+ All Categories
Home > Documents > ECONOAIR 3000S SERIES AIR HANDLING UNIT DIRECT...

ECONOAIR 3000S SERIES AIR HANDLING UNIT DIRECT...

Date post: 03-May-2020
Category:
Upload: others
View: 5 times
Download: 0 times
Share this document with a friend
61
ECONOAIR 3000S SERIES AIR HANDLING UNIT DIRECT FIRED Installation, Operation & Maintenance Instructions STOKVIS ENERGY SYSTEMS 96R WALTON ROAD EAST MOLESEY SURREY KT8 0DL TEL: 020 8783 3050 / 08707 707 747 FAX: 020 8783 3051 / 08707 707 767 E-MAIL: [email protected] WEBSITE: www.stokvisboilers.com JULY 1999
Transcript
Page 1: ECONOAIR 3000S SERIES AIR HANDLING UNIT DIRECT FIREDstokvisboilers.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/EconoAir... · 2019-05-10 · ECONOAIR 3000S SERIES AIR HANDLING UNIT DIRECT FIRED

ECONOAIR 3000S SERIES AIR HANDLING UNIT

DIRECT FIRED

Installation Operation amp Maintenance Instructions

STOKVIS ENERGY SYSTEMS 96R WALTON ROAD EAST MOLESEY SURREY KT8 0DL TEL 020 8783 3050 08707 707 747 FAX 020 8783 3051 08707 707 767 E-MAIL infostokvisboilerscom WEBSITE wwwstokvisboilerscom

JULY 1999

TABLE OF CONTENTS 30008

1 TECHNICAL DATA 5

11 Specification 5 12 Utilities 6 13 Settings (As shipped) 7

Process and Instrumentation Diagram

General Arrangement

Wiring Diagram

2 GENERAL DESCRIPTION8

21 Introduction 8 22 Gas Burner Assembly 8

23 Control System 8 231 Safety Controls 8

232 Temperature Control System 9

233 Main Control PaneL 9

234 Fuel Gas System 9

235 Remote Control Station 10 236 HEATED SPACE TEMPERATURE SENSOR 10

3 INST ALLA-rION 11

31 Statutory Requirements 11 32 Reception and Storage of Goods 11

321 Reception 11 322 Off Loading 11 323 Storage 11

33 Limitations of Use 12 34 Location of Air handlers 12 35 Fresh Air Inlet and Ventilation 13

351 Fresh Air Inlet 13 352 Ventilation 14

36 Air Discharge 14 37 Recirculation Air Entry 14 38 Remote Station 15 39 Visual Check 15 310 Connection of Services 15

3101 Fuel Gas Supply 15 3102 Electricity Supply 16

311 Connection to the Main Panel and Remote Station 16 312 Heated Space Temperature Sensor 16 313 Duct Sensor 16 314 Overheat Limit Control Sensor 16 315 Touch Screen Wiring 17

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 1

TABLE OF CONTENTS 30008

316 Alignment 18 3161 Installation Of Drive Belts 18 3162 Pulleys 18

3163 Alignment 18

3164 Belts 18

3165 Installation and Take Up Allowance 19

4 COMMISSIONING 20

41 Pre-start Checks 20 42 Dry Run 21 43 Start Up 21

431 Flame Signal Check 22 432 Handover 22

5 ADJUSTMENTS 23

51 Pilot Adjustment 23

52 Burner High Fire Pressure Adjustment 23

53 Burner Low Fire Adjustment 23

54 SUMMERIOFFIWINTER Switch 24 55 RESET Button 24

6 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 25

61 Air handler Start-up 25 62 Air handler Shut-down 25

621 Shutdown For Short Periods 25

622 Shutdown For Prolonged Periods 25 63 General Instructions 26

631 Site Clearance Adjacent to Air handler 26 632 Air Supply to Air handler 26 633 Air Filters 26

634 Service 26

635 Spare Parts 26 636 Gas Leaks 26

7 FAULT FINDING 27

71 POWER ON light is unlit 27 72 AIR FAN ON light is unlit 28 73 2LOCKOUT light is illuminated 29

75 AIR FAN ON light is illuminated 29

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 2

TABLE OF CONTENTS 30008

8 SERVICING 30

81 Isolation 30 811 Fuel Gas Isolation 30 812 Electrical Isolation 30

82 Routine Maintenance 31

83 Annual Service Checks 31

84 Removal Procedure For Replaceable Components 32 841 Burner 32

842 Flame Detector 32 843 Igniter Spark Plug 32 844 Igniter Spark Transformer 33 845 Combustion Air Pressure Switch (DPS) 33 846 Air handler Overheat Limit ControL 33 847 Air Fan and Motor 33

848 Fuel Gas Multi-functional Control - Small Units 34 849 Governor and Block Valves 34 8410 Fuel Gas Flow Control Valve 34 8411 Pilot Gas Governor and Block Valve 34 8412 Belt Tensioning Procedure 35

85 Main Panel Controls 37 851 Landis amp Gyr LFL 1335 Automatic Sequence Controller 37

852 Controls Circuit (24 Volt) Transformer 37 853 Controls Relays R1 R2 amp R3 37 854 6A MCB 37 855 Thermal Overload 37 856 Main Contactor 38 857 Motor Fuse 38

86 Remote Control Station 38

9 RECOMMENDED SPARES 39

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 3

TABLE OF CONTENTS 30008

APPENDIX 1

SOUNDNESS TESTING THE FUEL GAS LINE 40 A11 Testing the Upstream Pipework and Burner Controls 40 A12 Testing the Downstream Burner Valve 41 A13 Testing the Downstream Burner Pipework 41 A14 Testing the Downstream Pilot Pipework 41 A15 Testing the Burner Connections 42

APPENDIX 2

START SEQUENCE 43

APPENDIX 3

SERVICE CHECK SHEET 47

APPENDIX 4

TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER ~ 48 A41 Time Out Screen 48 A42 Status Screen 49 A43 Changing Settings 50 A44 Entering the Security Code 50 A45 Changing or Setting a Time Schedule 52 A46 Changing Set Values 54 A47 Commissioning and Servicing Burner Checks 55

A48 GMTltgtBST Changeover (Daylight Saving) 55

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 4

1 TECHNICAL DATA 30008

SPECIFICATION

308 99shy

CE 0087

G20 87AQ371

NA

17

10

5

415V 50Hz 3ph 4 Wire

A

kg

IE

JULY 1999 SAMPLE PageS

1 TECHNICAL DATA 30008

UTILITIES

AIR HANDLER UTILITIES

FUELi NATURAL GAS

MAXIMUM FUEL SUPPL Y PRESSURE 25 mbar

MINIMUM FUEL SUPPL Y PRESSURE 15 mbar

ELECTRIC SUPPL Y TO CONTROL PANEL WITH NEUTRAL WIRE

415V 50Hz 3ph 4 Wire

SUPPLY RATING Amps

MOTOR FUSES

Notes

Air handler models 3018S to 3040S inclusive of STOKVIS ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handlers have been certificated by British Gas Pic for use on Natural Gas only It does not cover the use of distribution ducting filters and high level or external installations The other air handlers in the range are designed and built to the same parameters and standards as the certificated sample

Your attention is drawn to the limitations on location for recirculation air handlers detailed in Section 33

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 6

1 TECHNICAL DATA 30008

SETTINGS (AS SHIPPED)

AIR HANDLER SETriNGS (AS SHIPPED) I

I

IAIR PRESSURE SWITCH rnbar

OVERHEAT LIMIT CONTROL 65degC

PILOT BURNER GAS PRESSURE 100 mbar

MAXIMUM 50 mbar MAIN BURNER GAS PRESSURES

MINIMUM 10 mbar

MAXIMUM AT RECIRCULATION CONDITION NA

OVERLOAD Amps

FAN SPEED rpm

MAXIMUM 16 mbarDIFFERENTIAL AIR PRESSURE ACROSS PROFILE PLATE MINIMUM 14 mbar

GAS CONNECTION SIZE BSP

TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER

ACCESS CODE 4321 I

TEMPERATURE SETPOINT (Code 00) 19degC i

SAMPLE INTERVAL (Code 01) 2 sec I

DISCHARGE LOW LIMIT (Code 02) 18degC

DISCHARGE HIGH LIMIT (Code 03) 36degC

Note For air handler dimensions please refer to the General Arrangement Drawing

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 7

~------------------~--~

~~O~~C~~~__-__~~middot~~I~~______________-1~~~__~~-=~~=-~i

COMPONENT UST

BURNER

AIR FAN MOTOR

FAN DRIVE

CONTROL PANEL

REMOTE PANEL

SERVICES

FUEL

UAX SUPPLY PRESSURE MIN SUPPLY PRESSURE

ELECTRICITY

BLOCK VALVES

Serial No

bullbull IlICh NPII

kW 1+4ORPM

NA

3-30005-100 RevO DOL Start

N

NATURAL GAS

25mbor 1gtmbor

15V5OHz3Ph4W1RE Motor FLC bullbullbull Amps

240V 50Hz 1Ph 3 WIRE

Site Address

TAG DESCRIPTION WI SUPPLY ISOlATION VALve

W2 JW3 MULTIBLOCKMY MV5 FLOW CONTROL VALve WS BURNER ISOLATION VALVE

PVl PILOT PRESSURE REGULATOR PV2 PILOT SOlpoundNOIO VALve PV3 PILOT ISOlATION VALve

TC SPACE lEMPERATURE CONTROUER TO DISCHARGE TEMPERATURE DETECTOR TR SPACE TEMPERATURE DElECTOR TS OISCHARGE TEMPERATURE swrrCH

PS AIR PRESSURE swrrCH

UV fLAt4E DETECTOR

t SPARK IGNITER

NOTE f INIlICATES PRpoundSSURE TEST POM

Client

srOKVIS END USERS ADDRESS END USER

RS STOKVIS amp SONS Ltd POOL ROAD WEST MOLESEY SURREY KT8 2HN

Ident T45

shyomiddot BVIoI 0 145

1 DJSO 1 GBlA 14 T45

1AC600 00T1701 DRT3453 RAK13bullbull170

lWGJ

ORAtO 023739

PILOT LINE

fRtsH Nfl HET

Title TITLE

Model No Seri4l No DutY Style

Tel 0181 941 1212 Fax 0181 941 4136

00lCIIAAGE 10 WORIltSPAtt

305 99- m3sINDOOR HORIZONTAL

ACStw -_nora I-ID_raw_-+I__-I

Checked

CONTROL Approved

o-1 CommentApproval

Rev IDote I Description

Computer No 99

Purchase Order No

Drawing No

4-MR-001 R~O~

NOTES1shy

I PROPOSED LOCATION TO BE CHECKED tOR LEVEL AND LOAD BEARING STRENGTH BY OTHERS

2 UNIT TO BE SUPPLIED IN SEPERATE SECTIONS FOR LIFTING INTO PLANTROOM AND ON TO BASE BY OTHERS

3 ALL SECTIONS TO HAVE TIJO BEADS OF SEALANT BETJEEN OPPOSING FLANGES AS PER SUPPLIED INSTALL ATlON INSTRUCTIONS

ltI ENSURE ALL BUILDERS JORK IS CARRIED OUT AND MADE GOOD AFTER INSTALLATION BY OTHERS

5 ALL EXTERNAL JIRING SHALL BE CARRIED OUT BY COMPETENT PERSON TO CURRENT lEE REGULATIONS

DISCHARGE OPENING lUOlElIE VIDE X lIE HIG CV 3011 MEZ FLANGE

Serial No

sroKVIS Site Address Client END USERS ADDRESS END USER

ACCESS OPENING

~L---gt lt0-shy

~ ~

GAS CONNECTIONS

CONTROL PANEL 60011 VIDE X 600111 HIGH

APPROX VEIGHTSshy

HEATER CASING - 1I0U( KG

IJCL OOCUUef IDrawn lACS

Checked

I RS STOKVIS amp SONS Ltd POOL ROAD WEST MOLESEY SURREY KT8 2HN Tel 0181 941 1212 fax 0181 941 4136 CONTROL IApproved

o I~ I CommentApproval

Rev IDate IDescription

Computer No

99 Purchase Order No

Drawing No

3-MR-005

415VOlT5OHz 4 WIRE sumy

lIfEI_-shy~a

30131

2_F11

3 TOO---shy

B (

Serial No

~s

~~~~

~ NIt 9lOIElIliOTt)R RA11NG~W

STOKVIS

0 reg

-0

0 0 lt0

u ~

R5-1 -

ADDRESS

shy

regshy

~tl

GAS v IoIOtQR AIIIfONGTll LEGEND

IHlmN PNEI _

-e- PNEl_

Sl1pound_

-11shy IJIfClIOII1IO~-

DUCT STAT NPE COt 17tll

_STAT NPE om 3lt4Il)

~~~pound~ niR~~ (i)l

~ ()1

_cbullbullL~ nmiddoti Apoundm

USER

~ ~

SCHEMATIC FOR 3000S SERIES AIR

IAC600 BASED

RS STOKVIS amp SONS Ltd POOL ROAD WEST MOLESEY SURREY KT8 2HN Tel 0181 941 1212 Fax 0181 941 4136

_[---------f P(N(J ON

ICHI11ONTfWiSFORlER

PllOT V IIEIi CAS VAllIE 1

II CAS VAllIE 2

~_ON

lOCKOUT

s

o Rev I Dote I Description

Computer No 99

Purchase Order No

Drawing No

3-MR-100 Rev

o

30005 2 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

21 INTRODUCTION

The STOKVIS ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler is a direct fired unit designed to give clean healthy environmental conditions and constant even temperature within the heated space

The main air handler assembly houses the circulating air fan the gas burner the fuel gas line and all necessary safety controls The burner management system and space temperature controller is located in the main control panel mounted on or adjacent to the side of the air handler A second control station supplied loose for mounting remote from the air handler within the heated space or other convenient location houses indicating lights the control touch screen and auxiliary operational switches

A sight glass is fitted on the air handler casing to view the burner during operation

For multi unit networked applications the touch screen is excluded

22 GAS BURNER ASSEMBLY

The ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler incorporates the Maxon NP-II burner This burner is specially designed for heating fresh air and is mounted such that a proportion of the incoming air is forced into contact with the flame to ensure rapid mixing and combustion within the code requirements The burner assembly is built up from modular components to give the required heat duty

Each burner assembly is fitted with an integral pilot spark igniter and UV detector The flame detector is used for scanning both the pilot and main flame Note that the pilot burner operates in interrupted mode

The burner module fitted is identified in the Technical Data Section of this manual and on the Valve and Instrun1ent list

23 CONTROL SYSTEM

The controls fitted on the air handler are detailed on the Process amp Instrumentation Diagram in the Technical Data Section of this manual

231 SAFETY CONTROLS

The safety interlocks on the ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler are

1 Combustion air proving switch (PS) 2 Ultra-violet burner flame detector (UV) 3 Overheat limit control (OLe)

Failure of either the combustion air switch or fiame scanning circuit will cause the air handler to go to LOCKOUT and the burner management system will require a RESET before a re-light can be attempted

The air handler discharge overheat limit control is a manual reset switch After a failure the switch will have to be RESET before a re-light can be attempted

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 8

2 GENERAL DESCRIPTION 3000S

232 TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEM

The ECONO-AIR 30008 Series air handler is fitted with a full three-term modulating temperature control system as standard The space temperature is sensed by a heated space detector (TR) which inputs to the panel mounted temperature controller (TC) This achieves control by modulation of the fuel gas flow control valve (MV5) The temperature controller additionally limits the air handler discharge air temperature measured by the discharge temperature detector (TO) to pre-set high and low limits

233 MAIN CONTROL PANEL

The control panel houses the combustioncirculation air fan starter the burner management system and the heated space temperature controller On larger units a separate starter panel may be supplied The panel door is fitted with an interlocked isolator POWER ON and LOCKOUT lights and the burner management RESET button The panel is mounted on or adjacent to the air handler

234 FUEL GAS SYSTEM

The PILOT LINE comprises 1 Pilot governor (PV1 ) 2 One British Gas certificated solenoid valve (PV2) 3 One pilot gas isolation valve (PV3) 4 Pipework and fittings

Note Two pressure test points are fitted on the pilot line on the inlet and discharge of the pilot solenoid valve

The MAIN GAS LINE comprises

1 Gas isolation valve (MV1 ) 2 Pressure governor (MV2) 3 Double block safety shut-oft system (MV34) 4 Gas flow control valve (MV5) 5 Burner isolation valve (MV6) 6 Pipework and fittings

Note Four pressure test points are fitted on the n1ain gas line on the supply the inlet and discharge of the second block valve and downstream of the flow control valve

Note On small air handlers items 2 and 3 are combined in one multi-functional control

All items above are detailed on the Process amp Instrumentation Diagram in Section 1 of this manual

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 9

2 GENERAL DESCRIPTION 3000S

235 REMOTE CONTROL STATION

The ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler is also supplied with a remote control station which houses the air handler operating controls indicating status and the workspace temperature detector if the control station is located in the heated space

236 HEATED SPACE TEMPERATURE SENSOR The heated space temperature sensor is to be located remotely within the space to be heated

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 10

3 INSTALLATION 30005

31 STATUTORY REQUIREMENTS

I n accordance with the Gas Safety (I nstallation and Use) Regulations 1998 installation of this ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler should only be undertaken by competent personnel who are fully aware of their responsibilities under the Health and Safety at Work Act 1974

The installation of this air handler must comply with

BS6230-1991 Installation of gas-fired forced convection air air handlers for commercial and industrial Space Heating of rated input exceeding 60kW

The lEE Regulations for Electrical Installations

Gas Safety (Installation and Use) Regulations 1998

Health and Safety at Work Act 1974

Building Regulations 1986

Building Standards (Scotland Only)

The I nstitution of Gas Engineers Codes of Practice

IGEUP1 Soundness Testing Procedures for Industrial and Commercial Gas Installations

IGEUP2 Gas Installation Pipework Boosters and Compressors on Industrial and Commercial Premises

IGEUP4 Commissioning Of Gas Fired Plant On Industrial and Commercial Premises

32 RECEPTION AND STORAGE OF GOODS

32laquo1 RECEPTION

On receipt of the shipment check that the shipment is complete against the Delivery Advice Note Check for mechanical damage sustained during transit before off-loading the goods Inform the carrier of any such damage

322 OFFLOADING

Horizontal air handlers are fitted with four lifting eyes to permit an overhead lift Alternatively horizontal air handlers may be handled by a fork lift truck on the steel angle support frame

323 STORAGE

Air handlers must be stored in a dry environment The remote control station must be removed from the shipment and stored indoors in a dry environment Outdoor units of split case design (Size 54 and above) must have open ends protected from the environment until installation is complete Any filter elements should be stored in a dry environment

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 11

3 INSTALLATION 3000S

33 LIMITATIONS OF USE

The ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler must not be installed in the following locations

I n hazardous areas

In areas where flammable vapours can be present in excess of their threshold limit values as defined in 8S5925

I n accordance with 8S6230 Clause 513 where there are any flued appliances in the heated area and where air is supplied mechanically and there is mechanical extraction the design extract rate must be 5 to 10 less than the design inlet rate so that the room will not be at a lower pressure than the outside air If the air handler is the only source of mechanically supplied air the extract rate must not exceed 95 of the nominal air flow specified in Section 11 of this manual

Note If it proposed to install the ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler to supply heated air to a hazardous area or in areas where flammable vapours are present the installation must first be approved by a RS STOKVIS Ltd Engineer

34 LOCATION OF AIR HANDLERS

The air handler should normally be installed in the location recommended by the RS STOKVIS Ltd specifying engineer

Check the proposed location for level and load bearing strength Ensure that there is adequate clearance as detailed on the air handler GA in Section 1 this manual around the unit for access for maintenance purposes If the air handler is to be installed above floor level a suitably designed service platform should be provided Such a platform must have 100mm minimum raised edges around the perimeter If this is not possible all air handler access panels must be fitted with hinged restraints This is a factory standard option which should be specified at the time of ordering - check the restraints are fitted before proceeding with installation

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 12

3 INSTALLATION 3000S

35 FRESH AIR INLET AND VENTILATION

351 FRESH AIR INLET

The air handler must be installed where it has a direct and unlimited supply of fresh air from outside the building Ensure that the air intake is not located near exhausts from the building or from any process exhausts such as paint booth exhausts Whenever possible protect the fresh air inlet from the prevailing wind and local wind effects from corners

The fresh air inlet should be sized for an air velocity of 3ms The inlet duct area is detailed on the General Arrangement drawing located in Section 1 of this manual

Where the fresh air inlet is made in a load bearing wall eg a brick wall guidance should be obtained from Structural Engineers on the provision of a lintel in the wall over the fresh air opening

A weather hood must be fitted when the air handler air inlet is at or within 1 m of the outside wall Additionally the weather hood should have negligible resistance to the airflow maximum 01 mbar at the design air flow rate

Do not install the ECONO-AI R 3000S Series air handler where long lengths of duct or bends of an angle greater than 30deg are necessary to lead to the air handler from the fresh air opening If ducting is unavoidable ensure that the resulting pressure drop is negligible Le less than 01 mbar for ductless air handlers and has been accounted for in the original design for ducted air handlers as detailed in the specification section of this manual Section 11

Note If the air intake is located in an area of unrestricted access warning notices preventing the blockage of the air intake by temporary stacking should be displayed adjacent to the intake

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 13

3 INSTALLATION 3000S

352 VENTI LA TION

Where the air air handler is in its own plant room or compartment this shall be ventilated with openings communicating directly with the outside air to ventilate the room

The openings shall be fitted with grilles of negligible resistance and shall be sited so that they cannot easily be blocked or flooded They shall have a total minimum free area as follows

Low Level (inlet) 320cm2 + 27cm2 per kilowatt in excess of 60kW total rated input

High Level (outlet) 160cm2 + 134cm2 per kilowatt in excess of 60kW total rated input

The free area of the grilles shall be not less than the size of the recommended minimum ventilation opening Grilles shall be designed to minimise high velocity air streams in the plant room For exposed ie free standing plant rooms ventilation openings shall be provided on at least two sides and preferably on all four sides

Where mechanical ventilation is used it shall be by mechanical inlet and either natural or mechanical extraction Systems of ventilation employing mechanical extraction and natural air inlet shall not be used

The minimum flow rates of air supplied shall be not less than 06 m3s per megawatt of rated heat input

36 AIR DISCHARGE

The air handler should be located with the air discharge into the heated space at a minimum height of 3 metres The air should not discharge directly onto any obstructions and direct discharge on to working personnel should be avoided

If the air discharge is located in an area of unrestricted access warning notices preventing the blockage of the air discharge by temporary stacking should be displayed adjacent to the discharge

Generally it is not necessary to fit distribution ducting to the discharge of the air handler If ducting is required or specified ensure that the resulting pressure drop has been accounted for in the original design specification as detailed in Section 1 of this manual

37 ASSEMBLY AND POSITIONING OF AIR HANDLER

Unless specified at the time of order air handlers will be shipped in sections Discharge heads grilles attenuators duct connecting sections filters rain-hoods etc will be supplied loose for site fitting to the air handler

Horizontal air handlers must be supported on their steel angle support base When the air handler is located check for level and adjust as necessary

Alternatively horizontal air handlers can be supplied with extensions of the support frame for suspending from overhead supports This must be specified at the time of order Do not suspend the air handler from the lifting eyes

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 14

3 INSTALLATION 3000S

38 REMOTE STATION

The ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler is supplied with a remote control station This should be mounted in a position convenient to the end user If possible it should not be mounted on an external wall or where the space temperature detector is affected by cold draughts or a local source of heat

39 VISUAL CHECK

After completion of installation re-check the air handler for signs of damage Report any instance to RS STOKVIS Ltd

310 CONNECTION OF SERVICES

The air handler requires the connection of fuel gas and electricity

3101 FUEL GAS SUPPLY

The ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler has been designed for use on Natural Gas An alternative version is available for LPG The gas type for the air handler supplied is clearly marked on the air handler data badge and on the Specification sheet in Section 1 of this manual Check the gas type is correct and that the supply pressure is within the range marked on the specification

The local gas Authority should be consulted about the adequacy of the gas service and meter supplies for existing and proposed extensions to the installation and for any requirements for boosting the gas supply_

Connect the fuel gas supply to the inlet manual valve on the air handler gas train The connection size is detailed in Section 1 of this manual A further isolation valve and union should be fitted immediately adjacent to the appliance which when the valve is closed allows the complete burner and control assembly to be disconnected for maintenance or repair

New gas pipework should be installed to British Gas Publication IGEUP2 and be purged and pressure tested in accordance with British Gas Publications IGEUP1

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 15

3 INSTALLATION 3000S

3102 ELECTRICITY SUPPLY

All external wiring shall be carried out and checked by a competent person All components shall be checked for suitability for voltage range and frequency

Means for electric isolation having a contact separation of at least 3mm in all poles must be provided adjacent to the air handler The electrical supply to the appliance shall incorporate suitable means of excess current protection

The ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler requires a 3 phase 4 wire supply which should be connected to the main control panel Check the air handler data badge for the correct electrical supply The maximum supply requirement is Specified in Section 1 of this manual Note that the 240 Volt air handler control circuit is taken from the lUI phase to Neutral Connection should be made as shown on the wiring diagram shipped inside this panel

The air handler must be earthed in accordance with BS5986 and CP1013

Check all terminal strip terminations for wires which have become loose during shipment

311 CONNECTION TO THE MAIN PANEL AND REMOTE STATION

Interconnecting wiring to the main panel and remote station should be made with a minimum specification of 075 mm2 300 Volt cable Check that no wires on the terminal strip have become loose during shipment The remote panel should be mounted at a height of approx 18m If possible it should not be mounted on an external wall or where the sensor will be affected by cold draughts or a local source of heat

Both panel and remote station must be earthed in accordance with BS5986 and CP1013

312 HEATED SPACE TEMPERATURE SENSOR

The space temperature sensor located on the remote panel should be connected with screened cable or twin low voltage signal cable run in its own separate conduit It should be mounted on the remote panel or adjacent to the outlet at a height of approx 18m If possible it should not be mounted on an external wall or where the sensor will be affected by cold draughts or a local source of heat

313 DUCT SENSOR

The duct sensor should be connected with screened cable or twin low voltage signal cable run in its own separate conduit It should be mounted in the air handler discharge as close as possible to the discharge into the heated space

314 OVERHEAT LIMIT CONTROL SENSOR

The overheat limit control sensor should be connected with twin core cable It should be mounted in the air handler discharge within 1 metre of the air handler outlet connection

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 16

3 INSTALLATION 3000S

315 TOUCH SCREEN WIRING

The touch screen located on the front of the remote station requires two separate twisted pairs of O5mrh2 screened cable run in a separate conduit If the distance between the main and remote stations is greater that 1 km please contact RS STOKVIS Ltd for advice

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 17

3 INSTALLATION 3000S

316 ALIGNMENT

3161 INSTALLATION OF DRIVE BELTS

On 80 amp 89 30008 range of air handlers it will be necessary to align the pulleys and fit the drive belts before carrying out commissioning of the unit

3162 PU LLEYS

Before assembling the drive check the pulley grooves are free from scores or sharp edges and all dimensions conform to the relevant standard

The Taper Lock bush is your starting point when it comes to assembly and installation Drive installation is a straightforward job with Taper Lock - but the stages set out on the installation leaflet provided with every Taper Lock bush should be followed closely

3163 ALIGNMENT

Good alignment of pulleys prior to belt installation is important to avoid belt flank wear The diagram below shows correct installation of pulleys

INTERNAl BEARING

MOTOR PUlLEY rAN PULLEY

MOTORMOTOR ADJUSTMENT MOUNTING BOlTSBOLTS

3164 BELTS

When the pulleys have been correctly positioned on the shafts the belts can be installed to complete the drive

The drive centre distance should be reduced prior to the installation of the belts so that they may be fitted without the use of force Under no circumstances must belts be prised into the grooves Using sharp tools to stretch the belts over the pulley rim can easily damage belts and pulley grooves

The installation allowance given in the table below is the minimum recommended reduction in centre distance for various belt section and lengths to allow for correct fitting

The take-up allowance given in the same table should be added on to the calculated centre distance to allow for belt stretch

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 18

3 INSTALLATION 3000S

3165 INSTALLATION AND TAKE UP ALLOWANCE

Belt Pitch Installation Allowance Take-Up Length (mm) SPZ SPA SPB SPC (mm)

410 to 530 5

540 to 840 10

850 to 1160 15

1170 to 1500 20

1510 to 1830 20 25

1840 to 2170 30

2180 to 2830 25 40

2840 to 3500 30 50

3520 to 4160 50 60

4170 to 5140 70

5220 to 6150 85

6180 to 7500 105

600 to 8500 125

8880 to 10170 145

10600 to 12500 175

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 19

4 COMMISSIONING 30005

This appliance must be commissioned by a RS STOKVIS Ltd approved engineer

41 PRESTART CHECKS

1 Switch the SUMMERIOFFMlINTER switch on the remote station to OFF

2 Check the correct electric supply is available to the air handler and the appliance isolator installed

3 Check the correct fuel gas supply is available to the air handler and local isolation valve and union installed Check that new gas pipe work has been correctly purged and pressure tested and that the isolation valve is in the OFF position

4 Check the air handler gas control system and burner connections for pressure soundness as detailed in Appendix 1 of this manual

5 Complete the first section of the Service Check Sheet supplied at the back of this manual (Appendix 3)

6 Close the air handler access door

7 Close and lock the main air handler control panel

8 Switch the main panel isolator to position 1 Check the POWER ON light illuminates

9 Check and set the timed ONOFF periods in the lAC Controller located on the remote panel Ensure that the unit is set to be on during testing Refer to Appendix 4 for the lAC setting procedure

10 Close and lock the remote panel

11 Switch the SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch on the remote station to SUMMER to start the air fan Return the switch to the OFF position and check for correct rotation of the fan as the fan slows and stops

The fan rotation can be observed through the fan section access door or through the air handler access door Only do this during the fan run-down period Ensure the door is securely fastened after completion

Rotation arrows are fitted on the end of the air handler and inside the air handler above the interior bearing support If the rotation is incorrect two phases should be interchanged as dictated by the Engineer responsible for the site electrical system

12 Check the air pressure drop across the burner whilst the fan is operating with a water column pressure gauge connected to the two pressure test points on the air pressure switch (DPS) This pressure should be between 14 and 16 rnbar

If the air differential pressure measured above is not within the operating range check inlet and outlet ductwork as appropriate and any filters fitted If the pressure differential is still not within limits isolate the air handler and report to RS STOKVIS Ltd before proceeding

13 Check the operation and setting of the Low Air Pressure Switch by injecting a controlled signal into the switch Check the break point on the switch is 1 mbar (falling)

Note The switch is set and sealed before fitting The 1 mbar switch point may not coincide with the 1 mbar scale reading on the switch

If on checking the switch is not operating correctly do not tamper with it return it to RS STOKVIS Ltd for replacement

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 20

4 COMMISSIONING 3000S

42 DRY RUN

With all the manual gas isolation valves still in the OFF position switch the SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch to WINTER

43 START UP

1 Attach a manometer to pressure test point F and the low pressure test point on the air pressure switch (DPS)

2 Open the main gas supply valve (MV1) and the pilot burner isolation valve (PV3) Leave the main burner isolation valve (MV6) closed Reset the air handler by pressing the push-button marked RESET on either the main panel or remote station The air handler pilot will light automatically (after the automatic damper start check and combustion air pre-purge) and then LOCKOUT after the main gas shut-off valves are addressed

During the short period that the pilot is in operation check the pilot gas pressure on the manometer It should be 10 mbar and the pilot flame approximately 100 - 150mm in length covering the first three or four holes of the mixing plate and have a steady blue colour when viewed through the sight glass on the access side of the air handler Adjust as necessary - refer to Section 51 this manual Check the flame signal - refer to Section 431

3 Open the main burner isolation valve (MV6) RESET the air handler which should now light to main burner stage When alight close the main burner isolation valve to shut down the gas flow to the burner Check that the unit goes to LOCKOUT

4 Reset the air handler and drive the burner to low fire by adjusting the temperature controller set point as described in Appendix 4 of this manual Check the flame is continuous across the width of the burner and has a flame length of approx 50 - 65mm from the burner rail when viewed through the sight glass on the access side of the air handler Check the burner pressure across pressure test point D and the downstream (low) pressure test point on the air pressure switch ie on the rear of the pressure switch This pressure is specifled in Section 1 of this manual Adjust as necessary-refer to Section 53 of this manual Check the flame signal - refer to Section 431

Where possible check the actual gas flow rate by meter reading with all other appliances turned off

5 Drive the burner to high fire by adjusting the temperature controller set point and high limit to 55degC as described in Appendix 4 of this manual Check the flame is continuous across the burner rail and has a flame length of approximately 250 - 350mm from the burner rail Check the burner pressure across pressure test point D and the downstream (low) pressure test point on the air pressure switch This pressure is specified in Section 1 of this manual Adjust as necessary - refer to Section 52 of this manual Check the maximum air handler discharge temperature Check the flame signal shyrefer to Section 431

Where possible check the actual gas flow rate by meter reading with all other appliances turned off

6 Check the operation of the overheat limit control by adjusting the temperature controller set point and high limit to 65degC as described in Appendix 4 of this manual Monitor the discharge temperature on the temperature controller Check that the overheat control operates as the set temperature is passed Check that the control must be manually reset by pressing the green reset button on the front of the switch Return the temperature controller to its original settings

In the event that the ambient temperature is too low for this simple procedure to work the instrument will have to be bench tested using a Temperature 8ath Remove and replace the control as Section 84 of this manual for bench-testing

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 21

4 COMMISSIONING 3000S

43 1 FLAME SIGNAL CHECK

1 The ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler is fitted with a Klippon SAKT1 Test Terminal which can be used to measure the flame scanning signal Refer to the Electrical Schematic and connect a 0-1 mA ammeter to the two test points with standard 23 mm test plugs with the positive lead on the detector side Disconnect the terminal link to obtain the signal reading A minimum signal of 70 microamps is required typical signals are in the 250-400 microamp range on both pilot and main flame After completion replace the terminal link and remove the test jacks

2 Drive the burner to high fire as previously described Measure the carbon dioxide content of the discharge air stream This figure must not exceed 2800 ppm If the discharge exceeds this limit isolate the air handler and report to RS STOKVIS Ltd before proceeding

Stop and start the air handler a few times to check for reliability using the Operating Instructions (Section 6)

432 HANDOVER

Complete the air handler Service Check Sheet supplied at the back of this manual The self-copy sheet must be returned to STOKVIS for checking

Instruct the User in efficient use and care of the unit start-up and shutdown (including emergency shutdown) and recommended service interval Emphasise the need to keep the air handler clear of stored items and extraneous material and to maintain the recirculation and fresh air paths to the air handler inlets Hand all instructions as applicable to the UserOwner for safekeeping

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 22

5 ADJUSTMENTS 3000S

If adjustments to the air handler settings are required they should be made by a RS STOKVIS Ltd approved engineer

The normal value for all control settings is specified in Section 1 of this manual

51 PILOT ADJUSTMENT

The pilot gas pressure and flame length may be adjusted by altering the discharge pressure of the pilot governor Screwing the adjusting screw clockwise (located under the top cap) increases the discharge pressure and the flame length anti-clockwise decreases the pressure and the flame length

52 BURNER HIGH FIRE PRESSURE ADJUSTMENT

At high fire alter the spring compression on the main burner governor (MV2) by removing the cap and adjust the spring compression plate clockwise to increase the burner pressure anti-clockwise to decrease burner pressure If the pressure does not increase on adjusting the spring the supply is inadequate

Note On small air handlers fitted with a mUlti-functional control the pressure adjusting screw is located under a swing cap on the first block valve

53 BURNER LOW FIRE ADJUSTMENT

The main burner low fire is adjusted on the flow control valve MV5 (Process amp Instrumentation Diagram)

Remove the top cover of the valve and insert a Terminal Screwdriver in the adjusting screw of the TOP cam marked NI

Drive the burner to low fire by adjusting the temperature controller set-point and high limit to 05degC as described in Appendix 4 of this manual

Turn the Terminal Screwdriver clockwise to decrease the low fire gas flow anti-clockwise to increase the flow

Check the heat input and flame signal at the new position are satisfactory and return the tenlperature controller to its normal settings

Replace the control valve cover

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 23

5 ADJUSTMENTS 3000S

54 SUMMERIOFFIWINTER SWITCH

In the SUMMER position this switch provides ventilation only and is independent of the programmed ON and OFF periods This position is manually selected and must be manually de-selected Whenever the switch is in this position the fan is operating

In the OFF position the air handler is shutdown and will not operate This overrides any frost protection fitted It is suitable for air handler shutdown for short periods such as holidays The programme memory is unaffected by this switch and assumes control of the air handler when the switch is returned to the WINTER position

In the WINTER position the air handler operates off the programme memory to provide heating

55 RESET BUTTON

Visual indication of air handler lockout is provided In the event of lockout occurring the air handler can be reset by depressing the RESET button This parallels the RESET button on the air handler main control panel If after 4 attempts to reset the air handler the lockout indicator still illuminates then a Service Engineer should be called to investigate the problem

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 24

6 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 3000S

61 AIR HANDLER START-UP

1 Open all manual gas valves both on the appliance and on the supply to the appliance Switch on the Electric Supply to the appliance

2 On the main air handler panel

Switch the panel isolator to the 1 position

Check POWER ON light

3 On the remote control station

For Heating Switch the SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch to WINTER

The air handler will now start automatically in response to the time settings

In the event of LOCKOUT

Press the RESET button and the cycle of operations will be repeated If the air handler goes to LOCKOUT four times in succession call for a Service Engineer

For Unheated Ventilation Switch the SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch to SUMMER

Note This prevents the burner firing giving a controlled supply of ventilation air to the heated space as long as the switch is in this position The air handler will now start automatically in response to the timeclock demand To turn the fan off return the switch to the centre OFF position

In the event of LOCKOUT

Press the RESET button and the cycle of operations will be repeated If the air handler goes to LOCKOUT four times in succession call for a Service Engineer

62 AIR HANDLER SHUTDOWN

621 SHUTDOWN FOR SHORT PERIODS

Switch the SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch on the remote station to OFF

622 SHUTDOWN FOR PROLONGED PERIODS

Switch the main panel isolator to the 0 position and close all manual gas valves both on and leading to the appliance

Note Manual gas valves should only be operated when the appliance is to be shut off for either Servicing or for a prolonged shutdown

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 25

30005 6 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

63 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS

631 SITE CLEARANCE ADJACENT TO AIR HANDLER

Attention should be paid to keeping the area around the air handler tidy No rubbish should be allowed to accumulate in the vicinity of the air handler and storage of goods etc should not be permitted within two metres of the air handler Failure to comply could result in reduced airflow to the air handler causing inefficient running and potential overheat cond ition

632 AIR SUPPLY TO AIR HANDLER

Air vents and grilles supplying air to the air handler should never be blocked and should be checked periodically to ensure they are clear

633 AIR FILTERS

Similarly attention should be paid to cleaning or replacing the filters to the air handler if fitted Your installer should advise you on the frequency with which this would be required to be completed

634 SERVICE

For continued safe and efficient operation of this air air handler it is important that servicing of the air handler should be completed at regular intervals by a competent person in accordance with Section 82 of this manual Users are advised to enter into a Service Agreement with RS STOKVIS Ltd

635 SPARE PARTS

It is suggested that a complete set of spare parts essential to the running of the air handler and recommended by the installer are kept by the user on the premises where the air handler is installed This is particularly important where the air handler forms an essential part of any process plant and its being out of operation may cause problems by for example frost damage or condensation by super-cooling

A list of Recommended Spares will be found in Section 9 of this manual

636 GAS LEAKS

If a smell of gas is detected around the area of the appliance Switch off all manual gas valves and contact your service engineer or the local gas undertaking

NEVER

LOOK FOR GAS LEAKS WITH A LIGHTED MATCH OR NAKED

FLAME

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 26

7 FAULT FINDING 30008

The main control panel incorporates two lights to help in fault finding

POWER ON

LOCKOUT

The remote station also has three lights

AIR FAN ON

BURNER ON

LOCKOUT

This section gives the possible causes of failure associated with each check light The electrical schematic diagram in this manual and the wiring diagram shipped in the main air handler panel should be used in conjunction with the notes below Additionally Service Engineers should familiarise themselves with the detailed Start Sequence given in Appendix 2 of this manual

The notes are given for each light before consulting the notes check for bulb failure

71 POWER ON LIGHT IS UNLIT

Check

1 Main control panel isolator is in the 1 position

2 Main Panel 6A MCB has not tripped if a trip has occurred the switch will be at the OFF position Reset and test system as required

3 Also check if the mains electrical supply is isolated If so FIND OUT WHY before taking any action

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 27

7 FAULT FINDING 30005

72 AIR FAN ON LIGHT IS UNLIT

Check

1 SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch is not in Position OFF

2 Timeperiod is not set to off

3 Air handler is not at LOCKOUT

4 Recheck both AIR FAN ON and LOCKOUT bulbs

Two fault indications are possible

1 THE FAN IS NOT OPERATING

If the fan should have started but is not operating

Check 1 Overload for tripped conditions Reset the overload and monitor the next start-up

2 Motor Fuses

3 Relays 1 2 amp3 for failure

laClor CC1 for failure

5 Air Pressure Switch (DPS) is failed in the N 0 Position

Replace the faulty component as described in Section 8

2 THE FAN IS OPERATING

This indicates that the air pressure switch (DPS) has failed to change over

Measure the profile plate differential pressure as described in Section 4113 If the pressure is correct the air pressure switch is faulty Check the switch as in 4114 If the pressure is not correct

Check 1 Correct fan belt tension

2 Correct fan rotation

3 The air handler air inlets and discharge are not blocked

4 Correct fitting on filters

5 The air differential pressure switch impulse lines are not blocked or leaking

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 28

7 FAULT FINDING 30008

73 LOCKOUT LIGHT IS ILLUMINATED

This light indicates a failure in the burner ignition and flame supervision system

RESET the unit and follow the progress of the start sequence The full cycle may take two minutes

1

------t

2 LOCKOUT after 35-40 seconds indicates an ignition failure RESET the system and observe the pilot and ignition spark during the start-up attempt

I-- shy

3 Observe the spark This should be strong and highly visible If not remove and clean the spark plug as Section 82 Check that the spark plug gap is correctly set at 15 mm

-- shy

4 Check the pilot flame If the pilot flame ignites and the unit goes to LOCKOUT the scanning system is at fault Remove and clean the detector as Section 82 Check the flame signal as in Section 431

5 If the pilot does not light the gas supply system is faulty Check the pilot system for restriction and the pilot valve operation

6 If the pilot lights and the unit goes to LOCKOUT after the main gas valves are addressed either the flow control valve is blocked or one of the main gas block valves has failed Fit a manometer on the pressure test point on the outlet flange of the multishyfunctional control and observe if the pressure rises when the main gas valves are addressed No pressure rise will indicate failure of the main gas valves

74 AIR FAN ON LIGHT ILLUMINATED

If the burner does not start check

1 SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch is in WINTER position

2 Overheat Limit Control

These interlocks prevent the burner management system starting

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 29

8 SERVICING 3000S

IMPORTANT Servicing and maintenance should be only carried out by a RS STOKVIS Ltd approved engineer

Only use replacement parts provided by the appliance manufacturer

Check that the air openings for combustion and for ventilation of any plant roon or compartment are clear

81 ISOLATION

811 FUEL GAS ISOLATION

The fuel gas to the ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler should be isolated and locked off at the manual ball valve mounted at the start of the fuel gas line Additionally before entering or servicing the air handler the burner manual isolation valve and pilot line isolation valve should be closed

812 ELECTRICAL ISOLATION

All electric power to the air handler and the remote control station is switched through the local isolator This isolator is fitted with a lock facility to permit it to be locked in the OFF position

Additionally isolate the power at the Wall Isolator

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 30

8 SERVICING 30005

82 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE

The air handler should be routinely serviced at the start of each heating season Isolate the air handler as above before servicing Details of access to individual components are given in Section 84 of this manual

1 Remove and clean spark igniter Check that the gap is correctly set at 25 mm Replace every two years

2 Clean the flame detector lens to ensure freedom from dirt and moisture If the cell shows any sign of cracks it should be replaced Routinely replace the cell every two years or after 10000 hours of operation which ever comes first

3 Inspect the entire air handler paint system for general damage Repair as necessary

4 Every two years brush the burner plates and clear the burner holes carefully with a Size 18mm drill for NP II and 20mm drill for NP I

WARNING THE BURNER HOLES MUST NOT BE ENLARGED

5 Inspect and lubricate all damper linkages to ensure freedom of operation Wipe off all excess lubricants to prevent dirt build up on linkage parts

6 Check the fan belt for cracks and splits Check tension The correct tension gives 16mm deflection per metre of span when the belt is centrally loaded with a force of 27N Adjust as necessary

7 Grease both the fan shaft bearings with Mobiith AW2 grease or similar

NEVER use high temperature grease

NEVER mix two different greases within the bearing always flush existing grease out

Note Removing the cover plate on the end of the air handler gains access to the outboard fan bearing

Light to Slow to 0 120 2 to 6 months Clean Dry

Medium Medium 120 200 1 to 2 months

Moderate to Light to Slow to 0 120 1 to 4 weeks Dry

Dirty Medium Medium 120 200 1 to 7 days

Extreme Dirt Dry Light to Slow to 0 200 Daily Flushing out

Medium Medium Dirt

83 ANNUAL SERVICE CHECKS

After Servicing test fire the air handler following the Commissioning Procedure detailed in Section 4 of this manual to ensure correct operation generally Special attention must be paid to the damper system and related controls and interlocks

Additionally check that the fresh air and recirculation air entry path to the air handler has been kept clear and instruct the User of the need for this as necessary

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 31

8 SERVICING 3000S

84 REMOVAL PROCEDURE FOR REPLACEABLE COMPONENTS

IMPORTANT

Turn off the gas at the appliance service valve and the electricity at the main panel and wall isolator before proceeding

841 BURNER

The burner is located inside the air handler casing and is mounted on two brackets from the support straps To remove the burner isolate the air handler as in 81 and undo the union on the fuel gas line adjacent to the burner isolation valve (MV6) and unscrew the main and pilot gas feed pipes from the burner rail Access to the rear of the burner assembly is made by removing the partition plate below the burner separating the fresh air inlet to the burner from the return air inlet compartment This is held in place by screws which engage in captive nuts on the top side of the partition Remove the Flame Detector and pull off the ignition plug cap Disconnect the burner support brackets and remove the burner The burner will easily pass through the access hatch for further strip down Replace in the reverse order soundness test the gas pipework check the burner operation and duty as described in the commissioning section of this manual

842 FLAME DETECTOR

This is a 240 Volt instrument

The flame detector is mounted on the end of the burner rail inside the air handler casing To remove the detector isolate the panel electric supply and lock off Push the scanner towards the burner and rotate to release the bayonet fixing and lift the detector from its mount Remove the two screws holding the detector cover and disconnect the supply leads noting the polarity of the connections

Replace the flame detector in the reverse order ensuring correct polarity of connections Ensure the access panel is securely closed and the retaining nuts are tightened down Check operation by inserting a test meter in the points provided in the main control panel and reading the flame signals during start up to full rate burner operation (See 431) Operate the appliance over six starts for reliability of operation including tum off of start and main gas valves to check for lockout operation

843 IGNITER SPARK PLUG

This is a high tension spark plug

The igniter spark plug is mounted on the end of the burner rail inside the air handler casing To remove the spark plug isolate the air handler as above Enter the service access door Access to the spark plug is made through the profile plate To remove the spark plug pull off the high tension lead and unscrew the plug with a plug spanner

When replacing the spark plug check the plug gap is set at 15mm Check ignition reliability over six start ups

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 32

8 SERVICING 3000S

844 IGNITER SPARK TRANSFORMER

This is a 240 Volt instrument

The ignition transformer is located in a plastic box mounted on the air handler casing adjacent to the main control panel To remove the transformer isolate the air handler as above and unscrew the four retaining screws holding the box lid in place and remove the lid Disconnect the supply cable at the terminal strip and undo the transformer retaining screws The transformer may then be unscrewed from the High Tension cable leading to the spark plug

Replacement is a simple reversal of this procedure

Check ignition reliability over six start ups

845 COMBUSTION AIR PRESSURE SWITCH (DPS)

Note The switch is set and sealed and should be replaced if not operating correctly

This switch is a 240 Volt instrument

The air switch is mounted directly on the air handler casing and can be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove the switch isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the supply cable Break the downstream pipe compression fitting and unscrew the switch housing from its locating fitting Reverse the procedure to replace after ensuring switch setting is as specified in Section 13 of this manual Operate the air handler to ensure reliability of operation over six start ups

846 AIR HANDLER OVERHEAT LIMIT CONTROL

This is a 240 Volt instrument

The overheat limit control can be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove the control isolate the air handler as above and lock off Remove the switch cover Disconnect the supply cable and unscrew the control housing from its locating fitting Reverse the procedure to replace check the switch is set to 50degC Test the switch operation as described in Section 43 over at least three operations

847 AIR FAN AND MOTOR

The air fan motor is a 415 Volt 3 phase motor

The motor and slide rails are easily accessible inside the air handler casing If it is necessary to remove the motor isolate the air handler as above Slacken the fan-belt tension and remove the drive belts Pull the motor away from the air handler casing to make access to the motor terminal box and disconnect the supply cable The motor may now be removed from the unit Following replacement the air handler must be fully re-commissioned as in Section 4

It is unlikely that the air fan will need replacing or servicing If required a full procedure should be obtained from RS STOKVIS Ltd

Replacement must be followed by full re-commissioning as in Section 4

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 33

8 SERVICING 3000S

848 FUEL GAS MULTI-FUNCTIONAL CONTROL - SMALL UNITS

This is a 240 Volt instrument

The fuel gas multi-functional control can be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove the unit isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the Hirschman electric termination Unbolt the control from its flanges and remove

When replacing care must be taken to ensure the flange 0 rings are undamaged and in the correct location Following replacement the air handler must be fully reshycommissioned as in Section 4 including tests for soundness prior to start-up

849 GOVERNOR AND BLOCK VALVES

The block valves are 240 Volt instruments

All these items may be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove any item isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the electric termination to the two block valves the pilot block valve and the flow control block valve Break the two pipe unions and remove the fuel gas line complete for further strip-down

8410 FUEL GAS FLOW CONTROL VALVE

This is a 24 Volt instrument

The fuel gas How control valve can be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove the valve isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the supply cables to the control valve

On small air handlers fitted with a multi-functional control support the multi-functional control and unbolt its discharge flange Break the union downstream of the burner isolation valve and remove the section of line containing the flow control valve for further strip-down

On large air handlers fitted with separate block valves it will be necessary to remove the fuel gas line complete as Section 8410 above

Following replacement re-commission the air handler

Note If the fresh air damper is not in the full open position the heat input must not exceed the maximum heat input at recirculation condition specified in the technical data section of this manual

8411 PILOT GAS GOVERNOR AND BLOCK VALVE

The block valve is a 240 Volt instrument

Both items may be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove either item isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the electric terrriination to the solenoid valve Undo the upstream pipe union and the compression fitting downstream of the manual block valve (PV3) Remove the pilot gas line complete for further strip down

Replace broken or distorted connections and retest for soundness Ensure the pilot gas pressure is correct and the flame is sensing an output Ensure reliability over six start-ups

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 34

8 SERVICING 3000S

8412 BELT TENSIONING PROCEDURE

The setting tensions are designed to cover a wide range of drives A precise setting force for individual applications can be calculated as detailed

SETTING FORCES

Belt Section

Setting Force To Deflect Belt 16mm per Metre Of Span

Small Pulley Diameter (mm)

Basic Setting Forces Newtons (N) Kilograms (kgf)

125 x Setting Forces Newtons (N) Kilograms (kgf)

SPZ

56 to 71 16 16 20 20 75 to 90 18 18 22 22

95 to 125 20 20 25 25 Over 125 22 22 28 28

SPA

80 to 100 22 22 28 28 106 to 140 30 30 38 38 150 to 200 36 37 45 46 Over 200 40 40 50 51

SPB

112 to 160 40 40 50 51 170 to 224 50 51 62 63 236 to 355 62 63 77 79 Over 355 65 66 81 83

SPC 224 to 250 70 71 87 89 265 to 355 92 94 115 120 Over 375 115 120 144 150

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 35

8 SERVICING 3000S

BELT TENSIONING USING FENNER BELT TENSION INDICATOR

Calculate the deflection in mm on a basis of 16mm per metre of centre distance Centre Distance (m) x 16 =Deflection (mm)

Set lower marker ring at the deflection distance required in mm on the lower scale

Set upper ring against to bottom edge of the top tube

Place the belt tension indicator on top of the belt at the centre of span and apply a force at right angles to the belt defecting it to the point where the lower marker ring is level with the top of the adjacent belt

Read off the force value indicated by the top edge of the upper marker ring

Compare this force to the kgf value shown in the table above

If a Fenner Belt Tension Indicator is not available a spring balance and rule will be suffice

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 36

8 SERVICING 30005

85 MAIN PANEL CONTROLS

All panel controls are readily accessible and may be easily exchanged for replacement components in the event of failure Ensure any replacement item is of the same make and type as the original

851 LANDIS amp GYR LFL 1335 AUTOMATIC SEQUENCE CONTROLLER

The Landis amp Gyr Automatic Sequence Controller is a plug-in unit locating on a pre-wired chassis To remove the controller undo the two retaining screws at the top left and lower right corners and pull the module off the chassis

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

852 CONTROLS CIRCUIT (24 VOLT) TRANSFORMER

The Controls Circuit Transformer is fixed to the panel back plate by tapped screws To remove the transformer undo the wiring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel Undo the two retaining screws and remove the unit complete

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

853 CONTROL RELAYS R1 R2 amp R3

The Control Relays are DIN Rail mounted To remove a relay undo the wIring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel Release the DIN rail retaining clip under the relay with a screwdriver and remove the relay

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

854 6A MCB

The 6A MCB is DIN Rail mounted To remove the MCB undo the wiring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel Release the DIN rail retaining clip under the MCB with a screwdriver and remove the MCB

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

855 THERMAL OVERLOAD

The thermal overload is attached to the underside of the main contactor To remove the overload undo the wiring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel and that the overload setting is as specified in Section 13 of this manual Unscrew the three connections to the contactor and remove the overload

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 37

8 SERVICING 3000S

856 MAIN CONTACTOR

The Main Contactor is DIN Rail mounted To remove the contactor remove the thermal overload as 855 above and then undo the wiring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel Release the DIN rail retaining clip under the contactor with a screwdriver and remove the contactor

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

857 MOTOR FUSE

To replace a motor fuse pull the fuse carrier off the fuse holder base The fuse is attached to the fuse carrier by two screws Unscrew remove and replace

86 REMOTE CONTROL STATION

The remote control station contains some serviceable parts although these items should only be fitted by an approved RS STOKVIS Ltd Engineer

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 38

9 RECOMMENDED SPARES 3000S

For two years operation it is recommended that the following items should be held in stock

ITEM DESCRIPTION PART NO QUANTITY i

1 INDICATOR BULBS W1121 1 PACK

2 SPARK PLUG 023739 1 I

3 UVDETECTOR QRA10C 1 I

4 ROOM SENSOR DRT2453 1

5 DUCT SENSOR DDT1701 1

All replacement parts can be obtained from RS STOKVIS Ltd by quoting the air handler serial number the part number and description

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 39

APPENDIX 1 30005

SOUNDNESS TESTING THE FUEL GAS PIPEWORK

This procedure should only be carried out by personnel familiar with the ECONO-AIR 3000S Series Air handler

The pressure test points and all valves are identified on the Process and Instrumentation Diagram for the air handler included in Section 1 of this n1anual

Isolate the air handler electric supply at the main control panel and lock off Close the manual isolation valves MV1 MV6 and PV3 Ensure the supply pressure is available on the upstream side of MV1

A11 TESTING THE UPSTREAM PIPEWORKAND BURNER CONTROLS 1 Connect a 60 mbar manometer to the pressure test nipple A Monitor the

pressure for two minutes Any rise in pressure indicates that valve MV1 is leaking and must be replaced Remove pressure test points Band F

2 Open MV1 to pressurise the pipework on both the main gas and pilot line to the first block valve

3 Close MV1 Allow one minute for the temperature to stabilise and then test the system for 2 minutes and watch for a drop in the pipework pressure If the pressure falls open valve MV1 and test the pipework connections and valves from MV1 to MV3 and MV1 to PV2 for leaks with a proprietary leak detector fluid or spray Turn off MV1 seal any leaks and re-test

4 If no extemalleaks are found either the pilot block valve PV1 or either the first main gas block valve MV3 is letting by

5 To test this seal pressure test point A and fit a manometer to pressure test point B Leave for two minutes with MV1 open A rise in pressure on the manometer confirms a leak on the block valve MV3 Turn off MV1 exchange the valve and re-test from point 2 above

6 Repeat this procedure for the pilot block valve Seal test point B and fit a manometer to pressure test point F Leave for two minutes with MV1 open A rise in pressure on the manometer confirms a leak on the pilot block valve PV2 Turn off MV1 exchange the valve and re-test from point 1 above Seal test point F

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 40

APPENDIX 1 30005

A12 TESTING THE DOWNSTREAM BURNER VALVE 1 Close MV1 and connect pressure test points A and 8 with flexible 6 mm bore

tubing teed into the manometer Remove pressure test point C Open MV1 to pressurise the downstream block valve MV4

2 Close MV1 and leave for one minute for the temperature to stabilise Monitor the pressure for 2 minutes If the pressure falls open valve MV1 and leak test the line between the two block valves MV3 and MV4 with a proprietary leak detector Turn off MV1 seal any leaks and re-test Note Smaller air handlers in the 3000S Series are fitted with multi-functional valves combining the pressure regulator and two block valves in one component The above procedure still applies but if a leak is found on either block valve the whole control should be replaced If no external leaks are found the downstream block valve is letting by

3 To confirm this close MV1 remove the manometer and refit to pressure test point C Connect pressure test points A and 8 with flexible 6mm bore tubing Open MV1 and allow one minute for the temperature to stabilise Monitor the pressure for a further 2 minutes with MV1 still open A rise in pressure confirms that the second block valve MV4 is letting by Turn off MV1 Replace the valve and re-test from 2 above

A13 TESTING THE DOWNSTREAM BURNER PIPEWORK 1 Close MV1 and connect pressure test points A and D with flexible 6 mm bore

tubing teed into the manometer Open MV1 to pressurise the downstream pilot pipework

2 Close MV1 and leave for one minute for the temperature to stabilise Monitor the pressure for 2 minutes If the pressure falls open valve MV1 and leak test the line between the downstream block valve MV4 and the manual block MV6 with a proprietary leak detector fluid or spray If no external leaks are found the manual block valve MV6 is letting by Turn off MV1 seal any leakages and reshytest from 2 above

A14 TESTING THE DOWNSTREAM PILOT PIPEWORK 1 Close MV1 and connect pressure test points A and F with flexible 6mm bore

tubing teed into the manometer Open MV1 to pressurise the downstream pilot pipework

2 Close MV1 and leave for one rninute for the temperature to stabilise Monitor the pressure for 2 minutes If the pressure falls open valve MV1 and leak test the line between the downstream block valve PV2 and the manual block PV3 with a proprietary leak detector fluid or spray If no external leaks are found the manual block valve PV3 is letting by Turn off MV1 seal any leakages and reshytest from 2 above

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 41

APPENDIX 1 30005

A15 TESTING THE BURNER CONNECTIONS 1 Remove the burner access panel as described in Section 84 of this manual

Remove the burner spark igniter Slacken the two retaining bolts holding the burner to the burner support straps and unbolt the burner supply endplate from the burner casting and mixing plates

2 Connect pressure test points A and 0 with flexible 6mm bore tubing teed into the manometer Open MV1 and MV6 to pressurise the burner pipework Leak test the main gas burner pipework and connections with proprietary leak detector fluid Turn off MV6 Seal any leakages and re-test

3 Connect pressure test points A and F with flexible 6 mm bore tubing teed into the manometer Open MV1 and PV3 to pressurise the pilot burner pipework Leak test the pilot gas burner pipework and connections with proprietary leak detector fluid Turn off PV3 Seal any leakages and re-test

4 Turn off MV1

5 Replace the spark igniter and profile division plate

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 42

APPENDIX 2 30005

START SEQUENCE

The burner start sequence is controlled by the Landis and Gyr burner management unit The timings are pre-set and comply with 885885 This unit must NOT be tampered with

A brief description of the start-up sequence isshy

The unit checks

1 The NO FLAME signal on the UV flame scanner

Note If the scanner detects a flame at any time other than in the correct operating sequence the flame programmer initiates a lockout

2 The operation of the combustion air proving switch in the NO AIR position

3 The air handler discharge high temperature switch

If the checks are completed the unit starts the combustion air fan and then checks the combustion airflow

Once the airflow is proven the unit checks that the damper control circuit is functioning correctly After the damper microswitch is made to prove the fresh air damper is fully open the sequence allows 30 seconds for the combustion air to purge any combustible gas from the air handler

After completion of the purge the spark ignition system is energised the pilot valve opened and the spark terminated If the pilot flame is not proven by the UV scanner the system will initiate a LOCKOUT

If the flame is proven the main gas valves are opened the pilot extinguished and the main burner flame proven

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 43

i

APPENDIX 2 30008

The following flow chart shows the complete start sequence including the lighting of the various indicating lamps

MANUAL STATUS LIGHT POWER ON

POWER ON

I INITIATE START BY TIME

SETTING ON CONTROLLER

I CHECK NO FLAME

VISIBLE

PROVEj FAIL LOCKOUT

I CHECK RELAY R4 NC

POSITION

PROVE FAIL NO START

I CHECK AIR PRESSURE SWITCH NC POSITION

PROVE FAIL NO START

I CHECK RELAY R1 NC

POSITION

PROVE j

FAIL NO START

I START COMBUSTION

AIR BLOWER

I CHECK AIR PRESSURE SWITCH NO POSITION

PROVE I

FAIL NO START

I STATUS LIGHT FAN ON

I ENERGISE RELAY R1

I

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 44

I

I

APPENDIX 2 30008

I CHECK OVERHEAT LIMIT

CONTROL R5

PROVE I

FAIL I I

CHECK 541412 LOOP CLOSED ON

LANDIS ampGYR CIRCUIT

PROVE I

FAIL I I

COMBUSTION AIR PURGE PERIOD

30 SECONDS

I

NO START

NO START

CANCEL NO FLAME CHECK CIRCUIT

I

ENERGISE SPARK

I TIMED PERIOD 25 SECONDS

I ENERGISE PILOT GAS

VALVE

I TIMED PERIOD 25 SECONDS

I TERMINATE SPARK

I INTERROGATE UV FLAME SCANNER

PROVE I

FAIL I I

TIMED PERIOD 10 SECONDS

I

LOCKOUT

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 45

I

I

APPENDIX 2 3000S

I ENERGISE MAIN GAS

VALVES

I

STATUS LIGHT BURNER ON

I TIMED PERIOD

5 SECONDS

I DE-ENERGISE PILOT

GAS VALVES

CONTINUOUS FROM PILOT

I INTERROGATE UV FLAME SCANNER

PROVE I

FAIL I I

LOCKOUT I

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 46

APPENDIX 3 30005

Please see copy of Standard Service Sheet

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 47

APPENDIX 4 30005

A41 TIME OUT SCREEN

This is the standard screen displayed when the touch screen is not in use The back light is off to save energy_ To access the STATUS screen touch the ENTER key and the following screen is displayed

[]][I][]rn[IJOO[][IJOO[] EJ~E11 I[]I ~ middot I

NOTE

The Touch Screen operates using the heat produced by the touch of a finger and therefore only LIGHT pressure is required

Excessive pressure can damage the Touch Screen

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 48

APPENDIX 4 30008

A42 STATUS SCREEN

On the typical STATUS screen the illustrated information detailed is as follows

19 36 Fan Brn

RS OS

100 Fst_~_ Lck _ _ Xst Gas~o ~ I

RS Indicates the current room temperature

OS ~( t~~ the current duct discharge temperature

Fan Indicates the current status of the fan by showing the arrow and the fan blades for ON and OFF is shown by the arrow and fan blades being removed

Brn Indicates the current status of the burner with the black flames indicating the burner to be ON and vice versa

Lck LOCKOUT - This indicates a flame failure when highlighted during normal or start-up operation

Xst EXCESS TEMPERATURE SWITCH - This indicates the unit has reached the trip limit on the over heat stat when highlighted during operation

Indicates the current position of the gas modulating valve during normal Gas

operation (0-100)

Indicates whether the Frost stat is energised and the unit is running on frost Fst

override

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 49

APPENDIX 4 30008

A43 CHANGING SETTINGS

It is possible to change the settings for the time of operation and the required temperature set points The following details the steps required

A44 ENTERING THE SECURITY CODE

From the STATUS screen touch the return key and the screen below will be displayed

Type the HIGH LEVEL security code (4321) If you make a mistake use the BACK SPACE key to delete any incorrect number(s) Touch the ENTER key when the code is correct

If the security code is incorrect the screen above will be displayed then try again If after several attempts you can not gain access please contact RS STOKVIS Ltd for further information

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 50

APPENDIX 4 30008

When the code is entered correctly the MAIN MENU is displayed as detailed below

~ STATUS SET VALUES~ ~ TIVIE CLOCK [) [) [) [) [)

The MAIN MENU screen shows the three menu items available The title for each menu item can be changed to suit the end user Please notify RS STOKVIS Ltd prior to commissioning should these parameters require special amendments

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 51

APPENDIX 4 30008

A45 CHANGING OR SETTING A TIME SCHEDULE

From the main menu screen select the TIME CLOCK page by running finger across screen symbol and touch the ENTER key the screen below will be displayed

On the following screen highlight the TS1 symbol and touch the ENTER key

The current time schedule will now be displayed as shown below The display will automatically default to the current day (1 =Monday 2 =Tuesday etc) In this case day 5 (Friday) the four schedule switching times refer to that day

IAC6BBB1BHIS1

mm0CIl bull mID 17BB 17BB 17HB

Iillleschedule

To modify a time select it by highlighting and touch the ENTER key and the following screen is displayed

To amend the appropriate onoff time as shown on the screen below The arrows to the right of the time are for altering the hours and the arrows on the left for the minutes

Once you have set the time use the ESCape key to exit back to the time schedule screen and choose another day by touching the required number Another time may now be modified as before

IAC6BBB1BHIS1

H8BH

I i eschedule

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 52

APPENDIX 4 30008

Use the ESCape key to exit back to the MAIN MENU screen

~ STATUS ~ SET VALUES

TIME CLOCK []~ [] [] [] []

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 53

APPENDIX 4 30005

A46 CHANGING SET VALUES

From the main menu screen select the SET VALUES page by highlight in the normal way and touch the ENTER key

The following screen is displayed

36 19 18III III IIIHsv Rsv Llv

To change the RSV highlight it in the normal way and touch the ENTER key and the screen below will now be shown

IAC6RRR1RR40 T I

0 19 (Y)l RSV

ROOM SET VALUE

The above screen shows the parameters that can be changed The values to the far left are the limitations of set point (OC) Change the set point by using the UP and DOWN ARROWS on the left of the screen or touch the set value itself followed by the ENTER key to select the set value and set it directly using the numeric keyboard All values can be changed in this way

Use the ESCape key twice to exit back to the MAIN MENU screen

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 54

APPENDIX 4 30005

A47 COMMISSIONING AND SERVICING BURNER CHECKS

Select the SET VALUES screen from the MAIN MENU screen and adjust the high lirrlit set point to 55degC to drive the burner to high fire

IAC6HHH1HH60 ~T I

0 19 (Y)

HSV

HIGH SET VALUE ~

Ensure the set value is returned to 36degC once the appropriate checks and adjustments as described in Section 43 of this manual have been completed Return to the SET VALUES screen and select the low limit value to adjust the low fire setting

Reduce the low limit value to OdegC to drive the gas valve to low fire and complete the appropriate checks and adjustments as described in Section 43 of this manual and ensure the set value is returned to the original value

A48 GMT ltgt BST CHANGEOVER DAYLIGHT SAVINGS

To change your unit to British Summer TimelWinter Time the following system screen must be highlighted by touching the Iamp1 button twice

By touching the clock symbol in the top left hand corner followed by the ENTER key the screen below will be displayed

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 55

APPENDIX 4 30008

188311 851193

544

By touching and highlighting in this case 18 followed by the ENTER key A small box allowing the entry of two digits will appear Enter the desired time required using the numbered keys followed by ENTER key Your unit is now set to operate on BSTBWT

Touch the ESC key three times to return back to the Status screen

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 56

STOKVIS ENERGY SYSTEMS 96R WALTON ROAD EAST MOLESEY SURREY KT8 0DL TEL 020 8783 3050 08707 707 747 FAX 020 8783 3051 08707 707 767 E-MAIL infostokvisboilerscom WEBSITE wwwstokvisboilerscom

JULY 1999

Page 2: ECONOAIR 3000S SERIES AIR HANDLING UNIT DIRECT FIREDstokvisboilers.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/EconoAir... · 2019-05-10 · ECONOAIR 3000S SERIES AIR HANDLING UNIT DIRECT FIRED

TABLE OF CONTENTS 30008

1 TECHNICAL DATA 5

11 Specification 5 12 Utilities 6 13 Settings (As shipped) 7

Process and Instrumentation Diagram

General Arrangement

Wiring Diagram

2 GENERAL DESCRIPTION8

21 Introduction 8 22 Gas Burner Assembly 8

23 Control System 8 231 Safety Controls 8

232 Temperature Control System 9

233 Main Control PaneL 9

234 Fuel Gas System 9

235 Remote Control Station 10 236 HEATED SPACE TEMPERATURE SENSOR 10

3 INST ALLA-rION 11

31 Statutory Requirements 11 32 Reception and Storage of Goods 11

321 Reception 11 322 Off Loading 11 323 Storage 11

33 Limitations of Use 12 34 Location of Air handlers 12 35 Fresh Air Inlet and Ventilation 13

351 Fresh Air Inlet 13 352 Ventilation 14

36 Air Discharge 14 37 Recirculation Air Entry 14 38 Remote Station 15 39 Visual Check 15 310 Connection of Services 15

3101 Fuel Gas Supply 15 3102 Electricity Supply 16

311 Connection to the Main Panel and Remote Station 16 312 Heated Space Temperature Sensor 16 313 Duct Sensor 16 314 Overheat Limit Control Sensor 16 315 Touch Screen Wiring 17

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 1

TABLE OF CONTENTS 30008

316 Alignment 18 3161 Installation Of Drive Belts 18 3162 Pulleys 18

3163 Alignment 18

3164 Belts 18

3165 Installation and Take Up Allowance 19

4 COMMISSIONING 20

41 Pre-start Checks 20 42 Dry Run 21 43 Start Up 21

431 Flame Signal Check 22 432 Handover 22

5 ADJUSTMENTS 23

51 Pilot Adjustment 23

52 Burner High Fire Pressure Adjustment 23

53 Burner Low Fire Adjustment 23

54 SUMMERIOFFIWINTER Switch 24 55 RESET Button 24

6 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 25

61 Air handler Start-up 25 62 Air handler Shut-down 25

621 Shutdown For Short Periods 25

622 Shutdown For Prolonged Periods 25 63 General Instructions 26

631 Site Clearance Adjacent to Air handler 26 632 Air Supply to Air handler 26 633 Air Filters 26

634 Service 26

635 Spare Parts 26 636 Gas Leaks 26

7 FAULT FINDING 27

71 POWER ON light is unlit 27 72 AIR FAN ON light is unlit 28 73 2LOCKOUT light is illuminated 29

75 AIR FAN ON light is illuminated 29

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 2

TABLE OF CONTENTS 30008

8 SERVICING 30

81 Isolation 30 811 Fuel Gas Isolation 30 812 Electrical Isolation 30

82 Routine Maintenance 31

83 Annual Service Checks 31

84 Removal Procedure For Replaceable Components 32 841 Burner 32

842 Flame Detector 32 843 Igniter Spark Plug 32 844 Igniter Spark Transformer 33 845 Combustion Air Pressure Switch (DPS) 33 846 Air handler Overheat Limit ControL 33 847 Air Fan and Motor 33

848 Fuel Gas Multi-functional Control - Small Units 34 849 Governor and Block Valves 34 8410 Fuel Gas Flow Control Valve 34 8411 Pilot Gas Governor and Block Valve 34 8412 Belt Tensioning Procedure 35

85 Main Panel Controls 37 851 Landis amp Gyr LFL 1335 Automatic Sequence Controller 37

852 Controls Circuit (24 Volt) Transformer 37 853 Controls Relays R1 R2 amp R3 37 854 6A MCB 37 855 Thermal Overload 37 856 Main Contactor 38 857 Motor Fuse 38

86 Remote Control Station 38

9 RECOMMENDED SPARES 39

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 3

TABLE OF CONTENTS 30008

APPENDIX 1

SOUNDNESS TESTING THE FUEL GAS LINE 40 A11 Testing the Upstream Pipework and Burner Controls 40 A12 Testing the Downstream Burner Valve 41 A13 Testing the Downstream Burner Pipework 41 A14 Testing the Downstream Pilot Pipework 41 A15 Testing the Burner Connections 42

APPENDIX 2

START SEQUENCE 43

APPENDIX 3

SERVICE CHECK SHEET 47

APPENDIX 4

TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER ~ 48 A41 Time Out Screen 48 A42 Status Screen 49 A43 Changing Settings 50 A44 Entering the Security Code 50 A45 Changing or Setting a Time Schedule 52 A46 Changing Set Values 54 A47 Commissioning and Servicing Burner Checks 55

A48 GMTltgtBST Changeover (Daylight Saving) 55

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 4

1 TECHNICAL DATA 30008

SPECIFICATION

308 99shy

CE 0087

G20 87AQ371

NA

17

10

5

415V 50Hz 3ph 4 Wire

A

kg

IE

JULY 1999 SAMPLE PageS

1 TECHNICAL DATA 30008

UTILITIES

AIR HANDLER UTILITIES

FUELi NATURAL GAS

MAXIMUM FUEL SUPPL Y PRESSURE 25 mbar

MINIMUM FUEL SUPPL Y PRESSURE 15 mbar

ELECTRIC SUPPL Y TO CONTROL PANEL WITH NEUTRAL WIRE

415V 50Hz 3ph 4 Wire

SUPPLY RATING Amps

MOTOR FUSES

Notes

Air handler models 3018S to 3040S inclusive of STOKVIS ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handlers have been certificated by British Gas Pic for use on Natural Gas only It does not cover the use of distribution ducting filters and high level or external installations The other air handlers in the range are designed and built to the same parameters and standards as the certificated sample

Your attention is drawn to the limitations on location for recirculation air handlers detailed in Section 33

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 6

1 TECHNICAL DATA 30008

SETTINGS (AS SHIPPED)

AIR HANDLER SETriNGS (AS SHIPPED) I

I

IAIR PRESSURE SWITCH rnbar

OVERHEAT LIMIT CONTROL 65degC

PILOT BURNER GAS PRESSURE 100 mbar

MAXIMUM 50 mbar MAIN BURNER GAS PRESSURES

MINIMUM 10 mbar

MAXIMUM AT RECIRCULATION CONDITION NA

OVERLOAD Amps

FAN SPEED rpm

MAXIMUM 16 mbarDIFFERENTIAL AIR PRESSURE ACROSS PROFILE PLATE MINIMUM 14 mbar

GAS CONNECTION SIZE BSP

TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER

ACCESS CODE 4321 I

TEMPERATURE SETPOINT (Code 00) 19degC i

SAMPLE INTERVAL (Code 01) 2 sec I

DISCHARGE LOW LIMIT (Code 02) 18degC

DISCHARGE HIGH LIMIT (Code 03) 36degC

Note For air handler dimensions please refer to the General Arrangement Drawing

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 7

~------------------~--~

~~O~~C~~~__-__~~middot~~I~~______________-1~~~__~~-=~~=-~i

COMPONENT UST

BURNER

AIR FAN MOTOR

FAN DRIVE

CONTROL PANEL

REMOTE PANEL

SERVICES

FUEL

UAX SUPPLY PRESSURE MIN SUPPLY PRESSURE

ELECTRICITY

BLOCK VALVES

Serial No

bullbull IlICh NPII

kW 1+4ORPM

NA

3-30005-100 RevO DOL Start

N

NATURAL GAS

25mbor 1gtmbor

15V5OHz3Ph4W1RE Motor FLC bullbullbull Amps

240V 50Hz 1Ph 3 WIRE

Site Address

TAG DESCRIPTION WI SUPPLY ISOlATION VALve

W2 JW3 MULTIBLOCKMY MV5 FLOW CONTROL VALve WS BURNER ISOLATION VALVE

PVl PILOT PRESSURE REGULATOR PV2 PILOT SOlpoundNOIO VALve PV3 PILOT ISOlATION VALve

TC SPACE lEMPERATURE CONTROUER TO DISCHARGE TEMPERATURE DETECTOR TR SPACE TEMPERATURE DElECTOR TS OISCHARGE TEMPERATURE swrrCH

PS AIR PRESSURE swrrCH

UV fLAt4E DETECTOR

t SPARK IGNITER

NOTE f INIlICATES PRpoundSSURE TEST POM

Client

srOKVIS END USERS ADDRESS END USER

RS STOKVIS amp SONS Ltd POOL ROAD WEST MOLESEY SURREY KT8 2HN

Ident T45

shyomiddot BVIoI 0 145

1 DJSO 1 GBlA 14 T45

1AC600 00T1701 DRT3453 RAK13bullbull170

lWGJ

ORAtO 023739

PILOT LINE

fRtsH Nfl HET

Title TITLE

Model No Seri4l No DutY Style

Tel 0181 941 1212 Fax 0181 941 4136

00lCIIAAGE 10 WORIltSPAtt

305 99- m3sINDOOR HORIZONTAL

ACStw -_nora I-ID_raw_-+I__-I

Checked

CONTROL Approved

o-1 CommentApproval

Rev IDote I Description

Computer No 99

Purchase Order No

Drawing No

4-MR-001 R~O~

NOTES1shy

I PROPOSED LOCATION TO BE CHECKED tOR LEVEL AND LOAD BEARING STRENGTH BY OTHERS

2 UNIT TO BE SUPPLIED IN SEPERATE SECTIONS FOR LIFTING INTO PLANTROOM AND ON TO BASE BY OTHERS

3 ALL SECTIONS TO HAVE TIJO BEADS OF SEALANT BETJEEN OPPOSING FLANGES AS PER SUPPLIED INSTALL ATlON INSTRUCTIONS

ltI ENSURE ALL BUILDERS JORK IS CARRIED OUT AND MADE GOOD AFTER INSTALLATION BY OTHERS

5 ALL EXTERNAL JIRING SHALL BE CARRIED OUT BY COMPETENT PERSON TO CURRENT lEE REGULATIONS

DISCHARGE OPENING lUOlElIE VIDE X lIE HIG CV 3011 MEZ FLANGE

Serial No

sroKVIS Site Address Client END USERS ADDRESS END USER

ACCESS OPENING

~L---gt lt0-shy

~ ~

GAS CONNECTIONS

CONTROL PANEL 60011 VIDE X 600111 HIGH

APPROX VEIGHTSshy

HEATER CASING - 1I0U( KG

IJCL OOCUUef IDrawn lACS

Checked

I RS STOKVIS amp SONS Ltd POOL ROAD WEST MOLESEY SURREY KT8 2HN Tel 0181 941 1212 fax 0181 941 4136 CONTROL IApproved

o I~ I CommentApproval

Rev IDate IDescription

Computer No

99 Purchase Order No

Drawing No

3-MR-005

415VOlT5OHz 4 WIRE sumy

lIfEI_-shy~a

30131

2_F11

3 TOO---shy

B (

Serial No

~s

~~~~

~ NIt 9lOIElIliOTt)R RA11NG~W

STOKVIS

0 reg

-0

0 0 lt0

u ~

R5-1 -

ADDRESS

shy

regshy

~tl

GAS v IoIOtQR AIIIfONGTll LEGEND

IHlmN PNEI _

-e- PNEl_

Sl1pound_

-11shy IJIfClIOII1IO~-

DUCT STAT NPE COt 17tll

_STAT NPE om 3lt4Il)

~~~pound~ niR~~ (i)l

~ ()1

_cbullbullL~ nmiddoti Apoundm

USER

~ ~

SCHEMATIC FOR 3000S SERIES AIR

IAC600 BASED

RS STOKVIS amp SONS Ltd POOL ROAD WEST MOLESEY SURREY KT8 2HN Tel 0181 941 1212 Fax 0181 941 4136

_[---------f P(N(J ON

ICHI11ONTfWiSFORlER

PllOT V IIEIi CAS VAllIE 1

II CAS VAllIE 2

~_ON

lOCKOUT

s

o Rev I Dote I Description

Computer No 99

Purchase Order No

Drawing No

3-MR-100 Rev

o

30005 2 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

21 INTRODUCTION

The STOKVIS ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler is a direct fired unit designed to give clean healthy environmental conditions and constant even temperature within the heated space

The main air handler assembly houses the circulating air fan the gas burner the fuel gas line and all necessary safety controls The burner management system and space temperature controller is located in the main control panel mounted on or adjacent to the side of the air handler A second control station supplied loose for mounting remote from the air handler within the heated space or other convenient location houses indicating lights the control touch screen and auxiliary operational switches

A sight glass is fitted on the air handler casing to view the burner during operation

For multi unit networked applications the touch screen is excluded

22 GAS BURNER ASSEMBLY

The ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler incorporates the Maxon NP-II burner This burner is specially designed for heating fresh air and is mounted such that a proportion of the incoming air is forced into contact with the flame to ensure rapid mixing and combustion within the code requirements The burner assembly is built up from modular components to give the required heat duty

Each burner assembly is fitted with an integral pilot spark igniter and UV detector The flame detector is used for scanning both the pilot and main flame Note that the pilot burner operates in interrupted mode

The burner module fitted is identified in the Technical Data Section of this manual and on the Valve and Instrun1ent list

23 CONTROL SYSTEM

The controls fitted on the air handler are detailed on the Process amp Instrumentation Diagram in the Technical Data Section of this manual

231 SAFETY CONTROLS

The safety interlocks on the ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler are

1 Combustion air proving switch (PS) 2 Ultra-violet burner flame detector (UV) 3 Overheat limit control (OLe)

Failure of either the combustion air switch or fiame scanning circuit will cause the air handler to go to LOCKOUT and the burner management system will require a RESET before a re-light can be attempted

The air handler discharge overheat limit control is a manual reset switch After a failure the switch will have to be RESET before a re-light can be attempted

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 8

2 GENERAL DESCRIPTION 3000S

232 TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEM

The ECONO-AIR 30008 Series air handler is fitted with a full three-term modulating temperature control system as standard The space temperature is sensed by a heated space detector (TR) which inputs to the panel mounted temperature controller (TC) This achieves control by modulation of the fuel gas flow control valve (MV5) The temperature controller additionally limits the air handler discharge air temperature measured by the discharge temperature detector (TO) to pre-set high and low limits

233 MAIN CONTROL PANEL

The control panel houses the combustioncirculation air fan starter the burner management system and the heated space temperature controller On larger units a separate starter panel may be supplied The panel door is fitted with an interlocked isolator POWER ON and LOCKOUT lights and the burner management RESET button The panel is mounted on or adjacent to the air handler

234 FUEL GAS SYSTEM

The PILOT LINE comprises 1 Pilot governor (PV1 ) 2 One British Gas certificated solenoid valve (PV2) 3 One pilot gas isolation valve (PV3) 4 Pipework and fittings

Note Two pressure test points are fitted on the pilot line on the inlet and discharge of the pilot solenoid valve

The MAIN GAS LINE comprises

1 Gas isolation valve (MV1 ) 2 Pressure governor (MV2) 3 Double block safety shut-oft system (MV34) 4 Gas flow control valve (MV5) 5 Burner isolation valve (MV6) 6 Pipework and fittings

Note Four pressure test points are fitted on the n1ain gas line on the supply the inlet and discharge of the second block valve and downstream of the flow control valve

Note On small air handlers items 2 and 3 are combined in one multi-functional control

All items above are detailed on the Process amp Instrumentation Diagram in Section 1 of this manual

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 9

2 GENERAL DESCRIPTION 3000S

235 REMOTE CONTROL STATION

The ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler is also supplied with a remote control station which houses the air handler operating controls indicating status and the workspace temperature detector if the control station is located in the heated space

236 HEATED SPACE TEMPERATURE SENSOR The heated space temperature sensor is to be located remotely within the space to be heated

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 10

3 INSTALLATION 30005

31 STATUTORY REQUIREMENTS

I n accordance with the Gas Safety (I nstallation and Use) Regulations 1998 installation of this ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler should only be undertaken by competent personnel who are fully aware of their responsibilities under the Health and Safety at Work Act 1974

The installation of this air handler must comply with

BS6230-1991 Installation of gas-fired forced convection air air handlers for commercial and industrial Space Heating of rated input exceeding 60kW

The lEE Regulations for Electrical Installations

Gas Safety (Installation and Use) Regulations 1998

Health and Safety at Work Act 1974

Building Regulations 1986

Building Standards (Scotland Only)

The I nstitution of Gas Engineers Codes of Practice

IGEUP1 Soundness Testing Procedures for Industrial and Commercial Gas Installations

IGEUP2 Gas Installation Pipework Boosters and Compressors on Industrial and Commercial Premises

IGEUP4 Commissioning Of Gas Fired Plant On Industrial and Commercial Premises

32 RECEPTION AND STORAGE OF GOODS

32laquo1 RECEPTION

On receipt of the shipment check that the shipment is complete against the Delivery Advice Note Check for mechanical damage sustained during transit before off-loading the goods Inform the carrier of any such damage

322 OFFLOADING

Horizontal air handlers are fitted with four lifting eyes to permit an overhead lift Alternatively horizontal air handlers may be handled by a fork lift truck on the steel angle support frame

323 STORAGE

Air handlers must be stored in a dry environment The remote control station must be removed from the shipment and stored indoors in a dry environment Outdoor units of split case design (Size 54 and above) must have open ends protected from the environment until installation is complete Any filter elements should be stored in a dry environment

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 11

3 INSTALLATION 3000S

33 LIMITATIONS OF USE

The ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler must not be installed in the following locations

I n hazardous areas

In areas where flammable vapours can be present in excess of their threshold limit values as defined in 8S5925

I n accordance with 8S6230 Clause 513 where there are any flued appliances in the heated area and where air is supplied mechanically and there is mechanical extraction the design extract rate must be 5 to 10 less than the design inlet rate so that the room will not be at a lower pressure than the outside air If the air handler is the only source of mechanically supplied air the extract rate must not exceed 95 of the nominal air flow specified in Section 11 of this manual

Note If it proposed to install the ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler to supply heated air to a hazardous area or in areas where flammable vapours are present the installation must first be approved by a RS STOKVIS Ltd Engineer

34 LOCATION OF AIR HANDLERS

The air handler should normally be installed in the location recommended by the RS STOKVIS Ltd specifying engineer

Check the proposed location for level and load bearing strength Ensure that there is adequate clearance as detailed on the air handler GA in Section 1 this manual around the unit for access for maintenance purposes If the air handler is to be installed above floor level a suitably designed service platform should be provided Such a platform must have 100mm minimum raised edges around the perimeter If this is not possible all air handler access panels must be fitted with hinged restraints This is a factory standard option which should be specified at the time of ordering - check the restraints are fitted before proceeding with installation

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 12

3 INSTALLATION 3000S

35 FRESH AIR INLET AND VENTILATION

351 FRESH AIR INLET

The air handler must be installed where it has a direct and unlimited supply of fresh air from outside the building Ensure that the air intake is not located near exhausts from the building or from any process exhausts such as paint booth exhausts Whenever possible protect the fresh air inlet from the prevailing wind and local wind effects from corners

The fresh air inlet should be sized for an air velocity of 3ms The inlet duct area is detailed on the General Arrangement drawing located in Section 1 of this manual

Where the fresh air inlet is made in a load bearing wall eg a brick wall guidance should be obtained from Structural Engineers on the provision of a lintel in the wall over the fresh air opening

A weather hood must be fitted when the air handler air inlet is at or within 1 m of the outside wall Additionally the weather hood should have negligible resistance to the airflow maximum 01 mbar at the design air flow rate

Do not install the ECONO-AI R 3000S Series air handler where long lengths of duct or bends of an angle greater than 30deg are necessary to lead to the air handler from the fresh air opening If ducting is unavoidable ensure that the resulting pressure drop is negligible Le less than 01 mbar for ductless air handlers and has been accounted for in the original design for ducted air handlers as detailed in the specification section of this manual Section 11

Note If the air intake is located in an area of unrestricted access warning notices preventing the blockage of the air intake by temporary stacking should be displayed adjacent to the intake

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 13

3 INSTALLATION 3000S

352 VENTI LA TION

Where the air air handler is in its own plant room or compartment this shall be ventilated with openings communicating directly with the outside air to ventilate the room

The openings shall be fitted with grilles of negligible resistance and shall be sited so that they cannot easily be blocked or flooded They shall have a total minimum free area as follows

Low Level (inlet) 320cm2 + 27cm2 per kilowatt in excess of 60kW total rated input

High Level (outlet) 160cm2 + 134cm2 per kilowatt in excess of 60kW total rated input

The free area of the grilles shall be not less than the size of the recommended minimum ventilation opening Grilles shall be designed to minimise high velocity air streams in the plant room For exposed ie free standing plant rooms ventilation openings shall be provided on at least two sides and preferably on all four sides

Where mechanical ventilation is used it shall be by mechanical inlet and either natural or mechanical extraction Systems of ventilation employing mechanical extraction and natural air inlet shall not be used

The minimum flow rates of air supplied shall be not less than 06 m3s per megawatt of rated heat input

36 AIR DISCHARGE

The air handler should be located with the air discharge into the heated space at a minimum height of 3 metres The air should not discharge directly onto any obstructions and direct discharge on to working personnel should be avoided

If the air discharge is located in an area of unrestricted access warning notices preventing the blockage of the air discharge by temporary stacking should be displayed adjacent to the discharge

Generally it is not necessary to fit distribution ducting to the discharge of the air handler If ducting is required or specified ensure that the resulting pressure drop has been accounted for in the original design specification as detailed in Section 1 of this manual

37 ASSEMBLY AND POSITIONING OF AIR HANDLER

Unless specified at the time of order air handlers will be shipped in sections Discharge heads grilles attenuators duct connecting sections filters rain-hoods etc will be supplied loose for site fitting to the air handler

Horizontal air handlers must be supported on their steel angle support base When the air handler is located check for level and adjust as necessary

Alternatively horizontal air handlers can be supplied with extensions of the support frame for suspending from overhead supports This must be specified at the time of order Do not suspend the air handler from the lifting eyes

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 14

3 INSTALLATION 3000S

38 REMOTE STATION

The ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler is supplied with a remote control station This should be mounted in a position convenient to the end user If possible it should not be mounted on an external wall or where the space temperature detector is affected by cold draughts or a local source of heat

39 VISUAL CHECK

After completion of installation re-check the air handler for signs of damage Report any instance to RS STOKVIS Ltd

310 CONNECTION OF SERVICES

The air handler requires the connection of fuel gas and electricity

3101 FUEL GAS SUPPLY

The ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler has been designed for use on Natural Gas An alternative version is available for LPG The gas type for the air handler supplied is clearly marked on the air handler data badge and on the Specification sheet in Section 1 of this manual Check the gas type is correct and that the supply pressure is within the range marked on the specification

The local gas Authority should be consulted about the adequacy of the gas service and meter supplies for existing and proposed extensions to the installation and for any requirements for boosting the gas supply_

Connect the fuel gas supply to the inlet manual valve on the air handler gas train The connection size is detailed in Section 1 of this manual A further isolation valve and union should be fitted immediately adjacent to the appliance which when the valve is closed allows the complete burner and control assembly to be disconnected for maintenance or repair

New gas pipework should be installed to British Gas Publication IGEUP2 and be purged and pressure tested in accordance with British Gas Publications IGEUP1

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 15

3 INSTALLATION 3000S

3102 ELECTRICITY SUPPLY

All external wiring shall be carried out and checked by a competent person All components shall be checked for suitability for voltage range and frequency

Means for electric isolation having a contact separation of at least 3mm in all poles must be provided adjacent to the air handler The electrical supply to the appliance shall incorporate suitable means of excess current protection

The ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler requires a 3 phase 4 wire supply which should be connected to the main control panel Check the air handler data badge for the correct electrical supply The maximum supply requirement is Specified in Section 1 of this manual Note that the 240 Volt air handler control circuit is taken from the lUI phase to Neutral Connection should be made as shown on the wiring diagram shipped inside this panel

The air handler must be earthed in accordance with BS5986 and CP1013

Check all terminal strip terminations for wires which have become loose during shipment

311 CONNECTION TO THE MAIN PANEL AND REMOTE STATION

Interconnecting wiring to the main panel and remote station should be made with a minimum specification of 075 mm2 300 Volt cable Check that no wires on the terminal strip have become loose during shipment The remote panel should be mounted at a height of approx 18m If possible it should not be mounted on an external wall or where the sensor will be affected by cold draughts or a local source of heat

Both panel and remote station must be earthed in accordance with BS5986 and CP1013

312 HEATED SPACE TEMPERATURE SENSOR

The space temperature sensor located on the remote panel should be connected with screened cable or twin low voltage signal cable run in its own separate conduit It should be mounted on the remote panel or adjacent to the outlet at a height of approx 18m If possible it should not be mounted on an external wall or where the sensor will be affected by cold draughts or a local source of heat

313 DUCT SENSOR

The duct sensor should be connected with screened cable or twin low voltage signal cable run in its own separate conduit It should be mounted in the air handler discharge as close as possible to the discharge into the heated space

314 OVERHEAT LIMIT CONTROL SENSOR

The overheat limit control sensor should be connected with twin core cable It should be mounted in the air handler discharge within 1 metre of the air handler outlet connection

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 16

3 INSTALLATION 3000S

315 TOUCH SCREEN WIRING

The touch screen located on the front of the remote station requires two separate twisted pairs of O5mrh2 screened cable run in a separate conduit If the distance between the main and remote stations is greater that 1 km please contact RS STOKVIS Ltd for advice

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 17

3 INSTALLATION 3000S

316 ALIGNMENT

3161 INSTALLATION OF DRIVE BELTS

On 80 amp 89 30008 range of air handlers it will be necessary to align the pulleys and fit the drive belts before carrying out commissioning of the unit

3162 PU LLEYS

Before assembling the drive check the pulley grooves are free from scores or sharp edges and all dimensions conform to the relevant standard

The Taper Lock bush is your starting point when it comes to assembly and installation Drive installation is a straightforward job with Taper Lock - but the stages set out on the installation leaflet provided with every Taper Lock bush should be followed closely

3163 ALIGNMENT

Good alignment of pulleys prior to belt installation is important to avoid belt flank wear The diagram below shows correct installation of pulleys

INTERNAl BEARING

MOTOR PUlLEY rAN PULLEY

MOTORMOTOR ADJUSTMENT MOUNTING BOlTSBOLTS

3164 BELTS

When the pulleys have been correctly positioned on the shafts the belts can be installed to complete the drive

The drive centre distance should be reduced prior to the installation of the belts so that they may be fitted without the use of force Under no circumstances must belts be prised into the grooves Using sharp tools to stretch the belts over the pulley rim can easily damage belts and pulley grooves

The installation allowance given in the table below is the minimum recommended reduction in centre distance for various belt section and lengths to allow for correct fitting

The take-up allowance given in the same table should be added on to the calculated centre distance to allow for belt stretch

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 18

3 INSTALLATION 3000S

3165 INSTALLATION AND TAKE UP ALLOWANCE

Belt Pitch Installation Allowance Take-Up Length (mm) SPZ SPA SPB SPC (mm)

410 to 530 5

540 to 840 10

850 to 1160 15

1170 to 1500 20

1510 to 1830 20 25

1840 to 2170 30

2180 to 2830 25 40

2840 to 3500 30 50

3520 to 4160 50 60

4170 to 5140 70

5220 to 6150 85

6180 to 7500 105

600 to 8500 125

8880 to 10170 145

10600 to 12500 175

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 19

4 COMMISSIONING 30005

This appliance must be commissioned by a RS STOKVIS Ltd approved engineer

41 PRESTART CHECKS

1 Switch the SUMMERIOFFMlINTER switch on the remote station to OFF

2 Check the correct electric supply is available to the air handler and the appliance isolator installed

3 Check the correct fuel gas supply is available to the air handler and local isolation valve and union installed Check that new gas pipe work has been correctly purged and pressure tested and that the isolation valve is in the OFF position

4 Check the air handler gas control system and burner connections for pressure soundness as detailed in Appendix 1 of this manual

5 Complete the first section of the Service Check Sheet supplied at the back of this manual (Appendix 3)

6 Close the air handler access door

7 Close and lock the main air handler control panel

8 Switch the main panel isolator to position 1 Check the POWER ON light illuminates

9 Check and set the timed ONOFF periods in the lAC Controller located on the remote panel Ensure that the unit is set to be on during testing Refer to Appendix 4 for the lAC setting procedure

10 Close and lock the remote panel

11 Switch the SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch on the remote station to SUMMER to start the air fan Return the switch to the OFF position and check for correct rotation of the fan as the fan slows and stops

The fan rotation can be observed through the fan section access door or through the air handler access door Only do this during the fan run-down period Ensure the door is securely fastened after completion

Rotation arrows are fitted on the end of the air handler and inside the air handler above the interior bearing support If the rotation is incorrect two phases should be interchanged as dictated by the Engineer responsible for the site electrical system

12 Check the air pressure drop across the burner whilst the fan is operating with a water column pressure gauge connected to the two pressure test points on the air pressure switch (DPS) This pressure should be between 14 and 16 rnbar

If the air differential pressure measured above is not within the operating range check inlet and outlet ductwork as appropriate and any filters fitted If the pressure differential is still not within limits isolate the air handler and report to RS STOKVIS Ltd before proceeding

13 Check the operation and setting of the Low Air Pressure Switch by injecting a controlled signal into the switch Check the break point on the switch is 1 mbar (falling)

Note The switch is set and sealed before fitting The 1 mbar switch point may not coincide with the 1 mbar scale reading on the switch

If on checking the switch is not operating correctly do not tamper with it return it to RS STOKVIS Ltd for replacement

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 20

4 COMMISSIONING 3000S

42 DRY RUN

With all the manual gas isolation valves still in the OFF position switch the SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch to WINTER

43 START UP

1 Attach a manometer to pressure test point F and the low pressure test point on the air pressure switch (DPS)

2 Open the main gas supply valve (MV1) and the pilot burner isolation valve (PV3) Leave the main burner isolation valve (MV6) closed Reset the air handler by pressing the push-button marked RESET on either the main panel or remote station The air handler pilot will light automatically (after the automatic damper start check and combustion air pre-purge) and then LOCKOUT after the main gas shut-off valves are addressed

During the short period that the pilot is in operation check the pilot gas pressure on the manometer It should be 10 mbar and the pilot flame approximately 100 - 150mm in length covering the first three or four holes of the mixing plate and have a steady blue colour when viewed through the sight glass on the access side of the air handler Adjust as necessary - refer to Section 51 this manual Check the flame signal - refer to Section 431

3 Open the main burner isolation valve (MV6) RESET the air handler which should now light to main burner stage When alight close the main burner isolation valve to shut down the gas flow to the burner Check that the unit goes to LOCKOUT

4 Reset the air handler and drive the burner to low fire by adjusting the temperature controller set point as described in Appendix 4 of this manual Check the flame is continuous across the width of the burner and has a flame length of approx 50 - 65mm from the burner rail when viewed through the sight glass on the access side of the air handler Check the burner pressure across pressure test point D and the downstream (low) pressure test point on the air pressure switch ie on the rear of the pressure switch This pressure is specifled in Section 1 of this manual Adjust as necessary-refer to Section 53 of this manual Check the flame signal - refer to Section 431

Where possible check the actual gas flow rate by meter reading with all other appliances turned off

5 Drive the burner to high fire by adjusting the temperature controller set point and high limit to 55degC as described in Appendix 4 of this manual Check the flame is continuous across the burner rail and has a flame length of approximately 250 - 350mm from the burner rail Check the burner pressure across pressure test point D and the downstream (low) pressure test point on the air pressure switch This pressure is specified in Section 1 of this manual Adjust as necessary - refer to Section 52 of this manual Check the maximum air handler discharge temperature Check the flame signal shyrefer to Section 431

Where possible check the actual gas flow rate by meter reading with all other appliances turned off

6 Check the operation of the overheat limit control by adjusting the temperature controller set point and high limit to 65degC as described in Appendix 4 of this manual Monitor the discharge temperature on the temperature controller Check that the overheat control operates as the set temperature is passed Check that the control must be manually reset by pressing the green reset button on the front of the switch Return the temperature controller to its original settings

In the event that the ambient temperature is too low for this simple procedure to work the instrument will have to be bench tested using a Temperature 8ath Remove and replace the control as Section 84 of this manual for bench-testing

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 21

4 COMMISSIONING 3000S

43 1 FLAME SIGNAL CHECK

1 The ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler is fitted with a Klippon SAKT1 Test Terminal which can be used to measure the flame scanning signal Refer to the Electrical Schematic and connect a 0-1 mA ammeter to the two test points with standard 23 mm test plugs with the positive lead on the detector side Disconnect the terminal link to obtain the signal reading A minimum signal of 70 microamps is required typical signals are in the 250-400 microamp range on both pilot and main flame After completion replace the terminal link and remove the test jacks

2 Drive the burner to high fire as previously described Measure the carbon dioxide content of the discharge air stream This figure must not exceed 2800 ppm If the discharge exceeds this limit isolate the air handler and report to RS STOKVIS Ltd before proceeding

Stop and start the air handler a few times to check for reliability using the Operating Instructions (Section 6)

432 HANDOVER

Complete the air handler Service Check Sheet supplied at the back of this manual The self-copy sheet must be returned to STOKVIS for checking

Instruct the User in efficient use and care of the unit start-up and shutdown (including emergency shutdown) and recommended service interval Emphasise the need to keep the air handler clear of stored items and extraneous material and to maintain the recirculation and fresh air paths to the air handler inlets Hand all instructions as applicable to the UserOwner for safekeeping

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 22

5 ADJUSTMENTS 3000S

If adjustments to the air handler settings are required they should be made by a RS STOKVIS Ltd approved engineer

The normal value for all control settings is specified in Section 1 of this manual

51 PILOT ADJUSTMENT

The pilot gas pressure and flame length may be adjusted by altering the discharge pressure of the pilot governor Screwing the adjusting screw clockwise (located under the top cap) increases the discharge pressure and the flame length anti-clockwise decreases the pressure and the flame length

52 BURNER HIGH FIRE PRESSURE ADJUSTMENT

At high fire alter the spring compression on the main burner governor (MV2) by removing the cap and adjust the spring compression plate clockwise to increase the burner pressure anti-clockwise to decrease burner pressure If the pressure does not increase on adjusting the spring the supply is inadequate

Note On small air handlers fitted with a mUlti-functional control the pressure adjusting screw is located under a swing cap on the first block valve

53 BURNER LOW FIRE ADJUSTMENT

The main burner low fire is adjusted on the flow control valve MV5 (Process amp Instrumentation Diagram)

Remove the top cover of the valve and insert a Terminal Screwdriver in the adjusting screw of the TOP cam marked NI

Drive the burner to low fire by adjusting the temperature controller set-point and high limit to 05degC as described in Appendix 4 of this manual

Turn the Terminal Screwdriver clockwise to decrease the low fire gas flow anti-clockwise to increase the flow

Check the heat input and flame signal at the new position are satisfactory and return the tenlperature controller to its normal settings

Replace the control valve cover

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 23

5 ADJUSTMENTS 3000S

54 SUMMERIOFFIWINTER SWITCH

In the SUMMER position this switch provides ventilation only and is independent of the programmed ON and OFF periods This position is manually selected and must be manually de-selected Whenever the switch is in this position the fan is operating

In the OFF position the air handler is shutdown and will not operate This overrides any frost protection fitted It is suitable for air handler shutdown for short periods such as holidays The programme memory is unaffected by this switch and assumes control of the air handler when the switch is returned to the WINTER position

In the WINTER position the air handler operates off the programme memory to provide heating

55 RESET BUTTON

Visual indication of air handler lockout is provided In the event of lockout occurring the air handler can be reset by depressing the RESET button This parallels the RESET button on the air handler main control panel If after 4 attempts to reset the air handler the lockout indicator still illuminates then a Service Engineer should be called to investigate the problem

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 24

6 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 3000S

61 AIR HANDLER START-UP

1 Open all manual gas valves both on the appliance and on the supply to the appliance Switch on the Electric Supply to the appliance

2 On the main air handler panel

Switch the panel isolator to the 1 position

Check POWER ON light

3 On the remote control station

For Heating Switch the SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch to WINTER

The air handler will now start automatically in response to the time settings

In the event of LOCKOUT

Press the RESET button and the cycle of operations will be repeated If the air handler goes to LOCKOUT four times in succession call for a Service Engineer

For Unheated Ventilation Switch the SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch to SUMMER

Note This prevents the burner firing giving a controlled supply of ventilation air to the heated space as long as the switch is in this position The air handler will now start automatically in response to the timeclock demand To turn the fan off return the switch to the centre OFF position

In the event of LOCKOUT

Press the RESET button and the cycle of operations will be repeated If the air handler goes to LOCKOUT four times in succession call for a Service Engineer

62 AIR HANDLER SHUTDOWN

621 SHUTDOWN FOR SHORT PERIODS

Switch the SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch on the remote station to OFF

622 SHUTDOWN FOR PROLONGED PERIODS

Switch the main panel isolator to the 0 position and close all manual gas valves both on and leading to the appliance

Note Manual gas valves should only be operated when the appliance is to be shut off for either Servicing or for a prolonged shutdown

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 25

30005 6 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

63 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS

631 SITE CLEARANCE ADJACENT TO AIR HANDLER

Attention should be paid to keeping the area around the air handler tidy No rubbish should be allowed to accumulate in the vicinity of the air handler and storage of goods etc should not be permitted within two metres of the air handler Failure to comply could result in reduced airflow to the air handler causing inefficient running and potential overheat cond ition

632 AIR SUPPLY TO AIR HANDLER

Air vents and grilles supplying air to the air handler should never be blocked and should be checked periodically to ensure they are clear

633 AIR FILTERS

Similarly attention should be paid to cleaning or replacing the filters to the air handler if fitted Your installer should advise you on the frequency with which this would be required to be completed

634 SERVICE

For continued safe and efficient operation of this air air handler it is important that servicing of the air handler should be completed at regular intervals by a competent person in accordance with Section 82 of this manual Users are advised to enter into a Service Agreement with RS STOKVIS Ltd

635 SPARE PARTS

It is suggested that a complete set of spare parts essential to the running of the air handler and recommended by the installer are kept by the user on the premises where the air handler is installed This is particularly important where the air handler forms an essential part of any process plant and its being out of operation may cause problems by for example frost damage or condensation by super-cooling

A list of Recommended Spares will be found in Section 9 of this manual

636 GAS LEAKS

If a smell of gas is detected around the area of the appliance Switch off all manual gas valves and contact your service engineer or the local gas undertaking

NEVER

LOOK FOR GAS LEAKS WITH A LIGHTED MATCH OR NAKED

FLAME

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 26

7 FAULT FINDING 30008

The main control panel incorporates two lights to help in fault finding

POWER ON

LOCKOUT

The remote station also has three lights

AIR FAN ON

BURNER ON

LOCKOUT

This section gives the possible causes of failure associated with each check light The electrical schematic diagram in this manual and the wiring diagram shipped in the main air handler panel should be used in conjunction with the notes below Additionally Service Engineers should familiarise themselves with the detailed Start Sequence given in Appendix 2 of this manual

The notes are given for each light before consulting the notes check for bulb failure

71 POWER ON LIGHT IS UNLIT

Check

1 Main control panel isolator is in the 1 position

2 Main Panel 6A MCB has not tripped if a trip has occurred the switch will be at the OFF position Reset and test system as required

3 Also check if the mains electrical supply is isolated If so FIND OUT WHY before taking any action

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 27

7 FAULT FINDING 30005

72 AIR FAN ON LIGHT IS UNLIT

Check

1 SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch is not in Position OFF

2 Timeperiod is not set to off

3 Air handler is not at LOCKOUT

4 Recheck both AIR FAN ON and LOCKOUT bulbs

Two fault indications are possible

1 THE FAN IS NOT OPERATING

If the fan should have started but is not operating

Check 1 Overload for tripped conditions Reset the overload and monitor the next start-up

2 Motor Fuses

3 Relays 1 2 amp3 for failure

laClor CC1 for failure

5 Air Pressure Switch (DPS) is failed in the N 0 Position

Replace the faulty component as described in Section 8

2 THE FAN IS OPERATING

This indicates that the air pressure switch (DPS) has failed to change over

Measure the profile plate differential pressure as described in Section 4113 If the pressure is correct the air pressure switch is faulty Check the switch as in 4114 If the pressure is not correct

Check 1 Correct fan belt tension

2 Correct fan rotation

3 The air handler air inlets and discharge are not blocked

4 Correct fitting on filters

5 The air differential pressure switch impulse lines are not blocked or leaking

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 28

7 FAULT FINDING 30008

73 LOCKOUT LIGHT IS ILLUMINATED

This light indicates a failure in the burner ignition and flame supervision system

RESET the unit and follow the progress of the start sequence The full cycle may take two minutes

1

------t

2 LOCKOUT after 35-40 seconds indicates an ignition failure RESET the system and observe the pilot and ignition spark during the start-up attempt

I-- shy

3 Observe the spark This should be strong and highly visible If not remove and clean the spark plug as Section 82 Check that the spark plug gap is correctly set at 15 mm

-- shy

4 Check the pilot flame If the pilot flame ignites and the unit goes to LOCKOUT the scanning system is at fault Remove and clean the detector as Section 82 Check the flame signal as in Section 431

5 If the pilot does not light the gas supply system is faulty Check the pilot system for restriction and the pilot valve operation

6 If the pilot lights and the unit goes to LOCKOUT after the main gas valves are addressed either the flow control valve is blocked or one of the main gas block valves has failed Fit a manometer on the pressure test point on the outlet flange of the multishyfunctional control and observe if the pressure rises when the main gas valves are addressed No pressure rise will indicate failure of the main gas valves

74 AIR FAN ON LIGHT ILLUMINATED

If the burner does not start check

1 SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch is in WINTER position

2 Overheat Limit Control

These interlocks prevent the burner management system starting

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 29

8 SERVICING 3000S

IMPORTANT Servicing and maintenance should be only carried out by a RS STOKVIS Ltd approved engineer

Only use replacement parts provided by the appliance manufacturer

Check that the air openings for combustion and for ventilation of any plant roon or compartment are clear

81 ISOLATION

811 FUEL GAS ISOLATION

The fuel gas to the ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler should be isolated and locked off at the manual ball valve mounted at the start of the fuel gas line Additionally before entering or servicing the air handler the burner manual isolation valve and pilot line isolation valve should be closed

812 ELECTRICAL ISOLATION

All electric power to the air handler and the remote control station is switched through the local isolator This isolator is fitted with a lock facility to permit it to be locked in the OFF position

Additionally isolate the power at the Wall Isolator

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 30

8 SERVICING 30005

82 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE

The air handler should be routinely serviced at the start of each heating season Isolate the air handler as above before servicing Details of access to individual components are given in Section 84 of this manual

1 Remove and clean spark igniter Check that the gap is correctly set at 25 mm Replace every two years

2 Clean the flame detector lens to ensure freedom from dirt and moisture If the cell shows any sign of cracks it should be replaced Routinely replace the cell every two years or after 10000 hours of operation which ever comes first

3 Inspect the entire air handler paint system for general damage Repair as necessary

4 Every two years brush the burner plates and clear the burner holes carefully with a Size 18mm drill for NP II and 20mm drill for NP I

WARNING THE BURNER HOLES MUST NOT BE ENLARGED

5 Inspect and lubricate all damper linkages to ensure freedom of operation Wipe off all excess lubricants to prevent dirt build up on linkage parts

6 Check the fan belt for cracks and splits Check tension The correct tension gives 16mm deflection per metre of span when the belt is centrally loaded with a force of 27N Adjust as necessary

7 Grease both the fan shaft bearings with Mobiith AW2 grease or similar

NEVER use high temperature grease

NEVER mix two different greases within the bearing always flush existing grease out

Note Removing the cover plate on the end of the air handler gains access to the outboard fan bearing

Light to Slow to 0 120 2 to 6 months Clean Dry

Medium Medium 120 200 1 to 2 months

Moderate to Light to Slow to 0 120 1 to 4 weeks Dry

Dirty Medium Medium 120 200 1 to 7 days

Extreme Dirt Dry Light to Slow to 0 200 Daily Flushing out

Medium Medium Dirt

83 ANNUAL SERVICE CHECKS

After Servicing test fire the air handler following the Commissioning Procedure detailed in Section 4 of this manual to ensure correct operation generally Special attention must be paid to the damper system and related controls and interlocks

Additionally check that the fresh air and recirculation air entry path to the air handler has been kept clear and instruct the User of the need for this as necessary

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 31

8 SERVICING 3000S

84 REMOVAL PROCEDURE FOR REPLACEABLE COMPONENTS

IMPORTANT

Turn off the gas at the appliance service valve and the electricity at the main panel and wall isolator before proceeding

841 BURNER

The burner is located inside the air handler casing and is mounted on two brackets from the support straps To remove the burner isolate the air handler as in 81 and undo the union on the fuel gas line adjacent to the burner isolation valve (MV6) and unscrew the main and pilot gas feed pipes from the burner rail Access to the rear of the burner assembly is made by removing the partition plate below the burner separating the fresh air inlet to the burner from the return air inlet compartment This is held in place by screws which engage in captive nuts on the top side of the partition Remove the Flame Detector and pull off the ignition plug cap Disconnect the burner support brackets and remove the burner The burner will easily pass through the access hatch for further strip down Replace in the reverse order soundness test the gas pipework check the burner operation and duty as described in the commissioning section of this manual

842 FLAME DETECTOR

This is a 240 Volt instrument

The flame detector is mounted on the end of the burner rail inside the air handler casing To remove the detector isolate the panel electric supply and lock off Push the scanner towards the burner and rotate to release the bayonet fixing and lift the detector from its mount Remove the two screws holding the detector cover and disconnect the supply leads noting the polarity of the connections

Replace the flame detector in the reverse order ensuring correct polarity of connections Ensure the access panel is securely closed and the retaining nuts are tightened down Check operation by inserting a test meter in the points provided in the main control panel and reading the flame signals during start up to full rate burner operation (See 431) Operate the appliance over six starts for reliability of operation including tum off of start and main gas valves to check for lockout operation

843 IGNITER SPARK PLUG

This is a high tension spark plug

The igniter spark plug is mounted on the end of the burner rail inside the air handler casing To remove the spark plug isolate the air handler as above Enter the service access door Access to the spark plug is made through the profile plate To remove the spark plug pull off the high tension lead and unscrew the plug with a plug spanner

When replacing the spark plug check the plug gap is set at 15mm Check ignition reliability over six start ups

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 32

8 SERVICING 3000S

844 IGNITER SPARK TRANSFORMER

This is a 240 Volt instrument

The ignition transformer is located in a plastic box mounted on the air handler casing adjacent to the main control panel To remove the transformer isolate the air handler as above and unscrew the four retaining screws holding the box lid in place and remove the lid Disconnect the supply cable at the terminal strip and undo the transformer retaining screws The transformer may then be unscrewed from the High Tension cable leading to the spark plug

Replacement is a simple reversal of this procedure

Check ignition reliability over six start ups

845 COMBUSTION AIR PRESSURE SWITCH (DPS)

Note The switch is set and sealed and should be replaced if not operating correctly

This switch is a 240 Volt instrument

The air switch is mounted directly on the air handler casing and can be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove the switch isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the supply cable Break the downstream pipe compression fitting and unscrew the switch housing from its locating fitting Reverse the procedure to replace after ensuring switch setting is as specified in Section 13 of this manual Operate the air handler to ensure reliability of operation over six start ups

846 AIR HANDLER OVERHEAT LIMIT CONTROL

This is a 240 Volt instrument

The overheat limit control can be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove the control isolate the air handler as above and lock off Remove the switch cover Disconnect the supply cable and unscrew the control housing from its locating fitting Reverse the procedure to replace check the switch is set to 50degC Test the switch operation as described in Section 43 over at least three operations

847 AIR FAN AND MOTOR

The air fan motor is a 415 Volt 3 phase motor

The motor and slide rails are easily accessible inside the air handler casing If it is necessary to remove the motor isolate the air handler as above Slacken the fan-belt tension and remove the drive belts Pull the motor away from the air handler casing to make access to the motor terminal box and disconnect the supply cable The motor may now be removed from the unit Following replacement the air handler must be fully re-commissioned as in Section 4

It is unlikely that the air fan will need replacing or servicing If required a full procedure should be obtained from RS STOKVIS Ltd

Replacement must be followed by full re-commissioning as in Section 4

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 33

8 SERVICING 3000S

848 FUEL GAS MULTI-FUNCTIONAL CONTROL - SMALL UNITS

This is a 240 Volt instrument

The fuel gas multi-functional control can be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove the unit isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the Hirschman electric termination Unbolt the control from its flanges and remove

When replacing care must be taken to ensure the flange 0 rings are undamaged and in the correct location Following replacement the air handler must be fully reshycommissioned as in Section 4 including tests for soundness prior to start-up

849 GOVERNOR AND BLOCK VALVES

The block valves are 240 Volt instruments

All these items may be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove any item isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the electric termination to the two block valves the pilot block valve and the flow control block valve Break the two pipe unions and remove the fuel gas line complete for further strip-down

8410 FUEL GAS FLOW CONTROL VALVE

This is a 24 Volt instrument

The fuel gas How control valve can be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove the valve isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the supply cables to the control valve

On small air handlers fitted with a multi-functional control support the multi-functional control and unbolt its discharge flange Break the union downstream of the burner isolation valve and remove the section of line containing the flow control valve for further strip-down

On large air handlers fitted with separate block valves it will be necessary to remove the fuel gas line complete as Section 8410 above

Following replacement re-commission the air handler

Note If the fresh air damper is not in the full open position the heat input must not exceed the maximum heat input at recirculation condition specified in the technical data section of this manual

8411 PILOT GAS GOVERNOR AND BLOCK VALVE

The block valve is a 240 Volt instrument

Both items may be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove either item isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the electric terrriination to the solenoid valve Undo the upstream pipe union and the compression fitting downstream of the manual block valve (PV3) Remove the pilot gas line complete for further strip down

Replace broken or distorted connections and retest for soundness Ensure the pilot gas pressure is correct and the flame is sensing an output Ensure reliability over six start-ups

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 34

8 SERVICING 3000S

8412 BELT TENSIONING PROCEDURE

The setting tensions are designed to cover a wide range of drives A precise setting force for individual applications can be calculated as detailed

SETTING FORCES

Belt Section

Setting Force To Deflect Belt 16mm per Metre Of Span

Small Pulley Diameter (mm)

Basic Setting Forces Newtons (N) Kilograms (kgf)

125 x Setting Forces Newtons (N) Kilograms (kgf)

SPZ

56 to 71 16 16 20 20 75 to 90 18 18 22 22

95 to 125 20 20 25 25 Over 125 22 22 28 28

SPA

80 to 100 22 22 28 28 106 to 140 30 30 38 38 150 to 200 36 37 45 46 Over 200 40 40 50 51

SPB

112 to 160 40 40 50 51 170 to 224 50 51 62 63 236 to 355 62 63 77 79 Over 355 65 66 81 83

SPC 224 to 250 70 71 87 89 265 to 355 92 94 115 120 Over 375 115 120 144 150

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 35

8 SERVICING 3000S

BELT TENSIONING USING FENNER BELT TENSION INDICATOR

Calculate the deflection in mm on a basis of 16mm per metre of centre distance Centre Distance (m) x 16 =Deflection (mm)

Set lower marker ring at the deflection distance required in mm on the lower scale

Set upper ring against to bottom edge of the top tube

Place the belt tension indicator on top of the belt at the centre of span and apply a force at right angles to the belt defecting it to the point where the lower marker ring is level with the top of the adjacent belt

Read off the force value indicated by the top edge of the upper marker ring

Compare this force to the kgf value shown in the table above

If a Fenner Belt Tension Indicator is not available a spring balance and rule will be suffice

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 36

8 SERVICING 30005

85 MAIN PANEL CONTROLS

All panel controls are readily accessible and may be easily exchanged for replacement components in the event of failure Ensure any replacement item is of the same make and type as the original

851 LANDIS amp GYR LFL 1335 AUTOMATIC SEQUENCE CONTROLLER

The Landis amp Gyr Automatic Sequence Controller is a plug-in unit locating on a pre-wired chassis To remove the controller undo the two retaining screws at the top left and lower right corners and pull the module off the chassis

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

852 CONTROLS CIRCUIT (24 VOLT) TRANSFORMER

The Controls Circuit Transformer is fixed to the panel back plate by tapped screws To remove the transformer undo the wiring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel Undo the two retaining screws and remove the unit complete

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

853 CONTROL RELAYS R1 R2 amp R3

The Control Relays are DIN Rail mounted To remove a relay undo the wIring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel Release the DIN rail retaining clip under the relay with a screwdriver and remove the relay

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

854 6A MCB

The 6A MCB is DIN Rail mounted To remove the MCB undo the wiring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel Release the DIN rail retaining clip under the MCB with a screwdriver and remove the MCB

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

855 THERMAL OVERLOAD

The thermal overload is attached to the underside of the main contactor To remove the overload undo the wiring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel and that the overload setting is as specified in Section 13 of this manual Unscrew the three connections to the contactor and remove the overload

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 37

8 SERVICING 3000S

856 MAIN CONTACTOR

The Main Contactor is DIN Rail mounted To remove the contactor remove the thermal overload as 855 above and then undo the wiring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel Release the DIN rail retaining clip under the contactor with a screwdriver and remove the contactor

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

857 MOTOR FUSE

To replace a motor fuse pull the fuse carrier off the fuse holder base The fuse is attached to the fuse carrier by two screws Unscrew remove and replace

86 REMOTE CONTROL STATION

The remote control station contains some serviceable parts although these items should only be fitted by an approved RS STOKVIS Ltd Engineer

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 38

9 RECOMMENDED SPARES 3000S

For two years operation it is recommended that the following items should be held in stock

ITEM DESCRIPTION PART NO QUANTITY i

1 INDICATOR BULBS W1121 1 PACK

2 SPARK PLUG 023739 1 I

3 UVDETECTOR QRA10C 1 I

4 ROOM SENSOR DRT2453 1

5 DUCT SENSOR DDT1701 1

All replacement parts can be obtained from RS STOKVIS Ltd by quoting the air handler serial number the part number and description

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 39

APPENDIX 1 30005

SOUNDNESS TESTING THE FUEL GAS PIPEWORK

This procedure should only be carried out by personnel familiar with the ECONO-AIR 3000S Series Air handler

The pressure test points and all valves are identified on the Process and Instrumentation Diagram for the air handler included in Section 1 of this n1anual

Isolate the air handler electric supply at the main control panel and lock off Close the manual isolation valves MV1 MV6 and PV3 Ensure the supply pressure is available on the upstream side of MV1

A11 TESTING THE UPSTREAM PIPEWORKAND BURNER CONTROLS 1 Connect a 60 mbar manometer to the pressure test nipple A Monitor the

pressure for two minutes Any rise in pressure indicates that valve MV1 is leaking and must be replaced Remove pressure test points Band F

2 Open MV1 to pressurise the pipework on both the main gas and pilot line to the first block valve

3 Close MV1 Allow one minute for the temperature to stabilise and then test the system for 2 minutes and watch for a drop in the pipework pressure If the pressure falls open valve MV1 and test the pipework connections and valves from MV1 to MV3 and MV1 to PV2 for leaks with a proprietary leak detector fluid or spray Turn off MV1 seal any leaks and re-test

4 If no extemalleaks are found either the pilot block valve PV1 or either the first main gas block valve MV3 is letting by

5 To test this seal pressure test point A and fit a manometer to pressure test point B Leave for two minutes with MV1 open A rise in pressure on the manometer confirms a leak on the block valve MV3 Turn off MV1 exchange the valve and re-test from point 2 above

6 Repeat this procedure for the pilot block valve Seal test point B and fit a manometer to pressure test point F Leave for two minutes with MV1 open A rise in pressure on the manometer confirms a leak on the pilot block valve PV2 Turn off MV1 exchange the valve and re-test from point 1 above Seal test point F

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 40

APPENDIX 1 30005

A12 TESTING THE DOWNSTREAM BURNER VALVE 1 Close MV1 and connect pressure test points A and 8 with flexible 6 mm bore

tubing teed into the manometer Remove pressure test point C Open MV1 to pressurise the downstream block valve MV4

2 Close MV1 and leave for one minute for the temperature to stabilise Monitor the pressure for 2 minutes If the pressure falls open valve MV1 and leak test the line between the two block valves MV3 and MV4 with a proprietary leak detector Turn off MV1 seal any leaks and re-test Note Smaller air handlers in the 3000S Series are fitted with multi-functional valves combining the pressure regulator and two block valves in one component The above procedure still applies but if a leak is found on either block valve the whole control should be replaced If no external leaks are found the downstream block valve is letting by

3 To confirm this close MV1 remove the manometer and refit to pressure test point C Connect pressure test points A and 8 with flexible 6mm bore tubing Open MV1 and allow one minute for the temperature to stabilise Monitor the pressure for a further 2 minutes with MV1 still open A rise in pressure confirms that the second block valve MV4 is letting by Turn off MV1 Replace the valve and re-test from 2 above

A13 TESTING THE DOWNSTREAM BURNER PIPEWORK 1 Close MV1 and connect pressure test points A and D with flexible 6 mm bore

tubing teed into the manometer Open MV1 to pressurise the downstream pilot pipework

2 Close MV1 and leave for one minute for the temperature to stabilise Monitor the pressure for 2 minutes If the pressure falls open valve MV1 and leak test the line between the downstream block valve MV4 and the manual block MV6 with a proprietary leak detector fluid or spray If no external leaks are found the manual block valve MV6 is letting by Turn off MV1 seal any leakages and reshytest from 2 above

A14 TESTING THE DOWNSTREAM PILOT PIPEWORK 1 Close MV1 and connect pressure test points A and F with flexible 6mm bore

tubing teed into the manometer Open MV1 to pressurise the downstream pilot pipework

2 Close MV1 and leave for one rninute for the temperature to stabilise Monitor the pressure for 2 minutes If the pressure falls open valve MV1 and leak test the line between the downstream block valve PV2 and the manual block PV3 with a proprietary leak detector fluid or spray If no external leaks are found the manual block valve PV3 is letting by Turn off MV1 seal any leakages and reshytest from 2 above

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 41

APPENDIX 1 30005

A15 TESTING THE BURNER CONNECTIONS 1 Remove the burner access panel as described in Section 84 of this manual

Remove the burner spark igniter Slacken the two retaining bolts holding the burner to the burner support straps and unbolt the burner supply endplate from the burner casting and mixing plates

2 Connect pressure test points A and 0 with flexible 6mm bore tubing teed into the manometer Open MV1 and MV6 to pressurise the burner pipework Leak test the main gas burner pipework and connections with proprietary leak detector fluid Turn off MV6 Seal any leakages and re-test

3 Connect pressure test points A and F with flexible 6 mm bore tubing teed into the manometer Open MV1 and PV3 to pressurise the pilot burner pipework Leak test the pilot gas burner pipework and connections with proprietary leak detector fluid Turn off PV3 Seal any leakages and re-test

4 Turn off MV1

5 Replace the spark igniter and profile division plate

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 42

APPENDIX 2 30005

START SEQUENCE

The burner start sequence is controlled by the Landis and Gyr burner management unit The timings are pre-set and comply with 885885 This unit must NOT be tampered with

A brief description of the start-up sequence isshy

The unit checks

1 The NO FLAME signal on the UV flame scanner

Note If the scanner detects a flame at any time other than in the correct operating sequence the flame programmer initiates a lockout

2 The operation of the combustion air proving switch in the NO AIR position

3 The air handler discharge high temperature switch

If the checks are completed the unit starts the combustion air fan and then checks the combustion airflow

Once the airflow is proven the unit checks that the damper control circuit is functioning correctly After the damper microswitch is made to prove the fresh air damper is fully open the sequence allows 30 seconds for the combustion air to purge any combustible gas from the air handler

After completion of the purge the spark ignition system is energised the pilot valve opened and the spark terminated If the pilot flame is not proven by the UV scanner the system will initiate a LOCKOUT

If the flame is proven the main gas valves are opened the pilot extinguished and the main burner flame proven

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 43

i

APPENDIX 2 30008

The following flow chart shows the complete start sequence including the lighting of the various indicating lamps

MANUAL STATUS LIGHT POWER ON

POWER ON

I INITIATE START BY TIME

SETTING ON CONTROLLER

I CHECK NO FLAME

VISIBLE

PROVEj FAIL LOCKOUT

I CHECK RELAY R4 NC

POSITION

PROVE FAIL NO START

I CHECK AIR PRESSURE SWITCH NC POSITION

PROVE FAIL NO START

I CHECK RELAY R1 NC

POSITION

PROVE j

FAIL NO START

I START COMBUSTION

AIR BLOWER

I CHECK AIR PRESSURE SWITCH NO POSITION

PROVE I

FAIL NO START

I STATUS LIGHT FAN ON

I ENERGISE RELAY R1

I

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 44

I

I

APPENDIX 2 30008

I CHECK OVERHEAT LIMIT

CONTROL R5

PROVE I

FAIL I I

CHECK 541412 LOOP CLOSED ON

LANDIS ampGYR CIRCUIT

PROVE I

FAIL I I

COMBUSTION AIR PURGE PERIOD

30 SECONDS

I

NO START

NO START

CANCEL NO FLAME CHECK CIRCUIT

I

ENERGISE SPARK

I TIMED PERIOD 25 SECONDS

I ENERGISE PILOT GAS

VALVE

I TIMED PERIOD 25 SECONDS

I TERMINATE SPARK

I INTERROGATE UV FLAME SCANNER

PROVE I

FAIL I I

TIMED PERIOD 10 SECONDS

I

LOCKOUT

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 45

I

I

APPENDIX 2 3000S

I ENERGISE MAIN GAS

VALVES

I

STATUS LIGHT BURNER ON

I TIMED PERIOD

5 SECONDS

I DE-ENERGISE PILOT

GAS VALVES

CONTINUOUS FROM PILOT

I INTERROGATE UV FLAME SCANNER

PROVE I

FAIL I I

LOCKOUT I

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 46

APPENDIX 3 30005

Please see copy of Standard Service Sheet

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 47

APPENDIX 4 30005

A41 TIME OUT SCREEN

This is the standard screen displayed when the touch screen is not in use The back light is off to save energy_ To access the STATUS screen touch the ENTER key and the following screen is displayed

[]][I][]rn[IJOO[][IJOO[] EJ~E11 I[]I ~ middot I

NOTE

The Touch Screen operates using the heat produced by the touch of a finger and therefore only LIGHT pressure is required

Excessive pressure can damage the Touch Screen

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 48

APPENDIX 4 30008

A42 STATUS SCREEN

On the typical STATUS screen the illustrated information detailed is as follows

19 36 Fan Brn

RS OS

100 Fst_~_ Lck _ _ Xst Gas~o ~ I

RS Indicates the current room temperature

OS ~( t~~ the current duct discharge temperature

Fan Indicates the current status of the fan by showing the arrow and the fan blades for ON and OFF is shown by the arrow and fan blades being removed

Brn Indicates the current status of the burner with the black flames indicating the burner to be ON and vice versa

Lck LOCKOUT - This indicates a flame failure when highlighted during normal or start-up operation

Xst EXCESS TEMPERATURE SWITCH - This indicates the unit has reached the trip limit on the over heat stat when highlighted during operation

Indicates the current position of the gas modulating valve during normal Gas

operation (0-100)

Indicates whether the Frost stat is energised and the unit is running on frost Fst

override

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 49

APPENDIX 4 30008

A43 CHANGING SETTINGS

It is possible to change the settings for the time of operation and the required temperature set points The following details the steps required

A44 ENTERING THE SECURITY CODE

From the STATUS screen touch the return key and the screen below will be displayed

Type the HIGH LEVEL security code (4321) If you make a mistake use the BACK SPACE key to delete any incorrect number(s) Touch the ENTER key when the code is correct

If the security code is incorrect the screen above will be displayed then try again If after several attempts you can not gain access please contact RS STOKVIS Ltd for further information

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 50

APPENDIX 4 30008

When the code is entered correctly the MAIN MENU is displayed as detailed below

~ STATUS SET VALUES~ ~ TIVIE CLOCK [) [) [) [) [)

The MAIN MENU screen shows the three menu items available The title for each menu item can be changed to suit the end user Please notify RS STOKVIS Ltd prior to commissioning should these parameters require special amendments

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 51

APPENDIX 4 30008

A45 CHANGING OR SETTING A TIME SCHEDULE

From the main menu screen select the TIME CLOCK page by running finger across screen symbol and touch the ENTER key the screen below will be displayed

On the following screen highlight the TS1 symbol and touch the ENTER key

The current time schedule will now be displayed as shown below The display will automatically default to the current day (1 =Monday 2 =Tuesday etc) In this case day 5 (Friday) the four schedule switching times refer to that day

IAC6BBB1BHIS1

mm0CIl bull mID 17BB 17BB 17HB

Iillleschedule

To modify a time select it by highlighting and touch the ENTER key and the following screen is displayed

To amend the appropriate onoff time as shown on the screen below The arrows to the right of the time are for altering the hours and the arrows on the left for the minutes

Once you have set the time use the ESCape key to exit back to the time schedule screen and choose another day by touching the required number Another time may now be modified as before

IAC6BBB1BHIS1

H8BH

I i eschedule

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 52

APPENDIX 4 30008

Use the ESCape key to exit back to the MAIN MENU screen

~ STATUS ~ SET VALUES

TIME CLOCK []~ [] [] [] []

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 53

APPENDIX 4 30005

A46 CHANGING SET VALUES

From the main menu screen select the SET VALUES page by highlight in the normal way and touch the ENTER key

The following screen is displayed

36 19 18III III IIIHsv Rsv Llv

To change the RSV highlight it in the normal way and touch the ENTER key and the screen below will now be shown

IAC6RRR1RR40 T I

0 19 (Y)l RSV

ROOM SET VALUE

The above screen shows the parameters that can be changed The values to the far left are the limitations of set point (OC) Change the set point by using the UP and DOWN ARROWS on the left of the screen or touch the set value itself followed by the ENTER key to select the set value and set it directly using the numeric keyboard All values can be changed in this way

Use the ESCape key twice to exit back to the MAIN MENU screen

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 54

APPENDIX 4 30005

A47 COMMISSIONING AND SERVICING BURNER CHECKS

Select the SET VALUES screen from the MAIN MENU screen and adjust the high lirrlit set point to 55degC to drive the burner to high fire

IAC6HHH1HH60 ~T I

0 19 (Y)

HSV

HIGH SET VALUE ~

Ensure the set value is returned to 36degC once the appropriate checks and adjustments as described in Section 43 of this manual have been completed Return to the SET VALUES screen and select the low limit value to adjust the low fire setting

Reduce the low limit value to OdegC to drive the gas valve to low fire and complete the appropriate checks and adjustments as described in Section 43 of this manual and ensure the set value is returned to the original value

A48 GMT ltgt BST CHANGEOVER DAYLIGHT SAVINGS

To change your unit to British Summer TimelWinter Time the following system screen must be highlighted by touching the Iamp1 button twice

By touching the clock symbol in the top left hand corner followed by the ENTER key the screen below will be displayed

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 55

APPENDIX 4 30008

188311 851193

544

By touching and highlighting in this case 18 followed by the ENTER key A small box allowing the entry of two digits will appear Enter the desired time required using the numbered keys followed by ENTER key Your unit is now set to operate on BSTBWT

Touch the ESC key three times to return back to the Status screen

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 56

STOKVIS ENERGY SYSTEMS 96R WALTON ROAD EAST MOLESEY SURREY KT8 0DL TEL 020 8783 3050 08707 707 747 FAX 020 8783 3051 08707 707 767 E-MAIL infostokvisboilerscom WEBSITE wwwstokvisboilerscom

JULY 1999

Page 3: ECONOAIR 3000S SERIES AIR HANDLING UNIT DIRECT FIREDstokvisboilers.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/EconoAir... · 2019-05-10 · ECONOAIR 3000S SERIES AIR HANDLING UNIT DIRECT FIRED

TABLE OF CONTENTS 30008

316 Alignment 18 3161 Installation Of Drive Belts 18 3162 Pulleys 18

3163 Alignment 18

3164 Belts 18

3165 Installation and Take Up Allowance 19

4 COMMISSIONING 20

41 Pre-start Checks 20 42 Dry Run 21 43 Start Up 21

431 Flame Signal Check 22 432 Handover 22

5 ADJUSTMENTS 23

51 Pilot Adjustment 23

52 Burner High Fire Pressure Adjustment 23

53 Burner Low Fire Adjustment 23

54 SUMMERIOFFIWINTER Switch 24 55 RESET Button 24

6 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 25

61 Air handler Start-up 25 62 Air handler Shut-down 25

621 Shutdown For Short Periods 25

622 Shutdown For Prolonged Periods 25 63 General Instructions 26

631 Site Clearance Adjacent to Air handler 26 632 Air Supply to Air handler 26 633 Air Filters 26

634 Service 26

635 Spare Parts 26 636 Gas Leaks 26

7 FAULT FINDING 27

71 POWER ON light is unlit 27 72 AIR FAN ON light is unlit 28 73 2LOCKOUT light is illuminated 29

75 AIR FAN ON light is illuminated 29

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 2

TABLE OF CONTENTS 30008

8 SERVICING 30

81 Isolation 30 811 Fuel Gas Isolation 30 812 Electrical Isolation 30

82 Routine Maintenance 31

83 Annual Service Checks 31

84 Removal Procedure For Replaceable Components 32 841 Burner 32

842 Flame Detector 32 843 Igniter Spark Plug 32 844 Igniter Spark Transformer 33 845 Combustion Air Pressure Switch (DPS) 33 846 Air handler Overheat Limit ControL 33 847 Air Fan and Motor 33

848 Fuel Gas Multi-functional Control - Small Units 34 849 Governor and Block Valves 34 8410 Fuel Gas Flow Control Valve 34 8411 Pilot Gas Governor and Block Valve 34 8412 Belt Tensioning Procedure 35

85 Main Panel Controls 37 851 Landis amp Gyr LFL 1335 Automatic Sequence Controller 37

852 Controls Circuit (24 Volt) Transformer 37 853 Controls Relays R1 R2 amp R3 37 854 6A MCB 37 855 Thermal Overload 37 856 Main Contactor 38 857 Motor Fuse 38

86 Remote Control Station 38

9 RECOMMENDED SPARES 39

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 3

TABLE OF CONTENTS 30008

APPENDIX 1

SOUNDNESS TESTING THE FUEL GAS LINE 40 A11 Testing the Upstream Pipework and Burner Controls 40 A12 Testing the Downstream Burner Valve 41 A13 Testing the Downstream Burner Pipework 41 A14 Testing the Downstream Pilot Pipework 41 A15 Testing the Burner Connections 42

APPENDIX 2

START SEQUENCE 43

APPENDIX 3

SERVICE CHECK SHEET 47

APPENDIX 4

TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER ~ 48 A41 Time Out Screen 48 A42 Status Screen 49 A43 Changing Settings 50 A44 Entering the Security Code 50 A45 Changing or Setting a Time Schedule 52 A46 Changing Set Values 54 A47 Commissioning and Servicing Burner Checks 55

A48 GMTltgtBST Changeover (Daylight Saving) 55

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 4

1 TECHNICAL DATA 30008

SPECIFICATION

308 99shy

CE 0087

G20 87AQ371

NA

17

10

5

415V 50Hz 3ph 4 Wire

A

kg

IE

JULY 1999 SAMPLE PageS

1 TECHNICAL DATA 30008

UTILITIES

AIR HANDLER UTILITIES

FUELi NATURAL GAS

MAXIMUM FUEL SUPPL Y PRESSURE 25 mbar

MINIMUM FUEL SUPPL Y PRESSURE 15 mbar

ELECTRIC SUPPL Y TO CONTROL PANEL WITH NEUTRAL WIRE

415V 50Hz 3ph 4 Wire

SUPPLY RATING Amps

MOTOR FUSES

Notes

Air handler models 3018S to 3040S inclusive of STOKVIS ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handlers have been certificated by British Gas Pic for use on Natural Gas only It does not cover the use of distribution ducting filters and high level or external installations The other air handlers in the range are designed and built to the same parameters and standards as the certificated sample

Your attention is drawn to the limitations on location for recirculation air handlers detailed in Section 33

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 6

1 TECHNICAL DATA 30008

SETTINGS (AS SHIPPED)

AIR HANDLER SETriNGS (AS SHIPPED) I

I

IAIR PRESSURE SWITCH rnbar

OVERHEAT LIMIT CONTROL 65degC

PILOT BURNER GAS PRESSURE 100 mbar

MAXIMUM 50 mbar MAIN BURNER GAS PRESSURES

MINIMUM 10 mbar

MAXIMUM AT RECIRCULATION CONDITION NA

OVERLOAD Amps

FAN SPEED rpm

MAXIMUM 16 mbarDIFFERENTIAL AIR PRESSURE ACROSS PROFILE PLATE MINIMUM 14 mbar

GAS CONNECTION SIZE BSP

TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER

ACCESS CODE 4321 I

TEMPERATURE SETPOINT (Code 00) 19degC i

SAMPLE INTERVAL (Code 01) 2 sec I

DISCHARGE LOW LIMIT (Code 02) 18degC

DISCHARGE HIGH LIMIT (Code 03) 36degC

Note For air handler dimensions please refer to the General Arrangement Drawing

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 7

~------------------~--~

~~O~~C~~~__-__~~middot~~I~~______________-1~~~__~~-=~~=-~i

COMPONENT UST

BURNER

AIR FAN MOTOR

FAN DRIVE

CONTROL PANEL

REMOTE PANEL

SERVICES

FUEL

UAX SUPPLY PRESSURE MIN SUPPLY PRESSURE

ELECTRICITY

BLOCK VALVES

Serial No

bullbull IlICh NPII

kW 1+4ORPM

NA

3-30005-100 RevO DOL Start

N

NATURAL GAS

25mbor 1gtmbor

15V5OHz3Ph4W1RE Motor FLC bullbullbull Amps

240V 50Hz 1Ph 3 WIRE

Site Address

TAG DESCRIPTION WI SUPPLY ISOlATION VALve

W2 JW3 MULTIBLOCKMY MV5 FLOW CONTROL VALve WS BURNER ISOLATION VALVE

PVl PILOT PRESSURE REGULATOR PV2 PILOT SOlpoundNOIO VALve PV3 PILOT ISOlATION VALve

TC SPACE lEMPERATURE CONTROUER TO DISCHARGE TEMPERATURE DETECTOR TR SPACE TEMPERATURE DElECTOR TS OISCHARGE TEMPERATURE swrrCH

PS AIR PRESSURE swrrCH

UV fLAt4E DETECTOR

t SPARK IGNITER

NOTE f INIlICATES PRpoundSSURE TEST POM

Client

srOKVIS END USERS ADDRESS END USER

RS STOKVIS amp SONS Ltd POOL ROAD WEST MOLESEY SURREY KT8 2HN

Ident T45

shyomiddot BVIoI 0 145

1 DJSO 1 GBlA 14 T45

1AC600 00T1701 DRT3453 RAK13bullbull170

lWGJ

ORAtO 023739

PILOT LINE

fRtsH Nfl HET

Title TITLE

Model No Seri4l No DutY Style

Tel 0181 941 1212 Fax 0181 941 4136

00lCIIAAGE 10 WORIltSPAtt

305 99- m3sINDOOR HORIZONTAL

ACStw -_nora I-ID_raw_-+I__-I

Checked

CONTROL Approved

o-1 CommentApproval

Rev IDote I Description

Computer No 99

Purchase Order No

Drawing No

4-MR-001 R~O~

NOTES1shy

I PROPOSED LOCATION TO BE CHECKED tOR LEVEL AND LOAD BEARING STRENGTH BY OTHERS

2 UNIT TO BE SUPPLIED IN SEPERATE SECTIONS FOR LIFTING INTO PLANTROOM AND ON TO BASE BY OTHERS

3 ALL SECTIONS TO HAVE TIJO BEADS OF SEALANT BETJEEN OPPOSING FLANGES AS PER SUPPLIED INSTALL ATlON INSTRUCTIONS

ltI ENSURE ALL BUILDERS JORK IS CARRIED OUT AND MADE GOOD AFTER INSTALLATION BY OTHERS

5 ALL EXTERNAL JIRING SHALL BE CARRIED OUT BY COMPETENT PERSON TO CURRENT lEE REGULATIONS

DISCHARGE OPENING lUOlElIE VIDE X lIE HIG CV 3011 MEZ FLANGE

Serial No

sroKVIS Site Address Client END USERS ADDRESS END USER

ACCESS OPENING

~L---gt lt0-shy

~ ~

GAS CONNECTIONS

CONTROL PANEL 60011 VIDE X 600111 HIGH

APPROX VEIGHTSshy

HEATER CASING - 1I0U( KG

IJCL OOCUUef IDrawn lACS

Checked

I RS STOKVIS amp SONS Ltd POOL ROAD WEST MOLESEY SURREY KT8 2HN Tel 0181 941 1212 fax 0181 941 4136 CONTROL IApproved

o I~ I CommentApproval

Rev IDate IDescription

Computer No

99 Purchase Order No

Drawing No

3-MR-005

415VOlT5OHz 4 WIRE sumy

lIfEI_-shy~a

30131

2_F11

3 TOO---shy

B (

Serial No

~s

~~~~

~ NIt 9lOIElIliOTt)R RA11NG~W

STOKVIS

0 reg

-0

0 0 lt0

u ~

R5-1 -

ADDRESS

shy

regshy

~tl

GAS v IoIOtQR AIIIfONGTll LEGEND

IHlmN PNEI _

-e- PNEl_

Sl1pound_

-11shy IJIfClIOII1IO~-

DUCT STAT NPE COt 17tll

_STAT NPE om 3lt4Il)

~~~pound~ niR~~ (i)l

~ ()1

_cbullbullL~ nmiddoti Apoundm

USER

~ ~

SCHEMATIC FOR 3000S SERIES AIR

IAC600 BASED

RS STOKVIS amp SONS Ltd POOL ROAD WEST MOLESEY SURREY KT8 2HN Tel 0181 941 1212 Fax 0181 941 4136

_[---------f P(N(J ON

ICHI11ONTfWiSFORlER

PllOT V IIEIi CAS VAllIE 1

II CAS VAllIE 2

~_ON

lOCKOUT

s

o Rev I Dote I Description

Computer No 99

Purchase Order No

Drawing No

3-MR-100 Rev

o

30005 2 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

21 INTRODUCTION

The STOKVIS ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler is a direct fired unit designed to give clean healthy environmental conditions and constant even temperature within the heated space

The main air handler assembly houses the circulating air fan the gas burner the fuel gas line and all necessary safety controls The burner management system and space temperature controller is located in the main control panel mounted on or adjacent to the side of the air handler A second control station supplied loose for mounting remote from the air handler within the heated space or other convenient location houses indicating lights the control touch screen and auxiliary operational switches

A sight glass is fitted on the air handler casing to view the burner during operation

For multi unit networked applications the touch screen is excluded

22 GAS BURNER ASSEMBLY

The ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler incorporates the Maxon NP-II burner This burner is specially designed for heating fresh air and is mounted such that a proportion of the incoming air is forced into contact with the flame to ensure rapid mixing and combustion within the code requirements The burner assembly is built up from modular components to give the required heat duty

Each burner assembly is fitted with an integral pilot spark igniter and UV detector The flame detector is used for scanning both the pilot and main flame Note that the pilot burner operates in interrupted mode

The burner module fitted is identified in the Technical Data Section of this manual and on the Valve and Instrun1ent list

23 CONTROL SYSTEM

The controls fitted on the air handler are detailed on the Process amp Instrumentation Diagram in the Technical Data Section of this manual

231 SAFETY CONTROLS

The safety interlocks on the ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler are

1 Combustion air proving switch (PS) 2 Ultra-violet burner flame detector (UV) 3 Overheat limit control (OLe)

Failure of either the combustion air switch or fiame scanning circuit will cause the air handler to go to LOCKOUT and the burner management system will require a RESET before a re-light can be attempted

The air handler discharge overheat limit control is a manual reset switch After a failure the switch will have to be RESET before a re-light can be attempted

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 8

2 GENERAL DESCRIPTION 3000S

232 TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEM

The ECONO-AIR 30008 Series air handler is fitted with a full three-term modulating temperature control system as standard The space temperature is sensed by a heated space detector (TR) which inputs to the panel mounted temperature controller (TC) This achieves control by modulation of the fuel gas flow control valve (MV5) The temperature controller additionally limits the air handler discharge air temperature measured by the discharge temperature detector (TO) to pre-set high and low limits

233 MAIN CONTROL PANEL

The control panel houses the combustioncirculation air fan starter the burner management system and the heated space temperature controller On larger units a separate starter panel may be supplied The panel door is fitted with an interlocked isolator POWER ON and LOCKOUT lights and the burner management RESET button The panel is mounted on or adjacent to the air handler

234 FUEL GAS SYSTEM

The PILOT LINE comprises 1 Pilot governor (PV1 ) 2 One British Gas certificated solenoid valve (PV2) 3 One pilot gas isolation valve (PV3) 4 Pipework and fittings

Note Two pressure test points are fitted on the pilot line on the inlet and discharge of the pilot solenoid valve

The MAIN GAS LINE comprises

1 Gas isolation valve (MV1 ) 2 Pressure governor (MV2) 3 Double block safety shut-oft system (MV34) 4 Gas flow control valve (MV5) 5 Burner isolation valve (MV6) 6 Pipework and fittings

Note Four pressure test points are fitted on the n1ain gas line on the supply the inlet and discharge of the second block valve and downstream of the flow control valve

Note On small air handlers items 2 and 3 are combined in one multi-functional control

All items above are detailed on the Process amp Instrumentation Diagram in Section 1 of this manual

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 9

2 GENERAL DESCRIPTION 3000S

235 REMOTE CONTROL STATION

The ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler is also supplied with a remote control station which houses the air handler operating controls indicating status and the workspace temperature detector if the control station is located in the heated space

236 HEATED SPACE TEMPERATURE SENSOR The heated space temperature sensor is to be located remotely within the space to be heated

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 10

3 INSTALLATION 30005

31 STATUTORY REQUIREMENTS

I n accordance with the Gas Safety (I nstallation and Use) Regulations 1998 installation of this ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler should only be undertaken by competent personnel who are fully aware of their responsibilities under the Health and Safety at Work Act 1974

The installation of this air handler must comply with

BS6230-1991 Installation of gas-fired forced convection air air handlers for commercial and industrial Space Heating of rated input exceeding 60kW

The lEE Regulations for Electrical Installations

Gas Safety (Installation and Use) Regulations 1998

Health and Safety at Work Act 1974

Building Regulations 1986

Building Standards (Scotland Only)

The I nstitution of Gas Engineers Codes of Practice

IGEUP1 Soundness Testing Procedures for Industrial and Commercial Gas Installations

IGEUP2 Gas Installation Pipework Boosters and Compressors on Industrial and Commercial Premises

IGEUP4 Commissioning Of Gas Fired Plant On Industrial and Commercial Premises

32 RECEPTION AND STORAGE OF GOODS

32laquo1 RECEPTION

On receipt of the shipment check that the shipment is complete against the Delivery Advice Note Check for mechanical damage sustained during transit before off-loading the goods Inform the carrier of any such damage

322 OFFLOADING

Horizontal air handlers are fitted with four lifting eyes to permit an overhead lift Alternatively horizontal air handlers may be handled by a fork lift truck on the steel angle support frame

323 STORAGE

Air handlers must be stored in a dry environment The remote control station must be removed from the shipment and stored indoors in a dry environment Outdoor units of split case design (Size 54 and above) must have open ends protected from the environment until installation is complete Any filter elements should be stored in a dry environment

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 11

3 INSTALLATION 3000S

33 LIMITATIONS OF USE

The ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler must not be installed in the following locations

I n hazardous areas

In areas where flammable vapours can be present in excess of their threshold limit values as defined in 8S5925

I n accordance with 8S6230 Clause 513 where there are any flued appliances in the heated area and where air is supplied mechanically and there is mechanical extraction the design extract rate must be 5 to 10 less than the design inlet rate so that the room will not be at a lower pressure than the outside air If the air handler is the only source of mechanically supplied air the extract rate must not exceed 95 of the nominal air flow specified in Section 11 of this manual

Note If it proposed to install the ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler to supply heated air to a hazardous area or in areas where flammable vapours are present the installation must first be approved by a RS STOKVIS Ltd Engineer

34 LOCATION OF AIR HANDLERS

The air handler should normally be installed in the location recommended by the RS STOKVIS Ltd specifying engineer

Check the proposed location for level and load bearing strength Ensure that there is adequate clearance as detailed on the air handler GA in Section 1 this manual around the unit for access for maintenance purposes If the air handler is to be installed above floor level a suitably designed service platform should be provided Such a platform must have 100mm minimum raised edges around the perimeter If this is not possible all air handler access panels must be fitted with hinged restraints This is a factory standard option which should be specified at the time of ordering - check the restraints are fitted before proceeding with installation

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 12

3 INSTALLATION 3000S

35 FRESH AIR INLET AND VENTILATION

351 FRESH AIR INLET

The air handler must be installed where it has a direct and unlimited supply of fresh air from outside the building Ensure that the air intake is not located near exhausts from the building or from any process exhausts such as paint booth exhausts Whenever possible protect the fresh air inlet from the prevailing wind and local wind effects from corners

The fresh air inlet should be sized for an air velocity of 3ms The inlet duct area is detailed on the General Arrangement drawing located in Section 1 of this manual

Where the fresh air inlet is made in a load bearing wall eg a brick wall guidance should be obtained from Structural Engineers on the provision of a lintel in the wall over the fresh air opening

A weather hood must be fitted when the air handler air inlet is at or within 1 m of the outside wall Additionally the weather hood should have negligible resistance to the airflow maximum 01 mbar at the design air flow rate

Do not install the ECONO-AI R 3000S Series air handler where long lengths of duct or bends of an angle greater than 30deg are necessary to lead to the air handler from the fresh air opening If ducting is unavoidable ensure that the resulting pressure drop is negligible Le less than 01 mbar for ductless air handlers and has been accounted for in the original design for ducted air handlers as detailed in the specification section of this manual Section 11

Note If the air intake is located in an area of unrestricted access warning notices preventing the blockage of the air intake by temporary stacking should be displayed adjacent to the intake

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 13

3 INSTALLATION 3000S

352 VENTI LA TION

Where the air air handler is in its own plant room or compartment this shall be ventilated with openings communicating directly with the outside air to ventilate the room

The openings shall be fitted with grilles of negligible resistance and shall be sited so that they cannot easily be blocked or flooded They shall have a total minimum free area as follows

Low Level (inlet) 320cm2 + 27cm2 per kilowatt in excess of 60kW total rated input

High Level (outlet) 160cm2 + 134cm2 per kilowatt in excess of 60kW total rated input

The free area of the grilles shall be not less than the size of the recommended minimum ventilation opening Grilles shall be designed to minimise high velocity air streams in the plant room For exposed ie free standing plant rooms ventilation openings shall be provided on at least two sides and preferably on all four sides

Where mechanical ventilation is used it shall be by mechanical inlet and either natural or mechanical extraction Systems of ventilation employing mechanical extraction and natural air inlet shall not be used

The minimum flow rates of air supplied shall be not less than 06 m3s per megawatt of rated heat input

36 AIR DISCHARGE

The air handler should be located with the air discharge into the heated space at a minimum height of 3 metres The air should not discharge directly onto any obstructions and direct discharge on to working personnel should be avoided

If the air discharge is located in an area of unrestricted access warning notices preventing the blockage of the air discharge by temporary stacking should be displayed adjacent to the discharge

Generally it is not necessary to fit distribution ducting to the discharge of the air handler If ducting is required or specified ensure that the resulting pressure drop has been accounted for in the original design specification as detailed in Section 1 of this manual

37 ASSEMBLY AND POSITIONING OF AIR HANDLER

Unless specified at the time of order air handlers will be shipped in sections Discharge heads grilles attenuators duct connecting sections filters rain-hoods etc will be supplied loose for site fitting to the air handler

Horizontal air handlers must be supported on their steel angle support base When the air handler is located check for level and adjust as necessary

Alternatively horizontal air handlers can be supplied with extensions of the support frame for suspending from overhead supports This must be specified at the time of order Do not suspend the air handler from the lifting eyes

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 14

3 INSTALLATION 3000S

38 REMOTE STATION

The ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler is supplied with a remote control station This should be mounted in a position convenient to the end user If possible it should not be mounted on an external wall or where the space temperature detector is affected by cold draughts or a local source of heat

39 VISUAL CHECK

After completion of installation re-check the air handler for signs of damage Report any instance to RS STOKVIS Ltd

310 CONNECTION OF SERVICES

The air handler requires the connection of fuel gas and electricity

3101 FUEL GAS SUPPLY

The ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler has been designed for use on Natural Gas An alternative version is available for LPG The gas type for the air handler supplied is clearly marked on the air handler data badge and on the Specification sheet in Section 1 of this manual Check the gas type is correct and that the supply pressure is within the range marked on the specification

The local gas Authority should be consulted about the adequacy of the gas service and meter supplies for existing and proposed extensions to the installation and for any requirements for boosting the gas supply_

Connect the fuel gas supply to the inlet manual valve on the air handler gas train The connection size is detailed in Section 1 of this manual A further isolation valve and union should be fitted immediately adjacent to the appliance which when the valve is closed allows the complete burner and control assembly to be disconnected for maintenance or repair

New gas pipework should be installed to British Gas Publication IGEUP2 and be purged and pressure tested in accordance with British Gas Publications IGEUP1

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 15

3 INSTALLATION 3000S

3102 ELECTRICITY SUPPLY

All external wiring shall be carried out and checked by a competent person All components shall be checked for suitability for voltage range and frequency

Means for electric isolation having a contact separation of at least 3mm in all poles must be provided adjacent to the air handler The electrical supply to the appliance shall incorporate suitable means of excess current protection

The ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler requires a 3 phase 4 wire supply which should be connected to the main control panel Check the air handler data badge for the correct electrical supply The maximum supply requirement is Specified in Section 1 of this manual Note that the 240 Volt air handler control circuit is taken from the lUI phase to Neutral Connection should be made as shown on the wiring diagram shipped inside this panel

The air handler must be earthed in accordance with BS5986 and CP1013

Check all terminal strip terminations for wires which have become loose during shipment

311 CONNECTION TO THE MAIN PANEL AND REMOTE STATION

Interconnecting wiring to the main panel and remote station should be made with a minimum specification of 075 mm2 300 Volt cable Check that no wires on the terminal strip have become loose during shipment The remote panel should be mounted at a height of approx 18m If possible it should not be mounted on an external wall or where the sensor will be affected by cold draughts or a local source of heat

Both panel and remote station must be earthed in accordance with BS5986 and CP1013

312 HEATED SPACE TEMPERATURE SENSOR

The space temperature sensor located on the remote panel should be connected with screened cable or twin low voltage signal cable run in its own separate conduit It should be mounted on the remote panel or adjacent to the outlet at a height of approx 18m If possible it should not be mounted on an external wall or where the sensor will be affected by cold draughts or a local source of heat

313 DUCT SENSOR

The duct sensor should be connected with screened cable or twin low voltage signal cable run in its own separate conduit It should be mounted in the air handler discharge as close as possible to the discharge into the heated space

314 OVERHEAT LIMIT CONTROL SENSOR

The overheat limit control sensor should be connected with twin core cable It should be mounted in the air handler discharge within 1 metre of the air handler outlet connection

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 16

3 INSTALLATION 3000S

315 TOUCH SCREEN WIRING

The touch screen located on the front of the remote station requires two separate twisted pairs of O5mrh2 screened cable run in a separate conduit If the distance between the main and remote stations is greater that 1 km please contact RS STOKVIS Ltd for advice

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 17

3 INSTALLATION 3000S

316 ALIGNMENT

3161 INSTALLATION OF DRIVE BELTS

On 80 amp 89 30008 range of air handlers it will be necessary to align the pulleys and fit the drive belts before carrying out commissioning of the unit

3162 PU LLEYS

Before assembling the drive check the pulley grooves are free from scores or sharp edges and all dimensions conform to the relevant standard

The Taper Lock bush is your starting point when it comes to assembly and installation Drive installation is a straightforward job with Taper Lock - but the stages set out on the installation leaflet provided with every Taper Lock bush should be followed closely

3163 ALIGNMENT

Good alignment of pulleys prior to belt installation is important to avoid belt flank wear The diagram below shows correct installation of pulleys

INTERNAl BEARING

MOTOR PUlLEY rAN PULLEY

MOTORMOTOR ADJUSTMENT MOUNTING BOlTSBOLTS

3164 BELTS

When the pulleys have been correctly positioned on the shafts the belts can be installed to complete the drive

The drive centre distance should be reduced prior to the installation of the belts so that they may be fitted without the use of force Under no circumstances must belts be prised into the grooves Using sharp tools to stretch the belts over the pulley rim can easily damage belts and pulley grooves

The installation allowance given in the table below is the minimum recommended reduction in centre distance for various belt section and lengths to allow for correct fitting

The take-up allowance given in the same table should be added on to the calculated centre distance to allow for belt stretch

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 18

3 INSTALLATION 3000S

3165 INSTALLATION AND TAKE UP ALLOWANCE

Belt Pitch Installation Allowance Take-Up Length (mm) SPZ SPA SPB SPC (mm)

410 to 530 5

540 to 840 10

850 to 1160 15

1170 to 1500 20

1510 to 1830 20 25

1840 to 2170 30

2180 to 2830 25 40

2840 to 3500 30 50

3520 to 4160 50 60

4170 to 5140 70

5220 to 6150 85

6180 to 7500 105

600 to 8500 125

8880 to 10170 145

10600 to 12500 175

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 19

4 COMMISSIONING 30005

This appliance must be commissioned by a RS STOKVIS Ltd approved engineer

41 PRESTART CHECKS

1 Switch the SUMMERIOFFMlINTER switch on the remote station to OFF

2 Check the correct electric supply is available to the air handler and the appliance isolator installed

3 Check the correct fuel gas supply is available to the air handler and local isolation valve and union installed Check that new gas pipe work has been correctly purged and pressure tested and that the isolation valve is in the OFF position

4 Check the air handler gas control system and burner connections for pressure soundness as detailed in Appendix 1 of this manual

5 Complete the first section of the Service Check Sheet supplied at the back of this manual (Appendix 3)

6 Close the air handler access door

7 Close and lock the main air handler control panel

8 Switch the main panel isolator to position 1 Check the POWER ON light illuminates

9 Check and set the timed ONOFF periods in the lAC Controller located on the remote panel Ensure that the unit is set to be on during testing Refer to Appendix 4 for the lAC setting procedure

10 Close and lock the remote panel

11 Switch the SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch on the remote station to SUMMER to start the air fan Return the switch to the OFF position and check for correct rotation of the fan as the fan slows and stops

The fan rotation can be observed through the fan section access door or through the air handler access door Only do this during the fan run-down period Ensure the door is securely fastened after completion

Rotation arrows are fitted on the end of the air handler and inside the air handler above the interior bearing support If the rotation is incorrect two phases should be interchanged as dictated by the Engineer responsible for the site electrical system

12 Check the air pressure drop across the burner whilst the fan is operating with a water column pressure gauge connected to the two pressure test points on the air pressure switch (DPS) This pressure should be between 14 and 16 rnbar

If the air differential pressure measured above is not within the operating range check inlet and outlet ductwork as appropriate and any filters fitted If the pressure differential is still not within limits isolate the air handler and report to RS STOKVIS Ltd before proceeding

13 Check the operation and setting of the Low Air Pressure Switch by injecting a controlled signal into the switch Check the break point on the switch is 1 mbar (falling)

Note The switch is set and sealed before fitting The 1 mbar switch point may not coincide with the 1 mbar scale reading on the switch

If on checking the switch is not operating correctly do not tamper with it return it to RS STOKVIS Ltd for replacement

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 20

4 COMMISSIONING 3000S

42 DRY RUN

With all the manual gas isolation valves still in the OFF position switch the SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch to WINTER

43 START UP

1 Attach a manometer to pressure test point F and the low pressure test point on the air pressure switch (DPS)

2 Open the main gas supply valve (MV1) and the pilot burner isolation valve (PV3) Leave the main burner isolation valve (MV6) closed Reset the air handler by pressing the push-button marked RESET on either the main panel or remote station The air handler pilot will light automatically (after the automatic damper start check and combustion air pre-purge) and then LOCKOUT after the main gas shut-off valves are addressed

During the short period that the pilot is in operation check the pilot gas pressure on the manometer It should be 10 mbar and the pilot flame approximately 100 - 150mm in length covering the first three or four holes of the mixing plate and have a steady blue colour when viewed through the sight glass on the access side of the air handler Adjust as necessary - refer to Section 51 this manual Check the flame signal - refer to Section 431

3 Open the main burner isolation valve (MV6) RESET the air handler which should now light to main burner stage When alight close the main burner isolation valve to shut down the gas flow to the burner Check that the unit goes to LOCKOUT

4 Reset the air handler and drive the burner to low fire by adjusting the temperature controller set point as described in Appendix 4 of this manual Check the flame is continuous across the width of the burner and has a flame length of approx 50 - 65mm from the burner rail when viewed through the sight glass on the access side of the air handler Check the burner pressure across pressure test point D and the downstream (low) pressure test point on the air pressure switch ie on the rear of the pressure switch This pressure is specifled in Section 1 of this manual Adjust as necessary-refer to Section 53 of this manual Check the flame signal - refer to Section 431

Where possible check the actual gas flow rate by meter reading with all other appliances turned off

5 Drive the burner to high fire by adjusting the temperature controller set point and high limit to 55degC as described in Appendix 4 of this manual Check the flame is continuous across the burner rail and has a flame length of approximately 250 - 350mm from the burner rail Check the burner pressure across pressure test point D and the downstream (low) pressure test point on the air pressure switch This pressure is specified in Section 1 of this manual Adjust as necessary - refer to Section 52 of this manual Check the maximum air handler discharge temperature Check the flame signal shyrefer to Section 431

Where possible check the actual gas flow rate by meter reading with all other appliances turned off

6 Check the operation of the overheat limit control by adjusting the temperature controller set point and high limit to 65degC as described in Appendix 4 of this manual Monitor the discharge temperature on the temperature controller Check that the overheat control operates as the set temperature is passed Check that the control must be manually reset by pressing the green reset button on the front of the switch Return the temperature controller to its original settings

In the event that the ambient temperature is too low for this simple procedure to work the instrument will have to be bench tested using a Temperature 8ath Remove and replace the control as Section 84 of this manual for bench-testing

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 21

4 COMMISSIONING 3000S

43 1 FLAME SIGNAL CHECK

1 The ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler is fitted with a Klippon SAKT1 Test Terminal which can be used to measure the flame scanning signal Refer to the Electrical Schematic and connect a 0-1 mA ammeter to the two test points with standard 23 mm test plugs with the positive lead on the detector side Disconnect the terminal link to obtain the signal reading A minimum signal of 70 microamps is required typical signals are in the 250-400 microamp range on both pilot and main flame After completion replace the terminal link and remove the test jacks

2 Drive the burner to high fire as previously described Measure the carbon dioxide content of the discharge air stream This figure must not exceed 2800 ppm If the discharge exceeds this limit isolate the air handler and report to RS STOKVIS Ltd before proceeding

Stop and start the air handler a few times to check for reliability using the Operating Instructions (Section 6)

432 HANDOVER

Complete the air handler Service Check Sheet supplied at the back of this manual The self-copy sheet must be returned to STOKVIS for checking

Instruct the User in efficient use and care of the unit start-up and shutdown (including emergency shutdown) and recommended service interval Emphasise the need to keep the air handler clear of stored items and extraneous material and to maintain the recirculation and fresh air paths to the air handler inlets Hand all instructions as applicable to the UserOwner for safekeeping

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 22

5 ADJUSTMENTS 3000S

If adjustments to the air handler settings are required they should be made by a RS STOKVIS Ltd approved engineer

The normal value for all control settings is specified in Section 1 of this manual

51 PILOT ADJUSTMENT

The pilot gas pressure and flame length may be adjusted by altering the discharge pressure of the pilot governor Screwing the adjusting screw clockwise (located under the top cap) increases the discharge pressure and the flame length anti-clockwise decreases the pressure and the flame length

52 BURNER HIGH FIRE PRESSURE ADJUSTMENT

At high fire alter the spring compression on the main burner governor (MV2) by removing the cap and adjust the spring compression plate clockwise to increase the burner pressure anti-clockwise to decrease burner pressure If the pressure does not increase on adjusting the spring the supply is inadequate

Note On small air handlers fitted with a mUlti-functional control the pressure adjusting screw is located under a swing cap on the first block valve

53 BURNER LOW FIRE ADJUSTMENT

The main burner low fire is adjusted on the flow control valve MV5 (Process amp Instrumentation Diagram)

Remove the top cover of the valve and insert a Terminal Screwdriver in the adjusting screw of the TOP cam marked NI

Drive the burner to low fire by adjusting the temperature controller set-point and high limit to 05degC as described in Appendix 4 of this manual

Turn the Terminal Screwdriver clockwise to decrease the low fire gas flow anti-clockwise to increase the flow

Check the heat input and flame signal at the new position are satisfactory and return the tenlperature controller to its normal settings

Replace the control valve cover

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 23

5 ADJUSTMENTS 3000S

54 SUMMERIOFFIWINTER SWITCH

In the SUMMER position this switch provides ventilation only and is independent of the programmed ON and OFF periods This position is manually selected and must be manually de-selected Whenever the switch is in this position the fan is operating

In the OFF position the air handler is shutdown and will not operate This overrides any frost protection fitted It is suitable for air handler shutdown for short periods such as holidays The programme memory is unaffected by this switch and assumes control of the air handler when the switch is returned to the WINTER position

In the WINTER position the air handler operates off the programme memory to provide heating

55 RESET BUTTON

Visual indication of air handler lockout is provided In the event of lockout occurring the air handler can be reset by depressing the RESET button This parallels the RESET button on the air handler main control panel If after 4 attempts to reset the air handler the lockout indicator still illuminates then a Service Engineer should be called to investigate the problem

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 24

6 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 3000S

61 AIR HANDLER START-UP

1 Open all manual gas valves both on the appliance and on the supply to the appliance Switch on the Electric Supply to the appliance

2 On the main air handler panel

Switch the panel isolator to the 1 position

Check POWER ON light

3 On the remote control station

For Heating Switch the SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch to WINTER

The air handler will now start automatically in response to the time settings

In the event of LOCKOUT

Press the RESET button and the cycle of operations will be repeated If the air handler goes to LOCKOUT four times in succession call for a Service Engineer

For Unheated Ventilation Switch the SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch to SUMMER

Note This prevents the burner firing giving a controlled supply of ventilation air to the heated space as long as the switch is in this position The air handler will now start automatically in response to the timeclock demand To turn the fan off return the switch to the centre OFF position

In the event of LOCKOUT

Press the RESET button and the cycle of operations will be repeated If the air handler goes to LOCKOUT four times in succession call for a Service Engineer

62 AIR HANDLER SHUTDOWN

621 SHUTDOWN FOR SHORT PERIODS

Switch the SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch on the remote station to OFF

622 SHUTDOWN FOR PROLONGED PERIODS

Switch the main panel isolator to the 0 position and close all manual gas valves both on and leading to the appliance

Note Manual gas valves should only be operated when the appliance is to be shut off for either Servicing or for a prolonged shutdown

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 25

30005 6 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

63 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS

631 SITE CLEARANCE ADJACENT TO AIR HANDLER

Attention should be paid to keeping the area around the air handler tidy No rubbish should be allowed to accumulate in the vicinity of the air handler and storage of goods etc should not be permitted within two metres of the air handler Failure to comply could result in reduced airflow to the air handler causing inefficient running and potential overheat cond ition

632 AIR SUPPLY TO AIR HANDLER

Air vents and grilles supplying air to the air handler should never be blocked and should be checked periodically to ensure they are clear

633 AIR FILTERS

Similarly attention should be paid to cleaning or replacing the filters to the air handler if fitted Your installer should advise you on the frequency with which this would be required to be completed

634 SERVICE

For continued safe and efficient operation of this air air handler it is important that servicing of the air handler should be completed at regular intervals by a competent person in accordance with Section 82 of this manual Users are advised to enter into a Service Agreement with RS STOKVIS Ltd

635 SPARE PARTS

It is suggested that a complete set of spare parts essential to the running of the air handler and recommended by the installer are kept by the user on the premises where the air handler is installed This is particularly important where the air handler forms an essential part of any process plant and its being out of operation may cause problems by for example frost damage or condensation by super-cooling

A list of Recommended Spares will be found in Section 9 of this manual

636 GAS LEAKS

If a smell of gas is detected around the area of the appliance Switch off all manual gas valves and contact your service engineer or the local gas undertaking

NEVER

LOOK FOR GAS LEAKS WITH A LIGHTED MATCH OR NAKED

FLAME

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 26

7 FAULT FINDING 30008

The main control panel incorporates two lights to help in fault finding

POWER ON

LOCKOUT

The remote station also has three lights

AIR FAN ON

BURNER ON

LOCKOUT

This section gives the possible causes of failure associated with each check light The electrical schematic diagram in this manual and the wiring diagram shipped in the main air handler panel should be used in conjunction with the notes below Additionally Service Engineers should familiarise themselves with the detailed Start Sequence given in Appendix 2 of this manual

The notes are given for each light before consulting the notes check for bulb failure

71 POWER ON LIGHT IS UNLIT

Check

1 Main control panel isolator is in the 1 position

2 Main Panel 6A MCB has not tripped if a trip has occurred the switch will be at the OFF position Reset and test system as required

3 Also check if the mains electrical supply is isolated If so FIND OUT WHY before taking any action

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 27

7 FAULT FINDING 30005

72 AIR FAN ON LIGHT IS UNLIT

Check

1 SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch is not in Position OFF

2 Timeperiod is not set to off

3 Air handler is not at LOCKOUT

4 Recheck both AIR FAN ON and LOCKOUT bulbs

Two fault indications are possible

1 THE FAN IS NOT OPERATING

If the fan should have started but is not operating

Check 1 Overload for tripped conditions Reset the overload and monitor the next start-up

2 Motor Fuses

3 Relays 1 2 amp3 for failure

laClor CC1 for failure

5 Air Pressure Switch (DPS) is failed in the N 0 Position

Replace the faulty component as described in Section 8

2 THE FAN IS OPERATING

This indicates that the air pressure switch (DPS) has failed to change over

Measure the profile plate differential pressure as described in Section 4113 If the pressure is correct the air pressure switch is faulty Check the switch as in 4114 If the pressure is not correct

Check 1 Correct fan belt tension

2 Correct fan rotation

3 The air handler air inlets and discharge are not blocked

4 Correct fitting on filters

5 The air differential pressure switch impulse lines are not blocked or leaking

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 28

7 FAULT FINDING 30008

73 LOCKOUT LIGHT IS ILLUMINATED

This light indicates a failure in the burner ignition and flame supervision system

RESET the unit and follow the progress of the start sequence The full cycle may take two minutes

1

------t

2 LOCKOUT after 35-40 seconds indicates an ignition failure RESET the system and observe the pilot and ignition spark during the start-up attempt

I-- shy

3 Observe the spark This should be strong and highly visible If not remove and clean the spark plug as Section 82 Check that the spark plug gap is correctly set at 15 mm

-- shy

4 Check the pilot flame If the pilot flame ignites and the unit goes to LOCKOUT the scanning system is at fault Remove and clean the detector as Section 82 Check the flame signal as in Section 431

5 If the pilot does not light the gas supply system is faulty Check the pilot system for restriction and the pilot valve operation

6 If the pilot lights and the unit goes to LOCKOUT after the main gas valves are addressed either the flow control valve is blocked or one of the main gas block valves has failed Fit a manometer on the pressure test point on the outlet flange of the multishyfunctional control and observe if the pressure rises when the main gas valves are addressed No pressure rise will indicate failure of the main gas valves

74 AIR FAN ON LIGHT ILLUMINATED

If the burner does not start check

1 SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch is in WINTER position

2 Overheat Limit Control

These interlocks prevent the burner management system starting

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 29

8 SERVICING 3000S

IMPORTANT Servicing and maintenance should be only carried out by a RS STOKVIS Ltd approved engineer

Only use replacement parts provided by the appliance manufacturer

Check that the air openings for combustion and for ventilation of any plant roon or compartment are clear

81 ISOLATION

811 FUEL GAS ISOLATION

The fuel gas to the ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler should be isolated and locked off at the manual ball valve mounted at the start of the fuel gas line Additionally before entering or servicing the air handler the burner manual isolation valve and pilot line isolation valve should be closed

812 ELECTRICAL ISOLATION

All electric power to the air handler and the remote control station is switched through the local isolator This isolator is fitted with a lock facility to permit it to be locked in the OFF position

Additionally isolate the power at the Wall Isolator

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 30

8 SERVICING 30005

82 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE

The air handler should be routinely serviced at the start of each heating season Isolate the air handler as above before servicing Details of access to individual components are given in Section 84 of this manual

1 Remove and clean spark igniter Check that the gap is correctly set at 25 mm Replace every two years

2 Clean the flame detector lens to ensure freedom from dirt and moisture If the cell shows any sign of cracks it should be replaced Routinely replace the cell every two years or after 10000 hours of operation which ever comes first

3 Inspect the entire air handler paint system for general damage Repair as necessary

4 Every two years brush the burner plates and clear the burner holes carefully with a Size 18mm drill for NP II and 20mm drill for NP I

WARNING THE BURNER HOLES MUST NOT BE ENLARGED

5 Inspect and lubricate all damper linkages to ensure freedom of operation Wipe off all excess lubricants to prevent dirt build up on linkage parts

6 Check the fan belt for cracks and splits Check tension The correct tension gives 16mm deflection per metre of span when the belt is centrally loaded with a force of 27N Adjust as necessary

7 Grease both the fan shaft bearings with Mobiith AW2 grease or similar

NEVER use high temperature grease

NEVER mix two different greases within the bearing always flush existing grease out

Note Removing the cover plate on the end of the air handler gains access to the outboard fan bearing

Light to Slow to 0 120 2 to 6 months Clean Dry

Medium Medium 120 200 1 to 2 months

Moderate to Light to Slow to 0 120 1 to 4 weeks Dry

Dirty Medium Medium 120 200 1 to 7 days

Extreme Dirt Dry Light to Slow to 0 200 Daily Flushing out

Medium Medium Dirt

83 ANNUAL SERVICE CHECKS

After Servicing test fire the air handler following the Commissioning Procedure detailed in Section 4 of this manual to ensure correct operation generally Special attention must be paid to the damper system and related controls and interlocks

Additionally check that the fresh air and recirculation air entry path to the air handler has been kept clear and instruct the User of the need for this as necessary

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 31

8 SERVICING 3000S

84 REMOVAL PROCEDURE FOR REPLACEABLE COMPONENTS

IMPORTANT

Turn off the gas at the appliance service valve and the electricity at the main panel and wall isolator before proceeding

841 BURNER

The burner is located inside the air handler casing and is mounted on two brackets from the support straps To remove the burner isolate the air handler as in 81 and undo the union on the fuel gas line adjacent to the burner isolation valve (MV6) and unscrew the main and pilot gas feed pipes from the burner rail Access to the rear of the burner assembly is made by removing the partition plate below the burner separating the fresh air inlet to the burner from the return air inlet compartment This is held in place by screws which engage in captive nuts on the top side of the partition Remove the Flame Detector and pull off the ignition plug cap Disconnect the burner support brackets and remove the burner The burner will easily pass through the access hatch for further strip down Replace in the reverse order soundness test the gas pipework check the burner operation and duty as described in the commissioning section of this manual

842 FLAME DETECTOR

This is a 240 Volt instrument

The flame detector is mounted on the end of the burner rail inside the air handler casing To remove the detector isolate the panel electric supply and lock off Push the scanner towards the burner and rotate to release the bayonet fixing and lift the detector from its mount Remove the two screws holding the detector cover and disconnect the supply leads noting the polarity of the connections

Replace the flame detector in the reverse order ensuring correct polarity of connections Ensure the access panel is securely closed and the retaining nuts are tightened down Check operation by inserting a test meter in the points provided in the main control panel and reading the flame signals during start up to full rate burner operation (See 431) Operate the appliance over six starts for reliability of operation including tum off of start and main gas valves to check for lockout operation

843 IGNITER SPARK PLUG

This is a high tension spark plug

The igniter spark plug is mounted on the end of the burner rail inside the air handler casing To remove the spark plug isolate the air handler as above Enter the service access door Access to the spark plug is made through the profile plate To remove the spark plug pull off the high tension lead and unscrew the plug with a plug spanner

When replacing the spark plug check the plug gap is set at 15mm Check ignition reliability over six start ups

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 32

8 SERVICING 3000S

844 IGNITER SPARK TRANSFORMER

This is a 240 Volt instrument

The ignition transformer is located in a plastic box mounted on the air handler casing adjacent to the main control panel To remove the transformer isolate the air handler as above and unscrew the four retaining screws holding the box lid in place and remove the lid Disconnect the supply cable at the terminal strip and undo the transformer retaining screws The transformer may then be unscrewed from the High Tension cable leading to the spark plug

Replacement is a simple reversal of this procedure

Check ignition reliability over six start ups

845 COMBUSTION AIR PRESSURE SWITCH (DPS)

Note The switch is set and sealed and should be replaced if not operating correctly

This switch is a 240 Volt instrument

The air switch is mounted directly on the air handler casing and can be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove the switch isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the supply cable Break the downstream pipe compression fitting and unscrew the switch housing from its locating fitting Reverse the procedure to replace after ensuring switch setting is as specified in Section 13 of this manual Operate the air handler to ensure reliability of operation over six start ups

846 AIR HANDLER OVERHEAT LIMIT CONTROL

This is a 240 Volt instrument

The overheat limit control can be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove the control isolate the air handler as above and lock off Remove the switch cover Disconnect the supply cable and unscrew the control housing from its locating fitting Reverse the procedure to replace check the switch is set to 50degC Test the switch operation as described in Section 43 over at least three operations

847 AIR FAN AND MOTOR

The air fan motor is a 415 Volt 3 phase motor

The motor and slide rails are easily accessible inside the air handler casing If it is necessary to remove the motor isolate the air handler as above Slacken the fan-belt tension and remove the drive belts Pull the motor away from the air handler casing to make access to the motor terminal box and disconnect the supply cable The motor may now be removed from the unit Following replacement the air handler must be fully re-commissioned as in Section 4

It is unlikely that the air fan will need replacing or servicing If required a full procedure should be obtained from RS STOKVIS Ltd

Replacement must be followed by full re-commissioning as in Section 4

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 33

8 SERVICING 3000S

848 FUEL GAS MULTI-FUNCTIONAL CONTROL - SMALL UNITS

This is a 240 Volt instrument

The fuel gas multi-functional control can be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove the unit isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the Hirschman electric termination Unbolt the control from its flanges and remove

When replacing care must be taken to ensure the flange 0 rings are undamaged and in the correct location Following replacement the air handler must be fully reshycommissioned as in Section 4 including tests for soundness prior to start-up

849 GOVERNOR AND BLOCK VALVES

The block valves are 240 Volt instruments

All these items may be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove any item isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the electric termination to the two block valves the pilot block valve and the flow control block valve Break the two pipe unions and remove the fuel gas line complete for further strip-down

8410 FUEL GAS FLOW CONTROL VALVE

This is a 24 Volt instrument

The fuel gas How control valve can be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove the valve isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the supply cables to the control valve

On small air handlers fitted with a multi-functional control support the multi-functional control and unbolt its discharge flange Break the union downstream of the burner isolation valve and remove the section of line containing the flow control valve for further strip-down

On large air handlers fitted with separate block valves it will be necessary to remove the fuel gas line complete as Section 8410 above

Following replacement re-commission the air handler

Note If the fresh air damper is not in the full open position the heat input must not exceed the maximum heat input at recirculation condition specified in the technical data section of this manual

8411 PILOT GAS GOVERNOR AND BLOCK VALVE

The block valve is a 240 Volt instrument

Both items may be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove either item isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the electric terrriination to the solenoid valve Undo the upstream pipe union and the compression fitting downstream of the manual block valve (PV3) Remove the pilot gas line complete for further strip down

Replace broken or distorted connections and retest for soundness Ensure the pilot gas pressure is correct and the flame is sensing an output Ensure reliability over six start-ups

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 34

8 SERVICING 3000S

8412 BELT TENSIONING PROCEDURE

The setting tensions are designed to cover a wide range of drives A precise setting force for individual applications can be calculated as detailed

SETTING FORCES

Belt Section

Setting Force To Deflect Belt 16mm per Metre Of Span

Small Pulley Diameter (mm)

Basic Setting Forces Newtons (N) Kilograms (kgf)

125 x Setting Forces Newtons (N) Kilograms (kgf)

SPZ

56 to 71 16 16 20 20 75 to 90 18 18 22 22

95 to 125 20 20 25 25 Over 125 22 22 28 28

SPA

80 to 100 22 22 28 28 106 to 140 30 30 38 38 150 to 200 36 37 45 46 Over 200 40 40 50 51

SPB

112 to 160 40 40 50 51 170 to 224 50 51 62 63 236 to 355 62 63 77 79 Over 355 65 66 81 83

SPC 224 to 250 70 71 87 89 265 to 355 92 94 115 120 Over 375 115 120 144 150

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 35

8 SERVICING 3000S

BELT TENSIONING USING FENNER BELT TENSION INDICATOR

Calculate the deflection in mm on a basis of 16mm per metre of centre distance Centre Distance (m) x 16 =Deflection (mm)

Set lower marker ring at the deflection distance required in mm on the lower scale

Set upper ring against to bottom edge of the top tube

Place the belt tension indicator on top of the belt at the centre of span and apply a force at right angles to the belt defecting it to the point where the lower marker ring is level with the top of the adjacent belt

Read off the force value indicated by the top edge of the upper marker ring

Compare this force to the kgf value shown in the table above

If a Fenner Belt Tension Indicator is not available a spring balance and rule will be suffice

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 36

8 SERVICING 30005

85 MAIN PANEL CONTROLS

All panel controls are readily accessible and may be easily exchanged for replacement components in the event of failure Ensure any replacement item is of the same make and type as the original

851 LANDIS amp GYR LFL 1335 AUTOMATIC SEQUENCE CONTROLLER

The Landis amp Gyr Automatic Sequence Controller is a plug-in unit locating on a pre-wired chassis To remove the controller undo the two retaining screws at the top left and lower right corners and pull the module off the chassis

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

852 CONTROLS CIRCUIT (24 VOLT) TRANSFORMER

The Controls Circuit Transformer is fixed to the panel back plate by tapped screws To remove the transformer undo the wiring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel Undo the two retaining screws and remove the unit complete

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

853 CONTROL RELAYS R1 R2 amp R3

The Control Relays are DIN Rail mounted To remove a relay undo the wIring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel Release the DIN rail retaining clip under the relay with a screwdriver and remove the relay

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

854 6A MCB

The 6A MCB is DIN Rail mounted To remove the MCB undo the wiring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel Release the DIN rail retaining clip under the MCB with a screwdriver and remove the MCB

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

855 THERMAL OVERLOAD

The thermal overload is attached to the underside of the main contactor To remove the overload undo the wiring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel and that the overload setting is as specified in Section 13 of this manual Unscrew the three connections to the contactor and remove the overload

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 37

8 SERVICING 3000S

856 MAIN CONTACTOR

The Main Contactor is DIN Rail mounted To remove the contactor remove the thermal overload as 855 above and then undo the wiring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel Release the DIN rail retaining clip under the contactor with a screwdriver and remove the contactor

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

857 MOTOR FUSE

To replace a motor fuse pull the fuse carrier off the fuse holder base The fuse is attached to the fuse carrier by two screws Unscrew remove and replace

86 REMOTE CONTROL STATION

The remote control station contains some serviceable parts although these items should only be fitted by an approved RS STOKVIS Ltd Engineer

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 38

9 RECOMMENDED SPARES 3000S

For two years operation it is recommended that the following items should be held in stock

ITEM DESCRIPTION PART NO QUANTITY i

1 INDICATOR BULBS W1121 1 PACK

2 SPARK PLUG 023739 1 I

3 UVDETECTOR QRA10C 1 I

4 ROOM SENSOR DRT2453 1

5 DUCT SENSOR DDT1701 1

All replacement parts can be obtained from RS STOKVIS Ltd by quoting the air handler serial number the part number and description

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 39

APPENDIX 1 30005

SOUNDNESS TESTING THE FUEL GAS PIPEWORK

This procedure should only be carried out by personnel familiar with the ECONO-AIR 3000S Series Air handler

The pressure test points and all valves are identified on the Process and Instrumentation Diagram for the air handler included in Section 1 of this n1anual

Isolate the air handler electric supply at the main control panel and lock off Close the manual isolation valves MV1 MV6 and PV3 Ensure the supply pressure is available on the upstream side of MV1

A11 TESTING THE UPSTREAM PIPEWORKAND BURNER CONTROLS 1 Connect a 60 mbar manometer to the pressure test nipple A Monitor the

pressure for two minutes Any rise in pressure indicates that valve MV1 is leaking and must be replaced Remove pressure test points Band F

2 Open MV1 to pressurise the pipework on both the main gas and pilot line to the first block valve

3 Close MV1 Allow one minute for the temperature to stabilise and then test the system for 2 minutes and watch for a drop in the pipework pressure If the pressure falls open valve MV1 and test the pipework connections and valves from MV1 to MV3 and MV1 to PV2 for leaks with a proprietary leak detector fluid or spray Turn off MV1 seal any leaks and re-test

4 If no extemalleaks are found either the pilot block valve PV1 or either the first main gas block valve MV3 is letting by

5 To test this seal pressure test point A and fit a manometer to pressure test point B Leave for two minutes with MV1 open A rise in pressure on the manometer confirms a leak on the block valve MV3 Turn off MV1 exchange the valve and re-test from point 2 above

6 Repeat this procedure for the pilot block valve Seal test point B and fit a manometer to pressure test point F Leave for two minutes with MV1 open A rise in pressure on the manometer confirms a leak on the pilot block valve PV2 Turn off MV1 exchange the valve and re-test from point 1 above Seal test point F

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 40

APPENDIX 1 30005

A12 TESTING THE DOWNSTREAM BURNER VALVE 1 Close MV1 and connect pressure test points A and 8 with flexible 6 mm bore

tubing teed into the manometer Remove pressure test point C Open MV1 to pressurise the downstream block valve MV4

2 Close MV1 and leave for one minute for the temperature to stabilise Monitor the pressure for 2 minutes If the pressure falls open valve MV1 and leak test the line between the two block valves MV3 and MV4 with a proprietary leak detector Turn off MV1 seal any leaks and re-test Note Smaller air handlers in the 3000S Series are fitted with multi-functional valves combining the pressure regulator and two block valves in one component The above procedure still applies but if a leak is found on either block valve the whole control should be replaced If no external leaks are found the downstream block valve is letting by

3 To confirm this close MV1 remove the manometer and refit to pressure test point C Connect pressure test points A and 8 with flexible 6mm bore tubing Open MV1 and allow one minute for the temperature to stabilise Monitor the pressure for a further 2 minutes with MV1 still open A rise in pressure confirms that the second block valve MV4 is letting by Turn off MV1 Replace the valve and re-test from 2 above

A13 TESTING THE DOWNSTREAM BURNER PIPEWORK 1 Close MV1 and connect pressure test points A and D with flexible 6 mm bore

tubing teed into the manometer Open MV1 to pressurise the downstream pilot pipework

2 Close MV1 and leave for one minute for the temperature to stabilise Monitor the pressure for 2 minutes If the pressure falls open valve MV1 and leak test the line between the downstream block valve MV4 and the manual block MV6 with a proprietary leak detector fluid or spray If no external leaks are found the manual block valve MV6 is letting by Turn off MV1 seal any leakages and reshytest from 2 above

A14 TESTING THE DOWNSTREAM PILOT PIPEWORK 1 Close MV1 and connect pressure test points A and F with flexible 6mm bore

tubing teed into the manometer Open MV1 to pressurise the downstream pilot pipework

2 Close MV1 and leave for one rninute for the temperature to stabilise Monitor the pressure for 2 minutes If the pressure falls open valve MV1 and leak test the line between the downstream block valve PV2 and the manual block PV3 with a proprietary leak detector fluid or spray If no external leaks are found the manual block valve PV3 is letting by Turn off MV1 seal any leakages and reshytest from 2 above

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 41

APPENDIX 1 30005

A15 TESTING THE BURNER CONNECTIONS 1 Remove the burner access panel as described in Section 84 of this manual

Remove the burner spark igniter Slacken the two retaining bolts holding the burner to the burner support straps and unbolt the burner supply endplate from the burner casting and mixing plates

2 Connect pressure test points A and 0 with flexible 6mm bore tubing teed into the manometer Open MV1 and MV6 to pressurise the burner pipework Leak test the main gas burner pipework and connections with proprietary leak detector fluid Turn off MV6 Seal any leakages and re-test

3 Connect pressure test points A and F with flexible 6 mm bore tubing teed into the manometer Open MV1 and PV3 to pressurise the pilot burner pipework Leak test the pilot gas burner pipework and connections with proprietary leak detector fluid Turn off PV3 Seal any leakages and re-test

4 Turn off MV1

5 Replace the spark igniter and profile division plate

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 42

APPENDIX 2 30005

START SEQUENCE

The burner start sequence is controlled by the Landis and Gyr burner management unit The timings are pre-set and comply with 885885 This unit must NOT be tampered with

A brief description of the start-up sequence isshy

The unit checks

1 The NO FLAME signal on the UV flame scanner

Note If the scanner detects a flame at any time other than in the correct operating sequence the flame programmer initiates a lockout

2 The operation of the combustion air proving switch in the NO AIR position

3 The air handler discharge high temperature switch

If the checks are completed the unit starts the combustion air fan and then checks the combustion airflow

Once the airflow is proven the unit checks that the damper control circuit is functioning correctly After the damper microswitch is made to prove the fresh air damper is fully open the sequence allows 30 seconds for the combustion air to purge any combustible gas from the air handler

After completion of the purge the spark ignition system is energised the pilot valve opened and the spark terminated If the pilot flame is not proven by the UV scanner the system will initiate a LOCKOUT

If the flame is proven the main gas valves are opened the pilot extinguished and the main burner flame proven

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 43

i

APPENDIX 2 30008

The following flow chart shows the complete start sequence including the lighting of the various indicating lamps

MANUAL STATUS LIGHT POWER ON

POWER ON

I INITIATE START BY TIME

SETTING ON CONTROLLER

I CHECK NO FLAME

VISIBLE

PROVEj FAIL LOCKOUT

I CHECK RELAY R4 NC

POSITION

PROVE FAIL NO START

I CHECK AIR PRESSURE SWITCH NC POSITION

PROVE FAIL NO START

I CHECK RELAY R1 NC

POSITION

PROVE j

FAIL NO START

I START COMBUSTION

AIR BLOWER

I CHECK AIR PRESSURE SWITCH NO POSITION

PROVE I

FAIL NO START

I STATUS LIGHT FAN ON

I ENERGISE RELAY R1

I

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 44

I

I

APPENDIX 2 30008

I CHECK OVERHEAT LIMIT

CONTROL R5

PROVE I

FAIL I I

CHECK 541412 LOOP CLOSED ON

LANDIS ampGYR CIRCUIT

PROVE I

FAIL I I

COMBUSTION AIR PURGE PERIOD

30 SECONDS

I

NO START

NO START

CANCEL NO FLAME CHECK CIRCUIT

I

ENERGISE SPARK

I TIMED PERIOD 25 SECONDS

I ENERGISE PILOT GAS

VALVE

I TIMED PERIOD 25 SECONDS

I TERMINATE SPARK

I INTERROGATE UV FLAME SCANNER

PROVE I

FAIL I I

TIMED PERIOD 10 SECONDS

I

LOCKOUT

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 45

I

I

APPENDIX 2 3000S

I ENERGISE MAIN GAS

VALVES

I

STATUS LIGHT BURNER ON

I TIMED PERIOD

5 SECONDS

I DE-ENERGISE PILOT

GAS VALVES

CONTINUOUS FROM PILOT

I INTERROGATE UV FLAME SCANNER

PROVE I

FAIL I I

LOCKOUT I

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 46

APPENDIX 3 30005

Please see copy of Standard Service Sheet

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 47

APPENDIX 4 30005

A41 TIME OUT SCREEN

This is the standard screen displayed when the touch screen is not in use The back light is off to save energy_ To access the STATUS screen touch the ENTER key and the following screen is displayed

[]][I][]rn[IJOO[][IJOO[] EJ~E11 I[]I ~ middot I

NOTE

The Touch Screen operates using the heat produced by the touch of a finger and therefore only LIGHT pressure is required

Excessive pressure can damage the Touch Screen

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 48

APPENDIX 4 30008

A42 STATUS SCREEN

On the typical STATUS screen the illustrated information detailed is as follows

19 36 Fan Brn

RS OS

100 Fst_~_ Lck _ _ Xst Gas~o ~ I

RS Indicates the current room temperature

OS ~( t~~ the current duct discharge temperature

Fan Indicates the current status of the fan by showing the arrow and the fan blades for ON and OFF is shown by the arrow and fan blades being removed

Brn Indicates the current status of the burner with the black flames indicating the burner to be ON and vice versa

Lck LOCKOUT - This indicates a flame failure when highlighted during normal or start-up operation

Xst EXCESS TEMPERATURE SWITCH - This indicates the unit has reached the trip limit on the over heat stat when highlighted during operation

Indicates the current position of the gas modulating valve during normal Gas

operation (0-100)

Indicates whether the Frost stat is energised and the unit is running on frost Fst

override

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 49

APPENDIX 4 30008

A43 CHANGING SETTINGS

It is possible to change the settings for the time of operation and the required temperature set points The following details the steps required

A44 ENTERING THE SECURITY CODE

From the STATUS screen touch the return key and the screen below will be displayed

Type the HIGH LEVEL security code (4321) If you make a mistake use the BACK SPACE key to delete any incorrect number(s) Touch the ENTER key when the code is correct

If the security code is incorrect the screen above will be displayed then try again If after several attempts you can not gain access please contact RS STOKVIS Ltd for further information

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 50

APPENDIX 4 30008

When the code is entered correctly the MAIN MENU is displayed as detailed below

~ STATUS SET VALUES~ ~ TIVIE CLOCK [) [) [) [) [)

The MAIN MENU screen shows the three menu items available The title for each menu item can be changed to suit the end user Please notify RS STOKVIS Ltd prior to commissioning should these parameters require special amendments

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 51

APPENDIX 4 30008

A45 CHANGING OR SETTING A TIME SCHEDULE

From the main menu screen select the TIME CLOCK page by running finger across screen symbol and touch the ENTER key the screen below will be displayed

On the following screen highlight the TS1 symbol and touch the ENTER key

The current time schedule will now be displayed as shown below The display will automatically default to the current day (1 =Monday 2 =Tuesday etc) In this case day 5 (Friday) the four schedule switching times refer to that day

IAC6BBB1BHIS1

mm0CIl bull mID 17BB 17BB 17HB

Iillleschedule

To modify a time select it by highlighting and touch the ENTER key and the following screen is displayed

To amend the appropriate onoff time as shown on the screen below The arrows to the right of the time are for altering the hours and the arrows on the left for the minutes

Once you have set the time use the ESCape key to exit back to the time schedule screen and choose another day by touching the required number Another time may now be modified as before

IAC6BBB1BHIS1

H8BH

I i eschedule

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 52

APPENDIX 4 30008

Use the ESCape key to exit back to the MAIN MENU screen

~ STATUS ~ SET VALUES

TIME CLOCK []~ [] [] [] []

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 53

APPENDIX 4 30005

A46 CHANGING SET VALUES

From the main menu screen select the SET VALUES page by highlight in the normal way and touch the ENTER key

The following screen is displayed

36 19 18III III IIIHsv Rsv Llv

To change the RSV highlight it in the normal way and touch the ENTER key and the screen below will now be shown

IAC6RRR1RR40 T I

0 19 (Y)l RSV

ROOM SET VALUE

The above screen shows the parameters that can be changed The values to the far left are the limitations of set point (OC) Change the set point by using the UP and DOWN ARROWS on the left of the screen or touch the set value itself followed by the ENTER key to select the set value and set it directly using the numeric keyboard All values can be changed in this way

Use the ESCape key twice to exit back to the MAIN MENU screen

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 54

APPENDIX 4 30005

A47 COMMISSIONING AND SERVICING BURNER CHECKS

Select the SET VALUES screen from the MAIN MENU screen and adjust the high lirrlit set point to 55degC to drive the burner to high fire

IAC6HHH1HH60 ~T I

0 19 (Y)

HSV

HIGH SET VALUE ~

Ensure the set value is returned to 36degC once the appropriate checks and adjustments as described in Section 43 of this manual have been completed Return to the SET VALUES screen and select the low limit value to adjust the low fire setting

Reduce the low limit value to OdegC to drive the gas valve to low fire and complete the appropriate checks and adjustments as described in Section 43 of this manual and ensure the set value is returned to the original value

A48 GMT ltgt BST CHANGEOVER DAYLIGHT SAVINGS

To change your unit to British Summer TimelWinter Time the following system screen must be highlighted by touching the Iamp1 button twice

By touching the clock symbol in the top left hand corner followed by the ENTER key the screen below will be displayed

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 55

APPENDIX 4 30008

188311 851193

544

By touching and highlighting in this case 18 followed by the ENTER key A small box allowing the entry of two digits will appear Enter the desired time required using the numbered keys followed by ENTER key Your unit is now set to operate on BSTBWT

Touch the ESC key three times to return back to the Status screen

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 56

STOKVIS ENERGY SYSTEMS 96R WALTON ROAD EAST MOLESEY SURREY KT8 0DL TEL 020 8783 3050 08707 707 747 FAX 020 8783 3051 08707 707 767 E-MAIL infostokvisboilerscom WEBSITE wwwstokvisboilerscom

JULY 1999

Page 4: ECONOAIR 3000S SERIES AIR HANDLING UNIT DIRECT FIREDstokvisboilers.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/EconoAir... · 2019-05-10 · ECONOAIR 3000S SERIES AIR HANDLING UNIT DIRECT FIRED

TABLE OF CONTENTS 30008

8 SERVICING 30

81 Isolation 30 811 Fuel Gas Isolation 30 812 Electrical Isolation 30

82 Routine Maintenance 31

83 Annual Service Checks 31

84 Removal Procedure For Replaceable Components 32 841 Burner 32

842 Flame Detector 32 843 Igniter Spark Plug 32 844 Igniter Spark Transformer 33 845 Combustion Air Pressure Switch (DPS) 33 846 Air handler Overheat Limit ControL 33 847 Air Fan and Motor 33

848 Fuel Gas Multi-functional Control - Small Units 34 849 Governor and Block Valves 34 8410 Fuel Gas Flow Control Valve 34 8411 Pilot Gas Governor and Block Valve 34 8412 Belt Tensioning Procedure 35

85 Main Panel Controls 37 851 Landis amp Gyr LFL 1335 Automatic Sequence Controller 37

852 Controls Circuit (24 Volt) Transformer 37 853 Controls Relays R1 R2 amp R3 37 854 6A MCB 37 855 Thermal Overload 37 856 Main Contactor 38 857 Motor Fuse 38

86 Remote Control Station 38

9 RECOMMENDED SPARES 39

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 3

TABLE OF CONTENTS 30008

APPENDIX 1

SOUNDNESS TESTING THE FUEL GAS LINE 40 A11 Testing the Upstream Pipework and Burner Controls 40 A12 Testing the Downstream Burner Valve 41 A13 Testing the Downstream Burner Pipework 41 A14 Testing the Downstream Pilot Pipework 41 A15 Testing the Burner Connections 42

APPENDIX 2

START SEQUENCE 43

APPENDIX 3

SERVICE CHECK SHEET 47

APPENDIX 4

TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER ~ 48 A41 Time Out Screen 48 A42 Status Screen 49 A43 Changing Settings 50 A44 Entering the Security Code 50 A45 Changing or Setting a Time Schedule 52 A46 Changing Set Values 54 A47 Commissioning and Servicing Burner Checks 55

A48 GMTltgtBST Changeover (Daylight Saving) 55

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 4

1 TECHNICAL DATA 30008

SPECIFICATION

308 99shy

CE 0087

G20 87AQ371

NA

17

10

5

415V 50Hz 3ph 4 Wire

A

kg

IE

JULY 1999 SAMPLE PageS

1 TECHNICAL DATA 30008

UTILITIES

AIR HANDLER UTILITIES

FUELi NATURAL GAS

MAXIMUM FUEL SUPPL Y PRESSURE 25 mbar

MINIMUM FUEL SUPPL Y PRESSURE 15 mbar

ELECTRIC SUPPL Y TO CONTROL PANEL WITH NEUTRAL WIRE

415V 50Hz 3ph 4 Wire

SUPPLY RATING Amps

MOTOR FUSES

Notes

Air handler models 3018S to 3040S inclusive of STOKVIS ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handlers have been certificated by British Gas Pic for use on Natural Gas only It does not cover the use of distribution ducting filters and high level or external installations The other air handlers in the range are designed and built to the same parameters and standards as the certificated sample

Your attention is drawn to the limitations on location for recirculation air handlers detailed in Section 33

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 6

1 TECHNICAL DATA 30008

SETTINGS (AS SHIPPED)

AIR HANDLER SETriNGS (AS SHIPPED) I

I

IAIR PRESSURE SWITCH rnbar

OVERHEAT LIMIT CONTROL 65degC

PILOT BURNER GAS PRESSURE 100 mbar

MAXIMUM 50 mbar MAIN BURNER GAS PRESSURES

MINIMUM 10 mbar

MAXIMUM AT RECIRCULATION CONDITION NA

OVERLOAD Amps

FAN SPEED rpm

MAXIMUM 16 mbarDIFFERENTIAL AIR PRESSURE ACROSS PROFILE PLATE MINIMUM 14 mbar

GAS CONNECTION SIZE BSP

TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER

ACCESS CODE 4321 I

TEMPERATURE SETPOINT (Code 00) 19degC i

SAMPLE INTERVAL (Code 01) 2 sec I

DISCHARGE LOW LIMIT (Code 02) 18degC

DISCHARGE HIGH LIMIT (Code 03) 36degC

Note For air handler dimensions please refer to the General Arrangement Drawing

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 7

~------------------~--~

~~O~~C~~~__-__~~middot~~I~~______________-1~~~__~~-=~~=-~i

COMPONENT UST

BURNER

AIR FAN MOTOR

FAN DRIVE

CONTROL PANEL

REMOTE PANEL

SERVICES

FUEL

UAX SUPPLY PRESSURE MIN SUPPLY PRESSURE

ELECTRICITY

BLOCK VALVES

Serial No

bullbull IlICh NPII

kW 1+4ORPM

NA

3-30005-100 RevO DOL Start

N

NATURAL GAS

25mbor 1gtmbor

15V5OHz3Ph4W1RE Motor FLC bullbullbull Amps

240V 50Hz 1Ph 3 WIRE

Site Address

TAG DESCRIPTION WI SUPPLY ISOlATION VALve

W2 JW3 MULTIBLOCKMY MV5 FLOW CONTROL VALve WS BURNER ISOLATION VALVE

PVl PILOT PRESSURE REGULATOR PV2 PILOT SOlpoundNOIO VALve PV3 PILOT ISOlATION VALve

TC SPACE lEMPERATURE CONTROUER TO DISCHARGE TEMPERATURE DETECTOR TR SPACE TEMPERATURE DElECTOR TS OISCHARGE TEMPERATURE swrrCH

PS AIR PRESSURE swrrCH

UV fLAt4E DETECTOR

t SPARK IGNITER

NOTE f INIlICATES PRpoundSSURE TEST POM

Client

srOKVIS END USERS ADDRESS END USER

RS STOKVIS amp SONS Ltd POOL ROAD WEST MOLESEY SURREY KT8 2HN

Ident T45

shyomiddot BVIoI 0 145

1 DJSO 1 GBlA 14 T45

1AC600 00T1701 DRT3453 RAK13bullbull170

lWGJ

ORAtO 023739

PILOT LINE

fRtsH Nfl HET

Title TITLE

Model No Seri4l No DutY Style

Tel 0181 941 1212 Fax 0181 941 4136

00lCIIAAGE 10 WORIltSPAtt

305 99- m3sINDOOR HORIZONTAL

ACStw -_nora I-ID_raw_-+I__-I

Checked

CONTROL Approved

o-1 CommentApproval

Rev IDote I Description

Computer No 99

Purchase Order No

Drawing No

4-MR-001 R~O~

NOTES1shy

I PROPOSED LOCATION TO BE CHECKED tOR LEVEL AND LOAD BEARING STRENGTH BY OTHERS

2 UNIT TO BE SUPPLIED IN SEPERATE SECTIONS FOR LIFTING INTO PLANTROOM AND ON TO BASE BY OTHERS

3 ALL SECTIONS TO HAVE TIJO BEADS OF SEALANT BETJEEN OPPOSING FLANGES AS PER SUPPLIED INSTALL ATlON INSTRUCTIONS

ltI ENSURE ALL BUILDERS JORK IS CARRIED OUT AND MADE GOOD AFTER INSTALLATION BY OTHERS

5 ALL EXTERNAL JIRING SHALL BE CARRIED OUT BY COMPETENT PERSON TO CURRENT lEE REGULATIONS

DISCHARGE OPENING lUOlElIE VIDE X lIE HIG CV 3011 MEZ FLANGE

Serial No

sroKVIS Site Address Client END USERS ADDRESS END USER

ACCESS OPENING

~L---gt lt0-shy

~ ~

GAS CONNECTIONS

CONTROL PANEL 60011 VIDE X 600111 HIGH

APPROX VEIGHTSshy

HEATER CASING - 1I0U( KG

IJCL OOCUUef IDrawn lACS

Checked

I RS STOKVIS amp SONS Ltd POOL ROAD WEST MOLESEY SURREY KT8 2HN Tel 0181 941 1212 fax 0181 941 4136 CONTROL IApproved

o I~ I CommentApproval

Rev IDate IDescription

Computer No

99 Purchase Order No

Drawing No

3-MR-005

415VOlT5OHz 4 WIRE sumy

lIfEI_-shy~a

30131

2_F11

3 TOO---shy

B (

Serial No

~s

~~~~

~ NIt 9lOIElIliOTt)R RA11NG~W

STOKVIS

0 reg

-0

0 0 lt0

u ~

R5-1 -

ADDRESS

shy

regshy

~tl

GAS v IoIOtQR AIIIfONGTll LEGEND

IHlmN PNEI _

-e- PNEl_

Sl1pound_

-11shy IJIfClIOII1IO~-

DUCT STAT NPE COt 17tll

_STAT NPE om 3lt4Il)

~~~pound~ niR~~ (i)l

~ ()1

_cbullbullL~ nmiddoti Apoundm

USER

~ ~

SCHEMATIC FOR 3000S SERIES AIR

IAC600 BASED

RS STOKVIS amp SONS Ltd POOL ROAD WEST MOLESEY SURREY KT8 2HN Tel 0181 941 1212 Fax 0181 941 4136

_[---------f P(N(J ON

ICHI11ONTfWiSFORlER

PllOT V IIEIi CAS VAllIE 1

II CAS VAllIE 2

~_ON

lOCKOUT

s

o Rev I Dote I Description

Computer No 99

Purchase Order No

Drawing No

3-MR-100 Rev

o

30005 2 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

21 INTRODUCTION

The STOKVIS ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler is a direct fired unit designed to give clean healthy environmental conditions and constant even temperature within the heated space

The main air handler assembly houses the circulating air fan the gas burner the fuel gas line and all necessary safety controls The burner management system and space temperature controller is located in the main control panel mounted on or adjacent to the side of the air handler A second control station supplied loose for mounting remote from the air handler within the heated space or other convenient location houses indicating lights the control touch screen and auxiliary operational switches

A sight glass is fitted on the air handler casing to view the burner during operation

For multi unit networked applications the touch screen is excluded

22 GAS BURNER ASSEMBLY

The ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler incorporates the Maxon NP-II burner This burner is specially designed for heating fresh air and is mounted such that a proportion of the incoming air is forced into contact with the flame to ensure rapid mixing and combustion within the code requirements The burner assembly is built up from modular components to give the required heat duty

Each burner assembly is fitted with an integral pilot spark igniter and UV detector The flame detector is used for scanning both the pilot and main flame Note that the pilot burner operates in interrupted mode

The burner module fitted is identified in the Technical Data Section of this manual and on the Valve and Instrun1ent list

23 CONTROL SYSTEM

The controls fitted on the air handler are detailed on the Process amp Instrumentation Diagram in the Technical Data Section of this manual

231 SAFETY CONTROLS

The safety interlocks on the ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler are

1 Combustion air proving switch (PS) 2 Ultra-violet burner flame detector (UV) 3 Overheat limit control (OLe)

Failure of either the combustion air switch or fiame scanning circuit will cause the air handler to go to LOCKOUT and the burner management system will require a RESET before a re-light can be attempted

The air handler discharge overheat limit control is a manual reset switch After a failure the switch will have to be RESET before a re-light can be attempted

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 8

2 GENERAL DESCRIPTION 3000S

232 TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEM

The ECONO-AIR 30008 Series air handler is fitted with a full three-term modulating temperature control system as standard The space temperature is sensed by a heated space detector (TR) which inputs to the panel mounted temperature controller (TC) This achieves control by modulation of the fuel gas flow control valve (MV5) The temperature controller additionally limits the air handler discharge air temperature measured by the discharge temperature detector (TO) to pre-set high and low limits

233 MAIN CONTROL PANEL

The control panel houses the combustioncirculation air fan starter the burner management system and the heated space temperature controller On larger units a separate starter panel may be supplied The panel door is fitted with an interlocked isolator POWER ON and LOCKOUT lights and the burner management RESET button The panel is mounted on or adjacent to the air handler

234 FUEL GAS SYSTEM

The PILOT LINE comprises 1 Pilot governor (PV1 ) 2 One British Gas certificated solenoid valve (PV2) 3 One pilot gas isolation valve (PV3) 4 Pipework and fittings

Note Two pressure test points are fitted on the pilot line on the inlet and discharge of the pilot solenoid valve

The MAIN GAS LINE comprises

1 Gas isolation valve (MV1 ) 2 Pressure governor (MV2) 3 Double block safety shut-oft system (MV34) 4 Gas flow control valve (MV5) 5 Burner isolation valve (MV6) 6 Pipework and fittings

Note Four pressure test points are fitted on the n1ain gas line on the supply the inlet and discharge of the second block valve and downstream of the flow control valve

Note On small air handlers items 2 and 3 are combined in one multi-functional control

All items above are detailed on the Process amp Instrumentation Diagram in Section 1 of this manual

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 9

2 GENERAL DESCRIPTION 3000S

235 REMOTE CONTROL STATION

The ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler is also supplied with a remote control station which houses the air handler operating controls indicating status and the workspace temperature detector if the control station is located in the heated space

236 HEATED SPACE TEMPERATURE SENSOR The heated space temperature sensor is to be located remotely within the space to be heated

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 10

3 INSTALLATION 30005

31 STATUTORY REQUIREMENTS

I n accordance with the Gas Safety (I nstallation and Use) Regulations 1998 installation of this ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler should only be undertaken by competent personnel who are fully aware of their responsibilities under the Health and Safety at Work Act 1974

The installation of this air handler must comply with

BS6230-1991 Installation of gas-fired forced convection air air handlers for commercial and industrial Space Heating of rated input exceeding 60kW

The lEE Regulations for Electrical Installations

Gas Safety (Installation and Use) Regulations 1998

Health and Safety at Work Act 1974

Building Regulations 1986

Building Standards (Scotland Only)

The I nstitution of Gas Engineers Codes of Practice

IGEUP1 Soundness Testing Procedures for Industrial and Commercial Gas Installations

IGEUP2 Gas Installation Pipework Boosters and Compressors on Industrial and Commercial Premises

IGEUP4 Commissioning Of Gas Fired Plant On Industrial and Commercial Premises

32 RECEPTION AND STORAGE OF GOODS

32laquo1 RECEPTION

On receipt of the shipment check that the shipment is complete against the Delivery Advice Note Check for mechanical damage sustained during transit before off-loading the goods Inform the carrier of any such damage

322 OFFLOADING

Horizontal air handlers are fitted with four lifting eyes to permit an overhead lift Alternatively horizontal air handlers may be handled by a fork lift truck on the steel angle support frame

323 STORAGE

Air handlers must be stored in a dry environment The remote control station must be removed from the shipment and stored indoors in a dry environment Outdoor units of split case design (Size 54 and above) must have open ends protected from the environment until installation is complete Any filter elements should be stored in a dry environment

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 11

3 INSTALLATION 3000S

33 LIMITATIONS OF USE

The ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler must not be installed in the following locations

I n hazardous areas

In areas where flammable vapours can be present in excess of their threshold limit values as defined in 8S5925

I n accordance with 8S6230 Clause 513 where there are any flued appliances in the heated area and where air is supplied mechanically and there is mechanical extraction the design extract rate must be 5 to 10 less than the design inlet rate so that the room will not be at a lower pressure than the outside air If the air handler is the only source of mechanically supplied air the extract rate must not exceed 95 of the nominal air flow specified in Section 11 of this manual

Note If it proposed to install the ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler to supply heated air to a hazardous area or in areas where flammable vapours are present the installation must first be approved by a RS STOKVIS Ltd Engineer

34 LOCATION OF AIR HANDLERS

The air handler should normally be installed in the location recommended by the RS STOKVIS Ltd specifying engineer

Check the proposed location for level and load bearing strength Ensure that there is adequate clearance as detailed on the air handler GA in Section 1 this manual around the unit for access for maintenance purposes If the air handler is to be installed above floor level a suitably designed service platform should be provided Such a platform must have 100mm minimum raised edges around the perimeter If this is not possible all air handler access panels must be fitted with hinged restraints This is a factory standard option which should be specified at the time of ordering - check the restraints are fitted before proceeding with installation

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 12

3 INSTALLATION 3000S

35 FRESH AIR INLET AND VENTILATION

351 FRESH AIR INLET

The air handler must be installed where it has a direct and unlimited supply of fresh air from outside the building Ensure that the air intake is not located near exhausts from the building or from any process exhausts such as paint booth exhausts Whenever possible protect the fresh air inlet from the prevailing wind and local wind effects from corners

The fresh air inlet should be sized for an air velocity of 3ms The inlet duct area is detailed on the General Arrangement drawing located in Section 1 of this manual

Where the fresh air inlet is made in a load bearing wall eg a brick wall guidance should be obtained from Structural Engineers on the provision of a lintel in the wall over the fresh air opening

A weather hood must be fitted when the air handler air inlet is at or within 1 m of the outside wall Additionally the weather hood should have negligible resistance to the airflow maximum 01 mbar at the design air flow rate

Do not install the ECONO-AI R 3000S Series air handler where long lengths of duct or bends of an angle greater than 30deg are necessary to lead to the air handler from the fresh air opening If ducting is unavoidable ensure that the resulting pressure drop is negligible Le less than 01 mbar for ductless air handlers and has been accounted for in the original design for ducted air handlers as detailed in the specification section of this manual Section 11

Note If the air intake is located in an area of unrestricted access warning notices preventing the blockage of the air intake by temporary stacking should be displayed adjacent to the intake

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 13

3 INSTALLATION 3000S

352 VENTI LA TION

Where the air air handler is in its own plant room or compartment this shall be ventilated with openings communicating directly with the outside air to ventilate the room

The openings shall be fitted with grilles of negligible resistance and shall be sited so that they cannot easily be blocked or flooded They shall have a total minimum free area as follows

Low Level (inlet) 320cm2 + 27cm2 per kilowatt in excess of 60kW total rated input

High Level (outlet) 160cm2 + 134cm2 per kilowatt in excess of 60kW total rated input

The free area of the grilles shall be not less than the size of the recommended minimum ventilation opening Grilles shall be designed to minimise high velocity air streams in the plant room For exposed ie free standing plant rooms ventilation openings shall be provided on at least two sides and preferably on all four sides

Where mechanical ventilation is used it shall be by mechanical inlet and either natural or mechanical extraction Systems of ventilation employing mechanical extraction and natural air inlet shall not be used

The minimum flow rates of air supplied shall be not less than 06 m3s per megawatt of rated heat input

36 AIR DISCHARGE

The air handler should be located with the air discharge into the heated space at a minimum height of 3 metres The air should not discharge directly onto any obstructions and direct discharge on to working personnel should be avoided

If the air discharge is located in an area of unrestricted access warning notices preventing the blockage of the air discharge by temporary stacking should be displayed adjacent to the discharge

Generally it is not necessary to fit distribution ducting to the discharge of the air handler If ducting is required or specified ensure that the resulting pressure drop has been accounted for in the original design specification as detailed in Section 1 of this manual

37 ASSEMBLY AND POSITIONING OF AIR HANDLER

Unless specified at the time of order air handlers will be shipped in sections Discharge heads grilles attenuators duct connecting sections filters rain-hoods etc will be supplied loose for site fitting to the air handler

Horizontal air handlers must be supported on their steel angle support base When the air handler is located check for level and adjust as necessary

Alternatively horizontal air handlers can be supplied with extensions of the support frame for suspending from overhead supports This must be specified at the time of order Do not suspend the air handler from the lifting eyes

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 14

3 INSTALLATION 3000S

38 REMOTE STATION

The ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler is supplied with a remote control station This should be mounted in a position convenient to the end user If possible it should not be mounted on an external wall or where the space temperature detector is affected by cold draughts or a local source of heat

39 VISUAL CHECK

After completion of installation re-check the air handler for signs of damage Report any instance to RS STOKVIS Ltd

310 CONNECTION OF SERVICES

The air handler requires the connection of fuel gas and electricity

3101 FUEL GAS SUPPLY

The ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler has been designed for use on Natural Gas An alternative version is available for LPG The gas type for the air handler supplied is clearly marked on the air handler data badge and on the Specification sheet in Section 1 of this manual Check the gas type is correct and that the supply pressure is within the range marked on the specification

The local gas Authority should be consulted about the adequacy of the gas service and meter supplies for existing and proposed extensions to the installation and for any requirements for boosting the gas supply_

Connect the fuel gas supply to the inlet manual valve on the air handler gas train The connection size is detailed in Section 1 of this manual A further isolation valve and union should be fitted immediately adjacent to the appliance which when the valve is closed allows the complete burner and control assembly to be disconnected for maintenance or repair

New gas pipework should be installed to British Gas Publication IGEUP2 and be purged and pressure tested in accordance with British Gas Publications IGEUP1

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 15

3 INSTALLATION 3000S

3102 ELECTRICITY SUPPLY

All external wiring shall be carried out and checked by a competent person All components shall be checked for suitability for voltage range and frequency

Means for electric isolation having a contact separation of at least 3mm in all poles must be provided adjacent to the air handler The electrical supply to the appliance shall incorporate suitable means of excess current protection

The ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler requires a 3 phase 4 wire supply which should be connected to the main control panel Check the air handler data badge for the correct electrical supply The maximum supply requirement is Specified in Section 1 of this manual Note that the 240 Volt air handler control circuit is taken from the lUI phase to Neutral Connection should be made as shown on the wiring diagram shipped inside this panel

The air handler must be earthed in accordance with BS5986 and CP1013

Check all terminal strip terminations for wires which have become loose during shipment

311 CONNECTION TO THE MAIN PANEL AND REMOTE STATION

Interconnecting wiring to the main panel and remote station should be made with a minimum specification of 075 mm2 300 Volt cable Check that no wires on the terminal strip have become loose during shipment The remote panel should be mounted at a height of approx 18m If possible it should not be mounted on an external wall or where the sensor will be affected by cold draughts or a local source of heat

Both panel and remote station must be earthed in accordance with BS5986 and CP1013

312 HEATED SPACE TEMPERATURE SENSOR

The space temperature sensor located on the remote panel should be connected with screened cable or twin low voltage signal cable run in its own separate conduit It should be mounted on the remote panel or adjacent to the outlet at a height of approx 18m If possible it should not be mounted on an external wall or where the sensor will be affected by cold draughts or a local source of heat

313 DUCT SENSOR

The duct sensor should be connected with screened cable or twin low voltage signal cable run in its own separate conduit It should be mounted in the air handler discharge as close as possible to the discharge into the heated space

314 OVERHEAT LIMIT CONTROL SENSOR

The overheat limit control sensor should be connected with twin core cable It should be mounted in the air handler discharge within 1 metre of the air handler outlet connection

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 16

3 INSTALLATION 3000S

315 TOUCH SCREEN WIRING

The touch screen located on the front of the remote station requires two separate twisted pairs of O5mrh2 screened cable run in a separate conduit If the distance between the main and remote stations is greater that 1 km please contact RS STOKVIS Ltd for advice

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 17

3 INSTALLATION 3000S

316 ALIGNMENT

3161 INSTALLATION OF DRIVE BELTS

On 80 amp 89 30008 range of air handlers it will be necessary to align the pulleys and fit the drive belts before carrying out commissioning of the unit

3162 PU LLEYS

Before assembling the drive check the pulley grooves are free from scores or sharp edges and all dimensions conform to the relevant standard

The Taper Lock bush is your starting point when it comes to assembly and installation Drive installation is a straightforward job with Taper Lock - but the stages set out on the installation leaflet provided with every Taper Lock bush should be followed closely

3163 ALIGNMENT

Good alignment of pulleys prior to belt installation is important to avoid belt flank wear The diagram below shows correct installation of pulleys

INTERNAl BEARING

MOTOR PUlLEY rAN PULLEY

MOTORMOTOR ADJUSTMENT MOUNTING BOlTSBOLTS

3164 BELTS

When the pulleys have been correctly positioned on the shafts the belts can be installed to complete the drive

The drive centre distance should be reduced prior to the installation of the belts so that they may be fitted without the use of force Under no circumstances must belts be prised into the grooves Using sharp tools to stretch the belts over the pulley rim can easily damage belts and pulley grooves

The installation allowance given in the table below is the minimum recommended reduction in centre distance for various belt section and lengths to allow for correct fitting

The take-up allowance given in the same table should be added on to the calculated centre distance to allow for belt stretch

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 18

3 INSTALLATION 3000S

3165 INSTALLATION AND TAKE UP ALLOWANCE

Belt Pitch Installation Allowance Take-Up Length (mm) SPZ SPA SPB SPC (mm)

410 to 530 5

540 to 840 10

850 to 1160 15

1170 to 1500 20

1510 to 1830 20 25

1840 to 2170 30

2180 to 2830 25 40

2840 to 3500 30 50

3520 to 4160 50 60

4170 to 5140 70

5220 to 6150 85

6180 to 7500 105

600 to 8500 125

8880 to 10170 145

10600 to 12500 175

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 19

4 COMMISSIONING 30005

This appliance must be commissioned by a RS STOKVIS Ltd approved engineer

41 PRESTART CHECKS

1 Switch the SUMMERIOFFMlINTER switch on the remote station to OFF

2 Check the correct electric supply is available to the air handler and the appliance isolator installed

3 Check the correct fuel gas supply is available to the air handler and local isolation valve and union installed Check that new gas pipe work has been correctly purged and pressure tested and that the isolation valve is in the OFF position

4 Check the air handler gas control system and burner connections for pressure soundness as detailed in Appendix 1 of this manual

5 Complete the first section of the Service Check Sheet supplied at the back of this manual (Appendix 3)

6 Close the air handler access door

7 Close and lock the main air handler control panel

8 Switch the main panel isolator to position 1 Check the POWER ON light illuminates

9 Check and set the timed ONOFF periods in the lAC Controller located on the remote panel Ensure that the unit is set to be on during testing Refer to Appendix 4 for the lAC setting procedure

10 Close and lock the remote panel

11 Switch the SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch on the remote station to SUMMER to start the air fan Return the switch to the OFF position and check for correct rotation of the fan as the fan slows and stops

The fan rotation can be observed through the fan section access door or through the air handler access door Only do this during the fan run-down period Ensure the door is securely fastened after completion

Rotation arrows are fitted on the end of the air handler and inside the air handler above the interior bearing support If the rotation is incorrect two phases should be interchanged as dictated by the Engineer responsible for the site electrical system

12 Check the air pressure drop across the burner whilst the fan is operating with a water column pressure gauge connected to the two pressure test points on the air pressure switch (DPS) This pressure should be between 14 and 16 rnbar

If the air differential pressure measured above is not within the operating range check inlet and outlet ductwork as appropriate and any filters fitted If the pressure differential is still not within limits isolate the air handler and report to RS STOKVIS Ltd before proceeding

13 Check the operation and setting of the Low Air Pressure Switch by injecting a controlled signal into the switch Check the break point on the switch is 1 mbar (falling)

Note The switch is set and sealed before fitting The 1 mbar switch point may not coincide with the 1 mbar scale reading on the switch

If on checking the switch is not operating correctly do not tamper with it return it to RS STOKVIS Ltd for replacement

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 20

4 COMMISSIONING 3000S

42 DRY RUN

With all the manual gas isolation valves still in the OFF position switch the SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch to WINTER

43 START UP

1 Attach a manometer to pressure test point F and the low pressure test point on the air pressure switch (DPS)

2 Open the main gas supply valve (MV1) and the pilot burner isolation valve (PV3) Leave the main burner isolation valve (MV6) closed Reset the air handler by pressing the push-button marked RESET on either the main panel or remote station The air handler pilot will light automatically (after the automatic damper start check and combustion air pre-purge) and then LOCKOUT after the main gas shut-off valves are addressed

During the short period that the pilot is in operation check the pilot gas pressure on the manometer It should be 10 mbar and the pilot flame approximately 100 - 150mm in length covering the first three or four holes of the mixing plate and have a steady blue colour when viewed through the sight glass on the access side of the air handler Adjust as necessary - refer to Section 51 this manual Check the flame signal - refer to Section 431

3 Open the main burner isolation valve (MV6) RESET the air handler which should now light to main burner stage When alight close the main burner isolation valve to shut down the gas flow to the burner Check that the unit goes to LOCKOUT

4 Reset the air handler and drive the burner to low fire by adjusting the temperature controller set point as described in Appendix 4 of this manual Check the flame is continuous across the width of the burner and has a flame length of approx 50 - 65mm from the burner rail when viewed through the sight glass on the access side of the air handler Check the burner pressure across pressure test point D and the downstream (low) pressure test point on the air pressure switch ie on the rear of the pressure switch This pressure is specifled in Section 1 of this manual Adjust as necessary-refer to Section 53 of this manual Check the flame signal - refer to Section 431

Where possible check the actual gas flow rate by meter reading with all other appliances turned off

5 Drive the burner to high fire by adjusting the temperature controller set point and high limit to 55degC as described in Appendix 4 of this manual Check the flame is continuous across the burner rail and has a flame length of approximately 250 - 350mm from the burner rail Check the burner pressure across pressure test point D and the downstream (low) pressure test point on the air pressure switch This pressure is specified in Section 1 of this manual Adjust as necessary - refer to Section 52 of this manual Check the maximum air handler discharge temperature Check the flame signal shyrefer to Section 431

Where possible check the actual gas flow rate by meter reading with all other appliances turned off

6 Check the operation of the overheat limit control by adjusting the temperature controller set point and high limit to 65degC as described in Appendix 4 of this manual Monitor the discharge temperature on the temperature controller Check that the overheat control operates as the set temperature is passed Check that the control must be manually reset by pressing the green reset button on the front of the switch Return the temperature controller to its original settings

In the event that the ambient temperature is too low for this simple procedure to work the instrument will have to be bench tested using a Temperature 8ath Remove and replace the control as Section 84 of this manual for bench-testing

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 21

4 COMMISSIONING 3000S

43 1 FLAME SIGNAL CHECK

1 The ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler is fitted with a Klippon SAKT1 Test Terminal which can be used to measure the flame scanning signal Refer to the Electrical Schematic and connect a 0-1 mA ammeter to the two test points with standard 23 mm test plugs with the positive lead on the detector side Disconnect the terminal link to obtain the signal reading A minimum signal of 70 microamps is required typical signals are in the 250-400 microamp range on both pilot and main flame After completion replace the terminal link and remove the test jacks

2 Drive the burner to high fire as previously described Measure the carbon dioxide content of the discharge air stream This figure must not exceed 2800 ppm If the discharge exceeds this limit isolate the air handler and report to RS STOKVIS Ltd before proceeding

Stop and start the air handler a few times to check for reliability using the Operating Instructions (Section 6)

432 HANDOVER

Complete the air handler Service Check Sheet supplied at the back of this manual The self-copy sheet must be returned to STOKVIS for checking

Instruct the User in efficient use and care of the unit start-up and shutdown (including emergency shutdown) and recommended service interval Emphasise the need to keep the air handler clear of stored items and extraneous material and to maintain the recirculation and fresh air paths to the air handler inlets Hand all instructions as applicable to the UserOwner for safekeeping

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 22

5 ADJUSTMENTS 3000S

If adjustments to the air handler settings are required they should be made by a RS STOKVIS Ltd approved engineer

The normal value for all control settings is specified in Section 1 of this manual

51 PILOT ADJUSTMENT

The pilot gas pressure and flame length may be adjusted by altering the discharge pressure of the pilot governor Screwing the adjusting screw clockwise (located under the top cap) increases the discharge pressure and the flame length anti-clockwise decreases the pressure and the flame length

52 BURNER HIGH FIRE PRESSURE ADJUSTMENT

At high fire alter the spring compression on the main burner governor (MV2) by removing the cap and adjust the spring compression plate clockwise to increase the burner pressure anti-clockwise to decrease burner pressure If the pressure does not increase on adjusting the spring the supply is inadequate

Note On small air handlers fitted with a mUlti-functional control the pressure adjusting screw is located under a swing cap on the first block valve

53 BURNER LOW FIRE ADJUSTMENT

The main burner low fire is adjusted on the flow control valve MV5 (Process amp Instrumentation Diagram)

Remove the top cover of the valve and insert a Terminal Screwdriver in the adjusting screw of the TOP cam marked NI

Drive the burner to low fire by adjusting the temperature controller set-point and high limit to 05degC as described in Appendix 4 of this manual

Turn the Terminal Screwdriver clockwise to decrease the low fire gas flow anti-clockwise to increase the flow

Check the heat input and flame signal at the new position are satisfactory and return the tenlperature controller to its normal settings

Replace the control valve cover

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 23

5 ADJUSTMENTS 3000S

54 SUMMERIOFFIWINTER SWITCH

In the SUMMER position this switch provides ventilation only and is independent of the programmed ON and OFF periods This position is manually selected and must be manually de-selected Whenever the switch is in this position the fan is operating

In the OFF position the air handler is shutdown and will not operate This overrides any frost protection fitted It is suitable for air handler shutdown for short periods such as holidays The programme memory is unaffected by this switch and assumes control of the air handler when the switch is returned to the WINTER position

In the WINTER position the air handler operates off the programme memory to provide heating

55 RESET BUTTON

Visual indication of air handler lockout is provided In the event of lockout occurring the air handler can be reset by depressing the RESET button This parallels the RESET button on the air handler main control panel If after 4 attempts to reset the air handler the lockout indicator still illuminates then a Service Engineer should be called to investigate the problem

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 24

6 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 3000S

61 AIR HANDLER START-UP

1 Open all manual gas valves both on the appliance and on the supply to the appliance Switch on the Electric Supply to the appliance

2 On the main air handler panel

Switch the panel isolator to the 1 position

Check POWER ON light

3 On the remote control station

For Heating Switch the SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch to WINTER

The air handler will now start automatically in response to the time settings

In the event of LOCKOUT

Press the RESET button and the cycle of operations will be repeated If the air handler goes to LOCKOUT four times in succession call for a Service Engineer

For Unheated Ventilation Switch the SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch to SUMMER

Note This prevents the burner firing giving a controlled supply of ventilation air to the heated space as long as the switch is in this position The air handler will now start automatically in response to the timeclock demand To turn the fan off return the switch to the centre OFF position

In the event of LOCKOUT

Press the RESET button and the cycle of operations will be repeated If the air handler goes to LOCKOUT four times in succession call for a Service Engineer

62 AIR HANDLER SHUTDOWN

621 SHUTDOWN FOR SHORT PERIODS

Switch the SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch on the remote station to OFF

622 SHUTDOWN FOR PROLONGED PERIODS

Switch the main panel isolator to the 0 position and close all manual gas valves both on and leading to the appliance

Note Manual gas valves should only be operated when the appliance is to be shut off for either Servicing or for a prolonged shutdown

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 25

30005 6 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

63 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS

631 SITE CLEARANCE ADJACENT TO AIR HANDLER

Attention should be paid to keeping the area around the air handler tidy No rubbish should be allowed to accumulate in the vicinity of the air handler and storage of goods etc should not be permitted within two metres of the air handler Failure to comply could result in reduced airflow to the air handler causing inefficient running and potential overheat cond ition

632 AIR SUPPLY TO AIR HANDLER

Air vents and grilles supplying air to the air handler should never be blocked and should be checked periodically to ensure they are clear

633 AIR FILTERS

Similarly attention should be paid to cleaning or replacing the filters to the air handler if fitted Your installer should advise you on the frequency with which this would be required to be completed

634 SERVICE

For continued safe and efficient operation of this air air handler it is important that servicing of the air handler should be completed at regular intervals by a competent person in accordance with Section 82 of this manual Users are advised to enter into a Service Agreement with RS STOKVIS Ltd

635 SPARE PARTS

It is suggested that a complete set of spare parts essential to the running of the air handler and recommended by the installer are kept by the user on the premises where the air handler is installed This is particularly important where the air handler forms an essential part of any process plant and its being out of operation may cause problems by for example frost damage or condensation by super-cooling

A list of Recommended Spares will be found in Section 9 of this manual

636 GAS LEAKS

If a smell of gas is detected around the area of the appliance Switch off all manual gas valves and contact your service engineer or the local gas undertaking

NEVER

LOOK FOR GAS LEAKS WITH A LIGHTED MATCH OR NAKED

FLAME

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 26

7 FAULT FINDING 30008

The main control panel incorporates two lights to help in fault finding

POWER ON

LOCKOUT

The remote station also has three lights

AIR FAN ON

BURNER ON

LOCKOUT

This section gives the possible causes of failure associated with each check light The electrical schematic diagram in this manual and the wiring diagram shipped in the main air handler panel should be used in conjunction with the notes below Additionally Service Engineers should familiarise themselves with the detailed Start Sequence given in Appendix 2 of this manual

The notes are given for each light before consulting the notes check for bulb failure

71 POWER ON LIGHT IS UNLIT

Check

1 Main control panel isolator is in the 1 position

2 Main Panel 6A MCB has not tripped if a trip has occurred the switch will be at the OFF position Reset and test system as required

3 Also check if the mains electrical supply is isolated If so FIND OUT WHY before taking any action

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 27

7 FAULT FINDING 30005

72 AIR FAN ON LIGHT IS UNLIT

Check

1 SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch is not in Position OFF

2 Timeperiod is not set to off

3 Air handler is not at LOCKOUT

4 Recheck both AIR FAN ON and LOCKOUT bulbs

Two fault indications are possible

1 THE FAN IS NOT OPERATING

If the fan should have started but is not operating

Check 1 Overload for tripped conditions Reset the overload and monitor the next start-up

2 Motor Fuses

3 Relays 1 2 amp3 for failure

laClor CC1 for failure

5 Air Pressure Switch (DPS) is failed in the N 0 Position

Replace the faulty component as described in Section 8

2 THE FAN IS OPERATING

This indicates that the air pressure switch (DPS) has failed to change over

Measure the profile plate differential pressure as described in Section 4113 If the pressure is correct the air pressure switch is faulty Check the switch as in 4114 If the pressure is not correct

Check 1 Correct fan belt tension

2 Correct fan rotation

3 The air handler air inlets and discharge are not blocked

4 Correct fitting on filters

5 The air differential pressure switch impulse lines are not blocked or leaking

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 28

7 FAULT FINDING 30008

73 LOCKOUT LIGHT IS ILLUMINATED

This light indicates a failure in the burner ignition and flame supervision system

RESET the unit and follow the progress of the start sequence The full cycle may take two minutes

1

------t

2 LOCKOUT after 35-40 seconds indicates an ignition failure RESET the system and observe the pilot and ignition spark during the start-up attempt

I-- shy

3 Observe the spark This should be strong and highly visible If not remove and clean the spark plug as Section 82 Check that the spark plug gap is correctly set at 15 mm

-- shy

4 Check the pilot flame If the pilot flame ignites and the unit goes to LOCKOUT the scanning system is at fault Remove and clean the detector as Section 82 Check the flame signal as in Section 431

5 If the pilot does not light the gas supply system is faulty Check the pilot system for restriction and the pilot valve operation

6 If the pilot lights and the unit goes to LOCKOUT after the main gas valves are addressed either the flow control valve is blocked or one of the main gas block valves has failed Fit a manometer on the pressure test point on the outlet flange of the multishyfunctional control and observe if the pressure rises when the main gas valves are addressed No pressure rise will indicate failure of the main gas valves

74 AIR FAN ON LIGHT ILLUMINATED

If the burner does not start check

1 SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch is in WINTER position

2 Overheat Limit Control

These interlocks prevent the burner management system starting

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 29

8 SERVICING 3000S

IMPORTANT Servicing and maintenance should be only carried out by a RS STOKVIS Ltd approved engineer

Only use replacement parts provided by the appliance manufacturer

Check that the air openings for combustion and for ventilation of any plant roon or compartment are clear

81 ISOLATION

811 FUEL GAS ISOLATION

The fuel gas to the ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler should be isolated and locked off at the manual ball valve mounted at the start of the fuel gas line Additionally before entering or servicing the air handler the burner manual isolation valve and pilot line isolation valve should be closed

812 ELECTRICAL ISOLATION

All electric power to the air handler and the remote control station is switched through the local isolator This isolator is fitted with a lock facility to permit it to be locked in the OFF position

Additionally isolate the power at the Wall Isolator

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 30

8 SERVICING 30005

82 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE

The air handler should be routinely serviced at the start of each heating season Isolate the air handler as above before servicing Details of access to individual components are given in Section 84 of this manual

1 Remove and clean spark igniter Check that the gap is correctly set at 25 mm Replace every two years

2 Clean the flame detector lens to ensure freedom from dirt and moisture If the cell shows any sign of cracks it should be replaced Routinely replace the cell every two years or after 10000 hours of operation which ever comes first

3 Inspect the entire air handler paint system for general damage Repair as necessary

4 Every two years brush the burner plates and clear the burner holes carefully with a Size 18mm drill for NP II and 20mm drill for NP I

WARNING THE BURNER HOLES MUST NOT BE ENLARGED

5 Inspect and lubricate all damper linkages to ensure freedom of operation Wipe off all excess lubricants to prevent dirt build up on linkage parts

6 Check the fan belt for cracks and splits Check tension The correct tension gives 16mm deflection per metre of span when the belt is centrally loaded with a force of 27N Adjust as necessary

7 Grease both the fan shaft bearings with Mobiith AW2 grease or similar

NEVER use high temperature grease

NEVER mix two different greases within the bearing always flush existing grease out

Note Removing the cover plate on the end of the air handler gains access to the outboard fan bearing

Light to Slow to 0 120 2 to 6 months Clean Dry

Medium Medium 120 200 1 to 2 months

Moderate to Light to Slow to 0 120 1 to 4 weeks Dry

Dirty Medium Medium 120 200 1 to 7 days

Extreme Dirt Dry Light to Slow to 0 200 Daily Flushing out

Medium Medium Dirt

83 ANNUAL SERVICE CHECKS

After Servicing test fire the air handler following the Commissioning Procedure detailed in Section 4 of this manual to ensure correct operation generally Special attention must be paid to the damper system and related controls and interlocks

Additionally check that the fresh air and recirculation air entry path to the air handler has been kept clear and instruct the User of the need for this as necessary

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 31

8 SERVICING 3000S

84 REMOVAL PROCEDURE FOR REPLACEABLE COMPONENTS

IMPORTANT

Turn off the gas at the appliance service valve and the electricity at the main panel and wall isolator before proceeding

841 BURNER

The burner is located inside the air handler casing and is mounted on two brackets from the support straps To remove the burner isolate the air handler as in 81 and undo the union on the fuel gas line adjacent to the burner isolation valve (MV6) and unscrew the main and pilot gas feed pipes from the burner rail Access to the rear of the burner assembly is made by removing the partition plate below the burner separating the fresh air inlet to the burner from the return air inlet compartment This is held in place by screws which engage in captive nuts on the top side of the partition Remove the Flame Detector and pull off the ignition plug cap Disconnect the burner support brackets and remove the burner The burner will easily pass through the access hatch for further strip down Replace in the reverse order soundness test the gas pipework check the burner operation and duty as described in the commissioning section of this manual

842 FLAME DETECTOR

This is a 240 Volt instrument

The flame detector is mounted on the end of the burner rail inside the air handler casing To remove the detector isolate the panel electric supply and lock off Push the scanner towards the burner and rotate to release the bayonet fixing and lift the detector from its mount Remove the two screws holding the detector cover and disconnect the supply leads noting the polarity of the connections

Replace the flame detector in the reverse order ensuring correct polarity of connections Ensure the access panel is securely closed and the retaining nuts are tightened down Check operation by inserting a test meter in the points provided in the main control panel and reading the flame signals during start up to full rate burner operation (See 431) Operate the appliance over six starts for reliability of operation including tum off of start and main gas valves to check for lockout operation

843 IGNITER SPARK PLUG

This is a high tension spark plug

The igniter spark plug is mounted on the end of the burner rail inside the air handler casing To remove the spark plug isolate the air handler as above Enter the service access door Access to the spark plug is made through the profile plate To remove the spark plug pull off the high tension lead and unscrew the plug with a plug spanner

When replacing the spark plug check the plug gap is set at 15mm Check ignition reliability over six start ups

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 32

8 SERVICING 3000S

844 IGNITER SPARK TRANSFORMER

This is a 240 Volt instrument

The ignition transformer is located in a plastic box mounted on the air handler casing adjacent to the main control panel To remove the transformer isolate the air handler as above and unscrew the four retaining screws holding the box lid in place and remove the lid Disconnect the supply cable at the terminal strip and undo the transformer retaining screws The transformer may then be unscrewed from the High Tension cable leading to the spark plug

Replacement is a simple reversal of this procedure

Check ignition reliability over six start ups

845 COMBUSTION AIR PRESSURE SWITCH (DPS)

Note The switch is set and sealed and should be replaced if not operating correctly

This switch is a 240 Volt instrument

The air switch is mounted directly on the air handler casing and can be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove the switch isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the supply cable Break the downstream pipe compression fitting and unscrew the switch housing from its locating fitting Reverse the procedure to replace after ensuring switch setting is as specified in Section 13 of this manual Operate the air handler to ensure reliability of operation over six start ups

846 AIR HANDLER OVERHEAT LIMIT CONTROL

This is a 240 Volt instrument

The overheat limit control can be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove the control isolate the air handler as above and lock off Remove the switch cover Disconnect the supply cable and unscrew the control housing from its locating fitting Reverse the procedure to replace check the switch is set to 50degC Test the switch operation as described in Section 43 over at least three operations

847 AIR FAN AND MOTOR

The air fan motor is a 415 Volt 3 phase motor

The motor and slide rails are easily accessible inside the air handler casing If it is necessary to remove the motor isolate the air handler as above Slacken the fan-belt tension and remove the drive belts Pull the motor away from the air handler casing to make access to the motor terminal box and disconnect the supply cable The motor may now be removed from the unit Following replacement the air handler must be fully re-commissioned as in Section 4

It is unlikely that the air fan will need replacing or servicing If required a full procedure should be obtained from RS STOKVIS Ltd

Replacement must be followed by full re-commissioning as in Section 4

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 33

8 SERVICING 3000S

848 FUEL GAS MULTI-FUNCTIONAL CONTROL - SMALL UNITS

This is a 240 Volt instrument

The fuel gas multi-functional control can be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove the unit isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the Hirschman electric termination Unbolt the control from its flanges and remove

When replacing care must be taken to ensure the flange 0 rings are undamaged and in the correct location Following replacement the air handler must be fully reshycommissioned as in Section 4 including tests for soundness prior to start-up

849 GOVERNOR AND BLOCK VALVES

The block valves are 240 Volt instruments

All these items may be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove any item isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the electric termination to the two block valves the pilot block valve and the flow control block valve Break the two pipe unions and remove the fuel gas line complete for further strip-down

8410 FUEL GAS FLOW CONTROL VALVE

This is a 24 Volt instrument

The fuel gas How control valve can be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove the valve isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the supply cables to the control valve

On small air handlers fitted with a multi-functional control support the multi-functional control and unbolt its discharge flange Break the union downstream of the burner isolation valve and remove the section of line containing the flow control valve for further strip-down

On large air handlers fitted with separate block valves it will be necessary to remove the fuel gas line complete as Section 8410 above

Following replacement re-commission the air handler

Note If the fresh air damper is not in the full open position the heat input must not exceed the maximum heat input at recirculation condition specified in the technical data section of this manual

8411 PILOT GAS GOVERNOR AND BLOCK VALVE

The block valve is a 240 Volt instrument

Both items may be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove either item isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the electric terrriination to the solenoid valve Undo the upstream pipe union and the compression fitting downstream of the manual block valve (PV3) Remove the pilot gas line complete for further strip down

Replace broken or distorted connections and retest for soundness Ensure the pilot gas pressure is correct and the flame is sensing an output Ensure reliability over six start-ups

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 34

8 SERVICING 3000S

8412 BELT TENSIONING PROCEDURE

The setting tensions are designed to cover a wide range of drives A precise setting force for individual applications can be calculated as detailed

SETTING FORCES

Belt Section

Setting Force To Deflect Belt 16mm per Metre Of Span

Small Pulley Diameter (mm)

Basic Setting Forces Newtons (N) Kilograms (kgf)

125 x Setting Forces Newtons (N) Kilograms (kgf)

SPZ

56 to 71 16 16 20 20 75 to 90 18 18 22 22

95 to 125 20 20 25 25 Over 125 22 22 28 28

SPA

80 to 100 22 22 28 28 106 to 140 30 30 38 38 150 to 200 36 37 45 46 Over 200 40 40 50 51

SPB

112 to 160 40 40 50 51 170 to 224 50 51 62 63 236 to 355 62 63 77 79 Over 355 65 66 81 83

SPC 224 to 250 70 71 87 89 265 to 355 92 94 115 120 Over 375 115 120 144 150

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 35

8 SERVICING 3000S

BELT TENSIONING USING FENNER BELT TENSION INDICATOR

Calculate the deflection in mm on a basis of 16mm per metre of centre distance Centre Distance (m) x 16 =Deflection (mm)

Set lower marker ring at the deflection distance required in mm on the lower scale

Set upper ring against to bottom edge of the top tube

Place the belt tension indicator on top of the belt at the centre of span and apply a force at right angles to the belt defecting it to the point where the lower marker ring is level with the top of the adjacent belt

Read off the force value indicated by the top edge of the upper marker ring

Compare this force to the kgf value shown in the table above

If a Fenner Belt Tension Indicator is not available a spring balance and rule will be suffice

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 36

8 SERVICING 30005

85 MAIN PANEL CONTROLS

All panel controls are readily accessible and may be easily exchanged for replacement components in the event of failure Ensure any replacement item is of the same make and type as the original

851 LANDIS amp GYR LFL 1335 AUTOMATIC SEQUENCE CONTROLLER

The Landis amp Gyr Automatic Sequence Controller is a plug-in unit locating on a pre-wired chassis To remove the controller undo the two retaining screws at the top left and lower right corners and pull the module off the chassis

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

852 CONTROLS CIRCUIT (24 VOLT) TRANSFORMER

The Controls Circuit Transformer is fixed to the panel back plate by tapped screws To remove the transformer undo the wiring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel Undo the two retaining screws and remove the unit complete

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

853 CONTROL RELAYS R1 R2 amp R3

The Control Relays are DIN Rail mounted To remove a relay undo the wIring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel Release the DIN rail retaining clip under the relay with a screwdriver and remove the relay

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

854 6A MCB

The 6A MCB is DIN Rail mounted To remove the MCB undo the wiring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel Release the DIN rail retaining clip under the MCB with a screwdriver and remove the MCB

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

855 THERMAL OVERLOAD

The thermal overload is attached to the underside of the main contactor To remove the overload undo the wiring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel and that the overload setting is as specified in Section 13 of this manual Unscrew the three connections to the contactor and remove the overload

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 37

8 SERVICING 3000S

856 MAIN CONTACTOR

The Main Contactor is DIN Rail mounted To remove the contactor remove the thermal overload as 855 above and then undo the wiring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel Release the DIN rail retaining clip under the contactor with a screwdriver and remove the contactor

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

857 MOTOR FUSE

To replace a motor fuse pull the fuse carrier off the fuse holder base The fuse is attached to the fuse carrier by two screws Unscrew remove and replace

86 REMOTE CONTROL STATION

The remote control station contains some serviceable parts although these items should only be fitted by an approved RS STOKVIS Ltd Engineer

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 38

9 RECOMMENDED SPARES 3000S

For two years operation it is recommended that the following items should be held in stock

ITEM DESCRIPTION PART NO QUANTITY i

1 INDICATOR BULBS W1121 1 PACK

2 SPARK PLUG 023739 1 I

3 UVDETECTOR QRA10C 1 I

4 ROOM SENSOR DRT2453 1

5 DUCT SENSOR DDT1701 1

All replacement parts can be obtained from RS STOKVIS Ltd by quoting the air handler serial number the part number and description

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 39

APPENDIX 1 30005

SOUNDNESS TESTING THE FUEL GAS PIPEWORK

This procedure should only be carried out by personnel familiar with the ECONO-AIR 3000S Series Air handler

The pressure test points and all valves are identified on the Process and Instrumentation Diagram for the air handler included in Section 1 of this n1anual

Isolate the air handler electric supply at the main control panel and lock off Close the manual isolation valves MV1 MV6 and PV3 Ensure the supply pressure is available on the upstream side of MV1

A11 TESTING THE UPSTREAM PIPEWORKAND BURNER CONTROLS 1 Connect a 60 mbar manometer to the pressure test nipple A Monitor the

pressure for two minutes Any rise in pressure indicates that valve MV1 is leaking and must be replaced Remove pressure test points Band F

2 Open MV1 to pressurise the pipework on both the main gas and pilot line to the first block valve

3 Close MV1 Allow one minute for the temperature to stabilise and then test the system for 2 minutes and watch for a drop in the pipework pressure If the pressure falls open valve MV1 and test the pipework connections and valves from MV1 to MV3 and MV1 to PV2 for leaks with a proprietary leak detector fluid or spray Turn off MV1 seal any leaks and re-test

4 If no extemalleaks are found either the pilot block valve PV1 or either the first main gas block valve MV3 is letting by

5 To test this seal pressure test point A and fit a manometer to pressure test point B Leave for two minutes with MV1 open A rise in pressure on the manometer confirms a leak on the block valve MV3 Turn off MV1 exchange the valve and re-test from point 2 above

6 Repeat this procedure for the pilot block valve Seal test point B and fit a manometer to pressure test point F Leave for two minutes with MV1 open A rise in pressure on the manometer confirms a leak on the pilot block valve PV2 Turn off MV1 exchange the valve and re-test from point 1 above Seal test point F

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 40

APPENDIX 1 30005

A12 TESTING THE DOWNSTREAM BURNER VALVE 1 Close MV1 and connect pressure test points A and 8 with flexible 6 mm bore

tubing teed into the manometer Remove pressure test point C Open MV1 to pressurise the downstream block valve MV4

2 Close MV1 and leave for one minute for the temperature to stabilise Monitor the pressure for 2 minutes If the pressure falls open valve MV1 and leak test the line between the two block valves MV3 and MV4 with a proprietary leak detector Turn off MV1 seal any leaks and re-test Note Smaller air handlers in the 3000S Series are fitted with multi-functional valves combining the pressure regulator and two block valves in one component The above procedure still applies but if a leak is found on either block valve the whole control should be replaced If no external leaks are found the downstream block valve is letting by

3 To confirm this close MV1 remove the manometer and refit to pressure test point C Connect pressure test points A and 8 with flexible 6mm bore tubing Open MV1 and allow one minute for the temperature to stabilise Monitor the pressure for a further 2 minutes with MV1 still open A rise in pressure confirms that the second block valve MV4 is letting by Turn off MV1 Replace the valve and re-test from 2 above

A13 TESTING THE DOWNSTREAM BURNER PIPEWORK 1 Close MV1 and connect pressure test points A and D with flexible 6 mm bore

tubing teed into the manometer Open MV1 to pressurise the downstream pilot pipework

2 Close MV1 and leave for one minute for the temperature to stabilise Monitor the pressure for 2 minutes If the pressure falls open valve MV1 and leak test the line between the downstream block valve MV4 and the manual block MV6 with a proprietary leak detector fluid or spray If no external leaks are found the manual block valve MV6 is letting by Turn off MV1 seal any leakages and reshytest from 2 above

A14 TESTING THE DOWNSTREAM PILOT PIPEWORK 1 Close MV1 and connect pressure test points A and F with flexible 6mm bore

tubing teed into the manometer Open MV1 to pressurise the downstream pilot pipework

2 Close MV1 and leave for one rninute for the temperature to stabilise Monitor the pressure for 2 minutes If the pressure falls open valve MV1 and leak test the line between the downstream block valve PV2 and the manual block PV3 with a proprietary leak detector fluid or spray If no external leaks are found the manual block valve PV3 is letting by Turn off MV1 seal any leakages and reshytest from 2 above

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 41

APPENDIX 1 30005

A15 TESTING THE BURNER CONNECTIONS 1 Remove the burner access panel as described in Section 84 of this manual

Remove the burner spark igniter Slacken the two retaining bolts holding the burner to the burner support straps and unbolt the burner supply endplate from the burner casting and mixing plates

2 Connect pressure test points A and 0 with flexible 6mm bore tubing teed into the manometer Open MV1 and MV6 to pressurise the burner pipework Leak test the main gas burner pipework and connections with proprietary leak detector fluid Turn off MV6 Seal any leakages and re-test

3 Connect pressure test points A and F with flexible 6 mm bore tubing teed into the manometer Open MV1 and PV3 to pressurise the pilot burner pipework Leak test the pilot gas burner pipework and connections with proprietary leak detector fluid Turn off PV3 Seal any leakages and re-test

4 Turn off MV1

5 Replace the spark igniter and profile division plate

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 42

APPENDIX 2 30005

START SEQUENCE

The burner start sequence is controlled by the Landis and Gyr burner management unit The timings are pre-set and comply with 885885 This unit must NOT be tampered with

A brief description of the start-up sequence isshy

The unit checks

1 The NO FLAME signal on the UV flame scanner

Note If the scanner detects a flame at any time other than in the correct operating sequence the flame programmer initiates a lockout

2 The operation of the combustion air proving switch in the NO AIR position

3 The air handler discharge high temperature switch

If the checks are completed the unit starts the combustion air fan and then checks the combustion airflow

Once the airflow is proven the unit checks that the damper control circuit is functioning correctly After the damper microswitch is made to prove the fresh air damper is fully open the sequence allows 30 seconds for the combustion air to purge any combustible gas from the air handler

After completion of the purge the spark ignition system is energised the pilot valve opened and the spark terminated If the pilot flame is not proven by the UV scanner the system will initiate a LOCKOUT

If the flame is proven the main gas valves are opened the pilot extinguished and the main burner flame proven

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 43

i

APPENDIX 2 30008

The following flow chart shows the complete start sequence including the lighting of the various indicating lamps

MANUAL STATUS LIGHT POWER ON

POWER ON

I INITIATE START BY TIME

SETTING ON CONTROLLER

I CHECK NO FLAME

VISIBLE

PROVEj FAIL LOCKOUT

I CHECK RELAY R4 NC

POSITION

PROVE FAIL NO START

I CHECK AIR PRESSURE SWITCH NC POSITION

PROVE FAIL NO START

I CHECK RELAY R1 NC

POSITION

PROVE j

FAIL NO START

I START COMBUSTION

AIR BLOWER

I CHECK AIR PRESSURE SWITCH NO POSITION

PROVE I

FAIL NO START

I STATUS LIGHT FAN ON

I ENERGISE RELAY R1

I

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 44

I

I

APPENDIX 2 30008

I CHECK OVERHEAT LIMIT

CONTROL R5

PROVE I

FAIL I I

CHECK 541412 LOOP CLOSED ON

LANDIS ampGYR CIRCUIT

PROVE I

FAIL I I

COMBUSTION AIR PURGE PERIOD

30 SECONDS

I

NO START

NO START

CANCEL NO FLAME CHECK CIRCUIT

I

ENERGISE SPARK

I TIMED PERIOD 25 SECONDS

I ENERGISE PILOT GAS

VALVE

I TIMED PERIOD 25 SECONDS

I TERMINATE SPARK

I INTERROGATE UV FLAME SCANNER

PROVE I

FAIL I I

TIMED PERIOD 10 SECONDS

I

LOCKOUT

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 45

I

I

APPENDIX 2 3000S

I ENERGISE MAIN GAS

VALVES

I

STATUS LIGHT BURNER ON

I TIMED PERIOD

5 SECONDS

I DE-ENERGISE PILOT

GAS VALVES

CONTINUOUS FROM PILOT

I INTERROGATE UV FLAME SCANNER

PROVE I

FAIL I I

LOCKOUT I

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 46

APPENDIX 3 30005

Please see copy of Standard Service Sheet

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 47

APPENDIX 4 30005

A41 TIME OUT SCREEN

This is the standard screen displayed when the touch screen is not in use The back light is off to save energy_ To access the STATUS screen touch the ENTER key and the following screen is displayed

[]][I][]rn[IJOO[][IJOO[] EJ~E11 I[]I ~ middot I

NOTE

The Touch Screen operates using the heat produced by the touch of a finger and therefore only LIGHT pressure is required

Excessive pressure can damage the Touch Screen

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 48

APPENDIX 4 30008

A42 STATUS SCREEN

On the typical STATUS screen the illustrated information detailed is as follows

19 36 Fan Brn

RS OS

100 Fst_~_ Lck _ _ Xst Gas~o ~ I

RS Indicates the current room temperature

OS ~( t~~ the current duct discharge temperature

Fan Indicates the current status of the fan by showing the arrow and the fan blades for ON and OFF is shown by the arrow and fan blades being removed

Brn Indicates the current status of the burner with the black flames indicating the burner to be ON and vice versa

Lck LOCKOUT - This indicates a flame failure when highlighted during normal or start-up operation

Xst EXCESS TEMPERATURE SWITCH - This indicates the unit has reached the trip limit on the over heat stat when highlighted during operation

Indicates the current position of the gas modulating valve during normal Gas

operation (0-100)

Indicates whether the Frost stat is energised and the unit is running on frost Fst

override

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 49

APPENDIX 4 30008

A43 CHANGING SETTINGS

It is possible to change the settings for the time of operation and the required temperature set points The following details the steps required

A44 ENTERING THE SECURITY CODE

From the STATUS screen touch the return key and the screen below will be displayed

Type the HIGH LEVEL security code (4321) If you make a mistake use the BACK SPACE key to delete any incorrect number(s) Touch the ENTER key when the code is correct

If the security code is incorrect the screen above will be displayed then try again If after several attempts you can not gain access please contact RS STOKVIS Ltd for further information

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 50

APPENDIX 4 30008

When the code is entered correctly the MAIN MENU is displayed as detailed below

~ STATUS SET VALUES~ ~ TIVIE CLOCK [) [) [) [) [)

The MAIN MENU screen shows the three menu items available The title for each menu item can be changed to suit the end user Please notify RS STOKVIS Ltd prior to commissioning should these parameters require special amendments

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 51

APPENDIX 4 30008

A45 CHANGING OR SETTING A TIME SCHEDULE

From the main menu screen select the TIME CLOCK page by running finger across screen symbol and touch the ENTER key the screen below will be displayed

On the following screen highlight the TS1 symbol and touch the ENTER key

The current time schedule will now be displayed as shown below The display will automatically default to the current day (1 =Monday 2 =Tuesday etc) In this case day 5 (Friday) the four schedule switching times refer to that day

IAC6BBB1BHIS1

mm0CIl bull mID 17BB 17BB 17HB

Iillleschedule

To modify a time select it by highlighting and touch the ENTER key and the following screen is displayed

To amend the appropriate onoff time as shown on the screen below The arrows to the right of the time are for altering the hours and the arrows on the left for the minutes

Once you have set the time use the ESCape key to exit back to the time schedule screen and choose another day by touching the required number Another time may now be modified as before

IAC6BBB1BHIS1

H8BH

I i eschedule

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 52

APPENDIX 4 30008

Use the ESCape key to exit back to the MAIN MENU screen

~ STATUS ~ SET VALUES

TIME CLOCK []~ [] [] [] []

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 53

APPENDIX 4 30005

A46 CHANGING SET VALUES

From the main menu screen select the SET VALUES page by highlight in the normal way and touch the ENTER key

The following screen is displayed

36 19 18III III IIIHsv Rsv Llv

To change the RSV highlight it in the normal way and touch the ENTER key and the screen below will now be shown

IAC6RRR1RR40 T I

0 19 (Y)l RSV

ROOM SET VALUE

The above screen shows the parameters that can be changed The values to the far left are the limitations of set point (OC) Change the set point by using the UP and DOWN ARROWS on the left of the screen or touch the set value itself followed by the ENTER key to select the set value and set it directly using the numeric keyboard All values can be changed in this way

Use the ESCape key twice to exit back to the MAIN MENU screen

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 54

APPENDIX 4 30005

A47 COMMISSIONING AND SERVICING BURNER CHECKS

Select the SET VALUES screen from the MAIN MENU screen and adjust the high lirrlit set point to 55degC to drive the burner to high fire

IAC6HHH1HH60 ~T I

0 19 (Y)

HSV

HIGH SET VALUE ~

Ensure the set value is returned to 36degC once the appropriate checks and adjustments as described in Section 43 of this manual have been completed Return to the SET VALUES screen and select the low limit value to adjust the low fire setting

Reduce the low limit value to OdegC to drive the gas valve to low fire and complete the appropriate checks and adjustments as described in Section 43 of this manual and ensure the set value is returned to the original value

A48 GMT ltgt BST CHANGEOVER DAYLIGHT SAVINGS

To change your unit to British Summer TimelWinter Time the following system screen must be highlighted by touching the Iamp1 button twice

By touching the clock symbol in the top left hand corner followed by the ENTER key the screen below will be displayed

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 55

APPENDIX 4 30008

188311 851193

544

By touching and highlighting in this case 18 followed by the ENTER key A small box allowing the entry of two digits will appear Enter the desired time required using the numbered keys followed by ENTER key Your unit is now set to operate on BSTBWT

Touch the ESC key three times to return back to the Status screen

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 56

STOKVIS ENERGY SYSTEMS 96R WALTON ROAD EAST MOLESEY SURREY KT8 0DL TEL 020 8783 3050 08707 707 747 FAX 020 8783 3051 08707 707 767 E-MAIL infostokvisboilerscom WEBSITE wwwstokvisboilerscom

JULY 1999

Page 5: ECONOAIR 3000S SERIES AIR HANDLING UNIT DIRECT FIREDstokvisboilers.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/EconoAir... · 2019-05-10 · ECONOAIR 3000S SERIES AIR HANDLING UNIT DIRECT FIRED

TABLE OF CONTENTS 30008

APPENDIX 1

SOUNDNESS TESTING THE FUEL GAS LINE 40 A11 Testing the Upstream Pipework and Burner Controls 40 A12 Testing the Downstream Burner Valve 41 A13 Testing the Downstream Burner Pipework 41 A14 Testing the Downstream Pilot Pipework 41 A15 Testing the Burner Connections 42

APPENDIX 2

START SEQUENCE 43

APPENDIX 3

SERVICE CHECK SHEET 47

APPENDIX 4

TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER ~ 48 A41 Time Out Screen 48 A42 Status Screen 49 A43 Changing Settings 50 A44 Entering the Security Code 50 A45 Changing or Setting a Time Schedule 52 A46 Changing Set Values 54 A47 Commissioning and Servicing Burner Checks 55

A48 GMTltgtBST Changeover (Daylight Saving) 55

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 4

1 TECHNICAL DATA 30008

SPECIFICATION

308 99shy

CE 0087

G20 87AQ371

NA

17

10

5

415V 50Hz 3ph 4 Wire

A

kg

IE

JULY 1999 SAMPLE PageS

1 TECHNICAL DATA 30008

UTILITIES

AIR HANDLER UTILITIES

FUELi NATURAL GAS

MAXIMUM FUEL SUPPL Y PRESSURE 25 mbar

MINIMUM FUEL SUPPL Y PRESSURE 15 mbar

ELECTRIC SUPPL Y TO CONTROL PANEL WITH NEUTRAL WIRE

415V 50Hz 3ph 4 Wire

SUPPLY RATING Amps

MOTOR FUSES

Notes

Air handler models 3018S to 3040S inclusive of STOKVIS ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handlers have been certificated by British Gas Pic for use on Natural Gas only It does not cover the use of distribution ducting filters and high level or external installations The other air handlers in the range are designed and built to the same parameters and standards as the certificated sample

Your attention is drawn to the limitations on location for recirculation air handlers detailed in Section 33

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 6

1 TECHNICAL DATA 30008

SETTINGS (AS SHIPPED)

AIR HANDLER SETriNGS (AS SHIPPED) I

I

IAIR PRESSURE SWITCH rnbar

OVERHEAT LIMIT CONTROL 65degC

PILOT BURNER GAS PRESSURE 100 mbar

MAXIMUM 50 mbar MAIN BURNER GAS PRESSURES

MINIMUM 10 mbar

MAXIMUM AT RECIRCULATION CONDITION NA

OVERLOAD Amps

FAN SPEED rpm

MAXIMUM 16 mbarDIFFERENTIAL AIR PRESSURE ACROSS PROFILE PLATE MINIMUM 14 mbar

GAS CONNECTION SIZE BSP

TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER

ACCESS CODE 4321 I

TEMPERATURE SETPOINT (Code 00) 19degC i

SAMPLE INTERVAL (Code 01) 2 sec I

DISCHARGE LOW LIMIT (Code 02) 18degC

DISCHARGE HIGH LIMIT (Code 03) 36degC

Note For air handler dimensions please refer to the General Arrangement Drawing

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 7

~------------------~--~

~~O~~C~~~__-__~~middot~~I~~______________-1~~~__~~-=~~=-~i

COMPONENT UST

BURNER

AIR FAN MOTOR

FAN DRIVE

CONTROL PANEL

REMOTE PANEL

SERVICES

FUEL

UAX SUPPLY PRESSURE MIN SUPPLY PRESSURE

ELECTRICITY

BLOCK VALVES

Serial No

bullbull IlICh NPII

kW 1+4ORPM

NA

3-30005-100 RevO DOL Start

N

NATURAL GAS

25mbor 1gtmbor

15V5OHz3Ph4W1RE Motor FLC bullbullbull Amps

240V 50Hz 1Ph 3 WIRE

Site Address

TAG DESCRIPTION WI SUPPLY ISOlATION VALve

W2 JW3 MULTIBLOCKMY MV5 FLOW CONTROL VALve WS BURNER ISOLATION VALVE

PVl PILOT PRESSURE REGULATOR PV2 PILOT SOlpoundNOIO VALve PV3 PILOT ISOlATION VALve

TC SPACE lEMPERATURE CONTROUER TO DISCHARGE TEMPERATURE DETECTOR TR SPACE TEMPERATURE DElECTOR TS OISCHARGE TEMPERATURE swrrCH

PS AIR PRESSURE swrrCH

UV fLAt4E DETECTOR

t SPARK IGNITER

NOTE f INIlICATES PRpoundSSURE TEST POM

Client

srOKVIS END USERS ADDRESS END USER

RS STOKVIS amp SONS Ltd POOL ROAD WEST MOLESEY SURREY KT8 2HN

Ident T45

shyomiddot BVIoI 0 145

1 DJSO 1 GBlA 14 T45

1AC600 00T1701 DRT3453 RAK13bullbull170

lWGJ

ORAtO 023739

PILOT LINE

fRtsH Nfl HET

Title TITLE

Model No Seri4l No DutY Style

Tel 0181 941 1212 Fax 0181 941 4136

00lCIIAAGE 10 WORIltSPAtt

305 99- m3sINDOOR HORIZONTAL

ACStw -_nora I-ID_raw_-+I__-I

Checked

CONTROL Approved

o-1 CommentApproval

Rev IDote I Description

Computer No 99

Purchase Order No

Drawing No

4-MR-001 R~O~

NOTES1shy

I PROPOSED LOCATION TO BE CHECKED tOR LEVEL AND LOAD BEARING STRENGTH BY OTHERS

2 UNIT TO BE SUPPLIED IN SEPERATE SECTIONS FOR LIFTING INTO PLANTROOM AND ON TO BASE BY OTHERS

3 ALL SECTIONS TO HAVE TIJO BEADS OF SEALANT BETJEEN OPPOSING FLANGES AS PER SUPPLIED INSTALL ATlON INSTRUCTIONS

ltI ENSURE ALL BUILDERS JORK IS CARRIED OUT AND MADE GOOD AFTER INSTALLATION BY OTHERS

5 ALL EXTERNAL JIRING SHALL BE CARRIED OUT BY COMPETENT PERSON TO CURRENT lEE REGULATIONS

DISCHARGE OPENING lUOlElIE VIDE X lIE HIG CV 3011 MEZ FLANGE

Serial No

sroKVIS Site Address Client END USERS ADDRESS END USER

ACCESS OPENING

~L---gt lt0-shy

~ ~

GAS CONNECTIONS

CONTROL PANEL 60011 VIDE X 600111 HIGH

APPROX VEIGHTSshy

HEATER CASING - 1I0U( KG

IJCL OOCUUef IDrawn lACS

Checked

I RS STOKVIS amp SONS Ltd POOL ROAD WEST MOLESEY SURREY KT8 2HN Tel 0181 941 1212 fax 0181 941 4136 CONTROL IApproved

o I~ I CommentApproval

Rev IDate IDescription

Computer No

99 Purchase Order No

Drawing No

3-MR-005

415VOlT5OHz 4 WIRE sumy

lIfEI_-shy~a

30131

2_F11

3 TOO---shy

B (

Serial No

~s

~~~~

~ NIt 9lOIElIliOTt)R RA11NG~W

STOKVIS

0 reg

-0

0 0 lt0

u ~

R5-1 -

ADDRESS

shy

regshy

~tl

GAS v IoIOtQR AIIIfONGTll LEGEND

IHlmN PNEI _

-e- PNEl_

Sl1pound_

-11shy IJIfClIOII1IO~-

DUCT STAT NPE COt 17tll

_STAT NPE om 3lt4Il)

~~~pound~ niR~~ (i)l

~ ()1

_cbullbullL~ nmiddoti Apoundm

USER

~ ~

SCHEMATIC FOR 3000S SERIES AIR

IAC600 BASED

RS STOKVIS amp SONS Ltd POOL ROAD WEST MOLESEY SURREY KT8 2HN Tel 0181 941 1212 Fax 0181 941 4136

_[---------f P(N(J ON

ICHI11ONTfWiSFORlER

PllOT V IIEIi CAS VAllIE 1

II CAS VAllIE 2

~_ON

lOCKOUT

s

o Rev I Dote I Description

Computer No 99

Purchase Order No

Drawing No

3-MR-100 Rev

o

30005 2 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

21 INTRODUCTION

The STOKVIS ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler is a direct fired unit designed to give clean healthy environmental conditions and constant even temperature within the heated space

The main air handler assembly houses the circulating air fan the gas burner the fuel gas line and all necessary safety controls The burner management system and space temperature controller is located in the main control panel mounted on or adjacent to the side of the air handler A second control station supplied loose for mounting remote from the air handler within the heated space or other convenient location houses indicating lights the control touch screen and auxiliary operational switches

A sight glass is fitted on the air handler casing to view the burner during operation

For multi unit networked applications the touch screen is excluded

22 GAS BURNER ASSEMBLY

The ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler incorporates the Maxon NP-II burner This burner is specially designed for heating fresh air and is mounted such that a proportion of the incoming air is forced into contact with the flame to ensure rapid mixing and combustion within the code requirements The burner assembly is built up from modular components to give the required heat duty

Each burner assembly is fitted with an integral pilot spark igniter and UV detector The flame detector is used for scanning both the pilot and main flame Note that the pilot burner operates in interrupted mode

The burner module fitted is identified in the Technical Data Section of this manual and on the Valve and Instrun1ent list

23 CONTROL SYSTEM

The controls fitted on the air handler are detailed on the Process amp Instrumentation Diagram in the Technical Data Section of this manual

231 SAFETY CONTROLS

The safety interlocks on the ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler are

1 Combustion air proving switch (PS) 2 Ultra-violet burner flame detector (UV) 3 Overheat limit control (OLe)

Failure of either the combustion air switch or fiame scanning circuit will cause the air handler to go to LOCKOUT and the burner management system will require a RESET before a re-light can be attempted

The air handler discharge overheat limit control is a manual reset switch After a failure the switch will have to be RESET before a re-light can be attempted

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 8

2 GENERAL DESCRIPTION 3000S

232 TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEM

The ECONO-AIR 30008 Series air handler is fitted with a full three-term modulating temperature control system as standard The space temperature is sensed by a heated space detector (TR) which inputs to the panel mounted temperature controller (TC) This achieves control by modulation of the fuel gas flow control valve (MV5) The temperature controller additionally limits the air handler discharge air temperature measured by the discharge temperature detector (TO) to pre-set high and low limits

233 MAIN CONTROL PANEL

The control panel houses the combustioncirculation air fan starter the burner management system and the heated space temperature controller On larger units a separate starter panel may be supplied The panel door is fitted with an interlocked isolator POWER ON and LOCKOUT lights and the burner management RESET button The panel is mounted on or adjacent to the air handler

234 FUEL GAS SYSTEM

The PILOT LINE comprises 1 Pilot governor (PV1 ) 2 One British Gas certificated solenoid valve (PV2) 3 One pilot gas isolation valve (PV3) 4 Pipework and fittings

Note Two pressure test points are fitted on the pilot line on the inlet and discharge of the pilot solenoid valve

The MAIN GAS LINE comprises

1 Gas isolation valve (MV1 ) 2 Pressure governor (MV2) 3 Double block safety shut-oft system (MV34) 4 Gas flow control valve (MV5) 5 Burner isolation valve (MV6) 6 Pipework and fittings

Note Four pressure test points are fitted on the n1ain gas line on the supply the inlet and discharge of the second block valve and downstream of the flow control valve

Note On small air handlers items 2 and 3 are combined in one multi-functional control

All items above are detailed on the Process amp Instrumentation Diagram in Section 1 of this manual

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 9

2 GENERAL DESCRIPTION 3000S

235 REMOTE CONTROL STATION

The ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler is also supplied with a remote control station which houses the air handler operating controls indicating status and the workspace temperature detector if the control station is located in the heated space

236 HEATED SPACE TEMPERATURE SENSOR The heated space temperature sensor is to be located remotely within the space to be heated

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 10

3 INSTALLATION 30005

31 STATUTORY REQUIREMENTS

I n accordance with the Gas Safety (I nstallation and Use) Regulations 1998 installation of this ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler should only be undertaken by competent personnel who are fully aware of their responsibilities under the Health and Safety at Work Act 1974

The installation of this air handler must comply with

BS6230-1991 Installation of gas-fired forced convection air air handlers for commercial and industrial Space Heating of rated input exceeding 60kW

The lEE Regulations for Electrical Installations

Gas Safety (Installation and Use) Regulations 1998

Health and Safety at Work Act 1974

Building Regulations 1986

Building Standards (Scotland Only)

The I nstitution of Gas Engineers Codes of Practice

IGEUP1 Soundness Testing Procedures for Industrial and Commercial Gas Installations

IGEUP2 Gas Installation Pipework Boosters and Compressors on Industrial and Commercial Premises

IGEUP4 Commissioning Of Gas Fired Plant On Industrial and Commercial Premises

32 RECEPTION AND STORAGE OF GOODS

32laquo1 RECEPTION

On receipt of the shipment check that the shipment is complete against the Delivery Advice Note Check for mechanical damage sustained during transit before off-loading the goods Inform the carrier of any such damage

322 OFFLOADING

Horizontal air handlers are fitted with four lifting eyes to permit an overhead lift Alternatively horizontal air handlers may be handled by a fork lift truck on the steel angle support frame

323 STORAGE

Air handlers must be stored in a dry environment The remote control station must be removed from the shipment and stored indoors in a dry environment Outdoor units of split case design (Size 54 and above) must have open ends protected from the environment until installation is complete Any filter elements should be stored in a dry environment

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 11

3 INSTALLATION 3000S

33 LIMITATIONS OF USE

The ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler must not be installed in the following locations

I n hazardous areas

In areas where flammable vapours can be present in excess of their threshold limit values as defined in 8S5925

I n accordance with 8S6230 Clause 513 where there are any flued appliances in the heated area and where air is supplied mechanically and there is mechanical extraction the design extract rate must be 5 to 10 less than the design inlet rate so that the room will not be at a lower pressure than the outside air If the air handler is the only source of mechanically supplied air the extract rate must not exceed 95 of the nominal air flow specified in Section 11 of this manual

Note If it proposed to install the ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler to supply heated air to a hazardous area or in areas where flammable vapours are present the installation must first be approved by a RS STOKVIS Ltd Engineer

34 LOCATION OF AIR HANDLERS

The air handler should normally be installed in the location recommended by the RS STOKVIS Ltd specifying engineer

Check the proposed location for level and load bearing strength Ensure that there is adequate clearance as detailed on the air handler GA in Section 1 this manual around the unit for access for maintenance purposes If the air handler is to be installed above floor level a suitably designed service platform should be provided Such a platform must have 100mm minimum raised edges around the perimeter If this is not possible all air handler access panels must be fitted with hinged restraints This is a factory standard option which should be specified at the time of ordering - check the restraints are fitted before proceeding with installation

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 12

3 INSTALLATION 3000S

35 FRESH AIR INLET AND VENTILATION

351 FRESH AIR INLET

The air handler must be installed where it has a direct and unlimited supply of fresh air from outside the building Ensure that the air intake is not located near exhausts from the building or from any process exhausts such as paint booth exhausts Whenever possible protect the fresh air inlet from the prevailing wind and local wind effects from corners

The fresh air inlet should be sized for an air velocity of 3ms The inlet duct area is detailed on the General Arrangement drawing located in Section 1 of this manual

Where the fresh air inlet is made in a load bearing wall eg a brick wall guidance should be obtained from Structural Engineers on the provision of a lintel in the wall over the fresh air opening

A weather hood must be fitted when the air handler air inlet is at or within 1 m of the outside wall Additionally the weather hood should have negligible resistance to the airflow maximum 01 mbar at the design air flow rate

Do not install the ECONO-AI R 3000S Series air handler where long lengths of duct or bends of an angle greater than 30deg are necessary to lead to the air handler from the fresh air opening If ducting is unavoidable ensure that the resulting pressure drop is negligible Le less than 01 mbar for ductless air handlers and has been accounted for in the original design for ducted air handlers as detailed in the specification section of this manual Section 11

Note If the air intake is located in an area of unrestricted access warning notices preventing the blockage of the air intake by temporary stacking should be displayed adjacent to the intake

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 13

3 INSTALLATION 3000S

352 VENTI LA TION

Where the air air handler is in its own plant room or compartment this shall be ventilated with openings communicating directly with the outside air to ventilate the room

The openings shall be fitted with grilles of negligible resistance and shall be sited so that they cannot easily be blocked or flooded They shall have a total minimum free area as follows

Low Level (inlet) 320cm2 + 27cm2 per kilowatt in excess of 60kW total rated input

High Level (outlet) 160cm2 + 134cm2 per kilowatt in excess of 60kW total rated input

The free area of the grilles shall be not less than the size of the recommended minimum ventilation opening Grilles shall be designed to minimise high velocity air streams in the plant room For exposed ie free standing plant rooms ventilation openings shall be provided on at least two sides and preferably on all four sides

Where mechanical ventilation is used it shall be by mechanical inlet and either natural or mechanical extraction Systems of ventilation employing mechanical extraction and natural air inlet shall not be used

The minimum flow rates of air supplied shall be not less than 06 m3s per megawatt of rated heat input

36 AIR DISCHARGE

The air handler should be located with the air discharge into the heated space at a minimum height of 3 metres The air should not discharge directly onto any obstructions and direct discharge on to working personnel should be avoided

If the air discharge is located in an area of unrestricted access warning notices preventing the blockage of the air discharge by temporary stacking should be displayed adjacent to the discharge

Generally it is not necessary to fit distribution ducting to the discharge of the air handler If ducting is required or specified ensure that the resulting pressure drop has been accounted for in the original design specification as detailed in Section 1 of this manual

37 ASSEMBLY AND POSITIONING OF AIR HANDLER

Unless specified at the time of order air handlers will be shipped in sections Discharge heads grilles attenuators duct connecting sections filters rain-hoods etc will be supplied loose for site fitting to the air handler

Horizontal air handlers must be supported on their steel angle support base When the air handler is located check for level and adjust as necessary

Alternatively horizontal air handlers can be supplied with extensions of the support frame for suspending from overhead supports This must be specified at the time of order Do not suspend the air handler from the lifting eyes

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 14

3 INSTALLATION 3000S

38 REMOTE STATION

The ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler is supplied with a remote control station This should be mounted in a position convenient to the end user If possible it should not be mounted on an external wall or where the space temperature detector is affected by cold draughts or a local source of heat

39 VISUAL CHECK

After completion of installation re-check the air handler for signs of damage Report any instance to RS STOKVIS Ltd

310 CONNECTION OF SERVICES

The air handler requires the connection of fuel gas and electricity

3101 FUEL GAS SUPPLY

The ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler has been designed for use on Natural Gas An alternative version is available for LPG The gas type for the air handler supplied is clearly marked on the air handler data badge and on the Specification sheet in Section 1 of this manual Check the gas type is correct and that the supply pressure is within the range marked on the specification

The local gas Authority should be consulted about the adequacy of the gas service and meter supplies for existing and proposed extensions to the installation and for any requirements for boosting the gas supply_

Connect the fuel gas supply to the inlet manual valve on the air handler gas train The connection size is detailed in Section 1 of this manual A further isolation valve and union should be fitted immediately adjacent to the appliance which when the valve is closed allows the complete burner and control assembly to be disconnected for maintenance or repair

New gas pipework should be installed to British Gas Publication IGEUP2 and be purged and pressure tested in accordance with British Gas Publications IGEUP1

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 15

3 INSTALLATION 3000S

3102 ELECTRICITY SUPPLY

All external wiring shall be carried out and checked by a competent person All components shall be checked for suitability for voltage range and frequency

Means for electric isolation having a contact separation of at least 3mm in all poles must be provided adjacent to the air handler The electrical supply to the appliance shall incorporate suitable means of excess current protection

The ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler requires a 3 phase 4 wire supply which should be connected to the main control panel Check the air handler data badge for the correct electrical supply The maximum supply requirement is Specified in Section 1 of this manual Note that the 240 Volt air handler control circuit is taken from the lUI phase to Neutral Connection should be made as shown on the wiring diagram shipped inside this panel

The air handler must be earthed in accordance with BS5986 and CP1013

Check all terminal strip terminations for wires which have become loose during shipment

311 CONNECTION TO THE MAIN PANEL AND REMOTE STATION

Interconnecting wiring to the main panel and remote station should be made with a minimum specification of 075 mm2 300 Volt cable Check that no wires on the terminal strip have become loose during shipment The remote panel should be mounted at a height of approx 18m If possible it should not be mounted on an external wall or where the sensor will be affected by cold draughts or a local source of heat

Both panel and remote station must be earthed in accordance with BS5986 and CP1013

312 HEATED SPACE TEMPERATURE SENSOR

The space temperature sensor located on the remote panel should be connected with screened cable or twin low voltage signal cable run in its own separate conduit It should be mounted on the remote panel or adjacent to the outlet at a height of approx 18m If possible it should not be mounted on an external wall or where the sensor will be affected by cold draughts or a local source of heat

313 DUCT SENSOR

The duct sensor should be connected with screened cable or twin low voltage signal cable run in its own separate conduit It should be mounted in the air handler discharge as close as possible to the discharge into the heated space

314 OVERHEAT LIMIT CONTROL SENSOR

The overheat limit control sensor should be connected with twin core cable It should be mounted in the air handler discharge within 1 metre of the air handler outlet connection

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 16

3 INSTALLATION 3000S

315 TOUCH SCREEN WIRING

The touch screen located on the front of the remote station requires two separate twisted pairs of O5mrh2 screened cable run in a separate conduit If the distance between the main and remote stations is greater that 1 km please contact RS STOKVIS Ltd for advice

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 17

3 INSTALLATION 3000S

316 ALIGNMENT

3161 INSTALLATION OF DRIVE BELTS

On 80 amp 89 30008 range of air handlers it will be necessary to align the pulleys and fit the drive belts before carrying out commissioning of the unit

3162 PU LLEYS

Before assembling the drive check the pulley grooves are free from scores or sharp edges and all dimensions conform to the relevant standard

The Taper Lock bush is your starting point when it comes to assembly and installation Drive installation is a straightforward job with Taper Lock - but the stages set out on the installation leaflet provided with every Taper Lock bush should be followed closely

3163 ALIGNMENT

Good alignment of pulleys prior to belt installation is important to avoid belt flank wear The diagram below shows correct installation of pulleys

INTERNAl BEARING

MOTOR PUlLEY rAN PULLEY

MOTORMOTOR ADJUSTMENT MOUNTING BOlTSBOLTS

3164 BELTS

When the pulleys have been correctly positioned on the shafts the belts can be installed to complete the drive

The drive centre distance should be reduced prior to the installation of the belts so that they may be fitted without the use of force Under no circumstances must belts be prised into the grooves Using sharp tools to stretch the belts over the pulley rim can easily damage belts and pulley grooves

The installation allowance given in the table below is the minimum recommended reduction in centre distance for various belt section and lengths to allow for correct fitting

The take-up allowance given in the same table should be added on to the calculated centre distance to allow for belt stretch

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 18

3 INSTALLATION 3000S

3165 INSTALLATION AND TAKE UP ALLOWANCE

Belt Pitch Installation Allowance Take-Up Length (mm) SPZ SPA SPB SPC (mm)

410 to 530 5

540 to 840 10

850 to 1160 15

1170 to 1500 20

1510 to 1830 20 25

1840 to 2170 30

2180 to 2830 25 40

2840 to 3500 30 50

3520 to 4160 50 60

4170 to 5140 70

5220 to 6150 85

6180 to 7500 105

600 to 8500 125

8880 to 10170 145

10600 to 12500 175

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 19

4 COMMISSIONING 30005

This appliance must be commissioned by a RS STOKVIS Ltd approved engineer

41 PRESTART CHECKS

1 Switch the SUMMERIOFFMlINTER switch on the remote station to OFF

2 Check the correct electric supply is available to the air handler and the appliance isolator installed

3 Check the correct fuel gas supply is available to the air handler and local isolation valve and union installed Check that new gas pipe work has been correctly purged and pressure tested and that the isolation valve is in the OFF position

4 Check the air handler gas control system and burner connections for pressure soundness as detailed in Appendix 1 of this manual

5 Complete the first section of the Service Check Sheet supplied at the back of this manual (Appendix 3)

6 Close the air handler access door

7 Close and lock the main air handler control panel

8 Switch the main panel isolator to position 1 Check the POWER ON light illuminates

9 Check and set the timed ONOFF periods in the lAC Controller located on the remote panel Ensure that the unit is set to be on during testing Refer to Appendix 4 for the lAC setting procedure

10 Close and lock the remote panel

11 Switch the SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch on the remote station to SUMMER to start the air fan Return the switch to the OFF position and check for correct rotation of the fan as the fan slows and stops

The fan rotation can be observed through the fan section access door or through the air handler access door Only do this during the fan run-down period Ensure the door is securely fastened after completion

Rotation arrows are fitted on the end of the air handler and inside the air handler above the interior bearing support If the rotation is incorrect two phases should be interchanged as dictated by the Engineer responsible for the site electrical system

12 Check the air pressure drop across the burner whilst the fan is operating with a water column pressure gauge connected to the two pressure test points on the air pressure switch (DPS) This pressure should be between 14 and 16 rnbar

If the air differential pressure measured above is not within the operating range check inlet and outlet ductwork as appropriate and any filters fitted If the pressure differential is still not within limits isolate the air handler and report to RS STOKVIS Ltd before proceeding

13 Check the operation and setting of the Low Air Pressure Switch by injecting a controlled signal into the switch Check the break point on the switch is 1 mbar (falling)

Note The switch is set and sealed before fitting The 1 mbar switch point may not coincide with the 1 mbar scale reading on the switch

If on checking the switch is not operating correctly do not tamper with it return it to RS STOKVIS Ltd for replacement

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 20

4 COMMISSIONING 3000S

42 DRY RUN

With all the manual gas isolation valves still in the OFF position switch the SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch to WINTER

43 START UP

1 Attach a manometer to pressure test point F and the low pressure test point on the air pressure switch (DPS)

2 Open the main gas supply valve (MV1) and the pilot burner isolation valve (PV3) Leave the main burner isolation valve (MV6) closed Reset the air handler by pressing the push-button marked RESET on either the main panel or remote station The air handler pilot will light automatically (after the automatic damper start check and combustion air pre-purge) and then LOCKOUT after the main gas shut-off valves are addressed

During the short period that the pilot is in operation check the pilot gas pressure on the manometer It should be 10 mbar and the pilot flame approximately 100 - 150mm in length covering the first three or four holes of the mixing plate and have a steady blue colour when viewed through the sight glass on the access side of the air handler Adjust as necessary - refer to Section 51 this manual Check the flame signal - refer to Section 431

3 Open the main burner isolation valve (MV6) RESET the air handler which should now light to main burner stage When alight close the main burner isolation valve to shut down the gas flow to the burner Check that the unit goes to LOCKOUT

4 Reset the air handler and drive the burner to low fire by adjusting the temperature controller set point as described in Appendix 4 of this manual Check the flame is continuous across the width of the burner and has a flame length of approx 50 - 65mm from the burner rail when viewed through the sight glass on the access side of the air handler Check the burner pressure across pressure test point D and the downstream (low) pressure test point on the air pressure switch ie on the rear of the pressure switch This pressure is specifled in Section 1 of this manual Adjust as necessary-refer to Section 53 of this manual Check the flame signal - refer to Section 431

Where possible check the actual gas flow rate by meter reading with all other appliances turned off

5 Drive the burner to high fire by adjusting the temperature controller set point and high limit to 55degC as described in Appendix 4 of this manual Check the flame is continuous across the burner rail and has a flame length of approximately 250 - 350mm from the burner rail Check the burner pressure across pressure test point D and the downstream (low) pressure test point on the air pressure switch This pressure is specified in Section 1 of this manual Adjust as necessary - refer to Section 52 of this manual Check the maximum air handler discharge temperature Check the flame signal shyrefer to Section 431

Where possible check the actual gas flow rate by meter reading with all other appliances turned off

6 Check the operation of the overheat limit control by adjusting the temperature controller set point and high limit to 65degC as described in Appendix 4 of this manual Monitor the discharge temperature on the temperature controller Check that the overheat control operates as the set temperature is passed Check that the control must be manually reset by pressing the green reset button on the front of the switch Return the temperature controller to its original settings

In the event that the ambient temperature is too low for this simple procedure to work the instrument will have to be bench tested using a Temperature 8ath Remove and replace the control as Section 84 of this manual for bench-testing

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 21

4 COMMISSIONING 3000S

43 1 FLAME SIGNAL CHECK

1 The ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler is fitted with a Klippon SAKT1 Test Terminal which can be used to measure the flame scanning signal Refer to the Electrical Schematic and connect a 0-1 mA ammeter to the two test points with standard 23 mm test plugs with the positive lead on the detector side Disconnect the terminal link to obtain the signal reading A minimum signal of 70 microamps is required typical signals are in the 250-400 microamp range on both pilot and main flame After completion replace the terminal link and remove the test jacks

2 Drive the burner to high fire as previously described Measure the carbon dioxide content of the discharge air stream This figure must not exceed 2800 ppm If the discharge exceeds this limit isolate the air handler and report to RS STOKVIS Ltd before proceeding

Stop and start the air handler a few times to check for reliability using the Operating Instructions (Section 6)

432 HANDOVER

Complete the air handler Service Check Sheet supplied at the back of this manual The self-copy sheet must be returned to STOKVIS for checking

Instruct the User in efficient use and care of the unit start-up and shutdown (including emergency shutdown) and recommended service interval Emphasise the need to keep the air handler clear of stored items and extraneous material and to maintain the recirculation and fresh air paths to the air handler inlets Hand all instructions as applicable to the UserOwner for safekeeping

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 22

5 ADJUSTMENTS 3000S

If adjustments to the air handler settings are required they should be made by a RS STOKVIS Ltd approved engineer

The normal value for all control settings is specified in Section 1 of this manual

51 PILOT ADJUSTMENT

The pilot gas pressure and flame length may be adjusted by altering the discharge pressure of the pilot governor Screwing the adjusting screw clockwise (located under the top cap) increases the discharge pressure and the flame length anti-clockwise decreases the pressure and the flame length

52 BURNER HIGH FIRE PRESSURE ADJUSTMENT

At high fire alter the spring compression on the main burner governor (MV2) by removing the cap and adjust the spring compression plate clockwise to increase the burner pressure anti-clockwise to decrease burner pressure If the pressure does not increase on adjusting the spring the supply is inadequate

Note On small air handlers fitted with a mUlti-functional control the pressure adjusting screw is located under a swing cap on the first block valve

53 BURNER LOW FIRE ADJUSTMENT

The main burner low fire is adjusted on the flow control valve MV5 (Process amp Instrumentation Diagram)

Remove the top cover of the valve and insert a Terminal Screwdriver in the adjusting screw of the TOP cam marked NI

Drive the burner to low fire by adjusting the temperature controller set-point and high limit to 05degC as described in Appendix 4 of this manual

Turn the Terminal Screwdriver clockwise to decrease the low fire gas flow anti-clockwise to increase the flow

Check the heat input and flame signal at the new position are satisfactory and return the tenlperature controller to its normal settings

Replace the control valve cover

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 23

5 ADJUSTMENTS 3000S

54 SUMMERIOFFIWINTER SWITCH

In the SUMMER position this switch provides ventilation only and is independent of the programmed ON and OFF periods This position is manually selected and must be manually de-selected Whenever the switch is in this position the fan is operating

In the OFF position the air handler is shutdown and will not operate This overrides any frost protection fitted It is suitable for air handler shutdown for short periods such as holidays The programme memory is unaffected by this switch and assumes control of the air handler when the switch is returned to the WINTER position

In the WINTER position the air handler operates off the programme memory to provide heating

55 RESET BUTTON

Visual indication of air handler lockout is provided In the event of lockout occurring the air handler can be reset by depressing the RESET button This parallels the RESET button on the air handler main control panel If after 4 attempts to reset the air handler the lockout indicator still illuminates then a Service Engineer should be called to investigate the problem

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 24

6 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 3000S

61 AIR HANDLER START-UP

1 Open all manual gas valves both on the appliance and on the supply to the appliance Switch on the Electric Supply to the appliance

2 On the main air handler panel

Switch the panel isolator to the 1 position

Check POWER ON light

3 On the remote control station

For Heating Switch the SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch to WINTER

The air handler will now start automatically in response to the time settings

In the event of LOCKOUT

Press the RESET button and the cycle of operations will be repeated If the air handler goes to LOCKOUT four times in succession call for a Service Engineer

For Unheated Ventilation Switch the SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch to SUMMER

Note This prevents the burner firing giving a controlled supply of ventilation air to the heated space as long as the switch is in this position The air handler will now start automatically in response to the timeclock demand To turn the fan off return the switch to the centre OFF position

In the event of LOCKOUT

Press the RESET button and the cycle of operations will be repeated If the air handler goes to LOCKOUT four times in succession call for a Service Engineer

62 AIR HANDLER SHUTDOWN

621 SHUTDOWN FOR SHORT PERIODS

Switch the SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch on the remote station to OFF

622 SHUTDOWN FOR PROLONGED PERIODS

Switch the main panel isolator to the 0 position and close all manual gas valves both on and leading to the appliance

Note Manual gas valves should only be operated when the appliance is to be shut off for either Servicing or for a prolonged shutdown

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 25

30005 6 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

63 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS

631 SITE CLEARANCE ADJACENT TO AIR HANDLER

Attention should be paid to keeping the area around the air handler tidy No rubbish should be allowed to accumulate in the vicinity of the air handler and storage of goods etc should not be permitted within two metres of the air handler Failure to comply could result in reduced airflow to the air handler causing inefficient running and potential overheat cond ition

632 AIR SUPPLY TO AIR HANDLER

Air vents and grilles supplying air to the air handler should never be blocked and should be checked periodically to ensure they are clear

633 AIR FILTERS

Similarly attention should be paid to cleaning or replacing the filters to the air handler if fitted Your installer should advise you on the frequency with which this would be required to be completed

634 SERVICE

For continued safe and efficient operation of this air air handler it is important that servicing of the air handler should be completed at regular intervals by a competent person in accordance with Section 82 of this manual Users are advised to enter into a Service Agreement with RS STOKVIS Ltd

635 SPARE PARTS

It is suggested that a complete set of spare parts essential to the running of the air handler and recommended by the installer are kept by the user on the premises where the air handler is installed This is particularly important where the air handler forms an essential part of any process plant and its being out of operation may cause problems by for example frost damage or condensation by super-cooling

A list of Recommended Spares will be found in Section 9 of this manual

636 GAS LEAKS

If a smell of gas is detected around the area of the appliance Switch off all manual gas valves and contact your service engineer or the local gas undertaking

NEVER

LOOK FOR GAS LEAKS WITH A LIGHTED MATCH OR NAKED

FLAME

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 26

7 FAULT FINDING 30008

The main control panel incorporates two lights to help in fault finding

POWER ON

LOCKOUT

The remote station also has three lights

AIR FAN ON

BURNER ON

LOCKOUT

This section gives the possible causes of failure associated with each check light The electrical schematic diagram in this manual and the wiring diagram shipped in the main air handler panel should be used in conjunction with the notes below Additionally Service Engineers should familiarise themselves with the detailed Start Sequence given in Appendix 2 of this manual

The notes are given for each light before consulting the notes check for bulb failure

71 POWER ON LIGHT IS UNLIT

Check

1 Main control panel isolator is in the 1 position

2 Main Panel 6A MCB has not tripped if a trip has occurred the switch will be at the OFF position Reset and test system as required

3 Also check if the mains electrical supply is isolated If so FIND OUT WHY before taking any action

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 27

7 FAULT FINDING 30005

72 AIR FAN ON LIGHT IS UNLIT

Check

1 SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch is not in Position OFF

2 Timeperiod is not set to off

3 Air handler is not at LOCKOUT

4 Recheck both AIR FAN ON and LOCKOUT bulbs

Two fault indications are possible

1 THE FAN IS NOT OPERATING

If the fan should have started but is not operating

Check 1 Overload for tripped conditions Reset the overload and monitor the next start-up

2 Motor Fuses

3 Relays 1 2 amp3 for failure

laClor CC1 for failure

5 Air Pressure Switch (DPS) is failed in the N 0 Position

Replace the faulty component as described in Section 8

2 THE FAN IS OPERATING

This indicates that the air pressure switch (DPS) has failed to change over

Measure the profile plate differential pressure as described in Section 4113 If the pressure is correct the air pressure switch is faulty Check the switch as in 4114 If the pressure is not correct

Check 1 Correct fan belt tension

2 Correct fan rotation

3 The air handler air inlets and discharge are not blocked

4 Correct fitting on filters

5 The air differential pressure switch impulse lines are not blocked or leaking

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 28

7 FAULT FINDING 30008

73 LOCKOUT LIGHT IS ILLUMINATED

This light indicates a failure in the burner ignition and flame supervision system

RESET the unit and follow the progress of the start sequence The full cycle may take two minutes

1

------t

2 LOCKOUT after 35-40 seconds indicates an ignition failure RESET the system and observe the pilot and ignition spark during the start-up attempt

I-- shy

3 Observe the spark This should be strong and highly visible If not remove and clean the spark plug as Section 82 Check that the spark plug gap is correctly set at 15 mm

-- shy

4 Check the pilot flame If the pilot flame ignites and the unit goes to LOCKOUT the scanning system is at fault Remove and clean the detector as Section 82 Check the flame signal as in Section 431

5 If the pilot does not light the gas supply system is faulty Check the pilot system for restriction and the pilot valve operation

6 If the pilot lights and the unit goes to LOCKOUT after the main gas valves are addressed either the flow control valve is blocked or one of the main gas block valves has failed Fit a manometer on the pressure test point on the outlet flange of the multishyfunctional control and observe if the pressure rises when the main gas valves are addressed No pressure rise will indicate failure of the main gas valves

74 AIR FAN ON LIGHT ILLUMINATED

If the burner does not start check

1 SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch is in WINTER position

2 Overheat Limit Control

These interlocks prevent the burner management system starting

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 29

8 SERVICING 3000S

IMPORTANT Servicing and maintenance should be only carried out by a RS STOKVIS Ltd approved engineer

Only use replacement parts provided by the appliance manufacturer

Check that the air openings for combustion and for ventilation of any plant roon or compartment are clear

81 ISOLATION

811 FUEL GAS ISOLATION

The fuel gas to the ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler should be isolated and locked off at the manual ball valve mounted at the start of the fuel gas line Additionally before entering or servicing the air handler the burner manual isolation valve and pilot line isolation valve should be closed

812 ELECTRICAL ISOLATION

All electric power to the air handler and the remote control station is switched through the local isolator This isolator is fitted with a lock facility to permit it to be locked in the OFF position

Additionally isolate the power at the Wall Isolator

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 30

8 SERVICING 30005

82 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE

The air handler should be routinely serviced at the start of each heating season Isolate the air handler as above before servicing Details of access to individual components are given in Section 84 of this manual

1 Remove and clean spark igniter Check that the gap is correctly set at 25 mm Replace every two years

2 Clean the flame detector lens to ensure freedom from dirt and moisture If the cell shows any sign of cracks it should be replaced Routinely replace the cell every two years or after 10000 hours of operation which ever comes first

3 Inspect the entire air handler paint system for general damage Repair as necessary

4 Every two years brush the burner plates and clear the burner holes carefully with a Size 18mm drill for NP II and 20mm drill for NP I

WARNING THE BURNER HOLES MUST NOT BE ENLARGED

5 Inspect and lubricate all damper linkages to ensure freedom of operation Wipe off all excess lubricants to prevent dirt build up on linkage parts

6 Check the fan belt for cracks and splits Check tension The correct tension gives 16mm deflection per metre of span when the belt is centrally loaded with a force of 27N Adjust as necessary

7 Grease both the fan shaft bearings with Mobiith AW2 grease or similar

NEVER use high temperature grease

NEVER mix two different greases within the bearing always flush existing grease out

Note Removing the cover plate on the end of the air handler gains access to the outboard fan bearing

Light to Slow to 0 120 2 to 6 months Clean Dry

Medium Medium 120 200 1 to 2 months

Moderate to Light to Slow to 0 120 1 to 4 weeks Dry

Dirty Medium Medium 120 200 1 to 7 days

Extreme Dirt Dry Light to Slow to 0 200 Daily Flushing out

Medium Medium Dirt

83 ANNUAL SERVICE CHECKS

After Servicing test fire the air handler following the Commissioning Procedure detailed in Section 4 of this manual to ensure correct operation generally Special attention must be paid to the damper system and related controls and interlocks

Additionally check that the fresh air and recirculation air entry path to the air handler has been kept clear and instruct the User of the need for this as necessary

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 31

8 SERVICING 3000S

84 REMOVAL PROCEDURE FOR REPLACEABLE COMPONENTS

IMPORTANT

Turn off the gas at the appliance service valve and the electricity at the main panel and wall isolator before proceeding

841 BURNER

The burner is located inside the air handler casing and is mounted on two brackets from the support straps To remove the burner isolate the air handler as in 81 and undo the union on the fuel gas line adjacent to the burner isolation valve (MV6) and unscrew the main and pilot gas feed pipes from the burner rail Access to the rear of the burner assembly is made by removing the partition plate below the burner separating the fresh air inlet to the burner from the return air inlet compartment This is held in place by screws which engage in captive nuts on the top side of the partition Remove the Flame Detector and pull off the ignition plug cap Disconnect the burner support brackets and remove the burner The burner will easily pass through the access hatch for further strip down Replace in the reverse order soundness test the gas pipework check the burner operation and duty as described in the commissioning section of this manual

842 FLAME DETECTOR

This is a 240 Volt instrument

The flame detector is mounted on the end of the burner rail inside the air handler casing To remove the detector isolate the panel electric supply and lock off Push the scanner towards the burner and rotate to release the bayonet fixing and lift the detector from its mount Remove the two screws holding the detector cover and disconnect the supply leads noting the polarity of the connections

Replace the flame detector in the reverse order ensuring correct polarity of connections Ensure the access panel is securely closed and the retaining nuts are tightened down Check operation by inserting a test meter in the points provided in the main control panel and reading the flame signals during start up to full rate burner operation (See 431) Operate the appliance over six starts for reliability of operation including tum off of start and main gas valves to check for lockout operation

843 IGNITER SPARK PLUG

This is a high tension spark plug

The igniter spark plug is mounted on the end of the burner rail inside the air handler casing To remove the spark plug isolate the air handler as above Enter the service access door Access to the spark plug is made through the profile plate To remove the spark plug pull off the high tension lead and unscrew the plug with a plug spanner

When replacing the spark plug check the plug gap is set at 15mm Check ignition reliability over six start ups

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 32

8 SERVICING 3000S

844 IGNITER SPARK TRANSFORMER

This is a 240 Volt instrument

The ignition transformer is located in a plastic box mounted on the air handler casing adjacent to the main control panel To remove the transformer isolate the air handler as above and unscrew the four retaining screws holding the box lid in place and remove the lid Disconnect the supply cable at the terminal strip and undo the transformer retaining screws The transformer may then be unscrewed from the High Tension cable leading to the spark plug

Replacement is a simple reversal of this procedure

Check ignition reliability over six start ups

845 COMBUSTION AIR PRESSURE SWITCH (DPS)

Note The switch is set and sealed and should be replaced if not operating correctly

This switch is a 240 Volt instrument

The air switch is mounted directly on the air handler casing and can be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove the switch isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the supply cable Break the downstream pipe compression fitting and unscrew the switch housing from its locating fitting Reverse the procedure to replace after ensuring switch setting is as specified in Section 13 of this manual Operate the air handler to ensure reliability of operation over six start ups

846 AIR HANDLER OVERHEAT LIMIT CONTROL

This is a 240 Volt instrument

The overheat limit control can be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove the control isolate the air handler as above and lock off Remove the switch cover Disconnect the supply cable and unscrew the control housing from its locating fitting Reverse the procedure to replace check the switch is set to 50degC Test the switch operation as described in Section 43 over at least three operations

847 AIR FAN AND MOTOR

The air fan motor is a 415 Volt 3 phase motor

The motor and slide rails are easily accessible inside the air handler casing If it is necessary to remove the motor isolate the air handler as above Slacken the fan-belt tension and remove the drive belts Pull the motor away from the air handler casing to make access to the motor terminal box and disconnect the supply cable The motor may now be removed from the unit Following replacement the air handler must be fully re-commissioned as in Section 4

It is unlikely that the air fan will need replacing or servicing If required a full procedure should be obtained from RS STOKVIS Ltd

Replacement must be followed by full re-commissioning as in Section 4

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 33

8 SERVICING 3000S

848 FUEL GAS MULTI-FUNCTIONAL CONTROL - SMALL UNITS

This is a 240 Volt instrument

The fuel gas multi-functional control can be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove the unit isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the Hirschman electric termination Unbolt the control from its flanges and remove

When replacing care must be taken to ensure the flange 0 rings are undamaged and in the correct location Following replacement the air handler must be fully reshycommissioned as in Section 4 including tests for soundness prior to start-up

849 GOVERNOR AND BLOCK VALVES

The block valves are 240 Volt instruments

All these items may be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove any item isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the electric termination to the two block valves the pilot block valve and the flow control block valve Break the two pipe unions and remove the fuel gas line complete for further strip-down

8410 FUEL GAS FLOW CONTROL VALVE

This is a 24 Volt instrument

The fuel gas How control valve can be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove the valve isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the supply cables to the control valve

On small air handlers fitted with a multi-functional control support the multi-functional control and unbolt its discharge flange Break the union downstream of the burner isolation valve and remove the section of line containing the flow control valve for further strip-down

On large air handlers fitted with separate block valves it will be necessary to remove the fuel gas line complete as Section 8410 above

Following replacement re-commission the air handler

Note If the fresh air damper is not in the full open position the heat input must not exceed the maximum heat input at recirculation condition specified in the technical data section of this manual

8411 PILOT GAS GOVERNOR AND BLOCK VALVE

The block valve is a 240 Volt instrument

Both items may be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove either item isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the electric terrriination to the solenoid valve Undo the upstream pipe union and the compression fitting downstream of the manual block valve (PV3) Remove the pilot gas line complete for further strip down

Replace broken or distorted connections and retest for soundness Ensure the pilot gas pressure is correct and the flame is sensing an output Ensure reliability over six start-ups

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 34

8 SERVICING 3000S

8412 BELT TENSIONING PROCEDURE

The setting tensions are designed to cover a wide range of drives A precise setting force for individual applications can be calculated as detailed

SETTING FORCES

Belt Section

Setting Force To Deflect Belt 16mm per Metre Of Span

Small Pulley Diameter (mm)

Basic Setting Forces Newtons (N) Kilograms (kgf)

125 x Setting Forces Newtons (N) Kilograms (kgf)

SPZ

56 to 71 16 16 20 20 75 to 90 18 18 22 22

95 to 125 20 20 25 25 Over 125 22 22 28 28

SPA

80 to 100 22 22 28 28 106 to 140 30 30 38 38 150 to 200 36 37 45 46 Over 200 40 40 50 51

SPB

112 to 160 40 40 50 51 170 to 224 50 51 62 63 236 to 355 62 63 77 79 Over 355 65 66 81 83

SPC 224 to 250 70 71 87 89 265 to 355 92 94 115 120 Over 375 115 120 144 150

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 35

8 SERVICING 3000S

BELT TENSIONING USING FENNER BELT TENSION INDICATOR

Calculate the deflection in mm on a basis of 16mm per metre of centre distance Centre Distance (m) x 16 =Deflection (mm)

Set lower marker ring at the deflection distance required in mm on the lower scale

Set upper ring against to bottom edge of the top tube

Place the belt tension indicator on top of the belt at the centre of span and apply a force at right angles to the belt defecting it to the point where the lower marker ring is level with the top of the adjacent belt

Read off the force value indicated by the top edge of the upper marker ring

Compare this force to the kgf value shown in the table above

If a Fenner Belt Tension Indicator is not available a spring balance and rule will be suffice

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 36

8 SERVICING 30005

85 MAIN PANEL CONTROLS

All panel controls are readily accessible and may be easily exchanged for replacement components in the event of failure Ensure any replacement item is of the same make and type as the original

851 LANDIS amp GYR LFL 1335 AUTOMATIC SEQUENCE CONTROLLER

The Landis amp Gyr Automatic Sequence Controller is a plug-in unit locating on a pre-wired chassis To remove the controller undo the two retaining screws at the top left and lower right corners and pull the module off the chassis

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

852 CONTROLS CIRCUIT (24 VOLT) TRANSFORMER

The Controls Circuit Transformer is fixed to the panel back plate by tapped screws To remove the transformer undo the wiring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel Undo the two retaining screws and remove the unit complete

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

853 CONTROL RELAYS R1 R2 amp R3

The Control Relays are DIN Rail mounted To remove a relay undo the wIring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel Release the DIN rail retaining clip under the relay with a screwdriver and remove the relay

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

854 6A MCB

The 6A MCB is DIN Rail mounted To remove the MCB undo the wiring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel Release the DIN rail retaining clip under the MCB with a screwdriver and remove the MCB

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

855 THERMAL OVERLOAD

The thermal overload is attached to the underside of the main contactor To remove the overload undo the wiring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel and that the overload setting is as specified in Section 13 of this manual Unscrew the three connections to the contactor and remove the overload

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 37

8 SERVICING 3000S

856 MAIN CONTACTOR

The Main Contactor is DIN Rail mounted To remove the contactor remove the thermal overload as 855 above and then undo the wiring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel Release the DIN rail retaining clip under the contactor with a screwdriver and remove the contactor

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

857 MOTOR FUSE

To replace a motor fuse pull the fuse carrier off the fuse holder base The fuse is attached to the fuse carrier by two screws Unscrew remove and replace

86 REMOTE CONTROL STATION

The remote control station contains some serviceable parts although these items should only be fitted by an approved RS STOKVIS Ltd Engineer

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 38

9 RECOMMENDED SPARES 3000S

For two years operation it is recommended that the following items should be held in stock

ITEM DESCRIPTION PART NO QUANTITY i

1 INDICATOR BULBS W1121 1 PACK

2 SPARK PLUG 023739 1 I

3 UVDETECTOR QRA10C 1 I

4 ROOM SENSOR DRT2453 1

5 DUCT SENSOR DDT1701 1

All replacement parts can be obtained from RS STOKVIS Ltd by quoting the air handler serial number the part number and description

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 39

APPENDIX 1 30005

SOUNDNESS TESTING THE FUEL GAS PIPEWORK

This procedure should only be carried out by personnel familiar with the ECONO-AIR 3000S Series Air handler

The pressure test points and all valves are identified on the Process and Instrumentation Diagram for the air handler included in Section 1 of this n1anual

Isolate the air handler electric supply at the main control panel and lock off Close the manual isolation valves MV1 MV6 and PV3 Ensure the supply pressure is available on the upstream side of MV1

A11 TESTING THE UPSTREAM PIPEWORKAND BURNER CONTROLS 1 Connect a 60 mbar manometer to the pressure test nipple A Monitor the

pressure for two minutes Any rise in pressure indicates that valve MV1 is leaking and must be replaced Remove pressure test points Band F

2 Open MV1 to pressurise the pipework on both the main gas and pilot line to the first block valve

3 Close MV1 Allow one minute for the temperature to stabilise and then test the system for 2 minutes and watch for a drop in the pipework pressure If the pressure falls open valve MV1 and test the pipework connections and valves from MV1 to MV3 and MV1 to PV2 for leaks with a proprietary leak detector fluid or spray Turn off MV1 seal any leaks and re-test

4 If no extemalleaks are found either the pilot block valve PV1 or either the first main gas block valve MV3 is letting by

5 To test this seal pressure test point A and fit a manometer to pressure test point B Leave for two minutes with MV1 open A rise in pressure on the manometer confirms a leak on the block valve MV3 Turn off MV1 exchange the valve and re-test from point 2 above

6 Repeat this procedure for the pilot block valve Seal test point B and fit a manometer to pressure test point F Leave for two minutes with MV1 open A rise in pressure on the manometer confirms a leak on the pilot block valve PV2 Turn off MV1 exchange the valve and re-test from point 1 above Seal test point F

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 40

APPENDIX 1 30005

A12 TESTING THE DOWNSTREAM BURNER VALVE 1 Close MV1 and connect pressure test points A and 8 with flexible 6 mm bore

tubing teed into the manometer Remove pressure test point C Open MV1 to pressurise the downstream block valve MV4

2 Close MV1 and leave for one minute for the temperature to stabilise Monitor the pressure for 2 minutes If the pressure falls open valve MV1 and leak test the line between the two block valves MV3 and MV4 with a proprietary leak detector Turn off MV1 seal any leaks and re-test Note Smaller air handlers in the 3000S Series are fitted with multi-functional valves combining the pressure regulator and two block valves in one component The above procedure still applies but if a leak is found on either block valve the whole control should be replaced If no external leaks are found the downstream block valve is letting by

3 To confirm this close MV1 remove the manometer and refit to pressure test point C Connect pressure test points A and 8 with flexible 6mm bore tubing Open MV1 and allow one minute for the temperature to stabilise Monitor the pressure for a further 2 minutes with MV1 still open A rise in pressure confirms that the second block valve MV4 is letting by Turn off MV1 Replace the valve and re-test from 2 above

A13 TESTING THE DOWNSTREAM BURNER PIPEWORK 1 Close MV1 and connect pressure test points A and D with flexible 6 mm bore

tubing teed into the manometer Open MV1 to pressurise the downstream pilot pipework

2 Close MV1 and leave for one minute for the temperature to stabilise Monitor the pressure for 2 minutes If the pressure falls open valve MV1 and leak test the line between the downstream block valve MV4 and the manual block MV6 with a proprietary leak detector fluid or spray If no external leaks are found the manual block valve MV6 is letting by Turn off MV1 seal any leakages and reshytest from 2 above

A14 TESTING THE DOWNSTREAM PILOT PIPEWORK 1 Close MV1 and connect pressure test points A and F with flexible 6mm bore

tubing teed into the manometer Open MV1 to pressurise the downstream pilot pipework

2 Close MV1 and leave for one rninute for the temperature to stabilise Monitor the pressure for 2 minutes If the pressure falls open valve MV1 and leak test the line between the downstream block valve PV2 and the manual block PV3 with a proprietary leak detector fluid or spray If no external leaks are found the manual block valve PV3 is letting by Turn off MV1 seal any leakages and reshytest from 2 above

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 41

APPENDIX 1 30005

A15 TESTING THE BURNER CONNECTIONS 1 Remove the burner access panel as described in Section 84 of this manual

Remove the burner spark igniter Slacken the two retaining bolts holding the burner to the burner support straps and unbolt the burner supply endplate from the burner casting and mixing plates

2 Connect pressure test points A and 0 with flexible 6mm bore tubing teed into the manometer Open MV1 and MV6 to pressurise the burner pipework Leak test the main gas burner pipework and connections with proprietary leak detector fluid Turn off MV6 Seal any leakages and re-test

3 Connect pressure test points A and F with flexible 6 mm bore tubing teed into the manometer Open MV1 and PV3 to pressurise the pilot burner pipework Leak test the pilot gas burner pipework and connections with proprietary leak detector fluid Turn off PV3 Seal any leakages and re-test

4 Turn off MV1

5 Replace the spark igniter and profile division plate

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 42

APPENDIX 2 30005

START SEQUENCE

The burner start sequence is controlled by the Landis and Gyr burner management unit The timings are pre-set and comply with 885885 This unit must NOT be tampered with

A brief description of the start-up sequence isshy

The unit checks

1 The NO FLAME signal on the UV flame scanner

Note If the scanner detects a flame at any time other than in the correct operating sequence the flame programmer initiates a lockout

2 The operation of the combustion air proving switch in the NO AIR position

3 The air handler discharge high temperature switch

If the checks are completed the unit starts the combustion air fan and then checks the combustion airflow

Once the airflow is proven the unit checks that the damper control circuit is functioning correctly After the damper microswitch is made to prove the fresh air damper is fully open the sequence allows 30 seconds for the combustion air to purge any combustible gas from the air handler

After completion of the purge the spark ignition system is energised the pilot valve opened and the spark terminated If the pilot flame is not proven by the UV scanner the system will initiate a LOCKOUT

If the flame is proven the main gas valves are opened the pilot extinguished and the main burner flame proven

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 43

i

APPENDIX 2 30008

The following flow chart shows the complete start sequence including the lighting of the various indicating lamps

MANUAL STATUS LIGHT POWER ON

POWER ON

I INITIATE START BY TIME

SETTING ON CONTROLLER

I CHECK NO FLAME

VISIBLE

PROVEj FAIL LOCKOUT

I CHECK RELAY R4 NC

POSITION

PROVE FAIL NO START

I CHECK AIR PRESSURE SWITCH NC POSITION

PROVE FAIL NO START

I CHECK RELAY R1 NC

POSITION

PROVE j

FAIL NO START

I START COMBUSTION

AIR BLOWER

I CHECK AIR PRESSURE SWITCH NO POSITION

PROVE I

FAIL NO START

I STATUS LIGHT FAN ON

I ENERGISE RELAY R1

I

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 44

I

I

APPENDIX 2 30008

I CHECK OVERHEAT LIMIT

CONTROL R5

PROVE I

FAIL I I

CHECK 541412 LOOP CLOSED ON

LANDIS ampGYR CIRCUIT

PROVE I

FAIL I I

COMBUSTION AIR PURGE PERIOD

30 SECONDS

I

NO START

NO START

CANCEL NO FLAME CHECK CIRCUIT

I

ENERGISE SPARK

I TIMED PERIOD 25 SECONDS

I ENERGISE PILOT GAS

VALVE

I TIMED PERIOD 25 SECONDS

I TERMINATE SPARK

I INTERROGATE UV FLAME SCANNER

PROVE I

FAIL I I

TIMED PERIOD 10 SECONDS

I

LOCKOUT

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 45

I

I

APPENDIX 2 3000S

I ENERGISE MAIN GAS

VALVES

I

STATUS LIGHT BURNER ON

I TIMED PERIOD

5 SECONDS

I DE-ENERGISE PILOT

GAS VALVES

CONTINUOUS FROM PILOT

I INTERROGATE UV FLAME SCANNER

PROVE I

FAIL I I

LOCKOUT I

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 46

APPENDIX 3 30005

Please see copy of Standard Service Sheet

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 47

APPENDIX 4 30005

A41 TIME OUT SCREEN

This is the standard screen displayed when the touch screen is not in use The back light is off to save energy_ To access the STATUS screen touch the ENTER key and the following screen is displayed

[]][I][]rn[IJOO[][IJOO[] EJ~E11 I[]I ~ middot I

NOTE

The Touch Screen operates using the heat produced by the touch of a finger and therefore only LIGHT pressure is required

Excessive pressure can damage the Touch Screen

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 48

APPENDIX 4 30008

A42 STATUS SCREEN

On the typical STATUS screen the illustrated information detailed is as follows

19 36 Fan Brn

RS OS

100 Fst_~_ Lck _ _ Xst Gas~o ~ I

RS Indicates the current room temperature

OS ~( t~~ the current duct discharge temperature

Fan Indicates the current status of the fan by showing the arrow and the fan blades for ON and OFF is shown by the arrow and fan blades being removed

Brn Indicates the current status of the burner with the black flames indicating the burner to be ON and vice versa

Lck LOCKOUT - This indicates a flame failure when highlighted during normal or start-up operation

Xst EXCESS TEMPERATURE SWITCH - This indicates the unit has reached the trip limit on the over heat stat when highlighted during operation

Indicates the current position of the gas modulating valve during normal Gas

operation (0-100)

Indicates whether the Frost stat is energised and the unit is running on frost Fst

override

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 49

APPENDIX 4 30008

A43 CHANGING SETTINGS

It is possible to change the settings for the time of operation and the required temperature set points The following details the steps required

A44 ENTERING THE SECURITY CODE

From the STATUS screen touch the return key and the screen below will be displayed

Type the HIGH LEVEL security code (4321) If you make a mistake use the BACK SPACE key to delete any incorrect number(s) Touch the ENTER key when the code is correct

If the security code is incorrect the screen above will be displayed then try again If after several attempts you can not gain access please contact RS STOKVIS Ltd for further information

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 50

APPENDIX 4 30008

When the code is entered correctly the MAIN MENU is displayed as detailed below

~ STATUS SET VALUES~ ~ TIVIE CLOCK [) [) [) [) [)

The MAIN MENU screen shows the three menu items available The title for each menu item can be changed to suit the end user Please notify RS STOKVIS Ltd prior to commissioning should these parameters require special amendments

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 51

APPENDIX 4 30008

A45 CHANGING OR SETTING A TIME SCHEDULE

From the main menu screen select the TIME CLOCK page by running finger across screen symbol and touch the ENTER key the screen below will be displayed

On the following screen highlight the TS1 symbol and touch the ENTER key

The current time schedule will now be displayed as shown below The display will automatically default to the current day (1 =Monday 2 =Tuesday etc) In this case day 5 (Friday) the four schedule switching times refer to that day

IAC6BBB1BHIS1

mm0CIl bull mID 17BB 17BB 17HB

Iillleschedule

To modify a time select it by highlighting and touch the ENTER key and the following screen is displayed

To amend the appropriate onoff time as shown on the screen below The arrows to the right of the time are for altering the hours and the arrows on the left for the minutes

Once you have set the time use the ESCape key to exit back to the time schedule screen and choose another day by touching the required number Another time may now be modified as before

IAC6BBB1BHIS1

H8BH

I i eschedule

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 52

APPENDIX 4 30008

Use the ESCape key to exit back to the MAIN MENU screen

~ STATUS ~ SET VALUES

TIME CLOCK []~ [] [] [] []

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 53

APPENDIX 4 30005

A46 CHANGING SET VALUES

From the main menu screen select the SET VALUES page by highlight in the normal way and touch the ENTER key

The following screen is displayed

36 19 18III III IIIHsv Rsv Llv

To change the RSV highlight it in the normal way and touch the ENTER key and the screen below will now be shown

IAC6RRR1RR40 T I

0 19 (Y)l RSV

ROOM SET VALUE

The above screen shows the parameters that can be changed The values to the far left are the limitations of set point (OC) Change the set point by using the UP and DOWN ARROWS on the left of the screen or touch the set value itself followed by the ENTER key to select the set value and set it directly using the numeric keyboard All values can be changed in this way

Use the ESCape key twice to exit back to the MAIN MENU screen

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 54

APPENDIX 4 30005

A47 COMMISSIONING AND SERVICING BURNER CHECKS

Select the SET VALUES screen from the MAIN MENU screen and adjust the high lirrlit set point to 55degC to drive the burner to high fire

IAC6HHH1HH60 ~T I

0 19 (Y)

HSV

HIGH SET VALUE ~

Ensure the set value is returned to 36degC once the appropriate checks and adjustments as described in Section 43 of this manual have been completed Return to the SET VALUES screen and select the low limit value to adjust the low fire setting

Reduce the low limit value to OdegC to drive the gas valve to low fire and complete the appropriate checks and adjustments as described in Section 43 of this manual and ensure the set value is returned to the original value

A48 GMT ltgt BST CHANGEOVER DAYLIGHT SAVINGS

To change your unit to British Summer TimelWinter Time the following system screen must be highlighted by touching the Iamp1 button twice

By touching the clock symbol in the top left hand corner followed by the ENTER key the screen below will be displayed

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 55

APPENDIX 4 30008

188311 851193

544

By touching and highlighting in this case 18 followed by the ENTER key A small box allowing the entry of two digits will appear Enter the desired time required using the numbered keys followed by ENTER key Your unit is now set to operate on BSTBWT

Touch the ESC key three times to return back to the Status screen

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 56

STOKVIS ENERGY SYSTEMS 96R WALTON ROAD EAST MOLESEY SURREY KT8 0DL TEL 020 8783 3050 08707 707 747 FAX 020 8783 3051 08707 707 767 E-MAIL infostokvisboilerscom WEBSITE wwwstokvisboilerscom

JULY 1999

Page 6: ECONOAIR 3000S SERIES AIR HANDLING UNIT DIRECT FIREDstokvisboilers.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/EconoAir... · 2019-05-10 · ECONOAIR 3000S SERIES AIR HANDLING UNIT DIRECT FIRED

1 TECHNICAL DATA 30008

SPECIFICATION

308 99shy

CE 0087

G20 87AQ371

NA

17

10

5

415V 50Hz 3ph 4 Wire

A

kg

IE

JULY 1999 SAMPLE PageS

1 TECHNICAL DATA 30008

UTILITIES

AIR HANDLER UTILITIES

FUELi NATURAL GAS

MAXIMUM FUEL SUPPL Y PRESSURE 25 mbar

MINIMUM FUEL SUPPL Y PRESSURE 15 mbar

ELECTRIC SUPPL Y TO CONTROL PANEL WITH NEUTRAL WIRE

415V 50Hz 3ph 4 Wire

SUPPLY RATING Amps

MOTOR FUSES

Notes

Air handler models 3018S to 3040S inclusive of STOKVIS ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handlers have been certificated by British Gas Pic for use on Natural Gas only It does not cover the use of distribution ducting filters and high level or external installations The other air handlers in the range are designed and built to the same parameters and standards as the certificated sample

Your attention is drawn to the limitations on location for recirculation air handlers detailed in Section 33

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 6

1 TECHNICAL DATA 30008

SETTINGS (AS SHIPPED)

AIR HANDLER SETriNGS (AS SHIPPED) I

I

IAIR PRESSURE SWITCH rnbar

OVERHEAT LIMIT CONTROL 65degC

PILOT BURNER GAS PRESSURE 100 mbar

MAXIMUM 50 mbar MAIN BURNER GAS PRESSURES

MINIMUM 10 mbar

MAXIMUM AT RECIRCULATION CONDITION NA

OVERLOAD Amps

FAN SPEED rpm

MAXIMUM 16 mbarDIFFERENTIAL AIR PRESSURE ACROSS PROFILE PLATE MINIMUM 14 mbar

GAS CONNECTION SIZE BSP

TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER

ACCESS CODE 4321 I

TEMPERATURE SETPOINT (Code 00) 19degC i

SAMPLE INTERVAL (Code 01) 2 sec I

DISCHARGE LOW LIMIT (Code 02) 18degC

DISCHARGE HIGH LIMIT (Code 03) 36degC

Note For air handler dimensions please refer to the General Arrangement Drawing

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 7

~------------------~--~

~~O~~C~~~__-__~~middot~~I~~______________-1~~~__~~-=~~=-~i

COMPONENT UST

BURNER

AIR FAN MOTOR

FAN DRIVE

CONTROL PANEL

REMOTE PANEL

SERVICES

FUEL

UAX SUPPLY PRESSURE MIN SUPPLY PRESSURE

ELECTRICITY

BLOCK VALVES

Serial No

bullbull IlICh NPII

kW 1+4ORPM

NA

3-30005-100 RevO DOL Start

N

NATURAL GAS

25mbor 1gtmbor

15V5OHz3Ph4W1RE Motor FLC bullbullbull Amps

240V 50Hz 1Ph 3 WIRE

Site Address

TAG DESCRIPTION WI SUPPLY ISOlATION VALve

W2 JW3 MULTIBLOCKMY MV5 FLOW CONTROL VALve WS BURNER ISOLATION VALVE

PVl PILOT PRESSURE REGULATOR PV2 PILOT SOlpoundNOIO VALve PV3 PILOT ISOlATION VALve

TC SPACE lEMPERATURE CONTROUER TO DISCHARGE TEMPERATURE DETECTOR TR SPACE TEMPERATURE DElECTOR TS OISCHARGE TEMPERATURE swrrCH

PS AIR PRESSURE swrrCH

UV fLAt4E DETECTOR

t SPARK IGNITER

NOTE f INIlICATES PRpoundSSURE TEST POM

Client

srOKVIS END USERS ADDRESS END USER

RS STOKVIS amp SONS Ltd POOL ROAD WEST MOLESEY SURREY KT8 2HN

Ident T45

shyomiddot BVIoI 0 145

1 DJSO 1 GBlA 14 T45

1AC600 00T1701 DRT3453 RAK13bullbull170

lWGJ

ORAtO 023739

PILOT LINE

fRtsH Nfl HET

Title TITLE

Model No Seri4l No DutY Style

Tel 0181 941 1212 Fax 0181 941 4136

00lCIIAAGE 10 WORIltSPAtt

305 99- m3sINDOOR HORIZONTAL

ACStw -_nora I-ID_raw_-+I__-I

Checked

CONTROL Approved

o-1 CommentApproval

Rev IDote I Description

Computer No 99

Purchase Order No

Drawing No

4-MR-001 R~O~

NOTES1shy

I PROPOSED LOCATION TO BE CHECKED tOR LEVEL AND LOAD BEARING STRENGTH BY OTHERS

2 UNIT TO BE SUPPLIED IN SEPERATE SECTIONS FOR LIFTING INTO PLANTROOM AND ON TO BASE BY OTHERS

3 ALL SECTIONS TO HAVE TIJO BEADS OF SEALANT BETJEEN OPPOSING FLANGES AS PER SUPPLIED INSTALL ATlON INSTRUCTIONS

ltI ENSURE ALL BUILDERS JORK IS CARRIED OUT AND MADE GOOD AFTER INSTALLATION BY OTHERS

5 ALL EXTERNAL JIRING SHALL BE CARRIED OUT BY COMPETENT PERSON TO CURRENT lEE REGULATIONS

DISCHARGE OPENING lUOlElIE VIDE X lIE HIG CV 3011 MEZ FLANGE

Serial No

sroKVIS Site Address Client END USERS ADDRESS END USER

ACCESS OPENING

~L---gt lt0-shy

~ ~

GAS CONNECTIONS

CONTROL PANEL 60011 VIDE X 600111 HIGH

APPROX VEIGHTSshy

HEATER CASING - 1I0U( KG

IJCL OOCUUef IDrawn lACS

Checked

I RS STOKVIS amp SONS Ltd POOL ROAD WEST MOLESEY SURREY KT8 2HN Tel 0181 941 1212 fax 0181 941 4136 CONTROL IApproved

o I~ I CommentApproval

Rev IDate IDescription

Computer No

99 Purchase Order No

Drawing No

3-MR-005

415VOlT5OHz 4 WIRE sumy

lIfEI_-shy~a

30131

2_F11

3 TOO---shy

B (

Serial No

~s

~~~~

~ NIt 9lOIElIliOTt)R RA11NG~W

STOKVIS

0 reg

-0

0 0 lt0

u ~

R5-1 -

ADDRESS

shy

regshy

~tl

GAS v IoIOtQR AIIIfONGTll LEGEND

IHlmN PNEI _

-e- PNEl_

Sl1pound_

-11shy IJIfClIOII1IO~-

DUCT STAT NPE COt 17tll

_STAT NPE om 3lt4Il)

~~~pound~ niR~~ (i)l

~ ()1

_cbullbullL~ nmiddoti Apoundm

USER

~ ~

SCHEMATIC FOR 3000S SERIES AIR

IAC600 BASED

RS STOKVIS amp SONS Ltd POOL ROAD WEST MOLESEY SURREY KT8 2HN Tel 0181 941 1212 Fax 0181 941 4136

_[---------f P(N(J ON

ICHI11ONTfWiSFORlER

PllOT V IIEIi CAS VAllIE 1

II CAS VAllIE 2

~_ON

lOCKOUT

s

o Rev I Dote I Description

Computer No 99

Purchase Order No

Drawing No

3-MR-100 Rev

o

30005 2 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

21 INTRODUCTION

The STOKVIS ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler is a direct fired unit designed to give clean healthy environmental conditions and constant even temperature within the heated space

The main air handler assembly houses the circulating air fan the gas burner the fuel gas line and all necessary safety controls The burner management system and space temperature controller is located in the main control panel mounted on or adjacent to the side of the air handler A second control station supplied loose for mounting remote from the air handler within the heated space or other convenient location houses indicating lights the control touch screen and auxiliary operational switches

A sight glass is fitted on the air handler casing to view the burner during operation

For multi unit networked applications the touch screen is excluded

22 GAS BURNER ASSEMBLY

The ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler incorporates the Maxon NP-II burner This burner is specially designed for heating fresh air and is mounted such that a proportion of the incoming air is forced into contact with the flame to ensure rapid mixing and combustion within the code requirements The burner assembly is built up from modular components to give the required heat duty

Each burner assembly is fitted with an integral pilot spark igniter and UV detector The flame detector is used for scanning both the pilot and main flame Note that the pilot burner operates in interrupted mode

The burner module fitted is identified in the Technical Data Section of this manual and on the Valve and Instrun1ent list

23 CONTROL SYSTEM

The controls fitted on the air handler are detailed on the Process amp Instrumentation Diagram in the Technical Data Section of this manual

231 SAFETY CONTROLS

The safety interlocks on the ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler are

1 Combustion air proving switch (PS) 2 Ultra-violet burner flame detector (UV) 3 Overheat limit control (OLe)

Failure of either the combustion air switch or fiame scanning circuit will cause the air handler to go to LOCKOUT and the burner management system will require a RESET before a re-light can be attempted

The air handler discharge overheat limit control is a manual reset switch After a failure the switch will have to be RESET before a re-light can be attempted

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 8

2 GENERAL DESCRIPTION 3000S

232 TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEM

The ECONO-AIR 30008 Series air handler is fitted with a full three-term modulating temperature control system as standard The space temperature is sensed by a heated space detector (TR) which inputs to the panel mounted temperature controller (TC) This achieves control by modulation of the fuel gas flow control valve (MV5) The temperature controller additionally limits the air handler discharge air temperature measured by the discharge temperature detector (TO) to pre-set high and low limits

233 MAIN CONTROL PANEL

The control panel houses the combustioncirculation air fan starter the burner management system and the heated space temperature controller On larger units a separate starter panel may be supplied The panel door is fitted with an interlocked isolator POWER ON and LOCKOUT lights and the burner management RESET button The panel is mounted on or adjacent to the air handler

234 FUEL GAS SYSTEM

The PILOT LINE comprises 1 Pilot governor (PV1 ) 2 One British Gas certificated solenoid valve (PV2) 3 One pilot gas isolation valve (PV3) 4 Pipework and fittings

Note Two pressure test points are fitted on the pilot line on the inlet and discharge of the pilot solenoid valve

The MAIN GAS LINE comprises

1 Gas isolation valve (MV1 ) 2 Pressure governor (MV2) 3 Double block safety shut-oft system (MV34) 4 Gas flow control valve (MV5) 5 Burner isolation valve (MV6) 6 Pipework and fittings

Note Four pressure test points are fitted on the n1ain gas line on the supply the inlet and discharge of the second block valve and downstream of the flow control valve

Note On small air handlers items 2 and 3 are combined in one multi-functional control

All items above are detailed on the Process amp Instrumentation Diagram in Section 1 of this manual

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 9

2 GENERAL DESCRIPTION 3000S

235 REMOTE CONTROL STATION

The ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler is also supplied with a remote control station which houses the air handler operating controls indicating status and the workspace temperature detector if the control station is located in the heated space

236 HEATED SPACE TEMPERATURE SENSOR The heated space temperature sensor is to be located remotely within the space to be heated

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 10

3 INSTALLATION 30005

31 STATUTORY REQUIREMENTS

I n accordance with the Gas Safety (I nstallation and Use) Regulations 1998 installation of this ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler should only be undertaken by competent personnel who are fully aware of their responsibilities under the Health and Safety at Work Act 1974

The installation of this air handler must comply with

BS6230-1991 Installation of gas-fired forced convection air air handlers for commercial and industrial Space Heating of rated input exceeding 60kW

The lEE Regulations for Electrical Installations

Gas Safety (Installation and Use) Regulations 1998

Health and Safety at Work Act 1974

Building Regulations 1986

Building Standards (Scotland Only)

The I nstitution of Gas Engineers Codes of Practice

IGEUP1 Soundness Testing Procedures for Industrial and Commercial Gas Installations

IGEUP2 Gas Installation Pipework Boosters and Compressors on Industrial and Commercial Premises

IGEUP4 Commissioning Of Gas Fired Plant On Industrial and Commercial Premises

32 RECEPTION AND STORAGE OF GOODS

32laquo1 RECEPTION

On receipt of the shipment check that the shipment is complete against the Delivery Advice Note Check for mechanical damage sustained during transit before off-loading the goods Inform the carrier of any such damage

322 OFFLOADING

Horizontal air handlers are fitted with four lifting eyes to permit an overhead lift Alternatively horizontal air handlers may be handled by a fork lift truck on the steel angle support frame

323 STORAGE

Air handlers must be stored in a dry environment The remote control station must be removed from the shipment and stored indoors in a dry environment Outdoor units of split case design (Size 54 and above) must have open ends protected from the environment until installation is complete Any filter elements should be stored in a dry environment

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 11

3 INSTALLATION 3000S

33 LIMITATIONS OF USE

The ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler must not be installed in the following locations

I n hazardous areas

In areas where flammable vapours can be present in excess of their threshold limit values as defined in 8S5925

I n accordance with 8S6230 Clause 513 where there are any flued appliances in the heated area and where air is supplied mechanically and there is mechanical extraction the design extract rate must be 5 to 10 less than the design inlet rate so that the room will not be at a lower pressure than the outside air If the air handler is the only source of mechanically supplied air the extract rate must not exceed 95 of the nominal air flow specified in Section 11 of this manual

Note If it proposed to install the ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler to supply heated air to a hazardous area or in areas where flammable vapours are present the installation must first be approved by a RS STOKVIS Ltd Engineer

34 LOCATION OF AIR HANDLERS

The air handler should normally be installed in the location recommended by the RS STOKVIS Ltd specifying engineer

Check the proposed location for level and load bearing strength Ensure that there is adequate clearance as detailed on the air handler GA in Section 1 this manual around the unit for access for maintenance purposes If the air handler is to be installed above floor level a suitably designed service platform should be provided Such a platform must have 100mm minimum raised edges around the perimeter If this is not possible all air handler access panels must be fitted with hinged restraints This is a factory standard option which should be specified at the time of ordering - check the restraints are fitted before proceeding with installation

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 12

3 INSTALLATION 3000S

35 FRESH AIR INLET AND VENTILATION

351 FRESH AIR INLET

The air handler must be installed where it has a direct and unlimited supply of fresh air from outside the building Ensure that the air intake is not located near exhausts from the building or from any process exhausts such as paint booth exhausts Whenever possible protect the fresh air inlet from the prevailing wind and local wind effects from corners

The fresh air inlet should be sized for an air velocity of 3ms The inlet duct area is detailed on the General Arrangement drawing located in Section 1 of this manual

Where the fresh air inlet is made in a load bearing wall eg a brick wall guidance should be obtained from Structural Engineers on the provision of a lintel in the wall over the fresh air opening

A weather hood must be fitted when the air handler air inlet is at or within 1 m of the outside wall Additionally the weather hood should have negligible resistance to the airflow maximum 01 mbar at the design air flow rate

Do not install the ECONO-AI R 3000S Series air handler where long lengths of duct or bends of an angle greater than 30deg are necessary to lead to the air handler from the fresh air opening If ducting is unavoidable ensure that the resulting pressure drop is negligible Le less than 01 mbar for ductless air handlers and has been accounted for in the original design for ducted air handlers as detailed in the specification section of this manual Section 11

Note If the air intake is located in an area of unrestricted access warning notices preventing the blockage of the air intake by temporary stacking should be displayed adjacent to the intake

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 13

3 INSTALLATION 3000S

352 VENTI LA TION

Where the air air handler is in its own plant room or compartment this shall be ventilated with openings communicating directly with the outside air to ventilate the room

The openings shall be fitted with grilles of negligible resistance and shall be sited so that they cannot easily be blocked or flooded They shall have a total minimum free area as follows

Low Level (inlet) 320cm2 + 27cm2 per kilowatt in excess of 60kW total rated input

High Level (outlet) 160cm2 + 134cm2 per kilowatt in excess of 60kW total rated input

The free area of the grilles shall be not less than the size of the recommended minimum ventilation opening Grilles shall be designed to minimise high velocity air streams in the plant room For exposed ie free standing plant rooms ventilation openings shall be provided on at least two sides and preferably on all four sides

Where mechanical ventilation is used it shall be by mechanical inlet and either natural or mechanical extraction Systems of ventilation employing mechanical extraction and natural air inlet shall not be used

The minimum flow rates of air supplied shall be not less than 06 m3s per megawatt of rated heat input

36 AIR DISCHARGE

The air handler should be located with the air discharge into the heated space at a minimum height of 3 metres The air should not discharge directly onto any obstructions and direct discharge on to working personnel should be avoided

If the air discharge is located in an area of unrestricted access warning notices preventing the blockage of the air discharge by temporary stacking should be displayed adjacent to the discharge

Generally it is not necessary to fit distribution ducting to the discharge of the air handler If ducting is required or specified ensure that the resulting pressure drop has been accounted for in the original design specification as detailed in Section 1 of this manual

37 ASSEMBLY AND POSITIONING OF AIR HANDLER

Unless specified at the time of order air handlers will be shipped in sections Discharge heads grilles attenuators duct connecting sections filters rain-hoods etc will be supplied loose for site fitting to the air handler

Horizontal air handlers must be supported on their steel angle support base When the air handler is located check for level and adjust as necessary

Alternatively horizontal air handlers can be supplied with extensions of the support frame for suspending from overhead supports This must be specified at the time of order Do not suspend the air handler from the lifting eyes

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 14

3 INSTALLATION 3000S

38 REMOTE STATION

The ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler is supplied with a remote control station This should be mounted in a position convenient to the end user If possible it should not be mounted on an external wall or where the space temperature detector is affected by cold draughts or a local source of heat

39 VISUAL CHECK

After completion of installation re-check the air handler for signs of damage Report any instance to RS STOKVIS Ltd

310 CONNECTION OF SERVICES

The air handler requires the connection of fuel gas and electricity

3101 FUEL GAS SUPPLY

The ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler has been designed for use on Natural Gas An alternative version is available for LPG The gas type for the air handler supplied is clearly marked on the air handler data badge and on the Specification sheet in Section 1 of this manual Check the gas type is correct and that the supply pressure is within the range marked on the specification

The local gas Authority should be consulted about the adequacy of the gas service and meter supplies for existing and proposed extensions to the installation and for any requirements for boosting the gas supply_

Connect the fuel gas supply to the inlet manual valve on the air handler gas train The connection size is detailed in Section 1 of this manual A further isolation valve and union should be fitted immediately adjacent to the appliance which when the valve is closed allows the complete burner and control assembly to be disconnected for maintenance or repair

New gas pipework should be installed to British Gas Publication IGEUP2 and be purged and pressure tested in accordance with British Gas Publications IGEUP1

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 15

3 INSTALLATION 3000S

3102 ELECTRICITY SUPPLY

All external wiring shall be carried out and checked by a competent person All components shall be checked for suitability for voltage range and frequency

Means for electric isolation having a contact separation of at least 3mm in all poles must be provided adjacent to the air handler The electrical supply to the appliance shall incorporate suitable means of excess current protection

The ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler requires a 3 phase 4 wire supply which should be connected to the main control panel Check the air handler data badge for the correct electrical supply The maximum supply requirement is Specified in Section 1 of this manual Note that the 240 Volt air handler control circuit is taken from the lUI phase to Neutral Connection should be made as shown on the wiring diagram shipped inside this panel

The air handler must be earthed in accordance with BS5986 and CP1013

Check all terminal strip terminations for wires which have become loose during shipment

311 CONNECTION TO THE MAIN PANEL AND REMOTE STATION

Interconnecting wiring to the main panel and remote station should be made with a minimum specification of 075 mm2 300 Volt cable Check that no wires on the terminal strip have become loose during shipment The remote panel should be mounted at a height of approx 18m If possible it should not be mounted on an external wall or where the sensor will be affected by cold draughts or a local source of heat

Both panel and remote station must be earthed in accordance with BS5986 and CP1013

312 HEATED SPACE TEMPERATURE SENSOR

The space temperature sensor located on the remote panel should be connected with screened cable or twin low voltage signal cable run in its own separate conduit It should be mounted on the remote panel or adjacent to the outlet at a height of approx 18m If possible it should not be mounted on an external wall or where the sensor will be affected by cold draughts or a local source of heat

313 DUCT SENSOR

The duct sensor should be connected with screened cable or twin low voltage signal cable run in its own separate conduit It should be mounted in the air handler discharge as close as possible to the discharge into the heated space

314 OVERHEAT LIMIT CONTROL SENSOR

The overheat limit control sensor should be connected with twin core cable It should be mounted in the air handler discharge within 1 metre of the air handler outlet connection

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 16

3 INSTALLATION 3000S

315 TOUCH SCREEN WIRING

The touch screen located on the front of the remote station requires two separate twisted pairs of O5mrh2 screened cable run in a separate conduit If the distance between the main and remote stations is greater that 1 km please contact RS STOKVIS Ltd for advice

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 17

3 INSTALLATION 3000S

316 ALIGNMENT

3161 INSTALLATION OF DRIVE BELTS

On 80 amp 89 30008 range of air handlers it will be necessary to align the pulleys and fit the drive belts before carrying out commissioning of the unit

3162 PU LLEYS

Before assembling the drive check the pulley grooves are free from scores or sharp edges and all dimensions conform to the relevant standard

The Taper Lock bush is your starting point when it comes to assembly and installation Drive installation is a straightforward job with Taper Lock - but the stages set out on the installation leaflet provided with every Taper Lock bush should be followed closely

3163 ALIGNMENT

Good alignment of pulleys prior to belt installation is important to avoid belt flank wear The diagram below shows correct installation of pulleys

INTERNAl BEARING

MOTOR PUlLEY rAN PULLEY

MOTORMOTOR ADJUSTMENT MOUNTING BOlTSBOLTS

3164 BELTS

When the pulleys have been correctly positioned on the shafts the belts can be installed to complete the drive

The drive centre distance should be reduced prior to the installation of the belts so that they may be fitted without the use of force Under no circumstances must belts be prised into the grooves Using sharp tools to stretch the belts over the pulley rim can easily damage belts and pulley grooves

The installation allowance given in the table below is the minimum recommended reduction in centre distance for various belt section and lengths to allow for correct fitting

The take-up allowance given in the same table should be added on to the calculated centre distance to allow for belt stretch

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 18

3 INSTALLATION 3000S

3165 INSTALLATION AND TAKE UP ALLOWANCE

Belt Pitch Installation Allowance Take-Up Length (mm) SPZ SPA SPB SPC (mm)

410 to 530 5

540 to 840 10

850 to 1160 15

1170 to 1500 20

1510 to 1830 20 25

1840 to 2170 30

2180 to 2830 25 40

2840 to 3500 30 50

3520 to 4160 50 60

4170 to 5140 70

5220 to 6150 85

6180 to 7500 105

600 to 8500 125

8880 to 10170 145

10600 to 12500 175

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 19

4 COMMISSIONING 30005

This appliance must be commissioned by a RS STOKVIS Ltd approved engineer

41 PRESTART CHECKS

1 Switch the SUMMERIOFFMlINTER switch on the remote station to OFF

2 Check the correct electric supply is available to the air handler and the appliance isolator installed

3 Check the correct fuel gas supply is available to the air handler and local isolation valve and union installed Check that new gas pipe work has been correctly purged and pressure tested and that the isolation valve is in the OFF position

4 Check the air handler gas control system and burner connections for pressure soundness as detailed in Appendix 1 of this manual

5 Complete the first section of the Service Check Sheet supplied at the back of this manual (Appendix 3)

6 Close the air handler access door

7 Close and lock the main air handler control panel

8 Switch the main panel isolator to position 1 Check the POWER ON light illuminates

9 Check and set the timed ONOFF periods in the lAC Controller located on the remote panel Ensure that the unit is set to be on during testing Refer to Appendix 4 for the lAC setting procedure

10 Close and lock the remote panel

11 Switch the SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch on the remote station to SUMMER to start the air fan Return the switch to the OFF position and check for correct rotation of the fan as the fan slows and stops

The fan rotation can be observed through the fan section access door or through the air handler access door Only do this during the fan run-down period Ensure the door is securely fastened after completion

Rotation arrows are fitted on the end of the air handler and inside the air handler above the interior bearing support If the rotation is incorrect two phases should be interchanged as dictated by the Engineer responsible for the site electrical system

12 Check the air pressure drop across the burner whilst the fan is operating with a water column pressure gauge connected to the two pressure test points on the air pressure switch (DPS) This pressure should be between 14 and 16 rnbar

If the air differential pressure measured above is not within the operating range check inlet and outlet ductwork as appropriate and any filters fitted If the pressure differential is still not within limits isolate the air handler and report to RS STOKVIS Ltd before proceeding

13 Check the operation and setting of the Low Air Pressure Switch by injecting a controlled signal into the switch Check the break point on the switch is 1 mbar (falling)

Note The switch is set and sealed before fitting The 1 mbar switch point may not coincide with the 1 mbar scale reading on the switch

If on checking the switch is not operating correctly do not tamper with it return it to RS STOKVIS Ltd for replacement

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 20

4 COMMISSIONING 3000S

42 DRY RUN

With all the manual gas isolation valves still in the OFF position switch the SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch to WINTER

43 START UP

1 Attach a manometer to pressure test point F and the low pressure test point on the air pressure switch (DPS)

2 Open the main gas supply valve (MV1) and the pilot burner isolation valve (PV3) Leave the main burner isolation valve (MV6) closed Reset the air handler by pressing the push-button marked RESET on either the main panel or remote station The air handler pilot will light automatically (after the automatic damper start check and combustion air pre-purge) and then LOCKOUT after the main gas shut-off valves are addressed

During the short period that the pilot is in operation check the pilot gas pressure on the manometer It should be 10 mbar and the pilot flame approximately 100 - 150mm in length covering the first three or four holes of the mixing plate and have a steady blue colour when viewed through the sight glass on the access side of the air handler Adjust as necessary - refer to Section 51 this manual Check the flame signal - refer to Section 431

3 Open the main burner isolation valve (MV6) RESET the air handler which should now light to main burner stage When alight close the main burner isolation valve to shut down the gas flow to the burner Check that the unit goes to LOCKOUT

4 Reset the air handler and drive the burner to low fire by adjusting the temperature controller set point as described in Appendix 4 of this manual Check the flame is continuous across the width of the burner and has a flame length of approx 50 - 65mm from the burner rail when viewed through the sight glass on the access side of the air handler Check the burner pressure across pressure test point D and the downstream (low) pressure test point on the air pressure switch ie on the rear of the pressure switch This pressure is specifled in Section 1 of this manual Adjust as necessary-refer to Section 53 of this manual Check the flame signal - refer to Section 431

Where possible check the actual gas flow rate by meter reading with all other appliances turned off

5 Drive the burner to high fire by adjusting the temperature controller set point and high limit to 55degC as described in Appendix 4 of this manual Check the flame is continuous across the burner rail and has a flame length of approximately 250 - 350mm from the burner rail Check the burner pressure across pressure test point D and the downstream (low) pressure test point on the air pressure switch This pressure is specified in Section 1 of this manual Adjust as necessary - refer to Section 52 of this manual Check the maximum air handler discharge temperature Check the flame signal shyrefer to Section 431

Where possible check the actual gas flow rate by meter reading with all other appliances turned off

6 Check the operation of the overheat limit control by adjusting the temperature controller set point and high limit to 65degC as described in Appendix 4 of this manual Monitor the discharge temperature on the temperature controller Check that the overheat control operates as the set temperature is passed Check that the control must be manually reset by pressing the green reset button on the front of the switch Return the temperature controller to its original settings

In the event that the ambient temperature is too low for this simple procedure to work the instrument will have to be bench tested using a Temperature 8ath Remove and replace the control as Section 84 of this manual for bench-testing

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 21

4 COMMISSIONING 3000S

43 1 FLAME SIGNAL CHECK

1 The ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler is fitted with a Klippon SAKT1 Test Terminal which can be used to measure the flame scanning signal Refer to the Electrical Schematic and connect a 0-1 mA ammeter to the two test points with standard 23 mm test plugs with the positive lead on the detector side Disconnect the terminal link to obtain the signal reading A minimum signal of 70 microamps is required typical signals are in the 250-400 microamp range on both pilot and main flame After completion replace the terminal link and remove the test jacks

2 Drive the burner to high fire as previously described Measure the carbon dioxide content of the discharge air stream This figure must not exceed 2800 ppm If the discharge exceeds this limit isolate the air handler and report to RS STOKVIS Ltd before proceeding

Stop and start the air handler a few times to check for reliability using the Operating Instructions (Section 6)

432 HANDOVER

Complete the air handler Service Check Sheet supplied at the back of this manual The self-copy sheet must be returned to STOKVIS for checking

Instruct the User in efficient use and care of the unit start-up and shutdown (including emergency shutdown) and recommended service interval Emphasise the need to keep the air handler clear of stored items and extraneous material and to maintain the recirculation and fresh air paths to the air handler inlets Hand all instructions as applicable to the UserOwner for safekeeping

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 22

5 ADJUSTMENTS 3000S

If adjustments to the air handler settings are required they should be made by a RS STOKVIS Ltd approved engineer

The normal value for all control settings is specified in Section 1 of this manual

51 PILOT ADJUSTMENT

The pilot gas pressure and flame length may be adjusted by altering the discharge pressure of the pilot governor Screwing the adjusting screw clockwise (located under the top cap) increases the discharge pressure and the flame length anti-clockwise decreases the pressure and the flame length

52 BURNER HIGH FIRE PRESSURE ADJUSTMENT

At high fire alter the spring compression on the main burner governor (MV2) by removing the cap and adjust the spring compression plate clockwise to increase the burner pressure anti-clockwise to decrease burner pressure If the pressure does not increase on adjusting the spring the supply is inadequate

Note On small air handlers fitted with a mUlti-functional control the pressure adjusting screw is located under a swing cap on the first block valve

53 BURNER LOW FIRE ADJUSTMENT

The main burner low fire is adjusted on the flow control valve MV5 (Process amp Instrumentation Diagram)

Remove the top cover of the valve and insert a Terminal Screwdriver in the adjusting screw of the TOP cam marked NI

Drive the burner to low fire by adjusting the temperature controller set-point and high limit to 05degC as described in Appendix 4 of this manual

Turn the Terminal Screwdriver clockwise to decrease the low fire gas flow anti-clockwise to increase the flow

Check the heat input and flame signal at the new position are satisfactory and return the tenlperature controller to its normal settings

Replace the control valve cover

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 23

5 ADJUSTMENTS 3000S

54 SUMMERIOFFIWINTER SWITCH

In the SUMMER position this switch provides ventilation only and is independent of the programmed ON and OFF periods This position is manually selected and must be manually de-selected Whenever the switch is in this position the fan is operating

In the OFF position the air handler is shutdown and will not operate This overrides any frost protection fitted It is suitable for air handler shutdown for short periods such as holidays The programme memory is unaffected by this switch and assumes control of the air handler when the switch is returned to the WINTER position

In the WINTER position the air handler operates off the programme memory to provide heating

55 RESET BUTTON

Visual indication of air handler lockout is provided In the event of lockout occurring the air handler can be reset by depressing the RESET button This parallels the RESET button on the air handler main control panel If after 4 attempts to reset the air handler the lockout indicator still illuminates then a Service Engineer should be called to investigate the problem

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 24

6 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 3000S

61 AIR HANDLER START-UP

1 Open all manual gas valves both on the appliance and on the supply to the appliance Switch on the Electric Supply to the appliance

2 On the main air handler panel

Switch the panel isolator to the 1 position

Check POWER ON light

3 On the remote control station

For Heating Switch the SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch to WINTER

The air handler will now start automatically in response to the time settings

In the event of LOCKOUT

Press the RESET button and the cycle of operations will be repeated If the air handler goes to LOCKOUT four times in succession call for a Service Engineer

For Unheated Ventilation Switch the SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch to SUMMER

Note This prevents the burner firing giving a controlled supply of ventilation air to the heated space as long as the switch is in this position The air handler will now start automatically in response to the timeclock demand To turn the fan off return the switch to the centre OFF position

In the event of LOCKOUT

Press the RESET button and the cycle of operations will be repeated If the air handler goes to LOCKOUT four times in succession call for a Service Engineer

62 AIR HANDLER SHUTDOWN

621 SHUTDOWN FOR SHORT PERIODS

Switch the SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch on the remote station to OFF

622 SHUTDOWN FOR PROLONGED PERIODS

Switch the main panel isolator to the 0 position and close all manual gas valves both on and leading to the appliance

Note Manual gas valves should only be operated when the appliance is to be shut off for either Servicing or for a prolonged shutdown

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 25

30005 6 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

63 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS

631 SITE CLEARANCE ADJACENT TO AIR HANDLER

Attention should be paid to keeping the area around the air handler tidy No rubbish should be allowed to accumulate in the vicinity of the air handler and storage of goods etc should not be permitted within two metres of the air handler Failure to comply could result in reduced airflow to the air handler causing inefficient running and potential overheat cond ition

632 AIR SUPPLY TO AIR HANDLER

Air vents and grilles supplying air to the air handler should never be blocked and should be checked periodically to ensure they are clear

633 AIR FILTERS

Similarly attention should be paid to cleaning or replacing the filters to the air handler if fitted Your installer should advise you on the frequency with which this would be required to be completed

634 SERVICE

For continued safe and efficient operation of this air air handler it is important that servicing of the air handler should be completed at regular intervals by a competent person in accordance with Section 82 of this manual Users are advised to enter into a Service Agreement with RS STOKVIS Ltd

635 SPARE PARTS

It is suggested that a complete set of spare parts essential to the running of the air handler and recommended by the installer are kept by the user on the premises where the air handler is installed This is particularly important where the air handler forms an essential part of any process plant and its being out of operation may cause problems by for example frost damage or condensation by super-cooling

A list of Recommended Spares will be found in Section 9 of this manual

636 GAS LEAKS

If a smell of gas is detected around the area of the appliance Switch off all manual gas valves and contact your service engineer or the local gas undertaking

NEVER

LOOK FOR GAS LEAKS WITH A LIGHTED MATCH OR NAKED

FLAME

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 26

7 FAULT FINDING 30008

The main control panel incorporates two lights to help in fault finding

POWER ON

LOCKOUT

The remote station also has three lights

AIR FAN ON

BURNER ON

LOCKOUT

This section gives the possible causes of failure associated with each check light The electrical schematic diagram in this manual and the wiring diagram shipped in the main air handler panel should be used in conjunction with the notes below Additionally Service Engineers should familiarise themselves with the detailed Start Sequence given in Appendix 2 of this manual

The notes are given for each light before consulting the notes check for bulb failure

71 POWER ON LIGHT IS UNLIT

Check

1 Main control panel isolator is in the 1 position

2 Main Panel 6A MCB has not tripped if a trip has occurred the switch will be at the OFF position Reset and test system as required

3 Also check if the mains electrical supply is isolated If so FIND OUT WHY before taking any action

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 27

7 FAULT FINDING 30005

72 AIR FAN ON LIGHT IS UNLIT

Check

1 SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch is not in Position OFF

2 Timeperiod is not set to off

3 Air handler is not at LOCKOUT

4 Recheck both AIR FAN ON and LOCKOUT bulbs

Two fault indications are possible

1 THE FAN IS NOT OPERATING

If the fan should have started but is not operating

Check 1 Overload for tripped conditions Reset the overload and monitor the next start-up

2 Motor Fuses

3 Relays 1 2 amp3 for failure

laClor CC1 for failure

5 Air Pressure Switch (DPS) is failed in the N 0 Position

Replace the faulty component as described in Section 8

2 THE FAN IS OPERATING

This indicates that the air pressure switch (DPS) has failed to change over

Measure the profile plate differential pressure as described in Section 4113 If the pressure is correct the air pressure switch is faulty Check the switch as in 4114 If the pressure is not correct

Check 1 Correct fan belt tension

2 Correct fan rotation

3 The air handler air inlets and discharge are not blocked

4 Correct fitting on filters

5 The air differential pressure switch impulse lines are not blocked or leaking

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 28

7 FAULT FINDING 30008

73 LOCKOUT LIGHT IS ILLUMINATED

This light indicates a failure in the burner ignition and flame supervision system

RESET the unit and follow the progress of the start sequence The full cycle may take two minutes

1

------t

2 LOCKOUT after 35-40 seconds indicates an ignition failure RESET the system and observe the pilot and ignition spark during the start-up attempt

I-- shy

3 Observe the spark This should be strong and highly visible If not remove and clean the spark plug as Section 82 Check that the spark plug gap is correctly set at 15 mm

-- shy

4 Check the pilot flame If the pilot flame ignites and the unit goes to LOCKOUT the scanning system is at fault Remove and clean the detector as Section 82 Check the flame signal as in Section 431

5 If the pilot does not light the gas supply system is faulty Check the pilot system for restriction and the pilot valve operation

6 If the pilot lights and the unit goes to LOCKOUT after the main gas valves are addressed either the flow control valve is blocked or one of the main gas block valves has failed Fit a manometer on the pressure test point on the outlet flange of the multishyfunctional control and observe if the pressure rises when the main gas valves are addressed No pressure rise will indicate failure of the main gas valves

74 AIR FAN ON LIGHT ILLUMINATED

If the burner does not start check

1 SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch is in WINTER position

2 Overheat Limit Control

These interlocks prevent the burner management system starting

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 29

8 SERVICING 3000S

IMPORTANT Servicing and maintenance should be only carried out by a RS STOKVIS Ltd approved engineer

Only use replacement parts provided by the appliance manufacturer

Check that the air openings for combustion and for ventilation of any plant roon or compartment are clear

81 ISOLATION

811 FUEL GAS ISOLATION

The fuel gas to the ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler should be isolated and locked off at the manual ball valve mounted at the start of the fuel gas line Additionally before entering or servicing the air handler the burner manual isolation valve and pilot line isolation valve should be closed

812 ELECTRICAL ISOLATION

All electric power to the air handler and the remote control station is switched through the local isolator This isolator is fitted with a lock facility to permit it to be locked in the OFF position

Additionally isolate the power at the Wall Isolator

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 30

8 SERVICING 30005

82 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE

The air handler should be routinely serviced at the start of each heating season Isolate the air handler as above before servicing Details of access to individual components are given in Section 84 of this manual

1 Remove and clean spark igniter Check that the gap is correctly set at 25 mm Replace every two years

2 Clean the flame detector lens to ensure freedom from dirt and moisture If the cell shows any sign of cracks it should be replaced Routinely replace the cell every two years or after 10000 hours of operation which ever comes first

3 Inspect the entire air handler paint system for general damage Repair as necessary

4 Every two years brush the burner plates and clear the burner holes carefully with a Size 18mm drill for NP II and 20mm drill for NP I

WARNING THE BURNER HOLES MUST NOT BE ENLARGED

5 Inspect and lubricate all damper linkages to ensure freedom of operation Wipe off all excess lubricants to prevent dirt build up on linkage parts

6 Check the fan belt for cracks and splits Check tension The correct tension gives 16mm deflection per metre of span when the belt is centrally loaded with a force of 27N Adjust as necessary

7 Grease both the fan shaft bearings with Mobiith AW2 grease or similar

NEVER use high temperature grease

NEVER mix two different greases within the bearing always flush existing grease out

Note Removing the cover plate on the end of the air handler gains access to the outboard fan bearing

Light to Slow to 0 120 2 to 6 months Clean Dry

Medium Medium 120 200 1 to 2 months

Moderate to Light to Slow to 0 120 1 to 4 weeks Dry

Dirty Medium Medium 120 200 1 to 7 days

Extreme Dirt Dry Light to Slow to 0 200 Daily Flushing out

Medium Medium Dirt

83 ANNUAL SERVICE CHECKS

After Servicing test fire the air handler following the Commissioning Procedure detailed in Section 4 of this manual to ensure correct operation generally Special attention must be paid to the damper system and related controls and interlocks

Additionally check that the fresh air and recirculation air entry path to the air handler has been kept clear and instruct the User of the need for this as necessary

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 31

8 SERVICING 3000S

84 REMOVAL PROCEDURE FOR REPLACEABLE COMPONENTS

IMPORTANT

Turn off the gas at the appliance service valve and the electricity at the main panel and wall isolator before proceeding

841 BURNER

The burner is located inside the air handler casing and is mounted on two brackets from the support straps To remove the burner isolate the air handler as in 81 and undo the union on the fuel gas line adjacent to the burner isolation valve (MV6) and unscrew the main and pilot gas feed pipes from the burner rail Access to the rear of the burner assembly is made by removing the partition plate below the burner separating the fresh air inlet to the burner from the return air inlet compartment This is held in place by screws which engage in captive nuts on the top side of the partition Remove the Flame Detector and pull off the ignition plug cap Disconnect the burner support brackets and remove the burner The burner will easily pass through the access hatch for further strip down Replace in the reverse order soundness test the gas pipework check the burner operation and duty as described in the commissioning section of this manual

842 FLAME DETECTOR

This is a 240 Volt instrument

The flame detector is mounted on the end of the burner rail inside the air handler casing To remove the detector isolate the panel electric supply and lock off Push the scanner towards the burner and rotate to release the bayonet fixing and lift the detector from its mount Remove the two screws holding the detector cover and disconnect the supply leads noting the polarity of the connections

Replace the flame detector in the reverse order ensuring correct polarity of connections Ensure the access panel is securely closed and the retaining nuts are tightened down Check operation by inserting a test meter in the points provided in the main control panel and reading the flame signals during start up to full rate burner operation (See 431) Operate the appliance over six starts for reliability of operation including tum off of start and main gas valves to check for lockout operation

843 IGNITER SPARK PLUG

This is a high tension spark plug

The igniter spark plug is mounted on the end of the burner rail inside the air handler casing To remove the spark plug isolate the air handler as above Enter the service access door Access to the spark plug is made through the profile plate To remove the spark plug pull off the high tension lead and unscrew the plug with a plug spanner

When replacing the spark plug check the plug gap is set at 15mm Check ignition reliability over six start ups

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 32

8 SERVICING 3000S

844 IGNITER SPARK TRANSFORMER

This is a 240 Volt instrument

The ignition transformer is located in a plastic box mounted on the air handler casing adjacent to the main control panel To remove the transformer isolate the air handler as above and unscrew the four retaining screws holding the box lid in place and remove the lid Disconnect the supply cable at the terminal strip and undo the transformer retaining screws The transformer may then be unscrewed from the High Tension cable leading to the spark plug

Replacement is a simple reversal of this procedure

Check ignition reliability over six start ups

845 COMBUSTION AIR PRESSURE SWITCH (DPS)

Note The switch is set and sealed and should be replaced if not operating correctly

This switch is a 240 Volt instrument

The air switch is mounted directly on the air handler casing and can be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove the switch isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the supply cable Break the downstream pipe compression fitting and unscrew the switch housing from its locating fitting Reverse the procedure to replace after ensuring switch setting is as specified in Section 13 of this manual Operate the air handler to ensure reliability of operation over six start ups

846 AIR HANDLER OVERHEAT LIMIT CONTROL

This is a 240 Volt instrument

The overheat limit control can be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove the control isolate the air handler as above and lock off Remove the switch cover Disconnect the supply cable and unscrew the control housing from its locating fitting Reverse the procedure to replace check the switch is set to 50degC Test the switch operation as described in Section 43 over at least three operations

847 AIR FAN AND MOTOR

The air fan motor is a 415 Volt 3 phase motor

The motor and slide rails are easily accessible inside the air handler casing If it is necessary to remove the motor isolate the air handler as above Slacken the fan-belt tension and remove the drive belts Pull the motor away from the air handler casing to make access to the motor terminal box and disconnect the supply cable The motor may now be removed from the unit Following replacement the air handler must be fully re-commissioned as in Section 4

It is unlikely that the air fan will need replacing or servicing If required a full procedure should be obtained from RS STOKVIS Ltd

Replacement must be followed by full re-commissioning as in Section 4

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 33

8 SERVICING 3000S

848 FUEL GAS MULTI-FUNCTIONAL CONTROL - SMALL UNITS

This is a 240 Volt instrument

The fuel gas multi-functional control can be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove the unit isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the Hirschman electric termination Unbolt the control from its flanges and remove

When replacing care must be taken to ensure the flange 0 rings are undamaged and in the correct location Following replacement the air handler must be fully reshycommissioned as in Section 4 including tests for soundness prior to start-up

849 GOVERNOR AND BLOCK VALVES

The block valves are 240 Volt instruments

All these items may be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove any item isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the electric termination to the two block valves the pilot block valve and the flow control block valve Break the two pipe unions and remove the fuel gas line complete for further strip-down

8410 FUEL GAS FLOW CONTROL VALVE

This is a 24 Volt instrument

The fuel gas How control valve can be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove the valve isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the supply cables to the control valve

On small air handlers fitted with a multi-functional control support the multi-functional control and unbolt its discharge flange Break the union downstream of the burner isolation valve and remove the section of line containing the flow control valve for further strip-down

On large air handlers fitted with separate block valves it will be necessary to remove the fuel gas line complete as Section 8410 above

Following replacement re-commission the air handler

Note If the fresh air damper is not in the full open position the heat input must not exceed the maximum heat input at recirculation condition specified in the technical data section of this manual

8411 PILOT GAS GOVERNOR AND BLOCK VALVE

The block valve is a 240 Volt instrument

Both items may be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove either item isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the electric terrriination to the solenoid valve Undo the upstream pipe union and the compression fitting downstream of the manual block valve (PV3) Remove the pilot gas line complete for further strip down

Replace broken or distorted connections and retest for soundness Ensure the pilot gas pressure is correct and the flame is sensing an output Ensure reliability over six start-ups

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 34

8 SERVICING 3000S

8412 BELT TENSIONING PROCEDURE

The setting tensions are designed to cover a wide range of drives A precise setting force for individual applications can be calculated as detailed

SETTING FORCES

Belt Section

Setting Force To Deflect Belt 16mm per Metre Of Span

Small Pulley Diameter (mm)

Basic Setting Forces Newtons (N) Kilograms (kgf)

125 x Setting Forces Newtons (N) Kilograms (kgf)

SPZ

56 to 71 16 16 20 20 75 to 90 18 18 22 22

95 to 125 20 20 25 25 Over 125 22 22 28 28

SPA

80 to 100 22 22 28 28 106 to 140 30 30 38 38 150 to 200 36 37 45 46 Over 200 40 40 50 51

SPB

112 to 160 40 40 50 51 170 to 224 50 51 62 63 236 to 355 62 63 77 79 Over 355 65 66 81 83

SPC 224 to 250 70 71 87 89 265 to 355 92 94 115 120 Over 375 115 120 144 150

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 35

8 SERVICING 3000S

BELT TENSIONING USING FENNER BELT TENSION INDICATOR

Calculate the deflection in mm on a basis of 16mm per metre of centre distance Centre Distance (m) x 16 =Deflection (mm)

Set lower marker ring at the deflection distance required in mm on the lower scale

Set upper ring against to bottom edge of the top tube

Place the belt tension indicator on top of the belt at the centre of span and apply a force at right angles to the belt defecting it to the point where the lower marker ring is level with the top of the adjacent belt

Read off the force value indicated by the top edge of the upper marker ring

Compare this force to the kgf value shown in the table above

If a Fenner Belt Tension Indicator is not available a spring balance and rule will be suffice

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 36

8 SERVICING 30005

85 MAIN PANEL CONTROLS

All panel controls are readily accessible and may be easily exchanged for replacement components in the event of failure Ensure any replacement item is of the same make and type as the original

851 LANDIS amp GYR LFL 1335 AUTOMATIC SEQUENCE CONTROLLER

The Landis amp Gyr Automatic Sequence Controller is a plug-in unit locating on a pre-wired chassis To remove the controller undo the two retaining screws at the top left and lower right corners and pull the module off the chassis

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

852 CONTROLS CIRCUIT (24 VOLT) TRANSFORMER

The Controls Circuit Transformer is fixed to the panel back plate by tapped screws To remove the transformer undo the wiring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel Undo the two retaining screws and remove the unit complete

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

853 CONTROL RELAYS R1 R2 amp R3

The Control Relays are DIN Rail mounted To remove a relay undo the wIring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel Release the DIN rail retaining clip under the relay with a screwdriver and remove the relay

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

854 6A MCB

The 6A MCB is DIN Rail mounted To remove the MCB undo the wiring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel Release the DIN rail retaining clip under the MCB with a screwdriver and remove the MCB

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

855 THERMAL OVERLOAD

The thermal overload is attached to the underside of the main contactor To remove the overload undo the wiring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel and that the overload setting is as specified in Section 13 of this manual Unscrew the three connections to the contactor and remove the overload

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 37

8 SERVICING 3000S

856 MAIN CONTACTOR

The Main Contactor is DIN Rail mounted To remove the contactor remove the thermal overload as 855 above and then undo the wiring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel Release the DIN rail retaining clip under the contactor with a screwdriver and remove the contactor

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

857 MOTOR FUSE

To replace a motor fuse pull the fuse carrier off the fuse holder base The fuse is attached to the fuse carrier by two screws Unscrew remove and replace

86 REMOTE CONTROL STATION

The remote control station contains some serviceable parts although these items should only be fitted by an approved RS STOKVIS Ltd Engineer

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 38

9 RECOMMENDED SPARES 3000S

For two years operation it is recommended that the following items should be held in stock

ITEM DESCRIPTION PART NO QUANTITY i

1 INDICATOR BULBS W1121 1 PACK

2 SPARK PLUG 023739 1 I

3 UVDETECTOR QRA10C 1 I

4 ROOM SENSOR DRT2453 1

5 DUCT SENSOR DDT1701 1

All replacement parts can be obtained from RS STOKVIS Ltd by quoting the air handler serial number the part number and description

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 39

APPENDIX 1 30005

SOUNDNESS TESTING THE FUEL GAS PIPEWORK

This procedure should only be carried out by personnel familiar with the ECONO-AIR 3000S Series Air handler

The pressure test points and all valves are identified on the Process and Instrumentation Diagram for the air handler included in Section 1 of this n1anual

Isolate the air handler electric supply at the main control panel and lock off Close the manual isolation valves MV1 MV6 and PV3 Ensure the supply pressure is available on the upstream side of MV1

A11 TESTING THE UPSTREAM PIPEWORKAND BURNER CONTROLS 1 Connect a 60 mbar manometer to the pressure test nipple A Monitor the

pressure for two minutes Any rise in pressure indicates that valve MV1 is leaking and must be replaced Remove pressure test points Band F

2 Open MV1 to pressurise the pipework on both the main gas and pilot line to the first block valve

3 Close MV1 Allow one minute for the temperature to stabilise and then test the system for 2 minutes and watch for a drop in the pipework pressure If the pressure falls open valve MV1 and test the pipework connections and valves from MV1 to MV3 and MV1 to PV2 for leaks with a proprietary leak detector fluid or spray Turn off MV1 seal any leaks and re-test

4 If no extemalleaks are found either the pilot block valve PV1 or either the first main gas block valve MV3 is letting by

5 To test this seal pressure test point A and fit a manometer to pressure test point B Leave for two minutes with MV1 open A rise in pressure on the manometer confirms a leak on the block valve MV3 Turn off MV1 exchange the valve and re-test from point 2 above

6 Repeat this procedure for the pilot block valve Seal test point B and fit a manometer to pressure test point F Leave for two minutes with MV1 open A rise in pressure on the manometer confirms a leak on the pilot block valve PV2 Turn off MV1 exchange the valve and re-test from point 1 above Seal test point F

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 40

APPENDIX 1 30005

A12 TESTING THE DOWNSTREAM BURNER VALVE 1 Close MV1 and connect pressure test points A and 8 with flexible 6 mm bore

tubing teed into the manometer Remove pressure test point C Open MV1 to pressurise the downstream block valve MV4

2 Close MV1 and leave for one minute for the temperature to stabilise Monitor the pressure for 2 minutes If the pressure falls open valve MV1 and leak test the line between the two block valves MV3 and MV4 with a proprietary leak detector Turn off MV1 seal any leaks and re-test Note Smaller air handlers in the 3000S Series are fitted with multi-functional valves combining the pressure regulator and two block valves in one component The above procedure still applies but if a leak is found on either block valve the whole control should be replaced If no external leaks are found the downstream block valve is letting by

3 To confirm this close MV1 remove the manometer and refit to pressure test point C Connect pressure test points A and 8 with flexible 6mm bore tubing Open MV1 and allow one minute for the temperature to stabilise Monitor the pressure for a further 2 minutes with MV1 still open A rise in pressure confirms that the second block valve MV4 is letting by Turn off MV1 Replace the valve and re-test from 2 above

A13 TESTING THE DOWNSTREAM BURNER PIPEWORK 1 Close MV1 and connect pressure test points A and D with flexible 6 mm bore

tubing teed into the manometer Open MV1 to pressurise the downstream pilot pipework

2 Close MV1 and leave for one minute for the temperature to stabilise Monitor the pressure for 2 minutes If the pressure falls open valve MV1 and leak test the line between the downstream block valve MV4 and the manual block MV6 with a proprietary leak detector fluid or spray If no external leaks are found the manual block valve MV6 is letting by Turn off MV1 seal any leakages and reshytest from 2 above

A14 TESTING THE DOWNSTREAM PILOT PIPEWORK 1 Close MV1 and connect pressure test points A and F with flexible 6mm bore

tubing teed into the manometer Open MV1 to pressurise the downstream pilot pipework

2 Close MV1 and leave for one rninute for the temperature to stabilise Monitor the pressure for 2 minutes If the pressure falls open valve MV1 and leak test the line between the downstream block valve PV2 and the manual block PV3 with a proprietary leak detector fluid or spray If no external leaks are found the manual block valve PV3 is letting by Turn off MV1 seal any leakages and reshytest from 2 above

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 41

APPENDIX 1 30005

A15 TESTING THE BURNER CONNECTIONS 1 Remove the burner access panel as described in Section 84 of this manual

Remove the burner spark igniter Slacken the two retaining bolts holding the burner to the burner support straps and unbolt the burner supply endplate from the burner casting and mixing plates

2 Connect pressure test points A and 0 with flexible 6mm bore tubing teed into the manometer Open MV1 and MV6 to pressurise the burner pipework Leak test the main gas burner pipework and connections with proprietary leak detector fluid Turn off MV6 Seal any leakages and re-test

3 Connect pressure test points A and F with flexible 6 mm bore tubing teed into the manometer Open MV1 and PV3 to pressurise the pilot burner pipework Leak test the pilot gas burner pipework and connections with proprietary leak detector fluid Turn off PV3 Seal any leakages and re-test

4 Turn off MV1

5 Replace the spark igniter and profile division plate

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 42

APPENDIX 2 30005

START SEQUENCE

The burner start sequence is controlled by the Landis and Gyr burner management unit The timings are pre-set and comply with 885885 This unit must NOT be tampered with

A brief description of the start-up sequence isshy

The unit checks

1 The NO FLAME signal on the UV flame scanner

Note If the scanner detects a flame at any time other than in the correct operating sequence the flame programmer initiates a lockout

2 The operation of the combustion air proving switch in the NO AIR position

3 The air handler discharge high temperature switch

If the checks are completed the unit starts the combustion air fan and then checks the combustion airflow

Once the airflow is proven the unit checks that the damper control circuit is functioning correctly After the damper microswitch is made to prove the fresh air damper is fully open the sequence allows 30 seconds for the combustion air to purge any combustible gas from the air handler

After completion of the purge the spark ignition system is energised the pilot valve opened and the spark terminated If the pilot flame is not proven by the UV scanner the system will initiate a LOCKOUT

If the flame is proven the main gas valves are opened the pilot extinguished and the main burner flame proven

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 43

i

APPENDIX 2 30008

The following flow chart shows the complete start sequence including the lighting of the various indicating lamps

MANUAL STATUS LIGHT POWER ON

POWER ON

I INITIATE START BY TIME

SETTING ON CONTROLLER

I CHECK NO FLAME

VISIBLE

PROVEj FAIL LOCKOUT

I CHECK RELAY R4 NC

POSITION

PROVE FAIL NO START

I CHECK AIR PRESSURE SWITCH NC POSITION

PROVE FAIL NO START

I CHECK RELAY R1 NC

POSITION

PROVE j

FAIL NO START

I START COMBUSTION

AIR BLOWER

I CHECK AIR PRESSURE SWITCH NO POSITION

PROVE I

FAIL NO START

I STATUS LIGHT FAN ON

I ENERGISE RELAY R1

I

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 44

I

I

APPENDIX 2 30008

I CHECK OVERHEAT LIMIT

CONTROL R5

PROVE I

FAIL I I

CHECK 541412 LOOP CLOSED ON

LANDIS ampGYR CIRCUIT

PROVE I

FAIL I I

COMBUSTION AIR PURGE PERIOD

30 SECONDS

I

NO START

NO START

CANCEL NO FLAME CHECK CIRCUIT

I

ENERGISE SPARK

I TIMED PERIOD 25 SECONDS

I ENERGISE PILOT GAS

VALVE

I TIMED PERIOD 25 SECONDS

I TERMINATE SPARK

I INTERROGATE UV FLAME SCANNER

PROVE I

FAIL I I

TIMED PERIOD 10 SECONDS

I

LOCKOUT

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 45

I

I

APPENDIX 2 3000S

I ENERGISE MAIN GAS

VALVES

I

STATUS LIGHT BURNER ON

I TIMED PERIOD

5 SECONDS

I DE-ENERGISE PILOT

GAS VALVES

CONTINUOUS FROM PILOT

I INTERROGATE UV FLAME SCANNER

PROVE I

FAIL I I

LOCKOUT I

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 46

APPENDIX 3 30005

Please see copy of Standard Service Sheet

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 47

APPENDIX 4 30005

A41 TIME OUT SCREEN

This is the standard screen displayed when the touch screen is not in use The back light is off to save energy_ To access the STATUS screen touch the ENTER key and the following screen is displayed

[]][I][]rn[IJOO[][IJOO[] EJ~E11 I[]I ~ middot I

NOTE

The Touch Screen operates using the heat produced by the touch of a finger and therefore only LIGHT pressure is required

Excessive pressure can damage the Touch Screen

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 48

APPENDIX 4 30008

A42 STATUS SCREEN

On the typical STATUS screen the illustrated information detailed is as follows

19 36 Fan Brn

RS OS

100 Fst_~_ Lck _ _ Xst Gas~o ~ I

RS Indicates the current room temperature

OS ~( t~~ the current duct discharge temperature

Fan Indicates the current status of the fan by showing the arrow and the fan blades for ON and OFF is shown by the arrow and fan blades being removed

Brn Indicates the current status of the burner with the black flames indicating the burner to be ON and vice versa

Lck LOCKOUT - This indicates a flame failure when highlighted during normal or start-up operation

Xst EXCESS TEMPERATURE SWITCH - This indicates the unit has reached the trip limit on the over heat stat when highlighted during operation

Indicates the current position of the gas modulating valve during normal Gas

operation (0-100)

Indicates whether the Frost stat is energised and the unit is running on frost Fst

override

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 49

APPENDIX 4 30008

A43 CHANGING SETTINGS

It is possible to change the settings for the time of operation and the required temperature set points The following details the steps required

A44 ENTERING THE SECURITY CODE

From the STATUS screen touch the return key and the screen below will be displayed

Type the HIGH LEVEL security code (4321) If you make a mistake use the BACK SPACE key to delete any incorrect number(s) Touch the ENTER key when the code is correct

If the security code is incorrect the screen above will be displayed then try again If after several attempts you can not gain access please contact RS STOKVIS Ltd for further information

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 50

APPENDIX 4 30008

When the code is entered correctly the MAIN MENU is displayed as detailed below

~ STATUS SET VALUES~ ~ TIVIE CLOCK [) [) [) [) [)

The MAIN MENU screen shows the three menu items available The title for each menu item can be changed to suit the end user Please notify RS STOKVIS Ltd prior to commissioning should these parameters require special amendments

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 51

APPENDIX 4 30008

A45 CHANGING OR SETTING A TIME SCHEDULE

From the main menu screen select the TIME CLOCK page by running finger across screen symbol and touch the ENTER key the screen below will be displayed

On the following screen highlight the TS1 symbol and touch the ENTER key

The current time schedule will now be displayed as shown below The display will automatically default to the current day (1 =Monday 2 =Tuesday etc) In this case day 5 (Friday) the four schedule switching times refer to that day

IAC6BBB1BHIS1

mm0CIl bull mID 17BB 17BB 17HB

Iillleschedule

To modify a time select it by highlighting and touch the ENTER key and the following screen is displayed

To amend the appropriate onoff time as shown on the screen below The arrows to the right of the time are for altering the hours and the arrows on the left for the minutes

Once you have set the time use the ESCape key to exit back to the time schedule screen and choose another day by touching the required number Another time may now be modified as before

IAC6BBB1BHIS1

H8BH

I i eschedule

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 52

APPENDIX 4 30008

Use the ESCape key to exit back to the MAIN MENU screen

~ STATUS ~ SET VALUES

TIME CLOCK []~ [] [] [] []

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 53

APPENDIX 4 30005

A46 CHANGING SET VALUES

From the main menu screen select the SET VALUES page by highlight in the normal way and touch the ENTER key

The following screen is displayed

36 19 18III III IIIHsv Rsv Llv

To change the RSV highlight it in the normal way and touch the ENTER key and the screen below will now be shown

IAC6RRR1RR40 T I

0 19 (Y)l RSV

ROOM SET VALUE

The above screen shows the parameters that can be changed The values to the far left are the limitations of set point (OC) Change the set point by using the UP and DOWN ARROWS on the left of the screen or touch the set value itself followed by the ENTER key to select the set value and set it directly using the numeric keyboard All values can be changed in this way

Use the ESCape key twice to exit back to the MAIN MENU screen

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 54

APPENDIX 4 30005

A47 COMMISSIONING AND SERVICING BURNER CHECKS

Select the SET VALUES screen from the MAIN MENU screen and adjust the high lirrlit set point to 55degC to drive the burner to high fire

IAC6HHH1HH60 ~T I

0 19 (Y)

HSV

HIGH SET VALUE ~

Ensure the set value is returned to 36degC once the appropriate checks and adjustments as described in Section 43 of this manual have been completed Return to the SET VALUES screen and select the low limit value to adjust the low fire setting

Reduce the low limit value to OdegC to drive the gas valve to low fire and complete the appropriate checks and adjustments as described in Section 43 of this manual and ensure the set value is returned to the original value

A48 GMT ltgt BST CHANGEOVER DAYLIGHT SAVINGS

To change your unit to British Summer TimelWinter Time the following system screen must be highlighted by touching the Iamp1 button twice

By touching the clock symbol in the top left hand corner followed by the ENTER key the screen below will be displayed

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 55

APPENDIX 4 30008

188311 851193

544

By touching and highlighting in this case 18 followed by the ENTER key A small box allowing the entry of two digits will appear Enter the desired time required using the numbered keys followed by ENTER key Your unit is now set to operate on BSTBWT

Touch the ESC key three times to return back to the Status screen

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 56

STOKVIS ENERGY SYSTEMS 96R WALTON ROAD EAST MOLESEY SURREY KT8 0DL TEL 020 8783 3050 08707 707 747 FAX 020 8783 3051 08707 707 767 E-MAIL infostokvisboilerscom WEBSITE wwwstokvisboilerscom

JULY 1999

Page 7: ECONOAIR 3000S SERIES AIR HANDLING UNIT DIRECT FIREDstokvisboilers.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/EconoAir... · 2019-05-10 · ECONOAIR 3000S SERIES AIR HANDLING UNIT DIRECT FIRED

1 TECHNICAL DATA 30008

UTILITIES

AIR HANDLER UTILITIES

FUELi NATURAL GAS

MAXIMUM FUEL SUPPL Y PRESSURE 25 mbar

MINIMUM FUEL SUPPL Y PRESSURE 15 mbar

ELECTRIC SUPPL Y TO CONTROL PANEL WITH NEUTRAL WIRE

415V 50Hz 3ph 4 Wire

SUPPLY RATING Amps

MOTOR FUSES

Notes

Air handler models 3018S to 3040S inclusive of STOKVIS ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handlers have been certificated by British Gas Pic for use on Natural Gas only It does not cover the use of distribution ducting filters and high level or external installations The other air handlers in the range are designed and built to the same parameters and standards as the certificated sample

Your attention is drawn to the limitations on location for recirculation air handlers detailed in Section 33

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 6

1 TECHNICAL DATA 30008

SETTINGS (AS SHIPPED)

AIR HANDLER SETriNGS (AS SHIPPED) I

I

IAIR PRESSURE SWITCH rnbar

OVERHEAT LIMIT CONTROL 65degC

PILOT BURNER GAS PRESSURE 100 mbar

MAXIMUM 50 mbar MAIN BURNER GAS PRESSURES

MINIMUM 10 mbar

MAXIMUM AT RECIRCULATION CONDITION NA

OVERLOAD Amps

FAN SPEED rpm

MAXIMUM 16 mbarDIFFERENTIAL AIR PRESSURE ACROSS PROFILE PLATE MINIMUM 14 mbar

GAS CONNECTION SIZE BSP

TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER

ACCESS CODE 4321 I

TEMPERATURE SETPOINT (Code 00) 19degC i

SAMPLE INTERVAL (Code 01) 2 sec I

DISCHARGE LOW LIMIT (Code 02) 18degC

DISCHARGE HIGH LIMIT (Code 03) 36degC

Note For air handler dimensions please refer to the General Arrangement Drawing

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 7

~------------------~--~

~~O~~C~~~__-__~~middot~~I~~______________-1~~~__~~-=~~=-~i

COMPONENT UST

BURNER

AIR FAN MOTOR

FAN DRIVE

CONTROL PANEL

REMOTE PANEL

SERVICES

FUEL

UAX SUPPLY PRESSURE MIN SUPPLY PRESSURE

ELECTRICITY

BLOCK VALVES

Serial No

bullbull IlICh NPII

kW 1+4ORPM

NA

3-30005-100 RevO DOL Start

N

NATURAL GAS

25mbor 1gtmbor

15V5OHz3Ph4W1RE Motor FLC bullbullbull Amps

240V 50Hz 1Ph 3 WIRE

Site Address

TAG DESCRIPTION WI SUPPLY ISOlATION VALve

W2 JW3 MULTIBLOCKMY MV5 FLOW CONTROL VALve WS BURNER ISOLATION VALVE

PVl PILOT PRESSURE REGULATOR PV2 PILOT SOlpoundNOIO VALve PV3 PILOT ISOlATION VALve

TC SPACE lEMPERATURE CONTROUER TO DISCHARGE TEMPERATURE DETECTOR TR SPACE TEMPERATURE DElECTOR TS OISCHARGE TEMPERATURE swrrCH

PS AIR PRESSURE swrrCH

UV fLAt4E DETECTOR

t SPARK IGNITER

NOTE f INIlICATES PRpoundSSURE TEST POM

Client

srOKVIS END USERS ADDRESS END USER

RS STOKVIS amp SONS Ltd POOL ROAD WEST MOLESEY SURREY KT8 2HN

Ident T45

shyomiddot BVIoI 0 145

1 DJSO 1 GBlA 14 T45

1AC600 00T1701 DRT3453 RAK13bullbull170

lWGJ

ORAtO 023739

PILOT LINE

fRtsH Nfl HET

Title TITLE

Model No Seri4l No DutY Style

Tel 0181 941 1212 Fax 0181 941 4136

00lCIIAAGE 10 WORIltSPAtt

305 99- m3sINDOOR HORIZONTAL

ACStw -_nora I-ID_raw_-+I__-I

Checked

CONTROL Approved

o-1 CommentApproval

Rev IDote I Description

Computer No 99

Purchase Order No

Drawing No

4-MR-001 R~O~

NOTES1shy

I PROPOSED LOCATION TO BE CHECKED tOR LEVEL AND LOAD BEARING STRENGTH BY OTHERS

2 UNIT TO BE SUPPLIED IN SEPERATE SECTIONS FOR LIFTING INTO PLANTROOM AND ON TO BASE BY OTHERS

3 ALL SECTIONS TO HAVE TIJO BEADS OF SEALANT BETJEEN OPPOSING FLANGES AS PER SUPPLIED INSTALL ATlON INSTRUCTIONS

ltI ENSURE ALL BUILDERS JORK IS CARRIED OUT AND MADE GOOD AFTER INSTALLATION BY OTHERS

5 ALL EXTERNAL JIRING SHALL BE CARRIED OUT BY COMPETENT PERSON TO CURRENT lEE REGULATIONS

DISCHARGE OPENING lUOlElIE VIDE X lIE HIG CV 3011 MEZ FLANGE

Serial No

sroKVIS Site Address Client END USERS ADDRESS END USER

ACCESS OPENING

~L---gt lt0-shy

~ ~

GAS CONNECTIONS

CONTROL PANEL 60011 VIDE X 600111 HIGH

APPROX VEIGHTSshy

HEATER CASING - 1I0U( KG

IJCL OOCUUef IDrawn lACS

Checked

I RS STOKVIS amp SONS Ltd POOL ROAD WEST MOLESEY SURREY KT8 2HN Tel 0181 941 1212 fax 0181 941 4136 CONTROL IApproved

o I~ I CommentApproval

Rev IDate IDescription

Computer No

99 Purchase Order No

Drawing No

3-MR-005

415VOlT5OHz 4 WIRE sumy

lIfEI_-shy~a

30131

2_F11

3 TOO---shy

B (

Serial No

~s

~~~~

~ NIt 9lOIElIliOTt)R RA11NG~W

STOKVIS

0 reg

-0

0 0 lt0

u ~

R5-1 -

ADDRESS

shy

regshy

~tl

GAS v IoIOtQR AIIIfONGTll LEGEND

IHlmN PNEI _

-e- PNEl_

Sl1pound_

-11shy IJIfClIOII1IO~-

DUCT STAT NPE COt 17tll

_STAT NPE om 3lt4Il)

~~~pound~ niR~~ (i)l

~ ()1

_cbullbullL~ nmiddoti Apoundm

USER

~ ~

SCHEMATIC FOR 3000S SERIES AIR

IAC600 BASED

RS STOKVIS amp SONS Ltd POOL ROAD WEST MOLESEY SURREY KT8 2HN Tel 0181 941 1212 Fax 0181 941 4136

_[---------f P(N(J ON

ICHI11ONTfWiSFORlER

PllOT V IIEIi CAS VAllIE 1

II CAS VAllIE 2

~_ON

lOCKOUT

s

o Rev I Dote I Description

Computer No 99

Purchase Order No

Drawing No

3-MR-100 Rev

o

30005 2 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

21 INTRODUCTION

The STOKVIS ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler is a direct fired unit designed to give clean healthy environmental conditions and constant even temperature within the heated space

The main air handler assembly houses the circulating air fan the gas burner the fuel gas line and all necessary safety controls The burner management system and space temperature controller is located in the main control panel mounted on or adjacent to the side of the air handler A second control station supplied loose for mounting remote from the air handler within the heated space or other convenient location houses indicating lights the control touch screen and auxiliary operational switches

A sight glass is fitted on the air handler casing to view the burner during operation

For multi unit networked applications the touch screen is excluded

22 GAS BURNER ASSEMBLY

The ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler incorporates the Maxon NP-II burner This burner is specially designed for heating fresh air and is mounted such that a proportion of the incoming air is forced into contact with the flame to ensure rapid mixing and combustion within the code requirements The burner assembly is built up from modular components to give the required heat duty

Each burner assembly is fitted with an integral pilot spark igniter and UV detector The flame detector is used for scanning both the pilot and main flame Note that the pilot burner operates in interrupted mode

The burner module fitted is identified in the Technical Data Section of this manual and on the Valve and Instrun1ent list

23 CONTROL SYSTEM

The controls fitted on the air handler are detailed on the Process amp Instrumentation Diagram in the Technical Data Section of this manual

231 SAFETY CONTROLS

The safety interlocks on the ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler are

1 Combustion air proving switch (PS) 2 Ultra-violet burner flame detector (UV) 3 Overheat limit control (OLe)

Failure of either the combustion air switch or fiame scanning circuit will cause the air handler to go to LOCKOUT and the burner management system will require a RESET before a re-light can be attempted

The air handler discharge overheat limit control is a manual reset switch After a failure the switch will have to be RESET before a re-light can be attempted

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 8

2 GENERAL DESCRIPTION 3000S

232 TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEM

The ECONO-AIR 30008 Series air handler is fitted with a full three-term modulating temperature control system as standard The space temperature is sensed by a heated space detector (TR) which inputs to the panel mounted temperature controller (TC) This achieves control by modulation of the fuel gas flow control valve (MV5) The temperature controller additionally limits the air handler discharge air temperature measured by the discharge temperature detector (TO) to pre-set high and low limits

233 MAIN CONTROL PANEL

The control panel houses the combustioncirculation air fan starter the burner management system and the heated space temperature controller On larger units a separate starter panel may be supplied The panel door is fitted with an interlocked isolator POWER ON and LOCKOUT lights and the burner management RESET button The panel is mounted on or adjacent to the air handler

234 FUEL GAS SYSTEM

The PILOT LINE comprises 1 Pilot governor (PV1 ) 2 One British Gas certificated solenoid valve (PV2) 3 One pilot gas isolation valve (PV3) 4 Pipework and fittings

Note Two pressure test points are fitted on the pilot line on the inlet and discharge of the pilot solenoid valve

The MAIN GAS LINE comprises

1 Gas isolation valve (MV1 ) 2 Pressure governor (MV2) 3 Double block safety shut-oft system (MV34) 4 Gas flow control valve (MV5) 5 Burner isolation valve (MV6) 6 Pipework and fittings

Note Four pressure test points are fitted on the n1ain gas line on the supply the inlet and discharge of the second block valve and downstream of the flow control valve

Note On small air handlers items 2 and 3 are combined in one multi-functional control

All items above are detailed on the Process amp Instrumentation Diagram in Section 1 of this manual

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 9

2 GENERAL DESCRIPTION 3000S

235 REMOTE CONTROL STATION

The ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler is also supplied with a remote control station which houses the air handler operating controls indicating status and the workspace temperature detector if the control station is located in the heated space

236 HEATED SPACE TEMPERATURE SENSOR The heated space temperature sensor is to be located remotely within the space to be heated

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 10

3 INSTALLATION 30005

31 STATUTORY REQUIREMENTS

I n accordance with the Gas Safety (I nstallation and Use) Regulations 1998 installation of this ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler should only be undertaken by competent personnel who are fully aware of their responsibilities under the Health and Safety at Work Act 1974

The installation of this air handler must comply with

BS6230-1991 Installation of gas-fired forced convection air air handlers for commercial and industrial Space Heating of rated input exceeding 60kW

The lEE Regulations for Electrical Installations

Gas Safety (Installation and Use) Regulations 1998

Health and Safety at Work Act 1974

Building Regulations 1986

Building Standards (Scotland Only)

The I nstitution of Gas Engineers Codes of Practice

IGEUP1 Soundness Testing Procedures for Industrial and Commercial Gas Installations

IGEUP2 Gas Installation Pipework Boosters and Compressors on Industrial and Commercial Premises

IGEUP4 Commissioning Of Gas Fired Plant On Industrial and Commercial Premises

32 RECEPTION AND STORAGE OF GOODS

32laquo1 RECEPTION

On receipt of the shipment check that the shipment is complete against the Delivery Advice Note Check for mechanical damage sustained during transit before off-loading the goods Inform the carrier of any such damage

322 OFFLOADING

Horizontal air handlers are fitted with four lifting eyes to permit an overhead lift Alternatively horizontal air handlers may be handled by a fork lift truck on the steel angle support frame

323 STORAGE

Air handlers must be stored in a dry environment The remote control station must be removed from the shipment and stored indoors in a dry environment Outdoor units of split case design (Size 54 and above) must have open ends protected from the environment until installation is complete Any filter elements should be stored in a dry environment

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 11

3 INSTALLATION 3000S

33 LIMITATIONS OF USE

The ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler must not be installed in the following locations

I n hazardous areas

In areas where flammable vapours can be present in excess of their threshold limit values as defined in 8S5925

I n accordance with 8S6230 Clause 513 where there are any flued appliances in the heated area and where air is supplied mechanically and there is mechanical extraction the design extract rate must be 5 to 10 less than the design inlet rate so that the room will not be at a lower pressure than the outside air If the air handler is the only source of mechanically supplied air the extract rate must not exceed 95 of the nominal air flow specified in Section 11 of this manual

Note If it proposed to install the ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler to supply heated air to a hazardous area or in areas where flammable vapours are present the installation must first be approved by a RS STOKVIS Ltd Engineer

34 LOCATION OF AIR HANDLERS

The air handler should normally be installed in the location recommended by the RS STOKVIS Ltd specifying engineer

Check the proposed location for level and load bearing strength Ensure that there is adequate clearance as detailed on the air handler GA in Section 1 this manual around the unit for access for maintenance purposes If the air handler is to be installed above floor level a suitably designed service platform should be provided Such a platform must have 100mm minimum raised edges around the perimeter If this is not possible all air handler access panels must be fitted with hinged restraints This is a factory standard option which should be specified at the time of ordering - check the restraints are fitted before proceeding with installation

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 12

3 INSTALLATION 3000S

35 FRESH AIR INLET AND VENTILATION

351 FRESH AIR INLET

The air handler must be installed where it has a direct and unlimited supply of fresh air from outside the building Ensure that the air intake is not located near exhausts from the building or from any process exhausts such as paint booth exhausts Whenever possible protect the fresh air inlet from the prevailing wind and local wind effects from corners

The fresh air inlet should be sized for an air velocity of 3ms The inlet duct area is detailed on the General Arrangement drawing located in Section 1 of this manual

Where the fresh air inlet is made in a load bearing wall eg a brick wall guidance should be obtained from Structural Engineers on the provision of a lintel in the wall over the fresh air opening

A weather hood must be fitted when the air handler air inlet is at or within 1 m of the outside wall Additionally the weather hood should have negligible resistance to the airflow maximum 01 mbar at the design air flow rate

Do not install the ECONO-AI R 3000S Series air handler where long lengths of duct or bends of an angle greater than 30deg are necessary to lead to the air handler from the fresh air opening If ducting is unavoidable ensure that the resulting pressure drop is negligible Le less than 01 mbar for ductless air handlers and has been accounted for in the original design for ducted air handlers as detailed in the specification section of this manual Section 11

Note If the air intake is located in an area of unrestricted access warning notices preventing the blockage of the air intake by temporary stacking should be displayed adjacent to the intake

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 13

3 INSTALLATION 3000S

352 VENTI LA TION

Where the air air handler is in its own plant room or compartment this shall be ventilated with openings communicating directly with the outside air to ventilate the room

The openings shall be fitted with grilles of negligible resistance and shall be sited so that they cannot easily be blocked or flooded They shall have a total minimum free area as follows

Low Level (inlet) 320cm2 + 27cm2 per kilowatt in excess of 60kW total rated input

High Level (outlet) 160cm2 + 134cm2 per kilowatt in excess of 60kW total rated input

The free area of the grilles shall be not less than the size of the recommended minimum ventilation opening Grilles shall be designed to minimise high velocity air streams in the plant room For exposed ie free standing plant rooms ventilation openings shall be provided on at least two sides and preferably on all four sides

Where mechanical ventilation is used it shall be by mechanical inlet and either natural or mechanical extraction Systems of ventilation employing mechanical extraction and natural air inlet shall not be used

The minimum flow rates of air supplied shall be not less than 06 m3s per megawatt of rated heat input

36 AIR DISCHARGE

The air handler should be located with the air discharge into the heated space at a minimum height of 3 metres The air should not discharge directly onto any obstructions and direct discharge on to working personnel should be avoided

If the air discharge is located in an area of unrestricted access warning notices preventing the blockage of the air discharge by temporary stacking should be displayed adjacent to the discharge

Generally it is not necessary to fit distribution ducting to the discharge of the air handler If ducting is required or specified ensure that the resulting pressure drop has been accounted for in the original design specification as detailed in Section 1 of this manual

37 ASSEMBLY AND POSITIONING OF AIR HANDLER

Unless specified at the time of order air handlers will be shipped in sections Discharge heads grilles attenuators duct connecting sections filters rain-hoods etc will be supplied loose for site fitting to the air handler

Horizontal air handlers must be supported on their steel angle support base When the air handler is located check for level and adjust as necessary

Alternatively horizontal air handlers can be supplied with extensions of the support frame for suspending from overhead supports This must be specified at the time of order Do not suspend the air handler from the lifting eyes

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 14

3 INSTALLATION 3000S

38 REMOTE STATION

The ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler is supplied with a remote control station This should be mounted in a position convenient to the end user If possible it should not be mounted on an external wall or where the space temperature detector is affected by cold draughts or a local source of heat

39 VISUAL CHECK

After completion of installation re-check the air handler for signs of damage Report any instance to RS STOKVIS Ltd

310 CONNECTION OF SERVICES

The air handler requires the connection of fuel gas and electricity

3101 FUEL GAS SUPPLY

The ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler has been designed for use on Natural Gas An alternative version is available for LPG The gas type for the air handler supplied is clearly marked on the air handler data badge and on the Specification sheet in Section 1 of this manual Check the gas type is correct and that the supply pressure is within the range marked on the specification

The local gas Authority should be consulted about the adequacy of the gas service and meter supplies for existing and proposed extensions to the installation and for any requirements for boosting the gas supply_

Connect the fuel gas supply to the inlet manual valve on the air handler gas train The connection size is detailed in Section 1 of this manual A further isolation valve and union should be fitted immediately adjacent to the appliance which when the valve is closed allows the complete burner and control assembly to be disconnected for maintenance or repair

New gas pipework should be installed to British Gas Publication IGEUP2 and be purged and pressure tested in accordance with British Gas Publications IGEUP1

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 15

3 INSTALLATION 3000S

3102 ELECTRICITY SUPPLY

All external wiring shall be carried out and checked by a competent person All components shall be checked for suitability for voltage range and frequency

Means for electric isolation having a contact separation of at least 3mm in all poles must be provided adjacent to the air handler The electrical supply to the appliance shall incorporate suitable means of excess current protection

The ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler requires a 3 phase 4 wire supply which should be connected to the main control panel Check the air handler data badge for the correct electrical supply The maximum supply requirement is Specified in Section 1 of this manual Note that the 240 Volt air handler control circuit is taken from the lUI phase to Neutral Connection should be made as shown on the wiring diagram shipped inside this panel

The air handler must be earthed in accordance with BS5986 and CP1013

Check all terminal strip terminations for wires which have become loose during shipment

311 CONNECTION TO THE MAIN PANEL AND REMOTE STATION

Interconnecting wiring to the main panel and remote station should be made with a minimum specification of 075 mm2 300 Volt cable Check that no wires on the terminal strip have become loose during shipment The remote panel should be mounted at a height of approx 18m If possible it should not be mounted on an external wall or where the sensor will be affected by cold draughts or a local source of heat

Both panel and remote station must be earthed in accordance with BS5986 and CP1013

312 HEATED SPACE TEMPERATURE SENSOR

The space temperature sensor located on the remote panel should be connected with screened cable or twin low voltage signal cable run in its own separate conduit It should be mounted on the remote panel or adjacent to the outlet at a height of approx 18m If possible it should not be mounted on an external wall or where the sensor will be affected by cold draughts or a local source of heat

313 DUCT SENSOR

The duct sensor should be connected with screened cable or twin low voltage signal cable run in its own separate conduit It should be mounted in the air handler discharge as close as possible to the discharge into the heated space

314 OVERHEAT LIMIT CONTROL SENSOR

The overheat limit control sensor should be connected with twin core cable It should be mounted in the air handler discharge within 1 metre of the air handler outlet connection

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 16

3 INSTALLATION 3000S

315 TOUCH SCREEN WIRING

The touch screen located on the front of the remote station requires two separate twisted pairs of O5mrh2 screened cable run in a separate conduit If the distance between the main and remote stations is greater that 1 km please contact RS STOKVIS Ltd for advice

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 17

3 INSTALLATION 3000S

316 ALIGNMENT

3161 INSTALLATION OF DRIVE BELTS

On 80 amp 89 30008 range of air handlers it will be necessary to align the pulleys and fit the drive belts before carrying out commissioning of the unit

3162 PU LLEYS

Before assembling the drive check the pulley grooves are free from scores or sharp edges and all dimensions conform to the relevant standard

The Taper Lock bush is your starting point when it comes to assembly and installation Drive installation is a straightforward job with Taper Lock - but the stages set out on the installation leaflet provided with every Taper Lock bush should be followed closely

3163 ALIGNMENT

Good alignment of pulleys prior to belt installation is important to avoid belt flank wear The diagram below shows correct installation of pulleys

INTERNAl BEARING

MOTOR PUlLEY rAN PULLEY

MOTORMOTOR ADJUSTMENT MOUNTING BOlTSBOLTS

3164 BELTS

When the pulleys have been correctly positioned on the shafts the belts can be installed to complete the drive

The drive centre distance should be reduced prior to the installation of the belts so that they may be fitted without the use of force Under no circumstances must belts be prised into the grooves Using sharp tools to stretch the belts over the pulley rim can easily damage belts and pulley grooves

The installation allowance given in the table below is the minimum recommended reduction in centre distance for various belt section and lengths to allow for correct fitting

The take-up allowance given in the same table should be added on to the calculated centre distance to allow for belt stretch

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 18

3 INSTALLATION 3000S

3165 INSTALLATION AND TAKE UP ALLOWANCE

Belt Pitch Installation Allowance Take-Up Length (mm) SPZ SPA SPB SPC (mm)

410 to 530 5

540 to 840 10

850 to 1160 15

1170 to 1500 20

1510 to 1830 20 25

1840 to 2170 30

2180 to 2830 25 40

2840 to 3500 30 50

3520 to 4160 50 60

4170 to 5140 70

5220 to 6150 85

6180 to 7500 105

600 to 8500 125

8880 to 10170 145

10600 to 12500 175

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 19

4 COMMISSIONING 30005

This appliance must be commissioned by a RS STOKVIS Ltd approved engineer

41 PRESTART CHECKS

1 Switch the SUMMERIOFFMlINTER switch on the remote station to OFF

2 Check the correct electric supply is available to the air handler and the appliance isolator installed

3 Check the correct fuel gas supply is available to the air handler and local isolation valve and union installed Check that new gas pipe work has been correctly purged and pressure tested and that the isolation valve is in the OFF position

4 Check the air handler gas control system and burner connections for pressure soundness as detailed in Appendix 1 of this manual

5 Complete the first section of the Service Check Sheet supplied at the back of this manual (Appendix 3)

6 Close the air handler access door

7 Close and lock the main air handler control panel

8 Switch the main panel isolator to position 1 Check the POWER ON light illuminates

9 Check and set the timed ONOFF periods in the lAC Controller located on the remote panel Ensure that the unit is set to be on during testing Refer to Appendix 4 for the lAC setting procedure

10 Close and lock the remote panel

11 Switch the SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch on the remote station to SUMMER to start the air fan Return the switch to the OFF position and check for correct rotation of the fan as the fan slows and stops

The fan rotation can be observed through the fan section access door or through the air handler access door Only do this during the fan run-down period Ensure the door is securely fastened after completion

Rotation arrows are fitted on the end of the air handler and inside the air handler above the interior bearing support If the rotation is incorrect two phases should be interchanged as dictated by the Engineer responsible for the site electrical system

12 Check the air pressure drop across the burner whilst the fan is operating with a water column pressure gauge connected to the two pressure test points on the air pressure switch (DPS) This pressure should be between 14 and 16 rnbar

If the air differential pressure measured above is not within the operating range check inlet and outlet ductwork as appropriate and any filters fitted If the pressure differential is still not within limits isolate the air handler and report to RS STOKVIS Ltd before proceeding

13 Check the operation and setting of the Low Air Pressure Switch by injecting a controlled signal into the switch Check the break point on the switch is 1 mbar (falling)

Note The switch is set and sealed before fitting The 1 mbar switch point may not coincide with the 1 mbar scale reading on the switch

If on checking the switch is not operating correctly do not tamper with it return it to RS STOKVIS Ltd for replacement

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 20

4 COMMISSIONING 3000S

42 DRY RUN

With all the manual gas isolation valves still in the OFF position switch the SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch to WINTER

43 START UP

1 Attach a manometer to pressure test point F and the low pressure test point on the air pressure switch (DPS)

2 Open the main gas supply valve (MV1) and the pilot burner isolation valve (PV3) Leave the main burner isolation valve (MV6) closed Reset the air handler by pressing the push-button marked RESET on either the main panel or remote station The air handler pilot will light automatically (after the automatic damper start check and combustion air pre-purge) and then LOCKOUT after the main gas shut-off valves are addressed

During the short period that the pilot is in operation check the pilot gas pressure on the manometer It should be 10 mbar and the pilot flame approximately 100 - 150mm in length covering the first three or four holes of the mixing plate and have a steady blue colour when viewed through the sight glass on the access side of the air handler Adjust as necessary - refer to Section 51 this manual Check the flame signal - refer to Section 431

3 Open the main burner isolation valve (MV6) RESET the air handler which should now light to main burner stage When alight close the main burner isolation valve to shut down the gas flow to the burner Check that the unit goes to LOCKOUT

4 Reset the air handler and drive the burner to low fire by adjusting the temperature controller set point as described in Appendix 4 of this manual Check the flame is continuous across the width of the burner and has a flame length of approx 50 - 65mm from the burner rail when viewed through the sight glass on the access side of the air handler Check the burner pressure across pressure test point D and the downstream (low) pressure test point on the air pressure switch ie on the rear of the pressure switch This pressure is specifled in Section 1 of this manual Adjust as necessary-refer to Section 53 of this manual Check the flame signal - refer to Section 431

Where possible check the actual gas flow rate by meter reading with all other appliances turned off

5 Drive the burner to high fire by adjusting the temperature controller set point and high limit to 55degC as described in Appendix 4 of this manual Check the flame is continuous across the burner rail and has a flame length of approximately 250 - 350mm from the burner rail Check the burner pressure across pressure test point D and the downstream (low) pressure test point on the air pressure switch This pressure is specified in Section 1 of this manual Adjust as necessary - refer to Section 52 of this manual Check the maximum air handler discharge temperature Check the flame signal shyrefer to Section 431

Where possible check the actual gas flow rate by meter reading with all other appliances turned off

6 Check the operation of the overheat limit control by adjusting the temperature controller set point and high limit to 65degC as described in Appendix 4 of this manual Monitor the discharge temperature on the temperature controller Check that the overheat control operates as the set temperature is passed Check that the control must be manually reset by pressing the green reset button on the front of the switch Return the temperature controller to its original settings

In the event that the ambient temperature is too low for this simple procedure to work the instrument will have to be bench tested using a Temperature 8ath Remove and replace the control as Section 84 of this manual for bench-testing

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 21

4 COMMISSIONING 3000S

43 1 FLAME SIGNAL CHECK

1 The ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler is fitted with a Klippon SAKT1 Test Terminal which can be used to measure the flame scanning signal Refer to the Electrical Schematic and connect a 0-1 mA ammeter to the two test points with standard 23 mm test plugs with the positive lead on the detector side Disconnect the terminal link to obtain the signal reading A minimum signal of 70 microamps is required typical signals are in the 250-400 microamp range on both pilot and main flame After completion replace the terminal link and remove the test jacks

2 Drive the burner to high fire as previously described Measure the carbon dioxide content of the discharge air stream This figure must not exceed 2800 ppm If the discharge exceeds this limit isolate the air handler and report to RS STOKVIS Ltd before proceeding

Stop and start the air handler a few times to check for reliability using the Operating Instructions (Section 6)

432 HANDOVER

Complete the air handler Service Check Sheet supplied at the back of this manual The self-copy sheet must be returned to STOKVIS for checking

Instruct the User in efficient use and care of the unit start-up and shutdown (including emergency shutdown) and recommended service interval Emphasise the need to keep the air handler clear of stored items and extraneous material and to maintain the recirculation and fresh air paths to the air handler inlets Hand all instructions as applicable to the UserOwner for safekeeping

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 22

5 ADJUSTMENTS 3000S

If adjustments to the air handler settings are required they should be made by a RS STOKVIS Ltd approved engineer

The normal value for all control settings is specified in Section 1 of this manual

51 PILOT ADJUSTMENT

The pilot gas pressure and flame length may be adjusted by altering the discharge pressure of the pilot governor Screwing the adjusting screw clockwise (located under the top cap) increases the discharge pressure and the flame length anti-clockwise decreases the pressure and the flame length

52 BURNER HIGH FIRE PRESSURE ADJUSTMENT

At high fire alter the spring compression on the main burner governor (MV2) by removing the cap and adjust the spring compression plate clockwise to increase the burner pressure anti-clockwise to decrease burner pressure If the pressure does not increase on adjusting the spring the supply is inadequate

Note On small air handlers fitted with a mUlti-functional control the pressure adjusting screw is located under a swing cap on the first block valve

53 BURNER LOW FIRE ADJUSTMENT

The main burner low fire is adjusted on the flow control valve MV5 (Process amp Instrumentation Diagram)

Remove the top cover of the valve and insert a Terminal Screwdriver in the adjusting screw of the TOP cam marked NI

Drive the burner to low fire by adjusting the temperature controller set-point and high limit to 05degC as described in Appendix 4 of this manual

Turn the Terminal Screwdriver clockwise to decrease the low fire gas flow anti-clockwise to increase the flow

Check the heat input and flame signal at the new position are satisfactory and return the tenlperature controller to its normal settings

Replace the control valve cover

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 23

5 ADJUSTMENTS 3000S

54 SUMMERIOFFIWINTER SWITCH

In the SUMMER position this switch provides ventilation only and is independent of the programmed ON and OFF periods This position is manually selected and must be manually de-selected Whenever the switch is in this position the fan is operating

In the OFF position the air handler is shutdown and will not operate This overrides any frost protection fitted It is suitable for air handler shutdown for short periods such as holidays The programme memory is unaffected by this switch and assumes control of the air handler when the switch is returned to the WINTER position

In the WINTER position the air handler operates off the programme memory to provide heating

55 RESET BUTTON

Visual indication of air handler lockout is provided In the event of lockout occurring the air handler can be reset by depressing the RESET button This parallels the RESET button on the air handler main control panel If after 4 attempts to reset the air handler the lockout indicator still illuminates then a Service Engineer should be called to investigate the problem

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 24

6 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 3000S

61 AIR HANDLER START-UP

1 Open all manual gas valves both on the appliance and on the supply to the appliance Switch on the Electric Supply to the appliance

2 On the main air handler panel

Switch the panel isolator to the 1 position

Check POWER ON light

3 On the remote control station

For Heating Switch the SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch to WINTER

The air handler will now start automatically in response to the time settings

In the event of LOCKOUT

Press the RESET button and the cycle of operations will be repeated If the air handler goes to LOCKOUT four times in succession call for a Service Engineer

For Unheated Ventilation Switch the SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch to SUMMER

Note This prevents the burner firing giving a controlled supply of ventilation air to the heated space as long as the switch is in this position The air handler will now start automatically in response to the timeclock demand To turn the fan off return the switch to the centre OFF position

In the event of LOCKOUT

Press the RESET button and the cycle of operations will be repeated If the air handler goes to LOCKOUT four times in succession call for a Service Engineer

62 AIR HANDLER SHUTDOWN

621 SHUTDOWN FOR SHORT PERIODS

Switch the SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch on the remote station to OFF

622 SHUTDOWN FOR PROLONGED PERIODS

Switch the main panel isolator to the 0 position and close all manual gas valves both on and leading to the appliance

Note Manual gas valves should only be operated when the appliance is to be shut off for either Servicing or for a prolonged shutdown

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 25

30005 6 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

63 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS

631 SITE CLEARANCE ADJACENT TO AIR HANDLER

Attention should be paid to keeping the area around the air handler tidy No rubbish should be allowed to accumulate in the vicinity of the air handler and storage of goods etc should not be permitted within two metres of the air handler Failure to comply could result in reduced airflow to the air handler causing inefficient running and potential overheat cond ition

632 AIR SUPPLY TO AIR HANDLER

Air vents and grilles supplying air to the air handler should never be blocked and should be checked periodically to ensure they are clear

633 AIR FILTERS

Similarly attention should be paid to cleaning or replacing the filters to the air handler if fitted Your installer should advise you on the frequency with which this would be required to be completed

634 SERVICE

For continued safe and efficient operation of this air air handler it is important that servicing of the air handler should be completed at regular intervals by a competent person in accordance with Section 82 of this manual Users are advised to enter into a Service Agreement with RS STOKVIS Ltd

635 SPARE PARTS

It is suggested that a complete set of spare parts essential to the running of the air handler and recommended by the installer are kept by the user on the premises where the air handler is installed This is particularly important where the air handler forms an essential part of any process plant and its being out of operation may cause problems by for example frost damage or condensation by super-cooling

A list of Recommended Spares will be found in Section 9 of this manual

636 GAS LEAKS

If a smell of gas is detected around the area of the appliance Switch off all manual gas valves and contact your service engineer or the local gas undertaking

NEVER

LOOK FOR GAS LEAKS WITH A LIGHTED MATCH OR NAKED

FLAME

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 26

7 FAULT FINDING 30008

The main control panel incorporates two lights to help in fault finding

POWER ON

LOCKOUT

The remote station also has three lights

AIR FAN ON

BURNER ON

LOCKOUT

This section gives the possible causes of failure associated with each check light The electrical schematic diagram in this manual and the wiring diagram shipped in the main air handler panel should be used in conjunction with the notes below Additionally Service Engineers should familiarise themselves with the detailed Start Sequence given in Appendix 2 of this manual

The notes are given for each light before consulting the notes check for bulb failure

71 POWER ON LIGHT IS UNLIT

Check

1 Main control panel isolator is in the 1 position

2 Main Panel 6A MCB has not tripped if a trip has occurred the switch will be at the OFF position Reset and test system as required

3 Also check if the mains electrical supply is isolated If so FIND OUT WHY before taking any action

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 27

7 FAULT FINDING 30005

72 AIR FAN ON LIGHT IS UNLIT

Check

1 SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch is not in Position OFF

2 Timeperiod is not set to off

3 Air handler is not at LOCKOUT

4 Recheck both AIR FAN ON and LOCKOUT bulbs

Two fault indications are possible

1 THE FAN IS NOT OPERATING

If the fan should have started but is not operating

Check 1 Overload for tripped conditions Reset the overload and monitor the next start-up

2 Motor Fuses

3 Relays 1 2 amp3 for failure

laClor CC1 for failure

5 Air Pressure Switch (DPS) is failed in the N 0 Position

Replace the faulty component as described in Section 8

2 THE FAN IS OPERATING

This indicates that the air pressure switch (DPS) has failed to change over

Measure the profile plate differential pressure as described in Section 4113 If the pressure is correct the air pressure switch is faulty Check the switch as in 4114 If the pressure is not correct

Check 1 Correct fan belt tension

2 Correct fan rotation

3 The air handler air inlets and discharge are not blocked

4 Correct fitting on filters

5 The air differential pressure switch impulse lines are not blocked or leaking

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 28

7 FAULT FINDING 30008

73 LOCKOUT LIGHT IS ILLUMINATED

This light indicates a failure in the burner ignition and flame supervision system

RESET the unit and follow the progress of the start sequence The full cycle may take two minutes

1

------t

2 LOCKOUT after 35-40 seconds indicates an ignition failure RESET the system and observe the pilot and ignition spark during the start-up attempt

I-- shy

3 Observe the spark This should be strong and highly visible If not remove and clean the spark plug as Section 82 Check that the spark plug gap is correctly set at 15 mm

-- shy

4 Check the pilot flame If the pilot flame ignites and the unit goes to LOCKOUT the scanning system is at fault Remove and clean the detector as Section 82 Check the flame signal as in Section 431

5 If the pilot does not light the gas supply system is faulty Check the pilot system for restriction and the pilot valve operation

6 If the pilot lights and the unit goes to LOCKOUT after the main gas valves are addressed either the flow control valve is blocked or one of the main gas block valves has failed Fit a manometer on the pressure test point on the outlet flange of the multishyfunctional control and observe if the pressure rises when the main gas valves are addressed No pressure rise will indicate failure of the main gas valves

74 AIR FAN ON LIGHT ILLUMINATED

If the burner does not start check

1 SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch is in WINTER position

2 Overheat Limit Control

These interlocks prevent the burner management system starting

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 29

8 SERVICING 3000S

IMPORTANT Servicing and maintenance should be only carried out by a RS STOKVIS Ltd approved engineer

Only use replacement parts provided by the appliance manufacturer

Check that the air openings for combustion and for ventilation of any plant roon or compartment are clear

81 ISOLATION

811 FUEL GAS ISOLATION

The fuel gas to the ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler should be isolated and locked off at the manual ball valve mounted at the start of the fuel gas line Additionally before entering or servicing the air handler the burner manual isolation valve and pilot line isolation valve should be closed

812 ELECTRICAL ISOLATION

All electric power to the air handler and the remote control station is switched through the local isolator This isolator is fitted with a lock facility to permit it to be locked in the OFF position

Additionally isolate the power at the Wall Isolator

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 30

8 SERVICING 30005

82 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE

The air handler should be routinely serviced at the start of each heating season Isolate the air handler as above before servicing Details of access to individual components are given in Section 84 of this manual

1 Remove and clean spark igniter Check that the gap is correctly set at 25 mm Replace every two years

2 Clean the flame detector lens to ensure freedom from dirt and moisture If the cell shows any sign of cracks it should be replaced Routinely replace the cell every two years or after 10000 hours of operation which ever comes first

3 Inspect the entire air handler paint system for general damage Repair as necessary

4 Every two years brush the burner plates and clear the burner holes carefully with a Size 18mm drill for NP II and 20mm drill for NP I

WARNING THE BURNER HOLES MUST NOT BE ENLARGED

5 Inspect and lubricate all damper linkages to ensure freedom of operation Wipe off all excess lubricants to prevent dirt build up on linkage parts

6 Check the fan belt for cracks and splits Check tension The correct tension gives 16mm deflection per metre of span when the belt is centrally loaded with a force of 27N Adjust as necessary

7 Grease both the fan shaft bearings with Mobiith AW2 grease or similar

NEVER use high temperature grease

NEVER mix two different greases within the bearing always flush existing grease out

Note Removing the cover plate on the end of the air handler gains access to the outboard fan bearing

Light to Slow to 0 120 2 to 6 months Clean Dry

Medium Medium 120 200 1 to 2 months

Moderate to Light to Slow to 0 120 1 to 4 weeks Dry

Dirty Medium Medium 120 200 1 to 7 days

Extreme Dirt Dry Light to Slow to 0 200 Daily Flushing out

Medium Medium Dirt

83 ANNUAL SERVICE CHECKS

After Servicing test fire the air handler following the Commissioning Procedure detailed in Section 4 of this manual to ensure correct operation generally Special attention must be paid to the damper system and related controls and interlocks

Additionally check that the fresh air and recirculation air entry path to the air handler has been kept clear and instruct the User of the need for this as necessary

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 31

8 SERVICING 3000S

84 REMOVAL PROCEDURE FOR REPLACEABLE COMPONENTS

IMPORTANT

Turn off the gas at the appliance service valve and the electricity at the main panel and wall isolator before proceeding

841 BURNER

The burner is located inside the air handler casing and is mounted on two brackets from the support straps To remove the burner isolate the air handler as in 81 and undo the union on the fuel gas line adjacent to the burner isolation valve (MV6) and unscrew the main and pilot gas feed pipes from the burner rail Access to the rear of the burner assembly is made by removing the partition plate below the burner separating the fresh air inlet to the burner from the return air inlet compartment This is held in place by screws which engage in captive nuts on the top side of the partition Remove the Flame Detector and pull off the ignition plug cap Disconnect the burner support brackets and remove the burner The burner will easily pass through the access hatch for further strip down Replace in the reverse order soundness test the gas pipework check the burner operation and duty as described in the commissioning section of this manual

842 FLAME DETECTOR

This is a 240 Volt instrument

The flame detector is mounted on the end of the burner rail inside the air handler casing To remove the detector isolate the panel electric supply and lock off Push the scanner towards the burner and rotate to release the bayonet fixing and lift the detector from its mount Remove the two screws holding the detector cover and disconnect the supply leads noting the polarity of the connections

Replace the flame detector in the reverse order ensuring correct polarity of connections Ensure the access panel is securely closed and the retaining nuts are tightened down Check operation by inserting a test meter in the points provided in the main control panel and reading the flame signals during start up to full rate burner operation (See 431) Operate the appliance over six starts for reliability of operation including tum off of start and main gas valves to check for lockout operation

843 IGNITER SPARK PLUG

This is a high tension spark plug

The igniter spark plug is mounted on the end of the burner rail inside the air handler casing To remove the spark plug isolate the air handler as above Enter the service access door Access to the spark plug is made through the profile plate To remove the spark plug pull off the high tension lead and unscrew the plug with a plug spanner

When replacing the spark plug check the plug gap is set at 15mm Check ignition reliability over six start ups

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 32

8 SERVICING 3000S

844 IGNITER SPARK TRANSFORMER

This is a 240 Volt instrument

The ignition transformer is located in a plastic box mounted on the air handler casing adjacent to the main control panel To remove the transformer isolate the air handler as above and unscrew the four retaining screws holding the box lid in place and remove the lid Disconnect the supply cable at the terminal strip and undo the transformer retaining screws The transformer may then be unscrewed from the High Tension cable leading to the spark plug

Replacement is a simple reversal of this procedure

Check ignition reliability over six start ups

845 COMBUSTION AIR PRESSURE SWITCH (DPS)

Note The switch is set and sealed and should be replaced if not operating correctly

This switch is a 240 Volt instrument

The air switch is mounted directly on the air handler casing and can be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove the switch isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the supply cable Break the downstream pipe compression fitting and unscrew the switch housing from its locating fitting Reverse the procedure to replace after ensuring switch setting is as specified in Section 13 of this manual Operate the air handler to ensure reliability of operation over six start ups

846 AIR HANDLER OVERHEAT LIMIT CONTROL

This is a 240 Volt instrument

The overheat limit control can be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove the control isolate the air handler as above and lock off Remove the switch cover Disconnect the supply cable and unscrew the control housing from its locating fitting Reverse the procedure to replace check the switch is set to 50degC Test the switch operation as described in Section 43 over at least three operations

847 AIR FAN AND MOTOR

The air fan motor is a 415 Volt 3 phase motor

The motor and slide rails are easily accessible inside the air handler casing If it is necessary to remove the motor isolate the air handler as above Slacken the fan-belt tension and remove the drive belts Pull the motor away from the air handler casing to make access to the motor terminal box and disconnect the supply cable The motor may now be removed from the unit Following replacement the air handler must be fully re-commissioned as in Section 4

It is unlikely that the air fan will need replacing or servicing If required a full procedure should be obtained from RS STOKVIS Ltd

Replacement must be followed by full re-commissioning as in Section 4

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 33

8 SERVICING 3000S

848 FUEL GAS MULTI-FUNCTIONAL CONTROL - SMALL UNITS

This is a 240 Volt instrument

The fuel gas multi-functional control can be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove the unit isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the Hirschman electric termination Unbolt the control from its flanges and remove

When replacing care must be taken to ensure the flange 0 rings are undamaged and in the correct location Following replacement the air handler must be fully reshycommissioned as in Section 4 including tests for soundness prior to start-up

849 GOVERNOR AND BLOCK VALVES

The block valves are 240 Volt instruments

All these items may be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove any item isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the electric termination to the two block valves the pilot block valve and the flow control block valve Break the two pipe unions and remove the fuel gas line complete for further strip-down

8410 FUEL GAS FLOW CONTROL VALVE

This is a 24 Volt instrument

The fuel gas How control valve can be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove the valve isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the supply cables to the control valve

On small air handlers fitted with a multi-functional control support the multi-functional control and unbolt its discharge flange Break the union downstream of the burner isolation valve and remove the section of line containing the flow control valve for further strip-down

On large air handlers fitted with separate block valves it will be necessary to remove the fuel gas line complete as Section 8410 above

Following replacement re-commission the air handler

Note If the fresh air damper is not in the full open position the heat input must not exceed the maximum heat input at recirculation condition specified in the technical data section of this manual

8411 PILOT GAS GOVERNOR AND BLOCK VALVE

The block valve is a 240 Volt instrument

Both items may be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove either item isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the electric terrriination to the solenoid valve Undo the upstream pipe union and the compression fitting downstream of the manual block valve (PV3) Remove the pilot gas line complete for further strip down

Replace broken or distorted connections and retest for soundness Ensure the pilot gas pressure is correct and the flame is sensing an output Ensure reliability over six start-ups

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 34

8 SERVICING 3000S

8412 BELT TENSIONING PROCEDURE

The setting tensions are designed to cover a wide range of drives A precise setting force for individual applications can be calculated as detailed

SETTING FORCES

Belt Section

Setting Force To Deflect Belt 16mm per Metre Of Span

Small Pulley Diameter (mm)

Basic Setting Forces Newtons (N) Kilograms (kgf)

125 x Setting Forces Newtons (N) Kilograms (kgf)

SPZ

56 to 71 16 16 20 20 75 to 90 18 18 22 22

95 to 125 20 20 25 25 Over 125 22 22 28 28

SPA

80 to 100 22 22 28 28 106 to 140 30 30 38 38 150 to 200 36 37 45 46 Over 200 40 40 50 51

SPB

112 to 160 40 40 50 51 170 to 224 50 51 62 63 236 to 355 62 63 77 79 Over 355 65 66 81 83

SPC 224 to 250 70 71 87 89 265 to 355 92 94 115 120 Over 375 115 120 144 150

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 35

8 SERVICING 3000S

BELT TENSIONING USING FENNER BELT TENSION INDICATOR

Calculate the deflection in mm on a basis of 16mm per metre of centre distance Centre Distance (m) x 16 =Deflection (mm)

Set lower marker ring at the deflection distance required in mm on the lower scale

Set upper ring against to bottom edge of the top tube

Place the belt tension indicator on top of the belt at the centre of span and apply a force at right angles to the belt defecting it to the point where the lower marker ring is level with the top of the adjacent belt

Read off the force value indicated by the top edge of the upper marker ring

Compare this force to the kgf value shown in the table above

If a Fenner Belt Tension Indicator is not available a spring balance and rule will be suffice

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 36

8 SERVICING 30005

85 MAIN PANEL CONTROLS

All panel controls are readily accessible and may be easily exchanged for replacement components in the event of failure Ensure any replacement item is of the same make and type as the original

851 LANDIS amp GYR LFL 1335 AUTOMATIC SEQUENCE CONTROLLER

The Landis amp Gyr Automatic Sequence Controller is a plug-in unit locating on a pre-wired chassis To remove the controller undo the two retaining screws at the top left and lower right corners and pull the module off the chassis

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

852 CONTROLS CIRCUIT (24 VOLT) TRANSFORMER

The Controls Circuit Transformer is fixed to the panel back plate by tapped screws To remove the transformer undo the wiring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel Undo the two retaining screws and remove the unit complete

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

853 CONTROL RELAYS R1 R2 amp R3

The Control Relays are DIN Rail mounted To remove a relay undo the wIring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel Release the DIN rail retaining clip under the relay with a screwdriver and remove the relay

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

854 6A MCB

The 6A MCB is DIN Rail mounted To remove the MCB undo the wiring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel Release the DIN rail retaining clip under the MCB with a screwdriver and remove the MCB

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

855 THERMAL OVERLOAD

The thermal overload is attached to the underside of the main contactor To remove the overload undo the wiring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel and that the overload setting is as specified in Section 13 of this manual Unscrew the three connections to the contactor and remove the overload

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 37

8 SERVICING 3000S

856 MAIN CONTACTOR

The Main Contactor is DIN Rail mounted To remove the contactor remove the thermal overload as 855 above and then undo the wiring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel Release the DIN rail retaining clip under the contactor with a screwdriver and remove the contactor

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

857 MOTOR FUSE

To replace a motor fuse pull the fuse carrier off the fuse holder base The fuse is attached to the fuse carrier by two screws Unscrew remove and replace

86 REMOTE CONTROL STATION

The remote control station contains some serviceable parts although these items should only be fitted by an approved RS STOKVIS Ltd Engineer

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 38

9 RECOMMENDED SPARES 3000S

For two years operation it is recommended that the following items should be held in stock

ITEM DESCRIPTION PART NO QUANTITY i

1 INDICATOR BULBS W1121 1 PACK

2 SPARK PLUG 023739 1 I

3 UVDETECTOR QRA10C 1 I

4 ROOM SENSOR DRT2453 1

5 DUCT SENSOR DDT1701 1

All replacement parts can be obtained from RS STOKVIS Ltd by quoting the air handler serial number the part number and description

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 39

APPENDIX 1 30005

SOUNDNESS TESTING THE FUEL GAS PIPEWORK

This procedure should only be carried out by personnel familiar with the ECONO-AIR 3000S Series Air handler

The pressure test points and all valves are identified on the Process and Instrumentation Diagram for the air handler included in Section 1 of this n1anual

Isolate the air handler electric supply at the main control panel and lock off Close the manual isolation valves MV1 MV6 and PV3 Ensure the supply pressure is available on the upstream side of MV1

A11 TESTING THE UPSTREAM PIPEWORKAND BURNER CONTROLS 1 Connect a 60 mbar manometer to the pressure test nipple A Monitor the

pressure for two minutes Any rise in pressure indicates that valve MV1 is leaking and must be replaced Remove pressure test points Band F

2 Open MV1 to pressurise the pipework on both the main gas and pilot line to the first block valve

3 Close MV1 Allow one minute for the temperature to stabilise and then test the system for 2 minutes and watch for a drop in the pipework pressure If the pressure falls open valve MV1 and test the pipework connections and valves from MV1 to MV3 and MV1 to PV2 for leaks with a proprietary leak detector fluid or spray Turn off MV1 seal any leaks and re-test

4 If no extemalleaks are found either the pilot block valve PV1 or either the first main gas block valve MV3 is letting by

5 To test this seal pressure test point A and fit a manometer to pressure test point B Leave for two minutes with MV1 open A rise in pressure on the manometer confirms a leak on the block valve MV3 Turn off MV1 exchange the valve and re-test from point 2 above

6 Repeat this procedure for the pilot block valve Seal test point B and fit a manometer to pressure test point F Leave for two minutes with MV1 open A rise in pressure on the manometer confirms a leak on the pilot block valve PV2 Turn off MV1 exchange the valve and re-test from point 1 above Seal test point F

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 40

APPENDIX 1 30005

A12 TESTING THE DOWNSTREAM BURNER VALVE 1 Close MV1 and connect pressure test points A and 8 with flexible 6 mm bore

tubing teed into the manometer Remove pressure test point C Open MV1 to pressurise the downstream block valve MV4

2 Close MV1 and leave for one minute for the temperature to stabilise Monitor the pressure for 2 minutes If the pressure falls open valve MV1 and leak test the line between the two block valves MV3 and MV4 with a proprietary leak detector Turn off MV1 seal any leaks and re-test Note Smaller air handlers in the 3000S Series are fitted with multi-functional valves combining the pressure regulator and two block valves in one component The above procedure still applies but if a leak is found on either block valve the whole control should be replaced If no external leaks are found the downstream block valve is letting by

3 To confirm this close MV1 remove the manometer and refit to pressure test point C Connect pressure test points A and 8 with flexible 6mm bore tubing Open MV1 and allow one minute for the temperature to stabilise Monitor the pressure for a further 2 minutes with MV1 still open A rise in pressure confirms that the second block valve MV4 is letting by Turn off MV1 Replace the valve and re-test from 2 above

A13 TESTING THE DOWNSTREAM BURNER PIPEWORK 1 Close MV1 and connect pressure test points A and D with flexible 6 mm bore

tubing teed into the manometer Open MV1 to pressurise the downstream pilot pipework

2 Close MV1 and leave for one minute for the temperature to stabilise Monitor the pressure for 2 minutes If the pressure falls open valve MV1 and leak test the line between the downstream block valve MV4 and the manual block MV6 with a proprietary leak detector fluid or spray If no external leaks are found the manual block valve MV6 is letting by Turn off MV1 seal any leakages and reshytest from 2 above

A14 TESTING THE DOWNSTREAM PILOT PIPEWORK 1 Close MV1 and connect pressure test points A and F with flexible 6mm bore

tubing teed into the manometer Open MV1 to pressurise the downstream pilot pipework

2 Close MV1 and leave for one rninute for the temperature to stabilise Monitor the pressure for 2 minutes If the pressure falls open valve MV1 and leak test the line between the downstream block valve PV2 and the manual block PV3 with a proprietary leak detector fluid or spray If no external leaks are found the manual block valve PV3 is letting by Turn off MV1 seal any leakages and reshytest from 2 above

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 41

APPENDIX 1 30005

A15 TESTING THE BURNER CONNECTIONS 1 Remove the burner access panel as described in Section 84 of this manual

Remove the burner spark igniter Slacken the two retaining bolts holding the burner to the burner support straps and unbolt the burner supply endplate from the burner casting and mixing plates

2 Connect pressure test points A and 0 with flexible 6mm bore tubing teed into the manometer Open MV1 and MV6 to pressurise the burner pipework Leak test the main gas burner pipework and connections with proprietary leak detector fluid Turn off MV6 Seal any leakages and re-test

3 Connect pressure test points A and F with flexible 6 mm bore tubing teed into the manometer Open MV1 and PV3 to pressurise the pilot burner pipework Leak test the pilot gas burner pipework and connections with proprietary leak detector fluid Turn off PV3 Seal any leakages and re-test

4 Turn off MV1

5 Replace the spark igniter and profile division plate

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 42

APPENDIX 2 30005

START SEQUENCE

The burner start sequence is controlled by the Landis and Gyr burner management unit The timings are pre-set and comply with 885885 This unit must NOT be tampered with

A brief description of the start-up sequence isshy

The unit checks

1 The NO FLAME signal on the UV flame scanner

Note If the scanner detects a flame at any time other than in the correct operating sequence the flame programmer initiates a lockout

2 The operation of the combustion air proving switch in the NO AIR position

3 The air handler discharge high temperature switch

If the checks are completed the unit starts the combustion air fan and then checks the combustion airflow

Once the airflow is proven the unit checks that the damper control circuit is functioning correctly After the damper microswitch is made to prove the fresh air damper is fully open the sequence allows 30 seconds for the combustion air to purge any combustible gas from the air handler

After completion of the purge the spark ignition system is energised the pilot valve opened and the spark terminated If the pilot flame is not proven by the UV scanner the system will initiate a LOCKOUT

If the flame is proven the main gas valves are opened the pilot extinguished and the main burner flame proven

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 43

i

APPENDIX 2 30008

The following flow chart shows the complete start sequence including the lighting of the various indicating lamps

MANUAL STATUS LIGHT POWER ON

POWER ON

I INITIATE START BY TIME

SETTING ON CONTROLLER

I CHECK NO FLAME

VISIBLE

PROVEj FAIL LOCKOUT

I CHECK RELAY R4 NC

POSITION

PROVE FAIL NO START

I CHECK AIR PRESSURE SWITCH NC POSITION

PROVE FAIL NO START

I CHECK RELAY R1 NC

POSITION

PROVE j

FAIL NO START

I START COMBUSTION

AIR BLOWER

I CHECK AIR PRESSURE SWITCH NO POSITION

PROVE I

FAIL NO START

I STATUS LIGHT FAN ON

I ENERGISE RELAY R1

I

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 44

I

I

APPENDIX 2 30008

I CHECK OVERHEAT LIMIT

CONTROL R5

PROVE I

FAIL I I

CHECK 541412 LOOP CLOSED ON

LANDIS ampGYR CIRCUIT

PROVE I

FAIL I I

COMBUSTION AIR PURGE PERIOD

30 SECONDS

I

NO START

NO START

CANCEL NO FLAME CHECK CIRCUIT

I

ENERGISE SPARK

I TIMED PERIOD 25 SECONDS

I ENERGISE PILOT GAS

VALVE

I TIMED PERIOD 25 SECONDS

I TERMINATE SPARK

I INTERROGATE UV FLAME SCANNER

PROVE I

FAIL I I

TIMED PERIOD 10 SECONDS

I

LOCKOUT

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 45

I

I

APPENDIX 2 3000S

I ENERGISE MAIN GAS

VALVES

I

STATUS LIGHT BURNER ON

I TIMED PERIOD

5 SECONDS

I DE-ENERGISE PILOT

GAS VALVES

CONTINUOUS FROM PILOT

I INTERROGATE UV FLAME SCANNER

PROVE I

FAIL I I

LOCKOUT I

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 46

APPENDIX 3 30005

Please see copy of Standard Service Sheet

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 47

APPENDIX 4 30005

A41 TIME OUT SCREEN

This is the standard screen displayed when the touch screen is not in use The back light is off to save energy_ To access the STATUS screen touch the ENTER key and the following screen is displayed

[]][I][]rn[IJOO[][IJOO[] EJ~E11 I[]I ~ middot I

NOTE

The Touch Screen operates using the heat produced by the touch of a finger and therefore only LIGHT pressure is required

Excessive pressure can damage the Touch Screen

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 48

APPENDIX 4 30008

A42 STATUS SCREEN

On the typical STATUS screen the illustrated information detailed is as follows

19 36 Fan Brn

RS OS

100 Fst_~_ Lck _ _ Xst Gas~o ~ I

RS Indicates the current room temperature

OS ~( t~~ the current duct discharge temperature

Fan Indicates the current status of the fan by showing the arrow and the fan blades for ON and OFF is shown by the arrow and fan blades being removed

Brn Indicates the current status of the burner with the black flames indicating the burner to be ON and vice versa

Lck LOCKOUT - This indicates a flame failure when highlighted during normal or start-up operation

Xst EXCESS TEMPERATURE SWITCH - This indicates the unit has reached the trip limit on the over heat stat when highlighted during operation

Indicates the current position of the gas modulating valve during normal Gas

operation (0-100)

Indicates whether the Frost stat is energised and the unit is running on frost Fst

override

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 49

APPENDIX 4 30008

A43 CHANGING SETTINGS

It is possible to change the settings for the time of operation and the required temperature set points The following details the steps required

A44 ENTERING THE SECURITY CODE

From the STATUS screen touch the return key and the screen below will be displayed

Type the HIGH LEVEL security code (4321) If you make a mistake use the BACK SPACE key to delete any incorrect number(s) Touch the ENTER key when the code is correct

If the security code is incorrect the screen above will be displayed then try again If after several attempts you can not gain access please contact RS STOKVIS Ltd for further information

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 50

APPENDIX 4 30008

When the code is entered correctly the MAIN MENU is displayed as detailed below

~ STATUS SET VALUES~ ~ TIVIE CLOCK [) [) [) [) [)

The MAIN MENU screen shows the three menu items available The title for each menu item can be changed to suit the end user Please notify RS STOKVIS Ltd prior to commissioning should these parameters require special amendments

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 51

APPENDIX 4 30008

A45 CHANGING OR SETTING A TIME SCHEDULE

From the main menu screen select the TIME CLOCK page by running finger across screen symbol and touch the ENTER key the screen below will be displayed

On the following screen highlight the TS1 symbol and touch the ENTER key

The current time schedule will now be displayed as shown below The display will automatically default to the current day (1 =Monday 2 =Tuesday etc) In this case day 5 (Friday) the four schedule switching times refer to that day

IAC6BBB1BHIS1

mm0CIl bull mID 17BB 17BB 17HB

Iillleschedule

To modify a time select it by highlighting and touch the ENTER key and the following screen is displayed

To amend the appropriate onoff time as shown on the screen below The arrows to the right of the time are for altering the hours and the arrows on the left for the minutes

Once you have set the time use the ESCape key to exit back to the time schedule screen and choose another day by touching the required number Another time may now be modified as before

IAC6BBB1BHIS1

H8BH

I i eschedule

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 52

APPENDIX 4 30008

Use the ESCape key to exit back to the MAIN MENU screen

~ STATUS ~ SET VALUES

TIME CLOCK []~ [] [] [] []

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 53

APPENDIX 4 30005

A46 CHANGING SET VALUES

From the main menu screen select the SET VALUES page by highlight in the normal way and touch the ENTER key

The following screen is displayed

36 19 18III III IIIHsv Rsv Llv

To change the RSV highlight it in the normal way and touch the ENTER key and the screen below will now be shown

IAC6RRR1RR40 T I

0 19 (Y)l RSV

ROOM SET VALUE

The above screen shows the parameters that can be changed The values to the far left are the limitations of set point (OC) Change the set point by using the UP and DOWN ARROWS on the left of the screen or touch the set value itself followed by the ENTER key to select the set value and set it directly using the numeric keyboard All values can be changed in this way

Use the ESCape key twice to exit back to the MAIN MENU screen

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 54

APPENDIX 4 30005

A47 COMMISSIONING AND SERVICING BURNER CHECKS

Select the SET VALUES screen from the MAIN MENU screen and adjust the high lirrlit set point to 55degC to drive the burner to high fire

IAC6HHH1HH60 ~T I

0 19 (Y)

HSV

HIGH SET VALUE ~

Ensure the set value is returned to 36degC once the appropriate checks and adjustments as described in Section 43 of this manual have been completed Return to the SET VALUES screen and select the low limit value to adjust the low fire setting

Reduce the low limit value to OdegC to drive the gas valve to low fire and complete the appropriate checks and adjustments as described in Section 43 of this manual and ensure the set value is returned to the original value

A48 GMT ltgt BST CHANGEOVER DAYLIGHT SAVINGS

To change your unit to British Summer TimelWinter Time the following system screen must be highlighted by touching the Iamp1 button twice

By touching the clock symbol in the top left hand corner followed by the ENTER key the screen below will be displayed

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 55

APPENDIX 4 30008

188311 851193

544

By touching and highlighting in this case 18 followed by the ENTER key A small box allowing the entry of two digits will appear Enter the desired time required using the numbered keys followed by ENTER key Your unit is now set to operate on BSTBWT

Touch the ESC key three times to return back to the Status screen

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 56

STOKVIS ENERGY SYSTEMS 96R WALTON ROAD EAST MOLESEY SURREY KT8 0DL TEL 020 8783 3050 08707 707 747 FAX 020 8783 3051 08707 707 767 E-MAIL infostokvisboilerscom WEBSITE wwwstokvisboilerscom

JULY 1999

Page 8: ECONOAIR 3000S SERIES AIR HANDLING UNIT DIRECT FIREDstokvisboilers.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/EconoAir... · 2019-05-10 · ECONOAIR 3000S SERIES AIR HANDLING UNIT DIRECT FIRED

1 TECHNICAL DATA 30008

SETTINGS (AS SHIPPED)

AIR HANDLER SETriNGS (AS SHIPPED) I

I

IAIR PRESSURE SWITCH rnbar

OVERHEAT LIMIT CONTROL 65degC

PILOT BURNER GAS PRESSURE 100 mbar

MAXIMUM 50 mbar MAIN BURNER GAS PRESSURES

MINIMUM 10 mbar

MAXIMUM AT RECIRCULATION CONDITION NA

OVERLOAD Amps

FAN SPEED rpm

MAXIMUM 16 mbarDIFFERENTIAL AIR PRESSURE ACROSS PROFILE PLATE MINIMUM 14 mbar

GAS CONNECTION SIZE BSP

TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER

ACCESS CODE 4321 I

TEMPERATURE SETPOINT (Code 00) 19degC i

SAMPLE INTERVAL (Code 01) 2 sec I

DISCHARGE LOW LIMIT (Code 02) 18degC

DISCHARGE HIGH LIMIT (Code 03) 36degC

Note For air handler dimensions please refer to the General Arrangement Drawing

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 7

~------------------~--~

~~O~~C~~~__-__~~middot~~I~~______________-1~~~__~~-=~~=-~i

COMPONENT UST

BURNER

AIR FAN MOTOR

FAN DRIVE

CONTROL PANEL

REMOTE PANEL

SERVICES

FUEL

UAX SUPPLY PRESSURE MIN SUPPLY PRESSURE

ELECTRICITY

BLOCK VALVES

Serial No

bullbull IlICh NPII

kW 1+4ORPM

NA

3-30005-100 RevO DOL Start

N

NATURAL GAS

25mbor 1gtmbor

15V5OHz3Ph4W1RE Motor FLC bullbullbull Amps

240V 50Hz 1Ph 3 WIRE

Site Address

TAG DESCRIPTION WI SUPPLY ISOlATION VALve

W2 JW3 MULTIBLOCKMY MV5 FLOW CONTROL VALve WS BURNER ISOLATION VALVE

PVl PILOT PRESSURE REGULATOR PV2 PILOT SOlpoundNOIO VALve PV3 PILOT ISOlATION VALve

TC SPACE lEMPERATURE CONTROUER TO DISCHARGE TEMPERATURE DETECTOR TR SPACE TEMPERATURE DElECTOR TS OISCHARGE TEMPERATURE swrrCH

PS AIR PRESSURE swrrCH

UV fLAt4E DETECTOR

t SPARK IGNITER

NOTE f INIlICATES PRpoundSSURE TEST POM

Client

srOKVIS END USERS ADDRESS END USER

RS STOKVIS amp SONS Ltd POOL ROAD WEST MOLESEY SURREY KT8 2HN

Ident T45

shyomiddot BVIoI 0 145

1 DJSO 1 GBlA 14 T45

1AC600 00T1701 DRT3453 RAK13bullbull170

lWGJ

ORAtO 023739

PILOT LINE

fRtsH Nfl HET

Title TITLE

Model No Seri4l No DutY Style

Tel 0181 941 1212 Fax 0181 941 4136

00lCIIAAGE 10 WORIltSPAtt

305 99- m3sINDOOR HORIZONTAL

ACStw -_nora I-ID_raw_-+I__-I

Checked

CONTROL Approved

o-1 CommentApproval

Rev IDote I Description

Computer No 99

Purchase Order No

Drawing No

4-MR-001 R~O~

NOTES1shy

I PROPOSED LOCATION TO BE CHECKED tOR LEVEL AND LOAD BEARING STRENGTH BY OTHERS

2 UNIT TO BE SUPPLIED IN SEPERATE SECTIONS FOR LIFTING INTO PLANTROOM AND ON TO BASE BY OTHERS

3 ALL SECTIONS TO HAVE TIJO BEADS OF SEALANT BETJEEN OPPOSING FLANGES AS PER SUPPLIED INSTALL ATlON INSTRUCTIONS

ltI ENSURE ALL BUILDERS JORK IS CARRIED OUT AND MADE GOOD AFTER INSTALLATION BY OTHERS

5 ALL EXTERNAL JIRING SHALL BE CARRIED OUT BY COMPETENT PERSON TO CURRENT lEE REGULATIONS

DISCHARGE OPENING lUOlElIE VIDE X lIE HIG CV 3011 MEZ FLANGE

Serial No

sroKVIS Site Address Client END USERS ADDRESS END USER

ACCESS OPENING

~L---gt lt0-shy

~ ~

GAS CONNECTIONS

CONTROL PANEL 60011 VIDE X 600111 HIGH

APPROX VEIGHTSshy

HEATER CASING - 1I0U( KG

IJCL OOCUUef IDrawn lACS

Checked

I RS STOKVIS amp SONS Ltd POOL ROAD WEST MOLESEY SURREY KT8 2HN Tel 0181 941 1212 fax 0181 941 4136 CONTROL IApproved

o I~ I CommentApproval

Rev IDate IDescription

Computer No

99 Purchase Order No

Drawing No

3-MR-005

415VOlT5OHz 4 WIRE sumy

lIfEI_-shy~a

30131

2_F11

3 TOO---shy

B (

Serial No

~s

~~~~

~ NIt 9lOIElIliOTt)R RA11NG~W

STOKVIS

0 reg

-0

0 0 lt0

u ~

R5-1 -

ADDRESS

shy

regshy

~tl

GAS v IoIOtQR AIIIfONGTll LEGEND

IHlmN PNEI _

-e- PNEl_

Sl1pound_

-11shy IJIfClIOII1IO~-

DUCT STAT NPE COt 17tll

_STAT NPE om 3lt4Il)

~~~pound~ niR~~ (i)l

~ ()1

_cbullbullL~ nmiddoti Apoundm

USER

~ ~

SCHEMATIC FOR 3000S SERIES AIR

IAC600 BASED

RS STOKVIS amp SONS Ltd POOL ROAD WEST MOLESEY SURREY KT8 2HN Tel 0181 941 1212 Fax 0181 941 4136

_[---------f P(N(J ON

ICHI11ONTfWiSFORlER

PllOT V IIEIi CAS VAllIE 1

II CAS VAllIE 2

~_ON

lOCKOUT

s

o Rev I Dote I Description

Computer No 99

Purchase Order No

Drawing No

3-MR-100 Rev

o

30005 2 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

21 INTRODUCTION

The STOKVIS ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler is a direct fired unit designed to give clean healthy environmental conditions and constant even temperature within the heated space

The main air handler assembly houses the circulating air fan the gas burner the fuel gas line and all necessary safety controls The burner management system and space temperature controller is located in the main control panel mounted on or adjacent to the side of the air handler A second control station supplied loose for mounting remote from the air handler within the heated space or other convenient location houses indicating lights the control touch screen and auxiliary operational switches

A sight glass is fitted on the air handler casing to view the burner during operation

For multi unit networked applications the touch screen is excluded

22 GAS BURNER ASSEMBLY

The ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler incorporates the Maxon NP-II burner This burner is specially designed for heating fresh air and is mounted such that a proportion of the incoming air is forced into contact with the flame to ensure rapid mixing and combustion within the code requirements The burner assembly is built up from modular components to give the required heat duty

Each burner assembly is fitted with an integral pilot spark igniter and UV detector The flame detector is used for scanning both the pilot and main flame Note that the pilot burner operates in interrupted mode

The burner module fitted is identified in the Technical Data Section of this manual and on the Valve and Instrun1ent list

23 CONTROL SYSTEM

The controls fitted on the air handler are detailed on the Process amp Instrumentation Diagram in the Technical Data Section of this manual

231 SAFETY CONTROLS

The safety interlocks on the ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler are

1 Combustion air proving switch (PS) 2 Ultra-violet burner flame detector (UV) 3 Overheat limit control (OLe)

Failure of either the combustion air switch or fiame scanning circuit will cause the air handler to go to LOCKOUT and the burner management system will require a RESET before a re-light can be attempted

The air handler discharge overheat limit control is a manual reset switch After a failure the switch will have to be RESET before a re-light can be attempted

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 8

2 GENERAL DESCRIPTION 3000S

232 TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEM

The ECONO-AIR 30008 Series air handler is fitted with a full three-term modulating temperature control system as standard The space temperature is sensed by a heated space detector (TR) which inputs to the panel mounted temperature controller (TC) This achieves control by modulation of the fuel gas flow control valve (MV5) The temperature controller additionally limits the air handler discharge air temperature measured by the discharge temperature detector (TO) to pre-set high and low limits

233 MAIN CONTROL PANEL

The control panel houses the combustioncirculation air fan starter the burner management system and the heated space temperature controller On larger units a separate starter panel may be supplied The panel door is fitted with an interlocked isolator POWER ON and LOCKOUT lights and the burner management RESET button The panel is mounted on or adjacent to the air handler

234 FUEL GAS SYSTEM

The PILOT LINE comprises 1 Pilot governor (PV1 ) 2 One British Gas certificated solenoid valve (PV2) 3 One pilot gas isolation valve (PV3) 4 Pipework and fittings

Note Two pressure test points are fitted on the pilot line on the inlet and discharge of the pilot solenoid valve

The MAIN GAS LINE comprises

1 Gas isolation valve (MV1 ) 2 Pressure governor (MV2) 3 Double block safety shut-oft system (MV34) 4 Gas flow control valve (MV5) 5 Burner isolation valve (MV6) 6 Pipework and fittings

Note Four pressure test points are fitted on the n1ain gas line on the supply the inlet and discharge of the second block valve and downstream of the flow control valve

Note On small air handlers items 2 and 3 are combined in one multi-functional control

All items above are detailed on the Process amp Instrumentation Diagram in Section 1 of this manual

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 9

2 GENERAL DESCRIPTION 3000S

235 REMOTE CONTROL STATION

The ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler is also supplied with a remote control station which houses the air handler operating controls indicating status and the workspace temperature detector if the control station is located in the heated space

236 HEATED SPACE TEMPERATURE SENSOR The heated space temperature sensor is to be located remotely within the space to be heated

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 10

3 INSTALLATION 30005

31 STATUTORY REQUIREMENTS

I n accordance with the Gas Safety (I nstallation and Use) Regulations 1998 installation of this ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler should only be undertaken by competent personnel who are fully aware of their responsibilities under the Health and Safety at Work Act 1974

The installation of this air handler must comply with

BS6230-1991 Installation of gas-fired forced convection air air handlers for commercial and industrial Space Heating of rated input exceeding 60kW

The lEE Regulations for Electrical Installations

Gas Safety (Installation and Use) Regulations 1998

Health and Safety at Work Act 1974

Building Regulations 1986

Building Standards (Scotland Only)

The I nstitution of Gas Engineers Codes of Practice

IGEUP1 Soundness Testing Procedures for Industrial and Commercial Gas Installations

IGEUP2 Gas Installation Pipework Boosters and Compressors on Industrial and Commercial Premises

IGEUP4 Commissioning Of Gas Fired Plant On Industrial and Commercial Premises

32 RECEPTION AND STORAGE OF GOODS

32laquo1 RECEPTION

On receipt of the shipment check that the shipment is complete against the Delivery Advice Note Check for mechanical damage sustained during transit before off-loading the goods Inform the carrier of any such damage

322 OFFLOADING

Horizontal air handlers are fitted with four lifting eyes to permit an overhead lift Alternatively horizontal air handlers may be handled by a fork lift truck on the steel angle support frame

323 STORAGE

Air handlers must be stored in a dry environment The remote control station must be removed from the shipment and stored indoors in a dry environment Outdoor units of split case design (Size 54 and above) must have open ends protected from the environment until installation is complete Any filter elements should be stored in a dry environment

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 11

3 INSTALLATION 3000S

33 LIMITATIONS OF USE

The ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler must not be installed in the following locations

I n hazardous areas

In areas where flammable vapours can be present in excess of their threshold limit values as defined in 8S5925

I n accordance with 8S6230 Clause 513 where there are any flued appliances in the heated area and where air is supplied mechanically and there is mechanical extraction the design extract rate must be 5 to 10 less than the design inlet rate so that the room will not be at a lower pressure than the outside air If the air handler is the only source of mechanically supplied air the extract rate must not exceed 95 of the nominal air flow specified in Section 11 of this manual

Note If it proposed to install the ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler to supply heated air to a hazardous area or in areas where flammable vapours are present the installation must first be approved by a RS STOKVIS Ltd Engineer

34 LOCATION OF AIR HANDLERS

The air handler should normally be installed in the location recommended by the RS STOKVIS Ltd specifying engineer

Check the proposed location for level and load bearing strength Ensure that there is adequate clearance as detailed on the air handler GA in Section 1 this manual around the unit for access for maintenance purposes If the air handler is to be installed above floor level a suitably designed service platform should be provided Such a platform must have 100mm minimum raised edges around the perimeter If this is not possible all air handler access panels must be fitted with hinged restraints This is a factory standard option which should be specified at the time of ordering - check the restraints are fitted before proceeding with installation

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 12

3 INSTALLATION 3000S

35 FRESH AIR INLET AND VENTILATION

351 FRESH AIR INLET

The air handler must be installed where it has a direct and unlimited supply of fresh air from outside the building Ensure that the air intake is not located near exhausts from the building or from any process exhausts such as paint booth exhausts Whenever possible protect the fresh air inlet from the prevailing wind and local wind effects from corners

The fresh air inlet should be sized for an air velocity of 3ms The inlet duct area is detailed on the General Arrangement drawing located in Section 1 of this manual

Where the fresh air inlet is made in a load bearing wall eg a brick wall guidance should be obtained from Structural Engineers on the provision of a lintel in the wall over the fresh air opening

A weather hood must be fitted when the air handler air inlet is at or within 1 m of the outside wall Additionally the weather hood should have negligible resistance to the airflow maximum 01 mbar at the design air flow rate

Do not install the ECONO-AI R 3000S Series air handler where long lengths of duct or bends of an angle greater than 30deg are necessary to lead to the air handler from the fresh air opening If ducting is unavoidable ensure that the resulting pressure drop is negligible Le less than 01 mbar for ductless air handlers and has been accounted for in the original design for ducted air handlers as detailed in the specification section of this manual Section 11

Note If the air intake is located in an area of unrestricted access warning notices preventing the blockage of the air intake by temporary stacking should be displayed adjacent to the intake

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 13

3 INSTALLATION 3000S

352 VENTI LA TION

Where the air air handler is in its own plant room or compartment this shall be ventilated with openings communicating directly with the outside air to ventilate the room

The openings shall be fitted with grilles of negligible resistance and shall be sited so that they cannot easily be blocked or flooded They shall have a total minimum free area as follows

Low Level (inlet) 320cm2 + 27cm2 per kilowatt in excess of 60kW total rated input

High Level (outlet) 160cm2 + 134cm2 per kilowatt in excess of 60kW total rated input

The free area of the grilles shall be not less than the size of the recommended minimum ventilation opening Grilles shall be designed to minimise high velocity air streams in the plant room For exposed ie free standing plant rooms ventilation openings shall be provided on at least two sides and preferably on all four sides

Where mechanical ventilation is used it shall be by mechanical inlet and either natural or mechanical extraction Systems of ventilation employing mechanical extraction and natural air inlet shall not be used

The minimum flow rates of air supplied shall be not less than 06 m3s per megawatt of rated heat input

36 AIR DISCHARGE

The air handler should be located with the air discharge into the heated space at a minimum height of 3 metres The air should not discharge directly onto any obstructions and direct discharge on to working personnel should be avoided

If the air discharge is located in an area of unrestricted access warning notices preventing the blockage of the air discharge by temporary stacking should be displayed adjacent to the discharge

Generally it is not necessary to fit distribution ducting to the discharge of the air handler If ducting is required or specified ensure that the resulting pressure drop has been accounted for in the original design specification as detailed in Section 1 of this manual

37 ASSEMBLY AND POSITIONING OF AIR HANDLER

Unless specified at the time of order air handlers will be shipped in sections Discharge heads grilles attenuators duct connecting sections filters rain-hoods etc will be supplied loose for site fitting to the air handler

Horizontal air handlers must be supported on their steel angle support base When the air handler is located check for level and adjust as necessary

Alternatively horizontal air handlers can be supplied with extensions of the support frame for suspending from overhead supports This must be specified at the time of order Do not suspend the air handler from the lifting eyes

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 14

3 INSTALLATION 3000S

38 REMOTE STATION

The ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler is supplied with a remote control station This should be mounted in a position convenient to the end user If possible it should not be mounted on an external wall or where the space temperature detector is affected by cold draughts or a local source of heat

39 VISUAL CHECK

After completion of installation re-check the air handler for signs of damage Report any instance to RS STOKVIS Ltd

310 CONNECTION OF SERVICES

The air handler requires the connection of fuel gas and electricity

3101 FUEL GAS SUPPLY

The ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler has been designed for use on Natural Gas An alternative version is available for LPG The gas type for the air handler supplied is clearly marked on the air handler data badge and on the Specification sheet in Section 1 of this manual Check the gas type is correct and that the supply pressure is within the range marked on the specification

The local gas Authority should be consulted about the adequacy of the gas service and meter supplies for existing and proposed extensions to the installation and for any requirements for boosting the gas supply_

Connect the fuel gas supply to the inlet manual valve on the air handler gas train The connection size is detailed in Section 1 of this manual A further isolation valve and union should be fitted immediately adjacent to the appliance which when the valve is closed allows the complete burner and control assembly to be disconnected for maintenance or repair

New gas pipework should be installed to British Gas Publication IGEUP2 and be purged and pressure tested in accordance with British Gas Publications IGEUP1

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 15

3 INSTALLATION 3000S

3102 ELECTRICITY SUPPLY

All external wiring shall be carried out and checked by a competent person All components shall be checked for suitability for voltage range and frequency

Means for electric isolation having a contact separation of at least 3mm in all poles must be provided adjacent to the air handler The electrical supply to the appliance shall incorporate suitable means of excess current protection

The ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler requires a 3 phase 4 wire supply which should be connected to the main control panel Check the air handler data badge for the correct electrical supply The maximum supply requirement is Specified in Section 1 of this manual Note that the 240 Volt air handler control circuit is taken from the lUI phase to Neutral Connection should be made as shown on the wiring diagram shipped inside this panel

The air handler must be earthed in accordance with BS5986 and CP1013

Check all terminal strip terminations for wires which have become loose during shipment

311 CONNECTION TO THE MAIN PANEL AND REMOTE STATION

Interconnecting wiring to the main panel and remote station should be made with a minimum specification of 075 mm2 300 Volt cable Check that no wires on the terminal strip have become loose during shipment The remote panel should be mounted at a height of approx 18m If possible it should not be mounted on an external wall or where the sensor will be affected by cold draughts or a local source of heat

Both panel and remote station must be earthed in accordance with BS5986 and CP1013

312 HEATED SPACE TEMPERATURE SENSOR

The space temperature sensor located on the remote panel should be connected with screened cable or twin low voltage signal cable run in its own separate conduit It should be mounted on the remote panel or adjacent to the outlet at a height of approx 18m If possible it should not be mounted on an external wall or where the sensor will be affected by cold draughts or a local source of heat

313 DUCT SENSOR

The duct sensor should be connected with screened cable or twin low voltage signal cable run in its own separate conduit It should be mounted in the air handler discharge as close as possible to the discharge into the heated space

314 OVERHEAT LIMIT CONTROL SENSOR

The overheat limit control sensor should be connected with twin core cable It should be mounted in the air handler discharge within 1 metre of the air handler outlet connection

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 16

3 INSTALLATION 3000S

315 TOUCH SCREEN WIRING

The touch screen located on the front of the remote station requires two separate twisted pairs of O5mrh2 screened cable run in a separate conduit If the distance between the main and remote stations is greater that 1 km please contact RS STOKVIS Ltd for advice

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 17

3 INSTALLATION 3000S

316 ALIGNMENT

3161 INSTALLATION OF DRIVE BELTS

On 80 amp 89 30008 range of air handlers it will be necessary to align the pulleys and fit the drive belts before carrying out commissioning of the unit

3162 PU LLEYS

Before assembling the drive check the pulley grooves are free from scores or sharp edges and all dimensions conform to the relevant standard

The Taper Lock bush is your starting point when it comes to assembly and installation Drive installation is a straightforward job with Taper Lock - but the stages set out on the installation leaflet provided with every Taper Lock bush should be followed closely

3163 ALIGNMENT

Good alignment of pulleys prior to belt installation is important to avoid belt flank wear The diagram below shows correct installation of pulleys

INTERNAl BEARING

MOTOR PUlLEY rAN PULLEY

MOTORMOTOR ADJUSTMENT MOUNTING BOlTSBOLTS

3164 BELTS

When the pulleys have been correctly positioned on the shafts the belts can be installed to complete the drive

The drive centre distance should be reduced prior to the installation of the belts so that they may be fitted without the use of force Under no circumstances must belts be prised into the grooves Using sharp tools to stretch the belts over the pulley rim can easily damage belts and pulley grooves

The installation allowance given in the table below is the minimum recommended reduction in centre distance for various belt section and lengths to allow for correct fitting

The take-up allowance given in the same table should be added on to the calculated centre distance to allow for belt stretch

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 18

3 INSTALLATION 3000S

3165 INSTALLATION AND TAKE UP ALLOWANCE

Belt Pitch Installation Allowance Take-Up Length (mm) SPZ SPA SPB SPC (mm)

410 to 530 5

540 to 840 10

850 to 1160 15

1170 to 1500 20

1510 to 1830 20 25

1840 to 2170 30

2180 to 2830 25 40

2840 to 3500 30 50

3520 to 4160 50 60

4170 to 5140 70

5220 to 6150 85

6180 to 7500 105

600 to 8500 125

8880 to 10170 145

10600 to 12500 175

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 19

4 COMMISSIONING 30005

This appliance must be commissioned by a RS STOKVIS Ltd approved engineer

41 PRESTART CHECKS

1 Switch the SUMMERIOFFMlINTER switch on the remote station to OFF

2 Check the correct electric supply is available to the air handler and the appliance isolator installed

3 Check the correct fuel gas supply is available to the air handler and local isolation valve and union installed Check that new gas pipe work has been correctly purged and pressure tested and that the isolation valve is in the OFF position

4 Check the air handler gas control system and burner connections for pressure soundness as detailed in Appendix 1 of this manual

5 Complete the first section of the Service Check Sheet supplied at the back of this manual (Appendix 3)

6 Close the air handler access door

7 Close and lock the main air handler control panel

8 Switch the main panel isolator to position 1 Check the POWER ON light illuminates

9 Check and set the timed ONOFF periods in the lAC Controller located on the remote panel Ensure that the unit is set to be on during testing Refer to Appendix 4 for the lAC setting procedure

10 Close and lock the remote panel

11 Switch the SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch on the remote station to SUMMER to start the air fan Return the switch to the OFF position and check for correct rotation of the fan as the fan slows and stops

The fan rotation can be observed through the fan section access door or through the air handler access door Only do this during the fan run-down period Ensure the door is securely fastened after completion

Rotation arrows are fitted on the end of the air handler and inside the air handler above the interior bearing support If the rotation is incorrect two phases should be interchanged as dictated by the Engineer responsible for the site electrical system

12 Check the air pressure drop across the burner whilst the fan is operating with a water column pressure gauge connected to the two pressure test points on the air pressure switch (DPS) This pressure should be between 14 and 16 rnbar

If the air differential pressure measured above is not within the operating range check inlet and outlet ductwork as appropriate and any filters fitted If the pressure differential is still not within limits isolate the air handler and report to RS STOKVIS Ltd before proceeding

13 Check the operation and setting of the Low Air Pressure Switch by injecting a controlled signal into the switch Check the break point on the switch is 1 mbar (falling)

Note The switch is set and sealed before fitting The 1 mbar switch point may not coincide with the 1 mbar scale reading on the switch

If on checking the switch is not operating correctly do not tamper with it return it to RS STOKVIS Ltd for replacement

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 20

4 COMMISSIONING 3000S

42 DRY RUN

With all the manual gas isolation valves still in the OFF position switch the SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch to WINTER

43 START UP

1 Attach a manometer to pressure test point F and the low pressure test point on the air pressure switch (DPS)

2 Open the main gas supply valve (MV1) and the pilot burner isolation valve (PV3) Leave the main burner isolation valve (MV6) closed Reset the air handler by pressing the push-button marked RESET on either the main panel or remote station The air handler pilot will light automatically (after the automatic damper start check and combustion air pre-purge) and then LOCKOUT after the main gas shut-off valves are addressed

During the short period that the pilot is in operation check the pilot gas pressure on the manometer It should be 10 mbar and the pilot flame approximately 100 - 150mm in length covering the first three or four holes of the mixing plate and have a steady blue colour when viewed through the sight glass on the access side of the air handler Adjust as necessary - refer to Section 51 this manual Check the flame signal - refer to Section 431

3 Open the main burner isolation valve (MV6) RESET the air handler which should now light to main burner stage When alight close the main burner isolation valve to shut down the gas flow to the burner Check that the unit goes to LOCKOUT

4 Reset the air handler and drive the burner to low fire by adjusting the temperature controller set point as described in Appendix 4 of this manual Check the flame is continuous across the width of the burner and has a flame length of approx 50 - 65mm from the burner rail when viewed through the sight glass on the access side of the air handler Check the burner pressure across pressure test point D and the downstream (low) pressure test point on the air pressure switch ie on the rear of the pressure switch This pressure is specifled in Section 1 of this manual Adjust as necessary-refer to Section 53 of this manual Check the flame signal - refer to Section 431

Where possible check the actual gas flow rate by meter reading with all other appliances turned off

5 Drive the burner to high fire by adjusting the temperature controller set point and high limit to 55degC as described in Appendix 4 of this manual Check the flame is continuous across the burner rail and has a flame length of approximately 250 - 350mm from the burner rail Check the burner pressure across pressure test point D and the downstream (low) pressure test point on the air pressure switch This pressure is specified in Section 1 of this manual Adjust as necessary - refer to Section 52 of this manual Check the maximum air handler discharge temperature Check the flame signal shyrefer to Section 431

Where possible check the actual gas flow rate by meter reading with all other appliances turned off

6 Check the operation of the overheat limit control by adjusting the temperature controller set point and high limit to 65degC as described in Appendix 4 of this manual Monitor the discharge temperature on the temperature controller Check that the overheat control operates as the set temperature is passed Check that the control must be manually reset by pressing the green reset button on the front of the switch Return the temperature controller to its original settings

In the event that the ambient temperature is too low for this simple procedure to work the instrument will have to be bench tested using a Temperature 8ath Remove and replace the control as Section 84 of this manual for bench-testing

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 21

4 COMMISSIONING 3000S

43 1 FLAME SIGNAL CHECK

1 The ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler is fitted with a Klippon SAKT1 Test Terminal which can be used to measure the flame scanning signal Refer to the Electrical Schematic and connect a 0-1 mA ammeter to the two test points with standard 23 mm test plugs with the positive lead on the detector side Disconnect the terminal link to obtain the signal reading A minimum signal of 70 microamps is required typical signals are in the 250-400 microamp range on both pilot and main flame After completion replace the terminal link and remove the test jacks

2 Drive the burner to high fire as previously described Measure the carbon dioxide content of the discharge air stream This figure must not exceed 2800 ppm If the discharge exceeds this limit isolate the air handler and report to RS STOKVIS Ltd before proceeding

Stop and start the air handler a few times to check for reliability using the Operating Instructions (Section 6)

432 HANDOVER

Complete the air handler Service Check Sheet supplied at the back of this manual The self-copy sheet must be returned to STOKVIS for checking

Instruct the User in efficient use and care of the unit start-up and shutdown (including emergency shutdown) and recommended service interval Emphasise the need to keep the air handler clear of stored items and extraneous material and to maintain the recirculation and fresh air paths to the air handler inlets Hand all instructions as applicable to the UserOwner for safekeeping

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 22

5 ADJUSTMENTS 3000S

If adjustments to the air handler settings are required they should be made by a RS STOKVIS Ltd approved engineer

The normal value for all control settings is specified in Section 1 of this manual

51 PILOT ADJUSTMENT

The pilot gas pressure and flame length may be adjusted by altering the discharge pressure of the pilot governor Screwing the adjusting screw clockwise (located under the top cap) increases the discharge pressure and the flame length anti-clockwise decreases the pressure and the flame length

52 BURNER HIGH FIRE PRESSURE ADJUSTMENT

At high fire alter the spring compression on the main burner governor (MV2) by removing the cap and adjust the spring compression plate clockwise to increase the burner pressure anti-clockwise to decrease burner pressure If the pressure does not increase on adjusting the spring the supply is inadequate

Note On small air handlers fitted with a mUlti-functional control the pressure adjusting screw is located under a swing cap on the first block valve

53 BURNER LOW FIRE ADJUSTMENT

The main burner low fire is adjusted on the flow control valve MV5 (Process amp Instrumentation Diagram)

Remove the top cover of the valve and insert a Terminal Screwdriver in the adjusting screw of the TOP cam marked NI

Drive the burner to low fire by adjusting the temperature controller set-point and high limit to 05degC as described in Appendix 4 of this manual

Turn the Terminal Screwdriver clockwise to decrease the low fire gas flow anti-clockwise to increase the flow

Check the heat input and flame signal at the new position are satisfactory and return the tenlperature controller to its normal settings

Replace the control valve cover

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 23

5 ADJUSTMENTS 3000S

54 SUMMERIOFFIWINTER SWITCH

In the SUMMER position this switch provides ventilation only and is independent of the programmed ON and OFF periods This position is manually selected and must be manually de-selected Whenever the switch is in this position the fan is operating

In the OFF position the air handler is shutdown and will not operate This overrides any frost protection fitted It is suitable for air handler shutdown for short periods such as holidays The programme memory is unaffected by this switch and assumes control of the air handler when the switch is returned to the WINTER position

In the WINTER position the air handler operates off the programme memory to provide heating

55 RESET BUTTON

Visual indication of air handler lockout is provided In the event of lockout occurring the air handler can be reset by depressing the RESET button This parallels the RESET button on the air handler main control panel If after 4 attempts to reset the air handler the lockout indicator still illuminates then a Service Engineer should be called to investigate the problem

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 24

6 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 3000S

61 AIR HANDLER START-UP

1 Open all manual gas valves both on the appliance and on the supply to the appliance Switch on the Electric Supply to the appliance

2 On the main air handler panel

Switch the panel isolator to the 1 position

Check POWER ON light

3 On the remote control station

For Heating Switch the SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch to WINTER

The air handler will now start automatically in response to the time settings

In the event of LOCKOUT

Press the RESET button and the cycle of operations will be repeated If the air handler goes to LOCKOUT four times in succession call for a Service Engineer

For Unheated Ventilation Switch the SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch to SUMMER

Note This prevents the burner firing giving a controlled supply of ventilation air to the heated space as long as the switch is in this position The air handler will now start automatically in response to the timeclock demand To turn the fan off return the switch to the centre OFF position

In the event of LOCKOUT

Press the RESET button and the cycle of operations will be repeated If the air handler goes to LOCKOUT four times in succession call for a Service Engineer

62 AIR HANDLER SHUTDOWN

621 SHUTDOWN FOR SHORT PERIODS

Switch the SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch on the remote station to OFF

622 SHUTDOWN FOR PROLONGED PERIODS

Switch the main panel isolator to the 0 position and close all manual gas valves both on and leading to the appliance

Note Manual gas valves should only be operated when the appliance is to be shut off for either Servicing or for a prolonged shutdown

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 25

30005 6 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

63 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS

631 SITE CLEARANCE ADJACENT TO AIR HANDLER

Attention should be paid to keeping the area around the air handler tidy No rubbish should be allowed to accumulate in the vicinity of the air handler and storage of goods etc should not be permitted within two metres of the air handler Failure to comply could result in reduced airflow to the air handler causing inefficient running and potential overheat cond ition

632 AIR SUPPLY TO AIR HANDLER

Air vents and grilles supplying air to the air handler should never be blocked and should be checked periodically to ensure they are clear

633 AIR FILTERS

Similarly attention should be paid to cleaning or replacing the filters to the air handler if fitted Your installer should advise you on the frequency with which this would be required to be completed

634 SERVICE

For continued safe and efficient operation of this air air handler it is important that servicing of the air handler should be completed at regular intervals by a competent person in accordance with Section 82 of this manual Users are advised to enter into a Service Agreement with RS STOKVIS Ltd

635 SPARE PARTS

It is suggested that a complete set of spare parts essential to the running of the air handler and recommended by the installer are kept by the user on the premises where the air handler is installed This is particularly important where the air handler forms an essential part of any process plant and its being out of operation may cause problems by for example frost damage or condensation by super-cooling

A list of Recommended Spares will be found in Section 9 of this manual

636 GAS LEAKS

If a smell of gas is detected around the area of the appliance Switch off all manual gas valves and contact your service engineer or the local gas undertaking

NEVER

LOOK FOR GAS LEAKS WITH A LIGHTED MATCH OR NAKED

FLAME

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 26

7 FAULT FINDING 30008

The main control panel incorporates two lights to help in fault finding

POWER ON

LOCKOUT

The remote station also has three lights

AIR FAN ON

BURNER ON

LOCKOUT

This section gives the possible causes of failure associated with each check light The electrical schematic diagram in this manual and the wiring diagram shipped in the main air handler panel should be used in conjunction with the notes below Additionally Service Engineers should familiarise themselves with the detailed Start Sequence given in Appendix 2 of this manual

The notes are given for each light before consulting the notes check for bulb failure

71 POWER ON LIGHT IS UNLIT

Check

1 Main control panel isolator is in the 1 position

2 Main Panel 6A MCB has not tripped if a trip has occurred the switch will be at the OFF position Reset and test system as required

3 Also check if the mains electrical supply is isolated If so FIND OUT WHY before taking any action

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 27

7 FAULT FINDING 30005

72 AIR FAN ON LIGHT IS UNLIT

Check

1 SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch is not in Position OFF

2 Timeperiod is not set to off

3 Air handler is not at LOCKOUT

4 Recheck both AIR FAN ON and LOCKOUT bulbs

Two fault indications are possible

1 THE FAN IS NOT OPERATING

If the fan should have started but is not operating

Check 1 Overload for tripped conditions Reset the overload and monitor the next start-up

2 Motor Fuses

3 Relays 1 2 amp3 for failure

laClor CC1 for failure

5 Air Pressure Switch (DPS) is failed in the N 0 Position

Replace the faulty component as described in Section 8

2 THE FAN IS OPERATING

This indicates that the air pressure switch (DPS) has failed to change over

Measure the profile plate differential pressure as described in Section 4113 If the pressure is correct the air pressure switch is faulty Check the switch as in 4114 If the pressure is not correct

Check 1 Correct fan belt tension

2 Correct fan rotation

3 The air handler air inlets and discharge are not blocked

4 Correct fitting on filters

5 The air differential pressure switch impulse lines are not blocked or leaking

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 28

7 FAULT FINDING 30008

73 LOCKOUT LIGHT IS ILLUMINATED

This light indicates a failure in the burner ignition and flame supervision system

RESET the unit and follow the progress of the start sequence The full cycle may take two minutes

1

------t

2 LOCKOUT after 35-40 seconds indicates an ignition failure RESET the system and observe the pilot and ignition spark during the start-up attempt

I-- shy

3 Observe the spark This should be strong and highly visible If not remove and clean the spark plug as Section 82 Check that the spark plug gap is correctly set at 15 mm

-- shy

4 Check the pilot flame If the pilot flame ignites and the unit goes to LOCKOUT the scanning system is at fault Remove and clean the detector as Section 82 Check the flame signal as in Section 431

5 If the pilot does not light the gas supply system is faulty Check the pilot system for restriction and the pilot valve operation

6 If the pilot lights and the unit goes to LOCKOUT after the main gas valves are addressed either the flow control valve is blocked or one of the main gas block valves has failed Fit a manometer on the pressure test point on the outlet flange of the multishyfunctional control and observe if the pressure rises when the main gas valves are addressed No pressure rise will indicate failure of the main gas valves

74 AIR FAN ON LIGHT ILLUMINATED

If the burner does not start check

1 SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch is in WINTER position

2 Overheat Limit Control

These interlocks prevent the burner management system starting

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 29

8 SERVICING 3000S

IMPORTANT Servicing and maintenance should be only carried out by a RS STOKVIS Ltd approved engineer

Only use replacement parts provided by the appliance manufacturer

Check that the air openings for combustion and for ventilation of any plant roon or compartment are clear

81 ISOLATION

811 FUEL GAS ISOLATION

The fuel gas to the ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler should be isolated and locked off at the manual ball valve mounted at the start of the fuel gas line Additionally before entering or servicing the air handler the burner manual isolation valve and pilot line isolation valve should be closed

812 ELECTRICAL ISOLATION

All electric power to the air handler and the remote control station is switched through the local isolator This isolator is fitted with a lock facility to permit it to be locked in the OFF position

Additionally isolate the power at the Wall Isolator

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 30

8 SERVICING 30005

82 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE

The air handler should be routinely serviced at the start of each heating season Isolate the air handler as above before servicing Details of access to individual components are given in Section 84 of this manual

1 Remove and clean spark igniter Check that the gap is correctly set at 25 mm Replace every two years

2 Clean the flame detector lens to ensure freedom from dirt and moisture If the cell shows any sign of cracks it should be replaced Routinely replace the cell every two years or after 10000 hours of operation which ever comes first

3 Inspect the entire air handler paint system for general damage Repair as necessary

4 Every two years brush the burner plates and clear the burner holes carefully with a Size 18mm drill for NP II and 20mm drill for NP I

WARNING THE BURNER HOLES MUST NOT BE ENLARGED

5 Inspect and lubricate all damper linkages to ensure freedom of operation Wipe off all excess lubricants to prevent dirt build up on linkage parts

6 Check the fan belt for cracks and splits Check tension The correct tension gives 16mm deflection per metre of span when the belt is centrally loaded with a force of 27N Adjust as necessary

7 Grease both the fan shaft bearings with Mobiith AW2 grease or similar

NEVER use high temperature grease

NEVER mix two different greases within the bearing always flush existing grease out

Note Removing the cover plate on the end of the air handler gains access to the outboard fan bearing

Light to Slow to 0 120 2 to 6 months Clean Dry

Medium Medium 120 200 1 to 2 months

Moderate to Light to Slow to 0 120 1 to 4 weeks Dry

Dirty Medium Medium 120 200 1 to 7 days

Extreme Dirt Dry Light to Slow to 0 200 Daily Flushing out

Medium Medium Dirt

83 ANNUAL SERVICE CHECKS

After Servicing test fire the air handler following the Commissioning Procedure detailed in Section 4 of this manual to ensure correct operation generally Special attention must be paid to the damper system and related controls and interlocks

Additionally check that the fresh air and recirculation air entry path to the air handler has been kept clear and instruct the User of the need for this as necessary

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 31

8 SERVICING 3000S

84 REMOVAL PROCEDURE FOR REPLACEABLE COMPONENTS

IMPORTANT

Turn off the gas at the appliance service valve and the electricity at the main panel and wall isolator before proceeding

841 BURNER

The burner is located inside the air handler casing and is mounted on two brackets from the support straps To remove the burner isolate the air handler as in 81 and undo the union on the fuel gas line adjacent to the burner isolation valve (MV6) and unscrew the main and pilot gas feed pipes from the burner rail Access to the rear of the burner assembly is made by removing the partition plate below the burner separating the fresh air inlet to the burner from the return air inlet compartment This is held in place by screws which engage in captive nuts on the top side of the partition Remove the Flame Detector and pull off the ignition plug cap Disconnect the burner support brackets and remove the burner The burner will easily pass through the access hatch for further strip down Replace in the reverse order soundness test the gas pipework check the burner operation and duty as described in the commissioning section of this manual

842 FLAME DETECTOR

This is a 240 Volt instrument

The flame detector is mounted on the end of the burner rail inside the air handler casing To remove the detector isolate the panel electric supply and lock off Push the scanner towards the burner and rotate to release the bayonet fixing and lift the detector from its mount Remove the two screws holding the detector cover and disconnect the supply leads noting the polarity of the connections

Replace the flame detector in the reverse order ensuring correct polarity of connections Ensure the access panel is securely closed and the retaining nuts are tightened down Check operation by inserting a test meter in the points provided in the main control panel and reading the flame signals during start up to full rate burner operation (See 431) Operate the appliance over six starts for reliability of operation including tum off of start and main gas valves to check for lockout operation

843 IGNITER SPARK PLUG

This is a high tension spark plug

The igniter spark plug is mounted on the end of the burner rail inside the air handler casing To remove the spark plug isolate the air handler as above Enter the service access door Access to the spark plug is made through the profile plate To remove the spark plug pull off the high tension lead and unscrew the plug with a plug spanner

When replacing the spark plug check the plug gap is set at 15mm Check ignition reliability over six start ups

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 32

8 SERVICING 3000S

844 IGNITER SPARK TRANSFORMER

This is a 240 Volt instrument

The ignition transformer is located in a plastic box mounted on the air handler casing adjacent to the main control panel To remove the transformer isolate the air handler as above and unscrew the four retaining screws holding the box lid in place and remove the lid Disconnect the supply cable at the terminal strip and undo the transformer retaining screws The transformer may then be unscrewed from the High Tension cable leading to the spark plug

Replacement is a simple reversal of this procedure

Check ignition reliability over six start ups

845 COMBUSTION AIR PRESSURE SWITCH (DPS)

Note The switch is set and sealed and should be replaced if not operating correctly

This switch is a 240 Volt instrument

The air switch is mounted directly on the air handler casing and can be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove the switch isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the supply cable Break the downstream pipe compression fitting and unscrew the switch housing from its locating fitting Reverse the procedure to replace after ensuring switch setting is as specified in Section 13 of this manual Operate the air handler to ensure reliability of operation over six start ups

846 AIR HANDLER OVERHEAT LIMIT CONTROL

This is a 240 Volt instrument

The overheat limit control can be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove the control isolate the air handler as above and lock off Remove the switch cover Disconnect the supply cable and unscrew the control housing from its locating fitting Reverse the procedure to replace check the switch is set to 50degC Test the switch operation as described in Section 43 over at least three operations

847 AIR FAN AND MOTOR

The air fan motor is a 415 Volt 3 phase motor

The motor and slide rails are easily accessible inside the air handler casing If it is necessary to remove the motor isolate the air handler as above Slacken the fan-belt tension and remove the drive belts Pull the motor away from the air handler casing to make access to the motor terminal box and disconnect the supply cable The motor may now be removed from the unit Following replacement the air handler must be fully re-commissioned as in Section 4

It is unlikely that the air fan will need replacing or servicing If required a full procedure should be obtained from RS STOKVIS Ltd

Replacement must be followed by full re-commissioning as in Section 4

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 33

8 SERVICING 3000S

848 FUEL GAS MULTI-FUNCTIONAL CONTROL - SMALL UNITS

This is a 240 Volt instrument

The fuel gas multi-functional control can be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove the unit isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the Hirschman electric termination Unbolt the control from its flanges and remove

When replacing care must be taken to ensure the flange 0 rings are undamaged and in the correct location Following replacement the air handler must be fully reshycommissioned as in Section 4 including tests for soundness prior to start-up

849 GOVERNOR AND BLOCK VALVES

The block valves are 240 Volt instruments

All these items may be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove any item isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the electric termination to the two block valves the pilot block valve and the flow control block valve Break the two pipe unions and remove the fuel gas line complete for further strip-down

8410 FUEL GAS FLOW CONTROL VALVE

This is a 24 Volt instrument

The fuel gas How control valve can be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove the valve isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the supply cables to the control valve

On small air handlers fitted with a multi-functional control support the multi-functional control and unbolt its discharge flange Break the union downstream of the burner isolation valve and remove the section of line containing the flow control valve for further strip-down

On large air handlers fitted with separate block valves it will be necessary to remove the fuel gas line complete as Section 8410 above

Following replacement re-commission the air handler

Note If the fresh air damper is not in the full open position the heat input must not exceed the maximum heat input at recirculation condition specified in the technical data section of this manual

8411 PILOT GAS GOVERNOR AND BLOCK VALVE

The block valve is a 240 Volt instrument

Both items may be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove either item isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the electric terrriination to the solenoid valve Undo the upstream pipe union and the compression fitting downstream of the manual block valve (PV3) Remove the pilot gas line complete for further strip down

Replace broken or distorted connections and retest for soundness Ensure the pilot gas pressure is correct and the flame is sensing an output Ensure reliability over six start-ups

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 34

8 SERVICING 3000S

8412 BELT TENSIONING PROCEDURE

The setting tensions are designed to cover a wide range of drives A precise setting force for individual applications can be calculated as detailed

SETTING FORCES

Belt Section

Setting Force To Deflect Belt 16mm per Metre Of Span

Small Pulley Diameter (mm)

Basic Setting Forces Newtons (N) Kilograms (kgf)

125 x Setting Forces Newtons (N) Kilograms (kgf)

SPZ

56 to 71 16 16 20 20 75 to 90 18 18 22 22

95 to 125 20 20 25 25 Over 125 22 22 28 28

SPA

80 to 100 22 22 28 28 106 to 140 30 30 38 38 150 to 200 36 37 45 46 Over 200 40 40 50 51

SPB

112 to 160 40 40 50 51 170 to 224 50 51 62 63 236 to 355 62 63 77 79 Over 355 65 66 81 83

SPC 224 to 250 70 71 87 89 265 to 355 92 94 115 120 Over 375 115 120 144 150

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 35

8 SERVICING 3000S

BELT TENSIONING USING FENNER BELT TENSION INDICATOR

Calculate the deflection in mm on a basis of 16mm per metre of centre distance Centre Distance (m) x 16 =Deflection (mm)

Set lower marker ring at the deflection distance required in mm on the lower scale

Set upper ring against to bottom edge of the top tube

Place the belt tension indicator on top of the belt at the centre of span and apply a force at right angles to the belt defecting it to the point where the lower marker ring is level with the top of the adjacent belt

Read off the force value indicated by the top edge of the upper marker ring

Compare this force to the kgf value shown in the table above

If a Fenner Belt Tension Indicator is not available a spring balance and rule will be suffice

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 36

8 SERVICING 30005

85 MAIN PANEL CONTROLS

All panel controls are readily accessible and may be easily exchanged for replacement components in the event of failure Ensure any replacement item is of the same make and type as the original

851 LANDIS amp GYR LFL 1335 AUTOMATIC SEQUENCE CONTROLLER

The Landis amp Gyr Automatic Sequence Controller is a plug-in unit locating on a pre-wired chassis To remove the controller undo the two retaining screws at the top left and lower right corners and pull the module off the chassis

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

852 CONTROLS CIRCUIT (24 VOLT) TRANSFORMER

The Controls Circuit Transformer is fixed to the panel back plate by tapped screws To remove the transformer undo the wiring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel Undo the two retaining screws and remove the unit complete

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

853 CONTROL RELAYS R1 R2 amp R3

The Control Relays are DIN Rail mounted To remove a relay undo the wIring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel Release the DIN rail retaining clip under the relay with a screwdriver and remove the relay

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

854 6A MCB

The 6A MCB is DIN Rail mounted To remove the MCB undo the wiring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel Release the DIN rail retaining clip under the MCB with a screwdriver and remove the MCB

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

855 THERMAL OVERLOAD

The thermal overload is attached to the underside of the main contactor To remove the overload undo the wiring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel and that the overload setting is as specified in Section 13 of this manual Unscrew the three connections to the contactor and remove the overload

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 37

8 SERVICING 3000S

856 MAIN CONTACTOR

The Main Contactor is DIN Rail mounted To remove the contactor remove the thermal overload as 855 above and then undo the wiring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel Release the DIN rail retaining clip under the contactor with a screwdriver and remove the contactor

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

857 MOTOR FUSE

To replace a motor fuse pull the fuse carrier off the fuse holder base The fuse is attached to the fuse carrier by two screws Unscrew remove and replace

86 REMOTE CONTROL STATION

The remote control station contains some serviceable parts although these items should only be fitted by an approved RS STOKVIS Ltd Engineer

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 38

9 RECOMMENDED SPARES 3000S

For two years operation it is recommended that the following items should be held in stock

ITEM DESCRIPTION PART NO QUANTITY i

1 INDICATOR BULBS W1121 1 PACK

2 SPARK PLUG 023739 1 I

3 UVDETECTOR QRA10C 1 I

4 ROOM SENSOR DRT2453 1

5 DUCT SENSOR DDT1701 1

All replacement parts can be obtained from RS STOKVIS Ltd by quoting the air handler serial number the part number and description

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 39

APPENDIX 1 30005

SOUNDNESS TESTING THE FUEL GAS PIPEWORK

This procedure should only be carried out by personnel familiar with the ECONO-AIR 3000S Series Air handler

The pressure test points and all valves are identified on the Process and Instrumentation Diagram for the air handler included in Section 1 of this n1anual

Isolate the air handler electric supply at the main control panel and lock off Close the manual isolation valves MV1 MV6 and PV3 Ensure the supply pressure is available on the upstream side of MV1

A11 TESTING THE UPSTREAM PIPEWORKAND BURNER CONTROLS 1 Connect a 60 mbar manometer to the pressure test nipple A Monitor the

pressure for two minutes Any rise in pressure indicates that valve MV1 is leaking and must be replaced Remove pressure test points Band F

2 Open MV1 to pressurise the pipework on both the main gas and pilot line to the first block valve

3 Close MV1 Allow one minute for the temperature to stabilise and then test the system for 2 minutes and watch for a drop in the pipework pressure If the pressure falls open valve MV1 and test the pipework connections and valves from MV1 to MV3 and MV1 to PV2 for leaks with a proprietary leak detector fluid or spray Turn off MV1 seal any leaks and re-test

4 If no extemalleaks are found either the pilot block valve PV1 or either the first main gas block valve MV3 is letting by

5 To test this seal pressure test point A and fit a manometer to pressure test point B Leave for two minutes with MV1 open A rise in pressure on the manometer confirms a leak on the block valve MV3 Turn off MV1 exchange the valve and re-test from point 2 above

6 Repeat this procedure for the pilot block valve Seal test point B and fit a manometer to pressure test point F Leave for two minutes with MV1 open A rise in pressure on the manometer confirms a leak on the pilot block valve PV2 Turn off MV1 exchange the valve and re-test from point 1 above Seal test point F

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 40

APPENDIX 1 30005

A12 TESTING THE DOWNSTREAM BURNER VALVE 1 Close MV1 and connect pressure test points A and 8 with flexible 6 mm bore

tubing teed into the manometer Remove pressure test point C Open MV1 to pressurise the downstream block valve MV4

2 Close MV1 and leave for one minute for the temperature to stabilise Monitor the pressure for 2 minutes If the pressure falls open valve MV1 and leak test the line between the two block valves MV3 and MV4 with a proprietary leak detector Turn off MV1 seal any leaks and re-test Note Smaller air handlers in the 3000S Series are fitted with multi-functional valves combining the pressure regulator and two block valves in one component The above procedure still applies but if a leak is found on either block valve the whole control should be replaced If no external leaks are found the downstream block valve is letting by

3 To confirm this close MV1 remove the manometer and refit to pressure test point C Connect pressure test points A and 8 with flexible 6mm bore tubing Open MV1 and allow one minute for the temperature to stabilise Monitor the pressure for a further 2 minutes with MV1 still open A rise in pressure confirms that the second block valve MV4 is letting by Turn off MV1 Replace the valve and re-test from 2 above

A13 TESTING THE DOWNSTREAM BURNER PIPEWORK 1 Close MV1 and connect pressure test points A and D with flexible 6 mm bore

tubing teed into the manometer Open MV1 to pressurise the downstream pilot pipework

2 Close MV1 and leave for one minute for the temperature to stabilise Monitor the pressure for 2 minutes If the pressure falls open valve MV1 and leak test the line between the downstream block valve MV4 and the manual block MV6 with a proprietary leak detector fluid or spray If no external leaks are found the manual block valve MV6 is letting by Turn off MV1 seal any leakages and reshytest from 2 above

A14 TESTING THE DOWNSTREAM PILOT PIPEWORK 1 Close MV1 and connect pressure test points A and F with flexible 6mm bore

tubing teed into the manometer Open MV1 to pressurise the downstream pilot pipework

2 Close MV1 and leave for one rninute for the temperature to stabilise Monitor the pressure for 2 minutes If the pressure falls open valve MV1 and leak test the line between the downstream block valve PV2 and the manual block PV3 with a proprietary leak detector fluid or spray If no external leaks are found the manual block valve PV3 is letting by Turn off MV1 seal any leakages and reshytest from 2 above

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 41

APPENDIX 1 30005

A15 TESTING THE BURNER CONNECTIONS 1 Remove the burner access panel as described in Section 84 of this manual

Remove the burner spark igniter Slacken the two retaining bolts holding the burner to the burner support straps and unbolt the burner supply endplate from the burner casting and mixing plates

2 Connect pressure test points A and 0 with flexible 6mm bore tubing teed into the manometer Open MV1 and MV6 to pressurise the burner pipework Leak test the main gas burner pipework and connections with proprietary leak detector fluid Turn off MV6 Seal any leakages and re-test

3 Connect pressure test points A and F with flexible 6 mm bore tubing teed into the manometer Open MV1 and PV3 to pressurise the pilot burner pipework Leak test the pilot gas burner pipework and connections with proprietary leak detector fluid Turn off PV3 Seal any leakages and re-test

4 Turn off MV1

5 Replace the spark igniter and profile division plate

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 42

APPENDIX 2 30005

START SEQUENCE

The burner start sequence is controlled by the Landis and Gyr burner management unit The timings are pre-set and comply with 885885 This unit must NOT be tampered with

A brief description of the start-up sequence isshy

The unit checks

1 The NO FLAME signal on the UV flame scanner

Note If the scanner detects a flame at any time other than in the correct operating sequence the flame programmer initiates a lockout

2 The operation of the combustion air proving switch in the NO AIR position

3 The air handler discharge high temperature switch

If the checks are completed the unit starts the combustion air fan and then checks the combustion airflow

Once the airflow is proven the unit checks that the damper control circuit is functioning correctly After the damper microswitch is made to prove the fresh air damper is fully open the sequence allows 30 seconds for the combustion air to purge any combustible gas from the air handler

After completion of the purge the spark ignition system is energised the pilot valve opened and the spark terminated If the pilot flame is not proven by the UV scanner the system will initiate a LOCKOUT

If the flame is proven the main gas valves are opened the pilot extinguished and the main burner flame proven

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 43

i

APPENDIX 2 30008

The following flow chart shows the complete start sequence including the lighting of the various indicating lamps

MANUAL STATUS LIGHT POWER ON

POWER ON

I INITIATE START BY TIME

SETTING ON CONTROLLER

I CHECK NO FLAME

VISIBLE

PROVEj FAIL LOCKOUT

I CHECK RELAY R4 NC

POSITION

PROVE FAIL NO START

I CHECK AIR PRESSURE SWITCH NC POSITION

PROVE FAIL NO START

I CHECK RELAY R1 NC

POSITION

PROVE j

FAIL NO START

I START COMBUSTION

AIR BLOWER

I CHECK AIR PRESSURE SWITCH NO POSITION

PROVE I

FAIL NO START

I STATUS LIGHT FAN ON

I ENERGISE RELAY R1

I

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 44

I

I

APPENDIX 2 30008

I CHECK OVERHEAT LIMIT

CONTROL R5

PROVE I

FAIL I I

CHECK 541412 LOOP CLOSED ON

LANDIS ampGYR CIRCUIT

PROVE I

FAIL I I

COMBUSTION AIR PURGE PERIOD

30 SECONDS

I

NO START

NO START

CANCEL NO FLAME CHECK CIRCUIT

I

ENERGISE SPARK

I TIMED PERIOD 25 SECONDS

I ENERGISE PILOT GAS

VALVE

I TIMED PERIOD 25 SECONDS

I TERMINATE SPARK

I INTERROGATE UV FLAME SCANNER

PROVE I

FAIL I I

TIMED PERIOD 10 SECONDS

I

LOCKOUT

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 45

I

I

APPENDIX 2 3000S

I ENERGISE MAIN GAS

VALVES

I

STATUS LIGHT BURNER ON

I TIMED PERIOD

5 SECONDS

I DE-ENERGISE PILOT

GAS VALVES

CONTINUOUS FROM PILOT

I INTERROGATE UV FLAME SCANNER

PROVE I

FAIL I I

LOCKOUT I

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 46

APPENDIX 3 30005

Please see copy of Standard Service Sheet

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 47

APPENDIX 4 30005

A41 TIME OUT SCREEN

This is the standard screen displayed when the touch screen is not in use The back light is off to save energy_ To access the STATUS screen touch the ENTER key and the following screen is displayed

[]][I][]rn[IJOO[][IJOO[] EJ~E11 I[]I ~ middot I

NOTE

The Touch Screen operates using the heat produced by the touch of a finger and therefore only LIGHT pressure is required

Excessive pressure can damage the Touch Screen

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 48

APPENDIX 4 30008

A42 STATUS SCREEN

On the typical STATUS screen the illustrated information detailed is as follows

19 36 Fan Brn

RS OS

100 Fst_~_ Lck _ _ Xst Gas~o ~ I

RS Indicates the current room temperature

OS ~( t~~ the current duct discharge temperature

Fan Indicates the current status of the fan by showing the arrow and the fan blades for ON and OFF is shown by the arrow and fan blades being removed

Brn Indicates the current status of the burner with the black flames indicating the burner to be ON and vice versa

Lck LOCKOUT - This indicates a flame failure when highlighted during normal or start-up operation

Xst EXCESS TEMPERATURE SWITCH - This indicates the unit has reached the trip limit on the over heat stat when highlighted during operation

Indicates the current position of the gas modulating valve during normal Gas

operation (0-100)

Indicates whether the Frost stat is energised and the unit is running on frost Fst

override

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 49

APPENDIX 4 30008

A43 CHANGING SETTINGS

It is possible to change the settings for the time of operation and the required temperature set points The following details the steps required

A44 ENTERING THE SECURITY CODE

From the STATUS screen touch the return key and the screen below will be displayed

Type the HIGH LEVEL security code (4321) If you make a mistake use the BACK SPACE key to delete any incorrect number(s) Touch the ENTER key when the code is correct

If the security code is incorrect the screen above will be displayed then try again If after several attempts you can not gain access please contact RS STOKVIS Ltd for further information

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 50

APPENDIX 4 30008

When the code is entered correctly the MAIN MENU is displayed as detailed below

~ STATUS SET VALUES~ ~ TIVIE CLOCK [) [) [) [) [)

The MAIN MENU screen shows the three menu items available The title for each menu item can be changed to suit the end user Please notify RS STOKVIS Ltd prior to commissioning should these parameters require special amendments

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 51

APPENDIX 4 30008

A45 CHANGING OR SETTING A TIME SCHEDULE

From the main menu screen select the TIME CLOCK page by running finger across screen symbol and touch the ENTER key the screen below will be displayed

On the following screen highlight the TS1 symbol and touch the ENTER key

The current time schedule will now be displayed as shown below The display will automatically default to the current day (1 =Monday 2 =Tuesday etc) In this case day 5 (Friday) the four schedule switching times refer to that day

IAC6BBB1BHIS1

mm0CIl bull mID 17BB 17BB 17HB

Iillleschedule

To modify a time select it by highlighting and touch the ENTER key and the following screen is displayed

To amend the appropriate onoff time as shown on the screen below The arrows to the right of the time are for altering the hours and the arrows on the left for the minutes

Once you have set the time use the ESCape key to exit back to the time schedule screen and choose another day by touching the required number Another time may now be modified as before

IAC6BBB1BHIS1

H8BH

I i eschedule

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 52

APPENDIX 4 30008

Use the ESCape key to exit back to the MAIN MENU screen

~ STATUS ~ SET VALUES

TIME CLOCK []~ [] [] [] []

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 53

APPENDIX 4 30005

A46 CHANGING SET VALUES

From the main menu screen select the SET VALUES page by highlight in the normal way and touch the ENTER key

The following screen is displayed

36 19 18III III IIIHsv Rsv Llv

To change the RSV highlight it in the normal way and touch the ENTER key and the screen below will now be shown

IAC6RRR1RR40 T I

0 19 (Y)l RSV

ROOM SET VALUE

The above screen shows the parameters that can be changed The values to the far left are the limitations of set point (OC) Change the set point by using the UP and DOWN ARROWS on the left of the screen or touch the set value itself followed by the ENTER key to select the set value and set it directly using the numeric keyboard All values can be changed in this way

Use the ESCape key twice to exit back to the MAIN MENU screen

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 54

APPENDIX 4 30005

A47 COMMISSIONING AND SERVICING BURNER CHECKS

Select the SET VALUES screen from the MAIN MENU screen and adjust the high lirrlit set point to 55degC to drive the burner to high fire

IAC6HHH1HH60 ~T I

0 19 (Y)

HSV

HIGH SET VALUE ~

Ensure the set value is returned to 36degC once the appropriate checks and adjustments as described in Section 43 of this manual have been completed Return to the SET VALUES screen and select the low limit value to adjust the low fire setting

Reduce the low limit value to OdegC to drive the gas valve to low fire and complete the appropriate checks and adjustments as described in Section 43 of this manual and ensure the set value is returned to the original value

A48 GMT ltgt BST CHANGEOVER DAYLIGHT SAVINGS

To change your unit to British Summer TimelWinter Time the following system screen must be highlighted by touching the Iamp1 button twice

By touching the clock symbol in the top left hand corner followed by the ENTER key the screen below will be displayed

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 55

APPENDIX 4 30008

188311 851193

544

By touching and highlighting in this case 18 followed by the ENTER key A small box allowing the entry of two digits will appear Enter the desired time required using the numbered keys followed by ENTER key Your unit is now set to operate on BSTBWT

Touch the ESC key three times to return back to the Status screen

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 56

STOKVIS ENERGY SYSTEMS 96R WALTON ROAD EAST MOLESEY SURREY KT8 0DL TEL 020 8783 3050 08707 707 747 FAX 020 8783 3051 08707 707 767 E-MAIL infostokvisboilerscom WEBSITE wwwstokvisboilerscom

JULY 1999

Page 9: ECONOAIR 3000S SERIES AIR HANDLING UNIT DIRECT FIREDstokvisboilers.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/EconoAir... · 2019-05-10 · ECONOAIR 3000S SERIES AIR HANDLING UNIT DIRECT FIRED

~------------------~--~

~~O~~C~~~__-__~~middot~~I~~______________-1~~~__~~-=~~=-~i

COMPONENT UST

BURNER

AIR FAN MOTOR

FAN DRIVE

CONTROL PANEL

REMOTE PANEL

SERVICES

FUEL

UAX SUPPLY PRESSURE MIN SUPPLY PRESSURE

ELECTRICITY

BLOCK VALVES

Serial No

bullbull IlICh NPII

kW 1+4ORPM

NA

3-30005-100 RevO DOL Start

N

NATURAL GAS

25mbor 1gtmbor

15V5OHz3Ph4W1RE Motor FLC bullbullbull Amps

240V 50Hz 1Ph 3 WIRE

Site Address

TAG DESCRIPTION WI SUPPLY ISOlATION VALve

W2 JW3 MULTIBLOCKMY MV5 FLOW CONTROL VALve WS BURNER ISOLATION VALVE

PVl PILOT PRESSURE REGULATOR PV2 PILOT SOlpoundNOIO VALve PV3 PILOT ISOlATION VALve

TC SPACE lEMPERATURE CONTROUER TO DISCHARGE TEMPERATURE DETECTOR TR SPACE TEMPERATURE DElECTOR TS OISCHARGE TEMPERATURE swrrCH

PS AIR PRESSURE swrrCH

UV fLAt4E DETECTOR

t SPARK IGNITER

NOTE f INIlICATES PRpoundSSURE TEST POM

Client

srOKVIS END USERS ADDRESS END USER

RS STOKVIS amp SONS Ltd POOL ROAD WEST MOLESEY SURREY KT8 2HN

Ident T45

shyomiddot BVIoI 0 145

1 DJSO 1 GBlA 14 T45

1AC600 00T1701 DRT3453 RAK13bullbull170

lWGJ

ORAtO 023739

PILOT LINE

fRtsH Nfl HET

Title TITLE

Model No Seri4l No DutY Style

Tel 0181 941 1212 Fax 0181 941 4136

00lCIIAAGE 10 WORIltSPAtt

305 99- m3sINDOOR HORIZONTAL

ACStw -_nora I-ID_raw_-+I__-I

Checked

CONTROL Approved

o-1 CommentApproval

Rev IDote I Description

Computer No 99

Purchase Order No

Drawing No

4-MR-001 R~O~

NOTES1shy

I PROPOSED LOCATION TO BE CHECKED tOR LEVEL AND LOAD BEARING STRENGTH BY OTHERS

2 UNIT TO BE SUPPLIED IN SEPERATE SECTIONS FOR LIFTING INTO PLANTROOM AND ON TO BASE BY OTHERS

3 ALL SECTIONS TO HAVE TIJO BEADS OF SEALANT BETJEEN OPPOSING FLANGES AS PER SUPPLIED INSTALL ATlON INSTRUCTIONS

ltI ENSURE ALL BUILDERS JORK IS CARRIED OUT AND MADE GOOD AFTER INSTALLATION BY OTHERS

5 ALL EXTERNAL JIRING SHALL BE CARRIED OUT BY COMPETENT PERSON TO CURRENT lEE REGULATIONS

DISCHARGE OPENING lUOlElIE VIDE X lIE HIG CV 3011 MEZ FLANGE

Serial No

sroKVIS Site Address Client END USERS ADDRESS END USER

ACCESS OPENING

~L---gt lt0-shy

~ ~

GAS CONNECTIONS

CONTROL PANEL 60011 VIDE X 600111 HIGH

APPROX VEIGHTSshy

HEATER CASING - 1I0U( KG

IJCL OOCUUef IDrawn lACS

Checked

I RS STOKVIS amp SONS Ltd POOL ROAD WEST MOLESEY SURREY KT8 2HN Tel 0181 941 1212 fax 0181 941 4136 CONTROL IApproved

o I~ I CommentApproval

Rev IDate IDescription

Computer No

99 Purchase Order No

Drawing No

3-MR-005

415VOlT5OHz 4 WIRE sumy

lIfEI_-shy~a

30131

2_F11

3 TOO---shy

B (

Serial No

~s

~~~~

~ NIt 9lOIElIliOTt)R RA11NG~W

STOKVIS

0 reg

-0

0 0 lt0

u ~

R5-1 -

ADDRESS

shy

regshy

~tl

GAS v IoIOtQR AIIIfONGTll LEGEND

IHlmN PNEI _

-e- PNEl_

Sl1pound_

-11shy IJIfClIOII1IO~-

DUCT STAT NPE COt 17tll

_STAT NPE om 3lt4Il)

~~~pound~ niR~~ (i)l

~ ()1

_cbullbullL~ nmiddoti Apoundm

USER

~ ~

SCHEMATIC FOR 3000S SERIES AIR

IAC600 BASED

RS STOKVIS amp SONS Ltd POOL ROAD WEST MOLESEY SURREY KT8 2HN Tel 0181 941 1212 Fax 0181 941 4136

_[---------f P(N(J ON

ICHI11ONTfWiSFORlER

PllOT V IIEIi CAS VAllIE 1

II CAS VAllIE 2

~_ON

lOCKOUT

s

o Rev I Dote I Description

Computer No 99

Purchase Order No

Drawing No

3-MR-100 Rev

o

30005 2 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

21 INTRODUCTION

The STOKVIS ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler is a direct fired unit designed to give clean healthy environmental conditions and constant even temperature within the heated space

The main air handler assembly houses the circulating air fan the gas burner the fuel gas line and all necessary safety controls The burner management system and space temperature controller is located in the main control panel mounted on or adjacent to the side of the air handler A second control station supplied loose for mounting remote from the air handler within the heated space or other convenient location houses indicating lights the control touch screen and auxiliary operational switches

A sight glass is fitted on the air handler casing to view the burner during operation

For multi unit networked applications the touch screen is excluded

22 GAS BURNER ASSEMBLY

The ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler incorporates the Maxon NP-II burner This burner is specially designed for heating fresh air and is mounted such that a proportion of the incoming air is forced into contact with the flame to ensure rapid mixing and combustion within the code requirements The burner assembly is built up from modular components to give the required heat duty

Each burner assembly is fitted with an integral pilot spark igniter and UV detector The flame detector is used for scanning both the pilot and main flame Note that the pilot burner operates in interrupted mode

The burner module fitted is identified in the Technical Data Section of this manual and on the Valve and Instrun1ent list

23 CONTROL SYSTEM

The controls fitted on the air handler are detailed on the Process amp Instrumentation Diagram in the Technical Data Section of this manual

231 SAFETY CONTROLS

The safety interlocks on the ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler are

1 Combustion air proving switch (PS) 2 Ultra-violet burner flame detector (UV) 3 Overheat limit control (OLe)

Failure of either the combustion air switch or fiame scanning circuit will cause the air handler to go to LOCKOUT and the burner management system will require a RESET before a re-light can be attempted

The air handler discharge overheat limit control is a manual reset switch After a failure the switch will have to be RESET before a re-light can be attempted

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 8

2 GENERAL DESCRIPTION 3000S

232 TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEM

The ECONO-AIR 30008 Series air handler is fitted with a full three-term modulating temperature control system as standard The space temperature is sensed by a heated space detector (TR) which inputs to the panel mounted temperature controller (TC) This achieves control by modulation of the fuel gas flow control valve (MV5) The temperature controller additionally limits the air handler discharge air temperature measured by the discharge temperature detector (TO) to pre-set high and low limits

233 MAIN CONTROL PANEL

The control panel houses the combustioncirculation air fan starter the burner management system and the heated space temperature controller On larger units a separate starter panel may be supplied The panel door is fitted with an interlocked isolator POWER ON and LOCKOUT lights and the burner management RESET button The panel is mounted on or adjacent to the air handler

234 FUEL GAS SYSTEM

The PILOT LINE comprises 1 Pilot governor (PV1 ) 2 One British Gas certificated solenoid valve (PV2) 3 One pilot gas isolation valve (PV3) 4 Pipework and fittings

Note Two pressure test points are fitted on the pilot line on the inlet and discharge of the pilot solenoid valve

The MAIN GAS LINE comprises

1 Gas isolation valve (MV1 ) 2 Pressure governor (MV2) 3 Double block safety shut-oft system (MV34) 4 Gas flow control valve (MV5) 5 Burner isolation valve (MV6) 6 Pipework and fittings

Note Four pressure test points are fitted on the n1ain gas line on the supply the inlet and discharge of the second block valve and downstream of the flow control valve

Note On small air handlers items 2 and 3 are combined in one multi-functional control

All items above are detailed on the Process amp Instrumentation Diagram in Section 1 of this manual

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 9

2 GENERAL DESCRIPTION 3000S

235 REMOTE CONTROL STATION

The ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler is also supplied with a remote control station which houses the air handler operating controls indicating status and the workspace temperature detector if the control station is located in the heated space

236 HEATED SPACE TEMPERATURE SENSOR The heated space temperature sensor is to be located remotely within the space to be heated

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 10

3 INSTALLATION 30005

31 STATUTORY REQUIREMENTS

I n accordance with the Gas Safety (I nstallation and Use) Regulations 1998 installation of this ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler should only be undertaken by competent personnel who are fully aware of their responsibilities under the Health and Safety at Work Act 1974

The installation of this air handler must comply with

BS6230-1991 Installation of gas-fired forced convection air air handlers for commercial and industrial Space Heating of rated input exceeding 60kW

The lEE Regulations for Electrical Installations

Gas Safety (Installation and Use) Regulations 1998

Health and Safety at Work Act 1974

Building Regulations 1986

Building Standards (Scotland Only)

The I nstitution of Gas Engineers Codes of Practice

IGEUP1 Soundness Testing Procedures for Industrial and Commercial Gas Installations

IGEUP2 Gas Installation Pipework Boosters and Compressors on Industrial and Commercial Premises

IGEUP4 Commissioning Of Gas Fired Plant On Industrial and Commercial Premises

32 RECEPTION AND STORAGE OF GOODS

32laquo1 RECEPTION

On receipt of the shipment check that the shipment is complete against the Delivery Advice Note Check for mechanical damage sustained during transit before off-loading the goods Inform the carrier of any such damage

322 OFFLOADING

Horizontal air handlers are fitted with four lifting eyes to permit an overhead lift Alternatively horizontal air handlers may be handled by a fork lift truck on the steel angle support frame

323 STORAGE

Air handlers must be stored in a dry environment The remote control station must be removed from the shipment and stored indoors in a dry environment Outdoor units of split case design (Size 54 and above) must have open ends protected from the environment until installation is complete Any filter elements should be stored in a dry environment

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 11

3 INSTALLATION 3000S

33 LIMITATIONS OF USE

The ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler must not be installed in the following locations

I n hazardous areas

In areas where flammable vapours can be present in excess of their threshold limit values as defined in 8S5925

I n accordance with 8S6230 Clause 513 where there are any flued appliances in the heated area and where air is supplied mechanically and there is mechanical extraction the design extract rate must be 5 to 10 less than the design inlet rate so that the room will not be at a lower pressure than the outside air If the air handler is the only source of mechanically supplied air the extract rate must not exceed 95 of the nominal air flow specified in Section 11 of this manual

Note If it proposed to install the ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler to supply heated air to a hazardous area or in areas where flammable vapours are present the installation must first be approved by a RS STOKVIS Ltd Engineer

34 LOCATION OF AIR HANDLERS

The air handler should normally be installed in the location recommended by the RS STOKVIS Ltd specifying engineer

Check the proposed location for level and load bearing strength Ensure that there is adequate clearance as detailed on the air handler GA in Section 1 this manual around the unit for access for maintenance purposes If the air handler is to be installed above floor level a suitably designed service platform should be provided Such a platform must have 100mm minimum raised edges around the perimeter If this is not possible all air handler access panels must be fitted with hinged restraints This is a factory standard option which should be specified at the time of ordering - check the restraints are fitted before proceeding with installation

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 12

3 INSTALLATION 3000S

35 FRESH AIR INLET AND VENTILATION

351 FRESH AIR INLET

The air handler must be installed where it has a direct and unlimited supply of fresh air from outside the building Ensure that the air intake is not located near exhausts from the building or from any process exhausts such as paint booth exhausts Whenever possible protect the fresh air inlet from the prevailing wind and local wind effects from corners

The fresh air inlet should be sized for an air velocity of 3ms The inlet duct area is detailed on the General Arrangement drawing located in Section 1 of this manual

Where the fresh air inlet is made in a load bearing wall eg a brick wall guidance should be obtained from Structural Engineers on the provision of a lintel in the wall over the fresh air opening

A weather hood must be fitted when the air handler air inlet is at or within 1 m of the outside wall Additionally the weather hood should have negligible resistance to the airflow maximum 01 mbar at the design air flow rate

Do not install the ECONO-AI R 3000S Series air handler where long lengths of duct or bends of an angle greater than 30deg are necessary to lead to the air handler from the fresh air opening If ducting is unavoidable ensure that the resulting pressure drop is negligible Le less than 01 mbar for ductless air handlers and has been accounted for in the original design for ducted air handlers as detailed in the specification section of this manual Section 11

Note If the air intake is located in an area of unrestricted access warning notices preventing the blockage of the air intake by temporary stacking should be displayed adjacent to the intake

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 13

3 INSTALLATION 3000S

352 VENTI LA TION

Where the air air handler is in its own plant room or compartment this shall be ventilated with openings communicating directly with the outside air to ventilate the room

The openings shall be fitted with grilles of negligible resistance and shall be sited so that they cannot easily be blocked or flooded They shall have a total minimum free area as follows

Low Level (inlet) 320cm2 + 27cm2 per kilowatt in excess of 60kW total rated input

High Level (outlet) 160cm2 + 134cm2 per kilowatt in excess of 60kW total rated input

The free area of the grilles shall be not less than the size of the recommended minimum ventilation opening Grilles shall be designed to minimise high velocity air streams in the plant room For exposed ie free standing plant rooms ventilation openings shall be provided on at least two sides and preferably on all four sides

Where mechanical ventilation is used it shall be by mechanical inlet and either natural or mechanical extraction Systems of ventilation employing mechanical extraction and natural air inlet shall not be used

The minimum flow rates of air supplied shall be not less than 06 m3s per megawatt of rated heat input

36 AIR DISCHARGE

The air handler should be located with the air discharge into the heated space at a minimum height of 3 metres The air should not discharge directly onto any obstructions and direct discharge on to working personnel should be avoided

If the air discharge is located in an area of unrestricted access warning notices preventing the blockage of the air discharge by temporary stacking should be displayed adjacent to the discharge

Generally it is not necessary to fit distribution ducting to the discharge of the air handler If ducting is required or specified ensure that the resulting pressure drop has been accounted for in the original design specification as detailed in Section 1 of this manual

37 ASSEMBLY AND POSITIONING OF AIR HANDLER

Unless specified at the time of order air handlers will be shipped in sections Discharge heads grilles attenuators duct connecting sections filters rain-hoods etc will be supplied loose for site fitting to the air handler

Horizontal air handlers must be supported on their steel angle support base When the air handler is located check for level and adjust as necessary

Alternatively horizontal air handlers can be supplied with extensions of the support frame for suspending from overhead supports This must be specified at the time of order Do not suspend the air handler from the lifting eyes

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 14

3 INSTALLATION 3000S

38 REMOTE STATION

The ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler is supplied with a remote control station This should be mounted in a position convenient to the end user If possible it should not be mounted on an external wall or where the space temperature detector is affected by cold draughts or a local source of heat

39 VISUAL CHECK

After completion of installation re-check the air handler for signs of damage Report any instance to RS STOKVIS Ltd

310 CONNECTION OF SERVICES

The air handler requires the connection of fuel gas and electricity

3101 FUEL GAS SUPPLY

The ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler has been designed for use on Natural Gas An alternative version is available for LPG The gas type for the air handler supplied is clearly marked on the air handler data badge and on the Specification sheet in Section 1 of this manual Check the gas type is correct and that the supply pressure is within the range marked on the specification

The local gas Authority should be consulted about the adequacy of the gas service and meter supplies for existing and proposed extensions to the installation and for any requirements for boosting the gas supply_

Connect the fuel gas supply to the inlet manual valve on the air handler gas train The connection size is detailed in Section 1 of this manual A further isolation valve and union should be fitted immediately adjacent to the appliance which when the valve is closed allows the complete burner and control assembly to be disconnected for maintenance or repair

New gas pipework should be installed to British Gas Publication IGEUP2 and be purged and pressure tested in accordance with British Gas Publications IGEUP1

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 15

3 INSTALLATION 3000S

3102 ELECTRICITY SUPPLY

All external wiring shall be carried out and checked by a competent person All components shall be checked for suitability for voltage range and frequency

Means for electric isolation having a contact separation of at least 3mm in all poles must be provided adjacent to the air handler The electrical supply to the appliance shall incorporate suitable means of excess current protection

The ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler requires a 3 phase 4 wire supply which should be connected to the main control panel Check the air handler data badge for the correct electrical supply The maximum supply requirement is Specified in Section 1 of this manual Note that the 240 Volt air handler control circuit is taken from the lUI phase to Neutral Connection should be made as shown on the wiring diagram shipped inside this panel

The air handler must be earthed in accordance with BS5986 and CP1013

Check all terminal strip terminations for wires which have become loose during shipment

311 CONNECTION TO THE MAIN PANEL AND REMOTE STATION

Interconnecting wiring to the main panel and remote station should be made with a minimum specification of 075 mm2 300 Volt cable Check that no wires on the terminal strip have become loose during shipment The remote panel should be mounted at a height of approx 18m If possible it should not be mounted on an external wall or where the sensor will be affected by cold draughts or a local source of heat

Both panel and remote station must be earthed in accordance with BS5986 and CP1013

312 HEATED SPACE TEMPERATURE SENSOR

The space temperature sensor located on the remote panel should be connected with screened cable or twin low voltage signal cable run in its own separate conduit It should be mounted on the remote panel or adjacent to the outlet at a height of approx 18m If possible it should not be mounted on an external wall or where the sensor will be affected by cold draughts or a local source of heat

313 DUCT SENSOR

The duct sensor should be connected with screened cable or twin low voltage signal cable run in its own separate conduit It should be mounted in the air handler discharge as close as possible to the discharge into the heated space

314 OVERHEAT LIMIT CONTROL SENSOR

The overheat limit control sensor should be connected with twin core cable It should be mounted in the air handler discharge within 1 metre of the air handler outlet connection

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 16

3 INSTALLATION 3000S

315 TOUCH SCREEN WIRING

The touch screen located on the front of the remote station requires two separate twisted pairs of O5mrh2 screened cable run in a separate conduit If the distance between the main and remote stations is greater that 1 km please contact RS STOKVIS Ltd for advice

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 17

3 INSTALLATION 3000S

316 ALIGNMENT

3161 INSTALLATION OF DRIVE BELTS

On 80 amp 89 30008 range of air handlers it will be necessary to align the pulleys and fit the drive belts before carrying out commissioning of the unit

3162 PU LLEYS

Before assembling the drive check the pulley grooves are free from scores or sharp edges and all dimensions conform to the relevant standard

The Taper Lock bush is your starting point when it comes to assembly and installation Drive installation is a straightforward job with Taper Lock - but the stages set out on the installation leaflet provided with every Taper Lock bush should be followed closely

3163 ALIGNMENT

Good alignment of pulleys prior to belt installation is important to avoid belt flank wear The diagram below shows correct installation of pulleys

INTERNAl BEARING

MOTOR PUlLEY rAN PULLEY

MOTORMOTOR ADJUSTMENT MOUNTING BOlTSBOLTS

3164 BELTS

When the pulleys have been correctly positioned on the shafts the belts can be installed to complete the drive

The drive centre distance should be reduced prior to the installation of the belts so that they may be fitted without the use of force Under no circumstances must belts be prised into the grooves Using sharp tools to stretch the belts over the pulley rim can easily damage belts and pulley grooves

The installation allowance given in the table below is the minimum recommended reduction in centre distance for various belt section and lengths to allow for correct fitting

The take-up allowance given in the same table should be added on to the calculated centre distance to allow for belt stretch

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 18

3 INSTALLATION 3000S

3165 INSTALLATION AND TAKE UP ALLOWANCE

Belt Pitch Installation Allowance Take-Up Length (mm) SPZ SPA SPB SPC (mm)

410 to 530 5

540 to 840 10

850 to 1160 15

1170 to 1500 20

1510 to 1830 20 25

1840 to 2170 30

2180 to 2830 25 40

2840 to 3500 30 50

3520 to 4160 50 60

4170 to 5140 70

5220 to 6150 85

6180 to 7500 105

600 to 8500 125

8880 to 10170 145

10600 to 12500 175

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 19

4 COMMISSIONING 30005

This appliance must be commissioned by a RS STOKVIS Ltd approved engineer

41 PRESTART CHECKS

1 Switch the SUMMERIOFFMlINTER switch on the remote station to OFF

2 Check the correct electric supply is available to the air handler and the appliance isolator installed

3 Check the correct fuel gas supply is available to the air handler and local isolation valve and union installed Check that new gas pipe work has been correctly purged and pressure tested and that the isolation valve is in the OFF position

4 Check the air handler gas control system and burner connections for pressure soundness as detailed in Appendix 1 of this manual

5 Complete the first section of the Service Check Sheet supplied at the back of this manual (Appendix 3)

6 Close the air handler access door

7 Close and lock the main air handler control panel

8 Switch the main panel isolator to position 1 Check the POWER ON light illuminates

9 Check and set the timed ONOFF periods in the lAC Controller located on the remote panel Ensure that the unit is set to be on during testing Refer to Appendix 4 for the lAC setting procedure

10 Close and lock the remote panel

11 Switch the SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch on the remote station to SUMMER to start the air fan Return the switch to the OFF position and check for correct rotation of the fan as the fan slows and stops

The fan rotation can be observed through the fan section access door or through the air handler access door Only do this during the fan run-down period Ensure the door is securely fastened after completion

Rotation arrows are fitted on the end of the air handler and inside the air handler above the interior bearing support If the rotation is incorrect two phases should be interchanged as dictated by the Engineer responsible for the site electrical system

12 Check the air pressure drop across the burner whilst the fan is operating with a water column pressure gauge connected to the two pressure test points on the air pressure switch (DPS) This pressure should be between 14 and 16 rnbar

If the air differential pressure measured above is not within the operating range check inlet and outlet ductwork as appropriate and any filters fitted If the pressure differential is still not within limits isolate the air handler and report to RS STOKVIS Ltd before proceeding

13 Check the operation and setting of the Low Air Pressure Switch by injecting a controlled signal into the switch Check the break point on the switch is 1 mbar (falling)

Note The switch is set and sealed before fitting The 1 mbar switch point may not coincide with the 1 mbar scale reading on the switch

If on checking the switch is not operating correctly do not tamper with it return it to RS STOKVIS Ltd for replacement

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 20

4 COMMISSIONING 3000S

42 DRY RUN

With all the manual gas isolation valves still in the OFF position switch the SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch to WINTER

43 START UP

1 Attach a manometer to pressure test point F and the low pressure test point on the air pressure switch (DPS)

2 Open the main gas supply valve (MV1) and the pilot burner isolation valve (PV3) Leave the main burner isolation valve (MV6) closed Reset the air handler by pressing the push-button marked RESET on either the main panel or remote station The air handler pilot will light automatically (after the automatic damper start check and combustion air pre-purge) and then LOCKOUT after the main gas shut-off valves are addressed

During the short period that the pilot is in operation check the pilot gas pressure on the manometer It should be 10 mbar and the pilot flame approximately 100 - 150mm in length covering the first three or four holes of the mixing plate and have a steady blue colour when viewed through the sight glass on the access side of the air handler Adjust as necessary - refer to Section 51 this manual Check the flame signal - refer to Section 431

3 Open the main burner isolation valve (MV6) RESET the air handler which should now light to main burner stage When alight close the main burner isolation valve to shut down the gas flow to the burner Check that the unit goes to LOCKOUT

4 Reset the air handler and drive the burner to low fire by adjusting the temperature controller set point as described in Appendix 4 of this manual Check the flame is continuous across the width of the burner and has a flame length of approx 50 - 65mm from the burner rail when viewed through the sight glass on the access side of the air handler Check the burner pressure across pressure test point D and the downstream (low) pressure test point on the air pressure switch ie on the rear of the pressure switch This pressure is specifled in Section 1 of this manual Adjust as necessary-refer to Section 53 of this manual Check the flame signal - refer to Section 431

Where possible check the actual gas flow rate by meter reading with all other appliances turned off

5 Drive the burner to high fire by adjusting the temperature controller set point and high limit to 55degC as described in Appendix 4 of this manual Check the flame is continuous across the burner rail and has a flame length of approximately 250 - 350mm from the burner rail Check the burner pressure across pressure test point D and the downstream (low) pressure test point on the air pressure switch This pressure is specified in Section 1 of this manual Adjust as necessary - refer to Section 52 of this manual Check the maximum air handler discharge temperature Check the flame signal shyrefer to Section 431

Where possible check the actual gas flow rate by meter reading with all other appliances turned off

6 Check the operation of the overheat limit control by adjusting the temperature controller set point and high limit to 65degC as described in Appendix 4 of this manual Monitor the discharge temperature on the temperature controller Check that the overheat control operates as the set temperature is passed Check that the control must be manually reset by pressing the green reset button on the front of the switch Return the temperature controller to its original settings

In the event that the ambient temperature is too low for this simple procedure to work the instrument will have to be bench tested using a Temperature 8ath Remove and replace the control as Section 84 of this manual for bench-testing

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 21

4 COMMISSIONING 3000S

43 1 FLAME SIGNAL CHECK

1 The ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler is fitted with a Klippon SAKT1 Test Terminal which can be used to measure the flame scanning signal Refer to the Electrical Schematic and connect a 0-1 mA ammeter to the two test points with standard 23 mm test plugs with the positive lead on the detector side Disconnect the terminal link to obtain the signal reading A minimum signal of 70 microamps is required typical signals are in the 250-400 microamp range on both pilot and main flame After completion replace the terminal link and remove the test jacks

2 Drive the burner to high fire as previously described Measure the carbon dioxide content of the discharge air stream This figure must not exceed 2800 ppm If the discharge exceeds this limit isolate the air handler and report to RS STOKVIS Ltd before proceeding

Stop and start the air handler a few times to check for reliability using the Operating Instructions (Section 6)

432 HANDOVER

Complete the air handler Service Check Sheet supplied at the back of this manual The self-copy sheet must be returned to STOKVIS for checking

Instruct the User in efficient use and care of the unit start-up and shutdown (including emergency shutdown) and recommended service interval Emphasise the need to keep the air handler clear of stored items and extraneous material and to maintain the recirculation and fresh air paths to the air handler inlets Hand all instructions as applicable to the UserOwner for safekeeping

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 22

5 ADJUSTMENTS 3000S

If adjustments to the air handler settings are required they should be made by a RS STOKVIS Ltd approved engineer

The normal value for all control settings is specified in Section 1 of this manual

51 PILOT ADJUSTMENT

The pilot gas pressure and flame length may be adjusted by altering the discharge pressure of the pilot governor Screwing the adjusting screw clockwise (located under the top cap) increases the discharge pressure and the flame length anti-clockwise decreases the pressure and the flame length

52 BURNER HIGH FIRE PRESSURE ADJUSTMENT

At high fire alter the spring compression on the main burner governor (MV2) by removing the cap and adjust the spring compression plate clockwise to increase the burner pressure anti-clockwise to decrease burner pressure If the pressure does not increase on adjusting the spring the supply is inadequate

Note On small air handlers fitted with a mUlti-functional control the pressure adjusting screw is located under a swing cap on the first block valve

53 BURNER LOW FIRE ADJUSTMENT

The main burner low fire is adjusted on the flow control valve MV5 (Process amp Instrumentation Diagram)

Remove the top cover of the valve and insert a Terminal Screwdriver in the adjusting screw of the TOP cam marked NI

Drive the burner to low fire by adjusting the temperature controller set-point and high limit to 05degC as described in Appendix 4 of this manual

Turn the Terminal Screwdriver clockwise to decrease the low fire gas flow anti-clockwise to increase the flow

Check the heat input and flame signal at the new position are satisfactory and return the tenlperature controller to its normal settings

Replace the control valve cover

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 23

5 ADJUSTMENTS 3000S

54 SUMMERIOFFIWINTER SWITCH

In the SUMMER position this switch provides ventilation only and is independent of the programmed ON and OFF periods This position is manually selected and must be manually de-selected Whenever the switch is in this position the fan is operating

In the OFF position the air handler is shutdown and will not operate This overrides any frost protection fitted It is suitable for air handler shutdown for short periods such as holidays The programme memory is unaffected by this switch and assumes control of the air handler when the switch is returned to the WINTER position

In the WINTER position the air handler operates off the programme memory to provide heating

55 RESET BUTTON

Visual indication of air handler lockout is provided In the event of lockout occurring the air handler can be reset by depressing the RESET button This parallels the RESET button on the air handler main control panel If after 4 attempts to reset the air handler the lockout indicator still illuminates then a Service Engineer should be called to investigate the problem

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 24

6 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 3000S

61 AIR HANDLER START-UP

1 Open all manual gas valves both on the appliance and on the supply to the appliance Switch on the Electric Supply to the appliance

2 On the main air handler panel

Switch the panel isolator to the 1 position

Check POWER ON light

3 On the remote control station

For Heating Switch the SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch to WINTER

The air handler will now start automatically in response to the time settings

In the event of LOCKOUT

Press the RESET button and the cycle of operations will be repeated If the air handler goes to LOCKOUT four times in succession call for a Service Engineer

For Unheated Ventilation Switch the SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch to SUMMER

Note This prevents the burner firing giving a controlled supply of ventilation air to the heated space as long as the switch is in this position The air handler will now start automatically in response to the timeclock demand To turn the fan off return the switch to the centre OFF position

In the event of LOCKOUT

Press the RESET button and the cycle of operations will be repeated If the air handler goes to LOCKOUT four times in succession call for a Service Engineer

62 AIR HANDLER SHUTDOWN

621 SHUTDOWN FOR SHORT PERIODS

Switch the SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch on the remote station to OFF

622 SHUTDOWN FOR PROLONGED PERIODS

Switch the main panel isolator to the 0 position and close all manual gas valves both on and leading to the appliance

Note Manual gas valves should only be operated when the appliance is to be shut off for either Servicing or for a prolonged shutdown

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 25

30005 6 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

63 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS

631 SITE CLEARANCE ADJACENT TO AIR HANDLER

Attention should be paid to keeping the area around the air handler tidy No rubbish should be allowed to accumulate in the vicinity of the air handler and storage of goods etc should not be permitted within two metres of the air handler Failure to comply could result in reduced airflow to the air handler causing inefficient running and potential overheat cond ition

632 AIR SUPPLY TO AIR HANDLER

Air vents and grilles supplying air to the air handler should never be blocked and should be checked periodically to ensure they are clear

633 AIR FILTERS

Similarly attention should be paid to cleaning or replacing the filters to the air handler if fitted Your installer should advise you on the frequency with which this would be required to be completed

634 SERVICE

For continued safe and efficient operation of this air air handler it is important that servicing of the air handler should be completed at regular intervals by a competent person in accordance with Section 82 of this manual Users are advised to enter into a Service Agreement with RS STOKVIS Ltd

635 SPARE PARTS

It is suggested that a complete set of spare parts essential to the running of the air handler and recommended by the installer are kept by the user on the premises where the air handler is installed This is particularly important where the air handler forms an essential part of any process plant and its being out of operation may cause problems by for example frost damage or condensation by super-cooling

A list of Recommended Spares will be found in Section 9 of this manual

636 GAS LEAKS

If a smell of gas is detected around the area of the appliance Switch off all manual gas valves and contact your service engineer or the local gas undertaking

NEVER

LOOK FOR GAS LEAKS WITH A LIGHTED MATCH OR NAKED

FLAME

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 26

7 FAULT FINDING 30008

The main control panel incorporates two lights to help in fault finding

POWER ON

LOCKOUT

The remote station also has three lights

AIR FAN ON

BURNER ON

LOCKOUT

This section gives the possible causes of failure associated with each check light The electrical schematic diagram in this manual and the wiring diagram shipped in the main air handler panel should be used in conjunction with the notes below Additionally Service Engineers should familiarise themselves with the detailed Start Sequence given in Appendix 2 of this manual

The notes are given for each light before consulting the notes check for bulb failure

71 POWER ON LIGHT IS UNLIT

Check

1 Main control panel isolator is in the 1 position

2 Main Panel 6A MCB has not tripped if a trip has occurred the switch will be at the OFF position Reset and test system as required

3 Also check if the mains electrical supply is isolated If so FIND OUT WHY before taking any action

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 27

7 FAULT FINDING 30005

72 AIR FAN ON LIGHT IS UNLIT

Check

1 SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch is not in Position OFF

2 Timeperiod is not set to off

3 Air handler is not at LOCKOUT

4 Recheck both AIR FAN ON and LOCKOUT bulbs

Two fault indications are possible

1 THE FAN IS NOT OPERATING

If the fan should have started but is not operating

Check 1 Overload for tripped conditions Reset the overload and monitor the next start-up

2 Motor Fuses

3 Relays 1 2 amp3 for failure

laClor CC1 for failure

5 Air Pressure Switch (DPS) is failed in the N 0 Position

Replace the faulty component as described in Section 8

2 THE FAN IS OPERATING

This indicates that the air pressure switch (DPS) has failed to change over

Measure the profile plate differential pressure as described in Section 4113 If the pressure is correct the air pressure switch is faulty Check the switch as in 4114 If the pressure is not correct

Check 1 Correct fan belt tension

2 Correct fan rotation

3 The air handler air inlets and discharge are not blocked

4 Correct fitting on filters

5 The air differential pressure switch impulse lines are not blocked or leaking

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 28

7 FAULT FINDING 30008

73 LOCKOUT LIGHT IS ILLUMINATED

This light indicates a failure in the burner ignition and flame supervision system

RESET the unit and follow the progress of the start sequence The full cycle may take two minutes

1

------t

2 LOCKOUT after 35-40 seconds indicates an ignition failure RESET the system and observe the pilot and ignition spark during the start-up attempt

I-- shy

3 Observe the spark This should be strong and highly visible If not remove and clean the spark plug as Section 82 Check that the spark plug gap is correctly set at 15 mm

-- shy

4 Check the pilot flame If the pilot flame ignites and the unit goes to LOCKOUT the scanning system is at fault Remove and clean the detector as Section 82 Check the flame signal as in Section 431

5 If the pilot does not light the gas supply system is faulty Check the pilot system for restriction and the pilot valve operation

6 If the pilot lights and the unit goes to LOCKOUT after the main gas valves are addressed either the flow control valve is blocked or one of the main gas block valves has failed Fit a manometer on the pressure test point on the outlet flange of the multishyfunctional control and observe if the pressure rises when the main gas valves are addressed No pressure rise will indicate failure of the main gas valves

74 AIR FAN ON LIGHT ILLUMINATED

If the burner does not start check

1 SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch is in WINTER position

2 Overheat Limit Control

These interlocks prevent the burner management system starting

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 29

8 SERVICING 3000S

IMPORTANT Servicing and maintenance should be only carried out by a RS STOKVIS Ltd approved engineer

Only use replacement parts provided by the appliance manufacturer

Check that the air openings for combustion and for ventilation of any plant roon or compartment are clear

81 ISOLATION

811 FUEL GAS ISOLATION

The fuel gas to the ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler should be isolated and locked off at the manual ball valve mounted at the start of the fuel gas line Additionally before entering or servicing the air handler the burner manual isolation valve and pilot line isolation valve should be closed

812 ELECTRICAL ISOLATION

All electric power to the air handler and the remote control station is switched through the local isolator This isolator is fitted with a lock facility to permit it to be locked in the OFF position

Additionally isolate the power at the Wall Isolator

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 30

8 SERVICING 30005

82 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE

The air handler should be routinely serviced at the start of each heating season Isolate the air handler as above before servicing Details of access to individual components are given in Section 84 of this manual

1 Remove and clean spark igniter Check that the gap is correctly set at 25 mm Replace every two years

2 Clean the flame detector lens to ensure freedom from dirt and moisture If the cell shows any sign of cracks it should be replaced Routinely replace the cell every two years or after 10000 hours of operation which ever comes first

3 Inspect the entire air handler paint system for general damage Repair as necessary

4 Every two years brush the burner plates and clear the burner holes carefully with a Size 18mm drill for NP II and 20mm drill for NP I

WARNING THE BURNER HOLES MUST NOT BE ENLARGED

5 Inspect and lubricate all damper linkages to ensure freedom of operation Wipe off all excess lubricants to prevent dirt build up on linkage parts

6 Check the fan belt for cracks and splits Check tension The correct tension gives 16mm deflection per metre of span when the belt is centrally loaded with a force of 27N Adjust as necessary

7 Grease both the fan shaft bearings with Mobiith AW2 grease or similar

NEVER use high temperature grease

NEVER mix two different greases within the bearing always flush existing grease out

Note Removing the cover plate on the end of the air handler gains access to the outboard fan bearing

Light to Slow to 0 120 2 to 6 months Clean Dry

Medium Medium 120 200 1 to 2 months

Moderate to Light to Slow to 0 120 1 to 4 weeks Dry

Dirty Medium Medium 120 200 1 to 7 days

Extreme Dirt Dry Light to Slow to 0 200 Daily Flushing out

Medium Medium Dirt

83 ANNUAL SERVICE CHECKS

After Servicing test fire the air handler following the Commissioning Procedure detailed in Section 4 of this manual to ensure correct operation generally Special attention must be paid to the damper system and related controls and interlocks

Additionally check that the fresh air and recirculation air entry path to the air handler has been kept clear and instruct the User of the need for this as necessary

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 31

8 SERVICING 3000S

84 REMOVAL PROCEDURE FOR REPLACEABLE COMPONENTS

IMPORTANT

Turn off the gas at the appliance service valve and the electricity at the main panel and wall isolator before proceeding

841 BURNER

The burner is located inside the air handler casing and is mounted on two brackets from the support straps To remove the burner isolate the air handler as in 81 and undo the union on the fuel gas line adjacent to the burner isolation valve (MV6) and unscrew the main and pilot gas feed pipes from the burner rail Access to the rear of the burner assembly is made by removing the partition plate below the burner separating the fresh air inlet to the burner from the return air inlet compartment This is held in place by screws which engage in captive nuts on the top side of the partition Remove the Flame Detector and pull off the ignition plug cap Disconnect the burner support brackets and remove the burner The burner will easily pass through the access hatch for further strip down Replace in the reverse order soundness test the gas pipework check the burner operation and duty as described in the commissioning section of this manual

842 FLAME DETECTOR

This is a 240 Volt instrument

The flame detector is mounted on the end of the burner rail inside the air handler casing To remove the detector isolate the panel electric supply and lock off Push the scanner towards the burner and rotate to release the bayonet fixing and lift the detector from its mount Remove the two screws holding the detector cover and disconnect the supply leads noting the polarity of the connections

Replace the flame detector in the reverse order ensuring correct polarity of connections Ensure the access panel is securely closed and the retaining nuts are tightened down Check operation by inserting a test meter in the points provided in the main control panel and reading the flame signals during start up to full rate burner operation (See 431) Operate the appliance over six starts for reliability of operation including tum off of start and main gas valves to check for lockout operation

843 IGNITER SPARK PLUG

This is a high tension spark plug

The igniter spark plug is mounted on the end of the burner rail inside the air handler casing To remove the spark plug isolate the air handler as above Enter the service access door Access to the spark plug is made through the profile plate To remove the spark plug pull off the high tension lead and unscrew the plug with a plug spanner

When replacing the spark plug check the plug gap is set at 15mm Check ignition reliability over six start ups

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 32

8 SERVICING 3000S

844 IGNITER SPARK TRANSFORMER

This is a 240 Volt instrument

The ignition transformer is located in a plastic box mounted on the air handler casing adjacent to the main control panel To remove the transformer isolate the air handler as above and unscrew the four retaining screws holding the box lid in place and remove the lid Disconnect the supply cable at the terminal strip and undo the transformer retaining screws The transformer may then be unscrewed from the High Tension cable leading to the spark plug

Replacement is a simple reversal of this procedure

Check ignition reliability over six start ups

845 COMBUSTION AIR PRESSURE SWITCH (DPS)

Note The switch is set and sealed and should be replaced if not operating correctly

This switch is a 240 Volt instrument

The air switch is mounted directly on the air handler casing and can be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove the switch isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the supply cable Break the downstream pipe compression fitting and unscrew the switch housing from its locating fitting Reverse the procedure to replace after ensuring switch setting is as specified in Section 13 of this manual Operate the air handler to ensure reliability of operation over six start ups

846 AIR HANDLER OVERHEAT LIMIT CONTROL

This is a 240 Volt instrument

The overheat limit control can be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove the control isolate the air handler as above and lock off Remove the switch cover Disconnect the supply cable and unscrew the control housing from its locating fitting Reverse the procedure to replace check the switch is set to 50degC Test the switch operation as described in Section 43 over at least three operations

847 AIR FAN AND MOTOR

The air fan motor is a 415 Volt 3 phase motor

The motor and slide rails are easily accessible inside the air handler casing If it is necessary to remove the motor isolate the air handler as above Slacken the fan-belt tension and remove the drive belts Pull the motor away from the air handler casing to make access to the motor terminal box and disconnect the supply cable The motor may now be removed from the unit Following replacement the air handler must be fully re-commissioned as in Section 4

It is unlikely that the air fan will need replacing or servicing If required a full procedure should be obtained from RS STOKVIS Ltd

Replacement must be followed by full re-commissioning as in Section 4

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 33

8 SERVICING 3000S

848 FUEL GAS MULTI-FUNCTIONAL CONTROL - SMALL UNITS

This is a 240 Volt instrument

The fuel gas multi-functional control can be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove the unit isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the Hirschman electric termination Unbolt the control from its flanges and remove

When replacing care must be taken to ensure the flange 0 rings are undamaged and in the correct location Following replacement the air handler must be fully reshycommissioned as in Section 4 including tests for soundness prior to start-up

849 GOVERNOR AND BLOCK VALVES

The block valves are 240 Volt instruments

All these items may be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove any item isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the electric termination to the two block valves the pilot block valve and the flow control block valve Break the two pipe unions and remove the fuel gas line complete for further strip-down

8410 FUEL GAS FLOW CONTROL VALVE

This is a 24 Volt instrument

The fuel gas How control valve can be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove the valve isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the supply cables to the control valve

On small air handlers fitted with a multi-functional control support the multi-functional control and unbolt its discharge flange Break the union downstream of the burner isolation valve and remove the section of line containing the flow control valve for further strip-down

On large air handlers fitted with separate block valves it will be necessary to remove the fuel gas line complete as Section 8410 above

Following replacement re-commission the air handler

Note If the fresh air damper is not in the full open position the heat input must not exceed the maximum heat input at recirculation condition specified in the technical data section of this manual

8411 PILOT GAS GOVERNOR AND BLOCK VALVE

The block valve is a 240 Volt instrument

Both items may be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove either item isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the electric terrriination to the solenoid valve Undo the upstream pipe union and the compression fitting downstream of the manual block valve (PV3) Remove the pilot gas line complete for further strip down

Replace broken or distorted connections and retest for soundness Ensure the pilot gas pressure is correct and the flame is sensing an output Ensure reliability over six start-ups

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 34

8 SERVICING 3000S

8412 BELT TENSIONING PROCEDURE

The setting tensions are designed to cover a wide range of drives A precise setting force for individual applications can be calculated as detailed

SETTING FORCES

Belt Section

Setting Force To Deflect Belt 16mm per Metre Of Span

Small Pulley Diameter (mm)

Basic Setting Forces Newtons (N) Kilograms (kgf)

125 x Setting Forces Newtons (N) Kilograms (kgf)

SPZ

56 to 71 16 16 20 20 75 to 90 18 18 22 22

95 to 125 20 20 25 25 Over 125 22 22 28 28

SPA

80 to 100 22 22 28 28 106 to 140 30 30 38 38 150 to 200 36 37 45 46 Over 200 40 40 50 51

SPB

112 to 160 40 40 50 51 170 to 224 50 51 62 63 236 to 355 62 63 77 79 Over 355 65 66 81 83

SPC 224 to 250 70 71 87 89 265 to 355 92 94 115 120 Over 375 115 120 144 150

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 35

8 SERVICING 3000S

BELT TENSIONING USING FENNER BELT TENSION INDICATOR

Calculate the deflection in mm on a basis of 16mm per metre of centre distance Centre Distance (m) x 16 =Deflection (mm)

Set lower marker ring at the deflection distance required in mm on the lower scale

Set upper ring against to bottom edge of the top tube

Place the belt tension indicator on top of the belt at the centre of span and apply a force at right angles to the belt defecting it to the point where the lower marker ring is level with the top of the adjacent belt

Read off the force value indicated by the top edge of the upper marker ring

Compare this force to the kgf value shown in the table above

If a Fenner Belt Tension Indicator is not available a spring balance and rule will be suffice

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 36

8 SERVICING 30005

85 MAIN PANEL CONTROLS

All panel controls are readily accessible and may be easily exchanged for replacement components in the event of failure Ensure any replacement item is of the same make and type as the original

851 LANDIS amp GYR LFL 1335 AUTOMATIC SEQUENCE CONTROLLER

The Landis amp Gyr Automatic Sequence Controller is a plug-in unit locating on a pre-wired chassis To remove the controller undo the two retaining screws at the top left and lower right corners and pull the module off the chassis

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

852 CONTROLS CIRCUIT (24 VOLT) TRANSFORMER

The Controls Circuit Transformer is fixed to the panel back plate by tapped screws To remove the transformer undo the wiring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel Undo the two retaining screws and remove the unit complete

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

853 CONTROL RELAYS R1 R2 amp R3

The Control Relays are DIN Rail mounted To remove a relay undo the wIring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel Release the DIN rail retaining clip under the relay with a screwdriver and remove the relay

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

854 6A MCB

The 6A MCB is DIN Rail mounted To remove the MCB undo the wiring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel Release the DIN rail retaining clip under the MCB with a screwdriver and remove the MCB

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

855 THERMAL OVERLOAD

The thermal overload is attached to the underside of the main contactor To remove the overload undo the wiring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel and that the overload setting is as specified in Section 13 of this manual Unscrew the three connections to the contactor and remove the overload

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 37

8 SERVICING 3000S

856 MAIN CONTACTOR

The Main Contactor is DIN Rail mounted To remove the contactor remove the thermal overload as 855 above and then undo the wiring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel Release the DIN rail retaining clip under the contactor with a screwdriver and remove the contactor

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

857 MOTOR FUSE

To replace a motor fuse pull the fuse carrier off the fuse holder base The fuse is attached to the fuse carrier by two screws Unscrew remove and replace

86 REMOTE CONTROL STATION

The remote control station contains some serviceable parts although these items should only be fitted by an approved RS STOKVIS Ltd Engineer

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 38

9 RECOMMENDED SPARES 3000S

For two years operation it is recommended that the following items should be held in stock

ITEM DESCRIPTION PART NO QUANTITY i

1 INDICATOR BULBS W1121 1 PACK

2 SPARK PLUG 023739 1 I

3 UVDETECTOR QRA10C 1 I

4 ROOM SENSOR DRT2453 1

5 DUCT SENSOR DDT1701 1

All replacement parts can be obtained from RS STOKVIS Ltd by quoting the air handler serial number the part number and description

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 39

APPENDIX 1 30005

SOUNDNESS TESTING THE FUEL GAS PIPEWORK

This procedure should only be carried out by personnel familiar with the ECONO-AIR 3000S Series Air handler

The pressure test points and all valves are identified on the Process and Instrumentation Diagram for the air handler included in Section 1 of this n1anual

Isolate the air handler electric supply at the main control panel and lock off Close the manual isolation valves MV1 MV6 and PV3 Ensure the supply pressure is available on the upstream side of MV1

A11 TESTING THE UPSTREAM PIPEWORKAND BURNER CONTROLS 1 Connect a 60 mbar manometer to the pressure test nipple A Monitor the

pressure for two minutes Any rise in pressure indicates that valve MV1 is leaking and must be replaced Remove pressure test points Band F

2 Open MV1 to pressurise the pipework on both the main gas and pilot line to the first block valve

3 Close MV1 Allow one minute for the temperature to stabilise and then test the system for 2 minutes and watch for a drop in the pipework pressure If the pressure falls open valve MV1 and test the pipework connections and valves from MV1 to MV3 and MV1 to PV2 for leaks with a proprietary leak detector fluid or spray Turn off MV1 seal any leaks and re-test

4 If no extemalleaks are found either the pilot block valve PV1 or either the first main gas block valve MV3 is letting by

5 To test this seal pressure test point A and fit a manometer to pressure test point B Leave for two minutes with MV1 open A rise in pressure on the manometer confirms a leak on the block valve MV3 Turn off MV1 exchange the valve and re-test from point 2 above

6 Repeat this procedure for the pilot block valve Seal test point B and fit a manometer to pressure test point F Leave for two minutes with MV1 open A rise in pressure on the manometer confirms a leak on the pilot block valve PV2 Turn off MV1 exchange the valve and re-test from point 1 above Seal test point F

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 40

APPENDIX 1 30005

A12 TESTING THE DOWNSTREAM BURNER VALVE 1 Close MV1 and connect pressure test points A and 8 with flexible 6 mm bore

tubing teed into the manometer Remove pressure test point C Open MV1 to pressurise the downstream block valve MV4

2 Close MV1 and leave for one minute for the temperature to stabilise Monitor the pressure for 2 minutes If the pressure falls open valve MV1 and leak test the line between the two block valves MV3 and MV4 with a proprietary leak detector Turn off MV1 seal any leaks and re-test Note Smaller air handlers in the 3000S Series are fitted with multi-functional valves combining the pressure regulator and two block valves in one component The above procedure still applies but if a leak is found on either block valve the whole control should be replaced If no external leaks are found the downstream block valve is letting by

3 To confirm this close MV1 remove the manometer and refit to pressure test point C Connect pressure test points A and 8 with flexible 6mm bore tubing Open MV1 and allow one minute for the temperature to stabilise Monitor the pressure for a further 2 minutes with MV1 still open A rise in pressure confirms that the second block valve MV4 is letting by Turn off MV1 Replace the valve and re-test from 2 above

A13 TESTING THE DOWNSTREAM BURNER PIPEWORK 1 Close MV1 and connect pressure test points A and D with flexible 6 mm bore

tubing teed into the manometer Open MV1 to pressurise the downstream pilot pipework

2 Close MV1 and leave for one minute for the temperature to stabilise Monitor the pressure for 2 minutes If the pressure falls open valve MV1 and leak test the line between the downstream block valve MV4 and the manual block MV6 with a proprietary leak detector fluid or spray If no external leaks are found the manual block valve MV6 is letting by Turn off MV1 seal any leakages and reshytest from 2 above

A14 TESTING THE DOWNSTREAM PILOT PIPEWORK 1 Close MV1 and connect pressure test points A and F with flexible 6mm bore

tubing teed into the manometer Open MV1 to pressurise the downstream pilot pipework

2 Close MV1 and leave for one rninute for the temperature to stabilise Monitor the pressure for 2 minutes If the pressure falls open valve MV1 and leak test the line between the downstream block valve PV2 and the manual block PV3 with a proprietary leak detector fluid or spray If no external leaks are found the manual block valve PV3 is letting by Turn off MV1 seal any leakages and reshytest from 2 above

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 41

APPENDIX 1 30005

A15 TESTING THE BURNER CONNECTIONS 1 Remove the burner access panel as described in Section 84 of this manual

Remove the burner spark igniter Slacken the two retaining bolts holding the burner to the burner support straps and unbolt the burner supply endplate from the burner casting and mixing plates

2 Connect pressure test points A and 0 with flexible 6mm bore tubing teed into the manometer Open MV1 and MV6 to pressurise the burner pipework Leak test the main gas burner pipework and connections with proprietary leak detector fluid Turn off MV6 Seal any leakages and re-test

3 Connect pressure test points A and F with flexible 6 mm bore tubing teed into the manometer Open MV1 and PV3 to pressurise the pilot burner pipework Leak test the pilot gas burner pipework and connections with proprietary leak detector fluid Turn off PV3 Seal any leakages and re-test

4 Turn off MV1

5 Replace the spark igniter and profile division plate

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 42

APPENDIX 2 30005

START SEQUENCE

The burner start sequence is controlled by the Landis and Gyr burner management unit The timings are pre-set and comply with 885885 This unit must NOT be tampered with

A brief description of the start-up sequence isshy

The unit checks

1 The NO FLAME signal on the UV flame scanner

Note If the scanner detects a flame at any time other than in the correct operating sequence the flame programmer initiates a lockout

2 The operation of the combustion air proving switch in the NO AIR position

3 The air handler discharge high temperature switch

If the checks are completed the unit starts the combustion air fan and then checks the combustion airflow

Once the airflow is proven the unit checks that the damper control circuit is functioning correctly After the damper microswitch is made to prove the fresh air damper is fully open the sequence allows 30 seconds for the combustion air to purge any combustible gas from the air handler

After completion of the purge the spark ignition system is energised the pilot valve opened and the spark terminated If the pilot flame is not proven by the UV scanner the system will initiate a LOCKOUT

If the flame is proven the main gas valves are opened the pilot extinguished and the main burner flame proven

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 43

i

APPENDIX 2 30008

The following flow chart shows the complete start sequence including the lighting of the various indicating lamps

MANUAL STATUS LIGHT POWER ON

POWER ON

I INITIATE START BY TIME

SETTING ON CONTROLLER

I CHECK NO FLAME

VISIBLE

PROVEj FAIL LOCKOUT

I CHECK RELAY R4 NC

POSITION

PROVE FAIL NO START

I CHECK AIR PRESSURE SWITCH NC POSITION

PROVE FAIL NO START

I CHECK RELAY R1 NC

POSITION

PROVE j

FAIL NO START

I START COMBUSTION

AIR BLOWER

I CHECK AIR PRESSURE SWITCH NO POSITION

PROVE I

FAIL NO START

I STATUS LIGHT FAN ON

I ENERGISE RELAY R1

I

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 44

I

I

APPENDIX 2 30008

I CHECK OVERHEAT LIMIT

CONTROL R5

PROVE I

FAIL I I

CHECK 541412 LOOP CLOSED ON

LANDIS ampGYR CIRCUIT

PROVE I

FAIL I I

COMBUSTION AIR PURGE PERIOD

30 SECONDS

I

NO START

NO START

CANCEL NO FLAME CHECK CIRCUIT

I

ENERGISE SPARK

I TIMED PERIOD 25 SECONDS

I ENERGISE PILOT GAS

VALVE

I TIMED PERIOD 25 SECONDS

I TERMINATE SPARK

I INTERROGATE UV FLAME SCANNER

PROVE I

FAIL I I

TIMED PERIOD 10 SECONDS

I

LOCKOUT

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 45

I

I

APPENDIX 2 3000S

I ENERGISE MAIN GAS

VALVES

I

STATUS LIGHT BURNER ON

I TIMED PERIOD

5 SECONDS

I DE-ENERGISE PILOT

GAS VALVES

CONTINUOUS FROM PILOT

I INTERROGATE UV FLAME SCANNER

PROVE I

FAIL I I

LOCKOUT I

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 46

APPENDIX 3 30005

Please see copy of Standard Service Sheet

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 47

APPENDIX 4 30005

A41 TIME OUT SCREEN

This is the standard screen displayed when the touch screen is not in use The back light is off to save energy_ To access the STATUS screen touch the ENTER key and the following screen is displayed

[]][I][]rn[IJOO[][IJOO[] EJ~E11 I[]I ~ middot I

NOTE

The Touch Screen operates using the heat produced by the touch of a finger and therefore only LIGHT pressure is required

Excessive pressure can damage the Touch Screen

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 48

APPENDIX 4 30008

A42 STATUS SCREEN

On the typical STATUS screen the illustrated information detailed is as follows

19 36 Fan Brn

RS OS

100 Fst_~_ Lck _ _ Xst Gas~o ~ I

RS Indicates the current room temperature

OS ~( t~~ the current duct discharge temperature

Fan Indicates the current status of the fan by showing the arrow and the fan blades for ON and OFF is shown by the arrow and fan blades being removed

Brn Indicates the current status of the burner with the black flames indicating the burner to be ON and vice versa

Lck LOCKOUT - This indicates a flame failure when highlighted during normal or start-up operation

Xst EXCESS TEMPERATURE SWITCH - This indicates the unit has reached the trip limit on the over heat stat when highlighted during operation

Indicates the current position of the gas modulating valve during normal Gas

operation (0-100)

Indicates whether the Frost stat is energised and the unit is running on frost Fst

override

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 49

APPENDIX 4 30008

A43 CHANGING SETTINGS

It is possible to change the settings for the time of operation and the required temperature set points The following details the steps required

A44 ENTERING THE SECURITY CODE

From the STATUS screen touch the return key and the screen below will be displayed

Type the HIGH LEVEL security code (4321) If you make a mistake use the BACK SPACE key to delete any incorrect number(s) Touch the ENTER key when the code is correct

If the security code is incorrect the screen above will be displayed then try again If after several attempts you can not gain access please contact RS STOKVIS Ltd for further information

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 50

APPENDIX 4 30008

When the code is entered correctly the MAIN MENU is displayed as detailed below

~ STATUS SET VALUES~ ~ TIVIE CLOCK [) [) [) [) [)

The MAIN MENU screen shows the three menu items available The title for each menu item can be changed to suit the end user Please notify RS STOKVIS Ltd prior to commissioning should these parameters require special amendments

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 51

APPENDIX 4 30008

A45 CHANGING OR SETTING A TIME SCHEDULE

From the main menu screen select the TIME CLOCK page by running finger across screen symbol and touch the ENTER key the screen below will be displayed

On the following screen highlight the TS1 symbol and touch the ENTER key

The current time schedule will now be displayed as shown below The display will automatically default to the current day (1 =Monday 2 =Tuesday etc) In this case day 5 (Friday) the four schedule switching times refer to that day

IAC6BBB1BHIS1

mm0CIl bull mID 17BB 17BB 17HB

Iillleschedule

To modify a time select it by highlighting and touch the ENTER key and the following screen is displayed

To amend the appropriate onoff time as shown on the screen below The arrows to the right of the time are for altering the hours and the arrows on the left for the minutes

Once you have set the time use the ESCape key to exit back to the time schedule screen and choose another day by touching the required number Another time may now be modified as before

IAC6BBB1BHIS1

H8BH

I i eschedule

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 52

APPENDIX 4 30008

Use the ESCape key to exit back to the MAIN MENU screen

~ STATUS ~ SET VALUES

TIME CLOCK []~ [] [] [] []

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 53

APPENDIX 4 30005

A46 CHANGING SET VALUES

From the main menu screen select the SET VALUES page by highlight in the normal way and touch the ENTER key

The following screen is displayed

36 19 18III III IIIHsv Rsv Llv

To change the RSV highlight it in the normal way and touch the ENTER key and the screen below will now be shown

IAC6RRR1RR40 T I

0 19 (Y)l RSV

ROOM SET VALUE

The above screen shows the parameters that can be changed The values to the far left are the limitations of set point (OC) Change the set point by using the UP and DOWN ARROWS on the left of the screen or touch the set value itself followed by the ENTER key to select the set value and set it directly using the numeric keyboard All values can be changed in this way

Use the ESCape key twice to exit back to the MAIN MENU screen

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 54

APPENDIX 4 30005

A47 COMMISSIONING AND SERVICING BURNER CHECKS

Select the SET VALUES screen from the MAIN MENU screen and adjust the high lirrlit set point to 55degC to drive the burner to high fire

IAC6HHH1HH60 ~T I

0 19 (Y)

HSV

HIGH SET VALUE ~

Ensure the set value is returned to 36degC once the appropriate checks and adjustments as described in Section 43 of this manual have been completed Return to the SET VALUES screen and select the low limit value to adjust the low fire setting

Reduce the low limit value to OdegC to drive the gas valve to low fire and complete the appropriate checks and adjustments as described in Section 43 of this manual and ensure the set value is returned to the original value

A48 GMT ltgt BST CHANGEOVER DAYLIGHT SAVINGS

To change your unit to British Summer TimelWinter Time the following system screen must be highlighted by touching the Iamp1 button twice

By touching the clock symbol in the top left hand corner followed by the ENTER key the screen below will be displayed

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 55

APPENDIX 4 30008

188311 851193

544

By touching and highlighting in this case 18 followed by the ENTER key A small box allowing the entry of two digits will appear Enter the desired time required using the numbered keys followed by ENTER key Your unit is now set to operate on BSTBWT

Touch the ESC key three times to return back to the Status screen

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 56

STOKVIS ENERGY SYSTEMS 96R WALTON ROAD EAST MOLESEY SURREY KT8 0DL TEL 020 8783 3050 08707 707 747 FAX 020 8783 3051 08707 707 767 E-MAIL infostokvisboilerscom WEBSITE wwwstokvisboilerscom

JULY 1999

Page 10: ECONOAIR 3000S SERIES AIR HANDLING UNIT DIRECT FIREDstokvisboilers.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/EconoAir... · 2019-05-10 · ECONOAIR 3000S SERIES AIR HANDLING UNIT DIRECT FIRED

NOTES1shy

I PROPOSED LOCATION TO BE CHECKED tOR LEVEL AND LOAD BEARING STRENGTH BY OTHERS

2 UNIT TO BE SUPPLIED IN SEPERATE SECTIONS FOR LIFTING INTO PLANTROOM AND ON TO BASE BY OTHERS

3 ALL SECTIONS TO HAVE TIJO BEADS OF SEALANT BETJEEN OPPOSING FLANGES AS PER SUPPLIED INSTALL ATlON INSTRUCTIONS

ltI ENSURE ALL BUILDERS JORK IS CARRIED OUT AND MADE GOOD AFTER INSTALLATION BY OTHERS

5 ALL EXTERNAL JIRING SHALL BE CARRIED OUT BY COMPETENT PERSON TO CURRENT lEE REGULATIONS

DISCHARGE OPENING lUOlElIE VIDE X lIE HIG CV 3011 MEZ FLANGE

Serial No

sroKVIS Site Address Client END USERS ADDRESS END USER

ACCESS OPENING

~L---gt lt0-shy

~ ~

GAS CONNECTIONS

CONTROL PANEL 60011 VIDE X 600111 HIGH

APPROX VEIGHTSshy

HEATER CASING - 1I0U( KG

IJCL OOCUUef IDrawn lACS

Checked

I RS STOKVIS amp SONS Ltd POOL ROAD WEST MOLESEY SURREY KT8 2HN Tel 0181 941 1212 fax 0181 941 4136 CONTROL IApproved

o I~ I CommentApproval

Rev IDate IDescription

Computer No

99 Purchase Order No

Drawing No

3-MR-005

415VOlT5OHz 4 WIRE sumy

lIfEI_-shy~a

30131

2_F11

3 TOO---shy

B (

Serial No

~s

~~~~

~ NIt 9lOIElIliOTt)R RA11NG~W

STOKVIS

0 reg

-0

0 0 lt0

u ~

R5-1 -

ADDRESS

shy

regshy

~tl

GAS v IoIOtQR AIIIfONGTll LEGEND

IHlmN PNEI _

-e- PNEl_

Sl1pound_

-11shy IJIfClIOII1IO~-

DUCT STAT NPE COt 17tll

_STAT NPE om 3lt4Il)

~~~pound~ niR~~ (i)l

~ ()1

_cbullbullL~ nmiddoti Apoundm

USER

~ ~

SCHEMATIC FOR 3000S SERIES AIR

IAC600 BASED

RS STOKVIS amp SONS Ltd POOL ROAD WEST MOLESEY SURREY KT8 2HN Tel 0181 941 1212 Fax 0181 941 4136

_[---------f P(N(J ON

ICHI11ONTfWiSFORlER

PllOT V IIEIi CAS VAllIE 1

II CAS VAllIE 2

~_ON

lOCKOUT

s

o Rev I Dote I Description

Computer No 99

Purchase Order No

Drawing No

3-MR-100 Rev

o

30005 2 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

21 INTRODUCTION

The STOKVIS ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler is a direct fired unit designed to give clean healthy environmental conditions and constant even temperature within the heated space

The main air handler assembly houses the circulating air fan the gas burner the fuel gas line and all necessary safety controls The burner management system and space temperature controller is located in the main control panel mounted on or adjacent to the side of the air handler A second control station supplied loose for mounting remote from the air handler within the heated space or other convenient location houses indicating lights the control touch screen and auxiliary operational switches

A sight glass is fitted on the air handler casing to view the burner during operation

For multi unit networked applications the touch screen is excluded

22 GAS BURNER ASSEMBLY

The ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler incorporates the Maxon NP-II burner This burner is specially designed for heating fresh air and is mounted such that a proportion of the incoming air is forced into contact with the flame to ensure rapid mixing and combustion within the code requirements The burner assembly is built up from modular components to give the required heat duty

Each burner assembly is fitted with an integral pilot spark igniter and UV detector The flame detector is used for scanning both the pilot and main flame Note that the pilot burner operates in interrupted mode

The burner module fitted is identified in the Technical Data Section of this manual and on the Valve and Instrun1ent list

23 CONTROL SYSTEM

The controls fitted on the air handler are detailed on the Process amp Instrumentation Diagram in the Technical Data Section of this manual

231 SAFETY CONTROLS

The safety interlocks on the ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler are

1 Combustion air proving switch (PS) 2 Ultra-violet burner flame detector (UV) 3 Overheat limit control (OLe)

Failure of either the combustion air switch or fiame scanning circuit will cause the air handler to go to LOCKOUT and the burner management system will require a RESET before a re-light can be attempted

The air handler discharge overheat limit control is a manual reset switch After a failure the switch will have to be RESET before a re-light can be attempted

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 8

2 GENERAL DESCRIPTION 3000S

232 TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEM

The ECONO-AIR 30008 Series air handler is fitted with a full three-term modulating temperature control system as standard The space temperature is sensed by a heated space detector (TR) which inputs to the panel mounted temperature controller (TC) This achieves control by modulation of the fuel gas flow control valve (MV5) The temperature controller additionally limits the air handler discharge air temperature measured by the discharge temperature detector (TO) to pre-set high and low limits

233 MAIN CONTROL PANEL

The control panel houses the combustioncirculation air fan starter the burner management system and the heated space temperature controller On larger units a separate starter panel may be supplied The panel door is fitted with an interlocked isolator POWER ON and LOCKOUT lights and the burner management RESET button The panel is mounted on or adjacent to the air handler

234 FUEL GAS SYSTEM

The PILOT LINE comprises 1 Pilot governor (PV1 ) 2 One British Gas certificated solenoid valve (PV2) 3 One pilot gas isolation valve (PV3) 4 Pipework and fittings

Note Two pressure test points are fitted on the pilot line on the inlet and discharge of the pilot solenoid valve

The MAIN GAS LINE comprises

1 Gas isolation valve (MV1 ) 2 Pressure governor (MV2) 3 Double block safety shut-oft system (MV34) 4 Gas flow control valve (MV5) 5 Burner isolation valve (MV6) 6 Pipework and fittings

Note Four pressure test points are fitted on the n1ain gas line on the supply the inlet and discharge of the second block valve and downstream of the flow control valve

Note On small air handlers items 2 and 3 are combined in one multi-functional control

All items above are detailed on the Process amp Instrumentation Diagram in Section 1 of this manual

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 9

2 GENERAL DESCRIPTION 3000S

235 REMOTE CONTROL STATION

The ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler is also supplied with a remote control station which houses the air handler operating controls indicating status and the workspace temperature detector if the control station is located in the heated space

236 HEATED SPACE TEMPERATURE SENSOR The heated space temperature sensor is to be located remotely within the space to be heated

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 10

3 INSTALLATION 30005

31 STATUTORY REQUIREMENTS

I n accordance with the Gas Safety (I nstallation and Use) Regulations 1998 installation of this ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler should only be undertaken by competent personnel who are fully aware of their responsibilities under the Health and Safety at Work Act 1974

The installation of this air handler must comply with

BS6230-1991 Installation of gas-fired forced convection air air handlers for commercial and industrial Space Heating of rated input exceeding 60kW

The lEE Regulations for Electrical Installations

Gas Safety (Installation and Use) Regulations 1998

Health and Safety at Work Act 1974

Building Regulations 1986

Building Standards (Scotland Only)

The I nstitution of Gas Engineers Codes of Practice

IGEUP1 Soundness Testing Procedures for Industrial and Commercial Gas Installations

IGEUP2 Gas Installation Pipework Boosters and Compressors on Industrial and Commercial Premises

IGEUP4 Commissioning Of Gas Fired Plant On Industrial and Commercial Premises

32 RECEPTION AND STORAGE OF GOODS

32laquo1 RECEPTION

On receipt of the shipment check that the shipment is complete against the Delivery Advice Note Check for mechanical damage sustained during transit before off-loading the goods Inform the carrier of any such damage

322 OFFLOADING

Horizontal air handlers are fitted with four lifting eyes to permit an overhead lift Alternatively horizontal air handlers may be handled by a fork lift truck on the steel angle support frame

323 STORAGE

Air handlers must be stored in a dry environment The remote control station must be removed from the shipment and stored indoors in a dry environment Outdoor units of split case design (Size 54 and above) must have open ends protected from the environment until installation is complete Any filter elements should be stored in a dry environment

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 11

3 INSTALLATION 3000S

33 LIMITATIONS OF USE

The ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler must not be installed in the following locations

I n hazardous areas

In areas where flammable vapours can be present in excess of their threshold limit values as defined in 8S5925

I n accordance with 8S6230 Clause 513 where there are any flued appliances in the heated area and where air is supplied mechanically and there is mechanical extraction the design extract rate must be 5 to 10 less than the design inlet rate so that the room will not be at a lower pressure than the outside air If the air handler is the only source of mechanically supplied air the extract rate must not exceed 95 of the nominal air flow specified in Section 11 of this manual

Note If it proposed to install the ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler to supply heated air to a hazardous area or in areas where flammable vapours are present the installation must first be approved by a RS STOKVIS Ltd Engineer

34 LOCATION OF AIR HANDLERS

The air handler should normally be installed in the location recommended by the RS STOKVIS Ltd specifying engineer

Check the proposed location for level and load bearing strength Ensure that there is adequate clearance as detailed on the air handler GA in Section 1 this manual around the unit for access for maintenance purposes If the air handler is to be installed above floor level a suitably designed service platform should be provided Such a platform must have 100mm minimum raised edges around the perimeter If this is not possible all air handler access panels must be fitted with hinged restraints This is a factory standard option which should be specified at the time of ordering - check the restraints are fitted before proceeding with installation

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 12

3 INSTALLATION 3000S

35 FRESH AIR INLET AND VENTILATION

351 FRESH AIR INLET

The air handler must be installed where it has a direct and unlimited supply of fresh air from outside the building Ensure that the air intake is not located near exhausts from the building or from any process exhausts such as paint booth exhausts Whenever possible protect the fresh air inlet from the prevailing wind and local wind effects from corners

The fresh air inlet should be sized for an air velocity of 3ms The inlet duct area is detailed on the General Arrangement drawing located in Section 1 of this manual

Where the fresh air inlet is made in a load bearing wall eg a brick wall guidance should be obtained from Structural Engineers on the provision of a lintel in the wall over the fresh air opening

A weather hood must be fitted when the air handler air inlet is at or within 1 m of the outside wall Additionally the weather hood should have negligible resistance to the airflow maximum 01 mbar at the design air flow rate

Do not install the ECONO-AI R 3000S Series air handler where long lengths of duct or bends of an angle greater than 30deg are necessary to lead to the air handler from the fresh air opening If ducting is unavoidable ensure that the resulting pressure drop is negligible Le less than 01 mbar for ductless air handlers and has been accounted for in the original design for ducted air handlers as detailed in the specification section of this manual Section 11

Note If the air intake is located in an area of unrestricted access warning notices preventing the blockage of the air intake by temporary stacking should be displayed adjacent to the intake

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 13

3 INSTALLATION 3000S

352 VENTI LA TION

Where the air air handler is in its own plant room or compartment this shall be ventilated with openings communicating directly with the outside air to ventilate the room

The openings shall be fitted with grilles of negligible resistance and shall be sited so that they cannot easily be blocked or flooded They shall have a total minimum free area as follows

Low Level (inlet) 320cm2 + 27cm2 per kilowatt in excess of 60kW total rated input

High Level (outlet) 160cm2 + 134cm2 per kilowatt in excess of 60kW total rated input

The free area of the grilles shall be not less than the size of the recommended minimum ventilation opening Grilles shall be designed to minimise high velocity air streams in the plant room For exposed ie free standing plant rooms ventilation openings shall be provided on at least two sides and preferably on all four sides

Where mechanical ventilation is used it shall be by mechanical inlet and either natural or mechanical extraction Systems of ventilation employing mechanical extraction and natural air inlet shall not be used

The minimum flow rates of air supplied shall be not less than 06 m3s per megawatt of rated heat input

36 AIR DISCHARGE

The air handler should be located with the air discharge into the heated space at a minimum height of 3 metres The air should not discharge directly onto any obstructions and direct discharge on to working personnel should be avoided

If the air discharge is located in an area of unrestricted access warning notices preventing the blockage of the air discharge by temporary stacking should be displayed adjacent to the discharge

Generally it is not necessary to fit distribution ducting to the discharge of the air handler If ducting is required or specified ensure that the resulting pressure drop has been accounted for in the original design specification as detailed in Section 1 of this manual

37 ASSEMBLY AND POSITIONING OF AIR HANDLER

Unless specified at the time of order air handlers will be shipped in sections Discharge heads grilles attenuators duct connecting sections filters rain-hoods etc will be supplied loose for site fitting to the air handler

Horizontal air handlers must be supported on their steel angle support base When the air handler is located check for level and adjust as necessary

Alternatively horizontal air handlers can be supplied with extensions of the support frame for suspending from overhead supports This must be specified at the time of order Do not suspend the air handler from the lifting eyes

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 14

3 INSTALLATION 3000S

38 REMOTE STATION

The ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler is supplied with a remote control station This should be mounted in a position convenient to the end user If possible it should not be mounted on an external wall or where the space temperature detector is affected by cold draughts or a local source of heat

39 VISUAL CHECK

After completion of installation re-check the air handler for signs of damage Report any instance to RS STOKVIS Ltd

310 CONNECTION OF SERVICES

The air handler requires the connection of fuel gas and electricity

3101 FUEL GAS SUPPLY

The ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler has been designed for use on Natural Gas An alternative version is available for LPG The gas type for the air handler supplied is clearly marked on the air handler data badge and on the Specification sheet in Section 1 of this manual Check the gas type is correct and that the supply pressure is within the range marked on the specification

The local gas Authority should be consulted about the adequacy of the gas service and meter supplies for existing and proposed extensions to the installation and for any requirements for boosting the gas supply_

Connect the fuel gas supply to the inlet manual valve on the air handler gas train The connection size is detailed in Section 1 of this manual A further isolation valve and union should be fitted immediately adjacent to the appliance which when the valve is closed allows the complete burner and control assembly to be disconnected for maintenance or repair

New gas pipework should be installed to British Gas Publication IGEUP2 and be purged and pressure tested in accordance with British Gas Publications IGEUP1

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 15

3 INSTALLATION 3000S

3102 ELECTRICITY SUPPLY

All external wiring shall be carried out and checked by a competent person All components shall be checked for suitability for voltage range and frequency

Means for electric isolation having a contact separation of at least 3mm in all poles must be provided adjacent to the air handler The electrical supply to the appliance shall incorporate suitable means of excess current protection

The ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler requires a 3 phase 4 wire supply which should be connected to the main control panel Check the air handler data badge for the correct electrical supply The maximum supply requirement is Specified in Section 1 of this manual Note that the 240 Volt air handler control circuit is taken from the lUI phase to Neutral Connection should be made as shown on the wiring diagram shipped inside this panel

The air handler must be earthed in accordance with BS5986 and CP1013

Check all terminal strip terminations for wires which have become loose during shipment

311 CONNECTION TO THE MAIN PANEL AND REMOTE STATION

Interconnecting wiring to the main panel and remote station should be made with a minimum specification of 075 mm2 300 Volt cable Check that no wires on the terminal strip have become loose during shipment The remote panel should be mounted at a height of approx 18m If possible it should not be mounted on an external wall or where the sensor will be affected by cold draughts or a local source of heat

Both panel and remote station must be earthed in accordance with BS5986 and CP1013

312 HEATED SPACE TEMPERATURE SENSOR

The space temperature sensor located on the remote panel should be connected with screened cable or twin low voltage signal cable run in its own separate conduit It should be mounted on the remote panel or adjacent to the outlet at a height of approx 18m If possible it should not be mounted on an external wall or where the sensor will be affected by cold draughts or a local source of heat

313 DUCT SENSOR

The duct sensor should be connected with screened cable or twin low voltage signal cable run in its own separate conduit It should be mounted in the air handler discharge as close as possible to the discharge into the heated space

314 OVERHEAT LIMIT CONTROL SENSOR

The overheat limit control sensor should be connected with twin core cable It should be mounted in the air handler discharge within 1 metre of the air handler outlet connection

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 16

3 INSTALLATION 3000S

315 TOUCH SCREEN WIRING

The touch screen located on the front of the remote station requires two separate twisted pairs of O5mrh2 screened cable run in a separate conduit If the distance between the main and remote stations is greater that 1 km please contact RS STOKVIS Ltd for advice

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 17

3 INSTALLATION 3000S

316 ALIGNMENT

3161 INSTALLATION OF DRIVE BELTS

On 80 amp 89 30008 range of air handlers it will be necessary to align the pulleys and fit the drive belts before carrying out commissioning of the unit

3162 PU LLEYS

Before assembling the drive check the pulley grooves are free from scores or sharp edges and all dimensions conform to the relevant standard

The Taper Lock bush is your starting point when it comes to assembly and installation Drive installation is a straightforward job with Taper Lock - but the stages set out on the installation leaflet provided with every Taper Lock bush should be followed closely

3163 ALIGNMENT

Good alignment of pulleys prior to belt installation is important to avoid belt flank wear The diagram below shows correct installation of pulleys

INTERNAl BEARING

MOTOR PUlLEY rAN PULLEY

MOTORMOTOR ADJUSTMENT MOUNTING BOlTSBOLTS

3164 BELTS

When the pulleys have been correctly positioned on the shafts the belts can be installed to complete the drive

The drive centre distance should be reduced prior to the installation of the belts so that they may be fitted without the use of force Under no circumstances must belts be prised into the grooves Using sharp tools to stretch the belts over the pulley rim can easily damage belts and pulley grooves

The installation allowance given in the table below is the minimum recommended reduction in centre distance for various belt section and lengths to allow for correct fitting

The take-up allowance given in the same table should be added on to the calculated centre distance to allow for belt stretch

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 18

3 INSTALLATION 3000S

3165 INSTALLATION AND TAKE UP ALLOWANCE

Belt Pitch Installation Allowance Take-Up Length (mm) SPZ SPA SPB SPC (mm)

410 to 530 5

540 to 840 10

850 to 1160 15

1170 to 1500 20

1510 to 1830 20 25

1840 to 2170 30

2180 to 2830 25 40

2840 to 3500 30 50

3520 to 4160 50 60

4170 to 5140 70

5220 to 6150 85

6180 to 7500 105

600 to 8500 125

8880 to 10170 145

10600 to 12500 175

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 19

4 COMMISSIONING 30005

This appliance must be commissioned by a RS STOKVIS Ltd approved engineer

41 PRESTART CHECKS

1 Switch the SUMMERIOFFMlINTER switch on the remote station to OFF

2 Check the correct electric supply is available to the air handler and the appliance isolator installed

3 Check the correct fuel gas supply is available to the air handler and local isolation valve and union installed Check that new gas pipe work has been correctly purged and pressure tested and that the isolation valve is in the OFF position

4 Check the air handler gas control system and burner connections for pressure soundness as detailed in Appendix 1 of this manual

5 Complete the first section of the Service Check Sheet supplied at the back of this manual (Appendix 3)

6 Close the air handler access door

7 Close and lock the main air handler control panel

8 Switch the main panel isolator to position 1 Check the POWER ON light illuminates

9 Check and set the timed ONOFF periods in the lAC Controller located on the remote panel Ensure that the unit is set to be on during testing Refer to Appendix 4 for the lAC setting procedure

10 Close and lock the remote panel

11 Switch the SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch on the remote station to SUMMER to start the air fan Return the switch to the OFF position and check for correct rotation of the fan as the fan slows and stops

The fan rotation can be observed through the fan section access door or through the air handler access door Only do this during the fan run-down period Ensure the door is securely fastened after completion

Rotation arrows are fitted on the end of the air handler and inside the air handler above the interior bearing support If the rotation is incorrect two phases should be interchanged as dictated by the Engineer responsible for the site electrical system

12 Check the air pressure drop across the burner whilst the fan is operating with a water column pressure gauge connected to the two pressure test points on the air pressure switch (DPS) This pressure should be between 14 and 16 rnbar

If the air differential pressure measured above is not within the operating range check inlet and outlet ductwork as appropriate and any filters fitted If the pressure differential is still not within limits isolate the air handler and report to RS STOKVIS Ltd before proceeding

13 Check the operation and setting of the Low Air Pressure Switch by injecting a controlled signal into the switch Check the break point on the switch is 1 mbar (falling)

Note The switch is set and sealed before fitting The 1 mbar switch point may not coincide with the 1 mbar scale reading on the switch

If on checking the switch is not operating correctly do not tamper with it return it to RS STOKVIS Ltd for replacement

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 20

4 COMMISSIONING 3000S

42 DRY RUN

With all the manual gas isolation valves still in the OFF position switch the SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch to WINTER

43 START UP

1 Attach a manometer to pressure test point F and the low pressure test point on the air pressure switch (DPS)

2 Open the main gas supply valve (MV1) and the pilot burner isolation valve (PV3) Leave the main burner isolation valve (MV6) closed Reset the air handler by pressing the push-button marked RESET on either the main panel or remote station The air handler pilot will light automatically (after the automatic damper start check and combustion air pre-purge) and then LOCKOUT after the main gas shut-off valves are addressed

During the short period that the pilot is in operation check the pilot gas pressure on the manometer It should be 10 mbar and the pilot flame approximately 100 - 150mm in length covering the first three or four holes of the mixing plate and have a steady blue colour when viewed through the sight glass on the access side of the air handler Adjust as necessary - refer to Section 51 this manual Check the flame signal - refer to Section 431

3 Open the main burner isolation valve (MV6) RESET the air handler which should now light to main burner stage When alight close the main burner isolation valve to shut down the gas flow to the burner Check that the unit goes to LOCKOUT

4 Reset the air handler and drive the burner to low fire by adjusting the temperature controller set point as described in Appendix 4 of this manual Check the flame is continuous across the width of the burner and has a flame length of approx 50 - 65mm from the burner rail when viewed through the sight glass on the access side of the air handler Check the burner pressure across pressure test point D and the downstream (low) pressure test point on the air pressure switch ie on the rear of the pressure switch This pressure is specifled in Section 1 of this manual Adjust as necessary-refer to Section 53 of this manual Check the flame signal - refer to Section 431

Where possible check the actual gas flow rate by meter reading with all other appliances turned off

5 Drive the burner to high fire by adjusting the temperature controller set point and high limit to 55degC as described in Appendix 4 of this manual Check the flame is continuous across the burner rail and has a flame length of approximately 250 - 350mm from the burner rail Check the burner pressure across pressure test point D and the downstream (low) pressure test point on the air pressure switch This pressure is specified in Section 1 of this manual Adjust as necessary - refer to Section 52 of this manual Check the maximum air handler discharge temperature Check the flame signal shyrefer to Section 431

Where possible check the actual gas flow rate by meter reading with all other appliances turned off

6 Check the operation of the overheat limit control by adjusting the temperature controller set point and high limit to 65degC as described in Appendix 4 of this manual Monitor the discharge temperature on the temperature controller Check that the overheat control operates as the set temperature is passed Check that the control must be manually reset by pressing the green reset button on the front of the switch Return the temperature controller to its original settings

In the event that the ambient temperature is too low for this simple procedure to work the instrument will have to be bench tested using a Temperature 8ath Remove and replace the control as Section 84 of this manual for bench-testing

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 21

4 COMMISSIONING 3000S

43 1 FLAME SIGNAL CHECK

1 The ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler is fitted with a Klippon SAKT1 Test Terminal which can be used to measure the flame scanning signal Refer to the Electrical Schematic and connect a 0-1 mA ammeter to the two test points with standard 23 mm test plugs with the positive lead on the detector side Disconnect the terminal link to obtain the signal reading A minimum signal of 70 microamps is required typical signals are in the 250-400 microamp range on both pilot and main flame After completion replace the terminal link and remove the test jacks

2 Drive the burner to high fire as previously described Measure the carbon dioxide content of the discharge air stream This figure must not exceed 2800 ppm If the discharge exceeds this limit isolate the air handler and report to RS STOKVIS Ltd before proceeding

Stop and start the air handler a few times to check for reliability using the Operating Instructions (Section 6)

432 HANDOVER

Complete the air handler Service Check Sheet supplied at the back of this manual The self-copy sheet must be returned to STOKVIS for checking

Instruct the User in efficient use and care of the unit start-up and shutdown (including emergency shutdown) and recommended service interval Emphasise the need to keep the air handler clear of stored items and extraneous material and to maintain the recirculation and fresh air paths to the air handler inlets Hand all instructions as applicable to the UserOwner for safekeeping

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 22

5 ADJUSTMENTS 3000S

If adjustments to the air handler settings are required they should be made by a RS STOKVIS Ltd approved engineer

The normal value for all control settings is specified in Section 1 of this manual

51 PILOT ADJUSTMENT

The pilot gas pressure and flame length may be adjusted by altering the discharge pressure of the pilot governor Screwing the adjusting screw clockwise (located under the top cap) increases the discharge pressure and the flame length anti-clockwise decreases the pressure and the flame length

52 BURNER HIGH FIRE PRESSURE ADJUSTMENT

At high fire alter the spring compression on the main burner governor (MV2) by removing the cap and adjust the spring compression plate clockwise to increase the burner pressure anti-clockwise to decrease burner pressure If the pressure does not increase on adjusting the spring the supply is inadequate

Note On small air handlers fitted with a mUlti-functional control the pressure adjusting screw is located under a swing cap on the first block valve

53 BURNER LOW FIRE ADJUSTMENT

The main burner low fire is adjusted on the flow control valve MV5 (Process amp Instrumentation Diagram)

Remove the top cover of the valve and insert a Terminal Screwdriver in the adjusting screw of the TOP cam marked NI

Drive the burner to low fire by adjusting the temperature controller set-point and high limit to 05degC as described in Appendix 4 of this manual

Turn the Terminal Screwdriver clockwise to decrease the low fire gas flow anti-clockwise to increase the flow

Check the heat input and flame signal at the new position are satisfactory and return the tenlperature controller to its normal settings

Replace the control valve cover

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 23

5 ADJUSTMENTS 3000S

54 SUMMERIOFFIWINTER SWITCH

In the SUMMER position this switch provides ventilation only and is independent of the programmed ON and OFF periods This position is manually selected and must be manually de-selected Whenever the switch is in this position the fan is operating

In the OFF position the air handler is shutdown and will not operate This overrides any frost protection fitted It is suitable for air handler shutdown for short periods such as holidays The programme memory is unaffected by this switch and assumes control of the air handler when the switch is returned to the WINTER position

In the WINTER position the air handler operates off the programme memory to provide heating

55 RESET BUTTON

Visual indication of air handler lockout is provided In the event of lockout occurring the air handler can be reset by depressing the RESET button This parallels the RESET button on the air handler main control panel If after 4 attempts to reset the air handler the lockout indicator still illuminates then a Service Engineer should be called to investigate the problem

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 24

6 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 3000S

61 AIR HANDLER START-UP

1 Open all manual gas valves both on the appliance and on the supply to the appliance Switch on the Electric Supply to the appliance

2 On the main air handler panel

Switch the panel isolator to the 1 position

Check POWER ON light

3 On the remote control station

For Heating Switch the SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch to WINTER

The air handler will now start automatically in response to the time settings

In the event of LOCKOUT

Press the RESET button and the cycle of operations will be repeated If the air handler goes to LOCKOUT four times in succession call for a Service Engineer

For Unheated Ventilation Switch the SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch to SUMMER

Note This prevents the burner firing giving a controlled supply of ventilation air to the heated space as long as the switch is in this position The air handler will now start automatically in response to the timeclock demand To turn the fan off return the switch to the centre OFF position

In the event of LOCKOUT

Press the RESET button and the cycle of operations will be repeated If the air handler goes to LOCKOUT four times in succession call for a Service Engineer

62 AIR HANDLER SHUTDOWN

621 SHUTDOWN FOR SHORT PERIODS

Switch the SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch on the remote station to OFF

622 SHUTDOWN FOR PROLONGED PERIODS

Switch the main panel isolator to the 0 position and close all manual gas valves both on and leading to the appliance

Note Manual gas valves should only be operated when the appliance is to be shut off for either Servicing or for a prolonged shutdown

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 25

30005 6 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

63 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS

631 SITE CLEARANCE ADJACENT TO AIR HANDLER

Attention should be paid to keeping the area around the air handler tidy No rubbish should be allowed to accumulate in the vicinity of the air handler and storage of goods etc should not be permitted within two metres of the air handler Failure to comply could result in reduced airflow to the air handler causing inefficient running and potential overheat cond ition

632 AIR SUPPLY TO AIR HANDLER

Air vents and grilles supplying air to the air handler should never be blocked and should be checked periodically to ensure they are clear

633 AIR FILTERS

Similarly attention should be paid to cleaning or replacing the filters to the air handler if fitted Your installer should advise you on the frequency with which this would be required to be completed

634 SERVICE

For continued safe and efficient operation of this air air handler it is important that servicing of the air handler should be completed at regular intervals by a competent person in accordance with Section 82 of this manual Users are advised to enter into a Service Agreement with RS STOKVIS Ltd

635 SPARE PARTS

It is suggested that a complete set of spare parts essential to the running of the air handler and recommended by the installer are kept by the user on the premises where the air handler is installed This is particularly important where the air handler forms an essential part of any process plant and its being out of operation may cause problems by for example frost damage or condensation by super-cooling

A list of Recommended Spares will be found in Section 9 of this manual

636 GAS LEAKS

If a smell of gas is detected around the area of the appliance Switch off all manual gas valves and contact your service engineer or the local gas undertaking

NEVER

LOOK FOR GAS LEAKS WITH A LIGHTED MATCH OR NAKED

FLAME

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 26

7 FAULT FINDING 30008

The main control panel incorporates two lights to help in fault finding

POWER ON

LOCKOUT

The remote station also has three lights

AIR FAN ON

BURNER ON

LOCKOUT

This section gives the possible causes of failure associated with each check light The electrical schematic diagram in this manual and the wiring diagram shipped in the main air handler panel should be used in conjunction with the notes below Additionally Service Engineers should familiarise themselves with the detailed Start Sequence given in Appendix 2 of this manual

The notes are given for each light before consulting the notes check for bulb failure

71 POWER ON LIGHT IS UNLIT

Check

1 Main control panel isolator is in the 1 position

2 Main Panel 6A MCB has not tripped if a trip has occurred the switch will be at the OFF position Reset and test system as required

3 Also check if the mains electrical supply is isolated If so FIND OUT WHY before taking any action

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 27

7 FAULT FINDING 30005

72 AIR FAN ON LIGHT IS UNLIT

Check

1 SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch is not in Position OFF

2 Timeperiod is not set to off

3 Air handler is not at LOCKOUT

4 Recheck both AIR FAN ON and LOCKOUT bulbs

Two fault indications are possible

1 THE FAN IS NOT OPERATING

If the fan should have started but is not operating

Check 1 Overload for tripped conditions Reset the overload and monitor the next start-up

2 Motor Fuses

3 Relays 1 2 amp3 for failure

laClor CC1 for failure

5 Air Pressure Switch (DPS) is failed in the N 0 Position

Replace the faulty component as described in Section 8

2 THE FAN IS OPERATING

This indicates that the air pressure switch (DPS) has failed to change over

Measure the profile plate differential pressure as described in Section 4113 If the pressure is correct the air pressure switch is faulty Check the switch as in 4114 If the pressure is not correct

Check 1 Correct fan belt tension

2 Correct fan rotation

3 The air handler air inlets and discharge are not blocked

4 Correct fitting on filters

5 The air differential pressure switch impulse lines are not blocked or leaking

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 28

7 FAULT FINDING 30008

73 LOCKOUT LIGHT IS ILLUMINATED

This light indicates a failure in the burner ignition and flame supervision system

RESET the unit and follow the progress of the start sequence The full cycle may take two minutes

1

------t

2 LOCKOUT after 35-40 seconds indicates an ignition failure RESET the system and observe the pilot and ignition spark during the start-up attempt

I-- shy

3 Observe the spark This should be strong and highly visible If not remove and clean the spark plug as Section 82 Check that the spark plug gap is correctly set at 15 mm

-- shy

4 Check the pilot flame If the pilot flame ignites and the unit goes to LOCKOUT the scanning system is at fault Remove and clean the detector as Section 82 Check the flame signal as in Section 431

5 If the pilot does not light the gas supply system is faulty Check the pilot system for restriction and the pilot valve operation

6 If the pilot lights and the unit goes to LOCKOUT after the main gas valves are addressed either the flow control valve is blocked or one of the main gas block valves has failed Fit a manometer on the pressure test point on the outlet flange of the multishyfunctional control and observe if the pressure rises when the main gas valves are addressed No pressure rise will indicate failure of the main gas valves

74 AIR FAN ON LIGHT ILLUMINATED

If the burner does not start check

1 SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch is in WINTER position

2 Overheat Limit Control

These interlocks prevent the burner management system starting

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 29

8 SERVICING 3000S

IMPORTANT Servicing and maintenance should be only carried out by a RS STOKVIS Ltd approved engineer

Only use replacement parts provided by the appliance manufacturer

Check that the air openings for combustion and for ventilation of any plant roon or compartment are clear

81 ISOLATION

811 FUEL GAS ISOLATION

The fuel gas to the ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler should be isolated and locked off at the manual ball valve mounted at the start of the fuel gas line Additionally before entering or servicing the air handler the burner manual isolation valve and pilot line isolation valve should be closed

812 ELECTRICAL ISOLATION

All electric power to the air handler and the remote control station is switched through the local isolator This isolator is fitted with a lock facility to permit it to be locked in the OFF position

Additionally isolate the power at the Wall Isolator

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 30

8 SERVICING 30005

82 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE

The air handler should be routinely serviced at the start of each heating season Isolate the air handler as above before servicing Details of access to individual components are given in Section 84 of this manual

1 Remove and clean spark igniter Check that the gap is correctly set at 25 mm Replace every two years

2 Clean the flame detector lens to ensure freedom from dirt and moisture If the cell shows any sign of cracks it should be replaced Routinely replace the cell every two years or after 10000 hours of operation which ever comes first

3 Inspect the entire air handler paint system for general damage Repair as necessary

4 Every two years brush the burner plates and clear the burner holes carefully with a Size 18mm drill for NP II and 20mm drill for NP I

WARNING THE BURNER HOLES MUST NOT BE ENLARGED

5 Inspect and lubricate all damper linkages to ensure freedom of operation Wipe off all excess lubricants to prevent dirt build up on linkage parts

6 Check the fan belt for cracks and splits Check tension The correct tension gives 16mm deflection per metre of span when the belt is centrally loaded with a force of 27N Adjust as necessary

7 Grease both the fan shaft bearings with Mobiith AW2 grease or similar

NEVER use high temperature grease

NEVER mix two different greases within the bearing always flush existing grease out

Note Removing the cover plate on the end of the air handler gains access to the outboard fan bearing

Light to Slow to 0 120 2 to 6 months Clean Dry

Medium Medium 120 200 1 to 2 months

Moderate to Light to Slow to 0 120 1 to 4 weeks Dry

Dirty Medium Medium 120 200 1 to 7 days

Extreme Dirt Dry Light to Slow to 0 200 Daily Flushing out

Medium Medium Dirt

83 ANNUAL SERVICE CHECKS

After Servicing test fire the air handler following the Commissioning Procedure detailed in Section 4 of this manual to ensure correct operation generally Special attention must be paid to the damper system and related controls and interlocks

Additionally check that the fresh air and recirculation air entry path to the air handler has been kept clear and instruct the User of the need for this as necessary

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 31

8 SERVICING 3000S

84 REMOVAL PROCEDURE FOR REPLACEABLE COMPONENTS

IMPORTANT

Turn off the gas at the appliance service valve and the electricity at the main panel and wall isolator before proceeding

841 BURNER

The burner is located inside the air handler casing and is mounted on two brackets from the support straps To remove the burner isolate the air handler as in 81 and undo the union on the fuel gas line adjacent to the burner isolation valve (MV6) and unscrew the main and pilot gas feed pipes from the burner rail Access to the rear of the burner assembly is made by removing the partition plate below the burner separating the fresh air inlet to the burner from the return air inlet compartment This is held in place by screws which engage in captive nuts on the top side of the partition Remove the Flame Detector and pull off the ignition plug cap Disconnect the burner support brackets and remove the burner The burner will easily pass through the access hatch for further strip down Replace in the reverse order soundness test the gas pipework check the burner operation and duty as described in the commissioning section of this manual

842 FLAME DETECTOR

This is a 240 Volt instrument

The flame detector is mounted on the end of the burner rail inside the air handler casing To remove the detector isolate the panel electric supply and lock off Push the scanner towards the burner and rotate to release the bayonet fixing and lift the detector from its mount Remove the two screws holding the detector cover and disconnect the supply leads noting the polarity of the connections

Replace the flame detector in the reverse order ensuring correct polarity of connections Ensure the access panel is securely closed and the retaining nuts are tightened down Check operation by inserting a test meter in the points provided in the main control panel and reading the flame signals during start up to full rate burner operation (See 431) Operate the appliance over six starts for reliability of operation including tum off of start and main gas valves to check for lockout operation

843 IGNITER SPARK PLUG

This is a high tension spark plug

The igniter spark plug is mounted on the end of the burner rail inside the air handler casing To remove the spark plug isolate the air handler as above Enter the service access door Access to the spark plug is made through the profile plate To remove the spark plug pull off the high tension lead and unscrew the plug with a plug spanner

When replacing the spark plug check the plug gap is set at 15mm Check ignition reliability over six start ups

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 32

8 SERVICING 3000S

844 IGNITER SPARK TRANSFORMER

This is a 240 Volt instrument

The ignition transformer is located in a plastic box mounted on the air handler casing adjacent to the main control panel To remove the transformer isolate the air handler as above and unscrew the four retaining screws holding the box lid in place and remove the lid Disconnect the supply cable at the terminal strip and undo the transformer retaining screws The transformer may then be unscrewed from the High Tension cable leading to the spark plug

Replacement is a simple reversal of this procedure

Check ignition reliability over six start ups

845 COMBUSTION AIR PRESSURE SWITCH (DPS)

Note The switch is set and sealed and should be replaced if not operating correctly

This switch is a 240 Volt instrument

The air switch is mounted directly on the air handler casing and can be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove the switch isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the supply cable Break the downstream pipe compression fitting and unscrew the switch housing from its locating fitting Reverse the procedure to replace after ensuring switch setting is as specified in Section 13 of this manual Operate the air handler to ensure reliability of operation over six start ups

846 AIR HANDLER OVERHEAT LIMIT CONTROL

This is a 240 Volt instrument

The overheat limit control can be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove the control isolate the air handler as above and lock off Remove the switch cover Disconnect the supply cable and unscrew the control housing from its locating fitting Reverse the procedure to replace check the switch is set to 50degC Test the switch operation as described in Section 43 over at least three operations

847 AIR FAN AND MOTOR

The air fan motor is a 415 Volt 3 phase motor

The motor and slide rails are easily accessible inside the air handler casing If it is necessary to remove the motor isolate the air handler as above Slacken the fan-belt tension and remove the drive belts Pull the motor away from the air handler casing to make access to the motor terminal box and disconnect the supply cable The motor may now be removed from the unit Following replacement the air handler must be fully re-commissioned as in Section 4

It is unlikely that the air fan will need replacing or servicing If required a full procedure should be obtained from RS STOKVIS Ltd

Replacement must be followed by full re-commissioning as in Section 4

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 33

8 SERVICING 3000S

848 FUEL GAS MULTI-FUNCTIONAL CONTROL - SMALL UNITS

This is a 240 Volt instrument

The fuel gas multi-functional control can be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove the unit isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the Hirschman electric termination Unbolt the control from its flanges and remove

When replacing care must be taken to ensure the flange 0 rings are undamaged and in the correct location Following replacement the air handler must be fully reshycommissioned as in Section 4 including tests for soundness prior to start-up

849 GOVERNOR AND BLOCK VALVES

The block valves are 240 Volt instruments

All these items may be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove any item isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the electric termination to the two block valves the pilot block valve and the flow control block valve Break the two pipe unions and remove the fuel gas line complete for further strip-down

8410 FUEL GAS FLOW CONTROL VALVE

This is a 24 Volt instrument

The fuel gas How control valve can be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove the valve isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the supply cables to the control valve

On small air handlers fitted with a multi-functional control support the multi-functional control and unbolt its discharge flange Break the union downstream of the burner isolation valve and remove the section of line containing the flow control valve for further strip-down

On large air handlers fitted with separate block valves it will be necessary to remove the fuel gas line complete as Section 8410 above

Following replacement re-commission the air handler

Note If the fresh air damper is not in the full open position the heat input must not exceed the maximum heat input at recirculation condition specified in the technical data section of this manual

8411 PILOT GAS GOVERNOR AND BLOCK VALVE

The block valve is a 240 Volt instrument

Both items may be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove either item isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the electric terrriination to the solenoid valve Undo the upstream pipe union and the compression fitting downstream of the manual block valve (PV3) Remove the pilot gas line complete for further strip down

Replace broken or distorted connections and retest for soundness Ensure the pilot gas pressure is correct and the flame is sensing an output Ensure reliability over six start-ups

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 34

8 SERVICING 3000S

8412 BELT TENSIONING PROCEDURE

The setting tensions are designed to cover a wide range of drives A precise setting force for individual applications can be calculated as detailed

SETTING FORCES

Belt Section

Setting Force To Deflect Belt 16mm per Metre Of Span

Small Pulley Diameter (mm)

Basic Setting Forces Newtons (N) Kilograms (kgf)

125 x Setting Forces Newtons (N) Kilograms (kgf)

SPZ

56 to 71 16 16 20 20 75 to 90 18 18 22 22

95 to 125 20 20 25 25 Over 125 22 22 28 28

SPA

80 to 100 22 22 28 28 106 to 140 30 30 38 38 150 to 200 36 37 45 46 Over 200 40 40 50 51

SPB

112 to 160 40 40 50 51 170 to 224 50 51 62 63 236 to 355 62 63 77 79 Over 355 65 66 81 83

SPC 224 to 250 70 71 87 89 265 to 355 92 94 115 120 Over 375 115 120 144 150

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 35

8 SERVICING 3000S

BELT TENSIONING USING FENNER BELT TENSION INDICATOR

Calculate the deflection in mm on a basis of 16mm per metre of centre distance Centre Distance (m) x 16 =Deflection (mm)

Set lower marker ring at the deflection distance required in mm on the lower scale

Set upper ring against to bottom edge of the top tube

Place the belt tension indicator on top of the belt at the centre of span and apply a force at right angles to the belt defecting it to the point where the lower marker ring is level with the top of the adjacent belt

Read off the force value indicated by the top edge of the upper marker ring

Compare this force to the kgf value shown in the table above

If a Fenner Belt Tension Indicator is not available a spring balance and rule will be suffice

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 36

8 SERVICING 30005

85 MAIN PANEL CONTROLS

All panel controls are readily accessible and may be easily exchanged for replacement components in the event of failure Ensure any replacement item is of the same make and type as the original

851 LANDIS amp GYR LFL 1335 AUTOMATIC SEQUENCE CONTROLLER

The Landis amp Gyr Automatic Sequence Controller is a plug-in unit locating on a pre-wired chassis To remove the controller undo the two retaining screws at the top left and lower right corners and pull the module off the chassis

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

852 CONTROLS CIRCUIT (24 VOLT) TRANSFORMER

The Controls Circuit Transformer is fixed to the panel back plate by tapped screws To remove the transformer undo the wiring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel Undo the two retaining screws and remove the unit complete

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

853 CONTROL RELAYS R1 R2 amp R3

The Control Relays are DIN Rail mounted To remove a relay undo the wIring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel Release the DIN rail retaining clip under the relay with a screwdriver and remove the relay

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

854 6A MCB

The 6A MCB is DIN Rail mounted To remove the MCB undo the wiring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel Release the DIN rail retaining clip under the MCB with a screwdriver and remove the MCB

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

855 THERMAL OVERLOAD

The thermal overload is attached to the underside of the main contactor To remove the overload undo the wiring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel and that the overload setting is as specified in Section 13 of this manual Unscrew the three connections to the contactor and remove the overload

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 37

8 SERVICING 3000S

856 MAIN CONTACTOR

The Main Contactor is DIN Rail mounted To remove the contactor remove the thermal overload as 855 above and then undo the wiring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel Release the DIN rail retaining clip under the contactor with a screwdriver and remove the contactor

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

857 MOTOR FUSE

To replace a motor fuse pull the fuse carrier off the fuse holder base The fuse is attached to the fuse carrier by two screws Unscrew remove and replace

86 REMOTE CONTROL STATION

The remote control station contains some serviceable parts although these items should only be fitted by an approved RS STOKVIS Ltd Engineer

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 38

9 RECOMMENDED SPARES 3000S

For two years operation it is recommended that the following items should be held in stock

ITEM DESCRIPTION PART NO QUANTITY i

1 INDICATOR BULBS W1121 1 PACK

2 SPARK PLUG 023739 1 I

3 UVDETECTOR QRA10C 1 I

4 ROOM SENSOR DRT2453 1

5 DUCT SENSOR DDT1701 1

All replacement parts can be obtained from RS STOKVIS Ltd by quoting the air handler serial number the part number and description

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 39

APPENDIX 1 30005

SOUNDNESS TESTING THE FUEL GAS PIPEWORK

This procedure should only be carried out by personnel familiar with the ECONO-AIR 3000S Series Air handler

The pressure test points and all valves are identified on the Process and Instrumentation Diagram for the air handler included in Section 1 of this n1anual

Isolate the air handler electric supply at the main control panel and lock off Close the manual isolation valves MV1 MV6 and PV3 Ensure the supply pressure is available on the upstream side of MV1

A11 TESTING THE UPSTREAM PIPEWORKAND BURNER CONTROLS 1 Connect a 60 mbar manometer to the pressure test nipple A Monitor the

pressure for two minutes Any rise in pressure indicates that valve MV1 is leaking and must be replaced Remove pressure test points Band F

2 Open MV1 to pressurise the pipework on both the main gas and pilot line to the first block valve

3 Close MV1 Allow one minute for the temperature to stabilise and then test the system for 2 minutes and watch for a drop in the pipework pressure If the pressure falls open valve MV1 and test the pipework connections and valves from MV1 to MV3 and MV1 to PV2 for leaks with a proprietary leak detector fluid or spray Turn off MV1 seal any leaks and re-test

4 If no extemalleaks are found either the pilot block valve PV1 or either the first main gas block valve MV3 is letting by

5 To test this seal pressure test point A and fit a manometer to pressure test point B Leave for two minutes with MV1 open A rise in pressure on the manometer confirms a leak on the block valve MV3 Turn off MV1 exchange the valve and re-test from point 2 above

6 Repeat this procedure for the pilot block valve Seal test point B and fit a manometer to pressure test point F Leave for two minutes with MV1 open A rise in pressure on the manometer confirms a leak on the pilot block valve PV2 Turn off MV1 exchange the valve and re-test from point 1 above Seal test point F

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 40

APPENDIX 1 30005

A12 TESTING THE DOWNSTREAM BURNER VALVE 1 Close MV1 and connect pressure test points A and 8 with flexible 6 mm bore

tubing teed into the manometer Remove pressure test point C Open MV1 to pressurise the downstream block valve MV4

2 Close MV1 and leave for one minute for the temperature to stabilise Monitor the pressure for 2 minutes If the pressure falls open valve MV1 and leak test the line between the two block valves MV3 and MV4 with a proprietary leak detector Turn off MV1 seal any leaks and re-test Note Smaller air handlers in the 3000S Series are fitted with multi-functional valves combining the pressure regulator and two block valves in one component The above procedure still applies but if a leak is found on either block valve the whole control should be replaced If no external leaks are found the downstream block valve is letting by

3 To confirm this close MV1 remove the manometer and refit to pressure test point C Connect pressure test points A and 8 with flexible 6mm bore tubing Open MV1 and allow one minute for the temperature to stabilise Monitor the pressure for a further 2 minutes with MV1 still open A rise in pressure confirms that the second block valve MV4 is letting by Turn off MV1 Replace the valve and re-test from 2 above

A13 TESTING THE DOWNSTREAM BURNER PIPEWORK 1 Close MV1 and connect pressure test points A and D with flexible 6 mm bore

tubing teed into the manometer Open MV1 to pressurise the downstream pilot pipework

2 Close MV1 and leave for one minute for the temperature to stabilise Monitor the pressure for 2 minutes If the pressure falls open valve MV1 and leak test the line between the downstream block valve MV4 and the manual block MV6 with a proprietary leak detector fluid or spray If no external leaks are found the manual block valve MV6 is letting by Turn off MV1 seal any leakages and reshytest from 2 above

A14 TESTING THE DOWNSTREAM PILOT PIPEWORK 1 Close MV1 and connect pressure test points A and F with flexible 6mm bore

tubing teed into the manometer Open MV1 to pressurise the downstream pilot pipework

2 Close MV1 and leave for one rninute for the temperature to stabilise Monitor the pressure for 2 minutes If the pressure falls open valve MV1 and leak test the line between the downstream block valve PV2 and the manual block PV3 with a proprietary leak detector fluid or spray If no external leaks are found the manual block valve PV3 is letting by Turn off MV1 seal any leakages and reshytest from 2 above

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 41

APPENDIX 1 30005

A15 TESTING THE BURNER CONNECTIONS 1 Remove the burner access panel as described in Section 84 of this manual

Remove the burner spark igniter Slacken the two retaining bolts holding the burner to the burner support straps and unbolt the burner supply endplate from the burner casting and mixing plates

2 Connect pressure test points A and 0 with flexible 6mm bore tubing teed into the manometer Open MV1 and MV6 to pressurise the burner pipework Leak test the main gas burner pipework and connections with proprietary leak detector fluid Turn off MV6 Seal any leakages and re-test

3 Connect pressure test points A and F with flexible 6 mm bore tubing teed into the manometer Open MV1 and PV3 to pressurise the pilot burner pipework Leak test the pilot gas burner pipework and connections with proprietary leak detector fluid Turn off PV3 Seal any leakages and re-test

4 Turn off MV1

5 Replace the spark igniter and profile division plate

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 42

APPENDIX 2 30005

START SEQUENCE

The burner start sequence is controlled by the Landis and Gyr burner management unit The timings are pre-set and comply with 885885 This unit must NOT be tampered with

A brief description of the start-up sequence isshy

The unit checks

1 The NO FLAME signal on the UV flame scanner

Note If the scanner detects a flame at any time other than in the correct operating sequence the flame programmer initiates a lockout

2 The operation of the combustion air proving switch in the NO AIR position

3 The air handler discharge high temperature switch

If the checks are completed the unit starts the combustion air fan and then checks the combustion airflow

Once the airflow is proven the unit checks that the damper control circuit is functioning correctly After the damper microswitch is made to prove the fresh air damper is fully open the sequence allows 30 seconds for the combustion air to purge any combustible gas from the air handler

After completion of the purge the spark ignition system is energised the pilot valve opened and the spark terminated If the pilot flame is not proven by the UV scanner the system will initiate a LOCKOUT

If the flame is proven the main gas valves are opened the pilot extinguished and the main burner flame proven

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 43

i

APPENDIX 2 30008

The following flow chart shows the complete start sequence including the lighting of the various indicating lamps

MANUAL STATUS LIGHT POWER ON

POWER ON

I INITIATE START BY TIME

SETTING ON CONTROLLER

I CHECK NO FLAME

VISIBLE

PROVEj FAIL LOCKOUT

I CHECK RELAY R4 NC

POSITION

PROVE FAIL NO START

I CHECK AIR PRESSURE SWITCH NC POSITION

PROVE FAIL NO START

I CHECK RELAY R1 NC

POSITION

PROVE j

FAIL NO START

I START COMBUSTION

AIR BLOWER

I CHECK AIR PRESSURE SWITCH NO POSITION

PROVE I

FAIL NO START

I STATUS LIGHT FAN ON

I ENERGISE RELAY R1

I

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 44

I

I

APPENDIX 2 30008

I CHECK OVERHEAT LIMIT

CONTROL R5

PROVE I

FAIL I I

CHECK 541412 LOOP CLOSED ON

LANDIS ampGYR CIRCUIT

PROVE I

FAIL I I

COMBUSTION AIR PURGE PERIOD

30 SECONDS

I

NO START

NO START

CANCEL NO FLAME CHECK CIRCUIT

I

ENERGISE SPARK

I TIMED PERIOD 25 SECONDS

I ENERGISE PILOT GAS

VALVE

I TIMED PERIOD 25 SECONDS

I TERMINATE SPARK

I INTERROGATE UV FLAME SCANNER

PROVE I

FAIL I I

TIMED PERIOD 10 SECONDS

I

LOCKOUT

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 45

I

I

APPENDIX 2 3000S

I ENERGISE MAIN GAS

VALVES

I

STATUS LIGHT BURNER ON

I TIMED PERIOD

5 SECONDS

I DE-ENERGISE PILOT

GAS VALVES

CONTINUOUS FROM PILOT

I INTERROGATE UV FLAME SCANNER

PROVE I

FAIL I I

LOCKOUT I

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 46

APPENDIX 3 30005

Please see copy of Standard Service Sheet

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 47

APPENDIX 4 30005

A41 TIME OUT SCREEN

This is the standard screen displayed when the touch screen is not in use The back light is off to save energy_ To access the STATUS screen touch the ENTER key and the following screen is displayed

[]][I][]rn[IJOO[][IJOO[] EJ~E11 I[]I ~ middot I

NOTE

The Touch Screen operates using the heat produced by the touch of a finger and therefore only LIGHT pressure is required

Excessive pressure can damage the Touch Screen

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 48

APPENDIX 4 30008

A42 STATUS SCREEN

On the typical STATUS screen the illustrated information detailed is as follows

19 36 Fan Brn

RS OS

100 Fst_~_ Lck _ _ Xst Gas~o ~ I

RS Indicates the current room temperature

OS ~( t~~ the current duct discharge temperature

Fan Indicates the current status of the fan by showing the arrow and the fan blades for ON and OFF is shown by the arrow and fan blades being removed

Brn Indicates the current status of the burner with the black flames indicating the burner to be ON and vice versa

Lck LOCKOUT - This indicates a flame failure when highlighted during normal or start-up operation

Xst EXCESS TEMPERATURE SWITCH - This indicates the unit has reached the trip limit on the over heat stat when highlighted during operation

Indicates the current position of the gas modulating valve during normal Gas

operation (0-100)

Indicates whether the Frost stat is energised and the unit is running on frost Fst

override

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 49

APPENDIX 4 30008

A43 CHANGING SETTINGS

It is possible to change the settings for the time of operation and the required temperature set points The following details the steps required

A44 ENTERING THE SECURITY CODE

From the STATUS screen touch the return key and the screen below will be displayed

Type the HIGH LEVEL security code (4321) If you make a mistake use the BACK SPACE key to delete any incorrect number(s) Touch the ENTER key when the code is correct

If the security code is incorrect the screen above will be displayed then try again If after several attempts you can not gain access please contact RS STOKVIS Ltd for further information

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 50

APPENDIX 4 30008

When the code is entered correctly the MAIN MENU is displayed as detailed below

~ STATUS SET VALUES~ ~ TIVIE CLOCK [) [) [) [) [)

The MAIN MENU screen shows the three menu items available The title for each menu item can be changed to suit the end user Please notify RS STOKVIS Ltd prior to commissioning should these parameters require special amendments

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 51

APPENDIX 4 30008

A45 CHANGING OR SETTING A TIME SCHEDULE

From the main menu screen select the TIME CLOCK page by running finger across screen symbol and touch the ENTER key the screen below will be displayed

On the following screen highlight the TS1 symbol and touch the ENTER key

The current time schedule will now be displayed as shown below The display will automatically default to the current day (1 =Monday 2 =Tuesday etc) In this case day 5 (Friday) the four schedule switching times refer to that day

IAC6BBB1BHIS1

mm0CIl bull mID 17BB 17BB 17HB

Iillleschedule

To modify a time select it by highlighting and touch the ENTER key and the following screen is displayed

To amend the appropriate onoff time as shown on the screen below The arrows to the right of the time are for altering the hours and the arrows on the left for the minutes

Once you have set the time use the ESCape key to exit back to the time schedule screen and choose another day by touching the required number Another time may now be modified as before

IAC6BBB1BHIS1

H8BH

I i eschedule

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 52

APPENDIX 4 30008

Use the ESCape key to exit back to the MAIN MENU screen

~ STATUS ~ SET VALUES

TIME CLOCK []~ [] [] [] []

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 53

APPENDIX 4 30005

A46 CHANGING SET VALUES

From the main menu screen select the SET VALUES page by highlight in the normal way and touch the ENTER key

The following screen is displayed

36 19 18III III IIIHsv Rsv Llv

To change the RSV highlight it in the normal way and touch the ENTER key and the screen below will now be shown

IAC6RRR1RR40 T I

0 19 (Y)l RSV

ROOM SET VALUE

The above screen shows the parameters that can be changed The values to the far left are the limitations of set point (OC) Change the set point by using the UP and DOWN ARROWS on the left of the screen or touch the set value itself followed by the ENTER key to select the set value and set it directly using the numeric keyboard All values can be changed in this way

Use the ESCape key twice to exit back to the MAIN MENU screen

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 54

APPENDIX 4 30005

A47 COMMISSIONING AND SERVICING BURNER CHECKS

Select the SET VALUES screen from the MAIN MENU screen and adjust the high lirrlit set point to 55degC to drive the burner to high fire

IAC6HHH1HH60 ~T I

0 19 (Y)

HSV

HIGH SET VALUE ~

Ensure the set value is returned to 36degC once the appropriate checks and adjustments as described in Section 43 of this manual have been completed Return to the SET VALUES screen and select the low limit value to adjust the low fire setting

Reduce the low limit value to OdegC to drive the gas valve to low fire and complete the appropriate checks and adjustments as described in Section 43 of this manual and ensure the set value is returned to the original value

A48 GMT ltgt BST CHANGEOVER DAYLIGHT SAVINGS

To change your unit to British Summer TimelWinter Time the following system screen must be highlighted by touching the Iamp1 button twice

By touching the clock symbol in the top left hand corner followed by the ENTER key the screen below will be displayed

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 55

APPENDIX 4 30008

188311 851193

544

By touching and highlighting in this case 18 followed by the ENTER key A small box allowing the entry of two digits will appear Enter the desired time required using the numbered keys followed by ENTER key Your unit is now set to operate on BSTBWT

Touch the ESC key three times to return back to the Status screen

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 56

STOKVIS ENERGY SYSTEMS 96R WALTON ROAD EAST MOLESEY SURREY KT8 0DL TEL 020 8783 3050 08707 707 747 FAX 020 8783 3051 08707 707 767 E-MAIL infostokvisboilerscom WEBSITE wwwstokvisboilerscom

JULY 1999

Page 11: ECONOAIR 3000S SERIES AIR HANDLING UNIT DIRECT FIREDstokvisboilers.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/EconoAir... · 2019-05-10 · ECONOAIR 3000S SERIES AIR HANDLING UNIT DIRECT FIRED

415VOlT5OHz 4 WIRE sumy

lIfEI_-shy~a

30131

2_F11

3 TOO---shy

B (

Serial No

~s

~~~~

~ NIt 9lOIElIliOTt)R RA11NG~W

STOKVIS

0 reg

-0

0 0 lt0

u ~

R5-1 -

ADDRESS

shy

regshy

~tl

GAS v IoIOtQR AIIIfONGTll LEGEND

IHlmN PNEI _

-e- PNEl_

Sl1pound_

-11shy IJIfClIOII1IO~-

DUCT STAT NPE COt 17tll

_STAT NPE om 3lt4Il)

~~~pound~ niR~~ (i)l

~ ()1

_cbullbullL~ nmiddoti Apoundm

USER

~ ~

SCHEMATIC FOR 3000S SERIES AIR

IAC600 BASED

RS STOKVIS amp SONS Ltd POOL ROAD WEST MOLESEY SURREY KT8 2HN Tel 0181 941 1212 Fax 0181 941 4136

_[---------f P(N(J ON

ICHI11ONTfWiSFORlER

PllOT V IIEIi CAS VAllIE 1

II CAS VAllIE 2

~_ON

lOCKOUT

s

o Rev I Dote I Description

Computer No 99

Purchase Order No

Drawing No

3-MR-100 Rev

o

30005 2 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

21 INTRODUCTION

The STOKVIS ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler is a direct fired unit designed to give clean healthy environmental conditions and constant even temperature within the heated space

The main air handler assembly houses the circulating air fan the gas burner the fuel gas line and all necessary safety controls The burner management system and space temperature controller is located in the main control panel mounted on or adjacent to the side of the air handler A second control station supplied loose for mounting remote from the air handler within the heated space or other convenient location houses indicating lights the control touch screen and auxiliary operational switches

A sight glass is fitted on the air handler casing to view the burner during operation

For multi unit networked applications the touch screen is excluded

22 GAS BURNER ASSEMBLY

The ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler incorporates the Maxon NP-II burner This burner is specially designed for heating fresh air and is mounted such that a proportion of the incoming air is forced into contact with the flame to ensure rapid mixing and combustion within the code requirements The burner assembly is built up from modular components to give the required heat duty

Each burner assembly is fitted with an integral pilot spark igniter and UV detector The flame detector is used for scanning both the pilot and main flame Note that the pilot burner operates in interrupted mode

The burner module fitted is identified in the Technical Data Section of this manual and on the Valve and Instrun1ent list

23 CONTROL SYSTEM

The controls fitted on the air handler are detailed on the Process amp Instrumentation Diagram in the Technical Data Section of this manual

231 SAFETY CONTROLS

The safety interlocks on the ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler are

1 Combustion air proving switch (PS) 2 Ultra-violet burner flame detector (UV) 3 Overheat limit control (OLe)

Failure of either the combustion air switch or fiame scanning circuit will cause the air handler to go to LOCKOUT and the burner management system will require a RESET before a re-light can be attempted

The air handler discharge overheat limit control is a manual reset switch After a failure the switch will have to be RESET before a re-light can be attempted

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 8

2 GENERAL DESCRIPTION 3000S

232 TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEM

The ECONO-AIR 30008 Series air handler is fitted with a full three-term modulating temperature control system as standard The space temperature is sensed by a heated space detector (TR) which inputs to the panel mounted temperature controller (TC) This achieves control by modulation of the fuel gas flow control valve (MV5) The temperature controller additionally limits the air handler discharge air temperature measured by the discharge temperature detector (TO) to pre-set high and low limits

233 MAIN CONTROL PANEL

The control panel houses the combustioncirculation air fan starter the burner management system and the heated space temperature controller On larger units a separate starter panel may be supplied The panel door is fitted with an interlocked isolator POWER ON and LOCKOUT lights and the burner management RESET button The panel is mounted on or adjacent to the air handler

234 FUEL GAS SYSTEM

The PILOT LINE comprises 1 Pilot governor (PV1 ) 2 One British Gas certificated solenoid valve (PV2) 3 One pilot gas isolation valve (PV3) 4 Pipework and fittings

Note Two pressure test points are fitted on the pilot line on the inlet and discharge of the pilot solenoid valve

The MAIN GAS LINE comprises

1 Gas isolation valve (MV1 ) 2 Pressure governor (MV2) 3 Double block safety shut-oft system (MV34) 4 Gas flow control valve (MV5) 5 Burner isolation valve (MV6) 6 Pipework and fittings

Note Four pressure test points are fitted on the n1ain gas line on the supply the inlet and discharge of the second block valve and downstream of the flow control valve

Note On small air handlers items 2 and 3 are combined in one multi-functional control

All items above are detailed on the Process amp Instrumentation Diagram in Section 1 of this manual

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 9

2 GENERAL DESCRIPTION 3000S

235 REMOTE CONTROL STATION

The ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler is also supplied with a remote control station which houses the air handler operating controls indicating status and the workspace temperature detector if the control station is located in the heated space

236 HEATED SPACE TEMPERATURE SENSOR The heated space temperature sensor is to be located remotely within the space to be heated

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 10

3 INSTALLATION 30005

31 STATUTORY REQUIREMENTS

I n accordance with the Gas Safety (I nstallation and Use) Regulations 1998 installation of this ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler should only be undertaken by competent personnel who are fully aware of their responsibilities under the Health and Safety at Work Act 1974

The installation of this air handler must comply with

BS6230-1991 Installation of gas-fired forced convection air air handlers for commercial and industrial Space Heating of rated input exceeding 60kW

The lEE Regulations for Electrical Installations

Gas Safety (Installation and Use) Regulations 1998

Health and Safety at Work Act 1974

Building Regulations 1986

Building Standards (Scotland Only)

The I nstitution of Gas Engineers Codes of Practice

IGEUP1 Soundness Testing Procedures for Industrial and Commercial Gas Installations

IGEUP2 Gas Installation Pipework Boosters and Compressors on Industrial and Commercial Premises

IGEUP4 Commissioning Of Gas Fired Plant On Industrial and Commercial Premises

32 RECEPTION AND STORAGE OF GOODS

32laquo1 RECEPTION

On receipt of the shipment check that the shipment is complete against the Delivery Advice Note Check for mechanical damage sustained during transit before off-loading the goods Inform the carrier of any such damage

322 OFFLOADING

Horizontal air handlers are fitted with four lifting eyes to permit an overhead lift Alternatively horizontal air handlers may be handled by a fork lift truck on the steel angle support frame

323 STORAGE

Air handlers must be stored in a dry environment The remote control station must be removed from the shipment and stored indoors in a dry environment Outdoor units of split case design (Size 54 and above) must have open ends protected from the environment until installation is complete Any filter elements should be stored in a dry environment

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 11

3 INSTALLATION 3000S

33 LIMITATIONS OF USE

The ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler must not be installed in the following locations

I n hazardous areas

In areas where flammable vapours can be present in excess of their threshold limit values as defined in 8S5925

I n accordance with 8S6230 Clause 513 where there are any flued appliances in the heated area and where air is supplied mechanically and there is mechanical extraction the design extract rate must be 5 to 10 less than the design inlet rate so that the room will not be at a lower pressure than the outside air If the air handler is the only source of mechanically supplied air the extract rate must not exceed 95 of the nominal air flow specified in Section 11 of this manual

Note If it proposed to install the ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler to supply heated air to a hazardous area or in areas where flammable vapours are present the installation must first be approved by a RS STOKVIS Ltd Engineer

34 LOCATION OF AIR HANDLERS

The air handler should normally be installed in the location recommended by the RS STOKVIS Ltd specifying engineer

Check the proposed location for level and load bearing strength Ensure that there is adequate clearance as detailed on the air handler GA in Section 1 this manual around the unit for access for maintenance purposes If the air handler is to be installed above floor level a suitably designed service platform should be provided Such a platform must have 100mm minimum raised edges around the perimeter If this is not possible all air handler access panels must be fitted with hinged restraints This is a factory standard option which should be specified at the time of ordering - check the restraints are fitted before proceeding with installation

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 12

3 INSTALLATION 3000S

35 FRESH AIR INLET AND VENTILATION

351 FRESH AIR INLET

The air handler must be installed where it has a direct and unlimited supply of fresh air from outside the building Ensure that the air intake is not located near exhausts from the building or from any process exhausts such as paint booth exhausts Whenever possible protect the fresh air inlet from the prevailing wind and local wind effects from corners

The fresh air inlet should be sized for an air velocity of 3ms The inlet duct area is detailed on the General Arrangement drawing located in Section 1 of this manual

Where the fresh air inlet is made in a load bearing wall eg a brick wall guidance should be obtained from Structural Engineers on the provision of a lintel in the wall over the fresh air opening

A weather hood must be fitted when the air handler air inlet is at or within 1 m of the outside wall Additionally the weather hood should have negligible resistance to the airflow maximum 01 mbar at the design air flow rate

Do not install the ECONO-AI R 3000S Series air handler where long lengths of duct or bends of an angle greater than 30deg are necessary to lead to the air handler from the fresh air opening If ducting is unavoidable ensure that the resulting pressure drop is negligible Le less than 01 mbar for ductless air handlers and has been accounted for in the original design for ducted air handlers as detailed in the specification section of this manual Section 11

Note If the air intake is located in an area of unrestricted access warning notices preventing the blockage of the air intake by temporary stacking should be displayed adjacent to the intake

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 13

3 INSTALLATION 3000S

352 VENTI LA TION

Where the air air handler is in its own plant room or compartment this shall be ventilated with openings communicating directly with the outside air to ventilate the room

The openings shall be fitted with grilles of negligible resistance and shall be sited so that they cannot easily be blocked or flooded They shall have a total minimum free area as follows

Low Level (inlet) 320cm2 + 27cm2 per kilowatt in excess of 60kW total rated input

High Level (outlet) 160cm2 + 134cm2 per kilowatt in excess of 60kW total rated input

The free area of the grilles shall be not less than the size of the recommended minimum ventilation opening Grilles shall be designed to minimise high velocity air streams in the plant room For exposed ie free standing plant rooms ventilation openings shall be provided on at least two sides and preferably on all four sides

Where mechanical ventilation is used it shall be by mechanical inlet and either natural or mechanical extraction Systems of ventilation employing mechanical extraction and natural air inlet shall not be used

The minimum flow rates of air supplied shall be not less than 06 m3s per megawatt of rated heat input

36 AIR DISCHARGE

The air handler should be located with the air discharge into the heated space at a minimum height of 3 metres The air should not discharge directly onto any obstructions and direct discharge on to working personnel should be avoided

If the air discharge is located in an area of unrestricted access warning notices preventing the blockage of the air discharge by temporary stacking should be displayed adjacent to the discharge

Generally it is not necessary to fit distribution ducting to the discharge of the air handler If ducting is required or specified ensure that the resulting pressure drop has been accounted for in the original design specification as detailed in Section 1 of this manual

37 ASSEMBLY AND POSITIONING OF AIR HANDLER

Unless specified at the time of order air handlers will be shipped in sections Discharge heads grilles attenuators duct connecting sections filters rain-hoods etc will be supplied loose for site fitting to the air handler

Horizontal air handlers must be supported on their steel angle support base When the air handler is located check for level and adjust as necessary

Alternatively horizontal air handlers can be supplied with extensions of the support frame for suspending from overhead supports This must be specified at the time of order Do not suspend the air handler from the lifting eyes

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 14

3 INSTALLATION 3000S

38 REMOTE STATION

The ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler is supplied with a remote control station This should be mounted in a position convenient to the end user If possible it should not be mounted on an external wall or where the space temperature detector is affected by cold draughts or a local source of heat

39 VISUAL CHECK

After completion of installation re-check the air handler for signs of damage Report any instance to RS STOKVIS Ltd

310 CONNECTION OF SERVICES

The air handler requires the connection of fuel gas and electricity

3101 FUEL GAS SUPPLY

The ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler has been designed for use on Natural Gas An alternative version is available for LPG The gas type for the air handler supplied is clearly marked on the air handler data badge and on the Specification sheet in Section 1 of this manual Check the gas type is correct and that the supply pressure is within the range marked on the specification

The local gas Authority should be consulted about the adequacy of the gas service and meter supplies for existing and proposed extensions to the installation and for any requirements for boosting the gas supply_

Connect the fuel gas supply to the inlet manual valve on the air handler gas train The connection size is detailed in Section 1 of this manual A further isolation valve and union should be fitted immediately adjacent to the appliance which when the valve is closed allows the complete burner and control assembly to be disconnected for maintenance or repair

New gas pipework should be installed to British Gas Publication IGEUP2 and be purged and pressure tested in accordance with British Gas Publications IGEUP1

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 15

3 INSTALLATION 3000S

3102 ELECTRICITY SUPPLY

All external wiring shall be carried out and checked by a competent person All components shall be checked for suitability for voltage range and frequency

Means for electric isolation having a contact separation of at least 3mm in all poles must be provided adjacent to the air handler The electrical supply to the appliance shall incorporate suitable means of excess current protection

The ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler requires a 3 phase 4 wire supply which should be connected to the main control panel Check the air handler data badge for the correct electrical supply The maximum supply requirement is Specified in Section 1 of this manual Note that the 240 Volt air handler control circuit is taken from the lUI phase to Neutral Connection should be made as shown on the wiring diagram shipped inside this panel

The air handler must be earthed in accordance with BS5986 and CP1013

Check all terminal strip terminations for wires which have become loose during shipment

311 CONNECTION TO THE MAIN PANEL AND REMOTE STATION

Interconnecting wiring to the main panel and remote station should be made with a minimum specification of 075 mm2 300 Volt cable Check that no wires on the terminal strip have become loose during shipment The remote panel should be mounted at a height of approx 18m If possible it should not be mounted on an external wall or where the sensor will be affected by cold draughts or a local source of heat

Both panel and remote station must be earthed in accordance with BS5986 and CP1013

312 HEATED SPACE TEMPERATURE SENSOR

The space temperature sensor located on the remote panel should be connected with screened cable or twin low voltage signal cable run in its own separate conduit It should be mounted on the remote panel or adjacent to the outlet at a height of approx 18m If possible it should not be mounted on an external wall or where the sensor will be affected by cold draughts or a local source of heat

313 DUCT SENSOR

The duct sensor should be connected with screened cable or twin low voltage signal cable run in its own separate conduit It should be mounted in the air handler discharge as close as possible to the discharge into the heated space

314 OVERHEAT LIMIT CONTROL SENSOR

The overheat limit control sensor should be connected with twin core cable It should be mounted in the air handler discharge within 1 metre of the air handler outlet connection

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 16

3 INSTALLATION 3000S

315 TOUCH SCREEN WIRING

The touch screen located on the front of the remote station requires two separate twisted pairs of O5mrh2 screened cable run in a separate conduit If the distance between the main and remote stations is greater that 1 km please contact RS STOKVIS Ltd for advice

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 17

3 INSTALLATION 3000S

316 ALIGNMENT

3161 INSTALLATION OF DRIVE BELTS

On 80 amp 89 30008 range of air handlers it will be necessary to align the pulleys and fit the drive belts before carrying out commissioning of the unit

3162 PU LLEYS

Before assembling the drive check the pulley grooves are free from scores or sharp edges and all dimensions conform to the relevant standard

The Taper Lock bush is your starting point when it comes to assembly and installation Drive installation is a straightforward job with Taper Lock - but the stages set out on the installation leaflet provided with every Taper Lock bush should be followed closely

3163 ALIGNMENT

Good alignment of pulleys prior to belt installation is important to avoid belt flank wear The diagram below shows correct installation of pulleys

INTERNAl BEARING

MOTOR PUlLEY rAN PULLEY

MOTORMOTOR ADJUSTMENT MOUNTING BOlTSBOLTS

3164 BELTS

When the pulleys have been correctly positioned on the shafts the belts can be installed to complete the drive

The drive centre distance should be reduced prior to the installation of the belts so that they may be fitted without the use of force Under no circumstances must belts be prised into the grooves Using sharp tools to stretch the belts over the pulley rim can easily damage belts and pulley grooves

The installation allowance given in the table below is the minimum recommended reduction in centre distance for various belt section and lengths to allow for correct fitting

The take-up allowance given in the same table should be added on to the calculated centre distance to allow for belt stretch

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 18

3 INSTALLATION 3000S

3165 INSTALLATION AND TAKE UP ALLOWANCE

Belt Pitch Installation Allowance Take-Up Length (mm) SPZ SPA SPB SPC (mm)

410 to 530 5

540 to 840 10

850 to 1160 15

1170 to 1500 20

1510 to 1830 20 25

1840 to 2170 30

2180 to 2830 25 40

2840 to 3500 30 50

3520 to 4160 50 60

4170 to 5140 70

5220 to 6150 85

6180 to 7500 105

600 to 8500 125

8880 to 10170 145

10600 to 12500 175

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 19

4 COMMISSIONING 30005

This appliance must be commissioned by a RS STOKVIS Ltd approved engineer

41 PRESTART CHECKS

1 Switch the SUMMERIOFFMlINTER switch on the remote station to OFF

2 Check the correct electric supply is available to the air handler and the appliance isolator installed

3 Check the correct fuel gas supply is available to the air handler and local isolation valve and union installed Check that new gas pipe work has been correctly purged and pressure tested and that the isolation valve is in the OFF position

4 Check the air handler gas control system and burner connections for pressure soundness as detailed in Appendix 1 of this manual

5 Complete the first section of the Service Check Sheet supplied at the back of this manual (Appendix 3)

6 Close the air handler access door

7 Close and lock the main air handler control panel

8 Switch the main panel isolator to position 1 Check the POWER ON light illuminates

9 Check and set the timed ONOFF periods in the lAC Controller located on the remote panel Ensure that the unit is set to be on during testing Refer to Appendix 4 for the lAC setting procedure

10 Close and lock the remote panel

11 Switch the SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch on the remote station to SUMMER to start the air fan Return the switch to the OFF position and check for correct rotation of the fan as the fan slows and stops

The fan rotation can be observed through the fan section access door or through the air handler access door Only do this during the fan run-down period Ensure the door is securely fastened after completion

Rotation arrows are fitted on the end of the air handler and inside the air handler above the interior bearing support If the rotation is incorrect two phases should be interchanged as dictated by the Engineer responsible for the site electrical system

12 Check the air pressure drop across the burner whilst the fan is operating with a water column pressure gauge connected to the two pressure test points on the air pressure switch (DPS) This pressure should be between 14 and 16 rnbar

If the air differential pressure measured above is not within the operating range check inlet and outlet ductwork as appropriate and any filters fitted If the pressure differential is still not within limits isolate the air handler and report to RS STOKVIS Ltd before proceeding

13 Check the operation and setting of the Low Air Pressure Switch by injecting a controlled signal into the switch Check the break point on the switch is 1 mbar (falling)

Note The switch is set and sealed before fitting The 1 mbar switch point may not coincide with the 1 mbar scale reading on the switch

If on checking the switch is not operating correctly do not tamper with it return it to RS STOKVIS Ltd for replacement

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 20

4 COMMISSIONING 3000S

42 DRY RUN

With all the manual gas isolation valves still in the OFF position switch the SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch to WINTER

43 START UP

1 Attach a manometer to pressure test point F and the low pressure test point on the air pressure switch (DPS)

2 Open the main gas supply valve (MV1) and the pilot burner isolation valve (PV3) Leave the main burner isolation valve (MV6) closed Reset the air handler by pressing the push-button marked RESET on either the main panel or remote station The air handler pilot will light automatically (after the automatic damper start check and combustion air pre-purge) and then LOCKOUT after the main gas shut-off valves are addressed

During the short period that the pilot is in operation check the pilot gas pressure on the manometer It should be 10 mbar and the pilot flame approximately 100 - 150mm in length covering the first three or four holes of the mixing plate and have a steady blue colour when viewed through the sight glass on the access side of the air handler Adjust as necessary - refer to Section 51 this manual Check the flame signal - refer to Section 431

3 Open the main burner isolation valve (MV6) RESET the air handler which should now light to main burner stage When alight close the main burner isolation valve to shut down the gas flow to the burner Check that the unit goes to LOCKOUT

4 Reset the air handler and drive the burner to low fire by adjusting the temperature controller set point as described in Appendix 4 of this manual Check the flame is continuous across the width of the burner and has a flame length of approx 50 - 65mm from the burner rail when viewed through the sight glass on the access side of the air handler Check the burner pressure across pressure test point D and the downstream (low) pressure test point on the air pressure switch ie on the rear of the pressure switch This pressure is specifled in Section 1 of this manual Adjust as necessary-refer to Section 53 of this manual Check the flame signal - refer to Section 431

Where possible check the actual gas flow rate by meter reading with all other appliances turned off

5 Drive the burner to high fire by adjusting the temperature controller set point and high limit to 55degC as described in Appendix 4 of this manual Check the flame is continuous across the burner rail and has a flame length of approximately 250 - 350mm from the burner rail Check the burner pressure across pressure test point D and the downstream (low) pressure test point on the air pressure switch This pressure is specified in Section 1 of this manual Adjust as necessary - refer to Section 52 of this manual Check the maximum air handler discharge temperature Check the flame signal shyrefer to Section 431

Where possible check the actual gas flow rate by meter reading with all other appliances turned off

6 Check the operation of the overheat limit control by adjusting the temperature controller set point and high limit to 65degC as described in Appendix 4 of this manual Monitor the discharge temperature on the temperature controller Check that the overheat control operates as the set temperature is passed Check that the control must be manually reset by pressing the green reset button on the front of the switch Return the temperature controller to its original settings

In the event that the ambient temperature is too low for this simple procedure to work the instrument will have to be bench tested using a Temperature 8ath Remove and replace the control as Section 84 of this manual for bench-testing

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 21

4 COMMISSIONING 3000S

43 1 FLAME SIGNAL CHECK

1 The ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler is fitted with a Klippon SAKT1 Test Terminal which can be used to measure the flame scanning signal Refer to the Electrical Schematic and connect a 0-1 mA ammeter to the two test points with standard 23 mm test plugs with the positive lead on the detector side Disconnect the terminal link to obtain the signal reading A minimum signal of 70 microamps is required typical signals are in the 250-400 microamp range on both pilot and main flame After completion replace the terminal link and remove the test jacks

2 Drive the burner to high fire as previously described Measure the carbon dioxide content of the discharge air stream This figure must not exceed 2800 ppm If the discharge exceeds this limit isolate the air handler and report to RS STOKVIS Ltd before proceeding

Stop and start the air handler a few times to check for reliability using the Operating Instructions (Section 6)

432 HANDOVER

Complete the air handler Service Check Sheet supplied at the back of this manual The self-copy sheet must be returned to STOKVIS for checking

Instruct the User in efficient use and care of the unit start-up and shutdown (including emergency shutdown) and recommended service interval Emphasise the need to keep the air handler clear of stored items and extraneous material and to maintain the recirculation and fresh air paths to the air handler inlets Hand all instructions as applicable to the UserOwner for safekeeping

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 22

5 ADJUSTMENTS 3000S

If adjustments to the air handler settings are required they should be made by a RS STOKVIS Ltd approved engineer

The normal value for all control settings is specified in Section 1 of this manual

51 PILOT ADJUSTMENT

The pilot gas pressure and flame length may be adjusted by altering the discharge pressure of the pilot governor Screwing the adjusting screw clockwise (located under the top cap) increases the discharge pressure and the flame length anti-clockwise decreases the pressure and the flame length

52 BURNER HIGH FIRE PRESSURE ADJUSTMENT

At high fire alter the spring compression on the main burner governor (MV2) by removing the cap and adjust the spring compression plate clockwise to increase the burner pressure anti-clockwise to decrease burner pressure If the pressure does not increase on adjusting the spring the supply is inadequate

Note On small air handlers fitted with a mUlti-functional control the pressure adjusting screw is located under a swing cap on the first block valve

53 BURNER LOW FIRE ADJUSTMENT

The main burner low fire is adjusted on the flow control valve MV5 (Process amp Instrumentation Diagram)

Remove the top cover of the valve and insert a Terminal Screwdriver in the adjusting screw of the TOP cam marked NI

Drive the burner to low fire by adjusting the temperature controller set-point and high limit to 05degC as described in Appendix 4 of this manual

Turn the Terminal Screwdriver clockwise to decrease the low fire gas flow anti-clockwise to increase the flow

Check the heat input and flame signal at the new position are satisfactory and return the tenlperature controller to its normal settings

Replace the control valve cover

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 23

5 ADJUSTMENTS 3000S

54 SUMMERIOFFIWINTER SWITCH

In the SUMMER position this switch provides ventilation only and is independent of the programmed ON and OFF periods This position is manually selected and must be manually de-selected Whenever the switch is in this position the fan is operating

In the OFF position the air handler is shutdown and will not operate This overrides any frost protection fitted It is suitable for air handler shutdown for short periods such as holidays The programme memory is unaffected by this switch and assumes control of the air handler when the switch is returned to the WINTER position

In the WINTER position the air handler operates off the programme memory to provide heating

55 RESET BUTTON

Visual indication of air handler lockout is provided In the event of lockout occurring the air handler can be reset by depressing the RESET button This parallels the RESET button on the air handler main control panel If after 4 attempts to reset the air handler the lockout indicator still illuminates then a Service Engineer should be called to investigate the problem

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 24

6 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 3000S

61 AIR HANDLER START-UP

1 Open all manual gas valves both on the appliance and on the supply to the appliance Switch on the Electric Supply to the appliance

2 On the main air handler panel

Switch the panel isolator to the 1 position

Check POWER ON light

3 On the remote control station

For Heating Switch the SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch to WINTER

The air handler will now start automatically in response to the time settings

In the event of LOCKOUT

Press the RESET button and the cycle of operations will be repeated If the air handler goes to LOCKOUT four times in succession call for a Service Engineer

For Unheated Ventilation Switch the SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch to SUMMER

Note This prevents the burner firing giving a controlled supply of ventilation air to the heated space as long as the switch is in this position The air handler will now start automatically in response to the timeclock demand To turn the fan off return the switch to the centre OFF position

In the event of LOCKOUT

Press the RESET button and the cycle of operations will be repeated If the air handler goes to LOCKOUT four times in succession call for a Service Engineer

62 AIR HANDLER SHUTDOWN

621 SHUTDOWN FOR SHORT PERIODS

Switch the SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch on the remote station to OFF

622 SHUTDOWN FOR PROLONGED PERIODS

Switch the main panel isolator to the 0 position and close all manual gas valves both on and leading to the appliance

Note Manual gas valves should only be operated when the appliance is to be shut off for either Servicing or for a prolonged shutdown

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 25

30005 6 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

63 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS

631 SITE CLEARANCE ADJACENT TO AIR HANDLER

Attention should be paid to keeping the area around the air handler tidy No rubbish should be allowed to accumulate in the vicinity of the air handler and storage of goods etc should not be permitted within two metres of the air handler Failure to comply could result in reduced airflow to the air handler causing inefficient running and potential overheat cond ition

632 AIR SUPPLY TO AIR HANDLER

Air vents and grilles supplying air to the air handler should never be blocked and should be checked periodically to ensure they are clear

633 AIR FILTERS

Similarly attention should be paid to cleaning or replacing the filters to the air handler if fitted Your installer should advise you on the frequency with which this would be required to be completed

634 SERVICE

For continued safe and efficient operation of this air air handler it is important that servicing of the air handler should be completed at regular intervals by a competent person in accordance with Section 82 of this manual Users are advised to enter into a Service Agreement with RS STOKVIS Ltd

635 SPARE PARTS

It is suggested that a complete set of spare parts essential to the running of the air handler and recommended by the installer are kept by the user on the premises where the air handler is installed This is particularly important where the air handler forms an essential part of any process plant and its being out of operation may cause problems by for example frost damage or condensation by super-cooling

A list of Recommended Spares will be found in Section 9 of this manual

636 GAS LEAKS

If a smell of gas is detected around the area of the appliance Switch off all manual gas valves and contact your service engineer or the local gas undertaking

NEVER

LOOK FOR GAS LEAKS WITH A LIGHTED MATCH OR NAKED

FLAME

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 26

7 FAULT FINDING 30008

The main control panel incorporates two lights to help in fault finding

POWER ON

LOCKOUT

The remote station also has three lights

AIR FAN ON

BURNER ON

LOCKOUT

This section gives the possible causes of failure associated with each check light The electrical schematic diagram in this manual and the wiring diagram shipped in the main air handler panel should be used in conjunction with the notes below Additionally Service Engineers should familiarise themselves with the detailed Start Sequence given in Appendix 2 of this manual

The notes are given for each light before consulting the notes check for bulb failure

71 POWER ON LIGHT IS UNLIT

Check

1 Main control panel isolator is in the 1 position

2 Main Panel 6A MCB has not tripped if a trip has occurred the switch will be at the OFF position Reset and test system as required

3 Also check if the mains electrical supply is isolated If so FIND OUT WHY before taking any action

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 27

7 FAULT FINDING 30005

72 AIR FAN ON LIGHT IS UNLIT

Check

1 SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch is not in Position OFF

2 Timeperiod is not set to off

3 Air handler is not at LOCKOUT

4 Recheck both AIR FAN ON and LOCKOUT bulbs

Two fault indications are possible

1 THE FAN IS NOT OPERATING

If the fan should have started but is not operating

Check 1 Overload for tripped conditions Reset the overload and monitor the next start-up

2 Motor Fuses

3 Relays 1 2 amp3 for failure

laClor CC1 for failure

5 Air Pressure Switch (DPS) is failed in the N 0 Position

Replace the faulty component as described in Section 8

2 THE FAN IS OPERATING

This indicates that the air pressure switch (DPS) has failed to change over

Measure the profile plate differential pressure as described in Section 4113 If the pressure is correct the air pressure switch is faulty Check the switch as in 4114 If the pressure is not correct

Check 1 Correct fan belt tension

2 Correct fan rotation

3 The air handler air inlets and discharge are not blocked

4 Correct fitting on filters

5 The air differential pressure switch impulse lines are not blocked or leaking

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 28

7 FAULT FINDING 30008

73 LOCKOUT LIGHT IS ILLUMINATED

This light indicates a failure in the burner ignition and flame supervision system

RESET the unit and follow the progress of the start sequence The full cycle may take two minutes

1

------t

2 LOCKOUT after 35-40 seconds indicates an ignition failure RESET the system and observe the pilot and ignition spark during the start-up attempt

I-- shy

3 Observe the spark This should be strong and highly visible If not remove and clean the spark plug as Section 82 Check that the spark plug gap is correctly set at 15 mm

-- shy

4 Check the pilot flame If the pilot flame ignites and the unit goes to LOCKOUT the scanning system is at fault Remove and clean the detector as Section 82 Check the flame signal as in Section 431

5 If the pilot does not light the gas supply system is faulty Check the pilot system for restriction and the pilot valve operation

6 If the pilot lights and the unit goes to LOCKOUT after the main gas valves are addressed either the flow control valve is blocked or one of the main gas block valves has failed Fit a manometer on the pressure test point on the outlet flange of the multishyfunctional control and observe if the pressure rises when the main gas valves are addressed No pressure rise will indicate failure of the main gas valves

74 AIR FAN ON LIGHT ILLUMINATED

If the burner does not start check

1 SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch is in WINTER position

2 Overheat Limit Control

These interlocks prevent the burner management system starting

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 29

8 SERVICING 3000S

IMPORTANT Servicing and maintenance should be only carried out by a RS STOKVIS Ltd approved engineer

Only use replacement parts provided by the appliance manufacturer

Check that the air openings for combustion and for ventilation of any plant roon or compartment are clear

81 ISOLATION

811 FUEL GAS ISOLATION

The fuel gas to the ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler should be isolated and locked off at the manual ball valve mounted at the start of the fuel gas line Additionally before entering or servicing the air handler the burner manual isolation valve and pilot line isolation valve should be closed

812 ELECTRICAL ISOLATION

All electric power to the air handler and the remote control station is switched through the local isolator This isolator is fitted with a lock facility to permit it to be locked in the OFF position

Additionally isolate the power at the Wall Isolator

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 30

8 SERVICING 30005

82 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE

The air handler should be routinely serviced at the start of each heating season Isolate the air handler as above before servicing Details of access to individual components are given in Section 84 of this manual

1 Remove and clean spark igniter Check that the gap is correctly set at 25 mm Replace every two years

2 Clean the flame detector lens to ensure freedom from dirt and moisture If the cell shows any sign of cracks it should be replaced Routinely replace the cell every two years or after 10000 hours of operation which ever comes first

3 Inspect the entire air handler paint system for general damage Repair as necessary

4 Every two years brush the burner plates and clear the burner holes carefully with a Size 18mm drill for NP II and 20mm drill for NP I

WARNING THE BURNER HOLES MUST NOT BE ENLARGED

5 Inspect and lubricate all damper linkages to ensure freedom of operation Wipe off all excess lubricants to prevent dirt build up on linkage parts

6 Check the fan belt for cracks and splits Check tension The correct tension gives 16mm deflection per metre of span when the belt is centrally loaded with a force of 27N Adjust as necessary

7 Grease both the fan shaft bearings with Mobiith AW2 grease or similar

NEVER use high temperature grease

NEVER mix two different greases within the bearing always flush existing grease out

Note Removing the cover plate on the end of the air handler gains access to the outboard fan bearing

Light to Slow to 0 120 2 to 6 months Clean Dry

Medium Medium 120 200 1 to 2 months

Moderate to Light to Slow to 0 120 1 to 4 weeks Dry

Dirty Medium Medium 120 200 1 to 7 days

Extreme Dirt Dry Light to Slow to 0 200 Daily Flushing out

Medium Medium Dirt

83 ANNUAL SERVICE CHECKS

After Servicing test fire the air handler following the Commissioning Procedure detailed in Section 4 of this manual to ensure correct operation generally Special attention must be paid to the damper system and related controls and interlocks

Additionally check that the fresh air and recirculation air entry path to the air handler has been kept clear and instruct the User of the need for this as necessary

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 31

8 SERVICING 3000S

84 REMOVAL PROCEDURE FOR REPLACEABLE COMPONENTS

IMPORTANT

Turn off the gas at the appliance service valve and the electricity at the main panel and wall isolator before proceeding

841 BURNER

The burner is located inside the air handler casing and is mounted on two brackets from the support straps To remove the burner isolate the air handler as in 81 and undo the union on the fuel gas line adjacent to the burner isolation valve (MV6) and unscrew the main and pilot gas feed pipes from the burner rail Access to the rear of the burner assembly is made by removing the partition plate below the burner separating the fresh air inlet to the burner from the return air inlet compartment This is held in place by screws which engage in captive nuts on the top side of the partition Remove the Flame Detector and pull off the ignition plug cap Disconnect the burner support brackets and remove the burner The burner will easily pass through the access hatch for further strip down Replace in the reverse order soundness test the gas pipework check the burner operation and duty as described in the commissioning section of this manual

842 FLAME DETECTOR

This is a 240 Volt instrument

The flame detector is mounted on the end of the burner rail inside the air handler casing To remove the detector isolate the panel electric supply and lock off Push the scanner towards the burner and rotate to release the bayonet fixing and lift the detector from its mount Remove the two screws holding the detector cover and disconnect the supply leads noting the polarity of the connections

Replace the flame detector in the reverse order ensuring correct polarity of connections Ensure the access panel is securely closed and the retaining nuts are tightened down Check operation by inserting a test meter in the points provided in the main control panel and reading the flame signals during start up to full rate burner operation (See 431) Operate the appliance over six starts for reliability of operation including tum off of start and main gas valves to check for lockout operation

843 IGNITER SPARK PLUG

This is a high tension spark plug

The igniter spark plug is mounted on the end of the burner rail inside the air handler casing To remove the spark plug isolate the air handler as above Enter the service access door Access to the spark plug is made through the profile plate To remove the spark plug pull off the high tension lead and unscrew the plug with a plug spanner

When replacing the spark plug check the plug gap is set at 15mm Check ignition reliability over six start ups

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 32

8 SERVICING 3000S

844 IGNITER SPARK TRANSFORMER

This is a 240 Volt instrument

The ignition transformer is located in a plastic box mounted on the air handler casing adjacent to the main control panel To remove the transformer isolate the air handler as above and unscrew the four retaining screws holding the box lid in place and remove the lid Disconnect the supply cable at the terminal strip and undo the transformer retaining screws The transformer may then be unscrewed from the High Tension cable leading to the spark plug

Replacement is a simple reversal of this procedure

Check ignition reliability over six start ups

845 COMBUSTION AIR PRESSURE SWITCH (DPS)

Note The switch is set and sealed and should be replaced if not operating correctly

This switch is a 240 Volt instrument

The air switch is mounted directly on the air handler casing and can be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove the switch isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the supply cable Break the downstream pipe compression fitting and unscrew the switch housing from its locating fitting Reverse the procedure to replace after ensuring switch setting is as specified in Section 13 of this manual Operate the air handler to ensure reliability of operation over six start ups

846 AIR HANDLER OVERHEAT LIMIT CONTROL

This is a 240 Volt instrument

The overheat limit control can be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove the control isolate the air handler as above and lock off Remove the switch cover Disconnect the supply cable and unscrew the control housing from its locating fitting Reverse the procedure to replace check the switch is set to 50degC Test the switch operation as described in Section 43 over at least three operations

847 AIR FAN AND MOTOR

The air fan motor is a 415 Volt 3 phase motor

The motor and slide rails are easily accessible inside the air handler casing If it is necessary to remove the motor isolate the air handler as above Slacken the fan-belt tension and remove the drive belts Pull the motor away from the air handler casing to make access to the motor terminal box and disconnect the supply cable The motor may now be removed from the unit Following replacement the air handler must be fully re-commissioned as in Section 4

It is unlikely that the air fan will need replacing or servicing If required a full procedure should be obtained from RS STOKVIS Ltd

Replacement must be followed by full re-commissioning as in Section 4

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 33

8 SERVICING 3000S

848 FUEL GAS MULTI-FUNCTIONAL CONTROL - SMALL UNITS

This is a 240 Volt instrument

The fuel gas multi-functional control can be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove the unit isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the Hirschman electric termination Unbolt the control from its flanges and remove

When replacing care must be taken to ensure the flange 0 rings are undamaged and in the correct location Following replacement the air handler must be fully reshycommissioned as in Section 4 including tests for soundness prior to start-up

849 GOVERNOR AND BLOCK VALVES

The block valves are 240 Volt instruments

All these items may be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove any item isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the electric termination to the two block valves the pilot block valve and the flow control block valve Break the two pipe unions and remove the fuel gas line complete for further strip-down

8410 FUEL GAS FLOW CONTROL VALVE

This is a 24 Volt instrument

The fuel gas How control valve can be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove the valve isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the supply cables to the control valve

On small air handlers fitted with a multi-functional control support the multi-functional control and unbolt its discharge flange Break the union downstream of the burner isolation valve and remove the section of line containing the flow control valve for further strip-down

On large air handlers fitted with separate block valves it will be necessary to remove the fuel gas line complete as Section 8410 above

Following replacement re-commission the air handler

Note If the fresh air damper is not in the full open position the heat input must not exceed the maximum heat input at recirculation condition specified in the technical data section of this manual

8411 PILOT GAS GOVERNOR AND BLOCK VALVE

The block valve is a 240 Volt instrument

Both items may be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove either item isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the electric terrriination to the solenoid valve Undo the upstream pipe union and the compression fitting downstream of the manual block valve (PV3) Remove the pilot gas line complete for further strip down

Replace broken or distorted connections and retest for soundness Ensure the pilot gas pressure is correct and the flame is sensing an output Ensure reliability over six start-ups

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 34

8 SERVICING 3000S

8412 BELT TENSIONING PROCEDURE

The setting tensions are designed to cover a wide range of drives A precise setting force for individual applications can be calculated as detailed

SETTING FORCES

Belt Section

Setting Force To Deflect Belt 16mm per Metre Of Span

Small Pulley Diameter (mm)

Basic Setting Forces Newtons (N) Kilograms (kgf)

125 x Setting Forces Newtons (N) Kilograms (kgf)

SPZ

56 to 71 16 16 20 20 75 to 90 18 18 22 22

95 to 125 20 20 25 25 Over 125 22 22 28 28

SPA

80 to 100 22 22 28 28 106 to 140 30 30 38 38 150 to 200 36 37 45 46 Over 200 40 40 50 51

SPB

112 to 160 40 40 50 51 170 to 224 50 51 62 63 236 to 355 62 63 77 79 Over 355 65 66 81 83

SPC 224 to 250 70 71 87 89 265 to 355 92 94 115 120 Over 375 115 120 144 150

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 35

8 SERVICING 3000S

BELT TENSIONING USING FENNER BELT TENSION INDICATOR

Calculate the deflection in mm on a basis of 16mm per metre of centre distance Centre Distance (m) x 16 =Deflection (mm)

Set lower marker ring at the deflection distance required in mm on the lower scale

Set upper ring against to bottom edge of the top tube

Place the belt tension indicator on top of the belt at the centre of span and apply a force at right angles to the belt defecting it to the point where the lower marker ring is level with the top of the adjacent belt

Read off the force value indicated by the top edge of the upper marker ring

Compare this force to the kgf value shown in the table above

If a Fenner Belt Tension Indicator is not available a spring balance and rule will be suffice

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 36

8 SERVICING 30005

85 MAIN PANEL CONTROLS

All panel controls are readily accessible and may be easily exchanged for replacement components in the event of failure Ensure any replacement item is of the same make and type as the original

851 LANDIS amp GYR LFL 1335 AUTOMATIC SEQUENCE CONTROLLER

The Landis amp Gyr Automatic Sequence Controller is a plug-in unit locating on a pre-wired chassis To remove the controller undo the two retaining screws at the top left and lower right corners and pull the module off the chassis

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

852 CONTROLS CIRCUIT (24 VOLT) TRANSFORMER

The Controls Circuit Transformer is fixed to the panel back plate by tapped screws To remove the transformer undo the wiring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel Undo the two retaining screws and remove the unit complete

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

853 CONTROL RELAYS R1 R2 amp R3

The Control Relays are DIN Rail mounted To remove a relay undo the wIring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel Release the DIN rail retaining clip under the relay with a screwdriver and remove the relay

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

854 6A MCB

The 6A MCB is DIN Rail mounted To remove the MCB undo the wiring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel Release the DIN rail retaining clip under the MCB with a screwdriver and remove the MCB

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

855 THERMAL OVERLOAD

The thermal overload is attached to the underside of the main contactor To remove the overload undo the wiring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel and that the overload setting is as specified in Section 13 of this manual Unscrew the three connections to the contactor and remove the overload

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 37

8 SERVICING 3000S

856 MAIN CONTACTOR

The Main Contactor is DIN Rail mounted To remove the contactor remove the thermal overload as 855 above and then undo the wiring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel Release the DIN rail retaining clip under the contactor with a screwdriver and remove the contactor

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

857 MOTOR FUSE

To replace a motor fuse pull the fuse carrier off the fuse holder base The fuse is attached to the fuse carrier by two screws Unscrew remove and replace

86 REMOTE CONTROL STATION

The remote control station contains some serviceable parts although these items should only be fitted by an approved RS STOKVIS Ltd Engineer

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 38

9 RECOMMENDED SPARES 3000S

For two years operation it is recommended that the following items should be held in stock

ITEM DESCRIPTION PART NO QUANTITY i

1 INDICATOR BULBS W1121 1 PACK

2 SPARK PLUG 023739 1 I

3 UVDETECTOR QRA10C 1 I

4 ROOM SENSOR DRT2453 1

5 DUCT SENSOR DDT1701 1

All replacement parts can be obtained from RS STOKVIS Ltd by quoting the air handler serial number the part number and description

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 39

APPENDIX 1 30005

SOUNDNESS TESTING THE FUEL GAS PIPEWORK

This procedure should only be carried out by personnel familiar with the ECONO-AIR 3000S Series Air handler

The pressure test points and all valves are identified on the Process and Instrumentation Diagram for the air handler included in Section 1 of this n1anual

Isolate the air handler electric supply at the main control panel and lock off Close the manual isolation valves MV1 MV6 and PV3 Ensure the supply pressure is available on the upstream side of MV1

A11 TESTING THE UPSTREAM PIPEWORKAND BURNER CONTROLS 1 Connect a 60 mbar manometer to the pressure test nipple A Monitor the

pressure for two minutes Any rise in pressure indicates that valve MV1 is leaking and must be replaced Remove pressure test points Band F

2 Open MV1 to pressurise the pipework on both the main gas and pilot line to the first block valve

3 Close MV1 Allow one minute for the temperature to stabilise and then test the system for 2 minutes and watch for a drop in the pipework pressure If the pressure falls open valve MV1 and test the pipework connections and valves from MV1 to MV3 and MV1 to PV2 for leaks with a proprietary leak detector fluid or spray Turn off MV1 seal any leaks and re-test

4 If no extemalleaks are found either the pilot block valve PV1 or either the first main gas block valve MV3 is letting by

5 To test this seal pressure test point A and fit a manometer to pressure test point B Leave for two minutes with MV1 open A rise in pressure on the manometer confirms a leak on the block valve MV3 Turn off MV1 exchange the valve and re-test from point 2 above

6 Repeat this procedure for the pilot block valve Seal test point B and fit a manometer to pressure test point F Leave for two minutes with MV1 open A rise in pressure on the manometer confirms a leak on the pilot block valve PV2 Turn off MV1 exchange the valve and re-test from point 1 above Seal test point F

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 40

APPENDIX 1 30005

A12 TESTING THE DOWNSTREAM BURNER VALVE 1 Close MV1 and connect pressure test points A and 8 with flexible 6 mm bore

tubing teed into the manometer Remove pressure test point C Open MV1 to pressurise the downstream block valve MV4

2 Close MV1 and leave for one minute for the temperature to stabilise Monitor the pressure for 2 minutes If the pressure falls open valve MV1 and leak test the line between the two block valves MV3 and MV4 with a proprietary leak detector Turn off MV1 seal any leaks and re-test Note Smaller air handlers in the 3000S Series are fitted with multi-functional valves combining the pressure regulator and two block valves in one component The above procedure still applies but if a leak is found on either block valve the whole control should be replaced If no external leaks are found the downstream block valve is letting by

3 To confirm this close MV1 remove the manometer and refit to pressure test point C Connect pressure test points A and 8 with flexible 6mm bore tubing Open MV1 and allow one minute for the temperature to stabilise Monitor the pressure for a further 2 minutes with MV1 still open A rise in pressure confirms that the second block valve MV4 is letting by Turn off MV1 Replace the valve and re-test from 2 above

A13 TESTING THE DOWNSTREAM BURNER PIPEWORK 1 Close MV1 and connect pressure test points A and D with flexible 6 mm bore

tubing teed into the manometer Open MV1 to pressurise the downstream pilot pipework

2 Close MV1 and leave for one minute for the temperature to stabilise Monitor the pressure for 2 minutes If the pressure falls open valve MV1 and leak test the line between the downstream block valve MV4 and the manual block MV6 with a proprietary leak detector fluid or spray If no external leaks are found the manual block valve MV6 is letting by Turn off MV1 seal any leakages and reshytest from 2 above

A14 TESTING THE DOWNSTREAM PILOT PIPEWORK 1 Close MV1 and connect pressure test points A and F with flexible 6mm bore

tubing teed into the manometer Open MV1 to pressurise the downstream pilot pipework

2 Close MV1 and leave for one rninute for the temperature to stabilise Monitor the pressure for 2 minutes If the pressure falls open valve MV1 and leak test the line between the downstream block valve PV2 and the manual block PV3 with a proprietary leak detector fluid or spray If no external leaks are found the manual block valve PV3 is letting by Turn off MV1 seal any leakages and reshytest from 2 above

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 41

APPENDIX 1 30005

A15 TESTING THE BURNER CONNECTIONS 1 Remove the burner access panel as described in Section 84 of this manual

Remove the burner spark igniter Slacken the two retaining bolts holding the burner to the burner support straps and unbolt the burner supply endplate from the burner casting and mixing plates

2 Connect pressure test points A and 0 with flexible 6mm bore tubing teed into the manometer Open MV1 and MV6 to pressurise the burner pipework Leak test the main gas burner pipework and connections with proprietary leak detector fluid Turn off MV6 Seal any leakages and re-test

3 Connect pressure test points A and F with flexible 6 mm bore tubing teed into the manometer Open MV1 and PV3 to pressurise the pilot burner pipework Leak test the pilot gas burner pipework and connections with proprietary leak detector fluid Turn off PV3 Seal any leakages and re-test

4 Turn off MV1

5 Replace the spark igniter and profile division plate

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 42

APPENDIX 2 30005

START SEQUENCE

The burner start sequence is controlled by the Landis and Gyr burner management unit The timings are pre-set and comply with 885885 This unit must NOT be tampered with

A brief description of the start-up sequence isshy

The unit checks

1 The NO FLAME signal on the UV flame scanner

Note If the scanner detects a flame at any time other than in the correct operating sequence the flame programmer initiates a lockout

2 The operation of the combustion air proving switch in the NO AIR position

3 The air handler discharge high temperature switch

If the checks are completed the unit starts the combustion air fan and then checks the combustion airflow

Once the airflow is proven the unit checks that the damper control circuit is functioning correctly After the damper microswitch is made to prove the fresh air damper is fully open the sequence allows 30 seconds for the combustion air to purge any combustible gas from the air handler

After completion of the purge the spark ignition system is energised the pilot valve opened and the spark terminated If the pilot flame is not proven by the UV scanner the system will initiate a LOCKOUT

If the flame is proven the main gas valves are opened the pilot extinguished and the main burner flame proven

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 43

i

APPENDIX 2 30008

The following flow chart shows the complete start sequence including the lighting of the various indicating lamps

MANUAL STATUS LIGHT POWER ON

POWER ON

I INITIATE START BY TIME

SETTING ON CONTROLLER

I CHECK NO FLAME

VISIBLE

PROVEj FAIL LOCKOUT

I CHECK RELAY R4 NC

POSITION

PROVE FAIL NO START

I CHECK AIR PRESSURE SWITCH NC POSITION

PROVE FAIL NO START

I CHECK RELAY R1 NC

POSITION

PROVE j

FAIL NO START

I START COMBUSTION

AIR BLOWER

I CHECK AIR PRESSURE SWITCH NO POSITION

PROVE I

FAIL NO START

I STATUS LIGHT FAN ON

I ENERGISE RELAY R1

I

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 44

I

I

APPENDIX 2 30008

I CHECK OVERHEAT LIMIT

CONTROL R5

PROVE I

FAIL I I

CHECK 541412 LOOP CLOSED ON

LANDIS ampGYR CIRCUIT

PROVE I

FAIL I I

COMBUSTION AIR PURGE PERIOD

30 SECONDS

I

NO START

NO START

CANCEL NO FLAME CHECK CIRCUIT

I

ENERGISE SPARK

I TIMED PERIOD 25 SECONDS

I ENERGISE PILOT GAS

VALVE

I TIMED PERIOD 25 SECONDS

I TERMINATE SPARK

I INTERROGATE UV FLAME SCANNER

PROVE I

FAIL I I

TIMED PERIOD 10 SECONDS

I

LOCKOUT

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 45

I

I

APPENDIX 2 3000S

I ENERGISE MAIN GAS

VALVES

I

STATUS LIGHT BURNER ON

I TIMED PERIOD

5 SECONDS

I DE-ENERGISE PILOT

GAS VALVES

CONTINUOUS FROM PILOT

I INTERROGATE UV FLAME SCANNER

PROVE I

FAIL I I

LOCKOUT I

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 46

APPENDIX 3 30005

Please see copy of Standard Service Sheet

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 47

APPENDIX 4 30005

A41 TIME OUT SCREEN

This is the standard screen displayed when the touch screen is not in use The back light is off to save energy_ To access the STATUS screen touch the ENTER key and the following screen is displayed

[]][I][]rn[IJOO[][IJOO[] EJ~E11 I[]I ~ middot I

NOTE

The Touch Screen operates using the heat produced by the touch of a finger and therefore only LIGHT pressure is required

Excessive pressure can damage the Touch Screen

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 48

APPENDIX 4 30008

A42 STATUS SCREEN

On the typical STATUS screen the illustrated information detailed is as follows

19 36 Fan Brn

RS OS

100 Fst_~_ Lck _ _ Xst Gas~o ~ I

RS Indicates the current room temperature

OS ~( t~~ the current duct discharge temperature

Fan Indicates the current status of the fan by showing the arrow and the fan blades for ON and OFF is shown by the arrow and fan blades being removed

Brn Indicates the current status of the burner with the black flames indicating the burner to be ON and vice versa

Lck LOCKOUT - This indicates a flame failure when highlighted during normal or start-up operation

Xst EXCESS TEMPERATURE SWITCH - This indicates the unit has reached the trip limit on the over heat stat when highlighted during operation

Indicates the current position of the gas modulating valve during normal Gas

operation (0-100)

Indicates whether the Frost stat is energised and the unit is running on frost Fst

override

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 49

APPENDIX 4 30008

A43 CHANGING SETTINGS

It is possible to change the settings for the time of operation and the required temperature set points The following details the steps required

A44 ENTERING THE SECURITY CODE

From the STATUS screen touch the return key and the screen below will be displayed

Type the HIGH LEVEL security code (4321) If you make a mistake use the BACK SPACE key to delete any incorrect number(s) Touch the ENTER key when the code is correct

If the security code is incorrect the screen above will be displayed then try again If after several attempts you can not gain access please contact RS STOKVIS Ltd for further information

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 50

APPENDIX 4 30008

When the code is entered correctly the MAIN MENU is displayed as detailed below

~ STATUS SET VALUES~ ~ TIVIE CLOCK [) [) [) [) [)

The MAIN MENU screen shows the three menu items available The title for each menu item can be changed to suit the end user Please notify RS STOKVIS Ltd prior to commissioning should these parameters require special amendments

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 51

APPENDIX 4 30008

A45 CHANGING OR SETTING A TIME SCHEDULE

From the main menu screen select the TIME CLOCK page by running finger across screen symbol and touch the ENTER key the screen below will be displayed

On the following screen highlight the TS1 symbol and touch the ENTER key

The current time schedule will now be displayed as shown below The display will automatically default to the current day (1 =Monday 2 =Tuesday etc) In this case day 5 (Friday) the four schedule switching times refer to that day

IAC6BBB1BHIS1

mm0CIl bull mID 17BB 17BB 17HB

Iillleschedule

To modify a time select it by highlighting and touch the ENTER key and the following screen is displayed

To amend the appropriate onoff time as shown on the screen below The arrows to the right of the time are for altering the hours and the arrows on the left for the minutes

Once you have set the time use the ESCape key to exit back to the time schedule screen and choose another day by touching the required number Another time may now be modified as before

IAC6BBB1BHIS1

H8BH

I i eschedule

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 52

APPENDIX 4 30008

Use the ESCape key to exit back to the MAIN MENU screen

~ STATUS ~ SET VALUES

TIME CLOCK []~ [] [] [] []

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 53

APPENDIX 4 30005

A46 CHANGING SET VALUES

From the main menu screen select the SET VALUES page by highlight in the normal way and touch the ENTER key

The following screen is displayed

36 19 18III III IIIHsv Rsv Llv

To change the RSV highlight it in the normal way and touch the ENTER key and the screen below will now be shown

IAC6RRR1RR40 T I

0 19 (Y)l RSV

ROOM SET VALUE

The above screen shows the parameters that can be changed The values to the far left are the limitations of set point (OC) Change the set point by using the UP and DOWN ARROWS on the left of the screen or touch the set value itself followed by the ENTER key to select the set value and set it directly using the numeric keyboard All values can be changed in this way

Use the ESCape key twice to exit back to the MAIN MENU screen

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 54

APPENDIX 4 30005

A47 COMMISSIONING AND SERVICING BURNER CHECKS

Select the SET VALUES screen from the MAIN MENU screen and adjust the high lirrlit set point to 55degC to drive the burner to high fire

IAC6HHH1HH60 ~T I

0 19 (Y)

HSV

HIGH SET VALUE ~

Ensure the set value is returned to 36degC once the appropriate checks and adjustments as described in Section 43 of this manual have been completed Return to the SET VALUES screen and select the low limit value to adjust the low fire setting

Reduce the low limit value to OdegC to drive the gas valve to low fire and complete the appropriate checks and adjustments as described in Section 43 of this manual and ensure the set value is returned to the original value

A48 GMT ltgt BST CHANGEOVER DAYLIGHT SAVINGS

To change your unit to British Summer TimelWinter Time the following system screen must be highlighted by touching the Iamp1 button twice

By touching the clock symbol in the top left hand corner followed by the ENTER key the screen below will be displayed

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 55

APPENDIX 4 30008

188311 851193

544

By touching and highlighting in this case 18 followed by the ENTER key A small box allowing the entry of two digits will appear Enter the desired time required using the numbered keys followed by ENTER key Your unit is now set to operate on BSTBWT

Touch the ESC key three times to return back to the Status screen

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 56

STOKVIS ENERGY SYSTEMS 96R WALTON ROAD EAST MOLESEY SURREY KT8 0DL TEL 020 8783 3050 08707 707 747 FAX 020 8783 3051 08707 707 767 E-MAIL infostokvisboilerscom WEBSITE wwwstokvisboilerscom

JULY 1999

Page 12: ECONOAIR 3000S SERIES AIR HANDLING UNIT DIRECT FIREDstokvisboilers.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/EconoAir... · 2019-05-10 · ECONOAIR 3000S SERIES AIR HANDLING UNIT DIRECT FIRED

30005 2 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

21 INTRODUCTION

The STOKVIS ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler is a direct fired unit designed to give clean healthy environmental conditions and constant even temperature within the heated space

The main air handler assembly houses the circulating air fan the gas burner the fuel gas line and all necessary safety controls The burner management system and space temperature controller is located in the main control panel mounted on or adjacent to the side of the air handler A second control station supplied loose for mounting remote from the air handler within the heated space or other convenient location houses indicating lights the control touch screen and auxiliary operational switches

A sight glass is fitted on the air handler casing to view the burner during operation

For multi unit networked applications the touch screen is excluded

22 GAS BURNER ASSEMBLY

The ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler incorporates the Maxon NP-II burner This burner is specially designed for heating fresh air and is mounted such that a proportion of the incoming air is forced into contact with the flame to ensure rapid mixing and combustion within the code requirements The burner assembly is built up from modular components to give the required heat duty

Each burner assembly is fitted with an integral pilot spark igniter and UV detector The flame detector is used for scanning both the pilot and main flame Note that the pilot burner operates in interrupted mode

The burner module fitted is identified in the Technical Data Section of this manual and on the Valve and Instrun1ent list

23 CONTROL SYSTEM

The controls fitted on the air handler are detailed on the Process amp Instrumentation Diagram in the Technical Data Section of this manual

231 SAFETY CONTROLS

The safety interlocks on the ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler are

1 Combustion air proving switch (PS) 2 Ultra-violet burner flame detector (UV) 3 Overheat limit control (OLe)

Failure of either the combustion air switch or fiame scanning circuit will cause the air handler to go to LOCKOUT and the burner management system will require a RESET before a re-light can be attempted

The air handler discharge overheat limit control is a manual reset switch After a failure the switch will have to be RESET before a re-light can be attempted

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 8

2 GENERAL DESCRIPTION 3000S

232 TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEM

The ECONO-AIR 30008 Series air handler is fitted with a full three-term modulating temperature control system as standard The space temperature is sensed by a heated space detector (TR) which inputs to the panel mounted temperature controller (TC) This achieves control by modulation of the fuel gas flow control valve (MV5) The temperature controller additionally limits the air handler discharge air temperature measured by the discharge temperature detector (TO) to pre-set high and low limits

233 MAIN CONTROL PANEL

The control panel houses the combustioncirculation air fan starter the burner management system and the heated space temperature controller On larger units a separate starter panel may be supplied The panel door is fitted with an interlocked isolator POWER ON and LOCKOUT lights and the burner management RESET button The panel is mounted on or adjacent to the air handler

234 FUEL GAS SYSTEM

The PILOT LINE comprises 1 Pilot governor (PV1 ) 2 One British Gas certificated solenoid valve (PV2) 3 One pilot gas isolation valve (PV3) 4 Pipework and fittings

Note Two pressure test points are fitted on the pilot line on the inlet and discharge of the pilot solenoid valve

The MAIN GAS LINE comprises

1 Gas isolation valve (MV1 ) 2 Pressure governor (MV2) 3 Double block safety shut-oft system (MV34) 4 Gas flow control valve (MV5) 5 Burner isolation valve (MV6) 6 Pipework and fittings

Note Four pressure test points are fitted on the n1ain gas line on the supply the inlet and discharge of the second block valve and downstream of the flow control valve

Note On small air handlers items 2 and 3 are combined in one multi-functional control

All items above are detailed on the Process amp Instrumentation Diagram in Section 1 of this manual

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 9

2 GENERAL DESCRIPTION 3000S

235 REMOTE CONTROL STATION

The ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler is also supplied with a remote control station which houses the air handler operating controls indicating status and the workspace temperature detector if the control station is located in the heated space

236 HEATED SPACE TEMPERATURE SENSOR The heated space temperature sensor is to be located remotely within the space to be heated

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 10

3 INSTALLATION 30005

31 STATUTORY REQUIREMENTS

I n accordance with the Gas Safety (I nstallation and Use) Regulations 1998 installation of this ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler should only be undertaken by competent personnel who are fully aware of their responsibilities under the Health and Safety at Work Act 1974

The installation of this air handler must comply with

BS6230-1991 Installation of gas-fired forced convection air air handlers for commercial and industrial Space Heating of rated input exceeding 60kW

The lEE Regulations for Electrical Installations

Gas Safety (Installation and Use) Regulations 1998

Health and Safety at Work Act 1974

Building Regulations 1986

Building Standards (Scotland Only)

The I nstitution of Gas Engineers Codes of Practice

IGEUP1 Soundness Testing Procedures for Industrial and Commercial Gas Installations

IGEUP2 Gas Installation Pipework Boosters and Compressors on Industrial and Commercial Premises

IGEUP4 Commissioning Of Gas Fired Plant On Industrial and Commercial Premises

32 RECEPTION AND STORAGE OF GOODS

32laquo1 RECEPTION

On receipt of the shipment check that the shipment is complete against the Delivery Advice Note Check for mechanical damage sustained during transit before off-loading the goods Inform the carrier of any such damage

322 OFFLOADING

Horizontal air handlers are fitted with four lifting eyes to permit an overhead lift Alternatively horizontal air handlers may be handled by a fork lift truck on the steel angle support frame

323 STORAGE

Air handlers must be stored in a dry environment The remote control station must be removed from the shipment and stored indoors in a dry environment Outdoor units of split case design (Size 54 and above) must have open ends protected from the environment until installation is complete Any filter elements should be stored in a dry environment

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 11

3 INSTALLATION 3000S

33 LIMITATIONS OF USE

The ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler must not be installed in the following locations

I n hazardous areas

In areas where flammable vapours can be present in excess of their threshold limit values as defined in 8S5925

I n accordance with 8S6230 Clause 513 where there are any flued appliances in the heated area and where air is supplied mechanically and there is mechanical extraction the design extract rate must be 5 to 10 less than the design inlet rate so that the room will not be at a lower pressure than the outside air If the air handler is the only source of mechanically supplied air the extract rate must not exceed 95 of the nominal air flow specified in Section 11 of this manual

Note If it proposed to install the ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler to supply heated air to a hazardous area or in areas where flammable vapours are present the installation must first be approved by a RS STOKVIS Ltd Engineer

34 LOCATION OF AIR HANDLERS

The air handler should normally be installed in the location recommended by the RS STOKVIS Ltd specifying engineer

Check the proposed location for level and load bearing strength Ensure that there is adequate clearance as detailed on the air handler GA in Section 1 this manual around the unit for access for maintenance purposes If the air handler is to be installed above floor level a suitably designed service platform should be provided Such a platform must have 100mm minimum raised edges around the perimeter If this is not possible all air handler access panels must be fitted with hinged restraints This is a factory standard option which should be specified at the time of ordering - check the restraints are fitted before proceeding with installation

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 12

3 INSTALLATION 3000S

35 FRESH AIR INLET AND VENTILATION

351 FRESH AIR INLET

The air handler must be installed where it has a direct and unlimited supply of fresh air from outside the building Ensure that the air intake is not located near exhausts from the building or from any process exhausts such as paint booth exhausts Whenever possible protect the fresh air inlet from the prevailing wind and local wind effects from corners

The fresh air inlet should be sized for an air velocity of 3ms The inlet duct area is detailed on the General Arrangement drawing located in Section 1 of this manual

Where the fresh air inlet is made in a load bearing wall eg a brick wall guidance should be obtained from Structural Engineers on the provision of a lintel in the wall over the fresh air opening

A weather hood must be fitted when the air handler air inlet is at or within 1 m of the outside wall Additionally the weather hood should have negligible resistance to the airflow maximum 01 mbar at the design air flow rate

Do not install the ECONO-AI R 3000S Series air handler where long lengths of duct or bends of an angle greater than 30deg are necessary to lead to the air handler from the fresh air opening If ducting is unavoidable ensure that the resulting pressure drop is negligible Le less than 01 mbar for ductless air handlers and has been accounted for in the original design for ducted air handlers as detailed in the specification section of this manual Section 11

Note If the air intake is located in an area of unrestricted access warning notices preventing the blockage of the air intake by temporary stacking should be displayed adjacent to the intake

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 13

3 INSTALLATION 3000S

352 VENTI LA TION

Where the air air handler is in its own plant room or compartment this shall be ventilated with openings communicating directly with the outside air to ventilate the room

The openings shall be fitted with grilles of negligible resistance and shall be sited so that they cannot easily be blocked or flooded They shall have a total minimum free area as follows

Low Level (inlet) 320cm2 + 27cm2 per kilowatt in excess of 60kW total rated input

High Level (outlet) 160cm2 + 134cm2 per kilowatt in excess of 60kW total rated input

The free area of the grilles shall be not less than the size of the recommended minimum ventilation opening Grilles shall be designed to minimise high velocity air streams in the plant room For exposed ie free standing plant rooms ventilation openings shall be provided on at least two sides and preferably on all four sides

Where mechanical ventilation is used it shall be by mechanical inlet and either natural or mechanical extraction Systems of ventilation employing mechanical extraction and natural air inlet shall not be used

The minimum flow rates of air supplied shall be not less than 06 m3s per megawatt of rated heat input

36 AIR DISCHARGE

The air handler should be located with the air discharge into the heated space at a minimum height of 3 metres The air should not discharge directly onto any obstructions and direct discharge on to working personnel should be avoided

If the air discharge is located in an area of unrestricted access warning notices preventing the blockage of the air discharge by temporary stacking should be displayed adjacent to the discharge

Generally it is not necessary to fit distribution ducting to the discharge of the air handler If ducting is required or specified ensure that the resulting pressure drop has been accounted for in the original design specification as detailed in Section 1 of this manual

37 ASSEMBLY AND POSITIONING OF AIR HANDLER

Unless specified at the time of order air handlers will be shipped in sections Discharge heads grilles attenuators duct connecting sections filters rain-hoods etc will be supplied loose for site fitting to the air handler

Horizontal air handlers must be supported on their steel angle support base When the air handler is located check for level and adjust as necessary

Alternatively horizontal air handlers can be supplied with extensions of the support frame for suspending from overhead supports This must be specified at the time of order Do not suspend the air handler from the lifting eyes

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 14

3 INSTALLATION 3000S

38 REMOTE STATION

The ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler is supplied with a remote control station This should be mounted in a position convenient to the end user If possible it should not be mounted on an external wall or where the space temperature detector is affected by cold draughts or a local source of heat

39 VISUAL CHECK

After completion of installation re-check the air handler for signs of damage Report any instance to RS STOKVIS Ltd

310 CONNECTION OF SERVICES

The air handler requires the connection of fuel gas and electricity

3101 FUEL GAS SUPPLY

The ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler has been designed for use on Natural Gas An alternative version is available for LPG The gas type for the air handler supplied is clearly marked on the air handler data badge and on the Specification sheet in Section 1 of this manual Check the gas type is correct and that the supply pressure is within the range marked on the specification

The local gas Authority should be consulted about the adequacy of the gas service and meter supplies for existing and proposed extensions to the installation and for any requirements for boosting the gas supply_

Connect the fuel gas supply to the inlet manual valve on the air handler gas train The connection size is detailed in Section 1 of this manual A further isolation valve and union should be fitted immediately adjacent to the appliance which when the valve is closed allows the complete burner and control assembly to be disconnected for maintenance or repair

New gas pipework should be installed to British Gas Publication IGEUP2 and be purged and pressure tested in accordance with British Gas Publications IGEUP1

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 15

3 INSTALLATION 3000S

3102 ELECTRICITY SUPPLY

All external wiring shall be carried out and checked by a competent person All components shall be checked for suitability for voltage range and frequency

Means for electric isolation having a contact separation of at least 3mm in all poles must be provided adjacent to the air handler The electrical supply to the appliance shall incorporate suitable means of excess current protection

The ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler requires a 3 phase 4 wire supply which should be connected to the main control panel Check the air handler data badge for the correct electrical supply The maximum supply requirement is Specified in Section 1 of this manual Note that the 240 Volt air handler control circuit is taken from the lUI phase to Neutral Connection should be made as shown on the wiring diagram shipped inside this panel

The air handler must be earthed in accordance with BS5986 and CP1013

Check all terminal strip terminations for wires which have become loose during shipment

311 CONNECTION TO THE MAIN PANEL AND REMOTE STATION

Interconnecting wiring to the main panel and remote station should be made with a minimum specification of 075 mm2 300 Volt cable Check that no wires on the terminal strip have become loose during shipment The remote panel should be mounted at a height of approx 18m If possible it should not be mounted on an external wall or where the sensor will be affected by cold draughts or a local source of heat

Both panel and remote station must be earthed in accordance with BS5986 and CP1013

312 HEATED SPACE TEMPERATURE SENSOR

The space temperature sensor located on the remote panel should be connected with screened cable or twin low voltage signal cable run in its own separate conduit It should be mounted on the remote panel or adjacent to the outlet at a height of approx 18m If possible it should not be mounted on an external wall or where the sensor will be affected by cold draughts or a local source of heat

313 DUCT SENSOR

The duct sensor should be connected with screened cable or twin low voltage signal cable run in its own separate conduit It should be mounted in the air handler discharge as close as possible to the discharge into the heated space

314 OVERHEAT LIMIT CONTROL SENSOR

The overheat limit control sensor should be connected with twin core cable It should be mounted in the air handler discharge within 1 metre of the air handler outlet connection

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 16

3 INSTALLATION 3000S

315 TOUCH SCREEN WIRING

The touch screen located on the front of the remote station requires two separate twisted pairs of O5mrh2 screened cable run in a separate conduit If the distance between the main and remote stations is greater that 1 km please contact RS STOKVIS Ltd for advice

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 17

3 INSTALLATION 3000S

316 ALIGNMENT

3161 INSTALLATION OF DRIVE BELTS

On 80 amp 89 30008 range of air handlers it will be necessary to align the pulleys and fit the drive belts before carrying out commissioning of the unit

3162 PU LLEYS

Before assembling the drive check the pulley grooves are free from scores or sharp edges and all dimensions conform to the relevant standard

The Taper Lock bush is your starting point when it comes to assembly and installation Drive installation is a straightforward job with Taper Lock - but the stages set out on the installation leaflet provided with every Taper Lock bush should be followed closely

3163 ALIGNMENT

Good alignment of pulleys prior to belt installation is important to avoid belt flank wear The diagram below shows correct installation of pulleys

INTERNAl BEARING

MOTOR PUlLEY rAN PULLEY

MOTORMOTOR ADJUSTMENT MOUNTING BOlTSBOLTS

3164 BELTS

When the pulleys have been correctly positioned on the shafts the belts can be installed to complete the drive

The drive centre distance should be reduced prior to the installation of the belts so that they may be fitted without the use of force Under no circumstances must belts be prised into the grooves Using sharp tools to stretch the belts over the pulley rim can easily damage belts and pulley grooves

The installation allowance given in the table below is the minimum recommended reduction in centre distance for various belt section and lengths to allow for correct fitting

The take-up allowance given in the same table should be added on to the calculated centre distance to allow for belt stretch

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 18

3 INSTALLATION 3000S

3165 INSTALLATION AND TAKE UP ALLOWANCE

Belt Pitch Installation Allowance Take-Up Length (mm) SPZ SPA SPB SPC (mm)

410 to 530 5

540 to 840 10

850 to 1160 15

1170 to 1500 20

1510 to 1830 20 25

1840 to 2170 30

2180 to 2830 25 40

2840 to 3500 30 50

3520 to 4160 50 60

4170 to 5140 70

5220 to 6150 85

6180 to 7500 105

600 to 8500 125

8880 to 10170 145

10600 to 12500 175

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 19

4 COMMISSIONING 30005

This appliance must be commissioned by a RS STOKVIS Ltd approved engineer

41 PRESTART CHECKS

1 Switch the SUMMERIOFFMlINTER switch on the remote station to OFF

2 Check the correct electric supply is available to the air handler and the appliance isolator installed

3 Check the correct fuel gas supply is available to the air handler and local isolation valve and union installed Check that new gas pipe work has been correctly purged and pressure tested and that the isolation valve is in the OFF position

4 Check the air handler gas control system and burner connections for pressure soundness as detailed in Appendix 1 of this manual

5 Complete the first section of the Service Check Sheet supplied at the back of this manual (Appendix 3)

6 Close the air handler access door

7 Close and lock the main air handler control panel

8 Switch the main panel isolator to position 1 Check the POWER ON light illuminates

9 Check and set the timed ONOFF periods in the lAC Controller located on the remote panel Ensure that the unit is set to be on during testing Refer to Appendix 4 for the lAC setting procedure

10 Close and lock the remote panel

11 Switch the SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch on the remote station to SUMMER to start the air fan Return the switch to the OFF position and check for correct rotation of the fan as the fan slows and stops

The fan rotation can be observed through the fan section access door or through the air handler access door Only do this during the fan run-down period Ensure the door is securely fastened after completion

Rotation arrows are fitted on the end of the air handler and inside the air handler above the interior bearing support If the rotation is incorrect two phases should be interchanged as dictated by the Engineer responsible for the site electrical system

12 Check the air pressure drop across the burner whilst the fan is operating with a water column pressure gauge connected to the two pressure test points on the air pressure switch (DPS) This pressure should be between 14 and 16 rnbar

If the air differential pressure measured above is not within the operating range check inlet and outlet ductwork as appropriate and any filters fitted If the pressure differential is still not within limits isolate the air handler and report to RS STOKVIS Ltd before proceeding

13 Check the operation and setting of the Low Air Pressure Switch by injecting a controlled signal into the switch Check the break point on the switch is 1 mbar (falling)

Note The switch is set and sealed before fitting The 1 mbar switch point may not coincide with the 1 mbar scale reading on the switch

If on checking the switch is not operating correctly do not tamper with it return it to RS STOKVIS Ltd for replacement

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 20

4 COMMISSIONING 3000S

42 DRY RUN

With all the manual gas isolation valves still in the OFF position switch the SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch to WINTER

43 START UP

1 Attach a manometer to pressure test point F and the low pressure test point on the air pressure switch (DPS)

2 Open the main gas supply valve (MV1) and the pilot burner isolation valve (PV3) Leave the main burner isolation valve (MV6) closed Reset the air handler by pressing the push-button marked RESET on either the main panel or remote station The air handler pilot will light automatically (after the automatic damper start check and combustion air pre-purge) and then LOCKOUT after the main gas shut-off valves are addressed

During the short period that the pilot is in operation check the pilot gas pressure on the manometer It should be 10 mbar and the pilot flame approximately 100 - 150mm in length covering the first three or four holes of the mixing plate and have a steady blue colour when viewed through the sight glass on the access side of the air handler Adjust as necessary - refer to Section 51 this manual Check the flame signal - refer to Section 431

3 Open the main burner isolation valve (MV6) RESET the air handler which should now light to main burner stage When alight close the main burner isolation valve to shut down the gas flow to the burner Check that the unit goes to LOCKOUT

4 Reset the air handler and drive the burner to low fire by adjusting the temperature controller set point as described in Appendix 4 of this manual Check the flame is continuous across the width of the burner and has a flame length of approx 50 - 65mm from the burner rail when viewed through the sight glass on the access side of the air handler Check the burner pressure across pressure test point D and the downstream (low) pressure test point on the air pressure switch ie on the rear of the pressure switch This pressure is specifled in Section 1 of this manual Adjust as necessary-refer to Section 53 of this manual Check the flame signal - refer to Section 431

Where possible check the actual gas flow rate by meter reading with all other appliances turned off

5 Drive the burner to high fire by adjusting the temperature controller set point and high limit to 55degC as described in Appendix 4 of this manual Check the flame is continuous across the burner rail and has a flame length of approximately 250 - 350mm from the burner rail Check the burner pressure across pressure test point D and the downstream (low) pressure test point on the air pressure switch This pressure is specified in Section 1 of this manual Adjust as necessary - refer to Section 52 of this manual Check the maximum air handler discharge temperature Check the flame signal shyrefer to Section 431

Where possible check the actual gas flow rate by meter reading with all other appliances turned off

6 Check the operation of the overheat limit control by adjusting the temperature controller set point and high limit to 65degC as described in Appendix 4 of this manual Monitor the discharge temperature on the temperature controller Check that the overheat control operates as the set temperature is passed Check that the control must be manually reset by pressing the green reset button on the front of the switch Return the temperature controller to its original settings

In the event that the ambient temperature is too low for this simple procedure to work the instrument will have to be bench tested using a Temperature 8ath Remove and replace the control as Section 84 of this manual for bench-testing

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 21

4 COMMISSIONING 3000S

43 1 FLAME SIGNAL CHECK

1 The ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler is fitted with a Klippon SAKT1 Test Terminal which can be used to measure the flame scanning signal Refer to the Electrical Schematic and connect a 0-1 mA ammeter to the two test points with standard 23 mm test plugs with the positive lead on the detector side Disconnect the terminal link to obtain the signal reading A minimum signal of 70 microamps is required typical signals are in the 250-400 microamp range on both pilot and main flame After completion replace the terminal link and remove the test jacks

2 Drive the burner to high fire as previously described Measure the carbon dioxide content of the discharge air stream This figure must not exceed 2800 ppm If the discharge exceeds this limit isolate the air handler and report to RS STOKVIS Ltd before proceeding

Stop and start the air handler a few times to check for reliability using the Operating Instructions (Section 6)

432 HANDOVER

Complete the air handler Service Check Sheet supplied at the back of this manual The self-copy sheet must be returned to STOKVIS for checking

Instruct the User in efficient use and care of the unit start-up and shutdown (including emergency shutdown) and recommended service interval Emphasise the need to keep the air handler clear of stored items and extraneous material and to maintain the recirculation and fresh air paths to the air handler inlets Hand all instructions as applicable to the UserOwner for safekeeping

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 22

5 ADJUSTMENTS 3000S

If adjustments to the air handler settings are required they should be made by a RS STOKVIS Ltd approved engineer

The normal value for all control settings is specified in Section 1 of this manual

51 PILOT ADJUSTMENT

The pilot gas pressure and flame length may be adjusted by altering the discharge pressure of the pilot governor Screwing the adjusting screw clockwise (located under the top cap) increases the discharge pressure and the flame length anti-clockwise decreases the pressure and the flame length

52 BURNER HIGH FIRE PRESSURE ADJUSTMENT

At high fire alter the spring compression on the main burner governor (MV2) by removing the cap and adjust the spring compression plate clockwise to increase the burner pressure anti-clockwise to decrease burner pressure If the pressure does not increase on adjusting the spring the supply is inadequate

Note On small air handlers fitted with a mUlti-functional control the pressure adjusting screw is located under a swing cap on the first block valve

53 BURNER LOW FIRE ADJUSTMENT

The main burner low fire is adjusted on the flow control valve MV5 (Process amp Instrumentation Diagram)

Remove the top cover of the valve and insert a Terminal Screwdriver in the adjusting screw of the TOP cam marked NI

Drive the burner to low fire by adjusting the temperature controller set-point and high limit to 05degC as described in Appendix 4 of this manual

Turn the Terminal Screwdriver clockwise to decrease the low fire gas flow anti-clockwise to increase the flow

Check the heat input and flame signal at the new position are satisfactory and return the tenlperature controller to its normal settings

Replace the control valve cover

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 23

5 ADJUSTMENTS 3000S

54 SUMMERIOFFIWINTER SWITCH

In the SUMMER position this switch provides ventilation only and is independent of the programmed ON and OFF periods This position is manually selected and must be manually de-selected Whenever the switch is in this position the fan is operating

In the OFF position the air handler is shutdown and will not operate This overrides any frost protection fitted It is suitable for air handler shutdown for short periods such as holidays The programme memory is unaffected by this switch and assumes control of the air handler when the switch is returned to the WINTER position

In the WINTER position the air handler operates off the programme memory to provide heating

55 RESET BUTTON

Visual indication of air handler lockout is provided In the event of lockout occurring the air handler can be reset by depressing the RESET button This parallels the RESET button on the air handler main control panel If after 4 attempts to reset the air handler the lockout indicator still illuminates then a Service Engineer should be called to investigate the problem

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 24

6 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 3000S

61 AIR HANDLER START-UP

1 Open all manual gas valves both on the appliance and on the supply to the appliance Switch on the Electric Supply to the appliance

2 On the main air handler panel

Switch the panel isolator to the 1 position

Check POWER ON light

3 On the remote control station

For Heating Switch the SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch to WINTER

The air handler will now start automatically in response to the time settings

In the event of LOCKOUT

Press the RESET button and the cycle of operations will be repeated If the air handler goes to LOCKOUT four times in succession call for a Service Engineer

For Unheated Ventilation Switch the SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch to SUMMER

Note This prevents the burner firing giving a controlled supply of ventilation air to the heated space as long as the switch is in this position The air handler will now start automatically in response to the timeclock demand To turn the fan off return the switch to the centre OFF position

In the event of LOCKOUT

Press the RESET button and the cycle of operations will be repeated If the air handler goes to LOCKOUT four times in succession call for a Service Engineer

62 AIR HANDLER SHUTDOWN

621 SHUTDOWN FOR SHORT PERIODS

Switch the SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch on the remote station to OFF

622 SHUTDOWN FOR PROLONGED PERIODS

Switch the main panel isolator to the 0 position and close all manual gas valves both on and leading to the appliance

Note Manual gas valves should only be operated when the appliance is to be shut off for either Servicing or for a prolonged shutdown

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 25

30005 6 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

63 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS

631 SITE CLEARANCE ADJACENT TO AIR HANDLER

Attention should be paid to keeping the area around the air handler tidy No rubbish should be allowed to accumulate in the vicinity of the air handler and storage of goods etc should not be permitted within two metres of the air handler Failure to comply could result in reduced airflow to the air handler causing inefficient running and potential overheat cond ition

632 AIR SUPPLY TO AIR HANDLER

Air vents and grilles supplying air to the air handler should never be blocked and should be checked periodically to ensure they are clear

633 AIR FILTERS

Similarly attention should be paid to cleaning or replacing the filters to the air handler if fitted Your installer should advise you on the frequency with which this would be required to be completed

634 SERVICE

For continued safe and efficient operation of this air air handler it is important that servicing of the air handler should be completed at regular intervals by a competent person in accordance with Section 82 of this manual Users are advised to enter into a Service Agreement with RS STOKVIS Ltd

635 SPARE PARTS

It is suggested that a complete set of spare parts essential to the running of the air handler and recommended by the installer are kept by the user on the premises where the air handler is installed This is particularly important where the air handler forms an essential part of any process plant and its being out of operation may cause problems by for example frost damage or condensation by super-cooling

A list of Recommended Spares will be found in Section 9 of this manual

636 GAS LEAKS

If a smell of gas is detected around the area of the appliance Switch off all manual gas valves and contact your service engineer or the local gas undertaking

NEVER

LOOK FOR GAS LEAKS WITH A LIGHTED MATCH OR NAKED

FLAME

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 26

7 FAULT FINDING 30008

The main control panel incorporates two lights to help in fault finding

POWER ON

LOCKOUT

The remote station also has three lights

AIR FAN ON

BURNER ON

LOCKOUT

This section gives the possible causes of failure associated with each check light The electrical schematic diagram in this manual and the wiring diagram shipped in the main air handler panel should be used in conjunction with the notes below Additionally Service Engineers should familiarise themselves with the detailed Start Sequence given in Appendix 2 of this manual

The notes are given for each light before consulting the notes check for bulb failure

71 POWER ON LIGHT IS UNLIT

Check

1 Main control panel isolator is in the 1 position

2 Main Panel 6A MCB has not tripped if a trip has occurred the switch will be at the OFF position Reset and test system as required

3 Also check if the mains electrical supply is isolated If so FIND OUT WHY before taking any action

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 27

7 FAULT FINDING 30005

72 AIR FAN ON LIGHT IS UNLIT

Check

1 SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch is not in Position OFF

2 Timeperiod is not set to off

3 Air handler is not at LOCKOUT

4 Recheck both AIR FAN ON and LOCKOUT bulbs

Two fault indications are possible

1 THE FAN IS NOT OPERATING

If the fan should have started but is not operating

Check 1 Overload for tripped conditions Reset the overload and monitor the next start-up

2 Motor Fuses

3 Relays 1 2 amp3 for failure

laClor CC1 for failure

5 Air Pressure Switch (DPS) is failed in the N 0 Position

Replace the faulty component as described in Section 8

2 THE FAN IS OPERATING

This indicates that the air pressure switch (DPS) has failed to change over

Measure the profile plate differential pressure as described in Section 4113 If the pressure is correct the air pressure switch is faulty Check the switch as in 4114 If the pressure is not correct

Check 1 Correct fan belt tension

2 Correct fan rotation

3 The air handler air inlets and discharge are not blocked

4 Correct fitting on filters

5 The air differential pressure switch impulse lines are not blocked or leaking

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 28

7 FAULT FINDING 30008

73 LOCKOUT LIGHT IS ILLUMINATED

This light indicates a failure in the burner ignition and flame supervision system

RESET the unit and follow the progress of the start sequence The full cycle may take two minutes

1

------t

2 LOCKOUT after 35-40 seconds indicates an ignition failure RESET the system and observe the pilot and ignition spark during the start-up attempt

I-- shy

3 Observe the spark This should be strong and highly visible If not remove and clean the spark plug as Section 82 Check that the spark plug gap is correctly set at 15 mm

-- shy

4 Check the pilot flame If the pilot flame ignites and the unit goes to LOCKOUT the scanning system is at fault Remove and clean the detector as Section 82 Check the flame signal as in Section 431

5 If the pilot does not light the gas supply system is faulty Check the pilot system for restriction and the pilot valve operation

6 If the pilot lights and the unit goes to LOCKOUT after the main gas valves are addressed either the flow control valve is blocked or one of the main gas block valves has failed Fit a manometer on the pressure test point on the outlet flange of the multishyfunctional control and observe if the pressure rises when the main gas valves are addressed No pressure rise will indicate failure of the main gas valves

74 AIR FAN ON LIGHT ILLUMINATED

If the burner does not start check

1 SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch is in WINTER position

2 Overheat Limit Control

These interlocks prevent the burner management system starting

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 29

8 SERVICING 3000S

IMPORTANT Servicing and maintenance should be only carried out by a RS STOKVIS Ltd approved engineer

Only use replacement parts provided by the appliance manufacturer

Check that the air openings for combustion and for ventilation of any plant roon or compartment are clear

81 ISOLATION

811 FUEL GAS ISOLATION

The fuel gas to the ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler should be isolated and locked off at the manual ball valve mounted at the start of the fuel gas line Additionally before entering or servicing the air handler the burner manual isolation valve and pilot line isolation valve should be closed

812 ELECTRICAL ISOLATION

All electric power to the air handler and the remote control station is switched through the local isolator This isolator is fitted with a lock facility to permit it to be locked in the OFF position

Additionally isolate the power at the Wall Isolator

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 30

8 SERVICING 30005

82 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE

The air handler should be routinely serviced at the start of each heating season Isolate the air handler as above before servicing Details of access to individual components are given in Section 84 of this manual

1 Remove and clean spark igniter Check that the gap is correctly set at 25 mm Replace every two years

2 Clean the flame detector lens to ensure freedom from dirt and moisture If the cell shows any sign of cracks it should be replaced Routinely replace the cell every two years or after 10000 hours of operation which ever comes first

3 Inspect the entire air handler paint system for general damage Repair as necessary

4 Every two years brush the burner plates and clear the burner holes carefully with a Size 18mm drill for NP II and 20mm drill for NP I

WARNING THE BURNER HOLES MUST NOT BE ENLARGED

5 Inspect and lubricate all damper linkages to ensure freedom of operation Wipe off all excess lubricants to prevent dirt build up on linkage parts

6 Check the fan belt for cracks and splits Check tension The correct tension gives 16mm deflection per metre of span when the belt is centrally loaded with a force of 27N Adjust as necessary

7 Grease both the fan shaft bearings with Mobiith AW2 grease or similar

NEVER use high temperature grease

NEVER mix two different greases within the bearing always flush existing grease out

Note Removing the cover plate on the end of the air handler gains access to the outboard fan bearing

Light to Slow to 0 120 2 to 6 months Clean Dry

Medium Medium 120 200 1 to 2 months

Moderate to Light to Slow to 0 120 1 to 4 weeks Dry

Dirty Medium Medium 120 200 1 to 7 days

Extreme Dirt Dry Light to Slow to 0 200 Daily Flushing out

Medium Medium Dirt

83 ANNUAL SERVICE CHECKS

After Servicing test fire the air handler following the Commissioning Procedure detailed in Section 4 of this manual to ensure correct operation generally Special attention must be paid to the damper system and related controls and interlocks

Additionally check that the fresh air and recirculation air entry path to the air handler has been kept clear and instruct the User of the need for this as necessary

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 31

8 SERVICING 3000S

84 REMOVAL PROCEDURE FOR REPLACEABLE COMPONENTS

IMPORTANT

Turn off the gas at the appliance service valve and the electricity at the main panel and wall isolator before proceeding

841 BURNER

The burner is located inside the air handler casing and is mounted on two brackets from the support straps To remove the burner isolate the air handler as in 81 and undo the union on the fuel gas line adjacent to the burner isolation valve (MV6) and unscrew the main and pilot gas feed pipes from the burner rail Access to the rear of the burner assembly is made by removing the partition plate below the burner separating the fresh air inlet to the burner from the return air inlet compartment This is held in place by screws which engage in captive nuts on the top side of the partition Remove the Flame Detector and pull off the ignition plug cap Disconnect the burner support brackets and remove the burner The burner will easily pass through the access hatch for further strip down Replace in the reverse order soundness test the gas pipework check the burner operation and duty as described in the commissioning section of this manual

842 FLAME DETECTOR

This is a 240 Volt instrument

The flame detector is mounted on the end of the burner rail inside the air handler casing To remove the detector isolate the panel electric supply and lock off Push the scanner towards the burner and rotate to release the bayonet fixing and lift the detector from its mount Remove the two screws holding the detector cover and disconnect the supply leads noting the polarity of the connections

Replace the flame detector in the reverse order ensuring correct polarity of connections Ensure the access panel is securely closed and the retaining nuts are tightened down Check operation by inserting a test meter in the points provided in the main control panel and reading the flame signals during start up to full rate burner operation (See 431) Operate the appliance over six starts for reliability of operation including tum off of start and main gas valves to check for lockout operation

843 IGNITER SPARK PLUG

This is a high tension spark plug

The igniter spark plug is mounted on the end of the burner rail inside the air handler casing To remove the spark plug isolate the air handler as above Enter the service access door Access to the spark plug is made through the profile plate To remove the spark plug pull off the high tension lead and unscrew the plug with a plug spanner

When replacing the spark plug check the plug gap is set at 15mm Check ignition reliability over six start ups

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 32

8 SERVICING 3000S

844 IGNITER SPARK TRANSFORMER

This is a 240 Volt instrument

The ignition transformer is located in a plastic box mounted on the air handler casing adjacent to the main control panel To remove the transformer isolate the air handler as above and unscrew the four retaining screws holding the box lid in place and remove the lid Disconnect the supply cable at the terminal strip and undo the transformer retaining screws The transformer may then be unscrewed from the High Tension cable leading to the spark plug

Replacement is a simple reversal of this procedure

Check ignition reliability over six start ups

845 COMBUSTION AIR PRESSURE SWITCH (DPS)

Note The switch is set and sealed and should be replaced if not operating correctly

This switch is a 240 Volt instrument

The air switch is mounted directly on the air handler casing and can be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove the switch isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the supply cable Break the downstream pipe compression fitting and unscrew the switch housing from its locating fitting Reverse the procedure to replace after ensuring switch setting is as specified in Section 13 of this manual Operate the air handler to ensure reliability of operation over six start ups

846 AIR HANDLER OVERHEAT LIMIT CONTROL

This is a 240 Volt instrument

The overheat limit control can be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove the control isolate the air handler as above and lock off Remove the switch cover Disconnect the supply cable and unscrew the control housing from its locating fitting Reverse the procedure to replace check the switch is set to 50degC Test the switch operation as described in Section 43 over at least three operations

847 AIR FAN AND MOTOR

The air fan motor is a 415 Volt 3 phase motor

The motor and slide rails are easily accessible inside the air handler casing If it is necessary to remove the motor isolate the air handler as above Slacken the fan-belt tension and remove the drive belts Pull the motor away from the air handler casing to make access to the motor terminal box and disconnect the supply cable The motor may now be removed from the unit Following replacement the air handler must be fully re-commissioned as in Section 4

It is unlikely that the air fan will need replacing or servicing If required a full procedure should be obtained from RS STOKVIS Ltd

Replacement must be followed by full re-commissioning as in Section 4

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 33

8 SERVICING 3000S

848 FUEL GAS MULTI-FUNCTIONAL CONTROL - SMALL UNITS

This is a 240 Volt instrument

The fuel gas multi-functional control can be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove the unit isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the Hirschman electric termination Unbolt the control from its flanges and remove

When replacing care must be taken to ensure the flange 0 rings are undamaged and in the correct location Following replacement the air handler must be fully reshycommissioned as in Section 4 including tests for soundness prior to start-up

849 GOVERNOR AND BLOCK VALVES

The block valves are 240 Volt instruments

All these items may be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove any item isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the electric termination to the two block valves the pilot block valve and the flow control block valve Break the two pipe unions and remove the fuel gas line complete for further strip-down

8410 FUEL GAS FLOW CONTROL VALVE

This is a 24 Volt instrument

The fuel gas How control valve can be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove the valve isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the supply cables to the control valve

On small air handlers fitted with a multi-functional control support the multi-functional control and unbolt its discharge flange Break the union downstream of the burner isolation valve and remove the section of line containing the flow control valve for further strip-down

On large air handlers fitted with separate block valves it will be necessary to remove the fuel gas line complete as Section 8410 above

Following replacement re-commission the air handler

Note If the fresh air damper is not in the full open position the heat input must not exceed the maximum heat input at recirculation condition specified in the technical data section of this manual

8411 PILOT GAS GOVERNOR AND BLOCK VALVE

The block valve is a 240 Volt instrument

Both items may be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove either item isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the electric terrriination to the solenoid valve Undo the upstream pipe union and the compression fitting downstream of the manual block valve (PV3) Remove the pilot gas line complete for further strip down

Replace broken or distorted connections and retest for soundness Ensure the pilot gas pressure is correct and the flame is sensing an output Ensure reliability over six start-ups

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 34

8 SERVICING 3000S

8412 BELT TENSIONING PROCEDURE

The setting tensions are designed to cover a wide range of drives A precise setting force for individual applications can be calculated as detailed

SETTING FORCES

Belt Section

Setting Force To Deflect Belt 16mm per Metre Of Span

Small Pulley Diameter (mm)

Basic Setting Forces Newtons (N) Kilograms (kgf)

125 x Setting Forces Newtons (N) Kilograms (kgf)

SPZ

56 to 71 16 16 20 20 75 to 90 18 18 22 22

95 to 125 20 20 25 25 Over 125 22 22 28 28

SPA

80 to 100 22 22 28 28 106 to 140 30 30 38 38 150 to 200 36 37 45 46 Over 200 40 40 50 51

SPB

112 to 160 40 40 50 51 170 to 224 50 51 62 63 236 to 355 62 63 77 79 Over 355 65 66 81 83

SPC 224 to 250 70 71 87 89 265 to 355 92 94 115 120 Over 375 115 120 144 150

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 35

8 SERVICING 3000S

BELT TENSIONING USING FENNER BELT TENSION INDICATOR

Calculate the deflection in mm on a basis of 16mm per metre of centre distance Centre Distance (m) x 16 =Deflection (mm)

Set lower marker ring at the deflection distance required in mm on the lower scale

Set upper ring against to bottom edge of the top tube

Place the belt tension indicator on top of the belt at the centre of span and apply a force at right angles to the belt defecting it to the point where the lower marker ring is level with the top of the adjacent belt

Read off the force value indicated by the top edge of the upper marker ring

Compare this force to the kgf value shown in the table above

If a Fenner Belt Tension Indicator is not available a spring balance and rule will be suffice

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 36

8 SERVICING 30005

85 MAIN PANEL CONTROLS

All panel controls are readily accessible and may be easily exchanged for replacement components in the event of failure Ensure any replacement item is of the same make and type as the original

851 LANDIS amp GYR LFL 1335 AUTOMATIC SEQUENCE CONTROLLER

The Landis amp Gyr Automatic Sequence Controller is a plug-in unit locating on a pre-wired chassis To remove the controller undo the two retaining screws at the top left and lower right corners and pull the module off the chassis

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

852 CONTROLS CIRCUIT (24 VOLT) TRANSFORMER

The Controls Circuit Transformer is fixed to the panel back plate by tapped screws To remove the transformer undo the wiring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel Undo the two retaining screws and remove the unit complete

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

853 CONTROL RELAYS R1 R2 amp R3

The Control Relays are DIN Rail mounted To remove a relay undo the wIring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel Release the DIN rail retaining clip under the relay with a screwdriver and remove the relay

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

854 6A MCB

The 6A MCB is DIN Rail mounted To remove the MCB undo the wiring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel Release the DIN rail retaining clip under the MCB with a screwdriver and remove the MCB

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

855 THERMAL OVERLOAD

The thermal overload is attached to the underside of the main contactor To remove the overload undo the wiring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel and that the overload setting is as specified in Section 13 of this manual Unscrew the three connections to the contactor and remove the overload

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 37

8 SERVICING 3000S

856 MAIN CONTACTOR

The Main Contactor is DIN Rail mounted To remove the contactor remove the thermal overload as 855 above and then undo the wiring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel Release the DIN rail retaining clip under the contactor with a screwdriver and remove the contactor

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

857 MOTOR FUSE

To replace a motor fuse pull the fuse carrier off the fuse holder base The fuse is attached to the fuse carrier by two screws Unscrew remove and replace

86 REMOTE CONTROL STATION

The remote control station contains some serviceable parts although these items should only be fitted by an approved RS STOKVIS Ltd Engineer

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 38

9 RECOMMENDED SPARES 3000S

For two years operation it is recommended that the following items should be held in stock

ITEM DESCRIPTION PART NO QUANTITY i

1 INDICATOR BULBS W1121 1 PACK

2 SPARK PLUG 023739 1 I

3 UVDETECTOR QRA10C 1 I

4 ROOM SENSOR DRT2453 1

5 DUCT SENSOR DDT1701 1

All replacement parts can be obtained from RS STOKVIS Ltd by quoting the air handler serial number the part number and description

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 39

APPENDIX 1 30005

SOUNDNESS TESTING THE FUEL GAS PIPEWORK

This procedure should only be carried out by personnel familiar with the ECONO-AIR 3000S Series Air handler

The pressure test points and all valves are identified on the Process and Instrumentation Diagram for the air handler included in Section 1 of this n1anual

Isolate the air handler electric supply at the main control panel and lock off Close the manual isolation valves MV1 MV6 and PV3 Ensure the supply pressure is available on the upstream side of MV1

A11 TESTING THE UPSTREAM PIPEWORKAND BURNER CONTROLS 1 Connect a 60 mbar manometer to the pressure test nipple A Monitor the

pressure for two minutes Any rise in pressure indicates that valve MV1 is leaking and must be replaced Remove pressure test points Band F

2 Open MV1 to pressurise the pipework on both the main gas and pilot line to the first block valve

3 Close MV1 Allow one minute for the temperature to stabilise and then test the system for 2 minutes and watch for a drop in the pipework pressure If the pressure falls open valve MV1 and test the pipework connections and valves from MV1 to MV3 and MV1 to PV2 for leaks with a proprietary leak detector fluid or spray Turn off MV1 seal any leaks and re-test

4 If no extemalleaks are found either the pilot block valve PV1 or either the first main gas block valve MV3 is letting by

5 To test this seal pressure test point A and fit a manometer to pressure test point B Leave for two minutes with MV1 open A rise in pressure on the manometer confirms a leak on the block valve MV3 Turn off MV1 exchange the valve and re-test from point 2 above

6 Repeat this procedure for the pilot block valve Seal test point B and fit a manometer to pressure test point F Leave for two minutes with MV1 open A rise in pressure on the manometer confirms a leak on the pilot block valve PV2 Turn off MV1 exchange the valve and re-test from point 1 above Seal test point F

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 40

APPENDIX 1 30005

A12 TESTING THE DOWNSTREAM BURNER VALVE 1 Close MV1 and connect pressure test points A and 8 with flexible 6 mm bore

tubing teed into the manometer Remove pressure test point C Open MV1 to pressurise the downstream block valve MV4

2 Close MV1 and leave for one minute for the temperature to stabilise Monitor the pressure for 2 minutes If the pressure falls open valve MV1 and leak test the line between the two block valves MV3 and MV4 with a proprietary leak detector Turn off MV1 seal any leaks and re-test Note Smaller air handlers in the 3000S Series are fitted with multi-functional valves combining the pressure regulator and two block valves in one component The above procedure still applies but if a leak is found on either block valve the whole control should be replaced If no external leaks are found the downstream block valve is letting by

3 To confirm this close MV1 remove the manometer and refit to pressure test point C Connect pressure test points A and 8 with flexible 6mm bore tubing Open MV1 and allow one minute for the temperature to stabilise Monitor the pressure for a further 2 minutes with MV1 still open A rise in pressure confirms that the second block valve MV4 is letting by Turn off MV1 Replace the valve and re-test from 2 above

A13 TESTING THE DOWNSTREAM BURNER PIPEWORK 1 Close MV1 and connect pressure test points A and D with flexible 6 mm bore

tubing teed into the manometer Open MV1 to pressurise the downstream pilot pipework

2 Close MV1 and leave for one minute for the temperature to stabilise Monitor the pressure for 2 minutes If the pressure falls open valve MV1 and leak test the line between the downstream block valve MV4 and the manual block MV6 with a proprietary leak detector fluid or spray If no external leaks are found the manual block valve MV6 is letting by Turn off MV1 seal any leakages and reshytest from 2 above

A14 TESTING THE DOWNSTREAM PILOT PIPEWORK 1 Close MV1 and connect pressure test points A and F with flexible 6mm bore

tubing teed into the manometer Open MV1 to pressurise the downstream pilot pipework

2 Close MV1 and leave for one rninute for the temperature to stabilise Monitor the pressure for 2 minutes If the pressure falls open valve MV1 and leak test the line between the downstream block valve PV2 and the manual block PV3 with a proprietary leak detector fluid or spray If no external leaks are found the manual block valve PV3 is letting by Turn off MV1 seal any leakages and reshytest from 2 above

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 41

APPENDIX 1 30005

A15 TESTING THE BURNER CONNECTIONS 1 Remove the burner access panel as described in Section 84 of this manual

Remove the burner spark igniter Slacken the two retaining bolts holding the burner to the burner support straps and unbolt the burner supply endplate from the burner casting and mixing plates

2 Connect pressure test points A and 0 with flexible 6mm bore tubing teed into the manometer Open MV1 and MV6 to pressurise the burner pipework Leak test the main gas burner pipework and connections with proprietary leak detector fluid Turn off MV6 Seal any leakages and re-test

3 Connect pressure test points A and F with flexible 6 mm bore tubing teed into the manometer Open MV1 and PV3 to pressurise the pilot burner pipework Leak test the pilot gas burner pipework and connections with proprietary leak detector fluid Turn off PV3 Seal any leakages and re-test

4 Turn off MV1

5 Replace the spark igniter and profile division plate

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 42

APPENDIX 2 30005

START SEQUENCE

The burner start sequence is controlled by the Landis and Gyr burner management unit The timings are pre-set and comply with 885885 This unit must NOT be tampered with

A brief description of the start-up sequence isshy

The unit checks

1 The NO FLAME signal on the UV flame scanner

Note If the scanner detects a flame at any time other than in the correct operating sequence the flame programmer initiates a lockout

2 The operation of the combustion air proving switch in the NO AIR position

3 The air handler discharge high temperature switch

If the checks are completed the unit starts the combustion air fan and then checks the combustion airflow

Once the airflow is proven the unit checks that the damper control circuit is functioning correctly After the damper microswitch is made to prove the fresh air damper is fully open the sequence allows 30 seconds for the combustion air to purge any combustible gas from the air handler

After completion of the purge the spark ignition system is energised the pilot valve opened and the spark terminated If the pilot flame is not proven by the UV scanner the system will initiate a LOCKOUT

If the flame is proven the main gas valves are opened the pilot extinguished and the main burner flame proven

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 43

i

APPENDIX 2 30008

The following flow chart shows the complete start sequence including the lighting of the various indicating lamps

MANUAL STATUS LIGHT POWER ON

POWER ON

I INITIATE START BY TIME

SETTING ON CONTROLLER

I CHECK NO FLAME

VISIBLE

PROVEj FAIL LOCKOUT

I CHECK RELAY R4 NC

POSITION

PROVE FAIL NO START

I CHECK AIR PRESSURE SWITCH NC POSITION

PROVE FAIL NO START

I CHECK RELAY R1 NC

POSITION

PROVE j

FAIL NO START

I START COMBUSTION

AIR BLOWER

I CHECK AIR PRESSURE SWITCH NO POSITION

PROVE I

FAIL NO START

I STATUS LIGHT FAN ON

I ENERGISE RELAY R1

I

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 44

I

I

APPENDIX 2 30008

I CHECK OVERHEAT LIMIT

CONTROL R5

PROVE I

FAIL I I

CHECK 541412 LOOP CLOSED ON

LANDIS ampGYR CIRCUIT

PROVE I

FAIL I I

COMBUSTION AIR PURGE PERIOD

30 SECONDS

I

NO START

NO START

CANCEL NO FLAME CHECK CIRCUIT

I

ENERGISE SPARK

I TIMED PERIOD 25 SECONDS

I ENERGISE PILOT GAS

VALVE

I TIMED PERIOD 25 SECONDS

I TERMINATE SPARK

I INTERROGATE UV FLAME SCANNER

PROVE I

FAIL I I

TIMED PERIOD 10 SECONDS

I

LOCKOUT

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 45

I

I

APPENDIX 2 3000S

I ENERGISE MAIN GAS

VALVES

I

STATUS LIGHT BURNER ON

I TIMED PERIOD

5 SECONDS

I DE-ENERGISE PILOT

GAS VALVES

CONTINUOUS FROM PILOT

I INTERROGATE UV FLAME SCANNER

PROVE I

FAIL I I

LOCKOUT I

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 46

APPENDIX 3 30005

Please see copy of Standard Service Sheet

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 47

APPENDIX 4 30005

A41 TIME OUT SCREEN

This is the standard screen displayed when the touch screen is not in use The back light is off to save energy_ To access the STATUS screen touch the ENTER key and the following screen is displayed

[]][I][]rn[IJOO[][IJOO[] EJ~E11 I[]I ~ middot I

NOTE

The Touch Screen operates using the heat produced by the touch of a finger and therefore only LIGHT pressure is required

Excessive pressure can damage the Touch Screen

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 48

APPENDIX 4 30008

A42 STATUS SCREEN

On the typical STATUS screen the illustrated information detailed is as follows

19 36 Fan Brn

RS OS

100 Fst_~_ Lck _ _ Xst Gas~o ~ I

RS Indicates the current room temperature

OS ~( t~~ the current duct discharge temperature

Fan Indicates the current status of the fan by showing the arrow and the fan blades for ON and OFF is shown by the arrow and fan blades being removed

Brn Indicates the current status of the burner with the black flames indicating the burner to be ON and vice versa

Lck LOCKOUT - This indicates a flame failure when highlighted during normal or start-up operation

Xst EXCESS TEMPERATURE SWITCH - This indicates the unit has reached the trip limit on the over heat stat when highlighted during operation

Indicates the current position of the gas modulating valve during normal Gas

operation (0-100)

Indicates whether the Frost stat is energised and the unit is running on frost Fst

override

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 49

APPENDIX 4 30008

A43 CHANGING SETTINGS

It is possible to change the settings for the time of operation and the required temperature set points The following details the steps required

A44 ENTERING THE SECURITY CODE

From the STATUS screen touch the return key and the screen below will be displayed

Type the HIGH LEVEL security code (4321) If you make a mistake use the BACK SPACE key to delete any incorrect number(s) Touch the ENTER key when the code is correct

If the security code is incorrect the screen above will be displayed then try again If after several attempts you can not gain access please contact RS STOKVIS Ltd for further information

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 50

APPENDIX 4 30008

When the code is entered correctly the MAIN MENU is displayed as detailed below

~ STATUS SET VALUES~ ~ TIVIE CLOCK [) [) [) [) [)

The MAIN MENU screen shows the three menu items available The title for each menu item can be changed to suit the end user Please notify RS STOKVIS Ltd prior to commissioning should these parameters require special amendments

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 51

APPENDIX 4 30008

A45 CHANGING OR SETTING A TIME SCHEDULE

From the main menu screen select the TIME CLOCK page by running finger across screen symbol and touch the ENTER key the screen below will be displayed

On the following screen highlight the TS1 symbol and touch the ENTER key

The current time schedule will now be displayed as shown below The display will automatically default to the current day (1 =Monday 2 =Tuesday etc) In this case day 5 (Friday) the four schedule switching times refer to that day

IAC6BBB1BHIS1

mm0CIl bull mID 17BB 17BB 17HB

Iillleschedule

To modify a time select it by highlighting and touch the ENTER key and the following screen is displayed

To amend the appropriate onoff time as shown on the screen below The arrows to the right of the time are for altering the hours and the arrows on the left for the minutes

Once you have set the time use the ESCape key to exit back to the time schedule screen and choose another day by touching the required number Another time may now be modified as before

IAC6BBB1BHIS1

H8BH

I i eschedule

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 52

APPENDIX 4 30008

Use the ESCape key to exit back to the MAIN MENU screen

~ STATUS ~ SET VALUES

TIME CLOCK []~ [] [] [] []

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 53

APPENDIX 4 30005

A46 CHANGING SET VALUES

From the main menu screen select the SET VALUES page by highlight in the normal way and touch the ENTER key

The following screen is displayed

36 19 18III III IIIHsv Rsv Llv

To change the RSV highlight it in the normal way and touch the ENTER key and the screen below will now be shown

IAC6RRR1RR40 T I

0 19 (Y)l RSV

ROOM SET VALUE

The above screen shows the parameters that can be changed The values to the far left are the limitations of set point (OC) Change the set point by using the UP and DOWN ARROWS on the left of the screen or touch the set value itself followed by the ENTER key to select the set value and set it directly using the numeric keyboard All values can be changed in this way

Use the ESCape key twice to exit back to the MAIN MENU screen

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 54

APPENDIX 4 30005

A47 COMMISSIONING AND SERVICING BURNER CHECKS

Select the SET VALUES screen from the MAIN MENU screen and adjust the high lirrlit set point to 55degC to drive the burner to high fire

IAC6HHH1HH60 ~T I

0 19 (Y)

HSV

HIGH SET VALUE ~

Ensure the set value is returned to 36degC once the appropriate checks and adjustments as described in Section 43 of this manual have been completed Return to the SET VALUES screen and select the low limit value to adjust the low fire setting

Reduce the low limit value to OdegC to drive the gas valve to low fire and complete the appropriate checks and adjustments as described in Section 43 of this manual and ensure the set value is returned to the original value

A48 GMT ltgt BST CHANGEOVER DAYLIGHT SAVINGS

To change your unit to British Summer TimelWinter Time the following system screen must be highlighted by touching the Iamp1 button twice

By touching the clock symbol in the top left hand corner followed by the ENTER key the screen below will be displayed

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 55

APPENDIX 4 30008

188311 851193

544

By touching and highlighting in this case 18 followed by the ENTER key A small box allowing the entry of two digits will appear Enter the desired time required using the numbered keys followed by ENTER key Your unit is now set to operate on BSTBWT

Touch the ESC key three times to return back to the Status screen

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 56

STOKVIS ENERGY SYSTEMS 96R WALTON ROAD EAST MOLESEY SURREY KT8 0DL TEL 020 8783 3050 08707 707 747 FAX 020 8783 3051 08707 707 767 E-MAIL infostokvisboilerscom WEBSITE wwwstokvisboilerscom

JULY 1999

Page 13: ECONOAIR 3000S SERIES AIR HANDLING UNIT DIRECT FIREDstokvisboilers.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/EconoAir... · 2019-05-10 · ECONOAIR 3000S SERIES AIR HANDLING UNIT DIRECT FIRED

2 GENERAL DESCRIPTION 3000S

232 TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEM

The ECONO-AIR 30008 Series air handler is fitted with a full three-term modulating temperature control system as standard The space temperature is sensed by a heated space detector (TR) which inputs to the panel mounted temperature controller (TC) This achieves control by modulation of the fuel gas flow control valve (MV5) The temperature controller additionally limits the air handler discharge air temperature measured by the discharge temperature detector (TO) to pre-set high and low limits

233 MAIN CONTROL PANEL

The control panel houses the combustioncirculation air fan starter the burner management system and the heated space temperature controller On larger units a separate starter panel may be supplied The panel door is fitted with an interlocked isolator POWER ON and LOCKOUT lights and the burner management RESET button The panel is mounted on or adjacent to the air handler

234 FUEL GAS SYSTEM

The PILOT LINE comprises 1 Pilot governor (PV1 ) 2 One British Gas certificated solenoid valve (PV2) 3 One pilot gas isolation valve (PV3) 4 Pipework and fittings

Note Two pressure test points are fitted on the pilot line on the inlet and discharge of the pilot solenoid valve

The MAIN GAS LINE comprises

1 Gas isolation valve (MV1 ) 2 Pressure governor (MV2) 3 Double block safety shut-oft system (MV34) 4 Gas flow control valve (MV5) 5 Burner isolation valve (MV6) 6 Pipework and fittings

Note Four pressure test points are fitted on the n1ain gas line on the supply the inlet and discharge of the second block valve and downstream of the flow control valve

Note On small air handlers items 2 and 3 are combined in one multi-functional control

All items above are detailed on the Process amp Instrumentation Diagram in Section 1 of this manual

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 9

2 GENERAL DESCRIPTION 3000S

235 REMOTE CONTROL STATION

The ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler is also supplied with a remote control station which houses the air handler operating controls indicating status and the workspace temperature detector if the control station is located in the heated space

236 HEATED SPACE TEMPERATURE SENSOR The heated space temperature sensor is to be located remotely within the space to be heated

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 10

3 INSTALLATION 30005

31 STATUTORY REQUIREMENTS

I n accordance with the Gas Safety (I nstallation and Use) Regulations 1998 installation of this ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler should only be undertaken by competent personnel who are fully aware of their responsibilities under the Health and Safety at Work Act 1974

The installation of this air handler must comply with

BS6230-1991 Installation of gas-fired forced convection air air handlers for commercial and industrial Space Heating of rated input exceeding 60kW

The lEE Regulations for Electrical Installations

Gas Safety (Installation and Use) Regulations 1998

Health and Safety at Work Act 1974

Building Regulations 1986

Building Standards (Scotland Only)

The I nstitution of Gas Engineers Codes of Practice

IGEUP1 Soundness Testing Procedures for Industrial and Commercial Gas Installations

IGEUP2 Gas Installation Pipework Boosters and Compressors on Industrial and Commercial Premises

IGEUP4 Commissioning Of Gas Fired Plant On Industrial and Commercial Premises

32 RECEPTION AND STORAGE OF GOODS

32laquo1 RECEPTION

On receipt of the shipment check that the shipment is complete against the Delivery Advice Note Check for mechanical damage sustained during transit before off-loading the goods Inform the carrier of any such damage

322 OFFLOADING

Horizontal air handlers are fitted with four lifting eyes to permit an overhead lift Alternatively horizontal air handlers may be handled by a fork lift truck on the steel angle support frame

323 STORAGE

Air handlers must be stored in a dry environment The remote control station must be removed from the shipment and stored indoors in a dry environment Outdoor units of split case design (Size 54 and above) must have open ends protected from the environment until installation is complete Any filter elements should be stored in a dry environment

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 11

3 INSTALLATION 3000S

33 LIMITATIONS OF USE

The ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler must not be installed in the following locations

I n hazardous areas

In areas where flammable vapours can be present in excess of their threshold limit values as defined in 8S5925

I n accordance with 8S6230 Clause 513 where there are any flued appliances in the heated area and where air is supplied mechanically and there is mechanical extraction the design extract rate must be 5 to 10 less than the design inlet rate so that the room will not be at a lower pressure than the outside air If the air handler is the only source of mechanically supplied air the extract rate must not exceed 95 of the nominal air flow specified in Section 11 of this manual

Note If it proposed to install the ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler to supply heated air to a hazardous area or in areas where flammable vapours are present the installation must first be approved by a RS STOKVIS Ltd Engineer

34 LOCATION OF AIR HANDLERS

The air handler should normally be installed in the location recommended by the RS STOKVIS Ltd specifying engineer

Check the proposed location for level and load bearing strength Ensure that there is adequate clearance as detailed on the air handler GA in Section 1 this manual around the unit for access for maintenance purposes If the air handler is to be installed above floor level a suitably designed service platform should be provided Such a platform must have 100mm minimum raised edges around the perimeter If this is not possible all air handler access panels must be fitted with hinged restraints This is a factory standard option which should be specified at the time of ordering - check the restraints are fitted before proceeding with installation

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 12

3 INSTALLATION 3000S

35 FRESH AIR INLET AND VENTILATION

351 FRESH AIR INLET

The air handler must be installed where it has a direct and unlimited supply of fresh air from outside the building Ensure that the air intake is not located near exhausts from the building or from any process exhausts such as paint booth exhausts Whenever possible protect the fresh air inlet from the prevailing wind and local wind effects from corners

The fresh air inlet should be sized for an air velocity of 3ms The inlet duct area is detailed on the General Arrangement drawing located in Section 1 of this manual

Where the fresh air inlet is made in a load bearing wall eg a brick wall guidance should be obtained from Structural Engineers on the provision of a lintel in the wall over the fresh air opening

A weather hood must be fitted when the air handler air inlet is at or within 1 m of the outside wall Additionally the weather hood should have negligible resistance to the airflow maximum 01 mbar at the design air flow rate

Do not install the ECONO-AI R 3000S Series air handler where long lengths of duct or bends of an angle greater than 30deg are necessary to lead to the air handler from the fresh air opening If ducting is unavoidable ensure that the resulting pressure drop is negligible Le less than 01 mbar for ductless air handlers and has been accounted for in the original design for ducted air handlers as detailed in the specification section of this manual Section 11

Note If the air intake is located in an area of unrestricted access warning notices preventing the blockage of the air intake by temporary stacking should be displayed adjacent to the intake

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 13

3 INSTALLATION 3000S

352 VENTI LA TION

Where the air air handler is in its own plant room or compartment this shall be ventilated with openings communicating directly with the outside air to ventilate the room

The openings shall be fitted with grilles of negligible resistance and shall be sited so that they cannot easily be blocked or flooded They shall have a total minimum free area as follows

Low Level (inlet) 320cm2 + 27cm2 per kilowatt in excess of 60kW total rated input

High Level (outlet) 160cm2 + 134cm2 per kilowatt in excess of 60kW total rated input

The free area of the grilles shall be not less than the size of the recommended minimum ventilation opening Grilles shall be designed to minimise high velocity air streams in the plant room For exposed ie free standing plant rooms ventilation openings shall be provided on at least two sides and preferably on all four sides

Where mechanical ventilation is used it shall be by mechanical inlet and either natural or mechanical extraction Systems of ventilation employing mechanical extraction and natural air inlet shall not be used

The minimum flow rates of air supplied shall be not less than 06 m3s per megawatt of rated heat input

36 AIR DISCHARGE

The air handler should be located with the air discharge into the heated space at a minimum height of 3 metres The air should not discharge directly onto any obstructions and direct discharge on to working personnel should be avoided

If the air discharge is located in an area of unrestricted access warning notices preventing the blockage of the air discharge by temporary stacking should be displayed adjacent to the discharge

Generally it is not necessary to fit distribution ducting to the discharge of the air handler If ducting is required or specified ensure that the resulting pressure drop has been accounted for in the original design specification as detailed in Section 1 of this manual

37 ASSEMBLY AND POSITIONING OF AIR HANDLER

Unless specified at the time of order air handlers will be shipped in sections Discharge heads grilles attenuators duct connecting sections filters rain-hoods etc will be supplied loose for site fitting to the air handler

Horizontal air handlers must be supported on their steel angle support base When the air handler is located check for level and adjust as necessary

Alternatively horizontal air handlers can be supplied with extensions of the support frame for suspending from overhead supports This must be specified at the time of order Do not suspend the air handler from the lifting eyes

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 14

3 INSTALLATION 3000S

38 REMOTE STATION

The ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler is supplied with a remote control station This should be mounted in a position convenient to the end user If possible it should not be mounted on an external wall or where the space temperature detector is affected by cold draughts or a local source of heat

39 VISUAL CHECK

After completion of installation re-check the air handler for signs of damage Report any instance to RS STOKVIS Ltd

310 CONNECTION OF SERVICES

The air handler requires the connection of fuel gas and electricity

3101 FUEL GAS SUPPLY

The ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler has been designed for use on Natural Gas An alternative version is available for LPG The gas type for the air handler supplied is clearly marked on the air handler data badge and on the Specification sheet in Section 1 of this manual Check the gas type is correct and that the supply pressure is within the range marked on the specification

The local gas Authority should be consulted about the adequacy of the gas service and meter supplies for existing and proposed extensions to the installation and for any requirements for boosting the gas supply_

Connect the fuel gas supply to the inlet manual valve on the air handler gas train The connection size is detailed in Section 1 of this manual A further isolation valve and union should be fitted immediately adjacent to the appliance which when the valve is closed allows the complete burner and control assembly to be disconnected for maintenance or repair

New gas pipework should be installed to British Gas Publication IGEUP2 and be purged and pressure tested in accordance with British Gas Publications IGEUP1

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 15

3 INSTALLATION 3000S

3102 ELECTRICITY SUPPLY

All external wiring shall be carried out and checked by a competent person All components shall be checked for suitability for voltage range and frequency

Means for electric isolation having a contact separation of at least 3mm in all poles must be provided adjacent to the air handler The electrical supply to the appliance shall incorporate suitable means of excess current protection

The ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler requires a 3 phase 4 wire supply which should be connected to the main control panel Check the air handler data badge for the correct electrical supply The maximum supply requirement is Specified in Section 1 of this manual Note that the 240 Volt air handler control circuit is taken from the lUI phase to Neutral Connection should be made as shown on the wiring diagram shipped inside this panel

The air handler must be earthed in accordance with BS5986 and CP1013

Check all terminal strip terminations for wires which have become loose during shipment

311 CONNECTION TO THE MAIN PANEL AND REMOTE STATION

Interconnecting wiring to the main panel and remote station should be made with a minimum specification of 075 mm2 300 Volt cable Check that no wires on the terminal strip have become loose during shipment The remote panel should be mounted at a height of approx 18m If possible it should not be mounted on an external wall or where the sensor will be affected by cold draughts or a local source of heat

Both panel and remote station must be earthed in accordance with BS5986 and CP1013

312 HEATED SPACE TEMPERATURE SENSOR

The space temperature sensor located on the remote panel should be connected with screened cable or twin low voltage signal cable run in its own separate conduit It should be mounted on the remote panel or adjacent to the outlet at a height of approx 18m If possible it should not be mounted on an external wall or where the sensor will be affected by cold draughts or a local source of heat

313 DUCT SENSOR

The duct sensor should be connected with screened cable or twin low voltage signal cable run in its own separate conduit It should be mounted in the air handler discharge as close as possible to the discharge into the heated space

314 OVERHEAT LIMIT CONTROL SENSOR

The overheat limit control sensor should be connected with twin core cable It should be mounted in the air handler discharge within 1 metre of the air handler outlet connection

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 16

3 INSTALLATION 3000S

315 TOUCH SCREEN WIRING

The touch screen located on the front of the remote station requires two separate twisted pairs of O5mrh2 screened cable run in a separate conduit If the distance between the main and remote stations is greater that 1 km please contact RS STOKVIS Ltd for advice

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 17

3 INSTALLATION 3000S

316 ALIGNMENT

3161 INSTALLATION OF DRIVE BELTS

On 80 amp 89 30008 range of air handlers it will be necessary to align the pulleys and fit the drive belts before carrying out commissioning of the unit

3162 PU LLEYS

Before assembling the drive check the pulley grooves are free from scores or sharp edges and all dimensions conform to the relevant standard

The Taper Lock bush is your starting point when it comes to assembly and installation Drive installation is a straightforward job with Taper Lock - but the stages set out on the installation leaflet provided with every Taper Lock bush should be followed closely

3163 ALIGNMENT

Good alignment of pulleys prior to belt installation is important to avoid belt flank wear The diagram below shows correct installation of pulleys

INTERNAl BEARING

MOTOR PUlLEY rAN PULLEY

MOTORMOTOR ADJUSTMENT MOUNTING BOlTSBOLTS

3164 BELTS

When the pulleys have been correctly positioned on the shafts the belts can be installed to complete the drive

The drive centre distance should be reduced prior to the installation of the belts so that they may be fitted without the use of force Under no circumstances must belts be prised into the grooves Using sharp tools to stretch the belts over the pulley rim can easily damage belts and pulley grooves

The installation allowance given in the table below is the minimum recommended reduction in centre distance for various belt section and lengths to allow for correct fitting

The take-up allowance given in the same table should be added on to the calculated centre distance to allow for belt stretch

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 18

3 INSTALLATION 3000S

3165 INSTALLATION AND TAKE UP ALLOWANCE

Belt Pitch Installation Allowance Take-Up Length (mm) SPZ SPA SPB SPC (mm)

410 to 530 5

540 to 840 10

850 to 1160 15

1170 to 1500 20

1510 to 1830 20 25

1840 to 2170 30

2180 to 2830 25 40

2840 to 3500 30 50

3520 to 4160 50 60

4170 to 5140 70

5220 to 6150 85

6180 to 7500 105

600 to 8500 125

8880 to 10170 145

10600 to 12500 175

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 19

4 COMMISSIONING 30005

This appliance must be commissioned by a RS STOKVIS Ltd approved engineer

41 PRESTART CHECKS

1 Switch the SUMMERIOFFMlINTER switch on the remote station to OFF

2 Check the correct electric supply is available to the air handler and the appliance isolator installed

3 Check the correct fuel gas supply is available to the air handler and local isolation valve and union installed Check that new gas pipe work has been correctly purged and pressure tested and that the isolation valve is in the OFF position

4 Check the air handler gas control system and burner connections for pressure soundness as detailed in Appendix 1 of this manual

5 Complete the first section of the Service Check Sheet supplied at the back of this manual (Appendix 3)

6 Close the air handler access door

7 Close and lock the main air handler control panel

8 Switch the main panel isolator to position 1 Check the POWER ON light illuminates

9 Check and set the timed ONOFF periods in the lAC Controller located on the remote panel Ensure that the unit is set to be on during testing Refer to Appendix 4 for the lAC setting procedure

10 Close and lock the remote panel

11 Switch the SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch on the remote station to SUMMER to start the air fan Return the switch to the OFF position and check for correct rotation of the fan as the fan slows and stops

The fan rotation can be observed through the fan section access door or through the air handler access door Only do this during the fan run-down period Ensure the door is securely fastened after completion

Rotation arrows are fitted on the end of the air handler and inside the air handler above the interior bearing support If the rotation is incorrect two phases should be interchanged as dictated by the Engineer responsible for the site electrical system

12 Check the air pressure drop across the burner whilst the fan is operating with a water column pressure gauge connected to the two pressure test points on the air pressure switch (DPS) This pressure should be between 14 and 16 rnbar

If the air differential pressure measured above is not within the operating range check inlet and outlet ductwork as appropriate and any filters fitted If the pressure differential is still not within limits isolate the air handler and report to RS STOKVIS Ltd before proceeding

13 Check the operation and setting of the Low Air Pressure Switch by injecting a controlled signal into the switch Check the break point on the switch is 1 mbar (falling)

Note The switch is set and sealed before fitting The 1 mbar switch point may not coincide with the 1 mbar scale reading on the switch

If on checking the switch is not operating correctly do not tamper with it return it to RS STOKVIS Ltd for replacement

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 20

4 COMMISSIONING 3000S

42 DRY RUN

With all the manual gas isolation valves still in the OFF position switch the SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch to WINTER

43 START UP

1 Attach a manometer to pressure test point F and the low pressure test point on the air pressure switch (DPS)

2 Open the main gas supply valve (MV1) and the pilot burner isolation valve (PV3) Leave the main burner isolation valve (MV6) closed Reset the air handler by pressing the push-button marked RESET on either the main panel or remote station The air handler pilot will light automatically (after the automatic damper start check and combustion air pre-purge) and then LOCKOUT after the main gas shut-off valves are addressed

During the short period that the pilot is in operation check the pilot gas pressure on the manometer It should be 10 mbar and the pilot flame approximately 100 - 150mm in length covering the first three or four holes of the mixing plate and have a steady blue colour when viewed through the sight glass on the access side of the air handler Adjust as necessary - refer to Section 51 this manual Check the flame signal - refer to Section 431

3 Open the main burner isolation valve (MV6) RESET the air handler which should now light to main burner stage When alight close the main burner isolation valve to shut down the gas flow to the burner Check that the unit goes to LOCKOUT

4 Reset the air handler and drive the burner to low fire by adjusting the temperature controller set point as described in Appendix 4 of this manual Check the flame is continuous across the width of the burner and has a flame length of approx 50 - 65mm from the burner rail when viewed through the sight glass on the access side of the air handler Check the burner pressure across pressure test point D and the downstream (low) pressure test point on the air pressure switch ie on the rear of the pressure switch This pressure is specifled in Section 1 of this manual Adjust as necessary-refer to Section 53 of this manual Check the flame signal - refer to Section 431

Where possible check the actual gas flow rate by meter reading with all other appliances turned off

5 Drive the burner to high fire by adjusting the temperature controller set point and high limit to 55degC as described in Appendix 4 of this manual Check the flame is continuous across the burner rail and has a flame length of approximately 250 - 350mm from the burner rail Check the burner pressure across pressure test point D and the downstream (low) pressure test point on the air pressure switch This pressure is specified in Section 1 of this manual Adjust as necessary - refer to Section 52 of this manual Check the maximum air handler discharge temperature Check the flame signal shyrefer to Section 431

Where possible check the actual gas flow rate by meter reading with all other appliances turned off

6 Check the operation of the overheat limit control by adjusting the temperature controller set point and high limit to 65degC as described in Appendix 4 of this manual Monitor the discharge temperature on the temperature controller Check that the overheat control operates as the set temperature is passed Check that the control must be manually reset by pressing the green reset button on the front of the switch Return the temperature controller to its original settings

In the event that the ambient temperature is too low for this simple procedure to work the instrument will have to be bench tested using a Temperature 8ath Remove and replace the control as Section 84 of this manual for bench-testing

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 21

4 COMMISSIONING 3000S

43 1 FLAME SIGNAL CHECK

1 The ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler is fitted with a Klippon SAKT1 Test Terminal which can be used to measure the flame scanning signal Refer to the Electrical Schematic and connect a 0-1 mA ammeter to the two test points with standard 23 mm test plugs with the positive lead on the detector side Disconnect the terminal link to obtain the signal reading A minimum signal of 70 microamps is required typical signals are in the 250-400 microamp range on both pilot and main flame After completion replace the terminal link and remove the test jacks

2 Drive the burner to high fire as previously described Measure the carbon dioxide content of the discharge air stream This figure must not exceed 2800 ppm If the discharge exceeds this limit isolate the air handler and report to RS STOKVIS Ltd before proceeding

Stop and start the air handler a few times to check for reliability using the Operating Instructions (Section 6)

432 HANDOVER

Complete the air handler Service Check Sheet supplied at the back of this manual The self-copy sheet must be returned to STOKVIS for checking

Instruct the User in efficient use and care of the unit start-up and shutdown (including emergency shutdown) and recommended service interval Emphasise the need to keep the air handler clear of stored items and extraneous material and to maintain the recirculation and fresh air paths to the air handler inlets Hand all instructions as applicable to the UserOwner for safekeeping

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 22

5 ADJUSTMENTS 3000S

If adjustments to the air handler settings are required they should be made by a RS STOKVIS Ltd approved engineer

The normal value for all control settings is specified in Section 1 of this manual

51 PILOT ADJUSTMENT

The pilot gas pressure and flame length may be adjusted by altering the discharge pressure of the pilot governor Screwing the adjusting screw clockwise (located under the top cap) increases the discharge pressure and the flame length anti-clockwise decreases the pressure and the flame length

52 BURNER HIGH FIRE PRESSURE ADJUSTMENT

At high fire alter the spring compression on the main burner governor (MV2) by removing the cap and adjust the spring compression plate clockwise to increase the burner pressure anti-clockwise to decrease burner pressure If the pressure does not increase on adjusting the spring the supply is inadequate

Note On small air handlers fitted with a mUlti-functional control the pressure adjusting screw is located under a swing cap on the first block valve

53 BURNER LOW FIRE ADJUSTMENT

The main burner low fire is adjusted on the flow control valve MV5 (Process amp Instrumentation Diagram)

Remove the top cover of the valve and insert a Terminal Screwdriver in the adjusting screw of the TOP cam marked NI

Drive the burner to low fire by adjusting the temperature controller set-point and high limit to 05degC as described in Appendix 4 of this manual

Turn the Terminal Screwdriver clockwise to decrease the low fire gas flow anti-clockwise to increase the flow

Check the heat input and flame signal at the new position are satisfactory and return the tenlperature controller to its normal settings

Replace the control valve cover

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 23

5 ADJUSTMENTS 3000S

54 SUMMERIOFFIWINTER SWITCH

In the SUMMER position this switch provides ventilation only and is independent of the programmed ON and OFF periods This position is manually selected and must be manually de-selected Whenever the switch is in this position the fan is operating

In the OFF position the air handler is shutdown and will not operate This overrides any frost protection fitted It is suitable for air handler shutdown for short periods such as holidays The programme memory is unaffected by this switch and assumes control of the air handler when the switch is returned to the WINTER position

In the WINTER position the air handler operates off the programme memory to provide heating

55 RESET BUTTON

Visual indication of air handler lockout is provided In the event of lockout occurring the air handler can be reset by depressing the RESET button This parallels the RESET button on the air handler main control panel If after 4 attempts to reset the air handler the lockout indicator still illuminates then a Service Engineer should be called to investigate the problem

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 24

6 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 3000S

61 AIR HANDLER START-UP

1 Open all manual gas valves both on the appliance and on the supply to the appliance Switch on the Electric Supply to the appliance

2 On the main air handler panel

Switch the panel isolator to the 1 position

Check POWER ON light

3 On the remote control station

For Heating Switch the SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch to WINTER

The air handler will now start automatically in response to the time settings

In the event of LOCKOUT

Press the RESET button and the cycle of operations will be repeated If the air handler goes to LOCKOUT four times in succession call for a Service Engineer

For Unheated Ventilation Switch the SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch to SUMMER

Note This prevents the burner firing giving a controlled supply of ventilation air to the heated space as long as the switch is in this position The air handler will now start automatically in response to the timeclock demand To turn the fan off return the switch to the centre OFF position

In the event of LOCKOUT

Press the RESET button and the cycle of operations will be repeated If the air handler goes to LOCKOUT four times in succession call for a Service Engineer

62 AIR HANDLER SHUTDOWN

621 SHUTDOWN FOR SHORT PERIODS

Switch the SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch on the remote station to OFF

622 SHUTDOWN FOR PROLONGED PERIODS

Switch the main panel isolator to the 0 position and close all manual gas valves both on and leading to the appliance

Note Manual gas valves should only be operated when the appliance is to be shut off for either Servicing or for a prolonged shutdown

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 25

30005 6 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

63 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS

631 SITE CLEARANCE ADJACENT TO AIR HANDLER

Attention should be paid to keeping the area around the air handler tidy No rubbish should be allowed to accumulate in the vicinity of the air handler and storage of goods etc should not be permitted within two metres of the air handler Failure to comply could result in reduced airflow to the air handler causing inefficient running and potential overheat cond ition

632 AIR SUPPLY TO AIR HANDLER

Air vents and grilles supplying air to the air handler should never be blocked and should be checked periodically to ensure they are clear

633 AIR FILTERS

Similarly attention should be paid to cleaning or replacing the filters to the air handler if fitted Your installer should advise you on the frequency with which this would be required to be completed

634 SERVICE

For continued safe and efficient operation of this air air handler it is important that servicing of the air handler should be completed at regular intervals by a competent person in accordance with Section 82 of this manual Users are advised to enter into a Service Agreement with RS STOKVIS Ltd

635 SPARE PARTS

It is suggested that a complete set of spare parts essential to the running of the air handler and recommended by the installer are kept by the user on the premises where the air handler is installed This is particularly important where the air handler forms an essential part of any process plant and its being out of operation may cause problems by for example frost damage or condensation by super-cooling

A list of Recommended Spares will be found in Section 9 of this manual

636 GAS LEAKS

If a smell of gas is detected around the area of the appliance Switch off all manual gas valves and contact your service engineer or the local gas undertaking

NEVER

LOOK FOR GAS LEAKS WITH A LIGHTED MATCH OR NAKED

FLAME

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 26

7 FAULT FINDING 30008

The main control panel incorporates two lights to help in fault finding

POWER ON

LOCKOUT

The remote station also has three lights

AIR FAN ON

BURNER ON

LOCKOUT

This section gives the possible causes of failure associated with each check light The electrical schematic diagram in this manual and the wiring diagram shipped in the main air handler panel should be used in conjunction with the notes below Additionally Service Engineers should familiarise themselves with the detailed Start Sequence given in Appendix 2 of this manual

The notes are given for each light before consulting the notes check for bulb failure

71 POWER ON LIGHT IS UNLIT

Check

1 Main control panel isolator is in the 1 position

2 Main Panel 6A MCB has not tripped if a trip has occurred the switch will be at the OFF position Reset and test system as required

3 Also check if the mains electrical supply is isolated If so FIND OUT WHY before taking any action

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 27

7 FAULT FINDING 30005

72 AIR FAN ON LIGHT IS UNLIT

Check

1 SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch is not in Position OFF

2 Timeperiod is not set to off

3 Air handler is not at LOCKOUT

4 Recheck both AIR FAN ON and LOCKOUT bulbs

Two fault indications are possible

1 THE FAN IS NOT OPERATING

If the fan should have started but is not operating

Check 1 Overload for tripped conditions Reset the overload and monitor the next start-up

2 Motor Fuses

3 Relays 1 2 amp3 for failure

laClor CC1 for failure

5 Air Pressure Switch (DPS) is failed in the N 0 Position

Replace the faulty component as described in Section 8

2 THE FAN IS OPERATING

This indicates that the air pressure switch (DPS) has failed to change over

Measure the profile plate differential pressure as described in Section 4113 If the pressure is correct the air pressure switch is faulty Check the switch as in 4114 If the pressure is not correct

Check 1 Correct fan belt tension

2 Correct fan rotation

3 The air handler air inlets and discharge are not blocked

4 Correct fitting on filters

5 The air differential pressure switch impulse lines are not blocked or leaking

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 28

7 FAULT FINDING 30008

73 LOCKOUT LIGHT IS ILLUMINATED

This light indicates a failure in the burner ignition and flame supervision system

RESET the unit and follow the progress of the start sequence The full cycle may take two minutes

1

------t

2 LOCKOUT after 35-40 seconds indicates an ignition failure RESET the system and observe the pilot and ignition spark during the start-up attempt

I-- shy

3 Observe the spark This should be strong and highly visible If not remove and clean the spark plug as Section 82 Check that the spark plug gap is correctly set at 15 mm

-- shy

4 Check the pilot flame If the pilot flame ignites and the unit goes to LOCKOUT the scanning system is at fault Remove and clean the detector as Section 82 Check the flame signal as in Section 431

5 If the pilot does not light the gas supply system is faulty Check the pilot system for restriction and the pilot valve operation

6 If the pilot lights and the unit goes to LOCKOUT after the main gas valves are addressed either the flow control valve is blocked or one of the main gas block valves has failed Fit a manometer on the pressure test point on the outlet flange of the multishyfunctional control and observe if the pressure rises when the main gas valves are addressed No pressure rise will indicate failure of the main gas valves

74 AIR FAN ON LIGHT ILLUMINATED

If the burner does not start check

1 SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch is in WINTER position

2 Overheat Limit Control

These interlocks prevent the burner management system starting

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 29

8 SERVICING 3000S

IMPORTANT Servicing and maintenance should be only carried out by a RS STOKVIS Ltd approved engineer

Only use replacement parts provided by the appliance manufacturer

Check that the air openings for combustion and for ventilation of any plant roon or compartment are clear

81 ISOLATION

811 FUEL GAS ISOLATION

The fuel gas to the ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler should be isolated and locked off at the manual ball valve mounted at the start of the fuel gas line Additionally before entering or servicing the air handler the burner manual isolation valve and pilot line isolation valve should be closed

812 ELECTRICAL ISOLATION

All electric power to the air handler and the remote control station is switched through the local isolator This isolator is fitted with a lock facility to permit it to be locked in the OFF position

Additionally isolate the power at the Wall Isolator

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 30

8 SERVICING 30005

82 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE

The air handler should be routinely serviced at the start of each heating season Isolate the air handler as above before servicing Details of access to individual components are given in Section 84 of this manual

1 Remove and clean spark igniter Check that the gap is correctly set at 25 mm Replace every two years

2 Clean the flame detector lens to ensure freedom from dirt and moisture If the cell shows any sign of cracks it should be replaced Routinely replace the cell every two years or after 10000 hours of operation which ever comes first

3 Inspect the entire air handler paint system for general damage Repair as necessary

4 Every two years brush the burner plates and clear the burner holes carefully with a Size 18mm drill for NP II and 20mm drill for NP I

WARNING THE BURNER HOLES MUST NOT BE ENLARGED

5 Inspect and lubricate all damper linkages to ensure freedom of operation Wipe off all excess lubricants to prevent dirt build up on linkage parts

6 Check the fan belt for cracks and splits Check tension The correct tension gives 16mm deflection per metre of span when the belt is centrally loaded with a force of 27N Adjust as necessary

7 Grease both the fan shaft bearings with Mobiith AW2 grease or similar

NEVER use high temperature grease

NEVER mix two different greases within the bearing always flush existing grease out

Note Removing the cover plate on the end of the air handler gains access to the outboard fan bearing

Light to Slow to 0 120 2 to 6 months Clean Dry

Medium Medium 120 200 1 to 2 months

Moderate to Light to Slow to 0 120 1 to 4 weeks Dry

Dirty Medium Medium 120 200 1 to 7 days

Extreme Dirt Dry Light to Slow to 0 200 Daily Flushing out

Medium Medium Dirt

83 ANNUAL SERVICE CHECKS

After Servicing test fire the air handler following the Commissioning Procedure detailed in Section 4 of this manual to ensure correct operation generally Special attention must be paid to the damper system and related controls and interlocks

Additionally check that the fresh air and recirculation air entry path to the air handler has been kept clear and instruct the User of the need for this as necessary

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 31

8 SERVICING 3000S

84 REMOVAL PROCEDURE FOR REPLACEABLE COMPONENTS

IMPORTANT

Turn off the gas at the appliance service valve and the electricity at the main panel and wall isolator before proceeding

841 BURNER

The burner is located inside the air handler casing and is mounted on two brackets from the support straps To remove the burner isolate the air handler as in 81 and undo the union on the fuel gas line adjacent to the burner isolation valve (MV6) and unscrew the main and pilot gas feed pipes from the burner rail Access to the rear of the burner assembly is made by removing the partition plate below the burner separating the fresh air inlet to the burner from the return air inlet compartment This is held in place by screws which engage in captive nuts on the top side of the partition Remove the Flame Detector and pull off the ignition plug cap Disconnect the burner support brackets and remove the burner The burner will easily pass through the access hatch for further strip down Replace in the reverse order soundness test the gas pipework check the burner operation and duty as described in the commissioning section of this manual

842 FLAME DETECTOR

This is a 240 Volt instrument

The flame detector is mounted on the end of the burner rail inside the air handler casing To remove the detector isolate the panel electric supply and lock off Push the scanner towards the burner and rotate to release the bayonet fixing and lift the detector from its mount Remove the two screws holding the detector cover and disconnect the supply leads noting the polarity of the connections

Replace the flame detector in the reverse order ensuring correct polarity of connections Ensure the access panel is securely closed and the retaining nuts are tightened down Check operation by inserting a test meter in the points provided in the main control panel and reading the flame signals during start up to full rate burner operation (See 431) Operate the appliance over six starts for reliability of operation including tum off of start and main gas valves to check for lockout operation

843 IGNITER SPARK PLUG

This is a high tension spark plug

The igniter spark plug is mounted on the end of the burner rail inside the air handler casing To remove the spark plug isolate the air handler as above Enter the service access door Access to the spark plug is made through the profile plate To remove the spark plug pull off the high tension lead and unscrew the plug with a plug spanner

When replacing the spark plug check the plug gap is set at 15mm Check ignition reliability over six start ups

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 32

8 SERVICING 3000S

844 IGNITER SPARK TRANSFORMER

This is a 240 Volt instrument

The ignition transformer is located in a plastic box mounted on the air handler casing adjacent to the main control panel To remove the transformer isolate the air handler as above and unscrew the four retaining screws holding the box lid in place and remove the lid Disconnect the supply cable at the terminal strip and undo the transformer retaining screws The transformer may then be unscrewed from the High Tension cable leading to the spark plug

Replacement is a simple reversal of this procedure

Check ignition reliability over six start ups

845 COMBUSTION AIR PRESSURE SWITCH (DPS)

Note The switch is set and sealed and should be replaced if not operating correctly

This switch is a 240 Volt instrument

The air switch is mounted directly on the air handler casing and can be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove the switch isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the supply cable Break the downstream pipe compression fitting and unscrew the switch housing from its locating fitting Reverse the procedure to replace after ensuring switch setting is as specified in Section 13 of this manual Operate the air handler to ensure reliability of operation over six start ups

846 AIR HANDLER OVERHEAT LIMIT CONTROL

This is a 240 Volt instrument

The overheat limit control can be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove the control isolate the air handler as above and lock off Remove the switch cover Disconnect the supply cable and unscrew the control housing from its locating fitting Reverse the procedure to replace check the switch is set to 50degC Test the switch operation as described in Section 43 over at least three operations

847 AIR FAN AND MOTOR

The air fan motor is a 415 Volt 3 phase motor

The motor and slide rails are easily accessible inside the air handler casing If it is necessary to remove the motor isolate the air handler as above Slacken the fan-belt tension and remove the drive belts Pull the motor away from the air handler casing to make access to the motor terminal box and disconnect the supply cable The motor may now be removed from the unit Following replacement the air handler must be fully re-commissioned as in Section 4

It is unlikely that the air fan will need replacing or servicing If required a full procedure should be obtained from RS STOKVIS Ltd

Replacement must be followed by full re-commissioning as in Section 4

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 33

8 SERVICING 3000S

848 FUEL GAS MULTI-FUNCTIONAL CONTROL - SMALL UNITS

This is a 240 Volt instrument

The fuel gas multi-functional control can be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove the unit isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the Hirschman electric termination Unbolt the control from its flanges and remove

When replacing care must be taken to ensure the flange 0 rings are undamaged and in the correct location Following replacement the air handler must be fully reshycommissioned as in Section 4 including tests for soundness prior to start-up

849 GOVERNOR AND BLOCK VALVES

The block valves are 240 Volt instruments

All these items may be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove any item isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the electric termination to the two block valves the pilot block valve and the flow control block valve Break the two pipe unions and remove the fuel gas line complete for further strip-down

8410 FUEL GAS FLOW CONTROL VALVE

This is a 24 Volt instrument

The fuel gas How control valve can be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove the valve isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the supply cables to the control valve

On small air handlers fitted with a multi-functional control support the multi-functional control and unbolt its discharge flange Break the union downstream of the burner isolation valve and remove the section of line containing the flow control valve for further strip-down

On large air handlers fitted with separate block valves it will be necessary to remove the fuel gas line complete as Section 8410 above

Following replacement re-commission the air handler

Note If the fresh air damper is not in the full open position the heat input must not exceed the maximum heat input at recirculation condition specified in the technical data section of this manual

8411 PILOT GAS GOVERNOR AND BLOCK VALVE

The block valve is a 240 Volt instrument

Both items may be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove either item isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the electric terrriination to the solenoid valve Undo the upstream pipe union and the compression fitting downstream of the manual block valve (PV3) Remove the pilot gas line complete for further strip down

Replace broken or distorted connections and retest for soundness Ensure the pilot gas pressure is correct and the flame is sensing an output Ensure reliability over six start-ups

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 34

8 SERVICING 3000S

8412 BELT TENSIONING PROCEDURE

The setting tensions are designed to cover a wide range of drives A precise setting force for individual applications can be calculated as detailed

SETTING FORCES

Belt Section

Setting Force To Deflect Belt 16mm per Metre Of Span

Small Pulley Diameter (mm)

Basic Setting Forces Newtons (N) Kilograms (kgf)

125 x Setting Forces Newtons (N) Kilograms (kgf)

SPZ

56 to 71 16 16 20 20 75 to 90 18 18 22 22

95 to 125 20 20 25 25 Over 125 22 22 28 28

SPA

80 to 100 22 22 28 28 106 to 140 30 30 38 38 150 to 200 36 37 45 46 Over 200 40 40 50 51

SPB

112 to 160 40 40 50 51 170 to 224 50 51 62 63 236 to 355 62 63 77 79 Over 355 65 66 81 83

SPC 224 to 250 70 71 87 89 265 to 355 92 94 115 120 Over 375 115 120 144 150

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 35

8 SERVICING 3000S

BELT TENSIONING USING FENNER BELT TENSION INDICATOR

Calculate the deflection in mm on a basis of 16mm per metre of centre distance Centre Distance (m) x 16 =Deflection (mm)

Set lower marker ring at the deflection distance required in mm on the lower scale

Set upper ring against to bottom edge of the top tube

Place the belt tension indicator on top of the belt at the centre of span and apply a force at right angles to the belt defecting it to the point where the lower marker ring is level with the top of the adjacent belt

Read off the force value indicated by the top edge of the upper marker ring

Compare this force to the kgf value shown in the table above

If a Fenner Belt Tension Indicator is not available a spring balance and rule will be suffice

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 36

8 SERVICING 30005

85 MAIN PANEL CONTROLS

All panel controls are readily accessible and may be easily exchanged for replacement components in the event of failure Ensure any replacement item is of the same make and type as the original

851 LANDIS amp GYR LFL 1335 AUTOMATIC SEQUENCE CONTROLLER

The Landis amp Gyr Automatic Sequence Controller is a plug-in unit locating on a pre-wired chassis To remove the controller undo the two retaining screws at the top left and lower right corners and pull the module off the chassis

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

852 CONTROLS CIRCUIT (24 VOLT) TRANSFORMER

The Controls Circuit Transformer is fixed to the panel back plate by tapped screws To remove the transformer undo the wiring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel Undo the two retaining screws and remove the unit complete

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

853 CONTROL RELAYS R1 R2 amp R3

The Control Relays are DIN Rail mounted To remove a relay undo the wIring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel Release the DIN rail retaining clip under the relay with a screwdriver and remove the relay

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

854 6A MCB

The 6A MCB is DIN Rail mounted To remove the MCB undo the wiring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel Release the DIN rail retaining clip under the MCB with a screwdriver and remove the MCB

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

855 THERMAL OVERLOAD

The thermal overload is attached to the underside of the main contactor To remove the overload undo the wiring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel and that the overload setting is as specified in Section 13 of this manual Unscrew the three connections to the contactor and remove the overload

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 37

8 SERVICING 3000S

856 MAIN CONTACTOR

The Main Contactor is DIN Rail mounted To remove the contactor remove the thermal overload as 855 above and then undo the wiring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel Release the DIN rail retaining clip under the contactor with a screwdriver and remove the contactor

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

857 MOTOR FUSE

To replace a motor fuse pull the fuse carrier off the fuse holder base The fuse is attached to the fuse carrier by two screws Unscrew remove and replace

86 REMOTE CONTROL STATION

The remote control station contains some serviceable parts although these items should only be fitted by an approved RS STOKVIS Ltd Engineer

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 38

9 RECOMMENDED SPARES 3000S

For two years operation it is recommended that the following items should be held in stock

ITEM DESCRIPTION PART NO QUANTITY i

1 INDICATOR BULBS W1121 1 PACK

2 SPARK PLUG 023739 1 I

3 UVDETECTOR QRA10C 1 I

4 ROOM SENSOR DRT2453 1

5 DUCT SENSOR DDT1701 1

All replacement parts can be obtained from RS STOKVIS Ltd by quoting the air handler serial number the part number and description

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 39

APPENDIX 1 30005

SOUNDNESS TESTING THE FUEL GAS PIPEWORK

This procedure should only be carried out by personnel familiar with the ECONO-AIR 3000S Series Air handler

The pressure test points and all valves are identified on the Process and Instrumentation Diagram for the air handler included in Section 1 of this n1anual

Isolate the air handler electric supply at the main control panel and lock off Close the manual isolation valves MV1 MV6 and PV3 Ensure the supply pressure is available on the upstream side of MV1

A11 TESTING THE UPSTREAM PIPEWORKAND BURNER CONTROLS 1 Connect a 60 mbar manometer to the pressure test nipple A Monitor the

pressure for two minutes Any rise in pressure indicates that valve MV1 is leaking and must be replaced Remove pressure test points Band F

2 Open MV1 to pressurise the pipework on both the main gas and pilot line to the first block valve

3 Close MV1 Allow one minute for the temperature to stabilise and then test the system for 2 minutes and watch for a drop in the pipework pressure If the pressure falls open valve MV1 and test the pipework connections and valves from MV1 to MV3 and MV1 to PV2 for leaks with a proprietary leak detector fluid or spray Turn off MV1 seal any leaks and re-test

4 If no extemalleaks are found either the pilot block valve PV1 or either the first main gas block valve MV3 is letting by

5 To test this seal pressure test point A and fit a manometer to pressure test point B Leave for two minutes with MV1 open A rise in pressure on the manometer confirms a leak on the block valve MV3 Turn off MV1 exchange the valve and re-test from point 2 above

6 Repeat this procedure for the pilot block valve Seal test point B and fit a manometer to pressure test point F Leave for two minutes with MV1 open A rise in pressure on the manometer confirms a leak on the pilot block valve PV2 Turn off MV1 exchange the valve and re-test from point 1 above Seal test point F

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 40

APPENDIX 1 30005

A12 TESTING THE DOWNSTREAM BURNER VALVE 1 Close MV1 and connect pressure test points A and 8 with flexible 6 mm bore

tubing teed into the manometer Remove pressure test point C Open MV1 to pressurise the downstream block valve MV4

2 Close MV1 and leave for one minute for the temperature to stabilise Monitor the pressure for 2 minutes If the pressure falls open valve MV1 and leak test the line between the two block valves MV3 and MV4 with a proprietary leak detector Turn off MV1 seal any leaks and re-test Note Smaller air handlers in the 3000S Series are fitted with multi-functional valves combining the pressure regulator and two block valves in one component The above procedure still applies but if a leak is found on either block valve the whole control should be replaced If no external leaks are found the downstream block valve is letting by

3 To confirm this close MV1 remove the manometer and refit to pressure test point C Connect pressure test points A and 8 with flexible 6mm bore tubing Open MV1 and allow one minute for the temperature to stabilise Monitor the pressure for a further 2 minutes with MV1 still open A rise in pressure confirms that the second block valve MV4 is letting by Turn off MV1 Replace the valve and re-test from 2 above

A13 TESTING THE DOWNSTREAM BURNER PIPEWORK 1 Close MV1 and connect pressure test points A and D with flexible 6 mm bore

tubing teed into the manometer Open MV1 to pressurise the downstream pilot pipework

2 Close MV1 and leave for one minute for the temperature to stabilise Monitor the pressure for 2 minutes If the pressure falls open valve MV1 and leak test the line between the downstream block valve MV4 and the manual block MV6 with a proprietary leak detector fluid or spray If no external leaks are found the manual block valve MV6 is letting by Turn off MV1 seal any leakages and reshytest from 2 above

A14 TESTING THE DOWNSTREAM PILOT PIPEWORK 1 Close MV1 and connect pressure test points A and F with flexible 6mm bore

tubing teed into the manometer Open MV1 to pressurise the downstream pilot pipework

2 Close MV1 and leave for one rninute for the temperature to stabilise Monitor the pressure for 2 minutes If the pressure falls open valve MV1 and leak test the line between the downstream block valve PV2 and the manual block PV3 with a proprietary leak detector fluid or spray If no external leaks are found the manual block valve PV3 is letting by Turn off MV1 seal any leakages and reshytest from 2 above

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 41

APPENDIX 1 30005

A15 TESTING THE BURNER CONNECTIONS 1 Remove the burner access panel as described in Section 84 of this manual

Remove the burner spark igniter Slacken the two retaining bolts holding the burner to the burner support straps and unbolt the burner supply endplate from the burner casting and mixing plates

2 Connect pressure test points A and 0 with flexible 6mm bore tubing teed into the manometer Open MV1 and MV6 to pressurise the burner pipework Leak test the main gas burner pipework and connections with proprietary leak detector fluid Turn off MV6 Seal any leakages and re-test

3 Connect pressure test points A and F with flexible 6 mm bore tubing teed into the manometer Open MV1 and PV3 to pressurise the pilot burner pipework Leak test the pilot gas burner pipework and connections with proprietary leak detector fluid Turn off PV3 Seal any leakages and re-test

4 Turn off MV1

5 Replace the spark igniter and profile division plate

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 42

APPENDIX 2 30005

START SEQUENCE

The burner start sequence is controlled by the Landis and Gyr burner management unit The timings are pre-set and comply with 885885 This unit must NOT be tampered with

A brief description of the start-up sequence isshy

The unit checks

1 The NO FLAME signal on the UV flame scanner

Note If the scanner detects a flame at any time other than in the correct operating sequence the flame programmer initiates a lockout

2 The operation of the combustion air proving switch in the NO AIR position

3 The air handler discharge high temperature switch

If the checks are completed the unit starts the combustion air fan and then checks the combustion airflow

Once the airflow is proven the unit checks that the damper control circuit is functioning correctly After the damper microswitch is made to prove the fresh air damper is fully open the sequence allows 30 seconds for the combustion air to purge any combustible gas from the air handler

After completion of the purge the spark ignition system is energised the pilot valve opened and the spark terminated If the pilot flame is not proven by the UV scanner the system will initiate a LOCKOUT

If the flame is proven the main gas valves are opened the pilot extinguished and the main burner flame proven

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 43

i

APPENDIX 2 30008

The following flow chart shows the complete start sequence including the lighting of the various indicating lamps

MANUAL STATUS LIGHT POWER ON

POWER ON

I INITIATE START BY TIME

SETTING ON CONTROLLER

I CHECK NO FLAME

VISIBLE

PROVEj FAIL LOCKOUT

I CHECK RELAY R4 NC

POSITION

PROVE FAIL NO START

I CHECK AIR PRESSURE SWITCH NC POSITION

PROVE FAIL NO START

I CHECK RELAY R1 NC

POSITION

PROVE j

FAIL NO START

I START COMBUSTION

AIR BLOWER

I CHECK AIR PRESSURE SWITCH NO POSITION

PROVE I

FAIL NO START

I STATUS LIGHT FAN ON

I ENERGISE RELAY R1

I

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 44

I

I

APPENDIX 2 30008

I CHECK OVERHEAT LIMIT

CONTROL R5

PROVE I

FAIL I I

CHECK 541412 LOOP CLOSED ON

LANDIS ampGYR CIRCUIT

PROVE I

FAIL I I

COMBUSTION AIR PURGE PERIOD

30 SECONDS

I

NO START

NO START

CANCEL NO FLAME CHECK CIRCUIT

I

ENERGISE SPARK

I TIMED PERIOD 25 SECONDS

I ENERGISE PILOT GAS

VALVE

I TIMED PERIOD 25 SECONDS

I TERMINATE SPARK

I INTERROGATE UV FLAME SCANNER

PROVE I

FAIL I I

TIMED PERIOD 10 SECONDS

I

LOCKOUT

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 45

I

I

APPENDIX 2 3000S

I ENERGISE MAIN GAS

VALVES

I

STATUS LIGHT BURNER ON

I TIMED PERIOD

5 SECONDS

I DE-ENERGISE PILOT

GAS VALVES

CONTINUOUS FROM PILOT

I INTERROGATE UV FLAME SCANNER

PROVE I

FAIL I I

LOCKOUT I

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 46

APPENDIX 3 30005

Please see copy of Standard Service Sheet

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 47

APPENDIX 4 30005

A41 TIME OUT SCREEN

This is the standard screen displayed when the touch screen is not in use The back light is off to save energy_ To access the STATUS screen touch the ENTER key and the following screen is displayed

[]][I][]rn[IJOO[][IJOO[] EJ~E11 I[]I ~ middot I

NOTE

The Touch Screen operates using the heat produced by the touch of a finger and therefore only LIGHT pressure is required

Excessive pressure can damage the Touch Screen

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 48

APPENDIX 4 30008

A42 STATUS SCREEN

On the typical STATUS screen the illustrated information detailed is as follows

19 36 Fan Brn

RS OS

100 Fst_~_ Lck _ _ Xst Gas~o ~ I

RS Indicates the current room temperature

OS ~( t~~ the current duct discharge temperature

Fan Indicates the current status of the fan by showing the arrow and the fan blades for ON and OFF is shown by the arrow and fan blades being removed

Brn Indicates the current status of the burner with the black flames indicating the burner to be ON and vice versa

Lck LOCKOUT - This indicates a flame failure when highlighted during normal or start-up operation

Xst EXCESS TEMPERATURE SWITCH - This indicates the unit has reached the trip limit on the over heat stat when highlighted during operation

Indicates the current position of the gas modulating valve during normal Gas

operation (0-100)

Indicates whether the Frost stat is energised and the unit is running on frost Fst

override

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 49

APPENDIX 4 30008

A43 CHANGING SETTINGS

It is possible to change the settings for the time of operation and the required temperature set points The following details the steps required

A44 ENTERING THE SECURITY CODE

From the STATUS screen touch the return key and the screen below will be displayed

Type the HIGH LEVEL security code (4321) If you make a mistake use the BACK SPACE key to delete any incorrect number(s) Touch the ENTER key when the code is correct

If the security code is incorrect the screen above will be displayed then try again If after several attempts you can not gain access please contact RS STOKVIS Ltd for further information

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 50

APPENDIX 4 30008

When the code is entered correctly the MAIN MENU is displayed as detailed below

~ STATUS SET VALUES~ ~ TIVIE CLOCK [) [) [) [) [)

The MAIN MENU screen shows the three menu items available The title for each menu item can be changed to suit the end user Please notify RS STOKVIS Ltd prior to commissioning should these parameters require special amendments

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 51

APPENDIX 4 30008

A45 CHANGING OR SETTING A TIME SCHEDULE

From the main menu screen select the TIME CLOCK page by running finger across screen symbol and touch the ENTER key the screen below will be displayed

On the following screen highlight the TS1 symbol and touch the ENTER key

The current time schedule will now be displayed as shown below The display will automatically default to the current day (1 =Monday 2 =Tuesday etc) In this case day 5 (Friday) the four schedule switching times refer to that day

IAC6BBB1BHIS1

mm0CIl bull mID 17BB 17BB 17HB

Iillleschedule

To modify a time select it by highlighting and touch the ENTER key and the following screen is displayed

To amend the appropriate onoff time as shown on the screen below The arrows to the right of the time are for altering the hours and the arrows on the left for the minutes

Once you have set the time use the ESCape key to exit back to the time schedule screen and choose another day by touching the required number Another time may now be modified as before

IAC6BBB1BHIS1

H8BH

I i eschedule

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 52

APPENDIX 4 30008

Use the ESCape key to exit back to the MAIN MENU screen

~ STATUS ~ SET VALUES

TIME CLOCK []~ [] [] [] []

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 53

APPENDIX 4 30005

A46 CHANGING SET VALUES

From the main menu screen select the SET VALUES page by highlight in the normal way and touch the ENTER key

The following screen is displayed

36 19 18III III IIIHsv Rsv Llv

To change the RSV highlight it in the normal way and touch the ENTER key and the screen below will now be shown

IAC6RRR1RR40 T I

0 19 (Y)l RSV

ROOM SET VALUE

The above screen shows the parameters that can be changed The values to the far left are the limitations of set point (OC) Change the set point by using the UP and DOWN ARROWS on the left of the screen or touch the set value itself followed by the ENTER key to select the set value and set it directly using the numeric keyboard All values can be changed in this way

Use the ESCape key twice to exit back to the MAIN MENU screen

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 54

APPENDIX 4 30005

A47 COMMISSIONING AND SERVICING BURNER CHECKS

Select the SET VALUES screen from the MAIN MENU screen and adjust the high lirrlit set point to 55degC to drive the burner to high fire

IAC6HHH1HH60 ~T I

0 19 (Y)

HSV

HIGH SET VALUE ~

Ensure the set value is returned to 36degC once the appropriate checks and adjustments as described in Section 43 of this manual have been completed Return to the SET VALUES screen and select the low limit value to adjust the low fire setting

Reduce the low limit value to OdegC to drive the gas valve to low fire and complete the appropriate checks and adjustments as described in Section 43 of this manual and ensure the set value is returned to the original value

A48 GMT ltgt BST CHANGEOVER DAYLIGHT SAVINGS

To change your unit to British Summer TimelWinter Time the following system screen must be highlighted by touching the Iamp1 button twice

By touching the clock symbol in the top left hand corner followed by the ENTER key the screen below will be displayed

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 55

APPENDIX 4 30008

188311 851193

544

By touching and highlighting in this case 18 followed by the ENTER key A small box allowing the entry of two digits will appear Enter the desired time required using the numbered keys followed by ENTER key Your unit is now set to operate on BSTBWT

Touch the ESC key three times to return back to the Status screen

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 56

STOKVIS ENERGY SYSTEMS 96R WALTON ROAD EAST MOLESEY SURREY KT8 0DL TEL 020 8783 3050 08707 707 747 FAX 020 8783 3051 08707 707 767 E-MAIL infostokvisboilerscom WEBSITE wwwstokvisboilerscom

JULY 1999

Page 14: ECONOAIR 3000S SERIES AIR HANDLING UNIT DIRECT FIREDstokvisboilers.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/EconoAir... · 2019-05-10 · ECONOAIR 3000S SERIES AIR HANDLING UNIT DIRECT FIRED

2 GENERAL DESCRIPTION 3000S

235 REMOTE CONTROL STATION

The ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler is also supplied with a remote control station which houses the air handler operating controls indicating status and the workspace temperature detector if the control station is located in the heated space

236 HEATED SPACE TEMPERATURE SENSOR The heated space temperature sensor is to be located remotely within the space to be heated

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 10

3 INSTALLATION 30005

31 STATUTORY REQUIREMENTS

I n accordance with the Gas Safety (I nstallation and Use) Regulations 1998 installation of this ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler should only be undertaken by competent personnel who are fully aware of their responsibilities under the Health and Safety at Work Act 1974

The installation of this air handler must comply with

BS6230-1991 Installation of gas-fired forced convection air air handlers for commercial and industrial Space Heating of rated input exceeding 60kW

The lEE Regulations for Electrical Installations

Gas Safety (Installation and Use) Regulations 1998

Health and Safety at Work Act 1974

Building Regulations 1986

Building Standards (Scotland Only)

The I nstitution of Gas Engineers Codes of Practice

IGEUP1 Soundness Testing Procedures for Industrial and Commercial Gas Installations

IGEUP2 Gas Installation Pipework Boosters and Compressors on Industrial and Commercial Premises

IGEUP4 Commissioning Of Gas Fired Plant On Industrial and Commercial Premises

32 RECEPTION AND STORAGE OF GOODS

32laquo1 RECEPTION

On receipt of the shipment check that the shipment is complete against the Delivery Advice Note Check for mechanical damage sustained during transit before off-loading the goods Inform the carrier of any such damage

322 OFFLOADING

Horizontal air handlers are fitted with four lifting eyes to permit an overhead lift Alternatively horizontal air handlers may be handled by a fork lift truck on the steel angle support frame

323 STORAGE

Air handlers must be stored in a dry environment The remote control station must be removed from the shipment and stored indoors in a dry environment Outdoor units of split case design (Size 54 and above) must have open ends protected from the environment until installation is complete Any filter elements should be stored in a dry environment

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 11

3 INSTALLATION 3000S

33 LIMITATIONS OF USE

The ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler must not be installed in the following locations

I n hazardous areas

In areas where flammable vapours can be present in excess of their threshold limit values as defined in 8S5925

I n accordance with 8S6230 Clause 513 where there are any flued appliances in the heated area and where air is supplied mechanically and there is mechanical extraction the design extract rate must be 5 to 10 less than the design inlet rate so that the room will not be at a lower pressure than the outside air If the air handler is the only source of mechanically supplied air the extract rate must not exceed 95 of the nominal air flow specified in Section 11 of this manual

Note If it proposed to install the ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler to supply heated air to a hazardous area or in areas where flammable vapours are present the installation must first be approved by a RS STOKVIS Ltd Engineer

34 LOCATION OF AIR HANDLERS

The air handler should normally be installed in the location recommended by the RS STOKVIS Ltd specifying engineer

Check the proposed location for level and load bearing strength Ensure that there is adequate clearance as detailed on the air handler GA in Section 1 this manual around the unit for access for maintenance purposes If the air handler is to be installed above floor level a suitably designed service platform should be provided Such a platform must have 100mm minimum raised edges around the perimeter If this is not possible all air handler access panels must be fitted with hinged restraints This is a factory standard option which should be specified at the time of ordering - check the restraints are fitted before proceeding with installation

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 12

3 INSTALLATION 3000S

35 FRESH AIR INLET AND VENTILATION

351 FRESH AIR INLET

The air handler must be installed where it has a direct and unlimited supply of fresh air from outside the building Ensure that the air intake is not located near exhausts from the building or from any process exhausts such as paint booth exhausts Whenever possible protect the fresh air inlet from the prevailing wind and local wind effects from corners

The fresh air inlet should be sized for an air velocity of 3ms The inlet duct area is detailed on the General Arrangement drawing located in Section 1 of this manual

Where the fresh air inlet is made in a load bearing wall eg a brick wall guidance should be obtained from Structural Engineers on the provision of a lintel in the wall over the fresh air opening

A weather hood must be fitted when the air handler air inlet is at or within 1 m of the outside wall Additionally the weather hood should have negligible resistance to the airflow maximum 01 mbar at the design air flow rate

Do not install the ECONO-AI R 3000S Series air handler where long lengths of duct or bends of an angle greater than 30deg are necessary to lead to the air handler from the fresh air opening If ducting is unavoidable ensure that the resulting pressure drop is negligible Le less than 01 mbar for ductless air handlers and has been accounted for in the original design for ducted air handlers as detailed in the specification section of this manual Section 11

Note If the air intake is located in an area of unrestricted access warning notices preventing the blockage of the air intake by temporary stacking should be displayed adjacent to the intake

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 13

3 INSTALLATION 3000S

352 VENTI LA TION

Where the air air handler is in its own plant room or compartment this shall be ventilated with openings communicating directly with the outside air to ventilate the room

The openings shall be fitted with grilles of negligible resistance and shall be sited so that they cannot easily be blocked or flooded They shall have a total minimum free area as follows

Low Level (inlet) 320cm2 + 27cm2 per kilowatt in excess of 60kW total rated input

High Level (outlet) 160cm2 + 134cm2 per kilowatt in excess of 60kW total rated input

The free area of the grilles shall be not less than the size of the recommended minimum ventilation opening Grilles shall be designed to minimise high velocity air streams in the plant room For exposed ie free standing plant rooms ventilation openings shall be provided on at least two sides and preferably on all four sides

Where mechanical ventilation is used it shall be by mechanical inlet and either natural or mechanical extraction Systems of ventilation employing mechanical extraction and natural air inlet shall not be used

The minimum flow rates of air supplied shall be not less than 06 m3s per megawatt of rated heat input

36 AIR DISCHARGE

The air handler should be located with the air discharge into the heated space at a minimum height of 3 metres The air should not discharge directly onto any obstructions and direct discharge on to working personnel should be avoided

If the air discharge is located in an area of unrestricted access warning notices preventing the blockage of the air discharge by temporary stacking should be displayed adjacent to the discharge

Generally it is not necessary to fit distribution ducting to the discharge of the air handler If ducting is required or specified ensure that the resulting pressure drop has been accounted for in the original design specification as detailed in Section 1 of this manual

37 ASSEMBLY AND POSITIONING OF AIR HANDLER

Unless specified at the time of order air handlers will be shipped in sections Discharge heads grilles attenuators duct connecting sections filters rain-hoods etc will be supplied loose for site fitting to the air handler

Horizontal air handlers must be supported on their steel angle support base When the air handler is located check for level and adjust as necessary

Alternatively horizontal air handlers can be supplied with extensions of the support frame for suspending from overhead supports This must be specified at the time of order Do not suspend the air handler from the lifting eyes

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 14

3 INSTALLATION 3000S

38 REMOTE STATION

The ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler is supplied with a remote control station This should be mounted in a position convenient to the end user If possible it should not be mounted on an external wall or where the space temperature detector is affected by cold draughts or a local source of heat

39 VISUAL CHECK

After completion of installation re-check the air handler for signs of damage Report any instance to RS STOKVIS Ltd

310 CONNECTION OF SERVICES

The air handler requires the connection of fuel gas and electricity

3101 FUEL GAS SUPPLY

The ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler has been designed for use on Natural Gas An alternative version is available for LPG The gas type for the air handler supplied is clearly marked on the air handler data badge and on the Specification sheet in Section 1 of this manual Check the gas type is correct and that the supply pressure is within the range marked on the specification

The local gas Authority should be consulted about the adequacy of the gas service and meter supplies for existing and proposed extensions to the installation and for any requirements for boosting the gas supply_

Connect the fuel gas supply to the inlet manual valve on the air handler gas train The connection size is detailed in Section 1 of this manual A further isolation valve and union should be fitted immediately adjacent to the appliance which when the valve is closed allows the complete burner and control assembly to be disconnected for maintenance or repair

New gas pipework should be installed to British Gas Publication IGEUP2 and be purged and pressure tested in accordance with British Gas Publications IGEUP1

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 15

3 INSTALLATION 3000S

3102 ELECTRICITY SUPPLY

All external wiring shall be carried out and checked by a competent person All components shall be checked for suitability for voltage range and frequency

Means for electric isolation having a contact separation of at least 3mm in all poles must be provided adjacent to the air handler The electrical supply to the appliance shall incorporate suitable means of excess current protection

The ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler requires a 3 phase 4 wire supply which should be connected to the main control panel Check the air handler data badge for the correct electrical supply The maximum supply requirement is Specified in Section 1 of this manual Note that the 240 Volt air handler control circuit is taken from the lUI phase to Neutral Connection should be made as shown on the wiring diagram shipped inside this panel

The air handler must be earthed in accordance with BS5986 and CP1013

Check all terminal strip terminations for wires which have become loose during shipment

311 CONNECTION TO THE MAIN PANEL AND REMOTE STATION

Interconnecting wiring to the main panel and remote station should be made with a minimum specification of 075 mm2 300 Volt cable Check that no wires on the terminal strip have become loose during shipment The remote panel should be mounted at a height of approx 18m If possible it should not be mounted on an external wall or where the sensor will be affected by cold draughts or a local source of heat

Both panel and remote station must be earthed in accordance with BS5986 and CP1013

312 HEATED SPACE TEMPERATURE SENSOR

The space temperature sensor located on the remote panel should be connected with screened cable or twin low voltage signal cable run in its own separate conduit It should be mounted on the remote panel or adjacent to the outlet at a height of approx 18m If possible it should not be mounted on an external wall or where the sensor will be affected by cold draughts or a local source of heat

313 DUCT SENSOR

The duct sensor should be connected with screened cable or twin low voltage signal cable run in its own separate conduit It should be mounted in the air handler discharge as close as possible to the discharge into the heated space

314 OVERHEAT LIMIT CONTROL SENSOR

The overheat limit control sensor should be connected with twin core cable It should be mounted in the air handler discharge within 1 metre of the air handler outlet connection

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 16

3 INSTALLATION 3000S

315 TOUCH SCREEN WIRING

The touch screen located on the front of the remote station requires two separate twisted pairs of O5mrh2 screened cable run in a separate conduit If the distance between the main and remote stations is greater that 1 km please contact RS STOKVIS Ltd for advice

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 17

3 INSTALLATION 3000S

316 ALIGNMENT

3161 INSTALLATION OF DRIVE BELTS

On 80 amp 89 30008 range of air handlers it will be necessary to align the pulleys and fit the drive belts before carrying out commissioning of the unit

3162 PU LLEYS

Before assembling the drive check the pulley grooves are free from scores or sharp edges and all dimensions conform to the relevant standard

The Taper Lock bush is your starting point when it comes to assembly and installation Drive installation is a straightforward job with Taper Lock - but the stages set out on the installation leaflet provided with every Taper Lock bush should be followed closely

3163 ALIGNMENT

Good alignment of pulleys prior to belt installation is important to avoid belt flank wear The diagram below shows correct installation of pulleys

INTERNAl BEARING

MOTOR PUlLEY rAN PULLEY

MOTORMOTOR ADJUSTMENT MOUNTING BOlTSBOLTS

3164 BELTS

When the pulleys have been correctly positioned on the shafts the belts can be installed to complete the drive

The drive centre distance should be reduced prior to the installation of the belts so that they may be fitted without the use of force Under no circumstances must belts be prised into the grooves Using sharp tools to stretch the belts over the pulley rim can easily damage belts and pulley grooves

The installation allowance given in the table below is the minimum recommended reduction in centre distance for various belt section and lengths to allow for correct fitting

The take-up allowance given in the same table should be added on to the calculated centre distance to allow for belt stretch

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 18

3 INSTALLATION 3000S

3165 INSTALLATION AND TAKE UP ALLOWANCE

Belt Pitch Installation Allowance Take-Up Length (mm) SPZ SPA SPB SPC (mm)

410 to 530 5

540 to 840 10

850 to 1160 15

1170 to 1500 20

1510 to 1830 20 25

1840 to 2170 30

2180 to 2830 25 40

2840 to 3500 30 50

3520 to 4160 50 60

4170 to 5140 70

5220 to 6150 85

6180 to 7500 105

600 to 8500 125

8880 to 10170 145

10600 to 12500 175

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 19

4 COMMISSIONING 30005

This appliance must be commissioned by a RS STOKVIS Ltd approved engineer

41 PRESTART CHECKS

1 Switch the SUMMERIOFFMlINTER switch on the remote station to OFF

2 Check the correct electric supply is available to the air handler and the appliance isolator installed

3 Check the correct fuel gas supply is available to the air handler and local isolation valve and union installed Check that new gas pipe work has been correctly purged and pressure tested and that the isolation valve is in the OFF position

4 Check the air handler gas control system and burner connections for pressure soundness as detailed in Appendix 1 of this manual

5 Complete the first section of the Service Check Sheet supplied at the back of this manual (Appendix 3)

6 Close the air handler access door

7 Close and lock the main air handler control panel

8 Switch the main panel isolator to position 1 Check the POWER ON light illuminates

9 Check and set the timed ONOFF periods in the lAC Controller located on the remote panel Ensure that the unit is set to be on during testing Refer to Appendix 4 for the lAC setting procedure

10 Close and lock the remote panel

11 Switch the SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch on the remote station to SUMMER to start the air fan Return the switch to the OFF position and check for correct rotation of the fan as the fan slows and stops

The fan rotation can be observed through the fan section access door or through the air handler access door Only do this during the fan run-down period Ensure the door is securely fastened after completion

Rotation arrows are fitted on the end of the air handler and inside the air handler above the interior bearing support If the rotation is incorrect two phases should be interchanged as dictated by the Engineer responsible for the site electrical system

12 Check the air pressure drop across the burner whilst the fan is operating with a water column pressure gauge connected to the two pressure test points on the air pressure switch (DPS) This pressure should be between 14 and 16 rnbar

If the air differential pressure measured above is not within the operating range check inlet and outlet ductwork as appropriate and any filters fitted If the pressure differential is still not within limits isolate the air handler and report to RS STOKVIS Ltd before proceeding

13 Check the operation and setting of the Low Air Pressure Switch by injecting a controlled signal into the switch Check the break point on the switch is 1 mbar (falling)

Note The switch is set and sealed before fitting The 1 mbar switch point may not coincide with the 1 mbar scale reading on the switch

If on checking the switch is not operating correctly do not tamper with it return it to RS STOKVIS Ltd for replacement

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 20

4 COMMISSIONING 3000S

42 DRY RUN

With all the manual gas isolation valves still in the OFF position switch the SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch to WINTER

43 START UP

1 Attach a manometer to pressure test point F and the low pressure test point on the air pressure switch (DPS)

2 Open the main gas supply valve (MV1) and the pilot burner isolation valve (PV3) Leave the main burner isolation valve (MV6) closed Reset the air handler by pressing the push-button marked RESET on either the main panel or remote station The air handler pilot will light automatically (after the automatic damper start check and combustion air pre-purge) and then LOCKOUT after the main gas shut-off valves are addressed

During the short period that the pilot is in operation check the pilot gas pressure on the manometer It should be 10 mbar and the pilot flame approximately 100 - 150mm in length covering the first three or four holes of the mixing plate and have a steady blue colour when viewed through the sight glass on the access side of the air handler Adjust as necessary - refer to Section 51 this manual Check the flame signal - refer to Section 431

3 Open the main burner isolation valve (MV6) RESET the air handler which should now light to main burner stage When alight close the main burner isolation valve to shut down the gas flow to the burner Check that the unit goes to LOCKOUT

4 Reset the air handler and drive the burner to low fire by adjusting the temperature controller set point as described in Appendix 4 of this manual Check the flame is continuous across the width of the burner and has a flame length of approx 50 - 65mm from the burner rail when viewed through the sight glass on the access side of the air handler Check the burner pressure across pressure test point D and the downstream (low) pressure test point on the air pressure switch ie on the rear of the pressure switch This pressure is specifled in Section 1 of this manual Adjust as necessary-refer to Section 53 of this manual Check the flame signal - refer to Section 431

Where possible check the actual gas flow rate by meter reading with all other appliances turned off

5 Drive the burner to high fire by adjusting the temperature controller set point and high limit to 55degC as described in Appendix 4 of this manual Check the flame is continuous across the burner rail and has a flame length of approximately 250 - 350mm from the burner rail Check the burner pressure across pressure test point D and the downstream (low) pressure test point on the air pressure switch This pressure is specified in Section 1 of this manual Adjust as necessary - refer to Section 52 of this manual Check the maximum air handler discharge temperature Check the flame signal shyrefer to Section 431

Where possible check the actual gas flow rate by meter reading with all other appliances turned off

6 Check the operation of the overheat limit control by adjusting the temperature controller set point and high limit to 65degC as described in Appendix 4 of this manual Monitor the discharge temperature on the temperature controller Check that the overheat control operates as the set temperature is passed Check that the control must be manually reset by pressing the green reset button on the front of the switch Return the temperature controller to its original settings

In the event that the ambient temperature is too low for this simple procedure to work the instrument will have to be bench tested using a Temperature 8ath Remove and replace the control as Section 84 of this manual for bench-testing

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 21

4 COMMISSIONING 3000S

43 1 FLAME SIGNAL CHECK

1 The ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler is fitted with a Klippon SAKT1 Test Terminal which can be used to measure the flame scanning signal Refer to the Electrical Schematic and connect a 0-1 mA ammeter to the two test points with standard 23 mm test plugs with the positive lead on the detector side Disconnect the terminal link to obtain the signal reading A minimum signal of 70 microamps is required typical signals are in the 250-400 microamp range on both pilot and main flame After completion replace the terminal link and remove the test jacks

2 Drive the burner to high fire as previously described Measure the carbon dioxide content of the discharge air stream This figure must not exceed 2800 ppm If the discharge exceeds this limit isolate the air handler and report to RS STOKVIS Ltd before proceeding

Stop and start the air handler a few times to check for reliability using the Operating Instructions (Section 6)

432 HANDOVER

Complete the air handler Service Check Sheet supplied at the back of this manual The self-copy sheet must be returned to STOKVIS for checking

Instruct the User in efficient use and care of the unit start-up and shutdown (including emergency shutdown) and recommended service interval Emphasise the need to keep the air handler clear of stored items and extraneous material and to maintain the recirculation and fresh air paths to the air handler inlets Hand all instructions as applicable to the UserOwner for safekeeping

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 22

5 ADJUSTMENTS 3000S

If adjustments to the air handler settings are required they should be made by a RS STOKVIS Ltd approved engineer

The normal value for all control settings is specified in Section 1 of this manual

51 PILOT ADJUSTMENT

The pilot gas pressure and flame length may be adjusted by altering the discharge pressure of the pilot governor Screwing the adjusting screw clockwise (located under the top cap) increases the discharge pressure and the flame length anti-clockwise decreases the pressure and the flame length

52 BURNER HIGH FIRE PRESSURE ADJUSTMENT

At high fire alter the spring compression on the main burner governor (MV2) by removing the cap and adjust the spring compression plate clockwise to increase the burner pressure anti-clockwise to decrease burner pressure If the pressure does not increase on adjusting the spring the supply is inadequate

Note On small air handlers fitted with a mUlti-functional control the pressure adjusting screw is located under a swing cap on the first block valve

53 BURNER LOW FIRE ADJUSTMENT

The main burner low fire is adjusted on the flow control valve MV5 (Process amp Instrumentation Diagram)

Remove the top cover of the valve and insert a Terminal Screwdriver in the adjusting screw of the TOP cam marked NI

Drive the burner to low fire by adjusting the temperature controller set-point and high limit to 05degC as described in Appendix 4 of this manual

Turn the Terminal Screwdriver clockwise to decrease the low fire gas flow anti-clockwise to increase the flow

Check the heat input and flame signal at the new position are satisfactory and return the tenlperature controller to its normal settings

Replace the control valve cover

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 23

5 ADJUSTMENTS 3000S

54 SUMMERIOFFIWINTER SWITCH

In the SUMMER position this switch provides ventilation only and is independent of the programmed ON and OFF periods This position is manually selected and must be manually de-selected Whenever the switch is in this position the fan is operating

In the OFF position the air handler is shutdown and will not operate This overrides any frost protection fitted It is suitable for air handler shutdown for short periods such as holidays The programme memory is unaffected by this switch and assumes control of the air handler when the switch is returned to the WINTER position

In the WINTER position the air handler operates off the programme memory to provide heating

55 RESET BUTTON

Visual indication of air handler lockout is provided In the event of lockout occurring the air handler can be reset by depressing the RESET button This parallels the RESET button on the air handler main control panel If after 4 attempts to reset the air handler the lockout indicator still illuminates then a Service Engineer should be called to investigate the problem

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 24

6 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 3000S

61 AIR HANDLER START-UP

1 Open all manual gas valves both on the appliance and on the supply to the appliance Switch on the Electric Supply to the appliance

2 On the main air handler panel

Switch the panel isolator to the 1 position

Check POWER ON light

3 On the remote control station

For Heating Switch the SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch to WINTER

The air handler will now start automatically in response to the time settings

In the event of LOCKOUT

Press the RESET button and the cycle of operations will be repeated If the air handler goes to LOCKOUT four times in succession call for a Service Engineer

For Unheated Ventilation Switch the SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch to SUMMER

Note This prevents the burner firing giving a controlled supply of ventilation air to the heated space as long as the switch is in this position The air handler will now start automatically in response to the timeclock demand To turn the fan off return the switch to the centre OFF position

In the event of LOCKOUT

Press the RESET button and the cycle of operations will be repeated If the air handler goes to LOCKOUT four times in succession call for a Service Engineer

62 AIR HANDLER SHUTDOWN

621 SHUTDOWN FOR SHORT PERIODS

Switch the SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch on the remote station to OFF

622 SHUTDOWN FOR PROLONGED PERIODS

Switch the main panel isolator to the 0 position and close all manual gas valves both on and leading to the appliance

Note Manual gas valves should only be operated when the appliance is to be shut off for either Servicing or for a prolonged shutdown

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 25

30005 6 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

63 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS

631 SITE CLEARANCE ADJACENT TO AIR HANDLER

Attention should be paid to keeping the area around the air handler tidy No rubbish should be allowed to accumulate in the vicinity of the air handler and storage of goods etc should not be permitted within two metres of the air handler Failure to comply could result in reduced airflow to the air handler causing inefficient running and potential overheat cond ition

632 AIR SUPPLY TO AIR HANDLER

Air vents and grilles supplying air to the air handler should never be blocked and should be checked periodically to ensure they are clear

633 AIR FILTERS

Similarly attention should be paid to cleaning or replacing the filters to the air handler if fitted Your installer should advise you on the frequency with which this would be required to be completed

634 SERVICE

For continued safe and efficient operation of this air air handler it is important that servicing of the air handler should be completed at regular intervals by a competent person in accordance with Section 82 of this manual Users are advised to enter into a Service Agreement with RS STOKVIS Ltd

635 SPARE PARTS

It is suggested that a complete set of spare parts essential to the running of the air handler and recommended by the installer are kept by the user on the premises where the air handler is installed This is particularly important where the air handler forms an essential part of any process plant and its being out of operation may cause problems by for example frost damage or condensation by super-cooling

A list of Recommended Spares will be found in Section 9 of this manual

636 GAS LEAKS

If a smell of gas is detected around the area of the appliance Switch off all manual gas valves and contact your service engineer or the local gas undertaking

NEVER

LOOK FOR GAS LEAKS WITH A LIGHTED MATCH OR NAKED

FLAME

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 26

7 FAULT FINDING 30008

The main control panel incorporates two lights to help in fault finding

POWER ON

LOCKOUT

The remote station also has three lights

AIR FAN ON

BURNER ON

LOCKOUT

This section gives the possible causes of failure associated with each check light The electrical schematic diagram in this manual and the wiring diagram shipped in the main air handler panel should be used in conjunction with the notes below Additionally Service Engineers should familiarise themselves with the detailed Start Sequence given in Appendix 2 of this manual

The notes are given for each light before consulting the notes check for bulb failure

71 POWER ON LIGHT IS UNLIT

Check

1 Main control panel isolator is in the 1 position

2 Main Panel 6A MCB has not tripped if a trip has occurred the switch will be at the OFF position Reset and test system as required

3 Also check if the mains electrical supply is isolated If so FIND OUT WHY before taking any action

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 27

7 FAULT FINDING 30005

72 AIR FAN ON LIGHT IS UNLIT

Check

1 SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch is not in Position OFF

2 Timeperiod is not set to off

3 Air handler is not at LOCKOUT

4 Recheck both AIR FAN ON and LOCKOUT bulbs

Two fault indications are possible

1 THE FAN IS NOT OPERATING

If the fan should have started but is not operating

Check 1 Overload for tripped conditions Reset the overload and monitor the next start-up

2 Motor Fuses

3 Relays 1 2 amp3 for failure

laClor CC1 for failure

5 Air Pressure Switch (DPS) is failed in the N 0 Position

Replace the faulty component as described in Section 8

2 THE FAN IS OPERATING

This indicates that the air pressure switch (DPS) has failed to change over

Measure the profile plate differential pressure as described in Section 4113 If the pressure is correct the air pressure switch is faulty Check the switch as in 4114 If the pressure is not correct

Check 1 Correct fan belt tension

2 Correct fan rotation

3 The air handler air inlets and discharge are not blocked

4 Correct fitting on filters

5 The air differential pressure switch impulse lines are not blocked or leaking

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 28

7 FAULT FINDING 30008

73 LOCKOUT LIGHT IS ILLUMINATED

This light indicates a failure in the burner ignition and flame supervision system

RESET the unit and follow the progress of the start sequence The full cycle may take two minutes

1

------t

2 LOCKOUT after 35-40 seconds indicates an ignition failure RESET the system and observe the pilot and ignition spark during the start-up attempt

I-- shy

3 Observe the spark This should be strong and highly visible If not remove and clean the spark plug as Section 82 Check that the spark plug gap is correctly set at 15 mm

-- shy

4 Check the pilot flame If the pilot flame ignites and the unit goes to LOCKOUT the scanning system is at fault Remove and clean the detector as Section 82 Check the flame signal as in Section 431

5 If the pilot does not light the gas supply system is faulty Check the pilot system for restriction and the pilot valve operation

6 If the pilot lights and the unit goes to LOCKOUT after the main gas valves are addressed either the flow control valve is blocked or one of the main gas block valves has failed Fit a manometer on the pressure test point on the outlet flange of the multishyfunctional control and observe if the pressure rises when the main gas valves are addressed No pressure rise will indicate failure of the main gas valves

74 AIR FAN ON LIGHT ILLUMINATED

If the burner does not start check

1 SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch is in WINTER position

2 Overheat Limit Control

These interlocks prevent the burner management system starting

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 29

8 SERVICING 3000S

IMPORTANT Servicing and maintenance should be only carried out by a RS STOKVIS Ltd approved engineer

Only use replacement parts provided by the appliance manufacturer

Check that the air openings for combustion and for ventilation of any plant roon or compartment are clear

81 ISOLATION

811 FUEL GAS ISOLATION

The fuel gas to the ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler should be isolated and locked off at the manual ball valve mounted at the start of the fuel gas line Additionally before entering or servicing the air handler the burner manual isolation valve and pilot line isolation valve should be closed

812 ELECTRICAL ISOLATION

All electric power to the air handler and the remote control station is switched through the local isolator This isolator is fitted with a lock facility to permit it to be locked in the OFF position

Additionally isolate the power at the Wall Isolator

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 30

8 SERVICING 30005

82 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE

The air handler should be routinely serviced at the start of each heating season Isolate the air handler as above before servicing Details of access to individual components are given in Section 84 of this manual

1 Remove and clean spark igniter Check that the gap is correctly set at 25 mm Replace every two years

2 Clean the flame detector lens to ensure freedom from dirt and moisture If the cell shows any sign of cracks it should be replaced Routinely replace the cell every two years or after 10000 hours of operation which ever comes first

3 Inspect the entire air handler paint system for general damage Repair as necessary

4 Every two years brush the burner plates and clear the burner holes carefully with a Size 18mm drill for NP II and 20mm drill for NP I

WARNING THE BURNER HOLES MUST NOT BE ENLARGED

5 Inspect and lubricate all damper linkages to ensure freedom of operation Wipe off all excess lubricants to prevent dirt build up on linkage parts

6 Check the fan belt for cracks and splits Check tension The correct tension gives 16mm deflection per metre of span when the belt is centrally loaded with a force of 27N Adjust as necessary

7 Grease both the fan shaft bearings with Mobiith AW2 grease or similar

NEVER use high temperature grease

NEVER mix two different greases within the bearing always flush existing grease out

Note Removing the cover plate on the end of the air handler gains access to the outboard fan bearing

Light to Slow to 0 120 2 to 6 months Clean Dry

Medium Medium 120 200 1 to 2 months

Moderate to Light to Slow to 0 120 1 to 4 weeks Dry

Dirty Medium Medium 120 200 1 to 7 days

Extreme Dirt Dry Light to Slow to 0 200 Daily Flushing out

Medium Medium Dirt

83 ANNUAL SERVICE CHECKS

After Servicing test fire the air handler following the Commissioning Procedure detailed in Section 4 of this manual to ensure correct operation generally Special attention must be paid to the damper system and related controls and interlocks

Additionally check that the fresh air and recirculation air entry path to the air handler has been kept clear and instruct the User of the need for this as necessary

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 31

8 SERVICING 3000S

84 REMOVAL PROCEDURE FOR REPLACEABLE COMPONENTS

IMPORTANT

Turn off the gas at the appliance service valve and the electricity at the main panel and wall isolator before proceeding

841 BURNER

The burner is located inside the air handler casing and is mounted on two brackets from the support straps To remove the burner isolate the air handler as in 81 and undo the union on the fuel gas line adjacent to the burner isolation valve (MV6) and unscrew the main and pilot gas feed pipes from the burner rail Access to the rear of the burner assembly is made by removing the partition plate below the burner separating the fresh air inlet to the burner from the return air inlet compartment This is held in place by screws which engage in captive nuts on the top side of the partition Remove the Flame Detector and pull off the ignition plug cap Disconnect the burner support brackets and remove the burner The burner will easily pass through the access hatch for further strip down Replace in the reverse order soundness test the gas pipework check the burner operation and duty as described in the commissioning section of this manual

842 FLAME DETECTOR

This is a 240 Volt instrument

The flame detector is mounted on the end of the burner rail inside the air handler casing To remove the detector isolate the panel electric supply and lock off Push the scanner towards the burner and rotate to release the bayonet fixing and lift the detector from its mount Remove the two screws holding the detector cover and disconnect the supply leads noting the polarity of the connections

Replace the flame detector in the reverse order ensuring correct polarity of connections Ensure the access panel is securely closed and the retaining nuts are tightened down Check operation by inserting a test meter in the points provided in the main control panel and reading the flame signals during start up to full rate burner operation (See 431) Operate the appliance over six starts for reliability of operation including tum off of start and main gas valves to check for lockout operation

843 IGNITER SPARK PLUG

This is a high tension spark plug

The igniter spark plug is mounted on the end of the burner rail inside the air handler casing To remove the spark plug isolate the air handler as above Enter the service access door Access to the spark plug is made through the profile plate To remove the spark plug pull off the high tension lead and unscrew the plug with a plug spanner

When replacing the spark plug check the plug gap is set at 15mm Check ignition reliability over six start ups

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 32

8 SERVICING 3000S

844 IGNITER SPARK TRANSFORMER

This is a 240 Volt instrument

The ignition transformer is located in a plastic box mounted on the air handler casing adjacent to the main control panel To remove the transformer isolate the air handler as above and unscrew the four retaining screws holding the box lid in place and remove the lid Disconnect the supply cable at the terminal strip and undo the transformer retaining screws The transformer may then be unscrewed from the High Tension cable leading to the spark plug

Replacement is a simple reversal of this procedure

Check ignition reliability over six start ups

845 COMBUSTION AIR PRESSURE SWITCH (DPS)

Note The switch is set and sealed and should be replaced if not operating correctly

This switch is a 240 Volt instrument

The air switch is mounted directly on the air handler casing and can be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove the switch isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the supply cable Break the downstream pipe compression fitting and unscrew the switch housing from its locating fitting Reverse the procedure to replace after ensuring switch setting is as specified in Section 13 of this manual Operate the air handler to ensure reliability of operation over six start ups

846 AIR HANDLER OVERHEAT LIMIT CONTROL

This is a 240 Volt instrument

The overheat limit control can be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove the control isolate the air handler as above and lock off Remove the switch cover Disconnect the supply cable and unscrew the control housing from its locating fitting Reverse the procedure to replace check the switch is set to 50degC Test the switch operation as described in Section 43 over at least three operations

847 AIR FAN AND MOTOR

The air fan motor is a 415 Volt 3 phase motor

The motor and slide rails are easily accessible inside the air handler casing If it is necessary to remove the motor isolate the air handler as above Slacken the fan-belt tension and remove the drive belts Pull the motor away from the air handler casing to make access to the motor terminal box and disconnect the supply cable The motor may now be removed from the unit Following replacement the air handler must be fully re-commissioned as in Section 4

It is unlikely that the air fan will need replacing or servicing If required a full procedure should be obtained from RS STOKVIS Ltd

Replacement must be followed by full re-commissioning as in Section 4

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 33

8 SERVICING 3000S

848 FUEL GAS MULTI-FUNCTIONAL CONTROL - SMALL UNITS

This is a 240 Volt instrument

The fuel gas multi-functional control can be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove the unit isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the Hirschman electric termination Unbolt the control from its flanges and remove

When replacing care must be taken to ensure the flange 0 rings are undamaged and in the correct location Following replacement the air handler must be fully reshycommissioned as in Section 4 including tests for soundness prior to start-up

849 GOVERNOR AND BLOCK VALVES

The block valves are 240 Volt instruments

All these items may be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove any item isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the electric termination to the two block valves the pilot block valve and the flow control block valve Break the two pipe unions and remove the fuel gas line complete for further strip-down

8410 FUEL GAS FLOW CONTROL VALVE

This is a 24 Volt instrument

The fuel gas How control valve can be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove the valve isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the supply cables to the control valve

On small air handlers fitted with a multi-functional control support the multi-functional control and unbolt its discharge flange Break the union downstream of the burner isolation valve and remove the section of line containing the flow control valve for further strip-down

On large air handlers fitted with separate block valves it will be necessary to remove the fuel gas line complete as Section 8410 above

Following replacement re-commission the air handler

Note If the fresh air damper is not in the full open position the heat input must not exceed the maximum heat input at recirculation condition specified in the technical data section of this manual

8411 PILOT GAS GOVERNOR AND BLOCK VALVE

The block valve is a 240 Volt instrument

Both items may be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove either item isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the electric terrriination to the solenoid valve Undo the upstream pipe union and the compression fitting downstream of the manual block valve (PV3) Remove the pilot gas line complete for further strip down

Replace broken or distorted connections and retest for soundness Ensure the pilot gas pressure is correct and the flame is sensing an output Ensure reliability over six start-ups

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 34

8 SERVICING 3000S

8412 BELT TENSIONING PROCEDURE

The setting tensions are designed to cover a wide range of drives A precise setting force for individual applications can be calculated as detailed

SETTING FORCES

Belt Section

Setting Force To Deflect Belt 16mm per Metre Of Span

Small Pulley Diameter (mm)

Basic Setting Forces Newtons (N) Kilograms (kgf)

125 x Setting Forces Newtons (N) Kilograms (kgf)

SPZ

56 to 71 16 16 20 20 75 to 90 18 18 22 22

95 to 125 20 20 25 25 Over 125 22 22 28 28

SPA

80 to 100 22 22 28 28 106 to 140 30 30 38 38 150 to 200 36 37 45 46 Over 200 40 40 50 51

SPB

112 to 160 40 40 50 51 170 to 224 50 51 62 63 236 to 355 62 63 77 79 Over 355 65 66 81 83

SPC 224 to 250 70 71 87 89 265 to 355 92 94 115 120 Over 375 115 120 144 150

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 35

8 SERVICING 3000S

BELT TENSIONING USING FENNER BELT TENSION INDICATOR

Calculate the deflection in mm on a basis of 16mm per metre of centre distance Centre Distance (m) x 16 =Deflection (mm)

Set lower marker ring at the deflection distance required in mm on the lower scale

Set upper ring against to bottom edge of the top tube

Place the belt tension indicator on top of the belt at the centre of span and apply a force at right angles to the belt defecting it to the point where the lower marker ring is level with the top of the adjacent belt

Read off the force value indicated by the top edge of the upper marker ring

Compare this force to the kgf value shown in the table above

If a Fenner Belt Tension Indicator is not available a spring balance and rule will be suffice

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 36

8 SERVICING 30005

85 MAIN PANEL CONTROLS

All panel controls are readily accessible and may be easily exchanged for replacement components in the event of failure Ensure any replacement item is of the same make and type as the original

851 LANDIS amp GYR LFL 1335 AUTOMATIC SEQUENCE CONTROLLER

The Landis amp Gyr Automatic Sequence Controller is a plug-in unit locating on a pre-wired chassis To remove the controller undo the two retaining screws at the top left and lower right corners and pull the module off the chassis

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

852 CONTROLS CIRCUIT (24 VOLT) TRANSFORMER

The Controls Circuit Transformer is fixed to the panel back plate by tapped screws To remove the transformer undo the wiring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel Undo the two retaining screws and remove the unit complete

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

853 CONTROL RELAYS R1 R2 amp R3

The Control Relays are DIN Rail mounted To remove a relay undo the wIring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel Release the DIN rail retaining clip under the relay with a screwdriver and remove the relay

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

854 6A MCB

The 6A MCB is DIN Rail mounted To remove the MCB undo the wiring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel Release the DIN rail retaining clip under the MCB with a screwdriver and remove the MCB

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

855 THERMAL OVERLOAD

The thermal overload is attached to the underside of the main contactor To remove the overload undo the wiring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel and that the overload setting is as specified in Section 13 of this manual Unscrew the three connections to the contactor and remove the overload

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 37

8 SERVICING 3000S

856 MAIN CONTACTOR

The Main Contactor is DIN Rail mounted To remove the contactor remove the thermal overload as 855 above and then undo the wiring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel Release the DIN rail retaining clip under the contactor with a screwdriver and remove the contactor

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

857 MOTOR FUSE

To replace a motor fuse pull the fuse carrier off the fuse holder base The fuse is attached to the fuse carrier by two screws Unscrew remove and replace

86 REMOTE CONTROL STATION

The remote control station contains some serviceable parts although these items should only be fitted by an approved RS STOKVIS Ltd Engineer

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 38

9 RECOMMENDED SPARES 3000S

For two years operation it is recommended that the following items should be held in stock

ITEM DESCRIPTION PART NO QUANTITY i

1 INDICATOR BULBS W1121 1 PACK

2 SPARK PLUG 023739 1 I

3 UVDETECTOR QRA10C 1 I

4 ROOM SENSOR DRT2453 1

5 DUCT SENSOR DDT1701 1

All replacement parts can be obtained from RS STOKVIS Ltd by quoting the air handler serial number the part number and description

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 39

APPENDIX 1 30005

SOUNDNESS TESTING THE FUEL GAS PIPEWORK

This procedure should only be carried out by personnel familiar with the ECONO-AIR 3000S Series Air handler

The pressure test points and all valves are identified on the Process and Instrumentation Diagram for the air handler included in Section 1 of this n1anual

Isolate the air handler electric supply at the main control panel and lock off Close the manual isolation valves MV1 MV6 and PV3 Ensure the supply pressure is available on the upstream side of MV1

A11 TESTING THE UPSTREAM PIPEWORKAND BURNER CONTROLS 1 Connect a 60 mbar manometer to the pressure test nipple A Monitor the

pressure for two minutes Any rise in pressure indicates that valve MV1 is leaking and must be replaced Remove pressure test points Band F

2 Open MV1 to pressurise the pipework on both the main gas and pilot line to the first block valve

3 Close MV1 Allow one minute for the temperature to stabilise and then test the system for 2 minutes and watch for a drop in the pipework pressure If the pressure falls open valve MV1 and test the pipework connections and valves from MV1 to MV3 and MV1 to PV2 for leaks with a proprietary leak detector fluid or spray Turn off MV1 seal any leaks and re-test

4 If no extemalleaks are found either the pilot block valve PV1 or either the first main gas block valve MV3 is letting by

5 To test this seal pressure test point A and fit a manometer to pressure test point B Leave for two minutes with MV1 open A rise in pressure on the manometer confirms a leak on the block valve MV3 Turn off MV1 exchange the valve and re-test from point 2 above

6 Repeat this procedure for the pilot block valve Seal test point B and fit a manometer to pressure test point F Leave for two minutes with MV1 open A rise in pressure on the manometer confirms a leak on the pilot block valve PV2 Turn off MV1 exchange the valve and re-test from point 1 above Seal test point F

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 40

APPENDIX 1 30005

A12 TESTING THE DOWNSTREAM BURNER VALVE 1 Close MV1 and connect pressure test points A and 8 with flexible 6 mm bore

tubing teed into the manometer Remove pressure test point C Open MV1 to pressurise the downstream block valve MV4

2 Close MV1 and leave for one minute for the temperature to stabilise Monitor the pressure for 2 minutes If the pressure falls open valve MV1 and leak test the line between the two block valves MV3 and MV4 with a proprietary leak detector Turn off MV1 seal any leaks and re-test Note Smaller air handlers in the 3000S Series are fitted with multi-functional valves combining the pressure regulator and two block valves in one component The above procedure still applies but if a leak is found on either block valve the whole control should be replaced If no external leaks are found the downstream block valve is letting by

3 To confirm this close MV1 remove the manometer and refit to pressure test point C Connect pressure test points A and 8 with flexible 6mm bore tubing Open MV1 and allow one minute for the temperature to stabilise Monitor the pressure for a further 2 minutes with MV1 still open A rise in pressure confirms that the second block valve MV4 is letting by Turn off MV1 Replace the valve and re-test from 2 above

A13 TESTING THE DOWNSTREAM BURNER PIPEWORK 1 Close MV1 and connect pressure test points A and D with flexible 6 mm bore

tubing teed into the manometer Open MV1 to pressurise the downstream pilot pipework

2 Close MV1 and leave for one minute for the temperature to stabilise Monitor the pressure for 2 minutes If the pressure falls open valve MV1 and leak test the line between the downstream block valve MV4 and the manual block MV6 with a proprietary leak detector fluid or spray If no external leaks are found the manual block valve MV6 is letting by Turn off MV1 seal any leakages and reshytest from 2 above

A14 TESTING THE DOWNSTREAM PILOT PIPEWORK 1 Close MV1 and connect pressure test points A and F with flexible 6mm bore

tubing teed into the manometer Open MV1 to pressurise the downstream pilot pipework

2 Close MV1 and leave for one rninute for the temperature to stabilise Monitor the pressure for 2 minutes If the pressure falls open valve MV1 and leak test the line between the downstream block valve PV2 and the manual block PV3 with a proprietary leak detector fluid or spray If no external leaks are found the manual block valve PV3 is letting by Turn off MV1 seal any leakages and reshytest from 2 above

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 41

APPENDIX 1 30005

A15 TESTING THE BURNER CONNECTIONS 1 Remove the burner access panel as described in Section 84 of this manual

Remove the burner spark igniter Slacken the two retaining bolts holding the burner to the burner support straps and unbolt the burner supply endplate from the burner casting and mixing plates

2 Connect pressure test points A and 0 with flexible 6mm bore tubing teed into the manometer Open MV1 and MV6 to pressurise the burner pipework Leak test the main gas burner pipework and connections with proprietary leak detector fluid Turn off MV6 Seal any leakages and re-test

3 Connect pressure test points A and F with flexible 6 mm bore tubing teed into the manometer Open MV1 and PV3 to pressurise the pilot burner pipework Leak test the pilot gas burner pipework and connections with proprietary leak detector fluid Turn off PV3 Seal any leakages and re-test

4 Turn off MV1

5 Replace the spark igniter and profile division plate

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 42

APPENDIX 2 30005

START SEQUENCE

The burner start sequence is controlled by the Landis and Gyr burner management unit The timings are pre-set and comply with 885885 This unit must NOT be tampered with

A brief description of the start-up sequence isshy

The unit checks

1 The NO FLAME signal on the UV flame scanner

Note If the scanner detects a flame at any time other than in the correct operating sequence the flame programmer initiates a lockout

2 The operation of the combustion air proving switch in the NO AIR position

3 The air handler discharge high temperature switch

If the checks are completed the unit starts the combustion air fan and then checks the combustion airflow

Once the airflow is proven the unit checks that the damper control circuit is functioning correctly After the damper microswitch is made to prove the fresh air damper is fully open the sequence allows 30 seconds for the combustion air to purge any combustible gas from the air handler

After completion of the purge the spark ignition system is energised the pilot valve opened and the spark terminated If the pilot flame is not proven by the UV scanner the system will initiate a LOCKOUT

If the flame is proven the main gas valves are opened the pilot extinguished and the main burner flame proven

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 43

i

APPENDIX 2 30008

The following flow chart shows the complete start sequence including the lighting of the various indicating lamps

MANUAL STATUS LIGHT POWER ON

POWER ON

I INITIATE START BY TIME

SETTING ON CONTROLLER

I CHECK NO FLAME

VISIBLE

PROVEj FAIL LOCKOUT

I CHECK RELAY R4 NC

POSITION

PROVE FAIL NO START

I CHECK AIR PRESSURE SWITCH NC POSITION

PROVE FAIL NO START

I CHECK RELAY R1 NC

POSITION

PROVE j

FAIL NO START

I START COMBUSTION

AIR BLOWER

I CHECK AIR PRESSURE SWITCH NO POSITION

PROVE I

FAIL NO START

I STATUS LIGHT FAN ON

I ENERGISE RELAY R1

I

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 44

I

I

APPENDIX 2 30008

I CHECK OVERHEAT LIMIT

CONTROL R5

PROVE I

FAIL I I

CHECK 541412 LOOP CLOSED ON

LANDIS ampGYR CIRCUIT

PROVE I

FAIL I I

COMBUSTION AIR PURGE PERIOD

30 SECONDS

I

NO START

NO START

CANCEL NO FLAME CHECK CIRCUIT

I

ENERGISE SPARK

I TIMED PERIOD 25 SECONDS

I ENERGISE PILOT GAS

VALVE

I TIMED PERIOD 25 SECONDS

I TERMINATE SPARK

I INTERROGATE UV FLAME SCANNER

PROVE I

FAIL I I

TIMED PERIOD 10 SECONDS

I

LOCKOUT

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 45

I

I

APPENDIX 2 3000S

I ENERGISE MAIN GAS

VALVES

I

STATUS LIGHT BURNER ON

I TIMED PERIOD

5 SECONDS

I DE-ENERGISE PILOT

GAS VALVES

CONTINUOUS FROM PILOT

I INTERROGATE UV FLAME SCANNER

PROVE I

FAIL I I

LOCKOUT I

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 46

APPENDIX 3 30005

Please see copy of Standard Service Sheet

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 47

APPENDIX 4 30005

A41 TIME OUT SCREEN

This is the standard screen displayed when the touch screen is not in use The back light is off to save energy_ To access the STATUS screen touch the ENTER key and the following screen is displayed

[]][I][]rn[IJOO[][IJOO[] EJ~E11 I[]I ~ middot I

NOTE

The Touch Screen operates using the heat produced by the touch of a finger and therefore only LIGHT pressure is required

Excessive pressure can damage the Touch Screen

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 48

APPENDIX 4 30008

A42 STATUS SCREEN

On the typical STATUS screen the illustrated information detailed is as follows

19 36 Fan Brn

RS OS

100 Fst_~_ Lck _ _ Xst Gas~o ~ I

RS Indicates the current room temperature

OS ~( t~~ the current duct discharge temperature

Fan Indicates the current status of the fan by showing the arrow and the fan blades for ON and OFF is shown by the arrow and fan blades being removed

Brn Indicates the current status of the burner with the black flames indicating the burner to be ON and vice versa

Lck LOCKOUT - This indicates a flame failure when highlighted during normal or start-up operation

Xst EXCESS TEMPERATURE SWITCH - This indicates the unit has reached the trip limit on the over heat stat when highlighted during operation

Indicates the current position of the gas modulating valve during normal Gas

operation (0-100)

Indicates whether the Frost stat is energised and the unit is running on frost Fst

override

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 49

APPENDIX 4 30008

A43 CHANGING SETTINGS

It is possible to change the settings for the time of operation and the required temperature set points The following details the steps required

A44 ENTERING THE SECURITY CODE

From the STATUS screen touch the return key and the screen below will be displayed

Type the HIGH LEVEL security code (4321) If you make a mistake use the BACK SPACE key to delete any incorrect number(s) Touch the ENTER key when the code is correct

If the security code is incorrect the screen above will be displayed then try again If after several attempts you can not gain access please contact RS STOKVIS Ltd for further information

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 50

APPENDIX 4 30008

When the code is entered correctly the MAIN MENU is displayed as detailed below

~ STATUS SET VALUES~ ~ TIVIE CLOCK [) [) [) [) [)

The MAIN MENU screen shows the three menu items available The title for each menu item can be changed to suit the end user Please notify RS STOKVIS Ltd prior to commissioning should these parameters require special amendments

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 51

APPENDIX 4 30008

A45 CHANGING OR SETTING A TIME SCHEDULE

From the main menu screen select the TIME CLOCK page by running finger across screen symbol and touch the ENTER key the screen below will be displayed

On the following screen highlight the TS1 symbol and touch the ENTER key

The current time schedule will now be displayed as shown below The display will automatically default to the current day (1 =Monday 2 =Tuesday etc) In this case day 5 (Friday) the four schedule switching times refer to that day

IAC6BBB1BHIS1

mm0CIl bull mID 17BB 17BB 17HB

Iillleschedule

To modify a time select it by highlighting and touch the ENTER key and the following screen is displayed

To amend the appropriate onoff time as shown on the screen below The arrows to the right of the time are for altering the hours and the arrows on the left for the minutes

Once you have set the time use the ESCape key to exit back to the time schedule screen and choose another day by touching the required number Another time may now be modified as before

IAC6BBB1BHIS1

H8BH

I i eschedule

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 52

APPENDIX 4 30008

Use the ESCape key to exit back to the MAIN MENU screen

~ STATUS ~ SET VALUES

TIME CLOCK []~ [] [] [] []

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 53

APPENDIX 4 30005

A46 CHANGING SET VALUES

From the main menu screen select the SET VALUES page by highlight in the normal way and touch the ENTER key

The following screen is displayed

36 19 18III III IIIHsv Rsv Llv

To change the RSV highlight it in the normal way and touch the ENTER key and the screen below will now be shown

IAC6RRR1RR40 T I

0 19 (Y)l RSV

ROOM SET VALUE

The above screen shows the parameters that can be changed The values to the far left are the limitations of set point (OC) Change the set point by using the UP and DOWN ARROWS on the left of the screen or touch the set value itself followed by the ENTER key to select the set value and set it directly using the numeric keyboard All values can be changed in this way

Use the ESCape key twice to exit back to the MAIN MENU screen

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 54

APPENDIX 4 30005

A47 COMMISSIONING AND SERVICING BURNER CHECKS

Select the SET VALUES screen from the MAIN MENU screen and adjust the high lirrlit set point to 55degC to drive the burner to high fire

IAC6HHH1HH60 ~T I

0 19 (Y)

HSV

HIGH SET VALUE ~

Ensure the set value is returned to 36degC once the appropriate checks and adjustments as described in Section 43 of this manual have been completed Return to the SET VALUES screen and select the low limit value to adjust the low fire setting

Reduce the low limit value to OdegC to drive the gas valve to low fire and complete the appropriate checks and adjustments as described in Section 43 of this manual and ensure the set value is returned to the original value

A48 GMT ltgt BST CHANGEOVER DAYLIGHT SAVINGS

To change your unit to British Summer TimelWinter Time the following system screen must be highlighted by touching the Iamp1 button twice

By touching the clock symbol in the top left hand corner followed by the ENTER key the screen below will be displayed

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 55

APPENDIX 4 30008

188311 851193

544

By touching and highlighting in this case 18 followed by the ENTER key A small box allowing the entry of two digits will appear Enter the desired time required using the numbered keys followed by ENTER key Your unit is now set to operate on BSTBWT

Touch the ESC key three times to return back to the Status screen

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 56

STOKVIS ENERGY SYSTEMS 96R WALTON ROAD EAST MOLESEY SURREY KT8 0DL TEL 020 8783 3050 08707 707 747 FAX 020 8783 3051 08707 707 767 E-MAIL infostokvisboilerscom WEBSITE wwwstokvisboilerscom

JULY 1999

Page 15: ECONOAIR 3000S SERIES AIR HANDLING UNIT DIRECT FIREDstokvisboilers.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/EconoAir... · 2019-05-10 · ECONOAIR 3000S SERIES AIR HANDLING UNIT DIRECT FIRED

3 INSTALLATION 30005

31 STATUTORY REQUIREMENTS

I n accordance with the Gas Safety (I nstallation and Use) Regulations 1998 installation of this ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler should only be undertaken by competent personnel who are fully aware of their responsibilities under the Health and Safety at Work Act 1974

The installation of this air handler must comply with

BS6230-1991 Installation of gas-fired forced convection air air handlers for commercial and industrial Space Heating of rated input exceeding 60kW

The lEE Regulations for Electrical Installations

Gas Safety (Installation and Use) Regulations 1998

Health and Safety at Work Act 1974

Building Regulations 1986

Building Standards (Scotland Only)

The I nstitution of Gas Engineers Codes of Practice

IGEUP1 Soundness Testing Procedures for Industrial and Commercial Gas Installations

IGEUP2 Gas Installation Pipework Boosters and Compressors on Industrial and Commercial Premises

IGEUP4 Commissioning Of Gas Fired Plant On Industrial and Commercial Premises

32 RECEPTION AND STORAGE OF GOODS

32laquo1 RECEPTION

On receipt of the shipment check that the shipment is complete against the Delivery Advice Note Check for mechanical damage sustained during transit before off-loading the goods Inform the carrier of any such damage

322 OFFLOADING

Horizontal air handlers are fitted with four lifting eyes to permit an overhead lift Alternatively horizontal air handlers may be handled by a fork lift truck on the steel angle support frame

323 STORAGE

Air handlers must be stored in a dry environment The remote control station must be removed from the shipment and stored indoors in a dry environment Outdoor units of split case design (Size 54 and above) must have open ends protected from the environment until installation is complete Any filter elements should be stored in a dry environment

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 11

3 INSTALLATION 3000S

33 LIMITATIONS OF USE

The ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler must not be installed in the following locations

I n hazardous areas

In areas where flammable vapours can be present in excess of their threshold limit values as defined in 8S5925

I n accordance with 8S6230 Clause 513 where there are any flued appliances in the heated area and where air is supplied mechanically and there is mechanical extraction the design extract rate must be 5 to 10 less than the design inlet rate so that the room will not be at a lower pressure than the outside air If the air handler is the only source of mechanically supplied air the extract rate must not exceed 95 of the nominal air flow specified in Section 11 of this manual

Note If it proposed to install the ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler to supply heated air to a hazardous area or in areas where flammable vapours are present the installation must first be approved by a RS STOKVIS Ltd Engineer

34 LOCATION OF AIR HANDLERS

The air handler should normally be installed in the location recommended by the RS STOKVIS Ltd specifying engineer

Check the proposed location for level and load bearing strength Ensure that there is adequate clearance as detailed on the air handler GA in Section 1 this manual around the unit for access for maintenance purposes If the air handler is to be installed above floor level a suitably designed service platform should be provided Such a platform must have 100mm minimum raised edges around the perimeter If this is not possible all air handler access panels must be fitted with hinged restraints This is a factory standard option which should be specified at the time of ordering - check the restraints are fitted before proceeding with installation

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 12

3 INSTALLATION 3000S

35 FRESH AIR INLET AND VENTILATION

351 FRESH AIR INLET

The air handler must be installed where it has a direct and unlimited supply of fresh air from outside the building Ensure that the air intake is not located near exhausts from the building or from any process exhausts such as paint booth exhausts Whenever possible protect the fresh air inlet from the prevailing wind and local wind effects from corners

The fresh air inlet should be sized for an air velocity of 3ms The inlet duct area is detailed on the General Arrangement drawing located in Section 1 of this manual

Where the fresh air inlet is made in a load bearing wall eg a brick wall guidance should be obtained from Structural Engineers on the provision of a lintel in the wall over the fresh air opening

A weather hood must be fitted when the air handler air inlet is at or within 1 m of the outside wall Additionally the weather hood should have negligible resistance to the airflow maximum 01 mbar at the design air flow rate

Do not install the ECONO-AI R 3000S Series air handler where long lengths of duct or bends of an angle greater than 30deg are necessary to lead to the air handler from the fresh air opening If ducting is unavoidable ensure that the resulting pressure drop is negligible Le less than 01 mbar for ductless air handlers and has been accounted for in the original design for ducted air handlers as detailed in the specification section of this manual Section 11

Note If the air intake is located in an area of unrestricted access warning notices preventing the blockage of the air intake by temporary stacking should be displayed adjacent to the intake

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 13

3 INSTALLATION 3000S

352 VENTI LA TION

Where the air air handler is in its own plant room or compartment this shall be ventilated with openings communicating directly with the outside air to ventilate the room

The openings shall be fitted with grilles of negligible resistance and shall be sited so that they cannot easily be blocked or flooded They shall have a total minimum free area as follows

Low Level (inlet) 320cm2 + 27cm2 per kilowatt in excess of 60kW total rated input

High Level (outlet) 160cm2 + 134cm2 per kilowatt in excess of 60kW total rated input

The free area of the grilles shall be not less than the size of the recommended minimum ventilation opening Grilles shall be designed to minimise high velocity air streams in the plant room For exposed ie free standing plant rooms ventilation openings shall be provided on at least two sides and preferably on all four sides

Where mechanical ventilation is used it shall be by mechanical inlet and either natural or mechanical extraction Systems of ventilation employing mechanical extraction and natural air inlet shall not be used

The minimum flow rates of air supplied shall be not less than 06 m3s per megawatt of rated heat input

36 AIR DISCHARGE

The air handler should be located with the air discharge into the heated space at a minimum height of 3 metres The air should not discharge directly onto any obstructions and direct discharge on to working personnel should be avoided

If the air discharge is located in an area of unrestricted access warning notices preventing the blockage of the air discharge by temporary stacking should be displayed adjacent to the discharge

Generally it is not necessary to fit distribution ducting to the discharge of the air handler If ducting is required or specified ensure that the resulting pressure drop has been accounted for in the original design specification as detailed in Section 1 of this manual

37 ASSEMBLY AND POSITIONING OF AIR HANDLER

Unless specified at the time of order air handlers will be shipped in sections Discharge heads grilles attenuators duct connecting sections filters rain-hoods etc will be supplied loose for site fitting to the air handler

Horizontal air handlers must be supported on their steel angle support base When the air handler is located check for level and adjust as necessary

Alternatively horizontal air handlers can be supplied with extensions of the support frame for suspending from overhead supports This must be specified at the time of order Do not suspend the air handler from the lifting eyes

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 14

3 INSTALLATION 3000S

38 REMOTE STATION

The ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler is supplied with a remote control station This should be mounted in a position convenient to the end user If possible it should not be mounted on an external wall or where the space temperature detector is affected by cold draughts or a local source of heat

39 VISUAL CHECK

After completion of installation re-check the air handler for signs of damage Report any instance to RS STOKVIS Ltd

310 CONNECTION OF SERVICES

The air handler requires the connection of fuel gas and electricity

3101 FUEL GAS SUPPLY

The ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler has been designed for use on Natural Gas An alternative version is available for LPG The gas type for the air handler supplied is clearly marked on the air handler data badge and on the Specification sheet in Section 1 of this manual Check the gas type is correct and that the supply pressure is within the range marked on the specification

The local gas Authority should be consulted about the adequacy of the gas service and meter supplies for existing and proposed extensions to the installation and for any requirements for boosting the gas supply_

Connect the fuel gas supply to the inlet manual valve on the air handler gas train The connection size is detailed in Section 1 of this manual A further isolation valve and union should be fitted immediately adjacent to the appliance which when the valve is closed allows the complete burner and control assembly to be disconnected for maintenance or repair

New gas pipework should be installed to British Gas Publication IGEUP2 and be purged and pressure tested in accordance with British Gas Publications IGEUP1

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 15

3 INSTALLATION 3000S

3102 ELECTRICITY SUPPLY

All external wiring shall be carried out and checked by a competent person All components shall be checked for suitability for voltage range and frequency

Means for electric isolation having a contact separation of at least 3mm in all poles must be provided adjacent to the air handler The electrical supply to the appliance shall incorporate suitable means of excess current protection

The ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler requires a 3 phase 4 wire supply which should be connected to the main control panel Check the air handler data badge for the correct electrical supply The maximum supply requirement is Specified in Section 1 of this manual Note that the 240 Volt air handler control circuit is taken from the lUI phase to Neutral Connection should be made as shown on the wiring diagram shipped inside this panel

The air handler must be earthed in accordance with BS5986 and CP1013

Check all terminal strip terminations for wires which have become loose during shipment

311 CONNECTION TO THE MAIN PANEL AND REMOTE STATION

Interconnecting wiring to the main panel and remote station should be made with a minimum specification of 075 mm2 300 Volt cable Check that no wires on the terminal strip have become loose during shipment The remote panel should be mounted at a height of approx 18m If possible it should not be mounted on an external wall or where the sensor will be affected by cold draughts or a local source of heat

Both panel and remote station must be earthed in accordance with BS5986 and CP1013

312 HEATED SPACE TEMPERATURE SENSOR

The space temperature sensor located on the remote panel should be connected with screened cable or twin low voltage signal cable run in its own separate conduit It should be mounted on the remote panel or adjacent to the outlet at a height of approx 18m If possible it should not be mounted on an external wall or where the sensor will be affected by cold draughts or a local source of heat

313 DUCT SENSOR

The duct sensor should be connected with screened cable or twin low voltage signal cable run in its own separate conduit It should be mounted in the air handler discharge as close as possible to the discharge into the heated space

314 OVERHEAT LIMIT CONTROL SENSOR

The overheat limit control sensor should be connected with twin core cable It should be mounted in the air handler discharge within 1 metre of the air handler outlet connection

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 16

3 INSTALLATION 3000S

315 TOUCH SCREEN WIRING

The touch screen located on the front of the remote station requires two separate twisted pairs of O5mrh2 screened cable run in a separate conduit If the distance between the main and remote stations is greater that 1 km please contact RS STOKVIS Ltd for advice

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 17

3 INSTALLATION 3000S

316 ALIGNMENT

3161 INSTALLATION OF DRIVE BELTS

On 80 amp 89 30008 range of air handlers it will be necessary to align the pulleys and fit the drive belts before carrying out commissioning of the unit

3162 PU LLEYS

Before assembling the drive check the pulley grooves are free from scores or sharp edges and all dimensions conform to the relevant standard

The Taper Lock bush is your starting point when it comes to assembly and installation Drive installation is a straightforward job with Taper Lock - but the stages set out on the installation leaflet provided with every Taper Lock bush should be followed closely

3163 ALIGNMENT

Good alignment of pulleys prior to belt installation is important to avoid belt flank wear The diagram below shows correct installation of pulleys

INTERNAl BEARING

MOTOR PUlLEY rAN PULLEY

MOTORMOTOR ADJUSTMENT MOUNTING BOlTSBOLTS

3164 BELTS

When the pulleys have been correctly positioned on the shafts the belts can be installed to complete the drive

The drive centre distance should be reduced prior to the installation of the belts so that they may be fitted without the use of force Under no circumstances must belts be prised into the grooves Using sharp tools to stretch the belts over the pulley rim can easily damage belts and pulley grooves

The installation allowance given in the table below is the minimum recommended reduction in centre distance for various belt section and lengths to allow for correct fitting

The take-up allowance given in the same table should be added on to the calculated centre distance to allow for belt stretch

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 18

3 INSTALLATION 3000S

3165 INSTALLATION AND TAKE UP ALLOWANCE

Belt Pitch Installation Allowance Take-Up Length (mm) SPZ SPA SPB SPC (mm)

410 to 530 5

540 to 840 10

850 to 1160 15

1170 to 1500 20

1510 to 1830 20 25

1840 to 2170 30

2180 to 2830 25 40

2840 to 3500 30 50

3520 to 4160 50 60

4170 to 5140 70

5220 to 6150 85

6180 to 7500 105

600 to 8500 125

8880 to 10170 145

10600 to 12500 175

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 19

4 COMMISSIONING 30005

This appliance must be commissioned by a RS STOKVIS Ltd approved engineer

41 PRESTART CHECKS

1 Switch the SUMMERIOFFMlINTER switch on the remote station to OFF

2 Check the correct electric supply is available to the air handler and the appliance isolator installed

3 Check the correct fuel gas supply is available to the air handler and local isolation valve and union installed Check that new gas pipe work has been correctly purged and pressure tested and that the isolation valve is in the OFF position

4 Check the air handler gas control system and burner connections for pressure soundness as detailed in Appendix 1 of this manual

5 Complete the first section of the Service Check Sheet supplied at the back of this manual (Appendix 3)

6 Close the air handler access door

7 Close and lock the main air handler control panel

8 Switch the main panel isolator to position 1 Check the POWER ON light illuminates

9 Check and set the timed ONOFF periods in the lAC Controller located on the remote panel Ensure that the unit is set to be on during testing Refer to Appendix 4 for the lAC setting procedure

10 Close and lock the remote panel

11 Switch the SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch on the remote station to SUMMER to start the air fan Return the switch to the OFF position and check for correct rotation of the fan as the fan slows and stops

The fan rotation can be observed through the fan section access door or through the air handler access door Only do this during the fan run-down period Ensure the door is securely fastened after completion

Rotation arrows are fitted on the end of the air handler and inside the air handler above the interior bearing support If the rotation is incorrect two phases should be interchanged as dictated by the Engineer responsible for the site electrical system

12 Check the air pressure drop across the burner whilst the fan is operating with a water column pressure gauge connected to the two pressure test points on the air pressure switch (DPS) This pressure should be between 14 and 16 rnbar

If the air differential pressure measured above is not within the operating range check inlet and outlet ductwork as appropriate and any filters fitted If the pressure differential is still not within limits isolate the air handler and report to RS STOKVIS Ltd before proceeding

13 Check the operation and setting of the Low Air Pressure Switch by injecting a controlled signal into the switch Check the break point on the switch is 1 mbar (falling)

Note The switch is set and sealed before fitting The 1 mbar switch point may not coincide with the 1 mbar scale reading on the switch

If on checking the switch is not operating correctly do not tamper with it return it to RS STOKVIS Ltd for replacement

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 20

4 COMMISSIONING 3000S

42 DRY RUN

With all the manual gas isolation valves still in the OFF position switch the SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch to WINTER

43 START UP

1 Attach a manometer to pressure test point F and the low pressure test point on the air pressure switch (DPS)

2 Open the main gas supply valve (MV1) and the pilot burner isolation valve (PV3) Leave the main burner isolation valve (MV6) closed Reset the air handler by pressing the push-button marked RESET on either the main panel or remote station The air handler pilot will light automatically (after the automatic damper start check and combustion air pre-purge) and then LOCKOUT after the main gas shut-off valves are addressed

During the short period that the pilot is in operation check the pilot gas pressure on the manometer It should be 10 mbar and the pilot flame approximately 100 - 150mm in length covering the first three or four holes of the mixing plate and have a steady blue colour when viewed through the sight glass on the access side of the air handler Adjust as necessary - refer to Section 51 this manual Check the flame signal - refer to Section 431

3 Open the main burner isolation valve (MV6) RESET the air handler which should now light to main burner stage When alight close the main burner isolation valve to shut down the gas flow to the burner Check that the unit goes to LOCKOUT

4 Reset the air handler and drive the burner to low fire by adjusting the temperature controller set point as described in Appendix 4 of this manual Check the flame is continuous across the width of the burner and has a flame length of approx 50 - 65mm from the burner rail when viewed through the sight glass on the access side of the air handler Check the burner pressure across pressure test point D and the downstream (low) pressure test point on the air pressure switch ie on the rear of the pressure switch This pressure is specifled in Section 1 of this manual Adjust as necessary-refer to Section 53 of this manual Check the flame signal - refer to Section 431

Where possible check the actual gas flow rate by meter reading with all other appliances turned off

5 Drive the burner to high fire by adjusting the temperature controller set point and high limit to 55degC as described in Appendix 4 of this manual Check the flame is continuous across the burner rail and has a flame length of approximately 250 - 350mm from the burner rail Check the burner pressure across pressure test point D and the downstream (low) pressure test point on the air pressure switch This pressure is specified in Section 1 of this manual Adjust as necessary - refer to Section 52 of this manual Check the maximum air handler discharge temperature Check the flame signal shyrefer to Section 431

Where possible check the actual gas flow rate by meter reading with all other appliances turned off

6 Check the operation of the overheat limit control by adjusting the temperature controller set point and high limit to 65degC as described in Appendix 4 of this manual Monitor the discharge temperature on the temperature controller Check that the overheat control operates as the set temperature is passed Check that the control must be manually reset by pressing the green reset button on the front of the switch Return the temperature controller to its original settings

In the event that the ambient temperature is too low for this simple procedure to work the instrument will have to be bench tested using a Temperature 8ath Remove and replace the control as Section 84 of this manual for bench-testing

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 21

4 COMMISSIONING 3000S

43 1 FLAME SIGNAL CHECK

1 The ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler is fitted with a Klippon SAKT1 Test Terminal which can be used to measure the flame scanning signal Refer to the Electrical Schematic and connect a 0-1 mA ammeter to the two test points with standard 23 mm test plugs with the positive lead on the detector side Disconnect the terminal link to obtain the signal reading A minimum signal of 70 microamps is required typical signals are in the 250-400 microamp range on both pilot and main flame After completion replace the terminal link and remove the test jacks

2 Drive the burner to high fire as previously described Measure the carbon dioxide content of the discharge air stream This figure must not exceed 2800 ppm If the discharge exceeds this limit isolate the air handler and report to RS STOKVIS Ltd before proceeding

Stop and start the air handler a few times to check for reliability using the Operating Instructions (Section 6)

432 HANDOVER

Complete the air handler Service Check Sheet supplied at the back of this manual The self-copy sheet must be returned to STOKVIS for checking

Instruct the User in efficient use and care of the unit start-up and shutdown (including emergency shutdown) and recommended service interval Emphasise the need to keep the air handler clear of stored items and extraneous material and to maintain the recirculation and fresh air paths to the air handler inlets Hand all instructions as applicable to the UserOwner for safekeeping

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 22

5 ADJUSTMENTS 3000S

If adjustments to the air handler settings are required they should be made by a RS STOKVIS Ltd approved engineer

The normal value for all control settings is specified in Section 1 of this manual

51 PILOT ADJUSTMENT

The pilot gas pressure and flame length may be adjusted by altering the discharge pressure of the pilot governor Screwing the adjusting screw clockwise (located under the top cap) increases the discharge pressure and the flame length anti-clockwise decreases the pressure and the flame length

52 BURNER HIGH FIRE PRESSURE ADJUSTMENT

At high fire alter the spring compression on the main burner governor (MV2) by removing the cap and adjust the spring compression plate clockwise to increase the burner pressure anti-clockwise to decrease burner pressure If the pressure does not increase on adjusting the spring the supply is inadequate

Note On small air handlers fitted with a mUlti-functional control the pressure adjusting screw is located under a swing cap on the first block valve

53 BURNER LOW FIRE ADJUSTMENT

The main burner low fire is adjusted on the flow control valve MV5 (Process amp Instrumentation Diagram)

Remove the top cover of the valve and insert a Terminal Screwdriver in the adjusting screw of the TOP cam marked NI

Drive the burner to low fire by adjusting the temperature controller set-point and high limit to 05degC as described in Appendix 4 of this manual

Turn the Terminal Screwdriver clockwise to decrease the low fire gas flow anti-clockwise to increase the flow

Check the heat input and flame signal at the new position are satisfactory and return the tenlperature controller to its normal settings

Replace the control valve cover

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 23

5 ADJUSTMENTS 3000S

54 SUMMERIOFFIWINTER SWITCH

In the SUMMER position this switch provides ventilation only and is independent of the programmed ON and OFF periods This position is manually selected and must be manually de-selected Whenever the switch is in this position the fan is operating

In the OFF position the air handler is shutdown and will not operate This overrides any frost protection fitted It is suitable for air handler shutdown for short periods such as holidays The programme memory is unaffected by this switch and assumes control of the air handler when the switch is returned to the WINTER position

In the WINTER position the air handler operates off the programme memory to provide heating

55 RESET BUTTON

Visual indication of air handler lockout is provided In the event of lockout occurring the air handler can be reset by depressing the RESET button This parallels the RESET button on the air handler main control panel If after 4 attempts to reset the air handler the lockout indicator still illuminates then a Service Engineer should be called to investigate the problem

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 24

6 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 3000S

61 AIR HANDLER START-UP

1 Open all manual gas valves both on the appliance and on the supply to the appliance Switch on the Electric Supply to the appliance

2 On the main air handler panel

Switch the panel isolator to the 1 position

Check POWER ON light

3 On the remote control station

For Heating Switch the SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch to WINTER

The air handler will now start automatically in response to the time settings

In the event of LOCKOUT

Press the RESET button and the cycle of operations will be repeated If the air handler goes to LOCKOUT four times in succession call for a Service Engineer

For Unheated Ventilation Switch the SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch to SUMMER

Note This prevents the burner firing giving a controlled supply of ventilation air to the heated space as long as the switch is in this position The air handler will now start automatically in response to the timeclock demand To turn the fan off return the switch to the centre OFF position

In the event of LOCKOUT

Press the RESET button and the cycle of operations will be repeated If the air handler goes to LOCKOUT four times in succession call for a Service Engineer

62 AIR HANDLER SHUTDOWN

621 SHUTDOWN FOR SHORT PERIODS

Switch the SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch on the remote station to OFF

622 SHUTDOWN FOR PROLONGED PERIODS

Switch the main panel isolator to the 0 position and close all manual gas valves both on and leading to the appliance

Note Manual gas valves should only be operated when the appliance is to be shut off for either Servicing or for a prolonged shutdown

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 25

30005 6 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

63 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS

631 SITE CLEARANCE ADJACENT TO AIR HANDLER

Attention should be paid to keeping the area around the air handler tidy No rubbish should be allowed to accumulate in the vicinity of the air handler and storage of goods etc should not be permitted within two metres of the air handler Failure to comply could result in reduced airflow to the air handler causing inefficient running and potential overheat cond ition

632 AIR SUPPLY TO AIR HANDLER

Air vents and grilles supplying air to the air handler should never be blocked and should be checked periodically to ensure they are clear

633 AIR FILTERS

Similarly attention should be paid to cleaning or replacing the filters to the air handler if fitted Your installer should advise you on the frequency with which this would be required to be completed

634 SERVICE

For continued safe and efficient operation of this air air handler it is important that servicing of the air handler should be completed at regular intervals by a competent person in accordance with Section 82 of this manual Users are advised to enter into a Service Agreement with RS STOKVIS Ltd

635 SPARE PARTS

It is suggested that a complete set of spare parts essential to the running of the air handler and recommended by the installer are kept by the user on the premises where the air handler is installed This is particularly important where the air handler forms an essential part of any process plant and its being out of operation may cause problems by for example frost damage or condensation by super-cooling

A list of Recommended Spares will be found in Section 9 of this manual

636 GAS LEAKS

If a smell of gas is detected around the area of the appliance Switch off all manual gas valves and contact your service engineer or the local gas undertaking

NEVER

LOOK FOR GAS LEAKS WITH A LIGHTED MATCH OR NAKED

FLAME

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 26

7 FAULT FINDING 30008

The main control panel incorporates two lights to help in fault finding

POWER ON

LOCKOUT

The remote station also has three lights

AIR FAN ON

BURNER ON

LOCKOUT

This section gives the possible causes of failure associated with each check light The electrical schematic diagram in this manual and the wiring diagram shipped in the main air handler panel should be used in conjunction with the notes below Additionally Service Engineers should familiarise themselves with the detailed Start Sequence given in Appendix 2 of this manual

The notes are given for each light before consulting the notes check for bulb failure

71 POWER ON LIGHT IS UNLIT

Check

1 Main control panel isolator is in the 1 position

2 Main Panel 6A MCB has not tripped if a trip has occurred the switch will be at the OFF position Reset and test system as required

3 Also check if the mains electrical supply is isolated If so FIND OUT WHY before taking any action

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 27

7 FAULT FINDING 30005

72 AIR FAN ON LIGHT IS UNLIT

Check

1 SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch is not in Position OFF

2 Timeperiod is not set to off

3 Air handler is not at LOCKOUT

4 Recheck both AIR FAN ON and LOCKOUT bulbs

Two fault indications are possible

1 THE FAN IS NOT OPERATING

If the fan should have started but is not operating

Check 1 Overload for tripped conditions Reset the overload and monitor the next start-up

2 Motor Fuses

3 Relays 1 2 amp3 for failure

laClor CC1 for failure

5 Air Pressure Switch (DPS) is failed in the N 0 Position

Replace the faulty component as described in Section 8

2 THE FAN IS OPERATING

This indicates that the air pressure switch (DPS) has failed to change over

Measure the profile plate differential pressure as described in Section 4113 If the pressure is correct the air pressure switch is faulty Check the switch as in 4114 If the pressure is not correct

Check 1 Correct fan belt tension

2 Correct fan rotation

3 The air handler air inlets and discharge are not blocked

4 Correct fitting on filters

5 The air differential pressure switch impulse lines are not blocked or leaking

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 28

7 FAULT FINDING 30008

73 LOCKOUT LIGHT IS ILLUMINATED

This light indicates a failure in the burner ignition and flame supervision system

RESET the unit and follow the progress of the start sequence The full cycle may take two minutes

1

------t

2 LOCKOUT after 35-40 seconds indicates an ignition failure RESET the system and observe the pilot and ignition spark during the start-up attempt

I-- shy

3 Observe the spark This should be strong and highly visible If not remove and clean the spark plug as Section 82 Check that the spark plug gap is correctly set at 15 mm

-- shy

4 Check the pilot flame If the pilot flame ignites and the unit goes to LOCKOUT the scanning system is at fault Remove and clean the detector as Section 82 Check the flame signal as in Section 431

5 If the pilot does not light the gas supply system is faulty Check the pilot system for restriction and the pilot valve operation

6 If the pilot lights and the unit goes to LOCKOUT after the main gas valves are addressed either the flow control valve is blocked or one of the main gas block valves has failed Fit a manometer on the pressure test point on the outlet flange of the multishyfunctional control and observe if the pressure rises when the main gas valves are addressed No pressure rise will indicate failure of the main gas valves

74 AIR FAN ON LIGHT ILLUMINATED

If the burner does not start check

1 SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch is in WINTER position

2 Overheat Limit Control

These interlocks prevent the burner management system starting

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 29

8 SERVICING 3000S

IMPORTANT Servicing and maintenance should be only carried out by a RS STOKVIS Ltd approved engineer

Only use replacement parts provided by the appliance manufacturer

Check that the air openings for combustion and for ventilation of any plant roon or compartment are clear

81 ISOLATION

811 FUEL GAS ISOLATION

The fuel gas to the ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler should be isolated and locked off at the manual ball valve mounted at the start of the fuel gas line Additionally before entering or servicing the air handler the burner manual isolation valve and pilot line isolation valve should be closed

812 ELECTRICAL ISOLATION

All electric power to the air handler and the remote control station is switched through the local isolator This isolator is fitted with a lock facility to permit it to be locked in the OFF position

Additionally isolate the power at the Wall Isolator

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 30

8 SERVICING 30005

82 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE

The air handler should be routinely serviced at the start of each heating season Isolate the air handler as above before servicing Details of access to individual components are given in Section 84 of this manual

1 Remove and clean spark igniter Check that the gap is correctly set at 25 mm Replace every two years

2 Clean the flame detector lens to ensure freedom from dirt and moisture If the cell shows any sign of cracks it should be replaced Routinely replace the cell every two years or after 10000 hours of operation which ever comes first

3 Inspect the entire air handler paint system for general damage Repair as necessary

4 Every two years brush the burner plates and clear the burner holes carefully with a Size 18mm drill for NP II and 20mm drill for NP I

WARNING THE BURNER HOLES MUST NOT BE ENLARGED

5 Inspect and lubricate all damper linkages to ensure freedom of operation Wipe off all excess lubricants to prevent dirt build up on linkage parts

6 Check the fan belt for cracks and splits Check tension The correct tension gives 16mm deflection per metre of span when the belt is centrally loaded with a force of 27N Adjust as necessary

7 Grease both the fan shaft bearings with Mobiith AW2 grease or similar

NEVER use high temperature grease

NEVER mix two different greases within the bearing always flush existing grease out

Note Removing the cover plate on the end of the air handler gains access to the outboard fan bearing

Light to Slow to 0 120 2 to 6 months Clean Dry

Medium Medium 120 200 1 to 2 months

Moderate to Light to Slow to 0 120 1 to 4 weeks Dry

Dirty Medium Medium 120 200 1 to 7 days

Extreme Dirt Dry Light to Slow to 0 200 Daily Flushing out

Medium Medium Dirt

83 ANNUAL SERVICE CHECKS

After Servicing test fire the air handler following the Commissioning Procedure detailed in Section 4 of this manual to ensure correct operation generally Special attention must be paid to the damper system and related controls and interlocks

Additionally check that the fresh air and recirculation air entry path to the air handler has been kept clear and instruct the User of the need for this as necessary

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 31

8 SERVICING 3000S

84 REMOVAL PROCEDURE FOR REPLACEABLE COMPONENTS

IMPORTANT

Turn off the gas at the appliance service valve and the electricity at the main panel and wall isolator before proceeding

841 BURNER

The burner is located inside the air handler casing and is mounted on two brackets from the support straps To remove the burner isolate the air handler as in 81 and undo the union on the fuel gas line adjacent to the burner isolation valve (MV6) and unscrew the main and pilot gas feed pipes from the burner rail Access to the rear of the burner assembly is made by removing the partition plate below the burner separating the fresh air inlet to the burner from the return air inlet compartment This is held in place by screws which engage in captive nuts on the top side of the partition Remove the Flame Detector and pull off the ignition plug cap Disconnect the burner support brackets and remove the burner The burner will easily pass through the access hatch for further strip down Replace in the reverse order soundness test the gas pipework check the burner operation and duty as described in the commissioning section of this manual

842 FLAME DETECTOR

This is a 240 Volt instrument

The flame detector is mounted on the end of the burner rail inside the air handler casing To remove the detector isolate the panel electric supply and lock off Push the scanner towards the burner and rotate to release the bayonet fixing and lift the detector from its mount Remove the two screws holding the detector cover and disconnect the supply leads noting the polarity of the connections

Replace the flame detector in the reverse order ensuring correct polarity of connections Ensure the access panel is securely closed and the retaining nuts are tightened down Check operation by inserting a test meter in the points provided in the main control panel and reading the flame signals during start up to full rate burner operation (See 431) Operate the appliance over six starts for reliability of operation including tum off of start and main gas valves to check for lockout operation

843 IGNITER SPARK PLUG

This is a high tension spark plug

The igniter spark plug is mounted on the end of the burner rail inside the air handler casing To remove the spark plug isolate the air handler as above Enter the service access door Access to the spark plug is made through the profile plate To remove the spark plug pull off the high tension lead and unscrew the plug with a plug spanner

When replacing the spark plug check the plug gap is set at 15mm Check ignition reliability over six start ups

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 32

8 SERVICING 3000S

844 IGNITER SPARK TRANSFORMER

This is a 240 Volt instrument

The ignition transformer is located in a plastic box mounted on the air handler casing adjacent to the main control panel To remove the transformer isolate the air handler as above and unscrew the four retaining screws holding the box lid in place and remove the lid Disconnect the supply cable at the terminal strip and undo the transformer retaining screws The transformer may then be unscrewed from the High Tension cable leading to the spark plug

Replacement is a simple reversal of this procedure

Check ignition reliability over six start ups

845 COMBUSTION AIR PRESSURE SWITCH (DPS)

Note The switch is set and sealed and should be replaced if not operating correctly

This switch is a 240 Volt instrument

The air switch is mounted directly on the air handler casing and can be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove the switch isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the supply cable Break the downstream pipe compression fitting and unscrew the switch housing from its locating fitting Reverse the procedure to replace after ensuring switch setting is as specified in Section 13 of this manual Operate the air handler to ensure reliability of operation over six start ups

846 AIR HANDLER OVERHEAT LIMIT CONTROL

This is a 240 Volt instrument

The overheat limit control can be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove the control isolate the air handler as above and lock off Remove the switch cover Disconnect the supply cable and unscrew the control housing from its locating fitting Reverse the procedure to replace check the switch is set to 50degC Test the switch operation as described in Section 43 over at least three operations

847 AIR FAN AND MOTOR

The air fan motor is a 415 Volt 3 phase motor

The motor and slide rails are easily accessible inside the air handler casing If it is necessary to remove the motor isolate the air handler as above Slacken the fan-belt tension and remove the drive belts Pull the motor away from the air handler casing to make access to the motor terminal box and disconnect the supply cable The motor may now be removed from the unit Following replacement the air handler must be fully re-commissioned as in Section 4

It is unlikely that the air fan will need replacing or servicing If required a full procedure should be obtained from RS STOKVIS Ltd

Replacement must be followed by full re-commissioning as in Section 4

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 33

8 SERVICING 3000S

848 FUEL GAS MULTI-FUNCTIONAL CONTROL - SMALL UNITS

This is a 240 Volt instrument

The fuel gas multi-functional control can be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove the unit isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the Hirschman electric termination Unbolt the control from its flanges and remove

When replacing care must be taken to ensure the flange 0 rings are undamaged and in the correct location Following replacement the air handler must be fully reshycommissioned as in Section 4 including tests for soundness prior to start-up

849 GOVERNOR AND BLOCK VALVES

The block valves are 240 Volt instruments

All these items may be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove any item isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the electric termination to the two block valves the pilot block valve and the flow control block valve Break the two pipe unions and remove the fuel gas line complete for further strip-down

8410 FUEL GAS FLOW CONTROL VALVE

This is a 24 Volt instrument

The fuel gas How control valve can be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove the valve isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the supply cables to the control valve

On small air handlers fitted with a multi-functional control support the multi-functional control and unbolt its discharge flange Break the union downstream of the burner isolation valve and remove the section of line containing the flow control valve for further strip-down

On large air handlers fitted with separate block valves it will be necessary to remove the fuel gas line complete as Section 8410 above

Following replacement re-commission the air handler

Note If the fresh air damper is not in the full open position the heat input must not exceed the maximum heat input at recirculation condition specified in the technical data section of this manual

8411 PILOT GAS GOVERNOR AND BLOCK VALVE

The block valve is a 240 Volt instrument

Both items may be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove either item isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the electric terrriination to the solenoid valve Undo the upstream pipe union and the compression fitting downstream of the manual block valve (PV3) Remove the pilot gas line complete for further strip down

Replace broken or distorted connections and retest for soundness Ensure the pilot gas pressure is correct and the flame is sensing an output Ensure reliability over six start-ups

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 34

8 SERVICING 3000S

8412 BELT TENSIONING PROCEDURE

The setting tensions are designed to cover a wide range of drives A precise setting force for individual applications can be calculated as detailed

SETTING FORCES

Belt Section

Setting Force To Deflect Belt 16mm per Metre Of Span

Small Pulley Diameter (mm)

Basic Setting Forces Newtons (N) Kilograms (kgf)

125 x Setting Forces Newtons (N) Kilograms (kgf)

SPZ

56 to 71 16 16 20 20 75 to 90 18 18 22 22

95 to 125 20 20 25 25 Over 125 22 22 28 28

SPA

80 to 100 22 22 28 28 106 to 140 30 30 38 38 150 to 200 36 37 45 46 Over 200 40 40 50 51

SPB

112 to 160 40 40 50 51 170 to 224 50 51 62 63 236 to 355 62 63 77 79 Over 355 65 66 81 83

SPC 224 to 250 70 71 87 89 265 to 355 92 94 115 120 Over 375 115 120 144 150

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 35

8 SERVICING 3000S

BELT TENSIONING USING FENNER BELT TENSION INDICATOR

Calculate the deflection in mm on a basis of 16mm per metre of centre distance Centre Distance (m) x 16 =Deflection (mm)

Set lower marker ring at the deflection distance required in mm on the lower scale

Set upper ring against to bottom edge of the top tube

Place the belt tension indicator on top of the belt at the centre of span and apply a force at right angles to the belt defecting it to the point where the lower marker ring is level with the top of the adjacent belt

Read off the force value indicated by the top edge of the upper marker ring

Compare this force to the kgf value shown in the table above

If a Fenner Belt Tension Indicator is not available a spring balance and rule will be suffice

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 36

8 SERVICING 30005

85 MAIN PANEL CONTROLS

All panel controls are readily accessible and may be easily exchanged for replacement components in the event of failure Ensure any replacement item is of the same make and type as the original

851 LANDIS amp GYR LFL 1335 AUTOMATIC SEQUENCE CONTROLLER

The Landis amp Gyr Automatic Sequence Controller is a plug-in unit locating on a pre-wired chassis To remove the controller undo the two retaining screws at the top left and lower right corners and pull the module off the chassis

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

852 CONTROLS CIRCUIT (24 VOLT) TRANSFORMER

The Controls Circuit Transformer is fixed to the panel back plate by tapped screws To remove the transformer undo the wiring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel Undo the two retaining screws and remove the unit complete

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

853 CONTROL RELAYS R1 R2 amp R3

The Control Relays are DIN Rail mounted To remove a relay undo the wIring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel Release the DIN rail retaining clip under the relay with a screwdriver and remove the relay

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

854 6A MCB

The 6A MCB is DIN Rail mounted To remove the MCB undo the wiring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel Release the DIN rail retaining clip under the MCB with a screwdriver and remove the MCB

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

855 THERMAL OVERLOAD

The thermal overload is attached to the underside of the main contactor To remove the overload undo the wiring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel and that the overload setting is as specified in Section 13 of this manual Unscrew the three connections to the contactor and remove the overload

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 37

8 SERVICING 3000S

856 MAIN CONTACTOR

The Main Contactor is DIN Rail mounted To remove the contactor remove the thermal overload as 855 above and then undo the wiring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel Release the DIN rail retaining clip under the contactor with a screwdriver and remove the contactor

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

857 MOTOR FUSE

To replace a motor fuse pull the fuse carrier off the fuse holder base The fuse is attached to the fuse carrier by two screws Unscrew remove and replace

86 REMOTE CONTROL STATION

The remote control station contains some serviceable parts although these items should only be fitted by an approved RS STOKVIS Ltd Engineer

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 38

9 RECOMMENDED SPARES 3000S

For two years operation it is recommended that the following items should be held in stock

ITEM DESCRIPTION PART NO QUANTITY i

1 INDICATOR BULBS W1121 1 PACK

2 SPARK PLUG 023739 1 I

3 UVDETECTOR QRA10C 1 I

4 ROOM SENSOR DRT2453 1

5 DUCT SENSOR DDT1701 1

All replacement parts can be obtained from RS STOKVIS Ltd by quoting the air handler serial number the part number and description

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 39

APPENDIX 1 30005

SOUNDNESS TESTING THE FUEL GAS PIPEWORK

This procedure should only be carried out by personnel familiar with the ECONO-AIR 3000S Series Air handler

The pressure test points and all valves are identified on the Process and Instrumentation Diagram for the air handler included in Section 1 of this n1anual

Isolate the air handler electric supply at the main control panel and lock off Close the manual isolation valves MV1 MV6 and PV3 Ensure the supply pressure is available on the upstream side of MV1

A11 TESTING THE UPSTREAM PIPEWORKAND BURNER CONTROLS 1 Connect a 60 mbar manometer to the pressure test nipple A Monitor the

pressure for two minutes Any rise in pressure indicates that valve MV1 is leaking and must be replaced Remove pressure test points Band F

2 Open MV1 to pressurise the pipework on both the main gas and pilot line to the first block valve

3 Close MV1 Allow one minute for the temperature to stabilise and then test the system for 2 minutes and watch for a drop in the pipework pressure If the pressure falls open valve MV1 and test the pipework connections and valves from MV1 to MV3 and MV1 to PV2 for leaks with a proprietary leak detector fluid or spray Turn off MV1 seal any leaks and re-test

4 If no extemalleaks are found either the pilot block valve PV1 or either the first main gas block valve MV3 is letting by

5 To test this seal pressure test point A and fit a manometer to pressure test point B Leave for two minutes with MV1 open A rise in pressure on the manometer confirms a leak on the block valve MV3 Turn off MV1 exchange the valve and re-test from point 2 above

6 Repeat this procedure for the pilot block valve Seal test point B and fit a manometer to pressure test point F Leave for two minutes with MV1 open A rise in pressure on the manometer confirms a leak on the pilot block valve PV2 Turn off MV1 exchange the valve and re-test from point 1 above Seal test point F

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 40

APPENDIX 1 30005

A12 TESTING THE DOWNSTREAM BURNER VALVE 1 Close MV1 and connect pressure test points A and 8 with flexible 6 mm bore

tubing teed into the manometer Remove pressure test point C Open MV1 to pressurise the downstream block valve MV4

2 Close MV1 and leave for one minute for the temperature to stabilise Monitor the pressure for 2 minutes If the pressure falls open valve MV1 and leak test the line between the two block valves MV3 and MV4 with a proprietary leak detector Turn off MV1 seal any leaks and re-test Note Smaller air handlers in the 3000S Series are fitted with multi-functional valves combining the pressure regulator and two block valves in one component The above procedure still applies but if a leak is found on either block valve the whole control should be replaced If no external leaks are found the downstream block valve is letting by

3 To confirm this close MV1 remove the manometer and refit to pressure test point C Connect pressure test points A and 8 with flexible 6mm bore tubing Open MV1 and allow one minute for the temperature to stabilise Monitor the pressure for a further 2 minutes with MV1 still open A rise in pressure confirms that the second block valve MV4 is letting by Turn off MV1 Replace the valve and re-test from 2 above

A13 TESTING THE DOWNSTREAM BURNER PIPEWORK 1 Close MV1 and connect pressure test points A and D with flexible 6 mm bore

tubing teed into the manometer Open MV1 to pressurise the downstream pilot pipework

2 Close MV1 and leave for one minute for the temperature to stabilise Monitor the pressure for 2 minutes If the pressure falls open valve MV1 and leak test the line between the downstream block valve MV4 and the manual block MV6 with a proprietary leak detector fluid or spray If no external leaks are found the manual block valve MV6 is letting by Turn off MV1 seal any leakages and reshytest from 2 above

A14 TESTING THE DOWNSTREAM PILOT PIPEWORK 1 Close MV1 and connect pressure test points A and F with flexible 6mm bore

tubing teed into the manometer Open MV1 to pressurise the downstream pilot pipework

2 Close MV1 and leave for one rninute for the temperature to stabilise Monitor the pressure for 2 minutes If the pressure falls open valve MV1 and leak test the line between the downstream block valve PV2 and the manual block PV3 with a proprietary leak detector fluid or spray If no external leaks are found the manual block valve PV3 is letting by Turn off MV1 seal any leakages and reshytest from 2 above

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 41

APPENDIX 1 30005

A15 TESTING THE BURNER CONNECTIONS 1 Remove the burner access panel as described in Section 84 of this manual

Remove the burner spark igniter Slacken the two retaining bolts holding the burner to the burner support straps and unbolt the burner supply endplate from the burner casting and mixing plates

2 Connect pressure test points A and 0 with flexible 6mm bore tubing teed into the manometer Open MV1 and MV6 to pressurise the burner pipework Leak test the main gas burner pipework and connections with proprietary leak detector fluid Turn off MV6 Seal any leakages and re-test

3 Connect pressure test points A and F with flexible 6 mm bore tubing teed into the manometer Open MV1 and PV3 to pressurise the pilot burner pipework Leak test the pilot gas burner pipework and connections with proprietary leak detector fluid Turn off PV3 Seal any leakages and re-test

4 Turn off MV1

5 Replace the spark igniter and profile division plate

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 42

APPENDIX 2 30005

START SEQUENCE

The burner start sequence is controlled by the Landis and Gyr burner management unit The timings are pre-set and comply with 885885 This unit must NOT be tampered with

A brief description of the start-up sequence isshy

The unit checks

1 The NO FLAME signal on the UV flame scanner

Note If the scanner detects a flame at any time other than in the correct operating sequence the flame programmer initiates a lockout

2 The operation of the combustion air proving switch in the NO AIR position

3 The air handler discharge high temperature switch

If the checks are completed the unit starts the combustion air fan and then checks the combustion airflow

Once the airflow is proven the unit checks that the damper control circuit is functioning correctly After the damper microswitch is made to prove the fresh air damper is fully open the sequence allows 30 seconds for the combustion air to purge any combustible gas from the air handler

After completion of the purge the spark ignition system is energised the pilot valve opened and the spark terminated If the pilot flame is not proven by the UV scanner the system will initiate a LOCKOUT

If the flame is proven the main gas valves are opened the pilot extinguished and the main burner flame proven

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 43

i

APPENDIX 2 30008

The following flow chart shows the complete start sequence including the lighting of the various indicating lamps

MANUAL STATUS LIGHT POWER ON

POWER ON

I INITIATE START BY TIME

SETTING ON CONTROLLER

I CHECK NO FLAME

VISIBLE

PROVEj FAIL LOCKOUT

I CHECK RELAY R4 NC

POSITION

PROVE FAIL NO START

I CHECK AIR PRESSURE SWITCH NC POSITION

PROVE FAIL NO START

I CHECK RELAY R1 NC

POSITION

PROVE j

FAIL NO START

I START COMBUSTION

AIR BLOWER

I CHECK AIR PRESSURE SWITCH NO POSITION

PROVE I

FAIL NO START

I STATUS LIGHT FAN ON

I ENERGISE RELAY R1

I

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 44

I

I

APPENDIX 2 30008

I CHECK OVERHEAT LIMIT

CONTROL R5

PROVE I

FAIL I I

CHECK 541412 LOOP CLOSED ON

LANDIS ampGYR CIRCUIT

PROVE I

FAIL I I

COMBUSTION AIR PURGE PERIOD

30 SECONDS

I

NO START

NO START

CANCEL NO FLAME CHECK CIRCUIT

I

ENERGISE SPARK

I TIMED PERIOD 25 SECONDS

I ENERGISE PILOT GAS

VALVE

I TIMED PERIOD 25 SECONDS

I TERMINATE SPARK

I INTERROGATE UV FLAME SCANNER

PROVE I

FAIL I I

TIMED PERIOD 10 SECONDS

I

LOCKOUT

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 45

I

I

APPENDIX 2 3000S

I ENERGISE MAIN GAS

VALVES

I

STATUS LIGHT BURNER ON

I TIMED PERIOD

5 SECONDS

I DE-ENERGISE PILOT

GAS VALVES

CONTINUOUS FROM PILOT

I INTERROGATE UV FLAME SCANNER

PROVE I

FAIL I I

LOCKOUT I

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 46

APPENDIX 3 30005

Please see copy of Standard Service Sheet

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 47

APPENDIX 4 30005

A41 TIME OUT SCREEN

This is the standard screen displayed when the touch screen is not in use The back light is off to save energy_ To access the STATUS screen touch the ENTER key and the following screen is displayed

[]][I][]rn[IJOO[][IJOO[] EJ~E11 I[]I ~ middot I

NOTE

The Touch Screen operates using the heat produced by the touch of a finger and therefore only LIGHT pressure is required

Excessive pressure can damage the Touch Screen

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 48

APPENDIX 4 30008

A42 STATUS SCREEN

On the typical STATUS screen the illustrated information detailed is as follows

19 36 Fan Brn

RS OS

100 Fst_~_ Lck _ _ Xst Gas~o ~ I

RS Indicates the current room temperature

OS ~( t~~ the current duct discharge temperature

Fan Indicates the current status of the fan by showing the arrow and the fan blades for ON and OFF is shown by the arrow and fan blades being removed

Brn Indicates the current status of the burner with the black flames indicating the burner to be ON and vice versa

Lck LOCKOUT - This indicates a flame failure when highlighted during normal or start-up operation

Xst EXCESS TEMPERATURE SWITCH - This indicates the unit has reached the trip limit on the over heat stat when highlighted during operation

Indicates the current position of the gas modulating valve during normal Gas

operation (0-100)

Indicates whether the Frost stat is energised and the unit is running on frost Fst

override

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 49

APPENDIX 4 30008

A43 CHANGING SETTINGS

It is possible to change the settings for the time of operation and the required temperature set points The following details the steps required

A44 ENTERING THE SECURITY CODE

From the STATUS screen touch the return key and the screen below will be displayed

Type the HIGH LEVEL security code (4321) If you make a mistake use the BACK SPACE key to delete any incorrect number(s) Touch the ENTER key when the code is correct

If the security code is incorrect the screen above will be displayed then try again If after several attempts you can not gain access please contact RS STOKVIS Ltd for further information

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 50

APPENDIX 4 30008

When the code is entered correctly the MAIN MENU is displayed as detailed below

~ STATUS SET VALUES~ ~ TIVIE CLOCK [) [) [) [) [)

The MAIN MENU screen shows the three menu items available The title for each menu item can be changed to suit the end user Please notify RS STOKVIS Ltd prior to commissioning should these parameters require special amendments

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 51

APPENDIX 4 30008

A45 CHANGING OR SETTING A TIME SCHEDULE

From the main menu screen select the TIME CLOCK page by running finger across screen symbol and touch the ENTER key the screen below will be displayed

On the following screen highlight the TS1 symbol and touch the ENTER key

The current time schedule will now be displayed as shown below The display will automatically default to the current day (1 =Monday 2 =Tuesday etc) In this case day 5 (Friday) the four schedule switching times refer to that day

IAC6BBB1BHIS1

mm0CIl bull mID 17BB 17BB 17HB

Iillleschedule

To modify a time select it by highlighting and touch the ENTER key and the following screen is displayed

To amend the appropriate onoff time as shown on the screen below The arrows to the right of the time are for altering the hours and the arrows on the left for the minutes

Once you have set the time use the ESCape key to exit back to the time schedule screen and choose another day by touching the required number Another time may now be modified as before

IAC6BBB1BHIS1

H8BH

I i eschedule

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 52

APPENDIX 4 30008

Use the ESCape key to exit back to the MAIN MENU screen

~ STATUS ~ SET VALUES

TIME CLOCK []~ [] [] [] []

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 53

APPENDIX 4 30005

A46 CHANGING SET VALUES

From the main menu screen select the SET VALUES page by highlight in the normal way and touch the ENTER key

The following screen is displayed

36 19 18III III IIIHsv Rsv Llv

To change the RSV highlight it in the normal way and touch the ENTER key and the screen below will now be shown

IAC6RRR1RR40 T I

0 19 (Y)l RSV

ROOM SET VALUE

The above screen shows the parameters that can be changed The values to the far left are the limitations of set point (OC) Change the set point by using the UP and DOWN ARROWS on the left of the screen or touch the set value itself followed by the ENTER key to select the set value and set it directly using the numeric keyboard All values can be changed in this way

Use the ESCape key twice to exit back to the MAIN MENU screen

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 54

APPENDIX 4 30005

A47 COMMISSIONING AND SERVICING BURNER CHECKS

Select the SET VALUES screen from the MAIN MENU screen and adjust the high lirrlit set point to 55degC to drive the burner to high fire

IAC6HHH1HH60 ~T I

0 19 (Y)

HSV

HIGH SET VALUE ~

Ensure the set value is returned to 36degC once the appropriate checks and adjustments as described in Section 43 of this manual have been completed Return to the SET VALUES screen and select the low limit value to adjust the low fire setting

Reduce the low limit value to OdegC to drive the gas valve to low fire and complete the appropriate checks and adjustments as described in Section 43 of this manual and ensure the set value is returned to the original value

A48 GMT ltgt BST CHANGEOVER DAYLIGHT SAVINGS

To change your unit to British Summer TimelWinter Time the following system screen must be highlighted by touching the Iamp1 button twice

By touching the clock symbol in the top left hand corner followed by the ENTER key the screen below will be displayed

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 55

APPENDIX 4 30008

188311 851193

544

By touching and highlighting in this case 18 followed by the ENTER key A small box allowing the entry of two digits will appear Enter the desired time required using the numbered keys followed by ENTER key Your unit is now set to operate on BSTBWT

Touch the ESC key three times to return back to the Status screen

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 56

STOKVIS ENERGY SYSTEMS 96R WALTON ROAD EAST MOLESEY SURREY KT8 0DL TEL 020 8783 3050 08707 707 747 FAX 020 8783 3051 08707 707 767 E-MAIL infostokvisboilerscom WEBSITE wwwstokvisboilerscom

JULY 1999

Page 16: ECONOAIR 3000S SERIES AIR HANDLING UNIT DIRECT FIREDstokvisboilers.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/EconoAir... · 2019-05-10 · ECONOAIR 3000S SERIES AIR HANDLING UNIT DIRECT FIRED

3 INSTALLATION 3000S

33 LIMITATIONS OF USE

The ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler must not be installed in the following locations

I n hazardous areas

In areas where flammable vapours can be present in excess of their threshold limit values as defined in 8S5925

I n accordance with 8S6230 Clause 513 where there are any flued appliances in the heated area and where air is supplied mechanically and there is mechanical extraction the design extract rate must be 5 to 10 less than the design inlet rate so that the room will not be at a lower pressure than the outside air If the air handler is the only source of mechanically supplied air the extract rate must not exceed 95 of the nominal air flow specified in Section 11 of this manual

Note If it proposed to install the ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler to supply heated air to a hazardous area or in areas where flammable vapours are present the installation must first be approved by a RS STOKVIS Ltd Engineer

34 LOCATION OF AIR HANDLERS

The air handler should normally be installed in the location recommended by the RS STOKVIS Ltd specifying engineer

Check the proposed location for level and load bearing strength Ensure that there is adequate clearance as detailed on the air handler GA in Section 1 this manual around the unit for access for maintenance purposes If the air handler is to be installed above floor level a suitably designed service platform should be provided Such a platform must have 100mm minimum raised edges around the perimeter If this is not possible all air handler access panels must be fitted with hinged restraints This is a factory standard option which should be specified at the time of ordering - check the restraints are fitted before proceeding with installation

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 12

3 INSTALLATION 3000S

35 FRESH AIR INLET AND VENTILATION

351 FRESH AIR INLET

The air handler must be installed where it has a direct and unlimited supply of fresh air from outside the building Ensure that the air intake is not located near exhausts from the building or from any process exhausts such as paint booth exhausts Whenever possible protect the fresh air inlet from the prevailing wind and local wind effects from corners

The fresh air inlet should be sized for an air velocity of 3ms The inlet duct area is detailed on the General Arrangement drawing located in Section 1 of this manual

Where the fresh air inlet is made in a load bearing wall eg a brick wall guidance should be obtained from Structural Engineers on the provision of a lintel in the wall over the fresh air opening

A weather hood must be fitted when the air handler air inlet is at or within 1 m of the outside wall Additionally the weather hood should have negligible resistance to the airflow maximum 01 mbar at the design air flow rate

Do not install the ECONO-AI R 3000S Series air handler where long lengths of duct or bends of an angle greater than 30deg are necessary to lead to the air handler from the fresh air opening If ducting is unavoidable ensure that the resulting pressure drop is negligible Le less than 01 mbar for ductless air handlers and has been accounted for in the original design for ducted air handlers as detailed in the specification section of this manual Section 11

Note If the air intake is located in an area of unrestricted access warning notices preventing the blockage of the air intake by temporary stacking should be displayed adjacent to the intake

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 13

3 INSTALLATION 3000S

352 VENTI LA TION

Where the air air handler is in its own plant room or compartment this shall be ventilated with openings communicating directly with the outside air to ventilate the room

The openings shall be fitted with grilles of negligible resistance and shall be sited so that they cannot easily be blocked or flooded They shall have a total minimum free area as follows

Low Level (inlet) 320cm2 + 27cm2 per kilowatt in excess of 60kW total rated input

High Level (outlet) 160cm2 + 134cm2 per kilowatt in excess of 60kW total rated input

The free area of the grilles shall be not less than the size of the recommended minimum ventilation opening Grilles shall be designed to minimise high velocity air streams in the plant room For exposed ie free standing plant rooms ventilation openings shall be provided on at least two sides and preferably on all four sides

Where mechanical ventilation is used it shall be by mechanical inlet and either natural or mechanical extraction Systems of ventilation employing mechanical extraction and natural air inlet shall not be used

The minimum flow rates of air supplied shall be not less than 06 m3s per megawatt of rated heat input

36 AIR DISCHARGE

The air handler should be located with the air discharge into the heated space at a minimum height of 3 metres The air should not discharge directly onto any obstructions and direct discharge on to working personnel should be avoided

If the air discharge is located in an area of unrestricted access warning notices preventing the blockage of the air discharge by temporary stacking should be displayed adjacent to the discharge

Generally it is not necessary to fit distribution ducting to the discharge of the air handler If ducting is required or specified ensure that the resulting pressure drop has been accounted for in the original design specification as detailed in Section 1 of this manual

37 ASSEMBLY AND POSITIONING OF AIR HANDLER

Unless specified at the time of order air handlers will be shipped in sections Discharge heads grilles attenuators duct connecting sections filters rain-hoods etc will be supplied loose for site fitting to the air handler

Horizontal air handlers must be supported on their steel angle support base When the air handler is located check for level and adjust as necessary

Alternatively horizontal air handlers can be supplied with extensions of the support frame for suspending from overhead supports This must be specified at the time of order Do not suspend the air handler from the lifting eyes

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 14

3 INSTALLATION 3000S

38 REMOTE STATION

The ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler is supplied with a remote control station This should be mounted in a position convenient to the end user If possible it should not be mounted on an external wall or where the space temperature detector is affected by cold draughts or a local source of heat

39 VISUAL CHECK

After completion of installation re-check the air handler for signs of damage Report any instance to RS STOKVIS Ltd

310 CONNECTION OF SERVICES

The air handler requires the connection of fuel gas and electricity

3101 FUEL GAS SUPPLY

The ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler has been designed for use on Natural Gas An alternative version is available for LPG The gas type for the air handler supplied is clearly marked on the air handler data badge and on the Specification sheet in Section 1 of this manual Check the gas type is correct and that the supply pressure is within the range marked on the specification

The local gas Authority should be consulted about the adequacy of the gas service and meter supplies for existing and proposed extensions to the installation and for any requirements for boosting the gas supply_

Connect the fuel gas supply to the inlet manual valve on the air handler gas train The connection size is detailed in Section 1 of this manual A further isolation valve and union should be fitted immediately adjacent to the appliance which when the valve is closed allows the complete burner and control assembly to be disconnected for maintenance or repair

New gas pipework should be installed to British Gas Publication IGEUP2 and be purged and pressure tested in accordance with British Gas Publications IGEUP1

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 15

3 INSTALLATION 3000S

3102 ELECTRICITY SUPPLY

All external wiring shall be carried out and checked by a competent person All components shall be checked for suitability for voltage range and frequency

Means for electric isolation having a contact separation of at least 3mm in all poles must be provided adjacent to the air handler The electrical supply to the appliance shall incorporate suitable means of excess current protection

The ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler requires a 3 phase 4 wire supply which should be connected to the main control panel Check the air handler data badge for the correct electrical supply The maximum supply requirement is Specified in Section 1 of this manual Note that the 240 Volt air handler control circuit is taken from the lUI phase to Neutral Connection should be made as shown on the wiring diagram shipped inside this panel

The air handler must be earthed in accordance with BS5986 and CP1013

Check all terminal strip terminations for wires which have become loose during shipment

311 CONNECTION TO THE MAIN PANEL AND REMOTE STATION

Interconnecting wiring to the main panel and remote station should be made with a minimum specification of 075 mm2 300 Volt cable Check that no wires on the terminal strip have become loose during shipment The remote panel should be mounted at a height of approx 18m If possible it should not be mounted on an external wall or where the sensor will be affected by cold draughts or a local source of heat

Both panel and remote station must be earthed in accordance with BS5986 and CP1013

312 HEATED SPACE TEMPERATURE SENSOR

The space temperature sensor located on the remote panel should be connected with screened cable or twin low voltage signal cable run in its own separate conduit It should be mounted on the remote panel or adjacent to the outlet at a height of approx 18m If possible it should not be mounted on an external wall or where the sensor will be affected by cold draughts or a local source of heat

313 DUCT SENSOR

The duct sensor should be connected with screened cable or twin low voltage signal cable run in its own separate conduit It should be mounted in the air handler discharge as close as possible to the discharge into the heated space

314 OVERHEAT LIMIT CONTROL SENSOR

The overheat limit control sensor should be connected with twin core cable It should be mounted in the air handler discharge within 1 metre of the air handler outlet connection

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 16

3 INSTALLATION 3000S

315 TOUCH SCREEN WIRING

The touch screen located on the front of the remote station requires two separate twisted pairs of O5mrh2 screened cable run in a separate conduit If the distance between the main and remote stations is greater that 1 km please contact RS STOKVIS Ltd for advice

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 17

3 INSTALLATION 3000S

316 ALIGNMENT

3161 INSTALLATION OF DRIVE BELTS

On 80 amp 89 30008 range of air handlers it will be necessary to align the pulleys and fit the drive belts before carrying out commissioning of the unit

3162 PU LLEYS

Before assembling the drive check the pulley grooves are free from scores or sharp edges and all dimensions conform to the relevant standard

The Taper Lock bush is your starting point when it comes to assembly and installation Drive installation is a straightforward job with Taper Lock - but the stages set out on the installation leaflet provided with every Taper Lock bush should be followed closely

3163 ALIGNMENT

Good alignment of pulleys prior to belt installation is important to avoid belt flank wear The diagram below shows correct installation of pulleys

INTERNAl BEARING

MOTOR PUlLEY rAN PULLEY

MOTORMOTOR ADJUSTMENT MOUNTING BOlTSBOLTS

3164 BELTS

When the pulleys have been correctly positioned on the shafts the belts can be installed to complete the drive

The drive centre distance should be reduced prior to the installation of the belts so that they may be fitted without the use of force Under no circumstances must belts be prised into the grooves Using sharp tools to stretch the belts over the pulley rim can easily damage belts and pulley grooves

The installation allowance given in the table below is the minimum recommended reduction in centre distance for various belt section and lengths to allow for correct fitting

The take-up allowance given in the same table should be added on to the calculated centre distance to allow for belt stretch

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 18

3 INSTALLATION 3000S

3165 INSTALLATION AND TAKE UP ALLOWANCE

Belt Pitch Installation Allowance Take-Up Length (mm) SPZ SPA SPB SPC (mm)

410 to 530 5

540 to 840 10

850 to 1160 15

1170 to 1500 20

1510 to 1830 20 25

1840 to 2170 30

2180 to 2830 25 40

2840 to 3500 30 50

3520 to 4160 50 60

4170 to 5140 70

5220 to 6150 85

6180 to 7500 105

600 to 8500 125

8880 to 10170 145

10600 to 12500 175

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 19

4 COMMISSIONING 30005

This appliance must be commissioned by a RS STOKVIS Ltd approved engineer

41 PRESTART CHECKS

1 Switch the SUMMERIOFFMlINTER switch on the remote station to OFF

2 Check the correct electric supply is available to the air handler and the appliance isolator installed

3 Check the correct fuel gas supply is available to the air handler and local isolation valve and union installed Check that new gas pipe work has been correctly purged and pressure tested and that the isolation valve is in the OFF position

4 Check the air handler gas control system and burner connections for pressure soundness as detailed in Appendix 1 of this manual

5 Complete the first section of the Service Check Sheet supplied at the back of this manual (Appendix 3)

6 Close the air handler access door

7 Close and lock the main air handler control panel

8 Switch the main panel isolator to position 1 Check the POWER ON light illuminates

9 Check and set the timed ONOFF periods in the lAC Controller located on the remote panel Ensure that the unit is set to be on during testing Refer to Appendix 4 for the lAC setting procedure

10 Close and lock the remote panel

11 Switch the SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch on the remote station to SUMMER to start the air fan Return the switch to the OFF position and check for correct rotation of the fan as the fan slows and stops

The fan rotation can be observed through the fan section access door or through the air handler access door Only do this during the fan run-down period Ensure the door is securely fastened after completion

Rotation arrows are fitted on the end of the air handler and inside the air handler above the interior bearing support If the rotation is incorrect two phases should be interchanged as dictated by the Engineer responsible for the site electrical system

12 Check the air pressure drop across the burner whilst the fan is operating with a water column pressure gauge connected to the two pressure test points on the air pressure switch (DPS) This pressure should be between 14 and 16 rnbar

If the air differential pressure measured above is not within the operating range check inlet and outlet ductwork as appropriate and any filters fitted If the pressure differential is still not within limits isolate the air handler and report to RS STOKVIS Ltd before proceeding

13 Check the operation and setting of the Low Air Pressure Switch by injecting a controlled signal into the switch Check the break point on the switch is 1 mbar (falling)

Note The switch is set and sealed before fitting The 1 mbar switch point may not coincide with the 1 mbar scale reading on the switch

If on checking the switch is not operating correctly do not tamper with it return it to RS STOKVIS Ltd for replacement

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 20

4 COMMISSIONING 3000S

42 DRY RUN

With all the manual gas isolation valves still in the OFF position switch the SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch to WINTER

43 START UP

1 Attach a manometer to pressure test point F and the low pressure test point on the air pressure switch (DPS)

2 Open the main gas supply valve (MV1) and the pilot burner isolation valve (PV3) Leave the main burner isolation valve (MV6) closed Reset the air handler by pressing the push-button marked RESET on either the main panel or remote station The air handler pilot will light automatically (after the automatic damper start check and combustion air pre-purge) and then LOCKOUT after the main gas shut-off valves are addressed

During the short period that the pilot is in operation check the pilot gas pressure on the manometer It should be 10 mbar and the pilot flame approximately 100 - 150mm in length covering the first three or four holes of the mixing plate and have a steady blue colour when viewed through the sight glass on the access side of the air handler Adjust as necessary - refer to Section 51 this manual Check the flame signal - refer to Section 431

3 Open the main burner isolation valve (MV6) RESET the air handler which should now light to main burner stage When alight close the main burner isolation valve to shut down the gas flow to the burner Check that the unit goes to LOCKOUT

4 Reset the air handler and drive the burner to low fire by adjusting the temperature controller set point as described in Appendix 4 of this manual Check the flame is continuous across the width of the burner and has a flame length of approx 50 - 65mm from the burner rail when viewed through the sight glass on the access side of the air handler Check the burner pressure across pressure test point D and the downstream (low) pressure test point on the air pressure switch ie on the rear of the pressure switch This pressure is specifled in Section 1 of this manual Adjust as necessary-refer to Section 53 of this manual Check the flame signal - refer to Section 431

Where possible check the actual gas flow rate by meter reading with all other appliances turned off

5 Drive the burner to high fire by adjusting the temperature controller set point and high limit to 55degC as described in Appendix 4 of this manual Check the flame is continuous across the burner rail and has a flame length of approximately 250 - 350mm from the burner rail Check the burner pressure across pressure test point D and the downstream (low) pressure test point on the air pressure switch This pressure is specified in Section 1 of this manual Adjust as necessary - refer to Section 52 of this manual Check the maximum air handler discharge temperature Check the flame signal shyrefer to Section 431

Where possible check the actual gas flow rate by meter reading with all other appliances turned off

6 Check the operation of the overheat limit control by adjusting the temperature controller set point and high limit to 65degC as described in Appendix 4 of this manual Monitor the discharge temperature on the temperature controller Check that the overheat control operates as the set temperature is passed Check that the control must be manually reset by pressing the green reset button on the front of the switch Return the temperature controller to its original settings

In the event that the ambient temperature is too low for this simple procedure to work the instrument will have to be bench tested using a Temperature 8ath Remove and replace the control as Section 84 of this manual for bench-testing

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 21

4 COMMISSIONING 3000S

43 1 FLAME SIGNAL CHECK

1 The ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler is fitted with a Klippon SAKT1 Test Terminal which can be used to measure the flame scanning signal Refer to the Electrical Schematic and connect a 0-1 mA ammeter to the two test points with standard 23 mm test plugs with the positive lead on the detector side Disconnect the terminal link to obtain the signal reading A minimum signal of 70 microamps is required typical signals are in the 250-400 microamp range on both pilot and main flame After completion replace the terminal link and remove the test jacks

2 Drive the burner to high fire as previously described Measure the carbon dioxide content of the discharge air stream This figure must not exceed 2800 ppm If the discharge exceeds this limit isolate the air handler and report to RS STOKVIS Ltd before proceeding

Stop and start the air handler a few times to check for reliability using the Operating Instructions (Section 6)

432 HANDOVER

Complete the air handler Service Check Sheet supplied at the back of this manual The self-copy sheet must be returned to STOKVIS for checking

Instruct the User in efficient use and care of the unit start-up and shutdown (including emergency shutdown) and recommended service interval Emphasise the need to keep the air handler clear of stored items and extraneous material and to maintain the recirculation and fresh air paths to the air handler inlets Hand all instructions as applicable to the UserOwner for safekeeping

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 22

5 ADJUSTMENTS 3000S

If adjustments to the air handler settings are required they should be made by a RS STOKVIS Ltd approved engineer

The normal value for all control settings is specified in Section 1 of this manual

51 PILOT ADJUSTMENT

The pilot gas pressure and flame length may be adjusted by altering the discharge pressure of the pilot governor Screwing the adjusting screw clockwise (located under the top cap) increases the discharge pressure and the flame length anti-clockwise decreases the pressure and the flame length

52 BURNER HIGH FIRE PRESSURE ADJUSTMENT

At high fire alter the spring compression on the main burner governor (MV2) by removing the cap and adjust the spring compression plate clockwise to increase the burner pressure anti-clockwise to decrease burner pressure If the pressure does not increase on adjusting the spring the supply is inadequate

Note On small air handlers fitted with a mUlti-functional control the pressure adjusting screw is located under a swing cap on the first block valve

53 BURNER LOW FIRE ADJUSTMENT

The main burner low fire is adjusted on the flow control valve MV5 (Process amp Instrumentation Diagram)

Remove the top cover of the valve and insert a Terminal Screwdriver in the adjusting screw of the TOP cam marked NI

Drive the burner to low fire by adjusting the temperature controller set-point and high limit to 05degC as described in Appendix 4 of this manual

Turn the Terminal Screwdriver clockwise to decrease the low fire gas flow anti-clockwise to increase the flow

Check the heat input and flame signal at the new position are satisfactory and return the tenlperature controller to its normal settings

Replace the control valve cover

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 23

5 ADJUSTMENTS 3000S

54 SUMMERIOFFIWINTER SWITCH

In the SUMMER position this switch provides ventilation only and is independent of the programmed ON and OFF periods This position is manually selected and must be manually de-selected Whenever the switch is in this position the fan is operating

In the OFF position the air handler is shutdown and will not operate This overrides any frost protection fitted It is suitable for air handler shutdown for short periods such as holidays The programme memory is unaffected by this switch and assumes control of the air handler when the switch is returned to the WINTER position

In the WINTER position the air handler operates off the programme memory to provide heating

55 RESET BUTTON

Visual indication of air handler lockout is provided In the event of lockout occurring the air handler can be reset by depressing the RESET button This parallels the RESET button on the air handler main control panel If after 4 attempts to reset the air handler the lockout indicator still illuminates then a Service Engineer should be called to investigate the problem

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 24

6 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 3000S

61 AIR HANDLER START-UP

1 Open all manual gas valves both on the appliance and on the supply to the appliance Switch on the Electric Supply to the appliance

2 On the main air handler panel

Switch the panel isolator to the 1 position

Check POWER ON light

3 On the remote control station

For Heating Switch the SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch to WINTER

The air handler will now start automatically in response to the time settings

In the event of LOCKOUT

Press the RESET button and the cycle of operations will be repeated If the air handler goes to LOCKOUT four times in succession call for a Service Engineer

For Unheated Ventilation Switch the SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch to SUMMER

Note This prevents the burner firing giving a controlled supply of ventilation air to the heated space as long as the switch is in this position The air handler will now start automatically in response to the timeclock demand To turn the fan off return the switch to the centre OFF position

In the event of LOCKOUT

Press the RESET button and the cycle of operations will be repeated If the air handler goes to LOCKOUT four times in succession call for a Service Engineer

62 AIR HANDLER SHUTDOWN

621 SHUTDOWN FOR SHORT PERIODS

Switch the SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch on the remote station to OFF

622 SHUTDOWN FOR PROLONGED PERIODS

Switch the main panel isolator to the 0 position and close all manual gas valves both on and leading to the appliance

Note Manual gas valves should only be operated when the appliance is to be shut off for either Servicing or for a prolonged shutdown

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 25

30005 6 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

63 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS

631 SITE CLEARANCE ADJACENT TO AIR HANDLER

Attention should be paid to keeping the area around the air handler tidy No rubbish should be allowed to accumulate in the vicinity of the air handler and storage of goods etc should not be permitted within two metres of the air handler Failure to comply could result in reduced airflow to the air handler causing inefficient running and potential overheat cond ition

632 AIR SUPPLY TO AIR HANDLER

Air vents and grilles supplying air to the air handler should never be blocked and should be checked periodically to ensure they are clear

633 AIR FILTERS

Similarly attention should be paid to cleaning or replacing the filters to the air handler if fitted Your installer should advise you on the frequency with which this would be required to be completed

634 SERVICE

For continued safe and efficient operation of this air air handler it is important that servicing of the air handler should be completed at regular intervals by a competent person in accordance with Section 82 of this manual Users are advised to enter into a Service Agreement with RS STOKVIS Ltd

635 SPARE PARTS

It is suggested that a complete set of spare parts essential to the running of the air handler and recommended by the installer are kept by the user on the premises where the air handler is installed This is particularly important where the air handler forms an essential part of any process plant and its being out of operation may cause problems by for example frost damage or condensation by super-cooling

A list of Recommended Spares will be found in Section 9 of this manual

636 GAS LEAKS

If a smell of gas is detected around the area of the appliance Switch off all manual gas valves and contact your service engineer or the local gas undertaking

NEVER

LOOK FOR GAS LEAKS WITH A LIGHTED MATCH OR NAKED

FLAME

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 26

7 FAULT FINDING 30008

The main control panel incorporates two lights to help in fault finding

POWER ON

LOCKOUT

The remote station also has three lights

AIR FAN ON

BURNER ON

LOCKOUT

This section gives the possible causes of failure associated with each check light The electrical schematic diagram in this manual and the wiring diagram shipped in the main air handler panel should be used in conjunction with the notes below Additionally Service Engineers should familiarise themselves with the detailed Start Sequence given in Appendix 2 of this manual

The notes are given for each light before consulting the notes check for bulb failure

71 POWER ON LIGHT IS UNLIT

Check

1 Main control panel isolator is in the 1 position

2 Main Panel 6A MCB has not tripped if a trip has occurred the switch will be at the OFF position Reset and test system as required

3 Also check if the mains electrical supply is isolated If so FIND OUT WHY before taking any action

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 27

7 FAULT FINDING 30005

72 AIR FAN ON LIGHT IS UNLIT

Check

1 SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch is not in Position OFF

2 Timeperiod is not set to off

3 Air handler is not at LOCKOUT

4 Recheck both AIR FAN ON and LOCKOUT bulbs

Two fault indications are possible

1 THE FAN IS NOT OPERATING

If the fan should have started but is not operating

Check 1 Overload for tripped conditions Reset the overload and monitor the next start-up

2 Motor Fuses

3 Relays 1 2 amp3 for failure

laClor CC1 for failure

5 Air Pressure Switch (DPS) is failed in the N 0 Position

Replace the faulty component as described in Section 8

2 THE FAN IS OPERATING

This indicates that the air pressure switch (DPS) has failed to change over

Measure the profile plate differential pressure as described in Section 4113 If the pressure is correct the air pressure switch is faulty Check the switch as in 4114 If the pressure is not correct

Check 1 Correct fan belt tension

2 Correct fan rotation

3 The air handler air inlets and discharge are not blocked

4 Correct fitting on filters

5 The air differential pressure switch impulse lines are not blocked or leaking

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 28

7 FAULT FINDING 30008

73 LOCKOUT LIGHT IS ILLUMINATED

This light indicates a failure in the burner ignition and flame supervision system

RESET the unit and follow the progress of the start sequence The full cycle may take two minutes

1

------t

2 LOCKOUT after 35-40 seconds indicates an ignition failure RESET the system and observe the pilot and ignition spark during the start-up attempt

I-- shy

3 Observe the spark This should be strong and highly visible If not remove and clean the spark plug as Section 82 Check that the spark plug gap is correctly set at 15 mm

-- shy

4 Check the pilot flame If the pilot flame ignites and the unit goes to LOCKOUT the scanning system is at fault Remove and clean the detector as Section 82 Check the flame signal as in Section 431

5 If the pilot does not light the gas supply system is faulty Check the pilot system for restriction and the pilot valve operation

6 If the pilot lights and the unit goes to LOCKOUT after the main gas valves are addressed either the flow control valve is blocked or one of the main gas block valves has failed Fit a manometer on the pressure test point on the outlet flange of the multishyfunctional control and observe if the pressure rises when the main gas valves are addressed No pressure rise will indicate failure of the main gas valves

74 AIR FAN ON LIGHT ILLUMINATED

If the burner does not start check

1 SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch is in WINTER position

2 Overheat Limit Control

These interlocks prevent the burner management system starting

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 29

8 SERVICING 3000S

IMPORTANT Servicing and maintenance should be only carried out by a RS STOKVIS Ltd approved engineer

Only use replacement parts provided by the appliance manufacturer

Check that the air openings for combustion and for ventilation of any plant roon or compartment are clear

81 ISOLATION

811 FUEL GAS ISOLATION

The fuel gas to the ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler should be isolated and locked off at the manual ball valve mounted at the start of the fuel gas line Additionally before entering or servicing the air handler the burner manual isolation valve and pilot line isolation valve should be closed

812 ELECTRICAL ISOLATION

All electric power to the air handler and the remote control station is switched through the local isolator This isolator is fitted with a lock facility to permit it to be locked in the OFF position

Additionally isolate the power at the Wall Isolator

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 30

8 SERVICING 30005

82 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE

The air handler should be routinely serviced at the start of each heating season Isolate the air handler as above before servicing Details of access to individual components are given in Section 84 of this manual

1 Remove and clean spark igniter Check that the gap is correctly set at 25 mm Replace every two years

2 Clean the flame detector lens to ensure freedom from dirt and moisture If the cell shows any sign of cracks it should be replaced Routinely replace the cell every two years or after 10000 hours of operation which ever comes first

3 Inspect the entire air handler paint system for general damage Repair as necessary

4 Every two years brush the burner plates and clear the burner holes carefully with a Size 18mm drill for NP II and 20mm drill for NP I

WARNING THE BURNER HOLES MUST NOT BE ENLARGED

5 Inspect and lubricate all damper linkages to ensure freedom of operation Wipe off all excess lubricants to prevent dirt build up on linkage parts

6 Check the fan belt for cracks and splits Check tension The correct tension gives 16mm deflection per metre of span when the belt is centrally loaded with a force of 27N Adjust as necessary

7 Grease both the fan shaft bearings with Mobiith AW2 grease or similar

NEVER use high temperature grease

NEVER mix two different greases within the bearing always flush existing grease out

Note Removing the cover plate on the end of the air handler gains access to the outboard fan bearing

Light to Slow to 0 120 2 to 6 months Clean Dry

Medium Medium 120 200 1 to 2 months

Moderate to Light to Slow to 0 120 1 to 4 weeks Dry

Dirty Medium Medium 120 200 1 to 7 days

Extreme Dirt Dry Light to Slow to 0 200 Daily Flushing out

Medium Medium Dirt

83 ANNUAL SERVICE CHECKS

After Servicing test fire the air handler following the Commissioning Procedure detailed in Section 4 of this manual to ensure correct operation generally Special attention must be paid to the damper system and related controls and interlocks

Additionally check that the fresh air and recirculation air entry path to the air handler has been kept clear and instruct the User of the need for this as necessary

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 31

8 SERVICING 3000S

84 REMOVAL PROCEDURE FOR REPLACEABLE COMPONENTS

IMPORTANT

Turn off the gas at the appliance service valve and the electricity at the main panel and wall isolator before proceeding

841 BURNER

The burner is located inside the air handler casing and is mounted on two brackets from the support straps To remove the burner isolate the air handler as in 81 and undo the union on the fuel gas line adjacent to the burner isolation valve (MV6) and unscrew the main and pilot gas feed pipes from the burner rail Access to the rear of the burner assembly is made by removing the partition plate below the burner separating the fresh air inlet to the burner from the return air inlet compartment This is held in place by screws which engage in captive nuts on the top side of the partition Remove the Flame Detector and pull off the ignition plug cap Disconnect the burner support brackets and remove the burner The burner will easily pass through the access hatch for further strip down Replace in the reverse order soundness test the gas pipework check the burner operation and duty as described in the commissioning section of this manual

842 FLAME DETECTOR

This is a 240 Volt instrument

The flame detector is mounted on the end of the burner rail inside the air handler casing To remove the detector isolate the panel electric supply and lock off Push the scanner towards the burner and rotate to release the bayonet fixing and lift the detector from its mount Remove the two screws holding the detector cover and disconnect the supply leads noting the polarity of the connections

Replace the flame detector in the reverse order ensuring correct polarity of connections Ensure the access panel is securely closed and the retaining nuts are tightened down Check operation by inserting a test meter in the points provided in the main control panel and reading the flame signals during start up to full rate burner operation (See 431) Operate the appliance over six starts for reliability of operation including tum off of start and main gas valves to check for lockout operation

843 IGNITER SPARK PLUG

This is a high tension spark plug

The igniter spark plug is mounted on the end of the burner rail inside the air handler casing To remove the spark plug isolate the air handler as above Enter the service access door Access to the spark plug is made through the profile plate To remove the spark plug pull off the high tension lead and unscrew the plug with a plug spanner

When replacing the spark plug check the plug gap is set at 15mm Check ignition reliability over six start ups

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 32

8 SERVICING 3000S

844 IGNITER SPARK TRANSFORMER

This is a 240 Volt instrument

The ignition transformer is located in a plastic box mounted on the air handler casing adjacent to the main control panel To remove the transformer isolate the air handler as above and unscrew the four retaining screws holding the box lid in place and remove the lid Disconnect the supply cable at the terminal strip and undo the transformer retaining screws The transformer may then be unscrewed from the High Tension cable leading to the spark plug

Replacement is a simple reversal of this procedure

Check ignition reliability over six start ups

845 COMBUSTION AIR PRESSURE SWITCH (DPS)

Note The switch is set and sealed and should be replaced if not operating correctly

This switch is a 240 Volt instrument

The air switch is mounted directly on the air handler casing and can be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove the switch isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the supply cable Break the downstream pipe compression fitting and unscrew the switch housing from its locating fitting Reverse the procedure to replace after ensuring switch setting is as specified in Section 13 of this manual Operate the air handler to ensure reliability of operation over six start ups

846 AIR HANDLER OVERHEAT LIMIT CONTROL

This is a 240 Volt instrument

The overheat limit control can be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove the control isolate the air handler as above and lock off Remove the switch cover Disconnect the supply cable and unscrew the control housing from its locating fitting Reverse the procedure to replace check the switch is set to 50degC Test the switch operation as described in Section 43 over at least three operations

847 AIR FAN AND MOTOR

The air fan motor is a 415 Volt 3 phase motor

The motor and slide rails are easily accessible inside the air handler casing If it is necessary to remove the motor isolate the air handler as above Slacken the fan-belt tension and remove the drive belts Pull the motor away from the air handler casing to make access to the motor terminal box and disconnect the supply cable The motor may now be removed from the unit Following replacement the air handler must be fully re-commissioned as in Section 4

It is unlikely that the air fan will need replacing or servicing If required a full procedure should be obtained from RS STOKVIS Ltd

Replacement must be followed by full re-commissioning as in Section 4

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 33

8 SERVICING 3000S

848 FUEL GAS MULTI-FUNCTIONAL CONTROL - SMALL UNITS

This is a 240 Volt instrument

The fuel gas multi-functional control can be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove the unit isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the Hirschman electric termination Unbolt the control from its flanges and remove

When replacing care must be taken to ensure the flange 0 rings are undamaged and in the correct location Following replacement the air handler must be fully reshycommissioned as in Section 4 including tests for soundness prior to start-up

849 GOVERNOR AND BLOCK VALVES

The block valves are 240 Volt instruments

All these items may be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove any item isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the electric termination to the two block valves the pilot block valve and the flow control block valve Break the two pipe unions and remove the fuel gas line complete for further strip-down

8410 FUEL GAS FLOW CONTROL VALVE

This is a 24 Volt instrument

The fuel gas How control valve can be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove the valve isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the supply cables to the control valve

On small air handlers fitted with a multi-functional control support the multi-functional control and unbolt its discharge flange Break the union downstream of the burner isolation valve and remove the section of line containing the flow control valve for further strip-down

On large air handlers fitted with separate block valves it will be necessary to remove the fuel gas line complete as Section 8410 above

Following replacement re-commission the air handler

Note If the fresh air damper is not in the full open position the heat input must not exceed the maximum heat input at recirculation condition specified in the technical data section of this manual

8411 PILOT GAS GOVERNOR AND BLOCK VALVE

The block valve is a 240 Volt instrument

Both items may be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove either item isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the electric terrriination to the solenoid valve Undo the upstream pipe union and the compression fitting downstream of the manual block valve (PV3) Remove the pilot gas line complete for further strip down

Replace broken or distorted connections and retest for soundness Ensure the pilot gas pressure is correct and the flame is sensing an output Ensure reliability over six start-ups

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 34

8 SERVICING 3000S

8412 BELT TENSIONING PROCEDURE

The setting tensions are designed to cover a wide range of drives A precise setting force for individual applications can be calculated as detailed

SETTING FORCES

Belt Section

Setting Force To Deflect Belt 16mm per Metre Of Span

Small Pulley Diameter (mm)

Basic Setting Forces Newtons (N) Kilograms (kgf)

125 x Setting Forces Newtons (N) Kilograms (kgf)

SPZ

56 to 71 16 16 20 20 75 to 90 18 18 22 22

95 to 125 20 20 25 25 Over 125 22 22 28 28

SPA

80 to 100 22 22 28 28 106 to 140 30 30 38 38 150 to 200 36 37 45 46 Over 200 40 40 50 51

SPB

112 to 160 40 40 50 51 170 to 224 50 51 62 63 236 to 355 62 63 77 79 Over 355 65 66 81 83

SPC 224 to 250 70 71 87 89 265 to 355 92 94 115 120 Over 375 115 120 144 150

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 35

8 SERVICING 3000S

BELT TENSIONING USING FENNER BELT TENSION INDICATOR

Calculate the deflection in mm on a basis of 16mm per metre of centre distance Centre Distance (m) x 16 =Deflection (mm)

Set lower marker ring at the deflection distance required in mm on the lower scale

Set upper ring against to bottom edge of the top tube

Place the belt tension indicator on top of the belt at the centre of span and apply a force at right angles to the belt defecting it to the point where the lower marker ring is level with the top of the adjacent belt

Read off the force value indicated by the top edge of the upper marker ring

Compare this force to the kgf value shown in the table above

If a Fenner Belt Tension Indicator is not available a spring balance and rule will be suffice

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 36

8 SERVICING 30005

85 MAIN PANEL CONTROLS

All panel controls are readily accessible and may be easily exchanged for replacement components in the event of failure Ensure any replacement item is of the same make and type as the original

851 LANDIS amp GYR LFL 1335 AUTOMATIC SEQUENCE CONTROLLER

The Landis amp Gyr Automatic Sequence Controller is a plug-in unit locating on a pre-wired chassis To remove the controller undo the two retaining screws at the top left and lower right corners and pull the module off the chassis

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

852 CONTROLS CIRCUIT (24 VOLT) TRANSFORMER

The Controls Circuit Transformer is fixed to the panel back plate by tapped screws To remove the transformer undo the wiring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel Undo the two retaining screws and remove the unit complete

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

853 CONTROL RELAYS R1 R2 amp R3

The Control Relays are DIN Rail mounted To remove a relay undo the wIring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel Release the DIN rail retaining clip under the relay with a screwdriver and remove the relay

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

854 6A MCB

The 6A MCB is DIN Rail mounted To remove the MCB undo the wiring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel Release the DIN rail retaining clip under the MCB with a screwdriver and remove the MCB

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

855 THERMAL OVERLOAD

The thermal overload is attached to the underside of the main contactor To remove the overload undo the wiring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel and that the overload setting is as specified in Section 13 of this manual Unscrew the three connections to the contactor and remove the overload

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 37

8 SERVICING 3000S

856 MAIN CONTACTOR

The Main Contactor is DIN Rail mounted To remove the contactor remove the thermal overload as 855 above and then undo the wiring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel Release the DIN rail retaining clip under the contactor with a screwdriver and remove the contactor

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

857 MOTOR FUSE

To replace a motor fuse pull the fuse carrier off the fuse holder base The fuse is attached to the fuse carrier by two screws Unscrew remove and replace

86 REMOTE CONTROL STATION

The remote control station contains some serviceable parts although these items should only be fitted by an approved RS STOKVIS Ltd Engineer

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 38

9 RECOMMENDED SPARES 3000S

For two years operation it is recommended that the following items should be held in stock

ITEM DESCRIPTION PART NO QUANTITY i

1 INDICATOR BULBS W1121 1 PACK

2 SPARK PLUG 023739 1 I

3 UVDETECTOR QRA10C 1 I

4 ROOM SENSOR DRT2453 1

5 DUCT SENSOR DDT1701 1

All replacement parts can be obtained from RS STOKVIS Ltd by quoting the air handler serial number the part number and description

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 39

APPENDIX 1 30005

SOUNDNESS TESTING THE FUEL GAS PIPEWORK

This procedure should only be carried out by personnel familiar with the ECONO-AIR 3000S Series Air handler

The pressure test points and all valves are identified on the Process and Instrumentation Diagram for the air handler included in Section 1 of this n1anual

Isolate the air handler electric supply at the main control panel and lock off Close the manual isolation valves MV1 MV6 and PV3 Ensure the supply pressure is available on the upstream side of MV1

A11 TESTING THE UPSTREAM PIPEWORKAND BURNER CONTROLS 1 Connect a 60 mbar manometer to the pressure test nipple A Monitor the

pressure for two minutes Any rise in pressure indicates that valve MV1 is leaking and must be replaced Remove pressure test points Band F

2 Open MV1 to pressurise the pipework on both the main gas and pilot line to the first block valve

3 Close MV1 Allow one minute for the temperature to stabilise and then test the system for 2 minutes and watch for a drop in the pipework pressure If the pressure falls open valve MV1 and test the pipework connections and valves from MV1 to MV3 and MV1 to PV2 for leaks with a proprietary leak detector fluid or spray Turn off MV1 seal any leaks and re-test

4 If no extemalleaks are found either the pilot block valve PV1 or either the first main gas block valve MV3 is letting by

5 To test this seal pressure test point A and fit a manometer to pressure test point B Leave for two minutes with MV1 open A rise in pressure on the manometer confirms a leak on the block valve MV3 Turn off MV1 exchange the valve and re-test from point 2 above

6 Repeat this procedure for the pilot block valve Seal test point B and fit a manometer to pressure test point F Leave for two minutes with MV1 open A rise in pressure on the manometer confirms a leak on the pilot block valve PV2 Turn off MV1 exchange the valve and re-test from point 1 above Seal test point F

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 40

APPENDIX 1 30005

A12 TESTING THE DOWNSTREAM BURNER VALVE 1 Close MV1 and connect pressure test points A and 8 with flexible 6 mm bore

tubing teed into the manometer Remove pressure test point C Open MV1 to pressurise the downstream block valve MV4

2 Close MV1 and leave for one minute for the temperature to stabilise Monitor the pressure for 2 minutes If the pressure falls open valve MV1 and leak test the line between the two block valves MV3 and MV4 with a proprietary leak detector Turn off MV1 seal any leaks and re-test Note Smaller air handlers in the 3000S Series are fitted with multi-functional valves combining the pressure regulator and two block valves in one component The above procedure still applies but if a leak is found on either block valve the whole control should be replaced If no external leaks are found the downstream block valve is letting by

3 To confirm this close MV1 remove the manometer and refit to pressure test point C Connect pressure test points A and 8 with flexible 6mm bore tubing Open MV1 and allow one minute for the temperature to stabilise Monitor the pressure for a further 2 minutes with MV1 still open A rise in pressure confirms that the second block valve MV4 is letting by Turn off MV1 Replace the valve and re-test from 2 above

A13 TESTING THE DOWNSTREAM BURNER PIPEWORK 1 Close MV1 and connect pressure test points A and D with flexible 6 mm bore

tubing teed into the manometer Open MV1 to pressurise the downstream pilot pipework

2 Close MV1 and leave for one minute for the temperature to stabilise Monitor the pressure for 2 minutes If the pressure falls open valve MV1 and leak test the line between the downstream block valve MV4 and the manual block MV6 with a proprietary leak detector fluid or spray If no external leaks are found the manual block valve MV6 is letting by Turn off MV1 seal any leakages and reshytest from 2 above

A14 TESTING THE DOWNSTREAM PILOT PIPEWORK 1 Close MV1 and connect pressure test points A and F with flexible 6mm bore

tubing teed into the manometer Open MV1 to pressurise the downstream pilot pipework

2 Close MV1 and leave for one rninute for the temperature to stabilise Monitor the pressure for 2 minutes If the pressure falls open valve MV1 and leak test the line between the downstream block valve PV2 and the manual block PV3 with a proprietary leak detector fluid or spray If no external leaks are found the manual block valve PV3 is letting by Turn off MV1 seal any leakages and reshytest from 2 above

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 41

APPENDIX 1 30005

A15 TESTING THE BURNER CONNECTIONS 1 Remove the burner access panel as described in Section 84 of this manual

Remove the burner spark igniter Slacken the two retaining bolts holding the burner to the burner support straps and unbolt the burner supply endplate from the burner casting and mixing plates

2 Connect pressure test points A and 0 with flexible 6mm bore tubing teed into the manometer Open MV1 and MV6 to pressurise the burner pipework Leak test the main gas burner pipework and connections with proprietary leak detector fluid Turn off MV6 Seal any leakages and re-test

3 Connect pressure test points A and F with flexible 6 mm bore tubing teed into the manometer Open MV1 and PV3 to pressurise the pilot burner pipework Leak test the pilot gas burner pipework and connections with proprietary leak detector fluid Turn off PV3 Seal any leakages and re-test

4 Turn off MV1

5 Replace the spark igniter and profile division plate

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 42

APPENDIX 2 30005

START SEQUENCE

The burner start sequence is controlled by the Landis and Gyr burner management unit The timings are pre-set and comply with 885885 This unit must NOT be tampered with

A brief description of the start-up sequence isshy

The unit checks

1 The NO FLAME signal on the UV flame scanner

Note If the scanner detects a flame at any time other than in the correct operating sequence the flame programmer initiates a lockout

2 The operation of the combustion air proving switch in the NO AIR position

3 The air handler discharge high temperature switch

If the checks are completed the unit starts the combustion air fan and then checks the combustion airflow

Once the airflow is proven the unit checks that the damper control circuit is functioning correctly After the damper microswitch is made to prove the fresh air damper is fully open the sequence allows 30 seconds for the combustion air to purge any combustible gas from the air handler

After completion of the purge the spark ignition system is energised the pilot valve opened and the spark terminated If the pilot flame is not proven by the UV scanner the system will initiate a LOCKOUT

If the flame is proven the main gas valves are opened the pilot extinguished and the main burner flame proven

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 43

i

APPENDIX 2 30008

The following flow chart shows the complete start sequence including the lighting of the various indicating lamps

MANUAL STATUS LIGHT POWER ON

POWER ON

I INITIATE START BY TIME

SETTING ON CONTROLLER

I CHECK NO FLAME

VISIBLE

PROVEj FAIL LOCKOUT

I CHECK RELAY R4 NC

POSITION

PROVE FAIL NO START

I CHECK AIR PRESSURE SWITCH NC POSITION

PROVE FAIL NO START

I CHECK RELAY R1 NC

POSITION

PROVE j

FAIL NO START

I START COMBUSTION

AIR BLOWER

I CHECK AIR PRESSURE SWITCH NO POSITION

PROVE I

FAIL NO START

I STATUS LIGHT FAN ON

I ENERGISE RELAY R1

I

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 44

I

I

APPENDIX 2 30008

I CHECK OVERHEAT LIMIT

CONTROL R5

PROVE I

FAIL I I

CHECK 541412 LOOP CLOSED ON

LANDIS ampGYR CIRCUIT

PROVE I

FAIL I I

COMBUSTION AIR PURGE PERIOD

30 SECONDS

I

NO START

NO START

CANCEL NO FLAME CHECK CIRCUIT

I

ENERGISE SPARK

I TIMED PERIOD 25 SECONDS

I ENERGISE PILOT GAS

VALVE

I TIMED PERIOD 25 SECONDS

I TERMINATE SPARK

I INTERROGATE UV FLAME SCANNER

PROVE I

FAIL I I

TIMED PERIOD 10 SECONDS

I

LOCKOUT

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 45

I

I

APPENDIX 2 3000S

I ENERGISE MAIN GAS

VALVES

I

STATUS LIGHT BURNER ON

I TIMED PERIOD

5 SECONDS

I DE-ENERGISE PILOT

GAS VALVES

CONTINUOUS FROM PILOT

I INTERROGATE UV FLAME SCANNER

PROVE I

FAIL I I

LOCKOUT I

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 46

APPENDIX 3 30005

Please see copy of Standard Service Sheet

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 47

APPENDIX 4 30005

A41 TIME OUT SCREEN

This is the standard screen displayed when the touch screen is not in use The back light is off to save energy_ To access the STATUS screen touch the ENTER key and the following screen is displayed

[]][I][]rn[IJOO[][IJOO[] EJ~E11 I[]I ~ middot I

NOTE

The Touch Screen operates using the heat produced by the touch of a finger and therefore only LIGHT pressure is required

Excessive pressure can damage the Touch Screen

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 48

APPENDIX 4 30008

A42 STATUS SCREEN

On the typical STATUS screen the illustrated information detailed is as follows

19 36 Fan Brn

RS OS

100 Fst_~_ Lck _ _ Xst Gas~o ~ I

RS Indicates the current room temperature

OS ~( t~~ the current duct discharge temperature

Fan Indicates the current status of the fan by showing the arrow and the fan blades for ON and OFF is shown by the arrow and fan blades being removed

Brn Indicates the current status of the burner with the black flames indicating the burner to be ON and vice versa

Lck LOCKOUT - This indicates a flame failure when highlighted during normal or start-up operation

Xst EXCESS TEMPERATURE SWITCH - This indicates the unit has reached the trip limit on the over heat stat when highlighted during operation

Indicates the current position of the gas modulating valve during normal Gas

operation (0-100)

Indicates whether the Frost stat is energised and the unit is running on frost Fst

override

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 49

APPENDIX 4 30008

A43 CHANGING SETTINGS

It is possible to change the settings for the time of operation and the required temperature set points The following details the steps required

A44 ENTERING THE SECURITY CODE

From the STATUS screen touch the return key and the screen below will be displayed

Type the HIGH LEVEL security code (4321) If you make a mistake use the BACK SPACE key to delete any incorrect number(s) Touch the ENTER key when the code is correct

If the security code is incorrect the screen above will be displayed then try again If after several attempts you can not gain access please contact RS STOKVIS Ltd for further information

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 50

APPENDIX 4 30008

When the code is entered correctly the MAIN MENU is displayed as detailed below

~ STATUS SET VALUES~ ~ TIVIE CLOCK [) [) [) [) [)

The MAIN MENU screen shows the three menu items available The title for each menu item can be changed to suit the end user Please notify RS STOKVIS Ltd prior to commissioning should these parameters require special amendments

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 51

APPENDIX 4 30008

A45 CHANGING OR SETTING A TIME SCHEDULE

From the main menu screen select the TIME CLOCK page by running finger across screen symbol and touch the ENTER key the screen below will be displayed

On the following screen highlight the TS1 symbol and touch the ENTER key

The current time schedule will now be displayed as shown below The display will automatically default to the current day (1 =Monday 2 =Tuesday etc) In this case day 5 (Friday) the four schedule switching times refer to that day

IAC6BBB1BHIS1

mm0CIl bull mID 17BB 17BB 17HB

Iillleschedule

To modify a time select it by highlighting and touch the ENTER key and the following screen is displayed

To amend the appropriate onoff time as shown on the screen below The arrows to the right of the time are for altering the hours and the arrows on the left for the minutes

Once you have set the time use the ESCape key to exit back to the time schedule screen and choose another day by touching the required number Another time may now be modified as before

IAC6BBB1BHIS1

H8BH

I i eschedule

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 52

APPENDIX 4 30008

Use the ESCape key to exit back to the MAIN MENU screen

~ STATUS ~ SET VALUES

TIME CLOCK []~ [] [] [] []

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 53

APPENDIX 4 30005

A46 CHANGING SET VALUES

From the main menu screen select the SET VALUES page by highlight in the normal way and touch the ENTER key

The following screen is displayed

36 19 18III III IIIHsv Rsv Llv

To change the RSV highlight it in the normal way and touch the ENTER key and the screen below will now be shown

IAC6RRR1RR40 T I

0 19 (Y)l RSV

ROOM SET VALUE

The above screen shows the parameters that can be changed The values to the far left are the limitations of set point (OC) Change the set point by using the UP and DOWN ARROWS on the left of the screen or touch the set value itself followed by the ENTER key to select the set value and set it directly using the numeric keyboard All values can be changed in this way

Use the ESCape key twice to exit back to the MAIN MENU screen

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 54

APPENDIX 4 30005

A47 COMMISSIONING AND SERVICING BURNER CHECKS

Select the SET VALUES screen from the MAIN MENU screen and adjust the high lirrlit set point to 55degC to drive the burner to high fire

IAC6HHH1HH60 ~T I

0 19 (Y)

HSV

HIGH SET VALUE ~

Ensure the set value is returned to 36degC once the appropriate checks and adjustments as described in Section 43 of this manual have been completed Return to the SET VALUES screen and select the low limit value to adjust the low fire setting

Reduce the low limit value to OdegC to drive the gas valve to low fire and complete the appropriate checks and adjustments as described in Section 43 of this manual and ensure the set value is returned to the original value

A48 GMT ltgt BST CHANGEOVER DAYLIGHT SAVINGS

To change your unit to British Summer TimelWinter Time the following system screen must be highlighted by touching the Iamp1 button twice

By touching the clock symbol in the top left hand corner followed by the ENTER key the screen below will be displayed

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 55

APPENDIX 4 30008

188311 851193

544

By touching and highlighting in this case 18 followed by the ENTER key A small box allowing the entry of two digits will appear Enter the desired time required using the numbered keys followed by ENTER key Your unit is now set to operate on BSTBWT

Touch the ESC key three times to return back to the Status screen

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 56

STOKVIS ENERGY SYSTEMS 96R WALTON ROAD EAST MOLESEY SURREY KT8 0DL TEL 020 8783 3050 08707 707 747 FAX 020 8783 3051 08707 707 767 E-MAIL infostokvisboilerscom WEBSITE wwwstokvisboilerscom

JULY 1999

Page 17: ECONOAIR 3000S SERIES AIR HANDLING UNIT DIRECT FIREDstokvisboilers.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/EconoAir... · 2019-05-10 · ECONOAIR 3000S SERIES AIR HANDLING UNIT DIRECT FIRED

3 INSTALLATION 3000S

35 FRESH AIR INLET AND VENTILATION

351 FRESH AIR INLET

The air handler must be installed where it has a direct and unlimited supply of fresh air from outside the building Ensure that the air intake is not located near exhausts from the building or from any process exhausts such as paint booth exhausts Whenever possible protect the fresh air inlet from the prevailing wind and local wind effects from corners

The fresh air inlet should be sized for an air velocity of 3ms The inlet duct area is detailed on the General Arrangement drawing located in Section 1 of this manual

Where the fresh air inlet is made in a load bearing wall eg a brick wall guidance should be obtained from Structural Engineers on the provision of a lintel in the wall over the fresh air opening

A weather hood must be fitted when the air handler air inlet is at or within 1 m of the outside wall Additionally the weather hood should have negligible resistance to the airflow maximum 01 mbar at the design air flow rate

Do not install the ECONO-AI R 3000S Series air handler where long lengths of duct or bends of an angle greater than 30deg are necessary to lead to the air handler from the fresh air opening If ducting is unavoidable ensure that the resulting pressure drop is negligible Le less than 01 mbar for ductless air handlers and has been accounted for in the original design for ducted air handlers as detailed in the specification section of this manual Section 11

Note If the air intake is located in an area of unrestricted access warning notices preventing the blockage of the air intake by temporary stacking should be displayed adjacent to the intake

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 13

3 INSTALLATION 3000S

352 VENTI LA TION

Where the air air handler is in its own plant room or compartment this shall be ventilated with openings communicating directly with the outside air to ventilate the room

The openings shall be fitted with grilles of negligible resistance and shall be sited so that they cannot easily be blocked or flooded They shall have a total minimum free area as follows

Low Level (inlet) 320cm2 + 27cm2 per kilowatt in excess of 60kW total rated input

High Level (outlet) 160cm2 + 134cm2 per kilowatt in excess of 60kW total rated input

The free area of the grilles shall be not less than the size of the recommended minimum ventilation opening Grilles shall be designed to minimise high velocity air streams in the plant room For exposed ie free standing plant rooms ventilation openings shall be provided on at least two sides and preferably on all four sides

Where mechanical ventilation is used it shall be by mechanical inlet and either natural or mechanical extraction Systems of ventilation employing mechanical extraction and natural air inlet shall not be used

The minimum flow rates of air supplied shall be not less than 06 m3s per megawatt of rated heat input

36 AIR DISCHARGE

The air handler should be located with the air discharge into the heated space at a minimum height of 3 metres The air should not discharge directly onto any obstructions and direct discharge on to working personnel should be avoided

If the air discharge is located in an area of unrestricted access warning notices preventing the blockage of the air discharge by temporary stacking should be displayed adjacent to the discharge

Generally it is not necessary to fit distribution ducting to the discharge of the air handler If ducting is required or specified ensure that the resulting pressure drop has been accounted for in the original design specification as detailed in Section 1 of this manual

37 ASSEMBLY AND POSITIONING OF AIR HANDLER

Unless specified at the time of order air handlers will be shipped in sections Discharge heads grilles attenuators duct connecting sections filters rain-hoods etc will be supplied loose for site fitting to the air handler

Horizontal air handlers must be supported on their steel angle support base When the air handler is located check for level and adjust as necessary

Alternatively horizontal air handlers can be supplied with extensions of the support frame for suspending from overhead supports This must be specified at the time of order Do not suspend the air handler from the lifting eyes

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 14

3 INSTALLATION 3000S

38 REMOTE STATION

The ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler is supplied with a remote control station This should be mounted in a position convenient to the end user If possible it should not be mounted on an external wall or where the space temperature detector is affected by cold draughts or a local source of heat

39 VISUAL CHECK

After completion of installation re-check the air handler for signs of damage Report any instance to RS STOKVIS Ltd

310 CONNECTION OF SERVICES

The air handler requires the connection of fuel gas and electricity

3101 FUEL GAS SUPPLY

The ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler has been designed for use on Natural Gas An alternative version is available for LPG The gas type for the air handler supplied is clearly marked on the air handler data badge and on the Specification sheet in Section 1 of this manual Check the gas type is correct and that the supply pressure is within the range marked on the specification

The local gas Authority should be consulted about the adequacy of the gas service and meter supplies for existing and proposed extensions to the installation and for any requirements for boosting the gas supply_

Connect the fuel gas supply to the inlet manual valve on the air handler gas train The connection size is detailed in Section 1 of this manual A further isolation valve and union should be fitted immediately adjacent to the appliance which when the valve is closed allows the complete burner and control assembly to be disconnected for maintenance or repair

New gas pipework should be installed to British Gas Publication IGEUP2 and be purged and pressure tested in accordance with British Gas Publications IGEUP1

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 15

3 INSTALLATION 3000S

3102 ELECTRICITY SUPPLY

All external wiring shall be carried out and checked by a competent person All components shall be checked for suitability for voltage range and frequency

Means for electric isolation having a contact separation of at least 3mm in all poles must be provided adjacent to the air handler The electrical supply to the appliance shall incorporate suitable means of excess current protection

The ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler requires a 3 phase 4 wire supply which should be connected to the main control panel Check the air handler data badge for the correct electrical supply The maximum supply requirement is Specified in Section 1 of this manual Note that the 240 Volt air handler control circuit is taken from the lUI phase to Neutral Connection should be made as shown on the wiring diagram shipped inside this panel

The air handler must be earthed in accordance with BS5986 and CP1013

Check all terminal strip terminations for wires which have become loose during shipment

311 CONNECTION TO THE MAIN PANEL AND REMOTE STATION

Interconnecting wiring to the main panel and remote station should be made with a minimum specification of 075 mm2 300 Volt cable Check that no wires on the terminal strip have become loose during shipment The remote panel should be mounted at a height of approx 18m If possible it should not be mounted on an external wall or where the sensor will be affected by cold draughts or a local source of heat

Both panel and remote station must be earthed in accordance with BS5986 and CP1013

312 HEATED SPACE TEMPERATURE SENSOR

The space temperature sensor located on the remote panel should be connected with screened cable or twin low voltage signal cable run in its own separate conduit It should be mounted on the remote panel or adjacent to the outlet at a height of approx 18m If possible it should not be mounted on an external wall or where the sensor will be affected by cold draughts or a local source of heat

313 DUCT SENSOR

The duct sensor should be connected with screened cable or twin low voltage signal cable run in its own separate conduit It should be mounted in the air handler discharge as close as possible to the discharge into the heated space

314 OVERHEAT LIMIT CONTROL SENSOR

The overheat limit control sensor should be connected with twin core cable It should be mounted in the air handler discharge within 1 metre of the air handler outlet connection

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 16

3 INSTALLATION 3000S

315 TOUCH SCREEN WIRING

The touch screen located on the front of the remote station requires two separate twisted pairs of O5mrh2 screened cable run in a separate conduit If the distance between the main and remote stations is greater that 1 km please contact RS STOKVIS Ltd for advice

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 17

3 INSTALLATION 3000S

316 ALIGNMENT

3161 INSTALLATION OF DRIVE BELTS

On 80 amp 89 30008 range of air handlers it will be necessary to align the pulleys and fit the drive belts before carrying out commissioning of the unit

3162 PU LLEYS

Before assembling the drive check the pulley grooves are free from scores or sharp edges and all dimensions conform to the relevant standard

The Taper Lock bush is your starting point when it comes to assembly and installation Drive installation is a straightforward job with Taper Lock - but the stages set out on the installation leaflet provided with every Taper Lock bush should be followed closely

3163 ALIGNMENT

Good alignment of pulleys prior to belt installation is important to avoid belt flank wear The diagram below shows correct installation of pulleys

INTERNAl BEARING

MOTOR PUlLEY rAN PULLEY

MOTORMOTOR ADJUSTMENT MOUNTING BOlTSBOLTS

3164 BELTS

When the pulleys have been correctly positioned on the shafts the belts can be installed to complete the drive

The drive centre distance should be reduced prior to the installation of the belts so that they may be fitted without the use of force Under no circumstances must belts be prised into the grooves Using sharp tools to stretch the belts over the pulley rim can easily damage belts and pulley grooves

The installation allowance given in the table below is the minimum recommended reduction in centre distance for various belt section and lengths to allow for correct fitting

The take-up allowance given in the same table should be added on to the calculated centre distance to allow for belt stretch

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 18

3 INSTALLATION 3000S

3165 INSTALLATION AND TAKE UP ALLOWANCE

Belt Pitch Installation Allowance Take-Up Length (mm) SPZ SPA SPB SPC (mm)

410 to 530 5

540 to 840 10

850 to 1160 15

1170 to 1500 20

1510 to 1830 20 25

1840 to 2170 30

2180 to 2830 25 40

2840 to 3500 30 50

3520 to 4160 50 60

4170 to 5140 70

5220 to 6150 85

6180 to 7500 105

600 to 8500 125

8880 to 10170 145

10600 to 12500 175

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 19

4 COMMISSIONING 30005

This appliance must be commissioned by a RS STOKVIS Ltd approved engineer

41 PRESTART CHECKS

1 Switch the SUMMERIOFFMlINTER switch on the remote station to OFF

2 Check the correct electric supply is available to the air handler and the appliance isolator installed

3 Check the correct fuel gas supply is available to the air handler and local isolation valve and union installed Check that new gas pipe work has been correctly purged and pressure tested and that the isolation valve is in the OFF position

4 Check the air handler gas control system and burner connections for pressure soundness as detailed in Appendix 1 of this manual

5 Complete the first section of the Service Check Sheet supplied at the back of this manual (Appendix 3)

6 Close the air handler access door

7 Close and lock the main air handler control panel

8 Switch the main panel isolator to position 1 Check the POWER ON light illuminates

9 Check and set the timed ONOFF periods in the lAC Controller located on the remote panel Ensure that the unit is set to be on during testing Refer to Appendix 4 for the lAC setting procedure

10 Close and lock the remote panel

11 Switch the SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch on the remote station to SUMMER to start the air fan Return the switch to the OFF position and check for correct rotation of the fan as the fan slows and stops

The fan rotation can be observed through the fan section access door or through the air handler access door Only do this during the fan run-down period Ensure the door is securely fastened after completion

Rotation arrows are fitted on the end of the air handler and inside the air handler above the interior bearing support If the rotation is incorrect two phases should be interchanged as dictated by the Engineer responsible for the site electrical system

12 Check the air pressure drop across the burner whilst the fan is operating with a water column pressure gauge connected to the two pressure test points on the air pressure switch (DPS) This pressure should be between 14 and 16 rnbar

If the air differential pressure measured above is not within the operating range check inlet and outlet ductwork as appropriate and any filters fitted If the pressure differential is still not within limits isolate the air handler and report to RS STOKVIS Ltd before proceeding

13 Check the operation and setting of the Low Air Pressure Switch by injecting a controlled signal into the switch Check the break point on the switch is 1 mbar (falling)

Note The switch is set and sealed before fitting The 1 mbar switch point may not coincide with the 1 mbar scale reading on the switch

If on checking the switch is not operating correctly do not tamper with it return it to RS STOKVIS Ltd for replacement

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 20

4 COMMISSIONING 3000S

42 DRY RUN

With all the manual gas isolation valves still in the OFF position switch the SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch to WINTER

43 START UP

1 Attach a manometer to pressure test point F and the low pressure test point on the air pressure switch (DPS)

2 Open the main gas supply valve (MV1) and the pilot burner isolation valve (PV3) Leave the main burner isolation valve (MV6) closed Reset the air handler by pressing the push-button marked RESET on either the main panel or remote station The air handler pilot will light automatically (after the automatic damper start check and combustion air pre-purge) and then LOCKOUT after the main gas shut-off valves are addressed

During the short period that the pilot is in operation check the pilot gas pressure on the manometer It should be 10 mbar and the pilot flame approximately 100 - 150mm in length covering the first three or four holes of the mixing plate and have a steady blue colour when viewed through the sight glass on the access side of the air handler Adjust as necessary - refer to Section 51 this manual Check the flame signal - refer to Section 431

3 Open the main burner isolation valve (MV6) RESET the air handler which should now light to main burner stage When alight close the main burner isolation valve to shut down the gas flow to the burner Check that the unit goes to LOCKOUT

4 Reset the air handler and drive the burner to low fire by adjusting the temperature controller set point as described in Appendix 4 of this manual Check the flame is continuous across the width of the burner and has a flame length of approx 50 - 65mm from the burner rail when viewed through the sight glass on the access side of the air handler Check the burner pressure across pressure test point D and the downstream (low) pressure test point on the air pressure switch ie on the rear of the pressure switch This pressure is specifled in Section 1 of this manual Adjust as necessary-refer to Section 53 of this manual Check the flame signal - refer to Section 431

Where possible check the actual gas flow rate by meter reading with all other appliances turned off

5 Drive the burner to high fire by adjusting the temperature controller set point and high limit to 55degC as described in Appendix 4 of this manual Check the flame is continuous across the burner rail and has a flame length of approximately 250 - 350mm from the burner rail Check the burner pressure across pressure test point D and the downstream (low) pressure test point on the air pressure switch This pressure is specified in Section 1 of this manual Adjust as necessary - refer to Section 52 of this manual Check the maximum air handler discharge temperature Check the flame signal shyrefer to Section 431

Where possible check the actual gas flow rate by meter reading with all other appliances turned off

6 Check the operation of the overheat limit control by adjusting the temperature controller set point and high limit to 65degC as described in Appendix 4 of this manual Monitor the discharge temperature on the temperature controller Check that the overheat control operates as the set temperature is passed Check that the control must be manually reset by pressing the green reset button on the front of the switch Return the temperature controller to its original settings

In the event that the ambient temperature is too low for this simple procedure to work the instrument will have to be bench tested using a Temperature 8ath Remove and replace the control as Section 84 of this manual for bench-testing

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 21

4 COMMISSIONING 3000S

43 1 FLAME SIGNAL CHECK

1 The ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler is fitted with a Klippon SAKT1 Test Terminal which can be used to measure the flame scanning signal Refer to the Electrical Schematic and connect a 0-1 mA ammeter to the two test points with standard 23 mm test plugs with the positive lead on the detector side Disconnect the terminal link to obtain the signal reading A minimum signal of 70 microamps is required typical signals are in the 250-400 microamp range on both pilot and main flame After completion replace the terminal link and remove the test jacks

2 Drive the burner to high fire as previously described Measure the carbon dioxide content of the discharge air stream This figure must not exceed 2800 ppm If the discharge exceeds this limit isolate the air handler and report to RS STOKVIS Ltd before proceeding

Stop and start the air handler a few times to check for reliability using the Operating Instructions (Section 6)

432 HANDOVER

Complete the air handler Service Check Sheet supplied at the back of this manual The self-copy sheet must be returned to STOKVIS for checking

Instruct the User in efficient use and care of the unit start-up and shutdown (including emergency shutdown) and recommended service interval Emphasise the need to keep the air handler clear of stored items and extraneous material and to maintain the recirculation and fresh air paths to the air handler inlets Hand all instructions as applicable to the UserOwner for safekeeping

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 22

5 ADJUSTMENTS 3000S

If adjustments to the air handler settings are required they should be made by a RS STOKVIS Ltd approved engineer

The normal value for all control settings is specified in Section 1 of this manual

51 PILOT ADJUSTMENT

The pilot gas pressure and flame length may be adjusted by altering the discharge pressure of the pilot governor Screwing the adjusting screw clockwise (located under the top cap) increases the discharge pressure and the flame length anti-clockwise decreases the pressure and the flame length

52 BURNER HIGH FIRE PRESSURE ADJUSTMENT

At high fire alter the spring compression on the main burner governor (MV2) by removing the cap and adjust the spring compression plate clockwise to increase the burner pressure anti-clockwise to decrease burner pressure If the pressure does not increase on adjusting the spring the supply is inadequate

Note On small air handlers fitted with a mUlti-functional control the pressure adjusting screw is located under a swing cap on the first block valve

53 BURNER LOW FIRE ADJUSTMENT

The main burner low fire is adjusted on the flow control valve MV5 (Process amp Instrumentation Diagram)

Remove the top cover of the valve and insert a Terminal Screwdriver in the adjusting screw of the TOP cam marked NI

Drive the burner to low fire by adjusting the temperature controller set-point and high limit to 05degC as described in Appendix 4 of this manual

Turn the Terminal Screwdriver clockwise to decrease the low fire gas flow anti-clockwise to increase the flow

Check the heat input and flame signal at the new position are satisfactory and return the tenlperature controller to its normal settings

Replace the control valve cover

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 23

5 ADJUSTMENTS 3000S

54 SUMMERIOFFIWINTER SWITCH

In the SUMMER position this switch provides ventilation only and is independent of the programmed ON and OFF periods This position is manually selected and must be manually de-selected Whenever the switch is in this position the fan is operating

In the OFF position the air handler is shutdown and will not operate This overrides any frost protection fitted It is suitable for air handler shutdown for short periods such as holidays The programme memory is unaffected by this switch and assumes control of the air handler when the switch is returned to the WINTER position

In the WINTER position the air handler operates off the programme memory to provide heating

55 RESET BUTTON

Visual indication of air handler lockout is provided In the event of lockout occurring the air handler can be reset by depressing the RESET button This parallels the RESET button on the air handler main control panel If after 4 attempts to reset the air handler the lockout indicator still illuminates then a Service Engineer should be called to investigate the problem

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 24

6 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 3000S

61 AIR HANDLER START-UP

1 Open all manual gas valves both on the appliance and on the supply to the appliance Switch on the Electric Supply to the appliance

2 On the main air handler panel

Switch the panel isolator to the 1 position

Check POWER ON light

3 On the remote control station

For Heating Switch the SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch to WINTER

The air handler will now start automatically in response to the time settings

In the event of LOCKOUT

Press the RESET button and the cycle of operations will be repeated If the air handler goes to LOCKOUT four times in succession call for a Service Engineer

For Unheated Ventilation Switch the SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch to SUMMER

Note This prevents the burner firing giving a controlled supply of ventilation air to the heated space as long as the switch is in this position The air handler will now start automatically in response to the timeclock demand To turn the fan off return the switch to the centre OFF position

In the event of LOCKOUT

Press the RESET button and the cycle of operations will be repeated If the air handler goes to LOCKOUT four times in succession call for a Service Engineer

62 AIR HANDLER SHUTDOWN

621 SHUTDOWN FOR SHORT PERIODS

Switch the SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch on the remote station to OFF

622 SHUTDOWN FOR PROLONGED PERIODS

Switch the main panel isolator to the 0 position and close all manual gas valves both on and leading to the appliance

Note Manual gas valves should only be operated when the appliance is to be shut off for either Servicing or for a prolonged shutdown

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 25

30005 6 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

63 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS

631 SITE CLEARANCE ADJACENT TO AIR HANDLER

Attention should be paid to keeping the area around the air handler tidy No rubbish should be allowed to accumulate in the vicinity of the air handler and storage of goods etc should not be permitted within two metres of the air handler Failure to comply could result in reduced airflow to the air handler causing inefficient running and potential overheat cond ition

632 AIR SUPPLY TO AIR HANDLER

Air vents and grilles supplying air to the air handler should never be blocked and should be checked periodically to ensure they are clear

633 AIR FILTERS

Similarly attention should be paid to cleaning or replacing the filters to the air handler if fitted Your installer should advise you on the frequency with which this would be required to be completed

634 SERVICE

For continued safe and efficient operation of this air air handler it is important that servicing of the air handler should be completed at regular intervals by a competent person in accordance with Section 82 of this manual Users are advised to enter into a Service Agreement with RS STOKVIS Ltd

635 SPARE PARTS

It is suggested that a complete set of spare parts essential to the running of the air handler and recommended by the installer are kept by the user on the premises where the air handler is installed This is particularly important where the air handler forms an essential part of any process plant and its being out of operation may cause problems by for example frost damage or condensation by super-cooling

A list of Recommended Spares will be found in Section 9 of this manual

636 GAS LEAKS

If a smell of gas is detected around the area of the appliance Switch off all manual gas valves and contact your service engineer or the local gas undertaking

NEVER

LOOK FOR GAS LEAKS WITH A LIGHTED MATCH OR NAKED

FLAME

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 26

7 FAULT FINDING 30008

The main control panel incorporates two lights to help in fault finding

POWER ON

LOCKOUT

The remote station also has three lights

AIR FAN ON

BURNER ON

LOCKOUT

This section gives the possible causes of failure associated with each check light The electrical schematic diagram in this manual and the wiring diagram shipped in the main air handler panel should be used in conjunction with the notes below Additionally Service Engineers should familiarise themselves with the detailed Start Sequence given in Appendix 2 of this manual

The notes are given for each light before consulting the notes check for bulb failure

71 POWER ON LIGHT IS UNLIT

Check

1 Main control panel isolator is in the 1 position

2 Main Panel 6A MCB has not tripped if a trip has occurred the switch will be at the OFF position Reset and test system as required

3 Also check if the mains electrical supply is isolated If so FIND OUT WHY before taking any action

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 27

7 FAULT FINDING 30005

72 AIR FAN ON LIGHT IS UNLIT

Check

1 SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch is not in Position OFF

2 Timeperiod is not set to off

3 Air handler is not at LOCKOUT

4 Recheck both AIR FAN ON and LOCKOUT bulbs

Two fault indications are possible

1 THE FAN IS NOT OPERATING

If the fan should have started but is not operating

Check 1 Overload for tripped conditions Reset the overload and monitor the next start-up

2 Motor Fuses

3 Relays 1 2 amp3 for failure

laClor CC1 for failure

5 Air Pressure Switch (DPS) is failed in the N 0 Position

Replace the faulty component as described in Section 8

2 THE FAN IS OPERATING

This indicates that the air pressure switch (DPS) has failed to change over

Measure the profile plate differential pressure as described in Section 4113 If the pressure is correct the air pressure switch is faulty Check the switch as in 4114 If the pressure is not correct

Check 1 Correct fan belt tension

2 Correct fan rotation

3 The air handler air inlets and discharge are not blocked

4 Correct fitting on filters

5 The air differential pressure switch impulse lines are not blocked or leaking

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 28

7 FAULT FINDING 30008

73 LOCKOUT LIGHT IS ILLUMINATED

This light indicates a failure in the burner ignition and flame supervision system

RESET the unit and follow the progress of the start sequence The full cycle may take two minutes

1

------t

2 LOCKOUT after 35-40 seconds indicates an ignition failure RESET the system and observe the pilot and ignition spark during the start-up attempt

I-- shy

3 Observe the spark This should be strong and highly visible If not remove and clean the spark plug as Section 82 Check that the spark plug gap is correctly set at 15 mm

-- shy

4 Check the pilot flame If the pilot flame ignites and the unit goes to LOCKOUT the scanning system is at fault Remove and clean the detector as Section 82 Check the flame signal as in Section 431

5 If the pilot does not light the gas supply system is faulty Check the pilot system for restriction and the pilot valve operation

6 If the pilot lights and the unit goes to LOCKOUT after the main gas valves are addressed either the flow control valve is blocked or one of the main gas block valves has failed Fit a manometer on the pressure test point on the outlet flange of the multishyfunctional control and observe if the pressure rises when the main gas valves are addressed No pressure rise will indicate failure of the main gas valves

74 AIR FAN ON LIGHT ILLUMINATED

If the burner does not start check

1 SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch is in WINTER position

2 Overheat Limit Control

These interlocks prevent the burner management system starting

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 29

8 SERVICING 3000S

IMPORTANT Servicing and maintenance should be only carried out by a RS STOKVIS Ltd approved engineer

Only use replacement parts provided by the appliance manufacturer

Check that the air openings for combustion and for ventilation of any plant roon or compartment are clear

81 ISOLATION

811 FUEL GAS ISOLATION

The fuel gas to the ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler should be isolated and locked off at the manual ball valve mounted at the start of the fuel gas line Additionally before entering or servicing the air handler the burner manual isolation valve and pilot line isolation valve should be closed

812 ELECTRICAL ISOLATION

All electric power to the air handler and the remote control station is switched through the local isolator This isolator is fitted with a lock facility to permit it to be locked in the OFF position

Additionally isolate the power at the Wall Isolator

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 30

8 SERVICING 30005

82 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE

The air handler should be routinely serviced at the start of each heating season Isolate the air handler as above before servicing Details of access to individual components are given in Section 84 of this manual

1 Remove and clean spark igniter Check that the gap is correctly set at 25 mm Replace every two years

2 Clean the flame detector lens to ensure freedom from dirt and moisture If the cell shows any sign of cracks it should be replaced Routinely replace the cell every two years or after 10000 hours of operation which ever comes first

3 Inspect the entire air handler paint system for general damage Repair as necessary

4 Every two years brush the burner plates and clear the burner holes carefully with a Size 18mm drill for NP II and 20mm drill for NP I

WARNING THE BURNER HOLES MUST NOT BE ENLARGED

5 Inspect and lubricate all damper linkages to ensure freedom of operation Wipe off all excess lubricants to prevent dirt build up on linkage parts

6 Check the fan belt for cracks and splits Check tension The correct tension gives 16mm deflection per metre of span when the belt is centrally loaded with a force of 27N Adjust as necessary

7 Grease both the fan shaft bearings with Mobiith AW2 grease or similar

NEVER use high temperature grease

NEVER mix two different greases within the bearing always flush existing grease out

Note Removing the cover plate on the end of the air handler gains access to the outboard fan bearing

Light to Slow to 0 120 2 to 6 months Clean Dry

Medium Medium 120 200 1 to 2 months

Moderate to Light to Slow to 0 120 1 to 4 weeks Dry

Dirty Medium Medium 120 200 1 to 7 days

Extreme Dirt Dry Light to Slow to 0 200 Daily Flushing out

Medium Medium Dirt

83 ANNUAL SERVICE CHECKS

After Servicing test fire the air handler following the Commissioning Procedure detailed in Section 4 of this manual to ensure correct operation generally Special attention must be paid to the damper system and related controls and interlocks

Additionally check that the fresh air and recirculation air entry path to the air handler has been kept clear and instruct the User of the need for this as necessary

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 31

8 SERVICING 3000S

84 REMOVAL PROCEDURE FOR REPLACEABLE COMPONENTS

IMPORTANT

Turn off the gas at the appliance service valve and the electricity at the main panel and wall isolator before proceeding

841 BURNER

The burner is located inside the air handler casing and is mounted on two brackets from the support straps To remove the burner isolate the air handler as in 81 and undo the union on the fuel gas line adjacent to the burner isolation valve (MV6) and unscrew the main and pilot gas feed pipes from the burner rail Access to the rear of the burner assembly is made by removing the partition plate below the burner separating the fresh air inlet to the burner from the return air inlet compartment This is held in place by screws which engage in captive nuts on the top side of the partition Remove the Flame Detector and pull off the ignition plug cap Disconnect the burner support brackets and remove the burner The burner will easily pass through the access hatch for further strip down Replace in the reverse order soundness test the gas pipework check the burner operation and duty as described in the commissioning section of this manual

842 FLAME DETECTOR

This is a 240 Volt instrument

The flame detector is mounted on the end of the burner rail inside the air handler casing To remove the detector isolate the panel electric supply and lock off Push the scanner towards the burner and rotate to release the bayonet fixing and lift the detector from its mount Remove the two screws holding the detector cover and disconnect the supply leads noting the polarity of the connections

Replace the flame detector in the reverse order ensuring correct polarity of connections Ensure the access panel is securely closed and the retaining nuts are tightened down Check operation by inserting a test meter in the points provided in the main control panel and reading the flame signals during start up to full rate burner operation (See 431) Operate the appliance over six starts for reliability of operation including tum off of start and main gas valves to check for lockout operation

843 IGNITER SPARK PLUG

This is a high tension spark plug

The igniter spark plug is mounted on the end of the burner rail inside the air handler casing To remove the spark plug isolate the air handler as above Enter the service access door Access to the spark plug is made through the profile plate To remove the spark plug pull off the high tension lead and unscrew the plug with a plug spanner

When replacing the spark plug check the plug gap is set at 15mm Check ignition reliability over six start ups

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 32

8 SERVICING 3000S

844 IGNITER SPARK TRANSFORMER

This is a 240 Volt instrument

The ignition transformer is located in a plastic box mounted on the air handler casing adjacent to the main control panel To remove the transformer isolate the air handler as above and unscrew the four retaining screws holding the box lid in place and remove the lid Disconnect the supply cable at the terminal strip and undo the transformer retaining screws The transformer may then be unscrewed from the High Tension cable leading to the spark plug

Replacement is a simple reversal of this procedure

Check ignition reliability over six start ups

845 COMBUSTION AIR PRESSURE SWITCH (DPS)

Note The switch is set and sealed and should be replaced if not operating correctly

This switch is a 240 Volt instrument

The air switch is mounted directly on the air handler casing and can be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove the switch isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the supply cable Break the downstream pipe compression fitting and unscrew the switch housing from its locating fitting Reverse the procedure to replace after ensuring switch setting is as specified in Section 13 of this manual Operate the air handler to ensure reliability of operation over six start ups

846 AIR HANDLER OVERHEAT LIMIT CONTROL

This is a 240 Volt instrument

The overheat limit control can be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove the control isolate the air handler as above and lock off Remove the switch cover Disconnect the supply cable and unscrew the control housing from its locating fitting Reverse the procedure to replace check the switch is set to 50degC Test the switch operation as described in Section 43 over at least three operations

847 AIR FAN AND MOTOR

The air fan motor is a 415 Volt 3 phase motor

The motor and slide rails are easily accessible inside the air handler casing If it is necessary to remove the motor isolate the air handler as above Slacken the fan-belt tension and remove the drive belts Pull the motor away from the air handler casing to make access to the motor terminal box and disconnect the supply cable The motor may now be removed from the unit Following replacement the air handler must be fully re-commissioned as in Section 4

It is unlikely that the air fan will need replacing or servicing If required a full procedure should be obtained from RS STOKVIS Ltd

Replacement must be followed by full re-commissioning as in Section 4

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 33

8 SERVICING 3000S

848 FUEL GAS MULTI-FUNCTIONAL CONTROL - SMALL UNITS

This is a 240 Volt instrument

The fuel gas multi-functional control can be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove the unit isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the Hirschman electric termination Unbolt the control from its flanges and remove

When replacing care must be taken to ensure the flange 0 rings are undamaged and in the correct location Following replacement the air handler must be fully reshycommissioned as in Section 4 including tests for soundness prior to start-up

849 GOVERNOR AND BLOCK VALVES

The block valves are 240 Volt instruments

All these items may be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove any item isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the electric termination to the two block valves the pilot block valve and the flow control block valve Break the two pipe unions and remove the fuel gas line complete for further strip-down

8410 FUEL GAS FLOW CONTROL VALVE

This is a 24 Volt instrument

The fuel gas How control valve can be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove the valve isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the supply cables to the control valve

On small air handlers fitted with a multi-functional control support the multi-functional control and unbolt its discharge flange Break the union downstream of the burner isolation valve and remove the section of line containing the flow control valve for further strip-down

On large air handlers fitted with separate block valves it will be necessary to remove the fuel gas line complete as Section 8410 above

Following replacement re-commission the air handler

Note If the fresh air damper is not in the full open position the heat input must not exceed the maximum heat input at recirculation condition specified in the technical data section of this manual

8411 PILOT GAS GOVERNOR AND BLOCK VALVE

The block valve is a 240 Volt instrument

Both items may be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove either item isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the electric terrriination to the solenoid valve Undo the upstream pipe union and the compression fitting downstream of the manual block valve (PV3) Remove the pilot gas line complete for further strip down

Replace broken or distorted connections and retest for soundness Ensure the pilot gas pressure is correct and the flame is sensing an output Ensure reliability over six start-ups

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 34

8 SERVICING 3000S

8412 BELT TENSIONING PROCEDURE

The setting tensions are designed to cover a wide range of drives A precise setting force for individual applications can be calculated as detailed

SETTING FORCES

Belt Section

Setting Force To Deflect Belt 16mm per Metre Of Span

Small Pulley Diameter (mm)

Basic Setting Forces Newtons (N) Kilograms (kgf)

125 x Setting Forces Newtons (N) Kilograms (kgf)

SPZ

56 to 71 16 16 20 20 75 to 90 18 18 22 22

95 to 125 20 20 25 25 Over 125 22 22 28 28

SPA

80 to 100 22 22 28 28 106 to 140 30 30 38 38 150 to 200 36 37 45 46 Over 200 40 40 50 51

SPB

112 to 160 40 40 50 51 170 to 224 50 51 62 63 236 to 355 62 63 77 79 Over 355 65 66 81 83

SPC 224 to 250 70 71 87 89 265 to 355 92 94 115 120 Over 375 115 120 144 150

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 35

8 SERVICING 3000S

BELT TENSIONING USING FENNER BELT TENSION INDICATOR

Calculate the deflection in mm on a basis of 16mm per metre of centre distance Centre Distance (m) x 16 =Deflection (mm)

Set lower marker ring at the deflection distance required in mm on the lower scale

Set upper ring against to bottom edge of the top tube

Place the belt tension indicator on top of the belt at the centre of span and apply a force at right angles to the belt defecting it to the point where the lower marker ring is level with the top of the adjacent belt

Read off the force value indicated by the top edge of the upper marker ring

Compare this force to the kgf value shown in the table above

If a Fenner Belt Tension Indicator is not available a spring balance and rule will be suffice

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 36

8 SERVICING 30005

85 MAIN PANEL CONTROLS

All panel controls are readily accessible and may be easily exchanged for replacement components in the event of failure Ensure any replacement item is of the same make and type as the original

851 LANDIS amp GYR LFL 1335 AUTOMATIC SEQUENCE CONTROLLER

The Landis amp Gyr Automatic Sequence Controller is a plug-in unit locating on a pre-wired chassis To remove the controller undo the two retaining screws at the top left and lower right corners and pull the module off the chassis

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

852 CONTROLS CIRCUIT (24 VOLT) TRANSFORMER

The Controls Circuit Transformer is fixed to the panel back plate by tapped screws To remove the transformer undo the wiring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel Undo the two retaining screws and remove the unit complete

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

853 CONTROL RELAYS R1 R2 amp R3

The Control Relays are DIN Rail mounted To remove a relay undo the wIring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel Release the DIN rail retaining clip under the relay with a screwdriver and remove the relay

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

854 6A MCB

The 6A MCB is DIN Rail mounted To remove the MCB undo the wiring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel Release the DIN rail retaining clip under the MCB with a screwdriver and remove the MCB

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

855 THERMAL OVERLOAD

The thermal overload is attached to the underside of the main contactor To remove the overload undo the wiring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel and that the overload setting is as specified in Section 13 of this manual Unscrew the three connections to the contactor and remove the overload

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 37

8 SERVICING 3000S

856 MAIN CONTACTOR

The Main Contactor is DIN Rail mounted To remove the contactor remove the thermal overload as 855 above and then undo the wiring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel Release the DIN rail retaining clip under the contactor with a screwdriver and remove the contactor

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

857 MOTOR FUSE

To replace a motor fuse pull the fuse carrier off the fuse holder base The fuse is attached to the fuse carrier by two screws Unscrew remove and replace

86 REMOTE CONTROL STATION

The remote control station contains some serviceable parts although these items should only be fitted by an approved RS STOKVIS Ltd Engineer

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 38

9 RECOMMENDED SPARES 3000S

For two years operation it is recommended that the following items should be held in stock

ITEM DESCRIPTION PART NO QUANTITY i

1 INDICATOR BULBS W1121 1 PACK

2 SPARK PLUG 023739 1 I

3 UVDETECTOR QRA10C 1 I

4 ROOM SENSOR DRT2453 1

5 DUCT SENSOR DDT1701 1

All replacement parts can be obtained from RS STOKVIS Ltd by quoting the air handler serial number the part number and description

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 39

APPENDIX 1 30005

SOUNDNESS TESTING THE FUEL GAS PIPEWORK

This procedure should only be carried out by personnel familiar with the ECONO-AIR 3000S Series Air handler

The pressure test points and all valves are identified on the Process and Instrumentation Diagram for the air handler included in Section 1 of this n1anual

Isolate the air handler electric supply at the main control panel and lock off Close the manual isolation valves MV1 MV6 and PV3 Ensure the supply pressure is available on the upstream side of MV1

A11 TESTING THE UPSTREAM PIPEWORKAND BURNER CONTROLS 1 Connect a 60 mbar manometer to the pressure test nipple A Monitor the

pressure for two minutes Any rise in pressure indicates that valve MV1 is leaking and must be replaced Remove pressure test points Band F

2 Open MV1 to pressurise the pipework on both the main gas and pilot line to the first block valve

3 Close MV1 Allow one minute for the temperature to stabilise and then test the system for 2 minutes and watch for a drop in the pipework pressure If the pressure falls open valve MV1 and test the pipework connections and valves from MV1 to MV3 and MV1 to PV2 for leaks with a proprietary leak detector fluid or spray Turn off MV1 seal any leaks and re-test

4 If no extemalleaks are found either the pilot block valve PV1 or either the first main gas block valve MV3 is letting by

5 To test this seal pressure test point A and fit a manometer to pressure test point B Leave for two minutes with MV1 open A rise in pressure on the manometer confirms a leak on the block valve MV3 Turn off MV1 exchange the valve and re-test from point 2 above

6 Repeat this procedure for the pilot block valve Seal test point B and fit a manometer to pressure test point F Leave for two minutes with MV1 open A rise in pressure on the manometer confirms a leak on the pilot block valve PV2 Turn off MV1 exchange the valve and re-test from point 1 above Seal test point F

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 40

APPENDIX 1 30005

A12 TESTING THE DOWNSTREAM BURNER VALVE 1 Close MV1 and connect pressure test points A and 8 with flexible 6 mm bore

tubing teed into the manometer Remove pressure test point C Open MV1 to pressurise the downstream block valve MV4

2 Close MV1 and leave for one minute for the temperature to stabilise Monitor the pressure for 2 minutes If the pressure falls open valve MV1 and leak test the line between the two block valves MV3 and MV4 with a proprietary leak detector Turn off MV1 seal any leaks and re-test Note Smaller air handlers in the 3000S Series are fitted with multi-functional valves combining the pressure regulator and two block valves in one component The above procedure still applies but if a leak is found on either block valve the whole control should be replaced If no external leaks are found the downstream block valve is letting by

3 To confirm this close MV1 remove the manometer and refit to pressure test point C Connect pressure test points A and 8 with flexible 6mm bore tubing Open MV1 and allow one minute for the temperature to stabilise Monitor the pressure for a further 2 minutes with MV1 still open A rise in pressure confirms that the second block valve MV4 is letting by Turn off MV1 Replace the valve and re-test from 2 above

A13 TESTING THE DOWNSTREAM BURNER PIPEWORK 1 Close MV1 and connect pressure test points A and D with flexible 6 mm bore

tubing teed into the manometer Open MV1 to pressurise the downstream pilot pipework

2 Close MV1 and leave for one minute for the temperature to stabilise Monitor the pressure for 2 minutes If the pressure falls open valve MV1 and leak test the line between the downstream block valve MV4 and the manual block MV6 with a proprietary leak detector fluid or spray If no external leaks are found the manual block valve MV6 is letting by Turn off MV1 seal any leakages and reshytest from 2 above

A14 TESTING THE DOWNSTREAM PILOT PIPEWORK 1 Close MV1 and connect pressure test points A and F with flexible 6mm bore

tubing teed into the manometer Open MV1 to pressurise the downstream pilot pipework

2 Close MV1 and leave for one rninute for the temperature to stabilise Monitor the pressure for 2 minutes If the pressure falls open valve MV1 and leak test the line between the downstream block valve PV2 and the manual block PV3 with a proprietary leak detector fluid or spray If no external leaks are found the manual block valve PV3 is letting by Turn off MV1 seal any leakages and reshytest from 2 above

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 41

APPENDIX 1 30005

A15 TESTING THE BURNER CONNECTIONS 1 Remove the burner access panel as described in Section 84 of this manual

Remove the burner spark igniter Slacken the two retaining bolts holding the burner to the burner support straps and unbolt the burner supply endplate from the burner casting and mixing plates

2 Connect pressure test points A and 0 with flexible 6mm bore tubing teed into the manometer Open MV1 and MV6 to pressurise the burner pipework Leak test the main gas burner pipework and connections with proprietary leak detector fluid Turn off MV6 Seal any leakages and re-test

3 Connect pressure test points A and F with flexible 6 mm bore tubing teed into the manometer Open MV1 and PV3 to pressurise the pilot burner pipework Leak test the pilot gas burner pipework and connections with proprietary leak detector fluid Turn off PV3 Seal any leakages and re-test

4 Turn off MV1

5 Replace the spark igniter and profile division plate

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 42

APPENDIX 2 30005

START SEQUENCE

The burner start sequence is controlled by the Landis and Gyr burner management unit The timings are pre-set and comply with 885885 This unit must NOT be tampered with

A brief description of the start-up sequence isshy

The unit checks

1 The NO FLAME signal on the UV flame scanner

Note If the scanner detects a flame at any time other than in the correct operating sequence the flame programmer initiates a lockout

2 The operation of the combustion air proving switch in the NO AIR position

3 The air handler discharge high temperature switch

If the checks are completed the unit starts the combustion air fan and then checks the combustion airflow

Once the airflow is proven the unit checks that the damper control circuit is functioning correctly After the damper microswitch is made to prove the fresh air damper is fully open the sequence allows 30 seconds for the combustion air to purge any combustible gas from the air handler

After completion of the purge the spark ignition system is energised the pilot valve opened and the spark terminated If the pilot flame is not proven by the UV scanner the system will initiate a LOCKOUT

If the flame is proven the main gas valves are opened the pilot extinguished and the main burner flame proven

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 43

i

APPENDIX 2 30008

The following flow chart shows the complete start sequence including the lighting of the various indicating lamps

MANUAL STATUS LIGHT POWER ON

POWER ON

I INITIATE START BY TIME

SETTING ON CONTROLLER

I CHECK NO FLAME

VISIBLE

PROVEj FAIL LOCKOUT

I CHECK RELAY R4 NC

POSITION

PROVE FAIL NO START

I CHECK AIR PRESSURE SWITCH NC POSITION

PROVE FAIL NO START

I CHECK RELAY R1 NC

POSITION

PROVE j

FAIL NO START

I START COMBUSTION

AIR BLOWER

I CHECK AIR PRESSURE SWITCH NO POSITION

PROVE I

FAIL NO START

I STATUS LIGHT FAN ON

I ENERGISE RELAY R1

I

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 44

I

I

APPENDIX 2 30008

I CHECK OVERHEAT LIMIT

CONTROL R5

PROVE I

FAIL I I

CHECK 541412 LOOP CLOSED ON

LANDIS ampGYR CIRCUIT

PROVE I

FAIL I I

COMBUSTION AIR PURGE PERIOD

30 SECONDS

I

NO START

NO START

CANCEL NO FLAME CHECK CIRCUIT

I

ENERGISE SPARK

I TIMED PERIOD 25 SECONDS

I ENERGISE PILOT GAS

VALVE

I TIMED PERIOD 25 SECONDS

I TERMINATE SPARK

I INTERROGATE UV FLAME SCANNER

PROVE I

FAIL I I

TIMED PERIOD 10 SECONDS

I

LOCKOUT

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 45

I

I

APPENDIX 2 3000S

I ENERGISE MAIN GAS

VALVES

I

STATUS LIGHT BURNER ON

I TIMED PERIOD

5 SECONDS

I DE-ENERGISE PILOT

GAS VALVES

CONTINUOUS FROM PILOT

I INTERROGATE UV FLAME SCANNER

PROVE I

FAIL I I

LOCKOUT I

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 46

APPENDIX 3 30005

Please see copy of Standard Service Sheet

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 47

APPENDIX 4 30005

A41 TIME OUT SCREEN

This is the standard screen displayed when the touch screen is not in use The back light is off to save energy_ To access the STATUS screen touch the ENTER key and the following screen is displayed

[]][I][]rn[IJOO[][IJOO[] EJ~E11 I[]I ~ middot I

NOTE

The Touch Screen operates using the heat produced by the touch of a finger and therefore only LIGHT pressure is required

Excessive pressure can damage the Touch Screen

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 48

APPENDIX 4 30008

A42 STATUS SCREEN

On the typical STATUS screen the illustrated information detailed is as follows

19 36 Fan Brn

RS OS

100 Fst_~_ Lck _ _ Xst Gas~o ~ I

RS Indicates the current room temperature

OS ~( t~~ the current duct discharge temperature

Fan Indicates the current status of the fan by showing the arrow and the fan blades for ON and OFF is shown by the arrow and fan blades being removed

Brn Indicates the current status of the burner with the black flames indicating the burner to be ON and vice versa

Lck LOCKOUT - This indicates a flame failure when highlighted during normal or start-up operation

Xst EXCESS TEMPERATURE SWITCH - This indicates the unit has reached the trip limit on the over heat stat when highlighted during operation

Indicates the current position of the gas modulating valve during normal Gas

operation (0-100)

Indicates whether the Frost stat is energised and the unit is running on frost Fst

override

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 49

APPENDIX 4 30008

A43 CHANGING SETTINGS

It is possible to change the settings for the time of operation and the required temperature set points The following details the steps required

A44 ENTERING THE SECURITY CODE

From the STATUS screen touch the return key and the screen below will be displayed

Type the HIGH LEVEL security code (4321) If you make a mistake use the BACK SPACE key to delete any incorrect number(s) Touch the ENTER key when the code is correct

If the security code is incorrect the screen above will be displayed then try again If after several attempts you can not gain access please contact RS STOKVIS Ltd for further information

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 50

APPENDIX 4 30008

When the code is entered correctly the MAIN MENU is displayed as detailed below

~ STATUS SET VALUES~ ~ TIVIE CLOCK [) [) [) [) [)

The MAIN MENU screen shows the three menu items available The title for each menu item can be changed to suit the end user Please notify RS STOKVIS Ltd prior to commissioning should these parameters require special amendments

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 51

APPENDIX 4 30008

A45 CHANGING OR SETTING A TIME SCHEDULE

From the main menu screen select the TIME CLOCK page by running finger across screen symbol and touch the ENTER key the screen below will be displayed

On the following screen highlight the TS1 symbol and touch the ENTER key

The current time schedule will now be displayed as shown below The display will automatically default to the current day (1 =Monday 2 =Tuesday etc) In this case day 5 (Friday) the four schedule switching times refer to that day

IAC6BBB1BHIS1

mm0CIl bull mID 17BB 17BB 17HB

Iillleschedule

To modify a time select it by highlighting and touch the ENTER key and the following screen is displayed

To amend the appropriate onoff time as shown on the screen below The arrows to the right of the time are for altering the hours and the arrows on the left for the minutes

Once you have set the time use the ESCape key to exit back to the time schedule screen and choose another day by touching the required number Another time may now be modified as before

IAC6BBB1BHIS1

H8BH

I i eschedule

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 52

APPENDIX 4 30008

Use the ESCape key to exit back to the MAIN MENU screen

~ STATUS ~ SET VALUES

TIME CLOCK []~ [] [] [] []

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 53

APPENDIX 4 30005

A46 CHANGING SET VALUES

From the main menu screen select the SET VALUES page by highlight in the normal way and touch the ENTER key

The following screen is displayed

36 19 18III III IIIHsv Rsv Llv

To change the RSV highlight it in the normal way and touch the ENTER key and the screen below will now be shown

IAC6RRR1RR40 T I

0 19 (Y)l RSV

ROOM SET VALUE

The above screen shows the parameters that can be changed The values to the far left are the limitations of set point (OC) Change the set point by using the UP and DOWN ARROWS on the left of the screen or touch the set value itself followed by the ENTER key to select the set value and set it directly using the numeric keyboard All values can be changed in this way

Use the ESCape key twice to exit back to the MAIN MENU screen

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 54

APPENDIX 4 30005

A47 COMMISSIONING AND SERVICING BURNER CHECKS

Select the SET VALUES screen from the MAIN MENU screen and adjust the high lirrlit set point to 55degC to drive the burner to high fire

IAC6HHH1HH60 ~T I

0 19 (Y)

HSV

HIGH SET VALUE ~

Ensure the set value is returned to 36degC once the appropriate checks and adjustments as described in Section 43 of this manual have been completed Return to the SET VALUES screen and select the low limit value to adjust the low fire setting

Reduce the low limit value to OdegC to drive the gas valve to low fire and complete the appropriate checks and adjustments as described in Section 43 of this manual and ensure the set value is returned to the original value

A48 GMT ltgt BST CHANGEOVER DAYLIGHT SAVINGS

To change your unit to British Summer TimelWinter Time the following system screen must be highlighted by touching the Iamp1 button twice

By touching the clock symbol in the top left hand corner followed by the ENTER key the screen below will be displayed

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 55

APPENDIX 4 30008

188311 851193

544

By touching and highlighting in this case 18 followed by the ENTER key A small box allowing the entry of two digits will appear Enter the desired time required using the numbered keys followed by ENTER key Your unit is now set to operate on BSTBWT

Touch the ESC key three times to return back to the Status screen

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 56

STOKVIS ENERGY SYSTEMS 96R WALTON ROAD EAST MOLESEY SURREY KT8 0DL TEL 020 8783 3050 08707 707 747 FAX 020 8783 3051 08707 707 767 E-MAIL infostokvisboilerscom WEBSITE wwwstokvisboilerscom

JULY 1999

Page 18: ECONOAIR 3000S SERIES AIR HANDLING UNIT DIRECT FIREDstokvisboilers.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/EconoAir... · 2019-05-10 · ECONOAIR 3000S SERIES AIR HANDLING UNIT DIRECT FIRED

3 INSTALLATION 3000S

352 VENTI LA TION

Where the air air handler is in its own plant room or compartment this shall be ventilated with openings communicating directly with the outside air to ventilate the room

The openings shall be fitted with grilles of negligible resistance and shall be sited so that they cannot easily be blocked or flooded They shall have a total minimum free area as follows

Low Level (inlet) 320cm2 + 27cm2 per kilowatt in excess of 60kW total rated input

High Level (outlet) 160cm2 + 134cm2 per kilowatt in excess of 60kW total rated input

The free area of the grilles shall be not less than the size of the recommended minimum ventilation opening Grilles shall be designed to minimise high velocity air streams in the plant room For exposed ie free standing plant rooms ventilation openings shall be provided on at least two sides and preferably on all four sides

Where mechanical ventilation is used it shall be by mechanical inlet and either natural or mechanical extraction Systems of ventilation employing mechanical extraction and natural air inlet shall not be used

The minimum flow rates of air supplied shall be not less than 06 m3s per megawatt of rated heat input

36 AIR DISCHARGE

The air handler should be located with the air discharge into the heated space at a minimum height of 3 metres The air should not discharge directly onto any obstructions and direct discharge on to working personnel should be avoided

If the air discharge is located in an area of unrestricted access warning notices preventing the blockage of the air discharge by temporary stacking should be displayed adjacent to the discharge

Generally it is not necessary to fit distribution ducting to the discharge of the air handler If ducting is required or specified ensure that the resulting pressure drop has been accounted for in the original design specification as detailed in Section 1 of this manual

37 ASSEMBLY AND POSITIONING OF AIR HANDLER

Unless specified at the time of order air handlers will be shipped in sections Discharge heads grilles attenuators duct connecting sections filters rain-hoods etc will be supplied loose for site fitting to the air handler

Horizontal air handlers must be supported on their steel angle support base When the air handler is located check for level and adjust as necessary

Alternatively horizontal air handlers can be supplied with extensions of the support frame for suspending from overhead supports This must be specified at the time of order Do not suspend the air handler from the lifting eyes

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 14

3 INSTALLATION 3000S

38 REMOTE STATION

The ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler is supplied with a remote control station This should be mounted in a position convenient to the end user If possible it should not be mounted on an external wall or where the space temperature detector is affected by cold draughts or a local source of heat

39 VISUAL CHECK

After completion of installation re-check the air handler for signs of damage Report any instance to RS STOKVIS Ltd

310 CONNECTION OF SERVICES

The air handler requires the connection of fuel gas and electricity

3101 FUEL GAS SUPPLY

The ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler has been designed for use on Natural Gas An alternative version is available for LPG The gas type for the air handler supplied is clearly marked on the air handler data badge and on the Specification sheet in Section 1 of this manual Check the gas type is correct and that the supply pressure is within the range marked on the specification

The local gas Authority should be consulted about the adequacy of the gas service and meter supplies for existing and proposed extensions to the installation and for any requirements for boosting the gas supply_

Connect the fuel gas supply to the inlet manual valve on the air handler gas train The connection size is detailed in Section 1 of this manual A further isolation valve and union should be fitted immediately adjacent to the appliance which when the valve is closed allows the complete burner and control assembly to be disconnected for maintenance or repair

New gas pipework should be installed to British Gas Publication IGEUP2 and be purged and pressure tested in accordance with British Gas Publications IGEUP1

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 15

3 INSTALLATION 3000S

3102 ELECTRICITY SUPPLY

All external wiring shall be carried out and checked by a competent person All components shall be checked for suitability for voltage range and frequency

Means for electric isolation having a contact separation of at least 3mm in all poles must be provided adjacent to the air handler The electrical supply to the appliance shall incorporate suitable means of excess current protection

The ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler requires a 3 phase 4 wire supply which should be connected to the main control panel Check the air handler data badge for the correct electrical supply The maximum supply requirement is Specified in Section 1 of this manual Note that the 240 Volt air handler control circuit is taken from the lUI phase to Neutral Connection should be made as shown on the wiring diagram shipped inside this panel

The air handler must be earthed in accordance with BS5986 and CP1013

Check all terminal strip terminations for wires which have become loose during shipment

311 CONNECTION TO THE MAIN PANEL AND REMOTE STATION

Interconnecting wiring to the main panel and remote station should be made with a minimum specification of 075 mm2 300 Volt cable Check that no wires on the terminal strip have become loose during shipment The remote panel should be mounted at a height of approx 18m If possible it should not be mounted on an external wall or where the sensor will be affected by cold draughts or a local source of heat

Both panel and remote station must be earthed in accordance with BS5986 and CP1013

312 HEATED SPACE TEMPERATURE SENSOR

The space temperature sensor located on the remote panel should be connected with screened cable or twin low voltage signal cable run in its own separate conduit It should be mounted on the remote panel or adjacent to the outlet at a height of approx 18m If possible it should not be mounted on an external wall or where the sensor will be affected by cold draughts or a local source of heat

313 DUCT SENSOR

The duct sensor should be connected with screened cable or twin low voltage signal cable run in its own separate conduit It should be mounted in the air handler discharge as close as possible to the discharge into the heated space

314 OVERHEAT LIMIT CONTROL SENSOR

The overheat limit control sensor should be connected with twin core cable It should be mounted in the air handler discharge within 1 metre of the air handler outlet connection

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 16

3 INSTALLATION 3000S

315 TOUCH SCREEN WIRING

The touch screen located on the front of the remote station requires two separate twisted pairs of O5mrh2 screened cable run in a separate conduit If the distance between the main and remote stations is greater that 1 km please contact RS STOKVIS Ltd for advice

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 17

3 INSTALLATION 3000S

316 ALIGNMENT

3161 INSTALLATION OF DRIVE BELTS

On 80 amp 89 30008 range of air handlers it will be necessary to align the pulleys and fit the drive belts before carrying out commissioning of the unit

3162 PU LLEYS

Before assembling the drive check the pulley grooves are free from scores or sharp edges and all dimensions conform to the relevant standard

The Taper Lock bush is your starting point when it comes to assembly and installation Drive installation is a straightforward job with Taper Lock - but the stages set out on the installation leaflet provided with every Taper Lock bush should be followed closely

3163 ALIGNMENT

Good alignment of pulleys prior to belt installation is important to avoid belt flank wear The diagram below shows correct installation of pulleys

INTERNAl BEARING

MOTOR PUlLEY rAN PULLEY

MOTORMOTOR ADJUSTMENT MOUNTING BOlTSBOLTS

3164 BELTS

When the pulleys have been correctly positioned on the shafts the belts can be installed to complete the drive

The drive centre distance should be reduced prior to the installation of the belts so that they may be fitted without the use of force Under no circumstances must belts be prised into the grooves Using sharp tools to stretch the belts over the pulley rim can easily damage belts and pulley grooves

The installation allowance given in the table below is the minimum recommended reduction in centre distance for various belt section and lengths to allow for correct fitting

The take-up allowance given in the same table should be added on to the calculated centre distance to allow for belt stretch

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 18

3 INSTALLATION 3000S

3165 INSTALLATION AND TAKE UP ALLOWANCE

Belt Pitch Installation Allowance Take-Up Length (mm) SPZ SPA SPB SPC (mm)

410 to 530 5

540 to 840 10

850 to 1160 15

1170 to 1500 20

1510 to 1830 20 25

1840 to 2170 30

2180 to 2830 25 40

2840 to 3500 30 50

3520 to 4160 50 60

4170 to 5140 70

5220 to 6150 85

6180 to 7500 105

600 to 8500 125

8880 to 10170 145

10600 to 12500 175

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 19

4 COMMISSIONING 30005

This appliance must be commissioned by a RS STOKVIS Ltd approved engineer

41 PRESTART CHECKS

1 Switch the SUMMERIOFFMlINTER switch on the remote station to OFF

2 Check the correct electric supply is available to the air handler and the appliance isolator installed

3 Check the correct fuel gas supply is available to the air handler and local isolation valve and union installed Check that new gas pipe work has been correctly purged and pressure tested and that the isolation valve is in the OFF position

4 Check the air handler gas control system and burner connections for pressure soundness as detailed in Appendix 1 of this manual

5 Complete the first section of the Service Check Sheet supplied at the back of this manual (Appendix 3)

6 Close the air handler access door

7 Close and lock the main air handler control panel

8 Switch the main panel isolator to position 1 Check the POWER ON light illuminates

9 Check and set the timed ONOFF periods in the lAC Controller located on the remote panel Ensure that the unit is set to be on during testing Refer to Appendix 4 for the lAC setting procedure

10 Close and lock the remote panel

11 Switch the SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch on the remote station to SUMMER to start the air fan Return the switch to the OFF position and check for correct rotation of the fan as the fan slows and stops

The fan rotation can be observed through the fan section access door or through the air handler access door Only do this during the fan run-down period Ensure the door is securely fastened after completion

Rotation arrows are fitted on the end of the air handler and inside the air handler above the interior bearing support If the rotation is incorrect two phases should be interchanged as dictated by the Engineer responsible for the site electrical system

12 Check the air pressure drop across the burner whilst the fan is operating with a water column pressure gauge connected to the two pressure test points on the air pressure switch (DPS) This pressure should be between 14 and 16 rnbar

If the air differential pressure measured above is not within the operating range check inlet and outlet ductwork as appropriate and any filters fitted If the pressure differential is still not within limits isolate the air handler and report to RS STOKVIS Ltd before proceeding

13 Check the operation and setting of the Low Air Pressure Switch by injecting a controlled signal into the switch Check the break point on the switch is 1 mbar (falling)

Note The switch is set and sealed before fitting The 1 mbar switch point may not coincide with the 1 mbar scale reading on the switch

If on checking the switch is not operating correctly do not tamper with it return it to RS STOKVIS Ltd for replacement

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 20

4 COMMISSIONING 3000S

42 DRY RUN

With all the manual gas isolation valves still in the OFF position switch the SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch to WINTER

43 START UP

1 Attach a manometer to pressure test point F and the low pressure test point on the air pressure switch (DPS)

2 Open the main gas supply valve (MV1) and the pilot burner isolation valve (PV3) Leave the main burner isolation valve (MV6) closed Reset the air handler by pressing the push-button marked RESET on either the main panel or remote station The air handler pilot will light automatically (after the automatic damper start check and combustion air pre-purge) and then LOCKOUT after the main gas shut-off valves are addressed

During the short period that the pilot is in operation check the pilot gas pressure on the manometer It should be 10 mbar and the pilot flame approximately 100 - 150mm in length covering the first three or four holes of the mixing plate and have a steady blue colour when viewed through the sight glass on the access side of the air handler Adjust as necessary - refer to Section 51 this manual Check the flame signal - refer to Section 431

3 Open the main burner isolation valve (MV6) RESET the air handler which should now light to main burner stage When alight close the main burner isolation valve to shut down the gas flow to the burner Check that the unit goes to LOCKOUT

4 Reset the air handler and drive the burner to low fire by adjusting the temperature controller set point as described in Appendix 4 of this manual Check the flame is continuous across the width of the burner and has a flame length of approx 50 - 65mm from the burner rail when viewed through the sight glass on the access side of the air handler Check the burner pressure across pressure test point D and the downstream (low) pressure test point on the air pressure switch ie on the rear of the pressure switch This pressure is specifled in Section 1 of this manual Adjust as necessary-refer to Section 53 of this manual Check the flame signal - refer to Section 431

Where possible check the actual gas flow rate by meter reading with all other appliances turned off

5 Drive the burner to high fire by adjusting the temperature controller set point and high limit to 55degC as described in Appendix 4 of this manual Check the flame is continuous across the burner rail and has a flame length of approximately 250 - 350mm from the burner rail Check the burner pressure across pressure test point D and the downstream (low) pressure test point on the air pressure switch This pressure is specified in Section 1 of this manual Adjust as necessary - refer to Section 52 of this manual Check the maximum air handler discharge temperature Check the flame signal shyrefer to Section 431

Where possible check the actual gas flow rate by meter reading with all other appliances turned off

6 Check the operation of the overheat limit control by adjusting the temperature controller set point and high limit to 65degC as described in Appendix 4 of this manual Monitor the discharge temperature on the temperature controller Check that the overheat control operates as the set temperature is passed Check that the control must be manually reset by pressing the green reset button on the front of the switch Return the temperature controller to its original settings

In the event that the ambient temperature is too low for this simple procedure to work the instrument will have to be bench tested using a Temperature 8ath Remove and replace the control as Section 84 of this manual for bench-testing

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 21

4 COMMISSIONING 3000S

43 1 FLAME SIGNAL CHECK

1 The ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler is fitted with a Klippon SAKT1 Test Terminal which can be used to measure the flame scanning signal Refer to the Electrical Schematic and connect a 0-1 mA ammeter to the two test points with standard 23 mm test plugs with the positive lead on the detector side Disconnect the terminal link to obtain the signal reading A minimum signal of 70 microamps is required typical signals are in the 250-400 microamp range on both pilot and main flame After completion replace the terminal link and remove the test jacks

2 Drive the burner to high fire as previously described Measure the carbon dioxide content of the discharge air stream This figure must not exceed 2800 ppm If the discharge exceeds this limit isolate the air handler and report to RS STOKVIS Ltd before proceeding

Stop and start the air handler a few times to check for reliability using the Operating Instructions (Section 6)

432 HANDOVER

Complete the air handler Service Check Sheet supplied at the back of this manual The self-copy sheet must be returned to STOKVIS for checking

Instruct the User in efficient use and care of the unit start-up and shutdown (including emergency shutdown) and recommended service interval Emphasise the need to keep the air handler clear of stored items and extraneous material and to maintain the recirculation and fresh air paths to the air handler inlets Hand all instructions as applicable to the UserOwner for safekeeping

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 22

5 ADJUSTMENTS 3000S

If adjustments to the air handler settings are required they should be made by a RS STOKVIS Ltd approved engineer

The normal value for all control settings is specified in Section 1 of this manual

51 PILOT ADJUSTMENT

The pilot gas pressure and flame length may be adjusted by altering the discharge pressure of the pilot governor Screwing the adjusting screw clockwise (located under the top cap) increases the discharge pressure and the flame length anti-clockwise decreases the pressure and the flame length

52 BURNER HIGH FIRE PRESSURE ADJUSTMENT

At high fire alter the spring compression on the main burner governor (MV2) by removing the cap and adjust the spring compression plate clockwise to increase the burner pressure anti-clockwise to decrease burner pressure If the pressure does not increase on adjusting the spring the supply is inadequate

Note On small air handlers fitted with a mUlti-functional control the pressure adjusting screw is located under a swing cap on the first block valve

53 BURNER LOW FIRE ADJUSTMENT

The main burner low fire is adjusted on the flow control valve MV5 (Process amp Instrumentation Diagram)

Remove the top cover of the valve and insert a Terminal Screwdriver in the adjusting screw of the TOP cam marked NI

Drive the burner to low fire by adjusting the temperature controller set-point and high limit to 05degC as described in Appendix 4 of this manual

Turn the Terminal Screwdriver clockwise to decrease the low fire gas flow anti-clockwise to increase the flow

Check the heat input and flame signal at the new position are satisfactory and return the tenlperature controller to its normal settings

Replace the control valve cover

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 23

5 ADJUSTMENTS 3000S

54 SUMMERIOFFIWINTER SWITCH

In the SUMMER position this switch provides ventilation only and is independent of the programmed ON and OFF periods This position is manually selected and must be manually de-selected Whenever the switch is in this position the fan is operating

In the OFF position the air handler is shutdown and will not operate This overrides any frost protection fitted It is suitable for air handler shutdown for short periods such as holidays The programme memory is unaffected by this switch and assumes control of the air handler when the switch is returned to the WINTER position

In the WINTER position the air handler operates off the programme memory to provide heating

55 RESET BUTTON

Visual indication of air handler lockout is provided In the event of lockout occurring the air handler can be reset by depressing the RESET button This parallels the RESET button on the air handler main control panel If after 4 attempts to reset the air handler the lockout indicator still illuminates then a Service Engineer should be called to investigate the problem

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 24

6 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 3000S

61 AIR HANDLER START-UP

1 Open all manual gas valves both on the appliance and on the supply to the appliance Switch on the Electric Supply to the appliance

2 On the main air handler panel

Switch the panel isolator to the 1 position

Check POWER ON light

3 On the remote control station

For Heating Switch the SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch to WINTER

The air handler will now start automatically in response to the time settings

In the event of LOCKOUT

Press the RESET button and the cycle of operations will be repeated If the air handler goes to LOCKOUT four times in succession call for a Service Engineer

For Unheated Ventilation Switch the SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch to SUMMER

Note This prevents the burner firing giving a controlled supply of ventilation air to the heated space as long as the switch is in this position The air handler will now start automatically in response to the timeclock demand To turn the fan off return the switch to the centre OFF position

In the event of LOCKOUT

Press the RESET button and the cycle of operations will be repeated If the air handler goes to LOCKOUT four times in succession call for a Service Engineer

62 AIR HANDLER SHUTDOWN

621 SHUTDOWN FOR SHORT PERIODS

Switch the SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch on the remote station to OFF

622 SHUTDOWN FOR PROLONGED PERIODS

Switch the main panel isolator to the 0 position and close all manual gas valves both on and leading to the appliance

Note Manual gas valves should only be operated when the appliance is to be shut off for either Servicing or for a prolonged shutdown

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 25

30005 6 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

63 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS

631 SITE CLEARANCE ADJACENT TO AIR HANDLER

Attention should be paid to keeping the area around the air handler tidy No rubbish should be allowed to accumulate in the vicinity of the air handler and storage of goods etc should not be permitted within two metres of the air handler Failure to comply could result in reduced airflow to the air handler causing inefficient running and potential overheat cond ition

632 AIR SUPPLY TO AIR HANDLER

Air vents and grilles supplying air to the air handler should never be blocked and should be checked periodically to ensure they are clear

633 AIR FILTERS

Similarly attention should be paid to cleaning or replacing the filters to the air handler if fitted Your installer should advise you on the frequency with which this would be required to be completed

634 SERVICE

For continued safe and efficient operation of this air air handler it is important that servicing of the air handler should be completed at regular intervals by a competent person in accordance with Section 82 of this manual Users are advised to enter into a Service Agreement with RS STOKVIS Ltd

635 SPARE PARTS

It is suggested that a complete set of spare parts essential to the running of the air handler and recommended by the installer are kept by the user on the premises where the air handler is installed This is particularly important where the air handler forms an essential part of any process plant and its being out of operation may cause problems by for example frost damage or condensation by super-cooling

A list of Recommended Spares will be found in Section 9 of this manual

636 GAS LEAKS

If a smell of gas is detected around the area of the appliance Switch off all manual gas valves and contact your service engineer or the local gas undertaking

NEVER

LOOK FOR GAS LEAKS WITH A LIGHTED MATCH OR NAKED

FLAME

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 26

7 FAULT FINDING 30008

The main control panel incorporates two lights to help in fault finding

POWER ON

LOCKOUT

The remote station also has three lights

AIR FAN ON

BURNER ON

LOCKOUT

This section gives the possible causes of failure associated with each check light The electrical schematic diagram in this manual and the wiring diagram shipped in the main air handler panel should be used in conjunction with the notes below Additionally Service Engineers should familiarise themselves with the detailed Start Sequence given in Appendix 2 of this manual

The notes are given for each light before consulting the notes check for bulb failure

71 POWER ON LIGHT IS UNLIT

Check

1 Main control panel isolator is in the 1 position

2 Main Panel 6A MCB has not tripped if a trip has occurred the switch will be at the OFF position Reset and test system as required

3 Also check if the mains electrical supply is isolated If so FIND OUT WHY before taking any action

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 27

7 FAULT FINDING 30005

72 AIR FAN ON LIGHT IS UNLIT

Check

1 SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch is not in Position OFF

2 Timeperiod is not set to off

3 Air handler is not at LOCKOUT

4 Recheck both AIR FAN ON and LOCKOUT bulbs

Two fault indications are possible

1 THE FAN IS NOT OPERATING

If the fan should have started but is not operating

Check 1 Overload for tripped conditions Reset the overload and monitor the next start-up

2 Motor Fuses

3 Relays 1 2 amp3 for failure

laClor CC1 for failure

5 Air Pressure Switch (DPS) is failed in the N 0 Position

Replace the faulty component as described in Section 8

2 THE FAN IS OPERATING

This indicates that the air pressure switch (DPS) has failed to change over

Measure the profile plate differential pressure as described in Section 4113 If the pressure is correct the air pressure switch is faulty Check the switch as in 4114 If the pressure is not correct

Check 1 Correct fan belt tension

2 Correct fan rotation

3 The air handler air inlets and discharge are not blocked

4 Correct fitting on filters

5 The air differential pressure switch impulse lines are not blocked or leaking

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 28

7 FAULT FINDING 30008

73 LOCKOUT LIGHT IS ILLUMINATED

This light indicates a failure in the burner ignition and flame supervision system

RESET the unit and follow the progress of the start sequence The full cycle may take two minutes

1

------t

2 LOCKOUT after 35-40 seconds indicates an ignition failure RESET the system and observe the pilot and ignition spark during the start-up attempt

I-- shy

3 Observe the spark This should be strong and highly visible If not remove and clean the spark plug as Section 82 Check that the spark plug gap is correctly set at 15 mm

-- shy

4 Check the pilot flame If the pilot flame ignites and the unit goes to LOCKOUT the scanning system is at fault Remove and clean the detector as Section 82 Check the flame signal as in Section 431

5 If the pilot does not light the gas supply system is faulty Check the pilot system for restriction and the pilot valve operation

6 If the pilot lights and the unit goes to LOCKOUT after the main gas valves are addressed either the flow control valve is blocked or one of the main gas block valves has failed Fit a manometer on the pressure test point on the outlet flange of the multishyfunctional control and observe if the pressure rises when the main gas valves are addressed No pressure rise will indicate failure of the main gas valves

74 AIR FAN ON LIGHT ILLUMINATED

If the burner does not start check

1 SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch is in WINTER position

2 Overheat Limit Control

These interlocks prevent the burner management system starting

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 29

8 SERVICING 3000S

IMPORTANT Servicing and maintenance should be only carried out by a RS STOKVIS Ltd approved engineer

Only use replacement parts provided by the appliance manufacturer

Check that the air openings for combustion and for ventilation of any plant roon or compartment are clear

81 ISOLATION

811 FUEL GAS ISOLATION

The fuel gas to the ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler should be isolated and locked off at the manual ball valve mounted at the start of the fuel gas line Additionally before entering or servicing the air handler the burner manual isolation valve and pilot line isolation valve should be closed

812 ELECTRICAL ISOLATION

All electric power to the air handler and the remote control station is switched through the local isolator This isolator is fitted with a lock facility to permit it to be locked in the OFF position

Additionally isolate the power at the Wall Isolator

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 30

8 SERVICING 30005

82 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE

The air handler should be routinely serviced at the start of each heating season Isolate the air handler as above before servicing Details of access to individual components are given in Section 84 of this manual

1 Remove and clean spark igniter Check that the gap is correctly set at 25 mm Replace every two years

2 Clean the flame detector lens to ensure freedom from dirt and moisture If the cell shows any sign of cracks it should be replaced Routinely replace the cell every two years or after 10000 hours of operation which ever comes first

3 Inspect the entire air handler paint system for general damage Repair as necessary

4 Every two years brush the burner plates and clear the burner holes carefully with a Size 18mm drill for NP II and 20mm drill for NP I

WARNING THE BURNER HOLES MUST NOT BE ENLARGED

5 Inspect and lubricate all damper linkages to ensure freedom of operation Wipe off all excess lubricants to prevent dirt build up on linkage parts

6 Check the fan belt for cracks and splits Check tension The correct tension gives 16mm deflection per metre of span when the belt is centrally loaded with a force of 27N Adjust as necessary

7 Grease both the fan shaft bearings with Mobiith AW2 grease or similar

NEVER use high temperature grease

NEVER mix two different greases within the bearing always flush existing grease out

Note Removing the cover plate on the end of the air handler gains access to the outboard fan bearing

Light to Slow to 0 120 2 to 6 months Clean Dry

Medium Medium 120 200 1 to 2 months

Moderate to Light to Slow to 0 120 1 to 4 weeks Dry

Dirty Medium Medium 120 200 1 to 7 days

Extreme Dirt Dry Light to Slow to 0 200 Daily Flushing out

Medium Medium Dirt

83 ANNUAL SERVICE CHECKS

After Servicing test fire the air handler following the Commissioning Procedure detailed in Section 4 of this manual to ensure correct operation generally Special attention must be paid to the damper system and related controls and interlocks

Additionally check that the fresh air and recirculation air entry path to the air handler has been kept clear and instruct the User of the need for this as necessary

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 31

8 SERVICING 3000S

84 REMOVAL PROCEDURE FOR REPLACEABLE COMPONENTS

IMPORTANT

Turn off the gas at the appliance service valve and the electricity at the main panel and wall isolator before proceeding

841 BURNER

The burner is located inside the air handler casing and is mounted on two brackets from the support straps To remove the burner isolate the air handler as in 81 and undo the union on the fuel gas line adjacent to the burner isolation valve (MV6) and unscrew the main and pilot gas feed pipes from the burner rail Access to the rear of the burner assembly is made by removing the partition plate below the burner separating the fresh air inlet to the burner from the return air inlet compartment This is held in place by screws which engage in captive nuts on the top side of the partition Remove the Flame Detector and pull off the ignition plug cap Disconnect the burner support brackets and remove the burner The burner will easily pass through the access hatch for further strip down Replace in the reverse order soundness test the gas pipework check the burner operation and duty as described in the commissioning section of this manual

842 FLAME DETECTOR

This is a 240 Volt instrument

The flame detector is mounted on the end of the burner rail inside the air handler casing To remove the detector isolate the panel electric supply and lock off Push the scanner towards the burner and rotate to release the bayonet fixing and lift the detector from its mount Remove the two screws holding the detector cover and disconnect the supply leads noting the polarity of the connections

Replace the flame detector in the reverse order ensuring correct polarity of connections Ensure the access panel is securely closed and the retaining nuts are tightened down Check operation by inserting a test meter in the points provided in the main control panel and reading the flame signals during start up to full rate burner operation (See 431) Operate the appliance over six starts for reliability of operation including tum off of start and main gas valves to check for lockout operation

843 IGNITER SPARK PLUG

This is a high tension spark plug

The igniter spark plug is mounted on the end of the burner rail inside the air handler casing To remove the spark plug isolate the air handler as above Enter the service access door Access to the spark plug is made through the profile plate To remove the spark plug pull off the high tension lead and unscrew the plug with a plug spanner

When replacing the spark plug check the plug gap is set at 15mm Check ignition reliability over six start ups

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 32

8 SERVICING 3000S

844 IGNITER SPARK TRANSFORMER

This is a 240 Volt instrument

The ignition transformer is located in a plastic box mounted on the air handler casing adjacent to the main control panel To remove the transformer isolate the air handler as above and unscrew the four retaining screws holding the box lid in place and remove the lid Disconnect the supply cable at the terminal strip and undo the transformer retaining screws The transformer may then be unscrewed from the High Tension cable leading to the spark plug

Replacement is a simple reversal of this procedure

Check ignition reliability over six start ups

845 COMBUSTION AIR PRESSURE SWITCH (DPS)

Note The switch is set and sealed and should be replaced if not operating correctly

This switch is a 240 Volt instrument

The air switch is mounted directly on the air handler casing and can be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove the switch isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the supply cable Break the downstream pipe compression fitting and unscrew the switch housing from its locating fitting Reverse the procedure to replace after ensuring switch setting is as specified in Section 13 of this manual Operate the air handler to ensure reliability of operation over six start ups

846 AIR HANDLER OVERHEAT LIMIT CONTROL

This is a 240 Volt instrument

The overheat limit control can be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove the control isolate the air handler as above and lock off Remove the switch cover Disconnect the supply cable and unscrew the control housing from its locating fitting Reverse the procedure to replace check the switch is set to 50degC Test the switch operation as described in Section 43 over at least three operations

847 AIR FAN AND MOTOR

The air fan motor is a 415 Volt 3 phase motor

The motor and slide rails are easily accessible inside the air handler casing If it is necessary to remove the motor isolate the air handler as above Slacken the fan-belt tension and remove the drive belts Pull the motor away from the air handler casing to make access to the motor terminal box and disconnect the supply cable The motor may now be removed from the unit Following replacement the air handler must be fully re-commissioned as in Section 4

It is unlikely that the air fan will need replacing or servicing If required a full procedure should be obtained from RS STOKVIS Ltd

Replacement must be followed by full re-commissioning as in Section 4

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 33

8 SERVICING 3000S

848 FUEL GAS MULTI-FUNCTIONAL CONTROL - SMALL UNITS

This is a 240 Volt instrument

The fuel gas multi-functional control can be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove the unit isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the Hirschman electric termination Unbolt the control from its flanges and remove

When replacing care must be taken to ensure the flange 0 rings are undamaged and in the correct location Following replacement the air handler must be fully reshycommissioned as in Section 4 including tests for soundness prior to start-up

849 GOVERNOR AND BLOCK VALVES

The block valves are 240 Volt instruments

All these items may be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove any item isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the electric termination to the two block valves the pilot block valve and the flow control block valve Break the two pipe unions and remove the fuel gas line complete for further strip-down

8410 FUEL GAS FLOW CONTROL VALVE

This is a 24 Volt instrument

The fuel gas How control valve can be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove the valve isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the supply cables to the control valve

On small air handlers fitted with a multi-functional control support the multi-functional control and unbolt its discharge flange Break the union downstream of the burner isolation valve and remove the section of line containing the flow control valve for further strip-down

On large air handlers fitted with separate block valves it will be necessary to remove the fuel gas line complete as Section 8410 above

Following replacement re-commission the air handler

Note If the fresh air damper is not in the full open position the heat input must not exceed the maximum heat input at recirculation condition specified in the technical data section of this manual

8411 PILOT GAS GOVERNOR AND BLOCK VALVE

The block valve is a 240 Volt instrument

Both items may be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove either item isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the electric terrriination to the solenoid valve Undo the upstream pipe union and the compression fitting downstream of the manual block valve (PV3) Remove the pilot gas line complete for further strip down

Replace broken or distorted connections and retest for soundness Ensure the pilot gas pressure is correct and the flame is sensing an output Ensure reliability over six start-ups

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 34

8 SERVICING 3000S

8412 BELT TENSIONING PROCEDURE

The setting tensions are designed to cover a wide range of drives A precise setting force for individual applications can be calculated as detailed

SETTING FORCES

Belt Section

Setting Force To Deflect Belt 16mm per Metre Of Span

Small Pulley Diameter (mm)

Basic Setting Forces Newtons (N) Kilograms (kgf)

125 x Setting Forces Newtons (N) Kilograms (kgf)

SPZ

56 to 71 16 16 20 20 75 to 90 18 18 22 22

95 to 125 20 20 25 25 Over 125 22 22 28 28

SPA

80 to 100 22 22 28 28 106 to 140 30 30 38 38 150 to 200 36 37 45 46 Over 200 40 40 50 51

SPB

112 to 160 40 40 50 51 170 to 224 50 51 62 63 236 to 355 62 63 77 79 Over 355 65 66 81 83

SPC 224 to 250 70 71 87 89 265 to 355 92 94 115 120 Over 375 115 120 144 150

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 35

8 SERVICING 3000S

BELT TENSIONING USING FENNER BELT TENSION INDICATOR

Calculate the deflection in mm on a basis of 16mm per metre of centre distance Centre Distance (m) x 16 =Deflection (mm)

Set lower marker ring at the deflection distance required in mm on the lower scale

Set upper ring against to bottom edge of the top tube

Place the belt tension indicator on top of the belt at the centre of span and apply a force at right angles to the belt defecting it to the point where the lower marker ring is level with the top of the adjacent belt

Read off the force value indicated by the top edge of the upper marker ring

Compare this force to the kgf value shown in the table above

If a Fenner Belt Tension Indicator is not available a spring balance and rule will be suffice

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 36

8 SERVICING 30005

85 MAIN PANEL CONTROLS

All panel controls are readily accessible and may be easily exchanged for replacement components in the event of failure Ensure any replacement item is of the same make and type as the original

851 LANDIS amp GYR LFL 1335 AUTOMATIC SEQUENCE CONTROLLER

The Landis amp Gyr Automatic Sequence Controller is a plug-in unit locating on a pre-wired chassis To remove the controller undo the two retaining screws at the top left and lower right corners and pull the module off the chassis

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

852 CONTROLS CIRCUIT (24 VOLT) TRANSFORMER

The Controls Circuit Transformer is fixed to the panel back plate by tapped screws To remove the transformer undo the wiring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel Undo the two retaining screws and remove the unit complete

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

853 CONTROL RELAYS R1 R2 amp R3

The Control Relays are DIN Rail mounted To remove a relay undo the wIring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel Release the DIN rail retaining clip under the relay with a screwdriver and remove the relay

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

854 6A MCB

The 6A MCB is DIN Rail mounted To remove the MCB undo the wiring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel Release the DIN rail retaining clip under the MCB with a screwdriver and remove the MCB

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

855 THERMAL OVERLOAD

The thermal overload is attached to the underside of the main contactor To remove the overload undo the wiring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel and that the overload setting is as specified in Section 13 of this manual Unscrew the three connections to the contactor and remove the overload

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 37

8 SERVICING 3000S

856 MAIN CONTACTOR

The Main Contactor is DIN Rail mounted To remove the contactor remove the thermal overload as 855 above and then undo the wiring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel Release the DIN rail retaining clip under the contactor with a screwdriver and remove the contactor

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

857 MOTOR FUSE

To replace a motor fuse pull the fuse carrier off the fuse holder base The fuse is attached to the fuse carrier by two screws Unscrew remove and replace

86 REMOTE CONTROL STATION

The remote control station contains some serviceable parts although these items should only be fitted by an approved RS STOKVIS Ltd Engineer

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 38

9 RECOMMENDED SPARES 3000S

For two years operation it is recommended that the following items should be held in stock

ITEM DESCRIPTION PART NO QUANTITY i

1 INDICATOR BULBS W1121 1 PACK

2 SPARK PLUG 023739 1 I

3 UVDETECTOR QRA10C 1 I

4 ROOM SENSOR DRT2453 1

5 DUCT SENSOR DDT1701 1

All replacement parts can be obtained from RS STOKVIS Ltd by quoting the air handler serial number the part number and description

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 39

APPENDIX 1 30005

SOUNDNESS TESTING THE FUEL GAS PIPEWORK

This procedure should only be carried out by personnel familiar with the ECONO-AIR 3000S Series Air handler

The pressure test points and all valves are identified on the Process and Instrumentation Diagram for the air handler included in Section 1 of this n1anual

Isolate the air handler electric supply at the main control panel and lock off Close the manual isolation valves MV1 MV6 and PV3 Ensure the supply pressure is available on the upstream side of MV1

A11 TESTING THE UPSTREAM PIPEWORKAND BURNER CONTROLS 1 Connect a 60 mbar manometer to the pressure test nipple A Monitor the

pressure for two minutes Any rise in pressure indicates that valve MV1 is leaking and must be replaced Remove pressure test points Band F

2 Open MV1 to pressurise the pipework on both the main gas and pilot line to the first block valve

3 Close MV1 Allow one minute for the temperature to stabilise and then test the system for 2 minutes and watch for a drop in the pipework pressure If the pressure falls open valve MV1 and test the pipework connections and valves from MV1 to MV3 and MV1 to PV2 for leaks with a proprietary leak detector fluid or spray Turn off MV1 seal any leaks and re-test

4 If no extemalleaks are found either the pilot block valve PV1 or either the first main gas block valve MV3 is letting by

5 To test this seal pressure test point A and fit a manometer to pressure test point B Leave for two minutes with MV1 open A rise in pressure on the manometer confirms a leak on the block valve MV3 Turn off MV1 exchange the valve and re-test from point 2 above

6 Repeat this procedure for the pilot block valve Seal test point B and fit a manometer to pressure test point F Leave for two minutes with MV1 open A rise in pressure on the manometer confirms a leak on the pilot block valve PV2 Turn off MV1 exchange the valve and re-test from point 1 above Seal test point F

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 40

APPENDIX 1 30005

A12 TESTING THE DOWNSTREAM BURNER VALVE 1 Close MV1 and connect pressure test points A and 8 with flexible 6 mm bore

tubing teed into the manometer Remove pressure test point C Open MV1 to pressurise the downstream block valve MV4

2 Close MV1 and leave for one minute for the temperature to stabilise Monitor the pressure for 2 minutes If the pressure falls open valve MV1 and leak test the line between the two block valves MV3 and MV4 with a proprietary leak detector Turn off MV1 seal any leaks and re-test Note Smaller air handlers in the 3000S Series are fitted with multi-functional valves combining the pressure regulator and two block valves in one component The above procedure still applies but if a leak is found on either block valve the whole control should be replaced If no external leaks are found the downstream block valve is letting by

3 To confirm this close MV1 remove the manometer and refit to pressure test point C Connect pressure test points A and 8 with flexible 6mm bore tubing Open MV1 and allow one minute for the temperature to stabilise Monitor the pressure for a further 2 minutes with MV1 still open A rise in pressure confirms that the second block valve MV4 is letting by Turn off MV1 Replace the valve and re-test from 2 above

A13 TESTING THE DOWNSTREAM BURNER PIPEWORK 1 Close MV1 and connect pressure test points A and D with flexible 6 mm bore

tubing teed into the manometer Open MV1 to pressurise the downstream pilot pipework

2 Close MV1 and leave for one minute for the temperature to stabilise Monitor the pressure for 2 minutes If the pressure falls open valve MV1 and leak test the line between the downstream block valve MV4 and the manual block MV6 with a proprietary leak detector fluid or spray If no external leaks are found the manual block valve MV6 is letting by Turn off MV1 seal any leakages and reshytest from 2 above

A14 TESTING THE DOWNSTREAM PILOT PIPEWORK 1 Close MV1 and connect pressure test points A and F with flexible 6mm bore

tubing teed into the manometer Open MV1 to pressurise the downstream pilot pipework

2 Close MV1 and leave for one rninute for the temperature to stabilise Monitor the pressure for 2 minutes If the pressure falls open valve MV1 and leak test the line between the downstream block valve PV2 and the manual block PV3 with a proprietary leak detector fluid or spray If no external leaks are found the manual block valve PV3 is letting by Turn off MV1 seal any leakages and reshytest from 2 above

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 41

APPENDIX 1 30005

A15 TESTING THE BURNER CONNECTIONS 1 Remove the burner access panel as described in Section 84 of this manual

Remove the burner spark igniter Slacken the two retaining bolts holding the burner to the burner support straps and unbolt the burner supply endplate from the burner casting and mixing plates

2 Connect pressure test points A and 0 with flexible 6mm bore tubing teed into the manometer Open MV1 and MV6 to pressurise the burner pipework Leak test the main gas burner pipework and connections with proprietary leak detector fluid Turn off MV6 Seal any leakages and re-test

3 Connect pressure test points A and F with flexible 6 mm bore tubing teed into the manometer Open MV1 and PV3 to pressurise the pilot burner pipework Leak test the pilot gas burner pipework and connections with proprietary leak detector fluid Turn off PV3 Seal any leakages and re-test

4 Turn off MV1

5 Replace the spark igniter and profile division plate

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 42

APPENDIX 2 30005

START SEQUENCE

The burner start sequence is controlled by the Landis and Gyr burner management unit The timings are pre-set and comply with 885885 This unit must NOT be tampered with

A brief description of the start-up sequence isshy

The unit checks

1 The NO FLAME signal on the UV flame scanner

Note If the scanner detects a flame at any time other than in the correct operating sequence the flame programmer initiates a lockout

2 The operation of the combustion air proving switch in the NO AIR position

3 The air handler discharge high temperature switch

If the checks are completed the unit starts the combustion air fan and then checks the combustion airflow

Once the airflow is proven the unit checks that the damper control circuit is functioning correctly After the damper microswitch is made to prove the fresh air damper is fully open the sequence allows 30 seconds for the combustion air to purge any combustible gas from the air handler

After completion of the purge the spark ignition system is energised the pilot valve opened and the spark terminated If the pilot flame is not proven by the UV scanner the system will initiate a LOCKOUT

If the flame is proven the main gas valves are opened the pilot extinguished and the main burner flame proven

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 43

i

APPENDIX 2 30008

The following flow chart shows the complete start sequence including the lighting of the various indicating lamps

MANUAL STATUS LIGHT POWER ON

POWER ON

I INITIATE START BY TIME

SETTING ON CONTROLLER

I CHECK NO FLAME

VISIBLE

PROVEj FAIL LOCKOUT

I CHECK RELAY R4 NC

POSITION

PROVE FAIL NO START

I CHECK AIR PRESSURE SWITCH NC POSITION

PROVE FAIL NO START

I CHECK RELAY R1 NC

POSITION

PROVE j

FAIL NO START

I START COMBUSTION

AIR BLOWER

I CHECK AIR PRESSURE SWITCH NO POSITION

PROVE I

FAIL NO START

I STATUS LIGHT FAN ON

I ENERGISE RELAY R1

I

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 44

I

I

APPENDIX 2 30008

I CHECK OVERHEAT LIMIT

CONTROL R5

PROVE I

FAIL I I

CHECK 541412 LOOP CLOSED ON

LANDIS ampGYR CIRCUIT

PROVE I

FAIL I I

COMBUSTION AIR PURGE PERIOD

30 SECONDS

I

NO START

NO START

CANCEL NO FLAME CHECK CIRCUIT

I

ENERGISE SPARK

I TIMED PERIOD 25 SECONDS

I ENERGISE PILOT GAS

VALVE

I TIMED PERIOD 25 SECONDS

I TERMINATE SPARK

I INTERROGATE UV FLAME SCANNER

PROVE I

FAIL I I

TIMED PERIOD 10 SECONDS

I

LOCKOUT

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 45

I

I

APPENDIX 2 3000S

I ENERGISE MAIN GAS

VALVES

I

STATUS LIGHT BURNER ON

I TIMED PERIOD

5 SECONDS

I DE-ENERGISE PILOT

GAS VALVES

CONTINUOUS FROM PILOT

I INTERROGATE UV FLAME SCANNER

PROVE I

FAIL I I

LOCKOUT I

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 46

APPENDIX 3 30005

Please see copy of Standard Service Sheet

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 47

APPENDIX 4 30005

A41 TIME OUT SCREEN

This is the standard screen displayed when the touch screen is not in use The back light is off to save energy_ To access the STATUS screen touch the ENTER key and the following screen is displayed

[]][I][]rn[IJOO[][IJOO[] EJ~E11 I[]I ~ middot I

NOTE

The Touch Screen operates using the heat produced by the touch of a finger and therefore only LIGHT pressure is required

Excessive pressure can damage the Touch Screen

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 48

APPENDIX 4 30008

A42 STATUS SCREEN

On the typical STATUS screen the illustrated information detailed is as follows

19 36 Fan Brn

RS OS

100 Fst_~_ Lck _ _ Xst Gas~o ~ I

RS Indicates the current room temperature

OS ~( t~~ the current duct discharge temperature

Fan Indicates the current status of the fan by showing the arrow and the fan blades for ON and OFF is shown by the arrow and fan blades being removed

Brn Indicates the current status of the burner with the black flames indicating the burner to be ON and vice versa

Lck LOCKOUT - This indicates a flame failure when highlighted during normal or start-up operation

Xst EXCESS TEMPERATURE SWITCH - This indicates the unit has reached the trip limit on the over heat stat when highlighted during operation

Indicates the current position of the gas modulating valve during normal Gas

operation (0-100)

Indicates whether the Frost stat is energised and the unit is running on frost Fst

override

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 49

APPENDIX 4 30008

A43 CHANGING SETTINGS

It is possible to change the settings for the time of operation and the required temperature set points The following details the steps required

A44 ENTERING THE SECURITY CODE

From the STATUS screen touch the return key and the screen below will be displayed

Type the HIGH LEVEL security code (4321) If you make a mistake use the BACK SPACE key to delete any incorrect number(s) Touch the ENTER key when the code is correct

If the security code is incorrect the screen above will be displayed then try again If after several attempts you can not gain access please contact RS STOKVIS Ltd for further information

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 50

APPENDIX 4 30008

When the code is entered correctly the MAIN MENU is displayed as detailed below

~ STATUS SET VALUES~ ~ TIVIE CLOCK [) [) [) [) [)

The MAIN MENU screen shows the three menu items available The title for each menu item can be changed to suit the end user Please notify RS STOKVIS Ltd prior to commissioning should these parameters require special amendments

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 51

APPENDIX 4 30008

A45 CHANGING OR SETTING A TIME SCHEDULE

From the main menu screen select the TIME CLOCK page by running finger across screen symbol and touch the ENTER key the screen below will be displayed

On the following screen highlight the TS1 symbol and touch the ENTER key

The current time schedule will now be displayed as shown below The display will automatically default to the current day (1 =Monday 2 =Tuesday etc) In this case day 5 (Friday) the four schedule switching times refer to that day

IAC6BBB1BHIS1

mm0CIl bull mID 17BB 17BB 17HB

Iillleschedule

To modify a time select it by highlighting and touch the ENTER key and the following screen is displayed

To amend the appropriate onoff time as shown on the screen below The arrows to the right of the time are for altering the hours and the arrows on the left for the minutes

Once you have set the time use the ESCape key to exit back to the time schedule screen and choose another day by touching the required number Another time may now be modified as before

IAC6BBB1BHIS1

H8BH

I i eschedule

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 52

APPENDIX 4 30008

Use the ESCape key to exit back to the MAIN MENU screen

~ STATUS ~ SET VALUES

TIME CLOCK []~ [] [] [] []

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 53

APPENDIX 4 30005

A46 CHANGING SET VALUES

From the main menu screen select the SET VALUES page by highlight in the normal way and touch the ENTER key

The following screen is displayed

36 19 18III III IIIHsv Rsv Llv

To change the RSV highlight it in the normal way and touch the ENTER key and the screen below will now be shown

IAC6RRR1RR40 T I

0 19 (Y)l RSV

ROOM SET VALUE

The above screen shows the parameters that can be changed The values to the far left are the limitations of set point (OC) Change the set point by using the UP and DOWN ARROWS on the left of the screen or touch the set value itself followed by the ENTER key to select the set value and set it directly using the numeric keyboard All values can be changed in this way

Use the ESCape key twice to exit back to the MAIN MENU screen

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 54

APPENDIX 4 30005

A47 COMMISSIONING AND SERVICING BURNER CHECKS

Select the SET VALUES screen from the MAIN MENU screen and adjust the high lirrlit set point to 55degC to drive the burner to high fire

IAC6HHH1HH60 ~T I

0 19 (Y)

HSV

HIGH SET VALUE ~

Ensure the set value is returned to 36degC once the appropriate checks and adjustments as described in Section 43 of this manual have been completed Return to the SET VALUES screen and select the low limit value to adjust the low fire setting

Reduce the low limit value to OdegC to drive the gas valve to low fire and complete the appropriate checks and adjustments as described in Section 43 of this manual and ensure the set value is returned to the original value

A48 GMT ltgt BST CHANGEOVER DAYLIGHT SAVINGS

To change your unit to British Summer TimelWinter Time the following system screen must be highlighted by touching the Iamp1 button twice

By touching the clock symbol in the top left hand corner followed by the ENTER key the screen below will be displayed

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 55

APPENDIX 4 30008

188311 851193

544

By touching and highlighting in this case 18 followed by the ENTER key A small box allowing the entry of two digits will appear Enter the desired time required using the numbered keys followed by ENTER key Your unit is now set to operate on BSTBWT

Touch the ESC key three times to return back to the Status screen

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 56

STOKVIS ENERGY SYSTEMS 96R WALTON ROAD EAST MOLESEY SURREY KT8 0DL TEL 020 8783 3050 08707 707 747 FAX 020 8783 3051 08707 707 767 E-MAIL infostokvisboilerscom WEBSITE wwwstokvisboilerscom

JULY 1999

Page 19: ECONOAIR 3000S SERIES AIR HANDLING UNIT DIRECT FIREDstokvisboilers.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/EconoAir... · 2019-05-10 · ECONOAIR 3000S SERIES AIR HANDLING UNIT DIRECT FIRED

3 INSTALLATION 3000S

38 REMOTE STATION

The ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler is supplied with a remote control station This should be mounted in a position convenient to the end user If possible it should not be mounted on an external wall or where the space temperature detector is affected by cold draughts or a local source of heat

39 VISUAL CHECK

After completion of installation re-check the air handler for signs of damage Report any instance to RS STOKVIS Ltd

310 CONNECTION OF SERVICES

The air handler requires the connection of fuel gas and electricity

3101 FUEL GAS SUPPLY

The ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler has been designed for use on Natural Gas An alternative version is available for LPG The gas type for the air handler supplied is clearly marked on the air handler data badge and on the Specification sheet in Section 1 of this manual Check the gas type is correct and that the supply pressure is within the range marked on the specification

The local gas Authority should be consulted about the adequacy of the gas service and meter supplies for existing and proposed extensions to the installation and for any requirements for boosting the gas supply_

Connect the fuel gas supply to the inlet manual valve on the air handler gas train The connection size is detailed in Section 1 of this manual A further isolation valve and union should be fitted immediately adjacent to the appliance which when the valve is closed allows the complete burner and control assembly to be disconnected for maintenance or repair

New gas pipework should be installed to British Gas Publication IGEUP2 and be purged and pressure tested in accordance with British Gas Publications IGEUP1

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 15

3 INSTALLATION 3000S

3102 ELECTRICITY SUPPLY

All external wiring shall be carried out and checked by a competent person All components shall be checked for suitability for voltage range and frequency

Means for electric isolation having a contact separation of at least 3mm in all poles must be provided adjacent to the air handler The electrical supply to the appliance shall incorporate suitable means of excess current protection

The ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler requires a 3 phase 4 wire supply which should be connected to the main control panel Check the air handler data badge for the correct electrical supply The maximum supply requirement is Specified in Section 1 of this manual Note that the 240 Volt air handler control circuit is taken from the lUI phase to Neutral Connection should be made as shown on the wiring diagram shipped inside this panel

The air handler must be earthed in accordance with BS5986 and CP1013

Check all terminal strip terminations for wires which have become loose during shipment

311 CONNECTION TO THE MAIN PANEL AND REMOTE STATION

Interconnecting wiring to the main panel and remote station should be made with a minimum specification of 075 mm2 300 Volt cable Check that no wires on the terminal strip have become loose during shipment The remote panel should be mounted at a height of approx 18m If possible it should not be mounted on an external wall or where the sensor will be affected by cold draughts or a local source of heat

Both panel and remote station must be earthed in accordance with BS5986 and CP1013

312 HEATED SPACE TEMPERATURE SENSOR

The space temperature sensor located on the remote panel should be connected with screened cable or twin low voltage signal cable run in its own separate conduit It should be mounted on the remote panel or adjacent to the outlet at a height of approx 18m If possible it should not be mounted on an external wall or where the sensor will be affected by cold draughts or a local source of heat

313 DUCT SENSOR

The duct sensor should be connected with screened cable or twin low voltage signal cable run in its own separate conduit It should be mounted in the air handler discharge as close as possible to the discharge into the heated space

314 OVERHEAT LIMIT CONTROL SENSOR

The overheat limit control sensor should be connected with twin core cable It should be mounted in the air handler discharge within 1 metre of the air handler outlet connection

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 16

3 INSTALLATION 3000S

315 TOUCH SCREEN WIRING

The touch screen located on the front of the remote station requires two separate twisted pairs of O5mrh2 screened cable run in a separate conduit If the distance between the main and remote stations is greater that 1 km please contact RS STOKVIS Ltd for advice

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 17

3 INSTALLATION 3000S

316 ALIGNMENT

3161 INSTALLATION OF DRIVE BELTS

On 80 amp 89 30008 range of air handlers it will be necessary to align the pulleys and fit the drive belts before carrying out commissioning of the unit

3162 PU LLEYS

Before assembling the drive check the pulley grooves are free from scores or sharp edges and all dimensions conform to the relevant standard

The Taper Lock bush is your starting point when it comes to assembly and installation Drive installation is a straightforward job with Taper Lock - but the stages set out on the installation leaflet provided with every Taper Lock bush should be followed closely

3163 ALIGNMENT

Good alignment of pulleys prior to belt installation is important to avoid belt flank wear The diagram below shows correct installation of pulleys

INTERNAl BEARING

MOTOR PUlLEY rAN PULLEY

MOTORMOTOR ADJUSTMENT MOUNTING BOlTSBOLTS

3164 BELTS

When the pulleys have been correctly positioned on the shafts the belts can be installed to complete the drive

The drive centre distance should be reduced prior to the installation of the belts so that they may be fitted without the use of force Under no circumstances must belts be prised into the grooves Using sharp tools to stretch the belts over the pulley rim can easily damage belts and pulley grooves

The installation allowance given in the table below is the minimum recommended reduction in centre distance for various belt section and lengths to allow for correct fitting

The take-up allowance given in the same table should be added on to the calculated centre distance to allow for belt stretch

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 18

3 INSTALLATION 3000S

3165 INSTALLATION AND TAKE UP ALLOWANCE

Belt Pitch Installation Allowance Take-Up Length (mm) SPZ SPA SPB SPC (mm)

410 to 530 5

540 to 840 10

850 to 1160 15

1170 to 1500 20

1510 to 1830 20 25

1840 to 2170 30

2180 to 2830 25 40

2840 to 3500 30 50

3520 to 4160 50 60

4170 to 5140 70

5220 to 6150 85

6180 to 7500 105

600 to 8500 125

8880 to 10170 145

10600 to 12500 175

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 19

4 COMMISSIONING 30005

This appliance must be commissioned by a RS STOKVIS Ltd approved engineer

41 PRESTART CHECKS

1 Switch the SUMMERIOFFMlINTER switch on the remote station to OFF

2 Check the correct electric supply is available to the air handler and the appliance isolator installed

3 Check the correct fuel gas supply is available to the air handler and local isolation valve and union installed Check that new gas pipe work has been correctly purged and pressure tested and that the isolation valve is in the OFF position

4 Check the air handler gas control system and burner connections for pressure soundness as detailed in Appendix 1 of this manual

5 Complete the first section of the Service Check Sheet supplied at the back of this manual (Appendix 3)

6 Close the air handler access door

7 Close and lock the main air handler control panel

8 Switch the main panel isolator to position 1 Check the POWER ON light illuminates

9 Check and set the timed ONOFF periods in the lAC Controller located on the remote panel Ensure that the unit is set to be on during testing Refer to Appendix 4 for the lAC setting procedure

10 Close and lock the remote panel

11 Switch the SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch on the remote station to SUMMER to start the air fan Return the switch to the OFF position and check for correct rotation of the fan as the fan slows and stops

The fan rotation can be observed through the fan section access door or through the air handler access door Only do this during the fan run-down period Ensure the door is securely fastened after completion

Rotation arrows are fitted on the end of the air handler and inside the air handler above the interior bearing support If the rotation is incorrect two phases should be interchanged as dictated by the Engineer responsible for the site electrical system

12 Check the air pressure drop across the burner whilst the fan is operating with a water column pressure gauge connected to the two pressure test points on the air pressure switch (DPS) This pressure should be between 14 and 16 rnbar

If the air differential pressure measured above is not within the operating range check inlet and outlet ductwork as appropriate and any filters fitted If the pressure differential is still not within limits isolate the air handler and report to RS STOKVIS Ltd before proceeding

13 Check the operation and setting of the Low Air Pressure Switch by injecting a controlled signal into the switch Check the break point on the switch is 1 mbar (falling)

Note The switch is set and sealed before fitting The 1 mbar switch point may not coincide with the 1 mbar scale reading on the switch

If on checking the switch is not operating correctly do not tamper with it return it to RS STOKVIS Ltd for replacement

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 20

4 COMMISSIONING 3000S

42 DRY RUN

With all the manual gas isolation valves still in the OFF position switch the SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch to WINTER

43 START UP

1 Attach a manometer to pressure test point F and the low pressure test point on the air pressure switch (DPS)

2 Open the main gas supply valve (MV1) and the pilot burner isolation valve (PV3) Leave the main burner isolation valve (MV6) closed Reset the air handler by pressing the push-button marked RESET on either the main panel or remote station The air handler pilot will light automatically (after the automatic damper start check and combustion air pre-purge) and then LOCKOUT after the main gas shut-off valves are addressed

During the short period that the pilot is in operation check the pilot gas pressure on the manometer It should be 10 mbar and the pilot flame approximately 100 - 150mm in length covering the first three or four holes of the mixing plate and have a steady blue colour when viewed through the sight glass on the access side of the air handler Adjust as necessary - refer to Section 51 this manual Check the flame signal - refer to Section 431

3 Open the main burner isolation valve (MV6) RESET the air handler which should now light to main burner stage When alight close the main burner isolation valve to shut down the gas flow to the burner Check that the unit goes to LOCKOUT

4 Reset the air handler and drive the burner to low fire by adjusting the temperature controller set point as described in Appendix 4 of this manual Check the flame is continuous across the width of the burner and has a flame length of approx 50 - 65mm from the burner rail when viewed through the sight glass on the access side of the air handler Check the burner pressure across pressure test point D and the downstream (low) pressure test point on the air pressure switch ie on the rear of the pressure switch This pressure is specifled in Section 1 of this manual Adjust as necessary-refer to Section 53 of this manual Check the flame signal - refer to Section 431

Where possible check the actual gas flow rate by meter reading with all other appliances turned off

5 Drive the burner to high fire by adjusting the temperature controller set point and high limit to 55degC as described in Appendix 4 of this manual Check the flame is continuous across the burner rail and has a flame length of approximately 250 - 350mm from the burner rail Check the burner pressure across pressure test point D and the downstream (low) pressure test point on the air pressure switch This pressure is specified in Section 1 of this manual Adjust as necessary - refer to Section 52 of this manual Check the maximum air handler discharge temperature Check the flame signal shyrefer to Section 431

Where possible check the actual gas flow rate by meter reading with all other appliances turned off

6 Check the operation of the overheat limit control by adjusting the temperature controller set point and high limit to 65degC as described in Appendix 4 of this manual Monitor the discharge temperature on the temperature controller Check that the overheat control operates as the set temperature is passed Check that the control must be manually reset by pressing the green reset button on the front of the switch Return the temperature controller to its original settings

In the event that the ambient temperature is too low for this simple procedure to work the instrument will have to be bench tested using a Temperature 8ath Remove and replace the control as Section 84 of this manual for bench-testing

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 21

4 COMMISSIONING 3000S

43 1 FLAME SIGNAL CHECK

1 The ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler is fitted with a Klippon SAKT1 Test Terminal which can be used to measure the flame scanning signal Refer to the Electrical Schematic and connect a 0-1 mA ammeter to the two test points with standard 23 mm test plugs with the positive lead on the detector side Disconnect the terminal link to obtain the signal reading A minimum signal of 70 microamps is required typical signals are in the 250-400 microamp range on both pilot and main flame After completion replace the terminal link and remove the test jacks

2 Drive the burner to high fire as previously described Measure the carbon dioxide content of the discharge air stream This figure must not exceed 2800 ppm If the discharge exceeds this limit isolate the air handler and report to RS STOKVIS Ltd before proceeding

Stop and start the air handler a few times to check for reliability using the Operating Instructions (Section 6)

432 HANDOVER

Complete the air handler Service Check Sheet supplied at the back of this manual The self-copy sheet must be returned to STOKVIS for checking

Instruct the User in efficient use and care of the unit start-up and shutdown (including emergency shutdown) and recommended service interval Emphasise the need to keep the air handler clear of stored items and extraneous material and to maintain the recirculation and fresh air paths to the air handler inlets Hand all instructions as applicable to the UserOwner for safekeeping

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 22

5 ADJUSTMENTS 3000S

If adjustments to the air handler settings are required they should be made by a RS STOKVIS Ltd approved engineer

The normal value for all control settings is specified in Section 1 of this manual

51 PILOT ADJUSTMENT

The pilot gas pressure and flame length may be adjusted by altering the discharge pressure of the pilot governor Screwing the adjusting screw clockwise (located under the top cap) increases the discharge pressure and the flame length anti-clockwise decreases the pressure and the flame length

52 BURNER HIGH FIRE PRESSURE ADJUSTMENT

At high fire alter the spring compression on the main burner governor (MV2) by removing the cap and adjust the spring compression plate clockwise to increase the burner pressure anti-clockwise to decrease burner pressure If the pressure does not increase on adjusting the spring the supply is inadequate

Note On small air handlers fitted with a mUlti-functional control the pressure adjusting screw is located under a swing cap on the first block valve

53 BURNER LOW FIRE ADJUSTMENT

The main burner low fire is adjusted on the flow control valve MV5 (Process amp Instrumentation Diagram)

Remove the top cover of the valve and insert a Terminal Screwdriver in the adjusting screw of the TOP cam marked NI

Drive the burner to low fire by adjusting the temperature controller set-point and high limit to 05degC as described in Appendix 4 of this manual

Turn the Terminal Screwdriver clockwise to decrease the low fire gas flow anti-clockwise to increase the flow

Check the heat input and flame signal at the new position are satisfactory and return the tenlperature controller to its normal settings

Replace the control valve cover

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 23

5 ADJUSTMENTS 3000S

54 SUMMERIOFFIWINTER SWITCH

In the SUMMER position this switch provides ventilation only and is independent of the programmed ON and OFF periods This position is manually selected and must be manually de-selected Whenever the switch is in this position the fan is operating

In the OFF position the air handler is shutdown and will not operate This overrides any frost protection fitted It is suitable for air handler shutdown for short periods such as holidays The programme memory is unaffected by this switch and assumes control of the air handler when the switch is returned to the WINTER position

In the WINTER position the air handler operates off the programme memory to provide heating

55 RESET BUTTON

Visual indication of air handler lockout is provided In the event of lockout occurring the air handler can be reset by depressing the RESET button This parallels the RESET button on the air handler main control panel If after 4 attempts to reset the air handler the lockout indicator still illuminates then a Service Engineer should be called to investigate the problem

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 24

6 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 3000S

61 AIR HANDLER START-UP

1 Open all manual gas valves both on the appliance and on the supply to the appliance Switch on the Electric Supply to the appliance

2 On the main air handler panel

Switch the panel isolator to the 1 position

Check POWER ON light

3 On the remote control station

For Heating Switch the SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch to WINTER

The air handler will now start automatically in response to the time settings

In the event of LOCKOUT

Press the RESET button and the cycle of operations will be repeated If the air handler goes to LOCKOUT four times in succession call for a Service Engineer

For Unheated Ventilation Switch the SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch to SUMMER

Note This prevents the burner firing giving a controlled supply of ventilation air to the heated space as long as the switch is in this position The air handler will now start automatically in response to the timeclock demand To turn the fan off return the switch to the centre OFF position

In the event of LOCKOUT

Press the RESET button and the cycle of operations will be repeated If the air handler goes to LOCKOUT four times in succession call for a Service Engineer

62 AIR HANDLER SHUTDOWN

621 SHUTDOWN FOR SHORT PERIODS

Switch the SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch on the remote station to OFF

622 SHUTDOWN FOR PROLONGED PERIODS

Switch the main panel isolator to the 0 position and close all manual gas valves both on and leading to the appliance

Note Manual gas valves should only be operated when the appliance is to be shut off for either Servicing or for a prolonged shutdown

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 25

30005 6 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

63 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS

631 SITE CLEARANCE ADJACENT TO AIR HANDLER

Attention should be paid to keeping the area around the air handler tidy No rubbish should be allowed to accumulate in the vicinity of the air handler and storage of goods etc should not be permitted within two metres of the air handler Failure to comply could result in reduced airflow to the air handler causing inefficient running and potential overheat cond ition

632 AIR SUPPLY TO AIR HANDLER

Air vents and grilles supplying air to the air handler should never be blocked and should be checked periodically to ensure they are clear

633 AIR FILTERS

Similarly attention should be paid to cleaning or replacing the filters to the air handler if fitted Your installer should advise you on the frequency with which this would be required to be completed

634 SERVICE

For continued safe and efficient operation of this air air handler it is important that servicing of the air handler should be completed at regular intervals by a competent person in accordance with Section 82 of this manual Users are advised to enter into a Service Agreement with RS STOKVIS Ltd

635 SPARE PARTS

It is suggested that a complete set of spare parts essential to the running of the air handler and recommended by the installer are kept by the user on the premises where the air handler is installed This is particularly important where the air handler forms an essential part of any process plant and its being out of operation may cause problems by for example frost damage or condensation by super-cooling

A list of Recommended Spares will be found in Section 9 of this manual

636 GAS LEAKS

If a smell of gas is detected around the area of the appliance Switch off all manual gas valves and contact your service engineer or the local gas undertaking

NEVER

LOOK FOR GAS LEAKS WITH A LIGHTED MATCH OR NAKED

FLAME

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 26

7 FAULT FINDING 30008

The main control panel incorporates two lights to help in fault finding

POWER ON

LOCKOUT

The remote station also has three lights

AIR FAN ON

BURNER ON

LOCKOUT

This section gives the possible causes of failure associated with each check light The electrical schematic diagram in this manual and the wiring diagram shipped in the main air handler panel should be used in conjunction with the notes below Additionally Service Engineers should familiarise themselves with the detailed Start Sequence given in Appendix 2 of this manual

The notes are given for each light before consulting the notes check for bulb failure

71 POWER ON LIGHT IS UNLIT

Check

1 Main control panel isolator is in the 1 position

2 Main Panel 6A MCB has not tripped if a trip has occurred the switch will be at the OFF position Reset and test system as required

3 Also check if the mains electrical supply is isolated If so FIND OUT WHY before taking any action

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 27

7 FAULT FINDING 30005

72 AIR FAN ON LIGHT IS UNLIT

Check

1 SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch is not in Position OFF

2 Timeperiod is not set to off

3 Air handler is not at LOCKOUT

4 Recheck both AIR FAN ON and LOCKOUT bulbs

Two fault indications are possible

1 THE FAN IS NOT OPERATING

If the fan should have started but is not operating

Check 1 Overload for tripped conditions Reset the overload and monitor the next start-up

2 Motor Fuses

3 Relays 1 2 amp3 for failure

laClor CC1 for failure

5 Air Pressure Switch (DPS) is failed in the N 0 Position

Replace the faulty component as described in Section 8

2 THE FAN IS OPERATING

This indicates that the air pressure switch (DPS) has failed to change over

Measure the profile plate differential pressure as described in Section 4113 If the pressure is correct the air pressure switch is faulty Check the switch as in 4114 If the pressure is not correct

Check 1 Correct fan belt tension

2 Correct fan rotation

3 The air handler air inlets and discharge are not blocked

4 Correct fitting on filters

5 The air differential pressure switch impulse lines are not blocked or leaking

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 28

7 FAULT FINDING 30008

73 LOCKOUT LIGHT IS ILLUMINATED

This light indicates a failure in the burner ignition and flame supervision system

RESET the unit and follow the progress of the start sequence The full cycle may take two minutes

1

------t

2 LOCKOUT after 35-40 seconds indicates an ignition failure RESET the system and observe the pilot and ignition spark during the start-up attempt

I-- shy

3 Observe the spark This should be strong and highly visible If not remove and clean the spark plug as Section 82 Check that the spark plug gap is correctly set at 15 mm

-- shy

4 Check the pilot flame If the pilot flame ignites and the unit goes to LOCKOUT the scanning system is at fault Remove and clean the detector as Section 82 Check the flame signal as in Section 431

5 If the pilot does not light the gas supply system is faulty Check the pilot system for restriction and the pilot valve operation

6 If the pilot lights and the unit goes to LOCKOUT after the main gas valves are addressed either the flow control valve is blocked or one of the main gas block valves has failed Fit a manometer on the pressure test point on the outlet flange of the multishyfunctional control and observe if the pressure rises when the main gas valves are addressed No pressure rise will indicate failure of the main gas valves

74 AIR FAN ON LIGHT ILLUMINATED

If the burner does not start check

1 SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch is in WINTER position

2 Overheat Limit Control

These interlocks prevent the burner management system starting

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 29

8 SERVICING 3000S

IMPORTANT Servicing and maintenance should be only carried out by a RS STOKVIS Ltd approved engineer

Only use replacement parts provided by the appliance manufacturer

Check that the air openings for combustion and for ventilation of any plant roon or compartment are clear

81 ISOLATION

811 FUEL GAS ISOLATION

The fuel gas to the ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler should be isolated and locked off at the manual ball valve mounted at the start of the fuel gas line Additionally before entering or servicing the air handler the burner manual isolation valve and pilot line isolation valve should be closed

812 ELECTRICAL ISOLATION

All electric power to the air handler and the remote control station is switched through the local isolator This isolator is fitted with a lock facility to permit it to be locked in the OFF position

Additionally isolate the power at the Wall Isolator

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 30

8 SERVICING 30005

82 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE

The air handler should be routinely serviced at the start of each heating season Isolate the air handler as above before servicing Details of access to individual components are given in Section 84 of this manual

1 Remove and clean spark igniter Check that the gap is correctly set at 25 mm Replace every two years

2 Clean the flame detector lens to ensure freedom from dirt and moisture If the cell shows any sign of cracks it should be replaced Routinely replace the cell every two years or after 10000 hours of operation which ever comes first

3 Inspect the entire air handler paint system for general damage Repair as necessary

4 Every two years brush the burner plates and clear the burner holes carefully with a Size 18mm drill for NP II and 20mm drill for NP I

WARNING THE BURNER HOLES MUST NOT BE ENLARGED

5 Inspect and lubricate all damper linkages to ensure freedom of operation Wipe off all excess lubricants to prevent dirt build up on linkage parts

6 Check the fan belt for cracks and splits Check tension The correct tension gives 16mm deflection per metre of span when the belt is centrally loaded with a force of 27N Adjust as necessary

7 Grease both the fan shaft bearings with Mobiith AW2 grease or similar

NEVER use high temperature grease

NEVER mix two different greases within the bearing always flush existing grease out

Note Removing the cover plate on the end of the air handler gains access to the outboard fan bearing

Light to Slow to 0 120 2 to 6 months Clean Dry

Medium Medium 120 200 1 to 2 months

Moderate to Light to Slow to 0 120 1 to 4 weeks Dry

Dirty Medium Medium 120 200 1 to 7 days

Extreme Dirt Dry Light to Slow to 0 200 Daily Flushing out

Medium Medium Dirt

83 ANNUAL SERVICE CHECKS

After Servicing test fire the air handler following the Commissioning Procedure detailed in Section 4 of this manual to ensure correct operation generally Special attention must be paid to the damper system and related controls and interlocks

Additionally check that the fresh air and recirculation air entry path to the air handler has been kept clear and instruct the User of the need for this as necessary

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 31

8 SERVICING 3000S

84 REMOVAL PROCEDURE FOR REPLACEABLE COMPONENTS

IMPORTANT

Turn off the gas at the appliance service valve and the electricity at the main panel and wall isolator before proceeding

841 BURNER

The burner is located inside the air handler casing and is mounted on two brackets from the support straps To remove the burner isolate the air handler as in 81 and undo the union on the fuel gas line adjacent to the burner isolation valve (MV6) and unscrew the main and pilot gas feed pipes from the burner rail Access to the rear of the burner assembly is made by removing the partition plate below the burner separating the fresh air inlet to the burner from the return air inlet compartment This is held in place by screws which engage in captive nuts on the top side of the partition Remove the Flame Detector and pull off the ignition plug cap Disconnect the burner support brackets and remove the burner The burner will easily pass through the access hatch for further strip down Replace in the reverse order soundness test the gas pipework check the burner operation and duty as described in the commissioning section of this manual

842 FLAME DETECTOR

This is a 240 Volt instrument

The flame detector is mounted on the end of the burner rail inside the air handler casing To remove the detector isolate the panel electric supply and lock off Push the scanner towards the burner and rotate to release the bayonet fixing and lift the detector from its mount Remove the two screws holding the detector cover and disconnect the supply leads noting the polarity of the connections

Replace the flame detector in the reverse order ensuring correct polarity of connections Ensure the access panel is securely closed and the retaining nuts are tightened down Check operation by inserting a test meter in the points provided in the main control panel and reading the flame signals during start up to full rate burner operation (See 431) Operate the appliance over six starts for reliability of operation including tum off of start and main gas valves to check for lockout operation

843 IGNITER SPARK PLUG

This is a high tension spark plug

The igniter spark plug is mounted on the end of the burner rail inside the air handler casing To remove the spark plug isolate the air handler as above Enter the service access door Access to the spark plug is made through the profile plate To remove the spark plug pull off the high tension lead and unscrew the plug with a plug spanner

When replacing the spark plug check the plug gap is set at 15mm Check ignition reliability over six start ups

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 32

8 SERVICING 3000S

844 IGNITER SPARK TRANSFORMER

This is a 240 Volt instrument

The ignition transformer is located in a plastic box mounted on the air handler casing adjacent to the main control panel To remove the transformer isolate the air handler as above and unscrew the four retaining screws holding the box lid in place and remove the lid Disconnect the supply cable at the terminal strip and undo the transformer retaining screws The transformer may then be unscrewed from the High Tension cable leading to the spark plug

Replacement is a simple reversal of this procedure

Check ignition reliability over six start ups

845 COMBUSTION AIR PRESSURE SWITCH (DPS)

Note The switch is set and sealed and should be replaced if not operating correctly

This switch is a 240 Volt instrument

The air switch is mounted directly on the air handler casing and can be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove the switch isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the supply cable Break the downstream pipe compression fitting and unscrew the switch housing from its locating fitting Reverse the procedure to replace after ensuring switch setting is as specified in Section 13 of this manual Operate the air handler to ensure reliability of operation over six start ups

846 AIR HANDLER OVERHEAT LIMIT CONTROL

This is a 240 Volt instrument

The overheat limit control can be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove the control isolate the air handler as above and lock off Remove the switch cover Disconnect the supply cable and unscrew the control housing from its locating fitting Reverse the procedure to replace check the switch is set to 50degC Test the switch operation as described in Section 43 over at least three operations

847 AIR FAN AND MOTOR

The air fan motor is a 415 Volt 3 phase motor

The motor and slide rails are easily accessible inside the air handler casing If it is necessary to remove the motor isolate the air handler as above Slacken the fan-belt tension and remove the drive belts Pull the motor away from the air handler casing to make access to the motor terminal box and disconnect the supply cable The motor may now be removed from the unit Following replacement the air handler must be fully re-commissioned as in Section 4

It is unlikely that the air fan will need replacing or servicing If required a full procedure should be obtained from RS STOKVIS Ltd

Replacement must be followed by full re-commissioning as in Section 4

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 33

8 SERVICING 3000S

848 FUEL GAS MULTI-FUNCTIONAL CONTROL - SMALL UNITS

This is a 240 Volt instrument

The fuel gas multi-functional control can be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove the unit isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the Hirschman electric termination Unbolt the control from its flanges and remove

When replacing care must be taken to ensure the flange 0 rings are undamaged and in the correct location Following replacement the air handler must be fully reshycommissioned as in Section 4 including tests for soundness prior to start-up

849 GOVERNOR AND BLOCK VALVES

The block valves are 240 Volt instruments

All these items may be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove any item isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the electric termination to the two block valves the pilot block valve and the flow control block valve Break the two pipe unions and remove the fuel gas line complete for further strip-down

8410 FUEL GAS FLOW CONTROL VALVE

This is a 24 Volt instrument

The fuel gas How control valve can be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove the valve isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the supply cables to the control valve

On small air handlers fitted with a multi-functional control support the multi-functional control and unbolt its discharge flange Break the union downstream of the burner isolation valve and remove the section of line containing the flow control valve for further strip-down

On large air handlers fitted with separate block valves it will be necessary to remove the fuel gas line complete as Section 8410 above

Following replacement re-commission the air handler

Note If the fresh air damper is not in the full open position the heat input must not exceed the maximum heat input at recirculation condition specified in the technical data section of this manual

8411 PILOT GAS GOVERNOR AND BLOCK VALVE

The block valve is a 240 Volt instrument

Both items may be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove either item isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the electric terrriination to the solenoid valve Undo the upstream pipe union and the compression fitting downstream of the manual block valve (PV3) Remove the pilot gas line complete for further strip down

Replace broken or distorted connections and retest for soundness Ensure the pilot gas pressure is correct and the flame is sensing an output Ensure reliability over six start-ups

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 34

8 SERVICING 3000S

8412 BELT TENSIONING PROCEDURE

The setting tensions are designed to cover a wide range of drives A precise setting force for individual applications can be calculated as detailed

SETTING FORCES

Belt Section

Setting Force To Deflect Belt 16mm per Metre Of Span

Small Pulley Diameter (mm)

Basic Setting Forces Newtons (N) Kilograms (kgf)

125 x Setting Forces Newtons (N) Kilograms (kgf)

SPZ

56 to 71 16 16 20 20 75 to 90 18 18 22 22

95 to 125 20 20 25 25 Over 125 22 22 28 28

SPA

80 to 100 22 22 28 28 106 to 140 30 30 38 38 150 to 200 36 37 45 46 Over 200 40 40 50 51

SPB

112 to 160 40 40 50 51 170 to 224 50 51 62 63 236 to 355 62 63 77 79 Over 355 65 66 81 83

SPC 224 to 250 70 71 87 89 265 to 355 92 94 115 120 Over 375 115 120 144 150

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 35

8 SERVICING 3000S

BELT TENSIONING USING FENNER BELT TENSION INDICATOR

Calculate the deflection in mm on a basis of 16mm per metre of centre distance Centre Distance (m) x 16 =Deflection (mm)

Set lower marker ring at the deflection distance required in mm on the lower scale

Set upper ring against to bottom edge of the top tube

Place the belt tension indicator on top of the belt at the centre of span and apply a force at right angles to the belt defecting it to the point where the lower marker ring is level with the top of the adjacent belt

Read off the force value indicated by the top edge of the upper marker ring

Compare this force to the kgf value shown in the table above

If a Fenner Belt Tension Indicator is not available a spring balance and rule will be suffice

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 36

8 SERVICING 30005

85 MAIN PANEL CONTROLS

All panel controls are readily accessible and may be easily exchanged for replacement components in the event of failure Ensure any replacement item is of the same make and type as the original

851 LANDIS amp GYR LFL 1335 AUTOMATIC SEQUENCE CONTROLLER

The Landis amp Gyr Automatic Sequence Controller is a plug-in unit locating on a pre-wired chassis To remove the controller undo the two retaining screws at the top left and lower right corners and pull the module off the chassis

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

852 CONTROLS CIRCUIT (24 VOLT) TRANSFORMER

The Controls Circuit Transformer is fixed to the panel back plate by tapped screws To remove the transformer undo the wiring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel Undo the two retaining screws and remove the unit complete

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

853 CONTROL RELAYS R1 R2 amp R3

The Control Relays are DIN Rail mounted To remove a relay undo the wIring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel Release the DIN rail retaining clip under the relay with a screwdriver and remove the relay

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

854 6A MCB

The 6A MCB is DIN Rail mounted To remove the MCB undo the wiring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel Release the DIN rail retaining clip under the MCB with a screwdriver and remove the MCB

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

855 THERMAL OVERLOAD

The thermal overload is attached to the underside of the main contactor To remove the overload undo the wiring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel and that the overload setting is as specified in Section 13 of this manual Unscrew the three connections to the contactor and remove the overload

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 37

8 SERVICING 3000S

856 MAIN CONTACTOR

The Main Contactor is DIN Rail mounted To remove the contactor remove the thermal overload as 855 above and then undo the wiring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel Release the DIN rail retaining clip under the contactor with a screwdriver and remove the contactor

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

857 MOTOR FUSE

To replace a motor fuse pull the fuse carrier off the fuse holder base The fuse is attached to the fuse carrier by two screws Unscrew remove and replace

86 REMOTE CONTROL STATION

The remote control station contains some serviceable parts although these items should only be fitted by an approved RS STOKVIS Ltd Engineer

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 38

9 RECOMMENDED SPARES 3000S

For two years operation it is recommended that the following items should be held in stock

ITEM DESCRIPTION PART NO QUANTITY i

1 INDICATOR BULBS W1121 1 PACK

2 SPARK PLUG 023739 1 I

3 UVDETECTOR QRA10C 1 I

4 ROOM SENSOR DRT2453 1

5 DUCT SENSOR DDT1701 1

All replacement parts can be obtained from RS STOKVIS Ltd by quoting the air handler serial number the part number and description

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 39

APPENDIX 1 30005

SOUNDNESS TESTING THE FUEL GAS PIPEWORK

This procedure should only be carried out by personnel familiar with the ECONO-AIR 3000S Series Air handler

The pressure test points and all valves are identified on the Process and Instrumentation Diagram for the air handler included in Section 1 of this n1anual

Isolate the air handler electric supply at the main control panel and lock off Close the manual isolation valves MV1 MV6 and PV3 Ensure the supply pressure is available on the upstream side of MV1

A11 TESTING THE UPSTREAM PIPEWORKAND BURNER CONTROLS 1 Connect a 60 mbar manometer to the pressure test nipple A Monitor the

pressure for two minutes Any rise in pressure indicates that valve MV1 is leaking and must be replaced Remove pressure test points Band F

2 Open MV1 to pressurise the pipework on both the main gas and pilot line to the first block valve

3 Close MV1 Allow one minute for the temperature to stabilise and then test the system for 2 minutes and watch for a drop in the pipework pressure If the pressure falls open valve MV1 and test the pipework connections and valves from MV1 to MV3 and MV1 to PV2 for leaks with a proprietary leak detector fluid or spray Turn off MV1 seal any leaks and re-test

4 If no extemalleaks are found either the pilot block valve PV1 or either the first main gas block valve MV3 is letting by

5 To test this seal pressure test point A and fit a manometer to pressure test point B Leave for two minutes with MV1 open A rise in pressure on the manometer confirms a leak on the block valve MV3 Turn off MV1 exchange the valve and re-test from point 2 above

6 Repeat this procedure for the pilot block valve Seal test point B and fit a manometer to pressure test point F Leave for two minutes with MV1 open A rise in pressure on the manometer confirms a leak on the pilot block valve PV2 Turn off MV1 exchange the valve and re-test from point 1 above Seal test point F

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 40

APPENDIX 1 30005

A12 TESTING THE DOWNSTREAM BURNER VALVE 1 Close MV1 and connect pressure test points A and 8 with flexible 6 mm bore

tubing teed into the manometer Remove pressure test point C Open MV1 to pressurise the downstream block valve MV4

2 Close MV1 and leave for one minute for the temperature to stabilise Monitor the pressure for 2 minutes If the pressure falls open valve MV1 and leak test the line between the two block valves MV3 and MV4 with a proprietary leak detector Turn off MV1 seal any leaks and re-test Note Smaller air handlers in the 3000S Series are fitted with multi-functional valves combining the pressure regulator and two block valves in one component The above procedure still applies but if a leak is found on either block valve the whole control should be replaced If no external leaks are found the downstream block valve is letting by

3 To confirm this close MV1 remove the manometer and refit to pressure test point C Connect pressure test points A and 8 with flexible 6mm bore tubing Open MV1 and allow one minute for the temperature to stabilise Monitor the pressure for a further 2 minutes with MV1 still open A rise in pressure confirms that the second block valve MV4 is letting by Turn off MV1 Replace the valve and re-test from 2 above

A13 TESTING THE DOWNSTREAM BURNER PIPEWORK 1 Close MV1 and connect pressure test points A and D with flexible 6 mm bore

tubing teed into the manometer Open MV1 to pressurise the downstream pilot pipework

2 Close MV1 and leave for one minute for the temperature to stabilise Monitor the pressure for 2 minutes If the pressure falls open valve MV1 and leak test the line between the downstream block valve MV4 and the manual block MV6 with a proprietary leak detector fluid or spray If no external leaks are found the manual block valve MV6 is letting by Turn off MV1 seal any leakages and reshytest from 2 above

A14 TESTING THE DOWNSTREAM PILOT PIPEWORK 1 Close MV1 and connect pressure test points A and F with flexible 6mm bore

tubing teed into the manometer Open MV1 to pressurise the downstream pilot pipework

2 Close MV1 and leave for one rninute for the temperature to stabilise Monitor the pressure for 2 minutes If the pressure falls open valve MV1 and leak test the line between the downstream block valve PV2 and the manual block PV3 with a proprietary leak detector fluid or spray If no external leaks are found the manual block valve PV3 is letting by Turn off MV1 seal any leakages and reshytest from 2 above

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 41

APPENDIX 1 30005

A15 TESTING THE BURNER CONNECTIONS 1 Remove the burner access panel as described in Section 84 of this manual

Remove the burner spark igniter Slacken the two retaining bolts holding the burner to the burner support straps and unbolt the burner supply endplate from the burner casting and mixing plates

2 Connect pressure test points A and 0 with flexible 6mm bore tubing teed into the manometer Open MV1 and MV6 to pressurise the burner pipework Leak test the main gas burner pipework and connections with proprietary leak detector fluid Turn off MV6 Seal any leakages and re-test

3 Connect pressure test points A and F with flexible 6 mm bore tubing teed into the manometer Open MV1 and PV3 to pressurise the pilot burner pipework Leak test the pilot gas burner pipework and connections with proprietary leak detector fluid Turn off PV3 Seal any leakages and re-test

4 Turn off MV1

5 Replace the spark igniter and profile division plate

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 42

APPENDIX 2 30005

START SEQUENCE

The burner start sequence is controlled by the Landis and Gyr burner management unit The timings are pre-set and comply with 885885 This unit must NOT be tampered with

A brief description of the start-up sequence isshy

The unit checks

1 The NO FLAME signal on the UV flame scanner

Note If the scanner detects a flame at any time other than in the correct operating sequence the flame programmer initiates a lockout

2 The operation of the combustion air proving switch in the NO AIR position

3 The air handler discharge high temperature switch

If the checks are completed the unit starts the combustion air fan and then checks the combustion airflow

Once the airflow is proven the unit checks that the damper control circuit is functioning correctly After the damper microswitch is made to prove the fresh air damper is fully open the sequence allows 30 seconds for the combustion air to purge any combustible gas from the air handler

After completion of the purge the spark ignition system is energised the pilot valve opened and the spark terminated If the pilot flame is not proven by the UV scanner the system will initiate a LOCKOUT

If the flame is proven the main gas valves are opened the pilot extinguished and the main burner flame proven

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 43

i

APPENDIX 2 30008

The following flow chart shows the complete start sequence including the lighting of the various indicating lamps

MANUAL STATUS LIGHT POWER ON

POWER ON

I INITIATE START BY TIME

SETTING ON CONTROLLER

I CHECK NO FLAME

VISIBLE

PROVEj FAIL LOCKOUT

I CHECK RELAY R4 NC

POSITION

PROVE FAIL NO START

I CHECK AIR PRESSURE SWITCH NC POSITION

PROVE FAIL NO START

I CHECK RELAY R1 NC

POSITION

PROVE j

FAIL NO START

I START COMBUSTION

AIR BLOWER

I CHECK AIR PRESSURE SWITCH NO POSITION

PROVE I

FAIL NO START

I STATUS LIGHT FAN ON

I ENERGISE RELAY R1

I

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 44

I

I

APPENDIX 2 30008

I CHECK OVERHEAT LIMIT

CONTROL R5

PROVE I

FAIL I I

CHECK 541412 LOOP CLOSED ON

LANDIS ampGYR CIRCUIT

PROVE I

FAIL I I

COMBUSTION AIR PURGE PERIOD

30 SECONDS

I

NO START

NO START

CANCEL NO FLAME CHECK CIRCUIT

I

ENERGISE SPARK

I TIMED PERIOD 25 SECONDS

I ENERGISE PILOT GAS

VALVE

I TIMED PERIOD 25 SECONDS

I TERMINATE SPARK

I INTERROGATE UV FLAME SCANNER

PROVE I

FAIL I I

TIMED PERIOD 10 SECONDS

I

LOCKOUT

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 45

I

I

APPENDIX 2 3000S

I ENERGISE MAIN GAS

VALVES

I

STATUS LIGHT BURNER ON

I TIMED PERIOD

5 SECONDS

I DE-ENERGISE PILOT

GAS VALVES

CONTINUOUS FROM PILOT

I INTERROGATE UV FLAME SCANNER

PROVE I

FAIL I I

LOCKOUT I

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 46

APPENDIX 3 30005

Please see copy of Standard Service Sheet

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 47

APPENDIX 4 30005

A41 TIME OUT SCREEN

This is the standard screen displayed when the touch screen is not in use The back light is off to save energy_ To access the STATUS screen touch the ENTER key and the following screen is displayed

[]][I][]rn[IJOO[][IJOO[] EJ~E11 I[]I ~ middot I

NOTE

The Touch Screen operates using the heat produced by the touch of a finger and therefore only LIGHT pressure is required

Excessive pressure can damage the Touch Screen

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 48

APPENDIX 4 30008

A42 STATUS SCREEN

On the typical STATUS screen the illustrated information detailed is as follows

19 36 Fan Brn

RS OS

100 Fst_~_ Lck _ _ Xst Gas~o ~ I

RS Indicates the current room temperature

OS ~( t~~ the current duct discharge temperature

Fan Indicates the current status of the fan by showing the arrow and the fan blades for ON and OFF is shown by the arrow and fan blades being removed

Brn Indicates the current status of the burner with the black flames indicating the burner to be ON and vice versa

Lck LOCKOUT - This indicates a flame failure when highlighted during normal or start-up operation

Xst EXCESS TEMPERATURE SWITCH - This indicates the unit has reached the trip limit on the over heat stat when highlighted during operation

Indicates the current position of the gas modulating valve during normal Gas

operation (0-100)

Indicates whether the Frost stat is energised and the unit is running on frost Fst

override

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 49

APPENDIX 4 30008

A43 CHANGING SETTINGS

It is possible to change the settings for the time of operation and the required temperature set points The following details the steps required

A44 ENTERING THE SECURITY CODE

From the STATUS screen touch the return key and the screen below will be displayed

Type the HIGH LEVEL security code (4321) If you make a mistake use the BACK SPACE key to delete any incorrect number(s) Touch the ENTER key when the code is correct

If the security code is incorrect the screen above will be displayed then try again If after several attempts you can not gain access please contact RS STOKVIS Ltd for further information

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 50

APPENDIX 4 30008

When the code is entered correctly the MAIN MENU is displayed as detailed below

~ STATUS SET VALUES~ ~ TIVIE CLOCK [) [) [) [) [)

The MAIN MENU screen shows the three menu items available The title for each menu item can be changed to suit the end user Please notify RS STOKVIS Ltd prior to commissioning should these parameters require special amendments

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 51

APPENDIX 4 30008

A45 CHANGING OR SETTING A TIME SCHEDULE

From the main menu screen select the TIME CLOCK page by running finger across screen symbol and touch the ENTER key the screen below will be displayed

On the following screen highlight the TS1 symbol and touch the ENTER key

The current time schedule will now be displayed as shown below The display will automatically default to the current day (1 =Monday 2 =Tuesday etc) In this case day 5 (Friday) the four schedule switching times refer to that day

IAC6BBB1BHIS1

mm0CIl bull mID 17BB 17BB 17HB

Iillleschedule

To modify a time select it by highlighting and touch the ENTER key and the following screen is displayed

To amend the appropriate onoff time as shown on the screen below The arrows to the right of the time are for altering the hours and the arrows on the left for the minutes

Once you have set the time use the ESCape key to exit back to the time schedule screen and choose another day by touching the required number Another time may now be modified as before

IAC6BBB1BHIS1

H8BH

I i eschedule

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 52

APPENDIX 4 30008

Use the ESCape key to exit back to the MAIN MENU screen

~ STATUS ~ SET VALUES

TIME CLOCK []~ [] [] [] []

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 53

APPENDIX 4 30005

A46 CHANGING SET VALUES

From the main menu screen select the SET VALUES page by highlight in the normal way and touch the ENTER key

The following screen is displayed

36 19 18III III IIIHsv Rsv Llv

To change the RSV highlight it in the normal way and touch the ENTER key and the screen below will now be shown

IAC6RRR1RR40 T I

0 19 (Y)l RSV

ROOM SET VALUE

The above screen shows the parameters that can be changed The values to the far left are the limitations of set point (OC) Change the set point by using the UP and DOWN ARROWS on the left of the screen or touch the set value itself followed by the ENTER key to select the set value and set it directly using the numeric keyboard All values can be changed in this way

Use the ESCape key twice to exit back to the MAIN MENU screen

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 54

APPENDIX 4 30005

A47 COMMISSIONING AND SERVICING BURNER CHECKS

Select the SET VALUES screen from the MAIN MENU screen and adjust the high lirrlit set point to 55degC to drive the burner to high fire

IAC6HHH1HH60 ~T I

0 19 (Y)

HSV

HIGH SET VALUE ~

Ensure the set value is returned to 36degC once the appropriate checks and adjustments as described in Section 43 of this manual have been completed Return to the SET VALUES screen and select the low limit value to adjust the low fire setting

Reduce the low limit value to OdegC to drive the gas valve to low fire and complete the appropriate checks and adjustments as described in Section 43 of this manual and ensure the set value is returned to the original value

A48 GMT ltgt BST CHANGEOVER DAYLIGHT SAVINGS

To change your unit to British Summer TimelWinter Time the following system screen must be highlighted by touching the Iamp1 button twice

By touching the clock symbol in the top left hand corner followed by the ENTER key the screen below will be displayed

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 55

APPENDIX 4 30008

188311 851193

544

By touching and highlighting in this case 18 followed by the ENTER key A small box allowing the entry of two digits will appear Enter the desired time required using the numbered keys followed by ENTER key Your unit is now set to operate on BSTBWT

Touch the ESC key three times to return back to the Status screen

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 56

STOKVIS ENERGY SYSTEMS 96R WALTON ROAD EAST MOLESEY SURREY KT8 0DL TEL 020 8783 3050 08707 707 747 FAX 020 8783 3051 08707 707 767 E-MAIL infostokvisboilerscom WEBSITE wwwstokvisboilerscom

JULY 1999

Page 20: ECONOAIR 3000S SERIES AIR HANDLING UNIT DIRECT FIREDstokvisboilers.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/EconoAir... · 2019-05-10 · ECONOAIR 3000S SERIES AIR HANDLING UNIT DIRECT FIRED

3 INSTALLATION 3000S

3102 ELECTRICITY SUPPLY

All external wiring shall be carried out and checked by a competent person All components shall be checked for suitability for voltage range and frequency

Means for electric isolation having a contact separation of at least 3mm in all poles must be provided adjacent to the air handler The electrical supply to the appliance shall incorporate suitable means of excess current protection

The ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler requires a 3 phase 4 wire supply which should be connected to the main control panel Check the air handler data badge for the correct electrical supply The maximum supply requirement is Specified in Section 1 of this manual Note that the 240 Volt air handler control circuit is taken from the lUI phase to Neutral Connection should be made as shown on the wiring diagram shipped inside this panel

The air handler must be earthed in accordance with BS5986 and CP1013

Check all terminal strip terminations for wires which have become loose during shipment

311 CONNECTION TO THE MAIN PANEL AND REMOTE STATION

Interconnecting wiring to the main panel and remote station should be made with a minimum specification of 075 mm2 300 Volt cable Check that no wires on the terminal strip have become loose during shipment The remote panel should be mounted at a height of approx 18m If possible it should not be mounted on an external wall or where the sensor will be affected by cold draughts or a local source of heat

Both panel and remote station must be earthed in accordance with BS5986 and CP1013

312 HEATED SPACE TEMPERATURE SENSOR

The space temperature sensor located on the remote panel should be connected with screened cable or twin low voltage signal cable run in its own separate conduit It should be mounted on the remote panel or adjacent to the outlet at a height of approx 18m If possible it should not be mounted on an external wall or where the sensor will be affected by cold draughts or a local source of heat

313 DUCT SENSOR

The duct sensor should be connected with screened cable or twin low voltage signal cable run in its own separate conduit It should be mounted in the air handler discharge as close as possible to the discharge into the heated space

314 OVERHEAT LIMIT CONTROL SENSOR

The overheat limit control sensor should be connected with twin core cable It should be mounted in the air handler discharge within 1 metre of the air handler outlet connection

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 16

3 INSTALLATION 3000S

315 TOUCH SCREEN WIRING

The touch screen located on the front of the remote station requires two separate twisted pairs of O5mrh2 screened cable run in a separate conduit If the distance between the main and remote stations is greater that 1 km please contact RS STOKVIS Ltd for advice

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 17

3 INSTALLATION 3000S

316 ALIGNMENT

3161 INSTALLATION OF DRIVE BELTS

On 80 amp 89 30008 range of air handlers it will be necessary to align the pulleys and fit the drive belts before carrying out commissioning of the unit

3162 PU LLEYS

Before assembling the drive check the pulley grooves are free from scores or sharp edges and all dimensions conform to the relevant standard

The Taper Lock bush is your starting point when it comes to assembly and installation Drive installation is a straightforward job with Taper Lock - but the stages set out on the installation leaflet provided with every Taper Lock bush should be followed closely

3163 ALIGNMENT

Good alignment of pulleys prior to belt installation is important to avoid belt flank wear The diagram below shows correct installation of pulleys

INTERNAl BEARING

MOTOR PUlLEY rAN PULLEY

MOTORMOTOR ADJUSTMENT MOUNTING BOlTSBOLTS

3164 BELTS

When the pulleys have been correctly positioned on the shafts the belts can be installed to complete the drive

The drive centre distance should be reduced prior to the installation of the belts so that they may be fitted without the use of force Under no circumstances must belts be prised into the grooves Using sharp tools to stretch the belts over the pulley rim can easily damage belts and pulley grooves

The installation allowance given in the table below is the minimum recommended reduction in centre distance for various belt section and lengths to allow for correct fitting

The take-up allowance given in the same table should be added on to the calculated centre distance to allow for belt stretch

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 18

3 INSTALLATION 3000S

3165 INSTALLATION AND TAKE UP ALLOWANCE

Belt Pitch Installation Allowance Take-Up Length (mm) SPZ SPA SPB SPC (mm)

410 to 530 5

540 to 840 10

850 to 1160 15

1170 to 1500 20

1510 to 1830 20 25

1840 to 2170 30

2180 to 2830 25 40

2840 to 3500 30 50

3520 to 4160 50 60

4170 to 5140 70

5220 to 6150 85

6180 to 7500 105

600 to 8500 125

8880 to 10170 145

10600 to 12500 175

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 19

4 COMMISSIONING 30005

This appliance must be commissioned by a RS STOKVIS Ltd approved engineer

41 PRESTART CHECKS

1 Switch the SUMMERIOFFMlINTER switch on the remote station to OFF

2 Check the correct electric supply is available to the air handler and the appliance isolator installed

3 Check the correct fuel gas supply is available to the air handler and local isolation valve and union installed Check that new gas pipe work has been correctly purged and pressure tested and that the isolation valve is in the OFF position

4 Check the air handler gas control system and burner connections for pressure soundness as detailed in Appendix 1 of this manual

5 Complete the first section of the Service Check Sheet supplied at the back of this manual (Appendix 3)

6 Close the air handler access door

7 Close and lock the main air handler control panel

8 Switch the main panel isolator to position 1 Check the POWER ON light illuminates

9 Check and set the timed ONOFF periods in the lAC Controller located on the remote panel Ensure that the unit is set to be on during testing Refer to Appendix 4 for the lAC setting procedure

10 Close and lock the remote panel

11 Switch the SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch on the remote station to SUMMER to start the air fan Return the switch to the OFF position and check for correct rotation of the fan as the fan slows and stops

The fan rotation can be observed through the fan section access door or through the air handler access door Only do this during the fan run-down period Ensure the door is securely fastened after completion

Rotation arrows are fitted on the end of the air handler and inside the air handler above the interior bearing support If the rotation is incorrect two phases should be interchanged as dictated by the Engineer responsible for the site electrical system

12 Check the air pressure drop across the burner whilst the fan is operating with a water column pressure gauge connected to the two pressure test points on the air pressure switch (DPS) This pressure should be between 14 and 16 rnbar

If the air differential pressure measured above is not within the operating range check inlet and outlet ductwork as appropriate and any filters fitted If the pressure differential is still not within limits isolate the air handler and report to RS STOKVIS Ltd before proceeding

13 Check the operation and setting of the Low Air Pressure Switch by injecting a controlled signal into the switch Check the break point on the switch is 1 mbar (falling)

Note The switch is set and sealed before fitting The 1 mbar switch point may not coincide with the 1 mbar scale reading on the switch

If on checking the switch is not operating correctly do not tamper with it return it to RS STOKVIS Ltd for replacement

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 20

4 COMMISSIONING 3000S

42 DRY RUN

With all the manual gas isolation valves still in the OFF position switch the SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch to WINTER

43 START UP

1 Attach a manometer to pressure test point F and the low pressure test point on the air pressure switch (DPS)

2 Open the main gas supply valve (MV1) and the pilot burner isolation valve (PV3) Leave the main burner isolation valve (MV6) closed Reset the air handler by pressing the push-button marked RESET on either the main panel or remote station The air handler pilot will light automatically (after the automatic damper start check and combustion air pre-purge) and then LOCKOUT after the main gas shut-off valves are addressed

During the short period that the pilot is in operation check the pilot gas pressure on the manometer It should be 10 mbar and the pilot flame approximately 100 - 150mm in length covering the first three or four holes of the mixing plate and have a steady blue colour when viewed through the sight glass on the access side of the air handler Adjust as necessary - refer to Section 51 this manual Check the flame signal - refer to Section 431

3 Open the main burner isolation valve (MV6) RESET the air handler which should now light to main burner stage When alight close the main burner isolation valve to shut down the gas flow to the burner Check that the unit goes to LOCKOUT

4 Reset the air handler and drive the burner to low fire by adjusting the temperature controller set point as described in Appendix 4 of this manual Check the flame is continuous across the width of the burner and has a flame length of approx 50 - 65mm from the burner rail when viewed through the sight glass on the access side of the air handler Check the burner pressure across pressure test point D and the downstream (low) pressure test point on the air pressure switch ie on the rear of the pressure switch This pressure is specifled in Section 1 of this manual Adjust as necessary-refer to Section 53 of this manual Check the flame signal - refer to Section 431

Where possible check the actual gas flow rate by meter reading with all other appliances turned off

5 Drive the burner to high fire by adjusting the temperature controller set point and high limit to 55degC as described in Appendix 4 of this manual Check the flame is continuous across the burner rail and has a flame length of approximately 250 - 350mm from the burner rail Check the burner pressure across pressure test point D and the downstream (low) pressure test point on the air pressure switch This pressure is specified in Section 1 of this manual Adjust as necessary - refer to Section 52 of this manual Check the maximum air handler discharge temperature Check the flame signal shyrefer to Section 431

Where possible check the actual gas flow rate by meter reading with all other appliances turned off

6 Check the operation of the overheat limit control by adjusting the temperature controller set point and high limit to 65degC as described in Appendix 4 of this manual Monitor the discharge temperature on the temperature controller Check that the overheat control operates as the set temperature is passed Check that the control must be manually reset by pressing the green reset button on the front of the switch Return the temperature controller to its original settings

In the event that the ambient temperature is too low for this simple procedure to work the instrument will have to be bench tested using a Temperature 8ath Remove and replace the control as Section 84 of this manual for bench-testing

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 21

4 COMMISSIONING 3000S

43 1 FLAME SIGNAL CHECK

1 The ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler is fitted with a Klippon SAKT1 Test Terminal which can be used to measure the flame scanning signal Refer to the Electrical Schematic and connect a 0-1 mA ammeter to the two test points with standard 23 mm test plugs with the positive lead on the detector side Disconnect the terminal link to obtain the signal reading A minimum signal of 70 microamps is required typical signals are in the 250-400 microamp range on both pilot and main flame After completion replace the terminal link and remove the test jacks

2 Drive the burner to high fire as previously described Measure the carbon dioxide content of the discharge air stream This figure must not exceed 2800 ppm If the discharge exceeds this limit isolate the air handler and report to RS STOKVIS Ltd before proceeding

Stop and start the air handler a few times to check for reliability using the Operating Instructions (Section 6)

432 HANDOVER

Complete the air handler Service Check Sheet supplied at the back of this manual The self-copy sheet must be returned to STOKVIS for checking

Instruct the User in efficient use and care of the unit start-up and shutdown (including emergency shutdown) and recommended service interval Emphasise the need to keep the air handler clear of stored items and extraneous material and to maintain the recirculation and fresh air paths to the air handler inlets Hand all instructions as applicable to the UserOwner for safekeeping

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 22

5 ADJUSTMENTS 3000S

If adjustments to the air handler settings are required they should be made by a RS STOKVIS Ltd approved engineer

The normal value for all control settings is specified in Section 1 of this manual

51 PILOT ADJUSTMENT

The pilot gas pressure and flame length may be adjusted by altering the discharge pressure of the pilot governor Screwing the adjusting screw clockwise (located under the top cap) increases the discharge pressure and the flame length anti-clockwise decreases the pressure and the flame length

52 BURNER HIGH FIRE PRESSURE ADJUSTMENT

At high fire alter the spring compression on the main burner governor (MV2) by removing the cap and adjust the spring compression plate clockwise to increase the burner pressure anti-clockwise to decrease burner pressure If the pressure does not increase on adjusting the spring the supply is inadequate

Note On small air handlers fitted with a mUlti-functional control the pressure adjusting screw is located under a swing cap on the first block valve

53 BURNER LOW FIRE ADJUSTMENT

The main burner low fire is adjusted on the flow control valve MV5 (Process amp Instrumentation Diagram)

Remove the top cover of the valve and insert a Terminal Screwdriver in the adjusting screw of the TOP cam marked NI

Drive the burner to low fire by adjusting the temperature controller set-point and high limit to 05degC as described in Appendix 4 of this manual

Turn the Terminal Screwdriver clockwise to decrease the low fire gas flow anti-clockwise to increase the flow

Check the heat input and flame signal at the new position are satisfactory and return the tenlperature controller to its normal settings

Replace the control valve cover

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 23

5 ADJUSTMENTS 3000S

54 SUMMERIOFFIWINTER SWITCH

In the SUMMER position this switch provides ventilation only and is independent of the programmed ON and OFF periods This position is manually selected and must be manually de-selected Whenever the switch is in this position the fan is operating

In the OFF position the air handler is shutdown and will not operate This overrides any frost protection fitted It is suitable for air handler shutdown for short periods such as holidays The programme memory is unaffected by this switch and assumes control of the air handler when the switch is returned to the WINTER position

In the WINTER position the air handler operates off the programme memory to provide heating

55 RESET BUTTON

Visual indication of air handler lockout is provided In the event of lockout occurring the air handler can be reset by depressing the RESET button This parallels the RESET button on the air handler main control panel If after 4 attempts to reset the air handler the lockout indicator still illuminates then a Service Engineer should be called to investigate the problem

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 24

6 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 3000S

61 AIR HANDLER START-UP

1 Open all manual gas valves both on the appliance and on the supply to the appliance Switch on the Electric Supply to the appliance

2 On the main air handler panel

Switch the panel isolator to the 1 position

Check POWER ON light

3 On the remote control station

For Heating Switch the SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch to WINTER

The air handler will now start automatically in response to the time settings

In the event of LOCKOUT

Press the RESET button and the cycle of operations will be repeated If the air handler goes to LOCKOUT four times in succession call for a Service Engineer

For Unheated Ventilation Switch the SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch to SUMMER

Note This prevents the burner firing giving a controlled supply of ventilation air to the heated space as long as the switch is in this position The air handler will now start automatically in response to the timeclock demand To turn the fan off return the switch to the centre OFF position

In the event of LOCKOUT

Press the RESET button and the cycle of operations will be repeated If the air handler goes to LOCKOUT four times in succession call for a Service Engineer

62 AIR HANDLER SHUTDOWN

621 SHUTDOWN FOR SHORT PERIODS

Switch the SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch on the remote station to OFF

622 SHUTDOWN FOR PROLONGED PERIODS

Switch the main panel isolator to the 0 position and close all manual gas valves both on and leading to the appliance

Note Manual gas valves should only be operated when the appliance is to be shut off for either Servicing or for a prolonged shutdown

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 25

30005 6 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

63 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS

631 SITE CLEARANCE ADJACENT TO AIR HANDLER

Attention should be paid to keeping the area around the air handler tidy No rubbish should be allowed to accumulate in the vicinity of the air handler and storage of goods etc should not be permitted within two metres of the air handler Failure to comply could result in reduced airflow to the air handler causing inefficient running and potential overheat cond ition

632 AIR SUPPLY TO AIR HANDLER

Air vents and grilles supplying air to the air handler should never be blocked and should be checked periodically to ensure they are clear

633 AIR FILTERS

Similarly attention should be paid to cleaning or replacing the filters to the air handler if fitted Your installer should advise you on the frequency with which this would be required to be completed

634 SERVICE

For continued safe and efficient operation of this air air handler it is important that servicing of the air handler should be completed at regular intervals by a competent person in accordance with Section 82 of this manual Users are advised to enter into a Service Agreement with RS STOKVIS Ltd

635 SPARE PARTS

It is suggested that a complete set of spare parts essential to the running of the air handler and recommended by the installer are kept by the user on the premises where the air handler is installed This is particularly important where the air handler forms an essential part of any process plant and its being out of operation may cause problems by for example frost damage or condensation by super-cooling

A list of Recommended Spares will be found in Section 9 of this manual

636 GAS LEAKS

If a smell of gas is detected around the area of the appliance Switch off all manual gas valves and contact your service engineer or the local gas undertaking

NEVER

LOOK FOR GAS LEAKS WITH A LIGHTED MATCH OR NAKED

FLAME

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 26

7 FAULT FINDING 30008

The main control panel incorporates two lights to help in fault finding

POWER ON

LOCKOUT

The remote station also has three lights

AIR FAN ON

BURNER ON

LOCKOUT

This section gives the possible causes of failure associated with each check light The electrical schematic diagram in this manual and the wiring diagram shipped in the main air handler panel should be used in conjunction with the notes below Additionally Service Engineers should familiarise themselves with the detailed Start Sequence given in Appendix 2 of this manual

The notes are given for each light before consulting the notes check for bulb failure

71 POWER ON LIGHT IS UNLIT

Check

1 Main control panel isolator is in the 1 position

2 Main Panel 6A MCB has not tripped if a trip has occurred the switch will be at the OFF position Reset and test system as required

3 Also check if the mains electrical supply is isolated If so FIND OUT WHY before taking any action

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 27

7 FAULT FINDING 30005

72 AIR FAN ON LIGHT IS UNLIT

Check

1 SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch is not in Position OFF

2 Timeperiod is not set to off

3 Air handler is not at LOCKOUT

4 Recheck both AIR FAN ON and LOCKOUT bulbs

Two fault indications are possible

1 THE FAN IS NOT OPERATING

If the fan should have started but is not operating

Check 1 Overload for tripped conditions Reset the overload and monitor the next start-up

2 Motor Fuses

3 Relays 1 2 amp3 for failure

laClor CC1 for failure

5 Air Pressure Switch (DPS) is failed in the N 0 Position

Replace the faulty component as described in Section 8

2 THE FAN IS OPERATING

This indicates that the air pressure switch (DPS) has failed to change over

Measure the profile plate differential pressure as described in Section 4113 If the pressure is correct the air pressure switch is faulty Check the switch as in 4114 If the pressure is not correct

Check 1 Correct fan belt tension

2 Correct fan rotation

3 The air handler air inlets and discharge are not blocked

4 Correct fitting on filters

5 The air differential pressure switch impulse lines are not blocked or leaking

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 28

7 FAULT FINDING 30008

73 LOCKOUT LIGHT IS ILLUMINATED

This light indicates a failure in the burner ignition and flame supervision system

RESET the unit and follow the progress of the start sequence The full cycle may take two minutes

1

------t

2 LOCKOUT after 35-40 seconds indicates an ignition failure RESET the system and observe the pilot and ignition spark during the start-up attempt

I-- shy

3 Observe the spark This should be strong and highly visible If not remove and clean the spark plug as Section 82 Check that the spark plug gap is correctly set at 15 mm

-- shy

4 Check the pilot flame If the pilot flame ignites and the unit goes to LOCKOUT the scanning system is at fault Remove and clean the detector as Section 82 Check the flame signal as in Section 431

5 If the pilot does not light the gas supply system is faulty Check the pilot system for restriction and the pilot valve operation

6 If the pilot lights and the unit goes to LOCKOUT after the main gas valves are addressed either the flow control valve is blocked or one of the main gas block valves has failed Fit a manometer on the pressure test point on the outlet flange of the multishyfunctional control and observe if the pressure rises when the main gas valves are addressed No pressure rise will indicate failure of the main gas valves

74 AIR FAN ON LIGHT ILLUMINATED

If the burner does not start check

1 SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch is in WINTER position

2 Overheat Limit Control

These interlocks prevent the burner management system starting

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 29

8 SERVICING 3000S

IMPORTANT Servicing and maintenance should be only carried out by a RS STOKVIS Ltd approved engineer

Only use replacement parts provided by the appliance manufacturer

Check that the air openings for combustion and for ventilation of any plant roon or compartment are clear

81 ISOLATION

811 FUEL GAS ISOLATION

The fuel gas to the ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler should be isolated and locked off at the manual ball valve mounted at the start of the fuel gas line Additionally before entering or servicing the air handler the burner manual isolation valve and pilot line isolation valve should be closed

812 ELECTRICAL ISOLATION

All electric power to the air handler and the remote control station is switched through the local isolator This isolator is fitted with a lock facility to permit it to be locked in the OFF position

Additionally isolate the power at the Wall Isolator

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 30

8 SERVICING 30005

82 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE

The air handler should be routinely serviced at the start of each heating season Isolate the air handler as above before servicing Details of access to individual components are given in Section 84 of this manual

1 Remove and clean spark igniter Check that the gap is correctly set at 25 mm Replace every two years

2 Clean the flame detector lens to ensure freedom from dirt and moisture If the cell shows any sign of cracks it should be replaced Routinely replace the cell every two years or after 10000 hours of operation which ever comes first

3 Inspect the entire air handler paint system for general damage Repair as necessary

4 Every two years brush the burner plates and clear the burner holes carefully with a Size 18mm drill for NP II and 20mm drill for NP I

WARNING THE BURNER HOLES MUST NOT BE ENLARGED

5 Inspect and lubricate all damper linkages to ensure freedom of operation Wipe off all excess lubricants to prevent dirt build up on linkage parts

6 Check the fan belt for cracks and splits Check tension The correct tension gives 16mm deflection per metre of span when the belt is centrally loaded with a force of 27N Adjust as necessary

7 Grease both the fan shaft bearings with Mobiith AW2 grease or similar

NEVER use high temperature grease

NEVER mix two different greases within the bearing always flush existing grease out

Note Removing the cover plate on the end of the air handler gains access to the outboard fan bearing

Light to Slow to 0 120 2 to 6 months Clean Dry

Medium Medium 120 200 1 to 2 months

Moderate to Light to Slow to 0 120 1 to 4 weeks Dry

Dirty Medium Medium 120 200 1 to 7 days

Extreme Dirt Dry Light to Slow to 0 200 Daily Flushing out

Medium Medium Dirt

83 ANNUAL SERVICE CHECKS

After Servicing test fire the air handler following the Commissioning Procedure detailed in Section 4 of this manual to ensure correct operation generally Special attention must be paid to the damper system and related controls and interlocks

Additionally check that the fresh air and recirculation air entry path to the air handler has been kept clear and instruct the User of the need for this as necessary

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 31

8 SERVICING 3000S

84 REMOVAL PROCEDURE FOR REPLACEABLE COMPONENTS

IMPORTANT

Turn off the gas at the appliance service valve and the electricity at the main panel and wall isolator before proceeding

841 BURNER

The burner is located inside the air handler casing and is mounted on two brackets from the support straps To remove the burner isolate the air handler as in 81 and undo the union on the fuel gas line adjacent to the burner isolation valve (MV6) and unscrew the main and pilot gas feed pipes from the burner rail Access to the rear of the burner assembly is made by removing the partition plate below the burner separating the fresh air inlet to the burner from the return air inlet compartment This is held in place by screws which engage in captive nuts on the top side of the partition Remove the Flame Detector and pull off the ignition plug cap Disconnect the burner support brackets and remove the burner The burner will easily pass through the access hatch for further strip down Replace in the reverse order soundness test the gas pipework check the burner operation and duty as described in the commissioning section of this manual

842 FLAME DETECTOR

This is a 240 Volt instrument

The flame detector is mounted on the end of the burner rail inside the air handler casing To remove the detector isolate the panel electric supply and lock off Push the scanner towards the burner and rotate to release the bayonet fixing and lift the detector from its mount Remove the two screws holding the detector cover and disconnect the supply leads noting the polarity of the connections

Replace the flame detector in the reverse order ensuring correct polarity of connections Ensure the access panel is securely closed and the retaining nuts are tightened down Check operation by inserting a test meter in the points provided in the main control panel and reading the flame signals during start up to full rate burner operation (See 431) Operate the appliance over six starts for reliability of operation including tum off of start and main gas valves to check for lockout operation

843 IGNITER SPARK PLUG

This is a high tension spark plug

The igniter spark plug is mounted on the end of the burner rail inside the air handler casing To remove the spark plug isolate the air handler as above Enter the service access door Access to the spark plug is made through the profile plate To remove the spark plug pull off the high tension lead and unscrew the plug with a plug spanner

When replacing the spark plug check the plug gap is set at 15mm Check ignition reliability over six start ups

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 32

8 SERVICING 3000S

844 IGNITER SPARK TRANSFORMER

This is a 240 Volt instrument

The ignition transformer is located in a plastic box mounted on the air handler casing adjacent to the main control panel To remove the transformer isolate the air handler as above and unscrew the four retaining screws holding the box lid in place and remove the lid Disconnect the supply cable at the terminal strip and undo the transformer retaining screws The transformer may then be unscrewed from the High Tension cable leading to the spark plug

Replacement is a simple reversal of this procedure

Check ignition reliability over six start ups

845 COMBUSTION AIR PRESSURE SWITCH (DPS)

Note The switch is set and sealed and should be replaced if not operating correctly

This switch is a 240 Volt instrument

The air switch is mounted directly on the air handler casing and can be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove the switch isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the supply cable Break the downstream pipe compression fitting and unscrew the switch housing from its locating fitting Reverse the procedure to replace after ensuring switch setting is as specified in Section 13 of this manual Operate the air handler to ensure reliability of operation over six start ups

846 AIR HANDLER OVERHEAT LIMIT CONTROL

This is a 240 Volt instrument

The overheat limit control can be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove the control isolate the air handler as above and lock off Remove the switch cover Disconnect the supply cable and unscrew the control housing from its locating fitting Reverse the procedure to replace check the switch is set to 50degC Test the switch operation as described in Section 43 over at least three operations

847 AIR FAN AND MOTOR

The air fan motor is a 415 Volt 3 phase motor

The motor and slide rails are easily accessible inside the air handler casing If it is necessary to remove the motor isolate the air handler as above Slacken the fan-belt tension and remove the drive belts Pull the motor away from the air handler casing to make access to the motor terminal box and disconnect the supply cable The motor may now be removed from the unit Following replacement the air handler must be fully re-commissioned as in Section 4

It is unlikely that the air fan will need replacing or servicing If required a full procedure should be obtained from RS STOKVIS Ltd

Replacement must be followed by full re-commissioning as in Section 4

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 33

8 SERVICING 3000S

848 FUEL GAS MULTI-FUNCTIONAL CONTROL - SMALL UNITS

This is a 240 Volt instrument

The fuel gas multi-functional control can be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove the unit isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the Hirschman electric termination Unbolt the control from its flanges and remove

When replacing care must be taken to ensure the flange 0 rings are undamaged and in the correct location Following replacement the air handler must be fully reshycommissioned as in Section 4 including tests for soundness prior to start-up

849 GOVERNOR AND BLOCK VALVES

The block valves are 240 Volt instruments

All these items may be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove any item isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the electric termination to the two block valves the pilot block valve and the flow control block valve Break the two pipe unions and remove the fuel gas line complete for further strip-down

8410 FUEL GAS FLOW CONTROL VALVE

This is a 24 Volt instrument

The fuel gas How control valve can be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove the valve isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the supply cables to the control valve

On small air handlers fitted with a multi-functional control support the multi-functional control and unbolt its discharge flange Break the union downstream of the burner isolation valve and remove the section of line containing the flow control valve for further strip-down

On large air handlers fitted with separate block valves it will be necessary to remove the fuel gas line complete as Section 8410 above

Following replacement re-commission the air handler

Note If the fresh air damper is not in the full open position the heat input must not exceed the maximum heat input at recirculation condition specified in the technical data section of this manual

8411 PILOT GAS GOVERNOR AND BLOCK VALVE

The block valve is a 240 Volt instrument

Both items may be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove either item isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the electric terrriination to the solenoid valve Undo the upstream pipe union and the compression fitting downstream of the manual block valve (PV3) Remove the pilot gas line complete for further strip down

Replace broken or distorted connections and retest for soundness Ensure the pilot gas pressure is correct and the flame is sensing an output Ensure reliability over six start-ups

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 34

8 SERVICING 3000S

8412 BELT TENSIONING PROCEDURE

The setting tensions are designed to cover a wide range of drives A precise setting force for individual applications can be calculated as detailed

SETTING FORCES

Belt Section

Setting Force To Deflect Belt 16mm per Metre Of Span

Small Pulley Diameter (mm)

Basic Setting Forces Newtons (N) Kilograms (kgf)

125 x Setting Forces Newtons (N) Kilograms (kgf)

SPZ

56 to 71 16 16 20 20 75 to 90 18 18 22 22

95 to 125 20 20 25 25 Over 125 22 22 28 28

SPA

80 to 100 22 22 28 28 106 to 140 30 30 38 38 150 to 200 36 37 45 46 Over 200 40 40 50 51

SPB

112 to 160 40 40 50 51 170 to 224 50 51 62 63 236 to 355 62 63 77 79 Over 355 65 66 81 83

SPC 224 to 250 70 71 87 89 265 to 355 92 94 115 120 Over 375 115 120 144 150

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 35

8 SERVICING 3000S

BELT TENSIONING USING FENNER BELT TENSION INDICATOR

Calculate the deflection in mm on a basis of 16mm per metre of centre distance Centre Distance (m) x 16 =Deflection (mm)

Set lower marker ring at the deflection distance required in mm on the lower scale

Set upper ring against to bottom edge of the top tube

Place the belt tension indicator on top of the belt at the centre of span and apply a force at right angles to the belt defecting it to the point where the lower marker ring is level with the top of the adjacent belt

Read off the force value indicated by the top edge of the upper marker ring

Compare this force to the kgf value shown in the table above

If a Fenner Belt Tension Indicator is not available a spring balance and rule will be suffice

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 36

8 SERVICING 30005

85 MAIN PANEL CONTROLS

All panel controls are readily accessible and may be easily exchanged for replacement components in the event of failure Ensure any replacement item is of the same make and type as the original

851 LANDIS amp GYR LFL 1335 AUTOMATIC SEQUENCE CONTROLLER

The Landis amp Gyr Automatic Sequence Controller is a plug-in unit locating on a pre-wired chassis To remove the controller undo the two retaining screws at the top left and lower right corners and pull the module off the chassis

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

852 CONTROLS CIRCUIT (24 VOLT) TRANSFORMER

The Controls Circuit Transformer is fixed to the panel back plate by tapped screws To remove the transformer undo the wiring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel Undo the two retaining screws and remove the unit complete

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

853 CONTROL RELAYS R1 R2 amp R3

The Control Relays are DIN Rail mounted To remove a relay undo the wIring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel Release the DIN rail retaining clip under the relay with a screwdriver and remove the relay

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

854 6A MCB

The 6A MCB is DIN Rail mounted To remove the MCB undo the wiring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel Release the DIN rail retaining clip under the MCB with a screwdriver and remove the MCB

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

855 THERMAL OVERLOAD

The thermal overload is attached to the underside of the main contactor To remove the overload undo the wiring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel and that the overload setting is as specified in Section 13 of this manual Unscrew the three connections to the contactor and remove the overload

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 37

8 SERVICING 3000S

856 MAIN CONTACTOR

The Main Contactor is DIN Rail mounted To remove the contactor remove the thermal overload as 855 above and then undo the wiring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel Release the DIN rail retaining clip under the contactor with a screwdriver and remove the contactor

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

857 MOTOR FUSE

To replace a motor fuse pull the fuse carrier off the fuse holder base The fuse is attached to the fuse carrier by two screws Unscrew remove and replace

86 REMOTE CONTROL STATION

The remote control station contains some serviceable parts although these items should only be fitted by an approved RS STOKVIS Ltd Engineer

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 38

9 RECOMMENDED SPARES 3000S

For two years operation it is recommended that the following items should be held in stock

ITEM DESCRIPTION PART NO QUANTITY i

1 INDICATOR BULBS W1121 1 PACK

2 SPARK PLUG 023739 1 I

3 UVDETECTOR QRA10C 1 I

4 ROOM SENSOR DRT2453 1

5 DUCT SENSOR DDT1701 1

All replacement parts can be obtained from RS STOKVIS Ltd by quoting the air handler serial number the part number and description

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 39

APPENDIX 1 30005

SOUNDNESS TESTING THE FUEL GAS PIPEWORK

This procedure should only be carried out by personnel familiar with the ECONO-AIR 3000S Series Air handler

The pressure test points and all valves are identified on the Process and Instrumentation Diagram for the air handler included in Section 1 of this n1anual

Isolate the air handler electric supply at the main control panel and lock off Close the manual isolation valves MV1 MV6 and PV3 Ensure the supply pressure is available on the upstream side of MV1

A11 TESTING THE UPSTREAM PIPEWORKAND BURNER CONTROLS 1 Connect a 60 mbar manometer to the pressure test nipple A Monitor the

pressure for two minutes Any rise in pressure indicates that valve MV1 is leaking and must be replaced Remove pressure test points Band F

2 Open MV1 to pressurise the pipework on both the main gas and pilot line to the first block valve

3 Close MV1 Allow one minute for the temperature to stabilise and then test the system for 2 minutes and watch for a drop in the pipework pressure If the pressure falls open valve MV1 and test the pipework connections and valves from MV1 to MV3 and MV1 to PV2 for leaks with a proprietary leak detector fluid or spray Turn off MV1 seal any leaks and re-test

4 If no extemalleaks are found either the pilot block valve PV1 or either the first main gas block valve MV3 is letting by

5 To test this seal pressure test point A and fit a manometer to pressure test point B Leave for two minutes with MV1 open A rise in pressure on the manometer confirms a leak on the block valve MV3 Turn off MV1 exchange the valve and re-test from point 2 above

6 Repeat this procedure for the pilot block valve Seal test point B and fit a manometer to pressure test point F Leave for two minutes with MV1 open A rise in pressure on the manometer confirms a leak on the pilot block valve PV2 Turn off MV1 exchange the valve and re-test from point 1 above Seal test point F

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 40

APPENDIX 1 30005

A12 TESTING THE DOWNSTREAM BURNER VALVE 1 Close MV1 and connect pressure test points A and 8 with flexible 6 mm bore

tubing teed into the manometer Remove pressure test point C Open MV1 to pressurise the downstream block valve MV4

2 Close MV1 and leave for one minute for the temperature to stabilise Monitor the pressure for 2 minutes If the pressure falls open valve MV1 and leak test the line between the two block valves MV3 and MV4 with a proprietary leak detector Turn off MV1 seal any leaks and re-test Note Smaller air handlers in the 3000S Series are fitted with multi-functional valves combining the pressure regulator and two block valves in one component The above procedure still applies but if a leak is found on either block valve the whole control should be replaced If no external leaks are found the downstream block valve is letting by

3 To confirm this close MV1 remove the manometer and refit to pressure test point C Connect pressure test points A and 8 with flexible 6mm bore tubing Open MV1 and allow one minute for the temperature to stabilise Monitor the pressure for a further 2 minutes with MV1 still open A rise in pressure confirms that the second block valve MV4 is letting by Turn off MV1 Replace the valve and re-test from 2 above

A13 TESTING THE DOWNSTREAM BURNER PIPEWORK 1 Close MV1 and connect pressure test points A and D with flexible 6 mm bore

tubing teed into the manometer Open MV1 to pressurise the downstream pilot pipework

2 Close MV1 and leave for one minute for the temperature to stabilise Monitor the pressure for 2 minutes If the pressure falls open valve MV1 and leak test the line between the downstream block valve MV4 and the manual block MV6 with a proprietary leak detector fluid or spray If no external leaks are found the manual block valve MV6 is letting by Turn off MV1 seal any leakages and reshytest from 2 above

A14 TESTING THE DOWNSTREAM PILOT PIPEWORK 1 Close MV1 and connect pressure test points A and F with flexible 6mm bore

tubing teed into the manometer Open MV1 to pressurise the downstream pilot pipework

2 Close MV1 and leave for one rninute for the temperature to stabilise Monitor the pressure for 2 minutes If the pressure falls open valve MV1 and leak test the line between the downstream block valve PV2 and the manual block PV3 with a proprietary leak detector fluid or spray If no external leaks are found the manual block valve PV3 is letting by Turn off MV1 seal any leakages and reshytest from 2 above

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 41

APPENDIX 1 30005

A15 TESTING THE BURNER CONNECTIONS 1 Remove the burner access panel as described in Section 84 of this manual

Remove the burner spark igniter Slacken the two retaining bolts holding the burner to the burner support straps and unbolt the burner supply endplate from the burner casting and mixing plates

2 Connect pressure test points A and 0 with flexible 6mm bore tubing teed into the manometer Open MV1 and MV6 to pressurise the burner pipework Leak test the main gas burner pipework and connections with proprietary leak detector fluid Turn off MV6 Seal any leakages and re-test

3 Connect pressure test points A and F with flexible 6 mm bore tubing teed into the manometer Open MV1 and PV3 to pressurise the pilot burner pipework Leak test the pilot gas burner pipework and connections with proprietary leak detector fluid Turn off PV3 Seal any leakages and re-test

4 Turn off MV1

5 Replace the spark igniter and profile division plate

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 42

APPENDIX 2 30005

START SEQUENCE

The burner start sequence is controlled by the Landis and Gyr burner management unit The timings are pre-set and comply with 885885 This unit must NOT be tampered with

A brief description of the start-up sequence isshy

The unit checks

1 The NO FLAME signal on the UV flame scanner

Note If the scanner detects a flame at any time other than in the correct operating sequence the flame programmer initiates a lockout

2 The operation of the combustion air proving switch in the NO AIR position

3 The air handler discharge high temperature switch

If the checks are completed the unit starts the combustion air fan and then checks the combustion airflow

Once the airflow is proven the unit checks that the damper control circuit is functioning correctly After the damper microswitch is made to prove the fresh air damper is fully open the sequence allows 30 seconds for the combustion air to purge any combustible gas from the air handler

After completion of the purge the spark ignition system is energised the pilot valve opened and the spark terminated If the pilot flame is not proven by the UV scanner the system will initiate a LOCKOUT

If the flame is proven the main gas valves are opened the pilot extinguished and the main burner flame proven

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 43

i

APPENDIX 2 30008

The following flow chart shows the complete start sequence including the lighting of the various indicating lamps

MANUAL STATUS LIGHT POWER ON

POWER ON

I INITIATE START BY TIME

SETTING ON CONTROLLER

I CHECK NO FLAME

VISIBLE

PROVEj FAIL LOCKOUT

I CHECK RELAY R4 NC

POSITION

PROVE FAIL NO START

I CHECK AIR PRESSURE SWITCH NC POSITION

PROVE FAIL NO START

I CHECK RELAY R1 NC

POSITION

PROVE j

FAIL NO START

I START COMBUSTION

AIR BLOWER

I CHECK AIR PRESSURE SWITCH NO POSITION

PROVE I

FAIL NO START

I STATUS LIGHT FAN ON

I ENERGISE RELAY R1

I

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 44

I

I

APPENDIX 2 30008

I CHECK OVERHEAT LIMIT

CONTROL R5

PROVE I

FAIL I I

CHECK 541412 LOOP CLOSED ON

LANDIS ampGYR CIRCUIT

PROVE I

FAIL I I

COMBUSTION AIR PURGE PERIOD

30 SECONDS

I

NO START

NO START

CANCEL NO FLAME CHECK CIRCUIT

I

ENERGISE SPARK

I TIMED PERIOD 25 SECONDS

I ENERGISE PILOT GAS

VALVE

I TIMED PERIOD 25 SECONDS

I TERMINATE SPARK

I INTERROGATE UV FLAME SCANNER

PROVE I

FAIL I I

TIMED PERIOD 10 SECONDS

I

LOCKOUT

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 45

I

I

APPENDIX 2 3000S

I ENERGISE MAIN GAS

VALVES

I

STATUS LIGHT BURNER ON

I TIMED PERIOD

5 SECONDS

I DE-ENERGISE PILOT

GAS VALVES

CONTINUOUS FROM PILOT

I INTERROGATE UV FLAME SCANNER

PROVE I

FAIL I I

LOCKOUT I

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 46

APPENDIX 3 30005

Please see copy of Standard Service Sheet

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 47

APPENDIX 4 30005

A41 TIME OUT SCREEN

This is the standard screen displayed when the touch screen is not in use The back light is off to save energy_ To access the STATUS screen touch the ENTER key and the following screen is displayed

[]][I][]rn[IJOO[][IJOO[] EJ~E11 I[]I ~ middot I

NOTE

The Touch Screen operates using the heat produced by the touch of a finger and therefore only LIGHT pressure is required

Excessive pressure can damage the Touch Screen

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 48

APPENDIX 4 30008

A42 STATUS SCREEN

On the typical STATUS screen the illustrated information detailed is as follows

19 36 Fan Brn

RS OS

100 Fst_~_ Lck _ _ Xst Gas~o ~ I

RS Indicates the current room temperature

OS ~( t~~ the current duct discharge temperature

Fan Indicates the current status of the fan by showing the arrow and the fan blades for ON and OFF is shown by the arrow and fan blades being removed

Brn Indicates the current status of the burner with the black flames indicating the burner to be ON and vice versa

Lck LOCKOUT - This indicates a flame failure when highlighted during normal or start-up operation

Xst EXCESS TEMPERATURE SWITCH - This indicates the unit has reached the trip limit on the over heat stat when highlighted during operation

Indicates the current position of the gas modulating valve during normal Gas

operation (0-100)

Indicates whether the Frost stat is energised and the unit is running on frost Fst

override

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 49

APPENDIX 4 30008

A43 CHANGING SETTINGS

It is possible to change the settings for the time of operation and the required temperature set points The following details the steps required

A44 ENTERING THE SECURITY CODE

From the STATUS screen touch the return key and the screen below will be displayed

Type the HIGH LEVEL security code (4321) If you make a mistake use the BACK SPACE key to delete any incorrect number(s) Touch the ENTER key when the code is correct

If the security code is incorrect the screen above will be displayed then try again If after several attempts you can not gain access please contact RS STOKVIS Ltd for further information

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 50

APPENDIX 4 30008

When the code is entered correctly the MAIN MENU is displayed as detailed below

~ STATUS SET VALUES~ ~ TIVIE CLOCK [) [) [) [) [)

The MAIN MENU screen shows the three menu items available The title for each menu item can be changed to suit the end user Please notify RS STOKVIS Ltd prior to commissioning should these parameters require special amendments

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 51

APPENDIX 4 30008

A45 CHANGING OR SETTING A TIME SCHEDULE

From the main menu screen select the TIME CLOCK page by running finger across screen symbol and touch the ENTER key the screen below will be displayed

On the following screen highlight the TS1 symbol and touch the ENTER key

The current time schedule will now be displayed as shown below The display will automatically default to the current day (1 =Monday 2 =Tuesday etc) In this case day 5 (Friday) the four schedule switching times refer to that day

IAC6BBB1BHIS1

mm0CIl bull mID 17BB 17BB 17HB

Iillleschedule

To modify a time select it by highlighting and touch the ENTER key and the following screen is displayed

To amend the appropriate onoff time as shown on the screen below The arrows to the right of the time are for altering the hours and the arrows on the left for the minutes

Once you have set the time use the ESCape key to exit back to the time schedule screen and choose another day by touching the required number Another time may now be modified as before

IAC6BBB1BHIS1

H8BH

I i eschedule

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 52

APPENDIX 4 30008

Use the ESCape key to exit back to the MAIN MENU screen

~ STATUS ~ SET VALUES

TIME CLOCK []~ [] [] [] []

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 53

APPENDIX 4 30005

A46 CHANGING SET VALUES

From the main menu screen select the SET VALUES page by highlight in the normal way and touch the ENTER key

The following screen is displayed

36 19 18III III IIIHsv Rsv Llv

To change the RSV highlight it in the normal way and touch the ENTER key and the screen below will now be shown

IAC6RRR1RR40 T I

0 19 (Y)l RSV

ROOM SET VALUE

The above screen shows the parameters that can be changed The values to the far left are the limitations of set point (OC) Change the set point by using the UP and DOWN ARROWS on the left of the screen or touch the set value itself followed by the ENTER key to select the set value and set it directly using the numeric keyboard All values can be changed in this way

Use the ESCape key twice to exit back to the MAIN MENU screen

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 54

APPENDIX 4 30005

A47 COMMISSIONING AND SERVICING BURNER CHECKS

Select the SET VALUES screen from the MAIN MENU screen and adjust the high lirrlit set point to 55degC to drive the burner to high fire

IAC6HHH1HH60 ~T I

0 19 (Y)

HSV

HIGH SET VALUE ~

Ensure the set value is returned to 36degC once the appropriate checks and adjustments as described in Section 43 of this manual have been completed Return to the SET VALUES screen and select the low limit value to adjust the low fire setting

Reduce the low limit value to OdegC to drive the gas valve to low fire and complete the appropriate checks and adjustments as described in Section 43 of this manual and ensure the set value is returned to the original value

A48 GMT ltgt BST CHANGEOVER DAYLIGHT SAVINGS

To change your unit to British Summer TimelWinter Time the following system screen must be highlighted by touching the Iamp1 button twice

By touching the clock symbol in the top left hand corner followed by the ENTER key the screen below will be displayed

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 55

APPENDIX 4 30008

188311 851193

544

By touching and highlighting in this case 18 followed by the ENTER key A small box allowing the entry of two digits will appear Enter the desired time required using the numbered keys followed by ENTER key Your unit is now set to operate on BSTBWT

Touch the ESC key three times to return back to the Status screen

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 56

STOKVIS ENERGY SYSTEMS 96R WALTON ROAD EAST MOLESEY SURREY KT8 0DL TEL 020 8783 3050 08707 707 747 FAX 020 8783 3051 08707 707 767 E-MAIL infostokvisboilerscom WEBSITE wwwstokvisboilerscom

JULY 1999

Page 21: ECONOAIR 3000S SERIES AIR HANDLING UNIT DIRECT FIREDstokvisboilers.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/EconoAir... · 2019-05-10 · ECONOAIR 3000S SERIES AIR HANDLING UNIT DIRECT FIRED

3 INSTALLATION 3000S

315 TOUCH SCREEN WIRING

The touch screen located on the front of the remote station requires two separate twisted pairs of O5mrh2 screened cable run in a separate conduit If the distance between the main and remote stations is greater that 1 km please contact RS STOKVIS Ltd for advice

JULY 1999 SAMPLE Page 17

3 INSTALLATION 3000S

316 ALIGNMENT

3161 INSTALLATION OF DRIVE BELTS

On 80 amp 89 30008 range of air handlers it will be necessary to align the pulleys and fit the drive belts before carrying out commissioning of the unit

3162 PU LLEYS

Before assembling the drive check the pulley grooves are free from scores or sharp edges and all dimensions conform to the relevant standard

The Taper Lock bush is your starting point when it comes to assembly and installation Drive installation is a straightforward job with Taper Lock - but the stages set out on the installation leaflet provided with every Taper Lock bush should be followed closely

3163 ALIGNMENT

Good alignment of pulleys prior to belt installation is important to avoid belt flank wear The diagram below shows correct installation of pulleys

INTERNAl BEARING

MOTOR PUlLEY rAN PULLEY

MOTORMOTOR ADJUSTMENT MOUNTING BOlTSBOLTS

3164 BELTS

When the pulleys have been correctly positioned on the shafts the belts can be installed to complete the drive

The drive centre distance should be reduced prior to the installation of the belts so that they may be fitted without the use of force Under no circumstances must belts be prised into the grooves Using sharp tools to stretch the belts over the pulley rim can easily damage belts and pulley grooves

The installation allowance given in the table below is the minimum recommended reduction in centre distance for various belt section and lengths to allow for correct fitting

The take-up allowance given in the same table should be added on to the calculated centre distance to allow for belt stretch

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 18

3 INSTALLATION 3000S

3165 INSTALLATION AND TAKE UP ALLOWANCE

Belt Pitch Installation Allowance Take-Up Length (mm) SPZ SPA SPB SPC (mm)

410 to 530 5

540 to 840 10

850 to 1160 15

1170 to 1500 20

1510 to 1830 20 25

1840 to 2170 30

2180 to 2830 25 40

2840 to 3500 30 50

3520 to 4160 50 60

4170 to 5140 70

5220 to 6150 85

6180 to 7500 105

600 to 8500 125

8880 to 10170 145

10600 to 12500 175

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 19

4 COMMISSIONING 30005

This appliance must be commissioned by a RS STOKVIS Ltd approved engineer

41 PRESTART CHECKS

1 Switch the SUMMERIOFFMlINTER switch on the remote station to OFF

2 Check the correct electric supply is available to the air handler and the appliance isolator installed

3 Check the correct fuel gas supply is available to the air handler and local isolation valve and union installed Check that new gas pipe work has been correctly purged and pressure tested and that the isolation valve is in the OFF position

4 Check the air handler gas control system and burner connections for pressure soundness as detailed in Appendix 1 of this manual

5 Complete the first section of the Service Check Sheet supplied at the back of this manual (Appendix 3)

6 Close the air handler access door

7 Close and lock the main air handler control panel

8 Switch the main panel isolator to position 1 Check the POWER ON light illuminates

9 Check and set the timed ONOFF periods in the lAC Controller located on the remote panel Ensure that the unit is set to be on during testing Refer to Appendix 4 for the lAC setting procedure

10 Close and lock the remote panel

11 Switch the SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch on the remote station to SUMMER to start the air fan Return the switch to the OFF position and check for correct rotation of the fan as the fan slows and stops

The fan rotation can be observed through the fan section access door or through the air handler access door Only do this during the fan run-down period Ensure the door is securely fastened after completion

Rotation arrows are fitted on the end of the air handler and inside the air handler above the interior bearing support If the rotation is incorrect two phases should be interchanged as dictated by the Engineer responsible for the site electrical system

12 Check the air pressure drop across the burner whilst the fan is operating with a water column pressure gauge connected to the two pressure test points on the air pressure switch (DPS) This pressure should be between 14 and 16 rnbar

If the air differential pressure measured above is not within the operating range check inlet and outlet ductwork as appropriate and any filters fitted If the pressure differential is still not within limits isolate the air handler and report to RS STOKVIS Ltd before proceeding

13 Check the operation and setting of the Low Air Pressure Switch by injecting a controlled signal into the switch Check the break point on the switch is 1 mbar (falling)

Note The switch is set and sealed before fitting The 1 mbar switch point may not coincide with the 1 mbar scale reading on the switch

If on checking the switch is not operating correctly do not tamper with it return it to RS STOKVIS Ltd for replacement

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 20

4 COMMISSIONING 3000S

42 DRY RUN

With all the manual gas isolation valves still in the OFF position switch the SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch to WINTER

43 START UP

1 Attach a manometer to pressure test point F and the low pressure test point on the air pressure switch (DPS)

2 Open the main gas supply valve (MV1) and the pilot burner isolation valve (PV3) Leave the main burner isolation valve (MV6) closed Reset the air handler by pressing the push-button marked RESET on either the main panel or remote station The air handler pilot will light automatically (after the automatic damper start check and combustion air pre-purge) and then LOCKOUT after the main gas shut-off valves are addressed

During the short period that the pilot is in operation check the pilot gas pressure on the manometer It should be 10 mbar and the pilot flame approximately 100 - 150mm in length covering the first three or four holes of the mixing plate and have a steady blue colour when viewed through the sight glass on the access side of the air handler Adjust as necessary - refer to Section 51 this manual Check the flame signal - refer to Section 431

3 Open the main burner isolation valve (MV6) RESET the air handler which should now light to main burner stage When alight close the main burner isolation valve to shut down the gas flow to the burner Check that the unit goes to LOCKOUT

4 Reset the air handler and drive the burner to low fire by adjusting the temperature controller set point as described in Appendix 4 of this manual Check the flame is continuous across the width of the burner and has a flame length of approx 50 - 65mm from the burner rail when viewed through the sight glass on the access side of the air handler Check the burner pressure across pressure test point D and the downstream (low) pressure test point on the air pressure switch ie on the rear of the pressure switch This pressure is specifled in Section 1 of this manual Adjust as necessary-refer to Section 53 of this manual Check the flame signal - refer to Section 431

Where possible check the actual gas flow rate by meter reading with all other appliances turned off

5 Drive the burner to high fire by adjusting the temperature controller set point and high limit to 55degC as described in Appendix 4 of this manual Check the flame is continuous across the burner rail and has a flame length of approximately 250 - 350mm from the burner rail Check the burner pressure across pressure test point D and the downstream (low) pressure test point on the air pressure switch This pressure is specified in Section 1 of this manual Adjust as necessary - refer to Section 52 of this manual Check the maximum air handler discharge temperature Check the flame signal shyrefer to Section 431

Where possible check the actual gas flow rate by meter reading with all other appliances turned off

6 Check the operation of the overheat limit control by adjusting the temperature controller set point and high limit to 65degC as described in Appendix 4 of this manual Monitor the discharge temperature on the temperature controller Check that the overheat control operates as the set temperature is passed Check that the control must be manually reset by pressing the green reset button on the front of the switch Return the temperature controller to its original settings

In the event that the ambient temperature is too low for this simple procedure to work the instrument will have to be bench tested using a Temperature 8ath Remove and replace the control as Section 84 of this manual for bench-testing

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 21

4 COMMISSIONING 3000S

43 1 FLAME SIGNAL CHECK

1 The ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler is fitted with a Klippon SAKT1 Test Terminal which can be used to measure the flame scanning signal Refer to the Electrical Schematic and connect a 0-1 mA ammeter to the two test points with standard 23 mm test plugs with the positive lead on the detector side Disconnect the terminal link to obtain the signal reading A minimum signal of 70 microamps is required typical signals are in the 250-400 microamp range on both pilot and main flame After completion replace the terminal link and remove the test jacks

2 Drive the burner to high fire as previously described Measure the carbon dioxide content of the discharge air stream This figure must not exceed 2800 ppm If the discharge exceeds this limit isolate the air handler and report to RS STOKVIS Ltd before proceeding

Stop and start the air handler a few times to check for reliability using the Operating Instructions (Section 6)

432 HANDOVER

Complete the air handler Service Check Sheet supplied at the back of this manual The self-copy sheet must be returned to STOKVIS for checking

Instruct the User in efficient use and care of the unit start-up and shutdown (including emergency shutdown) and recommended service interval Emphasise the need to keep the air handler clear of stored items and extraneous material and to maintain the recirculation and fresh air paths to the air handler inlets Hand all instructions as applicable to the UserOwner for safekeeping

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 22

5 ADJUSTMENTS 3000S

If adjustments to the air handler settings are required they should be made by a RS STOKVIS Ltd approved engineer

The normal value for all control settings is specified in Section 1 of this manual

51 PILOT ADJUSTMENT

The pilot gas pressure and flame length may be adjusted by altering the discharge pressure of the pilot governor Screwing the adjusting screw clockwise (located under the top cap) increases the discharge pressure and the flame length anti-clockwise decreases the pressure and the flame length

52 BURNER HIGH FIRE PRESSURE ADJUSTMENT

At high fire alter the spring compression on the main burner governor (MV2) by removing the cap and adjust the spring compression plate clockwise to increase the burner pressure anti-clockwise to decrease burner pressure If the pressure does not increase on adjusting the spring the supply is inadequate

Note On small air handlers fitted with a mUlti-functional control the pressure adjusting screw is located under a swing cap on the first block valve

53 BURNER LOW FIRE ADJUSTMENT

The main burner low fire is adjusted on the flow control valve MV5 (Process amp Instrumentation Diagram)

Remove the top cover of the valve and insert a Terminal Screwdriver in the adjusting screw of the TOP cam marked NI

Drive the burner to low fire by adjusting the temperature controller set-point and high limit to 05degC as described in Appendix 4 of this manual

Turn the Terminal Screwdriver clockwise to decrease the low fire gas flow anti-clockwise to increase the flow

Check the heat input and flame signal at the new position are satisfactory and return the tenlperature controller to its normal settings

Replace the control valve cover

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 23

5 ADJUSTMENTS 3000S

54 SUMMERIOFFIWINTER SWITCH

In the SUMMER position this switch provides ventilation only and is independent of the programmed ON and OFF periods This position is manually selected and must be manually de-selected Whenever the switch is in this position the fan is operating

In the OFF position the air handler is shutdown and will not operate This overrides any frost protection fitted It is suitable for air handler shutdown for short periods such as holidays The programme memory is unaffected by this switch and assumes control of the air handler when the switch is returned to the WINTER position

In the WINTER position the air handler operates off the programme memory to provide heating

55 RESET BUTTON

Visual indication of air handler lockout is provided In the event of lockout occurring the air handler can be reset by depressing the RESET button This parallels the RESET button on the air handler main control panel If after 4 attempts to reset the air handler the lockout indicator still illuminates then a Service Engineer should be called to investigate the problem

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 24

6 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 3000S

61 AIR HANDLER START-UP

1 Open all manual gas valves both on the appliance and on the supply to the appliance Switch on the Electric Supply to the appliance

2 On the main air handler panel

Switch the panel isolator to the 1 position

Check POWER ON light

3 On the remote control station

For Heating Switch the SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch to WINTER

The air handler will now start automatically in response to the time settings

In the event of LOCKOUT

Press the RESET button and the cycle of operations will be repeated If the air handler goes to LOCKOUT four times in succession call for a Service Engineer

For Unheated Ventilation Switch the SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch to SUMMER

Note This prevents the burner firing giving a controlled supply of ventilation air to the heated space as long as the switch is in this position The air handler will now start automatically in response to the timeclock demand To turn the fan off return the switch to the centre OFF position

In the event of LOCKOUT

Press the RESET button and the cycle of operations will be repeated If the air handler goes to LOCKOUT four times in succession call for a Service Engineer

62 AIR HANDLER SHUTDOWN

621 SHUTDOWN FOR SHORT PERIODS

Switch the SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch on the remote station to OFF

622 SHUTDOWN FOR PROLONGED PERIODS

Switch the main panel isolator to the 0 position and close all manual gas valves both on and leading to the appliance

Note Manual gas valves should only be operated when the appliance is to be shut off for either Servicing or for a prolonged shutdown

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 25

30005 6 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

63 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS

631 SITE CLEARANCE ADJACENT TO AIR HANDLER

Attention should be paid to keeping the area around the air handler tidy No rubbish should be allowed to accumulate in the vicinity of the air handler and storage of goods etc should not be permitted within two metres of the air handler Failure to comply could result in reduced airflow to the air handler causing inefficient running and potential overheat cond ition

632 AIR SUPPLY TO AIR HANDLER

Air vents and grilles supplying air to the air handler should never be blocked and should be checked periodically to ensure they are clear

633 AIR FILTERS

Similarly attention should be paid to cleaning or replacing the filters to the air handler if fitted Your installer should advise you on the frequency with which this would be required to be completed

634 SERVICE

For continued safe and efficient operation of this air air handler it is important that servicing of the air handler should be completed at regular intervals by a competent person in accordance with Section 82 of this manual Users are advised to enter into a Service Agreement with RS STOKVIS Ltd

635 SPARE PARTS

It is suggested that a complete set of spare parts essential to the running of the air handler and recommended by the installer are kept by the user on the premises where the air handler is installed This is particularly important where the air handler forms an essential part of any process plant and its being out of operation may cause problems by for example frost damage or condensation by super-cooling

A list of Recommended Spares will be found in Section 9 of this manual

636 GAS LEAKS

If a smell of gas is detected around the area of the appliance Switch off all manual gas valves and contact your service engineer or the local gas undertaking

NEVER

LOOK FOR GAS LEAKS WITH A LIGHTED MATCH OR NAKED

FLAME

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 26

7 FAULT FINDING 30008

The main control panel incorporates two lights to help in fault finding

POWER ON

LOCKOUT

The remote station also has three lights

AIR FAN ON

BURNER ON

LOCKOUT

This section gives the possible causes of failure associated with each check light The electrical schematic diagram in this manual and the wiring diagram shipped in the main air handler panel should be used in conjunction with the notes below Additionally Service Engineers should familiarise themselves with the detailed Start Sequence given in Appendix 2 of this manual

The notes are given for each light before consulting the notes check for bulb failure

71 POWER ON LIGHT IS UNLIT

Check

1 Main control panel isolator is in the 1 position

2 Main Panel 6A MCB has not tripped if a trip has occurred the switch will be at the OFF position Reset and test system as required

3 Also check if the mains electrical supply is isolated If so FIND OUT WHY before taking any action

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 27

7 FAULT FINDING 30005

72 AIR FAN ON LIGHT IS UNLIT

Check

1 SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch is not in Position OFF

2 Timeperiod is not set to off

3 Air handler is not at LOCKOUT

4 Recheck both AIR FAN ON and LOCKOUT bulbs

Two fault indications are possible

1 THE FAN IS NOT OPERATING

If the fan should have started but is not operating

Check 1 Overload for tripped conditions Reset the overload and monitor the next start-up

2 Motor Fuses

3 Relays 1 2 amp3 for failure

laClor CC1 for failure

5 Air Pressure Switch (DPS) is failed in the N 0 Position

Replace the faulty component as described in Section 8

2 THE FAN IS OPERATING

This indicates that the air pressure switch (DPS) has failed to change over

Measure the profile plate differential pressure as described in Section 4113 If the pressure is correct the air pressure switch is faulty Check the switch as in 4114 If the pressure is not correct

Check 1 Correct fan belt tension

2 Correct fan rotation

3 The air handler air inlets and discharge are not blocked

4 Correct fitting on filters

5 The air differential pressure switch impulse lines are not blocked or leaking

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 28

7 FAULT FINDING 30008

73 LOCKOUT LIGHT IS ILLUMINATED

This light indicates a failure in the burner ignition and flame supervision system

RESET the unit and follow the progress of the start sequence The full cycle may take two minutes

1

------t

2 LOCKOUT after 35-40 seconds indicates an ignition failure RESET the system and observe the pilot and ignition spark during the start-up attempt

I-- shy

3 Observe the spark This should be strong and highly visible If not remove and clean the spark plug as Section 82 Check that the spark plug gap is correctly set at 15 mm

-- shy

4 Check the pilot flame If the pilot flame ignites and the unit goes to LOCKOUT the scanning system is at fault Remove and clean the detector as Section 82 Check the flame signal as in Section 431

5 If the pilot does not light the gas supply system is faulty Check the pilot system for restriction and the pilot valve operation

6 If the pilot lights and the unit goes to LOCKOUT after the main gas valves are addressed either the flow control valve is blocked or one of the main gas block valves has failed Fit a manometer on the pressure test point on the outlet flange of the multishyfunctional control and observe if the pressure rises when the main gas valves are addressed No pressure rise will indicate failure of the main gas valves

74 AIR FAN ON LIGHT ILLUMINATED

If the burner does not start check

1 SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch is in WINTER position

2 Overheat Limit Control

These interlocks prevent the burner management system starting

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 29

8 SERVICING 3000S

IMPORTANT Servicing and maintenance should be only carried out by a RS STOKVIS Ltd approved engineer

Only use replacement parts provided by the appliance manufacturer

Check that the air openings for combustion and for ventilation of any plant roon or compartment are clear

81 ISOLATION

811 FUEL GAS ISOLATION

The fuel gas to the ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler should be isolated and locked off at the manual ball valve mounted at the start of the fuel gas line Additionally before entering or servicing the air handler the burner manual isolation valve and pilot line isolation valve should be closed

812 ELECTRICAL ISOLATION

All electric power to the air handler and the remote control station is switched through the local isolator This isolator is fitted with a lock facility to permit it to be locked in the OFF position

Additionally isolate the power at the Wall Isolator

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 30

8 SERVICING 30005

82 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE

The air handler should be routinely serviced at the start of each heating season Isolate the air handler as above before servicing Details of access to individual components are given in Section 84 of this manual

1 Remove and clean spark igniter Check that the gap is correctly set at 25 mm Replace every two years

2 Clean the flame detector lens to ensure freedom from dirt and moisture If the cell shows any sign of cracks it should be replaced Routinely replace the cell every two years or after 10000 hours of operation which ever comes first

3 Inspect the entire air handler paint system for general damage Repair as necessary

4 Every two years brush the burner plates and clear the burner holes carefully with a Size 18mm drill for NP II and 20mm drill for NP I

WARNING THE BURNER HOLES MUST NOT BE ENLARGED

5 Inspect and lubricate all damper linkages to ensure freedom of operation Wipe off all excess lubricants to prevent dirt build up on linkage parts

6 Check the fan belt for cracks and splits Check tension The correct tension gives 16mm deflection per metre of span when the belt is centrally loaded with a force of 27N Adjust as necessary

7 Grease both the fan shaft bearings with Mobiith AW2 grease or similar

NEVER use high temperature grease

NEVER mix two different greases within the bearing always flush existing grease out

Note Removing the cover plate on the end of the air handler gains access to the outboard fan bearing

Light to Slow to 0 120 2 to 6 months Clean Dry

Medium Medium 120 200 1 to 2 months

Moderate to Light to Slow to 0 120 1 to 4 weeks Dry

Dirty Medium Medium 120 200 1 to 7 days

Extreme Dirt Dry Light to Slow to 0 200 Daily Flushing out

Medium Medium Dirt

83 ANNUAL SERVICE CHECKS

After Servicing test fire the air handler following the Commissioning Procedure detailed in Section 4 of this manual to ensure correct operation generally Special attention must be paid to the damper system and related controls and interlocks

Additionally check that the fresh air and recirculation air entry path to the air handler has been kept clear and instruct the User of the need for this as necessary

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 31

8 SERVICING 3000S

84 REMOVAL PROCEDURE FOR REPLACEABLE COMPONENTS

IMPORTANT

Turn off the gas at the appliance service valve and the electricity at the main panel and wall isolator before proceeding

841 BURNER

The burner is located inside the air handler casing and is mounted on two brackets from the support straps To remove the burner isolate the air handler as in 81 and undo the union on the fuel gas line adjacent to the burner isolation valve (MV6) and unscrew the main and pilot gas feed pipes from the burner rail Access to the rear of the burner assembly is made by removing the partition plate below the burner separating the fresh air inlet to the burner from the return air inlet compartment This is held in place by screws which engage in captive nuts on the top side of the partition Remove the Flame Detector and pull off the ignition plug cap Disconnect the burner support brackets and remove the burner The burner will easily pass through the access hatch for further strip down Replace in the reverse order soundness test the gas pipework check the burner operation and duty as described in the commissioning section of this manual

842 FLAME DETECTOR

This is a 240 Volt instrument

The flame detector is mounted on the end of the burner rail inside the air handler casing To remove the detector isolate the panel electric supply and lock off Push the scanner towards the burner and rotate to release the bayonet fixing and lift the detector from its mount Remove the two screws holding the detector cover and disconnect the supply leads noting the polarity of the connections

Replace the flame detector in the reverse order ensuring correct polarity of connections Ensure the access panel is securely closed and the retaining nuts are tightened down Check operation by inserting a test meter in the points provided in the main control panel and reading the flame signals during start up to full rate burner operation (See 431) Operate the appliance over six starts for reliability of operation including tum off of start and main gas valves to check for lockout operation

843 IGNITER SPARK PLUG

This is a high tension spark plug

The igniter spark plug is mounted on the end of the burner rail inside the air handler casing To remove the spark plug isolate the air handler as above Enter the service access door Access to the spark plug is made through the profile plate To remove the spark plug pull off the high tension lead and unscrew the plug with a plug spanner

When replacing the spark plug check the plug gap is set at 15mm Check ignition reliability over six start ups

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 32

8 SERVICING 3000S

844 IGNITER SPARK TRANSFORMER

This is a 240 Volt instrument

The ignition transformer is located in a plastic box mounted on the air handler casing adjacent to the main control panel To remove the transformer isolate the air handler as above and unscrew the four retaining screws holding the box lid in place and remove the lid Disconnect the supply cable at the terminal strip and undo the transformer retaining screws The transformer may then be unscrewed from the High Tension cable leading to the spark plug

Replacement is a simple reversal of this procedure

Check ignition reliability over six start ups

845 COMBUSTION AIR PRESSURE SWITCH (DPS)

Note The switch is set and sealed and should be replaced if not operating correctly

This switch is a 240 Volt instrument

The air switch is mounted directly on the air handler casing and can be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove the switch isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the supply cable Break the downstream pipe compression fitting and unscrew the switch housing from its locating fitting Reverse the procedure to replace after ensuring switch setting is as specified in Section 13 of this manual Operate the air handler to ensure reliability of operation over six start ups

846 AIR HANDLER OVERHEAT LIMIT CONTROL

This is a 240 Volt instrument

The overheat limit control can be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove the control isolate the air handler as above and lock off Remove the switch cover Disconnect the supply cable and unscrew the control housing from its locating fitting Reverse the procedure to replace check the switch is set to 50degC Test the switch operation as described in Section 43 over at least three operations

847 AIR FAN AND MOTOR

The air fan motor is a 415 Volt 3 phase motor

The motor and slide rails are easily accessible inside the air handler casing If it is necessary to remove the motor isolate the air handler as above Slacken the fan-belt tension and remove the drive belts Pull the motor away from the air handler casing to make access to the motor terminal box and disconnect the supply cable The motor may now be removed from the unit Following replacement the air handler must be fully re-commissioned as in Section 4

It is unlikely that the air fan will need replacing or servicing If required a full procedure should be obtained from RS STOKVIS Ltd

Replacement must be followed by full re-commissioning as in Section 4

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 33

8 SERVICING 3000S

848 FUEL GAS MULTI-FUNCTIONAL CONTROL - SMALL UNITS

This is a 240 Volt instrument

The fuel gas multi-functional control can be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove the unit isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the Hirschman electric termination Unbolt the control from its flanges and remove

When replacing care must be taken to ensure the flange 0 rings are undamaged and in the correct location Following replacement the air handler must be fully reshycommissioned as in Section 4 including tests for soundness prior to start-up

849 GOVERNOR AND BLOCK VALVES

The block valves are 240 Volt instruments

All these items may be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove any item isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the electric termination to the two block valves the pilot block valve and the flow control block valve Break the two pipe unions and remove the fuel gas line complete for further strip-down

8410 FUEL GAS FLOW CONTROL VALVE

This is a 24 Volt instrument

The fuel gas How control valve can be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove the valve isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the supply cables to the control valve

On small air handlers fitted with a multi-functional control support the multi-functional control and unbolt its discharge flange Break the union downstream of the burner isolation valve and remove the section of line containing the flow control valve for further strip-down

On large air handlers fitted with separate block valves it will be necessary to remove the fuel gas line complete as Section 8410 above

Following replacement re-commission the air handler

Note If the fresh air damper is not in the full open position the heat input must not exceed the maximum heat input at recirculation condition specified in the technical data section of this manual

8411 PILOT GAS GOVERNOR AND BLOCK VALVE

The block valve is a 240 Volt instrument

Both items may be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove either item isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the electric terrriination to the solenoid valve Undo the upstream pipe union and the compression fitting downstream of the manual block valve (PV3) Remove the pilot gas line complete for further strip down

Replace broken or distorted connections and retest for soundness Ensure the pilot gas pressure is correct and the flame is sensing an output Ensure reliability over six start-ups

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 34

8 SERVICING 3000S

8412 BELT TENSIONING PROCEDURE

The setting tensions are designed to cover a wide range of drives A precise setting force for individual applications can be calculated as detailed

SETTING FORCES

Belt Section

Setting Force To Deflect Belt 16mm per Metre Of Span

Small Pulley Diameter (mm)

Basic Setting Forces Newtons (N) Kilograms (kgf)

125 x Setting Forces Newtons (N) Kilograms (kgf)

SPZ

56 to 71 16 16 20 20 75 to 90 18 18 22 22

95 to 125 20 20 25 25 Over 125 22 22 28 28

SPA

80 to 100 22 22 28 28 106 to 140 30 30 38 38 150 to 200 36 37 45 46 Over 200 40 40 50 51

SPB

112 to 160 40 40 50 51 170 to 224 50 51 62 63 236 to 355 62 63 77 79 Over 355 65 66 81 83

SPC 224 to 250 70 71 87 89 265 to 355 92 94 115 120 Over 375 115 120 144 150

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 35

8 SERVICING 3000S

BELT TENSIONING USING FENNER BELT TENSION INDICATOR

Calculate the deflection in mm on a basis of 16mm per metre of centre distance Centre Distance (m) x 16 =Deflection (mm)

Set lower marker ring at the deflection distance required in mm on the lower scale

Set upper ring against to bottom edge of the top tube

Place the belt tension indicator on top of the belt at the centre of span and apply a force at right angles to the belt defecting it to the point where the lower marker ring is level with the top of the adjacent belt

Read off the force value indicated by the top edge of the upper marker ring

Compare this force to the kgf value shown in the table above

If a Fenner Belt Tension Indicator is not available a spring balance and rule will be suffice

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 36

8 SERVICING 30005

85 MAIN PANEL CONTROLS

All panel controls are readily accessible and may be easily exchanged for replacement components in the event of failure Ensure any replacement item is of the same make and type as the original

851 LANDIS amp GYR LFL 1335 AUTOMATIC SEQUENCE CONTROLLER

The Landis amp Gyr Automatic Sequence Controller is a plug-in unit locating on a pre-wired chassis To remove the controller undo the two retaining screws at the top left and lower right corners and pull the module off the chassis

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

852 CONTROLS CIRCUIT (24 VOLT) TRANSFORMER

The Controls Circuit Transformer is fixed to the panel back plate by tapped screws To remove the transformer undo the wiring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel Undo the two retaining screws and remove the unit complete

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

853 CONTROL RELAYS R1 R2 amp R3

The Control Relays are DIN Rail mounted To remove a relay undo the wIring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel Release the DIN rail retaining clip under the relay with a screwdriver and remove the relay

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

854 6A MCB

The 6A MCB is DIN Rail mounted To remove the MCB undo the wiring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel Release the DIN rail retaining clip under the MCB with a screwdriver and remove the MCB

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

855 THERMAL OVERLOAD

The thermal overload is attached to the underside of the main contactor To remove the overload undo the wiring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel and that the overload setting is as specified in Section 13 of this manual Unscrew the three connections to the contactor and remove the overload

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 37

8 SERVICING 3000S

856 MAIN CONTACTOR

The Main Contactor is DIN Rail mounted To remove the contactor remove the thermal overload as 855 above and then undo the wiring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel Release the DIN rail retaining clip under the contactor with a screwdriver and remove the contactor

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

857 MOTOR FUSE

To replace a motor fuse pull the fuse carrier off the fuse holder base The fuse is attached to the fuse carrier by two screws Unscrew remove and replace

86 REMOTE CONTROL STATION

The remote control station contains some serviceable parts although these items should only be fitted by an approved RS STOKVIS Ltd Engineer

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 38

9 RECOMMENDED SPARES 3000S

For two years operation it is recommended that the following items should be held in stock

ITEM DESCRIPTION PART NO QUANTITY i

1 INDICATOR BULBS W1121 1 PACK

2 SPARK PLUG 023739 1 I

3 UVDETECTOR QRA10C 1 I

4 ROOM SENSOR DRT2453 1

5 DUCT SENSOR DDT1701 1

All replacement parts can be obtained from RS STOKVIS Ltd by quoting the air handler serial number the part number and description

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 39

APPENDIX 1 30005

SOUNDNESS TESTING THE FUEL GAS PIPEWORK

This procedure should only be carried out by personnel familiar with the ECONO-AIR 3000S Series Air handler

The pressure test points and all valves are identified on the Process and Instrumentation Diagram for the air handler included in Section 1 of this n1anual

Isolate the air handler electric supply at the main control panel and lock off Close the manual isolation valves MV1 MV6 and PV3 Ensure the supply pressure is available on the upstream side of MV1

A11 TESTING THE UPSTREAM PIPEWORKAND BURNER CONTROLS 1 Connect a 60 mbar manometer to the pressure test nipple A Monitor the

pressure for two minutes Any rise in pressure indicates that valve MV1 is leaking and must be replaced Remove pressure test points Band F

2 Open MV1 to pressurise the pipework on both the main gas and pilot line to the first block valve

3 Close MV1 Allow one minute for the temperature to stabilise and then test the system for 2 minutes and watch for a drop in the pipework pressure If the pressure falls open valve MV1 and test the pipework connections and valves from MV1 to MV3 and MV1 to PV2 for leaks with a proprietary leak detector fluid or spray Turn off MV1 seal any leaks and re-test

4 If no extemalleaks are found either the pilot block valve PV1 or either the first main gas block valve MV3 is letting by

5 To test this seal pressure test point A and fit a manometer to pressure test point B Leave for two minutes with MV1 open A rise in pressure on the manometer confirms a leak on the block valve MV3 Turn off MV1 exchange the valve and re-test from point 2 above

6 Repeat this procedure for the pilot block valve Seal test point B and fit a manometer to pressure test point F Leave for two minutes with MV1 open A rise in pressure on the manometer confirms a leak on the pilot block valve PV2 Turn off MV1 exchange the valve and re-test from point 1 above Seal test point F

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 40

APPENDIX 1 30005

A12 TESTING THE DOWNSTREAM BURNER VALVE 1 Close MV1 and connect pressure test points A and 8 with flexible 6 mm bore

tubing teed into the manometer Remove pressure test point C Open MV1 to pressurise the downstream block valve MV4

2 Close MV1 and leave for one minute for the temperature to stabilise Monitor the pressure for 2 minutes If the pressure falls open valve MV1 and leak test the line between the two block valves MV3 and MV4 with a proprietary leak detector Turn off MV1 seal any leaks and re-test Note Smaller air handlers in the 3000S Series are fitted with multi-functional valves combining the pressure regulator and two block valves in one component The above procedure still applies but if a leak is found on either block valve the whole control should be replaced If no external leaks are found the downstream block valve is letting by

3 To confirm this close MV1 remove the manometer and refit to pressure test point C Connect pressure test points A and 8 with flexible 6mm bore tubing Open MV1 and allow one minute for the temperature to stabilise Monitor the pressure for a further 2 minutes with MV1 still open A rise in pressure confirms that the second block valve MV4 is letting by Turn off MV1 Replace the valve and re-test from 2 above

A13 TESTING THE DOWNSTREAM BURNER PIPEWORK 1 Close MV1 and connect pressure test points A and D with flexible 6 mm bore

tubing teed into the manometer Open MV1 to pressurise the downstream pilot pipework

2 Close MV1 and leave for one minute for the temperature to stabilise Monitor the pressure for 2 minutes If the pressure falls open valve MV1 and leak test the line between the downstream block valve MV4 and the manual block MV6 with a proprietary leak detector fluid or spray If no external leaks are found the manual block valve MV6 is letting by Turn off MV1 seal any leakages and reshytest from 2 above

A14 TESTING THE DOWNSTREAM PILOT PIPEWORK 1 Close MV1 and connect pressure test points A and F with flexible 6mm bore

tubing teed into the manometer Open MV1 to pressurise the downstream pilot pipework

2 Close MV1 and leave for one rninute for the temperature to stabilise Monitor the pressure for 2 minutes If the pressure falls open valve MV1 and leak test the line between the downstream block valve PV2 and the manual block PV3 with a proprietary leak detector fluid or spray If no external leaks are found the manual block valve PV3 is letting by Turn off MV1 seal any leakages and reshytest from 2 above

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 41

APPENDIX 1 30005

A15 TESTING THE BURNER CONNECTIONS 1 Remove the burner access panel as described in Section 84 of this manual

Remove the burner spark igniter Slacken the two retaining bolts holding the burner to the burner support straps and unbolt the burner supply endplate from the burner casting and mixing plates

2 Connect pressure test points A and 0 with flexible 6mm bore tubing teed into the manometer Open MV1 and MV6 to pressurise the burner pipework Leak test the main gas burner pipework and connections with proprietary leak detector fluid Turn off MV6 Seal any leakages and re-test

3 Connect pressure test points A and F with flexible 6 mm bore tubing teed into the manometer Open MV1 and PV3 to pressurise the pilot burner pipework Leak test the pilot gas burner pipework and connections with proprietary leak detector fluid Turn off PV3 Seal any leakages and re-test

4 Turn off MV1

5 Replace the spark igniter and profile division plate

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 42

APPENDIX 2 30005

START SEQUENCE

The burner start sequence is controlled by the Landis and Gyr burner management unit The timings are pre-set and comply with 885885 This unit must NOT be tampered with

A brief description of the start-up sequence isshy

The unit checks

1 The NO FLAME signal on the UV flame scanner

Note If the scanner detects a flame at any time other than in the correct operating sequence the flame programmer initiates a lockout

2 The operation of the combustion air proving switch in the NO AIR position

3 The air handler discharge high temperature switch

If the checks are completed the unit starts the combustion air fan and then checks the combustion airflow

Once the airflow is proven the unit checks that the damper control circuit is functioning correctly After the damper microswitch is made to prove the fresh air damper is fully open the sequence allows 30 seconds for the combustion air to purge any combustible gas from the air handler

After completion of the purge the spark ignition system is energised the pilot valve opened and the spark terminated If the pilot flame is not proven by the UV scanner the system will initiate a LOCKOUT

If the flame is proven the main gas valves are opened the pilot extinguished and the main burner flame proven

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 43

i

APPENDIX 2 30008

The following flow chart shows the complete start sequence including the lighting of the various indicating lamps

MANUAL STATUS LIGHT POWER ON

POWER ON

I INITIATE START BY TIME

SETTING ON CONTROLLER

I CHECK NO FLAME

VISIBLE

PROVEj FAIL LOCKOUT

I CHECK RELAY R4 NC

POSITION

PROVE FAIL NO START

I CHECK AIR PRESSURE SWITCH NC POSITION

PROVE FAIL NO START

I CHECK RELAY R1 NC

POSITION

PROVE j

FAIL NO START

I START COMBUSTION

AIR BLOWER

I CHECK AIR PRESSURE SWITCH NO POSITION

PROVE I

FAIL NO START

I STATUS LIGHT FAN ON

I ENERGISE RELAY R1

I

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 44

I

I

APPENDIX 2 30008

I CHECK OVERHEAT LIMIT

CONTROL R5

PROVE I

FAIL I I

CHECK 541412 LOOP CLOSED ON

LANDIS ampGYR CIRCUIT

PROVE I

FAIL I I

COMBUSTION AIR PURGE PERIOD

30 SECONDS

I

NO START

NO START

CANCEL NO FLAME CHECK CIRCUIT

I

ENERGISE SPARK

I TIMED PERIOD 25 SECONDS

I ENERGISE PILOT GAS

VALVE

I TIMED PERIOD 25 SECONDS

I TERMINATE SPARK

I INTERROGATE UV FLAME SCANNER

PROVE I

FAIL I I

TIMED PERIOD 10 SECONDS

I

LOCKOUT

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 45

I

I

APPENDIX 2 3000S

I ENERGISE MAIN GAS

VALVES

I

STATUS LIGHT BURNER ON

I TIMED PERIOD

5 SECONDS

I DE-ENERGISE PILOT

GAS VALVES

CONTINUOUS FROM PILOT

I INTERROGATE UV FLAME SCANNER

PROVE I

FAIL I I

LOCKOUT I

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 46

APPENDIX 3 30005

Please see copy of Standard Service Sheet

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 47

APPENDIX 4 30005

A41 TIME OUT SCREEN

This is the standard screen displayed when the touch screen is not in use The back light is off to save energy_ To access the STATUS screen touch the ENTER key and the following screen is displayed

[]][I][]rn[IJOO[][IJOO[] EJ~E11 I[]I ~ middot I

NOTE

The Touch Screen operates using the heat produced by the touch of a finger and therefore only LIGHT pressure is required

Excessive pressure can damage the Touch Screen

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 48

APPENDIX 4 30008

A42 STATUS SCREEN

On the typical STATUS screen the illustrated information detailed is as follows

19 36 Fan Brn

RS OS

100 Fst_~_ Lck _ _ Xst Gas~o ~ I

RS Indicates the current room temperature

OS ~( t~~ the current duct discharge temperature

Fan Indicates the current status of the fan by showing the arrow and the fan blades for ON and OFF is shown by the arrow and fan blades being removed

Brn Indicates the current status of the burner with the black flames indicating the burner to be ON and vice versa

Lck LOCKOUT - This indicates a flame failure when highlighted during normal or start-up operation

Xst EXCESS TEMPERATURE SWITCH - This indicates the unit has reached the trip limit on the over heat stat when highlighted during operation

Indicates the current position of the gas modulating valve during normal Gas

operation (0-100)

Indicates whether the Frost stat is energised and the unit is running on frost Fst

override

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 49

APPENDIX 4 30008

A43 CHANGING SETTINGS

It is possible to change the settings for the time of operation and the required temperature set points The following details the steps required

A44 ENTERING THE SECURITY CODE

From the STATUS screen touch the return key and the screen below will be displayed

Type the HIGH LEVEL security code (4321) If you make a mistake use the BACK SPACE key to delete any incorrect number(s) Touch the ENTER key when the code is correct

If the security code is incorrect the screen above will be displayed then try again If after several attempts you can not gain access please contact RS STOKVIS Ltd for further information

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 50

APPENDIX 4 30008

When the code is entered correctly the MAIN MENU is displayed as detailed below

~ STATUS SET VALUES~ ~ TIVIE CLOCK [) [) [) [) [)

The MAIN MENU screen shows the three menu items available The title for each menu item can be changed to suit the end user Please notify RS STOKVIS Ltd prior to commissioning should these parameters require special amendments

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 51

APPENDIX 4 30008

A45 CHANGING OR SETTING A TIME SCHEDULE

From the main menu screen select the TIME CLOCK page by running finger across screen symbol and touch the ENTER key the screen below will be displayed

On the following screen highlight the TS1 symbol and touch the ENTER key

The current time schedule will now be displayed as shown below The display will automatically default to the current day (1 =Monday 2 =Tuesday etc) In this case day 5 (Friday) the four schedule switching times refer to that day

IAC6BBB1BHIS1

mm0CIl bull mID 17BB 17BB 17HB

Iillleschedule

To modify a time select it by highlighting and touch the ENTER key and the following screen is displayed

To amend the appropriate onoff time as shown on the screen below The arrows to the right of the time are for altering the hours and the arrows on the left for the minutes

Once you have set the time use the ESCape key to exit back to the time schedule screen and choose another day by touching the required number Another time may now be modified as before

IAC6BBB1BHIS1

H8BH

I i eschedule

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 52

APPENDIX 4 30008

Use the ESCape key to exit back to the MAIN MENU screen

~ STATUS ~ SET VALUES

TIME CLOCK []~ [] [] [] []

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 53

APPENDIX 4 30005

A46 CHANGING SET VALUES

From the main menu screen select the SET VALUES page by highlight in the normal way and touch the ENTER key

The following screen is displayed

36 19 18III III IIIHsv Rsv Llv

To change the RSV highlight it in the normal way and touch the ENTER key and the screen below will now be shown

IAC6RRR1RR40 T I

0 19 (Y)l RSV

ROOM SET VALUE

The above screen shows the parameters that can be changed The values to the far left are the limitations of set point (OC) Change the set point by using the UP and DOWN ARROWS on the left of the screen or touch the set value itself followed by the ENTER key to select the set value and set it directly using the numeric keyboard All values can be changed in this way

Use the ESCape key twice to exit back to the MAIN MENU screen

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 54

APPENDIX 4 30005

A47 COMMISSIONING AND SERVICING BURNER CHECKS

Select the SET VALUES screen from the MAIN MENU screen and adjust the high lirrlit set point to 55degC to drive the burner to high fire

IAC6HHH1HH60 ~T I

0 19 (Y)

HSV

HIGH SET VALUE ~

Ensure the set value is returned to 36degC once the appropriate checks and adjustments as described in Section 43 of this manual have been completed Return to the SET VALUES screen and select the low limit value to adjust the low fire setting

Reduce the low limit value to OdegC to drive the gas valve to low fire and complete the appropriate checks and adjustments as described in Section 43 of this manual and ensure the set value is returned to the original value

A48 GMT ltgt BST CHANGEOVER DAYLIGHT SAVINGS

To change your unit to British Summer TimelWinter Time the following system screen must be highlighted by touching the Iamp1 button twice

By touching the clock symbol in the top left hand corner followed by the ENTER key the screen below will be displayed

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 55

APPENDIX 4 30008

188311 851193

544

By touching and highlighting in this case 18 followed by the ENTER key A small box allowing the entry of two digits will appear Enter the desired time required using the numbered keys followed by ENTER key Your unit is now set to operate on BSTBWT

Touch the ESC key three times to return back to the Status screen

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 56

STOKVIS ENERGY SYSTEMS 96R WALTON ROAD EAST MOLESEY SURREY KT8 0DL TEL 020 8783 3050 08707 707 747 FAX 020 8783 3051 08707 707 767 E-MAIL infostokvisboilerscom WEBSITE wwwstokvisboilerscom

JULY 1999

Page 22: ECONOAIR 3000S SERIES AIR HANDLING UNIT DIRECT FIREDstokvisboilers.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/EconoAir... · 2019-05-10 · ECONOAIR 3000S SERIES AIR HANDLING UNIT DIRECT FIRED

3 INSTALLATION 3000S

316 ALIGNMENT

3161 INSTALLATION OF DRIVE BELTS

On 80 amp 89 30008 range of air handlers it will be necessary to align the pulleys and fit the drive belts before carrying out commissioning of the unit

3162 PU LLEYS

Before assembling the drive check the pulley grooves are free from scores or sharp edges and all dimensions conform to the relevant standard

The Taper Lock bush is your starting point when it comes to assembly and installation Drive installation is a straightforward job with Taper Lock - but the stages set out on the installation leaflet provided with every Taper Lock bush should be followed closely

3163 ALIGNMENT

Good alignment of pulleys prior to belt installation is important to avoid belt flank wear The diagram below shows correct installation of pulleys

INTERNAl BEARING

MOTOR PUlLEY rAN PULLEY

MOTORMOTOR ADJUSTMENT MOUNTING BOlTSBOLTS

3164 BELTS

When the pulleys have been correctly positioned on the shafts the belts can be installed to complete the drive

The drive centre distance should be reduced prior to the installation of the belts so that they may be fitted without the use of force Under no circumstances must belts be prised into the grooves Using sharp tools to stretch the belts over the pulley rim can easily damage belts and pulley grooves

The installation allowance given in the table below is the minimum recommended reduction in centre distance for various belt section and lengths to allow for correct fitting

The take-up allowance given in the same table should be added on to the calculated centre distance to allow for belt stretch

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 18

3 INSTALLATION 3000S

3165 INSTALLATION AND TAKE UP ALLOWANCE

Belt Pitch Installation Allowance Take-Up Length (mm) SPZ SPA SPB SPC (mm)

410 to 530 5

540 to 840 10

850 to 1160 15

1170 to 1500 20

1510 to 1830 20 25

1840 to 2170 30

2180 to 2830 25 40

2840 to 3500 30 50

3520 to 4160 50 60

4170 to 5140 70

5220 to 6150 85

6180 to 7500 105

600 to 8500 125

8880 to 10170 145

10600 to 12500 175

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 19

4 COMMISSIONING 30005

This appliance must be commissioned by a RS STOKVIS Ltd approved engineer

41 PRESTART CHECKS

1 Switch the SUMMERIOFFMlINTER switch on the remote station to OFF

2 Check the correct electric supply is available to the air handler and the appliance isolator installed

3 Check the correct fuel gas supply is available to the air handler and local isolation valve and union installed Check that new gas pipe work has been correctly purged and pressure tested and that the isolation valve is in the OFF position

4 Check the air handler gas control system and burner connections for pressure soundness as detailed in Appendix 1 of this manual

5 Complete the first section of the Service Check Sheet supplied at the back of this manual (Appendix 3)

6 Close the air handler access door

7 Close and lock the main air handler control panel

8 Switch the main panel isolator to position 1 Check the POWER ON light illuminates

9 Check and set the timed ONOFF periods in the lAC Controller located on the remote panel Ensure that the unit is set to be on during testing Refer to Appendix 4 for the lAC setting procedure

10 Close and lock the remote panel

11 Switch the SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch on the remote station to SUMMER to start the air fan Return the switch to the OFF position and check for correct rotation of the fan as the fan slows and stops

The fan rotation can be observed through the fan section access door or through the air handler access door Only do this during the fan run-down period Ensure the door is securely fastened after completion

Rotation arrows are fitted on the end of the air handler and inside the air handler above the interior bearing support If the rotation is incorrect two phases should be interchanged as dictated by the Engineer responsible for the site electrical system

12 Check the air pressure drop across the burner whilst the fan is operating with a water column pressure gauge connected to the two pressure test points on the air pressure switch (DPS) This pressure should be between 14 and 16 rnbar

If the air differential pressure measured above is not within the operating range check inlet and outlet ductwork as appropriate and any filters fitted If the pressure differential is still not within limits isolate the air handler and report to RS STOKVIS Ltd before proceeding

13 Check the operation and setting of the Low Air Pressure Switch by injecting a controlled signal into the switch Check the break point on the switch is 1 mbar (falling)

Note The switch is set and sealed before fitting The 1 mbar switch point may not coincide with the 1 mbar scale reading on the switch

If on checking the switch is not operating correctly do not tamper with it return it to RS STOKVIS Ltd for replacement

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 20

4 COMMISSIONING 3000S

42 DRY RUN

With all the manual gas isolation valves still in the OFF position switch the SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch to WINTER

43 START UP

1 Attach a manometer to pressure test point F and the low pressure test point on the air pressure switch (DPS)

2 Open the main gas supply valve (MV1) and the pilot burner isolation valve (PV3) Leave the main burner isolation valve (MV6) closed Reset the air handler by pressing the push-button marked RESET on either the main panel or remote station The air handler pilot will light automatically (after the automatic damper start check and combustion air pre-purge) and then LOCKOUT after the main gas shut-off valves are addressed

During the short period that the pilot is in operation check the pilot gas pressure on the manometer It should be 10 mbar and the pilot flame approximately 100 - 150mm in length covering the first three or four holes of the mixing plate and have a steady blue colour when viewed through the sight glass on the access side of the air handler Adjust as necessary - refer to Section 51 this manual Check the flame signal - refer to Section 431

3 Open the main burner isolation valve (MV6) RESET the air handler which should now light to main burner stage When alight close the main burner isolation valve to shut down the gas flow to the burner Check that the unit goes to LOCKOUT

4 Reset the air handler and drive the burner to low fire by adjusting the temperature controller set point as described in Appendix 4 of this manual Check the flame is continuous across the width of the burner and has a flame length of approx 50 - 65mm from the burner rail when viewed through the sight glass on the access side of the air handler Check the burner pressure across pressure test point D and the downstream (low) pressure test point on the air pressure switch ie on the rear of the pressure switch This pressure is specifled in Section 1 of this manual Adjust as necessary-refer to Section 53 of this manual Check the flame signal - refer to Section 431

Where possible check the actual gas flow rate by meter reading with all other appliances turned off

5 Drive the burner to high fire by adjusting the temperature controller set point and high limit to 55degC as described in Appendix 4 of this manual Check the flame is continuous across the burner rail and has a flame length of approximately 250 - 350mm from the burner rail Check the burner pressure across pressure test point D and the downstream (low) pressure test point on the air pressure switch This pressure is specified in Section 1 of this manual Adjust as necessary - refer to Section 52 of this manual Check the maximum air handler discharge temperature Check the flame signal shyrefer to Section 431

Where possible check the actual gas flow rate by meter reading with all other appliances turned off

6 Check the operation of the overheat limit control by adjusting the temperature controller set point and high limit to 65degC as described in Appendix 4 of this manual Monitor the discharge temperature on the temperature controller Check that the overheat control operates as the set temperature is passed Check that the control must be manually reset by pressing the green reset button on the front of the switch Return the temperature controller to its original settings

In the event that the ambient temperature is too low for this simple procedure to work the instrument will have to be bench tested using a Temperature 8ath Remove and replace the control as Section 84 of this manual for bench-testing

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 21

4 COMMISSIONING 3000S

43 1 FLAME SIGNAL CHECK

1 The ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler is fitted with a Klippon SAKT1 Test Terminal which can be used to measure the flame scanning signal Refer to the Electrical Schematic and connect a 0-1 mA ammeter to the two test points with standard 23 mm test plugs with the positive lead on the detector side Disconnect the terminal link to obtain the signal reading A minimum signal of 70 microamps is required typical signals are in the 250-400 microamp range on both pilot and main flame After completion replace the terminal link and remove the test jacks

2 Drive the burner to high fire as previously described Measure the carbon dioxide content of the discharge air stream This figure must not exceed 2800 ppm If the discharge exceeds this limit isolate the air handler and report to RS STOKVIS Ltd before proceeding

Stop and start the air handler a few times to check for reliability using the Operating Instructions (Section 6)

432 HANDOVER

Complete the air handler Service Check Sheet supplied at the back of this manual The self-copy sheet must be returned to STOKVIS for checking

Instruct the User in efficient use and care of the unit start-up and shutdown (including emergency shutdown) and recommended service interval Emphasise the need to keep the air handler clear of stored items and extraneous material and to maintain the recirculation and fresh air paths to the air handler inlets Hand all instructions as applicable to the UserOwner for safekeeping

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 22

5 ADJUSTMENTS 3000S

If adjustments to the air handler settings are required they should be made by a RS STOKVIS Ltd approved engineer

The normal value for all control settings is specified in Section 1 of this manual

51 PILOT ADJUSTMENT

The pilot gas pressure and flame length may be adjusted by altering the discharge pressure of the pilot governor Screwing the adjusting screw clockwise (located under the top cap) increases the discharge pressure and the flame length anti-clockwise decreases the pressure and the flame length

52 BURNER HIGH FIRE PRESSURE ADJUSTMENT

At high fire alter the spring compression on the main burner governor (MV2) by removing the cap and adjust the spring compression plate clockwise to increase the burner pressure anti-clockwise to decrease burner pressure If the pressure does not increase on adjusting the spring the supply is inadequate

Note On small air handlers fitted with a mUlti-functional control the pressure adjusting screw is located under a swing cap on the first block valve

53 BURNER LOW FIRE ADJUSTMENT

The main burner low fire is adjusted on the flow control valve MV5 (Process amp Instrumentation Diagram)

Remove the top cover of the valve and insert a Terminal Screwdriver in the adjusting screw of the TOP cam marked NI

Drive the burner to low fire by adjusting the temperature controller set-point and high limit to 05degC as described in Appendix 4 of this manual

Turn the Terminal Screwdriver clockwise to decrease the low fire gas flow anti-clockwise to increase the flow

Check the heat input and flame signal at the new position are satisfactory and return the tenlperature controller to its normal settings

Replace the control valve cover

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 23

5 ADJUSTMENTS 3000S

54 SUMMERIOFFIWINTER SWITCH

In the SUMMER position this switch provides ventilation only and is independent of the programmed ON and OFF periods This position is manually selected and must be manually de-selected Whenever the switch is in this position the fan is operating

In the OFF position the air handler is shutdown and will not operate This overrides any frost protection fitted It is suitable for air handler shutdown for short periods such as holidays The programme memory is unaffected by this switch and assumes control of the air handler when the switch is returned to the WINTER position

In the WINTER position the air handler operates off the programme memory to provide heating

55 RESET BUTTON

Visual indication of air handler lockout is provided In the event of lockout occurring the air handler can be reset by depressing the RESET button This parallels the RESET button on the air handler main control panel If after 4 attempts to reset the air handler the lockout indicator still illuminates then a Service Engineer should be called to investigate the problem

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 24

6 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 3000S

61 AIR HANDLER START-UP

1 Open all manual gas valves both on the appliance and on the supply to the appliance Switch on the Electric Supply to the appliance

2 On the main air handler panel

Switch the panel isolator to the 1 position

Check POWER ON light

3 On the remote control station

For Heating Switch the SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch to WINTER

The air handler will now start automatically in response to the time settings

In the event of LOCKOUT

Press the RESET button and the cycle of operations will be repeated If the air handler goes to LOCKOUT four times in succession call for a Service Engineer

For Unheated Ventilation Switch the SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch to SUMMER

Note This prevents the burner firing giving a controlled supply of ventilation air to the heated space as long as the switch is in this position The air handler will now start automatically in response to the timeclock demand To turn the fan off return the switch to the centre OFF position

In the event of LOCKOUT

Press the RESET button and the cycle of operations will be repeated If the air handler goes to LOCKOUT four times in succession call for a Service Engineer

62 AIR HANDLER SHUTDOWN

621 SHUTDOWN FOR SHORT PERIODS

Switch the SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch on the remote station to OFF

622 SHUTDOWN FOR PROLONGED PERIODS

Switch the main panel isolator to the 0 position and close all manual gas valves both on and leading to the appliance

Note Manual gas valves should only be operated when the appliance is to be shut off for either Servicing or for a prolonged shutdown

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 25

30005 6 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

63 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS

631 SITE CLEARANCE ADJACENT TO AIR HANDLER

Attention should be paid to keeping the area around the air handler tidy No rubbish should be allowed to accumulate in the vicinity of the air handler and storage of goods etc should not be permitted within two metres of the air handler Failure to comply could result in reduced airflow to the air handler causing inefficient running and potential overheat cond ition

632 AIR SUPPLY TO AIR HANDLER

Air vents and grilles supplying air to the air handler should never be blocked and should be checked periodically to ensure they are clear

633 AIR FILTERS

Similarly attention should be paid to cleaning or replacing the filters to the air handler if fitted Your installer should advise you on the frequency with which this would be required to be completed

634 SERVICE

For continued safe and efficient operation of this air air handler it is important that servicing of the air handler should be completed at regular intervals by a competent person in accordance with Section 82 of this manual Users are advised to enter into a Service Agreement with RS STOKVIS Ltd

635 SPARE PARTS

It is suggested that a complete set of spare parts essential to the running of the air handler and recommended by the installer are kept by the user on the premises where the air handler is installed This is particularly important where the air handler forms an essential part of any process plant and its being out of operation may cause problems by for example frost damage or condensation by super-cooling

A list of Recommended Spares will be found in Section 9 of this manual

636 GAS LEAKS

If a smell of gas is detected around the area of the appliance Switch off all manual gas valves and contact your service engineer or the local gas undertaking

NEVER

LOOK FOR GAS LEAKS WITH A LIGHTED MATCH OR NAKED

FLAME

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 26

7 FAULT FINDING 30008

The main control panel incorporates two lights to help in fault finding

POWER ON

LOCKOUT

The remote station also has three lights

AIR FAN ON

BURNER ON

LOCKOUT

This section gives the possible causes of failure associated with each check light The electrical schematic diagram in this manual and the wiring diagram shipped in the main air handler panel should be used in conjunction with the notes below Additionally Service Engineers should familiarise themselves with the detailed Start Sequence given in Appendix 2 of this manual

The notes are given for each light before consulting the notes check for bulb failure

71 POWER ON LIGHT IS UNLIT

Check

1 Main control panel isolator is in the 1 position

2 Main Panel 6A MCB has not tripped if a trip has occurred the switch will be at the OFF position Reset and test system as required

3 Also check if the mains electrical supply is isolated If so FIND OUT WHY before taking any action

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 27

7 FAULT FINDING 30005

72 AIR FAN ON LIGHT IS UNLIT

Check

1 SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch is not in Position OFF

2 Timeperiod is not set to off

3 Air handler is not at LOCKOUT

4 Recheck both AIR FAN ON and LOCKOUT bulbs

Two fault indications are possible

1 THE FAN IS NOT OPERATING

If the fan should have started but is not operating

Check 1 Overload for tripped conditions Reset the overload and monitor the next start-up

2 Motor Fuses

3 Relays 1 2 amp3 for failure

laClor CC1 for failure

5 Air Pressure Switch (DPS) is failed in the N 0 Position

Replace the faulty component as described in Section 8

2 THE FAN IS OPERATING

This indicates that the air pressure switch (DPS) has failed to change over

Measure the profile plate differential pressure as described in Section 4113 If the pressure is correct the air pressure switch is faulty Check the switch as in 4114 If the pressure is not correct

Check 1 Correct fan belt tension

2 Correct fan rotation

3 The air handler air inlets and discharge are not blocked

4 Correct fitting on filters

5 The air differential pressure switch impulse lines are not blocked or leaking

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 28

7 FAULT FINDING 30008

73 LOCKOUT LIGHT IS ILLUMINATED

This light indicates a failure in the burner ignition and flame supervision system

RESET the unit and follow the progress of the start sequence The full cycle may take two minutes

1

------t

2 LOCKOUT after 35-40 seconds indicates an ignition failure RESET the system and observe the pilot and ignition spark during the start-up attempt

I-- shy

3 Observe the spark This should be strong and highly visible If not remove and clean the spark plug as Section 82 Check that the spark plug gap is correctly set at 15 mm

-- shy

4 Check the pilot flame If the pilot flame ignites and the unit goes to LOCKOUT the scanning system is at fault Remove and clean the detector as Section 82 Check the flame signal as in Section 431

5 If the pilot does not light the gas supply system is faulty Check the pilot system for restriction and the pilot valve operation

6 If the pilot lights and the unit goes to LOCKOUT after the main gas valves are addressed either the flow control valve is blocked or one of the main gas block valves has failed Fit a manometer on the pressure test point on the outlet flange of the multishyfunctional control and observe if the pressure rises when the main gas valves are addressed No pressure rise will indicate failure of the main gas valves

74 AIR FAN ON LIGHT ILLUMINATED

If the burner does not start check

1 SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch is in WINTER position

2 Overheat Limit Control

These interlocks prevent the burner management system starting

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 29

8 SERVICING 3000S

IMPORTANT Servicing and maintenance should be only carried out by a RS STOKVIS Ltd approved engineer

Only use replacement parts provided by the appliance manufacturer

Check that the air openings for combustion and for ventilation of any plant roon or compartment are clear

81 ISOLATION

811 FUEL GAS ISOLATION

The fuel gas to the ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler should be isolated and locked off at the manual ball valve mounted at the start of the fuel gas line Additionally before entering or servicing the air handler the burner manual isolation valve and pilot line isolation valve should be closed

812 ELECTRICAL ISOLATION

All electric power to the air handler and the remote control station is switched through the local isolator This isolator is fitted with a lock facility to permit it to be locked in the OFF position

Additionally isolate the power at the Wall Isolator

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 30

8 SERVICING 30005

82 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE

The air handler should be routinely serviced at the start of each heating season Isolate the air handler as above before servicing Details of access to individual components are given in Section 84 of this manual

1 Remove and clean spark igniter Check that the gap is correctly set at 25 mm Replace every two years

2 Clean the flame detector lens to ensure freedom from dirt and moisture If the cell shows any sign of cracks it should be replaced Routinely replace the cell every two years or after 10000 hours of operation which ever comes first

3 Inspect the entire air handler paint system for general damage Repair as necessary

4 Every two years brush the burner plates and clear the burner holes carefully with a Size 18mm drill for NP II and 20mm drill for NP I

WARNING THE BURNER HOLES MUST NOT BE ENLARGED

5 Inspect and lubricate all damper linkages to ensure freedom of operation Wipe off all excess lubricants to prevent dirt build up on linkage parts

6 Check the fan belt for cracks and splits Check tension The correct tension gives 16mm deflection per metre of span when the belt is centrally loaded with a force of 27N Adjust as necessary

7 Grease both the fan shaft bearings with Mobiith AW2 grease or similar

NEVER use high temperature grease

NEVER mix two different greases within the bearing always flush existing grease out

Note Removing the cover plate on the end of the air handler gains access to the outboard fan bearing

Light to Slow to 0 120 2 to 6 months Clean Dry

Medium Medium 120 200 1 to 2 months

Moderate to Light to Slow to 0 120 1 to 4 weeks Dry

Dirty Medium Medium 120 200 1 to 7 days

Extreme Dirt Dry Light to Slow to 0 200 Daily Flushing out

Medium Medium Dirt

83 ANNUAL SERVICE CHECKS

After Servicing test fire the air handler following the Commissioning Procedure detailed in Section 4 of this manual to ensure correct operation generally Special attention must be paid to the damper system and related controls and interlocks

Additionally check that the fresh air and recirculation air entry path to the air handler has been kept clear and instruct the User of the need for this as necessary

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 31

8 SERVICING 3000S

84 REMOVAL PROCEDURE FOR REPLACEABLE COMPONENTS

IMPORTANT

Turn off the gas at the appliance service valve and the electricity at the main panel and wall isolator before proceeding

841 BURNER

The burner is located inside the air handler casing and is mounted on two brackets from the support straps To remove the burner isolate the air handler as in 81 and undo the union on the fuel gas line adjacent to the burner isolation valve (MV6) and unscrew the main and pilot gas feed pipes from the burner rail Access to the rear of the burner assembly is made by removing the partition plate below the burner separating the fresh air inlet to the burner from the return air inlet compartment This is held in place by screws which engage in captive nuts on the top side of the partition Remove the Flame Detector and pull off the ignition plug cap Disconnect the burner support brackets and remove the burner The burner will easily pass through the access hatch for further strip down Replace in the reverse order soundness test the gas pipework check the burner operation and duty as described in the commissioning section of this manual

842 FLAME DETECTOR

This is a 240 Volt instrument

The flame detector is mounted on the end of the burner rail inside the air handler casing To remove the detector isolate the panel electric supply and lock off Push the scanner towards the burner and rotate to release the bayonet fixing and lift the detector from its mount Remove the two screws holding the detector cover and disconnect the supply leads noting the polarity of the connections

Replace the flame detector in the reverse order ensuring correct polarity of connections Ensure the access panel is securely closed and the retaining nuts are tightened down Check operation by inserting a test meter in the points provided in the main control panel and reading the flame signals during start up to full rate burner operation (See 431) Operate the appliance over six starts for reliability of operation including tum off of start and main gas valves to check for lockout operation

843 IGNITER SPARK PLUG

This is a high tension spark plug

The igniter spark plug is mounted on the end of the burner rail inside the air handler casing To remove the spark plug isolate the air handler as above Enter the service access door Access to the spark plug is made through the profile plate To remove the spark plug pull off the high tension lead and unscrew the plug with a plug spanner

When replacing the spark plug check the plug gap is set at 15mm Check ignition reliability over six start ups

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 32

8 SERVICING 3000S

844 IGNITER SPARK TRANSFORMER

This is a 240 Volt instrument

The ignition transformer is located in a plastic box mounted on the air handler casing adjacent to the main control panel To remove the transformer isolate the air handler as above and unscrew the four retaining screws holding the box lid in place and remove the lid Disconnect the supply cable at the terminal strip and undo the transformer retaining screws The transformer may then be unscrewed from the High Tension cable leading to the spark plug

Replacement is a simple reversal of this procedure

Check ignition reliability over six start ups

845 COMBUSTION AIR PRESSURE SWITCH (DPS)

Note The switch is set and sealed and should be replaced if not operating correctly

This switch is a 240 Volt instrument

The air switch is mounted directly on the air handler casing and can be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove the switch isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the supply cable Break the downstream pipe compression fitting and unscrew the switch housing from its locating fitting Reverse the procedure to replace after ensuring switch setting is as specified in Section 13 of this manual Operate the air handler to ensure reliability of operation over six start ups

846 AIR HANDLER OVERHEAT LIMIT CONTROL

This is a 240 Volt instrument

The overheat limit control can be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove the control isolate the air handler as above and lock off Remove the switch cover Disconnect the supply cable and unscrew the control housing from its locating fitting Reverse the procedure to replace check the switch is set to 50degC Test the switch operation as described in Section 43 over at least three operations

847 AIR FAN AND MOTOR

The air fan motor is a 415 Volt 3 phase motor

The motor and slide rails are easily accessible inside the air handler casing If it is necessary to remove the motor isolate the air handler as above Slacken the fan-belt tension and remove the drive belts Pull the motor away from the air handler casing to make access to the motor terminal box and disconnect the supply cable The motor may now be removed from the unit Following replacement the air handler must be fully re-commissioned as in Section 4

It is unlikely that the air fan will need replacing or servicing If required a full procedure should be obtained from RS STOKVIS Ltd

Replacement must be followed by full re-commissioning as in Section 4

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 33

8 SERVICING 3000S

848 FUEL GAS MULTI-FUNCTIONAL CONTROL - SMALL UNITS

This is a 240 Volt instrument

The fuel gas multi-functional control can be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove the unit isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the Hirschman electric termination Unbolt the control from its flanges and remove

When replacing care must be taken to ensure the flange 0 rings are undamaged and in the correct location Following replacement the air handler must be fully reshycommissioned as in Section 4 including tests for soundness prior to start-up

849 GOVERNOR AND BLOCK VALVES

The block valves are 240 Volt instruments

All these items may be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove any item isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the electric termination to the two block valves the pilot block valve and the flow control block valve Break the two pipe unions and remove the fuel gas line complete for further strip-down

8410 FUEL GAS FLOW CONTROL VALVE

This is a 24 Volt instrument

The fuel gas How control valve can be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove the valve isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the supply cables to the control valve

On small air handlers fitted with a multi-functional control support the multi-functional control and unbolt its discharge flange Break the union downstream of the burner isolation valve and remove the section of line containing the flow control valve for further strip-down

On large air handlers fitted with separate block valves it will be necessary to remove the fuel gas line complete as Section 8410 above

Following replacement re-commission the air handler

Note If the fresh air damper is not in the full open position the heat input must not exceed the maximum heat input at recirculation condition specified in the technical data section of this manual

8411 PILOT GAS GOVERNOR AND BLOCK VALVE

The block valve is a 240 Volt instrument

Both items may be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove either item isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the electric terrriination to the solenoid valve Undo the upstream pipe union and the compression fitting downstream of the manual block valve (PV3) Remove the pilot gas line complete for further strip down

Replace broken or distorted connections and retest for soundness Ensure the pilot gas pressure is correct and the flame is sensing an output Ensure reliability over six start-ups

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 34

8 SERVICING 3000S

8412 BELT TENSIONING PROCEDURE

The setting tensions are designed to cover a wide range of drives A precise setting force for individual applications can be calculated as detailed

SETTING FORCES

Belt Section

Setting Force To Deflect Belt 16mm per Metre Of Span

Small Pulley Diameter (mm)

Basic Setting Forces Newtons (N) Kilograms (kgf)

125 x Setting Forces Newtons (N) Kilograms (kgf)

SPZ

56 to 71 16 16 20 20 75 to 90 18 18 22 22

95 to 125 20 20 25 25 Over 125 22 22 28 28

SPA

80 to 100 22 22 28 28 106 to 140 30 30 38 38 150 to 200 36 37 45 46 Over 200 40 40 50 51

SPB

112 to 160 40 40 50 51 170 to 224 50 51 62 63 236 to 355 62 63 77 79 Over 355 65 66 81 83

SPC 224 to 250 70 71 87 89 265 to 355 92 94 115 120 Over 375 115 120 144 150

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 35

8 SERVICING 3000S

BELT TENSIONING USING FENNER BELT TENSION INDICATOR

Calculate the deflection in mm on a basis of 16mm per metre of centre distance Centre Distance (m) x 16 =Deflection (mm)

Set lower marker ring at the deflection distance required in mm on the lower scale

Set upper ring against to bottom edge of the top tube

Place the belt tension indicator on top of the belt at the centre of span and apply a force at right angles to the belt defecting it to the point where the lower marker ring is level with the top of the adjacent belt

Read off the force value indicated by the top edge of the upper marker ring

Compare this force to the kgf value shown in the table above

If a Fenner Belt Tension Indicator is not available a spring balance and rule will be suffice

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 36

8 SERVICING 30005

85 MAIN PANEL CONTROLS

All panel controls are readily accessible and may be easily exchanged for replacement components in the event of failure Ensure any replacement item is of the same make and type as the original

851 LANDIS amp GYR LFL 1335 AUTOMATIC SEQUENCE CONTROLLER

The Landis amp Gyr Automatic Sequence Controller is a plug-in unit locating on a pre-wired chassis To remove the controller undo the two retaining screws at the top left and lower right corners and pull the module off the chassis

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

852 CONTROLS CIRCUIT (24 VOLT) TRANSFORMER

The Controls Circuit Transformer is fixed to the panel back plate by tapped screws To remove the transformer undo the wiring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel Undo the two retaining screws and remove the unit complete

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

853 CONTROL RELAYS R1 R2 amp R3

The Control Relays are DIN Rail mounted To remove a relay undo the wIring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel Release the DIN rail retaining clip under the relay with a screwdriver and remove the relay

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

854 6A MCB

The 6A MCB is DIN Rail mounted To remove the MCB undo the wiring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel Release the DIN rail retaining clip under the MCB with a screwdriver and remove the MCB

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

855 THERMAL OVERLOAD

The thermal overload is attached to the underside of the main contactor To remove the overload undo the wiring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel and that the overload setting is as specified in Section 13 of this manual Unscrew the three connections to the contactor and remove the overload

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 37

8 SERVICING 3000S

856 MAIN CONTACTOR

The Main Contactor is DIN Rail mounted To remove the contactor remove the thermal overload as 855 above and then undo the wiring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel Release the DIN rail retaining clip under the contactor with a screwdriver and remove the contactor

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

857 MOTOR FUSE

To replace a motor fuse pull the fuse carrier off the fuse holder base The fuse is attached to the fuse carrier by two screws Unscrew remove and replace

86 REMOTE CONTROL STATION

The remote control station contains some serviceable parts although these items should only be fitted by an approved RS STOKVIS Ltd Engineer

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 38

9 RECOMMENDED SPARES 3000S

For two years operation it is recommended that the following items should be held in stock

ITEM DESCRIPTION PART NO QUANTITY i

1 INDICATOR BULBS W1121 1 PACK

2 SPARK PLUG 023739 1 I

3 UVDETECTOR QRA10C 1 I

4 ROOM SENSOR DRT2453 1

5 DUCT SENSOR DDT1701 1

All replacement parts can be obtained from RS STOKVIS Ltd by quoting the air handler serial number the part number and description

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 39

APPENDIX 1 30005

SOUNDNESS TESTING THE FUEL GAS PIPEWORK

This procedure should only be carried out by personnel familiar with the ECONO-AIR 3000S Series Air handler

The pressure test points and all valves are identified on the Process and Instrumentation Diagram for the air handler included in Section 1 of this n1anual

Isolate the air handler electric supply at the main control panel and lock off Close the manual isolation valves MV1 MV6 and PV3 Ensure the supply pressure is available on the upstream side of MV1

A11 TESTING THE UPSTREAM PIPEWORKAND BURNER CONTROLS 1 Connect a 60 mbar manometer to the pressure test nipple A Monitor the

pressure for two minutes Any rise in pressure indicates that valve MV1 is leaking and must be replaced Remove pressure test points Band F

2 Open MV1 to pressurise the pipework on both the main gas and pilot line to the first block valve

3 Close MV1 Allow one minute for the temperature to stabilise and then test the system for 2 minutes and watch for a drop in the pipework pressure If the pressure falls open valve MV1 and test the pipework connections and valves from MV1 to MV3 and MV1 to PV2 for leaks with a proprietary leak detector fluid or spray Turn off MV1 seal any leaks and re-test

4 If no extemalleaks are found either the pilot block valve PV1 or either the first main gas block valve MV3 is letting by

5 To test this seal pressure test point A and fit a manometer to pressure test point B Leave for two minutes with MV1 open A rise in pressure on the manometer confirms a leak on the block valve MV3 Turn off MV1 exchange the valve and re-test from point 2 above

6 Repeat this procedure for the pilot block valve Seal test point B and fit a manometer to pressure test point F Leave for two minutes with MV1 open A rise in pressure on the manometer confirms a leak on the pilot block valve PV2 Turn off MV1 exchange the valve and re-test from point 1 above Seal test point F

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 40

APPENDIX 1 30005

A12 TESTING THE DOWNSTREAM BURNER VALVE 1 Close MV1 and connect pressure test points A and 8 with flexible 6 mm bore

tubing teed into the manometer Remove pressure test point C Open MV1 to pressurise the downstream block valve MV4

2 Close MV1 and leave for one minute for the temperature to stabilise Monitor the pressure for 2 minutes If the pressure falls open valve MV1 and leak test the line between the two block valves MV3 and MV4 with a proprietary leak detector Turn off MV1 seal any leaks and re-test Note Smaller air handlers in the 3000S Series are fitted with multi-functional valves combining the pressure regulator and two block valves in one component The above procedure still applies but if a leak is found on either block valve the whole control should be replaced If no external leaks are found the downstream block valve is letting by

3 To confirm this close MV1 remove the manometer and refit to pressure test point C Connect pressure test points A and 8 with flexible 6mm bore tubing Open MV1 and allow one minute for the temperature to stabilise Monitor the pressure for a further 2 minutes with MV1 still open A rise in pressure confirms that the second block valve MV4 is letting by Turn off MV1 Replace the valve and re-test from 2 above

A13 TESTING THE DOWNSTREAM BURNER PIPEWORK 1 Close MV1 and connect pressure test points A and D with flexible 6 mm bore

tubing teed into the manometer Open MV1 to pressurise the downstream pilot pipework

2 Close MV1 and leave for one minute for the temperature to stabilise Monitor the pressure for 2 minutes If the pressure falls open valve MV1 and leak test the line between the downstream block valve MV4 and the manual block MV6 with a proprietary leak detector fluid or spray If no external leaks are found the manual block valve MV6 is letting by Turn off MV1 seal any leakages and reshytest from 2 above

A14 TESTING THE DOWNSTREAM PILOT PIPEWORK 1 Close MV1 and connect pressure test points A and F with flexible 6mm bore

tubing teed into the manometer Open MV1 to pressurise the downstream pilot pipework

2 Close MV1 and leave for one rninute for the temperature to stabilise Monitor the pressure for 2 minutes If the pressure falls open valve MV1 and leak test the line between the downstream block valve PV2 and the manual block PV3 with a proprietary leak detector fluid or spray If no external leaks are found the manual block valve PV3 is letting by Turn off MV1 seal any leakages and reshytest from 2 above

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 41

APPENDIX 1 30005

A15 TESTING THE BURNER CONNECTIONS 1 Remove the burner access panel as described in Section 84 of this manual

Remove the burner spark igniter Slacken the two retaining bolts holding the burner to the burner support straps and unbolt the burner supply endplate from the burner casting and mixing plates

2 Connect pressure test points A and 0 with flexible 6mm bore tubing teed into the manometer Open MV1 and MV6 to pressurise the burner pipework Leak test the main gas burner pipework and connections with proprietary leak detector fluid Turn off MV6 Seal any leakages and re-test

3 Connect pressure test points A and F with flexible 6 mm bore tubing teed into the manometer Open MV1 and PV3 to pressurise the pilot burner pipework Leak test the pilot gas burner pipework and connections with proprietary leak detector fluid Turn off PV3 Seal any leakages and re-test

4 Turn off MV1

5 Replace the spark igniter and profile division plate

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 42

APPENDIX 2 30005

START SEQUENCE

The burner start sequence is controlled by the Landis and Gyr burner management unit The timings are pre-set and comply with 885885 This unit must NOT be tampered with

A brief description of the start-up sequence isshy

The unit checks

1 The NO FLAME signal on the UV flame scanner

Note If the scanner detects a flame at any time other than in the correct operating sequence the flame programmer initiates a lockout

2 The operation of the combustion air proving switch in the NO AIR position

3 The air handler discharge high temperature switch

If the checks are completed the unit starts the combustion air fan and then checks the combustion airflow

Once the airflow is proven the unit checks that the damper control circuit is functioning correctly After the damper microswitch is made to prove the fresh air damper is fully open the sequence allows 30 seconds for the combustion air to purge any combustible gas from the air handler

After completion of the purge the spark ignition system is energised the pilot valve opened and the spark terminated If the pilot flame is not proven by the UV scanner the system will initiate a LOCKOUT

If the flame is proven the main gas valves are opened the pilot extinguished and the main burner flame proven

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 43

i

APPENDIX 2 30008

The following flow chart shows the complete start sequence including the lighting of the various indicating lamps

MANUAL STATUS LIGHT POWER ON

POWER ON

I INITIATE START BY TIME

SETTING ON CONTROLLER

I CHECK NO FLAME

VISIBLE

PROVEj FAIL LOCKOUT

I CHECK RELAY R4 NC

POSITION

PROVE FAIL NO START

I CHECK AIR PRESSURE SWITCH NC POSITION

PROVE FAIL NO START

I CHECK RELAY R1 NC

POSITION

PROVE j

FAIL NO START

I START COMBUSTION

AIR BLOWER

I CHECK AIR PRESSURE SWITCH NO POSITION

PROVE I

FAIL NO START

I STATUS LIGHT FAN ON

I ENERGISE RELAY R1

I

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 44

I

I

APPENDIX 2 30008

I CHECK OVERHEAT LIMIT

CONTROL R5

PROVE I

FAIL I I

CHECK 541412 LOOP CLOSED ON

LANDIS ampGYR CIRCUIT

PROVE I

FAIL I I

COMBUSTION AIR PURGE PERIOD

30 SECONDS

I

NO START

NO START

CANCEL NO FLAME CHECK CIRCUIT

I

ENERGISE SPARK

I TIMED PERIOD 25 SECONDS

I ENERGISE PILOT GAS

VALVE

I TIMED PERIOD 25 SECONDS

I TERMINATE SPARK

I INTERROGATE UV FLAME SCANNER

PROVE I

FAIL I I

TIMED PERIOD 10 SECONDS

I

LOCKOUT

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 45

I

I

APPENDIX 2 3000S

I ENERGISE MAIN GAS

VALVES

I

STATUS LIGHT BURNER ON

I TIMED PERIOD

5 SECONDS

I DE-ENERGISE PILOT

GAS VALVES

CONTINUOUS FROM PILOT

I INTERROGATE UV FLAME SCANNER

PROVE I

FAIL I I

LOCKOUT I

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 46

APPENDIX 3 30005

Please see copy of Standard Service Sheet

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 47

APPENDIX 4 30005

A41 TIME OUT SCREEN

This is the standard screen displayed when the touch screen is not in use The back light is off to save energy_ To access the STATUS screen touch the ENTER key and the following screen is displayed

[]][I][]rn[IJOO[][IJOO[] EJ~E11 I[]I ~ middot I

NOTE

The Touch Screen operates using the heat produced by the touch of a finger and therefore only LIGHT pressure is required

Excessive pressure can damage the Touch Screen

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 48

APPENDIX 4 30008

A42 STATUS SCREEN

On the typical STATUS screen the illustrated information detailed is as follows

19 36 Fan Brn

RS OS

100 Fst_~_ Lck _ _ Xst Gas~o ~ I

RS Indicates the current room temperature

OS ~( t~~ the current duct discharge temperature

Fan Indicates the current status of the fan by showing the arrow and the fan blades for ON and OFF is shown by the arrow and fan blades being removed

Brn Indicates the current status of the burner with the black flames indicating the burner to be ON and vice versa

Lck LOCKOUT - This indicates a flame failure when highlighted during normal or start-up operation

Xst EXCESS TEMPERATURE SWITCH - This indicates the unit has reached the trip limit on the over heat stat when highlighted during operation

Indicates the current position of the gas modulating valve during normal Gas

operation (0-100)

Indicates whether the Frost stat is energised and the unit is running on frost Fst

override

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 49

APPENDIX 4 30008

A43 CHANGING SETTINGS

It is possible to change the settings for the time of operation and the required temperature set points The following details the steps required

A44 ENTERING THE SECURITY CODE

From the STATUS screen touch the return key and the screen below will be displayed

Type the HIGH LEVEL security code (4321) If you make a mistake use the BACK SPACE key to delete any incorrect number(s) Touch the ENTER key when the code is correct

If the security code is incorrect the screen above will be displayed then try again If after several attempts you can not gain access please contact RS STOKVIS Ltd for further information

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 50

APPENDIX 4 30008

When the code is entered correctly the MAIN MENU is displayed as detailed below

~ STATUS SET VALUES~ ~ TIVIE CLOCK [) [) [) [) [)

The MAIN MENU screen shows the three menu items available The title for each menu item can be changed to suit the end user Please notify RS STOKVIS Ltd prior to commissioning should these parameters require special amendments

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 51

APPENDIX 4 30008

A45 CHANGING OR SETTING A TIME SCHEDULE

From the main menu screen select the TIME CLOCK page by running finger across screen symbol and touch the ENTER key the screen below will be displayed

On the following screen highlight the TS1 symbol and touch the ENTER key

The current time schedule will now be displayed as shown below The display will automatically default to the current day (1 =Monday 2 =Tuesday etc) In this case day 5 (Friday) the four schedule switching times refer to that day

IAC6BBB1BHIS1

mm0CIl bull mID 17BB 17BB 17HB

Iillleschedule

To modify a time select it by highlighting and touch the ENTER key and the following screen is displayed

To amend the appropriate onoff time as shown on the screen below The arrows to the right of the time are for altering the hours and the arrows on the left for the minutes

Once you have set the time use the ESCape key to exit back to the time schedule screen and choose another day by touching the required number Another time may now be modified as before

IAC6BBB1BHIS1

H8BH

I i eschedule

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 52

APPENDIX 4 30008

Use the ESCape key to exit back to the MAIN MENU screen

~ STATUS ~ SET VALUES

TIME CLOCK []~ [] [] [] []

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 53

APPENDIX 4 30005

A46 CHANGING SET VALUES

From the main menu screen select the SET VALUES page by highlight in the normal way and touch the ENTER key

The following screen is displayed

36 19 18III III IIIHsv Rsv Llv

To change the RSV highlight it in the normal way and touch the ENTER key and the screen below will now be shown

IAC6RRR1RR40 T I

0 19 (Y)l RSV

ROOM SET VALUE

The above screen shows the parameters that can be changed The values to the far left are the limitations of set point (OC) Change the set point by using the UP and DOWN ARROWS on the left of the screen or touch the set value itself followed by the ENTER key to select the set value and set it directly using the numeric keyboard All values can be changed in this way

Use the ESCape key twice to exit back to the MAIN MENU screen

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 54

APPENDIX 4 30005

A47 COMMISSIONING AND SERVICING BURNER CHECKS

Select the SET VALUES screen from the MAIN MENU screen and adjust the high lirrlit set point to 55degC to drive the burner to high fire

IAC6HHH1HH60 ~T I

0 19 (Y)

HSV

HIGH SET VALUE ~

Ensure the set value is returned to 36degC once the appropriate checks and adjustments as described in Section 43 of this manual have been completed Return to the SET VALUES screen and select the low limit value to adjust the low fire setting

Reduce the low limit value to OdegC to drive the gas valve to low fire and complete the appropriate checks and adjustments as described in Section 43 of this manual and ensure the set value is returned to the original value

A48 GMT ltgt BST CHANGEOVER DAYLIGHT SAVINGS

To change your unit to British Summer TimelWinter Time the following system screen must be highlighted by touching the Iamp1 button twice

By touching the clock symbol in the top left hand corner followed by the ENTER key the screen below will be displayed

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 55

APPENDIX 4 30008

188311 851193

544

By touching and highlighting in this case 18 followed by the ENTER key A small box allowing the entry of two digits will appear Enter the desired time required using the numbered keys followed by ENTER key Your unit is now set to operate on BSTBWT

Touch the ESC key three times to return back to the Status screen

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 56

STOKVIS ENERGY SYSTEMS 96R WALTON ROAD EAST MOLESEY SURREY KT8 0DL TEL 020 8783 3050 08707 707 747 FAX 020 8783 3051 08707 707 767 E-MAIL infostokvisboilerscom WEBSITE wwwstokvisboilerscom

JULY 1999

Page 23: ECONOAIR 3000S SERIES AIR HANDLING UNIT DIRECT FIREDstokvisboilers.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/EconoAir... · 2019-05-10 · ECONOAIR 3000S SERIES AIR HANDLING UNIT DIRECT FIRED

3 INSTALLATION 3000S

3165 INSTALLATION AND TAKE UP ALLOWANCE

Belt Pitch Installation Allowance Take-Up Length (mm) SPZ SPA SPB SPC (mm)

410 to 530 5

540 to 840 10

850 to 1160 15

1170 to 1500 20

1510 to 1830 20 25

1840 to 2170 30

2180 to 2830 25 40

2840 to 3500 30 50

3520 to 4160 50 60

4170 to 5140 70

5220 to 6150 85

6180 to 7500 105

600 to 8500 125

8880 to 10170 145

10600 to 12500 175

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 19

4 COMMISSIONING 30005

This appliance must be commissioned by a RS STOKVIS Ltd approved engineer

41 PRESTART CHECKS

1 Switch the SUMMERIOFFMlINTER switch on the remote station to OFF

2 Check the correct electric supply is available to the air handler and the appliance isolator installed

3 Check the correct fuel gas supply is available to the air handler and local isolation valve and union installed Check that new gas pipe work has been correctly purged and pressure tested and that the isolation valve is in the OFF position

4 Check the air handler gas control system and burner connections for pressure soundness as detailed in Appendix 1 of this manual

5 Complete the first section of the Service Check Sheet supplied at the back of this manual (Appendix 3)

6 Close the air handler access door

7 Close and lock the main air handler control panel

8 Switch the main panel isolator to position 1 Check the POWER ON light illuminates

9 Check and set the timed ONOFF periods in the lAC Controller located on the remote panel Ensure that the unit is set to be on during testing Refer to Appendix 4 for the lAC setting procedure

10 Close and lock the remote panel

11 Switch the SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch on the remote station to SUMMER to start the air fan Return the switch to the OFF position and check for correct rotation of the fan as the fan slows and stops

The fan rotation can be observed through the fan section access door or through the air handler access door Only do this during the fan run-down period Ensure the door is securely fastened after completion

Rotation arrows are fitted on the end of the air handler and inside the air handler above the interior bearing support If the rotation is incorrect two phases should be interchanged as dictated by the Engineer responsible for the site electrical system

12 Check the air pressure drop across the burner whilst the fan is operating with a water column pressure gauge connected to the two pressure test points on the air pressure switch (DPS) This pressure should be between 14 and 16 rnbar

If the air differential pressure measured above is not within the operating range check inlet and outlet ductwork as appropriate and any filters fitted If the pressure differential is still not within limits isolate the air handler and report to RS STOKVIS Ltd before proceeding

13 Check the operation and setting of the Low Air Pressure Switch by injecting a controlled signal into the switch Check the break point on the switch is 1 mbar (falling)

Note The switch is set and sealed before fitting The 1 mbar switch point may not coincide with the 1 mbar scale reading on the switch

If on checking the switch is not operating correctly do not tamper with it return it to RS STOKVIS Ltd for replacement

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 20

4 COMMISSIONING 3000S

42 DRY RUN

With all the manual gas isolation valves still in the OFF position switch the SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch to WINTER

43 START UP

1 Attach a manometer to pressure test point F and the low pressure test point on the air pressure switch (DPS)

2 Open the main gas supply valve (MV1) and the pilot burner isolation valve (PV3) Leave the main burner isolation valve (MV6) closed Reset the air handler by pressing the push-button marked RESET on either the main panel or remote station The air handler pilot will light automatically (after the automatic damper start check and combustion air pre-purge) and then LOCKOUT after the main gas shut-off valves are addressed

During the short period that the pilot is in operation check the pilot gas pressure on the manometer It should be 10 mbar and the pilot flame approximately 100 - 150mm in length covering the first three or four holes of the mixing plate and have a steady blue colour when viewed through the sight glass on the access side of the air handler Adjust as necessary - refer to Section 51 this manual Check the flame signal - refer to Section 431

3 Open the main burner isolation valve (MV6) RESET the air handler which should now light to main burner stage When alight close the main burner isolation valve to shut down the gas flow to the burner Check that the unit goes to LOCKOUT

4 Reset the air handler and drive the burner to low fire by adjusting the temperature controller set point as described in Appendix 4 of this manual Check the flame is continuous across the width of the burner and has a flame length of approx 50 - 65mm from the burner rail when viewed through the sight glass on the access side of the air handler Check the burner pressure across pressure test point D and the downstream (low) pressure test point on the air pressure switch ie on the rear of the pressure switch This pressure is specifled in Section 1 of this manual Adjust as necessary-refer to Section 53 of this manual Check the flame signal - refer to Section 431

Where possible check the actual gas flow rate by meter reading with all other appliances turned off

5 Drive the burner to high fire by adjusting the temperature controller set point and high limit to 55degC as described in Appendix 4 of this manual Check the flame is continuous across the burner rail and has a flame length of approximately 250 - 350mm from the burner rail Check the burner pressure across pressure test point D and the downstream (low) pressure test point on the air pressure switch This pressure is specified in Section 1 of this manual Adjust as necessary - refer to Section 52 of this manual Check the maximum air handler discharge temperature Check the flame signal shyrefer to Section 431

Where possible check the actual gas flow rate by meter reading with all other appliances turned off

6 Check the operation of the overheat limit control by adjusting the temperature controller set point and high limit to 65degC as described in Appendix 4 of this manual Monitor the discharge temperature on the temperature controller Check that the overheat control operates as the set temperature is passed Check that the control must be manually reset by pressing the green reset button on the front of the switch Return the temperature controller to its original settings

In the event that the ambient temperature is too low for this simple procedure to work the instrument will have to be bench tested using a Temperature 8ath Remove and replace the control as Section 84 of this manual for bench-testing

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 21

4 COMMISSIONING 3000S

43 1 FLAME SIGNAL CHECK

1 The ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler is fitted with a Klippon SAKT1 Test Terminal which can be used to measure the flame scanning signal Refer to the Electrical Schematic and connect a 0-1 mA ammeter to the two test points with standard 23 mm test plugs with the positive lead on the detector side Disconnect the terminal link to obtain the signal reading A minimum signal of 70 microamps is required typical signals are in the 250-400 microamp range on both pilot and main flame After completion replace the terminal link and remove the test jacks

2 Drive the burner to high fire as previously described Measure the carbon dioxide content of the discharge air stream This figure must not exceed 2800 ppm If the discharge exceeds this limit isolate the air handler and report to RS STOKVIS Ltd before proceeding

Stop and start the air handler a few times to check for reliability using the Operating Instructions (Section 6)

432 HANDOVER

Complete the air handler Service Check Sheet supplied at the back of this manual The self-copy sheet must be returned to STOKVIS for checking

Instruct the User in efficient use and care of the unit start-up and shutdown (including emergency shutdown) and recommended service interval Emphasise the need to keep the air handler clear of stored items and extraneous material and to maintain the recirculation and fresh air paths to the air handler inlets Hand all instructions as applicable to the UserOwner for safekeeping

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 22

5 ADJUSTMENTS 3000S

If adjustments to the air handler settings are required they should be made by a RS STOKVIS Ltd approved engineer

The normal value for all control settings is specified in Section 1 of this manual

51 PILOT ADJUSTMENT

The pilot gas pressure and flame length may be adjusted by altering the discharge pressure of the pilot governor Screwing the adjusting screw clockwise (located under the top cap) increases the discharge pressure and the flame length anti-clockwise decreases the pressure and the flame length

52 BURNER HIGH FIRE PRESSURE ADJUSTMENT

At high fire alter the spring compression on the main burner governor (MV2) by removing the cap and adjust the spring compression plate clockwise to increase the burner pressure anti-clockwise to decrease burner pressure If the pressure does not increase on adjusting the spring the supply is inadequate

Note On small air handlers fitted with a mUlti-functional control the pressure adjusting screw is located under a swing cap on the first block valve

53 BURNER LOW FIRE ADJUSTMENT

The main burner low fire is adjusted on the flow control valve MV5 (Process amp Instrumentation Diagram)

Remove the top cover of the valve and insert a Terminal Screwdriver in the adjusting screw of the TOP cam marked NI

Drive the burner to low fire by adjusting the temperature controller set-point and high limit to 05degC as described in Appendix 4 of this manual

Turn the Terminal Screwdriver clockwise to decrease the low fire gas flow anti-clockwise to increase the flow

Check the heat input and flame signal at the new position are satisfactory and return the tenlperature controller to its normal settings

Replace the control valve cover

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 23

5 ADJUSTMENTS 3000S

54 SUMMERIOFFIWINTER SWITCH

In the SUMMER position this switch provides ventilation only and is independent of the programmed ON and OFF periods This position is manually selected and must be manually de-selected Whenever the switch is in this position the fan is operating

In the OFF position the air handler is shutdown and will not operate This overrides any frost protection fitted It is suitable for air handler shutdown for short periods such as holidays The programme memory is unaffected by this switch and assumes control of the air handler when the switch is returned to the WINTER position

In the WINTER position the air handler operates off the programme memory to provide heating

55 RESET BUTTON

Visual indication of air handler lockout is provided In the event of lockout occurring the air handler can be reset by depressing the RESET button This parallels the RESET button on the air handler main control panel If after 4 attempts to reset the air handler the lockout indicator still illuminates then a Service Engineer should be called to investigate the problem

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 24

6 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 3000S

61 AIR HANDLER START-UP

1 Open all manual gas valves both on the appliance and on the supply to the appliance Switch on the Electric Supply to the appliance

2 On the main air handler panel

Switch the panel isolator to the 1 position

Check POWER ON light

3 On the remote control station

For Heating Switch the SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch to WINTER

The air handler will now start automatically in response to the time settings

In the event of LOCKOUT

Press the RESET button and the cycle of operations will be repeated If the air handler goes to LOCKOUT four times in succession call for a Service Engineer

For Unheated Ventilation Switch the SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch to SUMMER

Note This prevents the burner firing giving a controlled supply of ventilation air to the heated space as long as the switch is in this position The air handler will now start automatically in response to the timeclock demand To turn the fan off return the switch to the centre OFF position

In the event of LOCKOUT

Press the RESET button and the cycle of operations will be repeated If the air handler goes to LOCKOUT four times in succession call for a Service Engineer

62 AIR HANDLER SHUTDOWN

621 SHUTDOWN FOR SHORT PERIODS

Switch the SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch on the remote station to OFF

622 SHUTDOWN FOR PROLONGED PERIODS

Switch the main panel isolator to the 0 position and close all manual gas valves both on and leading to the appliance

Note Manual gas valves should only be operated when the appliance is to be shut off for either Servicing or for a prolonged shutdown

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 25

30005 6 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

63 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS

631 SITE CLEARANCE ADJACENT TO AIR HANDLER

Attention should be paid to keeping the area around the air handler tidy No rubbish should be allowed to accumulate in the vicinity of the air handler and storage of goods etc should not be permitted within two metres of the air handler Failure to comply could result in reduced airflow to the air handler causing inefficient running and potential overheat cond ition

632 AIR SUPPLY TO AIR HANDLER

Air vents and grilles supplying air to the air handler should never be blocked and should be checked periodically to ensure they are clear

633 AIR FILTERS

Similarly attention should be paid to cleaning or replacing the filters to the air handler if fitted Your installer should advise you on the frequency with which this would be required to be completed

634 SERVICE

For continued safe and efficient operation of this air air handler it is important that servicing of the air handler should be completed at regular intervals by a competent person in accordance with Section 82 of this manual Users are advised to enter into a Service Agreement with RS STOKVIS Ltd

635 SPARE PARTS

It is suggested that a complete set of spare parts essential to the running of the air handler and recommended by the installer are kept by the user on the premises where the air handler is installed This is particularly important where the air handler forms an essential part of any process plant and its being out of operation may cause problems by for example frost damage or condensation by super-cooling

A list of Recommended Spares will be found in Section 9 of this manual

636 GAS LEAKS

If a smell of gas is detected around the area of the appliance Switch off all manual gas valves and contact your service engineer or the local gas undertaking

NEVER

LOOK FOR GAS LEAKS WITH A LIGHTED MATCH OR NAKED

FLAME

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 26

7 FAULT FINDING 30008

The main control panel incorporates two lights to help in fault finding

POWER ON

LOCKOUT

The remote station also has three lights

AIR FAN ON

BURNER ON

LOCKOUT

This section gives the possible causes of failure associated with each check light The electrical schematic diagram in this manual and the wiring diagram shipped in the main air handler panel should be used in conjunction with the notes below Additionally Service Engineers should familiarise themselves with the detailed Start Sequence given in Appendix 2 of this manual

The notes are given for each light before consulting the notes check for bulb failure

71 POWER ON LIGHT IS UNLIT

Check

1 Main control panel isolator is in the 1 position

2 Main Panel 6A MCB has not tripped if a trip has occurred the switch will be at the OFF position Reset and test system as required

3 Also check if the mains electrical supply is isolated If so FIND OUT WHY before taking any action

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 27

7 FAULT FINDING 30005

72 AIR FAN ON LIGHT IS UNLIT

Check

1 SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch is not in Position OFF

2 Timeperiod is not set to off

3 Air handler is not at LOCKOUT

4 Recheck both AIR FAN ON and LOCKOUT bulbs

Two fault indications are possible

1 THE FAN IS NOT OPERATING

If the fan should have started but is not operating

Check 1 Overload for tripped conditions Reset the overload and monitor the next start-up

2 Motor Fuses

3 Relays 1 2 amp3 for failure

laClor CC1 for failure

5 Air Pressure Switch (DPS) is failed in the N 0 Position

Replace the faulty component as described in Section 8

2 THE FAN IS OPERATING

This indicates that the air pressure switch (DPS) has failed to change over

Measure the profile plate differential pressure as described in Section 4113 If the pressure is correct the air pressure switch is faulty Check the switch as in 4114 If the pressure is not correct

Check 1 Correct fan belt tension

2 Correct fan rotation

3 The air handler air inlets and discharge are not blocked

4 Correct fitting on filters

5 The air differential pressure switch impulse lines are not blocked or leaking

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 28

7 FAULT FINDING 30008

73 LOCKOUT LIGHT IS ILLUMINATED

This light indicates a failure in the burner ignition and flame supervision system

RESET the unit and follow the progress of the start sequence The full cycle may take two minutes

1

------t

2 LOCKOUT after 35-40 seconds indicates an ignition failure RESET the system and observe the pilot and ignition spark during the start-up attempt

I-- shy

3 Observe the spark This should be strong and highly visible If not remove and clean the spark plug as Section 82 Check that the spark plug gap is correctly set at 15 mm

-- shy

4 Check the pilot flame If the pilot flame ignites and the unit goes to LOCKOUT the scanning system is at fault Remove and clean the detector as Section 82 Check the flame signal as in Section 431

5 If the pilot does not light the gas supply system is faulty Check the pilot system for restriction and the pilot valve operation

6 If the pilot lights and the unit goes to LOCKOUT after the main gas valves are addressed either the flow control valve is blocked or one of the main gas block valves has failed Fit a manometer on the pressure test point on the outlet flange of the multishyfunctional control and observe if the pressure rises when the main gas valves are addressed No pressure rise will indicate failure of the main gas valves

74 AIR FAN ON LIGHT ILLUMINATED

If the burner does not start check

1 SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch is in WINTER position

2 Overheat Limit Control

These interlocks prevent the burner management system starting

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 29

8 SERVICING 3000S

IMPORTANT Servicing and maintenance should be only carried out by a RS STOKVIS Ltd approved engineer

Only use replacement parts provided by the appliance manufacturer

Check that the air openings for combustion and for ventilation of any plant roon or compartment are clear

81 ISOLATION

811 FUEL GAS ISOLATION

The fuel gas to the ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler should be isolated and locked off at the manual ball valve mounted at the start of the fuel gas line Additionally before entering or servicing the air handler the burner manual isolation valve and pilot line isolation valve should be closed

812 ELECTRICAL ISOLATION

All electric power to the air handler and the remote control station is switched through the local isolator This isolator is fitted with a lock facility to permit it to be locked in the OFF position

Additionally isolate the power at the Wall Isolator

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 30

8 SERVICING 30005

82 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE

The air handler should be routinely serviced at the start of each heating season Isolate the air handler as above before servicing Details of access to individual components are given in Section 84 of this manual

1 Remove and clean spark igniter Check that the gap is correctly set at 25 mm Replace every two years

2 Clean the flame detector lens to ensure freedom from dirt and moisture If the cell shows any sign of cracks it should be replaced Routinely replace the cell every two years or after 10000 hours of operation which ever comes first

3 Inspect the entire air handler paint system for general damage Repair as necessary

4 Every two years brush the burner plates and clear the burner holes carefully with a Size 18mm drill for NP II and 20mm drill for NP I

WARNING THE BURNER HOLES MUST NOT BE ENLARGED

5 Inspect and lubricate all damper linkages to ensure freedom of operation Wipe off all excess lubricants to prevent dirt build up on linkage parts

6 Check the fan belt for cracks and splits Check tension The correct tension gives 16mm deflection per metre of span when the belt is centrally loaded with a force of 27N Adjust as necessary

7 Grease both the fan shaft bearings with Mobiith AW2 grease or similar

NEVER use high temperature grease

NEVER mix two different greases within the bearing always flush existing grease out

Note Removing the cover plate on the end of the air handler gains access to the outboard fan bearing

Light to Slow to 0 120 2 to 6 months Clean Dry

Medium Medium 120 200 1 to 2 months

Moderate to Light to Slow to 0 120 1 to 4 weeks Dry

Dirty Medium Medium 120 200 1 to 7 days

Extreme Dirt Dry Light to Slow to 0 200 Daily Flushing out

Medium Medium Dirt

83 ANNUAL SERVICE CHECKS

After Servicing test fire the air handler following the Commissioning Procedure detailed in Section 4 of this manual to ensure correct operation generally Special attention must be paid to the damper system and related controls and interlocks

Additionally check that the fresh air and recirculation air entry path to the air handler has been kept clear and instruct the User of the need for this as necessary

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 31

8 SERVICING 3000S

84 REMOVAL PROCEDURE FOR REPLACEABLE COMPONENTS

IMPORTANT

Turn off the gas at the appliance service valve and the electricity at the main panel and wall isolator before proceeding

841 BURNER

The burner is located inside the air handler casing and is mounted on two brackets from the support straps To remove the burner isolate the air handler as in 81 and undo the union on the fuel gas line adjacent to the burner isolation valve (MV6) and unscrew the main and pilot gas feed pipes from the burner rail Access to the rear of the burner assembly is made by removing the partition plate below the burner separating the fresh air inlet to the burner from the return air inlet compartment This is held in place by screws which engage in captive nuts on the top side of the partition Remove the Flame Detector and pull off the ignition plug cap Disconnect the burner support brackets and remove the burner The burner will easily pass through the access hatch for further strip down Replace in the reverse order soundness test the gas pipework check the burner operation and duty as described in the commissioning section of this manual

842 FLAME DETECTOR

This is a 240 Volt instrument

The flame detector is mounted on the end of the burner rail inside the air handler casing To remove the detector isolate the panel electric supply and lock off Push the scanner towards the burner and rotate to release the bayonet fixing and lift the detector from its mount Remove the two screws holding the detector cover and disconnect the supply leads noting the polarity of the connections

Replace the flame detector in the reverse order ensuring correct polarity of connections Ensure the access panel is securely closed and the retaining nuts are tightened down Check operation by inserting a test meter in the points provided in the main control panel and reading the flame signals during start up to full rate burner operation (See 431) Operate the appliance over six starts for reliability of operation including tum off of start and main gas valves to check for lockout operation

843 IGNITER SPARK PLUG

This is a high tension spark plug

The igniter spark plug is mounted on the end of the burner rail inside the air handler casing To remove the spark plug isolate the air handler as above Enter the service access door Access to the spark plug is made through the profile plate To remove the spark plug pull off the high tension lead and unscrew the plug with a plug spanner

When replacing the spark plug check the plug gap is set at 15mm Check ignition reliability over six start ups

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 32

8 SERVICING 3000S

844 IGNITER SPARK TRANSFORMER

This is a 240 Volt instrument

The ignition transformer is located in a plastic box mounted on the air handler casing adjacent to the main control panel To remove the transformer isolate the air handler as above and unscrew the four retaining screws holding the box lid in place and remove the lid Disconnect the supply cable at the terminal strip and undo the transformer retaining screws The transformer may then be unscrewed from the High Tension cable leading to the spark plug

Replacement is a simple reversal of this procedure

Check ignition reliability over six start ups

845 COMBUSTION AIR PRESSURE SWITCH (DPS)

Note The switch is set and sealed and should be replaced if not operating correctly

This switch is a 240 Volt instrument

The air switch is mounted directly on the air handler casing and can be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove the switch isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the supply cable Break the downstream pipe compression fitting and unscrew the switch housing from its locating fitting Reverse the procedure to replace after ensuring switch setting is as specified in Section 13 of this manual Operate the air handler to ensure reliability of operation over six start ups

846 AIR HANDLER OVERHEAT LIMIT CONTROL

This is a 240 Volt instrument

The overheat limit control can be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove the control isolate the air handler as above and lock off Remove the switch cover Disconnect the supply cable and unscrew the control housing from its locating fitting Reverse the procedure to replace check the switch is set to 50degC Test the switch operation as described in Section 43 over at least three operations

847 AIR FAN AND MOTOR

The air fan motor is a 415 Volt 3 phase motor

The motor and slide rails are easily accessible inside the air handler casing If it is necessary to remove the motor isolate the air handler as above Slacken the fan-belt tension and remove the drive belts Pull the motor away from the air handler casing to make access to the motor terminal box and disconnect the supply cable The motor may now be removed from the unit Following replacement the air handler must be fully re-commissioned as in Section 4

It is unlikely that the air fan will need replacing or servicing If required a full procedure should be obtained from RS STOKVIS Ltd

Replacement must be followed by full re-commissioning as in Section 4

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 33

8 SERVICING 3000S

848 FUEL GAS MULTI-FUNCTIONAL CONTROL - SMALL UNITS

This is a 240 Volt instrument

The fuel gas multi-functional control can be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove the unit isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the Hirschman electric termination Unbolt the control from its flanges and remove

When replacing care must be taken to ensure the flange 0 rings are undamaged and in the correct location Following replacement the air handler must be fully reshycommissioned as in Section 4 including tests for soundness prior to start-up

849 GOVERNOR AND BLOCK VALVES

The block valves are 240 Volt instruments

All these items may be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove any item isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the electric termination to the two block valves the pilot block valve and the flow control block valve Break the two pipe unions and remove the fuel gas line complete for further strip-down

8410 FUEL GAS FLOW CONTROL VALVE

This is a 24 Volt instrument

The fuel gas How control valve can be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove the valve isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the supply cables to the control valve

On small air handlers fitted with a multi-functional control support the multi-functional control and unbolt its discharge flange Break the union downstream of the burner isolation valve and remove the section of line containing the flow control valve for further strip-down

On large air handlers fitted with separate block valves it will be necessary to remove the fuel gas line complete as Section 8410 above

Following replacement re-commission the air handler

Note If the fresh air damper is not in the full open position the heat input must not exceed the maximum heat input at recirculation condition specified in the technical data section of this manual

8411 PILOT GAS GOVERNOR AND BLOCK VALVE

The block valve is a 240 Volt instrument

Both items may be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove either item isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the electric terrriination to the solenoid valve Undo the upstream pipe union and the compression fitting downstream of the manual block valve (PV3) Remove the pilot gas line complete for further strip down

Replace broken or distorted connections and retest for soundness Ensure the pilot gas pressure is correct and the flame is sensing an output Ensure reliability over six start-ups

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 34

8 SERVICING 3000S

8412 BELT TENSIONING PROCEDURE

The setting tensions are designed to cover a wide range of drives A precise setting force for individual applications can be calculated as detailed

SETTING FORCES

Belt Section

Setting Force To Deflect Belt 16mm per Metre Of Span

Small Pulley Diameter (mm)

Basic Setting Forces Newtons (N) Kilograms (kgf)

125 x Setting Forces Newtons (N) Kilograms (kgf)

SPZ

56 to 71 16 16 20 20 75 to 90 18 18 22 22

95 to 125 20 20 25 25 Over 125 22 22 28 28

SPA

80 to 100 22 22 28 28 106 to 140 30 30 38 38 150 to 200 36 37 45 46 Over 200 40 40 50 51

SPB

112 to 160 40 40 50 51 170 to 224 50 51 62 63 236 to 355 62 63 77 79 Over 355 65 66 81 83

SPC 224 to 250 70 71 87 89 265 to 355 92 94 115 120 Over 375 115 120 144 150

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 35

8 SERVICING 3000S

BELT TENSIONING USING FENNER BELT TENSION INDICATOR

Calculate the deflection in mm on a basis of 16mm per metre of centre distance Centre Distance (m) x 16 =Deflection (mm)

Set lower marker ring at the deflection distance required in mm on the lower scale

Set upper ring against to bottom edge of the top tube

Place the belt tension indicator on top of the belt at the centre of span and apply a force at right angles to the belt defecting it to the point where the lower marker ring is level with the top of the adjacent belt

Read off the force value indicated by the top edge of the upper marker ring

Compare this force to the kgf value shown in the table above

If a Fenner Belt Tension Indicator is not available a spring balance and rule will be suffice

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 36

8 SERVICING 30005

85 MAIN PANEL CONTROLS

All panel controls are readily accessible and may be easily exchanged for replacement components in the event of failure Ensure any replacement item is of the same make and type as the original

851 LANDIS amp GYR LFL 1335 AUTOMATIC SEQUENCE CONTROLLER

The Landis amp Gyr Automatic Sequence Controller is a plug-in unit locating on a pre-wired chassis To remove the controller undo the two retaining screws at the top left and lower right corners and pull the module off the chassis

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

852 CONTROLS CIRCUIT (24 VOLT) TRANSFORMER

The Controls Circuit Transformer is fixed to the panel back plate by tapped screws To remove the transformer undo the wiring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel Undo the two retaining screws and remove the unit complete

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

853 CONTROL RELAYS R1 R2 amp R3

The Control Relays are DIN Rail mounted To remove a relay undo the wIring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel Release the DIN rail retaining clip under the relay with a screwdriver and remove the relay

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

854 6A MCB

The 6A MCB is DIN Rail mounted To remove the MCB undo the wiring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel Release the DIN rail retaining clip under the MCB with a screwdriver and remove the MCB

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

855 THERMAL OVERLOAD

The thermal overload is attached to the underside of the main contactor To remove the overload undo the wiring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel and that the overload setting is as specified in Section 13 of this manual Unscrew the three connections to the contactor and remove the overload

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 37

8 SERVICING 3000S

856 MAIN CONTACTOR

The Main Contactor is DIN Rail mounted To remove the contactor remove the thermal overload as 855 above and then undo the wiring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel Release the DIN rail retaining clip under the contactor with a screwdriver and remove the contactor

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

857 MOTOR FUSE

To replace a motor fuse pull the fuse carrier off the fuse holder base The fuse is attached to the fuse carrier by two screws Unscrew remove and replace

86 REMOTE CONTROL STATION

The remote control station contains some serviceable parts although these items should only be fitted by an approved RS STOKVIS Ltd Engineer

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 38

9 RECOMMENDED SPARES 3000S

For two years operation it is recommended that the following items should be held in stock

ITEM DESCRIPTION PART NO QUANTITY i

1 INDICATOR BULBS W1121 1 PACK

2 SPARK PLUG 023739 1 I

3 UVDETECTOR QRA10C 1 I

4 ROOM SENSOR DRT2453 1

5 DUCT SENSOR DDT1701 1

All replacement parts can be obtained from RS STOKVIS Ltd by quoting the air handler serial number the part number and description

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 39

APPENDIX 1 30005

SOUNDNESS TESTING THE FUEL GAS PIPEWORK

This procedure should only be carried out by personnel familiar with the ECONO-AIR 3000S Series Air handler

The pressure test points and all valves are identified on the Process and Instrumentation Diagram for the air handler included in Section 1 of this n1anual

Isolate the air handler electric supply at the main control panel and lock off Close the manual isolation valves MV1 MV6 and PV3 Ensure the supply pressure is available on the upstream side of MV1

A11 TESTING THE UPSTREAM PIPEWORKAND BURNER CONTROLS 1 Connect a 60 mbar manometer to the pressure test nipple A Monitor the

pressure for two minutes Any rise in pressure indicates that valve MV1 is leaking and must be replaced Remove pressure test points Band F

2 Open MV1 to pressurise the pipework on both the main gas and pilot line to the first block valve

3 Close MV1 Allow one minute for the temperature to stabilise and then test the system for 2 minutes and watch for a drop in the pipework pressure If the pressure falls open valve MV1 and test the pipework connections and valves from MV1 to MV3 and MV1 to PV2 for leaks with a proprietary leak detector fluid or spray Turn off MV1 seal any leaks and re-test

4 If no extemalleaks are found either the pilot block valve PV1 or either the first main gas block valve MV3 is letting by

5 To test this seal pressure test point A and fit a manometer to pressure test point B Leave for two minutes with MV1 open A rise in pressure on the manometer confirms a leak on the block valve MV3 Turn off MV1 exchange the valve and re-test from point 2 above

6 Repeat this procedure for the pilot block valve Seal test point B and fit a manometer to pressure test point F Leave for two minutes with MV1 open A rise in pressure on the manometer confirms a leak on the pilot block valve PV2 Turn off MV1 exchange the valve and re-test from point 1 above Seal test point F

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 40

APPENDIX 1 30005

A12 TESTING THE DOWNSTREAM BURNER VALVE 1 Close MV1 and connect pressure test points A and 8 with flexible 6 mm bore

tubing teed into the manometer Remove pressure test point C Open MV1 to pressurise the downstream block valve MV4

2 Close MV1 and leave for one minute for the temperature to stabilise Monitor the pressure for 2 minutes If the pressure falls open valve MV1 and leak test the line between the two block valves MV3 and MV4 with a proprietary leak detector Turn off MV1 seal any leaks and re-test Note Smaller air handlers in the 3000S Series are fitted with multi-functional valves combining the pressure regulator and two block valves in one component The above procedure still applies but if a leak is found on either block valve the whole control should be replaced If no external leaks are found the downstream block valve is letting by

3 To confirm this close MV1 remove the manometer and refit to pressure test point C Connect pressure test points A and 8 with flexible 6mm bore tubing Open MV1 and allow one minute for the temperature to stabilise Monitor the pressure for a further 2 minutes with MV1 still open A rise in pressure confirms that the second block valve MV4 is letting by Turn off MV1 Replace the valve and re-test from 2 above

A13 TESTING THE DOWNSTREAM BURNER PIPEWORK 1 Close MV1 and connect pressure test points A and D with flexible 6 mm bore

tubing teed into the manometer Open MV1 to pressurise the downstream pilot pipework

2 Close MV1 and leave for one minute for the temperature to stabilise Monitor the pressure for 2 minutes If the pressure falls open valve MV1 and leak test the line between the downstream block valve MV4 and the manual block MV6 with a proprietary leak detector fluid or spray If no external leaks are found the manual block valve MV6 is letting by Turn off MV1 seal any leakages and reshytest from 2 above

A14 TESTING THE DOWNSTREAM PILOT PIPEWORK 1 Close MV1 and connect pressure test points A and F with flexible 6mm bore

tubing teed into the manometer Open MV1 to pressurise the downstream pilot pipework

2 Close MV1 and leave for one rninute for the temperature to stabilise Monitor the pressure for 2 minutes If the pressure falls open valve MV1 and leak test the line between the downstream block valve PV2 and the manual block PV3 with a proprietary leak detector fluid or spray If no external leaks are found the manual block valve PV3 is letting by Turn off MV1 seal any leakages and reshytest from 2 above

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 41

APPENDIX 1 30005

A15 TESTING THE BURNER CONNECTIONS 1 Remove the burner access panel as described in Section 84 of this manual

Remove the burner spark igniter Slacken the two retaining bolts holding the burner to the burner support straps and unbolt the burner supply endplate from the burner casting and mixing plates

2 Connect pressure test points A and 0 with flexible 6mm bore tubing teed into the manometer Open MV1 and MV6 to pressurise the burner pipework Leak test the main gas burner pipework and connections with proprietary leak detector fluid Turn off MV6 Seal any leakages and re-test

3 Connect pressure test points A and F with flexible 6 mm bore tubing teed into the manometer Open MV1 and PV3 to pressurise the pilot burner pipework Leak test the pilot gas burner pipework and connections with proprietary leak detector fluid Turn off PV3 Seal any leakages and re-test

4 Turn off MV1

5 Replace the spark igniter and profile division plate

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 42

APPENDIX 2 30005

START SEQUENCE

The burner start sequence is controlled by the Landis and Gyr burner management unit The timings are pre-set and comply with 885885 This unit must NOT be tampered with

A brief description of the start-up sequence isshy

The unit checks

1 The NO FLAME signal on the UV flame scanner

Note If the scanner detects a flame at any time other than in the correct operating sequence the flame programmer initiates a lockout

2 The operation of the combustion air proving switch in the NO AIR position

3 The air handler discharge high temperature switch

If the checks are completed the unit starts the combustion air fan and then checks the combustion airflow

Once the airflow is proven the unit checks that the damper control circuit is functioning correctly After the damper microswitch is made to prove the fresh air damper is fully open the sequence allows 30 seconds for the combustion air to purge any combustible gas from the air handler

After completion of the purge the spark ignition system is energised the pilot valve opened and the spark terminated If the pilot flame is not proven by the UV scanner the system will initiate a LOCKOUT

If the flame is proven the main gas valves are opened the pilot extinguished and the main burner flame proven

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 43

i

APPENDIX 2 30008

The following flow chart shows the complete start sequence including the lighting of the various indicating lamps

MANUAL STATUS LIGHT POWER ON

POWER ON

I INITIATE START BY TIME

SETTING ON CONTROLLER

I CHECK NO FLAME

VISIBLE

PROVEj FAIL LOCKOUT

I CHECK RELAY R4 NC

POSITION

PROVE FAIL NO START

I CHECK AIR PRESSURE SWITCH NC POSITION

PROVE FAIL NO START

I CHECK RELAY R1 NC

POSITION

PROVE j

FAIL NO START

I START COMBUSTION

AIR BLOWER

I CHECK AIR PRESSURE SWITCH NO POSITION

PROVE I

FAIL NO START

I STATUS LIGHT FAN ON

I ENERGISE RELAY R1

I

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 44

I

I

APPENDIX 2 30008

I CHECK OVERHEAT LIMIT

CONTROL R5

PROVE I

FAIL I I

CHECK 541412 LOOP CLOSED ON

LANDIS ampGYR CIRCUIT

PROVE I

FAIL I I

COMBUSTION AIR PURGE PERIOD

30 SECONDS

I

NO START

NO START

CANCEL NO FLAME CHECK CIRCUIT

I

ENERGISE SPARK

I TIMED PERIOD 25 SECONDS

I ENERGISE PILOT GAS

VALVE

I TIMED PERIOD 25 SECONDS

I TERMINATE SPARK

I INTERROGATE UV FLAME SCANNER

PROVE I

FAIL I I

TIMED PERIOD 10 SECONDS

I

LOCKOUT

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 45

I

I

APPENDIX 2 3000S

I ENERGISE MAIN GAS

VALVES

I

STATUS LIGHT BURNER ON

I TIMED PERIOD

5 SECONDS

I DE-ENERGISE PILOT

GAS VALVES

CONTINUOUS FROM PILOT

I INTERROGATE UV FLAME SCANNER

PROVE I

FAIL I I

LOCKOUT I

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 46

APPENDIX 3 30005

Please see copy of Standard Service Sheet

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 47

APPENDIX 4 30005

A41 TIME OUT SCREEN

This is the standard screen displayed when the touch screen is not in use The back light is off to save energy_ To access the STATUS screen touch the ENTER key and the following screen is displayed

[]][I][]rn[IJOO[][IJOO[] EJ~E11 I[]I ~ middot I

NOTE

The Touch Screen operates using the heat produced by the touch of a finger and therefore only LIGHT pressure is required

Excessive pressure can damage the Touch Screen

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 48

APPENDIX 4 30008

A42 STATUS SCREEN

On the typical STATUS screen the illustrated information detailed is as follows

19 36 Fan Brn

RS OS

100 Fst_~_ Lck _ _ Xst Gas~o ~ I

RS Indicates the current room temperature

OS ~( t~~ the current duct discharge temperature

Fan Indicates the current status of the fan by showing the arrow and the fan blades for ON and OFF is shown by the arrow and fan blades being removed

Brn Indicates the current status of the burner with the black flames indicating the burner to be ON and vice versa

Lck LOCKOUT - This indicates a flame failure when highlighted during normal or start-up operation

Xst EXCESS TEMPERATURE SWITCH - This indicates the unit has reached the trip limit on the over heat stat when highlighted during operation

Indicates the current position of the gas modulating valve during normal Gas

operation (0-100)

Indicates whether the Frost stat is energised and the unit is running on frost Fst

override

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 49

APPENDIX 4 30008

A43 CHANGING SETTINGS

It is possible to change the settings for the time of operation and the required temperature set points The following details the steps required

A44 ENTERING THE SECURITY CODE

From the STATUS screen touch the return key and the screen below will be displayed

Type the HIGH LEVEL security code (4321) If you make a mistake use the BACK SPACE key to delete any incorrect number(s) Touch the ENTER key when the code is correct

If the security code is incorrect the screen above will be displayed then try again If after several attempts you can not gain access please contact RS STOKVIS Ltd for further information

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 50

APPENDIX 4 30008

When the code is entered correctly the MAIN MENU is displayed as detailed below

~ STATUS SET VALUES~ ~ TIVIE CLOCK [) [) [) [) [)

The MAIN MENU screen shows the three menu items available The title for each menu item can be changed to suit the end user Please notify RS STOKVIS Ltd prior to commissioning should these parameters require special amendments

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 51

APPENDIX 4 30008

A45 CHANGING OR SETTING A TIME SCHEDULE

From the main menu screen select the TIME CLOCK page by running finger across screen symbol and touch the ENTER key the screen below will be displayed

On the following screen highlight the TS1 symbol and touch the ENTER key

The current time schedule will now be displayed as shown below The display will automatically default to the current day (1 =Monday 2 =Tuesday etc) In this case day 5 (Friday) the four schedule switching times refer to that day

IAC6BBB1BHIS1

mm0CIl bull mID 17BB 17BB 17HB

Iillleschedule

To modify a time select it by highlighting and touch the ENTER key and the following screen is displayed

To amend the appropriate onoff time as shown on the screen below The arrows to the right of the time are for altering the hours and the arrows on the left for the minutes

Once you have set the time use the ESCape key to exit back to the time schedule screen and choose another day by touching the required number Another time may now be modified as before

IAC6BBB1BHIS1

H8BH

I i eschedule

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 52

APPENDIX 4 30008

Use the ESCape key to exit back to the MAIN MENU screen

~ STATUS ~ SET VALUES

TIME CLOCK []~ [] [] [] []

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 53

APPENDIX 4 30005

A46 CHANGING SET VALUES

From the main menu screen select the SET VALUES page by highlight in the normal way and touch the ENTER key

The following screen is displayed

36 19 18III III IIIHsv Rsv Llv

To change the RSV highlight it in the normal way and touch the ENTER key and the screen below will now be shown

IAC6RRR1RR40 T I

0 19 (Y)l RSV

ROOM SET VALUE

The above screen shows the parameters that can be changed The values to the far left are the limitations of set point (OC) Change the set point by using the UP and DOWN ARROWS on the left of the screen or touch the set value itself followed by the ENTER key to select the set value and set it directly using the numeric keyboard All values can be changed in this way

Use the ESCape key twice to exit back to the MAIN MENU screen

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 54

APPENDIX 4 30005

A47 COMMISSIONING AND SERVICING BURNER CHECKS

Select the SET VALUES screen from the MAIN MENU screen and adjust the high lirrlit set point to 55degC to drive the burner to high fire

IAC6HHH1HH60 ~T I

0 19 (Y)

HSV

HIGH SET VALUE ~

Ensure the set value is returned to 36degC once the appropriate checks and adjustments as described in Section 43 of this manual have been completed Return to the SET VALUES screen and select the low limit value to adjust the low fire setting

Reduce the low limit value to OdegC to drive the gas valve to low fire and complete the appropriate checks and adjustments as described in Section 43 of this manual and ensure the set value is returned to the original value

A48 GMT ltgt BST CHANGEOVER DAYLIGHT SAVINGS

To change your unit to British Summer TimelWinter Time the following system screen must be highlighted by touching the Iamp1 button twice

By touching the clock symbol in the top left hand corner followed by the ENTER key the screen below will be displayed

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 55

APPENDIX 4 30008

188311 851193

544

By touching and highlighting in this case 18 followed by the ENTER key A small box allowing the entry of two digits will appear Enter the desired time required using the numbered keys followed by ENTER key Your unit is now set to operate on BSTBWT

Touch the ESC key three times to return back to the Status screen

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 56

STOKVIS ENERGY SYSTEMS 96R WALTON ROAD EAST MOLESEY SURREY KT8 0DL TEL 020 8783 3050 08707 707 747 FAX 020 8783 3051 08707 707 767 E-MAIL infostokvisboilerscom WEBSITE wwwstokvisboilerscom

JULY 1999

Page 24: ECONOAIR 3000S SERIES AIR HANDLING UNIT DIRECT FIREDstokvisboilers.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/EconoAir... · 2019-05-10 · ECONOAIR 3000S SERIES AIR HANDLING UNIT DIRECT FIRED

4 COMMISSIONING 30005

This appliance must be commissioned by a RS STOKVIS Ltd approved engineer

41 PRESTART CHECKS

1 Switch the SUMMERIOFFMlINTER switch on the remote station to OFF

2 Check the correct electric supply is available to the air handler and the appliance isolator installed

3 Check the correct fuel gas supply is available to the air handler and local isolation valve and union installed Check that new gas pipe work has been correctly purged and pressure tested and that the isolation valve is in the OFF position

4 Check the air handler gas control system and burner connections for pressure soundness as detailed in Appendix 1 of this manual

5 Complete the first section of the Service Check Sheet supplied at the back of this manual (Appendix 3)

6 Close the air handler access door

7 Close and lock the main air handler control panel

8 Switch the main panel isolator to position 1 Check the POWER ON light illuminates

9 Check and set the timed ONOFF periods in the lAC Controller located on the remote panel Ensure that the unit is set to be on during testing Refer to Appendix 4 for the lAC setting procedure

10 Close and lock the remote panel

11 Switch the SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch on the remote station to SUMMER to start the air fan Return the switch to the OFF position and check for correct rotation of the fan as the fan slows and stops

The fan rotation can be observed through the fan section access door or through the air handler access door Only do this during the fan run-down period Ensure the door is securely fastened after completion

Rotation arrows are fitted on the end of the air handler and inside the air handler above the interior bearing support If the rotation is incorrect two phases should be interchanged as dictated by the Engineer responsible for the site electrical system

12 Check the air pressure drop across the burner whilst the fan is operating with a water column pressure gauge connected to the two pressure test points on the air pressure switch (DPS) This pressure should be between 14 and 16 rnbar

If the air differential pressure measured above is not within the operating range check inlet and outlet ductwork as appropriate and any filters fitted If the pressure differential is still not within limits isolate the air handler and report to RS STOKVIS Ltd before proceeding

13 Check the operation and setting of the Low Air Pressure Switch by injecting a controlled signal into the switch Check the break point on the switch is 1 mbar (falling)

Note The switch is set and sealed before fitting The 1 mbar switch point may not coincide with the 1 mbar scale reading on the switch

If on checking the switch is not operating correctly do not tamper with it return it to RS STOKVIS Ltd for replacement

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 20

4 COMMISSIONING 3000S

42 DRY RUN

With all the manual gas isolation valves still in the OFF position switch the SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch to WINTER

43 START UP

1 Attach a manometer to pressure test point F and the low pressure test point on the air pressure switch (DPS)

2 Open the main gas supply valve (MV1) and the pilot burner isolation valve (PV3) Leave the main burner isolation valve (MV6) closed Reset the air handler by pressing the push-button marked RESET on either the main panel or remote station The air handler pilot will light automatically (after the automatic damper start check and combustion air pre-purge) and then LOCKOUT after the main gas shut-off valves are addressed

During the short period that the pilot is in operation check the pilot gas pressure on the manometer It should be 10 mbar and the pilot flame approximately 100 - 150mm in length covering the first three or four holes of the mixing plate and have a steady blue colour when viewed through the sight glass on the access side of the air handler Adjust as necessary - refer to Section 51 this manual Check the flame signal - refer to Section 431

3 Open the main burner isolation valve (MV6) RESET the air handler which should now light to main burner stage When alight close the main burner isolation valve to shut down the gas flow to the burner Check that the unit goes to LOCKOUT

4 Reset the air handler and drive the burner to low fire by adjusting the temperature controller set point as described in Appendix 4 of this manual Check the flame is continuous across the width of the burner and has a flame length of approx 50 - 65mm from the burner rail when viewed through the sight glass on the access side of the air handler Check the burner pressure across pressure test point D and the downstream (low) pressure test point on the air pressure switch ie on the rear of the pressure switch This pressure is specifled in Section 1 of this manual Adjust as necessary-refer to Section 53 of this manual Check the flame signal - refer to Section 431

Where possible check the actual gas flow rate by meter reading with all other appliances turned off

5 Drive the burner to high fire by adjusting the temperature controller set point and high limit to 55degC as described in Appendix 4 of this manual Check the flame is continuous across the burner rail and has a flame length of approximately 250 - 350mm from the burner rail Check the burner pressure across pressure test point D and the downstream (low) pressure test point on the air pressure switch This pressure is specified in Section 1 of this manual Adjust as necessary - refer to Section 52 of this manual Check the maximum air handler discharge temperature Check the flame signal shyrefer to Section 431

Where possible check the actual gas flow rate by meter reading with all other appliances turned off

6 Check the operation of the overheat limit control by adjusting the temperature controller set point and high limit to 65degC as described in Appendix 4 of this manual Monitor the discharge temperature on the temperature controller Check that the overheat control operates as the set temperature is passed Check that the control must be manually reset by pressing the green reset button on the front of the switch Return the temperature controller to its original settings

In the event that the ambient temperature is too low for this simple procedure to work the instrument will have to be bench tested using a Temperature 8ath Remove and replace the control as Section 84 of this manual for bench-testing

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 21

4 COMMISSIONING 3000S

43 1 FLAME SIGNAL CHECK

1 The ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler is fitted with a Klippon SAKT1 Test Terminal which can be used to measure the flame scanning signal Refer to the Electrical Schematic and connect a 0-1 mA ammeter to the two test points with standard 23 mm test plugs with the positive lead on the detector side Disconnect the terminal link to obtain the signal reading A minimum signal of 70 microamps is required typical signals are in the 250-400 microamp range on both pilot and main flame After completion replace the terminal link and remove the test jacks

2 Drive the burner to high fire as previously described Measure the carbon dioxide content of the discharge air stream This figure must not exceed 2800 ppm If the discharge exceeds this limit isolate the air handler and report to RS STOKVIS Ltd before proceeding

Stop and start the air handler a few times to check for reliability using the Operating Instructions (Section 6)

432 HANDOVER

Complete the air handler Service Check Sheet supplied at the back of this manual The self-copy sheet must be returned to STOKVIS for checking

Instruct the User in efficient use and care of the unit start-up and shutdown (including emergency shutdown) and recommended service interval Emphasise the need to keep the air handler clear of stored items and extraneous material and to maintain the recirculation and fresh air paths to the air handler inlets Hand all instructions as applicable to the UserOwner for safekeeping

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 22

5 ADJUSTMENTS 3000S

If adjustments to the air handler settings are required they should be made by a RS STOKVIS Ltd approved engineer

The normal value for all control settings is specified in Section 1 of this manual

51 PILOT ADJUSTMENT

The pilot gas pressure and flame length may be adjusted by altering the discharge pressure of the pilot governor Screwing the adjusting screw clockwise (located under the top cap) increases the discharge pressure and the flame length anti-clockwise decreases the pressure and the flame length

52 BURNER HIGH FIRE PRESSURE ADJUSTMENT

At high fire alter the spring compression on the main burner governor (MV2) by removing the cap and adjust the spring compression plate clockwise to increase the burner pressure anti-clockwise to decrease burner pressure If the pressure does not increase on adjusting the spring the supply is inadequate

Note On small air handlers fitted with a mUlti-functional control the pressure adjusting screw is located under a swing cap on the first block valve

53 BURNER LOW FIRE ADJUSTMENT

The main burner low fire is adjusted on the flow control valve MV5 (Process amp Instrumentation Diagram)

Remove the top cover of the valve and insert a Terminal Screwdriver in the adjusting screw of the TOP cam marked NI

Drive the burner to low fire by adjusting the temperature controller set-point and high limit to 05degC as described in Appendix 4 of this manual

Turn the Terminal Screwdriver clockwise to decrease the low fire gas flow anti-clockwise to increase the flow

Check the heat input and flame signal at the new position are satisfactory and return the tenlperature controller to its normal settings

Replace the control valve cover

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 23

5 ADJUSTMENTS 3000S

54 SUMMERIOFFIWINTER SWITCH

In the SUMMER position this switch provides ventilation only and is independent of the programmed ON and OFF periods This position is manually selected and must be manually de-selected Whenever the switch is in this position the fan is operating

In the OFF position the air handler is shutdown and will not operate This overrides any frost protection fitted It is suitable for air handler shutdown for short periods such as holidays The programme memory is unaffected by this switch and assumes control of the air handler when the switch is returned to the WINTER position

In the WINTER position the air handler operates off the programme memory to provide heating

55 RESET BUTTON

Visual indication of air handler lockout is provided In the event of lockout occurring the air handler can be reset by depressing the RESET button This parallels the RESET button on the air handler main control panel If after 4 attempts to reset the air handler the lockout indicator still illuminates then a Service Engineer should be called to investigate the problem

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 24

6 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 3000S

61 AIR HANDLER START-UP

1 Open all manual gas valves both on the appliance and on the supply to the appliance Switch on the Electric Supply to the appliance

2 On the main air handler panel

Switch the panel isolator to the 1 position

Check POWER ON light

3 On the remote control station

For Heating Switch the SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch to WINTER

The air handler will now start automatically in response to the time settings

In the event of LOCKOUT

Press the RESET button and the cycle of operations will be repeated If the air handler goes to LOCKOUT four times in succession call for a Service Engineer

For Unheated Ventilation Switch the SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch to SUMMER

Note This prevents the burner firing giving a controlled supply of ventilation air to the heated space as long as the switch is in this position The air handler will now start automatically in response to the timeclock demand To turn the fan off return the switch to the centre OFF position

In the event of LOCKOUT

Press the RESET button and the cycle of operations will be repeated If the air handler goes to LOCKOUT four times in succession call for a Service Engineer

62 AIR HANDLER SHUTDOWN

621 SHUTDOWN FOR SHORT PERIODS

Switch the SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch on the remote station to OFF

622 SHUTDOWN FOR PROLONGED PERIODS

Switch the main panel isolator to the 0 position and close all manual gas valves both on and leading to the appliance

Note Manual gas valves should only be operated when the appliance is to be shut off for either Servicing or for a prolonged shutdown

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 25

30005 6 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

63 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS

631 SITE CLEARANCE ADJACENT TO AIR HANDLER

Attention should be paid to keeping the area around the air handler tidy No rubbish should be allowed to accumulate in the vicinity of the air handler and storage of goods etc should not be permitted within two metres of the air handler Failure to comply could result in reduced airflow to the air handler causing inefficient running and potential overheat cond ition

632 AIR SUPPLY TO AIR HANDLER

Air vents and grilles supplying air to the air handler should never be blocked and should be checked periodically to ensure they are clear

633 AIR FILTERS

Similarly attention should be paid to cleaning or replacing the filters to the air handler if fitted Your installer should advise you on the frequency with which this would be required to be completed

634 SERVICE

For continued safe and efficient operation of this air air handler it is important that servicing of the air handler should be completed at regular intervals by a competent person in accordance with Section 82 of this manual Users are advised to enter into a Service Agreement with RS STOKVIS Ltd

635 SPARE PARTS

It is suggested that a complete set of spare parts essential to the running of the air handler and recommended by the installer are kept by the user on the premises where the air handler is installed This is particularly important where the air handler forms an essential part of any process plant and its being out of operation may cause problems by for example frost damage or condensation by super-cooling

A list of Recommended Spares will be found in Section 9 of this manual

636 GAS LEAKS

If a smell of gas is detected around the area of the appliance Switch off all manual gas valves and contact your service engineer or the local gas undertaking

NEVER

LOOK FOR GAS LEAKS WITH A LIGHTED MATCH OR NAKED

FLAME

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 26

7 FAULT FINDING 30008

The main control panel incorporates two lights to help in fault finding

POWER ON

LOCKOUT

The remote station also has three lights

AIR FAN ON

BURNER ON

LOCKOUT

This section gives the possible causes of failure associated with each check light The electrical schematic diagram in this manual and the wiring diagram shipped in the main air handler panel should be used in conjunction with the notes below Additionally Service Engineers should familiarise themselves with the detailed Start Sequence given in Appendix 2 of this manual

The notes are given for each light before consulting the notes check for bulb failure

71 POWER ON LIGHT IS UNLIT

Check

1 Main control panel isolator is in the 1 position

2 Main Panel 6A MCB has not tripped if a trip has occurred the switch will be at the OFF position Reset and test system as required

3 Also check if the mains electrical supply is isolated If so FIND OUT WHY before taking any action

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 27

7 FAULT FINDING 30005

72 AIR FAN ON LIGHT IS UNLIT

Check

1 SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch is not in Position OFF

2 Timeperiod is not set to off

3 Air handler is not at LOCKOUT

4 Recheck both AIR FAN ON and LOCKOUT bulbs

Two fault indications are possible

1 THE FAN IS NOT OPERATING

If the fan should have started but is not operating

Check 1 Overload for tripped conditions Reset the overload and monitor the next start-up

2 Motor Fuses

3 Relays 1 2 amp3 for failure

laClor CC1 for failure

5 Air Pressure Switch (DPS) is failed in the N 0 Position

Replace the faulty component as described in Section 8

2 THE FAN IS OPERATING

This indicates that the air pressure switch (DPS) has failed to change over

Measure the profile plate differential pressure as described in Section 4113 If the pressure is correct the air pressure switch is faulty Check the switch as in 4114 If the pressure is not correct

Check 1 Correct fan belt tension

2 Correct fan rotation

3 The air handler air inlets and discharge are not blocked

4 Correct fitting on filters

5 The air differential pressure switch impulse lines are not blocked or leaking

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 28

7 FAULT FINDING 30008

73 LOCKOUT LIGHT IS ILLUMINATED

This light indicates a failure in the burner ignition and flame supervision system

RESET the unit and follow the progress of the start sequence The full cycle may take two minutes

1

------t

2 LOCKOUT after 35-40 seconds indicates an ignition failure RESET the system and observe the pilot and ignition spark during the start-up attempt

I-- shy

3 Observe the spark This should be strong and highly visible If not remove and clean the spark plug as Section 82 Check that the spark plug gap is correctly set at 15 mm

-- shy

4 Check the pilot flame If the pilot flame ignites and the unit goes to LOCKOUT the scanning system is at fault Remove and clean the detector as Section 82 Check the flame signal as in Section 431

5 If the pilot does not light the gas supply system is faulty Check the pilot system for restriction and the pilot valve operation

6 If the pilot lights and the unit goes to LOCKOUT after the main gas valves are addressed either the flow control valve is blocked or one of the main gas block valves has failed Fit a manometer on the pressure test point on the outlet flange of the multishyfunctional control and observe if the pressure rises when the main gas valves are addressed No pressure rise will indicate failure of the main gas valves

74 AIR FAN ON LIGHT ILLUMINATED

If the burner does not start check

1 SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch is in WINTER position

2 Overheat Limit Control

These interlocks prevent the burner management system starting

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 29

8 SERVICING 3000S

IMPORTANT Servicing and maintenance should be only carried out by a RS STOKVIS Ltd approved engineer

Only use replacement parts provided by the appliance manufacturer

Check that the air openings for combustion and for ventilation of any plant roon or compartment are clear

81 ISOLATION

811 FUEL GAS ISOLATION

The fuel gas to the ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler should be isolated and locked off at the manual ball valve mounted at the start of the fuel gas line Additionally before entering or servicing the air handler the burner manual isolation valve and pilot line isolation valve should be closed

812 ELECTRICAL ISOLATION

All electric power to the air handler and the remote control station is switched through the local isolator This isolator is fitted with a lock facility to permit it to be locked in the OFF position

Additionally isolate the power at the Wall Isolator

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 30

8 SERVICING 30005

82 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE

The air handler should be routinely serviced at the start of each heating season Isolate the air handler as above before servicing Details of access to individual components are given in Section 84 of this manual

1 Remove and clean spark igniter Check that the gap is correctly set at 25 mm Replace every two years

2 Clean the flame detector lens to ensure freedom from dirt and moisture If the cell shows any sign of cracks it should be replaced Routinely replace the cell every two years or after 10000 hours of operation which ever comes first

3 Inspect the entire air handler paint system for general damage Repair as necessary

4 Every two years brush the burner plates and clear the burner holes carefully with a Size 18mm drill for NP II and 20mm drill for NP I

WARNING THE BURNER HOLES MUST NOT BE ENLARGED

5 Inspect and lubricate all damper linkages to ensure freedom of operation Wipe off all excess lubricants to prevent dirt build up on linkage parts

6 Check the fan belt for cracks and splits Check tension The correct tension gives 16mm deflection per metre of span when the belt is centrally loaded with a force of 27N Adjust as necessary

7 Grease both the fan shaft bearings with Mobiith AW2 grease or similar

NEVER use high temperature grease

NEVER mix two different greases within the bearing always flush existing grease out

Note Removing the cover plate on the end of the air handler gains access to the outboard fan bearing

Light to Slow to 0 120 2 to 6 months Clean Dry

Medium Medium 120 200 1 to 2 months

Moderate to Light to Slow to 0 120 1 to 4 weeks Dry

Dirty Medium Medium 120 200 1 to 7 days

Extreme Dirt Dry Light to Slow to 0 200 Daily Flushing out

Medium Medium Dirt

83 ANNUAL SERVICE CHECKS

After Servicing test fire the air handler following the Commissioning Procedure detailed in Section 4 of this manual to ensure correct operation generally Special attention must be paid to the damper system and related controls and interlocks

Additionally check that the fresh air and recirculation air entry path to the air handler has been kept clear and instruct the User of the need for this as necessary

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 31

8 SERVICING 3000S

84 REMOVAL PROCEDURE FOR REPLACEABLE COMPONENTS

IMPORTANT

Turn off the gas at the appliance service valve and the electricity at the main panel and wall isolator before proceeding

841 BURNER

The burner is located inside the air handler casing and is mounted on two brackets from the support straps To remove the burner isolate the air handler as in 81 and undo the union on the fuel gas line adjacent to the burner isolation valve (MV6) and unscrew the main and pilot gas feed pipes from the burner rail Access to the rear of the burner assembly is made by removing the partition plate below the burner separating the fresh air inlet to the burner from the return air inlet compartment This is held in place by screws which engage in captive nuts on the top side of the partition Remove the Flame Detector and pull off the ignition plug cap Disconnect the burner support brackets and remove the burner The burner will easily pass through the access hatch for further strip down Replace in the reverse order soundness test the gas pipework check the burner operation and duty as described in the commissioning section of this manual

842 FLAME DETECTOR

This is a 240 Volt instrument

The flame detector is mounted on the end of the burner rail inside the air handler casing To remove the detector isolate the panel electric supply and lock off Push the scanner towards the burner and rotate to release the bayonet fixing and lift the detector from its mount Remove the two screws holding the detector cover and disconnect the supply leads noting the polarity of the connections

Replace the flame detector in the reverse order ensuring correct polarity of connections Ensure the access panel is securely closed and the retaining nuts are tightened down Check operation by inserting a test meter in the points provided in the main control panel and reading the flame signals during start up to full rate burner operation (See 431) Operate the appliance over six starts for reliability of operation including tum off of start and main gas valves to check for lockout operation

843 IGNITER SPARK PLUG

This is a high tension spark plug

The igniter spark plug is mounted on the end of the burner rail inside the air handler casing To remove the spark plug isolate the air handler as above Enter the service access door Access to the spark plug is made through the profile plate To remove the spark plug pull off the high tension lead and unscrew the plug with a plug spanner

When replacing the spark plug check the plug gap is set at 15mm Check ignition reliability over six start ups

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 32

8 SERVICING 3000S

844 IGNITER SPARK TRANSFORMER

This is a 240 Volt instrument

The ignition transformer is located in a plastic box mounted on the air handler casing adjacent to the main control panel To remove the transformer isolate the air handler as above and unscrew the four retaining screws holding the box lid in place and remove the lid Disconnect the supply cable at the terminal strip and undo the transformer retaining screws The transformer may then be unscrewed from the High Tension cable leading to the spark plug

Replacement is a simple reversal of this procedure

Check ignition reliability over six start ups

845 COMBUSTION AIR PRESSURE SWITCH (DPS)

Note The switch is set and sealed and should be replaced if not operating correctly

This switch is a 240 Volt instrument

The air switch is mounted directly on the air handler casing and can be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove the switch isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the supply cable Break the downstream pipe compression fitting and unscrew the switch housing from its locating fitting Reverse the procedure to replace after ensuring switch setting is as specified in Section 13 of this manual Operate the air handler to ensure reliability of operation over six start ups

846 AIR HANDLER OVERHEAT LIMIT CONTROL

This is a 240 Volt instrument

The overheat limit control can be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove the control isolate the air handler as above and lock off Remove the switch cover Disconnect the supply cable and unscrew the control housing from its locating fitting Reverse the procedure to replace check the switch is set to 50degC Test the switch operation as described in Section 43 over at least three operations

847 AIR FAN AND MOTOR

The air fan motor is a 415 Volt 3 phase motor

The motor and slide rails are easily accessible inside the air handler casing If it is necessary to remove the motor isolate the air handler as above Slacken the fan-belt tension and remove the drive belts Pull the motor away from the air handler casing to make access to the motor terminal box and disconnect the supply cable The motor may now be removed from the unit Following replacement the air handler must be fully re-commissioned as in Section 4

It is unlikely that the air fan will need replacing or servicing If required a full procedure should be obtained from RS STOKVIS Ltd

Replacement must be followed by full re-commissioning as in Section 4

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 33

8 SERVICING 3000S

848 FUEL GAS MULTI-FUNCTIONAL CONTROL - SMALL UNITS

This is a 240 Volt instrument

The fuel gas multi-functional control can be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove the unit isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the Hirschman electric termination Unbolt the control from its flanges and remove

When replacing care must be taken to ensure the flange 0 rings are undamaged and in the correct location Following replacement the air handler must be fully reshycommissioned as in Section 4 including tests for soundness prior to start-up

849 GOVERNOR AND BLOCK VALVES

The block valves are 240 Volt instruments

All these items may be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove any item isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the electric termination to the two block valves the pilot block valve and the flow control block valve Break the two pipe unions and remove the fuel gas line complete for further strip-down

8410 FUEL GAS FLOW CONTROL VALVE

This is a 24 Volt instrument

The fuel gas How control valve can be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove the valve isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the supply cables to the control valve

On small air handlers fitted with a multi-functional control support the multi-functional control and unbolt its discharge flange Break the union downstream of the burner isolation valve and remove the section of line containing the flow control valve for further strip-down

On large air handlers fitted with separate block valves it will be necessary to remove the fuel gas line complete as Section 8410 above

Following replacement re-commission the air handler

Note If the fresh air damper is not in the full open position the heat input must not exceed the maximum heat input at recirculation condition specified in the technical data section of this manual

8411 PILOT GAS GOVERNOR AND BLOCK VALVE

The block valve is a 240 Volt instrument

Both items may be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove either item isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the electric terrriination to the solenoid valve Undo the upstream pipe union and the compression fitting downstream of the manual block valve (PV3) Remove the pilot gas line complete for further strip down

Replace broken or distorted connections and retest for soundness Ensure the pilot gas pressure is correct and the flame is sensing an output Ensure reliability over six start-ups

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 34

8 SERVICING 3000S

8412 BELT TENSIONING PROCEDURE

The setting tensions are designed to cover a wide range of drives A precise setting force for individual applications can be calculated as detailed

SETTING FORCES

Belt Section

Setting Force To Deflect Belt 16mm per Metre Of Span

Small Pulley Diameter (mm)

Basic Setting Forces Newtons (N) Kilograms (kgf)

125 x Setting Forces Newtons (N) Kilograms (kgf)

SPZ

56 to 71 16 16 20 20 75 to 90 18 18 22 22

95 to 125 20 20 25 25 Over 125 22 22 28 28

SPA

80 to 100 22 22 28 28 106 to 140 30 30 38 38 150 to 200 36 37 45 46 Over 200 40 40 50 51

SPB

112 to 160 40 40 50 51 170 to 224 50 51 62 63 236 to 355 62 63 77 79 Over 355 65 66 81 83

SPC 224 to 250 70 71 87 89 265 to 355 92 94 115 120 Over 375 115 120 144 150

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 35

8 SERVICING 3000S

BELT TENSIONING USING FENNER BELT TENSION INDICATOR

Calculate the deflection in mm on a basis of 16mm per metre of centre distance Centre Distance (m) x 16 =Deflection (mm)

Set lower marker ring at the deflection distance required in mm on the lower scale

Set upper ring against to bottom edge of the top tube

Place the belt tension indicator on top of the belt at the centre of span and apply a force at right angles to the belt defecting it to the point where the lower marker ring is level with the top of the adjacent belt

Read off the force value indicated by the top edge of the upper marker ring

Compare this force to the kgf value shown in the table above

If a Fenner Belt Tension Indicator is not available a spring balance and rule will be suffice

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 36

8 SERVICING 30005

85 MAIN PANEL CONTROLS

All panel controls are readily accessible and may be easily exchanged for replacement components in the event of failure Ensure any replacement item is of the same make and type as the original

851 LANDIS amp GYR LFL 1335 AUTOMATIC SEQUENCE CONTROLLER

The Landis amp Gyr Automatic Sequence Controller is a plug-in unit locating on a pre-wired chassis To remove the controller undo the two retaining screws at the top left and lower right corners and pull the module off the chassis

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

852 CONTROLS CIRCUIT (24 VOLT) TRANSFORMER

The Controls Circuit Transformer is fixed to the panel back plate by tapped screws To remove the transformer undo the wiring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel Undo the two retaining screws and remove the unit complete

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

853 CONTROL RELAYS R1 R2 amp R3

The Control Relays are DIN Rail mounted To remove a relay undo the wIring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel Release the DIN rail retaining clip under the relay with a screwdriver and remove the relay

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

854 6A MCB

The 6A MCB is DIN Rail mounted To remove the MCB undo the wiring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel Release the DIN rail retaining clip under the MCB with a screwdriver and remove the MCB

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

855 THERMAL OVERLOAD

The thermal overload is attached to the underside of the main contactor To remove the overload undo the wiring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel and that the overload setting is as specified in Section 13 of this manual Unscrew the three connections to the contactor and remove the overload

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 37

8 SERVICING 3000S

856 MAIN CONTACTOR

The Main Contactor is DIN Rail mounted To remove the contactor remove the thermal overload as 855 above and then undo the wiring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel Release the DIN rail retaining clip under the contactor with a screwdriver and remove the contactor

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

857 MOTOR FUSE

To replace a motor fuse pull the fuse carrier off the fuse holder base The fuse is attached to the fuse carrier by two screws Unscrew remove and replace

86 REMOTE CONTROL STATION

The remote control station contains some serviceable parts although these items should only be fitted by an approved RS STOKVIS Ltd Engineer

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 38

9 RECOMMENDED SPARES 3000S

For two years operation it is recommended that the following items should be held in stock

ITEM DESCRIPTION PART NO QUANTITY i

1 INDICATOR BULBS W1121 1 PACK

2 SPARK PLUG 023739 1 I

3 UVDETECTOR QRA10C 1 I

4 ROOM SENSOR DRT2453 1

5 DUCT SENSOR DDT1701 1

All replacement parts can be obtained from RS STOKVIS Ltd by quoting the air handler serial number the part number and description

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 39

APPENDIX 1 30005

SOUNDNESS TESTING THE FUEL GAS PIPEWORK

This procedure should only be carried out by personnel familiar with the ECONO-AIR 3000S Series Air handler

The pressure test points and all valves are identified on the Process and Instrumentation Diagram for the air handler included in Section 1 of this n1anual

Isolate the air handler electric supply at the main control panel and lock off Close the manual isolation valves MV1 MV6 and PV3 Ensure the supply pressure is available on the upstream side of MV1

A11 TESTING THE UPSTREAM PIPEWORKAND BURNER CONTROLS 1 Connect a 60 mbar manometer to the pressure test nipple A Monitor the

pressure for two minutes Any rise in pressure indicates that valve MV1 is leaking and must be replaced Remove pressure test points Band F

2 Open MV1 to pressurise the pipework on both the main gas and pilot line to the first block valve

3 Close MV1 Allow one minute for the temperature to stabilise and then test the system for 2 minutes and watch for a drop in the pipework pressure If the pressure falls open valve MV1 and test the pipework connections and valves from MV1 to MV3 and MV1 to PV2 for leaks with a proprietary leak detector fluid or spray Turn off MV1 seal any leaks and re-test

4 If no extemalleaks are found either the pilot block valve PV1 or either the first main gas block valve MV3 is letting by

5 To test this seal pressure test point A and fit a manometer to pressure test point B Leave for two minutes with MV1 open A rise in pressure on the manometer confirms a leak on the block valve MV3 Turn off MV1 exchange the valve and re-test from point 2 above

6 Repeat this procedure for the pilot block valve Seal test point B and fit a manometer to pressure test point F Leave for two minutes with MV1 open A rise in pressure on the manometer confirms a leak on the pilot block valve PV2 Turn off MV1 exchange the valve and re-test from point 1 above Seal test point F

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 40

APPENDIX 1 30005

A12 TESTING THE DOWNSTREAM BURNER VALVE 1 Close MV1 and connect pressure test points A and 8 with flexible 6 mm bore

tubing teed into the manometer Remove pressure test point C Open MV1 to pressurise the downstream block valve MV4

2 Close MV1 and leave for one minute for the temperature to stabilise Monitor the pressure for 2 minutes If the pressure falls open valve MV1 and leak test the line between the two block valves MV3 and MV4 with a proprietary leak detector Turn off MV1 seal any leaks and re-test Note Smaller air handlers in the 3000S Series are fitted with multi-functional valves combining the pressure regulator and two block valves in one component The above procedure still applies but if a leak is found on either block valve the whole control should be replaced If no external leaks are found the downstream block valve is letting by

3 To confirm this close MV1 remove the manometer and refit to pressure test point C Connect pressure test points A and 8 with flexible 6mm bore tubing Open MV1 and allow one minute for the temperature to stabilise Monitor the pressure for a further 2 minutes with MV1 still open A rise in pressure confirms that the second block valve MV4 is letting by Turn off MV1 Replace the valve and re-test from 2 above

A13 TESTING THE DOWNSTREAM BURNER PIPEWORK 1 Close MV1 and connect pressure test points A and D with flexible 6 mm bore

tubing teed into the manometer Open MV1 to pressurise the downstream pilot pipework

2 Close MV1 and leave for one minute for the temperature to stabilise Monitor the pressure for 2 minutes If the pressure falls open valve MV1 and leak test the line between the downstream block valve MV4 and the manual block MV6 with a proprietary leak detector fluid or spray If no external leaks are found the manual block valve MV6 is letting by Turn off MV1 seal any leakages and reshytest from 2 above

A14 TESTING THE DOWNSTREAM PILOT PIPEWORK 1 Close MV1 and connect pressure test points A and F with flexible 6mm bore

tubing teed into the manometer Open MV1 to pressurise the downstream pilot pipework

2 Close MV1 and leave for one rninute for the temperature to stabilise Monitor the pressure for 2 minutes If the pressure falls open valve MV1 and leak test the line between the downstream block valve PV2 and the manual block PV3 with a proprietary leak detector fluid or spray If no external leaks are found the manual block valve PV3 is letting by Turn off MV1 seal any leakages and reshytest from 2 above

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 41

APPENDIX 1 30005

A15 TESTING THE BURNER CONNECTIONS 1 Remove the burner access panel as described in Section 84 of this manual

Remove the burner spark igniter Slacken the two retaining bolts holding the burner to the burner support straps and unbolt the burner supply endplate from the burner casting and mixing plates

2 Connect pressure test points A and 0 with flexible 6mm bore tubing teed into the manometer Open MV1 and MV6 to pressurise the burner pipework Leak test the main gas burner pipework and connections with proprietary leak detector fluid Turn off MV6 Seal any leakages and re-test

3 Connect pressure test points A and F with flexible 6 mm bore tubing teed into the manometer Open MV1 and PV3 to pressurise the pilot burner pipework Leak test the pilot gas burner pipework and connections with proprietary leak detector fluid Turn off PV3 Seal any leakages and re-test

4 Turn off MV1

5 Replace the spark igniter and profile division plate

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 42

APPENDIX 2 30005

START SEQUENCE

The burner start sequence is controlled by the Landis and Gyr burner management unit The timings are pre-set and comply with 885885 This unit must NOT be tampered with

A brief description of the start-up sequence isshy

The unit checks

1 The NO FLAME signal on the UV flame scanner

Note If the scanner detects a flame at any time other than in the correct operating sequence the flame programmer initiates a lockout

2 The operation of the combustion air proving switch in the NO AIR position

3 The air handler discharge high temperature switch

If the checks are completed the unit starts the combustion air fan and then checks the combustion airflow

Once the airflow is proven the unit checks that the damper control circuit is functioning correctly After the damper microswitch is made to prove the fresh air damper is fully open the sequence allows 30 seconds for the combustion air to purge any combustible gas from the air handler

After completion of the purge the spark ignition system is energised the pilot valve opened and the spark terminated If the pilot flame is not proven by the UV scanner the system will initiate a LOCKOUT

If the flame is proven the main gas valves are opened the pilot extinguished and the main burner flame proven

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 43

i

APPENDIX 2 30008

The following flow chart shows the complete start sequence including the lighting of the various indicating lamps

MANUAL STATUS LIGHT POWER ON

POWER ON

I INITIATE START BY TIME

SETTING ON CONTROLLER

I CHECK NO FLAME

VISIBLE

PROVEj FAIL LOCKOUT

I CHECK RELAY R4 NC

POSITION

PROVE FAIL NO START

I CHECK AIR PRESSURE SWITCH NC POSITION

PROVE FAIL NO START

I CHECK RELAY R1 NC

POSITION

PROVE j

FAIL NO START

I START COMBUSTION

AIR BLOWER

I CHECK AIR PRESSURE SWITCH NO POSITION

PROVE I

FAIL NO START

I STATUS LIGHT FAN ON

I ENERGISE RELAY R1

I

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 44

I

I

APPENDIX 2 30008

I CHECK OVERHEAT LIMIT

CONTROL R5

PROVE I

FAIL I I

CHECK 541412 LOOP CLOSED ON

LANDIS ampGYR CIRCUIT

PROVE I

FAIL I I

COMBUSTION AIR PURGE PERIOD

30 SECONDS

I

NO START

NO START

CANCEL NO FLAME CHECK CIRCUIT

I

ENERGISE SPARK

I TIMED PERIOD 25 SECONDS

I ENERGISE PILOT GAS

VALVE

I TIMED PERIOD 25 SECONDS

I TERMINATE SPARK

I INTERROGATE UV FLAME SCANNER

PROVE I

FAIL I I

TIMED PERIOD 10 SECONDS

I

LOCKOUT

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 45

I

I

APPENDIX 2 3000S

I ENERGISE MAIN GAS

VALVES

I

STATUS LIGHT BURNER ON

I TIMED PERIOD

5 SECONDS

I DE-ENERGISE PILOT

GAS VALVES

CONTINUOUS FROM PILOT

I INTERROGATE UV FLAME SCANNER

PROVE I

FAIL I I

LOCKOUT I

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 46

APPENDIX 3 30005

Please see copy of Standard Service Sheet

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 47

APPENDIX 4 30005

A41 TIME OUT SCREEN

This is the standard screen displayed when the touch screen is not in use The back light is off to save energy_ To access the STATUS screen touch the ENTER key and the following screen is displayed

[]][I][]rn[IJOO[][IJOO[] EJ~E11 I[]I ~ middot I

NOTE

The Touch Screen operates using the heat produced by the touch of a finger and therefore only LIGHT pressure is required

Excessive pressure can damage the Touch Screen

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 48

APPENDIX 4 30008

A42 STATUS SCREEN

On the typical STATUS screen the illustrated information detailed is as follows

19 36 Fan Brn

RS OS

100 Fst_~_ Lck _ _ Xst Gas~o ~ I

RS Indicates the current room temperature

OS ~( t~~ the current duct discharge temperature

Fan Indicates the current status of the fan by showing the arrow and the fan blades for ON and OFF is shown by the arrow and fan blades being removed

Brn Indicates the current status of the burner with the black flames indicating the burner to be ON and vice versa

Lck LOCKOUT - This indicates a flame failure when highlighted during normal or start-up operation

Xst EXCESS TEMPERATURE SWITCH - This indicates the unit has reached the trip limit on the over heat stat when highlighted during operation

Indicates the current position of the gas modulating valve during normal Gas

operation (0-100)

Indicates whether the Frost stat is energised and the unit is running on frost Fst

override

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 49

APPENDIX 4 30008

A43 CHANGING SETTINGS

It is possible to change the settings for the time of operation and the required temperature set points The following details the steps required

A44 ENTERING THE SECURITY CODE

From the STATUS screen touch the return key and the screen below will be displayed

Type the HIGH LEVEL security code (4321) If you make a mistake use the BACK SPACE key to delete any incorrect number(s) Touch the ENTER key when the code is correct

If the security code is incorrect the screen above will be displayed then try again If after several attempts you can not gain access please contact RS STOKVIS Ltd for further information

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 50

APPENDIX 4 30008

When the code is entered correctly the MAIN MENU is displayed as detailed below

~ STATUS SET VALUES~ ~ TIVIE CLOCK [) [) [) [) [)

The MAIN MENU screen shows the three menu items available The title for each menu item can be changed to suit the end user Please notify RS STOKVIS Ltd prior to commissioning should these parameters require special amendments

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 51

APPENDIX 4 30008

A45 CHANGING OR SETTING A TIME SCHEDULE

From the main menu screen select the TIME CLOCK page by running finger across screen symbol and touch the ENTER key the screen below will be displayed

On the following screen highlight the TS1 symbol and touch the ENTER key

The current time schedule will now be displayed as shown below The display will automatically default to the current day (1 =Monday 2 =Tuesday etc) In this case day 5 (Friday) the four schedule switching times refer to that day

IAC6BBB1BHIS1

mm0CIl bull mID 17BB 17BB 17HB

Iillleschedule

To modify a time select it by highlighting and touch the ENTER key and the following screen is displayed

To amend the appropriate onoff time as shown on the screen below The arrows to the right of the time are for altering the hours and the arrows on the left for the minutes

Once you have set the time use the ESCape key to exit back to the time schedule screen and choose another day by touching the required number Another time may now be modified as before

IAC6BBB1BHIS1

H8BH

I i eschedule

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 52

APPENDIX 4 30008

Use the ESCape key to exit back to the MAIN MENU screen

~ STATUS ~ SET VALUES

TIME CLOCK []~ [] [] [] []

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 53

APPENDIX 4 30005

A46 CHANGING SET VALUES

From the main menu screen select the SET VALUES page by highlight in the normal way and touch the ENTER key

The following screen is displayed

36 19 18III III IIIHsv Rsv Llv

To change the RSV highlight it in the normal way and touch the ENTER key and the screen below will now be shown

IAC6RRR1RR40 T I

0 19 (Y)l RSV

ROOM SET VALUE

The above screen shows the parameters that can be changed The values to the far left are the limitations of set point (OC) Change the set point by using the UP and DOWN ARROWS on the left of the screen or touch the set value itself followed by the ENTER key to select the set value and set it directly using the numeric keyboard All values can be changed in this way

Use the ESCape key twice to exit back to the MAIN MENU screen

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 54

APPENDIX 4 30005

A47 COMMISSIONING AND SERVICING BURNER CHECKS

Select the SET VALUES screen from the MAIN MENU screen and adjust the high lirrlit set point to 55degC to drive the burner to high fire

IAC6HHH1HH60 ~T I

0 19 (Y)

HSV

HIGH SET VALUE ~

Ensure the set value is returned to 36degC once the appropriate checks and adjustments as described in Section 43 of this manual have been completed Return to the SET VALUES screen and select the low limit value to adjust the low fire setting

Reduce the low limit value to OdegC to drive the gas valve to low fire and complete the appropriate checks and adjustments as described in Section 43 of this manual and ensure the set value is returned to the original value

A48 GMT ltgt BST CHANGEOVER DAYLIGHT SAVINGS

To change your unit to British Summer TimelWinter Time the following system screen must be highlighted by touching the Iamp1 button twice

By touching the clock symbol in the top left hand corner followed by the ENTER key the screen below will be displayed

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 55

APPENDIX 4 30008

188311 851193

544

By touching and highlighting in this case 18 followed by the ENTER key A small box allowing the entry of two digits will appear Enter the desired time required using the numbered keys followed by ENTER key Your unit is now set to operate on BSTBWT

Touch the ESC key three times to return back to the Status screen

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 56

STOKVIS ENERGY SYSTEMS 96R WALTON ROAD EAST MOLESEY SURREY KT8 0DL TEL 020 8783 3050 08707 707 747 FAX 020 8783 3051 08707 707 767 E-MAIL infostokvisboilerscom WEBSITE wwwstokvisboilerscom

JULY 1999

Page 25: ECONOAIR 3000S SERIES AIR HANDLING UNIT DIRECT FIREDstokvisboilers.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/EconoAir... · 2019-05-10 · ECONOAIR 3000S SERIES AIR HANDLING UNIT DIRECT FIRED

4 COMMISSIONING 3000S

42 DRY RUN

With all the manual gas isolation valves still in the OFF position switch the SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch to WINTER

43 START UP

1 Attach a manometer to pressure test point F and the low pressure test point on the air pressure switch (DPS)

2 Open the main gas supply valve (MV1) and the pilot burner isolation valve (PV3) Leave the main burner isolation valve (MV6) closed Reset the air handler by pressing the push-button marked RESET on either the main panel or remote station The air handler pilot will light automatically (after the automatic damper start check and combustion air pre-purge) and then LOCKOUT after the main gas shut-off valves are addressed

During the short period that the pilot is in operation check the pilot gas pressure on the manometer It should be 10 mbar and the pilot flame approximately 100 - 150mm in length covering the first three or four holes of the mixing plate and have a steady blue colour when viewed through the sight glass on the access side of the air handler Adjust as necessary - refer to Section 51 this manual Check the flame signal - refer to Section 431

3 Open the main burner isolation valve (MV6) RESET the air handler which should now light to main burner stage When alight close the main burner isolation valve to shut down the gas flow to the burner Check that the unit goes to LOCKOUT

4 Reset the air handler and drive the burner to low fire by adjusting the temperature controller set point as described in Appendix 4 of this manual Check the flame is continuous across the width of the burner and has a flame length of approx 50 - 65mm from the burner rail when viewed through the sight glass on the access side of the air handler Check the burner pressure across pressure test point D and the downstream (low) pressure test point on the air pressure switch ie on the rear of the pressure switch This pressure is specifled in Section 1 of this manual Adjust as necessary-refer to Section 53 of this manual Check the flame signal - refer to Section 431

Where possible check the actual gas flow rate by meter reading with all other appliances turned off

5 Drive the burner to high fire by adjusting the temperature controller set point and high limit to 55degC as described in Appendix 4 of this manual Check the flame is continuous across the burner rail and has a flame length of approximately 250 - 350mm from the burner rail Check the burner pressure across pressure test point D and the downstream (low) pressure test point on the air pressure switch This pressure is specified in Section 1 of this manual Adjust as necessary - refer to Section 52 of this manual Check the maximum air handler discharge temperature Check the flame signal shyrefer to Section 431

Where possible check the actual gas flow rate by meter reading with all other appliances turned off

6 Check the operation of the overheat limit control by adjusting the temperature controller set point and high limit to 65degC as described in Appendix 4 of this manual Monitor the discharge temperature on the temperature controller Check that the overheat control operates as the set temperature is passed Check that the control must be manually reset by pressing the green reset button on the front of the switch Return the temperature controller to its original settings

In the event that the ambient temperature is too low for this simple procedure to work the instrument will have to be bench tested using a Temperature 8ath Remove and replace the control as Section 84 of this manual for bench-testing

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 21

4 COMMISSIONING 3000S

43 1 FLAME SIGNAL CHECK

1 The ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler is fitted with a Klippon SAKT1 Test Terminal which can be used to measure the flame scanning signal Refer to the Electrical Schematic and connect a 0-1 mA ammeter to the two test points with standard 23 mm test plugs with the positive lead on the detector side Disconnect the terminal link to obtain the signal reading A minimum signal of 70 microamps is required typical signals are in the 250-400 microamp range on both pilot and main flame After completion replace the terminal link and remove the test jacks

2 Drive the burner to high fire as previously described Measure the carbon dioxide content of the discharge air stream This figure must not exceed 2800 ppm If the discharge exceeds this limit isolate the air handler and report to RS STOKVIS Ltd before proceeding

Stop and start the air handler a few times to check for reliability using the Operating Instructions (Section 6)

432 HANDOVER

Complete the air handler Service Check Sheet supplied at the back of this manual The self-copy sheet must be returned to STOKVIS for checking

Instruct the User in efficient use and care of the unit start-up and shutdown (including emergency shutdown) and recommended service interval Emphasise the need to keep the air handler clear of stored items and extraneous material and to maintain the recirculation and fresh air paths to the air handler inlets Hand all instructions as applicable to the UserOwner for safekeeping

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 22

5 ADJUSTMENTS 3000S

If adjustments to the air handler settings are required they should be made by a RS STOKVIS Ltd approved engineer

The normal value for all control settings is specified in Section 1 of this manual

51 PILOT ADJUSTMENT

The pilot gas pressure and flame length may be adjusted by altering the discharge pressure of the pilot governor Screwing the adjusting screw clockwise (located under the top cap) increases the discharge pressure and the flame length anti-clockwise decreases the pressure and the flame length

52 BURNER HIGH FIRE PRESSURE ADJUSTMENT

At high fire alter the spring compression on the main burner governor (MV2) by removing the cap and adjust the spring compression plate clockwise to increase the burner pressure anti-clockwise to decrease burner pressure If the pressure does not increase on adjusting the spring the supply is inadequate

Note On small air handlers fitted with a mUlti-functional control the pressure adjusting screw is located under a swing cap on the first block valve

53 BURNER LOW FIRE ADJUSTMENT

The main burner low fire is adjusted on the flow control valve MV5 (Process amp Instrumentation Diagram)

Remove the top cover of the valve and insert a Terminal Screwdriver in the adjusting screw of the TOP cam marked NI

Drive the burner to low fire by adjusting the temperature controller set-point and high limit to 05degC as described in Appendix 4 of this manual

Turn the Terminal Screwdriver clockwise to decrease the low fire gas flow anti-clockwise to increase the flow

Check the heat input and flame signal at the new position are satisfactory and return the tenlperature controller to its normal settings

Replace the control valve cover

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 23

5 ADJUSTMENTS 3000S

54 SUMMERIOFFIWINTER SWITCH

In the SUMMER position this switch provides ventilation only and is independent of the programmed ON and OFF periods This position is manually selected and must be manually de-selected Whenever the switch is in this position the fan is operating

In the OFF position the air handler is shutdown and will not operate This overrides any frost protection fitted It is suitable for air handler shutdown for short periods such as holidays The programme memory is unaffected by this switch and assumes control of the air handler when the switch is returned to the WINTER position

In the WINTER position the air handler operates off the programme memory to provide heating

55 RESET BUTTON

Visual indication of air handler lockout is provided In the event of lockout occurring the air handler can be reset by depressing the RESET button This parallels the RESET button on the air handler main control panel If after 4 attempts to reset the air handler the lockout indicator still illuminates then a Service Engineer should be called to investigate the problem

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 24

6 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 3000S

61 AIR HANDLER START-UP

1 Open all manual gas valves both on the appliance and on the supply to the appliance Switch on the Electric Supply to the appliance

2 On the main air handler panel

Switch the panel isolator to the 1 position

Check POWER ON light

3 On the remote control station

For Heating Switch the SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch to WINTER

The air handler will now start automatically in response to the time settings

In the event of LOCKOUT

Press the RESET button and the cycle of operations will be repeated If the air handler goes to LOCKOUT four times in succession call for a Service Engineer

For Unheated Ventilation Switch the SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch to SUMMER

Note This prevents the burner firing giving a controlled supply of ventilation air to the heated space as long as the switch is in this position The air handler will now start automatically in response to the timeclock demand To turn the fan off return the switch to the centre OFF position

In the event of LOCKOUT

Press the RESET button and the cycle of operations will be repeated If the air handler goes to LOCKOUT four times in succession call for a Service Engineer

62 AIR HANDLER SHUTDOWN

621 SHUTDOWN FOR SHORT PERIODS

Switch the SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch on the remote station to OFF

622 SHUTDOWN FOR PROLONGED PERIODS

Switch the main panel isolator to the 0 position and close all manual gas valves both on and leading to the appliance

Note Manual gas valves should only be operated when the appliance is to be shut off for either Servicing or for a prolonged shutdown

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 25

30005 6 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

63 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS

631 SITE CLEARANCE ADJACENT TO AIR HANDLER

Attention should be paid to keeping the area around the air handler tidy No rubbish should be allowed to accumulate in the vicinity of the air handler and storage of goods etc should not be permitted within two metres of the air handler Failure to comply could result in reduced airflow to the air handler causing inefficient running and potential overheat cond ition

632 AIR SUPPLY TO AIR HANDLER

Air vents and grilles supplying air to the air handler should never be blocked and should be checked periodically to ensure they are clear

633 AIR FILTERS

Similarly attention should be paid to cleaning or replacing the filters to the air handler if fitted Your installer should advise you on the frequency with which this would be required to be completed

634 SERVICE

For continued safe and efficient operation of this air air handler it is important that servicing of the air handler should be completed at regular intervals by a competent person in accordance with Section 82 of this manual Users are advised to enter into a Service Agreement with RS STOKVIS Ltd

635 SPARE PARTS

It is suggested that a complete set of spare parts essential to the running of the air handler and recommended by the installer are kept by the user on the premises where the air handler is installed This is particularly important where the air handler forms an essential part of any process plant and its being out of operation may cause problems by for example frost damage or condensation by super-cooling

A list of Recommended Spares will be found in Section 9 of this manual

636 GAS LEAKS

If a smell of gas is detected around the area of the appliance Switch off all manual gas valves and contact your service engineer or the local gas undertaking

NEVER

LOOK FOR GAS LEAKS WITH A LIGHTED MATCH OR NAKED

FLAME

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 26

7 FAULT FINDING 30008

The main control panel incorporates two lights to help in fault finding

POWER ON

LOCKOUT

The remote station also has three lights

AIR FAN ON

BURNER ON

LOCKOUT

This section gives the possible causes of failure associated with each check light The electrical schematic diagram in this manual and the wiring diagram shipped in the main air handler panel should be used in conjunction with the notes below Additionally Service Engineers should familiarise themselves with the detailed Start Sequence given in Appendix 2 of this manual

The notes are given for each light before consulting the notes check for bulb failure

71 POWER ON LIGHT IS UNLIT

Check

1 Main control panel isolator is in the 1 position

2 Main Panel 6A MCB has not tripped if a trip has occurred the switch will be at the OFF position Reset and test system as required

3 Also check if the mains electrical supply is isolated If so FIND OUT WHY before taking any action

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 27

7 FAULT FINDING 30005

72 AIR FAN ON LIGHT IS UNLIT

Check

1 SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch is not in Position OFF

2 Timeperiod is not set to off

3 Air handler is not at LOCKOUT

4 Recheck both AIR FAN ON and LOCKOUT bulbs

Two fault indications are possible

1 THE FAN IS NOT OPERATING

If the fan should have started but is not operating

Check 1 Overload for tripped conditions Reset the overload and monitor the next start-up

2 Motor Fuses

3 Relays 1 2 amp3 for failure

laClor CC1 for failure

5 Air Pressure Switch (DPS) is failed in the N 0 Position

Replace the faulty component as described in Section 8

2 THE FAN IS OPERATING

This indicates that the air pressure switch (DPS) has failed to change over

Measure the profile plate differential pressure as described in Section 4113 If the pressure is correct the air pressure switch is faulty Check the switch as in 4114 If the pressure is not correct

Check 1 Correct fan belt tension

2 Correct fan rotation

3 The air handler air inlets and discharge are not blocked

4 Correct fitting on filters

5 The air differential pressure switch impulse lines are not blocked or leaking

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 28

7 FAULT FINDING 30008

73 LOCKOUT LIGHT IS ILLUMINATED

This light indicates a failure in the burner ignition and flame supervision system

RESET the unit and follow the progress of the start sequence The full cycle may take two minutes

1

------t

2 LOCKOUT after 35-40 seconds indicates an ignition failure RESET the system and observe the pilot and ignition spark during the start-up attempt

I-- shy

3 Observe the spark This should be strong and highly visible If not remove and clean the spark plug as Section 82 Check that the spark plug gap is correctly set at 15 mm

-- shy

4 Check the pilot flame If the pilot flame ignites and the unit goes to LOCKOUT the scanning system is at fault Remove and clean the detector as Section 82 Check the flame signal as in Section 431

5 If the pilot does not light the gas supply system is faulty Check the pilot system for restriction and the pilot valve operation

6 If the pilot lights and the unit goes to LOCKOUT after the main gas valves are addressed either the flow control valve is blocked or one of the main gas block valves has failed Fit a manometer on the pressure test point on the outlet flange of the multishyfunctional control and observe if the pressure rises when the main gas valves are addressed No pressure rise will indicate failure of the main gas valves

74 AIR FAN ON LIGHT ILLUMINATED

If the burner does not start check

1 SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch is in WINTER position

2 Overheat Limit Control

These interlocks prevent the burner management system starting

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 29

8 SERVICING 3000S

IMPORTANT Servicing and maintenance should be only carried out by a RS STOKVIS Ltd approved engineer

Only use replacement parts provided by the appliance manufacturer

Check that the air openings for combustion and for ventilation of any plant roon or compartment are clear

81 ISOLATION

811 FUEL GAS ISOLATION

The fuel gas to the ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler should be isolated and locked off at the manual ball valve mounted at the start of the fuel gas line Additionally before entering or servicing the air handler the burner manual isolation valve and pilot line isolation valve should be closed

812 ELECTRICAL ISOLATION

All electric power to the air handler and the remote control station is switched through the local isolator This isolator is fitted with a lock facility to permit it to be locked in the OFF position

Additionally isolate the power at the Wall Isolator

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 30

8 SERVICING 30005

82 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE

The air handler should be routinely serviced at the start of each heating season Isolate the air handler as above before servicing Details of access to individual components are given in Section 84 of this manual

1 Remove and clean spark igniter Check that the gap is correctly set at 25 mm Replace every two years

2 Clean the flame detector lens to ensure freedom from dirt and moisture If the cell shows any sign of cracks it should be replaced Routinely replace the cell every two years or after 10000 hours of operation which ever comes first

3 Inspect the entire air handler paint system for general damage Repair as necessary

4 Every two years brush the burner plates and clear the burner holes carefully with a Size 18mm drill for NP II and 20mm drill for NP I

WARNING THE BURNER HOLES MUST NOT BE ENLARGED

5 Inspect and lubricate all damper linkages to ensure freedom of operation Wipe off all excess lubricants to prevent dirt build up on linkage parts

6 Check the fan belt for cracks and splits Check tension The correct tension gives 16mm deflection per metre of span when the belt is centrally loaded with a force of 27N Adjust as necessary

7 Grease both the fan shaft bearings with Mobiith AW2 grease or similar

NEVER use high temperature grease

NEVER mix two different greases within the bearing always flush existing grease out

Note Removing the cover plate on the end of the air handler gains access to the outboard fan bearing

Light to Slow to 0 120 2 to 6 months Clean Dry

Medium Medium 120 200 1 to 2 months

Moderate to Light to Slow to 0 120 1 to 4 weeks Dry

Dirty Medium Medium 120 200 1 to 7 days

Extreme Dirt Dry Light to Slow to 0 200 Daily Flushing out

Medium Medium Dirt

83 ANNUAL SERVICE CHECKS

After Servicing test fire the air handler following the Commissioning Procedure detailed in Section 4 of this manual to ensure correct operation generally Special attention must be paid to the damper system and related controls and interlocks

Additionally check that the fresh air and recirculation air entry path to the air handler has been kept clear and instruct the User of the need for this as necessary

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 31

8 SERVICING 3000S

84 REMOVAL PROCEDURE FOR REPLACEABLE COMPONENTS

IMPORTANT

Turn off the gas at the appliance service valve and the electricity at the main panel and wall isolator before proceeding

841 BURNER

The burner is located inside the air handler casing and is mounted on two brackets from the support straps To remove the burner isolate the air handler as in 81 and undo the union on the fuel gas line adjacent to the burner isolation valve (MV6) and unscrew the main and pilot gas feed pipes from the burner rail Access to the rear of the burner assembly is made by removing the partition plate below the burner separating the fresh air inlet to the burner from the return air inlet compartment This is held in place by screws which engage in captive nuts on the top side of the partition Remove the Flame Detector and pull off the ignition plug cap Disconnect the burner support brackets and remove the burner The burner will easily pass through the access hatch for further strip down Replace in the reverse order soundness test the gas pipework check the burner operation and duty as described in the commissioning section of this manual

842 FLAME DETECTOR

This is a 240 Volt instrument

The flame detector is mounted on the end of the burner rail inside the air handler casing To remove the detector isolate the panel electric supply and lock off Push the scanner towards the burner and rotate to release the bayonet fixing and lift the detector from its mount Remove the two screws holding the detector cover and disconnect the supply leads noting the polarity of the connections

Replace the flame detector in the reverse order ensuring correct polarity of connections Ensure the access panel is securely closed and the retaining nuts are tightened down Check operation by inserting a test meter in the points provided in the main control panel and reading the flame signals during start up to full rate burner operation (See 431) Operate the appliance over six starts for reliability of operation including tum off of start and main gas valves to check for lockout operation

843 IGNITER SPARK PLUG

This is a high tension spark plug

The igniter spark plug is mounted on the end of the burner rail inside the air handler casing To remove the spark plug isolate the air handler as above Enter the service access door Access to the spark plug is made through the profile plate To remove the spark plug pull off the high tension lead and unscrew the plug with a plug spanner

When replacing the spark plug check the plug gap is set at 15mm Check ignition reliability over six start ups

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 32

8 SERVICING 3000S

844 IGNITER SPARK TRANSFORMER

This is a 240 Volt instrument

The ignition transformer is located in a plastic box mounted on the air handler casing adjacent to the main control panel To remove the transformer isolate the air handler as above and unscrew the four retaining screws holding the box lid in place and remove the lid Disconnect the supply cable at the terminal strip and undo the transformer retaining screws The transformer may then be unscrewed from the High Tension cable leading to the spark plug

Replacement is a simple reversal of this procedure

Check ignition reliability over six start ups

845 COMBUSTION AIR PRESSURE SWITCH (DPS)

Note The switch is set and sealed and should be replaced if not operating correctly

This switch is a 240 Volt instrument

The air switch is mounted directly on the air handler casing and can be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove the switch isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the supply cable Break the downstream pipe compression fitting and unscrew the switch housing from its locating fitting Reverse the procedure to replace after ensuring switch setting is as specified in Section 13 of this manual Operate the air handler to ensure reliability of operation over six start ups

846 AIR HANDLER OVERHEAT LIMIT CONTROL

This is a 240 Volt instrument

The overheat limit control can be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove the control isolate the air handler as above and lock off Remove the switch cover Disconnect the supply cable and unscrew the control housing from its locating fitting Reverse the procedure to replace check the switch is set to 50degC Test the switch operation as described in Section 43 over at least three operations

847 AIR FAN AND MOTOR

The air fan motor is a 415 Volt 3 phase motor

The motor and slide rails are easily accessible inside the air handler casing If it is necessary to remove the motor isolate the air handler as above Slacken the fan-belt tension and remove the drive belts Pull the motor away from the air handler casing to make access to the motor terminal box and disconnect the supply cable The motor may now be removed from the unit Following replacement the air handler must be fully re-commissioned as in Section 4

It is unlikely that the air fan will need replacing or servicing If required a full procedure should be obtained from RS STOKVIS Ltd

Replacement must be followed by full re-commissioning as in Section 4

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 33

8 SERVICING 3000S

848 FUEL GAS MULTI-FUNCTIONAL CONTROL - SMALL UNITS

This is a 240 Volt instrument

The fuel gas multi-functional control can be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove the unit isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the Hirschman electric termination Unbolt the control from its flanges and remove

When replacing care must be taken to ensure the flange 0 rings are undamaged and in the correct location Following replacement the air handler must be fully reshycommissioned as in Section 4 including tests for soundness prior to start-up

849 GOVERNOR AND BLOCK VALVES

The block valves are 240 Volt instruments

All these items may be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove any item isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the electric termination to the two block valves the pilot block valve and the flow control block valve Break the two pipe unions and remove the fuel gas line complete for further strip-down

8410 FUEL GAS FLOW CONTROL VALVE

This is a 24 Volt instrument

The fuel gas How control valve can be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove the valve isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the supply cables to the control valve

On small air handlers fitted with a multi-functional control support the multi-functional control and unbolt its discharge flange Break the union downstream of the burner isolation valve and remove the section of line containing the flow control valve for further strip-down

On large air handlers fitted with separate block valves it will be necessary to remove the fuel gas line complete as Section 8410 above

Following replacement re-commission the air handler

Note If the fresh air damper is not in the full open position the heat input must not exceed the maximum heat input at recirculation condition specified in the technical data section of this manual

8411 PILOT GAS GOVERNOR AND BLOCK VALVE

The block valve is a 240 Volt instrument

Both items may be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove either item isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the electric terrriination to the solenoid valve Undo the upstream pipe union and the compression fitting downstream of the manual block valve (PV3) Remove the pilot gas line complete for further strip down

Replace broken or distorted connections and retest for soundness Ensure the pilot gas pressure is correct and the flame is sensing an output Ensure reliability over six start-ups

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 34

8 SERVICING 3000S

8412 BELT TENSIONING PROCEDURE

The setting tensions are designed to cover a wide range of drives A precise setting force for individual applications can be calculated as detailed

SETTING FORCES

Belt Section

Setting Force To Deflect Belt 16mm per Metre Of Span

Small Pulley Diameter (mm)

Basic Setting Forces Newtons (N) Kilograms (kgf)

125 x Setting Forces Newtons (N) Kilograms (kgf)

SPZ

56 to 71 16 16 20 20 75 to 90 18 18 22 22

95 to 125 20 20 25 25 Over 125 22 22 28 28

SPA

80 to 100 22 22 28 28 106 to 140 30 30 38 38 150 to 200 36 37 45 46 Over 200 40 40 50 51

SPB

112 to 160 40 40 50 51 170 to 224 50 51 62 63 236 to 355 62 63 77 79 Over 355 65 66 81 83

SPC 224 to 250 70 71 87 89 265 to 355 92 94 115 120 Over 375 115 120 144 150

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 35

8 SERVICING 3000S

BELT TENSIONING USING FENNER BELT TENSION INDICATOR

Calculate the deflection in mm on a basis of 16mm per metre of centre distance Centre Distance (m) x 16 =Deflection (mm)

Set lower marker ring at the deflection distance required in mm on the lower scale

Set upper ring against to bottom edge of the top tube

Place the belt tension indicator on top of the belt at the centre of span and apply a force at right angles to the belt defecting it to the point where the lower marker ring is level with the top of the adjacent belt

Read off the force value indicated by the top edge of the upper marker ring

Compare this force to the kgf value shown in the table above

If a Fenner Belt Tension Indicator is not available a spring balance and rule will be suffice

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 36

8 SERVICING 30005

85 MAIN PANEL CONTROLS

All panel controls are readily accessible and may be easily exchanged for replacement components in the event of failure Ensure any replacement item is of the same make and type as the original

851 LANDIS amp GYR LFL 1335 AUTOMATIC SEQUENCE CONTROLLER

The Landis amp Gyr Automatic Sequence Controller is a plug-in unit locating on a pre-wired chassis To remove the controller undo the two retaining screws at the top left and lower right corners and pull the module off the chassis

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

852 CONTROLS CIRCUIT (24 VOLT) TRANSFORMER

The Controls Circuit Transformer is fixed to the panel back plate by tapped screws To remove the transformer undo the wiring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel Undo the two retaining screws and remove the unit complete

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

853 CONTROL RELAYS R1 R2 amp R3

The Control Relays are DIN Rail mounted To remove a relay undo the wIring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel Release the DIN rail retaining clip under the relay with a screwdriver and remove the relay

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

854 6A MCB

The 6A MCB is DIN Rail mounted To remove the MCB undo the wiring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel Release the DIN rail retaining clip under the MCB with a screwdriver and remove the MCB

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

855 THERMAL OVERLOAD

The thermal overload is attached to the underside of the main contactor To remove the overload undo the wiring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel and that the overload setting is as specified in Section 13 of this manual Unscrew the three connections to the contactor and remove the overload

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 37

8 SERVICING 3000S

856 MAIN CONTACTOR

The Main Contactor is DIN Rail mounted To remove the contactor remove the thermal overload as 855 above and then undo the wiring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel Release the DIN rail retaining clip under the contactor with a screwdriver and remove the contactor

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

857 MOTOR FUSE

To replace a motor fuse pull the fuse carrier off the fuse holder base The fuse is attached to the fuse carrier by two screws Unscrew remove and replace

86 REMOTE CONTROL STATION

The remote control station contains some serviceable parts although these items should only be fitted by an approved RS STOKVIS Ltd Engineer

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 38

9 RECOMMENDED SPARES 3000S

For two years operation it is recommended that the following items should be held in stock

ITEM DESCRIPTION PART NO QUANTITY i

1 INDICATOR BULBS W1121 1 PACK

2 SPARK PLUG 023739 1 I

3 UVDETECTOR QRA10C 1 I

4 ROOM SENSOR DRT2453 1

5 DUCT SENSOR DDT1701 1

All replacement parts can be obtained from RS STOKVIS Ltd by quoting the air handler serial number the part number and description

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 39

APPENDIX 1 30005

SOUNDNESS TESTING THE FUEL GAS PIPEWORK

This procedure should only be carried out by personnel familiar with the ECONO-AIR 3000S Series Air handler

The pressure test points and all valves are identified on the Process and Instrumentation Diagram for the air handler included in Section 1 of this n1anual

Isolate the air handler electric supply at the main control panel and lock off Close the manual isolation valves MV1 MV6 and PV3 Ensure the supply pressure is available on the upstream side of MV1

A11 TESTING THE UPSTREAM PIPEWORKAND BURNER CONTROLS 1 Connect a 60 mbar manometer to the pressure test nipple A Monitor the

pressure for two minutes Any rise in pressure indicates that valve MV1 is leaking and must be replaced Remove pressure test points Band F

2 Open MV1 to pressurise the pipework on both the main gas and pilot line to the first block valve

3 Close MV1 Allow one minute for the temperature to stabilise and then test the system for 2 minutes and watch for a drop in the pipework pressure If the pressure falls open valve MV1 and test the pipework connections and valves from MV1 to MV3 and MV1 to PV2 for leaks with a proprietary leak detector fluid or spray Turn off MV1 seal any leaks and re-test

4 If no extemalleaks are found either the pilot block valve PV1 or either the first main gas block valve MV3 is letting by

5 To test this seal pressure test point A and fit a manometer to pressure test point B Leave for two minutes with MV1 open A rise in pressure on the manometer confirms a leak on the block valve MV3 Turn off MV1 exchange the valve and re-test from point 2 above

6 Repeat this procedure for the pilot block valve Seal test point B and fit a manometer to pressure test point F Leave for two minutes with MV1 open A rise in pressure on the manometer confirms a leak on the pilot block valve PV2 Turn off MV1 exchange the valve and re-test from point 1 above Seal test point F

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 40

APPENDIX 1 30005

A12 TESTING THE DOWNSTREAM BURNER VALVE 1 Close MV1 and connect pressure test points A and 8 with flexible 6 mm bore

tubing teed into the manometer Remove pressure test point C Open MV1 to pressurise the downstream block valve MV4

2 Close MV1 and leave for one minute for the temperature to stabilise Monitor the pressure for 2 minutes If the pressure falls open valve MV1 and leak test the line between the two block valves MV3 and MV4 with a proprietary leak detector Turn off MV1 seal any leaks and re-test Note Smaller air handlers in the 3000S Series are fitted with multi-functional valves combining the pressure regulator and two block valves in one component The above procedure still applies but if a leak is found on either block valve the whole control should be replaced If no external leaks are found the downstream block valve is letting by

3 To confirm this close MV1 remove the manometer and refit to pressure test point C Connect pressure test points A and 8 with flexible 6mm bore tubing Open MV1 and allow one minute for the temperature to stabilise Monitor the pressure for a further 2 minutes with MV1 still open A rise in pressure confirms that the second block valve MV4 is letting by Turn off MV1 Replace the valve and re-test from 2 above

A13 TESTING THE DOWNSTREAM BURNER PIPEWORK 1 Close MV1 and connect pressure test points A and D with flexible 6 mm bore

tubing teed into the manometer Open MV1 to pressurise the downstream pilot pipework

2 Close MV1 and leave for one minute for the temperature to stabilise Monitor the pressure for 2 minutes If the pressure falls open valve MV1 and leak test the line between the downstream block valve MV4 and the manual block MV6 with a proprietary leak detector fluid or spray If no external leaks are found the manual block valve MV6 is letting by Turn off MV1 seal any leakages and reshytest from 2 above

A14 TESTING THE DOWNSTREAM PILOT PIPEWORK 1 Close MV1 and connect pressure test points A and F with flexible 6mm bore

tubing teed into the manometer Open MV1 to pressurise the downstream pilot pipework

2 Close MV1 and leave for one rninute for the temperature to stabilise Monitor the pressure for 2 minutes If the pressure falls open valve MV1 and leak test the line between the downstream block valve PV2 and the manual block PV3 with a proprietary leak detector fluid or spray If no external leaks are found the manual block valve PV3 is letting by Turn off MV1 seal any leakages and reshytest from 2 above

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 41

APPENDIX 1 30005

A15 TESTING THE BURNER CONNECTIONS 1 Remove the burner access panel as described in Section 84 of this manual

Remove the burner spark igniter Slacken the two retaining bolts holding the burner to the burner support straps and unbolt the burner supply endplate from the burner casting and mixing plates

2 Connect pressure test points A and 0 with flexible 6mm bore tubing teed into the manometer Open MV1 and MV6 to pressurise the burner pipework Leak test the main gas burner pipework and connections with proprietary leak detector fluid Turn off MV6 Seal any leakages and re-test

3 Connect pressure test points A and F with flexible 6 mm bore tubing teed into the manometer Open MV1 and PV3 to pressurise the pilot burner pipework Leak test the pilot gas burner pipework and connections with proprietary leak detector fluid Turn off PV3 Seal any leakages and re-test

4 Turn off MV1

5 Replace the spark igniter and profile division plate

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 42

APPENDIX 2 30005

START SEQUENCE

The burner start sequence is controlled by the Landis and Gyr burner management unit The timings are pre-set and comply with 885885 This unit must NOT be tampered with

A brief description of the start-up sequence isshy

The unit checks

1 The NO FLAME signal on the UV flame scanner

Note If the scanner detects a flame at any time other than in the correct operating sequence the flame programmer initiates a lockout

2 The operation of the combustion air proving switch in the NO AIR position

3 The air handler discharge high temperature switch

If the checks are completed the unit starts the combustion air fan and then checks the combustion airflow

Once the airflow is proven the unit checks that the damper control circuit is functioning correctly After the damper microswitch is made to prove the fresh air damper is fully open the sequence allows 30 seconds for the combustion air to purge any combustible gas from the air handler

After completion of the purge the spark ignition system is energised the pilot valve opened and the spark terminated If the pilot flame is not proven by the UV scanner the system will initiate a LOCKOUT

If the flame is proven the main gas valves are opened the pilot extinguished and the main burner flame proven

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 43

i

APPENDIX 2 30008

The following flow chart shows the complete start sequence including the lighting of the various indicating lamps

MANUAL STATUS LIGHT POWER ON

POWER ON

I INITIATE START BY TIME

SETTING ON CONTROLLER

I CHECK NO FLAME

VISIBLE

PROVEj FAIL LOCKOUT

I CHECK RELAY R4 NC

POSITION

PROVE FAIL NO START

I CHECK AIR PRESSURE SWITCH NC POSITION

PROVE FAIL NO START

I CHECK RELAY R1 NC

POSITION

PROVE j

FAIL NO START

I START COMBUSTION

AIR BLOWER

I CHECK AIR PRESSURE SWITCH NO POSITION

PROVE I

FAIL NO START

I STATUS LIGHT FAN ON

I ENERGISE RELAY R1

I

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 44

I

I

APPENDIX 2 30008

I CHECK OVERHEAT LIMIT

CONTROL R5

PROVE I

FAIL I I

CHECK 541412 LOOP CLOSED ON

LANDIS ampGYR CIRCUIT

PROVE I

FAIL I I

COMBUSTION AIR PURGE PERIOD

30 SECONDS

I

NO START

NO START

CANCEL NO FLAME CHECK CIRCUIT

I

ENERGISE SPARK

I TIMED PERIOD 25 SECONDS

I ENERGISE PILOT GAS

VALVE

I TIMED PERIOD 25 SECONDS

I TERMINATE SPARK

I INTERROGATE UV FLAME SCANNER

PROVE I

FAIL I I

TIMED PERIOD 10 SECONDS

I

LOCKOUT

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 45

I

I

APPENDIX 2 3000S

I ENERGISE MAIN GAS

VALVES

I

STATUS LIGHT BURNER ON

I TIMED PERIOD

5 SECONDS

I DE-ENERGISE PILOT

GAS VALVES

CONTINUOUS FROM PILOT

I INTERROGATE UV FLAME SCANNER

PROVE I

FAIL I I

LOCKOUT I

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 46

APPENDIX 3 30005

Please see copy of Standard Service Sheet

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 47

APPENDIX 4 30005

A41 TIME OUT SCREEN

This is the standard screen displayed when the touch screen is not in use The back light is off to save energy_ To access the STATUS screen touch the ENTER key and the following screen is displayed

[]][I][]rn[IJOO[][IJOO[] EJ~E11 I[]I ~ middot I

NOTE

The Touch Screen operates using the heat produced by the touch of a finger and therefore only LIGHT pressure is required

Excessive pressure can damage the Touch Screen

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 48

APPENDIX 4 30008

A42 STATUS SCREEN

On the typical STATUS screen the illustrated information detailed is as follows

19 36 Fan Brn

RS OS

100 Fst_~_ Lck _ _ Xst Gas~o ~ I

RS Indicates the current room temperature

OS ~( t~~ the current duct discharge temperature

Fan Indicates the current status of the fan by showing the arrow and the fan blades for ON and OFF is shown by the arrow and fan blades being removed

Brn Indicates the current status of the burner with the black flames indicating the burner to be ON and vice versa

Lck LOCKOUT - This indicates a flame failure when highlighted during normal or start-up operation

Xst EXCESS TEMPERATURE SWITCH - This indicates the unit has reached the trip limit on the over heat stat when highlighted during operation

Indicates the current position of the gas modulating valve during normal Gas

operation (0-100)

Indicates whether the Frost stat is energised and the unit is running on frost Fst

override

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 49

APPENDIX 4 30008

A43 CHANGING SETTINGS

It is possible to change the settings for the time of operation and the required temperature set points The following details the steps required

A44 ENTERING THE SECURITY CODE

From the STATUS screen touch the return key and the screen below will be displayed

Type the HIGH LEVEL security code (4321) If you make a mistake use the BACK SPACE key to delete any incorrect number(s) Touch the ENTER key when the code is correct

If the security code is incorrect the screen above will be displayed then try again If after several attempts you can not gain access please contact RS STOKVIS Ltd for further information

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 50

APPENDIX 4 30008

When the code is entered correctly the MAIN MENU is displayed as detailed below

~ STATUS SET VALUES~ ~ TIVIE CLOCK [) [) [) [) [)

The MAIN MENU screen shows the three menu items available The title for each menu item can be changed to suit the end user Please notify RS STOKVIS Ltd prior to commissioning should these parameters require special amendments

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 51

APPENDIX 4 30008

A45 CHANGING OR SETTING A TIME SCHEDULE

From the main menu screen select the TIME CLOCK page by running finger across screen symbol and touch the ENTER key the screen below will be displayed

On the following screen highlight the TS1 symbol and touch the ENTER key

The current time schedule will now be displayed as shown below The display will automatically default to the current day (1 =Monday 2 =Tuesday etc) In this case day 5 (Friday) the four schedule switching times refer to that day

IAC6BBB1BHIS1

mm0CIl bull mID 17BB 17BB 17HB

Iillleschedule

To modify a time select it by highlighting and touch the ENTER key and the following screen is displayed

To amend the appropriate onoff time as shown on the screen below The arrows to the right of the time are for altering the hours and the arrows on the left for the minutes

Once you have set the time use the ESCape key to exit back to the time schedule screen and choose another day by touching the required number Another time may now be modified as before

IAC6BBB1BHIS1

H8BH

I i eschedule

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 52

APPENDIX 4 30008

Use the ESCape key to exit back to the MAIN MENU screen

~ STATUS ~ SET VALUES

TIME CLOCK []~ [] [] [] []

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 53

APPENDIX 4 30005

A46 CHANGING SET VALUES

From the main menu screen select the SET VALUES page by highlight in the normal way and touch the ENTER key

The following screen is displayed

36 19 18III III IIIHsv Rsv Llv

To change the RSV highlight it in the normal way and touch the ENTER key and the screen below will now be shown

IAC6RRR1RR40 T I

0 19 (Y)l RSV

ROOM SET VALUE

The above screen shows the parameters that can be changed The values to the far left are the limitations of set point (OC) Change the set point by using the UP and DOWN ARROWS on the left of the screen or touch the set value itself followed by the ENTER key to select the set value and set it directly using the numeric keyboard All values can be changed in this way

Use the ESCape key twice to exit back to the MAIN MENU screen

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 54

APPENDIX 4 30005

A47 COMMISSIONING AND SERVICING BURNER CHECKS

Select the SET VALUES screen from the MAIN MENU screen and adjust the high lirrlit set point to 55degC to drive the burner to high fire

IAC6HHH1HH60 ~T I

0 19 (Y)

HSV

HIGH SET VALUE ~

Ensure the set value is returned to 36degC once the appropriate checks and adjustments as described in Section 43 of this manual have been completed Return to the SET VALUES screen and select the low limit value to adjust the low fire setting

Reduce the low limit value to OdegC to drive the gas valve to low fire and complete the appropriate checks and adjustments as described in Section 43 of this manual and ensure the set value is returned to the original value

A48 GMT ltgt BST CHANGEOVER DAYLIGHT SAVINGS

To change your unit to British Summer TimelWinter Time the following system screen must be highlighted by touching the Iamp1 button twice

By touching the clock symbol in the top left hand corner followed by the ENTER key the screen below will be displayed

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 55

APPENDIX 4 30008

188311 851193

544

By touching and highlighting in this case 18 followed by the ENTER key A small box allowing the entry of two digits will appear Enter the desired time required using the numbered keys followed by ENTER key Your unit is now set to operate on BSTBWT

Touch the ESC key three times to return back to the Status screen

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 56

STOKVIS ENERGY SYSTEMS 96R WALTON ROAD EAST MOLESEY SURREY KT8 0DL TEL 020 8783 3050 08707 707 747 FAX 020 8783 3051 08707 707 767 E-MAIL infostokvisboilerscom WEBSITE wwwstokvisboilerscom

JULY 1999

Page 26: ECONOAIR 3000S SERIES AIR HANDLING UNIT DIRECT FIREDstokvisboilers.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/EconoAir... · 2019-05-10 · ECONOAIR 3000S SERIES AIR HANDLING UNIT DIRECT FIRED

4 COMMISSIONING 3000S

43 1 FLAME SIGNAL CHECK

1 The ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler is fitted with a Klippon SAKT1 Test Terminal which can be used to measure the flame scanning signal Refer to the Electrical Schematic and connect a 0-1 mA ammeter to the two test points with standard 23 mm test plugs with the positive lead on the detector side Disconnect the terminal link to obtain the signal reading A minimum signal of 70 microamps is required typical signals are in the 250-400 microamp range on both pilot and main flame After completion replace the terminal link and remove the test jacks

2 Drive the burner to high fire as previously described Measure the carbon dioxide content of the discharge air stream This figure must not exceed 2800 ppm If the discharge exceeds this limit isolate the air handler and report to RS STOKVIS Ltd before proceeding

Stop and start the air handler a few times to check for reliability using the Operating Instructions (Section 6)

432 HANDOVER

Complete the air handler Service Check Sheet supplied at the back of this manual The self-copy sheet must be returned to STOKVIS for checking

Instruct the User in efficient use and care of the unit start-up and shutdown (including emergency shutdown) and recommended service interval Emphasise the need to keep the air handler clear of stored items and extraneous material and to maintain the recirculation and fresh air paths to the air handler inlets Hand all instructions as applicable to the UserOwner for safekeeping

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 22

5 ADJUSTMENTS 3000S

If adjustments to the air handler settings are required they should be made by a RS STOKVIS Ltd approved engineer

The normal value for all control settings is specified in Section 1 of this manual

51 PILOT ADJUSTMENT

The pilot gas pressure and flame length may be adjusted by altering the discharge pressure of the pilot governor Screwing the adjusting screw clockwise (located under the top cap) increases the discharge pressure and the flame length anti-clockwise decreases the pressure and the flame length

52 BURNER HIGH FIRE PRESSURE ADJUSTMENT

At high fire alter the spring compression on the main burner governor (MV2) by removing the cap and adjust the spring compression plate clockwise to increase the burner pressure anti-clockwise to decrease burner pressure If the pressure does not increase on adjusting the spring the supply is inadequate

Note On small air handlers fitted with a mUlti-functional control the pressure adjusting screw is located under a swing cap on the first block valve

53 BURNER LOW FIRE ADJUSTMENT

The main burner low fire is adjusted on the flow control valve MV5 (Process amp Instrumentation Diagram)

Remove the top cover of the valve and insert a Terminal Screwdriver in the adjusting screw of the TOP cam marked NI

Drive the burner to low fire by adjusting the temperature controller set-point and high limit to 05degC as described in Appendix 4 of this manual

Turn the Terminal Screwdriver clockwise to decrease the low fire gas flow anti-clockwise to increase the flow

Check the heat input and flame signal at the new position are satisfactory and return the tenlperature controller to its normal settings

Replace the control valve cover

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 23

5 ADJUSTMENTS 3000S

54 SUMMERIOFFIWINTER SWITCH

In the SUMMER position this switch provides ventilation only and is independent of the programmed ON and OFF periods This position is manually selected and must be manually de-selected Whenever the switch is in this position the fan is operating

In the OFF position the air handler is shutdown and will not operate This overrides any frost protection fitted It is suitable for air handler shutdown for short periods such as holidays The programme memory is unaffected by this switch and assumes control of the air handler when the switch is returned to the WINTER position

In the WINTER position the air handler operates off the programme memory to provide heating

55 RESET BUTTON

Visual indication of air handler lockout is provided In the event of lockout occurring the air handler can be reset by depressing the RESET button This parallels the RESET button on the air handler main control panel If after 4 attempts to reset the air handler the lockout indicator still illuminates then a Service Engineer should be called to investigate the problem

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 24

6 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 3000S

61 AIR HANDLER START-UP

1 Open all manual gas valves both on the appliance and on the supply to the appliance Switch on the Electric Supply to the appliance

2 On the main air handler panel

Switch the panel isolator to the 1 position

Check POWER ON light

3 On the remote control station

For Heating Switch the SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch to WINTER

The air handler will now start automatically in response to the time settings

In the event of LOCKOUT

Press the RESET button and the cycle of operations will be repeated If the air handler goes to LOCKOUT four times in succession call for a Service Engineer

For Unheated Ventilation Switch the SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch to SUMMER

Note This prevents the burner firing giving a controlled supply of ventilation air to the heated space as long as the switch is in this position The air handler will now start automatically in response to the timeclock demand To turn the fan off return the switch to the centre OFF position

In the event of LOCKOUT

Press the RESET button and the cycle of operations will be repeated If the air handler goes to LOCKOUT four times in succession call for a Service Engineer

62 AIR HANDLER SHUTDOWN

621 SHUTDOWN FOR SHORT PERIODS

Switch the SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch on the remote station to OFF

622 SHUTDOWN FOR PROLONGED PERIODS

Switch the main panel isolator to the 0 position and close all manual gas valves both on and leading to the appliance

Note Manual gas valves should only be operated when the appliance is to be shut off for either Servicing or for a prolonged shutdown

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 25

30005 6 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

63 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS

631 SITE CLEARANCE ADJACENT TO AIR HANDLER

Attention should be paid to keeping the area around the air handler tidy No rubbish should be allowed to accumulate in the vicinity of the air handler and storage of goods etc should not be permitted within two metres of the air handler Failure to comply could result in reduced airflow to the air handler causing inefficient running and potential overheat cond ition

632 AIR SUPPLY TO AIR HANDLER

Air vents and grilles supplying air to the air handler should never be blocked and should be checked periodically to ensure they are clear

633 AIR FILTERS

Similarly attention should be paid to cleaning or replacing the filters to the air handler if fitted Your installer should advise you on the frequency with which this would be required to be completed

634 SERVICE

For continued safe and efficient operation of this air air handler it is important that servicing of the air handler should be completed at regular intervals by a competent person in accordance with Section 82 of this manual Users are advised to enter into a Service Agreement with RS STOKVIS Ltd

635 SPARE PARTS

It is suggested that a complete set of spare parts essential to the running of the air handler and recommended by the installer are kept by the user on the premises where the air handler is installed This is particularly important where the air handler forms an essential part of any process plant and its being out of operation may cause problems by for example frost damage or condensation by super-cooling

A list of Recommended Spares will be found in Section 9 of this manual

636 GAS LEAKS

If a smell of gas is detected around the area of the appliance Switch off all manual gas valves and contact your service engineer or the local gas undertaking

NEVER

LOOK FOR GAS LEAKS WITH A LIGHTED MATCH OR NAKED

FLAME

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 26

7 FAULT FINDING 30008

The main control panel incorporates two lights to help in fault finding

POWER ON

LOCKOUT

The remote station also has three lights

AIR FAN ON

BURNER ON

LOCKOUT

This section gives the possible causes of failure associated with each check light The electrical schematic diagram in this manual and the wiring diagram shipped in the main air handler panel should be used in conjunction with the notes below Additionally Service Engineers should familiarise themselves with the detailed Start Sequence given in Appendix 2 of this manual

The notes are given for each light before consulting the notes check for bulb failure

71 POWER ON LIGHT IS UNLIT

Check

1 Main control panel isolator is in the 1 position

2 Main Panel 6A MCB has not tripped if a trip has occurred the switch will be at the OFF position Reset and test system as required

3 Also check if the mains electrical supply is isolated If so FIND OUT WHY before taking any action

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 27

7 FAULT FINDING 30005

72 AIR FAN ON LIGHT IS UNLIT

Check

1 SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch is not in Position OFF

2 Timeperiod is not set to off

3 Air handler is not at LOCKOUT

4 Recheck both AIR FAN ON and LOCKOUT bulbs

Two fault indications are possible

1 THE FAN IS NOT OPERATING

If the fan should have started but is not operating

Check 1 Overload for tripped conditions Reset the overload and monitor the next start-up

2 Motor Fuses

3 Relays 1 2 amp3 for failure

laClor CC1 for failure

5 Air Pressure Switch (DPS) is failed in the N 0 Position

Replace the faulty component as described in Section 8

2 THE FAN IS OPERATING

This indicates that the air pressure switch (DPS) has failed to change over

Measure the profile plate differential pressure as described in Section 4113 If the pressure is correct the air pressure switch is faulty Check the switch as in 4114 If the pressure is not correct

Check 1 Correct fan belt tension

2 Correct fan rotation

3 The air handler air inlets and discharge are not blocked

4 Correct fitting on filters

5 The air differential pressure switch impulse lines are not blocked or leaking

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 28

7 FAULT FINDING 30008

73 LOCKOUT LIGHT IS ILLUMINATED

This light indicates a failure in the burner ignition and flame supervision system

RESET the unit and follow the progress of the start sequence The full cycle may take two minutes

1

------t

2 LOCKOUT after 35-40 seconds indicates an ignition failure RESET the system and observe the pilot and ignition spark during the start-up attempt

I-- shy

3 Observe the spark This should be strong and highly visible If not remove and clean the spark plug as Section 82 Check that the spark plug gap is correctly set at 15 mm

-- shy

4 Check the pilot flame If the pilot flame ignites and the unit goes to LOCKOUT the scanning system is at fault Remove and clean the detector as Section 82 Check the flame signal as in Section 431

5 If the pilot does not light the gas supply system is faulty Check the pilot system for restriction and the pilot valve operation

6 If the pilot lights and the unit goes to LOCKOUT after the main gas valves are addressed either the flow control valve is blocked or one of the main gas block valves has failed Fit a manometer on the pressure test point on the outlet flange of the multishyfunctional control and observe if the pressure rises when the main gas valves are addressed No pressure rise will indicate failure of the main gas valves

74 AIR FAN ON LIGHT ILLUMINATED

If the burner does not start check

1 SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch is in WINTER position

2 Overheat Limit Control

These interlocks prevent the burner management system starting

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 29

8 SERVICING 3000S

IMPORTANT Servicing and maintenance should be only carried out by a RS STOKVIS Ltd approved engineer

Only use replacement parts provided by the appliance manufacturer

Check that the air openings for combustion and for ventilation of any plant roon or compartment are clear

81 ISOLATION

811 FUEL GAS ISOLATION

The fuel gas to the ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler should be isolated and locked off at the manual ball valve mounted at the start of the fuel gas line Additionally before entering or servicing the air handler the burner manual isolation valve and pilot line isolation valve should be closed

812 ELECTRICAL ISOLATION

All electric power to the air handler and the remote control station is switched through the local isolator This isolator is fitted with a lock facility to permit it to be locked in the OFF position

Additionally isolate the power at the Wall Isolator

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 30

8 SERVICING 30005

82 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE

The air handler should be routinely serviced at the start of each heating season Isolate the air handler as above before servicing Details of access to individual components are given in Section 84 of this manual

1 Remove and clean spark igniter Check that the gap is correctly set at 25 mm Replace every two years

2 Clean the flame detector lens to ensure freedom from dirt and moisture If the cell shows any sign of cracks it should be replaced Routinely replace the cell every two years or after 10000 hours of operation which ever comes first

3 Inspect the entire air handler paint system for general damage Repair as necessary

4 Every two years brush the burner plates and clear the burner holes carefully with a Size 18mm drill for NP II and 20mm drill for NP I

WARNING THE BURNER HOLES MUST NOT BE ENLARGED

5 Inspect and lubricate all damper linkages to ensure freedom of operation Wipe off all excess lubricants to prevent dirt build up on linkage parts

6 Check the fan belt for cracks and splits Check tension The correct tension gives 16mm deflection per metre of span when the belt is centrally loaded with a force of 27N Adjust as necessary

7 Grease both the fan shaft bearings with Mobiith AW2 grease or similar

NEVER use high temperature grease

NEVER mix two different greases within the bearing always flush existing grease out

Note Removing the cover plate on the end of the air handler gains access to the outboard fan bearing

Light to Slow to 0 120 2 to 6 months Clean Dry

Medium Medium 120 200 1 to 2 months

Moderate to Light to Slow to 0 120 1 to 4 weeks Dry

Dirty Medium Medium 120 200 1 to 7 days

Extreme Dirt Dry Light to Slow to 0 200 Daily Flushing out

Medium Medium Dirt

83 ANNUAL SERVICE CHECKS

After Servicing test fire the air handler following the Commissioning Procedure detailed in Section 4 of this manual to ensure correct operation generally Special attention must be paid to the damper system and related controls and interlocks

Additionally check that the fresh air and recirculation air entry path to the air handler has been kept clear and instruct the User of the need for this as necessary

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 31

8 SERVICING 3000S

84 REMOVAL PROCEDURE FOR REPLACEABLE COMPONENTS

IMPORTANT

Turn off the gas at the appliance service valve and the electricity at the main panel and wall isolator before proceeding

841 BURNER

The burner is located inside the air handler casing and is mounted on two brackets from the support straps To remove the burner isolate the air handler as in 81 and undo the union on the fuel gas line adjacent to the burner isolation valve (MV6) and unscrew the main and pilot gas feed pipes from the burner rail Access to the rear of the burner assembly is made by removing the partition plate below the burner separating the fresh air inlet to the burner from the return air inlet compartment This is held in place by screws which engage in captive nuts on the top side of the partition Remove the Flame Detector and pull off the ignition plug cap Disconnect the burner support brackets and remove the burner The burner will easily pass through the access hatch for further strip down Replace in the reverse order soundness test the gas pipework check the burner operation and duty as described in the commissioning section of this manual

842 FLAME DETECTOR

This is a 240 Volt instrument

The flame detector is mounted on the end of the burner rail inside the air handler casing To remove the detector isolate the panel electric supply and lock off Push the scanner towards the burner and rotate to release the bayonet fixing and lift the detector from its mount Remove the two screws holding the detector cover and disconnect the supply leads noting the polarity of the connections

Replace the flame detector in the reverse order ensuring correct polarity of connections Ensure the access panel is securely closed and the retaining nuts are tightened down Check operation by inserting a test meter in the points provided in the main control panel and reading the flame signals during start up to full rate burner operation (See 431) Operate the appliance over six starts for reliability of operation including tum off of start and main gas valves to check for lockout operation

843 IGNITER SPARK PLUG

This is a high tension spark plug

The igniter spark plug is mounted on the end of the burner rail inside the air handler casing To remove the spark plug isolate the air handler as above Enter the service access door Access to the spark plug is made through the profile plate To remove the spark plug pull off the high tension lead and unscrew the plug with a plug spanner

When replacing the spark plug check the plug gap is set at 15mm Check ignition reliability over six start ups

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 32

8 SERVICING 3000S

844 IGNITER SPARK TRANSFORMER

This is a 240 Volt instrument

The ignition transformer is located in a plastic box mounted on the air handler casing adjacent to the main control panel To remove the transformer isolate the air handler as above and unscrew the four retaining screws holding the box lid in place and remove the lid Disconnect the supply cable at the terminal strip and undo the transformer retaining screws The transformer may then be unscrewed from the High Tension cable leading to the spark plug

Replacement is a simple reversal of this procedure

Check ignition reliability over six start ups

845 COMBUSTION AIR PRESSURE SWITCH (DPS)

Note The switch is set and sealed and should be replaced if not operating correctly

This switch is a 240 Volt instrument

The air switch is mounted directly on the air handler casing and can be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove the switch isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the supply cable Break the downstream pipe compression fitting and unscrew the switch housing from its locating fitting Reverse the procedure to replace after ensuring switch setting is as specified in Section 13 of this manual Operate the air handler to ensure reliability of operation over six start ups

846 AIR HANDLER OVERHEAT LIMIT CONTROL

This is a 240 Volt instrument

The overheat limit control can be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove the control isolate the air handler as above and lock off Remove the switch cover Disconnect the supply cable and unscrew the control housing from its locating fitting Reverse the procedure to replace check the switch is set to 50degC Test the switch operation as described in Section 43 over at least three operations

847 AIR FAN AND MOTOR

The air fan motor is a 415 Volt 3 phase motor

The motor and slide rails are easily accessible inside the air handler casing If it is necessary to remove the motor isolate the air handler as above Slacken the fan-belt tension and remove the drive belts Pull the motor away from the air handler casing to make access to the motor terminal box and disconnect the supply cable The motor may now be removed from the unit Following replacement the air handler must be fully re-commissioned as in Section 4

It is unlikely that the air fan will need replacing or servicing If required a full procedure should be obtained from RS STOKVIS Ltd

Replacement must be followed by full re-commissioning as in Section 4

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 33

8 SERVICING 3000S

848 FUEL GAS MULTI-FUNCTIONAL CONTROL - SMALL UNITS

This is a 240 Volt instrument

The fuel gas multi-functional control can be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove the unit isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the Hirschman electric termination Unbolt the control from its flanges and remove

When replacing care must be taken to ensure the flange 0 rings are undamaged and in the correct location Following replacement the air handler must be fully reshycommissioned as in Section 4 including tests for soundness prior to start-up

849 GOVERNOR AND BLOCK VALVES

The block valves are 240 Volt instruments

All these items may be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove any item isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the electric termination to the two block valves the pilot block valve and the flow control block valve Break the two pipe unions and remove the fuel gas line complete for further strip-down

8410 FUEL GAS FLOW CONTROL VALVE

This is a 24 Volt instrument

The fuel gas How control valve can be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove the valve isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the supply cables to the control valve

On small air handlers fitted with a multi-functional control support the multi-functional control and unbolt its discharge flange Break the union downstream of the burner isolation valve and remove the section of line containing the flow control valve for further strip-down

On large air handlers fitted with separate block valves it will be necessary to remove the fuel gas line complete as Section 8410 above

Following replacement re-commission the air handler

Note If the fresh air damper is not in the full open position the heat input must not exceed the maximum heat input at recirculation condition specified in the technical data section of this manual

8411 PILOT GAS GOVERNOR AND BLOCK VALVE

The block valve is a 240 Volt instrument

Both items may be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove either item isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the electric terrriination to the solenoid valve Undo the upstream pipe union and the compression fitting downstream of the manual block valve (PV3) Remove the pilot gas line complete for further strip down

Replace broken or distorted connections and retest for soundness Ensure the pilot gas pressure is correct and the flame is sensing an output Ensure reliability over six start-ups

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 34

8 SERVICING 3000S

8412 BELT TENSIONING PROCEDURE

The setting tensions are designed to cover a wide range of drives A precise setting force for individual applications can be calculated as detailed

SETTING FORCES

Belt Section

Setting Force To Deflect Belt 16mm per Metre Of Span

Small Pulley Diameter (mm)

Basic Setting Forces Newtons (N) Kilograms (kgf)

125 x Setting Forces Newtons (N) Kilograms (kgf)

SPZ

56 to 71 16 16 20 20 75 to 90 18 18 22 22

95 to 125 20 20 25 25 Over 125 22 22 28 28

SPA

80 to 100 22 22 28 28 106 to 140 30 30 38 38 150 to 200 36 37 45 46 Over 200 40 40 50 51

SPB

112 to 160 40 40 50 51 170 to 224 50 51 62 63 236 to 355 62 63 77 79 Over 355 65 66 81 83

SPC 224 to 250 70 71 87 89 265 to 355 92 94 115 120 Over 375 115 120 144 150

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 35

8 SERVICING 3000S

BELT TENSIONING USING FENNER BELT TENSION INDICATOR

Calculate the deflection in mm on a basis of 16mm per metre of centre distance Centre Distance (m) x 16 =Deflection (mm)

Set lower marker ring at the deflection distance required in mm on the lower scale

Set upper ring against to bottom edge of the top tube

Place the belt tension indicator on top of the belt at the centre of span and apply a force at right angles to the belt defecting it to the point where the lower marker ring is level with the top of the adjacent belt

Read off the force value indicated by the top edge of the upper marker ring

Compare this force to the kgf value shown in the table above

If a Fenner Belt Tension Indicator is not available a spring balance and rule will be suffice

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 36

8 SERVICING 30005

85 MAIN PANEL CONTROLS

All panel controls are readily accessible and may be easily exchanged for replacement components in the event of failure Ensure any replacement item is of the same make and type as the original

851 LANDIS amp GYR LFL 1335 AUTOMATIC SEQUENCE CONTROLLER

The Landis amp Gyr Automatic Sequence Controller is a plug-in unit locating on a pre-wired chassis To remove the controller undo the two retaining screws at the top left and lower right corners and pull the module off the chassis

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

852 CONTROLS CIRCUIT (24 VOLT) TRANSFORMER

The Controls Circuit Transformer is fixed to the panel back plate by tapped screws To remove the transformer undo the wiring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel Undo the two retaining screws and remove the unit complete

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

853 CONTROL RELAYS R1 R2 amp R3

The Control Relays are DIN Rail mounted To remove a relay undo the wIring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel Release the DIN rail retaining clip under the relay with a screwdriver and remove the relay

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

854 6A MCB

The 6A MCB is DIN Rail mounted To remove the MCB undo the wiring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel Release the DIN rail retaining clip under the MCB with a screwdriver and remove the MCB

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

855 THERMAL OVERLOAD

The thermal overload is attached to the underside of the main contactor To remove the overload undo the wiring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel and that the overload setting is as specified in Section 13 of this manual Unscrew the three connections to the contactor and remove the overload

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 37

8 SERVICING 3000S

856 MAIN CONTACTOR

The Main Contactor is DIN Rail mounted To remove the contactor remove the thermal overload as 855 above and then undo the wiring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel Release the DIN rail retaining clip under the contactor with a screwdriver and remove the contactor

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

857 MOTOR FUSE

To replace a motor fuse pull the fuse carrier off the fuse holder base The fuse is attached to the fuse carrier by two screws Unscrew remove and replace

86 REMOTE CONTROL STATION

The remote control station contains some serviceable parts although these items should only be fitted by an approved RS STOKVIS Ltd Engineer

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 38

9 RECOMMENDED SPARES 3000S

For two years operation it is recommended that the following items should be held in stock

ITEM DESCRIPTION PART NO QUANTITY i

1 INDICATOR BULBS W1121 1 PACK

2 SPARK PLUG 023739 1 I

3 UVDETECTOR QRA10C 1 I

4 ROOM SENSOR DRT2453 1

5 DUCT SENSOR DDT1701 1

All replacement parts can be obtained from RS STOKVIS Ltd by quoting the air handler serial number the part number and description

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 39

APPENDIX 1 30005

SOUNDNESS TESTING THE FUEL GAS PIPEWORK

This procedure should only be carried out by personnel familiar with the ECONO-AIR 3000S Series Air handler

The pressure test points and all valves are identified on the Process and Instrumentation Diagram for the air handler included in Section 1 of this n1anual

Isolate the air handler electric supply at the main control panel and lock off Close the manual isolation valves MV1 MV6 and PV3 Ensure the supply pressure is available on the upstream side of MV1

A11 TESTING THE UPSTREAM PIPEWORKAND BURNER CONTROLS 1 Connect a 60 mbar manometer to the pressure test nipple A Monitor the

pressure for two minutes Any rise in pressure indicates that valve MV1 is leaking and must be replaced Remove pressure test points Band F

2 Open MV1 to pressurise the pipework on both the main gas and pilot line to the first block valve

3 Close MV1 Allow one minute for the temperature to stabilise and then test the system for 2 minutes and watch for a drop in the pipework pressure If the pressure falls open valve MV1 and test the pipework connections and valves from MV1 to MV3 and MV1 to PV2 for leaks with a proprietary leak detector fluid or spray Turn off MV1 seal any leaks and re-test

4 If no extemalleaks are found either the pilot block valve PV1 or either the first main gas block valve MV3 is letting by

5 To test this seal pressure test point A and fit a manometer to pressure test point B Leave for two minutes with MV1 open A rise in pressure on the manometer confirms a leak on the block valve MV3 Turn off MV1 exchange the valve and re-test from point 2 above

6 Repeat this procedure for the pilot block valve Seal test point B and fit a manometer to pressure test point F Leave for two minutes with MV1 open A rise in pressure on the manometer confirms a leak on the pilot block valve PV2 Turn off MV1 exchange the valve and re-test from point 1 above Seal test point F

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 40

APPENDIX 1 30005

A12 TESTING THE DOWNSTREAM BURNER VALVE 1 Close MV1 and connect pressure test points A and 8 with flexible 6 mm bore

tubing teed into the manometer Remove pressure test point C Open MV1 to pressurise the downstream block valve MV4

2 Close MV1 and leave for one minute for the temperature to stabilise Monitor the pressure for 2 minutes If the pressure falls open valve MV1 and leak test the line between the two block valves MV3 and MV4 with a proprietary leak detector Turn off MV1 seal any leaks and re-test Note Smaller air handlers in the 3000S Series are fitted with multi-functional valves combining the pressure regulator and two block valves in one component The above procedure still applies but if a leak is found on either block valve the whole control should be replaced If no external leaks are found the downstream block valve is letting by

3 To confirm this close MV1 remove the manometer and refit to pressure test point C Connect pressure test points A and 8 with flexible 6mm bore tubing Open MV1 and allow one minute for the temperature to stabilise Monitor the pressure for a further 2 minutes with MV1 still open A rise in pressure confirms that the second block valve MV4 is letting by Turn off MV1 Replace the valve and re-test from 2 above

A13 TESTING THE DOWNSTREAM BURNER PIPEWORK 1 Close MV1 and connect pressure test points A and D with flexible 6 mm bore

tubing teed into the manometer Open MV1 to pressurise the downstream pilot pipework

2 Close MV1 and leave for one minute for the temperature to stabilise Monitor the pressure for 2 minutes If the pressure falls open valve MV1 and leak test the line between the downstream block valve MV4 and the manual block MV6 with a proprietary leak detector fluid or spray If no external leaks are found the manual block valve MV6 is letting by Turn off MV1 seal any leakages and reshytest from 2 above

A14 TESTING THE DOWNSTREAM PILOT PIPEWORK 1 Close MV1 and connect pressure test points A and F with flexible 6mm bore

tubing teed into the manometer Open MV1 to pressurise the downstream pilot pipework

2 Close MV1 and leave for one rninute for the temperature to stabilise Monitor the pressure for 2 minutes If the pressure falls open valve MV1 and leak test the line between the downstream block valve PV2 and the manual block PV3 with a proprietary leak detector fluid or spray If no external leaks are found the manual block valve PV3 is letting by Turn off MV1 seal any leakages and reshytest from 2 above

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 41

APPENDIX 1 30005

A15 TESTING THE BURNER CONNECTIONS 1 Remove the burner access panel as described in Section 84 of this manual

Remove the burner spark igniter Slacken the two retaining bolts holding the burner to the burner support straps and unbolt the burner supply endplate from the burner casting and mixing plates

2 Connect pressure test points A and 0 with flexible 6mm bore tubing teed into the manometer Open MV1 and MV6 to pressurise the burner pipework Leak test the main gas burner pipework and connections with proprietary leak detector fluid Turn off MV6 Seal any leakages and re-test

3 Connect pressure test points A and F with flexible 6 mm bore tubing teed into the manometer Open MV1 and PV3 to pressurise the pilot burner pipework Leak test the pilot gas burner pipework and connections with proprietary leak detector fluid Turn off PV3 Seal any leakages and re-test

4 Turn off MV1

5 Replace the spark igniter and profile division plate

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 42

APPENDIX 2 30005

START SEQUENCE

The burner start sequence is controlled by the Landis and Gyr burner management unit The timings are pre-set and comply with 885885 This unit must NOT be tampered with

A brief description of the start-up sequence isshy

The unit checks

1 The NO FLAME signal on the UV flame scanner

Note If the scanner detects a flame at any time other than in the correct operating sequence the flame programmer initiates a lockout

2 The operation of the combustion air proving switch in the NO AIR position

3 The air handler discharge high temperature switch

If the checks are completed the unit starts the combustion air fan and then checks the combustion airflow

Once the airflow is proven the unit checks that the damper control circuit is functioning correctly After the damper microswitch is made to prove the fresh air damper is fully open the sequence allows 30 seconds for the combustion air to purge any combustible gas from the air handler

After completion of the purge the spark ignition system is energised the pilot valve opened and the spark terminated If the pilot flame is not proven by the UV scanner the system will initiate a LOCKOUT

If the flame is proven the main gas valves are opened the pilot extinguished and the main burner flame proven

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 43

i

APPENDIX 2 30008

The following flow chart shows the complete start sequence including the lighting of the various indicating lamps

MANUAL STATUS LIGHT POWER ON

POWER ON

I INITIATE START BY TIME

SETTING ON CONTROLLER

I CHECK NO FLAME

VISIBLE

PROVEj FAIL LOCKOUT

I CHECK RELAY R4 NC

POSITION

PROVE FAIL NO START

I CHECK AIR PRESSURE SWITCH NC POSITION

PROVE FAIL NO START

I CHECK RELAY R1 NC

POSITION

PROVE j

FAIL NO START

I START COMBUSTION

AIR BLOWER

I CHECK AIR PRESSURE SWITCH NO POSITION

PROVE I

FAIL NO START

I STATUS LIGHT FAN ON

I ENERGISE RELAY R1

I

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 44

I

I

APPENDIX 2 30008

I CHECK OVERHEAT LIMIT

CONTROL R5

PROVE I

FAIL I I

CHECK 541412 LOOP CLOSED ON

LANDIS ampGYR CIRCUIT

PROVE I

FAIL I I

COMBUSTION AIR PURGE PERIOD

30 SECONDS

I

NO START

NO START

CANCEL NO FLAME CHECK CIRCUIT

I

ENERGISE SPARK

I TIMED PERIOD 25 SECONDS

I ENERGISE PILOT GAS

VALVE

I TIMED PERIOD 25 SECONDS

I TERMINATE SPARK

I INTERROGATE UV FLAME SCANNER

PROVE I

FAIL I I

TIMED PERIOD 10 SECONDS

I

LOCKOUT

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 45

I

I

APPENDIX 2 3000S

I ENERGISE MAIN GAS

VALVES

I

STATUS LIGHT BURNER ON

I TIMED PERIOD

5 SECONDS

I DE-ENERGISE PILOT

GAS VALVES

CONTINUOUS FROM PILOT

I INTERROGATE UV FLAME SCANNER

PROVE I

FAIL I I

LOCKOUT I

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 46

APPENDIX 3 30005

Please see copy of Standard Service Sheet

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 47

APPENDIX 4 30005

A41 TIME OUT SCREEN

This is the standard screen displayed when the touch screen is not in use The back light is off to save energy_ To access the STATUS screen touch the ENTER key and the following screen is displayed

[]][I][]rn[IJOO[][IJOO[] EJ~E11 I[]I ~ middot I

NOTE

The Touch Screen operates using the heat produced by the touch of a finger and therefore only LIGHT pressure is required

Excessive pressure can damage the Touch Screen

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 48

APPENDIX 4 30008

A42 STATUS SCREEN

On the typical STATUS screen the illustrated information detailed is as follows

19 36 Fan Brn

RS OS

100 Fst_~_ Lck _ _ Xst Gas~o ~ I

RS Indicates the current room temperature

OS ~( t~~ the current duct discharge temperature

Fan Indicates the current status of the fan by showing the arrow and the fan blades for ON and OFF is shown by the arrow and fan blades being removed

Brn Indicates the current status of the burner with the black flames indicating the burner to be ON and vice versa

Lck LOCKOUT - This indicates a flame failure when highlighted during normal or start-up operation

Xst EXCESS TEMPERATURE SWITCH - This indicates the unit has reached the trip limit on the over heat stat when highlighted during operation

Indicates the current position of the gas modulating valve during normal Gas

operation (0-100)

Indicates whether the Frost stat is energised and the unit is running on frost Fst

override

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 49

APPENDIX 4 30008

A43 CHANGING SETTINGS

It is possible to change the settings for the time of operation and the required temperature set points The following details the steps required

A44 ENTERING THE SECURITY CODE

From the STATUS screen touch the return key and the screen below will be displayed

Type the HIGH LEVEL security code (4321) If you make a mistake use the BACK SPACE key to delete any incorrect number(s) Touch the ENTER key when the code is correct

If the security code is incorrect the screen above will be displayed then try again If after several attempts you can not gain access please contact RS STOKVIS Ltd for further information

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 50

APPENDIX 4 30008

When the code is entered correctly the MAIN MENU is displayed as detailed below

~ STATUS SET VALUES~ ~ TIVIE CLOCK [) [) [) [) [)

The MAIN MENU screen shows the three menu items available The title for each menu item can be changed to suit the end user Please notify RS STOKVIS Ltd prior to commissioning should these parameters require special amendments

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 51

APPENDIX 4 30008

A45 CHANGING OR SETTING A TIME SCHEDULE

From the main menu screen select the TIME CLOCK page by running finger across screen symbol and touch the ENTER key the screen below will be displayed

On the following screen highlight the TS1 symbol and touch the ENTER key

The current time schedule will now be displayed as shown below The display will automatically default to the current day (1 =Monday 2 =Tuesday etc) In this case day 5 (Friday) the four schedule switching times refer to that day

IAC6BBB1BHIS1

mm0CIl bull mID 17BB 17BB 17HB

Iillleschedule

To modify a time select it by highlighting and touch the ENTER key and the following screen is displayed

To amend the appropriate onoff time as shown on the screen below The arrows to the right of the time are for altering the hours and the arrows on the left for the minutes

Once you have set the time use the ESCape key to exit back to the time schedule screen and choose another day by touching the required number Another time may now be modified as before

IAC6BBB1BHIS1

H8BH

I i eschedule

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 52

APPENDIX 4 30008

Use the ESCape key to exit back to the MAIN MENU screen

~ STATUS ~ SET VALUES

TIME CLOCK []~ [] [] [] []

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 53

APPENDIX 4 30005

A46 CHANGING SET VALUES

From the main menu screen select the SET VALUES page by highlight in the normal way and touch the ENTER key

The following screen is displayed

36 19 18III III IIIHsv Rsv Llv

To change the RSV highlight it in the normal way and touch the ENTER key and the screen below will now be shown

IAC6RRR1RR40 T I

0 19 (Y)l RSV

ROOM SET VALUE

The above screen shows the parameters that can be changed The values to the far left are the limitations of set point (OC) Change the set point by using the UP and DOWN ARROWS on the left of the screen or touch the set value itself followed by the ENTER key to select the set value and set it directly using the numeric keyboard All values can be changed in this way

Use the ESCape key twice to exit back to the MAIN MENU screen

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 54

APPENDIX 4 30005

A47 COMMISSIONING AND SERVICING BURNER CHECKS

Select the SET VALUES screen from the MAIN MENU screen and adjust the high lirrlit set point to 55degC to drive the burner to high fire

IAC6HHH1HH60 ~T I

0 19 (Y)

HSV

HIGH SET VALUE ~

Ensure the set value is returned to 36degC once the appropriate checks and adjustments as described in Section 43 of this manual have been completed Return to the SET VALUES screen and select the low limit value to adjust the low fire setting

Reduce the low limit value to OdegC to drive the gas valve to low fire and complete the appropriate checks and adjustments as described in Section 43 of this manual and ensure the set value is returned to the original value

A48 GMT ltgt BST CHANGEOVER DAYLIGHT SAVINGS

To change your unit to British Summer TimelWinter Time the following system screen must be highlighted by touching the Iamp1 button twice

By touching the clock symbol in the top left hand corner followed by the ENTER key the screen below will be displayed

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 55

APPENDIX 4 30008

188311 851193

544

By touching and highlighting in this case 18 followed by the ENTER key A small box allowing the entry of two digits will appear Enter the desired time required using the numbered keys followed by ENTER key Your unit is now set to operate on BSTBWT

Touch the ESC key three times to return back to the Status screen

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 56

STOKVIS ENERGY SYSTEMS 96R WALTON ROAD EAST MOLESEY SURREY KT8 0DL TEL 020 8783 3050 08707 707 747 FAX 020 8783 3051 08707 707 767 E-MAIL infostokvisboilerscom WEBSITE wwwstokvisboilerscom

JULY 1999

Page 27: ECONOAIR 3000S SERIES AIR HANDLING UNIT DIRECT FIREDstokvisboilers.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/EconoAir... · 2019-05-10 · ECONOAIR 3000S SERIES AIR HANDLING UNIT DIRECT FIRED

5 ADJUSTMENTS 3000S

If adjustments to the air handler settings are required they should be made by a RS STOKVIS Ltd approved engineer

The normal value for all control settings is specified in Section 1 of this manual

51 PILOT ADJUSTMENT

The pilot gas pressure and flame length may be adjusted by altering the discharge pressure of the pilot governor Screwing the adjusting screw clockwise (located under the top cap) increases the discharge pressure and the flame length anti-clockwise decreases the pressure and the flame length

52 BURNER HIGH FIRE PRESSURE ADJUSTMENT

At high fire alter the spring compression on the main burner governor (MV2) by removing the cap and adjust the spring compression plate clockwise to increase the burner pressure anti-clockwise to decrease burner pressure If the pressure does not increase on adjusting the spring the supply is inadequate

Note On small air handlers fitted with a mUlti-functional control the pressure adjusting screw is located under a swing cap on the first block valve

53 BURNER LOW FIRE ADJUSTMENT

The main burner low fire is adjusted on the flow control valve MV5 (Process amp Instrumentation Diagram)

Remove the top cover of the valve and insert a Terminal Screwdriver in the adjusting screw of the TOP cam marked NI

Drive the burner to low fire by adjusting the temperature controller set-point and high limit to 05degC as described in Appendix 4 of this manual

Turn the Terminal Screwdriver clockwise to decrease the low fire gas flow anti-clockwise to increase the flow

Check the heat input and flame signal at the new position are satisfactory and return the tenlperature controller to its normal settings

Replace the control valve cover

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 23

5 ADJUSTMENTS 3000S

54 SUMMERIOFFIWINTER SWITCH

In the SUMMER position this switch provides ventilation only and is independent of the programmed ON and OFF periods This position is manually selected and must be manually de-selected Whenever the switch is in this position the fan is operating

In the OFF position the air handler is shutdown and will not operate This overrides any frost protection fitted It is suitable for air handler shutdown for short periods such as holidays The programme memory is unaffected by this switch and assumes control of the air handler when the switch is returned to the WINTER position

In the WINTER position the air handler operates off the programme memory to provide heating

55 RESET BUTTON

Visual indication of air handler lockout is provided In the event of lockout occurring the air handler can be reset by depressing the RESET button This parallels the RESET button on the air handler main control panel If after 4 attempts to reset the air handler the lockout indicator still illuminates then a Service Engineer should be called to investigate the problem

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 24

6 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 3000S

61 AIR HANDLER START-UP

1 Open all manual gas valves both on the appliance and on the supply to the appliance Switch on the Electric Supply to the appliance

2 On the main air handler panel

Switch the panel isolator to the 1 position

Check POWER ON light

3 On the remote control station

For Heating Switch the SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch to WINTER

The air handler will now start automatically in response to the time settings

In the event of LOCKOUT

Press the RESET button and the cycle of operations will be repeated If the air handler goes to LOCKOUT four times in succession call for a Service Engineer

For Unheated Ventilation Switch the SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch to SUMMER

Note This prevents the burner firing giving a controlled supply of ventilation air to the heated space as long as the switch is in this position The air handler will now start automatically in response to the timeclock demand To turn the fan off return the switch to the centre OFF position

In the event of LOCKOUT

Press the RESET button and the cycle of operations will be repeated If the air handler goes to LOCKOUT four times in succession call for a Service Engineer

62 AIR HANDLER SHUTDOWN

621 SHUTDOWN FOR SHORT PERIODS

Switch the SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch on the remote station to OFF

622 SHUTDOWN FOR PROLONGED PERIODS

Switch the main panel isolator to the 0 position and close all manual gas valves both on and leading to the appliance

Note Manual gas valves should only be operated when the appliance is to be shut off for either Servicing or for a prolonged shutdown

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 25

30005 6 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

63 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS

631 SITE CLEARANCE ADJACENT TO AIR HANDLER

Attention should be paid to keeping the area around the air handler tidy No rubbish should be allowed to accumulate in the vicinity of the air handler and storage of goods etc should not be permitted within two metres of the air handler Failure to comply could result in reduced airflow to the air handler causing inefficient running and potential overheat cond ition

632 AIR SUPPLY TO AIR HANDLER

Air vents and grilles supplying air to the air handler should never be blocked and should be checked periodically to ensure they are clear

633 AIR FILTERS

Similarly attention should be paid to cleaning or replacing the filters to the air handler if fitted Your installer should advise you on the frequency with which this would be required to be completed

634 SERVICE

For continued safe and efficient operation of this air air handler it is important that servicing of the air handler should be completed at regular intervals by a competent person in accordance with Section 82 of this manual Users are advised to enter into a Service Agreement with RS STOKVIS Ltd

635 SPARE PARTS

It is suggested that a complete set of spare parts essential to the running of the air handler and recommended by the installer are kept by the user on the premises where the air handler is installed This is particularly important where the air handler forms an essential part of any process plant and its being out of operation may cause problems by for example frost damage or condensation by super-cooling

A list of Recommended Spares will be found in Section 9 of this manual

636 GAS LEAKS

If a smell of gas is detected around the area of the appliance Switch off all manual gas valves and contact your service engineer or the local gas undertaking

NEVER

LOOK FOR GAS LEAKS WITH A LIGHTED MATCH OR NAKED

FLAME

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 26

7 FAULT FINDING 30008

The main control panel incorporates two lights to help in fault finding

POWER ON

LOCKOUT

The remote station also has three lights

AIR FAN ON

BURNER ON

LOCKOUT

This section gives the possible causes of failure associated with each check light The electrical schematic diagram in this manual and the wiring diagram shipped in the main air handler panel should be used in conjunction with the notes below Additionally Service Engineers should familiarise themselves with the detailed Start Sequence given in Appendix 2 of this manual

The notes are given for each light before consulting the notes check for bulb failure

71 POWER ON LIGHT IS UNLIT

Check

1 Main control panel isolator is in the 1 position

2 Main Panel 6A MCB has not tripped if a trip has occurred the switch will be at the OFF position Reset and test system as required

3 Also check if the mains electrical supply is isolated If so FIND OUT WHY before taking any action

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 27

7 FAULT FINDING 30005

72 AIR FAN ON LIGHT IS UNLIT

Check

1 SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch is not in Position OFF

2 Timeperiod is not set to off

3 Air handler is not at LOCKOUT

4 Recheck both AIR FAN ON and LOCKOUT bulbs

Two fault indications are possible

1 THE FAN IS NOT OPERATING

If the fan should have started but is not operating

Check 1 Overload for tripped conditions Reset the overload and monitor the next start-up

2 Motor Fuses

3 Relays 1 2 amp3 for failure

laClor CC1 for failure

5 Air Pressure Switch (DPS) is failed in the N 0 Position

Replace the faulty component as described in Section 8

2 THE FAN IS OPERATING

This indicates that the air pressure switch (DPS) has failed to change over

Measure the profile plate differential pressure as described in Section 4113 If the pressure is correct the air pressure switch is faulty Check the switch as in 4114 If the pressure is not correct

Check 1 Correct fan belt tension

2 Correct fan rotation

3 The air handler air inlets and discharge are not blocked

4 Correct fitting on filters

5 The air differential pressure switch impulse lines are not blocked or leaking

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 28

7 FAULT FINDING 30008

73 LOCKOUT LIGHT IS ILLUMINATED

This light indicates a failure in the burner ignition and flame supervision system

RESET the unit and follow the progress of the start sequence The full cycle may take two minutes

1

------t

2 LOCKOUT after 35-40 seconds indicates an ignition failure RESET the system and observe the pilot and ignition spark during the start-up attempt

I-- shy

3 Observe the spark This should be strong and highly visible If not remove and clean the spark plug as Section 82 Check that the spark plug gap is correctly set at 15 mm

-- shy

4 Check the pilot flame If the pilot flame ignites and the unit goes to LOCKOUT the scanning system is at fault Remove and clean the detector as Section 82 Check the flame signal as in Section 431

5 If the pilot does not light the gas supply system is faulty Check the pilot system for restriction and the pilot valve operation

6 If the pilot lights and the unit goes to LOCKOUT after the main gas valves are addressed either the flow control valve is blocked or one of the main gas block valves has failed Fit a manometer on the pressure test point on the outlet flange of the multishyfunctional control and observe if the pressure rises when the main gas valves are addressed No pressure rise will indicate failure of the main gas valves

74 AIR FAN ON LIGHT ILLUMINATED

If the burner does not start check

1 SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch is in WINTER position

2 Overheat Limit Control

These interlocks prevent the burner management system starting

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 29

8 SERVICING 3000S

IMPORTANT Servicing and maintenance should be only carried out by a RS STOKVIS Ltd approved engineer

Only use replacement parts provided by the appliance manufacturer

Check that the air openings for combustion and for ventilation of any plant roon or compartment are clear

81 ISOLATION

811 FUEL GAS ISOLATION

The fuel gas to the ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler should be isolated and locked off at the manual ball valve mounted at the start of the fuel gas line Additionally before entering or servicing the air handler the burner manual isolation valve and pilot line isolation valve should be closed

812 ELECTRICAL ISOLATION

All electric power to the air handler and the remote control station is switched through the local isolator This isolator is fitted with a lock facility to permit it to be locked in the OFF position

Additionally isolate the power at the Wall Isolator

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 30

8 SERVICING 30005

82 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE

The air handler should be routinely serviced at the start of each heating season Isolate the air handler as above before servicing Details of access to individual components are given in Section 84 of this manual

1 Remove and clean spark igniter Check that the gap is correctly set at 25 mm Replace every two years

2 Clean the flame detector lens to ensure freedom from dirt and moisture If the cell shows any sign of cracks it should be replaced Routinely replace the cell every two years or after 10000 hours of operation which ever comes first

3 Inspect the entire air handler paint system for general damage Repair as necessary

4 Every two years brush the burner plates and clear the burner holes carefully with a Size 18mm drill for NP II and 20mm drill for NP I

WARNING THE BURNER HOLES MUST NOT BE ENLARGED

5 Inspect and lubricate all damper linkages to ensure freedom of operation Wipe off all excess lubricants to prevent dirt build up on linkage parts

6 Check the fan belt for cracks and splits Check tension The correct tension gives 16mm deflection per metre of span when the belt is centrally loaded with a force of 27N Adjust as necessary

7 Grease both the fan shaft bearings with Mobiith AW2 grease or similar

NEVER use high temperature grease

NEVER mix two different greases within the bearing always flush existing grease out

Note Removing the cover plate on the end of the air handler gains access to the outboard fan bearing

Light to Slow to 0 120 2 to 6 months Clean Dry

Medium Medium 120 200 1 to 2 months

Moderate to Light to Slow to 0 120 1 to 4 weeks Dry

Dirty Medium Medium 120 200 1 to 7 days

Extreme Dirt Dry Light to Slow to 0 200 Daily Flushing out

Medium Medium Dirt

83 ANNUAL SERVICE CHECKS

After Servicing test fire the air handler following the Commissioning Procedure detailed in Section 4 of this manual to ensure correct operation generally Special attention must be paid to the damper system and related controls and interlocks

Additionally check that the fresh air and recirculation air entry path to the air handler has been kept clear and instruct the User of the need for this as necessary

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 31

8 SERVICING 3000S

84 REMOVAL PROCEDURE FOR REPLACEABLE COMPONENTS

IMPORTANT

Turn off the gas at the appliance service valve and the electricity at the main panel and wall isolator before proceeding

841 BURNER

The burner is located inside the air handler casing and is mounted on two brackets from the support straps To remove the burner isolate the air handler as in 81 and undo the union on the fuel gas line adjacent to the burner isolation valve (MV6) and unscrew the main and pilot gas feed pipes from the burner rail Access to the rear of the burner assembly is made by removing the partition plate below the burner separating the fresh air inlet to the burner from the return air inlet compartment This is held in place by screws which engage in captive nuts on the top side of the partition Remove the Flame Detector and pull off the ignition plug cap Disconnect the burner support brackets and remove the burner The burner will easily pass through the access hatch for further strip down Replace in the reverse order soundness test the gas pipework check the burner operation and duty as described in the commissioning section of this manual

842 FLAME DETECTOR

This is a 240 Volt instrument

The flame detector is mounted on the end of the burner rail inside the air handler casing To remove the detector isolate the panel electric supply and lock off Push the scanner towards the burner and rotate to release the bayonet fixing and lift the detector from its mount Remove the two screws holding the detector cover and disconnect the supply leads noting the polarity of the connections

Replace the flame detector in the reverse order ensuring correct polarity of connections Ensure the access panel is securely closed and the retaining nuts are tightened down Check operation by inserting a test meter in the points provided in the main control panel and reading the flame signals during start up to full rate burner operation (See 431) Operate the appliance over six starts for reliability of operation including tum off of start and main gas valves to check for lockout operation

843 IGNITER SPARK PLUG

This is a high tension spark plug

The igniter spark plug is mounted on the end of the burner rail inside the air handler casing To remove the spark plug isolate the air handler as above Enter the service access door Access to the spark plug is made through the profile plate To remove the spark plug pull off the high tension lead and unscrew the plug with a plug spanner

When replacing the spark plug check the plug gap is set at 15mm Check ignition reliability over six start ups

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 32

8 SERVICING 3000S

844 IGNITER SPARK TRANSFORMER

This is a 240 Volt instrument

The ignition transformer is located in a plastic box mounted on the air handler casing adjacent to the main control panel To remove the transformer isolate the air handler as above and unscrew the four retaining screws holding the box lid in place and remove the lid Disconnect the supply cable at the terminal strip and undo the transformer retaining screws The transformer may then be unscrewed from the High Tension cable leading to the spark plug

Replacement is a simple reversal of this procedure

Check ignition reliability over six start ups

845 COMBUSTION AIR PRESSURE SWITCH (DPS)

Note The switch is set and sealed and should be replaced if not operating correctly

This switch is a 240 Volt instrument

The air switch is mounted directly on the air handler casing and can be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove the switch isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the supply cable Break the downstream pipe compression fitting and unscrew the switch housing from its locating fitting Reverse the procedure to replace after ensuring switch setting is as specified in Section 13 of this manual Operate the air handler to ensure reliability of operation over six start ups

846 AIR HANDLER OVERHEAT LIMIT CONTROL

This is a 240 Volt instrument

The overheat limit control can be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove the control isolate the air handler as above and lock off Remove the switch cover Disconnect the supply cable and unscrew the control housing from its locating fitting Reverse the procedure to replace check the switch is set to 50degC Test the switch operation as described in Section 43 over at least three operations

847 AIR FAN AND MOTOR

The air fan motor is a 415 Volt 3 phase motor

The motor and slide rails are easily accessible inside the air handler casing If it is necessary to remove the motor isolate the air handler as above Slacken the fan-belt tension and remove the drive belts Pull the motor away from the air handler casing to make access to the motor terminal box and disconnect the supply cable The motor may now be removed from the unit Following replacement the air handler must be fully re-commissioned as in Section 4

It is unlikely that the air fan will need replacing or servicing If required a full procedure should be obtained from RS STOKVIS Ltd

Replacement must be followed by full re-commissioning as in Section 4

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 33

8 SERVICING 3000S

848 FUEL GAS MULTI-FUNCTIONAL CONTROL - SMALL UNITS

This is a 240 Volt instrument

The fuel gas multi-functional control can be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove the unit isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the Hirschman electric termination Unbolt the control from its flanges and remove

When replacing care must be taken to ensure the flange 0 rings are undamaged and in the correct location Following replacement the air handler must be fully reshycommissioned as in Section 4 including tests for soundness prior to start-up

849 GOVERNOR AND BLOCK VALVES

The block valves are 240 Volt instruments

All these items may be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove any item isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the electric termination to the two block valves the pilot block valve and the flow control block valve Break the two pipe unions and remove the fuel gas line complete for further strip-down

8410 FUEL GAS FLOW CONTROL VALVE

This is a 24 Volt instrument

The fuel gas How control valve can be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove the valve isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the supply cables to the control valve

On small air handlers fitted with a multi-functional control support the multi-functional control and unbolt its discharge flange Break the union downstream of the burner isolation valve and remove the section of line containing the flow control valve for further strip-down

On large air handlers fitted with separate block valves it will be necessary to remove the fuel gas line complete as Section 8410 above

Following replacement re-commission the air handler

Note If the fresh air damper is not in the full open position the heat input must not exceed the maximum heat input at recirculation condition specified in the technical data section of this manual

8411 PILOT GAS GOVERNOR AND BLOCK VALVE

The block valve is a 240 Volt instrument

Both items may be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove either item isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the electric terrriination to the solenoid valve Undo the upstream pipe union and the compression fitting downstream of the manual block valve (PV3) Remove the pilot gas line complete for further strip down

Replace broken or distorted connections and retest for soundness Ensure the pilot gas pressure is correct and the flame is sensing an output Ensure reliability over six start-ups

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 34

8 SERVICING 3000S

8412 BELT TENSIONING PROCEDURE

The setting tensions are designed to cover a wide range of drives A precise setting force for individual applications can be calculated as detailed

SETTING FORCES

Belt Section

Setting Force To Deflect Belt 16mm per Metre Of Span

Small Pulley Diameter (mm)

Basic Setting Forces Newtons (N) Kilograms (kgf)

125 x Setting Forces Newtons (N) Kilograms (kgf)

SPZ

56 to 71 16 16 20 20 75 to 90 18 18 22 22

95 to 125 20 20 25 25 Over 125 22 22 28 28

SPA

80 to 100 22 22 28 28 106 to 140 30 30 38 38 150 to 200 36 37 45 46 Over 200 40 40 50 51

SPB

112 to 160 40 40 50 51 170 to 224 50 51 62 63 236 to 355 62 63 77 79 Over 355 65 66 81 83

SPC 224 to 250 70 71 87 89 265 to 355 92 94 115 120 Over 375 115 120 144 150

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 35

8 SERVICING 3000S

BELT TENSIONING USING FENNER BELT TENSION INDICATOR

Calculate the deflection in mm on a basis of 16mm per metre of centre distance Centre Distance (m) x 16 =Deflection (mm)

Set lower marker ring at the deflection distance required in mm on the lower scale

Set upper ring against to bottom edge of the top tube

Place the belt tension indicator on top of the belt at the centre of span and apply a force at right angles to the belt defecting it to the point where the lower marker ring is level with the top of the adjacent belt

Read off the force value indicated by the top edge of the upper marker ring

Compare this force to the kgf value shown in the table above

If a Fenner Belt Tension Indicator is not available a spring balance and rule will be suffice

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 36

8 SERVICING 30005

85 MAIN PANEL CONTROLS

All panel controls are readily accessible and may be easily exchanged for replacement components in the event of failure Ensure any replacement item is of the same make and type as the original

851 LANDIS amp GYR LFL 1335 AUTOMATIC SEQUENCE CONTROLLER

The Landis amp Gyr Automatic Sequence Controller is a plug-in unit locating on a pre-wired chassis To remove the controller undo the two retaining screws at the top left and lower right corners and pull the module off the chassis

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

852 CONTROLS CIRCUIT (24 VOLT) TRANSFORMER

The Controls Circuit Transformer is fixed to the panel back plate by tapped screws To remove the transformer undo the wiring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel Undo the two retaining screws and remove the unit complete

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

853 CONTROL RELAYS R1 R2 amp R3

The Control Relays are DIN Rail mounted To remove a relay undo the wIring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel Release the DIN rail retaining clip under the relay with a screwdriver and remove the relay

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

854 6A MCB

The 6A MCB is DIN Rail mounted To remove the MCB undo the wiring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel Release the DIN rail retaining clip under the MCB with a screwdriver and remove the MCB

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

855 THERMAL OVERLOAD

The thermal overload is attached to the underside of the main contactor To remove the overload undo the wiring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel and that the overload setting is as specified in Section 13 of this manual Unscrew the three connections to the contactor and remove the overload

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 37

8 SERVICING 3000S

856 MAIN CONTACTOR

The Main Contactor is DIN Rail mounted To remove the contactor remove the thermal overload as 855 above and then undo the wiring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel Release the DIN rail retaining clip under the contactor with a screwdriver and remove the contactor

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

857 MOTOR FUSE

To replace a motor fuse pull the fuse carrier off the fuse holder base The fuse is attached to the fuse carrier by two screws Unscrew remove and replace

86 REMOTE CONTROL STATION

The remote control station contains some serviceable parts although these items should only be fitted by an approved RS STOKVIS Ltd Engineer

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 38

9 RECOMMENDED SPARES 3000S

For two years operation it is recommended that the following items should be held in stock

ITEM DESCRIPTION PART NO QUANTITY i

1 INDICATOR BULBS W1121 1 PACK

2 SPARK PLUG 023739 1 I

3 UVDETECTOR QRA10C 1 I

4 ROOM SENSOR DRT2453 1

5 DUCT SENSOR DDT1701 1

All replacement parts can be obtained from RS STOKVIS Ltd by quoting the air handler serial number the part number and description

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 39

APPENDIX 1 30005

SOUNDNESS TESTING THE FUEL GAS PIPEWORK

This procedure should only be carried out by personnel familiar with the ECONO-AIR 3000S Series Air handler

The pressure test points and all valves are identified on the Process and Instrumentation Diagram for the air handler included in Section 1 of this n1anual

Isolate the air handler electric supply at the main control panel and lock off Close the manual isolation valves MV1 MV6 and PV3 Ensure the supply pressure is available on the upstream side of MV1

A11 TESTING THE UPSTREAM PIPEWORKAND BURNER CONTROLS 1 Connect a 60 mbar manometer to the pressure test nipple A Monitor the

pressure for two minutes Any rise in pressure indicates that valve MV1 is leaking and must be replaced Remove pressure test points Band F

2 Open MV1 to pressurise the pipework on both the main gas and pilot line to the first block valve

3 Close MV1 Allow one minute for the temperature to stabilise and then test the system for 2 minutes and watch for a drop in the pipework pressure If the pressure falls open valve MV1 and test the pipework connections and valves from MV1 to MV3 and MV1 to PV2 for leaks with a proprietary leak detector fluid or spray Turn off MV1 seal any leaks and re-test

4 If no extemalleaks are found either the pilot block valve PV1 or either the first main gas block valve MV3 is letting by

5 To test this seal pressure test point A and fit a manometer to pressure test point B Leave for two minutes with MV1 open A rise in pressure on the manometer confirms a leak on the block valve MV3 Turn off MV1 exchange the valve and re-test from point 2 above

6 Repeat this procedure for the pilot block valve Seal test point B and fit a manometer to pressure test point F Leave for two minutes with MV1 open A rise in pressure on the manometer confirms a leak on the pilot block valve PV2 Turn off MV1 exchange the valve and re-test from point 1 above Seal test point F

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 40

APPENDIX 1 30005

A12 TESTING THE DOWNSTREAM BURNER VALVE 1 Close MV1 and connect pressure test points A and 8 with flexible 6 mm bore

tubing teed into the manometer Remove pressure test point C Open MV1 to pressurise the downstream block valve MV4

2 Close MV1 and leave for one minute for the temperature to stabilise Monitor the pressure for 2 minutes If the pressure falls open valve MV1 and leak test the line between the two block valves MV3 and MV4 with a proprietary leak detector Turn off MV1 seal any leaks and re-test Note Smaller air handlers in the 3000S Series are fitted with multi-functional valves combining the pressure regulator and two block valves in one component The above procedure still applies but if a leak is found on either block valve the whole control should be replaced If no external leaks are found the downstream block valve is letting by

3 To confirm this close MV1 remove the manometer and refit to pressure test point C Connect pressure test points A and 8 with flexible 6mm bore tubing Open MV1 and allow one minute for the temperature to stabilise Monitor the pressure for a further 2 minutes with MV1 still open A rise in pressure confirms that the second block valve MV4 is letting by Turn off MV1 Replace the valve and re-test from 2 above

A13 TESTING THE DOWNSTREAM BURNER PIPEWORK 1 Close MV1 and connect pressure test points A and D with flexible 6 mm bore

tubing teed into the manometer Open MV1 to pressurise the downstream pilot pipework

2 Close MV1 and leave for one minute for the temperature to stabilise Monitor the pressure for 2 minutes If the pressure falls open valve MV1 and leak test the line between the downstream block valve MV4 and the manual block MV6 with a proprietary leak detector fluid or spray If no external leaks are found the manual block valve MV6 is letting by Turn off MV1 seal any leakages and reshytest from 2 above

A14 TESTING THE DOWNSTREAM PILOT PIPEWORK 1 Close MV1 and connect pressure test points A and F with flexible 6mm bore

tubing teed into the manometer Open MV1 to pressurise the downstream pilot pipework

2 Close MV1 and leave for one rninute for the temperature to stabilise Monitor the pressure for 2 minutes If the pressure falls open valve MV1 and leak test the line between the downstream block valve PV2 and the manual block PV3 with a proprietary leak detector fluid or spray If no external leaks are found the manual block valve PV3 is letting by Turn off MV1 seal any leakages and reshytest from 2 above

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 41

APPENDIX 1 30005

A15 TESTING THE BURNER CONNECTIONS 1 Remove the burner access panel as described in Section 84 of this manual

Remove the burner spark igniter Slacken the two retaining bolts holding the burner to the burner support straps and unbolt the burner supply endplate from the burner casting and mixing plates

2 Connect pressure test points A and 0 with flexible 6mm bore tubing teed into the manometer Open MV1 and MV6 to pressurise the burner pipework Leak test the main gas burner pipework and connections with proprietary leak detector fluid Turn off MV6 Seal any leakages and re-test

3 Connect pressure test points A and F with flexible 6 mm bore tubing teed into the manometer Open MV1 and PV3 to pressurise the pilot burner pipework Leak test the pilot gas burner pipework and connections with proprietary leak detector fluid Turn off PV3 Seal any leakages and re-test

4 Turn off MV1

5 Replace the spark igniter and profile division plate

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 42

APPENDIX 2 30005

START SEQUENCE

The burner start sequence is controlled by the Landis and Gyr burner management unit The timings are pre-set and comply with 885885 This unit must NOT be tampered with

A brief description of the start-up sequence isshy

The unit checks

1 The NO FLAME signal on the UV flame scanner

Note If the scanner detects a flame at any time other than in the correct operating sequence the flame programmer initiates a lockout

2 The operation of the combustion air proving switch in the NO AIR position

3 The air handler discharge high temperature switch

If the checks are completed the unit starts the combustion air fan and then checks the combustion airflow

Once the airflow is proven the unit checks that the damper control circuit is functioning correctly After the damper microswitch is made to prove the fresh air damper is fully open the sequence allows 30 seconds for the combustion air to purge any combustible gas from the air handler

After completion of the purge the spark ignition system is energised the pilot valve opened and the spark terminated If the pilot flame is not proven by the UV scanner the system will initiate a LOCKOUT

If the flame is proven the main gas valves are opened the pilot extinguished and the main burner flame proven

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 43

i

APPENDIX 2 30008

The following flow chart shows the complete start sequence including the lighting of the various indicating lamps

MANUAL STATUS LIGHT POWER ON

POWER ON

I INITIATE START BY TIME

SETTING ON CONTROLLER

I CHECK NO FLAME

VISIBLE

PROVEj FAIL LOCKOUT

I CHECK RELAY R4 NC

POSITION

PROVE FAIL NO START

I CHECK AIR PRESSURE SWITCH NC POSITION

PROVE FAIL NO START

I CHECK RELAY R1 NC

POSITION

PROVE j

FAIL NO START

I START COMBUSTION

AIR BLOWER

I CHECK AIR PRESSURE SWITCH NO POSITION

PROVE I

FAIL NO START

I STATUS LIGHT FAN ON

I ENERGISE RELAY R1

I

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 44

I

I

APPENDIX 2 30008

I CHECK OVERHEAT LIMIT

CONTROL R5

PROVE I

FAIL I I

CHECK 541412 LOOP CLOSED ON

LANDIS ampGYR CIRCUIT

PROVE I

FAIL I I

COMBUSTION AIR PURGE PERIOD

30 SECONDS

I

NO START

NO START

CANCEL NO FLAME CHECK CIRCUIT

I

ENERGISE SPARK

I TIMED PERIOD 25 SECONDS

I ENERGISE PILOT GAS

VALVE

I TIMED PERIOD 25 SECONDS

I TERMINATE SPARK

I INTERROGATE UV FLAME SCANNER

PROVE I

FAIL I I

TIMED PERIOD 10 SECONDS

I

LOCKOUT

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 45

I

I

APPENDIX 2 3000S

I ENERGISE MAIN GAS

VALVES

I

STATUS LIGHT BURNER ON

I TIMED PERIOD

5 SECONDS

I DE-ENERGISE PILOT

GAS VALVES

CONTINUOUS FROM PILOT

I INTERROGATE UV FLAME SCANNER

PROVE I

FAIL I I

LOCKOUT I

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 46

APPENDIX 3 30005

Please see copy of Standard Service Sheet

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 47

APPENDIX 4 30005

A41 TIME OUT SCREEN

This is the standard screen displayed when the touch screen is not in use The back light is off to save energy_ To access the STATUS screen touch the ENTER key and the following screen is displayed

[]][I][]rn[IJOO[][IJOO[] EJ~E11 I[]I ~ middot I

NOTE

The Touch Screen operates using the heat produced by the touch of a finger and therefore only LIGHT pressure is required

Excessive pressure can damage the Touch Screen

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 48

APPENDIX 4 30008

A42 STATUS SCREEN

On the typical STATUS screen the illustrated information detailed is as follows

19 36 Fan Brn

RS OS

100 Fst_~_ Lck _ _ Xst Gas~o ~ I

RS Indicates the current room temperature

OS ~( t~~ the current duct discharge temperature

Fan Indicates the current status of the fan by showing the arrow and the fan blades for ON and OFF is shown by the arrow and fan blades being removed

Brn Indicates the current status of the burner with the black flames indicating the burner to be ON and vice versa

Lck LOCKOUT - This indicates a flame failure when highlighted during normal or start-up operation

Xst EXCESS TEMPERATURE SWITCH - This indicates the unit has reached the trip limit on the over heat stat when highlighted during operation

Indicates the current position of the gas modulating valve during normal Gas

operation (0-100)

Indicates whether the Frost stat is energised and the unit is running on frost Fst

override

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 49

APPENDIX 4 30008

A43 CHANGING SETTINGS

It is possible to change the settings for the time of operation and the required temperature set points The following details the steps required

A44 ENTERING THE SECURITY CODE

From the STATUS screen touch the return key and the screen below will be displayed

Type the HIGH LEVEL security code (4321) If you make a mistake use the BACK SPACE key to delete any incorrect number(s) Touch the ENTER key when the code is correct

If the security code is incorrect the screen above will be displayed then try again If after several attempts you can not gain access please contact RS STOKVIS Ltd for further information

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 50

APPENDIX 4 30008

When the code is entered correctly the MAIN MENU is displayed as detailed below

~ STATUS SET VALUES~ ~ TIVIE CLOCK [) [) [) [) [)

The MAIN MENU screen shows the three menu items available The title for each menu item can be changed to suit the end user Please notify RS STOKVIS Ltd prior to commissioning should these parameters require special amendments

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 51

APPENDIX 4 30008

A45 CHANGING OR SETTING A TIME SCHEDULE

From the main menu screen select the TIME CLOCK page by running finger across screen symbol and touch the ENTER key the screen below will be displayed

On the following screen highlight the TS1 symbol and touch the ENTER key

The current time schedule will now be displayed as shown below The display will automatically default to the current day (1 =Monday 2 =Tuesday etc) In this case day 5 (Friday) the four schedule switching times refer to that day

IAC6BBB1BHIS1

mm0CIl bull mID 17BB 17BB 17HB

Iillleschedule

To modify a time select it by highlighting and touch the ENTER key and the following screen is displayed

To amend the appropriate onoff time as shown on the screen below The arrows to the right of the time are for altering the hours and the arrows on the left for the minutes

Once you have set the time use the ESCape key to exit back to the time schedule screen and choose another day by touching the required number Another time may now be modified as before

IAC6BBB1BHIS1

H8BH

I i eschedule

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 52

APPENDIX 4 30008

Use the ESCape key to exit back to the MAIN MENU screen

~ STATUS ~ SET VALUES

TIME CLOCK []~ [] [] [] []

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 53

APPENDIX 4 30005

A46 CHANGING SET VALUES

From the main menu screen select the SET VALUES page by highlight in the normal way and touch the ENTER key

The following screen is displayed

36 19 18III III IIIHsv Rsv Llv

To change the RSV highlight it in the normal way and touch the ENTER key and the screen below will now be shown

IAC6RRR1RR40 T I

0 19 (Y)l RSV

ROOM SET VALUE

The above screen shows the parameters that can be changed The values to the far left are the limitations of set point (OC) Change the set point by using the UP and DOWN ARROWS on the left of the screen or touch the set value itself followed by the ENTER key to select the set value and set it directly using the numeric keyboard All values can be changed in this way

Use the ESCape key twice to exit back to the MAIN MENU screen

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 54

APPENDIX 4 30005

A47 COMMISSIONING AND SERVICING BURNER CHECKS

Select the SET VALUES screen from the MAIN MENU screen and adjust the high lirrlit set point to 55degC to drive the burner to high fire

IAC6HHH1HH60 ~T I

0 19 (Y)

HSV

HIGH SET VALUE ~

Ensure the set value is returned to 36degC once the appropriate checks and adjustments as described in Section 43 of this manual have been completed Return to the SET VALUES screen and select the low limit value to adjust the low fire setting

Reduce the low limit value to OdegC to drive the gas valve to low fire and complete the appropriate checks and adjustments as described in Section 43 of this manual and ensure the set value is returned to the original value

A48 GMT ltgt BST CHANGEOVER DAYLIGHT SAVINGS

To change your unit to British Summer TimelWinter Time the following system screen must be highlighted by touching the Iamp1 button twice

By touching the clock symbol in the top left hand corner followed by the ENTER key the screen below will be displayed

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 55

APPENDIX 4 30008

188311 851193

544

By touching and highlighting in this case 18 followed by the ENTER key A small box allowing the entry of two digits will appear Enter the desired time required using the numbered keys followed by ENTER key Your unit is now set to operate on BSTBWT

Touch the ESC key three times to return back to the Status screen

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 56

STOKVIS ENERGY SYSTEMS 96R WALTON ROAD EAST MOLESEY SURREY KT8 0DL TEL 020 8783 3050 08707 707 747 FAX 020 8783 3051 08707 707 767 E-MAIL infostokvisboilerscom WEBSITE wwwstokvisboilerscom

JULY 1999

Page 28: ECONOAIR 3000S SERIES AIR HANDLING UNIT DIRECT FIREDstokvisboilers.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/EconoAir... · 2019-05-10 · ECONOAIR 3000S SERIES AIR HANDLING UNIT DIRECT FIRED

5 ADJUSTMENTS 3000S

54 SUMMERIOFFIWINTER SWITCH

In the SUMMER position this switch provides ventilation only and is independent of the programmed ON and OFF periods This position is manually selected and must be manually de-selected Whenever the switch is in this position the fan is operating

In the OFF position the air handler is shutdown and will not operate This overrides any frost protection fitted It is suitable for air handler shutdown for short periods such as holidays The programme memory is unaffected by this switch and assumes control of the air handler when the switch is returned to the WINTER position

In the WINTER position the air handler operates off the programme memory to provide heating

55 RESET BUTTON

Visual indication of air handler lockout is provided In the event of lockout occurring the air handler can be reset by depressing the RESET button This parallels the RESET button on the air handler main control panel If after 4 attempts to reset the air handler the lockout indicator still illuminates then a Service Engineer should be called to investigate the problem

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 24

6 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 3000S

61 AIR HANDLER START-UP

1 Open all manual gas valves both on the appliance and on the supply to the appliance Switch on the Electric Supply to the appliance

2 On the main air handler panel

Switch the panel isolator to the 1 position

Check POWER ON light

3 On the remote control station

For Heating Switch the SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch to WINTER

The air handler will now start automatically in response to the time settings

In the event of LOCKOUT

Press the RESET button and the cycle of operations will be repeated If the air handler goes to LOCKOUT four times in succession call for a Service Engineer

For Unheated Ventilation Switch the SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch to SUMMER

Note This prevents the burner firing giving a controlled supply of ventilation air to the heated space as long as the switch is in this position The air handler will now start automatically in response to the timeclock demand To turn the fan off return the switch to the centre OFF position

In the event of LOCKOUT

Press the RESET button and the cycle of operations will be repeated If the air handler goes to LOCKOUT four times in succession call for a Service Engineer

62 AIR HANDLER SHUTDOWN

621 SHUTDOWN FOR SHORT PERIODS

Switch the SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch on the remote station to OFF

622 SHUTDOWN FOR PROLONGED PERIODS

Switch the main panel isolator to the 0 position and close all manual gas valves both on and leading to the appliance

Note Manual gas valves should only be operated when the appliance is to be shut off for either Servicing or for a prolonged shutdown

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 25

30005 6 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

63 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS

631 SITE CLEARANCE ADJACENT TO AIR HANDLER

Attention should be paid to keeping the area around the air handler tidy No rubbish should be allowed to accumulate in the vicinity of the air handler and storage of goods etc should not be permitted within two metres of the air handler Failure to comply could result in reduced airflow to the air handler causing inefficient running and potential overheat cond ition

632 AIR SUPPLY TO AIR HANDLER

Air vents and grilles supplying air to the air handler should never be blocked and should be checked periodically to ensure they are clear

633 AIR FILTERS

Similarly attention should be paid to cleaning or replacing the filters to the air handler if fitted Your installer should advise you on the frequency with which this would be required to be completed

634 SERVICE

For continued safe and efficient operation of this air air handler it is important that servicing of the air handler should be completed at regular intervals by a competent person in accordance with Section 82 of this manual Users are advised to enter into a Service Agreement with RS STOKVIS Ltd

635 SPARE PARTS

It is suggested that a complete set of spare parts essential to the running of the air handler and recommended by the installer are kept by the user on the premises where the air handler is installed This is particularly important where the air handler forms an essential part of any process plant and its being out of operation may cause problems by for example frost damage or condensation by super-cooling

A list of Recommended Spares will be found in Section 9 of this manual

636 GAS LEAKS

If a smell of gas is detected around the area of the appliance Switch off all manual gas valves and contact your service engineer or the local gas undertaking

NEVER

LOOK FOR GAS LEAKS WITH A LIGHTED MATCH OR NAKED

FLAME

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 26

7 FAULT FINDING 30008

The main control panel incorporates two lights to help in fault finding

POWER ON

LOCKOUT

The remote station also has three lights

AIR FAN ON

BURNER ON

LOCKOUT

This section gives the possible causes of failure associated with each check light The electrical schematic diagram in this manual and the wiring diagram shipped in the main air handler panel should be used in conjunction with the notes below Additionally Service Engineers should familiarise themselves with the detailed Start Sequence given in Appendix 2 of this manual

The notes are given for each light before consulting the notes check for bulb failure

71 POWER ON LIGHT IS UNLIT

Check

1 Main control panel isolator is in the 1 position

2 Main Panel 6A MCB has not tripped if a trip has occurred the switch will be at the OFF position Reset and test system as required

3 Also check if the mains electrical supply is isolated If so FIND OUT WHY before taking any action

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 27

7 FAULT FINDING 30005

72 AIR FAN ON LIGHT IS UNLIT

Check

1 SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch is not in Position OFF

2 Timeperiod is not set to off

3 Air handler is not at LOCKOUT

4 Recheck both AIR FAN ON and LOCKOUT bulbs

Two fault indications are possible

1 THE FAN IS NOT OPERATING

If the fan should have started but is not operating

Check 1 Overload for tripped conditions Reset the overload and monitor the next start-up

2 Motor Fuses

3 Relays 1 2 amp3 for failure

laClor CC1 for failure

5 Air Pressure Switch (DPS) is failed in the N 0 Position

Replace the faulty component as described in Section 8

2 THE FAN IS OPERATING

This indicates that the air pressure switch (DPS) has failed to change over

Measure the profile plate differential pressure as described in Section 4113 If the pressure is correct the air pressure switch is faulty Check the switch as in 4114 If the pressure is not correct

Check 1 Correct fan belt tension

2 Correct fan rotation

3 The air handler air inlets and discharge are not blocked

4 Correct fitting on filters

5 The air differential pressure switch impulse lines are not blocked or leaking

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 28

7 FAULT FINDING 30008

73 LOCKOUT LIGHT IS ILLUMINATED

This light indicates a failure in the burner ignition and flame supervision system

RESET the unit and follow the progress of the start sequence The full cycle may take two minutes

1

------t

2 LOCKOUT after 35-40 seconds indicates an ignition failure RESET the system and observe the pilot and ignition spark during the start-up attempt

I-- shy

3 Observe the spark This should be strong and highly visible If not remove and clean the spark plug as Section 82 Check that the spark plug gap is correctly set at 15 mm

-- shy

4 Check the pilot flame If the pilot flame ignites and the unit goes to LOCKOUT the scanning system is at fault Remove and clean the detector as Section 82 Check the flame signal as in Section 431

5 If the pilot does not light the gas supply system is faulty Check the pilot system for restriction and the pilot valve operation

6 If the pilot lights and the unit goes to LOCKOUT after the main gas valves are addressed either the flow control valve is blocked or one of the main gas block valves has failed Fit a manometer on the pressure test point on the outlet flange of the multishyfunctional control and observe if the pressure rises when the main gas valves are addressed No pressure rise will indicate failure of the main gas valves

74 AIR FAN ON LIGHT ILLUMINATED

If the burner does not start check

1 SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch is in WINTER position

2 Overheat Limit Control

These interlocks prevent the burner management system starting

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 29

8 SERVICING 3000S

IMPORTANT Servicing and maintenance should be only carried out by a RS STOKVIS Ltd approved engineer

Only use replacement parts provided by the appliance manufacturer

Check that the air openings for combustion and for ventilation of any plant roon or compartment are clear

81 ISOLATION

811 FUEL GAS ISOLATION

The fuel gas to the ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler should be isolated and locked off at the manual ball valve mounted at the start of the fuel gas line Additionally before entering or servicing the air handler the burner manual isolation valve and pilot line isolation valve should be closed

812 ELECTRICAL ISOLATION

All electric power to the air handler and the remote control station is switched through the local isolator This isolator is fitted with a lock facility to permit it to be locked in the OFF position

Additionally isolate the power at the Wall Isolator

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 30

8 SERVICING 30005

82 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE

The air handler should be routinely serviced at the start of each heating season Isolate the air handler as above before servicing Details of access to individual components are given in Section 84 of this manual

1 Remove and clean spark igniter Check that the gap is correctly set at 25 mm Replace every two years

2 Clean the flame detector lens to ensure freedom from dirt and moisture If the cell shows any sign of cracks it should be replaced Routinely replace the cell every two years or after 10000 hours of operation which ever comes first

3 Inspect the entire air handler paint system for general damage Repair as necessary

4 Every two years brush the burner plates and clear the burner holes carefully with a Size 18mm drill for NP II and 20mm drill for NP I

WARNING THE BURNER HOLES MUST NOT BE ENLARGED

5 Inspect and lubricate all damper linkages to ensure freedom of operation Wipe off all excess lubricants to prevent dirt build up on linkage parts

6 Check the fan belt for cracks and splits Check tension The correct tension gives 16mm deflection per metre of span when the belt is centrally loaded with a force of 27N Adjust as necessary

7 Grease both the fan shaft bearings with Mobiith AW2 grease or similar

NEVER use high temperature grease

NEVER mix two different greases within the bearing always flush existing grease out

Note Removing the cover plate on the end of the air handler gains access to the outboard fan bearing

Light to Slow to 0 120 2 to 6 months Clean Dry

Medium Medium 120 200 1 to 2 months

Moderate to Light to Slow to 0 120 1 to 4 weeks Dry

Dirty Medium Medium 120 200 1 to 7 days

Extreme Dirt Dry Light to Slow to 0 200 Daily Flushing out

Medium Medium Dirt

83 ANNUAL SERVICE CHECKS

After Servicing test fire the air handler following the Commissioning Procedure detailed in Section 4 of this manual to ensure correct operation generally Special attention must be paid to the damper system and related controls and interlocks

Additionally check that the fresh air and recirculation air entry path to the air handler has been kept clear and instruct the User of the need for this as necessary

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 31

8 SERVICING 3000S

84 REMOVAL PROCEDURE FOR REPLACEABLE COMPONENTS

IMPORTANT

Turn off the gas at the appliance service valve and the electricity at the main panel and wall isolator before proceeding

841 BURNER

The burner is located inside the air handler casing and is mounted on two brackets from the support straps To remove the burner isolate the air handler as in 81 and undo the union on the fuel gas line adjacent to the burner isolation valve (MV6) and unscrew the main and pilot gas feed pipes from the burner rail Access to the rear of the burner assembly is made by removing the partition plate below the burner separating the fresh air inlet to the burner from the return air inlet compartment This is held in place by screws which engage in captive nuts on the top side of the partition Remove the Flame Detector and pull off the ignition plug cap Disconnect the burner support brackets and remove the burner The burner will easily pass through the access hatch for further strip down Replace in the reverse order soundness test the gas pipework check the burner operation and duty as described in the commissioning section of this manual

842 FLAME DETECTOR

This is a 240 Volt instrument

The flame detector is mounted on the end of the burner rail inside the air handler casing To remove the detector isolate the panel electric supply and lock off Push the scanner towards the burner and rotate to release the bayonet fixing and lift the detector from its mount Remove the two screws holding the detector cover and disconnect the supply leads noting the polarity of the connections

Replace the flame detector in the reverse order ensuring correct polarity of connections Ensure the access panel is securely closed and the retaining nuts are tightened down Check operation by inserting a test meter in the points provided in the main control panel and reading the flame signals during start up to full rate burner operation (See 431) Operate the appliance over six starts for reliability of operation including tum off of start and main gas valves to check for lockout operation

843 IGNITER SPARK PLUG

This is a high tension spark plug

The igniter spark plug is mounted on the end of the burner rail inside the air handler casing To remove the spark plug isolate the air handler as above Enter the service access door Access to the spark plug is made through the profile plate To remove the spark plug pull off the high tension lead and unscrew the plug with a plug spanner

When replacing the spark plug check the plug gap is set at 15mm Check ignition reliability over six start ups

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 32

8 SERVICING 3000S

844 IGNITER SPARK TRANSFORMER

This is a 240 Volt instrument

The ignition transformer is located in a plastic box mounted on the air handler casing adjacent to the main control panel To remove the transformer isolate the air handler as above and unscrew the four retaining screws holding the box lid in place and remove the lid Disconnect the supply cable at the terminal strip and undo the transformer retaining screws The transformer may then be unscrewed from the High Tension cable leading to the spark plug

Replacement is a simple reversal of this procedure

Check ignition reliability over six start ups

845 COMBUSTION AIR PRESSURE SWITCH (DPS)

Note The switch is set and sealed and should be replaced if not operating correctly

This switch is a 240 Volt instrument

The air switch is mounted directly on the air handler casing and can be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove the switch isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the supply cable Break the downstream pipe compression fitting and unscrew the switch housing from its locating fitting Reverse the procedure to replace after ensuring switch setting is as specified in Section 13 of this manual Operate the air handler to ensure reliability of operation over six start ups

846 AIR HANDLER OVERHEAT LIMIT CONTROL

This is a 240 Volt instrument

The overheat limit control can be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove the control isolate the air handler as above and lock off Remove the switch cover Disconnect the supply cable and unscrew the control housing from its locating fitting Reverse the procedure to replace check the switch is set to 50degC Test the switch operation as described in Section 43 over at least three operations

847 AIR FAN AND MOTOR

The air fan motor is a 415 Volt 3 phase motor

The motor and slide rails are easily accessible inside the air handler casing If it is necessary to remove the motor isolate the air handler as above Slacken the fan-belt tension and remove the drive belts Pull the motor away from the air handler casing to make access to the motor terminal box and disconnect the supply cable The motor may now be removed from the unit Following replacement the air handler must be fully re-commissioned as in Section 4

It is unlikely that the air fan will need replacing or servicing If required a full procedure should be obtained from RS STOKVIS Ltd

Replacement must be followed by full re-commissioning as in Section 4

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 33

8 SERVICING 3000S

848 FUEL GAS MULTI-FUNCTIONAL CONTROL - SMALL UNITS

This is a 240 Volt instrument

The fuel gas multi-functional control can be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove the unit isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the Hirschman electric termination Unbolt the control from its flanges and remove

When replacing care must be taken to ensure the flange 0 rings are undamaged and in the correct location Following replacement the air handler must be fully reshycommissioned as in Section 4 including tests for soundness prior to start-up

849 GOVERNOR AND BLOCK VALVES

The block valves are 240 Volt instruments

All these items may be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove any item isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the electric termination to the two block valves the pilot block valve and the flow control block valve Break the two pipe unions and remove the fuel gas line complete for further strip-down

8410 FUEL GAS FLOW CONTROL VALVE

This is a 24 Volt instrument

The fuel gas How control valve can be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove the valve isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the supply cables to the control valve

On small air handlers fitted with a multi-functional control support the multi-functional control and unbolt its discharge flange Break the union downstream of the burner isolation valve and remove the section of line containing the flow control valve for further strip-down

On large air handlers fitted with separate block valves it will be necessary to remove the fuel gas line complete as Section 8410 above

Following replacement re-commission the air handler

Note If the fresh air damper is not in the full open position the heat input must not exceed the maximum heat input at recirculation condition specified in the technical data section of this manual

8411 PILOT GAS GOVERNOR AND BLOCK VALVE

The block valve is a 240 Volt instrument

Both items may be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove either item isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the electric terrriination to the solenoid valve Undo the upstream pipe union and the compression fitting downstream of the manual block valve (PV3) Remove the pilot gas line complete for further strip down

Replace broken or distorted connections and retest for soundness Ensure the pilot gas pressure is correct and the flame is sensing an output Ensure reliability over six start-ups

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 34

8 SERVICING 3000S

8412 BELT TENSIONING PROCEDURE

The setting tensions are designed to cover a wide range of drives A precise setting force for individual applications can be calculated as detailed

SETTING FORCES

Belt Section

Setting Force To Deflect Belt 16mm per Metre Of Span

Small Pulley Diameter (mm)

Basic Setting Forces Newtons (N) Kilograms (kgf)

125 x Setting Forces Newtons (N) Kilograms (kgf)

SPZ

56 to 71 16 16 20 20 75 to 90 18 18 22 22

95 to 125 20 20 25 25 Over 125 22 22 28 28

SPA

80 to 100 22 22 28 28 106 to 140 30 30 38 38 150 to 200 36 37 45 46 Over 200 40 40 50 51

SPB

112 to 160 40 40 50 51 170 to 224 50 51 62 63 236 to 355 62 63 77 79 Over 355 65 66 81 83

SPC 224 to 250 70 71 87 89 265 to 355 92 94 115 120 Over 375 115 120 144 150

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 35

8 SERVICING 3000S

BELT TENSIONING USING FENNER BELT TENSION INDICATOR

Calculate the deflection in mm on a basis of 16mm per metre of centre distance Centre Distance (m) x 16 =Deflection (mm)

Set lower marker ring at the deflection distance required in mm on the lower scale

Set upper ring against to bottom edge of the top tube

Place the belt tension indicator on top of the belt at the centre of span and apply a force at right angles to the belt defecting it to the point where the lower marker ring is level with the top of the adjacent belt

Read off the force value indicated by the top edge of the upper marker ring

Compare this force to the kgf value shown in the table above

If a Fenner Belt Tension Indicator is not available a spring balance and rule will be suffice

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 36

8 SERVICING 30005

85 MAIN PANEL CONTROLS

All panel controls are readily accessible and may be easily exchanged for replacement components in the event of failure Ensure any replacement item is of the same make and type as the original

851 LANDIS amp GYR LFL 1335 AUTOMATIC SEQUENCE CONTROLLER

The Landis amp Gyr Automatic Sequence Controller is a plug-in unit locating on a pre-wired chassis To remove the controller undo the two retaining screws at the top left and lower right corners and pull the module off the chassis

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

852 CONTROLS CIRCUIT (24 VOLT) TRANSFORMER

The Controls Circuit Transformer is fixed to the panel back plate by tapped screws To remove the transformer undo the wiring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel Undo the two retaining screws and remove the unit complete

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

853 CONTROL RELAYS R1 R2 amp R3

The Control Relays are DIN Rail mounted To remove a relay undo the wIring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel Release the DIN rail retaining clip under the relay with a screwdriver and remove the relay

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

854 6A MCB

The 6A MCB is DIN Rail mounted To remove the MCB undo the wiring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel Release the DIN rail retaining clip under the MCB with a screwdriver and remove the MCB

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

855 THERMAL OVERLOAD

The thermal overload is attached to the underside of the main contactor To remove the overload undo the wiring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel and that the overload setting is as specified in Section 13 of this manual Unscrew the three connections to the contactor and remove the overload

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 37

8 SERVICING 3000S

856 MAIN CONTACTOR

The Main Contactor is DIN Rail mounted To remove the contactor remove the thermal overload as 855 above and then undo the wiring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel Release the DIN rail retaining clip under the contactor with a screwdriver and remove the contactor

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

857 MOTOR FUSE

To replace a motor fuse pull the fuse carrier off the fuse holder base The fuse is attached to the fuse carrier by two screws Unscrew remove and replace

86 REMOTE CONTROL STATION

The remote control station contains some serviceable parts although these items should only be fitted by an approved RS STOKVIS Ltd Engineer

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 38

9 RECOMMENDED SPARES 3000S

For two years operation it is recommended that the following items should be held in stock

ITEM DESCRIPTION PART NO QUANTITY i

1 INDICATOR BULBS W1121 1 PACK

2 SPARK PLUG 023739 1 I

3 UVDETECTOR QRA10C 1 I

4 ROOM SENSOR DRT2453 1

5 DUCT SENSOR DDT1701 1

All replacement parts can be obtained from RS STOKVIS Ltd by quoting the air handler serial number the part number and description

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 39

APPENDIX 1 30005

SOUNDNESS TESTING THE FUEL GAS PIPEWORK

This procedure should only be carried out by personnel familiar with the ECONO-AIR 3000S Series Air handler

The pressure test points and all valves are identified on the Process and Instrumentation Diagram for the air handler included in Section 1 of this n1anual

Isolate the air handler electric supply at the main control panel and lock off Close the manual isolation valves MV1 MV6 and PV3 Ensure the supply pressure is available on the upstream side of MV1

A11 TESTING THE UPSTREAM PIPEWORKAND BURNER CONTROLS 1 Connect a 60 mbar manometer to the pressure test nipple A Monitor the

pressure for two minutes Any rise in pressure indicates that valve MV1 is leaking and must be replaced Remove pressure test points Band F

2 Open MV1 to pressurise the pipework on both the main gas and pilot line to the first block valve

3 Close MV1 Allow one minute for the temperature to stabilise and then test the system for 2 minutes and watch for a drop in the pipework pressure If the pressure falls open valve MV1 and test the pipework connections and valves from MV1 to MV3 and MV1 to PV2 for leaks with a proprietary leak detector fluid or spray Turn off MV1 seal any leaks and re-test

4 If no extemalleaks are found either the pilot block valve PV1 or either the first main gas block valve MV3 is letting by

5 To test this seal pressure test point A and fit a manometer to pressure test point B Leave for two minutes with MV1 open A rise in pressure on the manometer confirms a leak on the block valve MV3 Turn off MV1 exchange the valve and re-test from point 2 above

6 Repeat this procedure for the pilot block valve Seal test point B and fit a manometer to pressure test point F Leave for two minutes with MV1 open A rise in pressure on the manometer confirms a leak on the pilot block valve PV2 Turn off MV1 exchange the valve and re-test from point 1 above Seal test point F

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 40

APPENDIX 1 30005

A12 TESTING THE DOWNSTREAM BURNER VALVE 1 Close MV1 and connect pressure test points A and 8 with flexible 6 mm bore

tubing teed into the manometer Remove pressure test point C Open MV1 to pressurise the downstream block valve MV4

2 Close MV1 and leave for one minute for the temperature to stabilise Monitor the pressure for 2 minutes If the pressure falls open valve MV1 and leak test the line between the two block valves MV3 and MV4 with a proprietary leak detector Turn off MV1 seal any leaks and re-test Note Smaller air handlers in the 3000S Series are fitted with multi-functional valves combining the pressure regulator and two block valves in one component The above procedure still applies but if a leak is found on either block valve the whole control should be replaced If no external leaks are found the downstream block valve is letting by

3 To confirm this close MV1 remove the manometer and refit to pressure test point C Connect pressure test points A and 8 with flexible 6mm bore tubing Open MV1 and allow one minute for the temperature to stabilise Monitor the pressure for a further 2 minutes with MV1 still open A rise in pressure confirms that the second block valve MV4 is letting by Turn off MV1 Replace the valve and re-test from 2 above

A13 TESTING THE DOWNSTREAM BURNER PIPEWORK 1 Close MV1 and connect pressure test points A and D with flexible 6 mm bore

tubing teed into the manometer Open MV1 to pressurise the downstream pilot pipework

2 Close MV1 and leave for one minute for the temperature to stabilise Monitor the pressure for 2 minutes If the pressure falls open valve MV1 and leak test the line between the downstream block valve MV4 and the manual block MV6 with a proprietary leak detector fluid or spray If no external leaks are found the manual block valve MV6 is letting by Turn off MV1 seal any leakages and reshytest from 2 above

A14 TESTING THE DOWNSTREAM PILOT PIPEWORK 1 Close MV1 and connect pressure test points A and F with flexible 6mm bore

tubing teed into the manometer Open MV1 to pressurise the downstream pilot pipework

2 Close MV1 and leave for one rninute for the temperature to stabilise Monitor the pressure for 2 minutes If the pressure falls open valve MV1 and leak test the line between the downstream block valve PV2 and the manual block PV3 with a proprietary leak detector fluid or spray If no external leaks are found the manual block valve PV3 is letting by Turn off MV1 seal any leakages and reshytest from 2 above

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 41

APPENDIX 1 30005

A15 TESTING THE BURNER CONNECTIONS 1 Remove the burner access panel as described in Section 84 of this manual

Remove the burner spark igniter Slacken the two retaining bolts holding the burner to the burner support straps and unbolt the burner supply endplate from the burner casting and mixing plates

2 Connect pressure test points A and 0 with flexible 6mm bore tubing teed into the manometer Open MV1 and MV6 to pressurise the burner pipework Leak test the main gas burner pipework and connections with proprietary leak detector fluid Turn off MV6 Seal any leakages and re-test

3 Connect pressure test points A and F with flexible 6 mm bore tubing teed into the manometer Open MV1 and PV3 to pressurise the pilot burner pipework Leak test the pilot gas burner pipework and connections with proprietary leak detector fluid Turn off PV3 Seal any leakages and re-test

4 Turn off MV1

5 Replace the spark igniter and profile division plate

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 42

APPENDIX 2 30005

START SEQUENCE

The burner start sequence is controlled by the Landis and Gyr burner management unit The timings are pre-set and comply with 885885 This unit must NOT be tampered with

A brief description of the start-up sequence isshy

The unit checks

1 The NO FLAME signal on the UV flame scanner

Note If the scanner detects a flame at any time other than in the correct operating sequence the flame programmer initiates a lockout

2 The operation of the combustion air proving switch in the NO AIR position

3 The air handler discharge high temperature switch

If the checks are completed the unit starts the combustion air fan and then checks the combustion airflow

Once the airflow is proven the unit checks that the damper control circuit is functioning correctly After the damper microswitch is made to prove the fresh air damper is fully open the sequence allows 30 seconds for the combustion air to purge any combustible gas from the air handler

After completion of the purge the spark ignition system is energised the pilot valve opened and the spark terminated If the pilot flame is not proven by the UV scanner the system will initiate a LOCKOUT

If the flame is proven the main gas valves are opened the pilot extinguished and the main burner flame proven

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 43

i

APPENDIX 2 30008

The following flow chart shows the complete start sequence including the lighting of the various indicating lamps

MANUAL STATUS LIGHT POWER ON

POWER ON

I INITIATE START BY TIME

SETTING ON CONTROLLER

I CHECK NO FLAME

VISIBLE

PROVEj FAIL LOCKOUT

I CHECK RELAY R4 NC

POSITION

PROVE FAIL NO START

I CHECK AIR PRESSURE SWITCH NC POSITION

PROVE FAIL NO START

I CHECK RELAY R1 NC

POSITION

PROVE j

FAIL NO START

I START COMBUSTION

AIR BLOWER

I CHECK AIR PRESSURE SWITCH NO POSITION

PROVE I

FAIL NO START

I STATUS LIGHT FAN ON

I ENERGISE RELAY R1

I

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 44

I

I

APPENDIX 2 30008

I CHECK OVERHEAT LIMIT

CONTROL R5

PROVE I

FAIL I I

CHECK 541412 LOOP CLOSED ON

LANDIS ampGYR CIRCUIT

PROVE I

FAIL I I

COMBUSTION AIR PURGE PERIOD

30 SECONDS

I

NO START

NO START

CANCEL NO FLAME CHECK CIRCUIT

I

ENERGISE SPARK

I TIMED PERIOD 25 SECONDS

I ENERGISE PILOT GAS

VALVE

I TIMED PERIOD 25 SECONDS

I TERMINATE SPARK

I INTERROGATE UV FLAME SCANNER

PROVE I

FAIL I I

TIMED PERIOD 10 SECONDS

I

LOCKOUT

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 45

I

I

APPENDIX 2 3000S

I ENERGISE MAIN GAS

VALVES

I

STATUS LIGHT BURNER ON

I TIMED PERIOD

5 SECONDS

I DE-ENERGISE PILOT

GAS VALVES

CONTINUOUS FROM PILOT

I INTERROGATE UV FLAME SCANNER

PROVE I

FAIL I I

LOCKOUT I

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 46

APPENDIX 3 30005

Please see copy of Standard Service Sheet

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 47

APPENDIX 4 30005

A41 TIME OUT SCREEN

This is the standard screen displayed when the touch screen is not in use The back light is off to save energy_ To access the STATUS screen touch the ENTER key and the following screen is displayed

[]][I][]rn[IJOO[][IJOO[] EJ~E11 I[]I ~ middot I

NOTE

The Touch Screen operates using the heat produced by the touch of a finger and therefore only LIGHT pressure is required

Excessive pressure can damage the Touch Screen

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 48

APPENDIX 4 30008

A42 STATUS SCREEN

On the typical STATUS screen the illustrated information detailed is as follows

19 36 Fan Brn

RS OS

100 Fst_~_ Lck _ _ Xst Gas~o ~ I

RS Indicates the current room temperature

OS ~( t~~ the current duct discharge temperature

Fan Indicates the current status of the fan by showing the arrow and the fan blades for ON and OFF is shown by the arrow and fan blades being removed

Brn Indicates the current status of the burner with the black flames indicating the burner to be ON and vice versa

Lck LOCKOUT - This indicates a flame failure when highlighted during normal or start-up operation

Xst EXCESS TEMPERATURE SWITCH - This indicates the unit has reached the trip limit on the over heat stat when highlighted during operation

Indicates the current position of the gas modulating valve during normal Gas

operation (0-100)

Indicates whether the Frost stat is energised and the unit is running on frost Fst

override

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 49

APPENDIX 4 30008

A43 CHANGING SETTINGS

It is possible to change the settings for the time of operation and the required temperature set points The following details the steps required

A44 ENTERING THE SECURITY CODE

From the STATUS screen touch the return key and the screen below will be displayed

Type the HIGH LEVEL security code (4321) If you make a mistake use the BACK SPACE key to delete any incorrect number(s) Touch the ENTER key when the code is correct

If the security code is incorrect the screen above will be displayed then try again If after several attempts you can not gain access please contact RS STOKVIS Ltd for further information

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 50

APPENDIX 4 30008

When the code is entered correctly the MAIN MENU is displayed as detailed below

~ STATUS SET VALUES~ ~ TIVIE CLOCK [) [) [) [) [)

The MAIN MENU screen shows the three menu items available The title for each menu item can be changed to suit the end user Please notify RS STOKVIS Ltd prior to commissioning should these parameters require special amendments

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 51

APPENDIX 4 30008

A45 CHANGING OR SETTING A TIME SCHEDULE

From the main menu screen select the TIME CLOCK page by running finger across screen symbol and touch the ENTER key the screen below will be displayed

On the following screen highlight the TS1 symbol and touch the ENTER key

The current time schedule will now be displayed as shown below The display will automatically default to the current day (1 =Monday 2 =Tuesday etc) In this case day 5 (Friday) the four schedule switching times refer to that day

IAC6BBB1BHIS1

mm0CIl bull mID 17BB 17BB 17HB

Iillleschedule

To modify a time select it by highlighting and touch the ENTER key and the following screen is displayed

To amend the appropriate onoff time as shown on the screen below The arrows to the right of the time are for altering the hours and the arrows on the left for the minutes

Once you have set the time use the ESCape key to exit back to the time schedule screen and choose another day by touching the required number Another time may now be modified as before

IAC6BBB1BHIS1

H8BH

I i eschedule

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 52

APPENDIX 4 30008

Use the ESCape key to exit back to the MAIN MENU screen

~ STATUS ~ SET VALUES

TIME CLOCK []~ [] [] [] []

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 53

APPENDIX 4 30005

A46 CHANGING SET VALUES

From the main menu screen select the SET VALUES page by highlight in the normal way and touch the ENTER key

The following screen is displayed

36 19 18III III IIIHsv Rsv Llv

To change the RSV highlight it in the normal way and touch the ENTER key and the screen below will now be shown

IAC6RRR1RR40 T I

0 19 (Y)l RSV

ROOM SET VALUE

The above screen shows the parameters that can be changed The values to the far left are the limitations of set point (OC) Change the set point by using the UP and DOWN ARROWS on the left of the screen or touch the set value itself followed by the ENTER key to select the set value and set it directly using the numeric keyboard All values can be changed in this way

Use the ESCape key twice to exit back to the MAIN MENU screen

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 54

APPENDIX 4 30005

A47 COMMISSIONING AND SERVICING BURNER CHECKS

Select the SET VALUES screen from the MAIN MENU screen and adjust the high lirrlit set point to 55degC to drive the burner to high fire

IAC6HHH1HH60 ~T I

0 19 (Y)

HSV

HIGH SET VALUE ~

Ensure the set value is returned to 36degC once the appropriate checks and adjustments as described in Section 43 of this manual have been completed Return to the SET VALUES screen and select the low limit value to adjust the low fire setting

Reduce the low limit value to OdegC to drive the gas valve to low fire and complete the appropriate checks and adjustments as described in Section 43 of this manual and ensure the set value is returned to the original value

A48 GMT ltgt BST CHANGEOVER DAYLIGHT SAVINGS

To change your unit to British Summer TimelWinter Time the following system screen must be highlighted by touching the Iamp1 button twice

By touching the clock symbol in the top left hand corner followed by the ENTER key the screen below will be displayed

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 55

APPENDIX 4 30008

188311 851193

544

By touching and highlighting in this case 18 followed by the ENTER key A small box allowing the entry of two digits will appear Enter the desired time required using the numbered keys followed by ENTER key Your unit is now set to operate on BSTBWT

Touch the ESC key three times to return back to the Status screen

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 56

STOKVIS ENERGY SYSTEMS 96R WALTON ROAD EAST MOLESEY SURREY KT8 0DL TEL 020 8783 3050 08707 707 747 FAX 020 8783 3051 08707 707 767 E-MAIL infostokvisboilerscom WEBSITE wwwstokvisboilerscom

JULY 1999

Page 29: ECONOAIR 3000S SERIES AIR HANDLING UNIT DIRECT FIREDstokvisboilers.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/EconoAir... · 2019-05-10 · ECONOAIR 3000S SERIES AIR HANDLING UNIT DIRECT FIRED

6 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 3000S

61 AIR HANDLER START-UP

1 Open all manual gas valves both on the appliance and on the supply to the appliance Switch on the Electric Supply to the appliance

2 On the main air handler panel

Switch the panel isolator to the 1 position

Check POWER ON light

3 On the remote control station

For Heating Switch the SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch to WINTER

The air handler will now start automatically in response to the time settings

In the event of LOCKOUT

Press the RESET button and the cycle of operations will be repeated If the air handler goes to LOCKOUT four times in succession call for a Service Engineer

For Unheated Ventilation Switch the SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch to SUMMER

Note This prevents the burner firing giving a controlled supply of ventilation air to the heated space as long as the switch is in this position The air handler will now start automatically in response to the timeclock demand To turn the fan off return the switch to the centre OFF position

In the event of LOCKOUT

Press the RESET button and the cycle of operations will be repeated If the air handler goes to LOCKOUT four times in succession call for a Service Engineer

62 AIR HANDLER SHUTDOWN

621 SHUTDOWN FOR SHORT PERIODS

Switch the SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch on the remote station to OFF

622 SHUTDOWN FOR PROLONGED PERIODS

Switch the main panel isolator to the 0 position and close all manual gas valves both on and leading to the appliance

Note Manual gas valves should only be operated when the appliance is to be shut off for either Servicing or for a prolonged shutdown

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 25

30005 6 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

63 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS

631 SITE CLEARANCE ADJACENT TO AIR HANDLER

Attention should be paid to keeping the area around the air handler tidy No rubbish should be allowed to accumulate in the vicinity of the air handler and storage of goods etc should not be permitted within two metres of the air handler Failure to comply could result in reduced airflow to the air handler causing inefficient running and potential overheat cond ition

632 AIR SUPPLY TO AIR HANDLER

Air vents and grilles supplying air to the air handler should never be blocked and should be checked periodically to ensure they are clear

633 AIR FILTERS

Similarly attention should be paid to cleaning or replacing the filters to the air handler if fitted Your installer should advise you on the frequency with which this would be required to be completed

634 SERVICE

For continued safe and efficient operation of this air air handler it is important that servicing of the air handler should be completed at regular intervals by a competent person in accordance with Section 82 of this manual Users are advised to enter into a Service Agreement with RS STOKVIS Ltd

635 SPARE PARTS

It is suggested that a complete set of spare parts essential to the running of the air handler and recommended by the installer are kept by the user on the premises where the air handler is installed This is particularly important where the air handler forms an essential part of any process plant and its being out of operation may cause problems by for example frost damage or condensation by super-cooling

A list of Recommended Spares will be found in Section 9 of this manual

636 GAS LEAKS

If a smell of gas is detected around the area of the appliance Switch off all manual gas valves and contact your service engineer or the local gas undertaking

NEVER

LOOK FOR GAS LEAKS WITH A LIGHTED MATCH OR NAKED

FLAME

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 26

7 FAULT FINDING 30008

The main control panel incorporates two lights to help in fault finding

POWER ON

LOCKOUT

The remote station also has three lights

AIR FAN ON

BURNER ON

LOCKOUT

This section gives the possible causes of failure associated with each check light The electrical schematic diagram in this manual and the wiring diagram shipped in the main air handler panel should be used in conjunction with the notes below Additionally Service Engineers should familiarise themselves with the detailed Start Sequence given in Appendix 2 of this manual

The notes are given for each light before consulting the notes check for bulb failure

71 POWER ON LIGHT IS UNLIT

Check

1 Main control panel isolator is in the 1 position

2 Main Panel 6A MCB has not tripped if a trip has occurred the switch will be at the OFF position Reset and test system as required

3 Also check if the mains electrical supply is isolated If so FIND OUT WHY before taking any action

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 27

7 FAULT FINDING 30005

72 AIR FAN ON LIGHT IS UNLIT

Check

1 SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch is not in Position OFF

2 Timeperiod is not set to off

3 Air handler is not at LOCKOUT

4 Recheck both AIR FAN ON and LOCKOUT bulbs

Two fault indications are possible

1 THE FAN IS NOT OPERATING

If the fan should have started but is not operating

Check 1 Overload for tripped conditions Reset the overload and monitor the next start-up

2 Motor Fuses

3 Relays 1 2 amp3 for failure

laClor CC1 for failure

5 Air Pressure Switch (DPS) is failed in the N 0 Position

Replace the faulty component as described in Section 8

2 THE FAN IS OPERATING

This indicates that the air pressure switch (DPS) has failed to change over

Measure the profile plate differential pressure as described in Section 4113 If the pressure is correct the air pressure switch is faulty Check the switch as in 4114 If the pressure is not correct

Check 1 Correct fan belt tension

2 Correct fan rotation

3 The air handler air inlets and discharge are not blocked

4 Correct fitting on filters

5 The air differential pressure switch impulse lines are not blocked or leaking

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 28

7 FAULT FINDING 30008

73 LOCKOUT LIGHT IS ILLUMINATED

This light indicates a failure in the burner ignition and flame supervision system

RESET the unit and follow the progress of the start sequence The full cycle may take two minutes

1

------t

2 LOCKOUT after 35-40 seconds indicates an ignition failure RESET the system and observe the pilot and ignition spark during the start-up attempt

I-- shy

3 Observe the spark This should be strong and highly visible If not remove and clean the spark plug as Section 82 Check that the spark plug gap is correctly set at 15 mm

-- shy

4 Check the pilot flame If the pilot flame ignites and the unit goes to LOCKOUT the scanning system is at fault Remove and clean the detector as Section 82 Check the flame signal as in Section 431

5 If the pilot does not light the gas supply system is faulty Check the pilot system for restriction and the pilot valve operation

6 If the pilot lights and the unit goes to LOCKOUT after the main gas valves are addressed either the flow control valve is blocked or one of the main gas block valves has failed Fit a manometer on the pressure test point on the outlet flange of the multishyfunctional control and observe if the pressure rises when the main gas valves are addressed No pressure rise will indicate failure of the main gas valves

74 AIR FAN ON LIGHT ILLUMINATED

If the burner does not start check

1 SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch is in WINTER position

2 Overheat Limit Control

These interlocks prevent the burner management system starting

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 29

8 SERVICING 3000S

IMPORTANT Servicing and maintenance should be only carried out by a RS STOKVIS Ltd approved engineer

Only use replacement parts provided by the appliance manufacturer

Check that the air openings for combustion and for ventilation of any plant roon or compartment are clear

81 ISOLATION

811 FUEL GAS ISOLATION

The fuel gas to the ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler should be isolated and locked off at the manual ball valve mounted at the start of the fuel gas line Additionally before entering or servicing the air handler the burner manual isolation valve and pilot line isolation valve should be closed

812 ELECTRICAL ISOLATION

All electric power to the air handler and the remote control station is switched through the local isolator This isolator is fitted with a lock facility to permit it to be locked in the OFF position

Additionally isolate the power at the Wall Isolator

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 30

8 SERVICING 30005

82 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE

The air handler should be routinely serviced at the start of each heating season Isolate the air handler as above before servicing Details of access to individual components are given in Section 84 of this manual

1 Remove and clean spark igniter Check that the gap is correctly set at 25 mm Replace every two years

2 Clean the flame detector lens to ensure freedom from dirt and moisture If the cell shows any sign of cracks it should be replaced Routinely replace the cell every two years or after 10000 hours of operation which ever comes first

3 Inspect the entire air handler paint system for general damage Repair as necessary

4 Every two years brush the burner plates and clear the burner holes carefully with a Size 18mm drill for NP II and 20mm drill for NP I

WARNING THE BURNER HOLES MUST NOT BE ENLARGED

5 Inspect and lubricate all damper linkages to ensure freedom of operation Wipe off all excess lubricants to prevent dirt build up on linkage parts

6 Check the fan belt for cracks and splits Check tension The correct tension gives 16mm deflection per metre of span when the belt is centrally loaded with a force of 27N Adjust as necessary

7 Grease both the fan shaft bearings with Mobiith AW2 grease or similar

NEVER use high temperature grease

NEVER mix two different greases within the bearing always flush existing grease out

Note Removing the cover plate on the end of the air handler gains access to the outboard fan bearing

Light to Slow to 0 120 2 to 6 months Clean Dry

Medium Medium 120 200 1 to 2 months

Moderate to Light to Slow to 0 120 1 to 4 weeks Dry

Dirty Medium Medium 120 200 1 to 7 days

Extreme Dirt Dry Light to Slow to 0 200 Daily Flushing out

Medium Medium Dirt

83 ANNUAL SERVICE CHECKS

After Servicing test fire the air handler following the Commissioning Procedure detailed in Section 4 of this manual to ensure correct operation generally Special attention must be paid to the damper system and related controls and interlocks

Additionally check that the fresh air and recirculation air entry path to the air handler has been kept clear and instruct the User of the need for this as necessary

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 31

8 SERVICING 3000S

84 REMOVAL PROCEDURE FOR REPLACEABLE COMPONENTS

IMPORTANT

Turn off the gas at the appliance service valve and the electricity at the main panel and wall isolator before proceeding

841 BURNER

The burner is located inside the air handler casing and is mounted on two brackets from the support straps To remove the burner isolate the air handler as in 81 and undo the union on the fuel gas line adjacent to the burner isolation valve (MV6) and unscrew the main and pilot gas feed pipes from the burner rail Access to the rear of the burner assembly is made by removing the partition plate below the burner separating the fresh air inlet to the burner from the return air inlet compartment This is held in place by screws which engage in captive nuts on the top side of the partition Remove the Flame Detector and pull off the ignition plug cap Disconnect the burner support brackets and remove the burner The burner will easily pass through the access hatch for further strip down Replace in the reverse order soundness test the gas pipework check the burner operation and duty as described in the commissioning section of this manual

842 FLAME DETECTOR

This is a 240 Volt instrument

The flame detector is mounted on the end of the burner rail inside the air handler casing To remove the detector isolate the panel electric supply and lock off Push the scanner towards the burner and rotate to release the bayonet fixing and lift the detector from its mount Remove the two screws holding the detector cover and disconnect the supply leads noting the polarity of the connections

Replace the flame detector in the reverse order ensuring correct polarity of connections Ensure the access panel is securely closed and the retaining nuts are tightened down Check operation by inserting a test meter in the points provided in the main control panel and reading the flame signals during start up to full rate burner operation (See 431) Operate the appliance over six starts for reliability of operation including tum off of start and main gas valves to check for lockout operation

843 IGNITER SPARK PLUG

This is a high tension spark plug

The igniter spark plug is mounted on the end of the burner rail inside the air handler casing To remove the spark plug isolate the air handler as above Enter the service access door Access to the spark plug is made through the profile plate To remove the spark plug pull off the high tension lead and unscrew the plug with a plug spanner

When replacing the spark plug check the plug gap is set at 15mm Check ignition reliability over six start ups

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 32

8 SERVICING 3000S

844 IGNITER SPARK TRANSFORMER

This is a 240 Volt instrument

The ignition transformer is located in a plastic box mounted on the air handler casing adjacent to the main control panel To remove the transformer isolate the air handler as above and unscrew the four retaining screws holding the box lid in place and remove the lid Disconnect the supply cable at the terminal strip and undo the transformer retaining screws The transformer may then be unscrewed from the High Tension cable leading to the spark plug

Replacement is a simple reversal of this procedure

Check ignition reliability over six start ups

845 COMBUSTION AIR PRESSURE SWITCH (DPS)

Note The switch is set and sealed and should be replaced if not operating correctly

This switch is a 240 Volt instrument

The air switch is mounted directly on the air handler casing and can be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove the switch isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the supply cable Break the downstream pipe compression fitting and unscrew the switch housing from its locating fitting Reverse the procedure to replace after ensuring switch setting is as specified in Section 13 of this manual Operate the air handler to ensure reliability of operation over six start ups

846 AIR HANDLER OVERHEAT LIMIT CONTROL

This is a 240 Volt instrument

The overheat limit control can be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove the control isolate the air handler as above and lock off Remove the switch cover Disconnect the supply cable and unscrew the control housing from its locating fitting Reverse the procedure to replace check the switch is set to 50degC Test the switch operation as described in Section 43 over at least three operations

847 AIR FAN AND MOTOR

The air fan motor is a 415 Volt 3 phase motor

The motor and slide rails are easily accessible inside the air handler casing If it is necessary to remove the motor isolate the air handler as above Slacken the fan-belt tension and remove the drive belts Pull the motor away from the air handler casing to make access to the motor terminal box and disconnect the supply cable The motor may now be removed from the unit Following replacement the air handler must be fully re-commissioned as in Section 4

It is unlikely that the air fan will need replacing or servicing If required a full procedure should be obtained from RS STOKVIS Ltd

Replacement must be followed by full re-commissioning as in Section 4

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 33

8 SERVICING 3000S

848 FUEL GAS MULTI-FUNCTIONAL CONTROL - SMALL UNITS

This is a 240 Volt instrument

The fuel gas multi-functional control can be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove the unit isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the Hirschman electric termination Unbolt the control from its flanges and remove

When replacing care must be taken to ensure the flange 0 rings are undamaged and in the correct location Following replacement the air handler must be fully reshycommissioned as in Section 4 including tests for soundness prior to start-up

849 GOVERNOR AND BLOCK VALVES

The block valves are 240 Volt instruments

All these items may be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove any item isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the electric termination to the two block valves the pilot block valve and the flow control block valve Break the two pipe unions and remove the fuel gas line complete for further strip-down

8410 FUEL GAS FLOW CONTROL VALVE

This is a 24 Volt instrument

The fuel gas How control valve can be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove the valve isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the supply cables to the control valve

On small air handlers fitted with a multi-functional control support the multi-functional control and unbolt its discharge flange Break the union downstream of the burner isolation valve and remove the section of line containing the flow control valve for further strip-down

On large air handlers fitted with separate block valves it will be necessary to remove the fuel gas line complete as Section 8410 above

Following replacement re-commission the air handler

Note If the fresh air damper is not in the full open position the heat input must not exceed the maximum heat input at recirculation condition specified in the technical data section of this manual

8411 PILOT GAS GOVERNOR AND BLOCK VALVE

The block valve is a 240 Volt instrument

Both items may be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove either item isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the electric terrriination to the solenoid valve Undo the upstream pipe union and the compression fitting downstream of the manual block valve (PV3) Remove the pilot gas line complete for further strip down

Replace broken or distorted connections and retest for soundness Ensure the pilot gas pressure is correct and the flame is sensing an output Ensure reliability over six start-ups

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 34

8 SERVICING 3000S

8412 BELT TENSIONING PROCEDURE

The setting tensions are designed to cover a wide range of drives A precise setting force for individual applications can be calculated as detailed

SETTING FORCES

Belt Section

Setting Force To Deflect Belt 16mm per Metre Of Span

Small Pulley Diameter (mm)

Basic Setting Forces Newtons (N) Kilograms (kgf)

125 x Setting Forces Newtons (N) Kilograms (kgf)

SPZ

56 to 71 16 16 20 20 75 to 90 18 18 22 22

95 to 125 20 20 25 25 Over 125 22 22 28 28

SPA

80 to 100 22 22 28 28 106 to 140 30 30 38 38 150 to 200 36 37 45 46 Over 200 40 40 50 51

SPB

112 to 160 40 40 50 51 170 to 224 50 51 62 63 236 to 355 62 63 77 79 Over 355 65 66 81 83

SPC 224 to 250 70 71 87 89 265 to 355 92 94 115 120 Over 375 115 120 144 150

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 35

8 SERVICING 3000S

BELT TENSIONING USING FENNER BELT TENSION INDICATOR

Calculate the deflection in mm on a basis of 16mm per metre of centre distance Centre Distance (m) x 16 =Deflection (mm)

Set lower marker ring at the deflection distance required in mm on the lower scale

Set upper ring against to bottom edge of the top tube

Place the belt tension indicator on top of the belt at the centre of span and apply a force at right angles to the belt defecting it to the point where the lower marker ring is level with the top of the adjacent belt

Read off the force value indicated by the top edge of the upper marker ring

Compare this force to the kgf value shown in the table above

If a Fenner Belt Tension Indicator is not available a spring balance and rule will be suffice

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 36

8 SERVICING 30005

85 MAIN PANEL CONTROLS

All panel controls are readily accessible and may be easily exchanged for replacement components in the event of failure Ensure any replacement item is of the same make and type as the original

851 LANDIS amp GYR LFL 1335 AUTOMATIC SEQUENCE CONTROLLER

The Landis amp Gyr Automatic Sequence Controller is a plug-in unit locating on a pre-wired chassis To remove the controller undo the two retaining screws at the top left and lower right corners and pull the module off the chassis

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

852 CONTROLS CIRCUIT (24 VOLT) TRANSFORMER

The Controls Circuit Transformer is fixed to the panel back plate by tapped screws To remove the transformer undo the wiring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel Undo the two retaining screws and remove the unit complete

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

853 CONTROL RELAYS R1 R2 amp R3

The Control Relays are DIN Rail mounted To remove a relay undo the wIring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel Release the DIN rail retaining clip under the relay with a screwdriver and remove the relay

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

854 6A MCB

The 6A MCB is DIN Rail mounted To remove the MCB undo the wiring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel Release the DIN rail retaining clip under the MCB with a screwdriver and remove the MCB

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

855 THERMAL OVERLOAD

The thermal overload is attached to the underside of the main contactor To remove the overload undo the wiring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel and that the overload setting is as specified in Section 13 of this manual Unscrew the three connections to the contactor and remove the overload

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 37

8 SERVICING 3000S

856 MAIN CONTACTOR

The Main Contactor is DIN Rail mounted To remove the contactor remove the thermal overload as 855 above and then undo the wiring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel Release the DIN rail retaining clip under the contactor with a screwdriver and remove the contactor

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

857 MOTOR FUSE

To replace a motor fuse pull the fuse carrier off the fuse holder base The fuse is attached to the fuse carrier by two screws Unscrew remove and replace

86 REMOTE CONTROL STATION

The remote control station contains some serviceable parts although these items should only be fitted by an approved RS STOKVIS Ltd Engineer

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 38

9 RECOMMENDED SPARES 3000S

For two years operation it is recommended that the following items should be held in stock

ITEM DESCRIPTION PART NO QUANTITY i

1 INDICATOR BULBS W1121 1 PACK

2 SPARK PLUG 023739 1 I

3 UVDETECTOR QRA10C 1 I

4 ROOM SENSOR DRT2453 1

5 DUCT SENSOR DDT1701 1

All replacement parts can be obtained from RS STOKVIS Ltd by quoting the air handler serial number the part number and description

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 39

APPENDIX 1 30005

SOUNDNESS TESTING THE FUEL GAS PIPEWORK

This procedure should only be carried out by personnel familiar with the ECONO-AIR 3000S Series Air handler

The pressure test points and all valves are identified on the Process and Instrumentation Diagram for the air handler included in Section 1 of this n1anual

Isolate the air handler electric supply at the main control panel and lock off Close the manual isolation valves MV1 MV6 and PV3 Ensure the supply pressure is available on the upstream side of MV1

A11 TESTING THE UPSTREAM PIPEWORKAND BURNER CONTROLS 1 Connect a 60 mbar manometer to the pressure test nipple A Monitor the

pressure for two minutes Any rise in pressure indicates that valve MV1 is leaking and must be replaced Remove pressure test points Band F

2 Open MV1 to pressurise the pipework on both the main gas and pilot line to the first block valve

3 Close MV1 Allow one minute for the temperature to stabilise and then test the system for 2 minutes and watch for a drop in the pipework pressure If the pressure falls open valve MV1 and test the pipework connections and valves from MV1 to MV3 and MV1 to PV2 for leaks with a proprietary leak detector fluid or spray Turn off MV1 seal any leaks and re-test

4 If no extemalleaks are found either the pilot block valve PV1 or either the first main gas block valve MV3 is letting by

5 To test this seal pressure test point A and fit a manometer to pressure test point B Leave for two minutes with MV1 open A rise in pressure on the manometer confirms a leak on the block valve MV3 Turn off MV1 exchange the valve and re-test from point 2 above

6 Repeat this procedure for the pilot block valve Seal test point B and fit a manometer to pressure test point F Leave for two minutes with MV1 open A rise in pressure on the manometer confirms a leak on the pilot block valve PV2 Turn off MV1 exchange the valve and re-test from point 1 above Seal test point F

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 40

APPENDIX 1 30005

A12 TESTING THE DOWNSTREAM BURNER VALVE 1 Close MV1 and connect pressure test points A and 8 with flexible 6 mm bore

tubing teed into the manometer Remove pressure test point C Open MV1 to pressurise the downstream block valve MV4

2 Close MV1 and leave for one minute for the temperature to stabilise Monitor the pressure for 2 minutes If the pressure falls open valve MV1 and leak test the line between the two block valves MV3 and MV4 with a proprietary leak detector Turn off MV1 seal any leaks and re-test Note Smaller air handlers in the 3000S Series are fitted with multi-functional valves combining the pressure regulator and two block valves in one component The above procedure still applies but if a leak is found on either block valve the whole control should be replaced If no external leaks are found the downstream block valve is letting by

3 To confirm this close MV1 remove the manometer and refit to pressure test point C Connect pressure test points A and 8 with flexible 6mm bore tubing Open MV1 and allow one minute for the temperature to stabilise Monitor the pressure for a further 2 minutes with MV1 still open A rise in pressure confirms that the second block valve MV4 is letting by Turn off MV1 Replace the valve and re-test from 2 above

A13 TESTING THE DOWNSTREAM BURNER PIPEWORK 1 Close MV1 and connect pressure test points A and D with flexible 6 mm bore

tubing teed into the manometer Open MV1 to pressurise the downstream pilot pipework

2 Close MV1 and leave for one minute for the temperature to stabilise Monitor the pressure for 2 minutes If the pressure falls open valve MV1 and leak test the line between the downstream block valve MV4 and the manual block MV6 with a proprietary leak detector fluid or spray If no external leaks are found the manual block valve MV6 is letting by Turn off MV1 seal any leakages and reshytest from 2 above

A14 TESTING THE DOWNSTREAM PILOT PIPEWORK 1 Close MV1 and connect pressure test points A and F with flexible 6mm bore

tubing teed into the manometer Open MV1 to pressurise the downstream pilot pipework

2 Close MV1 and leave for one rninute for the temperature to stabilise Monitor the pressure for 2 minutes If the pressure falls open valve MV1 and leak test the line between the downstream block valve PV2 and the manual block PV3 with a proprietary leak detector fluid or spray If no external leaks are found the manual block valve PV3 is letting by Turn off MV1 seal any leakages and reshytest from 2 above

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 41

APPENDIX 1 30005

A15 TESTING THE BURNER CONNECTIONS 1 Remove the burner access panel as described in Section 84 of this manual

Remove the burner spark igniter Slacken the two retaining bolts holding the burner to the burner support straps and unbolt the burner supply endplate from the burner casting and mixing plates

2 Connect pressure test points A and 0 with flexible 6mm bore tubing teed into the manometer Open MV1 and MV6 to pressurise the burner pipework Leak test the main gas burner pipework and connections with proprietary leak detector fluid Turn off MV6 Seal any leakages and re-test

3 Connect pressure test points A and F with flexible 6 mm bore tubing teed into the manometer Open MV1 and PV3 to pressurise the pilot burner pipework Leak test the pilot gas burner pipework and connections with proprietary leak detector fluid Turn off PV3 Seal any leakages and re-test

4 Turn off MV1

5 Replace the spark igniter and profile division plate

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 42

APPENDIX 2 30005

START SEQUENCE

The burner start sequence is controlled by the Landis and Gyr burner management unit The timings are pre-set and comply with 885885 This unit must NOT be tampered with

A brief description of the start-up sequence isshy

The unit checks

1 The NO FLAME signal on the UV flame scanner

Note If the scanner detects a flame at any time other than in the correct operating sequence the flame programmer initiates a lockout

2 The operation of the combustion air proving switch in the NO AIR position

3 The air handler discharge high temperature switch

If the checks are completed the unit starts the combustion air fan and then checks the combustion airflow

Once the airflow is proven the unit checks that the damper control circuit is functioning correctly After the damper microswitch is made to prove the fresh air damper is fully open the sequence allows 30 seconds for the combustion air to purge any combustible gas from the air handler

After completion of the purge the spark ignition system is energised the pilot valve opened and the spark terminated If the pilot flame is not proven by the UV scanner the system will initiate a LOCKOUT

If the flame is proven the main gas valves are opened the pilot extinguished and the main burner flame proven

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 43

i

APPENDIX 2 30008

The following flow chart shows the complete start sequence including the lighting of the various indicating lamps

MANUAL STATUS LIGHT POWER ON

POWER ON

I INITIATE START BY TIME

SETTING ON CONTROLLER

I CHECK NO FLAME

VISIBLE

PROVEj FAIL LOCKOUT

I CHECK RELAY R4 NC

POSITION

PROVE FAIL NO START

I CHECK AIR PRESSURE SWITCH NC POSITION

PROVE FAIL NO START

I CHECK RELAY R1 NC

POSITION

PROVE j

FAIL NO START

I START COMBUSTION

AIR BLOWER

I CHECK AIR PRESSURE SWITCH NO POSITION

PROVE I

FAIL NO START

I STATUS LIGHT FAN ON

I ENERGISE RELAY R1

I

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 44

I

I

APPENDIX 2 30008

I CHECK OVERHEAT LIMIT

CONTROL R5

PROVE I

FAIL I I

CHECK 541412 LOOP CLOSED ON

LANDIS ampGYR CIRCUIT

PROVE I

FAIL I I

COMBUSTION AIR PURGE PERIOD

30 SECONDS

I

NO START

NO START

CANCEL NO FLAME CHECK CIRCUIT

I

ENERGISE SPARK

I TIMED PERIOD 25 SECONDS

I ENERGISE PILOT GAS

VALVE

I TIMED PERIOD 25 SECONDS

I TERMINATE SPARK

I INTERROGATE UV FLAME SCANNER

PROVE I

FAIL I I

TIMED PERIOD 10 SECONDS

I

LOCKOUT

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 45

I

I

APPENDIX 2 3000S

I ENERGISE MAIN GAS

VALVES

I

STATUS LIGHT BURNER ON

I TIMED PERIOD

5 SECONDS

I DE-ENERGISE PILOT

GAS VALVES

CONTINUOUS FROM PILOT

I INTERROGATE UV FLAME SCANNER

PROVE I

FAIL I I

LOCKOUT I

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 46

APPENDIX 3 30005

Please see copy of Standard Service Sheet

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 47

APPENDIX 4 30005

A41 TIME OUT SCREEN

This is the standard screen displayed when the touch screen is not in use The back light is off to save energy_ To access the STATUS screen touch the ENTER key and the following screen is displayed

[]][I][]rn[IJOO[][IJOO[] EJ~E11 I[]I ~ middot I

NOTE

The Touch Screen operates using the heat produced by the touch of a finger and therefore only LIGHT pressure is required

Excessive pressure can damage the Touch Screen

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 48

APPENDIX 4 30008

A42 STATUS SCREEN

On the typical STATUS screen the illustrated information detailed is as follows

19 36 Fan Brn

RS OS

100 Fst_~_ Lck _ _ Xst Gas~o ~ I

RS Indicates the current room temperature

OS ~( t~~ the current duct discharge temperature

Fan Indicates the current status of the fan by showing the arrow and the fan blades for ON and OFF is shown by the arrow and fan blades being removed

Brn Indicates the current status of the burner with the black flames indicating the burner to be ON and vice versa

Lck LOCKOUT - This indicates a flame failure when highlighted during normal or start-up operation

Xst EXCESS TEMPERATURE SWITCH - This indicates the unit has reached the trip limit on the over heat stat when highlighted during operation

Indicates the current position of the gas modulating valve during normal Gas

operation (0-100)

Indicates whether the Frost stat is energised and the unit is running on frost Fst

override

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 49

APPENDIX 4 30008

A43 CHANGING SETTINGS

It is possible to change the settings for the time of operation and the required temperature set points The following details the steps required

A44 ENTERING THE SECURITY CODE

From the STATUS screen touch the return key and the screen below will be displayed

Type the HIGH LEVEL security code (4321) If you make a mistake use the BACK SPACE key to delete any incorrect number(s) Touch the ENTER key when the code is correct

If the security code is incorrect the screen above will be displayed then try again If after several attempts you can not gain access please contact RS STOKVIS Ltd for further information

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 50

APPENDIX 4 30008

When the code is entered correctly the MAIN MENU is displayed as detailed below

~ STATUS SET VALUES~ ~ TIVIE CLOCK [) [) [) [) [)

The MAIN MENU screen shows the three menu items available The title for each menu item can be changed to suit the end user Please notify RS STOKVIS Ltd prior to commissioning should these parameters require special amendments

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 51

APPENDIX 4 30008

A45 CHANGING OR SETTING A TIME SCHEDULE

From the main menu screen select the TIME CLOCK page by running finger across screen symbol and touch the ENTER key the screen below will be displayed

On the following screen highlight the TS1 symbol and touch the ENTER key

The current time schedule will now be displayed as shown below The display will automatically default to the current day (1 =Monday 2 =Tuesday etc) In this case day 5 (Friday) the four schedule switching times refer to that day

IAC6BBB1BHIS1

mm0CIl bull mID 17BB 17BB 17HB

Iillleschedule

To modify a time select it by highlighting and touch the ENTER key and the following screen is displayed

To amend the appropriate onoff time as shown on the screen below The arrows to the right of the time are for altering the hours and the arrows on the left for the minutes

Once you have set the time use the ESCape key to exit back to the time schedule screen and choose another day by touching the required number Another time may now be modified as before

IAC6BBB1BHIS1

H8BH

I i eschedule

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 52

APPENDIX 4 30008

Use the ESCape key to exit back to the MAIN MENU screen

~ STATUS ~ SET VALUES

TIME CLOCK []~ [] [] [] []

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 53

APPENDIX 4 30005

A46 CHANGING SET VALUES

From the main menu screen select the SET VALUES page by highlight in the normal way and touch the ENTER key

The following screen is displayed

36 19 18III III IIIHsv Rsv Llv

To change the RSV highlight it in the normal way and touch the ENTER key and the screen below will now be shown

IAC6RRR1RR40 T I

0 19 (Y)l RSV

ROOM SET VALUE

The above screen shows the parameters that can be changed The values to the far left are the limitations of set point (OC) Change the set point by using the UP and DOWN ARROWS on the left of the screen or touch the set value itself followed by the ENTER key to select the set value and set it directly using the numeric keyboard All values can be changed in this way

Use the ESCape key twice to exit back to the MAIN MENU screen

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 54

APPENDIX 4 30005

A47 COMMISSIONING AND SERVICING BURNER CHECKS

Select the SET VALUES screen from the MAIN MENU screen and adjust the high lirrlit set point to 55degC to drive the burner to high fire

IAC6HHH1HH60 ~T I

0 19 (Y)

HSV

HIGH SET VALUE ~

Ensure the set value is returned to 36degC once the appropriate checks and adjustments as described in Section 43 of this manual have been completed Return to the SET VALUES screen and select the low limit value to adjust the low fire setting

Reduce the low limit value to OdegC to drive the gas valve to low fire and complete the appropriate checks and adjustments as described in Section 43 of this manual and ensure the set value is returned to the original value

A48 GMT ltgt BST CHANGEOVER DAYLIGHT SAVINGS

To change your unit to British Summer TimelWinter Time the following system screen must be highlighted by touching the Iamp1 button twice

By touching the clock symbol in the top left hand corner followed by the ENTER key the screen below will be displayed

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 55

APPENDIX 4 30008

188311 851193

544

By touching and highlighting in this case 18 followed by the ENTER key A small box allowing the entry of two digits will appear Enter the desired time required using the numbered keys followed by ENTER key Your unit is now set to operate on BSTBWT

Touch the ESC key three times to return back to the Status screen

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 56

STOKVIS ENERGY SYSTEMS 96R WALTON ROAD EAST MOLESEY SURREY KT8 0DL TEL 020 8783 3050 08707 707 747 FAX 020 8783 3051 08707 707 767 E-MAIL infostokvisboilerscom WEBSITE wwwstokvisboilerscom

JULY 1999

Page 30: ECONOAIR 3000S SERIES AIR HANDLING UNIT DIRECT FIREDstokvisboilers.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/EconoAir... · 2019-05-10 · ECONOAIR 3000S SERIES AIR HANDLING UNIT DIRECT FIRED

30005 6 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

63 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS

631 SITE CLEARANCE ADJACENT TO AIR HANDLER

Attention should be paid to keeping the area around the air handler tidy No rubbish should be allowed to accumulate in the vicinity of the air handler and storage of goods etc should not be permitted within two metres of the air handler Failure to comply could result in reduced airflow to the air handler causing inefficient running and potential overheat cond ition

632 AIR SUPPLY TO AIR HANDLER

Air vents and grilles supplying air to the air handler should never be blocked and should be checked periodically to ensure they are clear

633 AIR FILTERS

Similarly attention should be paid to cleaning or replacing the filters to the air handler if fitted Your installer should advise you on the frequency with which this would be required to be completed

634 SERVICE

For continued safe and efficient operation of this air air handler it is important that servicing of the air handler should be completed at regular intervals by a competent person in accordance with Section 82 of this manual Users are advised to enter into a Service Agreement with RS STOKVIS Ltd

635 SPARE PARTS

It is suggested that a complete set of spare parts essential to the running of the air handler and recommended by the installer are kept by the user on the premises where the air handler is installed This is particularly important where the air handler forms an essential part of any process plant and its being out of operation may cause problems by for example frost damage or condensation by super-cooling

A list of Recommended Spares will be found in Section 9 of this manual

636 GAS LEAKS

If a smell of gas is detected around the area of the appliance Switch off all manual gas valves and contact your service engineer or the local gas undertaking

NEVER

LOOK FOR GAS LEAKS WITH A LIGHTED MATCH OR NAKED

FLAME

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 26

7 FAULT FINDING 30008

The main control panel incorporates two lights to help in fault finding

POWER ON

LOCKOUT

The remote station also has three lights

AIR FAN ON

BURNER ON

LOCKOUT

This section gives the possible causes of failure associated with each check light The electrical schematic diagram in this manual and the wiring diagram shipped in the main air handler panel should be used in conjunction with the notes below Additionally Service Engineers should familiarise themselves with the detailed Start Sequence given in Appendix 2 of this manual

The notes are given for each light before consulting the notes check for bulb failure

71 POWER ON LIGHT IS UNLIT

Check

1 Main control panel isolator is in the 1 position

2 Main Panel 6A MCB has not tripped if a trip has occurred the switch will be at the OFF position Reset and test system as required

3 Also check if the mains electrical supply is isolated If so FIND OUT WHY before taking any action

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 27

7 FAULT FINDING 30005

72 AIR FAN ON LIGHT IS UNLIT

Check

1 SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch is not in Position OFF

2 Timeperiod is not set to off

3 Air handler is not at LOCKOUT

4 Recheck both AIR FAN ON and LOCKOUT bulbs

Two fault indications are possible

1 THE FAN IS NOT OPERATING

If the fan should have started but is not operating

Check 1 Overload for tripped conditions Reset the overload and monitor the next start-up

2 Motor Fuses

3 Relays 1 2 amp3 for failure

laClor CC1 for failure

5 Air Pressure Switch (DPS) is failed in the N 0 Position

Replace the faulty component as described in Section 8

2 THE FAN IS OPERATING

This indicates that the air pressure switch (DPS) has failed to change over

Measure the profile plate differential pressure as described in Section 4113 If the pressure is correct the air pressure switch is faulty Check the switch as in 4114 If the pressure is not correct

Check 1 Correct fan belt tension

2 Correct fan rotation

3 The air handler air inlets and discharge are not blocked

4 Correct fitting on filters

5 The air differential pressure switch impulse lines are not blocked or leaking

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 28

7 FAULT FINDING 30008

73 LOCKOUT LIGHT IS ILLUMINATED

This light indicates a failure in the burner ignition and flame supervision system

RESET the unit and follow the progress of the start sequence The full cycle may take two minutes

1

------t

2 LOCKOUT after 35-40 seconds indicates an ignition failure RESET the system and observe the pilot and ignition spark during the start-up attempt

I-- shy

3 Observe the spark This should be strong and highly visible If not remove and clean the spark plug as Section 82 Check that the spark plug gap is correctly set at 15 mm

-- shy

4 Check the pilot flame If the pilot flame ignites and the unit goes to LOCKOUT the scanning system is at fault Remove and clean the detector as Section 82 Check the flame signal as in Section 431

5 If the pilot does not light the gas supply system is faulty Check the pilot system for restriction and the pilot valve operation

6 If the pilot lights and the unit goes to LOCKOUT after the main gas valves are addressed either the flow control valve is blocked or one of the main gas block valves has failed Fit a manometer on the pressure test point on the outlet flange of the multishyfunctional control and observe if the pressure rises when the main gas valves are addressed No pressure rise will indicate failure of the main gas valves

74 AIR FAN ON LIGHT ILLUMINATED

If the burner does not start check

1 SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch is in WINTER position

2 Overheat Limit Control

These interlocks prevent the burner management system starting

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 29

8 SERVICING 3000S

IMPORTANT Servicing and maintenance should be only carried out by a RS STOKVIS Ltd approved engineer

Only use replacement parts provided by the appliance manufacturer

Check that the air openings for combustion and for ventilation of any plant roon or compartment are clear

81 ISOLATION

811 FUEL GAS ISOLATION

The fuel gas to the ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler should be isolated and locked off at the manual ball valve mounted at the start of the fuel gas line Additionally before entering or servicing the air handler the burner manual isolation valve and pilot line isolation valve should be closed

812 ELECTRICAL ISOLATION

All electric power to the air handler and the remote control station is switched through the local isolator This isolator is fitted with a lock facility to permit it to be locked in the OFF position

Additionally isolate the power at the Wall Isolator

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 30

8 SERVICING 30005

82 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE

The air handler should be routinely serviced at the start of each heating season Isolate the air handler as above before servicing Details of access to individual components are given in Section 84 of this manual

1 Remove and clean spark igniter Check that the gap is correctly set at 25 mm Replace every two years

2 Clean the flame detector lens to ensure freedom from dirt and moisture If the cell shows any sign of cracks it should be replaced Routinely replace the cell every two years or after 10000 hours of operation which ever comes first

3 Inspect the entire air handler paint system for general damage Repair as necessary

4 Every two years brush the burner plates and clear the burner holes carefully with a Size 18mm drill for NP II and 20mm drill for NP I

WARNING THE BURNER HOLES MUST NOT BE ENLARGED

5 Inspect and lubricate all damper linkages to ensure freedom of operation Wipe off all excess lubricants to prevent dirt build up on linkage parts

6 Check the fan belt for cracks and splits Check tension The correct tension gives 16mm deflection per metre of span when the belt is centrally loaded with a force of 27N Adjust as necessary

7 Grease both the fan shaft bearings with Mobiith AW2 grease or similar

NEVER use high temperature grease

NEVER mix two different greases within the bearing always flush existing grease out

Note Removing the cover plate on the end of the air handler gains access to the outboard fan bearing

Light to Slow to 0 120 2 to 6 months Clean Dry

Medium Medium 120 200 1 to 2 months

Moderate to Light to Slow to 0 120 1 to 4 weeks Dry

Dirty Medium Medium 120 200 1 to 7 days

Extreme Dirt Dry Light to Slow to 0 200 Daily Flushing out

Medium Medium Dirt

83 ANNUAL SERVICE CHECKS

After Servicing test fire the air handler following the Commissioning Procedure detailed in Section 4 of this manual to ensure correct operation generally Special attention must be paid to the damper system and related controls and interlocks

Additionally check that the fresh air and recirculation air entry path to the air handler has been kept clear and instruct the User of the need for this as necessary

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 31

8 SERVICING 3000S

84 REMOVAL PROCEDURE FOR REPLACEABLE COMPONENTS

IMPORTANT

Turn off the gas at the appliance service valve and the electricity at the main panel and wall isolator before proceeding

841 BURNER

The burner is located inside the air handler casing and is mounted on two brackets from the support straps To remove the burner isolate the air handler as in 81 and undo the union on the fuel gas line adjacent to the burner isolation valve (MV6) and unscrew the main and pilot gas feed pipes from the burner rail Access to the rear of the burner assembly is made by removing the partition plate below the burner separating the fresh air inlet to the burner from the return air inlet compartment This is held in place by screws which engage in captive nuts on the top side of the partition Remove the Flame Detector and pull off the ignition plug cap Disconnect the burner support brackets and remove the burner The burner will easily pass through the access hatch for further strip down Replace in the reverse order soundness test the gas pipework check the burner operation and duty as described in the commissioning section of this manual

842 FLAME DETECTOR

This is a 240 Volt instrument

The flame detector is mounted on the end of the burner rail inside the air handler casing To remove the detector isolate the panel electric supply and lock off Push the scanner towards the burner and rotate to release the bayonet fixing and lift the detector from its mount Remove the two screws holding the detector cover and disconnect the supply leads noting the polarity of the connections

Replace the flame detector in the reverse order ensuring correct polarity of connections Ensure the access panel is securely closed and the retaining nuts are tightened down Check operation by inserting a test meter in the points provided in the main control panel and reading the flame signals during start up to full rate burner operation (See 431) Operate the appliance over six starts for reliability of operation including tum off of start and main gas valves to check for lockout operation

843 IGNITER SPARK PLUG

This is a high tension spark plug

The igniter spark plug is mounted on the end of the burner rail inside the air handler casing To remove the spark plug isolate the air handler as above Enter the service access door Access to the spark plug is made through the profile plate To remove the spark plug pull off the high tension lead and unscrew the plug with a plug spanner

When replacing the spark plug check the plug gap is set at 15mm Check ignition reliability over six start ups

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 32

8 SERVICING 3000S

844 IGNITER SPARK TRANSFORMER

This is a 240 Volt instrument

The ignition transformer is located in a plastic box mounted on the air handler casing adjacent to the main control panel To remove the transformer isolate the air handler as above and unscrew the four retaining screws holding the box lid in place and remove the lid Disconnect the supply cable at the terminal strip and undo the transformer retaining screws The transformer may then be unscrewed from the High Tension cable leading to the spark plug

Replacement is a simple reversal of this procedure

Check ignition reliability over six start ups

845 COMBUSTION AIR PRESSURE SWITCH (DPS)

Note The switch is set and sealed and should be replaced if not operating correctly

This switch is a 240 Volt instrument

The air switch is mounted directly on the air handler casing and can be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove the switch isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the supply cable Break the downstream pipe compression fitting and unscrew the switch housing from its locating fitting Reverse the procedure to replace after ensuring switch setting is as specified in Section 13 of this manual Operate the air handler to ensure reliability of operation over six start ups

846 AIR HANDLER OVERHEAT LIMIT CONTROL

This is a 240 Volt instrument

The overheat limit control can be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove the control isolate the air handler as above and lock off Remove the switch cover Disconnect the supply cable and unscrew the control housing from its locating fitting Reverse the procedure to replace check the switch is set to 50degC Test the switch operation as described in Section 43 over at least three operations

847 AIR FAN AND MOTOR

The air fan motor is a 415 Volt 3 phase motor

The motor and slide rails are easily accessible inside the air handler casing If it is necessary to remove the motor isolate the air handler as above Slacken the fan-belt tension and remove the drive belts Pull the motor away from the air handler casing to make access to the motor terminal box and disconnect the supply cable The motor may now be removed from the unit Following replacement the air handler must be fully re-commissioned as in Section 4

It is unlikely that the air fan will need replacing or servicing If required a full procedure should be obtained from RS STOKVIS Ltd

Replacement must be followed by full re-commissioning as in Section 4

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 33

8 SERVICING 3000S

848 FUEL GAS MULTI-FUNCTIONAL CONTROL - SMALL UNITS

This is a 240 Volt instrument

The fuel gas multi-functional control can be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove the unit isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the Hirschman electric termination Unbolt the control from its flanges and remove

When replacing care must be taken to ensure the flange 0 rings are undamaged and in the correct location Following replacement the air handler must be fully reshycommissioned as in Section 4 including tests for soundness prior to start-up

849 GOVERNOR AND BLOCK VALVES

The block valves are 240 Volt instruments

All these items may be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove any item isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the electric termination to the two block valves the pilot block valve and the flow control block valve Break the two pipe unions and remove the fuel gas line complete for further strip-down

8410 FUEL GAS FLOW CONTROL VALVE

This is a 24 Volt instrument

The fuel gas How control valve can be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove the valve isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the supply cables to the control valve

On small air handlers fitted with a multi-functional control support the multi-functional control and unbolt its discharge flange Break the union downstream of the burner isolation valve and remove the section of line containing the flow control valve for further strip-down

On large air handlers fitted with separate block valves it will be necessary to remove the fuel gas line complete as Section 8410 above

Following replacement re-commission the air handler

Note If the fresh air damper is not in the full open position the heat input must not exceed the maximum heat input at recirculation condition specified in the technical data section of this manual

8411 PILOT GAS GOVERNOR AND BLOCK VALVE

The block valve is a 240 Volt instrument

Both items may be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove either item isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the electric terrriination to the solenoid valve Undo the upstream pipe union and the compression fitting downstream of the manual block valve (PV3) Remove the pilot gas line complete for further strip down

Replace broken or distorted connections and retest for soundness Ensure the pilot gas pressure is correct and the flame is sensing an output Ensure reliability over six start-ups

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 34

8 SERVICING 3000S

8412 BELT TENSIONING PROCEDURE

The setting tensions are designed to cover a wide range of drives A precise setting force for individual applications can be calculated as detailed

SETTING FORCES

Belt Section

Setting Force To Deflect Belt 16mm per Metre Of Span

Small Pulley Diameter (mm)

Basic Setting Forces Newtons (N) Kilograms (kgf)

125 x Setting Forces Newtons (N) Kilograms (kgf)

SPZ

56 to 71 16 16 20 20 75 to 90 18 18 22 22

95 to 125 20 20 25 25 Over 125 22 22 28 28

SPA

80 to 100 22 22 28 28 106 to 140 30 30 38 38 150 to 200 36 37 45 46 Over 200 40 40 50 51

SPB

112 to 160 40 40 50 51 170 to 224 50 51 62 63 236 to 355 62 63 77 79 Over 355 65 66 81 83

SPC 224 to 250 70 71 87 89 265 to 355 92 94 115 120 Over 375 115 120 144 150

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 35

8 SERVICING 3000S

BELT TENSIONING USING FENNER BELT TENSION INDICATOR

Calculate the deflection in mm on a basis of 16mm per metre of centre distance Centre Distance (m) x 16 =Deflection (mm)

Set lower marker ring at the deflection distance required in mm on the lower scale

Set upper ring against to bottom edge of the top tube

Place the belt tension indicator on top of the belt at the centre of span and apply a force at right angles to the belt defecting it to the point where the lower marker ring is level with the top of the adjacent belt

Read off the force value indicated by the top edge of the upper marker ring

Compare this force to the kgf value shown in the table above

If a Fenner Belt Tension Indicator is not available a spring balance and rule will be suffice

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 36

8 SERVICING 30005

85 MAIN PANEL CONTROLS

All panel controls are readily accessible and may be easily exchanged for replacement components in the event of failure Ensure any replacement item is of the same make and type as the original

851 LANDIS amp GYR LFL 1335 AUTOMATIC SEQUENCE CONTROLLER

The Landis amp Gyr Automatic Sequence Controller is a plug-in unit locating on a pre-wired chassis To remove the controller undo the two retaining screws at the top left and lower right corners and pull the module off the chassis

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

852 CONTROLS CIRCUIT (24 VOLT) TRANSFORMER

The Controls Circuit Transformer is fixed to the panel back plate by tapped screws To remove the transformer undo the wiring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel Undo the two retaining screws and remove the unit complete

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

853 CONTROL RELAYS R1 R2 amp R3

The Control Relays are DIN Rail mounted To remove a relay undo the wIring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel Release the DIN rail retaining clip under the relay with a screwdriver and remove the relay

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

854 6A MCB

The 6A MCB is DIN Rail mounted To remove the MCB undo the wiring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel Release the DIN rail retaining clip under the MCB with a screwdriver and remove the MCB

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

855 THERMAL OVERLOAD

The thermal overload is attached to the underside of the main contactor To remove the overload undo the wiring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel and that the overload setting is as specified in Section 13 of this manual Unscrew the three connections to the contactor and remove the overload

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 37

8 SERVICING 3000S

856 MAIN CONTACTOR

The Main Contactor is DIN Rail mounted To remove the contactor remove the thermal overload as 855 above and then undo the wiring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel Release the DIN rail retaining clip under the contactor with a screwdriver and remove the contactor

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

857 MOTOR FUSE

To replace a motor fuse pull the fuse carrier off the fuse holder base The fuse is attached to the fuse carrier by two screws Unscrew remove and replace

86 REMOTE CONTROL STATION

The remote control station contains some serviceable parts although these items should only be fitted by an approved RS STOKVIS Ltd Engineer

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 38

9 RECOMMENDED SPARES 3000S

For two years operation it is recommended that the following items should be held in stock

ITEM DESCRIPTION PART NO QUANTITY i

1 INDICATOR BULBS W1121 1 PACK

2 SPARK PLUG 023739 1 I

3 UVDETECTOR QRA10C 1 I

4 ROOM SENSOR DRT2453 1

5 DUCT SENSOR DDT1701 1

All replacement parts can be obtained from RS STOKVIS Ltd by quoting the air handler serial number the part number and description

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 39

APPENDIX 1 30005

SOUNDNESS TESTING THE FUEL GAS PIPEWORK

This procedure should only be carried out by personnel familiar with the ECONO-AIR 3000S Series Air handler

The pressure test points and all valves are identified on the Process and Instrumentation Diagram for the air handler included in Section 1 of this n1anual

Isolate the air handler electric supply at the main control panel and lock off Close the manual isolation valves MV1 MV6 and PV3 Ensure the supply pressure is available on the upstream side of MV1

A11 TESTING THE UPSTREAM PIPEWORKAND BURNER CONTROLS 1 Connect a 60 mbar manometer to the pressure test nipple A Monitor the

pressure for two minutes Any rise in pressure indicates that valve MV1 is leaking and must be replaced Remove pressure test points Band F

2 Open MV1 to pressurise the pipework on both the main gas and pilot line to the first block valve

3 Close MV1 Allow one minute for the temperature to stabilise and then test the system for 2 minutes and watch for a drop in the pipework pressure If the pressure falls open valve MV1 and test the pipework connections and valves from MV1 to MV3 and MV1 to PV2 for leaks with a proprietary leak detector fluid or spray Turn off MV1 seal any leaks and re-test

4 If no extemalleaks are found either the pilot block valve PV1 or either the first main gas block valve MV3 is letting by

5 To test this seal pressure test point A and fit a manometer to pressure test point B Leave for two minutes with MV1 open A rise in pressure on the manometer confirms a leak on the block valve MV3 Turn off MV1 exchange the valve and re-test from point 2 above

6 Repeat this procedure for the pilot block valve Seal test point B and fit a manometer to pressure test point F Leave for two minutes with MV1 open A rise in pressure on the manometer confirms a leak on the pilot block valve PV2 Turn off MV1 exchange the valve and re-test from point 1 above Seal test point F

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 40

APPENDIX 1 30005

A12 TESTING THE DOWNSTREAM BURNER VALVE 1 Close MV1 and connect pressure test points A and 8 with flexible 6 mm bore

tubing teed into the manometer Remove pressure test point C Open MV1 to pressurise the downstream block valve MV4

2 Close MV1 and leave for one minute for the temperature to stabilise Monitor the pressure for 2 minutes If the pressure falls open valve MV1 and leak test the line between the two block valves MV3 and MV4 with a proprietary leak detector Turn off MV1 seal any leaks and re-test Note Smaller air handlers in the 3000S Series are fitted with multi-functional valves combining the pressure regulator and two block valves in one component The above procedure still applies but if a leak is found on either block valve the whole control should be replaced If no external leaks are found the downstream block valve is letting by

3 To confirm this close MV1 remove the manometer and refit to pressure test point C Connect pressure test points A and 8 with flexible 6mm bore tubing Open MV1 and allow one minute for the temperature to stabilise Monitor the pressure for a further 2 minutes with MV1 still open A rise in pressure confirms that the second block valve MV4 is letting by Turn off MV1 Replace the valve and re-test from 2 above

A13 TESTING THE DOWNSTREAM BURNER PIPEWORK 1 Close MV1 and connect pressure test points A and D with flexible 6 mm bore

tubing teed into the manometer Open MV1 to pressurise the downstream pilot pipework

2 Close MV1 and leave for one minute for the temperature to stabilise Monitor the pressure for 2 minutes If the pressure falls open valve MV1 and leak test the line between the downstream block valve MV4 and the manual block MV6 with a proprietary leak detector fluid or spray If no external leaks are found the manual block valve MV6 is letting by Turn off MV1 seal any leakages and reshytest from 2 above

A14 TESTING THE DOWNSTREAM PILOT PIPEWORK 1 Close MV1 and connect pressure test points A and F with flexible 6mm bore

tubing teed into the manometer Open MV1 to pressurise the downstream pilot pipework

2 Close MV1 and leave for one rninute for the temperature to stabilise Monitor the pressure for 2 minutes If the pressure falls open valve MV1 and leak test the line between the downstream block valve PV2 and the manual block PV3 with a proprietary leak detector fluid or spray If no external leaks are found the manual block valve PV3 is letting by Turn off MV1 seal any leakages and reshytest from 2 above

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 41

APPENDIX 1 30005

A15 TESTING THE BURNER CONNECTIONS 1 Remove the burner access panel as described in Section 84 of this manual

Remove the burner spark igniter Slacken the two retaining bolts holding the burner to the burner support straps and unbolt the burner supply endplate from the burner casting and mixing plates

2 Connect pressure test points A and 0 with flexible 6mm bore tubing teed into the manometer Open MV1 and MV6 to pressurise the burner pipework Leak test the main gas burner pipework and connections with proprietary leak detector fluid Turn off MV6 Seal any leakages and re-test

3 Connect pressure test points A and F with flexible 6 mm bore tubing teed into the manometer Open MV1 and PV3 to pressurise the pilot burner pipework Leak test the pilot gas burner pipework and connections with proprietary leak detector fluid Turn off PV3 Seal any leakages and re-test

4 Turn off MV1

5 Replace the spark igniter and profile division plate

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 42

APPENDIX 2 30005

START SEQUENCE

The burner start sequence is controlled by the Landis and Gyr burner management unit The timings are pre-set and comply with 885885 This unit must NOT be tampered with

A brief description of the start-up sequence isshy

The unit checks

1 The NO FLAME signal on the UV flame scanner

Note If the scanner detects a flame at any time other than in the correct operating sequence the flame programmer initiates a lockout

2 The operation of the combustion air proving switch in the NO AIR position

3 The air handler discharge high temperature switch

If the checks are completed the unit starts the combustion air fan and then checks the combustion airflow

Once the airflow is proven the unit checks that the damper control circuit is functioning correctly After the damper microswitch is made to prove the fresh air damper is fully open the sequence allows 30 seconds for the combustion air to purge any combustible gas from the air handler

After completion of the purge the spark ignition system is energised the pilot valve opened and the spark terminated If the pilot flame is not proven by the UV scanner the system will initiate a LOCKOUT

If the flame is proven the main gas valves are opened the pilot extinguished and the main burner flame proven

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 43

i

APPENDIX 2 30008

The following flow chart shows the complete start sequence including the lighting of the various indicating lamps

MANUAL STATUS LIGHT POWER ON

POWER ON

I INITIATE START BY TIME

SETTING ON CONTROLLER

I CHECK NO FLAME

VISIBLE

PROVEj FAIL LOCKOUT

I CHECK RELAY R4 NC

POSITION

PROVE FAIL NO START

I CHECK AIR PRESSURE SWITCH NC POSITION

PROVE FAIL NO START

I CHECK RELAY R1 NC

POSITION

PROVE j

FAIL NO START

I START COMBUSTION

AIR BLOWER

I CHECK AIR PRESSURE SWITCH NO POSITION

PROVE I

FAIL NO START

I STATUS LIGHT FAN ON

I ENERGISE RELAY R1

I

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 44

I

I

APPENDIX 2 30008

I CHECK OVERHEAT LIMIT

CONTROL R5

PROVE I

FAIL I I

CHECK 541412 LOOP CLOSED ON

LANDIS ampGYR CIRCUIT

PROVE I

FAIL I I

COMBUSTION AIR PURGE PERIOD

30 SECONDS

I

NO START

NO START

CANCEL NO FLAME CHECK CIRCUIT

I

ENERGISE SPARK

I TIMED PERIOD 25 SECONDS

I ENERGISE PILOT GAS

VALVE

I TIMED PERIOD 25 SECONDS

I TERMINATE SPARK

I INTERROGATE UV FLAME SCANNER

PROVE I

FAIL I I

TIMED PERIOD 10 SECONDS

I

LOCKOUT

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 45

I

I

APPENDIX 2 3000S

I ENERGISE MAIN GAS

VALVES

I

STATUS LIGHT BURNER ON

I TIMED PERIOD

5 SECONDS

I DE-ENERGISE PILOT

GAS VALVES

CONTINUOUS FROM PILOT

I INTERROGATE UV FLAME SCANNER

PROVE I

FAIL I I

LOCKOUT I

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 46

APPENDIX 3 30005

Please see copy of Standard Service Sheet

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 47

APPENDIX 4 30005

A41 TIME OUT SCREEN

This is the standard screen displayed when the touch screen is not in use The back light is off to save energy_ To access the STATUS screen touch the ENTER key and the following screen is displayed

[]][I][]rn[IJOO[][IJOO[] EJ~E11 I[]I ~ middot I

NOTE

The Touch Screen operates using the heat produced by the touch of a finger and therefore only LIGHT pressure is required

Excessive pressure can damage the Touch Screen

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 48

APPENDIX 4 30008

A42 STATUS SCREEN

On the typical STATUS screen the illustrated information detailed is as follows

19 36 Fan Brn

RS OS

100 Fst_~_ Lck _ _ Xst Gas~o ~ I

RS Indicates the current room temperature

OS ~( t~~ the current duct discharge temperature

Fan Indicates the current status of the fan by showing the arrow and the fan blades for ON and OFF is shown by the arrow and fan blades being removed

Brn Indicates the current status of the burner with the black flames indicating the burner to be ON and vice versa

Lck LOCKOUT - This indicates a flame failure when highlighted during normal or start-up operation

Xst EXCESS TEMPERATURE SWITCH - This indicates the unit has reached the trip limit on the over heat stat when highlighted during operation

Indicates the current position of the gas modulating valve during normal Gas

operation (0-100)

Indicates whether the Frost stat is energised and the unit is running on frost Fst

override

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 49

APPENDIX 4 30008

A43 CHANGING SETTINGS

It is possible to change the settings for the time of operation and the required temperature set points The following details the steps required

A44 ENTERING THE SECURITY CODE

From the STATUS screen touch the return key and the screen below will be displayed

Type the HIGH LEVEL security code (4321) If you make a mistake use the BACK SPACE key to delete any incorrect number(s) Touch the ENTER key when the code is correct

If the security code is incorrect the screen above will be displayed then try again If after several attempts you can not gain access please contact RS STOKVIS Ltd for further information

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 50

APPENDIX 4 30008

When the code is entered correctly the MAIN MENU is displayed as detailed below

~ STATUS SET VALUES~ ~ TIVIE CLOCK [) [) [) [) [)

The MAIN MENU screen shows the three menu items available The title for each menu item can be changed to suit the end user Please notify RS STOKVIS Ltd prior to commissioning should these parameters require special amendments

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 51

APPENDIX 4 30008

A45 CHANGING OR SETTING A TIME SCHEDULE

From the main menu screen select the TIME CLOCK page by running finger across screen symbol and touch the ENTER key the screen below will be displayed

On the following screen highlight the TS1 symbol and touch the ENTER key

The current time schedule will now be displayed as shown below The display will automatically default to the current day (1 =Monday 2 =Tuesday etc) In this case day 5 (Friday) the four schedule switching times refer to that day

IAC6BBB1BHIS1

mm0CIl bull mID 17BB 17BB 17HB

Iillleschedule

To modify a time select it by highlighting and touch the ENTER key and the following screen is displayed

To amend the appropriate onoff time as shown on the screen below The arrows to the right of the time are for altering the hours and the arrows on the left for the minutes

Once you have set the time use the ESCape key to exit back to the time schedule screen and choose another day by touching the required number Another time may now be modified as before

IAC6BBB1BHIS1

H8BH

I i eschedule

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 52

APPENDIX 4 30008

Use the ESCape key to exit back to the MAIN MENU screen

~ STATUS ~ SET VALUES

TIME CLOCK []~ [] [] [] []

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 53

APPENDIX 4 30005

A46 CHANGING SET VALUES

From the main menu screen select the SET VALUES page by highlight in the normal way and touch the ENTER key

The following screen is displayed

36 19 18III III IIIHsv Rsv Llv

To change the RSV highlight it in the normal way and touch the ENTER key and the screen below will now be shown

IAC6RRR1RR40 T I

0 19 (Y)l RSV

ROOM SET VALUE

The above screen shows the parameters that can be changed The values to the far left are the limitations of set point (OC) Change the set point by using the UP and DOWN ARROWS on the left of the screen or touch the set value itself followed by the ENTER key to select the set value and set it directly using the numeric keyboard All values can be changed in this way

Use the ESCape key twice to exit back to the MAIN MENU screen

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 54

APPENDIX 4 30005

A47 COMMISSIONING AND SERVICING BURNER CHECKS

Select the SET VALUES screen from the MAIN MENU screen and adjust the high lirrlit set point to 55degC to drive the burner to high fire

IAC6HHH1HH60 ~T I

0 19 (Y)

HSV

HIGH SET VALUE ~

Ensure the set value is returned to 36degC once the appropriate checks and adjustments as described in Section 43 of this manual have been completed Return to the SET VALUES screen and select the low limit value to adjust the low fire setting

Reduce the low limit value to OdegC to drive the gas valve to low fire and complete the appropriate checks and adjustments as described in Section 43 of this manual and ensure the set value is returned to the original value

A48 GMT ltgt BST CHANGEOVER DAYLIGHT SAVINGS

To change your unit to British Summer TimelWinter Time the following system screen must be highlighted by touching the Iamp1 button twice

By touching the clock symbol in the top left hand corner followed by the ENTER key the screen below will be displayed

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 55

APPENDIX 4 30008

188311 851193

544

By touching and highlighting in this case 18 followed by the ENTER key A small box allowing the entry of two digits will appear Enter the desired time required using the numbered keys followed by ENTER key Your unit is now set to operate on BSTBWT

Touch the ESC key three times to return back to the Status screen

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 56

STOKVIS ENERGY SYSTEMS 96R WALTON ROAD EAST MOLESEY SURREY KT8 0DL TEL 020 8783 3050 08707 707 747 FAX 020 8783 3051 08707 707 767 E-MAIL infostokvisboilerscom WEBSITE wwwstokvisboilerscom

JULY 1999

Page 31: ECONOAIR 3000S SERIES AIR HANDLING UNIT DIRECT FIREDstokvisboilers.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/EconoAir... · 2019-05-10 · ECONOAIR 3000S SERIES AIR HANDLING UNIT DIRECT FIRED

7 FAULT FINDING 30008

The main control panel incorporates two lights to help in fault finding

POWER ON

LOCKOUT

The remote station also has three lights

AIR FAN ON

BURNER ON

LOCKOUT

This section gives the possible causes of failure associated with each check light The electrical schematic diagram in this manual and the wiring diagram shipped in the main air handler panel should be used in conjunction with the notes below Additionally Service Engineers should familiarise themselves with the detailed Start Sequence given in Appendix 2 of this manual

The notes are given for each light before consulting the notes check for bulb failure

71 POWER ON LIGHT IS UNLIT

Check

1 Main control panel isolator is in the 1 position

2 Main Panel 6A MCB has not tripped if a trip has occurred the switch will be at the OFF position Reset and test system as required

3 Also check if the mains electrical supply is isolated If so FIND OUT WHY before taking any action

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 27

7 FAULT FINDING 30005

72 AIR FAN ON LIGHT IS UNLIT

Check

1 SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch is not in Position OFF

2 Timeperiod is not set to off

3 Air handler is not at LOCKOUT

4 Recheck both AIR FAN ON and LOCKOUT bulbs

Two fault indications are possible

1 THE FAN IS NOT OPERATING

If the fan should have started but is not operating

Check 1 Overload for tripped conditions Reset the overload and monitor the next start-up

2 Motor Fuses

3 Relays 1 2 amp3 for failure

laClor CC1 for failure

5 Air Pressure Switch (DPS) is failed in the N 0 Position

Replace the faulty component as described in Section 8

2 THE FAN IS OPERATING

This indicates that the air pressure switch (DPS) has failed to change over

Measure the profile plate differential pressure as described in Section 4113 If the pressure is correct the air pressure switch is faulty Check the switch as in 4114 If the pressure is not correct

Check 1 Correct fan belt tension

2 Correct fan rotation

3 The air handler air inlets and discharge are not blocked

4 Correct fitting on filters

5 The air differential pressure switch impulse lines are not blocked or leaking

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 28

7 FAULT FINDING 30008

73 LOCKOUT LIGHT IS ILLUMINATED

This light indicates a failure in the burner ignition and flame supervision system

RESET the unit and follow the progress of the start sequence The full cycle may take two minutes

1

------t

2 LOCKOUT after 35-40 seconds indicates an ignition failure RESET the system and observe the pilot and ignition spark during the start-up attempt

I-- shy

3 Observe the spark This should be strong and highly visible If not remove and clean the spark plug as Section 82 Check that the spark plug gap is correctly set at 15 mm

-- shy

4 Check the pilot flame If the pilot flame ignites and the unit goes to LOCKOUT the scanning system is at fault Remove and clean the detector as Section 82 Check the flame signal as in Section 431

5 If the pilot does not light the gas supply system is faulty Check the pilot system for restriction and the pilot valve operation

6 If the pilot lights and the unit goes to LOCKOUT after the main gas valves are addressed either the flow control valve is blocked or one of the main gas block valves has failed Fit a manometer on the pressure test point on the outlet flange of the multishyfunctional control and observe if the pressure rises when the main gas valves are addressed No pressure rise will indicate failure of the main gas valves

74 AIR FAN ON LIGHT ILLUMINATED

If the burner does not start check

1 SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch is in WINTER position

2 Overheat Limit Control

These interlocks prevent the burner management system starting

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 29

8 SERVICING 3000S

IMPORTANT Servicing and maintenance should be only carried out by a RS STOKVIS Ltd approved engineer

Only use replacement parts provided by the appliance manufacturer

Check that the air openings for combustion and for ventilation of any plant roon or compartment are clear

81 ISOLATION

811 FUEL GAS ISOLATION

The fuel gas to the ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler should be isolated and locked off at the manual ball valve mounted at the start of the fuel gas line Additionally before entering or servicing the air handler the burner manual isolation valve and pilot line isolation valve should be closed

812 ELECTRICAL ISOLATION

All electric power to the air handler and the remote control station is switched through the local isolator This isolator is fitted with a lock facility to permit it to be locked in the OFF position

Additionally isolate the power at the Wall Isolator

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 30

8 SERVICING 30005

82 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE

The air handler should be routinely serviced at the start of each heating season Isolate the air handler as above before servicing Details of access to individual components are given in Section 84 of this manual

1 Remove and clean spark igniter Check that the gap is correctly set at 25 mm Replace every two years

2 Clean the flame detector lens to ensure freedom from dirt and moisture If the cell shows any sign of cracks it should be replaced Routinely replace the cell every two years or after 10000 hours of operation which ever comes first

3 Inspect the entire air handler paint system for general damage Repair as necessary

4 Every two years brush the burner plates and clear the burner holes carefully with a Size 18mm drill for NP II and 20mm drill for NP I

WARNING THE BURNER HOLES MUST NOT BE ENLARGED

5 Inspect and lubricate all damper linkages to ensure freedom of operation Wipe off all excess lubricants to prevent dirt build up on linkage parts

6 Check the fan belt for cracks and splits Check tension The correct tension gives 16mm deflection per metre of span when the belt is centrally loaded with a force of 27N Adjust as necessary

7 Grease both the fan shaft bearings with Mobiith AW2 grease or similar

NEVER use high temperature grease

NEVER mix two different greases within the bearing always flush existing grease out

Note Removing the cover plate on the end of the air handler gains access to the outboard fan bearing

Light to Slow to 0 120 2 to 6 months Clean Dry

Medium Medium 120 200 1 to 2 months

Moderate to Light to Slow to 0 120 1 to 4 weeks Dry

Dirty Medium Medium 120 200 1 to 7 days

Extreme Dirt Dry Light to Slow to 0 200 Daily Flushing out

Medium Medium Dirt

83 ANNUAL SERVICE CHECKS

After Servicing test fire the air handler following the Commissioning Procedure detailed in Section 4 of this manual to ensure correct operation generally Special attention must be paid to the damper system and related controls and interlocks

Additionally check that the fresh air and recirculation air entry path to the air handler has been kept clear and instruct the User of the need for this as necessary

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 31

8 SERVICING 3000S

84 REMOVAL PROCEDURE FOR REPLACEABLE COMPONENTS

IMPORTANT

Turn off the gas at the appliance service valve and the electricity at the main panel and wall isolator before proceeding

841 BURNER

The burner is located inside the air handler casing and is mounted on two brackets from the support straps To remove the burner isolate the air handler as in 81 and undo the union on the fuel gas line adjacent to the burner isolation valve (MV6) and unscrew the main and pilot gas feed pipes from the burner rail Access to the rear of the burner assembly is made by removing the partition plate below the burner separating the fresh air inlet to the burner from the return air inlet compartment This is held in place by screws which engage in captive nuts on the top side of the partition Remove the Flame Detector and pull off the ignition plug cap Disconnect the burner support brackets and remove the burner The burner will easily pass through the access hatch for further strip down Replace in the reverse order soundness test the gas pipework check the burner operation and duty as described in the commissioning section of this manual

842 FLAME DETECTOR

This is a 240 Volt instrument

The flame detector is mounted on the end of the burner rail inside the air handler casing To remove the detector isolate the panel electric supply and lock off Push the scanner towards the burner and rotate to release the bayonet fixing and lift the detector from its mount Remove the two screws holding the detector cover and disconnect the supply leads noting the polarity of the connections

Replace the flame detector in the reverse order ensuring correct polarity of connections Ensure the access panel is securely closed and the retaining nuts are tightened down Check operation by inserting a test meter in the points provided in the main control panel and reading the flame signals during start up to full rate burner operation (See 431) Operate the appliance over six starts for reliability of operation including tum off of start and main gas valves to check for lockout operation

843 IGNITER SPARK PLUG

This is a high tension spark plug

The igniter spark plug is mounted on the end of the burner rail inside the air handler casing To remove the spark plug isolate the air handler as above Enter the service access door Access to the spark plug is made through the profile plate To remove the spark plug pull off the high tension lead and unscrew the plug with a plug spanner

When replacing the spark plug check the plug gap is set at 15mm Check ignition reliability over six start ups

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 32

8 SERVICING 3000S

844 IGNITER SPARK TRANSFORMER

This is a 240 Volt instrument

The ignition transformer is located in a plastic box mounted on the air handler casing adjacent to the main control panel To remove the transformer isolate the air handler as above and unscrew the four retaining screws holding the box lid in place and remove the lid Disconnect the supply cable at the terminal strip and undo the transformer retaining screws The transformer may then be unscrewed from the High Tension cable leading to the spark plug

Replacement is a simple reversal of this procedure

Check ignition reliability over six start ups

845 COMBUSTION AIR PRESSURE SWITCH (DPS)

Note The switch is set and sealed and should be replaced if not operating correctly

This switch is a 240 Volt instrument

The air switch is mounted directly on the air handler casing and can be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove the switch isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the supply cable Break the downstream pipe compression fitting and unscrew the switch housing from its locating fitting Reverse the procedure to replace after ensuring switch setting is as specified in Section 13 of this manual Operate the air handler to ensure reliability of operation over six start ups

846 AIR HANDLER OVERHEAT LIMIT CONTROL

This is a 240 Volt instrument

The overheat limit control can be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove the control isolate the air handler as above and lock off Remove the switch cover Disconnect the supply cable and unscrew the control housing from its locating fitting Reverse the procedure to replace check the switch is set to 50degC Test the switch operation as described in Section 43 over at least three operations

847 AIR FAN AND MOTOR

The air fan motor is a 415 Volt 3 phase motor

The motor and slide rails are easily accessible inside the air handler casing If it is necessary to remove the motor isolate the air handler as above Slacken the fan-belt tension and remove the drive belts Pull the motor away from the air handler casing to make access to the motor terminal box and disconnect the supply cable The motor may now be removed from the unit Following replacement the air handler must be fully re-commissioned as in Section 4

It is unlikely that the air fan will need replacing or servicing If required a full procedure should be obtained from RS STOKVIS Ltd

Replacement must be followed by full re-commissioning as in Section 4

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 33

8 SERVICING 3000S

848 FUEL GAS MULTI-FUNCTIONAL CONTROL - SMALL UNITS

This is a 240 Volt instrument

The fuel gas multi-functional control can be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove the unit isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the Hirschman electric termination Unbolt the control from its flanges and remove

When replacing care must be taken to ensure the flange 0 rings are undamaged and in the correct location Following replacement the air handler must be fully reshycommissioned as in Section 4 including tests for soundness prior to start-up

849 GOVERNOR AND BLOCK VALVES

The block valves are 240 Volt instruments

All these items may be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove any item isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the electric termination to the two block valves the pilot block valve and the flow control block valve Break the two pipe unions and remove the fuel gas line complete for further strip-down

8410 FUEL GAS FLOW CONTROL VALVE

This is a 24 Volt instrument

The fuel gas How control valve can be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove the valve isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the supply cables to the control valve

On small air handlers fitted with a multi-functional control support the multi-functional control and unbolt its discharge flange Break the union downstream of the burner isolation valve and remove the section of line containing the flow control valve for further strip-down

On large air handlers fitted with separate block valves it will be necessary to remove the fuel gas line complete as Section 8410 above

Following replacement re-commission the air handler

Note If the fresh air damper is not in the full open position the heat input must not exceed the maximum heat input at recirculation condition specified in the technical data section of this manual

8411 PILOT GAS GOVERNOR AND BLOCK VALVE

The block valve is a 240 Volt instrument

Both items may be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove either item isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the electric terrriination to the solenoid valve Undo the upstream pipe union and the compression fitting downstream of the manual block valve (PV3) Remove the pilot gas line complete for further strip down

Replace broken or distorted connections and retest for soundness Ensure the pilot gas pressure is correct and the flame is sensing an output Ensure reliability over six start-ups

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 34

8 SERVICING 3000S

8412 BELT TENSIONING PROCEDURE

The setting tensions are designed to cover a wide range of drives A precise setting force for individual applications can be calculated as detailed

SETTING FORCES

Belt Section

Setting Force To Deflect Belt 16mm per Metre Of Span

Small Pulley Diameter (mm)

Basic Setting Forces Newtons (N) Kilograms (kgf)

125 x Setting Forces Newtons (N) Kilograms (kgf)

SPZ

56 to 71 16 16 20 20 75 to 90 18 18 22 22

95 to 125 20 20 25 25 Over 125 22 22 28 28

SPA

80 to 100 22 22 28 28 106 to 140 30 30 38 38 150 to 200 36 37 45 46 Over 200 40 40 50 51

SPB

112 to 160 40 40 50 51 170 to 224 50 51 62 63 236 to 355 62 63 77 79 Over 355 65 66 81 83

SPC 224 to 250 70 71 87 89 265 to 355 92 94 115 120 Over 375 115 120 144 150

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 35

8 SERVICING 3000S

BELT TENSIONING USING FENNER BELT TENSION INDICATOR

Calculate the deflection in mm on a basis of 16mm per metre of centre distance Centre Distance (m) x 16 =Deflection (mm)

Set lower marker ring at the deflection distance required in mm on the lower scale

Set upper ring against to bottom edge of the top tube

Place the belt tension indicator on top of the belt at the centre of span and apply a force at right angles to the belt defecting it to the point where the lower marker ring is level with the top of the adjacent belt

Read off the force value indicated by the top edge of the upper marker ring

Compare this force to the kgf value shown in the table above

If a Fenner Belt Tension Indicator is not available a spring balance and rule will be suffice

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 36

8 SERVICING 30005

85 MAIN PANEL CONTROLS

All panel controls are readily accessible and may be easily exchanged for replacement components in the event of failure Ensure any replacement item is of the same make and type as the original

851 LANDIS amp GYR LFL 1335 AUTOMATIC SEQUENCE CONTROLLER

The Landis amp Gyr Automatic Sequence Controller is a plug-in unit locating on a pre-wired chassis To remove the controller undo the two retaining screws at the top left and lower right corners and pull the module off the chassis

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

852 CONTROLS CIRCUIT (24 VOLT) TRANSFORMER

The Controls Circuit Transformer is fixed to the panel back plate by tapped screws To remove the transformer undo the wiring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel Undo the two retaining screws and remove the unit complete

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

853 CONTROL RELAYS R1 R2 amp R3

The Control Relays are DIN Rail mounted To remove a relay undo the wIring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel Release the DIN rail retaining clip under the relay with a screwdriver and remove the relay

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

854 6A MCB

The 6A MCB is DIN Rail mounted To remove the MCB undo the wiring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel Release the DIN rail retaining clip under the MCB with a screwdriver and remove the MCB

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

855 THERMAL OVERLOAD

The thermal overload is attached to the underside of the main contactor To remove the overload undo the wiring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel and that the overload setting is as specified in Section 13 of this manual Unscrew the three connections to the contactor and remove the overload

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 37

8 SERVICING 3000S

856 MAIN CONTACTOR

The Main Contactor is DIN Rail mounted To remove the contactor remove the thermal overload as 855 above and then undo the wiring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel Release the DIN rail retaining clip under the contactor with a screwdriver and remove the contactor

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

857 MOTOR FUSE

To replace a motor fuse pull the fuse carrier off the fuse holder base The fuse is attached to the fuse carrier by two screws Unscrew remove and replace

86 REMOTE CONTROL STATION

The remote control station contains some serviceable parts although these items should only be fitted by an approved RS STOKVIS Ltd Engineer

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 38

9 RECOMMENDED SPARES 3000S

For two years operation it is recommended that the following items should be held in stock

ITEM DESCRIPTION PART NO QUANTITY i

1 INDICATOR BULBS W1121 1 PACK

2 SPARK PLUG 023739 1 I

3 UVDETECTOR QRA10C 1 I

4 ROOM SENSOR DRT2453 1

5 DUCT SENSOR DDT1701 1

All replacement parts can be obtained from RS STOKVIS Ltd by quoting the air handler serial number the part number and description

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 39

APPENDIX 1 30005

SOUNDNESS TESTING THE FUEL GAS PIPEWORK

This procedure should only be carried out by personnel familiar with the ECONO-AIR 3000S Series Air handler

The pressure test points and all valves are identified on the Process and Instrumentation Diagram for the air handler included in Section 1 of this n1anual

Isolate the air handler electric supply at the main control panel and lock off Close the manual isolation valves MV1 MV6 and PV3 Ensure the supply pressure is available on the upstream side of MV1

A11 TESTING THE UPSTREAM PIPEWORKAND BURNER CONTROLS 1 Connect a 60 mbar manometer to the pressure test nipple A Monitor the

pressure for two minutes Any rise in pressure indicates that valve MV1 is leaking and must be replaced Remove pressure test points Band F

2 Open MV1 to pressurise the pipework on both the main gas and pilot line to the first block valve

3 Close MV1 Allow one minute for the temperature to stabilise and then test the system for 2 minutes and watch for a drop in the pipework pressure If the pressure falls open valve MV1 and test the pipework connections and valves from MV1 to MV3 and MV1 to PV2 for leaks with a proprietary leak detector fluid or spray Turn off MV1 seal any leaks and re-test

4 If no extemalleaks are found either the pilot block valve PV1 or either the first main gas block valve MV3 is letting by

5 To test this seal pressure test point A and fit a manometer to pressure test point B Leave for two minutes with MV1 open A rise in pressure on the manometer confirms a leak on the block valve MV3 Turn off MV1 exchange the valve and re-test from point 2 above

6 Repeat this procedure for the pilot block valve Seal test point B and fit a manometer to pressure test point F Leave for two minutes with MV1 open A rise in pressure on the manometer confirms a leak on the pilot block valve PV2 Turn off MV1 exchange the valve and re-test from point 1 above Seal test point F

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 40

APPENDIX 1 30005

A12 TESTING THE DOWNSTREAM BURNER VALVE 1 Close MV1 and connect pressure test points A and 8 with flexible 6 mm bore

tubing teed into the manometer Remove pressure test point C Open MV1 to pressurise the downstream block valve MV4

2 Close MV1 and leave for one minute for the temperature to stabilise Monitor the pressure for 2 minutes If the pressure falls open valve MV1 and leak test the line between the two block valves MV3 and MV4 with a proprietary leak detector Turn off MV1 seal any leaks and re-test Note Smaller air handlers in the 3000S Series are fitted with multi-functional valves combining the pressure regulator and two block valves in one component The above procedure still applies but if a leak is found on either block valve the whole control should be replaced If no external leaks are found the downstream block valve is letting by

3 To confirm this close MV1 remove the manometer and refit to pressure test point C Connect pressure test points A and 8 with flexible 6mm bore tubing Open MV1 and allow one minute for the temperature to stabilise Monitor the pressure for a further 2 minutes with MV1 still open A rise in pressure confirms that the second block valve MV4 is letting by Turn off MV1 Replace the valve and re-test from 2 above

A13 TESTING THE DOWNSTREAM BURNER PIPEWORK 1 Close MV1 and connect pressure test points A and D with flexible 6 mm bore

tubing teed into the manometer Open MV1 to pressurise the downstream pilot pipework

2 Close MV1 and leave for one minute for the temperature to stabilise Monitor the pressure for 2 minutes If the pressure falls open valve MV1 and leak test the line between the downstream block valve MV4 and the manual block MV6 with a proprietary leak detector fluid or spray If no external leaks are found the manual block valve MV6 is letting by Turn off MV1 seal any leakages and reshytest from 2 above

A14 TESTING THE DOWNSTREAM PILOT PIPEWORK 1 Close MV1 and connect pressure test points A and F with flexible 6mm bore

tubing teed into the manometer Open MV1 to pressurise the downstream pilot pipework

2 Close MV1 and leave for one rninute for the temperature to stabilise Monitor the pressure for 2 minutes If the pressure falls open valve MV1 and leak test the line between the downstream block valve PV2 and the manual block PV3 with a proprietary leak detector fluid or spray If no external leaks are found the manual block valve PV3 is letting by Turn off MV1 seal any leakages and reshytest from 2 above

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 41

APPENDIX 1 30005

A15 TESTING THE BURNER CONNECTIONS 1 Remove the burner access panel as described in Section 84 of this manual

Remove the burner spark igniter Slacken the two retaining bolts holding the burner to the burner support straps and unbolt the burner supply endplate from the burner casting and mixing plates

2 Connect pressure test points A and 0 with flexible 6mm bore tubing teed into the manometer Open MV1 and MV6 to pressurise the burner pipework Leak test the main gas burner pipework and connections with proprietary leak detector fluid Turn off MV6 Seal any leakages and re-test

3 Connect pressure test points A and F with flexible 6 mm bore tubing teed into the manometer Open MV1 and PV3 to pressurise the pilot burner pipework Leak test the pilot gas burner pipework and connections with proprietary leak detector fluid Turn off PV3 Seal any leakages and re-test

4 Turn off MV1

5 Replace the spark igniter and profile division plate

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 42

APPENDIX 2 30005

START SEQUENCE

The burner start sequence is controlled by the Landis and Gyr burner management unit The timings are pre-set and comply with 885885 This unit must NOT be tampered with

A brief description of the start-up sequence isshy

The unit checks

1 The NO FLAME signal on the UV flame scanner

Note If the scanner detects a flame at any time other than in the correct operating sequence the flame programmer initiates a lockout

2 The operation of the combustion air proving switch in the NO AIR position

3 The air handler discharge high temperature switch

If the checks are completed the unit starts the combustion air fan and then checks the combustion airflow

Once the airflow is proven the unit checks that the damper control circuit is functioning correctly After the damper microswitch is made to prove the fresh air damper is fully open the sequence allows 30 seconds for the combustion air to purge any combustible gas from the air handler

After completion of the purge the spark ignition system is energised the pilot valve opened and the spark terminated If the pilot flame is not proven by the UV scanner the system will initiate a LOCKOUT

If the flame is proven the main gas valves are opened the pilot extinguished and the main burner flame proven

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 43

i

APPENDIX 2 30008

The following flow chart shows the complete start sequence including the lighting of the various indicating lamps

MANUAL STATUS LIGHT POWER ON

POWER ON

I INITIATE START BY TIME

SETTING ON CONTROLLER

I CHECK NO FLAME

VISIBLE

PROVEj FAIL LOCKOUT

I CHECK RELAY R4 NC

POSITION

PROVE FAIL NO START

I CHECK AIR PRESSURE SWITCH NC POSITION

PROVE FAIL NO START

I CHECK RELAY R1 NC

POSITION

PROVE j

FAIL NO START

I START COMBUSTION

AIR BLOWER

I CHECK AIR PRESSURE SWITCH NO POSITION

PROVE I

FAIL NO START

I STATUS LIGHT FAN ON

I ENERGISE RELAY R1

I

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 44

I

I

APPENDIX 2 30008

I CHECK OVERHEAT LIMIT

CONTROL R5

PROVE I

FAIL I I

CHECK 541412 LOOP CLOSED ON

LANDIS ampGYR CIRCUIT

PROVE I

FAIL I I

COMBUSTION AIR PURGE PERIOD

30 SECONDS

I

NO START

NO START

CANCEL NO FLAME CHECK CIRCUIT

I

ENERGISE SPARK

I TIMED PERIOD 25 SECONDS

I ENERGISE PILOT GAS

VALVE

I TIMED PERIOD 25 SECONDS

I TERMINATE SPARK

I INTERROGATE UV FLAME SCANNER

PROVE I

FAIL I I

TIMED PERIOD 10 SECONDS

I

LOCKOUT

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 45

I

I

APPENDIX 2 3000S

I ENERGISE MAIN GAS

VALVES

I

STATUS LIGHT BURNER ON

I TIMED PERIOD

5 SECONDS

I DE-ENERGISE PILOT

GAS VALVES

CONTINUOUS FROM PILOT

I INTERROGATE UV FLAME SCANNER

PROVE I

FAIL I I

LOCKOUT I

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 46

APPENDIX 3 30005

Please see copy of Standard Service Sheet

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 47

APPENDIX 4 30005

A41 TIME OUT SCREEN

This is the standard screen displayed when the touch screen is not in use The back light is off to save energy_ To access the STATUS screen touch the ENTER key and the following screen is displayed

[]][I][]rn[IJOO[][IJOO[] EJ~E11 I[]I ~ middot I

NOTE

The Touch Screen operates using the heat produced by the touch of a finger and therefore only LIGHT pressure is required

Excessive pressure can damage the Touch Screen

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 48

APPENDIX 4 30008

A42 STATUS SCREEN

On the typical STATUS screen the illustrated information detailed is as follows

19 36 Fan Brn

RS OS

100 Fst_~_ Lck _ _ Xst Gas~o ~ I

RS Indicates the current room temperature

OS ~( t~~ the current duct discharge temperature

Fan Indicates the current status of the fan by showing the arrow and the fan blades for ON and OFF is shown by the arrow and fan blades being removed

Brn Indicates the current status of the burner with the black flames indicating the burner to be ON and vice versa

Lck LOCKOUT - This indicates a flame failure when highlighted during normal or start-up operation

Xst EXCESS TEMPERATURE SWITCH - This indicates the unit has reached the trip limit on the over heat stat when highlighted during operation

Indicates the current position of the gas modulating valve during normal Gas

operation (0-100)

Indicates whether the Frost stat is energised and the unit is running on frost Fst

override

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 49

APPENDIX 4 30008

A43 CHANGING SETTINGS

It is possible to change the settings for the time of operation and the required temperature set points The following details the steps required

A44 ENTERING THE SECURITY CODE

From the STATUS screen touch the return key and the screen below will be displayed

Type the HIGH LEVEL security code (4321) If you make a mistake use the BACK SPACE key to delete any incorrect number(s) Touch the ENTER key when the code is correct

If the security code is incorrect the screen above will be displayed then try again If after several attempts you can not gain access please contact RS STOKVIS Ltd for further information

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 50

APPENDIX 4 30008

When the code is entered correctly the MAIN MENU is displayed as detailed below

~ STATUS SET VALUES~ ~ TIVIE CLOCK [) [) [) [) [)

The MAIN MENU screen shows the three menu items available The title for each menu item can be changed to suit the end user Please notify RS STOKVIS Ltd prior to commissioning should these parameters require special amendments

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 51

APPENDIX 4 30008

A45 CHANGING OR SETTING A TIME SCHEDULE

From the main menu screen select the TIME CLOCK page by running finger across screen symbol and touch the ENTER key the screen below will be displayed

On the following screen highlight the TS1 symbol and touch the ENTER key

The current time schedule will now be displayed as shown below The display will automatically default to the current day (1 =Monday 2 =Tuesday etc) In this case day 5 (Friday) the four schedule switching times refer to that day

IAC6BBB1BHIS1

mm0CIl bull mID 17BB 17BB 17HB

Iillleschedule

To modify a time select it by highlighting and touch the ENTER key and the following screen is displayed

To amend the appropriate onoff time as shown on the screen below The arrows to the right of the time are for altering the hours and the arrows on the left for the minutes

Once you have set the time use the ESCape key to exit back to the time schedule screen and choose another day by touching the required number Another time may now be modified as before

IAC6BBB1BHIS1

H8BH

I i eschedule

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 52

APPENDIX 4 30008

Use the ESCape key to exit back to the MAIN MENU screen

~ STATUS ~ SET VALUES

TIME CLOCK []~ [] [] [] []

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 53

APPENDIX 4 30005

A46 CHANGING SET VALUES

From the main menu screen select the SET VALUES page by highlight in the normal way and touch the ENTER key

The following screen is displayed

36 19 18III III IIIHsv Rsv Llv

To change the RSV highlight it in the normal way and touch the ENTER key and the screen below will now be shown

IAC6RRR1RR40 T I

0 19 (Y)l RSV

ROOM SET VALUE

The above screen shows the parameters that can be changed The values to the far left are the limitations of set point (OC) Change the set point by using the UP and DOWN ARROWS on the left of the screen or touch the set value itself followed by the ENTER key to select the set value and set it directly using the numeric keyboard All values can be changed in this way

Use the ESCape key twice to exit back to the MAIN MENU screen

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 54

APPENDIX 4 30005

A47 COMMISSIONING AND SERVICING BURNER CHECKS

Select the SET VALUES screen from the MAIN MENU screen and adjust the high lirrlit set point to 55degC to drive the burner to high fire

IAC6HHH1HH60 ~T I

0 19 (Y)

HSV

HIGH SET VALUE ~

Ensure the set value is returned to 36degC once the appropriate checks and adjustments as described in Section 43 of this manual have been completed Return to the SET VALUES screen and select the low limit value to adjust the low fire setting

Reduce the low limit value to OdegC to drive the gas valve to low fire and complete the appropriate checks and adjustments as described in Section 43 of this manual and ensure the set value is returned to the original value

A48 GMT ltgt BST CHANGEOVER DAYLIGHT SAVINGS

To change your unit to British Summer TimelWinter Time the following system screen must be highlighted by touching the Iamp1 button twice

By touching the clock symbol in the top left hand corner followed by the ENTER key the screen below will be displayed

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 55

APPENDIX 4 30008

188311 851193

544

By touching and highlighting in this case 18 followed by the ENTER key A small box allowing the entry of two digits will appear Enter the desired time required using the numbered keys followed by ENTER key Your unit is now set to operate on BSTBWT

Touch the ESC key three times to return back to the Status screen

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 56

STOKVIS ENERGY SYSTEMS 96R WALTON ROAD EAST MOLESEY SURREY KT8 0DL TEL 020 8783 3050 08707 707 747 FAX 020 8783 3051 08707 707 767 E-MAIL infostokvisboilerscom WEBSITE wwwstokvisboilerscom

JULY 1999

Page 32: ECONOAIR 3000S SERIES AIR HANDLING UNIT DIRECT FIREDstokvisboilers.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/EconoAir... · 2019-05-10 · ECONOAIR 3000S SERIES AIR HANDLING UNIT DIRECT FIRED

7 FAULT FINDING 30005

72 AIR FAN ON LIGHT IS UNLIT

Check

1 SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch is not in Position OFF

2 Timeperiod is not set to off

3 Air handler is not at LOCKOUT

4 Recheck both AIR FAN ON and LOCKOUT bulbs

Two fault indications are possible

1 THE FAN IS NOT OPERATING

If the fan should have started but is not operating

Check 1 Overload for tripped conditions Reset the overload and monitor the next start-up

2 Motor Fuses

3 Relays 1 2 amp3 for failure

laClor CC1 for failure

5 Air Pressure Switch (DPS) is failed in the N 0 Position

Replace the faulty component as described in Section 8

2 THE FAN IS OPERATING

This indicates that the air pressure switch (DPS) has failed to change over

Measure the profile plate differential pressure as described in Section 4113 If the pressure is correct the air pressure switch is faulty Check the switch as in 4114 If the pressure is not correct

Check 1 Correct fan belt tension

2 Correct fan rotation

3 The air handler air inlets and discharge are not blocked

4 Correct fitting on filters

5 The air differential pressure switch impulse lines are not blocked or leaking

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 28

7 FAULT FINDING 30008

73 LOCKOUT LIGHT IS ILLUMINATED

This light indicates a failure in the burner ignition and flame supervision system

RESET the unit and follow the progress of the start sequence The full cycle may take two minutes

1

------t

2 LOCKOUT after 35-40 seconds indicates an ignition failure RESET the system and observe the pilot and ignition spark during the start-up attempt

I-- shy

3 Observe the spark This should be strong and highly visible If not remove and clean the spark plug as Section 82 Check that the spark plug gap is correctly set at 15 mm

-- shy

4 Check the pilot flame If the pilot flame ignites and the unit goes to LOCKOUT the scanning system is at fault Remove and clean the detector as Section 82 Check the flame signal as in Section 431

5 If the pilot does not light the gas supply system is faulty Check the pilot system for restriction and the pilot valve operation

6 If the pilot lights and the unit goes to LOCKOUT after the main gas valves are addressed either the flow control valve is blocked or one of the main gas block valves has failed Fit a manometer on the pressure test point on the outlet flange of the multishyfunctional control and observe if the pressure rises when the main gas valves are addressed No pressure rise will indicate failure of the main gas valves

74 AIR FAN ON LIGHT ILLUMINATED

If the burner does not start check

1 SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch is in WINTER position

2 Overheat Limit Control

These interlocks prevent the burner management system starting

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 29

8 SERVICING 3000S

IMPORTANT Servicing and maintenance should be only carried out by a RS STOKVIS Ltd approved engineer

Only use replacement parts provided by the appliance manufacturer

Check that the air openings for combustion and for ventilation of any plant roon or compartment are clear

81 ISOLATION

811 FUEL GAS ISOLATION

The fuel gas to the ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler should be isolated and locked off at the manual ball valve mounted at the start of the fuel gas line Additionally before entering or servicing the air handler the burner manual isolation valve and pilot line isolation valve should be closed

812 ELECTRICAL ISOLATION

All electric power to the air handler and the remote control station is switched through the local isolator This isolator is fitted with a lock facility to permit it to be locked in the OFF position

Additionally isolate the power at the Wall Isolator

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 30

8 SERVICING 30005

82 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE

The air handler should be routinely serviced at the start of each heating season Isolate the air handler as above before servicing Details of access to individual components are given in Section 84 of this manual

1 Remove and clean spark igniter Check that the gap is correctly set at 25 mm Replace every two years

2 Clean the flame detector lens to ensure freedom from dirt and moisture If the cell shows any sign of cracks it should be replaced Routinely replace the cell every two years or after 10000 hours of operation which ever comes first

3 Inspect the entire air handler paint system for general damage Repair as necessary

4 Every two years brush the burner plates and clear the burner holes carefully with a Size 18mm drill for NP II and 20mm drill for NP I

WARNING THE BURNER HOLES MUST NOT BE ENLARGED

5 Inspect and lubricate all damper linkages to ensure freedom of operation Wipe off all excess lubricants to prevent dirt build up on linkage parts

6 Check the fan belt for cracks and splits Check tension The correct tension gives 16mm deflection per metre of span when the belt is centrally loaded with a force of 27N Adjust as necessary

7 Grease both the fan shaft bearings with Mobiith AW2 grease or similar

NEVER use high temperature grease

NEVER mix two different greases within the bearing always flush existing grease out

Note Removing the cover plate on the end of the air handler gains access to the outboard fan bearing

Light to Slow to 0 120 2 to 6 months Clean Dry

Medium Medium 120 200 1 to 2 months

Moderate to Light to Slow to 0 120 1 to 4 weeks Dry

Dirty Medium Medium 120 200 1 to 7 days

Extreme Dirt Dry Light to Slow to 0 200 Daily Flushing out

Medium Medium Dirt

83 ANNUAL SERVICE CHECKS

After Servicing test fire the air handler following the Commissioning Procedure detailed in Section 4 of this manual to ensure correct operation generally Special attention must be paid to the damper system and related controls and interlocks

Additionally check that the fresh air and recirculation air entry path to the air handler has been kept clear and instruct the User of the need for this as necessary

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 31

8 SERVICING 3000S

84 REMOVAL PROCEDURE FOR REPLACEABLE COMPONENTS

IMPORTANT

Turn off the gas at the appliance service valve and the electricity at the main panel and wall isolator before proceeding

841 BURNER

The burner is located inside the air handler casing and is mounted on two brackets from the support straps To remove the burner isolate the air handler as in 81 and undo the union on the fuel gas line adjacent to the burner isolation valve (MV6) and unscrew the main and pilot gas feed pipes from the burner rail Access to the rear of the burner assembly is made by removing the partition plate below the burner separating the fresh air inlet to the burner from the return air inlet compartment This is held in place by screws which engage in captive nuts on the top side of the partition Remove the Flame Detector and pull off the ignition plug cap Disconnect the burner support brackets and remove the burner The burner will easily pass through the access hatch for further strip down Replace in the reverse order soundness test the gas pipework check the burner operation and duty as described in the commissioning section of this manual

842 FLAME DETECTOR

This is a 240 Volt instrument

The flame detector is mounted on the end of the burner rail inside the air handler casing To remove the detector isolate the panel electric supply and lock off Push the scanner towards the burner and rotate to release the bayonet fixing and lift the detector from its mount Remove the two screws holding the detector cover and disconnect the supply leads noting the polarity of the connections

Replace the flame detector in the reverse order ensuring correct polarity of connections Ensure the access panel is securely closed and the retaining nuts are tightened down Check operation by inserting a test meter in the points provided in the main control panel and reading the flame signals during start up to full rate burner operation (See 431) Operate the appliance over six starts for reliability of operation including tum off of start and main gas valves to check for lockout operation

843 IGNITER SPARK PLUG

This is a high tension spark plug

The igniter spark plug is mounted on the end of the burner rail inside the air handler casing To remove the spark plug isolate the air handler as above Enter the service access door Access to the spark plug is made through the profile plate To remove the spark plug pull off the high tension lead and unscrew the plug with a plug spanner

When replacing the spark plug check the plug gap is set at 15mm Check ignition reliability over six start ups

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 32

8 SERVICING 3000S

844 IGNITER SPARK TRANSFORMER

This is a 240 Volt instrument

The ignition transformer is located in a plastic box mounted on the air handler casing adjacent to the main control panel To remove the transformer isolate the air handler as above and unscrew the four retaining screws holding the box lid in place and remove the lid Disconnect the supply cable at the terminal strip and undo the transformer retaining screws The transformer may then be unscrewed from the High Tension cable leading to the spark plug

Replacement is a simple reversal of this procedure

Check ignition reliability over six start ups

845 COMBUSTION AIR PRESSURE SWITCH (DPS)

Note The switch is set and sealed and should be replaced if not operating correctly

This switch is a 240 Volt instrument

The air switch is mounted directly on the air handler casing and can be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove the switch isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the supply cable Break the downstream pipe compression fitting and unscrew the switch housing from its locating fitting Reverse the procedure to replace after ensuring switch setting is as specified in Section 13 of this manual Operate the air handler to ensure reliability of operation over six start ups

846 AIR HANDLER OVERHEAT LIMIT CONTROL

This is a 240 Volt instrument

The overheat limit control can be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove the control isolate the air handler as above and lock off Remove the switch cover Disconnect the supply cable and unscrew the control housing from its locating fitting Reverse the procedure to replace check the switch is set to 50degC Test the switch operation as described in Section 43 over at least three operations

847 AIR FAN AND MOTOR

The air fan motor is a 415 Volt 3 phase motor

The motor and slide rails are easily accessible inside the air handler casing If it is necessary to remove the motor isolate the air handler as above Slacken the fan-belt tension and remove the drive belts Pull the motor away from the air handler casing to make access to the motor terminal box and disconnect the supply cable The motor may now be removed from the unit Following replacement the air handler must be fully re-commissioned as in Section 4

It is unlikely that the air fan will need replacing or servicing If required a full procedure should be obtained from RS STOKVIS Ltd

Replacement must be followed by full re-commissioning as in Section 4

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 33

8 SERVICING 3000S

848 FUEL GAS MULTI-FUNCTIONAL CONTROL - SMALL UNITS

This is a 240 Volt instrument

The fuel gas multi-functional control can be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove the unit isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the Hirschman electric termination Unbolt the control from its flanges and remove

When replacing care must be taken to ensure the flange 0 rings are undamaged and in the correct location Following replacement the air handler must be fully reshycommissioned as in Section 4 including tests for soundness prior to start-up

849 GOVERNOR AND BLOCK VALVES

The block valves are 240 Volt instruments

All these items may be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove any item isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the electric termination to the two block valves the pilot block valve and the flow control block valve Break the two pipe unions and remove the fuel gas line complete for further strip-down

8410 FUEL GAS FLOW CONTROL VALVE

This is a 24 Volt instrument

The fuel gas How control valve can be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove the valve isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the supply cables to the control valve

On small air handlers fitted with a multi-functional control support the multi-functional control and unbolt its discharge flange Break the union downstream of the burner isolation valve and remove the section of line containing the flow control valve for further strip-down

On large air handlers fitted with separate block valves it will be necessary to remove the fuel gas line complete as Section 8410 above

Following replacement re-commission the air handler

Note If the fresh air damper is not in the full open position the heat input must not exceed the maximum heat input at recirculation condition specified in the technical data section of this manual

8411 PILOT GAS GOVERNOR AND BLOCK VALVE

The block valve is a 240 Volt instrument

Both items may be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove either item isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the electric terrriination to the solenoid valve Undo the upstream pipe union and the compression fitting downstream of the manual block valve (PV3) Remove the pilot gas line complete for further strip down

Replace broken or distorted connections and retest for soundness Ensure the pilot gas pressure is correct and the flame is sensing an output Ensure reliability over six start-ups

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 34

8 SERVICING 3000S

8412 BELT TENSIONING PROCEDURE

The setting tensions are designed to cover a wide range of drives A precise setting force for individual applications can be calculated as detailed

SETTING FORCES

Belt Section

Setting Force To Deflect Belt 16mm per Metre Of Span

Small Pulley Diameter (mm)

Basic Setting Forces Newtons (N) Kilograms (kgf)

125 x Setting Forces Newtons (N) Kilograms (kgf)

SPZ

56 to 71 16 16 20 20 75 to 90 18 18 22 22

95 to 125 20 20 25 25 Over 125 22 22 28 28

SPA

80 to 100 22 22 28 28 106 to 140 30 30 38 38 150 to 200 36 37 45 46 Over 200 40 40 50 51

SPB

112 to 160 40 40 50 51 170 to 224 50 51 62 63 236 to 355 62 63 77 79 Over 355 65 66 81 83

SPC 224 to 250 70 71 87 89 265 to 355 92 94 115 120 Over 375 115 120 144 150

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 35

8 SERVICING 3000S

BELT TENSIONING USING FENNER BELT TENSION INDICATOR

Calculate the deflection in mm on a basis of 16mm per metre of centre distance Centre Distance (m) x 16 =Deflection (mm)

Set lower marker ring at the deflection distance required in mm on the lower scale

Set upper ring against to bottom edge of the top tube

Place the belt tension indicator on top of the belt at the centre of span and apply a force at right angles to the belt defecting it to the point where the lower marker ring is level with the top of the adjacent belt

Read off the force value indicated by the top edge of the upper marker ring

Compare this force to the kgf value shown in the table above

If a Fenner Belt Tension Indicator is not available a spring balance and rule will be suffice

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 36

8 SERVICING 30005

85 MAIN PANEL CONTROLS

All panel controls are readily accessible and may be easily exchanged for replacement components in the event of failure Ensure any replacement item is of the same make and type as the original

851 LANDIS amp GYR LFL 1335 AUTOMATIC SEQUENCE CONTROLLER

The Landis amp Gyr Automatic Sequence Controller is a plug-in unit locating on a pre-wired chassis To remove the controller undo the two retaining screws at the top left and lower right corners and pull the module off the chassis

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

852 CONTROLS CIRCUIT (24 VOLT) TRANSFORMER

The Controls Circuit Transformer is fixed to the panel back plate by tapped screws To remove the transformer undo the wiring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel Undo the two retaining screws and remove the unit complete

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

853 CONTROL RELAYS R1 R2 amp R3

The Control Relays are DIN Rail mounted To remove a relay undo the wIring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel Release the DIN rail retaining clip under the relay with a screwdriver and remove the relay

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

854 6A MCB

The 6A MCB is DIN Rail mounted To remove the MCB undo the wiring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel Release the DIN rail retaining clip under the MCB with a screwdriver and remove the MCB

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

855 THERMAL OVERLOAD

The thermal overload is attached to the underside of the main contactor To remove the overload undo the wiring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel and that the overload setting is as specified in Section 13 of this manual Unscrew the three connections to the contactor and remove the overload

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 37

8 SERVICING 3000S

856 MAIN CONTACTOR

The Main Contactor is DIN Rail mounted To remove the contactor remove the thermal overload as 855 above and then undo the wiring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel Release the DIN rail retaining clip under the contactor with a screwdriver and remove the contactor

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

857 MOTOR FUSE

To replace a motor fuse pull the fuse carrier off the fuse holder base The fuse is attached to the fuse carrier by two screws Unscrew remove and replace

86 REMOTE CONTROL STATION

The remote control station contains some serviceable parts although these items should only be fitted by an approved RS STOKVIS Ltd Engineer

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 38

9 RECOMMENDED SPARES 3000S

For two years operation it is recommended that the following items should be held in stock

ITEM DESCRIPTION PART NO QUANTITY i

1 INDICATOR BULBS W1121 1 PACK

2 SPARK PLUG 023739 1 I

3 UVDETECTOR QRA10C 1 I

4 ROOM SENSOR DRT2453 1

5 DUCT SENSOR DDT1701 1

All replacement parts can be obtained from RS STOKVIS Ltd by quoting the air handler serial number the part number and description

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 39

APPENDIX 1 30005

SOUNDNESS TESTING THE FUEL GAS PIPEWORK

This procedure should only be carried out by personnel familiar with the ECONO-AIR 3000S Series Air handler

The pressure test points and all valves are identified on the Process and Instrumentation Diagram for the air handler included in Section 1 of this n1anual

Isolate the air handler electric supply at the main control panel and lock off Close the manual isolation valves MV1 MV6 and PV3 Ensure the supply pressure is available on the upstream side of MV1

A11 TESTING THE UPSTREAM PIPEWORKAND BURNER CONTROLS 1 Connect a 60 mbar manometer to the pressure test nipple A Monitor the

pressure for two minutes Any rise in pressure indicates that valve MV1 is leaking and must be replaced Remove pressure test points Band F

2 Open MV1 to pressurise the pipework on both the main gas and pilot line to the first block valve

3 Close MV1 Allow one minute for the temperature to stabilise and then test the system for 2 minutes and watch for a drop in the pipework pressure If the pressure falls open valve MV1 and test the pipework connections and valves from MV1 to MV3 and MV1 to PV2 for leaks with a proprietary leak detector fluid or spray Turn off MV1 seal any leaks and re-test

4 If no extemalleaks are found either the pilot block valve PV1 or either the first main gas block valve MV3 is letting by

5 To test this seal pressure test point A and fit a manometer to pressure test point B Leave for two minutes with MV1 open A rise in pressure on the manometer confirms a leak on the block valve MV3 Turn off MV1 exchange the valve and re-test from point 2 above

6 Repeat this procedure for the pilot block valve Seal test point B and fit a manometer to pressure test point F Leave for two minutes with MV1 open A rise in pressure on the manometer confirms a leak on the pilot block valve PV2 Turn off MV1 exchange the valve and re-test from point 1 above Seal test point F

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 40

APPENDIX 1 30005

A12 TESTING THE DOWNSTREAM BURNER VALVE 1 Close MV1 and connect pressure test points A and 8 with flexible 6 mm bore

tubing teed into the manometer Remove pressure test point C Open MV1 to pressurise the downstream block valve MV4

2 Close MV1 and leave for one minute for the temperature to stabilise Monitor the pressure for 2 minutes If the pressure falls open valve MV1 and leak test the line between the two block valves MV3 and MV4 with a proprietary leak detector Turn off MV1 seal any leaks and re-test Note Smaller air handlers in the 3000S Series are fitted with multi-functional valves combining the pressure regulator and two block valves in one component The above procedure still applies but if a leak is found on either block valve the whole control should be replaced If no external leaks are found the downstream block valve is letting by

3 To confirm this close MV1 remove the manometer and refit to pressure test point C Connect pressure test points A and 8 with flexible 6mm bore tubing Open MV1 and allow one minute for the temperature to stabilise Monitor the pressure for a further 2 minutes with MV1 still open A rise in pressure confirms that the second block valve MV4 is letting by Turn off MV1 Replace the valve and re-test from 2 above

A13 TESTING THE DOWNSTREAM BURNER PIPEWORK 1 Close MV1 and connect pressure test points A and D with flexible 6 mm bore

tubing teed into the manometer Open MV1 to pressurise the downstream pilot pipework

2 Close MV1 and leave for one minute for the temperature to stabilise Monitor the pressure for 2 minutes If the pressure falls open valve MV1 and leak test the line between the downstream block valve MV4 and the manual block MV6 with a proprietary leak detector fluid or spray If no external leaks are found the manual block valve MV6 is letting by Turn off MV1 seal any leakages and reshytest from 2 above

A14 TESTING THE DOWNSTREAM PILOT PIPEWORK 1 Close MV1 and connect pressure test points A and F with flexible 6mm bore

tubing teed into the manometer Open MV1 to pressurise the downstream pilot pipework

2 Close MV1 and leave for one rninute for the temperature to stabilise Monitor the pressure for 2 minutes If the pressure falls open valve MV1 and leak test the line between the downstream block valve PV2 and the manual block PV3 with a proprietary leak detector fluid or spray If no external leaks are found the manual block valve PV3 is letting by Turn off MV1 seal any leakages and reshytest from 2 above

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 41

APPENDIX 1 30005

A15 TESTING THE BURNER CONNECTIONS 1 Remove the burner access panel as described in Section 84 of this manual

Remove the burner spark igniter Slacken the two retaining bolts holding the burner to the burner support straps and unbolt the burner supply endplate from the burner casting and mixing plates

2 Connect pressure test points A and 0 with flexible 6mm bore tubing teed into the manometer Open MV1 and MV6 to pressurise the burner pipework Leak test the main gas burner pipework and connections with proprietary leak detector fluid Turn off MV6 Seal any leakages and re-test

3 Connect pressure test points A and F with flexible 6 mm bore tubing teed into the manometer Open MV1 and PV3 to pressurise the pilot burner pipework Leak test the pilot gas burner pipework and connections with proprietary leak detector fluid Turn off PV3 Seal any leakages and re-test

4 Turn off MV1

5 Replace the spark igniter and profile division plate

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 42

APPENDIX 2 30005

START SEQUENCE

The burner start sequence is controlled by the Landis and Gyr burner management unit The timings are pre-set and comply with 885885 This unit must NOT be tampered with

A brief description of the start-up sequence isshy

The unit checks

1 The NO FLAME signal on the UV flame scanner

Note If the scanner detects a flame at any time other than in the correct operating sequence the flame programmer initiates a lockout

2 The operation of the combustion air proving switch in the NO AIR position

3 The air handler discharge high temperature switch

If the checks are completed the unit starts the combustion air fan and then checks the combustion airflow

Once the airflow is proven the unit checks that the damper control circuit is functioning correctly After the damper microswitch is made to prove the fresh air damper is fully open the sequence allows 30 seconds for the combustion air to purge any combustible gas from the air handler

After completion of the purge the spark ignition system is energised the pilot valve opened and the spark terminated If the pilot flame is not proven by the UV scanner the system will initiate a LOCKOUT

If the flame is proven the main gas valves are opened the pilot extinguished and the main burner flame proven

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 43

i

APPENDIX 2 30008

The following flow chart shows the complete start sequence including the lighting of the various indicating lamps

MANUAL STATUS LIGHT POWER ON

POWER ON

I INITIATE START BY TIME

SETTING ON CONTROLLER

I CHECK NO FLAME

VISIBLE

PROVEj FAIL LOCKOUT

I CHECK RELAY R4 NC

POSITION

PROVE FAIL NO START

I CHECK AIR PRESSURE SWITCH NC POSITION

PROVE FAIL NO START

I CHECK RELAY R1 NC

POSITION

PROVE j

FAIL NO START

I START COMBUSTION

AIR BLOWER

I CHECK AIR PRESSURE SWITCH NO POSITION

PROVE I

FAIL NO START

I STATUS LIGHT FAN ON

I ENERGISE RELAY R1

I

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 44

I

I

APPENDIX 2 30008

I CHECK OVERHEAT LIMIT

CONTROL R5

PROVE I

FAIL I I

CHECK 541412 LOOP CLOSED ON

LANDIS ampGYR CIRCUIT

PROVE I

FAIL I I

COMBUSTION AIR PURGE PERIOD

30 SECONDS

I

NO START

NO START

CANCEL NO FLAME CHECK CIRCUIT

I

ENERGISE SPARK

I TIMED PERIOD 25 SECONDS

I ENERGISE PILOT GAS

VALVE

I TIMED PERIOD 25 SECONDS

I TERMINATE SPARK

I INTERROGATE UV FLAME SCANNER

PROVE I

FAIL I I

TIMED PERIOD 10 SECONDS

I

LOCKOUT

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 45

I

I

APPENDIX 2 3000S

I ENERGISE MAIN GAS

VALVES

I

STATUS LIGHT BURNER ON

I TIMED PERIOD

5 SECONDS

I DE-ENERGISE PILOT

GAS VALVES

CONTINUOUS FROM PILOT

I INTERROGATE UV FLAME SCANNER

PROVE I

FAIL I I

LOCKOUT I

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 46

APPENDIX 3 30005

Please see copy of Standard Service Sheet

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 47

APPENDIX 4 30005

A41 TIME OUT SCREEN

This is the standard screen displayed when the touch screen is not in use The back light is off to save energy_ To access the STATUS screen touch the ENTER key and the following screen is displayed

[]][I][]rn[IJOO[][IJOO[] EJ~E11 I[]I ~ middot I

NOTE

The Touch Screen operates using the heat produced by the touch of a finger and therefore only LIGHT pressure is required

Excessive pressure can damage the Touch Screen

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 48

APPENDIX 4 30008

A42 STATUS SCREEN

On the typical STATUS screen the illustrated information detailed is as follows

19 36 Fan Brn

RS OS

100 Fst_~_ Lck _ _ Xst Gas~o ~ I

RS Indicates the current room temperature

OS ~( t~~ the current duct discharge temperature

Fan Indicates the current status of the fan by showing the arrow and the fan blades for ON and OFF is shown by the arrow and fan blades being removed

Brn Indicates the current status of the burner with the black flames indicating the burner to be ON and vice versa

Lck LOCKOUT - This indicates a flame failure when highlighted during normal or start-up operation

Xst EXCESS TEMPERATURE SWITCH - This indicates the unit has reached the trip limit on the over heat stat when highlighted during operation

Indicates the current position of the gas modulating valve during normal Gas

operation (0-100)

Indicates whether the Frost stat is energised and the unit is running on frost Fst

override

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 49

APPENDIX 4 30008

A43 CHANGING SETTINGS

It is possible to change the settings for the time of operation and the required temperature set points The following details the steps required

A44 ENTERING THE SECURITY CODE

From the STATUS screen touch the return key and the screen below will be displayed

Type the HIGH LEVEL security code (4321) If you make a mistake use the BACK SPACE key to delete any incorrect number(s) Touch the ENTER key when the code is correct

If the security code is incorrect the screen above will be displayed then try again If after several attempts you can not gain access please contact RS STOKVIS Ltd for further information

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 50

APPENDIX 4 30008

When the code is entered correctly the MAIN MENU is displayed as detailed below

~ STATUS SET VALUES~ ~ TIVIE CLOCK [) [) [) [) [)

The MAIN MENU screen shows the three menu items available The title for each menu item can be changed to suit the end user Please notify RS STOKVIS Ltd prior to commissioning should these parameters require special amendments

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 51

APPENDIX 4 30008

A45 CHANGING OR SETTING A TIME SCHEDULE

From the main menu screen select the TIME CLOCK page by running finger across screen symbol and touch the ENTER key the screen below will be displayed

On the following screen highlight the TS1 symbol and touch the ENTER key

The current time schedule will now be displayed as shown below The display will automatically default to the current day (1 =Monday 2 =Tuesday etc) In this case day 5 (Friday) the four schedule switching times refer to that day

IAC6BBB1BHIS1

mm0CIl bull mID 17BB 17BB 17HB

Iillleschedule

To modify a time select it by highlighting and touch the ENTER key and the following screen is displayed

To amend the appropriate onoff time as shown on the screen below The arrows to the right of the time are for altering the hours and the arrows on the left for the minutes

Once you have set the time use the ESCape key to exit back to the time schedule screen and choose another day by touching the required number Another time may now be modified as before

IAC6BBB1BHIS1

H8BH

I i eschedule

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 52

APPENDIX 4 30008

Use the ESCape key to exit back to the MAIN MENU screen

~ STATUS ~ SET VALUES

TIME CLOCK []~ [] [] [] []

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 53

APPENDIX 4 30005

A46 CHANGING SET VALUES

From the main menu screen select the SET VALUES page by highlight in the normal way and touch the ENTER key

The following screen is displayed

36 19 18III III IIIHsv Rsv Llv

To change the RSV highlight it in the normal way and touch the ENTER key and the screen below will now be shown

IAC6RRR1RR40 T I

0 19 (Y)l RSV

ROOM SET VALUE

The above screen shows the parameters that can be changed The values to the far left are the limitations of set point (OC) Change the set point by using the UP and DOWN ARROWS on the left of the screen or touch the set value itself followed by the ENTER key to select the set value and set it directly using the numeric keyboard All values can be changed in this way

Use the ESCape key twice to exit back to the MAIN MENU screen

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 54

APPENDIX 4 30005

A47 COMMISSIONING AND SERVICING BURNER CHECKS

Select the SET VALUES screen from the MAIN MENU screen and adjust the high lirrlit set point to 55degC to drive the burner to high fire

IAC6HHH1HH60 ~T I

0 19 (Y)

HSV

HIGH SET VALUE ~

Ensure the set value is returned to 36degC once the appropriate checks and adjustments as described in Section 43 of this manual have been completed Return to the SET VALUES screen and select the low limit value to adjust the low fire setting

Reduce the low limit value to OdegC to drive the gas valve to low fire and complete the appropriate checks and adjustments as described in Section 43 of this manual and ensure the set value is returned to the original value

A48 GMT ltgt BST CHANGEOVER DAYLIGHT SAVINGS

To change your unit to British Summer TimelWinter Time the following system screen must be highlighted by touching the Iamp1 button twice

By touching the clock symbol in the top left hand corner followed by the ENTER key the screen below will be displayed

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 55

APPENDIX 4 30008

188311 851193

544

By touching and highlighting in this case 18 followed by the ENTER key A small box allowing the entry of two digits will appear Enter the desired time required using the numbered keys followed by ENTER key Your unit is now set to operate on BSTBWT

Touch the ESC key three times to return back to the Status screen

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 56

STOKVIS ENERGY SYSTEMS 96R WALTON ROAD EAST MOLESEY SURREY KT8 0DL TEL 020 8783 3050 08707 707 747 FAX 020 8783 3051 08707 707 767 E-MAIL infostokvisboilerscom WEBSITE wwwstokvisboilerscom

JULY 1999

Page 33: ECONOAIR 3000S SERIES AIR HANDLING UNIT DIRECT FIREDstokvisboilers.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/EconoAir... · 2019-05-10 · ECONOAIR 3000S SERIES AIR HANDLING UNIT DIRECT FIRED

7 FAULT FINDING 30008

73 LOCKOUT LIGHT IS ILLUMINATED

This light indicates a failure in the burner ignition and flame supervision system

RESET the unit and follow the progress of the start sequence The full cycle may take two minutes

1

------t

2 LOCKOUT after 35-40 seconds indicates an ignition failure RESET the system and observe the pilot and ignition spark during the start-up attempt

I-- shy

3 Observe the spark This should be strong and highly visible If not remove and clean the spark plug as Section 82 Check that the spark plug gap is correctly set at 15 mm

-- shy

4 Check the pilot flame If the pilot flame ignites and the unit goes to LOCKOUT the scanning system is at fault Remove and clean the detector as Section 82 Check the flame signal as in Section 431

5 If the pilot does not light the gas supply system is faulty Check the pilot system for restriction and the pilot valve operation

6 If the pilot lights and the unit goes to LOCKOUT after the main gas valves are addressed either the flow control valve is blocked or one of the main gas block valves has failed Fit a manometer on the pressure test point on the outlet flange of the multishyfunctional control and observe if the pressure rises when the main gas valves are addressed No pressure rise will indicate failure of the main gas valves

74 AIR FAN ON LIGHT ILLUMINATED

If the burner does not start check

1 SUMMERIOFFIWINTER switch is in WINTER position

2 Overheat Limit Control

These interlocks prevent the burner management system starting

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 29

8 SERVICING 3000S

IMPORTANT Servicing and maintenance should be only carried out by a RS STOKVIS Ltd approved engineer

Only use replacement parts provided by the appliance manufacturer

Check that the air openings for combustion and for ventilation of any plant roon or compartment are clear

81 ISOLATION

811 FUEL GAS ISOLATION

The fuel gas to the ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler should be isolated and locked off at the manual ball valve mounted at the start of the fuel gas line Additionally before entering or servicing the air handler the burner manual isolation valve and pilot line isolation valve should be closed

812 ELECTRICAL ISOLATION

All electric power to the air handler and the remote control station is switched through the local isolator This isolator is fitted with a lock facility to permit it to be locked in the OFF position

Additionally isolate the power at the Wall Isolator

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 30

8 SERVICING 30005

82 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE

The air handler should be routinely serviced at the start of each heating season Isolate the air handler as above before servicing Details of access to individual components are given in Section 84 of this manual

1 Remove and clean spark igniter Check that the gap is correctly set at 25 mm Replace every two years

2 Clean the flame detector lens to ensure freedom from dirt and moisture If the cell shows any sign of cracks it should be replaced Routinely replace the cell every two years or after 10000 hours of operation which ever comes first

3 Inspect the entire air handler paint system for general damage Repair as necessary

4 Every two years brush the burner plates and clear the burner holes carefully with a Size 18mm drill for NP II and 20mm drill for NP I

WARNING THE BURNER HOLES MUST NOT BE ENLARGED

5 Inspect and lubricate all damper linkages to ensure freedom of operation Wipe off all excess lubricants to prevent dirt build up on linkage parts

6 Check the fan belt for cracks and splits Check tension The correct tension gives 16mm deflection per metre of span when the belt is centrally loaded with a force of 27N Adjust as necessary

7 Grease both the fan shaft bearings with Mobiith AW2 grease or similar

NEVER use high temperature grease

NEVER mix two different greases within the bearing always flush existing grease out

Note Removing the cover plate on the end of the air handler gains access to the outboard fan bearing

Light to Slow to 0 120 2 to 6 months Clean Dry

Medium Medium 120 200 1 to 2 months

Moderate to Light to Slow to 0 120 1 to 4 weeks Dry

Dirty Medium Medium 120 200 1 to 7 days

Extreme Dirt Dry Light to Slow to 0 200 Daily Flushing out

Medium Medium Dirt

83 ANNUAL SERVICE CHECKS

After Servicing test fire the air handler following the Commissioning Procedure detailed in Section 4 of this manual to ensure correct operation generally Special attention must be paid to the damper system and related controls and interlocks

Additionally check that the fresh air and recirculation air entry path to the air handler has been kept clear and instruct the User of the need for this as necessary

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 31

8 SERVICING 3000S

84 REMOVAL PROCEDURE FOR REPLACEABLE COMPONENTS

IMPORTANT

Turn off the gas at the appliance service valve and the electricity at the main panel and wall isolator before proceeding

841 BURNER

The burner is located inside the air handler casing and is mounted on two brackets from the support straps To remove the burner isolate the air handler as in 81 and undo the union on the fuel gas line adjacent to the burner isolation valve (MV6) and unscrew the main and pilot gas feed pipes from the burner rail Access to the rear of the burner assembly is made by removing the partition plate below the burner separating the fresh air inlet to the burner from the return air inlet compartment This is held in place by screws which engage in captive nuts on the top side of the partition Remove the Flame Detector and pull off the ignition plug cap Disconnect the burner support brackets and remove the burner The burner will easily pass through the access hatch for further strip down Replace in the reverse order soundness test the gas pipework check the burner operation and duty as described in the commissioning section of this manual

842 FLAME DETECTOR

This is a 240 Volt instrument

The flame detector is mounted on the end of the burner rail inside the air handler casing To remove the detector isolate the panel electric supply and lock off Push the scanner towards the burner and rotate to release the bayonet fixing and lift the detector from its mount Remove the two screws holding the detector cover and disconnect the supply leads noting the polarity of the connections

Replace the flame detector in the reverse order ensuring correct polarity of connections Ensure the access panel is securely closed and the retaining nuts are tightened down Check operation by inserting a test meter in the points provided in the main control panel and reading the flame signals during start up to full rate burner operation (See 431) Operate the appliance over six starts for reliability of operation including tum off of start and main gas valves to check for lockout operation

843 IGNITER SPARK PLUG

This is a high tension spark plug

The igniter spark plug is mounted on the end of the burner rail inside the air handler casing To remove the spark plug isolate the air handler as above Enter the service access door Access to the spark plug is made through the profile plate To remove the spark plug pull off the high tension lead and unscrew the plug with a plug spanner

When replacing the spark plug check the plug gap is set at 15mm Check ignition reliability over six start ups

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 32

8 SERVICING 3000S

844 IGNITER SPARK TRANSFORMER

This is a 240 Volt instrument

The ignition transformer is located in a plastic box mounted on the air handler casing adjacent to the main control panel To remove the transformer isolate the air handler as above and unscrew the four retaining screws holding the box lid in place and remove the lid Disconnect the supply cable at the terminal strip and undo the transformer retaining screws The transformer may then be unscrewed from the High Tension cable leading to the spark plug

Replacement is a simple reversal of this procedure

Check ignition reliability over six start ups

845 COMBUSTION AIR PRESSURE SWITCH (DPS)

Note The switch is set and sealed and should be replaced if not operating correctly

This switch is a 240 Volt instrument

The air switch is mounted directly on the air handler casing and can be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove the switch isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the supply cable Break the downstream pipe compression fitting and unscrew the switch housing from its locating fitting Reverse the procedure to replace after ensuring switch setting is as specified in Section 13 of this manual Operate the air handler to ensure reliability of operation over six start ups

846 AIR HANDLER OVERHEAT LIMIT CONTROL

This is a 240 Volt instrument

The overheat limit control can be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove the control isolate the air handler as above and lock off Remove the switch cover Disconnect the supply cable and unscrew the control housing from its locating fitting Reverse the procedure to replace check the switch is set to 50degC Test the switch operation as described in Section 43 over at least three operations

847 AIR FAN AND MOTOR

The air fan motor is a 415 Volt 3 phase motor

The motor and slide rails are easily accessible inside the air handler casing If it is necessary to remove the motor isolate the air handler as above Slacken the fan-belt tension and remove the drive belts Pull the motor away from the air handler casing to make access to the motor terminal box and disconnect the supply cable The motor may now be removed from the unit Following replacement the air handler must be fully re-commissioned as in Section 4

It is unlikely that the air fan will need replacing or servicing If required a full procedure should be obtained from RS STOKVIS Ltd

Replacement must be followed by full re-commissioning as in Section 4

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 33

8 SERVICING 3000S

848 FUEL GAS MULTI-FUNCTIONAL CONTROL - SMALL UNITS

This is a 240 Volt instrument

The fuel gas multi-functional control can be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove the unit isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the Hirschman electric termination Unbolt the control from its flanges and remove

When replacing care must be taken to ensure the flange 0 rings are undamaged and in the correct location Following replacement the air handler must be fully reshycommissioned as in Section 4 including tests for soundness prior to start-up

849 GOVERNOR AND BLOCK VALVES

The block valves are 240 Volt instruments

All these items may be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove any item isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the electric termination to the two block valves the pilot block valve and the flow control block valve Break the two pipe unions and remove the fuel gas line complete for further strip-down

8410 FUEL GAS FLOW CONTROL VALVE

This is a 24 Volt instrument

The fuel gas How control valve can be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove the valve isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the supply cables to the control valve

On small air handlers fitted with a multi-functional control support the multi-functional control and unbolt its discharge flange Break the union downstream of the burner isolation valve and remove the section of line containing the flow control valve for further strip-down

On large air handlers fitted with separate block valves it will be necessary to remove the fuel gas line complete as Section 8410 above

Following replacement re-commission the air handler

Note If the fresh air damper is not in the full open position the heat input must not exceed the maximum heat input at recirculation condition specified in the technical data section of this manual

8411 PILOT GAS GOVERNOR AND BLOCK VALVE

The block valve is a 240 Volt instrument

Both items may be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove either item isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the electric terrriination to the solenoid valve Undo the upstream pipe union and the compression fitting downstream of the manual block valve (PV3) Remove the pilot gas line complete for further strip down

Replace broken or distorted connections and retest for soundness Ensure the pilot gas pressure is correct and the flame is sensing an output Ensure reliability over six start-ups

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 34

8 SERVICING 3000S

8412 BELT TENSIONING PROCEDURE

The setting tensions are designed to cover a wide range of drives A precise setting force for individual applications can be calculated as detailed

SETTING FORCES

Belt Section

Setting Force To Deflect Belt 16mm per Metre Of Span

Small Pulley Diameter (mm)

Basic Setting Forces Newtons (N) Kilograms (kgf)

125 x Setting Forces Newtons (N) Kilograms (kgf)

SPZ

56 to 71 16 16 20 20 75 to 90 18 18 22 22

95 to 125 20 20 25 25 Over 125 22 22 28 28

SPA

80 to 100 22 22 28 28 106 to 140 30 30 38 38 150 to 200 36 37 45 46 Over 200 40 40 50 51

SPB

112 to 160 40 40 50 51 170 to 224 50 51 62 63 236 to 355 62 63 77 79 Over 355 65 66 81 83

SPC 224 to 250 70 71 87 89 265 to 355 92 94 115 120 Over 375 115 120 144 150

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 35

8 SERVICING 3000S

BELT TENSIONING USING FENNER BELT TENSION INDICATOR

Calculate the deflection in mm on a basis of 16mm per metre of centre distance Centre Distance (m) x 16 =Deflection (mm)

Set lower marker ring at the deflection distance required in mm on the lower scale

Set upper ring against to bottom edge of the top tube

Place the belt tension indicator on top of the belt at the centre of span and apply a force at right angles to the belt defecting it to the point where the lower marker ring is level with the top of the adjacent belt

Read off the force value indicated by the top edge of the upper marker ring

Compare this force to the kgf value shown in the table above

If a Fenner Belt Tension Indicator is not available a spring balance and rule will be suffice

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 36

8 SERVICING 30005

85 MAIN PANEL CONTROLS

All panel controls are readily accessible and may be easily exchanged for replacement components in the event of failure Ensure any replacement item is of the same make and type as the original

851 LANDIS amp GYR LFL 1335 AUTOMATIC SEQUENCE CONTROLLER

The Landis amp Gyr Automatic Sequence Controller is a plug-in unit locating on a pre-wired chassis To remove the controller undo the two retaining screws at the top left and lower right corners and pull the module off the chassis

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

852 CONTROLS CIRCUIT (24 VOLT) TRANSFORMER

The Controls Circuit Transformer is fixed to the panel back plate by tapped screws To remove the transformer undo the wiring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel Undo the two retaining screws and remove the unit complete

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

853 CONTROL RELAYS R1 R2 amp R3

The Control Relays are DIN Rail mounted To remove a relay undo the wIring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel Release the DIN rail retaining clip under the relay with a screwdriver and remove the relay

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

854 6A MCB

The 6A MCB is DIN Rail mounted To remove the MCB undo the wiring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel Release the DIN rail retaining clip under the MCB with a screwdriver and remove the MCB

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

855 THERMAL OVERLOAD

The thermal overload is attached to the underside of the main contactor To remove the overload undo the wiring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel and that the overload setting is as specified in Section 13 of this manual Unscrew the three connections to the contactor and remove the overload

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 37

8 SERVICING 3000S

856 MAIN CONTACTOR

The Main Contactor is DIN Rail mounted To remove the contactor remove the thermal overload as 855 above and then undo the wiring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel Release the DIN rail retaining clip under the contactor with a screwdriver and remove the contactor

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

857 MOTOR FUSE

To replace a motor fuse pull the fuse carrier off the fuse holder base The fuse is attached to the fuse carrier by two screws Unscrew remove and replace

86 REMOTE CONTROL STATION

The remote control station contains some serviceable parts although these items should only be fitted by an approved RS STOKVIS Ltd Engineer

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 38

9 RECOMMENDED SPARES 3000S

For two years operation it is recommended that the following items should be held in stock

ITEM DESCRIPTION PART NO QUANTITY i

1 INDICATOR BULBS W1121 1 PACK

2 SPARK PLUG 023739 1 I

3 UVDETECTOR QRA10C 1 I

4 ROOM SENSOR DRT2453 1

5 DUCT SENSOR DDT1701 1

All replacement parts can be obtained from RS STOKVIS Ltd by quoting the air handler serial number the part number and description

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 39

APPENDIX 1 30005

SOUNDNESS TESTING THE FUEL GAS PIPEWORK

This procedure should only be carried out by personnel familiar with the ECONO-AIR 3000S Series Air handler

The pressure test points and all valves are identified on the Process and Instrumentation Diagram for the air handler included in Section 1 of this n1anual

Isolate the air handler electric supply at the main control panel and lock off Close the manual isolation valves MV1 MV6 and PV3 Ensure the supply pressure is available on the upstream side of MV1

A11 TESTING THE UPSTREAM PIPEWORKAND BURNER CONTROLS 1 Connect a 60 mbar manometer to the pressure test nipple A Monitor the

pressure for two minutes Any rise in pressure indicates that valve MV1 is leaking and must be replaced Remove pressure test points Band F

2 Open MV1 to pressurise the pipework on both the main gas and pilot line to the first block valve

3 Close MV1 Allow one minute for the temperature to stabilise and then test the system for 2 minutes and watch for a drop in the pipework pressure If the pressure falls open valve MV1 and test the pipework connections and valves from MV1 to MV3 and MV1 to PV2 for leaks with a proprietary leak detector fluid or spray Turn off MV1 seal any leaks and re-test

4 If no extemalleaks are found either the pilot block valve PV1 or either the first main gas block valve MV3 is letting by

5 To test this seal pressure test point A and fit a manometer to pressure test point B Leave for two minutes with MV1 open A rise in pressure on the manometer confirms a leak on the block valve MV3 Turn off MV1 exchange the valve and re-test from point 2 above

6 Repeat this procedure for the pilot block valve Seal test point B and fit a manometer to pressure test point F Leave for two minutes with MV1 open A rise in pressure on the manometer confirms a leak on the pilot block valve PV2 Turn off MV1 exchange the valve and re-test from point 1 above Seal test point F

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 40

APPENDIX 1 30005

A12 TESTING THE DOWNSTREAM BURNER VALVE 1 Close MV1 and connect pressure test points A and 8 with flexible 6 mm bore

tubing teed into the manometer Remove pressure test point C Open MV1 to pressurise the downstream block valve MV4

2 Close MV1 and leave for one minute for the temperature to stabilise Monitor the pressure for 2 minutes If the pressure falls open valve MV1 and leak test the line between the two block valves MV3 and MV4 with a proprietary leak detector Turn off MV1 seal any leaks and re-test Note Smaller air handlers in the 3000S Series are fitted with multi-functional valves combining the pressure regulator and two block valves in one component The above procedure still applies but if a leak is found on either block valve the whole control should be replaced If no external leaks are found the downstream block valve is letting by

3 To confirm this close MV1 remove the manometer and refit to pressure test point C Connect pressure test points A and 8 with flexible 6mm bore tubing Open MV1 and allow one minute for the temperature to stabilise Monitor the pressure for a further 2 minutes with MV1 still open A rise in pressure confirms that the second block valve MV4 is letting by Turn off MV1 Replace the valve and re-test from 2 above

A13 TESTING THE DOWNSTREAM BURNER PIPEWORK 1 Close MV1 and connect pressure test points A and D with flexible 6 mm bore

tubing teed into the manometer Open MV1 to pressurise the downstream pilot pipework

2 Close MV1 and leave for one minute for the temperature to stabilise Monitor the pressure for 2 minutes If the pressure falls open valve MV1 and leak test the line between the downstream block valve MV4 and the manual block MV6 with a proprietary leak detector fluid or spray If no external leaks are found the manual block valve MV6 is letting by Turn off MV1 seal any leakages and reshytest from 2 above

A14 TESTING THE DOWNSTREAM PILOT PIPEWORK 1 Close MV1 and connect pressure test points A and F with flexible 6mm bore

tubing teed into the manometer Open MV1 to pressurise the downstream pilot pipework

2 Close MV1 and leave for one rninute for the temperature to stabilise Monitor the pressure for 2 minutes If the pressure falls open valve MV1 and leak test the line between the downstream block valve PV2 and the manual block PV3 with a proprietary leak detector fluid or spray If no external leaks are found the manual block valve PV3 is letting by Turn off MV1 seal any leakages and reshytest from 2 above

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 41

APPENDIX 1 30005

A15 TESTING THE BURNER CONNECTIONS 1 Remove the burner access panel as described in Section 84 of this manual

Remove the burner spark igniter Slacken the two retaining bolts holding the burner to the burner support straps and unbolt the burner supply endplate from the burner casting and mixing plates

2 Connect pressure test points A and 0 with flexible 6mm bore tubing teed into the manometer Open MV1 and MV6 to pressurise the burner pipework Leak test the main gas burner pipework and connections with proprietary leak detector fluid Turn off MV6 Seal any leakages and re-test

3 Connect pressure test points A and F with flexible 6 mm bore tubing teed into the manometer Open MV1 and PV3 to pressurise the pilot burner pipework Leak test the pilot gas burner pipework and connections with proprietary leak detector fluid Turn off PV3 Seal any leakages and re-test

4 Turn off MV1

5 Replace the spark igniter and profile division plate

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 42

APPENDIX 2 30005

START SEQUENCE

The burner start sequence is controlled by the Landis and Gyr burner management unit The timings are pre-set and comply with 885885 This unit must NOT be tampered with

A brief description of the start-up sequence isshy

The unit checks

1 The NO FLAME signal on the UV flame scanner

Note If the scanner detects a flame at any time other than in the correct operating sequence the flame programmer initiates a lockout

2 The operation of the combustion air proving switch in the NO AIR position

3 The air handler discharge high temperature switch

If the checks are completed the unit starts the combustion air fan and then checks the combustion airflow

Once the airflow is proven the unit checks that the damper control circuit is functioning correctly After the damper microswitch is made to prove the fresh air damper is fully open the sequence allows 30 seconds for the combustion air to purge any combustible gas from the air handler

After completion of the purge the spark ignition system is energised the pilot valve opened and the spark terminated If the pilot flame is not proven by the UV scanner the system will initiate a LOCKOUT

If the flame is proven the main gas valves are opened the pilot extinguished and the main burner flame proven

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 43

i

APPENDIX 2 30008

The following flow chart shows the complete start sequence including the lighting of the various indicating lamps

MANUAL STATUS LIGHT POWER ON

POWER ON

I INITIATE START BY TIME

SETTING ON CONTROLLER

I CHECK NO FLAME

VISIBLE

PROVEj FAIL LOCKOUT

I CHECK RELAY R4 NC

POSITION

PROVE FAIL NO START

I CHECK AIR PRESSURE SWITCH NC POSITION

PROVE FAIL NO START

I CHECK RELAY R1 NC

POSITION

PROVE j

FAIL NO START

I START COMBUSTION

AIR BLOWER

I CHECK AIR PRESSURE SWITCH NO POSITION

PROVE I

FAIL NO START

I STATUS LIGHT FAN ON

I ENERGISE RELAY R1

I

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 44

I

I

APPENDIX 2 30008

I CHECK OVERHEAT LIMIT

CONTROL R5

PROVE I

FAIL I I

CHECK 541412 LOOP CLOSED ON

LANDIS ampGYR CIRCUIT

PROVE I

FAIL I I

COMBUSTION AIR PURGE PERIOD

30 SECONDS

I

NO START

NO START

CANCEL NO FLAME CHECK CIRCUIT

I

ENERGISE SPARK

I TIMED PERIOD 25 SECONDS

I ENERGISE PILOT GAS

VALVE

I TIMED PERIOD 25 SECONDS

I TERMINATE SPARK

I INTERROGATE UV FLAME SCANNER

PROVE I

FAIL I I

TIMED PERIOD 10 SECONDS

I

LOCKOUT

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 45

I

I

APPENDIX 2 3000S

I ENERGISE MAIN GAS

VALVES

I

STATUS LIGHT BURNER ON

I TIMED PERIOD

5 SECONDS

I DE-ENERGISE PILOT

GAS VALVES

CONTINUOUS FROM PILOT

I INTERROGATE UV FLAME SCANNER

PROVE I

FAIL I I

LOCKOUT I

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 46

APPENDIX 3 30005

Please see copy of Standard Service Sheet

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 47

APPENDIX 4 30005

A41 TIME OUT SCREEN

This is the standard screen displayed when the touch screen is not in use The back light is off to save energy_ To access the STATUS screen touch the ENTER key and the following screen is displayed

[]][I][]rn[IJOO[][IJOO[] EJ~E11 I[]I ~ middot I

NOTE

The Touch Screen operates using the heat produced by the touch of a finger and therefore only LIGHT pressure is required

Excessive pressure can damage the Touch Screen

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 48

APPENDIX 4 30008

A42 STATUS SCREEN

On the typical STATUS screen the illustrated information detailed is as follows

19 36 Fan Brn

RS OS

100 Fst_~_ Lck _ _ Xst Gas~o ~ I

RS Indicates the current room temperature

OS ~( t~~ the current duct discharge temperature

Fan Indicates the current status of the fan by showing the arrow and the fan blades for ON and OFF is shown by the arrow and fan blades being removed

Brn Indicates the current status of the burner with the black flames indicating the burner to be ON and vice versa

Lck LOCKOUT - This indicates a flame failure when highlighted during normal or start-up operation

Xst EXCESS TEMPERATURE SWITCH - This indicates the unit has reached the trip limit on the over heat stat when highlighted during operation

Indicates the current position of the gas modulating valve during normal Gas

operation (0-100)

Indicates whether the Frost stat is energised and the unit is running on frost Fst

override

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 49

APPENDIX 4 30008

A43 CHANGING SETTINGS

It is possible to change the settings for the time of operation and the required temperature set points The following details the steps required

A44 ENTERING THE SECURITY CODE

From the STATUS screen touch the return key and the screen below will be displayed

Type the HIGH LEVEL security code (4321) If you make a mistake use the BACK SPACE key to delete any incorrect number(s) Touch the ENTER key when the code is correct

If the security code is incorrect the screen above will be displayed then try again If after several attempts you can not gain access please contact RS STOKVIS Ltd for further information

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 50

APPENDIX 4 30008

When the code is entered correctly the MAIN MENU is displayed as detailed below

~ STATUS SET VALUES~ ~ TIVIE CLOCK [) [) [) [) [)

The MAIN MENU screen shows the three menu items available The title for each menu item can be changed to suit the end user Please notify RS STOKVIS Ltd prior to commissioning should these parameters require special amendments

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 51

APPENDIX 4 30008

A45 CHANGING OR SETTING A TIME SCHEDULE

From the main menu screen select the TIME CLOCK page by running finger across screen symbol and touch the ENTER key the screen below will be displayed

On the following screen highlight the TS1 symbol and touch the ENTER key

The current time schedule will now be displayed as shown below The display will automatically default to the current day (1 =Monday 2 =Tuesday etc) In this case day 5 (Friday) the four schedule switching times refer to that day

IAC6BBB1BHIS1

mm0CIl bull mID 17BB 17BB 17HB

Iillleschedule

To modify a time select it by highlighting and touch the ENTER key and the following screen is displayed

To amend the appropriate onoff time as shown on the screen below The arrows to the right of the time are for altering the hours and the arrows on the left for the minutes

Once you have set the time use the ESCape key to exit back to the time schedule screen and choose another day by touching the required number Another time may now be modified as before

IAC6BBB1BHIS1

H8BH

I i eschedule

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 52

APPENDIX 4 30008

Use the ESCape key to exit back to the MAIN MENU screen

~ STATUS ~ SET VALUES

TIME CLOCK []~ [] [] [] []

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 53

APPENDIX 4 30005

A46 CHANGING SET VALUES

From the main menu screen select the SET VALUES page by highlight in the normal way and touch the ENTER key

The following screen is displayed

36 19 18III III IIIHsv Rsv Llv

To change the RSV highlight it in the normal way and touch the ENTER key and the screen below will now be shown

IAC6RRR1RR40 T I

0 19 (Y)l RSV

ROOM SET VALUE

The above screen shows the parameters that can be changed The values to the far left are the limitations of set point (OC) Change the set point by using the UP and DOWN ARROWS on the left of the screen or touch the set value itself followed by the ENTER key to select the set value and set it directly using the numeric keyboard All values can be changed in this way

Use the ESCape key twice to exit back to the MAIN MENU screen

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 54

APPENDIX 4 30005

A47 COMMISSIONING AND SERVICING BURNER CHECKS

Select the SET VALUES screen from the MAIN MENU screen and adjust the high lirrlit set point to 55degC to drive the burner to high fire

IAC6HHH1HH60 ~T I

0 19 (Y)

HSV

HIGH SET VALUE ~

Ensure the set value is returned to 36degC once the appropriate checks and adjustments as described in Section 43 of this manual have been completed Return to the SET VALUES screen and select the low limit value to adjust the low fire setting

Reduce the low limit value to OdegC to drive the gas valve to low fire and complete the appropriate checks and adjustments as described in Section 43 of this manual and ensure the set value is returned to the original value

A48 GMT ltgt BST CHANGEOVER DAYLIGHT SAVINGS

To change your unit to British Summer TimelWinter Time the following system screen must be highlighted by touching the Iamp1 button twice

By touching the clock symbol in the top left hand corner followed by the ENTER key the screen below will be displayed

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 55

APPENDIX 4 30008

188311 851193

544

By touching and highlighting in this case 18 followed by the ENTER key A small box allowing the entry of two digits will appear Enter the desired time required using the numbered keys followed by ENTER key Your unit is now set to operate on BSTBWT

Touch the ESC key three times to return back to the Status screen

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 56

STOKVIS ENERGY SYSTEMS 96R WALTON ROAD EAST MOLESEY SURREY KT8 0DL TEL 020 8783 3050 08707 707 747 FAX 020 8783 3051 08707 707 767 E-MAIL infostokvisboilerscom WEBSITE wwwstokvisboilerscom

JULY 1999

Page 34: ECONOAIR 3000S SERIES AIR HANDLING UNIT DIRECT FIREDstokvisboilers.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/EconoAir... · 2019-05-10 · ECONOAIR 3000S SERIES AIR HANDLING UNIT DIRECT FIRED

8 SERVICING 3000S

IMPORTANT Servicing and maintenance should be only carried out by a RS STOKVIS Ltd approved engineer

Only use replacement parts provided by the appliance manufacturer

Check that the air openings for combustion and for ventilation of any plant roon or compartment are clear

81 ISOLATION

811 FUEL GAS ISOLATION

The fuel gas to the ECONO-AIR 3000S Series air handler should be isolated and locked off at the manual ball valve mounted at the start of the fuel gas line Additionally before entering or servicing the air handler the burner manual isolation valve and pilot line isolation valve should be closed

812 ELECTRICAL ISOLATION

All electric power to the air handler and the remote control station is switched through the local isolator This isolator is fitted with a lock facility to permit it to be locked in the OFF position

Additionally isolate the power at the Wall Isolator

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 30

8 SERVICING 30005

82 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE

The air handler should be routinely serviced at the start of each heating season Isolate the air handler as above before servicing Details of access to individual components are given in Section 84 of this manual

1 Remove and clean spark igniter Check that the gap is correctly set at 25 mm Replace every two years

2 Clean the flame detector lens to ensure freedom from dirt and moisture If the cell shows any sign of cracks it should be replaced Routinely replace the cell every two years or after 10000 hours of operation which ever comes first

3 Inspect the entire air handler paint system for general damage Repair as necessary

4 Every two years brush the burner plates and clear the burner holes carefully with a Size 18mm drill for NP II and 20mm drill for NP I

WARNING THE BURNER HOLES MUST NOT BE ENLARGED

5 Inspect and lubricate all damper linkages to ensure freedom of operation Wipe off all excess lubricants to prevent dirt build up on linkage parts

6 Check the fan belt for cracks and splits Check tension The correct tension gives 16mm deflection per metre of span when the belt is centrally loaded with a force of 27N Adjust as necessary

7 Grease both the fan shaft bearings with Mobiith AW2 grease or similar

NEVER use high temperature grease

NEVER mix two different greases within the bearing always flush existing grease out

Note Removing the cover plate on the end of the air handler gains access to the outboard fan bearing

Light to Slow to 0 120 2 to 6 months Clean Dry

Medium Medium 120 200 1 to 2 months

Moderate to Light to Slow to 0 120 1 to 4 weeks Dry

Dirty Medium Medium 120 200 1 to 7 days

Extreme Dirt Dry Light to Slow to 0 200 Daily Flushing out

Medium Medium Dirt

83 ANNUAL SERVICE CHECKS

After Servicing test fire the air handler following the Commissioning Procedure detailed in Section 4 of this manual to ensure correct operation generally Special attention must be paid to the damper system and related controls and interlocks

Additionally check that the fresh air and recirculation air entry path to the air handler has been kept clear and instruct the User of the need for this as necessary

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 31

8 SERVICING 3000S

84 REMOVAL PROCEDURE FOR REPLACEABLE COMPONENTS

IMPORTANT

Turn off the gas at the appliance service valve and the electricity at the main panel and wall isolator before proceeding

841 BURNER

The burner is located inside the air handler casing and is mounted on two brackets from the support straps To remove the burner isolate the air handler as in 81 and undo the union on the fuel gas line adjacent to the burner isolation valve (MV6) and unscrew the main and pilot gas feed pipes from the burner rail Access to the rear of the burner assembly is made by removing the partition plate below the burner separating the fresh air inlet to the burner from the return air inlet compartment This is held in place by screws which engage in captive nuts on the top side of the partition Remove the Flame Detector and pull off the ignition plug cap Disconnect the burner support brackets and remove the burner The burner will easily pass through the access hatch for further strip down Replace in the reverse order soundness test the gas pipework check the burner operation and duty as described in the commissioning section of this manual

842 FLAME DETECTOR

This is a 240 Volt instrument

The flame detector is mounted on the end of the burner rail inside the air handler casing To remove the detector isolate the panel electric supply and lock off Push the scanner towards the burner and rotate to release the bayonet fixing and lift the detector from its mount Remove the two screws holding the detector cover and disconnect the supply leads noting the polarity of the connections

Replace the flame detector in the reverse order ensuring correct polarity of connections Ensure the access panel is securely closed and the retaining nuts are tightened down Check operation by inserting a test meter in the points provided in the main control panel and reading the flame signals during start up to full rate burner operation (See 431) Operate the appliance over six starts for reliability of operation including tum off of start and main gas valves to check for lockout operation

843 IGNITER SPARK PLUG

This is a high tension spark plug

The igniter spark plug is mounted on the end of the burner rail inside the air handler casing To remove the spark plug isolate the air handler as above Enter the service access door Access to the spark plug is made through the profile plate To remove the spark plug pull off the high tension lead and unscrew the plug with a plug spanner

When replacing the spark plug check the plug gap is set at 15mm Check ignition reliability over six start ups

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 32

8 SERVICING 3000S

844 IGNITER SPARK TRANSFORMER

This is a 240 Volt instrument

The ignition transformer is located in a plastic box mounted on the air handler casing adjacent to the main control panel To remove the transformer isolate the air handler as above and unscrew the four retaining screws holding the box lid in place and remove the lid Disconnect the supply cable at the terminal strip and undo the transformer retaining screws The transformer may then be unscrewed from the High Tension cable leading to the spark plug

Replacement is a simple reversal of this procedure

Check ignition reliability over six start ups

845 COMBUSTION AIR PRESSURE SWITCH (DPS)

Note The switch is set and sealed and should be replaced if not operating correctly

This switch is a 240 Volt instrument

The air switch is mounted directly on the air handler casing and can be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove the switch isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the supply cable Break the downstream pipe compression fitting and unscrew the switch housing from its locating fitting Reverse the procedure to replace after ensuring switch setting is as specified in Section 13 of this manual Operate the air handler to ensure reliability of operation over six start ups

846 AIR HANDLER OVERHEAT LIMIT CONTROL

This is a 240 Volt instrument

The overheat limit control can be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove the control isolate the air handler as above and lock off Remove the switch cover Disconnect the supply cable and unscrew the control housing from its locating fitting Reverse the procedure to replace check the switch is set to 50degC Test the switch operation as described in Section 43 over at least three operations

847 AIR FAN AND MOTOR

The air fan motor is a 415 Volt 3 phase motor

The motor and slide rails are easily accessible inside the air handler casing If it is necessary to remove the motor isolate the air handler as above Slacken the fan-belt tension and remove the drive belts Pull the motor away from the air handler casing to make access to the motor terminal box and disconnect the supply cable The motor may now be removed from the unit Following replacement the air handler must be fully re-commissioned as in Section 4

It is unlikely that the air fan will need replacing or servicing If required a full procedure should be obtained from RS STOKVIS Ltd

Replacement must be followed by full re-commissioning as in Section 4

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 33

8 SERVICING 3000S

848 FUEL GAS MULTI-FUNCTIONAL CONTROL - SMALL UNITS

This is a 240 Volt instrument

The fuel gas multi-functional control can be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove the unit isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the Hirschman electric termination Unbolt the control from its flanges and remove

When replacing care must be taken to ensure the flange 0 rings are undamaged and in the correct location Following replacement the air handler must be fully reshycommissioned as in Section 4 including tests for soundness prior to start-up

849 GOVERNOR AND BLOCK VALVES

The block valves are 240 Volt instruments

All these items may be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove any item isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the electric termination to the two block valves the pilot block valve and the flow control block valve Break the two pipe unions and remove the fuel gas line complete for further strip-down

8410 FUEL GAS FLOW CONTROL VALVE

This is a 24 Volt instrument

The fuel gas How control valve can be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove the valve isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the supply cables to the control valve

On small air handlers fitted with a multi-functional control support the multi-functional control and unbolt its discharge flange Break the union downstream of the burner isolation valve and remove the section of line containing the flow control valve for further strip-down

On large air handlers fitted with separate block valves it will be necessary to remove the fuel gas line complete as Section 8410 above

Following replacement re-commission the air handler

Note If the fresh air damper is not in the full open position the heat input must not exceed the maximum heat input at recirculation condition specified in the technical data section of this manual

8411 PILOT GAS GOVERNOR AND BLOCK VALVE

The block valve is a 240 Volt instrument

Both items may be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove either item isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the electric terrriination to the solenoid valve Undo the upstream pipe union and the compression fitting downstream of the manual block valve (PV3) Remove the pilot gas line complete for further strip down

Replace broken or distorted connections and retest for soundness Ensure the pilot gas pressure is correct and the flame is sensing an output Ensure reliability over six start-ups

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 34

8 SERVICING 3000S

8412 BELT TENSIONING PROCEDURE

The setting tensions are designed to cover a wide range of drives A precise setting force for individual applications can be calculated as detailed

SETTING FORCES

Belt Section

Setting Force To Deflect Belt 16mm per Metre Of Span

Small Pulley Diameter (mm)

Basic Setting Forces Newtons (N) Kilograms (kgf)

125 x Setting Forces Newtons (N) Kilograms (kgf)

SPZ

56 to 71 16 16 20 20 75 to 90 18 18 22 22

95 to 125 20 20 25 25 Over 125 22 22 28 28

SPA

80 to 100 22 22 28 28 106 to 140 30 30 38 38 150 to 200 36 37 45 46 Over 200 40 40 50 51

SPB

112 to 160 40 40 50 51 170 to 224 50 51 62 63 236 to 355 62 63 77 79 Over 355 65 66 81 83

SPC 224 to 250 70 71 87 89 265 to 355 92 94 115 120 Over 375 115 120 144 150

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 35

8 SERVICING 3000S

BELT TENSIONING USING FENNER BELT TENSION INDICATOR

Calculate the deflection in mm on a basis of 16mm per metre of centre distance Centre Distance (m) x 16 =Deflection (mm)

Set lower marker ring at the deflection distance required in mm on the lower scale

Set upper ring against to bottom edge of the top tube

Place the belt tension indicator on top of the belt at the centre of span and apply a force at right angles to the belt defecting it to the point where the lower marker ring is level with the top of the adjacent belt

Read off the force value indicated by the top edge of the upper marker ring

Compare this force to the kgf value shown in the table above

If a Fenner Belt Tension Indicator is not available a spring balance and rule will be suffice

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 36

8 SERVICING 30005

85 MAIN PANEL CONTROLS

All panel controls are readily accessible and may be easily exchanged for replacement components in the event of failure Ensure any replacement item is of the same make and type as the original

851 LANDIS amp GYR LFL 1335 AUTOMATIC SEQUENCE CONTROLLER

The Landis amp Gyr Automatic Sequence Controller is a plug-in unit locating on a pre-wired chassis To remove the controller undo the two retaining screws at the top left and lower right corners and pull the module off the chassis

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

852 CONTROLS CIRCUIT (24 VOLT) TRANSFORMER

The Controls Circuit Transformer is fixed to the panel back plate by tapped screws To remove the transformer undo the wiring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel Undo the two retaining screws and remove the unit complete

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

853 CONTROL RELAYS R1 R2 amp R3

The Control Relays are DIN Rail mounted To remove a relay undo the wIring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel Release the DIN rail retaining clip under the relay with a screwdriver and remove the relay

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

854 6A MCB

The 6A MCB is DIN Rail mounted To remove the MCB undo the wiring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel Release the DIN rail retaining clip under the MCB with a screwdriver and remove the MCB

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

855 THERMAL OVERLOAD

The thermal overload is attached to the underside of the main contactor To remove the overload undo the wiring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel and that the overload setting is as specified in Section 13 of this manual Unscrew the three connections to the contactor and remove the overload

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 37

8 SERVICING 3000S

856 MAIN CONTACTOR

The Main Contactor is DIN Rail mounted To remove the contactor remove the thermal overload as 855 above and then undo the wiring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel Release the DIN rail retaining clip under the contactor with a screwdriver and remove the contactor

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

857 MOTOR FUSE

To replace a motor fuse pull the fuse carrier off the fuse holder base The fuse is attached to the fuse carrier by two screws Unscrew remove and replace

86 REMOTE CONTROL STATION

The remote control station contains some serviceable parts although these items should only be fitted by an approved RS STOKVIS Ltd Engineer

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 38

9 RECOMMENDED SPARES 3000S

For two years operation it is recommended that the following items should be held in stock

ITEM DESCRIPTION PART NO QUANTITY i

1 INDICATOR BULBS W1121 1 PACK

2 SPARK PLUG 023739 1 I

3 UVDETECTOR QRA10C 1 I

4 ROOM SENSOR DRT2453 1

5 DUCT SENSOR DDT1701 1

All replacement parts can be obtained from RS STOKVIS Ltd by quoting the air handler serial number the part number and description

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 39

APPENDIX 1 30005

SOUNDNESS TESTING THE FUEL GAS PIPEWORK

This procedure should only be carried out by personnel familiar with the ECONO-AIR 3000S Series Air handler

The pressure test points and all valves are identified on the Process and Instrumentation Diagram for the air handler included in Section 1 of this n1anual

Isolate the air handler electric supply at the main control panel and lock off Close the manual isolation valves MV1 MV6 and PV3 Ensure the supply pressure is available on the upstream side of MV1

A11 TESTING THE UPSTREAM PIPEWORKAND BURNER CONTROLS 1 Connect a 60 mbar manometer to the pressure test nipple A Monitor the

pressure for two minutes Any rise in pressure indicates that valve MV1 is leaking and must be replaced Remove pressure test points Band F

2 Open MV1 to pressurise the pipework on both the main gas and pilot line to the first block valve

3 Close MV1 Allow one minute for the temperature to stabilise and then test the system for 2 minutes and watch for a drop in the pipework pressure If the pressure falls open valve MV1 and test the pipework connections and valves from MV1 to MV3 and MV1 to PV2 for leaks with a proprietary leak detector fluid or spray Turn off MV1 seal any leaks and re-test

4 If no extemalleaks are found either the pilot block valve PV1 or either the first main gas block valve MV3 is letting by

5 To test this seal pressure test point A and fit a manometer to pressure test point B Leave for two minutes with MV1 open A rise in pressure on the manometer confirms a leak on the block valve MV3 Turn off MV1 exchange the valve and re-test from point 2 above

6 Repeat this procedure for the pilot block valve Seal test point B and fit a manometer to pressure test point F Leave for two minutes with MV1 open A rise in pressure on the manometer confirms a leak on the pilot block valve PV2 Turn off MV1 exchange the valve and re-test from point 1 above Seal test point F

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 40

APPENDIX 1 30005

A12 TESTING THE DOWNSTREAM BURNER VALVE 1 Close MV1 and connect pressure test points A and 8 with flexible 6 mm bore

tubing teed into the manometer Remove pressure test point C Open MV1 to pressurise the downstream block valve MV4

2 Close MV1 and leave for one minute for the temperature to stabilise Monitor the pressure for 2 minutes If the pressure falls open valve MV1 and leak test the line between the two block valves MV3 and MV4 with a proprietary leak detector Turn off MV1 seal any leaks and re-test Note Smaller air handlers in the 3000S Series are fitted with multi-functional valves combining the pressure regulator and two block valves in one component The above procedure still applies but if a leak is found on either block valve the whole control should be replaced If no external leaks are found the downstream block valve is letting by

3 To confirm this close MV1 remove the manometer and refit to pressure test point C Connect pressure test points A and 8 with flexible 6mm bore tubing Open MV1 and allow one minute for the temperature to stabilise Monitor the pressure for a further 2 minutes with MV1 still open A rise in pressure confirms that the second block valve MV4 is letting by Turn off MV1 Replace the valve and re-test from 2 above

A13 TESTING THE DOWNSTREAM BURNER PIPEWORK 1 Close MV1 and connect pressure test points A and D with flexible 6 mm bore

tubing teed into the manometer Open MV1 to pressurise the downstream pilot pipework

2 Close MV1 and leave for one minute for the temperature to stabilise Monitor the pressure for 2 minutes If the pressure falls open valve MV1 and leak test the line between the downstream block valve MV4 and the manual block MV6 with a proprietary leak detector fluid or spray If no external leaks are found the manual block valve MV6 is letting by Turn off MV1 seal any leakages and reshytest from 2 above

A14 TESTING THE DOWNSTREAM PILOT PIPEWORK 1 Close MV1 and connect pressure test points A and F with flexible 6mm bore

tubing teed into the manometer Open MV1 to pressurise the downstream pilot pipework

2 Close MV1 and leave for one rninute for the temperature to stabilise Monitor the pressure for 2 minutes If the pressure falls open valve MV1 and leak test the line between the downstream block valve PV2 and the manual block PV3 with a proprietary leak detector fluid or spray If no external leaks are found the manual block valve PV3 is letting by Turn off MV1 seal any leakages and reshytest from 2 above

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 41

APPENDIX 1 30005

A15 TESTING THE BURNER CONNECTIONS 1 Remove the burner access panel as described in Section 84 of this manual

Remove the burner spark igniter Slacken the two retaining bolts holding the burner to the burner support straps and unbolt the burner supply endplate from the burner casting and mixing plates

2 Connect pressure test points A and 0 with flexible 6mm bore tubing teed into the manometer Open MV1 and MV6 to pressurise the burner pipework Leak test the main gas burner pipework and connections with proprietary leak detector fluid Turn off MV6 Seal any leakages and re-test

3 Connect pressure test points A and F with flexible 6 mm bore tubing teed into the manometer Open MV1 and PV3 to pressurise the pilot burner pipework Leak test the pilot gas burner pipework and connections with proprietary leak detector fluid Turn off PV3 Seal any leakages and re-test

4 Turn off MV1

5 Replace the spark igniter and profile division plate

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 42

APPENDIX 2 30005

START SEQUENCE

The burner start sequence is controlled by the Landis and Gyr burner management unit The timings are pre-set and comply with 885885 This unit must NOT be tampered with

A brief description of the start-up sequence isshy

The unit checks

1 The NO FLAME signal on the UV flame scanner

Note If the scanner detects a flame at any time other than in the correct operating sequence the flame programmer initiates a lockout

2 The operation of the combustion air proving switch in the NO AIR position

3 The air handler discharge high temperature switch

If the checks are completed the unit starts the combustion air fan and then checks the combustion airflow

Once the airflow is proven the unit checks that the damper control circuit is functioning correctly After the damper microswitch is made to prove the fresh air damper is fully open the sequence allows 30 seconds for the combustion air to purge any combustible gas from the air handler

After completion of the purge the spark ignition system is energised the pilot valve opened and the spark terminated If the pilot flame is not proven by the UV scanner the system will initiate a LOCKOUT

If the flame is proven the main gas valves are opened the pilot extinguished and the main burner flame proven

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 43

i

APPENDIX 2 30008

The following flow chart shows the complete start sequence including the lighting of the various indicating lamps

MANUAL STATUS LIGHT POWER ON

POWER ON

I INITIATE START BY TIME

SETTING ON CONTROLLER

I CHECK NO FLAME

VISIBLE

PROVEj FAIL LOCKOUT

I CHECK RELAY R4 NC

POSITION

PROVE FAIL NO START

I CHECK AIR PRESSURE SWITCH NC POSITION

PROVE FAIL NO START

I CHECK RELAY R1 NC

POSITION

PROVE j

FAIL NO START

I START COMBUSTION

AIR BLOWER

I CHECK AIR PRESSURE SWITCH NO POSITION

PROVE I

FAIL NO START

I STATUS LIGHT FAN ON

I ENERGISE RELAY R1

I

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 44

I

I

APPENDIX 2 30008

I CHECK OVERHEAT LIMIT

CONTROL R5

PROVE I

FAIL I I

CHECK 541412 LOOP CLOSED ON

LANDIS ampGYR CIRCUIT

PROVE I

FAIL I I

COMBUSTION AIR PURGE PERIOD

30 SECONDS

I

NO START

NO START

CANCEL NO FLAME CHECK CIRCUIT

I

ENERGISE SPARK

I TIMED PERIOD 25 SECONDS

I ENERGISE PILOT GAS

VALVE

I TIMED PERIOD 25 SECONDS

I TERMINATE SPARK

I INTERROGATE UV FLAME SCANNER

PROVE I

FAIL I I

TIMED PERIOD 10 SECONDS

I

LOCKOUT

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 45

I

I

APPENDIX 2 3000S

I ENERGISE MAIN GAS

VALVES

I

STATUS LIGHT BURNER ON

I TIMED PERIOD

5 SECONDS

I DE-ENERGISE PILOT

GAS VALVES

CONTINUOUS FROM PILOT

I INTERROGATE UV FLAME SCANNER

PROVE I

FAIL I I

LOCKOUT I

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 46

APPENDIX 3 30005

Please see copy of Standard Service Sheet

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 47

APPENDIX 4 30005

A41 TIME OUT SCREEN

This is the standard screen displayed when the touch screen is not in use The back light is off to save energy_ To access the STATUS screen touch the ENTER key and the following screen is displayed

[]][I][]rn[IJOO[][IJOO[] EJ~E11 I[]I ~ middot I

NOTE

The Touch Screen operates using the heat produced by the touch of a finger and therefore only LIGHT pressure is required

Excessive pressure can damage the Touch Screen

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 48

APPENDIX 4 30008

A42 STATUS SCREEN

On the typical STATUS screen the illustrated information detailed is as follows

19 36 Fan Brn

RS OS

100 Fst_~_ Lck _ _ Xst Gas~o ~ I

RS Indicates the current room temperature

OS ~( t~~ the current duct discharge temperature

Fan Indicates the current status of the fan by showing the arrow and the fan blades for ON and OFF is shown by the arrow and fan blades being removed

Brn Indicates the current status of the burner with the black flames indicating the burner to be ON and vice versa

Lck LOCKOUT - This indicates a flame failure when highlighted during normal or start-up operation

Xst EXCESS TEMPERATURE SWITCH - This indicates the unit has reached the trip limit on the over heat stat when highlighted during operation

Indicates the current position of the gas modulating valve during normal Gas

operation (0-100)

Indicates whether the Frost stat is energised and the unit is running on frost Fst

override

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 49

APPENDIX 4 30008

A43 CHANGING SETTINGS

It is possible to change the settings for the time of operation and the required temperature set points The following details the steps required

A44 ENTERING THE SECURITY CODE

From the STATUS screen touch the return key and the screen below will be displayed

Type the HIGH LEVEL security code (4321) If you make a mistake use the BACK SPACE key to delete any incorrect number(s) Touch the ENTER key when the code is correct

If the security code is incorrect the screen above will be displayed then try again If after several attempts you can not gain access please contact RS STOKVIS Ltd for further information

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 50

APPENDIX 4 30008

When the code is entered correctly the MAIN MENU is displayed as detailed below

~ STATUS SET VALUES~ ~ TIVIE CLOCK [) [) [) [) [)

The MAIN MENU screen shows the three menu items available The title for each menu item can be changed to suit the end user Please notify RS STOKVIS Ltd prior to commissioning should these parameters require special amendments

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 51

APPENDIX 4 30008

A45 CHANGING OR SETTING A TIME SCHEDULE

From the main menu screen select the TIME CLOCK page by running finger across screen symbol and touch the ENTER key the screen below will be displayed

On the following screen highlight the TS1 symbol and touch the ENTER key

The current time schedule will now be displayed as shown below The display will automatically default to the current day (1 =Monday 2 =Tuesday etc) In this case day 5 (Friday) the four schedule switching times refer to that day

IAC6BBB1BHIS1

mm0CIl bull mID 17BB 17BB 17HB

Iillleschedule

To modify a time select it by highlighting and touch the ENTER key and the following screen is displayed

To amend the appropriate onoff time as shown on the screen below The arrows to the right of the time are for altering the hours and the arrows on the left for the minutes

Once you have set the time use the ESCape key to exit back to the time schedule screen and choose another day by touching the required number Another time may now be modified as before

IAC6BBB1BHIS1

H8BH

I i eschedule

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 52

APPENDIX 4 30008

Use the ESCape key to exit back to the MAIN MENU screen

~ STATUS ~ SET VALUES

TIME CLOCK []~ [] [] [] []

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 53

APPENDIX 4 30005

A46 CHANGING SET VALUES

From the main menu screen select the SET VALUES page by highlight in the normal way and touch the ENTER key

The following screen is displayed

36 19 18III III IIIHsv Rsv Llv

To change the RSV highlight it in the normal way and touch the ENTER key and the screen below will now be shown

IAC6RRR1RR40 T I

0 19 (Y)l RSV

ROOM SET VALUE

The above screen shows the parameters that can be changed The values to the far left are the limitations of set point (OC) Change the set point by using the UP and DOWN ARROWS on the left of the screen or touch the set value itself followed by the ENTER key to select the set value and set it directly using the numeric keyboard All values can be changed in this way

Use the ESCape key twice to exit back to the MAIN MENU screen

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 54

APPENDIX 4 30005

A47 COMMISSIONING AND SERVICING BURNER CHECKS

Select the SET VALUES screen from the MAIN MENU screen and adjust the high lirrlit set point to 55degC to drive the burner to high fire

IAC6HHH1HH60 ~T I

0 19 (Y)

HSV

HIGH SET VALUE ~

Ensure the set value is returned to 36degC once the appropriate checks and adjustments as described in Section 43 of this manual have been completed Return to the SET VALUES screen and select the low limit value to adjust the low fire setting

Reduce the low limit value to OdegC to drive the gas valve to low fire and complete the appropriate checks and adjustments as described in Section 43 of this manual and ensure the set value is returned to the original value

A48 GMT ltgt BST CHANGEOVER DAYLIGHT SAVINGS

To change your unit to British Summer TimelWinter Time the following system screen must be highlighted by touching the Iamp1 button twice

By touching the clock symbol in the top left hand corner followed by the ENTER key the screen below will be displayed

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 55

APPENDIX 4 30008

188311 851193

544

By touching and highlighting in this case 18 followed by the ENTER key A small box allowing the entry of two digits will appear Enter the desired time required using the numbered keys followed by ENTER key Your unit is now set to operate on BSTBWT

Touch the ESC key three times to return back to the Status screen

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 56

STOKVIS ENERGY SYSTEMS 96R WALTON ROAD EAST MOLESEY SURREY KT8 0DL TEL 020 8783 3050 08707 707 747 FAX 020 8783 3051 08707 707 767 E-MAIL infostokvisboilerscom WEBSITE wwwstokvisboilerscom

JULY 1999

Page 35: ECONOAIR 3000S SERIES AIR HANDLING UNIT DIRECT FIREDstokvisboilers.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/EconoAir... · 2019-05-10 · ECONOAIR 3000S SERIES AIR HANDLING UNIT DIRECT FIRED

8 SERVICING 30005

82 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE

The air handler should be routinely serviced at the start of each heating season Isolate the air handler as above before servicing Details of access to individual components are given in Section 84 of this manual

1 Remove and clean spark igniter Check that the gap is correctly set at 25 mm Replace every two years

2 Clean the flame detector lens to ensure freedom from dirt and moisture If the cell shows any sign of cracks it should be replaced Routinely replace the cell every two years or after 10000 hours of operation which ever comes first

3 Inspect the entire air handler paint system for general damage Repair as necessary

4 Every two years brush the burner plates and clear the burner holes carefully with a Size 18mm drill for NP II and 20mm drill for NP I

WARNING THE BURNER HOLES MUST NOT BE ENLARGED

5 Inspect and lubricate all damper linkages to ensure freedom of operation Wipe off all excess lubricants to prevent dirt build up on linkage parts

6 Check the fan belt for cracks and splits Check tension The correct tension gives 16mm deflection per metre of span when the belt is centrally loaded with a force of 27N Adjust as necessary

7 Grease both the fan shaft bearings with Mobiith AW2 grease or similar

NEVER use high temperature grease

NEVER mix two different greases within the bearing always flush existing grease out

Note Removing the cover plate on the end of the air handler gains access to the outboard fan bearing

Light to Slow to 0 120 2 to 6 months Clean Dry

Medium Medium 120 200 1 to 2 months

Moderate to Light to Slow to 0 120 1 to 4 weeks Dry

Dirty Medium Medium 120 200 1 to 7 days

Extreme Dirt Dry Light to Slow to 0 200 Daily Flushing out

Medium Medium Dirt

83 ANNUAL SERVICE CHECKS

After Servicing test fire the air handler following the Commissioning Procedure detailed in Section 4 of this manual to ensure correct operation generally Special attention must be paid to the damper system and related controls and interlocks

Additionally check that the fresh air and recirculation air entry path to the air handler has been kept clear and instruct the User of the need for this as necessary

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 31

8 SERVICING 3000S

84 REMOVAL PROCEDURE FOR REPLACEABLE COMPONENTS

IMPORTANT

Turn off the gas at the appliance service valve and the electricity at the main panel and wall isolator before proceeding

841 BURNER

The burner is located inside the air handler casing and is mounted on two brackets from the support straps To remove the burner isolate the air handler as in 81 and undo the union on the fuel gas line adjacent to the burner isolation valve (MV6) and unscrew the main and pilot gas feed pipes from the burner rail Access to the rear of the burner assembly is made by removing the partition plate below the burner separating the fresh air inlet to the burner from the return air inlet compartment This is held in place by screws which engage in captive nuts on the top side of the partition Remove the Flame Detector and pull off the ignition plug cap Disconnect the burner support brackets and remove the burner The burner will easily pass through the access hatch for further strip down Replace in the reverse order soundness test the gas pipework check the burner operation and duty as described in the commissioning section of this manual

842 FLAME DETECTOR

This is a 240 Volt instrument

The flame detector is mounted on the end of the burner rail inside the air handler casing To remove the detector isolate the panel electric supply and lock off Push the scanner towards the burner and rotate to release the bayonet fixing and lift the detector from its mount Remove the two screws holding the detector cover and disconnect the supply leads noting the polarity of the connections

Replace the flame detector in the reverse order ensuring correct polarity of connections Ensure the access panel is securely closed and the retaining nuts are tightened down Check operation by inserting a test meter in the points provided in the main control panel and reading the flame signals during start up to full rate burner operation (See 431) Operate the appliance over six starts for reliability of operation including tum off of start and main gas valves to check for lockout operation

843 IGNITER SPARK PLUG

This is a high tension spark plug

The igniter spark plug is mounted on the end of the burner rail inside the air handler casing To remove the spark plug isolate the air handler as above Enter the service access door Access to the spark plug is made through the profile plate To remove the spark plug pull off the high tension lead and unscrew the plug with a plug spanner

When replacing the spark plug check the plug gap is set at 15mm Check ignition reliability over six start ups

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 32

8 SERVICING 3000S

844 IGNITER SPARK TRANSFORMER

This is a 240 Volt instrument

The ignition transformer is located in a plastic box mounted on the air handler casing adjacent to the main control panel To remove the transformer isolate the air handler as above and unscrew the four retaining screws holding the box lid in place and remove the lid Disconnect the supply cable at the terminal strip and undo the transformer retaining screws The transformer may then be unscrewed from the High Tension cable leading to the spark plug

Replacement is a simple reversal of this procedure

Check ignition reliability over six start ups

845 COMBUSTION AIR PRESSURE SWITCH (DPS)

Note The switch is set and sealed and should be replaced if not operating correctly

This switch is a 240 Volt instrument

The air switch is mounted directly on the air handler casing and can be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove the switch isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the supply cable Break the downstream pipe compression fitting and unscrew the switch housing from its locating fitting Reverse the procedure to replace after ensuring switch setting is as specified in Section 13 of this manual Operate the air handler to ensure reliability of operation over six start ups

846 AIR HANDLER OVERHEAT LIMIT CONTROL

This is a 240 Volt instrument

The overheat limit control can be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove the control isolate the air handler as above and lock off Remove the switch cover Disconnect the supply cable and unscrew the control housing from its locating fitting Reverse the procedure to replace check the switch is set to 50degC Test the switch operation as described in Section 43 over at least three operations

847 AIR FAN AND MOTOR

The air fan motor is a 415 Volt 3 phase motor

The motor and slide rails are easily accessible inside the air handler casing If it is necessary to remove the motor isolate the air handler as above Slacken the fan-belt tension and remove the drive belts Pull the motor away from the air handler casing to make access to the motor terminal box and disconnect the supply cable The motor may now be removed from the unit Following replacement the air handler must be fully re-commissioned as in Section 4

It is unlikely that the air fan will need replacing or servicing If required a full procedure should be obtained from RS STOKVIS Ltd

Replacement must be followed by full re-commissioning as in Section 4

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 33

8 SERVICING 3000S

848 FUEL GAS MULTI-FUNCTIONAL CONTROL - SMALL UNITS

This is a 240 Volt instrument

The fuel gas multi-functional control can be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove the unit isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the Hirschman electric termination Unbolt the control from its flanges and remove

When replacing care must be taken to ensure the flange 0 rings are undamaged and in the correct location Following replacement the air handler must be fully reshycommissioned as in Section 4 including tests for soundness prior to start-up

849 GOVERNOR AND BLOCK VALVES

The block valves are 240 Volt instruments

All these items may be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove any item isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the electric termination to the two block valves the pilot block valve and the flow control block valve Break the two pipe unions and remove the fuel gas line complete for further strip-down

8410 FUEL GAS FLOW CONTROL VALVE

This is a 24 Volt instrument

The fuel gas How control valve can be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove the valve isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the supply cables to the control valve

On small air handlers fitted with a multi-functional control support the multi-functional control and unbolt its discharge flange Break the union downstream of the burner isolation valve and remove the section of line containing the flow control valve for further strip-down

On large air handlers fitted with separate block valves it will be necessary to remove the fuel gas line complete as Section 8410 above

Following replacement re-commission the air handler

Note If the fresh air damper is not in the full open position the heat input must not exceed the maximum heat input at recirculation condition specified in the technical data section of this manual

8411 PILOT GAS GOVERNOR AND BLOCK VALVE

The block valve is a 240 Volt instrument

Both items may be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove either item isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the electric terrriination to the solenoid valve Undo the upstream pipe union and the compression fitting downstream of the manual block valve (PV3) Remove the pilot gas line complete for further strip down

Replace broken or distorted connections and retest for soundness Ensure the pilot gas pressure is correct and the flame is sensing an output Ensure reliability over six start-ups

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 34

8 SERVICING 3000S

8412 BELT TENSIONING PROCEDURE

The setting tensions are designed to cover a wide range of drives A precise setting force for individual applications can be calculated as detailed

SETTING FORCES

Belt Section

Setting Force To Deflect Belt 16mm per Metre Of Span

Small Pulley Diameter (mm)

Basic Setting Forces Newtons (N) Kilograms (kgf)

125 x Setting Forces Newtons (N) Kilograms (kgf)

SPZ

56 to 71 16 16 20 20 75 to 90 18 18 22 22

95 to 125 20 20 25 25 Over 125 22 22 28 28

SPA

80 to 100 22 22 28 28 106 to 140 30 30 38 38 150 to 200 36 37 45 46 Over 200 40 40 50 51

SPB

112 to 160 40 40 50 51 170 to 224 50 51 62 63 236 to 355 62 63 77 79 Over 355 65 66 81 83

SPC 224 to 250 70 71 87 89 265 to 355 92 94 115 120 Over 375 115 120 144 150

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 35

8 SERVICING 3000S

BELT TENSIONING USING FENNER BELT TENSION INDICATOR

Calculate the deflection in mm on a basis of 16mm per metre of centre distance Centre Distance (m) x 16 =Deflection (mm)

Set lower marker ring at the deflection distance required in mm on the lower scale

Set upper ring against to bottom edge of the top tube

Place the belt tension indicator on top of the belt at the centre of span and apply a force at right angles to the belt defecting it to the point where the lower marker ring is level with the top of the adjacent belt

Read off the force value indicated by the top edge of the upper marker ring

Compare this force to the kgf value shown in the table above

If a Fenner Belt Tension Indicator is not available a spring balance and rule will be suffice

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 36

8 SERVICING 30005

85 MAIN PANEL CONTROLS

All panel controls are readily accessible and may be easily exchanged for replacement components in the event of failure Ensure any replacement item is of the same make and type as the original

851 LANDIS amp GYR LFL 1335 AUTOMATIC SEQUENCE CONTROLLER

The Landis amp Gyr Automatic Sequence Controller is a plug-in unit locating on a pre-wired chassis To remove the controller undo the two retaining screws at the top left and lower right corners and pull the module off the chassis

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

852 CONTROLS CIRCUIT (24 VOLT) TRANSFORMER

The Controls Circuit Transformer is fixed to the panel back plate by tapped screws To remove the transformer undo the wiring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel Undo the two retaining screws and remove the unit complete

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

853 CONTROL RELAYS R1 R2 amp R3

The Control Relays are DIN Rail mounted To remove a relay undo the wIring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel Release the DIN rail retaining clip under the relay with a screwdriver and remove the relay

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

854 6A MCB

The 6A MCB is DIN Rail mounted To remove the MCB undo the wiring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel Release the DIN rail retaining clip under the MCB with a screwdriver and remove the MCB

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

855 THERMAL OVERLOAD

The thermal overload is attached to the underside of the main contactor To remove the overload undo the wiring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel and that the overload setting is as specified in Section 13 of this manual Unscrew the three connections to the contactor and remove the overload

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 37

8 SERVICING 3000S

856 MAIN CONTACTOR

The Main Contactor is DIN Rail mounted To remove the contactor remove the thermal overload as 855 above and then undo the wiring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel Release the DIN rail retaining clip under the contactor with a screwdriver and remove the contactor

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

857 MOTOR FUSE

To replace a motor fuse pull the fuse carrier off the fuse holder base The fuse is attached to the fuse carrier by two screws Unscrew remove and replace

86 REMOTE CONTROL STATION

The remote control station contains some serviceable parts although these items should only be fitted by an approved RS STOKVIS Ltd Engineer

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 38

9 RECOMMENDED SPARES 3000S

For two years operation it is recommended that the following items should be held in stock

ITEM DESCRIPTION PART NO QUANTITY i

1 INDICATOR BULBS W1121 1 PACK

2 SPARK PLUG 023739 1 I

3 UVDETECTOR QRA10C 1 I

4 ROOM SENSOR DRT2453 1

5 DUCT SENSOR DDT1701 1

All replacement parts can be obtained from RS STOKVIS Ltd by quoting the air handler serial number the part number and description

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 39

APPENDIX 1 30005

SOUNDNESS TESTING THE FUEL GAS PIPEWORK

This procedure should only be carried out by personnel familiar with the ECONO-AIR 3000S Series Air handler

The pressure test points and all valves are identified on the Process and Instrumentation Diagram for the air handler included in Section 1 of this n1anual

Isolate the air handler electric supply at the main control panel and lock off Close the manual isolation valves MV1 MV6 and PV3 Ensure the supply pressure is available on the upstream side of MV1

A11 TESTING THE UPSTREAM PIPEWORKAND BURNER CONTROLS 1 Connect a 60 mbar manometer to the pressure test nipple A Monitor the

pressure for two minutes Any rise in pressure indicates that valve MV1 is leaking and must be replaced Remove pressure test points Band F

2 Open MV1 to pressurise the pipework on both the main gas and pilot line to the first block valve

3 Close MV1 Allow one minute for the temperature to stabilise and then test the system for 2 minutes and watch for a drop in the pipework pressure If the pressure falls open valve MV1 and test the pipework connections and valves from MV1 to MV3 and MV1 to PV2 for leaks with a proprietary leak detector fluid or spray Turn off MV1 seal any leaks and re-test

4 If no extemalleaks are found either the pilot block valve PV1 or either the first main gas block valve MV3 is letting by

5 To test this seal pressure test point A and fit a manometer to pressure test point B Leave for two minutes with MV1 open A rise in pressure on the manometer confirms a leak on the block valve MV3 Turn off MV1 exchange the valve and re-test from point 2 above

6 Repeat this procedure for the pilot block valve Seal test point B and fit a manometer to pressure test point F Leave for two minutes with MV1 open A rise in pressure on the manometer confirms a leak on the pilot block valve PV2 Turn off MV1 exchange the valve and re-test from point 1 above Seal test point F

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 40

APPENDIX 1 30005

A12 TESTING THE DOWNSTREAM BURNER VALVE 1 Close MV1 and connect pressure test points A and 8 with flexible 6 mm bore

tubing teed into the manometer Remove pressure test point C Open MV1 to pressurise the downstream block valve MV4

2 Close MV1 and leave for one minute for the temperature to stabilise Monitor the pressure for 2 minutes If the pressure falls open valve MV1 and leak test the line between the two block valves MV3 and MV4 with a proprietary leak detector Turn off MV1 seal any leaks and re-test Note Smaller air handlers in the 3000S Series are fitted with multi-functional valves combining the pressure regulator and two block valves in one component The above procedure still applies but if a leak is found on either block valve the whole control should be replaced If no external leaks are found the downstream block valve is letting by

3 To confirm this close MV1 remove the manometer and refit to pressure test point C Connect pressure test points A and 8 with flexible 6mm bore tubing Open MV1 and allow one minute for the temperature to stabilise Monitor the pressure for a further 2 minutes with MV1 still open A rise in pressure confirms that the second block valve MV4 is letting by Turn off MV1 Replace the valve and re-test from 2 above

A13 TESTING THE DOWNSTREAM BURNER PIPEWORK 1 Close MV1 and connect pressure test points A and D with flexible 6 mm bore

tubing teed into the manometer Open MV1 to pressurise the downstream pilot pipework

2 Close MV1 and leave for one minute for the temperature to stabilise Monitor the pressure for 2 minutes If the pressure falls open valve MV1 and leak test the line between the downstream block valve MV4 and the manual block MV6 with a proprietary leak detector fluid or spray If no external leaks are found the manual block valve MV6 is letting by Turn off MV1 seal any leakages and reshytest from 2 above

A14 TESTING THE DOWNSTREAM PILOT PIPEWORK 1 Close MV1 and connect pressure test points A and F with flexible 6mm bore

tubing teed into the manometer Open MV1 to pressurise the downstream pilot pipework

2 Close MV1 and leave for one rninute for the temperature to stabilise Monitor the pressure for 2 minutes If the pressure falls open valve MV1 and leak test the line between the downstream block valve PV2 and the manual block PV3 with a proprietary leak detector fluid or spray If no external leaks are found the manual block valve PV3 is letting by Turn off MV1 seal any leakages and reshytest from 2 above

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 41

APPENDIX 1 30005

A15 TESTING THE BURNER CONNECTIONS 1 Remove the burner access panel as described in Section 84 of this manual

Remove the burner spark igniter Slacken the two retaining bolts holding the burner to the burner support straps and unbolt the burner supply endplate from the burner casting and mixing plates

2 Connect pressure test points A and 0 with flexible 6mm bore tubing teed into the manometer Open MV1 and MV6 to pressurise the burner pipework Leak test the main gas burner pipework and connections with proprietary leak detector fluid Turn off MV6 Seal any leakages and re-test

3 Connect pressure test points A and F with flexible 6 mm bore tubing teed into the manometer Open MV1 and PV3 to pressurise the pilot burner pipework Leak test the pilot gas burner pipework and connections with proprietary leak detector fluid Turn off PV3 Seal any leakages and re-test

4 Turn off MV1

5 Replace the spark igniter and profile division plate

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 42

APPENDIX 2 30005

START SEQUENCE

The burner start sequence is controlled by the Landis and Gyr burner management unit The timings are pre-set and comply with 885885 This unit must NOT be tampered with

A brief description of the start-up sequence isshy

The unit checks

1 The NO FLAME signal on the UV flame scanner

Note If the scanner detects a flame at any time other than in the correct operating sequence the flame programmer initiates a lockout

2 The operation of the combustion air proving switch in the NO AIR position

3 The air handler discharge high temperature switch

If the checks are completed the unit starts the combustion air fan and then checks the combustion airflow

Once the airflow is proven the unit checks that the damper control circuit is functioning correctly After the damper microswitch is made to prove the fresh air damper is fully open the sequence allows 30 seconds for the combustion air to purge any combustible gas from the air handler

After completion of the purge the spark ignition system is energised the pilot valve opened and the spark terminated If the pilot flame is not proven by the UV scanner the system will initiate a LOCKOUT

If the flame is proven the main gas valves are opened the pilot extinguished and the main burner flame proven

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 43

i

APPENDIX 2 30008

The following flow chart shows the complete start sequence including the lighting of the various indicating lamps

MANUAL STATUS LIGHT POWER ON

POWER ON

I INITIATE START BY TIME

SETTING ON CONTROLLER

I CHECK NO FLAME

VISIBLE

PROVEj FAIL LOCKOUT

I CHECK RELAY R4 NC

POSITION

PROVE FAIL NO START

I CHECK AIR PRESSURE SWITCH NC POSITION

PROVE FAIL NO START

I CHECK RELAY R1 NC

POSITION

PROVE j

FAIL NO START

I START COMBUSTION

AIR BLOWER

I CHECK AIR PRESSURE SWITCH NO POSITION

PROVE I

FAIL NO START

I STATUS LIGHT FAN ON

I ENERGISE RELAY R1

I

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 44

I

I

APPENDIX 2 30008

I CHECK OVERHEAT LIMIT

CONTROL R5

PROVE I

FAIL I I

CHECK 541412 LOOP CLOSED ON

LANDIS ampGYR CIRCUIT

PROVE I

FAIL I I

COMBUSTION AIR PURGE PERIOD

30 SECONDS

I

NO START

NO START

CANCEL NO FLAME CHECK CIRCUIT

I

ENERGISE SPARK

I TIMED PERIOD 25 SECONDS

I ENERGISE PILOT GAS

VALVE

I TIMED PERIOD 25 SECONDS

I TERMINATE SPARK

I INTERROGATE UV FLAME SCANNER

PROVE I

FAIL I I

TIMED PERIOD 10 SECONDS

I

LOCKOUT

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 45

I

I

APPENDIX 2 3000S

I ENERGISE MAIN GAS

VALVES

I

STATUS LIGHT BURNER ON

I TIMED PERIOD

5 SECONDS

I DE-ENERGISE PILOT

GAS VALVES

CONTINUOUS FROM PILOT

I INTERROGATE UV FLAME SCANNER

PROVE I

FAIL I I

LOCKOUT I

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 46

APPENDIX 3 30005

Please see copy of Standard Service Sheet

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 47

APPENDIX 4 30005

A41 TIME OUT SCREEN

This is the standard screen displayed when the touch screen is not in use The back light is off to save energy_ To access the STATUS screen touch the ENTER key and the following screen is displayed

[]][I][]rn[IJOO[][IJOO[] EJ~E11 I[]I ~ middot I

NOTE

The Touch Screen operates using the heat produced by the touch of a finger and therefore only LIGHT pressure is required

Excessive pressure can damage the Touch Screen

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 48

APPENDIX 4 30008

A42 STATUS SCREEN

On the typical STATUS screen the illustrated information detailed is as follows

19 36 Fan Brn

RS OS

100 Fst_~_ Lck _ _ Xst Gas~o ~ I

RS Indicates the current room temperature

OS ~( t~~ the current duct discharge temperature

Fan Indicates the current status of the fan by showing the arrow and the fan blades for ON and OFF is shown by the arrow and fan blades being removed

Brn Indicates the current status of the burner with the black flames indicating the burner to be ON and vice versa

Lck LOCKOUT - This indicates a flame failure when highlighted during normal or start-up operation

Xst EXCESS TEMPERATURE SWITCH - This indicates the unit has reached the trip limit on the over heat stat when highlighted during operation

Indicates the current position of the gas modulating valve during normal Gas

operation (0-100)

Indicates whether the Frost stat is energised and the unit is running on frost Fst

override

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 49

APPENDIX 4 30008

A43 CHANGING SETTINGS

It is possible to change the settings for the time of operation and the required temperature set points The following details the steps required

A44 ENTERING THE SECURITY CODE

From the STATUS screen touch the return key and the screen below will be displayed

Type the HIGH LEVEL security code (4321) If you make a mistake use the BACK SPACE key to delete any incorrect number(s) Touch the ENTER key when the code is correct

If the security code is incorrect the screen above will be displayed then try again If after several attempts you can not gain access please contact RS STOKVIS Ltd for further information

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 50

APPENDIX 4 30008

When the code is entered correctly the MAIN MENU is displayed as detailed below

~ STATUS SET VALUES~ ~ TIVIE CLOCK [) [) [) [) [)

The MAIN MENU screen shows the three menu items available The title for each menu item can be changed to suit the end user Please notify RS STOKVIS Ltd prior to commissioning should these parameters require special amendments

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 51

APPENDIX 4 30008

A45 CHANGING OR SETTING A TIME SCHEDULE

From the main menu screen select the TIME CLOCK page by running finger across screen symbol and touch the ENTER key the screen below will be displayed

On the following screen highlight the TS1 symbol and touch the ENTER key

The current time schedule will now be displayed as shown below The display will automatically default to the current day (1 =Monday 2 =Tuesday etc) In this case day 5 (Friday) the four schedule switching times refer to that day

IAC6BBB1BHIS1

mm0CIl bull mID 17BB 17BB 17HB

Iillleschedule

To modify a time select it by highlighting and touch the ENTER key and the following screen is displayed

To amend the appropriate onoff time as shown on the screen below The arrows to the right of the time are for altering the hours and the arrows on the left for the minutes

Once you have set the time use the ESCape key to exit back to the time schedule screen and choose another day by touching the required number Another time may now be modified as before

IAC6BBB1BHIS1

H8BH

I i eschedule

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 52

APPENDIX 4 30008

Use the ESCape key to exit back to the MAIN MENU screen

~ STATUS ~ SET VALUES

TIME CLOCK []~ [] [] [] []

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 53

APPENDIX 4 30005

A46 CHANGING SET VALUES

From the main menu screen select the SET VALUES page by highlight in the normal way and touch the ENTER key

The following screen is displayed

36 19 18III III IIIHsv Rsv Llv

To change the RSV highlight it in the normal way and touch the ENTER key and the screen below will now be shown

IAC6RRR1RR40 T I

0 19 (Y)l RSV

ROOM SET VALUE

The above screen shows the parameters that can be changed The values to the far left are the limitations of set point (OC) Change the set point by using the UP and DOWN ARROWS on the left of the screen or touch the set value itself followed by the ENTER key to select the set value and set it directly using the numeric keyboard All values can be changed in this way

Use the ESCape key twice to exit back to the MAIN MENU screen

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 54

APPENDIX 4 30005

A47 COMMISSIONING AND SERVICING BURNER CHECKS

Select the SET VALUES screen from the MAIN MENU screen and adjust the high lirrlit set point to 55degC to drive the burner to high fire

IAC6HHH1HH60 ~T I

0 19 (Y)

HSV

HIGH SET VALUE ~

Ensure the set value is returned to 36degC once the appropriate checks and adjustments as described in Section 43 of this manual have been completed Return to the SET VALUES screen and select the low limit value to adjust the low fire setting

Reduce the low limit value to OdegC to drive the gas valve to low fire and complete the appropriate checks and adjustments as described in Section 43 of this manual and ensure the set value is returned to the original value

A48 GMT ltgt BST CHANGEOVER DAYLIGHT SAVINGS

To change your unit to British Summer TimelWinter Time the following system screen must be highlighted by touching the Iamp1 button twice

By touching the clock symbol in the top left hand corner followed by the ENTER key the screen below will be displayed

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 55

APPENDIX 4 30008

188311 851193

544

By touching and highlighting in this case 18 followed by the ENTER key A small box allowing the entry of two digits will appear Enter the desired time required using the numbered keys followed by ENTER key Your unit is now set to operate on BSTBWT

Touch the ESC key three times to return back to the Status screen

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 56

STOKVIS ENERGY SYSTEMS 96R WALTON ROAD EAST MOLESEY SURREY KT8 0DL TEL 020 8783 3050 08707 707 747 FAX 020 8783 3051 08707 707 767 E-MAIL infostokvisboilerscom WEBSITE wwwstokvisboilerscom

JULY 1999

Page 36: ECONOAIR 3000S SERIES AIR HANDLING UNIT DIRECT FIREDstokvisboilers.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/EconoAir... · 2019-05-10 · ECONOAIR 3000S SERIES AIR HANDLING UNIT DIRECT FIRED

8 SERVICING 3000S

84 REMOVAL PROCEDURE FOR REPLACEABLE COMPONENTS

IMPORTANT

Turn off the gas at the appliance service valve and the electricity at the main panel and wall isolator before proceeding

841 BURNER

The burner is located inside the air handler casing and is mounted on two brackets from the support straps To remove the burner isolate the air handler as in 81 and undo the union on the fuel gas line adjacent to the burner isolation valve (MV6) and unscrew the main and pilot gas feed pipes from the burner rail Access to the rear of the burner assembly is made by removing the partition plate below the burner separating the fresh air inlet to the burner from the return air inlet compartment This is held in place by screws which engage in captive nuts on the top side of the partition Remove the Flame Detector and pull off the ignition plug cap Disconnect the burner support brackets and remove the burner The burner will easily pass through the access hatch for further strip down Replace in the reverse order soundness test the gas pipework check the burner operation and duty as described in the commissioning section of this manual

842 FLAME DETECTOR

This is a 240 Volt instrument

The flame detector is mounted on the end of the burner rail inside the air handler casing To remove the detector isolate the panel electric supply and lock off Push the scanner towards the burner and rotate to release the bayonet fixing and lift the detector from its mount Remove the two screws holding the detector cover and disconnect the supply leads noting the polarity of the connections

Replace the flame detector in the reverse order ensuring correct polarity of connections Ensure the access panel is securely closed and the retaining nuts are tightened down Check operation by inserting a test meter in the points provided in the main control panel and reading the flame signals during start up to full rate burner operation (See 431) Operate the appliance over six starts for reliability of operation including tum off of start and main gas valves to check for lockout operation

843 IGNITER SPARK PLUG

This is a high tension spark plug

The igniter spark plug is mounted on the end of the burner rail inside the air handler casing To remove the spark plug isolate the air handler as above Enter the service access door Access to the spark plug is made through the profile plate To remove the spark plug pull off the high tension lead and unscrew the plug with a plug spanner

When replacing the spark plug check the plug gap is set at 15mm Check ignition reliability over six start ups

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 32

8 SERVICING 3000S

844 IGNITER SPARK TRANSFORMER

This is a 240 Volt instrument

The ignition transformer is located in a plastic box mounted on the air handler casing adjacent to the main control panel To remove the transformer isolate the air handler as above and unscrew the four retaining screws holding the box lid in place and remove the lid Disconnect the supply cable at the terminal strip and undo the transformer retaining screws The transformer may then be unscrewed from the High Tension cable leading to the spark plug

Replacement is a simple reversal of this procedure

Check ignition reliability over six start ups

845 COMBUSTION AIR PRESSURE SWITCH (DPS)

Note The switch is set and sealed and should be replaced if not operating correctly

This switch is a 240 Volt instrument

The air switch is mounted directly on the air handler casing and can be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove the switch isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the supply cable Break the downstream pipe compression fitting and unscrew the switch housing from its locating fitting Reverse the procedure to replace after ensuring switch setting is as specified in Section 13 of this manual Operate the air handler to ensure reliability of operation over six start ups

846 AIR HANDLER OVERHEAT LIMIT CONTROL

This is a 240 Volt instrument

The overheat limit control can be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove the control isolate the air handler as above and lock off Remove the switch cover Disconnect the supply cable and unscrew the control housing from its locating fitting Reverse the procedure to replace check the switch is set to 50degC Test the switch operation as described in Section 43 over at least three operations

847 AIR FAN AND MOTOR

The air fan motor is a 415 Volt 3 phase motor

The motor and slide rails are easily accessible inside the air handler casing If it is necessary to remove the motor isolate the air handler as above Slacken the fan-belt tension and remove the drive belts Pull the motor away from the air handler casing to make access to the motor terminal box and disconnect the supply cable The motor may now be removed from the unit Following replacement the air handler must be fully re-commissioned as in Section 4

It is unlikely that the air fan will need replacing or servicing If required a full procedure should be obtained from RS STOKVIS Ltd

Replacement must be followed by full re-commissioning as in Section 4

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 33

8 SERVICING 3000S

848 FUEL GAS MULTI-FUNCTIONAL CONTROL - SMALL UNITS

This is a 240 Volt instrument

The fuel gas multi-functional control can be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove the unit isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the Hirschman electric termination Unbolt the control from its flanges and remove

When replacing care must be taken to ensure the flange 0 rings are undamaged and in the correct location Following replacement the air handler must be fully reshycommissioned as in Section 4 including tests for soundness prior to start-up

849 GOVERNOR AND BLOCK VALVES

The block valves are 240 Volt instruments

All these items may be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove any item isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the electric termination to the two block valves the pilot block valve and the flow control block valve Break the two pipe unions and remove the fuel gas line complete for further strip-down

8410 FUEL GAS FLOW CONTROL VALVE

This is a 24 Volt instrument

The fuel gas How control valve can be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove the valve isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the supply cables to the control valve

On small air handlers fitted with a multi-functional control support the multi-functional control and unbolt its discharge flange Break the union downstream of the burner isolation valve and remove the section of line containing the flow control valve for further strip-down

On large air handlers fitted with separate block valves it will be necessary to remove the fuel gas line complete as Section 8410 above

Following replacement re-commission the air handler

Note If the fresh air damper is not in the full open position the heat input must not exceed the maximum heat input at recirculation condition specified in the technical data section of this manual

8411 PILOT GAS GOVERNOR AND BLOCK VALVE

The block valve is a 240 Volt instrument

Both items may be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove either item isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the electric terrriination to the solenoid valve Undo the upstream pipe union and the compression fitting downstream of the manual block valve (PV3) Remove the pilot gas line complete for further strip down

Replace broken or distorted connections and retest for soundness Ensure the pilot gas pressure is correct and the flame is sensing an output Ensure reliability over six start-ups

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 34

8 SERVICING 3000S

8412 BELT TENSIONING PROCEDURE

The setting tensions are designed to cover a wide range of drives A precise setting force for individual applications can be calculated as detailed

SETTING FORCES

Belt Section

Setting Force To Deflect Belt 16mm per Metre Of Span

Small Pulley Diameter (mm)

Basic Setting Forces Newtons (N) Kilograms (kgf)

125 x Setting Forces Newtons (N) Kilograms (kgf)

SPZ

56 to 71 16 16 20 20 75 to 90 18 18 22 22

95 to 125 20 20 25 25 Over 125 22 22 28 28

SPA

80 to 100 22 22 28 28 106 to 140 30 30 38 38 150 to 200 36 37 45 46 Over 200 40 40 50 51

SPB

112 to 160 40 40 50 51 170 to 224 50 51 62 63 236 to 355 62 63 77 79 Over 355 65 66 81 83

SPC 224 to 250 70 71 87 89 265 to 355 92 94 115 120 Over 375 115 120 144 150

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 35

8 SERVICING 3000S

BELT TENSIONING USING FENNER BELT TENSION INDICATOR

Calculate the deflection in mm on a basis of 16mm per metre of centre distance Centre Distance (m) x 16 =Deflection (mm)

Set lower marker ring at the deflection distance required in mm on the lower scale

Set upper ring against to bottom edge of the top tube

Place the belt tension indicator on top of the belt at the centre of span and apply a force at right angles to the belt defecting it to the point where the lower marker ring is level with the top of the adjacent belt

Read off the force value indicated by the top edge of the upper marker ring

Compare this force to the kgf value shown in the table above

If a Fenner Belt Tension Indicator is not available a spring balance and rule will be suffice

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 36

8 SERVICING 30005

85 MAIN PANEL CONTROLS

All panel controls are readily accessible and may be easily exchanged for replacement components in the event of failure Ensure any replacement item is of the same make and type as the original

851 LANDIS amp GYR LFL 1335 AUTOMATIC SEQUENCE CONTROLLER

The Landis amp Gyr Automatic Sequence Controller is a plug-in unit locating on a pre-wired chassis To remove the controller undo the two retaining screws at the top left and lower right corners and pull the module off the chassis

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

852 CONTROLS CIRCUIT (24 VOLT) TRANSFORMER

The Controls Circuit Transformer is fixed to the panel back plate by tapped screws To remove the transformer undo the wiring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel Undo the two retaining screws and remove the unit complete

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

853 CONTROL RELAYS R1 R2 amp R3

The Control Relays are DIN Rail mounted To remove a relay undo the wIring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel Release the DIN rail retaining clip under the relay with a screwdriver and remove the relay

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

854 6A MCB

The 6A MCB is DIN Rail mounted To remove the MCB undo the wiring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel Release the DIN rail retaining clip under the MCB with a screwdriver and remove the MCB

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

855 THERMAL OVERLOAD

The thermal overload is attached to the underside of the main contactor To remove the overload undo the wiring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel and that the overload setting is as specified in Section 13 of this manual Unscrew the three connections to the contactor and remove the overload

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 37

8 SERVICING 3000S

856 MAIN CONTACTOR

The Main Contactor is DIN Rail mounted To remove the contactor remove the thermal overload as 855 above and then undo the wiring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel Release the DIN rail retaining clip under the contactor with a screwdriver and remove the contactor

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

857 MOTOR FUSE

To replace a motor fuse pull the fuse carrier off the fuse holder base The fuse is attached to the fuse carrier by two screws Unscrew remove and replace

86 REMOTE CONTROL STATION

The remote control station contains some serviceable parts although these items should only be fitted by an approved RS STOKVIS Ltd Engineer

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 38

9 RECOMMENDED SPARES 3000S

For two years operation it is recommended that the following items should be held in stock

ITEM DESCRIPTION PART NO QUANTITY i

1 INDICATOR BULBS W1121 1 PACK

2 SPARK PLUG 023739 1 I

3 UVDETECTOR QRA10C 1 I

4 ROOM SENSOR DRT2453 1

5 DUCT SENSOR DDT1701 1

All replacement parts can be obtained from RS STOKVIS Ltd by quoting the air handler serial number the part number and description

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 39

APPENDIX 1 30005

SOUNDNESS TESTING THE FUEL GAS PIPEWORK

This procedure should only be carried out by personnel familiar with the ECONO-AIR 3000S Series Air handler

The pressure test points and all valves are identified on the Process and Instrumentation Diagram for the air handler included in Section 1 of this n1anual

Isolate the air handler electric supply at the main control panel and lock off Close the manual isolation valves MV1 MV6 and PV3 Ensure the supply pressure is available on the upstream side of MV1

A11 TESTING THE UPSTREAM PIPEWORKAND BURNER CONTROLS 1 Connect a 60 mbar manometer to the pressure test nipple A Monitor the

pressure for two minutes Any rise in pressure indicates that valve MV1 is leaking and must be replaced Remove pressure test points Band F

2 Open MV1 to pressurise the pipework on both the main gas and pilot line to the first block valve

3 Close MV1 Allow one minute for the temperature to stabilise and then test the system for 2 minutes and watch for a drop in the pipework pressure If the pressure falls open valve MV1 and test the pipework connections and valves from MV1 to MV3 and MV1 to PV2 for leaks with a proprietary leak detector fluid or spray Turn off MV1 seal any leaks and re-test

4 If no extemalleaks are found either the pilot block valve PV1 or either the first main gas block valve MV3 is letting by

5 To test this seal pressure test point A and fit a manometer to pressure test point B Leave for two minutes with MV1 open A rise in pressure on the manometer confirms a leak on the block valve MV3 Turn off MV1 exchange the valve and re-test from point 2 above

6 Repeat this procedure for the pilot block valve Seal test point B and fit a manometer to pressure test point F Leave for two minutes with MV1 open A rise in pressure on the manometer confirms a leak on the pilot block valve PV2 Turn off MV1 exchange the valve and re-test from point 1 above Seal test point F

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 40

APPENDIX 1 30005

A12 TESTING THE DOWNSTREAM BURNER VALVE 1 Close MV1 and connect pressure test points A and 8 with flexible 6 mm bore

tubing teed into the manometer Remove pressure test point C Open MV1 to pressurise the downstream block valve MV4

2 Close MV1 and leave for one minute for the temperature to stabilise Monitor the pressure for 2 minutes If the pressure falls open valve MV1 and leak test the line between the two block valves MV3 and MV4 with a proprietary leak detector Turn off MV1 seal any leaks and re-test Note Smaller air handlers in the 3000S Series are fitted with multi-functional valves combining the pressure regulator and two block valves in one component The above procedure still applies but if a leak is found on either block valve the whole control should be replaced If no external leaks are found the downstream block valve is letting by

3 To confirm this close MV1 remove the manometer and refit to pressure test point C Connect pressure test points A and 8 with flexible 6mm bore tubing Open MV1 and allow one minute for the temperature to stabilise Monitor the pressure for a further 2 minutes with MV1 still open A rise in pressure confirms that the second block valve MV4 is letting by Turn off MV1 Replace the valve and re-test from 2 above

A13 TESTING THE DOWNSTREAM BURNER PIPEWORK 1 Close MV1 and connect pressure test points A and D with flexible 6 mm bore

tubing teed into the manometer Open MV1 to pressurise the downstream pilot pipework

2 Close MV1 and leave for one minute for the temperature to stabilise Monitor the pressure for 2 minutes If the pressure falls open valve MV1 and leak test the line between the downstream block valve MV4 and the manual block MV6 with a proprietary leak detector fluid or spray If no external leaks are found the manual block valve MV6 is letting by Turn off MV1 seal any leakages and reshytest from 2 above

A14 TESTING THE DOWNSTREAM PILOT PIPEWORK 1 Close MV1 and connect pressure test points A and F with flexible 6mm bore

tubing teed into the manometer Open MV1 to pressurise the downstream pilot pipework

2 Close MV1 and leave for one rninute for the temperature to stabilise Monitor the pressure for 2 minutes If the pressure falls open valve MV1 and leak test the line between the downstream block valve PV2 and the manual block PV3 with a proprietary leak detector fluid or spray If no external leaks are found the manual block valve PV3 is letting by Turn off MV1 seal any leakages and reshytest from 2 above

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 41

APPENDIX 1 30005

A15 TESTING THE BURNER CONNECTIONS 1 Remove the burner access panel as described in Section 84 of this manual

Remove the burner spark igniter Slacken the two retaining bolts holding the burner to the burner support straps and unbolt the burner supply endplate from the burner casting and mixing plates

2 Connect pressure test points A and 0 with flexible 6mm bore tubing teed into the manometer Open MV1 and MV6 to pressurise the burner pipework Leak test the main gas burner pipework and connections with proprietary leak detector fluid Turn off MV6 Seal any leakages and re-test

3 Connect pressure test points A and F with flexible 6 mm bore tubing teed into the manometer Open MV1 and PV3 to pressurise the pilot burner pipework Leak test the pilot gas burner pipework and connections with proprietary leak detector fluid Turn off PV3 Seal any leakages and re-test

4 Turn off MV1

5 Replace the spark igniter and profile division plate

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 42

APPENDIX 2 30005

START SEQUENCE

The burner start sequence is controlled by the Landis and Gyr burner management unit The timings are pre-set and comply with 885885 This unit must NOT be tampered with

A brief description of the start-up sequence isshy

The unit checks

1 The NO FLAME signal on the UV flame scanner

Note If the scanner detects a flame at any time other than in the correct operating sequence the flame programmer initiates a lockout

2 The operation of the combustion air proving switch in the NO AIR position

3 The air handler discharge high temperature switch

If the checks are completed the unit starts the combustion air fan and then checks the combustion airflow

Once the airflow is proven the unit checks that the damper control circuit is functioning correctly After the damper microswitch is made to prove the fresh air damper is fully open the sequence allows 30 seconds for the combustion air to purge any combustible gas from the air handler

After completion of the purge the spark ignition system is energised the pilot valve opened and the spark terminated If the pilot flame is not proven by the UV scanner the system will initiate a LOCKOUT

If the flame is proven the main gas valves are opened the pilot extinguished and the main burner flame proven

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 43

i

APPENDIX 2 30008

The following flow chart shows the complete start sequence including the lighting of the various indicating lamps

MANUAL STATUS LIGHT POWER ON

POWER ON

I INITIATE START BY TIME

SETTING ON CONTROLLER

I CHECK NO FLAME

VISIBLE

PROVEj FAIL LOCKOUT

I CHECK RELAY R4 NC

POSITION

PROVE FAIL NO START

I CHECK AIR PRESSURE SWITCH NC POSITION

PROVE FAIL NO START

I CHECK RELAY R1 NC

POSITION

PROVE j

FAIL NO START

I START COMBUSTION

AIR BLOWER

I CHECK AIR PRESSURE SWITCH NO POSITION

PROVE I

FAIL NO START

I STATUS LIGHT FAN ON

I ENERGISE RELAY R1

I

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 44

I

I

APPENDIX 2 30008

I CHECK OVERHEAT LIMIT

CONTROL R5

PROVE I

FAIL I I

CHECK 541412 LOOP CLOSED ON

LANDIS ampGYR CIRCUIT

PROVE I

FAIL I I

COMBUSTION AIR PURGE PERIOD

30 SECONDS

I

NO START

NO START

CANCEL NO FLAME CHECK CIRCUIT

I

ENERGISE SPARK

I TIMED PERIOD 25 SECONDS

I ENERGISE PILOT GAS

VALVE

I TIMED PERIOD 25 SECONDS

I TERMINATE SPARK

I INTERROGATE UV FLAME SCANNER

PROVE I

FAIL I I

TIMED PERIOD 10 SECONDS

I

LOCKOUT

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 45

I

I

APPENDIX 2 3000S

I ENERGISE MAIN GAS

VALVES

I

STATUS LIGHT BURNER ON

I TIMED PERIOD

5 SECONDS

I DE-ENERGISE PILOT

GAS VALVES

CONTINUOUS FROM PILOT

I INTERROGATE UV FLAME SCANNER

PROVE I

FAIL I I

LOCKOUT I

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 46

APPENDIX 3 30005

Please see copy of Standard Service Sheet

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 47

APPENDIX 4 30005

A41 TIME OUT SCREEN

This is the standard screen displayed when the touch screen is not in use The back light is off to save energy_ To access the STATUS screen touch the ENTER key and the following screen is displayed

[]][I][]rn[IJOO[][IJOO[] EJ~E11 I[]I ~ middot I

NOTE

The Touch Screen operates using the heat produced by the touch of a finger and therefore only LIGHT pressure is required

Excessive pressure can damage the Touch Screen

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 48

APPENDIX 4 30008

A42 STATUS SCREEN

On the typical STATUS screen the illustrated information detailed is as follows

19 36 Fan Brn

RS OS

100 Fst_~_ Lck _ _ Xst Gas~o ~ I

RS Indicates the current room temperature

OS ~( t~~ the current duct discharge temperature

Fan Indicates the current status of the fan by showing the arrow and the fan blades for ON and OFF is shown by the arrow and fan blades being removed

Brn Indicates the current status of the burner with the black flames indicating the burner to be ON and vice versa

Lck LOCKOUT - This indicates a flame failure when highlighted during normal or start-up operation

Xst EXCESS TEMPERATURE SWITCH - This indicates the unit has reached the trip limit on the over heat stat when highlighted during operation

Indicates the current position of the gas modulating valve during normal Gas

operation (0-100)

Indicates whether the Frost stat is energised and the unit is running on frost Fst

override

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 49

APPENDIX 4 30008

A43 CHANGING SETTINGS

It is possible to change the settings for the time of operation and the required temperature set points The following details the steps required

A44 ENTERING THE SECURITY CODE

From the STATUS screen touch the return key and the screen below will be displayed

Type the HIGH LEVEL security code (4321) If you make a mistake use the BACK SPACE key to delete any incorrect number(s) Touch the ENTER key when the code is correct

If the security code is incorrect the screen above will be displayed then try again If after several attempts you can not gain access please contact RS STOKVIS Ltd for further information

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 50

APPENDIX 4 30008

When the code is entered correctly the MAIN MENU is displayed as detailed below

~ STATUS SET VALUES~ ~ TIVIE CLOCK [) [) [) [) [)

The MAIN MENU screen shows the three menu items available The title for each menu item can be changed to suit the end user Please notify RS STOKVIS Ltd prior to commissioning should these parameters require special amendments

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 51

APPENDIX 4 30008

A45 CHANGING OR SETTING A TIME SCHEDULE

From the main menu screen select the TIME CLOCK page by running finger across screen symbol and touch the ENTER key the screen below will be displayed

On the following screen highlight the TS1 symbol and touch the ENTER key

The current time schedule will now be displayed as shown below The display will automatically default to the current day (1 =Monday 2 =Tuesday etc) In this case day 5 (Friday) the four schedule switching times refer to that day

IAC6BBB1BHIS1

mm0CIl bull mID 17BB 17BB 17HB

Iillleschedule

To modify a time select it by highlighting and touch the ENTER key and the following screen is displayed

To amend the appropriate onoff time as shown on the screen below The arrows to the right of the time are for altering the hours and the arrows on the left for the minutes

Once you have set the time use the ESCape key to exit back to the time schedule screen and choose another day by touching the required number Another time may now be modified as before

IAC6BBB1BHIS1

H8BH

I i eschedule

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 52

APPENDIX 4 30008

Use the ESCape key to exit back to the MAIN MENU screen

~ STATUS ~ SET VALUES

TIME CLOCK []~ [] [] [] []

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 53

APPENDIX 4 30005

A46 CHANGING SET VALUES

From the main menu screen select the SET VALUES page by highlight in the normal way and touch the ENTER key

The following screen is displayed

36 19 18III III IIIHsv Rsv Llv

To change the RSV highlight it in the normal way and touch the ENTER key and the screen below will now be shown

IAC6RRR1RR40 T I

0 19 (Y)l RSV

ROOM SET VALUE

The above screen shows the parameters that can be changed The values to the far left are the limitations of set point (OC) Change the set point by using the UP and DOWN ARROWS on the left of the screen or touch the set value itself followed by the ENTER key to select the set value and set it directly using the numeric keyboard All values can be changed in this way

Use the ESCape key twice to exit back to the MAIN MENU screen

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 54

APPENDIX 4 30005

A47 COMMISSIONING AND SERVICING BURNER CHECKS

Select the SET VALUES screen from the MAIN MENU screen and adjust the high lirrlit set point to 55degC to drive the burner to high fire

IAC6HHH1HH60 ~T I

0 19 (Y)

HSV

HIGH SET VALUE ~

Ensure the set value is returned to 36degC once the appropriate checks and adjustments as described in Section 43 of this manual have been completed Return to the SET VALUES screen and select the low limit value to adjust the low fire setting

Reduce the low limit value to OdegC to drive the gas valve to low fire and complete the appropriate checks and adjustments as described in Section 43 of this manual and ensure the set value is returned to the original value

A48 GMT ltgt BST CHANGEOVER DAYLIGHT SAVINGS

To change your unit to British Summer TimelWinter Time the following system screen must be highlighted by touching the Iamp1 button twice

By touching the clock symbol in the top left hand corner followed by the ENTER key the screen below will be displayed

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 55

APPENDIX 4 30008

188311 851193

544

By touching and highlighting in this case 18 followed by the ENTER key A small box allowing the entry of two digits will appear Enter the desired time required using the numbered keys followed by ENTER key Your unit is now set to operate on BSTBWT

Touch the ESC key three times to return back to the Status screen

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 56

STOKVIS ENERGY SYSTEMS 96R WALTON ROAD EAST MOLESEY SURREY KT8 0DL TEL 020 8783 3050 08707 707 747 FAX 020 8783 3051 08707 707 767 E-MAIL infostokvisboilerscom WEBSITE wwwstokvisboilerscom

JULY 1999

Page 37: ECONOAIR 3000S SERIES AIR HANDLING UNIT DIRECT FIREDstokvisboilers.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/EconoAir... · 2019-05-10 · ECONOAIR 3000S SERIES AIR HANDLING UNIT DIRECT FIRED

8 SERVICING 3000S

844 IGNITER SPARK TRANSFORMER

This is a 240 Volt instrument

The ignition transformer is located in a plastic box mounted on the air handler casing adjacent to the main control panel To remove the transformer isolate the air handler as above and unscrew the four retaining screws holding the box lid in place and remove the lid Disconnect the supply cable at the terminal strip and undo the transformer retaining screws The transformer may then be unscrewed from the High Tension cable leading to the spark plug

Replacement is a simple reversal of this procedure

Check ignition reliability over six start ups

845 COMBUSTION AIR PRESSURE SWITCH (DPS)

Note The switch is set and sealed and should be replaced if not operating correctly

This switch is a 240 Volt instrument

The air switch is mounted directly on the air handler casing and can be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove the switch isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the supply cable Break the downstream pipe compression fitting and unscrew the switch housing from its locating fitting Reverse the procedure to replace after ensuring switch setting is as specified in Section 13 of this manual Operate the air handler to ensure reliability of operation over six start ups

846 AIR HANDLER OVERHEAT LIMIT CONTROL

This is a 240 Volt instrument

The overheat limit control can be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove the control isolate the air handler as above and lock off Remove the switch cover Disconnect the supply cable and unscrew the control housing from its locating fitting Reverse the procedure to replace check the switch is set to 50degC Test the switch operation as described in Section 43 over at least three operations

847 AIR FAN AND MOTOR

The air fan motor is a 415 Volt 3 phase motor

The motor and slide rails are easily accessible inside the air handler casing If it is necessary to remove the motor isolate the air handler as above Slacken the fan-belt tension and remove the drive belts Pull the motor away from the air handler casing to make access to the motor terminal box and disconnect the supply cable The motor may now be removed from the unit Following replacement the air handler must be fully re-commissioned as in Section 4

It is unlikely that the air fan will need replacing or servicing If required a full procedure should be obtained from RS STOKVIS Ltd

Replacement must be followed by full re-commissioning as in Section 4

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 33

8 SERVICING 3000S

848 FUEL GAS MULTI-FUNCTIONAL CONTROL - SMALL UNITS

This is a 240 Volt instrument

The fuel gas multi-functional control can be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove the unit isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the Hirschman electric termination Unbolt the control from its flanges and remove

When replacing care must be taken to ensure the flange 0 rings are undamaged and in the correct location Following replacement the air handler must be fully reshycommissioned as in Section 4 including tests for soundness prior to start-up

849 GOVERNOR AND BLOCK VALVES

The block valves are 240 Volt instruments

All these items may be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove any item isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the electric termination to the two block valves the pilot block valve and the flow control block valve Break the two pipe unions and remove the fuel gas line complete for further strip-down

8410 FUEL GAS FLOW CONTROL VALVE

This is a 24 Volt instrument

The fuel gas How control valve can be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove the valve isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the supply cables to the control valve

On small air handlers fitted with a multi-functional control support the multi-functional control and unbolt its discharge flange Break the union downstream of the burner isolation valve and remove the section of line containing the flow control valve for further strip-down

On large air handlers fitted with separate block valves it will be necessary to remove the fuel gas line complete as Section 8410 above

Following replacement re-commission the air handler

Note If the fresh air damper is not in the full open position the heat input must not exceed the maximum heat input at recirculation condition specified in the technical data section of this manual

8411 PILOT GAS GOVERNOR AND BLOCK VALVE

The block valve is a 240 Volt instrument

Both items may be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove either item isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the electric terrriination to the solenoid valve Undo the upstream pipe union and the compression fitting downstream of the manual block valve (PV3) Remove the pilot gas line complete for further strip down

Replace broken or distorted connections and retest for soundness Ensure the pilot gas pressure is correct and the flame is sensing an output Ensure reliability over six start-ups

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 34

8 SERVICING 3000S

8412 BELT TENSIONING PROCEDURE

The setting tensions are designed to cover a wide range of drives A precise setting force for individual applications can be calculated as detailed

SETTING FORCES

Belt Section

Setting Force To Deflect Belt 16mm per Metre Of Span

Small Pulley Diameter (mm)

Basic Setting Forces Newtons (N) Kilograms (kgf)

125 x Setting Forces Newtons (N) Kilograms (kgf)

SPZ

56 to 71 16 16 20 20 75 to 90 18 18 22 22

95 to 125 20 20 25 25 Over 125 22 22 28 28

SPA

80 to 100 22 22 28 28 106 to 140 30 30 38 38 150 to 200 36 37 45 46 Over 200 40 40 50 51

SPB

112 to 160 40 40 50 51 170 to 224 50 51 62 63 236 to 355 62 63 77 79 Over 355 65 66 81 83

SPC 224 to 250 70 71 87 89 265 to 355 92 94 115 120 Over 375 115 120 144 150

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 35

8 SERVICING 3000S

BELT TENSIONING USING FENNER BELT TENSION INDICATOR

Calculate the deflection in mm on a basis of 16mm per metre of centre distance Centre Distance (m) x 16 =Deflection (mm)

Set lower marker ring at the deflection distance required in mm on the lower scale

Set upper ring against to bottom edge of the top tube

Place the belt tension indicator on top of the belt at the centre of span and apply a force at right angles to the belt defecting it to the point where the lower marker ring is level with the top of the adjacent belt

Read off the force value indicated by the top edge of the upper marker ring

Compare this force to the kgf value shown in the table above

If a Fenner Belt Tension Indicator is not available a spring balance and rule will be suffice

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 36

8 SERVICING 30005

85 MAIN PANEL CONTROLS

All panel controls are readily accessible and may be easily exchanged for replacement components in the event of failure Ensure any replacement item is of the same make and type as the original

851 LANDIS amp GYR LFL 1335 AUTOMATIC SEQUENCE CONTROLLER

The Landis amp Gyr Automatic Sequence Controller is a plug-in unit locating on a pre-wired chassis To remove the controller undo the two retaining screws at the top left and lower right corners and pull the module off the chassis

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

852 CONTROLS CIRCUIT (24 VOLT) TRANSFORMER

The Controls Circuit Transformer is fixed to the panel back plate by tapped screws To remove the transformer undo the wiring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel Undo the two retaining screws and remove the unit complete

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

853 CONTROL RELAYS R1 R2 amp R3

The Control Relays are DIN Rail mounted To remove a relay undo the wIring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel Release the DIN rail retaining clip under the relay with a screwdriver and remove the relay

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

854 6A MCB

The 6A MCB is DIN Rail mounted To remove the MCB undo the wiring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel Release the DIN rail retaining clip under the MCB with a screwdriver and remove the MCB

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

855 THERMAL OVERLOAD

The thermal overload is attached to the underside of the main contactor To remove the overload undo the wiring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel and that the overload setting is as specified in Section 13 of this manual Unscrew the three connections to the contactor and remove the overload

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 37

8 SERVICING 3000S

856 MAIN CONTACTOR

The Main Contactor is DIN Rail mounted To remove the contactor remove the thermal overload as 855 above and then undo the wiring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel Release the DIN rail retaining clip under the contactor with a screwdriver and remove the contactor

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

857 MOTOR FUSE

To replace a motor fuse pull the fuse carrier off the fuse holder base The fuse is attached to the fuse carrier by two screws Unscrew remove and replace

86 REMOTE CONTROL STATION

The remote control station contains some serviceable parts although these items should only be fitted by an approved RS STOKVIS Ltd Engineer

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 38

9 RECOMMENDED SPARES 3000S

For two years operation it is recommended that the following items should be held in stock

ITEM DESCRIPTION PART NO QUANTITY i

1 INDICATOR BULBS W1121 1 PACK

2 SPARK PLUG 023739 1 I

3 UVDETECTOR QRA10C 1 I

4 ROOM SENSOR DRT2453 1

5 DUCT SENSOR DDT1701 1

All replacement parts can be obtained from RS STOKVIS Ltd by quoting the air handler serial number the part number and description

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 39

APPENDIX 1 30005

SOUNDNESS TESTING THE FUEL GAS PIPEWORK

This procedure should only be carried out by personnel familiar with the ECONO-AIR 3000S Series Air handler

The pressure test points and all valves are identified on the Process and Instrumentation Diagram for the air handler included in Section 1 of this n1anual

Isolate the air handler electric supply at the main control panel and lock off Close the manual isolation valves MV1 MV6 and PV3 Ensure the supply pressure is available on the upstream side of MV1

A11 TESTING THE UPSTREAM PIPEWORKAND BURNER CONTROLS 1 Connect a 60 mbar manometer to the pressure test nipple A Monitor the

pressure for two minutes Any rise in pressure indicates that valve MV1 is leaking and must be replaced Remove pressure test points Band F

2 Open MV1 to pressurise the pipework on both the main gas and pilot line to the first block valve

3 Close MV1 Allow one minute for the temperature to stabilise and then test the system for 2 minutes and watch for a drop in the pipework pressure If the pressure falls open valve MV1 and test the pipework connections and valves from MV1 to MV3 and MV1 to PV2 for leaks with a proprietary leak detector fluid or spray Turn off MV1 seal any leaks and re-test

4 If no extemalleaks are found either the pilot block valve PV1 or either the first main gas block valve MV3 is letting by

5 To test this seal pressure test point A and fit a manometer to pressure test point B Leave for two minutes with MV1 open A rise in pressure on the manometer confirms a leak on the block valve MV3 Turn off MV1 exchange the valve and re-test from point 2 above

6 Repeat this procedure for the pilot block valve Seal test point B and fit a manometer to pressure test point F Leave for two minutes with MV1 open A rise in pressure on the manometer confirms a leak on the pilot block valve PV2 Turn off MV1 exchange the valve and re-test from point 1 above Seal test point F

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 40

APPENDIX 1 30005

A12 TESTING THE DOWNSTREAM BURNER VALVE 1 Close MV1 and connect pressure test points A and 8 with flexible 6 mm bore

tubing teed into the manometer Remove pressure test point C Open MV1 to pressurise the downstream block valve MV4

2 Close MV1 and leave for one minute for the temperature to stabilise Monitor the pressure for 2 minutes If the pressure falls open valve MV1 and leak test the line between the two block valves MV3 and MV4 with a proprietary leak detector Turn off MV1 seal any leaks and re-test Note Smaller air handlers in the 3000S Series are fitted with multi-functional valves combining the pressure regulator and two block valves in one component The above procedure still applies but if a leak is found on either block valve the whole control should be replaced If no external leaks are found the downstream block valve is letting by

3 To confirm this close MV1 remove the manometer and refit to pressure test point C Connect pressure test points A and 8 with flexible 6mm bore tubing Open MV1 and allow one minute for the temperature to stabilise Monitor the pressure for a further 2 minutes with MV1 still open A rise in pressure confirms that the second block valve MV4 is letting by Turn off MV1 Replace the valve and re-test from 2 above

A13 TESTING THE DOWNSTREAM BURNER PIPEWORK 1 Close MV1 and connect pressure test points A and D with flexible 6 mm bore

tubing teed into the manometer Open MV1 to pressurise the downstream pilot pipework

2 Close MV1 and leave for one minute for the temperature to stabilise Monitor the pressure for 2 minutes If the pressure falls open valve MV1 and leak test the line between the downstream block valve MV4 and the manual block MV6 with a proprietary leak detector fluid or spray If no external leaks are found the manual block valve MV6 is letting by Turn off MV1 seal any leakages and reshytest from 2 above

A14 TESTING THE DOWNSTREAM PILOT PIPEWORK 1 Close MV1 and connect pressure test points A and F with flexible 6mm bore

tubing teed into the manometer Open MV1 to pressurise the downstream pilot pipework

2 Close MV1 and leave for one rninute for the temperature to stabilise Monitor the pressure for 2 minutes If the pressure falls open valve MV1 and leak test the line between the downstream block valve PV2 and the manual block PV3 with a proprietary leak detector fluid or spray If no external leaks are found the manual block valve PV3 is letting by Turn off MV1 seal any leakages and reshytest from 2 above

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 41

APPENDIX 1 30005

A15 TESTING THE BURNER CONNECTIONS 1 Remove the burner access panel as described in Section 84 of this manual

Remove the burner spark igniter Slacken the two retaining bolts holding the burner to the burner support straps and unbolt the burner supply endplate from the burner casting and mixing plates

2 Connect pressure test points A and 0 with flexible 6mm bore tubing teed into the manometer Open MV1 and MV6 to pressurise the burner pipework Leak test the main gas burner pipework and connections with proprietary leak detector fluid Turn off MV6 Seal any leakages and re-test

3 Connect pressure test points A and F with flexible 6 mm bore tubing teed into the manometer Open MV1 and PV3 to pressurise the pilot burner pipework Leak test the pilot gas burner pipework and connections with proprietary leak detector fluid Turn off PV3 Seal any leakages and re-test

4 Turn off MV1

5 Replace the spark igniter and profile division plate

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 42

APPENDIX 2 30005

START SEQUENCE

The burner start sequence is controlled by the Landis and Gyr burner management unit The timings are pre-set and comply with 885885 This unit must NOT be tampered with

A brief description of the start-up sequence isshy

The unit checks

1 The NO FLAME signal on the UV flame scanner

Note If the scanner detects a flame at any time other than in the correct operating sequence the flame programmer initiates a lockout

2 The operation of the combustion air proving switch in the NO AIR position

3 The air handler discharge high temperature switch

If the checks are completed the unit starts the combustion air fan and then checks the combustion airflow

Once the airflow is proven the unit checks that the damper control circuit is functioning correctly After the damper microswitch is made to prove the fresh air damper is fully open the sequence allows 30 seconds for the combustion air to purge any combustible gas from the air handler

After completion of the purge the spark ignition system is energised the pilot valve opened and the spark terminated If the pilot flame is not proven by the UV scanner the system will initiate a LOCKOUT

If the flame is proven the main gas valves are opened the pilot extinguished and the main burner flame proven

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 43

i

APPENDIX 2 30008

The following flow chart shows the complete start sequence including the lighting of the various indicating lamps

MANUAL STATUS LIGHT POWER ON

POWER ON

I INITIATE START BY TIME

SETTING ON CONTROLLER

I CHECK NO FLAME

VISIBLE

PROVEj FAIL LOCKOUT

I CHECK RELAY R4 NC

POSITION

PROVE FAIL NO START

I CHECK AIR PRESSURE SWITCH NC POSITION

PROVE FAIL NO START

I CHECK RELAY R1 NC

POSITION

PROVE j

FAIL NO START

I START COMBUSTION

AIR BLOWER

I CHECK AIR PRESSURE SWITCH NO POSITION

PROVE I

FAIL NO START

I STATUS LIGHT FAN ON

I ENERGISE RELAY R1

I

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 44

I

I

APPENDIX 2 30008

I CHECK OVERHEAT LIMIT

CONTROL R5

PROVE I

FAIL I I

CHECK 541412 LOOP CLOSED ON

LANDIS ampGYR CIRCUIT

PROVE I

FAIL I I

COMBUSTION AIR PURGE PERIOD

30 SECONDS

I

NO START

NO START

CANCEL NO FLAME CHECK CIRCUIT

I

ENERGISE SPARK

I TIMED PERIOD 25 SECONDS

I ENERGISE PILOT GAS

VALVE

I TIMED PERIOD 25 SECONDS

I TERMINATE SPARK

I INTERROGATE UV FLAME SCANNER

PROVE I

FAIL I I

TIMED PERIOD 10 SECONDS

I

LOCKOUT

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 45

I

I

APPENDIX 2 3000S

I ENERGISE MAIN GAS

VALVES

I

STATUS LIGHT BURNER ON

I TIMED PERIOD

5 SECONDS

I DE-ENERGISE PILOT

GAS VALVES

CONTINUOUS FROM PILOT

I INTERROGATE UV FLAME SCANNER

PROVE I

FAIL I I

LOCKOUT I

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 46

APPENDIX 3 30005

Please see copy of Standard Service Sheet

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 47

APPENDIX 4 30005

A41 TIME OUT SCREEN

This is the standard screen displayed when the touch screen is not in use The back light is off to save energy_ To access the STATUS screen touch the ENTER key and the following screen is displayed

[]][I][]rn[IJOO[][IJOO[] EJ~E11 I[]I ~ middot I

NOTE

The Touch Screen operates using the heat produced by the touch of a finger and therefore only LIGHT pressure is required

Excessive pressure can damage the Touch Screen

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 48

APPENDIX 4 30008

A42 STATUS SCREEN

On the typical STATUS screen the illustrated information detailed is as follows

19 36 Fan Brn

RS OS

100 Fst_~_ Lck _ _ Xst Gas~o ~ I

RS Indicates the current room temperature

OS ~( t~~ the current duct discharge temperature

Fan Indicates the current status of the fan by showing the arrow and the fan blades for ON and OFF is shown by the arrow and fan blades being removed

Brn Indicates the current status of the burner with the black flames indicating the burner to be ON and vice versa

Lck LOCKOUT - This indicates a flame failure when highlighted during normal or start-up operation

Xst EXCESS TEMPERATURE SWITCH - This indicates the unit has reached the trip limit on the over heat stat when highlighted during operation

Indicates the current position of the gas modulating valve during normal Gas

operation (0-100)

Indicates whether the Frost stat is energised and the unit is running on frost Fst

override

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 49

APPENDIX 4 30008

A43 CHANGING SETTINGS

It is possible to change the settings for the time of operation and the required temperature set points The following details the steps required

A44 ENTERING THE SECURITY CODE

From the STATUS screen touch the return key and the screen below will be displayed

Type the HIGH LEVEL security code (4321) If you make a mistake use the BACK SPACE key to delete any incorrect number(s) Touch the ENTER key when the code is correct

If the security code is incorrect the screen above will be displayed then try again If after several attempts you can not gain access please contact RS STOKVIS Ltd for further information

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 50

APPENDIX 4 30008

When the code is entered correctly the MAIN MENU is displayed as detailed below

~ STATUS SET VALUES~ ~ TIVIE CLOCK [) [) [) [) [)

The MAIN MENU screen shows the three menu items available The title for each menu item can be changed to suit the end user Please notify RS STOKVIS Ltd prior to commissioning should these parameters require special amendments

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 51

APPENDIX 4 30008

A45 CHANGING OR SETTING A TIME SCHEDULE

From the main menu screen select the TIME CLOCK page by running finger across screen symbol and touch the ENTER key the screen below will be displayed

On the following screen highlight the TS1 symbol and touch the ENTER key

The current time schedule will now be displayed as shown below The display will automatically default to the current day (1 =Monday 2 =Tuesday etc) In this case day 5 (Friday) the four schedule switching times refer to that day

IAC6BBB1BHIS1

mm0CIl bull mID 17BB 17BB 17HB

Iillleschedule

To modify a time select it by highlighting and touch the ENTER key and the following screen is displayed

To amend the appropriate onoff time as shown on the screen below The arrows to the right of the time are for altering the hours and the arrows on the left for the minutes

Once you have set the time use the ESCape key to exit back to the time schedule screen and choose another day by touching the required number Another time may now be modified as before

IAC6BBB1BHIS1

H8BH

I i eschedule

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 52

APPENDIX 4 30008

Use the ESCape key to exit back to the MAIN MENU screen

~ STATUS ~ SET VALUES

TIME CLOCK []~ [] [] [] []

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 53

APPENDIX 4 30005

A46 CHANGING SET VALUES

From the main menu screen select the SET VALUES page by highlight in the normal way and touch the ENTER key

The following screen is displayed

36 19 18III III IIIHsv Rsv Llv

To change the RSV highlight it in the normal way and touch the ENTER key and the screen below will now be shown

IAC6RRR1RR40 T I

0 19 (Y)l RSV

ROOM SET VALUE

The above screen shows the parameters that can be changed The values to the far left are the limitations of set point (OC) Change the set point by using the UP and DOWN ARROWS on the left of the screen or touch the set value itself followed by the ENTER key to select the set value and set it directly using the numeric keyboard All values can be changed in this way

Use the ESCape key twice to exit back to the MAIN MENU screen

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 54

APPENDIX 4 30005

A47 COMMISSIONING AND SERVICING BURNER CHECKS

Select the SET VALUES screen from the MAIN MENU screen and adjust the high lirrlit set point to 55degC to drive the burner to high fire

IAC6HHH1HH60 ~T I

0 19 (Y)

HSV

HIGH SET VALUE ~

Ensure the set value is returned to 36degC once the appropriate checks and adjustments as described in Section 43 of this manual have been completed Return to the SET VALUES screen and select the low limit value to adjust the low fire setting

Reduce the low limit value to OdegC to drive the gas valve to low fire and complete the appropriate checks and adjustments as described in Section 43 of this manual and ensure the set value is returned to the original value

A48 GMT ltgt BST CHANGEOVER DAYLIGHT SAVINGS

To change your unit to British Summer TimelWinter Time the following system screen must be highlighted by touching the Iamp1 button twice

By touching the clock symbol in the top left hand corner followed by the ENTER key the screen below will be displayed

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 55

APPENDIX 4 30008

188311 851193

544

By touching and highlighting in this case 18 followed by the ENTER key A small box allowing the entry of two digits will appear Enter the desired time required using the numbered keys followed by ENTER key Your unit is now set to operate on BSTBWT

Touch the ESC key three times to return back to the Status screen

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 56

STOKVIS ENERGY SYSTEMS 96R WALTON ROAD EAST MOLESEY SURREY KT8 0DL TEL 020 8783 3050 08707 707 747 FAX 020 8783 3051 08707 707 767 E-MAIL infostokvisboilerscom WEBSITE wwwstokvisboilerscom

JULY 1999

Page 38: ECONOAIR 3000S SERIES AIR HANDLING UNIT DIRECT FIREDstokvisboilers.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/EconoAir... · 2019-05-10 · ECONOAIR 3000S SERIES AIR HANDLING UNIT DIRECT FIRED

8 SERVICING 3000S

848 FUEL GAS MULTI-FUNCTIONAL CONTROL - SMALL UNITS

This is a 240 Volt instrument

The fuel gas multi-functional control can be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove the unit isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the Hirschman electric termination Unbolt the control from its flanges and remove

When replacing care must be taken to ensure the flange 0 rings are undamaged and in the correct location Following replacement the air handler must be fully reshycommissioned as in Section 4 including tests for soundness prior to start-up

849 GOVERNOR AND BLOCK VALVES

The block valves are 240 Volt instruments

All these items may be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove any item isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the electric termination to the two block valves the pilot block valve and the flow control block valve Break the two pipe unions and remove the fuel gas line complete for further strip-down

8410 FUEL GAS FLOW CONTROL VALVE

This is a 24 Volt instrument

The fuel gas How control valve can be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove the valve isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the supply cables to the control valve

On small air handlers fitted with a multi-functional control support the multi-functional control and unbolt its discharge flange Break the union downstream of the burner isolation valve and remove the section of line containing the flow control valve for further strip-down

On large air handlers fitted with separate block valves it will be necessary to remove the fuel gas line complete as Section 8410 above

Following replacement re-commission the air handler

Note If the fresh air damper is not in the full open position the heat input must not exceed the maximum heat input at recirculation condition specified in the technical data section of this manual

8411 PILOT GAS GOVERNOR AND BLOCK VALVE

The block valve is a 240 Volt instrument

Both items may be serviced in situ However if it is necessary to remove either item isolate the air handler as above Disconnect the electric terrriination to the solenoid valve Undo the upstream pipe union and the compression fitting downstream of the manual block valve (PV3) Remove the pilot gas line complete for further strip down

Replace broken or distorted connections and retest for soundness Ensure the pilot gas pressure is correct and the flame is sensing an output Ensure reliability over six start-ups

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 34

8 SERVICING 3000S

8412 BELT TENSIONING PROCEDURE

The setting tensions are designed to cover a wide range of drives A precise setting force for individual applications can be calculated as detailed

SETTING FORCES

Belt Section

Setting Force To Deflect Belt 16mm per Metre Of Span

Small Pulley Diameter (mm)

Basic Setting Forces Newtons (N) Kilograms (kgf)

125 x Setting Forces Newtons (N) Kilograms (kgf)

SPZ

56 to 71 16 16 20 20 75 to 90 18 18 22 22

95 to 125 20 20 25 25 Over 125 22 22 28 28

SPA

80 to 100 22 22 28 28 106 to 140 30 30 38 38 150 to 200 36 37 45 46 Over 200 40 40 50 51

SPB

112 to 160 40 40 50 51 170 to 224 50 51 62 63 236 to 355 62 63 77 79 Over 355 65 66 81 83

SPC 224 to 250 70 71 87 89 265 to 355 92 94 115 120 Over 375 115 120 144 150

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 35

8 SERVICING 3000S

BELT TENSIONING USING FENNER BELT TENSION INDICATOR

Calculate the deflection in mm on a basis of 16mm per metre of centre distance Centre Distance (m) x 16 =Deflection (mm)

Set lower marker ring at the deflection distance required in mm on the lower scale

Set upper ring against to bottom edge of the top tube

Place the belt tension indicator on top of the belt at the centre of span and apply a force at right angles to the belt defecting it to the point where the lower marker ring is level with the top of the adjacent belt

Read off the force value indicated by the top edge of the upper marker ring

Compare this force to the kgf value shown in the table above

If a Fenner Belt Tension Indicator is not available a spring balance and rule will be suffice

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 36

8 SERVICING 30005

85 MAIN PANEL CONTROLS

All panel controls are readily accessible and may be easily exchanged for replacement components in the event of failure Ensure any replacement item is of the same make and type as the original

851 LANDIS amp GYR LFL 1335 AUTOMATIC SEQUENCE CONTROLLER

The Landis amp Gyr Automatic Sequence Controller is a plug-in unit locating on a pre-wired chassis To remove the controller undo the two retaining screws at the top left and lower right corners and pull the module off the chassis

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

852 CONTROLS CIRCUIT (24 VOLT) TRANSFORMER

The Controls Circuit Transformer is fixed to the panel back plate by tapped screws To remove the transformer undo the wiring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel Undo the two retaining screws and remove the unit complete

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

853 CONTROL RELAYS R1 R2 amp R3

The Control Relays are DIN Rail mounted To remove a relay undo the wIring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel Release the DIN rail retaining clip under the relay with a screwdriver and remove the relay

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

854 6A MCB

The 6A MCB is DIN Rail mounted To remove the MCB undo the wiring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel Release the DIN rail retaining clip under the MCB with a screwdriver and remove the MCB

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

855 THERMAL OVERLOAD

The thermal overload is attached to the underside of the main contactor To remove the overload undo the wiring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel and that the overload setting is as specified in Section 13 of this manual Unscrew the three connections to the contactor and remove the overload

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 37

8 SERVICING 3000S

856 MAIN CONTACTOR

The Main Contactor is DIN Rail mounted To remove the contactor remove the thermal overload as 855 above and then undo the wiring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel Release the DIN rail retaining clip under the contactor with a screwdriver and remove the contactor

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

857 MOTOR FUSE

To replace a motor fuse pull the fuse carrier off the fuse holder base The fuse is attached to the fuse carrier by two screws Unscrew remove and replace

86 REMOTE CONTROL STATION

The remote control station contains some serviceable parts although these items should only be fitted by an approved RS STOKVIS Ltd Engineer

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 38

9 RECOMMENDED SPARES 3000S

For two years operation it is recommended that the following items should be held in stock

ITEM DESCRIPTION PART NO QUANTITY i

1 INDICATOR BULBS W1121 1 PACK

2 SPARK PLUG 023739 1 I

3 UVDETECTOR QRA10C 1 I

4 ROOM SENSOR DRT2453 1

5 DUCT SENSOR DDT1701 1

All replacement parts can be obtained from RS STOKVIS Ltd by quoting the air handler serial number the part number and description

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 39

APPENDIX 1 30005

SOUNDNESS TESTING THE FUEL GAS PIPEWORK

This procedure should only be carried out by personnel familiar with the ECONO-AIR 3000S Series Air handler

The pressure test points and all valves are identified on the Process and Instrumentation Diagram for the air handler included in Section 1 of this n1anual

Isolate the air handler electric supply at the main control panel and lock off Close the manual isolation valves MV1 MV6 and PV3 Ensure the supply pressure is available on the upstream side of MV1

A11 TESTING THE UPSTREAM PIPEWORKAND BURNER CONTROLS 1 Connect a 60 mbar manometer to the pressure test nipple A Monitor the

pressure for two minutes Any rise in pressure indicates that valve MV1 is leaking and must be replaced Remove pressure test points Band F

2 Open MV1 to pressurise the pipework on both the main gas and pilot line to the first block valve

3 Close MV1 Allow one minute for the temperature to stabilise and then test the system for 2 minutes and watch for a drop in the pipework pressure If the pressure falls open valve MV1 and test the pipework connections and valves from MV1 to MV3 and MV1 to PV2 for leaks with a proprietary leak detector fluid or spray Turn off MV1 seal any leaks and re-test

4 If no extemalleaks are found either the pilot block valve PV1 or either the first main gas block valve MV3 is letting by

5 To test this seal pressure test point A and fit a manometer to pressure test point B Leave for two minutes with MV1 open A rise in pressure on the manometer confirms a leak on the block valve MV3 Turn off MV1 exchange the valve and re-test from point 2 above

6 Repeat this procedure for the pilot block valve Seal test point B and fit a manometer to pressure test point F Leave for two minutes with MV1 open A rise in pressure on the manometer confirms a leak on the pilot block valve PV2 Turn off MV1 exchange the valve and re-test from point 1 above Seal test point F

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 40

APPENDIX 1 30005

A12 TESTING THE DOWNSTREAM BURNER VALVE 1 Close MV1 and connect pressure test points A and 8 with flexible 6 mm bore

tubing teed into the manometer Remove pressure test point C Open MV1 to pressurise the downstream block valve MV4

2 Close MV1 and leave for one minute for the temperature to stabilise Monitor the pressure for 2 minutes If the pressure falls open valve MV1 and leak test the line between the two block valves MV3 and MV4 with a proprietary leak detector Turn off MV1 seal any leaks and re-test Note Smaller air handlers in the 3000S Series are fitted with multi-functional valves combining the pressure regulator and two block valves in one component The above procedure still applies but if a leak is found on either block valve the whole control should be replaced If no external leaks are found the downstream block valve is letting by

3 To confirm this close MV1 remove the manometer and refit to pressure test point C Connect pressure test points A and 8 with flexible 6mm bore tubing Open MV1 and allow one minute for the temperature to stabilise Monitor the pressure for a further 2 minutes with MV1 still open A rise in pressure confirms that the second block valve MV4 is letting by Turn off MV1 Replace the valve and re-test from 2 above

A13 TESTING THE DOWNSTREAM BURNER PIPEWORK 1 Close MV1 and connect pressure test points A and D with flexible 6 mm bore

tubing teed into the manometer Open MV1 to pressurise the downstream pilot pipework

2 Close MV1 and leave for one minute for the temperature to stabilise Monitor the pressure for 2 minutes If the pressure falls open valve MV1 and leak test the line between the downstream block valve MV4 and the manual block MV6 with a proprietary leak detector fluid or spray If no external leaks are found the manual block valve MV6 is letting by Turn off MV1 seal any leakages and reshytest from 2 above

A14 TESTING THE DOWNSTREAM PILOT PIPEWORK 1 Close MV1 and connect pressure test points A and F with flexible 6mm bore

tubing teed into the manometer Open MV1 to pressurise the downstream pilot pipework

2 Close MV1 and leave for one rninute for the temperature to stabilise Monitor the pressure for 2 minutes If the pressure falls open valve MV1 and leak test the line between the downstream block valve PV2 and the manual block PV3 with a proprietary leak detector fluid or spray If no external leaks are found the manual block valve PV3 is letting by Turn off MV1 seal any leakages and reshytest from 2 above

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 41

APPENDIX 1 30005

A15 TESTING THE BURNER CONNECTIONS 1 Remove the burner access panel as described in Section 84 of this manual

Remove the burner spark igniter Slacken the two retaining bolts holding the burner to the burner support straps and unbolt the burner supply endplate from the burner casting and mixing plates

2 Connect pressure test points A and 0 with flexible 6mm bore tubing teed into the manometer Open MV1 and MV6 to pressurise the burner pipework Leak test the main gas burner pipework and connections with proprietary leak detector fluid Turn off MV6 Seal any leakages and re-test

3 Connect pressure test points A and F with flexible 6 mm bore tubing teed into the manometer Open MV1 and PV3 to pressurise the pilot burner pipework Leak test the pilot gas burner pipework and connections with proprietary leak detector fluid Turn off PV3 Seal any leakages and re-test

4 Turn off MV1

5 Replace the spark igniter and profile division plate

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 42

APPENDIX 2 30005

START SEQUENCE

The burner start sequence is controlled by the Landis and Gyr burner management unit The timings are pre-set and comply with 885885 This unit must NOT be tampered with

A brief description of the start-up sequence isshy

The unit checks

1 The NO FLAME signal on the UV flame scanner

Note If the scanner detects a flame at any time other than in the correct operating sequence the flame programmer initiates a lockout

2 The operation of the combustion air proving switch in the NO AIR position

3 The air handler discharge high temperature switch

If the checks are completed the unit starts the combustion air fan and then checks the combustion airflow

Once the airflow is proven the unit checks that the damper control circuit is functioning correctly After the damper microswitch is made to prove the fresh air damper is fully open the sequence allows 30 seconds for the combustion air to purge any combustible gas from the air handler

After completion of the purge the spark ignition system is energised the pilot valve opened and the spark terminated If the pilot flame is not proven by the UV scanner the system will initiate a LOCKOUT

If the flame is proven the main gas valves are opened the pilot extinguished and the main burner flame proven

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 43

i

APPENDIX 2 30008

The following flow chart shows the complete start sequence including the lighting of the various indicating lamps

MANUAL STATUS LIGHT POWER ON

POWER ON

I INITIATE START BY TIME

SETTING ON CONTROLLER

I CHECK NO FLAME

VISIBLE

PROVEj FAIL LOCKOUT

I CHECK RELAY R4 NC

POSITION

PROVE FAIL NO START

I CHECK AIR PRESSURE SWITCH NC POSITION

PROVE FAIL NO START

I CHECK RELAY R1 NC

POSITION

PROVE j

FAIL NO START

I START COMBUSTION

AIR BLOWER

I CHECK AIR PRESSURE SWITCH NO POSITION

PROVE I

FAIL NO START

I STATUS LIGHT FAN ON

I ENERGISE RELAY R1

I

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 44

I

I

APPENDIX 2 30008

I CHECK OVERHEAT LIMIT

CONTROL R5

PROVE I

FAIL I I

CHECK 541412 LOOP CLOSED ON

LANDIS ampGYR CIRCUIT

PROVE I

FAIL I I

COMBUSTION AIR PURGE PERIOD

30 SECONDS

I

NO START

NO START

CANCEL NO FLAME CHECK CIRCUIT

I

ENERGISE SPARK

I TIMED PERIOD 25 SECONDS

I ENERGISE PILOT GAS

VALVE

I TIMED PERIOD 25 SECONDS

I TERMINATE SPARK

I INTERROGATE UV FLAME SCANNER

PROVE I

FAIL I I

TIMED PERIOD 10 SECONDS

I

LOCKOUT

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 45

I

I

APPENDIX 2 3000S

I ENERGISE MAIN GAS

VALVES

I

STATUS LIGHT BURNER ON

I TIMED PERIOD

5 SECONDS

I DE-ENERGISE PILOT

GAS VALVES

CONTINUOUS FROM PILOT

I INTERROGATE UV FLAME SCANNER

PROVE I

FAIL I I

LOCKOUT I

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 46

APPENDIX 3 30005

Please see copy of Standard Service Sheet

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 47

APPENDIX 4 30005

A41 TIME OUT SCREEN

This is the standard screen displayed when the touch screen is not in use The back light is off to save energy_ To access the STATUS screen touch the ENTER key and the following screen is displayed

[]][I][]rn[IJOO[][IJOO[] EJ~E11 I[]I ~ middot I

NOTE

The Touch Screen operates using the heat produced by the touch of a finger and therefore only LIGHT pressure is required

Excessive pressure can damage the Touch Screen

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 48

APPENDIX 4 30008

A42 STATUS SCREEN

On the typical STATUS screen the illustrated information detailed is as follows

19 36 Fan Brn

RS OS

100 Fst_~_ Lck _ _ Xst Gas~o ~ I

RS Indicates the current room temperature

OS ~( t~~ the current duct discharge temperature

Fan Indicates the current status of the fan by showing the arrow and the fan blades for ON and OFF is shown by the arrow and fan blades being removed

Brn Indicates the current status of the burner with the black flames indicating the burner to be ON and vice versa

Lck LOCKOUT - This indicates a flame failure when highlighted during normal or start-up operation

Xst EXCESS TEMPERATURE SWITCH - This indicates the unit has reached the trip limit on the over heat stat when highlighted during operation

Indicates the current position of the gas modulating valve during normal Gas

operation (0-100)

Indicates whether the Frost stat is energised and the unit is running on frost Fst

override

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 49

APPENDIX 4 30008

A43 CHANGING SETTINGS

It is possible to change the settings for the time of operation and the required temperature set points The following details the steps required

A44 ENTERING THE SECURITY CODE

From the STATUS screen touch the return key and the screen below will be displayed

Type the HIGH LEVEL security code (4321) If you make a mistake use the BACK SPACE key to delete any incorrect number(s) Touch the ENTER key when the code is correct

If the security code is incorrect the screen above will be displayed then try again If after several attempts you can not gain access please contact RS STOKVIS Ltd for further information

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 50

APPENDIX 4 30008

When the code is entered correctly the MAIN MENU is displayed as detailed below

~ STATUS SET VALUES~ ~ TIVIE CLOCK [) [) [) [) [)

The MAIN MENU screen shows the three menu items available The title for each menu item can be changed to suit the end user Please notify RS STOKVIS Ltd prior to commissioning should these parameters require special amendments

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 51

APPENDIX 4 30008

A45 CHANGING OR SETTING A TIME SCHEDULE

From the main menu screen select the TIME CLOCK page by running finger across screen symbol and touch the ENTER key the screen below will be displayed

On the following screen highlight the TS1 symbol and touch the ENTER key

The current time schedule will now be displayed as shown below The display will automatically default to the current day (1 =Monday 2 =Tuesday etc) In this case day 5 (Friday) the four schedule switching times refer to that day

IAC6BBB1BHIS1

mm0CIl bull mID 17BB 17BB 17HB

Iillleschedule

To modify a time select it by highlighting and touch the ENTER key and the following screen is displayed

To amend the appropriate onoff time as shown on the screen below The arrows to the right of the time are for altering the hours and the arrows on the left for the minutes

Once you have set the time use the ESCape key to exit back to the time schedule screen and choose another day by touching the required number Another time may now be modified as before

IAC6BBB1BHIS1

H8BH

I i eschedule

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 52

APPENDIX 4 30008

Use the ESCape key to exit back to the MAIN MENU screen

~ STATUS ~ SET VALUES

TIME CLOCK []~ [] [] [] []

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 53

APPENDIX 4 30005

A46 CHANGING SET VALUES

From the main menu screen select the SET VALUES page by highlight in the normal way and touch the ENTER key

The following screen is displayed

36 19 18III III IIIHsv Rsv Llv

To change the RSV highlight it in the normal way and touch the ENTER key and the screen below will now be shown

IAC6RRR1RR40 T I

0 19 (Y)l RSV

ROOM SET VALUE

The above screen shows the parameters that can be changed The values to the far left are the limitations of set point (OC) Change the set point by using the UP and DOWN ARROWS on the left of the screen or touch the set value itself followed by the ENTER key to select the set value and set it directly using the numeric keyboard All values can be changed in this way

Use the ESCape key twice to exit back to the MAIN MENU screen

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 54

APPENDIX 4 30005

A47 COMMISSIONING AND SERVICING BURNER CHECKS

Select the SET VALUES screen from the MAIN MENU screen and adjust the high lirrlit set point to 55degC to drive the burner to high fire

IAC6HHH1HH60 ~T I

0 19 (Y)

HSV

HIGH SET VALUE ~

Ensure the set value is returned to 36degC once the appropriate checks and adjustments as described in Section 43 of this manual have been completed Return to the SET VALUES screen and select the low limit value to adjust the low fire setting

Reduce the low limit value to OdegC to drive the gas valve to low fire and complete the appropriate checks and adjustments as described in Section 43 of this manual and ensure the set value is returned to the original value

A48 GMT ltgt BST CHANGEOVER DAYLIGHT SAVINGS

To change your unit to British Summer TimelWinter Time the following system screen must be highlighted by touching the Iamp1 button twice

By touching the clock symbol in the top left hand corner followed by the ENTER key the screen below will be displayed

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 55

APPENDIX 4 30008

188311 851193

544

By touching and highlighting in this case 18 followed by the ENTER key A small box allowing the entry of two digits will appear Enter the desired time required using the numbered keys followed by ENTER key Your unit is now set to operate on BSTBWT

Touch the ESC key three times to return back to the Status screen

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 56

STOKVIS ENERGY SYSTEMS 96R WALTON ROAD EAST MOLESEY SURREY KT8 0DL TEL 020 8783 3050 08707 707 747 FAX 020 8783 3051 08707 707 767 E-MAIL infostokvisboilerscom WEBSITE wwwstokvisboilerscom

JULY 1999

Page 39: ECONOAIR 3000S SERIES AIR HANDLING UNIT DIRECT FIREDstokvisboilers.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/EconoAir... · 2019-05-10 · ECONOAIR 3000S SERIES AIR HANDLING UNIT DIRECT FIRED

8 SERVICING 3000S

8412 BELT TENSIONING PROCEDURE

The setting tensions are designed to cover a wide range of drives A precise setting force for individual applications can be calculated as detailed

SETTING FORCES

Belt Section

Setting Force To Deflect Belt 16mm per Metre Of Span

Small Pulley Diameter (mm)

Basic Setting Forces Newtons (N) Kilograms (kgf)

125 x Setting Forces Newtons (N) Kilograms (kgf)

SPZ

56 to 71 16 16 20 20 75 to 90 18 18 22 22

95 to 125 20 20 25 25 Over 125 22 22 28 28

SPA

80 to 100 22 22 28 28 106 to 140 30 30 38 38 150 to 200 36 37 45 46 Over 200 40 40 50 51

SPB

112 to 160 40 40 50 51 170 to 224 50 51 62 63 236 to 355 62 63 77 79 Over 355 65 66 81 83

SPC 224 to 250 70 71 87 89 265 to 355 92 94 115 120 Over 375 115 120 144 150

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 35

8 SERVICING 3000S

BELT TENSIONING USING FENNER BELT TENSION INDICATOR

Calculate the deflection in mm on a basis of 16mm per metre of centre distance Centre Distance (m) x 16 =Deflection (mm)

Set lower marker ring at the deflection distance required in mm on the lower scale

Set upper ring against to bottom edge of the top tube

Place the belt tension indicator on top of the belt at the centre of span and apply a force at right angles to the belt defecting it to the point where the lower marker ring is level with the top of the adjacent belt

Read off the force value indicated by the top edge of the upper marker ring

Compare this force to the kgf value shown in the table above

If a Fenner Belt Tension Indicator is not available a spring balance and rule will be suffice

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 36

8 SERVICING 30005

85 MAIN PANEL CONTROLS

All panel controls are readily accessible and may be easily exchanged for replacement components in the event of failure Ensure any replacement item is of the same make and type as the original

851 LANDIS amp GYR LFL 1335 AUTOMATIC SEQUENCE CONTROLLER

The Landis amp Gyr Automatic Sequence Controller is a plug-in unit locating on a pre-wired chassis To remove the controller undo the two retaining screws at the top left and lower right corners and pull the module off the chassis

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

852 CONTROLS CIRCUIT (24 VOLT) TRANSFORMER

The Controls Circuit Transformer is fixed to the panel back plate by tapped screws To remove the transformer undo the wiring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel Undo the two retaining screws and remove the unit complete

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

853 CONTROL RELAYS R1 R2 amp R3

The Control Relays are DIN Rail mounted To remove a relay undo the wIring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel Release the DIN rail retaining clip under the relay with a screwdriver and remove the relay

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

854 6A MCB

The 6A MCB is DIN Rail mounted To remove the MCB undo the wiring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel Release the DIN rail retaining clip under the MCB with a screwdriver and remove the MCB

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

855 THERMAL OVERLOAD

The thermal overload is attached to the underside of the main contactor To remove the overload undo the wiring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel and that the overload setting is as specified in Section 13 of this manual Unscrew the three connections to the contactor and remove the overload

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 37

8 SERVICING 3000S

856 MAIN CONTACTOR

The Main Contactor is DIN Rail mounted To remove the contactor remove the thermal overload as 855 above and then undo the wiring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel Release the DIN rail retaining clip under the contactor with a screwdriver and remove the contactor

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

857 MOTOR FUSE

To replace a motor fuse pull the fuse carrier off the fuse holder base The fuse is attached to the fuse carrier by two screws Unscrew remove and replace

86 REMOTE CONTROL STATION

The remote control station contains some serviceable parts although these items should only be fitted by an approved RS STOKVIS Ltd Engineer

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 38

9 RECOMMENDED SPARES 3000S

For two years operation it is recommended that the following items should be held in stock

ITEM DESCRIPTION PART NO QUANTITY i

1 INDICATOR BULBS W1121 1 PACK

2 SPARK PLUG 023739 1 I

3 UVDETECTOR QRA10C 1 I

4 ROOM SENSOR DRT2453 1

5 DUCT SENSOR DDT1701 1

All replacement parts can be obtained from RS STOKVIS Ltd by quoting the air handler serial number the part number and description

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 39

APPENDIX 1 30005

SOUNDNESS TESTING THE FUEL GAS PIPEWORK

This procedure should only be carried out by personnel familiar with the ECONO-AIR 3000S Series Air handler

The pressure test points and all valves are identified on the Process and Instrumentation Diagram for the air handler included in Section 1 of this n1anual

Isolate the air handler electric supply at the main control panel and lock off Close the manual isolation valves MV1 MV6 and PV3 Ensure the supply pressure is available on the upstream side of MV1

A11 TESTING THE UPSTREAM PIPEWORKAND BURNER CONTROLS 1 Connect a 60 mbar manometer to the pressure test nipple A Monitor the

pressure for two minutes Any rise in pressure indicates that valve MV1 is leaking and must be replaced Remove pressure test points Band F

2 Open MV1 to pressurise the pipework on both the main gas and pilot line to the first block valve

3 Close MV1 Allow one minute for the temperature to stabilise and then test the system for 2 minutes and watch for a drop in the pipework pressure If the pressure falls open valve MV1 and test the pipework connections and valves from MV1 to MV3 and MV1 to PV2 for leaks with a proprietary leak detector fluid or spray Turn off MV1 seal any leaks and re-test

4 If no extemalleaks are found either the pilot block valve PV1 or either the first main gas block valve MV3 is letting by

5 To test this seal pressure test point A and fit a manometer to pressure test point B Leave for two minutes with MV1 open A rise in pressure on the manometer confirms a leak on the block valve MV3 Turn off MV1 exchange the valve and re-test from point 2 above

6 Repeat this procedure for the pilot block valve Seal test point B and fit a manometer to pressure test point F Leave for two minutes with MV1 open A rise in pressure on the manometer confirms a leak on the pilot block valve PV2 Turn off MV1 exchange the valve and re-test from point 1 above Seal test point F

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 40

APPENDIX 1 30005

A12 TESTING THE DOWNSTREAM BURNER VALVE 1 Close MV1 and connect pressure test points A and 8 with flexible 6 mm bore

tubing teed into the manometer Remove pressure test point C Open MV1 to pressurise the downstream block valve MV4

2 Close MV1 and leave for one minute for the temperature to stabilise Monitor the pressure for 2 minutes If the pressure falls open valve MV1 and leak test the line between the two block valves MV3 and MV4 with a proprietary leak detector Turn off MV1 seal any leaks and re-test Note Smaller air handlers in the 3000S Series are fitted with multi-functional valves combining the pressure regulator and two block valves in one component The above procedure still applies but if a leak is found on either block valve the whole control should be replaced If no external leaks are found the downstream block valve is letting by

3 To confirm this close MV1 remove the manometer and refit to pressure test point C Connect pressure test points A and 8 with flexible 6mm bore tubing Open MV1 and allow one minute for the temperature to stabilise Monitor the pressure for a further 2 minutes with MV1 still open A rise in pressure confirms that the second block valve MV4 is letting by Turn off MV1 Replace the valve and re-test from 2 above

A13 TESTING THE DOWNSTREAM BURNER PIPEWORK 1 Close MV1 and connect pressure test points A and D with flexible 6 mm bore

tubing teed into the manometer Open MV1 to pressurise the downstream pilot pipework

2 Close MV1 and leave for one minute for the temperature to stabilise Monitor the pressure for 2 minutes If the pressure falls open valve MV1 and leak test the line between the downstream block valve MV4 and the manual block MV6 with a proprietary leak detector fluid or spray If no external leaks are found the manual block valve MV6 is letting by Turn off MV1 seal any leakages and reshytest from 2 above

A14 TESTING THE DOWNSTREAM PILOT PIPEWORK 1 Close MV1 and connect pressure test points A and F with flexible 6mm bore

tubing teed into the manometer Open MV1 to pressurise the downstream pilot pipework

2 Close MV1 and leave for one rninute for the temperature to stabilise Monitor the pressure for 2 minutes If the pressure falls open valve MV1 and leak test the line between the downstream block valve PV2 and the manual block PV3 with a proprietary leak detector fluid or spray If no external leaks are found the manual block valve PV3 is letting by Turn off MV1 seal any leakages and reshytest from 2 above

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 41

APPENDIX 1 30005

A15 TESTING THE BURNER CONNECTIONS 1 Remove the burner access panel as described in Section 84 of this manual

Remove the burner spark igniter Slacken the two retaining bolts holding the burner to the burner support straps and unbolt the burner supply endplate from the burner casting and mixing plates

2 Connect pressure test points A and 0 with flexible 6mm bore tubing teed into the manometer Open MV1 and MV6 to pressurise the burner pipework Leak test the main gas burner pipework and connections with proprietary leak detector fluid Turn off MV6 Seal any leakages and re-test

3 Connect pressure test points A and F with flexible 6 mm bore tubing teed into the manometer Open MV1 and PV3 to pressurise the pilot burner pipework Leak test the pilot gas burner pipework and connections with proprietary leak detector fluid Turn off PV3 Seal any leakages and re-test

4 Turn off MV1

5 Replace the spark igniter and profile division plate

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 42

APPENDIX 2 30005

START SEQUENCE

The burner start sequence is controlled by the Landis and Gyr burner management unit The timings are pre-set and comply with 885885 This unit must NOT be tampered with

A brief description of the start-up sequence isshy

The unit checks

1 The NO FLAME signal on the UV flame scanner

Note If the scanner detects a flame at any time other than in the correct operating sequence the flame programmer initiates a lockout

2 The operation of the combustion air proving switch in the NO AIR position

3 The air handler discharge high temperature switch

If the checks are completed the unit starts the combustion air fan and then checks the combustion airflow

Once the airflow is proven the unit checks that the damper control circuit is functioning correctly After the damper microswitch is made to prove the fresh air damper is fully open the sequence allows 30 seconds for the combustion air to purge any combustible gas from the air handler

After completion of the purge the spark ignition system is energised the pilot valve opened and the spark terminated If the pilot flame is not proven by the UV scanner the system will initiate a LOCKOUT

If the flame is proven the main gas valves are opened the pilot extinguished and the main burner flame proven

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 43

i

APPENDIX 2 30008

The following flow chart shows the complete start sequence including the lighting of the various indicating lamps

MANUAL STATUS LIGHT POWER ON

POWER ON

I INITIATE START BY TIME

SETTING ON CONTROLLER

I CHECK NO FLAME

VISIBLE

PROVEj FAIL LOCKOUT

I CHECK RELAY R4 NC

POSITION

PROVE FAIL NO START

I CHECK AIR PRESSURE SWITCH NC POSITION

PROVE FAIL NO START

I CHECK RELAY R1 NC

POSITION

PROVE j

FAIL NO START

I START COMBUSTION

AIR BLOWER

I CHECK AIR PRESSURE SWITCH NO POSITION

PROVE I

FAIL NO START

I STATUS LIGHT FAN ON

I ENERGISE RELAY R1

I

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 44

I

I

APPENDIX 2 30008

I CHECK OVERHEAT LIMIT

CONTROL R5

PROVE I

FAIL I I

CHECK 541412 LOOP CLOSED ON

LANDIS ampGYR CIRCUIT

PROVE I

FAIL I I

COMBUSTION AIR PURGE PERIOD

30 SECONDS

I

NO START

NO START

CANCEL NO FLAME CHECK CIRCUIT

I

ENERGISE SPARK

I TIMED PERIOD 25 SECONDS

I ENERGISE PILOT GAS

VALVE

I TIMED PERIOD 25 SECONDS

I TERMINATE SPARK

I INTERROGATE UV FLAME SCANNER

PROVE I

FAIL I I

TIMED PERIOD 10 SECONDS

I

LOCKOUT

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 45

I

I

APPENDIX 2 3000S

I ENERGISE MAIN GAS

VALVES

I

STATUS LIGHT BURNER ON

I TIMED PERIOD

5 SECONDS

I DE-ENERGISE PILOT

GAS VALVES

CONTINUOUS FROM PILOT

I INTERROGATE UV FLAME SCANNER

PROVE I

FAIL I I

LOCKOUT I

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 46

APPENDIX 3 30005

Please see copy of Standard Service Sheet

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 47

APPENDIX 4 30005

A41 TIME OUT SCREEN

This is the standard screen displayed when the touch screen is not in use The back light is off to save energy_ To access the STATUS screen touch the ENTER key and the following screen is displayed

[]][I][]rn[IJOO[][IJOO[] EJ~E11 I[]I ~ middot I

NOTE

The Touch Screen operates using the heat produced by the touch of a finger and therefore only LIGHT pressure is required

Excessive pressure can damage the Touch Screen

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 48

APPENDIX 4 30008

A42 STATUS SCREEN

On the typical STATUS screen the illustrated information detailed is as follows

19 36 Fan Brn

RS OS

100 Fst_~_ Lck _ _ Xst Gas~o ~ I

RS Indicates the current room temperature

OS ~( t~~ the current duct discharge temperature

Fan Indicates the current status of the fan by showing the arrow and the fan blades for ON and OFF is shown by the arrow and fan blades being removed

Brn Indicates the current status of the burner with the black flames indicating the burner to be ON and vice versa

Lck LOCKOUT - This indicates a flame failure when highlighted during normal or start-up operation

Xst EXCESS TEMPERATURE SWITCH - This indicates the unit has reached the trip limit on the over heat stat when highlighted during operation

Indicates the current position of the gas modulating valve during normal Gas

operation (0-100)

Indicates whether the Frost stat is energised and the unit is running on frost Fst

override

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 49

APPENDIX 4 30008

A43 CHANGING SETTINGS

It is possible to change the settings for the time of operation and the required temperature set points The following details the steps required

A44 ENTERING THE SECURITY CODE

From the STATUS screen touch the return key and the screen below will be displayed

Type the HIGH LEVEL security code (4321) If you make a mistake use the BACK SPACE key to delete any incorrect number(s) Touch the ENTER key when the code is correct

If the security code is incorrect the screen above will be displayed then try again If after several attempts you can not gain access please contact RS STOKVIS Ltd for further information

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 50

APPENDIX 4 30008

When the code is entered correctly the MAIN MENU is displayed as detailed below

~ STATUS SET VALUES~ ~ TIVIE CLOCK [) [) [) [) [)

The MAIN MENU screen shows the three menu items available The title for each menu item can be changed to suit the end user Please notify RS STOKVIS Ltd prior to commissioning should these parameters require special amendments

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 51

APPENDIX 4 30008

A45 CHANGING OR SETTING A TIME SCHEDULE

From the main menu screen select the TIME CLOCK page by running finger across screen symbol and touch the ENTER key the screen below will be displayed

On the following screen highlight the TS1 symbol and touch the ENTER key

The current time schedule will now be displayed as shown below The display will automatically default to the current day (1 =Monday 2 =Tuesday etc) In this case day 5 (Friday) the four schedule switching times refer to that day

IAC6BBB1BHIS1

mm0CIl bull mID 17BB 17BB 17HB

Iillleschedule

To modify a time select it by highlighting and touch the ENTER key and the following screen is displayed

To amend the appropriate onoff time as shown on the screen below The arrows to the right of the time are for altering the hours and the arrows on the left for the minutes

Once you have set the time use the ESCape key to exit back to the time schedule screen and choose another day by touching the required number Another time may now be modified as before

IAC6BBB1BHIS1

H8BH

I i eschedule

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 52

APPENDIX 4 30008

Use the ESCape key to exit back to the MAIN MENU screen

~ STATUS ~ SET VALUES

TIME CLOCK []~ [] [] [] []

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 53

APPENDIX 4 30005

A46 CHANGING SET VALUES

From the main menu screen select the SET VALUES page by highlight in the normal way and touch the ENTER key

The following screen is displayed

36 19 18III III IIIHsv Rsv Llv

To change the RSV highlight it in the normal way and touch the ENTER key and the screen below will now be shown

IAC6RRR1RR40 T I

0 19 (Y)l RSV

ROOM SET VALUE

The above screen shows the parameters that can be changed The values to the far left are the limitations of set point (OC) Change the set point by using the UP and DOWN ARROWS on the left of the screen or touch the set value itself followed by the ENTER key to select the set value and set it directly using the numeric keyboard All values can be changed in this way

Use the ESCape key twice to exit back to the MAIN MENU screen

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 54

APPENDIX 4 30005

A47 COMMISSIONING AND SERVICING BURNER CHECKS

Select the SET VALUES screen from the MAIN MENU screen and adjust the high lirrlit set point to 55degC to drive the burner to high fire

IAC6HHH1HH60 ~T I

0 19 (Y)

HSV

HIGH SET VALUE ~

Ensure the set value is returned to 36degC once the appropriate checks and adjustments as described in Section 43 of this manual have been completed Return to the SET VALUES screen and select the low limit value to adjust the low fire setting

Reduce the low limit value to OdegC to drive the gas valve to low fire and complete the appropriate checks and adjustments as described in Section 43 of this manual and ensure the set value is returned to the original value

A48 GMT ltgt BST CHANGEOVER DAYLIGHT SAVINGS

To change your unit to British Summer TimelWinter Time the following system screen must be highlighted by touching the Iamp1 button twice

By touching the clock symbol in the top left hand corner followed by the ENTER key the screen below will be displayed

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 55

APPENDIX 4 30008

188311 851193

544

By touching and highlighting in this case 18 followed by the ENTER key A small box allowing the entry of two digits will appear Enter the desired time required using the numbered keys followed by ENTER key Your unit is now set to operate on BSTBWT

Touch the ESC key three times to return back to the Status screen

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 56

STOKVIS ENERGY SYSTEMS 96R WALTON ROAD EAST MOLESEY SURREY KT8 0DL TEL 020 8783 3050 08707 707 747 FAX 020 8783 3051 08707 707 767 E-MAIL infostokvisboilerscom WEBSITE wwwstokvisboilerscom

JULY 1999

Page 40: ECONOAIR 3000S SERIES AIR HANDLING UNIT DIRECT FIREDstokvisboilers.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/EconoAir... · 2019-05-10 · ECONOAIR 3000S SERIES AIR HANDLING UNIT DIRECT FIRED

8 SERVICING 3000S

BELT TENSIONING USING FENNER BELT TENSION INDICATOR

Calculate the deflection in mm on a basis of 16mm per metre of centre distance Centre Distance (m) x 16 =Deflection (mm)

Set lower marker ring at the deflection distance required in mm on the lower scale

Set upper ring against to bottom edge of the top tube

Place the belt tension indicator on top of the belt at the centre of span and apply a force at right angles to the belt defecting it to the point where the lower marker ring is level with the top of the adjacent belt

Read off the force value indicated by the top edge of the upper marker ring

Compare this force to the kgf value shown in the table above

If a Fenner Belt Tension Indicator is not available a spring balance and rule will be suffice

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 36

8 SERVICING 30005

85 MAIN PANEL CONTROLS

All panel controls are readily accessible and may be easily exchanged for replacement components in the event of failure Ensure any replacement item is of the same make and type as the original

851 LANDIS amp GYR LFL 1335 AUTOMATIC SEQUENCE CONTROLLER

The Landis amp Gyr Automatic Sequence Controller is a plug-in unit locating on a pre-wired chassis To remove the controller undo the two retaining screws at the top left and lower right corners and pull the module off the chassis

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

852 CONTROLS CIRCUIT (24 VOLT) TRANSFORMER

The Controls Circuit Transformer is fixed to the panel back plate by tapped screws To remove the transformer undo the wiring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel Undo the two retaining screws and remove the unit complete

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

853 CONTROL RELAYS R1 R2 amp R3

The Control Relays are DIN Rail mounted To remove a relay undo the wIring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel Release the DIN rail retaining clip under the relay with a screwdriver and remove the relay

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

854 6A MCB

The 6A MCB is DIN Rail mounted To remove the MCB undo the wiring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel Release the DIN rail retaining clip under the MCB with a screwdriver and remove the MCB

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

855 THERMAL OVERLOAD

The thermal overload is attached to the underside of the main contactor To remove the overload undo the wiring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel and that the overload setting is as specified in Section 13 of this manual Unscrew the three connections to the contactor and remove the overload

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 37

8 SERVICING 3000S

856 MAIN CONTACTOR

The Main Contactor is DIN Rail mounted To remove the contactor remove the thermal overload as 855 above and then undo the wiring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel Release the DIN rail retaining clip under the contactor with a screwdriver and remove the contactor

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

857 MOTOR FUSE

To replace a motor fuse pull the fuse carrier off the fuse holder base The fuse is attached to the fuse carrier by two screws Unscrew remove and replace

86 REMOTE CONTROL STATION

The remote control station contains some serviceable parts although these items should only be fitted by an approved RS STOKVIS Ltd Engineer

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 38

9 RECOMMENDED SPARES 3000S

For two years operation it is recommended that the following items should be held in stock

ITEM DESCRIPTION PART NO QUANTITY i

1 INDICATOR BULBS W1121 1 PACK

2 SPARK PLUG 023739 1 I

3 UVDETECTOR QRA10C 1 I

4 ROOM SENSOR DRT2453 1

5 DUCT SENSOR DDT1701 1

All replacement parts can be obtained from RS STOKVIS Ltd by quoting the air handler serial number the part number and description

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 39

APPENDIX 1 30005

SOUNDNESS TESTING THE FUEL GAS PIPEWORK

This procedure should only be carried out by personnel familiar with the ECONO-AIR 3000S Series Air handler

The pressure test points and all valves are identified on the Process and Instrumentation Diagram for the air handler included in Section 1 of this n1anual

Isolate the air handler electric supply at the main control panel and lock off Close the manual isolation valves MV1 MV6 and PV3 Ensure the supply pressure is available on the upstream side of MV1

A11 TESTING THE UPSTREAM PIPEWORKAND BURNER CONTROLS 1 Connect a 60 mbar manometer to the pressure test nipple A Monitor the

pressure for two minutes Any rise in pressure indicates that valve MV1 is leaking and must be replaced Remove pressure test points Band F

2 Open MV1 to pressurise the pipework on both the main gas and pilot line to the first block valve

3 Close MV1 Allow one minute for the temperature to stabilise and then test the system for 2 minutes and watch for a drop in the pipework pressure If the pressure falls open valve MV1 and test the pipework connections and valves from MV1 to MV3 and MV1 to PV2 for leaks with a proprietary leak detector fluid or spray Turn off MV1 seal any leaks and re-test

4 If no extemalleaks are found either the pilot block valve PV1 or either the first main gas block valve MV3 is letting by

5 To test this seal pressure test point A and fit a manometer to pressure test point B Leave for two minutes with MV1 open A rise in pressure on the manometer confirms a leak on the block valve MV3 Turn off MV1 exchange the valve and re-test from point 2 above

6 Repeat this procedure for the pilot block valve Seal test point B and fit a manometer to pressure test point F Leave for two minutes with MV1 open A rise in pressure on the manometer confirms a leak on the pilot block valve PV2 Turn off MV1 exchange the valve and re-test from point 1 above Seal test point F

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 40

APPENDIX 1 30005

A12 TESTING THE DOWNSTREAM BURNER VALVE 1 Close MV1 and connect pressure test points A and 8 with flexible 6 mm bore

tubing teed into the manometer Remove pressure test point C Open MV1 to pressurise the downstream block valve MV4

2 Close MV1 and leave for one minute for the temperature to stabilise Monitor the pressure for 2 minutes If the pressure falls open valve MV1 and leak test the line between the two block valves MV3 and MV4 with a proprietary leak detector Turn off MV1 seal any leaks and re-test Note Smaller air handlers in the 3000S Series are fitted with multi-functional valves combining the pressure regulator and two block valves in one component The above procedure still applies but if a leak is found on either block valve the whole control should be replaced If no external leaks are found the downstream block valve is letting by

3 To confirm this close MV1 remove the manometer and refit to pressure test point C Connect pressure test points A and 8 with flexible 6mm bore tubing Open MV1 and allow one minute for the temperature to stabilise Monitor the pressure for a further 2 minutes with MV1 still open A rise in pressure confirms that the second block valve MV4 is letting by Turn off MV1 Replace the valve and re-test from 2 above

A13 TESTING THE DOWNSTREAM BURNER PIPEWORK 1 Close MV1 and connect pressure test points A and D with flexible 6 mm bore

tubing teed into the manometer Open MV1 to pressurise the downstream pilot pipework

2 Close MV1 and leave for one minute for the temperature to stabilise Monitor the pressure for 2 minutes If the pressure falls open valve MV1 and leak test the line between the downstream block valve MV4 and the manual block MV6 with a proprietary leak detector fluid or spray If no external leaks are found the manual block valve MV6 is letting by Turn off MV1 seal any leakages and reshytest from 2 above

A14 TESTING THE DOWNSTREAM PILOT PIPEWORK 1 Close MV1 and connect pressure test points A and F with flexible 6mm bore

tubing teed into the manometer Open MV1 to pressurise the downstream pilot pipework

2 Close MV1 and leave for one rninute for the temperature to stabilise Monitor the pressure for 2 minutes If the pressure falls open valve MV1 and leak test the line between the downstream block valve PV2 and the manual block PV3 with a proprietary leak detector fluid or spray If no external leaks are found the manual block valve PV3 is letting by Turn off MV1 seal any leakages and reshytest from 2 above

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 41

APPENDIX 1 30005

A15 TESTING THE BURNER CONNECTIONS 1 Remove the burner access panel as described in Section 84 of this manual

Remove the burner spark igniter Slacken the two retaining bolts holding the burner to the burner support straps and unbolt the burner supply endplate from the burner casting and mixing plates

2 Connect pressure test points A and 0 with flexible 6mm bore tubing teed into the manometer Open MV1 and MV6 to pressurise the burner pipework Leak test the main gas burner pipework and connections with proprietary leak detector fluid Turn off MV6 Seal any leakages and re-test

3 Connect pressure test points A and F with flexible 6 mm bore tubing teed into the manometer Open MV1 and PV3 to pressurise the pilot burner pipework Leak test the pilot gas burner pipework and connections with proprietary leak detector fluid Turn off PV3 Seal any leakages and re-test

4 Turn off MV1

5 Replace the spark igniter and profile division plate

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 42

APPENDIX 2 30005

START SEQUENCE

The burner start sequence is controlled by the Landis and Gyr burner management unit The timings are pre-set and comply with 885885 This unit must NOT be tampered with

A brief description of the start-up sequence isshy

The unit checks

1 The NO FLAME signal on the UV flame scanner

Note If the scanner detects a flame at any time other than in the correct operating sequence the flame programmer initiates a lockout

2 The operation of the combustion air proving switch in the NO AIR position

3 The air handler discharge high temperature switch

If the checks are completed the unit starts the combustion air fan and then checks the combustion airflow

Once the airflow is proven the unit checks that the damper control circuit is functioning correctly After the damper microswitch is made to prove the fresh air damper is fully open the sequence allows 30 seconds for the combustion air to purge any combustible gas from the air handler

After completion of the purge the spark ignition system is energised the pilot valve opened and the spark terminated If the pilot flame is not proven by the UV scanner the system will initiate a LOCKOUT

If the flame is proven the main gas valves are opened the pilot extinguished and the main burner flame proven

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 43

i

APPENDIX 2 30008

The following flow chart shows the complete start sequence including the lighting of the various indicating lamps

MANUAL STATUS LIGHT POWER ON

POWER ON

I INITIATE START BY TIME

SETTING ON CONTROLLER

I CHECK NO FLAME

VISIBLE

PROVEj FAIL LOCKOUT

I CHECK RELAY R4 NC

POSITION

PROVE FAIL NO START

I CHECK AIR PRESSURE SWITCH NC POSITION

PROVE FAIL NO START

I CHECK RELAY R1 NC

POSITION

PROVE j

FAIL NO START

I START COMBUSTION

AIR BLOWER

I CHECK AIR PRESSURE SWITCH NO POSITION

PROVE I

FAIL NO START

I STATUS LIGHT FAN ON

I ENERGISE RELAY R1

I

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 44

I

I

APPENDIX 2 30008

I CHECK OVERHEAT LIMIT

CONTROL R5

PROVE I

FAIL I I

CHECK 541412 LOOP CLOSED ON

LANDIS ampGYR CIRCUIT

PROVE I

FAIL I I

COMBUSTION AIR PURGE PERIOD

30 SECONDS

I

NO START

NO START

CANCEL NO FLAME CHECK CIRCUIT

I

ENERGISE SPARK

I TIMED PERIOD 25 SECONDS

I ENERGISE PILOT GAS

VALVE

I TIMED PERIOD 25 SECONDS

I TERMINATE SPARK

I INTERROGATE UV FLAME SCANNER

PROVE I

FAIL I I

TIMED PERIOD 10 SECONDS

I

LOCKOUT

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 45

I

I

APPENDIX 2 3000S

I ENERGISE MAIN GAS

VALVES

I

STATUS LIGHT BURNER ON

I TIMED PERIOD

5 SECONDS

I DE-ENERGISE PILOT

GAS VALVES

CONTINUOUS FROM PILOT

I INTERROGATE UV FLAME SCANNER

PROVE I

FAIL I I

LOCKOUT I

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 46

APPENDIX 3 30005

Please see copy of Standard Service Sheet

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 47

APPENDIX 4 30005

A41 TIME OUT SCREEN

This is the standard screen displayed when the touch screen is not in use The back light is off to save energy_ To access the STATUS screen touch the ENTER key and the following screen is displayed

[]][I][]rn[IJOO[][IJOO[] EJ~E11 I[]I ~ middot I

NOTE

The Touch Screen operates using the heat produced by the touch of a finger and therefore only LIGHT pressure is required

Excessive pressure can damage the Touch Screen

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 48

APPENDIX 4 30008

A42 STATUS SCREEN

On the typical STATUS screen the illustrated information detailed is as follows

19 36 Fan Brn

RS OS

100 Fst_~_ Lck _ _ Xst Gas~o ~ I

RS Indicates the current room temperature

OS ~( t~~ the current duct discharge temperature

Fan Indicates the current status of the fan by showing the arrow and the fan blades for ON and OFF is shown by the arrow and fan blades being removed

Brn Indicates the current status of the burner with the black flames indicating the burner to be ON and vice versa

Lck LOCKOUT - This indicates a flame failure when highlighted during normal or start-up operation

Xst EXCESS TEMPERATURE SWITCH - This indicates the unit has reached the trip limit on the over heat stat when highlighted during operation

Indicates the current position of the gas modulating valve during normal Gas

operation (0-100)

Indicates whether the Frost stat is energised and the unit is running on frost Fst

override

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 49

APPENDIX 4 30008

A43 CHANGING SETTINGS

It is possible to change the settings for the time of operation and the required temperature set points The following details the steps required

A44 ENTERING THE SECURITY CODE

From the STATUS screen touch the return key and the screen below will be displayed

Type the HIGH LEVEL security code (4321) If you make a mistake use the BACK SPACE key to delete any incorrect number(s) Touch the ENTER key when the code is correct

If the security code is incorrect the screen above will be displayed then try again If after several attempts you can not gain access please contact RS STOKVIS Ltd for further information

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 50

APPENDIX 4 30008

When the code is entered correctly the MAIN MENU is displayed as detailed below

~ STATUS SET VALUES~ ~ TIVIE CLOCK [) [) [) [) [)

The MAIN MENU screen shows the three menu items available The title for each menu item can be changed to suit the end user Please notify RS STOKVIS Ltd prior to commissioning should these parameters require special amendments

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 51

APPENDIX 4 30008

A45 CHANGING OR SETTING A TIME SCHEDULE

From the main menu screen select the TIME CLOCK page by running finger across screen symbol and touch the ENTER key the screen below will be displayed

On the following screen highlight the TS1 symbol and touch the ENTER key

The current time schedule will now be displayed as shown below The display will automatically default to the current day (1 =Monday 2 =Tuesday etc) In this case day 5 (Friday) the four schedule switching times refer to that day

IAC6BBB1BHIS1

mm0CIl bull mID 17BB 17BB 17HB

Iillleschedule

To modify a time select it by highlighting and touch the ENTER key and the following screen is displayed

To amend the appropriate onoff time as shown on the screen below The arrows to the right of the time are for altering the hours and the arrows on the left for the minutes

Once you have set the time use the ESCape key to exit back to the time schedule screen and choose another day by touching the required number Another time may now be modified as before

IAC6BBB1BHIS1

H8BH

I i eschedule

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 52

APPENDIX 4 30008

Use the ESCape key to exit back to the MAIN MENU screen

~ STATUS ~ SET VALUES

TIME CLOCK []~ [] [] [] []

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 53

APPENDIX 4 30005

A46 CHANGING SET VALUES

From the main menu screen select the SET VALUES page by highlight in the normal way and touch the ENTER key

The following screen is displayed

36 19 18III III IIIHsv Rsv Llv

To change the RSV highlight it in the normal way and touch the ENTER key and the screen below will now be shown

IAC6RRR1RR40 T I

0 19 (Y)l RSV

ROOM SET VALUE

The above screen shows the parameters that can be changed The values to the far left are the limitations of set point (OC) Change the set point by using the UP and DOWN ARROWS on the left of the screen or touch the set value itself followed by the ENTER key to select the set value and set it directly using the numeric keyboard All values can be changed in this way

Use the ESCape key twice to exit back to the MAIN MENU screen

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 54

APPENDIX 4 30005

A47 COMMISSIONING AND SERVICING BURNER CHECKS

Select the SET VALUES screen from the MAIN MENU screen and adjust the high lirrlit set point to 55degC to drive the burner to high fire

IAC6HHH1HH60 ~T I

0 19 (Y)

HSV

HIGH SET VALUE ~

Ensure the set value is returned to 36degC once the appropriate checks and adjustments as described in Section 43 of this manual have been completed Return to the SET VALUES screen and select the low limit value to adjust the low fire setting

Reduce the low limit value to OdegC to drive the gas valve to low fire and complete the appropriate checks and adjustments as described in Section 43 of this manual and ensure the set value is returned to the original value

A48 GMT ltgt BST CHANGEOVER DAYLIGHT SAVINGS

To change your unit to British Summer TimelWinter Time the following system screen must be highlighted by touching the Iamp1 button twice

By touching the clock symbol in the top left hand corner followed by the ENTER key the screen below will be displayed

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 55

APPENDIX 4 30008

188311 851193

544

By touching and highlighting in this case 18 followed by the ENTER key A small box allowing the entry of two digits will appear Enter the desired time required using the numbered keys followed by ENTER key Your unit is now set to operate on BSTBWT

Touch the ESC key three times to return back to the Status screen

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 56

STOKVIS ENERGY SYSTEMS 96R WALTON ROAD EAST MOLESEY SURREY KT8 0DL TEL 020 8783 3050 08707 707 747 FAX 020 8783 3051 08707 707 767 E-MAIL infostokvisboilerscom WEBSITE wwwstokvisboilerscom

JULY 1999

Page 41: ECONOAIR 3000S SERIES AIR HANDLING UNIT DIRECT FIREDstokvisboilers.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/EconoAir... · 2019-05-10 · ECONOAIR 3000S SERIES AIR HANDLING UNIT DIRECT FIRED

8 SERVICING 30005

85 MAIN PANEL CONTROLS

All panel controls are readily accessible and may be easily exchanged for replacement components in the event of failure Ensure any replacement item is of the same make and type as the original

851 LANDIS amp GYR LFL 1335 AUTOMATIC SEQUENCE CONTROLLER

The Landis amp Gyr Automatic Sequence Controller is a plug-in unit locating on a pre-wired chassis To remove the controller undo the two retaining screws at the top left and lower right corners and pull the module off the chassis

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

852 CONTROLS CIRCUIT (24 VOLT) TRANSFORMER

The Controls Circuit Transformer is fixed to the panel back plate by tapped screws To remove the transformer undo the wiring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel Undo the two retaining screws and remove the unit complete

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

853 CONTROL RELAYS R1 R2 amp R3

The Control Relays are DIN Rail mounted To remove a relay undo the wIring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel Release the DIN rail retaining clip under the relay with a screwdriver and remove the relay

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

854 6A MCB

The 6A MCB is DIN Rail mounted To remove the MCB undo the wiring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel Release the DIN rail retaining clip under the MCB with a screwdriver and remove the MCB

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

855 THERMAL OVERLOAD

The thermal overload is attached to the underside of the main contactor To remove the overload undo the wiring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel and that the overload setting is as specified in Section 13 of this manual Unscrew the three connections to the contactor and remove the overload

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 37

8 SERVICING 3000S

856 MAIN CONTACTOR

The Main Contactor is DIN Rail mounted To remove the contactor remove the thermal overload as 855 above and then undo the wiring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel Release the DIN rail retaining clip under the contactor with a screwdriver and remove the contactor

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

857 MOTOR FUSE

To replace a motor fuse pull the fuse carrier off the fuse holder base The fuse is attached to the fuse carrier by two screws Unscrew remove and replace

86 REMOTE CONTROL STATION

The remote control station contains some serviceable parts although these items should only be fitted by an approved RS STOKVIS Ltd Engineer

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 38

9 RECOMMENDED SPARES 3000S

For two years operation it is recommended that the following items should be held in stock

ITEM DESCRIPTION PART NO QUANTITY i

1 INDICATOR BULBS W1121 1 PACK

2 SPARK PLUG 023739 1 I

3 UVDETECTOR QRA10C 1 I

4 ROOM SENSOR DRT2453 1

5 DUCT SENSOR DDT1701 1

All replacement parts can be obtained from RS STOKVIS Ltd by quoting the air handler serial number the part number and description

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 39

APPENDIX 1 30005

SOUNDNESS TESTING THE FUEL GAS PIPEWORK

This procedure should only be carried out by personnel familiar with the ECONO-AIR 3000S Series Air handler

The pressure test points and all valves are identified on the Process and Instrumentation Diagram for the air handler included in Section 1 of this n1anual

Isolate the air handler electric supply at the main control panel and lock off Close the manual isolation valves MV1 MV6 and PV3 Ensure the supply pressure is available on the upstream side of MV1

A11 TESTING THE UPSTREAM PIPEWORKAND BURNER CONTROLS 1 Connect a 60 mbar manometer to the pressure test nipple A Monitor the

pressure for two minutes Any rise in pressure indicates that valve MV1 is leaking and must be replaced Remove pressure test points Band F

2 Open MV1 to pressurise the pipework on both the main gas and pilot line to the first block valve

3 Close MV1 Allow one minute for the temperature to stabilise and then test the system for 2 minutes and watch for a drop in the pipework pressure If the pressure falls open valve MV1 and test the pipework connections and valves from MV1 to MV3 and MV1 to PV2 for leaks with a proprietary leak detector fluid or spray Turn off MV1 seal any leaks and re-test

4 If no extemalleaks are found either the pilot block valve PV1 or either the first main gas block valve MV3 is letting by

5 To test this seal pressure test point A and fit a manometer to pressure test point B Leave for two minutes with MV1 open A rise in pressure on the manometer confirms a leak on the block valve MV3 Turn off MV1 exchange the valve and re-test from point 2 above

6 Repeat this procedure for the pilot block valve Seal test point B and fit a manometer to pressure test point F Leave for two minutes with MV1 open A rise in pressure on the manometer confirms a leak on the pilot block valve PV2 Turn off MV1 exchange the valve and re-test from point 1 above Seal test point F

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 40

APPENDIX 1 30005

A12 TESTING THE DOWNSTREAM BURNER VALVE 1 Close MV1 and connect pressure test points A and 8 with flexible 6 mm bore

tubing teed into the manometer Remove pressure test point C Open MV1 to pressurise the downstream block valve MV4

2 Close MV1 and leave for one minute for the temperature to stabilise Monitor the pressure for 2 minutes If the pressure falls open valve MV1 and leak test the line between the two block valves MV3 and MV4 with a proprietary leak detector Turn off MV1 seal any leaks and re-test Note Smaller air handlers in the 3000S Series are fitted with multi-functional valves combining the pressure regulator and two block valves in one component The above procedure still applies but if a leak is found on either block valve the whole control should be replaced If no external leaks are found the downstream block valve is letting by

3 To confirm this close MV1 remove the manometer and refit to pressure test point C Connect pressure test points A and 8 with flexible 6mm bore tubing Open MV1 and allow one minute for the temperature to stabilise Monitor the pressure for a further 2 minutes with MV1 still open A rise in pressure confirms that the second block valve MV4 is letting by Turn off MV1 Replace the valve and re-test from 2 above

A13 TESTING THE DOWNSTREAM BURNER PIPEWORK 1 Close MV1 and connect pressure test points A and D with flexible 6 mm bore

tubing teed into the manometer Open MV1 to pressurise the downstream pilot pipework

2 Close MV1 and leave for one minute for the temperature to stabilise Monitor the pressure for 2 minutes If the pressure falls open valve MV1 and leak test the line between the downstream block valve MV4 and the manual block MV6 with a proprietary leak detector fluid or spray If no external leaks are found the manual block valve MV6 is letting by Turn off MV1 seal any leakages and reshytest from 2 above

A14 TESTING THE DOWNSTREAM PILOT PIPEWORK 1 Close MV1 and connect pressure test points A and F with flexible 6mm bore

tubing teed into the manometer Open MV1 to pressurise the downstream pilot pipework

2 Close MV1 and leave for one rninute for the temperature to stabilise Monitor the pressure for 2 minutes If the pressure falls open valve MV1 and leak test the line between the downstream block valve PV2 and the manual block PV3 with a proprietary leak detector fluid or spray If no external leaks are found the manual block valve PV3 is letting by Turn off MV1 seal any leakages and reshytest from 2 above

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 41

APPENDIX 1 30005

A15 TESTING THE BURNER CONNECTIONS 1 Remove the burner access panel as described in Section 84 of this manual

Remove the burner spark igniter Slacken the two retaining bolts holding the burner to the burner support straps and unbolt the burner supply endplate from the burner casting and mixing plates

2 Connect pressure test points A and 0 with flexible 6mm bore tubing teed into the manometer Open MV1 and MV6 to pressurise the burner pipework Leak test the main gas burner pipework and connections with proprietary leak detector fluid Turn off MV6 Seal any leakages and re-test

3 Connect pressure test points A and F with flexible 6 mm bore tubing teed into the manometer Open MV1 and PV3 to pressurise the pilot burner pipework Leak test the pilot gas burner pipework and connections with proprietary leak detector fluid Turn off PV3 Seal any leakages and re-test

4 Turn off MV1

5 Replace the spark igniter and profile division plate

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 42

APPENDIX 2 30005

START SEQUENCE

The burner start sequence is controlled by the Landis and Gyr burner management unit The timings are pre-set and comply with 885885 This unit must NOT be tampered with

A brief description of the start-up sequence isshy

The unit checks

1 The NO FLAME signal on the UV flame scanner

Note If the scanner detects a flame at any time other than in the correct operating sequence the flame programmer initiates a lockout

2 The operation of the combustion air proving switch in the NO AIR position

3 The air handler discharge high temperature switch

If the checks are completed the unit starts the combustion air fan and then checks the combustion airflow

Once the airflow is proven the unit checks that the damper control circuit is functioning correctly After the damper microswitch is made to prove the fresh air damper is fully open the sequence allows 30 seconds for the combustion air to purge any combustible gas from the air handler

After completion of the purge the spark ignition system is energised the pilot valve opened and the spark terminated If the pilot flame is not proven by the UV scanner the system will initiate a LOCKOUT

If the flame is proven the main gas valves are opened the pilot extinguished and the main burner flame proven

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 43

i

APPENDIX 2 30008

The following flow chart shows the complete start sequence including the lighting of the various indicating lamps

MANUAL STATUS LIGHT POWER ON

POWER ON

I INITIATE START BY TIME

SETTING ON CONTROLLER

I CHECK NO FLAME

VISIBLE

PROVEj FAIL LOCKOUT

I CHECK RELAY R4 NC

POSITION

PROVE FAIL NO START

I CHECK AIR PRESSURE SWITCH NC POSITION

PROVE FAIL NO START

I CHECK RELAY R1 NC

POSITION

PROVE j

FAIL NO START

I START COMBUSTION

AIR BLOWER

I CHECK AIR PRESSURE SWITCH NO POSITION

PROVE I

FAIL NO START

I STATUS LIGHT FAN ON

I ENERGISE RELAY R1

I

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 44

I

I

APPENDIX 2 30008

I CHECK OVERHEAT LIMIT

CONTROL R5

PROVE I

FAIL I I

CHECK 541412 LOOP CLOSED ON

LANDIS ampGYR CIRCUIT

PROVE I

FAIL I I

COMBUSTION AIR PURGE PERIOD

30 SECONDS

I

NO START

NO START

CANCEL NO FLAME CHECK CIRCUIT

I

ENERGISE SPARK

I TIMED PERIOD 25 SECONDS

I ENERGISE PILOT GAS

VALVE

I TIMED PERIOD 25 SECONDS

I TERMINATE SPARK

I INTERROGATE UV FLAME SCANNER

PROVE I

FAIL I I

TIMED PERIOD 10 SECONDS

I

LOCKOUT

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 45

I

I

APPENDIX 2 3000S

I ENERGISE MAIN GAS

VALVES

I

STATUS LIGHT BURNER ON

I TIMED PERIOD

5 SECONDS

I DE-ENERGISE PILOT

GAS VALVES

CONTINUOUS FROM PILOT

I INTERROGATE UV FLAME SCANNER

PROVE I

FAIL I I

LOCKOUT I

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 46

APPENDIX 3 30005

Please see copy of Standard Service Sheet

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 47

APPENDIX 4 30005

A41 TIME OUT SCREEN

This is the standard screen displayed when the touch screen is not in use The back light is off to save energy_ To access the STATUS screen touch the ENTER key and the following screen is displayed

[]][I][]rn[IJOO[][IJOO[] EJ~E11 I[]I ~ middot I

NOTE

The Touch Screen operates using the heat produced by the touch of a finger and therefore only LIGHT pressure is required

Excessive pressure can damage the Touch Screen

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 48

APPENDIX 4 30008

A42 STATUS SCREEN

On the typical STATUS screen the illustrated information detailed is as follows

19 36 Fan Brn

RS OS

100 Fst_~_ Lck _ _ Xst Gas~o ~ I

RS Indicates the current room temperature

OS ~( t~~ the current duct discharge temperature

Fan Indicates the current status of the fan by showing the arrow and the fan blades for ON and OFF is shown by the arrow and fan blades being removed

Brn Indicates the current status of the burner with the black flames indicating the burner to be ON and vice versa

Lck LOCKOUT - This indicates a flame failure when highlighted during normal or start-up operation

Xst EXCESS TEMPERATURE SWITCH - This indicates the unit has reached the trip limit on the over heat stat when highlighted during operation

Indicates the current position of the gas modulating valve during normal Gas

operation (0-100)

Indicates whether the Frost stat is energised and the unit is running on frost Fst

override

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 49

APPENDIX 4 30008

A43 CHANGING SETTINGS

It is possible to change the settings for the time of operation and the required temperature set points The following details the steps required

A44 ENTERING THE SECURITY CODE

From the STATUS screen touch the return key and the screen below will be displayed

Type the HIGH LEVEL security code (4321) If you make a mistake use the BACK SPACE key to delete any incorrect number(s) Touch the ENTER key when the code is correct

If the security code is incorrect the screen above will be displayed then try again If after several attempts you can not gain access please contact RS STOKVIS Ltd for further information

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 50

APPENDIX 4 30008

When the code is entered correctly the MAIN MENU is displayed as detailed below

~ STATUS SET VALUES~ ~ TIVIE CLOCK [) [) [) [) [)

The MAIN MENU screen shows the three menu items available The title for each menu item can be changed to suit the end user Please notify RS STOKVIS Ltd prior to commissioning should these parameters require special amendments

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 51

APPENDIX 4 30008

A45 CHANGING OR SETTING A TIME SCHEDULE

From the main menu screen select the TIME CLOCK page by running finger across screen symbol and touch the ENTER key the screen below will be displayed

On the following screen highlight the TS1 symbol and touch the ENTER key

The current time schedule will now be displayed as shown below The display will automatically default to the current day (1 =Monday 2 =Tuesday etc) In this case day 5 (Friday) the four schedule switching times refer to that day

IAC6BBB1BHIS1

mm0CIl bull mID 17BB 17BB 17HB

Iillleschedule

To modify a time select it by highlighting and touch the ENTER key and the following screen is displayed

To amend the appropriate onoff time as shown on the screen below The arrows to the right of the time are for altering the hours and the arrows on the left for the minutes

Once you have set the time use the ESCape key to exit back to the time schedule screen and choose another day by touching the required number Another time may now be modified as before

IAC6BBB1BHIS1

H8BH

I i eschedule

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 52

APPENDIX 4 30008

Use the ESCape key to exit back to the MAIN MENU screen

~ STATUS ~ SET VALUES

TIME CLOCK []~ [] [] [] []

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 53

APPENDIX 4 30005

A46 CHANGING SET VALUES

From the main menu screen select the SET VALUES page by highlight in the normal way and touch the ENTER key

The following screen is displayed

36 19 18III III IIIHsv Rsv Llv

To change the RSV highlight it in the normal way and touch the ENTER key and the screen below will now be shown

IAC6RRR1RR40 T I

0 19 (Y)l RSV

ROOM SET VALUE

The above screen shows the parameters that can be changed The values to the far left are the limitations of set point (OC) Change the set point by using the UP and DOWN ARROWS on the left of the screen or touch the set value itself followed by the ENTER key to select the set value and set it directly using the numeric keyboard All values can be changed in this way

Use the ESCape key twice to exit back to the MAIN MENU screen

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 54

APPENDIX 4 30005

A47 COMMISSIONING AND SERVICING BURNER CHECKS

Select the SET VALUES screen from the MAIN MENU screen and adjust the high lirrlit set point to 55degC to drive the burner to high fire

IAC6HHH1HH60 ~T I

0 19 (Y)

HSV

HIGH SET VALUE ~

Ensure the set value is returned to 36degC once the appropriate checks and adjustments as described in Section 43 of this manual have been completed Return to the SET VALUES screen and select the low limit value to adjust the low fire setting

Reduce the low limit value to OdegC to drive the gas valve to low fire and complete the appropriate checks and adjustments as described in Section 43 of this manual and ensure the set value is returned to the original value

A48 GMT ltgt BST CHANGEOVER DAYLIGHT SAVINGS

To change your unit to British Summer TimelWinter Time the following system screen must be highlighted by touching the Iamp1 button twice

By touching the clock symbol in the top left hand corner followed by the ENTER key the screen below will be displayed

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 55

APPENDIX 4 30008

188311 851193

544

By touching and highlighting in this case 18 followed by the ENTER key A small box allowing the entry of two digits will appear Enter the desired time required using the numbered keys followed by ENTER key Your unit is now set to operate on BSTBWT

Touch the ESC key three times to return back to the Status screen

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 56

STOKVIS ENERGY SYSTEMS 96R WALTON ROAD EAST MOLESEY SURREY KT8 0DL TEL 020 8783 3050 08707 707 747 FAX 020 8783 3051 08707 707 767 E-MAIL infostokvisboilerscom WEBSITE wwwstokvisboilerscom

JULY 1999

Page 42: ECONOAIR 3000S SERIES AIR HANDLING UNIT DIRECT FIREDstokvisboilers.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/EconoAir... · 2019-05-10 · ECONOAIR 3000S SERIES AIR HANDLING UNIT DIRECT FIRED

8 SERVICING 3000S

856 MAIN CONTACTOR

The Main Contactor is DIN Rail mounted To remove the contactor remove the thermal overload as 855 above and then undo the wiring connections after first noting that the connections are correct to the wiring diagram attached to the panel Release the DIN rail retaining clip under the contactor with a screwdriver and remove the contactor

Replacement is a simple reversal of the above procedure

857 MOTOR FUSE

To replace a motor fuse pull the fuse carrier off the fuse holder base The fuse is attached to the fuse carrier by two screws Unscrew remove and replace

86 REMOTE CONTROL STATION

The remote control station contains some serviceable parts although these items should only be fitted by an approved RS STOKVIS Ltd Engineer

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 38

9 RECOMMENDED SPARES 3000S

For two years operation it is recommended that the following items should be held in stock

ITEM DESCRIPTION PART NO QUANTITY i

1 INDICATOR BULBS W1121 1 PACK

2 SPARK PLUG 023739 1 I

3 UVDETECTOR QRA10C 1 I

4 ROOM SENSOR DRT2453 1

5 DUCT SENSOR DDT1701 1

All replacement parts can be obtained from RS STOKVIS Ltd by quoting the air handler serial number the part number and description

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 39

APPENDIX 1 30005

SOUNDNESS TESTING THE FUEL GAS PIPEWORK

This procedure should only be carried out by personnel familiar with the ECONO-AIR 3000S Series Air handler

The pressure test points and all valves are identified on the Process and Instrumentation Diagram for the air handler included in Section 1 of this n1anual

Isolate the air handler electric supply at the main control panel and lock off Close the manual isolation valves MV1 MV6 and PV3 Ensure the supply pressure is available on the upstream side of MV1

A11 TESTING THE UPSTREAM PIPEWORKAND BURNER CONTROLS 1 Connect a 60 mbar manometer to the pressure test nipple A Monitor the

pressure for two minutes Any rise in pressure indicates that valve MV1 is leaking and must be replaced Remove pressure test points Band F

2 Open MV1 to pressurise the pipework on both the main gas and pilot line to the first block valve

3 Close MV1 Allow one minute for the temperature to stabilise and then test the system for 2 minutes and watch for a drop in the pipework pressure If the pressure falls open valve MV1 and test the pipework connections and valves from MV1 to MV3 and MV1 to PV2 for leaks with a proprietary leak detector fluid or spray Turn off MV1 seal any leaks and re-test

4 If no extemalleaks are found either the pilot block valve PV1 or either the first main gas block valve MV3 is letting by

5 To test this seal pressure test point A and fit a manometer to pressure test point B Leave for two minutes with MV1 open A rise in pressure on the manometer confirms a leak on the block valve MV3 Turn off MV1 exchange the valve and re-test from point 2 above

6 Repeat this procedure for the pilot block valve Seal test point B and fit a manometer to pressure test point F Leave for two minutes with MV1 open A rise in pressure on the manometer confirms a leak on the pilot block valve PV2 Turn off MV1 exchange the valve and re-test from point 1 above Seal test point F

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 40

APPENDIX 1 30005

A12 TESTING THE DOWNSTREAM BURNER VALVE 1 Close MV1 and connect pressure test points A and 8 with flexible 6 mm bore

tubing teed into the manometer Remove pressure test point C Open MV1 to pressurise the downstream block valve MV4

2 Close MV1 and leave for one minute for the temperature to stabilise Monitor the pressure for 2 minutes If the pressure falls open valve MV1 and leak test the line between the two block valves MV3 and MV4 with a proprietary leak detector Turn off MV1 seal any leaks and re-test Note Smaller air handlers in the 3000S Series are fitted with multi-functional valves combining the pressure regulator and two block valves in one component The above procedure still applies but if a leak is found on either block valve the whole control should be replaced If no external leaks are found the downstream block valve is letting by

3 To confirm this close MV1 remove the manometer and refit to pressure test point C Connect pressure test points A and 8 with flexible 6mm bore tubing Open MV1 and allow one minute for the temperature to stabilise Monitor the pressure for a further 2 minutes with MV1 still open A rise in pressure confirms that the second block valve MV4 is letting by Turn off MV1 Replace the valve and re-test from 2 above

A13 TESTING THE DOWNSTREAM BURNER PIPEWORK 1 Close MV1 and connect pressure test points A and D with flexible 6 mm bore

tubing teed into the manometer Open MV1 to pressurise the downstream pilot pipework

2 Close MV1 and leave for one minute for the temperature to stabilise Monitor the pressure for 2 minutes If the pressure falls open valve MV1 and leak test the line between the downstream block valve MV4 and the manual block MV6 with a proprietary leak detector fluid or spray If no external leaks are found the manual block valve MV6 is letting by Turn off MV1 seal any leakages and reshytest from 2 above

A14 TESTING THE DOWNSTREAM PILOT PIPEWORK 1 Close MV1 and connect pressure test points A and F with flexible 6mm bore

tubing teed into the manometer Open MV1 to pressurise the downstream pilot pipework

2 Close MV1 and leave for one rninute for the temperature to stabilise Monitor the pressure for 2 minutes If the pressure falls open valve MV1 and leak test the line between the downstream block valve PV2 and the manual block PV3 with a proprietary leak detector fluid or spray If no external leaks are found the manual block valve PV3 is letting by Turn off MV1 seal any leakages and reshytest from 2 above

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 41

APPENDIX 1 30005

A15 TESTING THE BURNER CONNECTIONS 1 Remove the burner access panel as described in Section 84 of this manual

Remove the burner spark igniter Slacken the two retaining bolts holding the burner to the burner support straps and unbolt the burner supply endplate from the burner casting and mixing plates

2 Connect pressure test points A and 0 with flexible 6mm bore tubing teed into the manometer Open MV1 and MV6 to pressurise the burner pipework Leak test the main gas burner pipework and connections with proprietary leak detector fluid Turn off MV6 Seal any leakages and re-test

3 Connect pressure test points A and F with flexible 6 mm bore tubing teed into the manometer Open MV1 and PV3 to pressurise the pilot burner pipework Leak test the pilot gas burner pipework and connections with proprietary leak detector fluid Turn off PV3 Seal any leakages and re-test

4 Turn off MV1

5 Replace the spark igniter and profile division plate

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 42

APPENDIX 2 30005

START SEQUENCE

The burner start sequence is controlled by the Landis and Gyr burner management unit The timings are pre-set and comply with 885885 This unit must NOT be tampered with

A brief description of the start-up sequence isshy

The unit checks

1 The NO FLAME signal on the UV flame scanner

Note If the scanner detects a flame at any time other than in the correct operating sequence the flame programmer initiates a lockout

2 The operation of the combustion air proving switch in the NO AIR position

3 The air handler discharge high temperature switch

If the checks are completed the unit starts the combustion air fan and then checks the combustion airflow

Once the airflow is proven the unit checks that the damper control circuit is functioning correctly After the damper microswitch is made to prove the fresh air damper is fully open the sequence allows 30 seconds for the combustion air to purge any combustible gas from the air handler

After completion of the purge the spark ignition system is energised the pilot valve opened and the spark terminated If the pilot flame is not proven by the UV scanner the system will initiate a LOCKOUT

If the flame is proven the main gas valves are opened the pilot extinguished and the main burner flame proven

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 43

i

APPENDIX 2 30008

The following flow chart shows the complete start sequence including the lighting of the various indicating lamps

MANUAL STATUS LIGHT POWER ON

POWER ON

I INITIATE START BY TIME

SETTING ON CONTROLLER

I CHECK NO FLAME

VISIBLE

PROVEj FAIL LOCKOUT

I CHECK RELAY R4 NC

POSITION

PROVE FAIL NO START

I CHECK AIR PRESSURE SWITCH NC POSITION

PROVE FAIL NO START

I CHECK RELAY R1 NC

POSITION

PROVE j

FAIL NO START

I START COMBUSTION

AIR BLOWER

I CHECK AIR PRESSURE SWITCH NO POSITION

PROVE I

FAIL NO START

I STATUS LIGHT FAN ON

I ENERGISE RELAY R1

I

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 44

I

I

APPENDIX 2 30008

I CHECK OVERHEAT LIMIT

CONTROL R5

PROVE I

FAIL I I

CHECK 541412 LOOP CLOSED ON

LANDIS ampGYR CIRCUIT

PROVE I

FAIL I I

COMBUSTION AIR PURGE PERIOD

30 SECONDS

I

NO START

NO START

CANCEL NO FLAME CHECK CIRCUIT

I

ENERGISE SPARK

I TIMED PERIOD 25 SECONDS

I ENERGISE PILOT GAS

VALVE

I TIMED PERIOD 25 SECONDS

I TERMINATE SPARK

I INTERROGATE UV FLAME SCANNER

PROVE I

FAIL I I

TIMED PERIOD 10 SECONDS

I

LOCKOUT

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 45

I

I

APPENDIX 2 3000S

I ENERGISE MAIN GAS

VALVES

I

STATUS LIGHT BURNER ON

I TIMED PERIOD

5 SECONDS

I DE-ENERGISE PILOT

GAS VALVES

CONTINUOUS FROM PILOT

I INTERROGATE UV FLAME SCANNER

PROVE I

FAIL I I

LOCKOUT I

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 46

APPENDIX 3 30005

Please see copy of Standard Service Sheet

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 47

APPENDIX 4 30005

A41 TIME OUT SCREEN

This is the standard screen displayed when the touch screen is not in use The back light is off to save energy_ To access the STATUS screen touch the ENTER key and the following screen is displayed

[]][I][]rn[IJOO[][IJOO[] EJ~E11 I[]I ~ middot I

NOTE

The Touch Screen operates using the heat produced by the touch of a finger and therefore only LIGHT pressure is required

Excessive pressure can damage the Touch Screen

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 48

APPENDIX 4 30008

A42 STATUS SCREEN

On the typical STATUS screen the illustrated information detailed is as follows

19 36 Fan Brn

RS OS

100 Fst_~_ Lck _ _ Xst Gas~o ~ I

RS Indicates the current room temperature

OS ~( t~~ the current duct discharge temperature

Fan Indicates the current status of the fan by showing the arrow and the fan blades for ON and OFF is shown by the arrow and fan blades being removed

Brn Indicates the current status of the burner with the black flames indicating the burner to be ON and vice versa

Lck LOCKOUT - This indicates a flame failure when highlighted during normal or start-up operation

Xst EXCESS TEMPERATURE SWITCH - This indicates the unit has reached the trip limit on the over heat stat when highlighted during operation

Indicates the current position of the gas modulating valve during normal Gas

operation (0-100)

Indicates whether the Frost stat is energised and the unit is running on frost Fst

override

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 49

APPENDIX 4 30008

A43 CHANGING SETTINGS

It is possible to change the settings for the time of operation and the required temperature set points The following details the steps required

A44 ENTERING THE SECURITY CODE

From the STATUS screen touch the return key and the screen below will be displayed

Type the HIGH LEVEL security code (4321) If you make a mistake use the BACK SPACE key to delete any incorrect number(s) Touch the ENTER key when the code is correct

If the security code is incorrect the screen above will be displayed then try again If after several attempts you can not gain access please contact RS STOKVIS Ltd for further information

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 50

APPENDIX 4 30008

When the code is entered correctly the MAIN MENU is displayed as detailed below

~ STATUS SET VALUES~ ~ TIVIE CLOCK [) [) [) [) [)

The MAIN MENU screen shows the three menu items available The title for each menu item can be changed to suit the end user Please notify RS STOKVIS Ltd prior to commissioning should these parameters require special amendments

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 51

APPENDIX 4 30008

A45 CHANGING OR SETTING A TIME SCHEDULE

From the main menu screen select the TIME CLOCK page by running finger across screen symbol and touch the ENTER key the screen below will be displayed

On the following screen highlight the TS1 symbol and touch the ENTER key

The current time schedule will now be displayed as shown below The display will automatically default to the current day (1 =Monday 2 =Tuesday etc) In this case day 5 (Friday) the four schedule switching times refer to that day

IAC6BBB1BHIS1

mm0CIl bull mID 17BB 17BB 17HB

Iillleschedule

To modify a time select it by highlighting and touch the ENTER key and the following screen is displayed

To amend the appropriate onoff time as shown on the screen below The arrows to the right of the time are for altering the hours and the arrows on the left for the minutes

Once you have set the time use the ESCape key to exit back to the time schedule screen and choose another day by touching the required number Another time may now be modified as before

IAC6BBB1BHIS1

H8BH

I i eschedule

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 52

APPENDIX 4 30008

Use the ESCape key to exit back to the MAIN MENU screen

~ STATUS ~ SET VALUES

TIME CLOCK []~ [] [] [] []

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 53

APPENDIX 4 30005

A46 CHANGING SET VALUES

From the main menu screen select the SET VALUES page by highlight in the normal way and touch the ENTER key

The following screen is displayed

36 19 18III III IIIHsv Rsv Llv

To change the RSV highlight it in the normal way and touch the ENTER key and the screen below will now be shown

IAC6RRR1RR40 T I

0 19 (Y)l RSV

ROOM SET VALUE

The above screen shows the parameters that can be changed The values to the far left are the limitations of set point (OC) Change the set point by using the UP and DOWN ARROWS on the left of the screen or touch the set value itself followed by the ENTER key to select the set value and set it directly using the numeric keyboard All values can be changed in this way

Use the ESCape key twice to exit back to the MAIN MENU screen

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 54

APPENDIX 4 30005

A47 COMMISSIONING AND SERVICING BURNER CHECKS

Select the SET VALUES screen from the MAIN MENU screen and adjust the high lirrlit set point to 55degC to drive the burner to high fire

IAC6HHH1HH60 ~T I

0 19 (Y)

HSV

HIGH SET VALUE ~

Ensure the set value is returned to 36degC once the appropriate checks and adjustments as described in Section 43 of this manual have been completed Return to the SET VALUES screen and select the low limit value to adjust the low fire setting

Reduce the low limit value to OdegC to drive the gas valve to low fire and complete the appropriate checks and adjustments as described in Section 43 of this manual and ensure the set value is returned to the original value

A48 GMT ltgt BST CHANGEOVER DAYLIGHT SAVINGS

To change your unit to British Summer TimelWinter Time the following system screen must be highlighted by touching the Iamp1 button twice

By touching the clock symbol in the top left hand corner followed by the ENTER key the screen below will be displayed

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 55

APPENDIX 4 30008

188311 851193

544

By touching and highlighting in this case 18 followed by the ENTER key A small box allowing the entry of two digits will appear Enter the desired time required using the numbered keys followed by ENTER key Your unit is now set to operate on BSTBWT

Touch the ESC key three times to return back to the Status screen

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 56

STOKVIS ENERGY SYSTEMS 96R WALTON ROAD EAST MOLESEY SURREY KT8 0DL TEL 020 8783 3050 08707 707 747 FAX 020 8783 3051 08707 707 767 E-MAIL infostokvisboilerscom WEBSITE wwwstokvisboilerscom

JULY 1999

Page 43: ECONOAIR 3000S SERIES AIR HANDLING UNIT DIRECT FIREDstokvisboilers.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/EconoAir... · 2019-05-10 · ECONOAIR 3000S SERIES AIR HANDLING UNIT DIRECT FIRED

9 RECOMMENDED SPARES 3000S

For two years operation it is recommended that the following items should be held in stock

ITEM DESCRIPTION PART NO QUANTITY i

1 INDICATOR BULBS W1121 1 PACK

2 SPARK PLUG 023739 1 I

3 UVDETECTOR QRA10C 1 I

4 ROOM SENSOR DRT2453 1

5 DUCT SENSOR DDT1701 1

All replacement parts can be obtained from RS STOKVIS Ltd by quoting the air handler serial number the part number and description

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 39

APPENDIX 1 30005

SOUNDNESS TESTING THE FUEL GAS PIPEWORK

This procedure should only be carried out by personnel familiar with the ECONO-AIR 3000S Series Air handler

The pressure test points and all valves are identified on the Process and Instrumentation Diagram for the air handler included in Section 1 of this n1anual

Isolate the air handler electric supply at the main control panel and lock off Close the manual isolation valves MV1 MV6 and PV3 Ensure the supply pressure is available on the upstream side of MV1

A11 TESTING THE UPSTREAM PIPEWORKAND BURNER CONTROLS 1 Connect a 60 mbar manometer to the pressure test nipple A Monitor the

pressure for two minutes Any rise in pressure indicates that valve MV1 is leaking and must be replaced Remove pressure test points Band F

2 Open MV1 to pressurise the pipework on both the main gas and pilot line to the first block valve

3 Close MV1 Allow one minute for the temperature to stabilise and then test the system for 2 minutes and watch for a drop in the pipework pressure If the pressure falls open valve MV1 and test the pipework connections and valves from MV1 to MV3 and MV1 to PV2 for leaks with a proprietary leak detector fluid or spray Turn off MV1 seal any leaks and re-test

4 If no extemalleaks are found either the pilot block valve PV1 or either the first main gas block valve MV3 is letting by

5 To test this seal pressure test point A and fit a manometer to pressure test point B Leave for two minutes with MV1 open A rise in pressure on the manometer confirms a leak on the block valve MV3 Turn off MV1 exchange the valve and re-test from point 2 above

6 Repeat this procedure for the pilot block valve Seal test point B and fit a manometer to pressure test point F Leave for two minutes with MV1 open A rise in pressure on the manometer confirms a leak on the pilot block valve PV2 Turn off MV1 exchange the valve and re-test from point 1 above Seal test point F

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 40

APPENDIX 1 30005

A12 TESTING THE DOWNSTREAM BURNER VALVE 1 Close MV1 and connect pressure test points A and 8 with flexible 6 mm bore

tubing teed into the manometer Remove pressure test point C Open MV1 to pressurise the downstream block valve MV4

2 Close MV1 and leave for one minute for the temperature to stabilise Monitor the pressure for 2 minutes If the pressure falls open valve MV1 and leak test the line between the two block valves MV3 and MV4 with a proprietary leak detector Turn off MV1 seal any leaks and re-test Note Smaller air handlers in the 3000S Series are fitted with multi-functional valves combining the pressure regulator and two block valves in one component The above procedure still applies but if a leak is found on either block valve the whole control should be replaced If no external leaks are found the downstream block valve is letting by

3 To confirm this close MV1 remove the manometer and refit to pressure test point C Connect pressure test points A and 8 with flexible 6mm bore tubing Open MV1 and allow one minute for the temperature to stabilise Monitor the pressure for a further 2 minutes with MV1 still open A rise in pressure confirms that the second block valve MV4 is letting by Turn off MV1 Replace the valve and re-test from 2 above

A13 TESTING THE DOWNSTREAM BURNER PIPEWORK 1 Close MV1 and connect pressure test points A and D with flexible 6 mm bore

tubing teed into the manometer Open MV1 to pressurise the downstream pilot pipework

2 Close MV1 and leave for one minute for the temperature to stabilise Monitor the pressure for 2 minutes If the pressure falls open valve MV1 and leak test the line between the downstream block valve MV4 and the manual block MV6 with a proprietary leak detector fluid or spray If no external leaks are found the manual block valve MV6 is letting by Turn off MV1 seal any leakages and reshytest from 2 above

A14 TESTING THE DOWNSTREAM PILOT PIPEWORK 1 Close MV1 and connect pressure test points A and F with flexible 6mm bore

tubing teed into the manometer Open MV1 to pressurise the downstream pilot pipework

2 Close MV1 and leave for one rninute for the temperature to stabilise Monitor the pressure for 2 minutes If the pressure falls open valve MV1 and leak test the line between the downstream block valve PV2 and the manual block PV3 with a proprietary leak detector fluid or spray If no external leaks are found the manual block valve PV3 is letting by Turn off MV1 seal any leakages and reshytest from 2 above

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 41

APPENDIX 1 30005

A15 TESTING THE BURNER CONNECTIONS 1 Remove the burner access panel as described in Section 84 of this manual

Remove the burner spark igniter Slacken the two retaining bolts holding the burner to the burner support straps and unbolt the burner supply endplate from the burner casting and mixing plates

2 Connect pressure test points A and 0 with flexible 6mm bore tubing teed into the manometer Open MV1 and MV6 to pressurise the burner pipework Leak test the main gas burner pipework and connections with proprietary leak detector fluid Turn off MV6 Seal any leakages and re-test

3 Connect pressure test points A and F with flexible 6 mm bore tubing teed into the manometer Open MV1 and PV3 to pressurise the pilot burner pipework Leak test the pilot gas burner pipework and connections with proprietary leak detector fluid Turn off PV3 Seal any leakages and re-test

4 Turn off MV1

5 Replace the spark igniter and profile division plate

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 42

APPENDIX 2 30005

START SEQUENCE

The burner start sequence is controlled by the Landis and Gyr burner management unit The timings are pre-set and comply with 885885 This unit must NOT be tampered with

A brief description of the start-up sequence isshy

The unit checks

1 The NO FLAME signal on the UV flame scanner

Note If the scanner detects a flame at any time other than in the correct operating sequence the flame programmer initiates a lockout

2 The operation of the combustion air proving switch in the NO AIR position

3 The air handler discharge high temperature switch

If the checks are completed the unit starts the combustion air fan and then checks the combustion airflow

Once the airflow is proven the unit checks that the damper control circuit is functioning correctly After the damper microswitch is made to prove the fresh air damper is fully open the sequence allows 30 seconds for the combustion air to purge any combustible gas from the air handler

After completion of the purge the spark ignition system is energised the pilot valve opened and the spark terminated If the pilot flame is not proven by the UV scanner the system will initiate a LOCKOUT

If the flame is proven the main gas valves are opened the pilot extinguished and the main burner flame proven

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 43

i

APPENDIX 2 30008

The following flow chart shows the complete start sequence including the lighting of the various indicating lamps

MANUAL STATUS LIGHT POWER ON

POWER ON

I INITIATE START BY TIME

SETTING ON CONTROLLER

I CHECK NO FLAME

VISIBLE

PROVEj FAIL LOCKOUT

I CHECK RELAY R4 NC

POSITION

PROVE FAIL NO START

I CHECK AIR PRESSURE SWITCH NC POSITION

PROVE FAIL NO START

I CHECK RELAY R1 NC

POSITION

PROVE j

FAIL NO START

I START COMBUSTION

AIR BLOWER

I CHECK AIR PRESSURE SWITCH NO POSITION

PROVE I

FAIL NO START

I STATUS LIGHT FAN ON

I ENERGISE RELAY R1

I

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 44

I

I

APPENDIX 2 30008

I CHECK OVERHEAT LIMIT

CONTROL R5

PROVE I

FAIL I I

CHECK 541412 LOOP CLOSED ON

LANDIS ampGYR CIRCUIT

PROVE I

FAIL I I

COMBUSTION AIR PURGE PERIOD

30 SECONDS

I

NO START

NO START

CANCEL NO FLAME CHECK CIRCUIT

I

ENERGISE SPARK

I TIMED PERIOD 25 SECONDS

I ENERGISE PILOT GAS

VALVE

I TIMED PERIOD 25 SECONDS

I TERMINATE SPARK

I INTERROGATE UV FLAME SCANNER

PROVE I

FAIL I I

TIMED PERIOD 10 SECONDS

I

LOCKOUT

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 45

I

I

APPENDIX 2 3000S

I ENERGISE MAIN GAS

VALVES

I

STATUS LIGHT BURNER ON

I TIMED PERIOD

5 SECONDS

I DE-ENERGISE PILOT

GAS VALVES

CONTINUOUS FROM PILOT

I INTERROGATE UV FLAME SCANNER

PROVE I

FAIL I I

LOCKOUT I

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 46

APPENDIX 3 30005

Please see copy of Standard Service Sheet

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 47

APPENDIX 4 30005

A41 TIME OUT SCREEN

This is the standard screen displayed when the touch screen is not in use The back light is off to save energy_ To access the STATUS screen touch the ENTER key and the following screen is displayed

[]][I][]rn[IJOO[][IJOO[] EJ~E11 I[]I ~ middot I

NOTE

The Touch Screen operates using the heat produced by the touch of a finger and therefore only LIGHT pressure is required

Excessive pressure can damage the Touch Screen

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 48

APPENDIX 4 30008

A42 STATUS SCREEN

On the typical STATUS screen the illustrated information detailed is as follows

19 36 Fan Brn

RS OS

100 Fst_~_ Lck _ _ Xst Gas~o ~ I

RS Indicates the current room temperature

OS ~( t~~ the current duct discharge temperature

Fan Indicates the current status of the fan by showing the arrow and the fan blades for ON and OFF is shown by the arrow and fan blades being removed

Brn Indicates the current status of the burner with the black flames indicating the burner to be ON and vice versa

Lck LOCKOUT - This indicates a flame failure when highlighted during normal or start-up operation

Xst EXCESS TEMPERATURE SWITCH - This indicates the unit has reached the trip limit on the over heat stat when highlighted during operation

Indicates the current position of the gas modulating valve during normal Gas

operation (0-100)

Indicates whether the Frost stat is energised and the unit is running on frost Fst

override

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 49

APPENDIX 4 30008

A43 CHANGING SETTINGS

It is possible to change the settings for the time of operation and the required temperature set points The following details the steps required

A44 ENTERING THE SECURITY CODE

From the STATUS screen touch the return key and the screen below will be displayed

Type the HIGH LEVEL security code (4321) If you make a mistake use the BACK SPACE key to delete any incorrect number(s) Touch the ENTER key when the code is correct

If the security code is incorrect the screen above will be displayed then try again If after several attempts you can not gain access please contact RS STOKVIS Ltd for further information

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 50

APPENDIX 4 30008

When the code is entered correctly the MAIN MENU is displayed as detailed below

~ STATUS SET VALUES~ ~ TIVIE CLOCK [) [) [) [) [)

The MAIN MENU screen shows the three menu items available The title for each menu item can be changed to suit the end user Please notify RS STOKVIS Ltd prior to commissioning should these parameters require special amendments

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 51

APPENDIX 4 30008

A45 CHANGING OR SETTING A TIME SCHEDULE

From the main menu screen select the TIME CLOCK page by running finger across screen symbol and touch the ENTER key the screen below will be displayed

On the following screen highlight the TS1 symbol and touch the ENTER key

The current time schedule will now be displayed as shown below The display will automatically default to the current day (1 =Monday 2 =Tuesday etc) In this case day 5 (Friday) the four schedule switching times refer to that day

IAC6BBB1BHIS1

mm0CIl bull mID 17BB 17BB 17HB

Iillleschedule

To modify a time select it by highlighting and touch the ENTER key and the following screen is displayed

To amend the appropriate onoff time as shown on the screen below The arrows to the right of the time are for altering the hours and the arrows on the left for the minutes

Once you have set the time use the ESCape key to exit back to the time schedule screen and choose another day by touching the required number Another time may now be modified as before

IAC6BBB1BHIS1

H8BH

I i eschedule

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 52

APPENDIX 4 30008

Use the ESCape key to exit back to the MAIN MENU screen

~ STATUS ~ SET VALUES

TIME CLOCK []~ [] [] [] []

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 53

APPENDIX 4 30005

A46 CHANGING SET VALUES

From the main menu screen select the SET VALUES page by highlight in the normal way and touch the ENTER key

The following screen is displayed

36 19 18III III IIIHsv Rsv Llv

To change the RSV highlight it in the normal way and touch the ENTER key and the screen below will now be shown

IAC6RRR1RR40 T I

0 19 (Y)l RSV

ROOM SET VALUE

The above screen shows the parameters that can be changed The values to the far left are the limitations of set point (OC) Change the set point by using the UP and DOWN ARROWS on the left of the screen or touch the set value itself followed by the ENTER key to select the set value and set it directly using the numeric keyboard All values can be changed in this way

Use the ESCape key twice to exit back to the MAIN MENU screen

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 54

APPENDIX 4 30005

A47 COMMISSIONING AND SERVICING BURNER CHECKS

Select the SET VALUES screen from the MAIN MENU screen and adjust the high lirrlit set point to 55degC to drive the burner to high fire

IAC6HHH1HH60 ~T I

0 19 (Y)

HSV

HIGH SET VALUE ~

Ensure the set value is returned to 36degC once the appropriate checks and adjustments as described in Section 43 of this manual have been completed Return to the SET VALUES screen and select the low limit value to adjust the low fire setting

Reduce the low limit value to OdegC to drive the gas valve to low fire and complete the appropriate checks and adjustments as described in Section 43 of this manual and ensure the set value is returned to the original value

A48 GMT ltgt BST CHANGEOVER DAYLIGHT SAVINGS

To change your unit to British Summer TimelWinter Time the following system screen must be highlighted by touching the Iamp1 button twice

By touching the clock symbol in the top left hand corner followed by the ENTER key the screen below will be displayed

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 55

APPENDIX 4 30008

188311 851193

544

By touching and highlighting in this case 18 followed by the ENTER key A small box allowing the entry of two digits will appear Enter the desired time required using the numbered keys followed by ENTER key Your unit is now set to operate on BSTBWT

Touch the ESC key three times to return back to the Status screen

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 56

STOKVIS ENERGY SYSTEMS 96R WALTON ROAD EAST MOLESEY SURREY KT8 0DL TEL 020 8783 3050 08707 707 747 FAX 020 8783 3051 08707 707 767 E-MAIL infostokvisboilerscom WEBSITE wwwstokvisboilerscom

JULY 1999

Page 44: ECONOAIR 3000S SERIES AIR HANDLING UNIT DIRECT FIREDstokvisboilers.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/EconoAir... · 2019-05-10 · ECONOAIR 3000S SERIES AIR HANDLING UNIT DIRECT FIRED

APPENDIX 1 30005

SOUNDNESS TESTING THE FUEL GAS PIPEWORK

This procedure should only be carried out by personnel familiar with the ECONO-AIR 3000S Series Air handler

The pressure test points and all valves are identified on the Process and Instrumentation Diagram for the air handler included in Section 1 of this n1anual

Isolate the air handler electric supply at the main control panel and lock off Close the manual isolation valves MV1 MV6 and PV3 Ensure the supply pressure is available on the upstream side of MV1

A11 TESTING THE UPSTREAM PIPEWORKAND BURNER CONTROLS 1 Connect a 60 mbar manometer to the pressure test nipple A Monitor the

pressure for two minutes Any rise in pressure indicates that valve MV1 is leaking and must be replaced Remove pressure test points Band F

2 Open MV1 to pressurise the pipework on both the main gas and pilot line to the first block valve

3 Close MV1 Allow one minute for the temperature to stabilise and then test the system for 2 minutes and watch for a drop in the pipework pressure If the pressure falls open valve MV1 and test the pipework connections and valves from MV1 to MV3 and MV1 to PV2 for leaks with a proprietary leak detector fluid or spray Turn off MV1 seal any leaks and re-test

4 If no extemalleaks are found either the pilot block valve PV1 or either the first main gas block valve MV3 is letting by

5 To test this seal pressure test point A and fit a manometer to pressure test point B Leave for two minutes with MV1 open A rise in pressure on the manometer confirms a leak on the block valve MV3 Turn off MV1 exchange the valve and re-test from point 2 above

6 Repeat this procedure for the pilot block valve Seal test point B and fit a manometer to pressure test point F Leave for two minutes with MV1 open A rise in pressure on the manometer confirms a leak on the pilot block valve PV2 Turn off MV1 exchange the valve and re-test from point 1 above Seal test point F

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 40

APPENDIX 1 30005

A12 TESTING THE DOWNSTREAM BURNER VALVE 1 Close MV1 and connect pressure test points A and 8 with flexible 6 mm bore

tubing teed into the manometer Remove pressure test point C Open MV1 to pressurise the downstream block valve MV4

2 Close MV1 and leave for one minute for the temperature to stabilise Monitor the pressure for 2 minutes If the pressure falls open valve MV1 and leak test the line between the two block valves MV3 and MV4 with a proprietary leak detector Turn off MV1 seal any leaks and re-test Note Smaller air handlers in the 3000S Series are fitted with multi-functional valves combining the pressure regulator and two block valves in one component The above procedure still applies but if a leak is found on either block valve the whole control should be replaced If no external leaks are found the downstream block valve is letting by

3 To confirm this close MV1 remove the manometer and refit to pressure test point C Connect pressure test points A and 8 with flexible 6mm bore tubing Open MV1 and allow one minute for the temperature to stabilise Monitor the pressure for a further 2 minutes with MV1 still open A rise in pressure confirms that the second block valve MV4 is letting by Turn off MV1 Replace the valve and re-test from 2 above

A13 TESTING THE DOWNSTREAM BURNER PIPEWORK 1 Close MV1 and connect pressure test points A and D with flexible 6 mm bore

tubing teed into the manometer Open MV1 to pressurise the downstream pilot pipework

2 Close MV1 and leave for one minute for the temperature to stabilise Monitor the pressure for 2 minutes If the pressure falls open valve MV1 and leak test the line between the downstream block valve MV4 and the manual block MV6 with a proprietary leak detector fluid or spray If no external leaks are found the manual block valve MV6 is letting by Turn off MV1 seal any leakages and reshytest from 2 above

A14 TESTING THE DOWNSTREAM PILOT PIPEWORK 1 Close MV1 and connect pressure test points A and F with flexible 6mm bore

tubing teed into the manometer Open MV1 to pressurise the downstream pilot pipework

2 Close MV1 and leave for one rninute for the temperature to stabilise Monitor the pressure for 2 minutes If the pressure falls open valve MV1 and leak test the line between the downstream block valve PV2 and the manual block PV3 with a proprietary leak detector fluid or spray If no external leaks are found the manual block valve PV3 is letting by Turn off MV1 seal any leakages and reshytest from 2 above

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 41

APPENDIX 1 30005

A15 TESTING THE BURNER CONNECTIONS 1 Remove the burner access panel as described in Section 84 of this manual

Remove the burner spark igniter Slacken the two retaining bolts holding the burner to the burner support straps and unbolt the burner supply endplate from the burner casting and mixing plates

2 Connect pressure test points A and 0 with flexible 6mm bore tubing teed into the manometer Open MV1 and MV6 to pressurise the burner pipework Leak test the main gas burner pipework and connections with proprietary leak detector fluid Turn off MV6 Seal any leakages and re-test

3 Connect pressure test points A and F with flexible 6 mm bore tubing teed into the manometer Open MV1 and PV3 to pressurise the pilot burner pipework Leak test the pilot gas burner pipework and connections with proprietary leak detector fluid Turn off PV3 Seal any leakages and re-test

4 Turn off MV1

5 Replace the spark igniter and profile division plate

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 42

APPENDIX 2 30005

START SEQUENCE

The burner start sequence is controlled by the Landis and Gyr burner management unit The timings are pre-set and comply with 885885 This unit must NOT be tampered with

A brief description of the start-up sequence isshy

The unit checks

1 The NO FLAME signal on the UV flame scanner

Note If the scanner detects a flame at any time other than in the correct operating sequence the flame programmer initiates a lockout

2 The operation of the combustion air proving switch in the NO AIR position

3 The air handler discharge high temperature switch

If the checks are completed the unit starts the combustion air fan and then checks the combustion airflow

Once the airflow is proven the unit checks that the damper control circuit is functioning correctly After the damper microswitch is made to prove the fresh air damper is fully open the sequence allows 30 seconds for the combustion air to purge any combustible gas from the air handler

After completion of the purge the spark ignition system is energised the pilot valve opened and the spark terminated If the pilot flame is not proven by the UV scanner the system will initiate a LOCKOUT

If the flame is proven the main gas valves are opened the pilot extinguished and the main burner flame proven

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 43

i

APPENDIX 2 30008

The following flow chart shows the complete start sequence including the lighting of the various indicating lamps

MANUAL STATUS LIGHT POWER ON

POWER ON

I INITIATE START BY TIME

SETTING ON CONTROLLER

I CHECK NO FLAME

VISIBLE

PROVEj FAIL LOCKOUT

I CHECK RELAY R4 NC

POSITION

PROVE FAIL NO START

I CHECK AIR PRESSURE SWITCH NC POSITION

PROVE FAIL NO START

I CHECK RELAY R1 NC

POSITION

PROVE j

FAIL NO START

I START COMBUSTION

AIR BLOWER

I CHECK AIR PRESSURE SWITCH NO POSITION

PROVE I

FAIL NO START

I STATUS LIGHT FAN ON

I ENERGISE RELAY R1

I

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 44

I

I

APPENDIX 2 30008

I CHECK OVERHEAT LIMIT

CONTROL R5

PROVE I

FAIL I I

CHECK 541412 LOOP CLOSED ON

LANDIS ampGYR CIRCUIT

PROVE I

FAIL I I

COMBUSTION AIR PURGE PERIOD

30 SECONDS

I

NO START

NO START

CANCEL NO FLAME CHECK CIRCUIT

I

ENERGISE SPARK

I TIMED PERIOD 25 SECONDS

I ENERGISE PILOT GAS

VALVE

I TIMED PERIOD 25 SECONDS

I TERMINATE SPARK

I INTERROGATE UV FLAME SCANNER

PROVE I

FAIL I I

TIMED PERIOD 10 SECONDS

I

LOCKOUT

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 45

I

I

APPENDIX 2 3000S

I ENERGISE MAIN GAS

VALVES

I

STATUS LIGHT BURNER ON

I TIMED PERIOD

5 SECONDS

I DE-ENERGISE PILOT

GAS VALVES

CONTINUOUS FROM PILOT

I INTERROGATE UV FLAME SCANNER

PROVE I

FAIL I I

LOCKOUT I

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 46

APPENDIX 3 30005

Please see copy of Standard Service Sheet

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 47

APPENDIX 4 30005

A41 TIME OUT SCREEN

This is the standard screen displayed when the touch screen is not in use The back light is off to save energy_ To access the STATUS screen touch the ENTER key and the following screen is displayed

[]][I][]rn[IJOO[][IJOO[] EJ~E11 I[]I ~ middot I

NOTE

The Touch Screen operates using the heat produced by the touch of a finger and therefore only LIGHT pressure is required

Excessive pressure can damage the Touch Screen

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 48

APPENDIX 4 30008

A42 STATUS SCREEN

On the typical STATUS screen the illustrated information detailed is as follows

19 36 Fan Brn

RS OS

100 Fst_~_ Lck _ _ Xst Gas~o ~ I

RS Indicates the current room temperature

OS ~( t~~ the current duct discharge temperature

Fan Indicates the current status of the fan by showing the arrow and the fan blades for ON and OFF is shown by the arrow and fan blades being removed

Brn Indicates the current status of the burner with the black flames indicating the burner to be ON and vice versa

Lck LOCKOUT - This indicates a flame failure when highlighted during normal or start-up operation

Xst EXCESS TEMPERATURE SWITCH - This indicates the unit has reached the trip limit on the over heat stat when highlighted during operation

Indicates the current position of the gas modulating valve during normal Gas

operation (0-100)

Indicates whether the Frost stat is energised and the unit is running on frost Fst

override

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 49

APPENDIX 4 30008

A43 CHANGING SETTINGS

It is possible to change the settings for the time of operation and the required temperature set points The following details the steps required

A44 ENTERING THE SECURITY CODE

From the STATUS screen touch the return key and the screen below will be displayed

Type the HIGH LEVEL security code (4321) If you make a mistake use the BACK SPACE key to delete any incorrect number(s) Touch the ENTER key when the code is correct

If the security code is incorrect the screen above will be displayed then try again If after several attempts you can not gain access please contact RS STOKVIS Ltd for further information

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 50

APPENDIX 4 30008

When the code is entered correctly the MAIN MENU is displayed as detailed below

~ STATUS SET VALUES~ ~ TIVIE CLOCK [) [) [) [) [)

The MAIN MENU screen shows the three menu items available The title for each menu item can be changed to suit the end user Please notify RS STOKVIS Ltd prior to commissioning should these parameters require special amendments

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 51

APPENDIX 4 30008

A45 CHANGING OR SETTING A TIME SCHEDULE

From the main menu screen select the TIME CLOCK page by running finger across screen symbol and touch the ENTER key the screen below will be displayed

On the following screen highlight the TS1 symbol and touch the ENTER key

The current time schedule will now be displayed as shown below The display will automatically default to the current day (1 =Monday 2 =Tuesday etc) In this case day 5 (Friday) the four schedule switching times refer to that day

IAC6BBB1BHIS1

mm0CIl bull mID 17BB 17BB 17HB

Iillleschedule

To modify a time select it by highlighting and touch the ENTER key and the following screen is displayed

To amend the appropriate onoff time as shown on the screen below The arrows to the right of the time are for altering the hours and the arrows on the left for the minutes

Once you have set the time use the ESCape key to exit back to the time schedule screen and choose another day by touching the required number Another time may now be modified as before

IAC6BBB1BHIS1

H8BH

I i eschedule

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 52

APPENDIX 4 30008

Use the ESCape key to exit back to the MAIN MENU screen

~ STATUS ~ SET VALUES

TIME CLOCK []~ [] [] [] []

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 53

APPENDIX 4 30005

A46 CHANGING SET VALUES

From the main menu screen select the SET VALUES page by highlight in the normal way and touch the ENTER key

The following screen is displayed

36 19 18III III IIIHsv Rsv Llv

To change the RSV highlight it in the normal way and touch the ENTER key and the screen below will now be shown

IAC6RRR1RR40 T I

0 19 (Y)l RSV

ROOM SET VALUE

The above screen shows the parameters that can be changed The values to the far left are the limitations of set point (OC) Change the set point by using the UP and DOWN ARROWS on the left of the screen or touch the set value itself followed by the ENTER key to select the set value and set it directly using the numeric keyboard All values can be changed in this way

Use the ESCape key twice to exit back to the MAIN MENU screen

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 54

APPENDIX 4 30005

A47 COMMISSIONING AND SERVICING BURNER CHECKS

Select the SET VALUES screen from the MAIN MENU screen and adjust the high lirrlit set point to 55degC to drive the burner to high fire

IAC6HHH1HH60 ~T I

0 19 (Y)

HSV

HIGH SET VALUE ~

Ensure the set value is returned to 36degC once the appropriate checks and adjustments as described in Section 43 of this manual have been completed Return to the SET VALUES screen and select the low limit value to adjust the low fire setting

Reduce the low limit value to OdegC to drive the gas valve to low fire and complete the appropriate checks and adjustments as described in Section 43 of this manual and ensure the set value is returned to the original value

A48 GMT ltgt BST CHANGEOVER DAYLIGHT SAVINGS

To change your unit to British Summer TimelWinter Time the following system screen must be highlighted by touching the Iamp1 button twice

By touching the clock symbol in the top left hand corner followed by the ENTER key the screen below will be displayed

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 55

APPENDIX 4 30008

188311 851193

544

By touching and highlighting in this case 18 followed by the ENTER key A small box allowing the entry of two digits will appear Enter the desired time required using the numbered keys followed by ENTER key Your unit is now set to operate on BSTBWT

Touch the ESC key three times to return back to the Status screen

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 56

STOKVIS ENERGY SYSTEMS 96R WALTON ROAD EAST MOLESEY SURREY KT8 0DL TEL 020 8783 3050 08707 707 747 FAX 020 8783 3051 08707 707 767 E-MAIL infostokvisboilerscom WEBSITE wwwstokvisboilerscom

JULY 1999

Page 45: ECONOAIR 3000S SERIES AIR HANDLING UNIT DIRECT FIREDstokvisboilers.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/EconoAir... · 2019-05-10 · ECONOAIR 3000S SERIES AIR HANDLING UNIT DIRECT FIRED

APPENDIX 1 30005

A12 TESTING THE DOWNSTREAM BURNER VALVE 1 Close MV1 and connect pressure test points A and 8 with flexible 6 mm bore

tubing teed into the manometer Remove pressure test point C Open MV1 to pressurise the downstream block valve MV4

2 Close MV1 and leave for one minute for the temperature to stabilise Monitor the pressure for 2 minutes If the pressure falls open valve MV1 and leak test the line between the two block valves MV3 and MV4 with a proprietary leak detector Turn off MV1 seal any leaks and re-test Note Smaller air handlers in the 3000S Series are fitted with multi-functional valves combining the pressure regulator and two block valves in one component The above procedure still applies but if a leak is found on either block valve the whole control should be replaced If no external leaks are found the downstream block valve is letting by

3 To confirm this close MV1 remove the manometer and refit to pressure test point C Connect pressure test points A and 8 with flexible 6mm bore tubing Open MV1 and allow one minute for the temperature to stabilise Monitor the pressure for a further 2 minutes with MV1 still open A rise in pressure confirms that the second block valve MV4 is letting by Turn off MV1 Replace the valve and re-test from 2 above

A13 TESTING THE DOWNSTREAM BURNER PIPEWORK 1 Close MV1 and connect pressure test points A and D with flexible 6 mm bore

tubing teed into the manometer Open MV1 to pressurise the downstream pilot pipework

2 Close MV1 and leave for one minute for the temperature to stabilise Monitor the pressure for 2 minutes If the pressure falls open valve MV1 and leak test the line between the downstream block valve MV4 and the manual block MV6 with a proprietary leak detector fluid or spray If no external leaks are found the manual block valve MV6 is letting by Turn off MV1 seal any leakages and reshytest from 2 above

A14 TESTING THE DOWNSTREAM PILOT PIPEWORK 1 Close MV1 and connect pressure test points A and F with flexible 6mm bore

tubing teed into the manometer Open MV1 to pressurise the downstream pilot pipework

2 Close MV1 and leave for one rninute for the temperature to stabilise Monitor the pressure for 2 minutes If the pressure falls open valve MV1 and leak test the line between the downstream block valve PV2 and the manual block PV3 with a proprietary leak detector fluid or spray If no external leaks are found the manual block valve PV3 is letting by Turn off MV1 seal any leakages and reshytest from 2 above

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 41

APPENDIX 1 30005

A15 TESTING THE BURNER CONNECTIONS 1 Remove the burner access panel as described in Section 84 of this manual

Remove the burner spark igniter Slacken the two retaining bolts holding the burner to the burner support straps and unbolt the burner supply endplate from the burner casting and mixing plates

2 Connect pressure test points A and 0 with flexible 6mm bore tubing teed into the manometer Open MV1 and MV6 to pressurise the burner pipework Leak test the main gas burner pipework and connections with proprietary leak detector fluid Turn off MV6 Seal any leakages and re-test

3 Connect pressure test points A and F with flexible 6 mm bore tubing teed into the manometer Open MV1 and PV3 to pressurise the pilot burner pipework Leak test the pilot gas burner pipework and connections with proprietary leak detector fluid Turn off PV3 Seal any leakages and re-test

4 Turn off MV1

5 Replace the spark igniter and profile division plate

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 42

APPENDIX 2 30005

START SEQUENCE

The burner start sequence is controlled by the Landis and Gyr burner management unit The timings are pre-set and comply with 885885 This unit must NOT be tampered with

A brief description of the start-up sequence isshy

The unit checks

1 The NO FLAME signal on the UV flame scanner

Note If the scanner detects a flame at any time other than in the correct operating sequence the flame programmer initiates a lockout

2 The operation of the combustion air proving switch in the NO AIR position

3 The air handler discharge high temperature switch

If the checks are completed the unit starts the combustion air fan and then checks the combustion airflow

Once the airflow is proven the unit checks that the damper control circuit is functioning correctly After the damper microswitch is made to prove the fresh air damper is fully open the sequence allows 30 seconds for the combustion air to purge any combustible gas from the air handler

After completion of the purge the spark ignition system is energised the pilot valve opened and the spark terminated If the pilot flame is not proven by the UV scanner the system will initiate a LOCKOUT

If the flame is proven the main gas valves are opened the pilot extinguished and the main burner flame proven

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 43

i

APPENDIX 2 30008

The following flow chart shows the complete start sequence including the lighting of the various indicating lamps

MANUAL STATUS LIGHT POWER ON

POWER ON

I INITIATE START BY TIME

SETTING ON CONTROLLER

I CHECK NO FLAME

VISIBLE

PROVEj FAIL LOCKOUT

I CHECK RELAY R4 NC

POSITION

PROVE FAIL NO START

I CHECK AIR PRESSURE SWITCH NC POSITION

PROVE FAIL NO START

I CHECK RELAY R1 NC

POSITION

PROVE j

FAIL NO START

I START COMBUSTION

AIR BLOWER

I CHECK AIR PRESSURE SWITCH NO POSITION

PROVE I

FAIL NO START

I STATUS LIGHT FAN ON

I ENERGISE RELAY R1

I

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 44

I

I

APPENDIX 2 30008

I CHECK OVERHEAT LIMIT

CONTROL R5

PROVE I

FAIL I I

CHECK 541412 LOOP CLOSED ON

LANDIS ampGYR CIRCUIT

PROVE I

FAIL I I

COMBUSTION AIR PURGE PERIOD

30 SECONDS

I

NO START

NO START

CANCEL NO FLAME CHECK CIRCUIT

I

ENERGISE SPARK

I TIMED PERIOD 25 SECONDS

I ENERGISE PILOT GAS

VALVE

I TIMED PERIOD 25 SECONDS

I TERMINATE SPARK

I INTERROGATE UV FLAME SCANNER

PROVE I

FAIL I I

TIMED PERIOD 10 SECONDS

I

LOCKOUT

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 45

I

I

APPENDIX 2 3000S

I ENERGISE MAIN GAS

VALVES

I

STATUS LIGHT BURNER ON

I TIMED PERIOD

5 SECONDS

I DE-ENERGISE PILOT

GAS VALVES

CONTINUOUS FROM PILOT

I INTERROGATE UV FLAME SCANNER

PROVE I

FAIL I I

LOCKOUT I

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 46

APPENDIX 3 30005

Please see copy of Standard Service Sheet

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 47

APPENDIX 4 30005

A41 TIME OUT SCREEN

This is the standard screen displayed when the touch screen is not in use The back light is off to save energy_ To access the STATUS screen touch the ENTER key and the following screen is displayed

[]][I][]rn[IJOO[][IJOO[] EJ~E11 I[]I ~ middot I

NOTE

The Touch Screen operates using the heat produced by the touch of a finger and therefore only LIGHT pressure is required

Excessive pressure can damage the Touch Screen

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 48

APPENDIX 4 30008

A42 STATUS SCREEN

On the typical STATUS screen the illustrated information detailed is as follows

19 36 Fan Brn

RS OS

100 Fst_~_ Lck _ _ Xst Gas~o ~ I

RS Indicates the current room temperature

OS ~( t~~ the current duct discharge temperature

Fan Indicates the current status of the fan by showing the arrow and the fan blades for ON and OFF is shown by the arrow and fan blades being removed

Brn Indicates the current status of the burner with the black flames indicating the burner to be ON and vice versa

Lck LOCKOUT - This indicates a flame failure when highlighted during normal or start-up operation

Xst EXCESS TEMPERATURE SWITCH - This indicates the unit has reached the trip limit on the over heat stat when highlighted during operation

Indicates the current position of the gas modulating valve during normal Gas

operation (0-100)

Indicates whether the Frost stat is energised and the unit is running on frost Fst

override

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 49

APPENDIX 4 30008

A43 CHANGING SETTINGS

It is possible to change the settings for the time of operation and the required temperature set points The following details the steps required

A44 ENTERING THE SECURITY CODE

From the STATUS screen touch the return key and the screen below will be displayed

Type the HIGH LEVEL security code (4321) If you make a mistake use the BACK SPACE key to delete any incorrect number(s) Touch the ENTER key when the code is correct

If the security code is incorrect the screen above will be displayed then try again If after several attempts you can not gain access please contact RS STOKVIS Ltd for further information

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 50

APPENDIX 4 30008

When the code is entered correctly the MAIN MENU is displayed as detailed below

~ STATUS SET VALUES~ ~ TIVIE CLOCK [) [) [) [) [)

The MAIN MENU screen shows the three menu items available The title for each menu item can be changed to suit the end user Please notify RS STOKVIS Ltd prior to commissioning should these parameters require special amendments

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 51

APPENDIX 4 30008

A45 CHANGING OR SETTING A TIME SCHEDULE

From the main menu screen select the TIME CLOCK page by running finger across screen symbol and touch the ENTER key the screen below will be displayed

On the following screen highlight the TS1 symbol and touch the ENTER key

The current time schedule will now be displayed as shown below The display will automatically default to the current day (1 =Monday 2 =Tuesday etc) In this case day 5 (Friday) the four schedule switching times refer to that day

IAC6BBB1BHIS1

mm0CIl bull mID 17BB 17BB 17HB

Iillleschedule

To modify a time select it by highlighting and touch the ENTER key and the following screen is displayed

To amend the appropriate onoff time as shown on the screen below The arrows to the right of the time are for altering the hours and the arrows on the left for the minutes

Once you have set the time use the ESCape key to exit back to the time schedule screen and choose another day by touching the required number Another time may now be modified as before

IAC6BBB1BHIS1

H8BH

I i eschedule

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 52

APPENDIX 4 30008

Use the ESCape key to exit back to the MAIN MENU screen

~ STATUS ~ SET VALUES

TIME CLOCK []~ [] [] [] []

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 53

APPENDIX 4 30005

A46 CHANGING SET VALUES

From the main menu screen select the SET VALUES page by highlight in the normal way and touch the ENTER key

The following screen is displayed

36 19 18III III IIIHsv Rsv Llv

To change the RSV highlight it in the normal way and touch the ENTER key and the screen below will now be shown

IAC6RRR1RR40 T I

0 19 (Y)l RSV

ROOM SET VALUE

The above screen shows the parameters that can be changed The values to the far left are the limitations of set point (OC) Change the set point by using the UP and DOWN ARROWS on the left of the screen or touch the set value itself followed by the ENTER key to select the set value and set it directly using the numeric keyboard All values can be changed in this way

Use the ESCape key twice to exit back to the MAIN MENU screen

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 54

APPENDIX 4 30005

A47 COMMISSIONING AND SERVICING BURNER CHECKS

Select the SET VALUES screen from the MAIN MENU screen and adjust the high lirrlit set point to 55degC to drive the burner to high fire

IAC6HHH1HH60 ~T I

0 19 (Y)

HSV

HIGH SET VALUE ~

Ensure the set value is returned to 36degC once the appropriate checks and adjustments as described in Section 43 of this manual have been completed Return to the SET VALUES screen and select the low limit value to adjust the low fire setting

Reduce the low limit value to OdegC to drive the gas valve to low fire and complete the appropriate checks and adjustments as described in Section 43 of this manual and ensure the set value is returned to the original value

A48 GMT ltgt BST CHANGEOVER DAYLIGHT SAVINGS

To change your unit to British Summer TimelWinter Time the following system screen must be highlighted by touching the Iamp1 button twice

By touching the clock symbol in the top left hand corner followed by the ENTER key the screen below will be displayed

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 55

APPENDIX 4 30008

188311 851193

544

By touching and highlighting in this case 18 followed by the ENTER key A small box allowing the entry of two digits will appear Enter the desired time required using the numbered keys followed by ENTER key Your unit is now set to operate on BSTBWT

Touch the ESC key three times to return back to the Status screen

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 56

STOKVIS ENERGY SYSTEMS 96R WALTON ROAD EAST MOLESEY SURREY KT8 0DL TEL 020 8783 3050 08707 707 747 FAX 020 8783 3051 08707 707 767 E-MAIL infostokvisboilerscom WEBSITE wwwstokvisboilerscom

JULY 1999

Page 46: ECONOAIR 3000S SERIES AIR HANDLING UNIT DIRECT FIREDstokvisboilers.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/EconoAir... · 2019-05-10 · ECONOAIR 3000S SERIES AIR HANDLING UNIT DIRECT FIRED

APPENDIX 1 30005

A15 TESTING THE BURNER CONNECTIONS 1 Remove the burner access panel as described in Section 84 of this manual

Remove the burner spark igniter Slacken the two retaining bolts holding the burner to the burner support straps and unbolt the burner supply endplate from the burner casting and mixing plates

2 Connect pressure test points A and 0 with flexible 6mm bore tubing teed into the manometer Open MV1 and MV6 to pressurise the burner pipework Leak test the main gas burner pipework and connections with proprietary leak detector fluid Turn off MV6 Seal any leakages and re-test

3 Connect pressure test points A and F with flexible 6 mm bore tubing teed into the manometer Open MV1 and PV3 to pressurise the pilot burner pipework Leak test the pilot gas burner pipework and connections with proprietary leak detector fluid Turn off PV3 Seal any leakages and re-test

4 Turn off MV1

5 Replace the spark igniter and profile division plate

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 42

APPENDIX 2 30005

START SEQUENCE

The burner start sequence is controlled by the Landis and Gyr burner management unit The timings are pre-set and comply with 885885 This unit must NOT be tampered with

A brief description of the start-up sequence isshy

The unit checks

1 The NO FLAME signal on the UV flame scanner

Note If the scanner detects a flame at any time other than in the correct operating sequence the flame programmer initiates a lockout

2 The operation of the combustion air proving switch in the NO AIR position

3 The air handler discharge high temperature switch

If the checks are completed the unit starts the combustion air fan and then checks the combustion airflow

Once the airflow is proven the unit checks that the damper control circuit is functioning correctly After the damper microswitch is made to prove the fresh air damper is fully open the sequence allows 30 seconds for the combustion air to purge any combustible gas from the air handler

After completion of the purge the spark ignition system is energised the pilot valve opened and the spark terminated If the pilot flame is not proven by the UV scanner the system will initiate a LOCKOUT

If the flame is proven the main gas valves are opened the pilot extinguished and the main burner flame proven

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 43

i

APPENDIX 2 30008

The following flow chart shows the complete start sequence including the lighting of the various indicating lamps

MANUAL STATUS LIGHT POWER ON

POWER ON

I INITIATE START BY TIME

SETTING ON CONTROLLER

I CHECK NO FLAME

VISIBLE

PROVEj FAIL LOCKOUT

I CHECK RELAY R4 NC

POSITION

PROVE FAIL NO START

I CHECK AIR PRESSURE SWITCH NC POSITION

PROVE FAIL NO START

I CHECK RELAY R1 NC

POSITION

PROVE j

FAIL NO START

I START COMBUSTION

AIR BLOWER

I CHECK AIR PRESSURE SWITCH NO POSITION

PROVE I

FAIL NO START

I STATUS LIGHT FAN ON

I ENERGISE RELAY R1

I

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 44

I

I

APPENDIX 2 30008

I CHECK OVERHEAT LIMIT

CONTROL R5

PROVE I

FAIL I I

CHECK 541412 LOOP CLOSED ON

LANDIS ampGYR CIRCUIT

PROVE I

FAIL I I

COMBUSTION AIR PURGE PERIOD

30 SECONDS

I

NO START

NO START

CANCEL NO FLAME CHECK CIRCUIT

I

ENERGISE SPARK

I TIMED PERIOD 25 SECONDS

I ENERGISE PILOT GAS

VALVE

I TIMED PERIOD 25 SECONDS

I TERMINATE SPARK

I INTERROGATE UV FLAME SCANNER

PROVE I

FAIL I I

TIMED PERIOD 10 SECONDS

I

LOCKOUT

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 45

I

I

APPENDIX 2 3000S

I ENERGISE MAIN GAS

VALVES

I

STATUS LIGHT BURNER ON

I TIMED PERIOD

5 SECONDS

I DE-ENERGISE PILOT

GAS VALVES

CONTINUOUS FROM PILOT

I INTERROGATE UV FLAME SCANNER

PROVE I

FAIL I I

LOCKOUT I

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 46

APPENDIX 3 30005

Please see copy of Standard Service Sheet

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 47

APPENDIX 4 30005

A41 TIME OUT SCREEN

This is the standard screen displayed when the touch screen is not in use The back light is off to save energy_ To access the STATUS screen touch the ENTER key and the following screen is displayed

[]][I][]rn[IJOO[][IJOO[] EJ~E11 I[]I ~ middot I

NOTE

The Touch Screen operates using the heat produced by the touch of a finger and therefore only LIGHT pressure is required

Excessive pressure can damage the Touch Screen

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 48

APPENDIX 4 30008

A42 STATUS SCREEN

On the typical STATUS screen the illustrated information detailed is as follows

19 36 Fan Brn

RS OS

100 Fst_~_ Lck _ _ Xst Gas~o ~ I

RS Indicates the current room temperature

OS ~( t~~ the current duct discharge temperature

Fan Indicates the current status of the fan by showing the arrow and the fan blades for ON and OFF is shown by the arrow and fan blades being removed

Brn Indicates the current status of the burner with the black flames indicating the burner to be ON and vice versa

Lck LOCKOUT - This indicates a flame failure when highlighted during normal or start-up operation

Xst EXCESS TEMPERATURE SWITCH - This indicates the unit has reached the trip limit on the over heat stat when highlighted during operation

Indicates the current position of the gas modulating valve during normal Gas

operation (0-100)

Indicates whether the Frost stat is energised and the unit is running on frost Fst

override

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 49

APPENDIX 4 30008

A43 CHANGING SETTINGS

It is possible to change the settings for the time of operation and the required temperature set points The following details the steps required

A44 ENTERING THE SECURITY CODE

From the STATUS screen touch the return key and the screen below will be displayed

Type the HIGH LEVEL security code (4321) If you make a mistake use the BACK SPACE key to delete any incorrect number(s) Touch the ENTER key when the code is correct

If the security code is incorrect the screen above will be displayed then try again If after several attempts you can not gain access please contact RS STOKVIS Ltd for further information

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 50

APPENDIX 4 30008

When the code is entered correctly the MAIN MENU is displayed as detailed below

~ STATUS SET VALUES~ ~ TIVIE CLOCK [) [) [) [) [)

The MAIN MENU screen shows the three menu items available The title for each menu item can be changed to suit the end user Please notify RS STOKVIS Ltd prior to commissioning should these parameters require special amendments

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 51

APPENDIX 4 30008

A45 CHANGING OR SETTING A TIME SCHEDULE

From the main menu screen select the TIME CLOCK page by running finger across screen symbol and touch the ENTER key the screen below will be displayed

On the following screen highlight the TS1 symbol and touch the ENTER key

The current time schedule will now be displayed as shown below The display will automatically default to the current day (1 =Monday 2 =Tuesday etc) In this case day 5 (Friday) the four schedule switching times refer to that day

IAC6BBB1BHIS1

mm0CIl bull mID 17BB 17BB 17HB

Iillleschedule

To modify a time select it by highlighting and touch the ENTER key and the following screen is displayed

To amend the appropriate onoff time as shown on the screen below The arrows to the right of the time are for altering the hours and the arrows on the left for the minutes

Once you have set the time use the ESCape key to exit back to the time schedule screen and choose another day by touching the required number Another time may now be modified as before

IAC6BBB1BHIS1

H8BH

I i eschedule

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 52

APPENDIX 4 30008

Use the ESCape key to exit back to the MAIN MENU screen

~ STATUS ~ SET VALUES

TIME CLOCK []~ [] [] [] []

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 53

APPENDIX 4 30005

A46 CHANGING SET VALUES

From the main menu screen select the SET VALUES page by highlight in the normal way and touch the ENTER key

The following screen is displayed

36 19 18III III IIIHsv Rsv Llv

To change the RSV highlight it in the normal way and touch the ENTER key and the screen below will now be shown

IAC6RRR1RR40 T I

0 19 (Y)l RSV

ROOM SET VALUE

The above screen shows the parameters that can be changed The values to the far left are the limitations of set point (OC) Change the set point by using the UP and DOWN ARROWS on the left of the screen or touch the set value itself followed by the ENTER key to select the set value and set it directly using the numeric keyboard All values can be changed in this way

Use the ESCape key twice to exit back to the MAIN MENU screen

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 54

APPENDIX 4 30005

A47 COMMISSIONING AND SERVICING BURNER CHECKS

Select the SET VALUES screen from the MAIN MENU screen and adjust the high lirrlit set point to 55degC to drive the burner to high fire

IAC6HHH1HH60 ~T I

0 19 (Y)

HSV

HIGH SET VALUE ~

Ensure the set value is returned to 36degC once the appropriate checks and adjustments as described in Section 43 of this manual have been completed Return to the SET VALUES screen and select the low limit value to adjust the low fire setting

Reduce the low limit value to OdegC to drive the gas valve to low fire and complete the appropriate checks and adjustments as described in Section 43 of this manual and ensure the set value is returned to the original value

A48 GMT ltgt BST CHANGEOVER DAYLIGHT SAVINGS

To change your unit to British Summer TimelWinter Time the following system screen must be highlighted by touching the Iamp1 button twice

By touching the clock symbol in the top left hand corner followed by the ENTER key the screen below will be displayed

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 55

APPENDIX 4 30008

188311 851193

544

By touching and highlighting in this case 18 followed by the ENTER key A small box allowing the entry of two digits will appear Enter the desired time required using the numbered keys followed by ENTER key Your unit is now set to operate on BSTBWT

Touch the ESC key three times to return back to the Status screen

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 56

STOKVIS ENERGY SYSTEMS 96R WALTON ROAD EAST MOLESEY SURREY KT8 0DL TEL 020 8783 3050 08707 707 747 FAX 020 8783 3051 08707 707 767 E-MAIL infostokvisboilerscom WEBSITE wwwstokvisboilerscom

JULY 1999

Page 47: ECONOAIR 3000S SERIES AIR HANDLING UNIT DIRECT FIREDstokvisboilers.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/EconoAir... · 2019-05-10 · ECONOAIR 3000S SERIES AIR HANDLING UNIT DIRECT FIRED

APPENDIX 2 30005

START SEQUENCE

The burner start sequence is controlled by the Landis and Gyr burner management unit The timings are pre-set and comply with 885885 This unit must NOT be tampered with

A brief description of the start-up sequence isshy

The unit checks

1 The NO FLAME signal on the UV flame scanner

Note If the scanner detects a flame at any time other than in the correct operating sequence the flame programmer initiates a lockout

2 The operation of the combustion air proving switch in the NO AIR position

3 The air handler discharge high temperature switch

If the checks are completed the unit starts the combustion air fan and then checks the combustion airflow

Once the airflow is proven the unit checks that the damper control circuit is functioning correctly After the damper microswitch is made to prove the fresh air damper is fully open the sequence allows 30 seconds for the combustion air to purge any combustible gas from the air handler

After completion of the purge the spark ignition system is energised the pilot valve opened and the spark terminated If the pilot flame is not proven by the UV scanner the system will initiate a LOCKOUT

If the flame is proven the main gas valves are opened the pilot extinguished and the main burner flame proven

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 43

i

APPENDIX 2 30008

The following flow chart shows the complete start sequence including the lighting of the various indicating lamps

MANUAL STATUS LIGHT POWER ON

POWER ON

I INITIATE START BY TIME

SETTING ON CONTROLLER

I CHECK NO FLAME

VISIBLE

PROVEj FAIL LOCKOUT

I CHECK RELAY R4 NC

POSITION

PROVE FAIL NO START

I CHECK AIR PRESSURE SWITCH NC POSITION

PROVE FAIL NO START

I CHECK RELAY R1 NC

POSITION

PROVE j

FAIL NO START

I START COMBUSTION

AIR BLOWER

I CHECK AIR PRESSURE SWITCH NO POSITION

PROVE I

FAIL NO START

I STATUS LIGHT FAN ON

I ENERGISE RELAY R1

I

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 44

I

I

APPENDIX 2 30008

I CHECK OVERHEAT LIMIT

CONTROL R5

PROVE I

FAIL I I

CHECK 541412 LOOP CLOSED ON

LANDIS ampGYR CIRCUIT

PROVE I

FAIL I I

COMBUSTION AIR PURGE PERIOD

30 SECONDS

I

NO START

NO START

CANCEL NO FLAME CHECK CIRCUIT

I

ENERGISE SPARK

I TIMED PERIOD 25 SECONDS

I ENERGISE PILOT GAS

VALVE

I TIMED PERIOD 25 SECONDS

I TERMINATE SPARK

I INTERROGATE UV FLAME SCANNER

PROVE I

FAIL I I

TIMED PERIOD 10 SECONDS

I

LOCKOUT

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 45

I

I

APPENDIX 2 3000S

I ENERGISE MAIN GAS

VALVES

I

STATUS LIGHT BURNER ON

I TIMED PERIOD

5 SECONDS

I DE-ENERGISE PILOT

GAS VALVES

CONTINUOUS FROM PILOT

I INTERROGATE UV FLAME SCANNER

PROVE I

FAIL I I

LOCKOUT I

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 46

APPENDIX 3 30005

Please see copy of Standard Service Sheet

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 47

APPENDIX 4 30005

A41 TIME OUT SCREEN

This is the standard screen displayed when the touch screen is not in use The back light is off to save energy_ To access the STATUS screen touch the ENTER key and the following screen is displayed

[]][I][]rn[IJOO[][IJOO[] EJ~E11 I[]I ~ middot I

NOTE

The Touch Screen operates using the heat produced by the touch of a finger and therefore only LIGHT pressure is required

Excessive pressure can damage the Touch Screen

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 48

APPENDIX 4 30008

A42 STATUS SCREEN

On the typical STATUS screen the illustrated information detailed is as follows

19 36 Fan Brn

RS OS

100 Fst_~_ Lck _ _ Xst Gas~o ~ I

RS Indicates the current room temperature

OS ~( t~~ the current duct discharge temperature

Fan Indicates the current status of the fan by showing the arrow and the fan blades for ON and OFF is shown by the arrow and fan blades being removed

Brn Indicates the current status of the burner with the black flames indicating the burner to be ON and vice versa

Lck LOCKOUT - This indicates a flame failure when highlighted during normal or start-up operation

Xst EXCESS TEMPERATURE SWITCH - This indicates the unit has reached the trip limit on the over heat stat when highlighted during operation

Indicates the current position of the gas modulating valve during normal Gas

operation (0-100)

Indicates whether the Frost stat is energised and the unit is running on frost Fst

override

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 49

APPENDIX 4 30008

A43 CHANGING SETTINGS

It is possible to change the settings for the time of operation and the required temperature set points The following details the steps required

A44 ENTERING THE SECURITY CODE

From the STATUS screen touch the return key and the screen below will be displayed

Type the HIGH LEVEL security code (4321) If you make a mistake use the BACK SPACE key to delete any incorrect number(s) Touch the ENTER key when the code is correct

If the security code is incorrect the screen above will be displayed then try again If after several attempts you can not gain access please contact RS STOKVIS Ltd for further information

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 50

APPENDIX 4 30008

When the code is entered correctly the MAIN MENU is displayed as detailed below

~ STATUS SET VALUES~ ~ TIVIE CLOCK [) [) [) [) [)

The MAIN MENU screen shows the three menu items available The title for each menu item can be changed to suit the end user Please notify RS STOKVIS Ltd prior to commissioning should these parameters require special amendments

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 51

APPENDIX 4 30008

A45 CHANGING OR SETTING A TIME SCHEDULE

From the main menu screen select the TIME CLOCK page by running finger across screen symbol and touch the ENTER key the screen below will be displayed

On the following screen highlight the TS1 symbol and touch the ENTER key

The current time schedule will now be displayed as shown below The display will automatically default to the current day (1 =Monday 2 =Tuesday etc) In this case day 5 (Friday) the four schedule switching times refer to that day

IAC6BBB1BHIS1

mm0CIl bull mID 17BB 17BB 17HB

Iillleschedule

To modify a time select it by highlighting and touch the ENTER key and the following screen is displayed

To amend the appropriate onoff time as shown on the screen below The arrows to the right of the time are for altering the hours and the arrows on the left for the minutes

Once you have set the time use the ESCape key to exit back to the time schedule screen and choose another day by touching the required number Another time may now be modified as before

IAC6BBB1BHIS1

H8BH

I i eschedule

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 52

APPENDIX 4 30008

Use the ESCape key to exit back to the MAIN MENU screen

~ STATUS ~ SET VALUES

TIME CLOCK []~ [] [] [] []

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 53

APPENDIX 4 30005

A46 CHANGING SET VALUES

From the main menu screen select the SET VALUES page by highlight in the normal way and touch the ENTER key

The following screen is displayed

36 19 18III III IIIHsv Rsv Llv

To change the RSV highlight it in the normal way and touch the ENTER key and the screen below will now be shown

IAC6RRR1RR40 T I

0 19 (Y)l RSV

ROOM SET VALUE

The above screen shows the parameters that can be changed The values to the far left are the limitations of set point (OC) Change the set point by using the UP and DOWN ARROWS on the left of the screen or touch the set value itself followed by the ENTER key to select the set value and set it directly using the numeric keyboard All values can be changed in this way

Use the ESCape key twice to exit back to the MAIN MENU screen

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 54

APPENDIX 4 30005

A47 COMMISSIONING AND SERVICING BURNER CHECKS

Select the SET VALUES screen from the MAIN MENU screen and adjust the high lirrlit set point to 55degC to drive the burner to high fire

IAC6HHH1HH60 ~T I

0 19 (Y)

HSV

HIGH SET VALUE ~

Ensure the set value is returned to 36degC once the appropriate checks and adjustments as described in Section 43 of this manual have been completed Return to the SET VALUES screen and select the low limit value to adjust the low fire setting

Reduce the low limit value to OdegC to drive the gas valve to low fire and complete the appropriate checks and adjustments as described in Section 43 of this manual and ensure the set value is returned to the original value

A48 GMT ltgt BST CHANGEOVER DAYLIGHT SAVINGS

To change your unit to British Summer TimelWinter Time the following system screen must be highlighted by touching the Iamp1 button twice

By touching the clock symbol in the top left hand corner followed by the ENTER key the screen below will be displayed

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 55

APPENDIX 4 30008

188311 851193

544

By touching and highlighting in this case 18 followed by the ENTER key A small box allowing the entry of two digits will appear Enter the desired time required using the numbered keys followed by ENTER key Your unit is now set to operate on BSTBWT

Touch the ESC key three times to return back to the Status screen

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 56

STOKVIS ENERGY SYSTEMS 96R WALTON ROAD EAST MOLESEY SURREY KT8 0DL TEL 020 8783 3050 08707 707 747 FAX 020 8783 3051 08707 707 767 E-MAIL infostokvisboilerscom WEBSITE wwwstokvisboilerscom

JULY 1999

Page 48: ECONOAIR 3000S SERIES AIR HANDLING UNIT DIRECT FIREDstokvisboilers.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/EconoAir... · 2019-05-10 · ECONOAIR 3000S SERIES AIR HANDLING UNIT DIRECT FIRED

i

APPENDIX 2 30008

The following flow chart shows the complete start sequence including the lighting of the various indicating lamps

MANUAL STATUS LIGHT POWER ON

POWER ON

I INITIATE START BY TIME

SETTING ON CONTROLLER

I CHECK NO FLAME

VISIBLE

PROVEj FAIL LOCKOUT

I CHECK RELAY R4 NC

POSITION

PROVE FAIL NO START

I CHECK AIR PRESSURE SWITCH NC POSITION

PROVE FAIL NO START

I CHECK RELAY R1 NC

POSITION

PROVE j

FAIL NO START

I START COMBUSTION

AIR BLOWER

I CHECK AIR PRESSURE SWITCH NO POSITION

PROVE I

FAIL NO START

I STATUS LIGHT FAN ON

I ENERGISE RELAY R1

I

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 44

I

I

APPENDIX 2 30008

I CHECK OVERHEAT LIMIT

CONTROL R5

PROVE I

FAIL I I

CHECK 541412 LOOP CLOSED ON

LANDIS ampGYR CIRCUIT

PROVE I

FAIL I I

COMBUSTION AIR PURGE PERIOD

30 SECONDS

I

NO START

NO START

CANCEL NO FLAME CHECK CIRCUIT

I

ENERGISE SPARK

I TIMED PERIOD 25 SECONDS

I ENERGISE PILOT GAS

VALVE

I TIMED PERIOD 25 SECONDS

I TERMINATE SPARK

I INTERROGATE UV FLAME SCANNER

PROVE I

FAIL I I

TIMED PERIOD 10 SECONDS

I

LOCKOUT

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 45

I

I

APPENDIX 2 3000S

I ENERGISE MAIN GAS

VALVES

I

STATUS LIGHT BURNER ON

I TIMED PERIOD

5 SECONDS

I DE-ENERGISE PILOT

GAS VALVES

CONTINUOUS FROM PILOT

I INTERROGATE UV FLAME SCANNER

PROVE I

FAIL I I

LOCKOUT I

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 46

APPENDIX 3 30005

Please see copy of Standard Service Sheet

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 47

APPENDIX 4 30005

A41 TIME OUT SCREEN

This is the standard screen displayed when the touch screen is not in use The back light is off to save energy_ To access the STATUS screen touch the ENTER key and the following screen is displayed

[]][I][]rn[IJOO[][IJOO[] EJ~E11 I[]I ~ middot I

NOTE

The Touch Screen operates using the heat produced by the touch of a finger and therefore only LIGHT pressure is required

Excessive pressure can damage the Touch Screen

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 48

APPENDIX 4 30008

A42 STATUS SCREEN

On the typical STATUS screen the illustrated information detailed is as follows

19 36 Fan Brn

RS OS

100 Fst_~_ Lck _ _ Xst Gas~o ~ I

RS Indicates the current room temperature

OS ~( t~~ the current duct discharge temperature

Fan Indicates the current status of the fan by showing the arrow and the fan blades for ON and OFF is shown by the arrow and fan blades being removed

Brn Indicates the current status of the burner with the black flames indicating the burner to be ON and vice versa

Lck LOCKOUT - This indicates a flame failure when highlighted during normal or start-up operation

Xst EXCESS TEMPERATURE SWITCH - This indicates the unit has reached the trip limit on the over heat stat when highlighted during operation

Indicates the current position of the gas modulating valve during normal Gas

operation (0-100)

Indicates whether the Frost stat is energised and the unit is running on frost Fst

override

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 49

APPENDIX 4 30008

A43 CHANGING SETTINGS

It is possible to change the settings for the time of operation and the required temperature set points The following details the steps required

A44 ENTERING THE SECURITY CODE

From the STATUS screen touch the return key and the screen below will be displayed

Type the HIGH LEVEL security code (4321) If you make a mistake use the BACK SPACE key to delete any incorrect number(s) Touch the ENTER key when the code is correct

If the security code is incorrect the screen above will be displayed then try again If after several attempts you can not gain access please contact RS STOKVIS Ltd for further information

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 50

APPENDIX 4 30008

When the code is entered correctly the MAIN MENU is displayed as detailed below

~ STATUS SET VALUES~ ~ TIVIE CLOCK [) [) [) [) [)

The MAIN MENU screen shows the three menu items available The title for each menu item can be changed to suit the end user Please notify RS STOKVIS Ltd prior to commissioning should these parameters require special amendments

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 51

APPENDIX 4 30008

A45 CHANGING OR SETTING A TIME SCHEDULE

From the main menu screen select the TIME CLOCK page by running finger across screen symbol and touch the ENTER key the screen below will be displayed

On the following screen highlight the TS1 symbol and touch the ENTER key

The current time schedule will now be displayed as shown below The display will automatically default to the current day (1 =Monday 2 =Tuesday etc) In this case day 5 (Friday) the four schedule switching times refer to that day

IAC6BBB1BHIS1

mm0CIl bull mID 17BB 17BB 17HB

Iillleschedule

To modify a time select it by highlighting and touch the ENTER key and the following screen is displayed

To amend the appropriate onoff time as shown on the screen below The arrows to the right of the time are for altering the hours and the arrows on the left for the minutes

Once you have set the time use the ESCape key to exit back to the time schedule screen and choose another day by touching the required number Another time may now be modified as before

IAC6BBB1BHIS1

H8BH

I i eschedule

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 52

APPENDIX 4 30008

Use the ESCape key to exit back to the MAIN MENU screen

~ STATUS ~ SET VALUES

TIME CLOCK []~ [] [] [] []

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 53

APPENDIX 4 30005

A46 CHANGING SET VALUES

From the main menu screen select the SET VALUES page by highlight in the normal way and touch the ENTER key

The following screen is displayed

36 19 18III III IIIHsv Rsv Llv

To change the RSV highlight it in the normal way and touch the ENTER key and the screen below will now be shown

IAC6RRR1RR40 T I

0 19 (Y)l RSV

ROOM SET VALUE

The above screen shows the parameters that can be changed The values to the far left are the limitations of set point (OC) Change the set point by using the UP and DOWN ARROWS on the left of the screen or touch the set value itself followed by the ENTER key to select the set value and set it directly using the numeric keyboard All values can be changed in this way

Use the ESCape key twice to exit back to the MAIN MENU screen

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 54

APPENDIX 4 30005

A47 COMMISSIONING AND SERVICING BURNER CHECKS

Select the SET VALUES screen from the MAIN MENU screen and adjust the high lirrlit set point to 55degC to drive the burner to high fire

IAC6HHH1HH60 ~T I

0 19 (Y)

HSV

HIGH SET VALUE ~

Ensure the set value is returned to 36degC once the appropriate checks and adjustments as described in Section 43 of this manual have been completed Return to the SET VALUES screen and select the low limit value to adjust the low fire setting

Reduce the low limit value to OdegC to drive the gas valve to low fire and complete the appropriate checks and adjustments as described in Section 43 of this manual and ensure the set value is returned to the original value

A48 GMT ltgt BST CHANGEOVER DAYLIGHT SAVINGS

To change your unit to British Summer TimelWinter Time the following system screen must be highlighted by touching the Iamp1 button twice

By touching the clock symbol in the top left hand corner followed by the ENTER key the screen below will be displayed

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 55

APPENDIX 4 30008

188311 851193

544

By touching and highlighting in this case 18 followed by the ENTER key A small box allowing the entry of two digits will appear Enter the desired time required using the numbered keys followed by ENTER key Your unit is now set to operate on BSTBWT

Touch the ESC key three times to return back to the Status screen

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 56

STOKVIS ENERGY SYSTEMS 96R WALTON ROAD EAST MOLESEY SURREY KT8 0DL TEL 020 8783 3050 08707 707 747 FAX 020 8783 3051 08707 707 767 E-MAIL infostokvisboilerscom WEBSITE wwwstokvisboilerscom

JULY 1999

Page 49: ECONOAIR 3000S SERIES AIR HANDLING UNIT DIRECT FIREDstokvisboilers.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/EconoAir... · 2019-05-10 · ECONOAIR 3000S SERIES AIR HANDLING UNIT DIRECT FIRED

I

APPENDIX 2 30008

I CHECK OVERHEAT LIMIT

CONTROL R5

PROVE I

FAIL I I

CHECK 541412 LOOP CLOSED ON

LANDIS ampGYR CIRCUIT

PROVE I

FAIL I I

COMBUSTION AIR PURGE PERIOD

30 SECONDS

I

NO START

NO START

CANCEL NO FLAME CHECK CIRCUIT

I

ENERGISE SPARK

I TIMED PERIOD 25 SECONDS

I ENERGISE PILOT GAS

VALVE

I TIMED PERIOD 25 SECONDS

I TERMINATE SPARK

I INTERROGATE UV FLAME SCANNER

PROVE I

FAIL I I

TIMED PERIOD 10 SECONDS

I

LOCKOUT

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 45

I

I

APPENDIX 2 3000S

I ENERGISE MAIN GAS

VALVES

I

STATUS LIGHT BURNER ON

I TIMED PERIOD

5 SECONDS

I DE-ENERGISE PILOT

GAS VALVES

CONTINUOUS FROM PILOT

I INTERROGATE UV FLAME SCANNER

PROVE I

FAIL I I

LOCKOUT I

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 46

APPENDIX 3 30005

Please see copy of Standard Service Sheet

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 47

APPENDIX 4 30005

A41 TIME OUT SCREEN

This is the standard screen displayed when the touch screen is not in use The back light is off to save energy_ To access the STATUS screen touch the ENTER key and the following screen is displayed

[]][I][]rn[IJOO[][IJOO[] EJ~E11 I[]I ~ middot I

NOTE

The Touch Screen operates using the heat produced by the touch of a finger and therefore only LIGHT pressure is required

Excessive pressure can damage the Touch Screen

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 48

APPENDIX 4 30008

A42 STATUS SCREEN

On the typical STATUS screen the illustrated information detailed is as follows

19 36 Fan Brn

RS OS

100 Fst_~_ Lck _ _ Xst Gas~o ~ I

RS Indicates the current room temperature

OS ~( t~~ the current duct discharge temperature

Fan Indicates the current status of the fan by showing the arrow and the fan blades for ON and OFF is shown by the arrow and fan blades being removed

Brn Indicates the current status of the burner with the black flames indicating the burner to be ON and vice versa

Lck LOCKOUT - This indicates a flame failure when highlighted during normal or start-up operation

Xst EXCESS TEMPERATURE SWITCH - This indicates the unit has reached the trip limit on the over heat stat when highlighted during operation

Indicates the current position of the gas modulating valve during normal Gas

operation (0-100)

Indicates whether the Frost stat is energised and the unit is running on frost Fst

override

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 49

APPENDIX 4 30008

A43 CHANGING SETTINGS

It is possible to change the settings for the time of operation and the required temperature set points The following details the steps required

A44 ENTERING THE SECURITY CODE

From the STATUS screen touch the return key and the screen below will be displayed

Type the HIGH LEVEL security code (4321) If you make a mistake use the BACK SPACE key to delete any incorrect number(s) Touch the ENTER key when the code is correct

If the security code is incorrect the screen above will be displayed then try again If after several attempts you can not gain access please contact RS STOKVIS Ltd for further information

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 50

APPENDIX 4 30008

When the code is entered correctly the MAIN MENU is displayed as detailed below

~ STATUS SET VALUES~ ~ TIVIE CLOCK [) [) [) [) [)

The MAIN MENU screen shows the three menu items available The title for each menu item can be changed to suit the end user Please notify RS STOKVIS Ltd prior to commissioning should these parameters require special amendments

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 51

APPENDIX 4 30008

A45 CHANGING OR SETTING A TIME SCHEDULE

From the main menu screen select the TIME CLOCK page by running finger across screen symbol and touch the ENTER key the screen below will be displayed

On the following screen highlight the TS1 symbol and touch the ENTER key

The current time schedule will now be displayed as shown below The display will automatically default to the current day (1 =Monday 2 =Tuesday etc) In this case day 5 (Friday) the four schedule switching times refer to that day

IAC6BBB1BHIS1

mm0CIl bull mID 17BB 17BB 17HB

Iillleschedule

To modify a time select it by highlighting and touch the ENTER key and the following screen is displayed

To amend the appropriate onoff time as shown on the screen below The arrows to the right of the time are for altering the hours and the arrows on the left for the minutes

Once you have set the time use the ESCape key to exit back to the time schedule screen and choose another day by touching the required number Another time may now be modified as before

IAC6BBB1BHIS1

H8BH

I i eschedule

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 52

APPENDIX 4 30008

Use the ESCape key to exit back to the MAIN MENU screen

~ STATUS ~ SET VALUES

TIME CLOCK []~ [] [] [] []

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 53

APPENDIX 4 30005

A46 CHANGING SET VALUES

From the main menu screen select the SET VALUES page by highlight in the normal way and touch the ENTER key

The following screen is displayed

36 19 18III III IIIHsv Rsv Llv

To change the RSV highlight it in the normal way and touch the ENTER key and the screen below will now be shown

IAC6RRR1RR40 T I

0 19 (Y)l RSV

ROOM SET VALUE

The above screen shows the parameters that can be changed The values to the far left are the limitations of set point (OC) Change the set point by using the UP and DOWN ARROWS on the left of the screen or touch the set value itself followed by the ENTER key to select the set value and set it directly using the numeric keyboard All values can be changed in this way

Use the ESCape key twice to exit back to the MAIN MENU screen

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 54

APPENDIX 4 30005

A47 COMMISSIONING AND SERVICING BURNER CHECKS

Select the SET VALUES screen from the MAIN MENU screen and adjust the high lirrlit set point to 55degC to drive the burner to high fire

IAC6HHH1HH60 ~T I

0 19 (Y)

HSV

HIGH SET VALUE ~

Ensure the set value is returned to 36degC once the appropriate checks and adjustments as described in Section 43 of this manual have been completed Return to the SET VALUES screen and select the low limit value to adjust the low fire setting

Reduce the low limit value to OdegC to drive the gas valve to low fire and complete the appropriate checks and adjustments as described in Section 43 of this manual and ensure the set value is returned to the original value

A48 GMT ltgt BST CHANGEOVER DAYLIGHT SAVINGS

To change your unit to British Summer TimelWinter Time the following system screen must be highlighted by touching the Iamp1 button twice

By touching the clock symbol in the top left hand corner followed by the ENTER key the screen below will be displayed

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 55

APPENDIX 4 30008

188311 851193

544

By touching and highlighting in this case 18 followed by the ENTER key A small box allowing the entry of two digits will appear Enter the desired time required using the numbered keys followed by ENTER key Your unit is now set to operate on BSTBWT

Touch the ESC key three times to return back to the Status screen

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 56

STOKVIS ENERGY SYSTEMS 96R WALTON ROAD EAST MOLESEY SURREY KT8 0DL TEL 020 8783 3050 08707 707 747 FAX 020 8783 3051 08707 707 767 E-MAIL infostokvisboilerscom WEBSITE wwwstokvisboilerscom

JULY 1999

Page 50: ECONOAIR 3000S SERIES AIR HANDLING UNIT DIRECT FIREDstokvisboilers.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/EconoAir... · 2019-05-10 · ECONOAIR 3000S SERIES AIR HANDLING UNIT DIRECT FIRED

APPENDIX 2 3000S

I ENERGISE MAIN GAS

VALVES

I

STATUS LIGHT BURNER ON

I TIMED PERIOD

5 SECONDS

I DE-ENERGISE PILOT

GAS VALVES

CONTINUOUS FROM PILOT

I INTERROGATE UV FLAME SCANNER

PROVE I

FAIL I I

LOCKOUT I

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 46

APPENDIX 3 30005

Please see copy of Standard Service Sheet

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 47

APPENDIX 4 30005

A41 TIME OUT SCREEN

This is the standard screen displayed when the touch screen is not in use The back light is off to save energy_ To access the STATUS screen touch the ENTER key and the following screen is displayed

[]][I][]rn[IJOO[][IJOO[] EJ~E11 I[]I ~ middot I

NOTE

The Touch Screen operates using the heat produced by the touch of a finger and therefore only LIGHT pressure is required

Excessive pressure can damage the Touch Screen

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 48

APPENDIX 4 30008

A42 STATUS SCREEN

On the typical STATUS screen the illustrated information detailed is as follows

19 36 Fan Brn

RS OS

100 Fst_~_ Lck _ _ Xst Gas~o ~ I

RS Indicates the current room temperature

OS ~( t~~ the current duct discharge temperature

Fan Indicates the current status of the fan by showing the arrow and the fan blades for ON and OFF is shown by the arrow and fan blades being removed

Brn Indicates the current status of the burner with the black flames indicating the burner to be ON and vice versa

Lck LOCKOUT - This indicates a flame failure when highlighted during normal or start-up operation

Xst EXCESS TEMPERATURE SWITCH - This indicates the unit has reached the trip limit on the over heat stat when highlighted during operation

Indicates the current position of the gas modulating valve during normal Gas

operation (0-100)

Indicates whether the Frost stat is energised and the unit is running on frost Fst

override

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 49

APPENDIX 4 30008

A43 CHANGING SETTINGS

It is possible to change the settings for the time of operation and the required temperature set points The following details the steps required

A44 ENTERING THE SECURITY CODE

From the STATUS screen touch the return key and the screen below will be displayed

Type the HIGH LEVEL security code (4321) If you make a mistake use the BACK SPACE key to delete any incorrect number(s) Touch the ENTER key when the code is correct

If the security code is incorrect the screen above will be displayed then try again If after several attempts you can not gain access please contact RS STOKVIS Ltd for further information

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 50

APPENDIX 4 30008

When the code is entered correctly the MAIN MENU is displayed as detailed below

~ STATUS SET VALUES~ ~ TIVIE CLOCK [) [) [) [) [)

The MAIN MENU screen shows the three menu items available The title for each menu item can be changed to suit the end user Please notify RS STOKVIS Ltd prior to commissioning should these parameters require special amendments

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 51

APPENDIX 4 30008

A45 CHANGING OR SETTING A TIME SCHEDULE

From the main menu screen select the TIME CLOCK page by running finger across screen symbol and touch the ENTER key the screen below will be displayed

On the following screen highlight the TS1 symbol and touch the ENTER key

The current time schedule will now be displayed as shown below The display will automatically default to the current day (1 =Monday 2 =Tuesday etc) In this case day 5 (Friday) the four schedule switching times refer to that day

IAC6BBB1BHIS1

mm0CIl bull mID 17BB 17BB 17HB

Iillleschedule

To modify a time select it by highlighting and touch the ENTER key and the following screen is displayed

To amend the appropriate onoff time as shown on the screen below The arrows to the right of the time are for altering the hours and the arrows on the left for the minutes

Once you have set the time use the ESCape key to exit back to the time schedule screen and choose another day by touching the required number Another time may now be modified as before

IAC6BBB1BHIS1

H8BH

I i eschedule

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 52

APPENDIX 4 30008

Use the ESCape key to exit back to the MAIN MENU screen

~ STATUS ~ SET VALUES

TIME CLOCK []~ [] [] [] []

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 53

APPENDIX 4 30005

A46 CHANGING SET VALUES

From the main menu screen select the SET VALUES page by highlight in the normal way and touch the ENTER key

The following screen is displayed

36 19 18III III IIIHsv Rsv Llv

To change the RSV highlight it in the normal way and touch the ENTER key and the screen below will now be shown

IAC6RRR1RR40 T I

0 19 (Y)l RSV

ROOM SET VALUE

The above screen shows the parameters that can be changed The values to the far left are the limitations of set point (OC) Change the set point by using the UP and DOWN ARROWS on the left of the screen or touch the set value itself followed by the ENTER key to select the set value and set it directly using the numeric keyboard All values can be changed in this way

Use the ESCape key twice to exit back to the MAIN MENU screen

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 54

APPENDIX 4 30005

A47 COMMISSIONING AND SERVICING BURNER CHECKS

Select the SET VALUES screen from the MAIN MENU screen and adjust the high lirrlit set point to 55degC to drive the burner to high fire

IAC6HHH1HH60 ~T I

0 19 (Y)

HSV

HIGH SET VALUE ~

Ensure the set value is returned to 36degC once the appropriate checks and adjustments as described in Section 43 of this manual have been completed Return to the SET VALUES screen and select the low limit value to adjust the low fire setting

Reduce the low limit value to OdegC to drive the gas valve to low fire and complete the appropriate checks and adjustments as described in Section 43 of this manual and ensure the set value is returned to the original value

A48 GMT ltgt BST CHANGEOVER DAYLIGHT SAVINGS

To change your unit to British Summer TimelWinter Time the following system screen must be highlighted by touching the Iamp1 button twice

By touching the clock symbol in the top left hand corner followed by the ENTER key the screen below will be displayed

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 55

APPENDIX 4 30008

188311 851193

544

By touching and highlighting in this case 18 followed by the ENTER key A small box allowing the entry of two digits will appear Enter the desired time required using the numbered keys followed by ENTER key Your unit is now set to operate on BSTBWT

Touch the ESC key three times to return back to the Status screen

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 56

STOKVIS ENERGY SYSTEMS 96R WALTON ROAD EAST MOLESEY SURREY KT8 0DL TEL 020 8783 3050 08707 707 747 FAX 020 8783 3051 08707 707 767 E-MAIL infostokvisboilerscom WEBSITE wwwstokvisboilerscom

JULY 1999

Page 51: ECONOAIR 3000S SERIES AIR HANDLING UNIT DIRECT FIREDstokvisboilers.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/EconoAir... · 2019-05-10 · ECONOAIR 3000S SERIES AIR HANDLING UNIT DIRECT FIRED

APPENDIX 3 30005

Please see copy of Standard Service Sheet

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 47

APPENDIX 4 30005

A41 TIME OUT SCREEN

This is the standard screen displayed when the touch screen is not in use The back light is off to save energy_ To access the STATUS screen touch the ENTER key and the following screen is displayed

[]][I][]rn[IJOO[][IJOO[] EJ~E11 I[]I ~ middot I

NOTE

The Touch Screen operates using the heat produced by the touch of a finger and therefore only LIGHT pressure is required

Excessive pressure can damage the Touch Screen

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 48

APPENDIX 4 30008

A42 STATUS SCREEN

On the typical STATUS screen the illustrated information detailed is as follows

19 36 Fan Brn

RS OS

100 Fst_~_ Lck _ _ Xst Gas~o ~ I

RS Indicates the current room temperature

OS ~( t~~ the current duct discharge temperature

Fan Indicates the current status of the fan by showing the arrow and the fan blades for ON and OFF is shown by the arrow and fan blades being removed

Brn Indicates the current status of the burner with the black flames indicating the burner to be ON and vice versa

Lck LOCKOUT - This indicates a flame failure when highlighted during normal or start-up operation

Xst EXCESS TEMPERATURE SWITCH - This indicates the unit has reached the trip limit on the over heat stat when highlighted during operation

Indicates the current position of the gas modulating valve during normal Gas

operation (0-100)

Indicates whether the Frost stat is energised and the unit is running on frost Fst

override

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 49

APPENDIX 4 30008

A43 CHANGING SETTINGS

It is possible to change the settings for the time of operation and the required temperature set points The following details the steps required

A44 ENTERING THE SECURITY CODE

From the STATUS screen touch the return key and the screen below will be displayed

Type the HIGH LEVEL security code (4321) If you make a mistake use the BACK SPACE key to delete any incorrect number(s) Touch the ENTER key when the code is correct

If the security code is incorrect the screen above will be displayed then try again If after several attempts you can not gain access please contact RS STOKVIS Ltd for further information

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 50

APPENDIX 4 30008

When the code is entered correctly the MAIN MENU is displayed as detailed below

~ STATUS SET VALUES~ ~ TIVIE CLOCK [) [) [) [) [)

The MAIN MENU screen shows the three menu items available The title for each menu item can be changed to suit the end user Please notify RS STOKVIS Ltd prior to commissioning should these parameters require special amendments

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 51

APPENDIX 4 30008

A45 CHANGING OR SETTING A TIME SCHEDULE

From the main menu screen select the TIME CLOCK page by running finger across screen symbol and touch the ENTER key the screen below will be displayed

On the following screen highlight the TS1 symbol and touch the ENTER key

The current time schedule will now be displayed as shown below The display will automatically default to the current day (1 =Monday 2 =Tuesday etc) In this case day 5 (Friday) the four schedule switching times refer to that day

IAC6BBB1BHIS1

mm0CIl bull mID 17BB 17BB 17HB

Iillleschedule

To modify a time select it by highlighting and touch the ENTER key and the following screen is displayed

To amend the appropriate onoff time as shown on the screen below The arrows to the right of the time are for altering the hours and the arrows on the left for the minutes

Once you have set the time use the ESCape key to exit back to the time schedule screen and choose another day by touching the required number Another time may now be modified as before

IAC6BBB1BHIS1

H8BH

I i eschedule

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 52

APPENDIX 4 30008

Use the ESCape key to exit back to the MAIN MENU screen

~ STATUS ~ SET VALUES

TIME CLOCK []~ [] [] [] []

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 53

APPENDIX 4 30005

A46 CHANGING SET VALUES

From the main menu screen select the SET VALUES page by highlight in the normal way and touch the ENTER key

The following screen is displayed

36 19 18III III IIIHsv Rsv Llv

To change the RSV highlight it in the normal way and touch the ENTER key and the screen below will now be shown

IAC6RRR1RR40 T I

0 19 (Y)l RSV

ROOM SET VALUE

The above screen shows the parameters that can be changed The values to the far left are the limitations of set point (OC) Change the set point by using the UP and DOWN ARROWS on the left of the screen or touch the set value itself followed by the ENTER key to select the set value and set it directly using the numeric keyboard All values can be changed in this way

Use the ESCape key twice to exit back to the MAIN MENU screen

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 54

APPENDIX 4 30005

A47 COMMISSIONING AND SERVICING BURNER CHECKS

Select the SET VALUES screen from the MAIN MENU screen and adjust the high lirrlit set point to 55degC to drive the burner to high fire

IAC6HHH1HH60 ~T I

0 19 (Y)

HSV

HIGH SET VALUE ~

Ensure the set value is returned to 36degC once the appropriate checks and adjustments as described in Section 43 of this manual have been completed Return to the SET VALUES screen and select the low limit value to adjust the low fire setting

Reduce the low limit value to OdegC to drive the gas valve to low fire and complete the appropriate checks and adjustments as described in Section 43 of this manual and ensure the set value is returned to the original value

A48 GMT ltgt BST CHANGEOVER DAYLIGHT SAVINGS

To change your unit to British Summer TimelWinter Time the following system screen must be highlighted by touching the Iamp1 button twice

By touching the clock symbol in the top left hand corner followed by the ENTER key the screen below will be displayed

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 55

APPENDIX 4 30008

188311 851193

544

By touching and highlighting in this case 18 followed by the ENTER key A small box allowing the entry of two digits will appear Enter the desired time required using the numbered keys followed by ENTER key Your unit is now set to operate on BSTBWT

Touch the ESC key three times to return back to the Status screen

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 56

STOKVIS ENERGY SYSTEMS 96R WALTON ROAD EAST MOLESEY SURREY KT8 0DL TEL 020 8783 3050 08707 707 747 FAX 020 8783 3051 08707 707 767 E-MAIL infostokvisboilerscom WEBSITE wwwstokvisboilerscom

JULY 1999

Page 52: ECONOAIR 3000S SERIES AIR HANDLING UNIT DIRECT FIREDstokvisboilers.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/EconoAir... · 2019-05-10 · ECONOAIR 3000S SERIES AIR HANDLING UNIT DIRECT FIRED

APPENDIX 4 30005

A41 TIME OUT SCREEN

This is the standard screen displayed when the touch screen is not in use The back light is off to save energy_ To access the STATUS screen touch the ENTER key and the following screen is displayed

[]][I][]rn[IJOO[][IJOO[] EJ~E11 I[]I ~ middot I

NOTE

The Touch Screen operates using the heat produced by the touch of a finger and therefore only LIGHT pressure is required

Excessive pressure can damage the Touch Screen

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 48

APPENDIX 4 30008

A42 STATUS SCREEN

On the typical STATUS screen the illustrated information detailed is as follows

19 36 Fan Brn

RS OS

100 Fst_~_ Lck _ _ Xst Gas~o ~ I

RS Indicates the current room temperature

OS ~( t~~ the current duct discharge temperature

Fan Indicates the current status of the fan by showing the arrow and the fan blades for ON and OFF is shown by the arrow and fan blades being removed

Brn Indicates the current status of the burner with the black flames indicating the burner to be ON and vice versa

Lck LOCKOUT - This indicates a flame failure when highlighted during normal or start-up operation

Xst EXCESS TEMPERATURE SWITCH - This indicates the unit has reached the trip limit on the over heat stat when highlighted during operation

Indicates the current position of the gas modulating valve during normal Gas

operation (0-100)

Indicates whether the Frost stat is energised and the unit is running on frost Fst

override

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 49

APPENDIX 4 30008

A43 CHANGING SETTINGS

It is possible to change the settings for the time of operation and the required temperature set points The following details the steps required

A44 ENTERING THE SECURITY CODE

From the STATUS screen touch the return key and the screen below will be displayed

Type the HIGH LEVEL security code (4321) If you make a mistake use the BACK SPACE key to delete any incorrect number(s) Touch the ENTER key when the code is correct

If the security code is incorrect the screen above will be displayed then try again If after several attempts you can not gain access please contact RS STOKVIS Ltd for further information

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 50

APPENDIX 4 30008

When the code is entered correctly the MAIN MENU is displayed as detailed below

~ STATUS SET VALUES~ ~ TIVIE CLOCK [) [) [) [) [)

The MAIN MENU screen shows the three menu items available The title for each menu item can be changed to suit the end user Please notify RS STOKVIS Ltd prior to commissioning should these parameters require special amendments

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 51

APPENDIX 4 30008

A45 CHANGING OR SETTING A TIME SCHEDULE

From the main menu screen select the TIME CLOCK page by running finger across screen symbol and touch the ENTER key the screen below will be displayed

On the following screen highlight the TS1 symbol and touch the ENTER key

The current time schedule will now be displayed as shown below The display will automatically default to the current day (1 =Monday 2 =Tuesday etc) In this case day 5 (Friday) the four schedule switching times refer to that day

IAC6BBB1BHIS1

mm0CIl bull mID 17BB 17BB 17HB

Iillleschedule

To modify a time select it by highlighting and touch the ENTER key and the following screen is displayed

To amend the appropriate onoff time as shown on the screen below The arrows to the right of the time are for altering the hours and the arrows on the left for the minutes

Once you have set the time use the ESCape key to exit back to the time schedule screen and choose another day by touching the required number Another time may now be modified as before

IAC6BBB1BHIS1

H8BH

I i eschedule

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 52

APPENDIX 4 30008

Use the ESCape key to exit back to the MAIN MENU screen

~ STATUS ~ SET VALUES

TIME CLOCK []~ [] [] [] []

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 53

APPENDIX 4 30005

A46 CHANGING SET VALUES

From the main menu screen select the SET VALUES page by highlight in the normal way and touch the ENTER key

The following screen is displayed

36 19 18III III IIIHsv Rsv Llv

To change the RSV highlight it in the normal way and touch the ENTER key and the screen below will now be shown

IAC6RRR1RR40 T I

0 19 (Y)l RSV

ROOM SET VALUE

The above screen shows the parameters that can be changed The values to the far left are the limitations of set point (OC) Change the set point by using the UP and DOWN ARROWS on the left of the screen or touch the set value itself followed by the ENTER key to select the set value and set it directly using the numeric keyboard All values can be changed in this way

Use the ESCape key twice to exit back to the MAIN MENU screen

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 54

APPENDIX 4 30005

A47 COMMISSIONING AND SERVICING BURNER CHECKS

Select the SET VALUES screen from the MAIN MENU screen and adjust the high lirrlit set point to 55degC to drive the burner to high fire

IAC6HHH1HH60 ~T I

0 19 (Y)

HSV

HIGH SET VALUE ~

Ensure the set value is returned to 36degC once the appropriate checks and adjustments as described in Section 43 of this manual have been completed Return to the SET VALUES screen and select the low limit value to adjust the low fire setting

Reduce the low limit value to OdegC to drive the gas valve to low fire and complete the appropriate checks and adjustments as described in Section 43 of this manual and ensure the set value is returned to the original value

A48 GMT ltgt BST CHANGEOVER DAYLIGHT SAVINGS

To change your unit to British Summer TimelWinter Time the following system screen must be highlighted by touching the Iamp1 button twice

By touching the clock symbol in the top left hand corner followed by the ENTER key the screen below will be displayed

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 55

APPENDIX 4 30008

188311 851193

544

By touching and highlighting in this case 18 followed by the ENTER key A small box allowing the entry of two digits will appear Enter the desired time required using the numbered keys followed by ENTER key Your unit is now set to operate on BSTBWT

Touch the ESC key three times to return back to the Status screen

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 56

STOKVIS ENERGY SYSTEMS 96R WALTON ROAD EAST MOLESEY SURREY KT8 0DL TEL 020 8783 3050 08707 707 747 FAX 020 8783 3051 08707 707 767 E-MAIL infostokvisboilerscom WEBSITE wwwstokvisboilerscom

JULY 1999

Page 53: ECONOAIR 3000S SERIES AIR HANDLING UNIT DIRECT FIREDstokvisboilers.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/EconoAir... · 2019-05-10 · ECONOAIR 3000S SERIES AIR HANDLING UNIT DIRECT FIRED

APPENDIX 4 30008

A42 STATUS SCREEN

On the typical STATUS screen the illustrated information detailed is as follows

19 36 Fan Brn

RS OS

100 Fst_~_ Lck _ _ Xst Gas~o ~ I

RS Indicates the current room temperature

OS ~( t~~ the current duct discharge temperature

Fan Indicates the current status of the fan by showing the arrow and the fan blades for ON and OFF is shown by the arrow and fan blades being removed

Brn Indicates the current status of the burner with the black flames indicating the burner to be ON and vice versa

Lck LOCKOUT - This indicates a flame failure when highlighted during normal or start-up operation

Xst EXCESS TEMPERATURE SWITCH - This indicates the unit has reached the trip limit on the over heat stat when highlighted during operation

Indicates the current position of the gas modulating valve during normal Gas

operation (0-100)

Indicates whether the Frost stat is energised and the unit is running on frost Fst

override

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 49

APPENDIX 4 30008

A43 CHANGING SETTINGS

It is possible to change the settings for the time of operation and the required temperature set points The following details the steps required

A44 ENTERING THE SECURITY CODE

From the STATUS screen touch the return key and the screen below will be displayed

Type the HIGH LEVEL security code (4321) If you make a mistake use the BACK SPACE key to delete any incorrect number(s) Touch the ENTER key when the code is correct

If the security code is incorrect the screen above will be displayed then try again If after several attempts you can not gain access please contact RS STOKVIS Ltd for further information

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 50

APPENDIX 4 30008

When the code is entered correctly the MAIN MENU is displayed as detailed below

~ STATUS SET VALUES~ ~ TIVIE CLOCK [) [) [) [) [)

The MAIN MENU screen shows the three menu items available The title for each menu item can be changed to suit the end user Please notify RS STOKVIS Ltd prior to commissioning should these parameters require special amendments

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 51

APPENDIX 4 30008

A45 CHANGING OR SETTING A TIME SCHEDULE

From the main menu screen select the TIME CLOCK page by running finger across screen symbol and touch the ENTER key the screen below will be displayed

On the following screen highlight the TS1 symbol and touch the ENTER key

The current time schedule will now be displayed as shown below The display will automatically default to the current day (1 =Monday 2 =Tuesday etc) In this case day 5 (Friday) the four schedule switching times refer to that day

IAC6BBB1BHIS1

mm0CIl bull mID 17BB 17BB 17HB

Iillleschedule

To modify a time select it by highlighting and touch the ENTER key and the following screen is displayed

To amend the appropriate onoff time as shown on the screen below The arrows to the right of the time are for altering the hours and the arrows on the left for the minutes

Once you have set the time use the ESCape key to exit back to the time schedule screen and choose another day by touching the required number Another time may now be modified as before

IAC6BBB1BHIS1

H8BH

I i eschedule

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 52

APPENDIX 4 30008

Use the ESCape key to exit back to the MAIN MENU screen

~ STATUS ~ SET VALUES

TIME CLOCK []~ [] [] [] []

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 53

APPENDIX 4 30005

A46 CHANGING SET VALUES

From the main menu screen select the SET VALUES page by highlight in the normal way and touch the ENTER key

The following screen is displayed

36 19 18III III IIIHsv Rsv Llv

To change the RSV highlight it in the normal way and touch the ENTER key and the screen below will now be shown

IAC6RRR1RR40 T I

0 19 (Y)l RSV

ROOM SET VALUE

The above screen shows the parameters that can be changed The values to the far left are the limitations of set point (OC) Change the set point by using the UP and DOWN ARROWS on the left of the screen or touch the set value itself followed by the ENTER key to select the set value and set it directly using the numeric keyboard All values can be changed in this way

Use the ESCape key twice to exit back to the MAIN MENU screen

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 54

APPENDIX 4 30005

A47 COMMISSIONING AND SERVICING BURNER CHECKS

Select the SET VALUES screen from the MAIN MENU screen and adjust the high lirrlit set point to 55degC to drive the burner to high fire

IAC6HHH1HH60 ~T I

0 19 (Y)

HSV

HIGH SET VALUE ~

Ensure the set value is returned to 36degC once the appropriate checks and adjustments as described in Section 43 of this manual have been completed Return to the SET VALUES screen and select the low limit value to adjust the low fire setting

Reduce the low limit value to OdegC to drive the gas valve to low fire and complete the appropriate checks and adjustments as described in Section 43 of this manual and ensure the set value is returned to the original value

A48 GMT ltgt BST CHANGEOVER DAYLIGHT SAVINGS

To change your unit to British Summer TimelWinter Time the following system screen must be highlighted by touching the Iamp1 button twice

By touching the clock symbol in the top left hand corner followed by the ENTER key the screen below will be displayed

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 55

APPENDIX 4 30008

188311 851193

544

By touching and highlighting in this case 18 followed by the ENTER key A small box allowing the entry of two digits will appear Enter the desired time required using the numbered keys followed by ENTER key Your unit is now set to operate on BSTBWT

Touch the ESC key three times to return back to the Status screen

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 56

STOKVIS ENERGY SYSTEMS 96R WALTON ROAD EAST MOLESEY SURREY KT8 0DL TEL 020 8783 3050 08707 707 747 FAX 020 8783 3051 08707 707 767 E-MAIL infostokvisboilerscom WEBSITE wwwstokvisboilerscom

JULY 1999

Page 54: ECONOAIR 3000S SERIES AIR HANDLING UNIT DIRECT FIREDstokvisboilers.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/EconoAir... · 2019-05-10 · ECONOAIR 3000S SERIES AIR HANDLING UNIT DIRECT FIRED

APPENDIX 4 30008

A43 CHANGING SETTINGS

It is possible to change the settings for the time of operation and the required temperature set points The following details the steps required

A44 ENTERING THE SECURITY CODE

From the STATUS screen touch the return key and the screen below will be displayed

Type the HIGH LEVEL security code (4321) If you make a mistake use the BACK SPACE key to delete any incorrect number(s) Touch the ENTER key when the code is correct

If the security code is incorrect the screen above will be displayed then try again If after several attempts you can not gain access please contact RS STOKVIS Ltd for further information

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 50

APPENDIX 4 30008

When the code is entered correctly the MAIN MENU is displayed as detailed below

~ STATUS SET VALUES~ ~ TIVIE CLOCK [) [) [) [) [)

The MAIN MENU screen shows the three menu items available The title for each menu item can be changed to suit the end user Please notify RS STOKVIS Ltd prior to commissioning should these parameters require special amendments

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 51

APPENDIX 4 30008

A45 CHANGING OR SETTING A TIME SCHEDULE

From the main menu screen select the TIME CLOCK page by running finger across screen symbol and touch the ENTER key the screen below will be displayed

On the following screen highlight the TS1 symbol and touch the ENTER key

The current time schedule will now be displayed as shown below The display will automatically default to the current day (1 =Monday 2 =Tuesday etc) In this case day 5 (Friday) the four schedule switching times refer to that day

IAC6BBB1BHIS1

mm0CIl bull mID 17BB 17BB 17HB

Iillleschedule

To modify a time select it by highlighting and touch the ENTER key and the following screen is displayed

To amend the appropriate onoff time as shown on the screen below The arrows to the right of the time are for altering the hours and the arrows on the left for the minutes

Once you have set the time use the ESCape key to exit back to the time schedule screen and choose another day by touching the required number Another time may now be modified as before

IAC6BBB1BHIS1

H8BH

I i eschedule

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 52

APPENDIX 4 30008

Use the ESCape key to exit back to the MAIN MENU screen

~ STATUS ~ SET VALUES

TIME CLOCK []~ [] [] [] []

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 53

APPENDIX 4 30005

A46 CHANGING SET VALUES

From the main menu screen select the SET VALUES page by highlight in the normal way and touch the ENTER key

The following screen is displayed

36 19 18III III IIIHsv Rsv Llv

To change the RSV highlight it in the normal way and touch the ENTER key and the screen below will now be shown

IAC6RRR1RR40 T I

0 19 (Y)l RSV

ROOM SET VALUE

The above screen shows the parameters that can be changed The values to the far left are the limitations of set point (OC) Change the set point by using the UP and DOWN ARROWS on the left of the screen or touch the set value itself followed by the ENTER key to select the set value and set it directly using the numeric keyboard All values can be changed in this way

Use the ESCape key twice to exit back to the MAIN MENU screen

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 54

APPENDIX 4 30005

A47 COMMISSIONING AND SERVICING BURNER CHECKS

Select the SET VALUES screen from the MAIN MENU screen and adjust the high lirrlit set point to 55degC to drive the burner to high fire

IAC6HHH1HH60 ~T I

0 19 (Y)

HSV

HIGH SET VALUE ~

Ensure the set value is returned to 36degC once the appropriate checks and adjustments as described in Section 43 of this manual have been completed Return to the SET VALUES screen and select the low limit value to adjust the low fire setting

Reduce the low limit value to OdegC to drive the gas valve to low fire and complete the appropriate checks and adjustments as described in Section 43 of this manual and ensure the set value is returned to the original value

A48 GMT ltgt BST CHANGEOVER DAYLIGHT SAVINGS

To change your unit to British Summer TimelWinter Time the following system screen must be highlighted by touching the Iamp1 button twice

By touching the clock symbol in the top left hand corner followed by the ENTER key the screen below will be displayed

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 55

APPENDIX 4 30008

188311 851193

544

By touching and highlighting in this case 18 followed by the ENTER key A small box allowing the entry of two digits will appear Enter the desired time required using the numbered keys followed by ENTER key Your unit is now set to operate on BSTBWT

Touch the ESC key three times to return back to the Status screen

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 56

STOKVIS ENERGY SYSTEMS 96R WALTON ROAD EAST MOLESEY SURREY KT8 0DL TEL 020 8783 3050 08707 707 747 FAX 020 8783 3051 08707 707 767 E-MAIL infostokvisboilerscom WEBSITE wwwstokvisboilerscom

JULY 1999

Page 55: ECONOAIR 3000S SERIES AIR HANDLING UNIT DIRECT FIREDstokvisboilers.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/EconoAir... · 2019-05-10 · ECONOAIR 3000S SERIES AIR HANDLING UNIT DIRECT FIRED

APPENDIX 4 30008

When the code is entered correctly the MAIN MENU is displayed as detailed below

~ STATUS SET VALUES~ ~ TIVIE CLOCK [) [) [) [) [)

The MAIN MENU screen shows the three menu items available The title for each menu item can be changed to suit the end user Please notify RS STOKVIS Ltd prior to commissioning should these parameters require special amendments

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 51

APPENDIX 4 30008

A45 CHANGING OR SETTING A TIME SCHEDULE

From the main menu screen select the TIME CLOCK page by running finger across screen symbol and touch the ENTER key the screen below will be displayed

On the following screen highlight the TS1 symbol and touch the ENTER key

The current time schedule will now be displayed as shown below The display will automatically default to the current day (1 =Monday 2 =Tuesday etc) In this case day 5 (Friday) the four schedule switching times refer to that day

IAC6BBB1BHIS1

mm0CIl bull mID 17BB 17BB 17HB

Iillleschedule

To modify a time select it by highlighting and touch the ENTER key and the following screen is displayed

To amend the appropriate onoff time as shown on the screen below The arrows to the right of the time are for altering the hours and the arrows on the left for the minutes

Once you have set the time use the ESCape key to exit back to the time schedule screen and choose another day by touching the required number Another time may now be modified as before

IAC6BBB1BHIS1

H8BH

I i eschedule

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 52

APPENDIX 4 30008

Use the ESCape key to exit back to the MAIN MENU screen

~ STATUS ~ SET VALUES

TIME CLOCK []~ [] [] [] []

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 53

APPENDIX 4 30005

A46 CHANGING SET VALUES

From the main menu screen select the SET VALUES page by highlight in the normal way and touch the ENTER key

The following screen is displayed

36 19 18III III IIIHsv Rsv Llv

To change the RSV highlight it in the normal way and touch the ENTER key and the screen below will now be shown

IAC6RRR1RR40 T I

0 19 (Y)l RSV

ROOM SET VALUE

The above screen shows the parameters that can be changed The values to the far left are the limitations of set point (OC) Change the set point by using the UP and DOWN ARROWS on the left of the screen or touch the set value itself followed by the ENTER key to select the set value and set it directly using the numeric keyboard All values can be changed in this way

Use the ESCape key twice to exit back to the MAIN MENU screen

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 54

APPENDIX 4 30005

A47 COMMISSIONING AND SERVICING BURNER CHECKS

Select the SET VALUES screen from the MAIN MENU screen and adjust the high lirrlit set point to 55degC to drive the burner to high fire

IAC6HHH1HH60 ~T I

0 19 (Y)

HSV

HIGH SET VALUE ~

Ensure the set value is returned to 36degC once the appropriate checks and adjustments as described in Section 43 of this manual have been completed Return to the SET VALUES screen and select the low limit value to adjust the low fire setting

Reduce the low limit value to OdegC to drive the gas valve to low fire and complete the appropriate checks and adjustments as described in Section 43 of this manual and ensure the set value is returned to the original value

A48 GMT ltgt BST CHANGEOVER DAYLIGHT SAVINGS

To change your unit to British Summer TimelWinter Time the following system screen must be highlighted by touching the Iamp1 button twice

By touching the clock symbol in the top left hand corner followed by the ENTER key the screen below will be displayed

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 55

APPENDIX 4 30008

188311 851193

544

By touching and highlighting in this case 18 followed by the ENTER key A small box allowing the entry of two digits will appear Enter the desired time required using the numbered keys followed by ENTER key Your unit is now set to operate on BSTBWT

Touch the ESC key three times to return back to the Status screen

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 56

STOKVIS ENERGY SYSTEMS 96R WALTON ROAD EAST MOLESEY SURREY KT8 0DL TEL 020 8783 3050 08707 707 747 FAX 020 8783 3051 08707 707 767 E-MAIL infostokvisboilerscom WEBSITE wwwstokvisboilerscom

JULY 1999

Page 56: ECONOAIR 3000S SERIES AIR HANDLING UNIT DIRECT FIREDstokvisboilers.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/EconoAir... · 2019-05-10 · ECONOAIR 3000S SERIES AIR HANDLING UNIT DIRECT FIRED

APPENDIX 4 30008

A45 CHANGING OR SETTING A TIME SCHEDULE

From the main menu screen select the TIME CLOCK page by running finger across screen symbol and touch the ENTER key the screen below will be displayed

On the following screen highlight the TS1 symbol and touch the ENTER key

The current time schedule will now be displayed as shown below The display will automatically default to the current day (1 =Monday 2 =Tuesday etc) In this case day 5 (Friday) the four schedule switching times refer to that day

IAC6BBB1BHIS1

mm0CIl bull mID 17BB 17BB 17HB

Iillleschedule

To modify a time select it by highlighting and touch the ENTER key and the following screen is displayed

To amend the appropriate onoff time as shown on the screen below The arrows to the right of the time are for altering the hours and the arrows on the left for the minutes

Once you have set the time use the ESCape key to exit back to the time schedule screen and choose another day by touching the required number Another time may now be modified as before

IAC6BBB1BHIS1

H8BH

I i eschedule

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 52

APPENDIX 4 30008

Use the ESCape key to exit back to the MAIN MENU screen

~ STATUS ~ SET VALUES

TIME CLOCK []~ [] [] [] []

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 53

APPENDIX 4 30005

A46 CHANGING SET VALUES

From the main menu screen select the SET VALUES page by highlight in the normal way and touch the ENTER key

The following screen is displayed

36 19 18III III IIIHsv Rsv Llv

To change the RSV highlight it in the normal way and touch the ENTER key and the screen below will now be shown

IAC6RRR1RR40 T I

0 19 (Y)l RSV

ROOM SET VALUE

The above screen shows the parameters that can be changed The values to the far left are the limitations of set point (OC) Change the set point by using the UP and DOWN ARROWS on the left of the screen or touch the set value itself followed by the ENTER key to select the set value and set it directly using the numeric keyboard All values can be changed in this way

Use the ESCape key twice to exit back to the MAIN MENU screen

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 54

APPENDIX 4 30005

A47 COMMISSIONING AND SERVICING BURNER CHECKS

Select the SET VALUES screen from the MAIN MENU screen and adjust the high lirrlit set point to 55degC to drive the burner to high fire

IAC6HHH1HH60 ~T I

0 19 (Y)

HSV

HIGH SET VALUE ~

Ensure the set value is returned to 36degC once the appropriate checks and adjustments as described in Section 43 of this manual have been completed Return to the SET VALUES screen and select the low limit value to adjust the low fire setting

Reduce the low limit value to OdegC to drive the gas valve to low fire and complete the appropriate checks and adjustments as described in Section 43 of this manual and ensure the set value is returned to the original value

A48 GMT ltgt BST CHANGEOVER DAYLIGHT SAVINGS

To change your unit to British Summer TimelWinter Time the following system screen must be highlighted by touching the Iamp1 button twice

By touching the clock symbol in the top left hand corner followed by the ENTER key the screen below will be displayed

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 55

APPENDIX 4 30008

188311 851193

544

By touching and highlighting in this case 18 followed by the ENTER key A small box allowing the entry of two digits will appear Enter the desired time required using the numbered keys followed by ENTER key Your unit is now set to operate on BSTBWT

Touch the ESC key three times to return back to the Status screen

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 56

STOKVIS ENERGY SYSTEMS 96R WALTON ROAD EAST MOLESEY SURREY KT8 0DL TEL 020 8783 3050 08707 707 747 FAX 020 8783 3051 08707 707 767 E-MAIL infostokvisboilerscom WEBSITE wwwstokvisboilerscom

JULY 1999

Page 57: ECONOAIR 3000S SERIES AIR HANDLING UNIT DIRECT FIREDstokvisboilers.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/EconoAir... · 2019-05-10 · ECONOAIR 3000S SERIES AIR HANDLING UNIT DIRECT FIRED

APPENDIX 4 30008

Use the ESCape key to exit back to the MAIN MENU screen

~ STATUS ~ SET VALUES

TIME CLOCK []~ [] [] [] []

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 53

APPENDIX 4 30005

A46 CHANGING SET VALUES

From the main menu screen select the SET VALUES page by highlight in the normal way and touch the ENTER key

The following screen is displayed

36 19 18III III IIIHsv Rsv Llv

To change the RSV highlight it in the normal way and touch the ENTER key and the screen below will now be shown

IAC6RRR1RR40 T I

0 19 (Y)l RSV

ROOM SET VALUE

The above screen shows the parameters that can be changed The values to the far left are the limitations of set point (OC) Change the set point by using the UP and DOWN ARROWS on the left of the screen or touch the set value itself followed by the ENTER key to select the set value and set it directly using the numeric keyboard All values can be changed in this way

Use the ESCape key twice to exit back to the MAIN MENU screen

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 54

APPENDIX 4 30005

A47 COMMISSIONING AND SERVICING BURNER CHECKS

Select the SET VALUES screen from the MAIN MENU screen and adjust the high lirrlit set point to 55degC to drive the burner to high fire

IAC6HHH1HH60 ~T I

0 19 (Y)

HSV

HIGH SET VALUE ~

Ensure the set value is returned to 36degC once the appropriate checks and adjustments as described in Section 43 of this manual have been completed Return to the SET VALUES screen and select the low limit value to adjust the low fire setting

Reduce the low limit value to OdegC to drive the gas valve to low fire and complete the appropriate checks and adjustments as described in Section 43 of this manual and ensure the set value is returned to the original value

A48 GMT ltgt BST CHANGEOVER DAYLIGHT SAVINGS

To change your unit to British Summer TimelWinter Time the following system screen must be highlighted by touching the Iamp1 button twice

By touching the clock symbol in the top left hand corner followed by the ENTER key the screen below will be displayed

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 55

APPENDIX 4 30008

188311 851193

544

By touching and highlighting in this case 18 followed by the ENTER key A small box allowing the entry of two digits will appear Enter the desired time required using the numbered keys followed by ENTER key Your unit is now set to operate on BSTBWT

Touch the ESC key three times to return back to the Status screen

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 56

STOKVIS ENERGY SYSTEMS 96R WALTON ROAD EAST MOLESEY SURREY KT8 0DL TEL 020 8783 3050 08707 707 747 FAX 020 8783 3051 08707 707 767 E-MAIL infostokvisboilerscom WEBSITE wwwstokvisboilerscom

JULY 1999

Page 58: ECONOAIR 3000S SERIES AIR HANDLING UNIT DIRECT FIREDstokvisboilers.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/EconoAir... · 2019-05-10 · ECONOAIR 3000S SERIES AIR HANDLING UNIT DIRECT FIRED

APPENDIX 4 30005

A46 CHANGING SET VALUES

From the main menu screen select the SET VALUES page by highlight in the normal way and touch the ENTER key

The following screen is displayed

36 19 18III III IIIHsv Rsv Llv

To change the RSV highlight it in the normal way and touch the ENTER key and the screen below will now be shown

IAC6RRR1RR40 T I

0 19 (Y)l RSV

ROOM SET VALUE

The above screen shows the parameters that can be changed The values to the far left are the limitations of set point (OC) Change the set point by using the UP and DOWN ARROWS on the left of the screen or touch the set value itself followed by the ENTER key to select the set value and set it directly using the numeric keyboard All values can be changed in this way

Use the ESCape key twice to exit back to the MAIN MENU screen

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 54

APPENDIX 4 30005

A47 COMMISSIONING AND SERVICING BURNER CHECKS

Select the SET VALUES screen from the MAIN MENU screen and adjust the high lirrlit set point to 55degC to drive the burner to high fire

IAC6HHH1HH60 ~T I

0 19 (Y)

HSV

HIGH SET VALUE ~

Ensure the set value is returned to 36degC once the appropriate checks and adjustments as described in Section 43 of this manual have been completed Return to the SET VALUES screen and select the low limit value to adjust the low fire setting

Reduce the low limit value to OdegC to drive the gas valve to low fire and complete the appropriate checks and adjustments as described in Section 43 of this manual and ensure the set value is returned to the original value

A48 GMT ltgt BST CHANGEOVER DAYLIGHT SAVINGS

To change your unit to British Summer TimelWinter Time the following system screen must be highlighted by touching the Iamp1 button twice

By touching the clock symbol in the top left hand corner followed by the ENTER key the screen below will be displayed

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 55

APPENDIX 4 30008

188311 851193

544

By touching and highlighting in this case 18 followed by the ENTER key A small box allowing the entry of two digits will appear Enter the desired time required using the numbered keys followed by ENTER key Your unit is now set to operate on BSTBWT

Touch the ESC key three times to return back to the Status screen

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 56

STOKVIS ENERGY SYSTEMS 96R WALTON ROAD EAST MOLESEY SURREY KT8 0DL TEL 020 8783 3050 08707 707 747 FAX 020 8783 3051 08707 707 767 E-MAIL infostokvisboilerscom WEBSITE wwwstokvisboilerscom

JULY 1999

Page 59: ECONOAIR 3000S SERIES AIR HANDLING UNIT DIRECT FIREDstokvisboilers.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/EconoAir... · 2019-05-10 · ECONOAIR 3000S SERIES AIR HANDLING UNIT DIRECT FIRED

APPENDIX 4 30005

A47 COMMISSIONING AND SERVICING BURNER CHECKS

Select the SET VALUES screen from the MAIN MENU screen and adjust the high lirrlit set point to 55degC to drive the burner to high fire

IAC6HHH1HH60 ~T I

0 19 (Y)

HSV

HIGH SET VALUE ~

Ensure the set value is returned to 36degC once the appropriate checks and adjustments as described in Section 43 of this manual have been completed Return to the SET VALUES screen and select the low limit value to adjust the low fire setting

Reduce the low limit value to OdegC to drive the gas valve to low fire and complete the appropriate checks and adjustments as described in Section 43 of this manual and ensure the set value is returned to the original value

A48 GMT ltgt BST CHANGEOVER DAYLIGHT SAVINGS

To change your unit to British Summer TimelWinter Time the following system screen must be highlighted by touching the Iamp1 button twice

By touching the clock symbol in the top left hand corner followed by the ENTER key the screen below will be displayed

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 55

APPENDIX 4 30008

188311 851193

544

By touching and highlighting in this case 18 followed by the ENTER key A small box allowing the entry of two digits will appear Enter the desired time required using the numbered keys followed by ENTER key Your unit is now set to operate on BSTBWT

Touch the ESC key three times to return back to the Status screen

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 56

STOKVIS ENERGY SYSTEMS 96R WALTON ROAD EAST MOLESEY SURREY KT8 0DL TEL 020 8783 3050 08707 707 747 FAX 020 8783 3051 08707 707 767 E-MAIL infostokvisboilerscom WEBSITE wwwstokvisboilerscom

JULY 1999

Page 60: ECONOAIR 3000S SERIES AIR HANDLING UNIT DIRECT FIREDstokvisboilers.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/EconoAir... · 2019-05-10 · ECONOAIR 3000S SERIES AIR HANDLING UNIT DIRECT FIRED

APPENDIX 4 30008

188311 851193

544

By touching and highlighting in this case 18 followed by the ENTER key A small box allowing the entry of two digits will appear Enter the desired time required using the numbered keys followed by ENTER key Your unit is now set to operate on BSTBWT

Touch the ESC key three times to return back to the Status screen

MONTH 1999 SAMPLE Page 56

STOKVIS ENERGY SYSTEMS 96R WALTON ROAD EAST MOLESEY SURREY KT8 0DL TEL 020 8783 3050 08707 707 747 FAX 020 8783 3051 08707 707 767 E-MAIL infostokvisboilerscom WEBSITE wwwstokvisboilerscom

JULY 1999

Page 61: ECONOAIR 3000S SERIES AIR HANDLING UNIT DIRECT FIREDstokvisboilers.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/EconoAir... · 2019-05-10 · ECONOAIR 3000S SERIES AIR HANDLING UNIT DIRECT FIRED

STOKVIS ENERGY SYSTEMS 96R WALTON ROAD EAST MOLESEY SURREY KT8 0DL TEL 020 8783 3050 08707 707 747 FAX 020 8783 3051 08707 707 767 E-MAIL infostokvisboilerscom WEBSITE wwwstokvisboilerscom

JULY 1999


Recommended